INVERTER

INVERTER
FR-A800

FR-A800
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (DETAILED)
High functionality and high performance

FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 04750(90K)(-GF)
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 06830(280K)(-GF)
FR-A842-07700(315K) to 12120(500K)(-GF)
FR-A846-00023(0.4K) to 03610(132K)

INSTRUCTION MANUAL (DETAILED)

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

FR-A800
FR-A800
MODEL
Model
INSTRUCTION
Instruction MANUAL
Manual (Detailed)

MODEL
Model code 1A2-P52
XXX-XXX
CODE

IB(NA)-0600503ENG-M(2103)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

M
Safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1.1 Product checking and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

1.2 Component names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

CONTENTS
1.3 Operation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

1.4 Related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Chapter 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

2.1 Peripheral devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2.1.1 Inverter and peripheral devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2.1.2 Peripheral devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

2.3.1 Inverter installation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

2.3.2 Amount of heat generated by the inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.3.3 Cooling system types for inverter enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.3.4 Inverter installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.3.5 Protruding the heat sink through a panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

2.5 Main circuit terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

2.5.1 Details on the main circuit terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

2.5.2 Main circuit terminal layout and wiring to power supply and motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.5.3 Recommended cables and wiring length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.5.4 Earthing (grounding) precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

2.6 Control circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

2.6.1 Details on the control circuit terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

2.6.2 Control logic (sink/source) change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.6.3 Wiring of control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.6.4 Wiring precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.6.5 When using separate power supplies for the control circuit and the main circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.6.6 When supplying 24 V external power to the control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.6.7 Safety stop function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

2.7 Communication connectors and terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

2.7.1 PU connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.7.2 USB connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.7.3 RS-485 terminal block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

1
 2.9 Parameter settings for a motor with encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

2.10.1 Connection of the brake resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

2.10.2 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2.10.3 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2.10.4 Connection of the brake unit (BU type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2.10.5 Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
2.10.6 Connection of the multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
2.10.7 Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2.10.8 Connection of the power regeneration converter (MT-RC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
2.10.9 Connection of the DC reactor (FR-HEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

2.11.1 System configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

2.11.2 Network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.11.3 Network components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.11.4 Component names of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
2.11.5 Wiring method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2.11.6 Operation status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Chapter 3 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER . . . . 116

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

3.1.1 Leakage currents and countermeasures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

3.1.2 Techniques and measures for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.1.3 Built-in EMC filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

3.2 Power supply harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

3.2.1 Power supply harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

3.2.2 Harmonic suppression guidelines in Japan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

3.3 Installation of a reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

3.5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

3.6 Checklist before starting operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Chapter 4 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

4.1.1 Components of the operation panel (FR-DU08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

4.1.2 Basic operation of the operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
4.1.3 Digital characters and their corresponding printed equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4.1.4 Changing the parameter setting value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

4.2 Monitoring the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

4.2.1 Monitoring of output current and output voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

2
4.2.2 First priority monitor screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
4.2.3 Displaying the set frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

4.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

4.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

4.4.1 Simple mode parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

CONTENTS
4.5.1 Setting the frequency on the operation panel (example: operating at 30 Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.5.2 Perform PU operation using the setting dial like a potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.5.3 Setting the frequency with switches (multi-speed setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.5.4 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (voltage input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.5.5 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (current input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

4.6.1 Setting the frequency on the operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

4.6.2 Setting the frequency and giving a start command with switches (multi-speed setting) (Pr.4 to Pr.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
4.6.3 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (voltage input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
4.6.4 Changing the frequency (60 Hz, initial value) at the maximum voltage input (5 V, initial value). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.6.5 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (current input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.6.6 Changing the frequency (60 Hz, initial value) at the maximum current input (at 20 mA, initial value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

4.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

4.7.1 Giving a start command by using external signals for JOG operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.7.2 Giving a start command from the operation panel for JOG operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 5 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

5.1 Parameter list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

5.1.1 Parameter list (by parameter number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

5.1.2 Use of a function group number for the identification of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
5.1.3 Parameter list (by function group number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

5.2 Control method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

5.2.1 Vector control and Real sensorless vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

5.2.2 Changing the control method and mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
5.2.3 Selecting the Advanced magnetic flux vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.2.4 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
5.2.5 Low-speed range torque characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

5.3.1 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector control (speed control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
5.3.2 Setting procedure of Vector control (speed control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5.3.3 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control (speed control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5.3.4 Setting the torque limit level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5.3.5 Performing high-accuracy, fast-response control (gain adjustment for Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM
sensorless vector control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
5.3.6 Troubleshooting in the speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
5.3.7 Speed feed forward control, model adaptive speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
5.3.8 Torque bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
5.3.9 Avoiding motor overrunning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.3.10 Notch filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

5.4.1 Torque control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

3
 5.4.2 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector control (torque control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
5.4.3 Setting procedure for Vector control (torque control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
5.4.4 Torque command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
5.4.5 Speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
5.4.6 Torque control gain adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
5.4.7 Troubleshooting in torque control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
5.4.8 Torque control by variable-current limiter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

5.5.1 About position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

5.5.2 Setting procedure of Vector control (position control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
5.5.3 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control (position control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
5.5.4 Simple positioning function by parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
5.5.5 Position control by the FR-A8AL pulse train input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
5.5.6 Position control by pulse train input to the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
5.5.7 Clear signal selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
5.5.8 Pulse monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
5.5.9 Electronic gear settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
5.5.10 Position adjustment parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
5.5.11 Position control gain adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
5.5.12 Troubleshooting in position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

5.6 Adjustment during Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

5.6.1 Speed detection filter and torque detection filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

5.6.2 Excitation ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
5.6.3 Gain adjustment of current controllers for the d axis and the q axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

5.7.1 Real time clock function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

5.7.2 Reset selection / disconnected PU detection / PU stop selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
5.7.3 PU display language selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
5.7.4 Buzzer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
5.7.5 PU contrast adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
5.7.6 Display-off setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
5.7.7 Direct setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
5.7.8 Resetting USB host errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
5.7.9 Easy frequency setting (Volume-knob-like setting) and key lock function selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
5.7.10 Frequency change increment amount setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
5.7.11 Multiple rating setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
5.7.12 Using the power supply exceeding 480 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
5.7.13 Parameter write selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
5.7.14 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
5.7.15 Free parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
5.7.16 Setting multiple parameters by batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
5.7.17 Extended parameter display and user group function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
5.7.18 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
5.7.19 Inverter parts life display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
5.7.20 Maintenance timer alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
5.7.21 Current average value monitor signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern . . . . . . . 367

5.8.1 Setting the acceleration and deceleration time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

5.8.2 Acceleration/deceleration pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
5.8.3 Remote setting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
5.8.4 Starting frequency and start-time hold function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
5.8.5 Minimum motor speed frequency and hold function at the motor start up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
5.8.6 Shortest acceleration/deceleration and optimum acceleration/deceleration (automatic acceleration/deceleration) . . . . . 384
5.8.7 Lift operation (automatic acceleration/deceleration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

5.9.1 Operation mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

5.9.2 Startup of the inverter in Network operation mode at power-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

4
5.9.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
5.9.4 Reverse rotation prevention selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
5.9.5 Frequency setting using pulse train input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
5.9.6 JOG operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
5.9.7 Operation by multi-speed setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

5.10 (H) Protective function parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

5.10.1 Motor overheat protection (electronic thermal O/L relay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

5.10.2 Fault definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
5.10.3 Cooling fan operation selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
5.10.4 Earth (ground) fault detection at start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

CONTENTS
5.10.5 Varying the activation level of the undervoltage protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
5.10.6 Initiating a protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
5.10.7 I/O phase loss protection selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
5.10.8 Retry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
5.10.9 Limiting the output frequency (maximum/minimum frequency). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
5.10.10 Avoiding machine resonance points (frequency jump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
5.10.11 Stall prevention operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
5.10.12 Load characteristics fault detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
5.10.13 Motor overspeeding detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

5.11.1 Speed indication and its setting change to rotations per minute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
5.11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
5.11.3 Monitor display selection for terminals FM/CA and AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
5.11.4 Adjustment of terminal FM/CA and terminal AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
5.11.5 Energy saving monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
5.11.6 Output terminal function selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
5.11.7 Output frequency detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
5.11.8 Output current detection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
5.11.9 Output torque detection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
5.11.10 Remote output function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
5.11.11 Analog remote output function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
5.11.12 Fault code output selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
5.11.13 Pulse train output to announce cumulative output energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
5.11.14 Detection of control circuit temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
5.11.15 Encoder pulse dividing output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

5.12.1 Analog input selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

5.12.2 Analog input terminal (terminal 1, 4) function assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
5.12.3 Analog input compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
5.12.4 Response level of analog input and noise elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
5.12.5 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
5.12.6 Torque (magnetic flux) setting voltage (current) bias and gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
5.12.7 Checking of current input on analog input terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
5.12.8 Input terminal function selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
5.12.9 Inverter output shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
5.12.10 External fault input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
5.12.11 Selecting the condition to activate the Second function selection (RT) signal or the Third function selection (X9) signal 525

5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

5.13.1 Applied motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

5.13.2 Offline auto tuning for an induction motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
5.13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (under Vector control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
5.13.4 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant tuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
5.13.5 Online auto tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
5.13.6 Signal loss detection of encoder signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

5.14 (A) Application parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

5.14.1 Electronic bypass function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

5.14.2 Self power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
5.14.3 Brake sequence function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
5.14.4 Start count monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

5
 5.14.5 Stop-on-contact control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
5.14.6 Load torque high-speed frequency control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
5.14.7 Traverse function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
5.14.8 Anti-sway control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
5.14.9 Orientation control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
5.14.10 PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
5.14.11 Changing the display increment of numerical values used in PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
5.14.12 PID Pre-charge function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
5.14.13 Dancer control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
5.14.14 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start with an induction motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
5.14.15 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start with a PM motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
5.14.16 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
5.14.17 Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
5.14.18 PLC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
5.14.19 Trace function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

5.15.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

5.15.2 Wiring and configuration of RS-485 terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
5.15.3 Initial setting of operation via communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
5.15.4 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
5.15.5 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
5.15.6 MODBUS RTU communication specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
5.15.7 CC-Link IE Field Network function setting (FR-A800-GF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
5.15.8 USB device communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
5.15.9 Automatic connection with GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
5.15.10 Backup/restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702

5.16 (G) Control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705

5.16.1 Manual torque boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706

5.16.2 Base frequency voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
5.16.3 Load pattern selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
5.16.4 Excitation current low-speed scaling factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
5.16.5 Energy saving control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
5.16.6 Adjustable 5 points V/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
5.16.7 SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
5.16.8 DC injection brake, zero speed control, and servo lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
5.16.9 Output stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
5.16.10 Start signal operation selection / stop selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
5.16.11 Regenerative brake selection and DC feeding mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
5.16.12 Regeneration avoidance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
5.16.13 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
5.16.14 Slip compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
5.16.15 Encoder feedback control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
5.16.16 Droop control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
5.16.17 Speed smoothing control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741

5.17 Parameter clear / All parameter clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

5.18 Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744

5.18.1 Parameter copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744

5.18.2 Parameter verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746

5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747

5.20 Checking parameters changed from their initial values (initial value change list) . . . . . . . . . 751

5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752

5.21.1 Cyclic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752

5.21.2 I/O signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
5.21.3 Details of the remote input and output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
5.21.4 Details of the remote register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758

6
5.21.5 Programming examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
5.21.6 Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
5.21.7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770

Chapter 6 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772

6.1 Inverter fault and alarm indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772

6.2 Reset method for the protective functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773

CONTENTS
6.3 Check and clear of the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

6.4 List of fault displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776

6.5 Causes and corrective actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779

6.6 Check first when you have a trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

6.6.1 Motor does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

6.6.2 Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
6.6.3 Inverter generates abnormal noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
6.6.4 Motor generates heat abnormally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
6.6.5 Motor rotates in the opposite direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
6.6.6 Speed greatly differs from the setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
6.6.7 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
6.6.8 Speed varies during operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
6.6.9 Operation mode is not changed properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
6.6.10 Operation panel (FR-DU08) display is not operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
6.6.11 The motor current is too large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
6.6.12 Speed does not accelerate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
6.6.13 Unable to write parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
6.6.14 Power lamp is not lit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

Chapter 7 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND

INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

7.1 Inspection item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

7.1.1 Daily inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

7.1.2 Periodic inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
7.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
7.1.4 Checking the inverter and converter modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
7.1.5 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
7.1.6 Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
7.1.7 Removal and reinstallation of the control circuit terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819

7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, and powers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821

7.2.1 Measurement of powers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823

7.2.2 Measurement of voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
7.2.3 Measurement of currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
7.2.4 Measurement of inverter input power factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
7.2.5 Measurement of converter output voltage (between terminals P and N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
7.2.6 Measurement of inverter output frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
7.2.7 Insulation resistance test using megger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
7.2.8 Withstand voltage test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824

7
 Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826

8.1 Inverter rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826

8.2 Motor rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829

8.2.1 Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
8.2.2 Vector control dedicated motor SF-THY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
8.2.3 IPM motor MM-CF (2000 r/min series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833

8.3 Common specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

8.4 Outline dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

8.4.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

8.4.2 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Chapter 9 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856

9.1 For customers replacing the conventional model with this inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856

9.1.1 Replacement of the FR-A700 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856

9.1.2 Replacement of the FR-A500(L) series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857

9.2 International standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858

9.3 Acquisition of type certification for ship classification standards (400 V class) . . . . . . . . . . . 858

9.3.1 Applicable models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858

9.3.2 Details of type certification for standard model / Separated converter type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
9.3.3 Details of type certification for IP55 compatible model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
9.3.4 Wiring for compliance with EMC standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862

9.4 Specification comparison between PM sensorless vector control and induction motor control . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

9.5 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods . . . . . . . . . . . 864

9.6 For customers using HMS network options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893

9.7 Ready bit status selection (Pr.349, N240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897

8
Safety instructions
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Electric inverter.
This Instruction Manual (Detailed) provides detailed instructions for advanced settings of the FR-A800 series inverters.
Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using this product, read all the relevant instruction manuals
carefully to ensure proper use.
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect this product until you have read the Instruction Manuals and appended
documents carefully. Do not use this product until you have a full knowledge of this product mechanism, safety information and
instructions.
Installation, operation, maintenance and inspection must be performed by qualified personnel. Here, qualified personnel means
a person who meets all the following conditions:
• A person who possesses a certification in regard with electric appliance handling, or person took a proper engineering
training. Such training may be available at your local Mitsubishi Electric office. Contact your local sales office for schedules
and locations.
• A person who can access operating manuals for the protective devices (for example, light curtain) connected to the safety
control system, or a person who has read these manuals thoroughly and familiarized themselves with the protective
devices.

In this Instruction Manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

WARNING Incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury,
CAUTION or may cause only material damage.

Note that even the level may lead to a serious consequence depending on conditions. Be sure to follow the
instructions of both levels as they are critical to personnel safety.

9
 Electric shock prevention
WARNING
 Do not remove the front cover or the wiring cover while the power of this product is ON, and do not run this product with
the front cover or the wiring cover removed as the exposed high voltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry
can be touched. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
 Even if power is OFF, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic inspection as the inside of this product
is charged. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
 Before wiring or inspection, check that the LED display of the operation panel is OFF. Any person who is involved in
wiring or inspection shall wait for 10 minutes or longer after the power supply has been cut off, and check that there are
no residual voltage using a digital multimeter or the like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after
power OFF, and it is dangerous.
 This product must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local
safety regulations and electrical code (NEC section 250, IEC 61140 class 1 and other applicable standards). A neutral-
point earthed (grounded) power supply must be used for 400 V class of this product to be compliant with EN standard.
 Any person who is involved in wiring or inspection of this product shall be fully competent to do the work.
 This product body must be installed before wiring. Otherwise you may get an electric shock or be injured.
 Do not touch the setting dial or keys with wed hands. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
 Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
 Do not change the cooling fan while power is ON as it is dangerous.
 Do not touch the printed circuit board or handle the cables with wet hands. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
 Never touch the motor terminals, etc. right after powering OFF as the DC voltage is applied to the motor for 1 second at
powering OFF if the main circuit capacitor capacity is measured. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
 Before wiring or inspection for a PM motor, confirm that the PM motor is stopped as a PM motor is a synchronous motor
with high-performance magnets embedded inside and high-voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the motor
is running even after the power of this product is turned OFF. In an application, such as fan and blower, that the motor
may be driven by the load, connect a low-voltage manual contactor at the output side of this product and keep it open
during wiring and inspection of this product. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.

Fire prevention
CAUTION
 This product must be installed on a nonflammable wall without holes in it so that its components cannot be touched from
behind. Installing it on or near flammable material may cause a fire.
 If this product becomes faulty, the product power must be switched OFF. A continuous flow of large current may cause
a fire.
 When using a brake resistor, a sequence that will turn OFF power when a fault signal is output must be configured.
Otherwise the brake resistor may excessively overheat due to damage of the brake transistor and such, causing a fire.
 Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+ and N/-. Doing so could cause a fire.
 Be sure to perform daily and periodic inspections as specified in the Instruction Manual. There is a possibility of
explosion, damage, or fire if this product is used without inspection.

Injury prevention
CAUTION
 The voltage applied to each terminal must be as specified in the Instruction Manual. Otherwise an explosion or damage
may occur.
 The cables must be connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise an explosion or damage may occur.
 The polarity (+ and -) must be correct. Otherwise an explosion or damage may occur.
 While power is ON or for some time after power-OFF, do not touch this product as it will be extremely hot. Doing so may
cause burns.

10
Additional instructions
The following instructions must be also followed. If this product is handled incorrectly, it may cause unexpected fault, an injury,
or an electric shock.

CAUTION
Transportation and installation
 To prevent injury, wear cut-resistant gloves when opening packaging with sharp tools.
 Use proper lifting techniques or a trolley when carrying products. Failure to do so may lead to injuries.
 Do not stand or place any heavy object on this product.
 Do not stack the boxes containing this product higher than the number recommended.
 When carrying this product, do not hold it by the front cover. It may fall or break.
 During installation, caution must be taken not to drop this product as doing so may cause injuries.
 The product must be installed on a surface that withstands the weight of the product.
 Do not install this product on a hot surface.
 Ensure the mounting orientation of this product is correct.
 Ensure this product is mounted securely in its enclosure.
 Do not install or operate this product if it is damaged or has parts missing.
 Foreign conductive objects must be prevented from entering this product. That includes screws and metal fragments or
other flammable substance such as oil.
 As this product is a precision instrument, do not drop or subject it to impact.
 The surrounding air temperature must be between -10 and +50°C*1 (non-freezing) for this product at HD (heavy duty),
ND (normal duty) (initial setting), or LD (light duty) rating, and between -10 and +40°C*2 (non-freezing) for this product
at SLD (super light duty) rating. Otherwise the product may be damaged.
 The ambient humidity must be 95% RH or less (non-condensing) for this product. Otherwise the product may be
damaged. (Refer to page 37 for details.)
 The temporary storage temperature (applicable to a short limited time such as a transportation time) must be between -
20 and +65°C. Otherwise this product may be damaged.
 This product must be used indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt). Otherwise the product
may be damaged.
 Do not use this product at an altitude above 2500 m. Vibration should not exceed 5.9 m/s2*3 at 10 to 55 Hz in X, Y, and
Z directions. Otherwise the product may be damaged. (For details, refer to page 37.)
 If halogens (including fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine) contained in fumigants for wood packages enter this
product, the product may be damaged. Prevent the entry of fumigant residuals or use an alternative method such as heat
disinfection. Note that sterilization of disinfection of wood packages should be performed before packing the product.
Wiring
 Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge absorber, or radio noise filter on the output side of this product.
These devices may overheat or burn out.
 The output terminals (terminals U, V, and W) must be connected to a motor correctly. Otherwise the motor will rotate
inversely.
 Even with the power OFF, high voltage is still applied to the terminals U, V and W while the PM motor is running. Ensure
the PM motor has stopped before carrying out any wiring. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
 Never connect a PM motor to a commercial power supply. Connecting a commercial power supply to the input terminals
(U, V, W) of a PM motor will burn it out. The PM motor must be applied a power from this product with the output terminals
(U, V, W).
Test operation
 Before starting the test operation, confirm or adjust the parameter settings. Failure to do so may cause some machines
to make unexpected motions.
*1 0 to +50°C for the FR-A800-GF.
*2 0 to 40°C for the FR-A800-GF.
*3 2.9 m/s2 or less for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher.

11
 WARNING
Usage
 Stay away from the equipment after using the retry function in this product as the equipment will restart suddenly after
the output shutoff of this product.
 Depending on the function settings of this product, the product does not stop its output even when the STOP/RESET
key on the operation panel is pressed. To prepare for it, provide a separate circuit and switch (to turn OFF the power of
this product, or apply a mechanical brake, etc.) for an emergency stop.
 Be sure to turn OFF the start (STF/STR) signal before clearing the fault as this product will restart the motor suddenly
after a fault is cleared.
 Do not use a PM motor for an application that the motor may be driven by the load and run at a speed higher than the
maximum motor speed.
 Use only a three-phase induction motor or PM motor as a load on this product. Connection of any other electrical
equipment to the output of this product may damage the equipment.
 Performing pre-excitation (by using the LX or X13 signal) during torque control (under Real sensorless vector control)
may rotate a motor at a low speed even though a start command (STF or STR) is not given. This product with the start
command ON may also rotate the motor at a low speed when the speed limit value is set to zero. Confirm that the motor
running does not cause any safety problems before performing pre-excitation.
 Do not modify this product.
 Do not remove any part which is not instructed to be removed in the Instruction Manuals. Doing so may lead to a failure
or damage of this product.

12
 CAUTION
Usage
 The electronic thermal O/L relay function may not be enough for protection of a motor from overheating. It is
recommended to install an external thermal relay or a PTC thermistor for overheat protection.
 Do not repeatedly start or stop this product with a magnetic contactor on its input side. Doing so may shorten the life of
this product.
 Use a noise filter or other means to minimize electromagnetic interference with other electronic equipment used nearby
this product.
 Appropriate precautions must be taken to suppress harmonics. Otherwise harmonics in power systems generated from
this product may heat/damage a power factor correction capacitor or a generator.
 To drive a 400 V class motor with this product, use an insulation-enhanced motor, or take measures to suppress surge
voltage. Otherwise surge voltage, which is attributed to the length and thickness of wire, may occur at the motor
terminals, causing the motor insulation to deteriorate.
 As all parameters return to their initial values after the Parameter clear or All parameter clear is performed, the needed
parameters for this product operation must be set again before the operation is started.
 This product can be easily set for high-speed operation. Therefore, consider all things related to the operation such as
the performance of a motor and equipment in a system before the setting change.
 This product's brake function cannot be used as a mechanical brake. Use a separate device instead.
 Perform an inspection and test operation of this product if it has been stored for a long period of time.
 To avoid damage to this product due to static electricity, static electricity in your body must be discharged before you
touch this product.
 Only one PM motor can be connected to a single unit of this product.
 A PM motor must be used under PM sensorless vector control. Do not use a synchronous motor, induction motor, or
synchronous induction motor.
 Do not connect a PM motor to this product with it set to the induction motor control setting (initial setting). Do not connect
an induction motor to this product with it set to the PM sensorless vector control setting. Doing so will cause failure.
 As a process of starting a PM motor, turn ON the power of this product first, and then close the contactor on the output
side of this product.
 To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the inverter and the system against unauthorized
access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from external devices via network, take appropriate
measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions. We shall have no responsibility or
liability for any problems involving inverter trouble and system trouble by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer
viruses, and other cyberattacks.
Emergency stop
 A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided for devices or equipment in a system to prevent
hazardous conditions in case of failure of this product or an external device controlling this product.
 If the breaker installed on the input side of this product trips, check for wiring faults (such as short circuits) and damage
to internal parts of this product. Identify and remove the cause of the trip before resetting the tripped breaker (or before
applying the power to this product again).
 When any protective function is activated, take an appropriate corrective action before resetting this product to resume
the operation.
Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
 Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of this product. Doing so will cause failure.
Disposal
 This product must be treated as industrial waste.
*1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS)
state.

13
 General instruction
 For clarity, illustrations in this Instruction Manual may be drawn with covers or safety guards removed. Ensure all covers
and safety guards are properly installed prior to starting operation. For details on the PM motor, refer to the Instruction
Manual of the PM motor.

14
 CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
4

1.1 Product checking and accessories .........................................................................................................................17

1.2 Component names .................................................................................................................................................19
6
1.3 Operation steps ......................................................................................................................................................21
1.4 Related manuals.....................................................................................................................................................23
7

10

15
 1 INTRODUCTION
The contents described in this chapter must be read before using this product.
Always read the instructions before use.
For the separated converter type, refer to the "INTRODUCTION" in the FR-A802 (Separated Converter Type) Instruction
Manual (Hardware).
For the IP55 compatible model, refer to the "INTRODUCTION" in the FR-A806 (IP55/UL Type 12 specification) Instruction
Manual (Hardware).

 Abbreviations
Item Description
DU Operation panel (FR-DU08)
Operation panel Operation panel (FR-DU08) and LCD operation panel (FR-LU08)
Parameter unit Parameter unit (FR-PU07)
PU Operation panel and parameter unit
Inverter Mitsubishi Electric FR-A800 series inverter
FR-A800-GF FR-A800 series inverter with built-in CC-Link IE Field Network communication function
Vector control compatible option FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-A8APA/FR-A8APR/FR-A8APS (plug-in option), FR-A8TP (control terminal option)
Pr. Parameter number (Number assigned to function)
PU operation Operation using the PU (operation panel/parameter unit)
External operation Operation using the control circuit signals
Combined operation Combined operation using the PU (operation panel/parameter unit) and External operation
Mitsubishi Electric standard
SF-JR
motor
Mitsubishi Electric constant-
SF-HRCA
torque motor
Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU
Mitsubishi Electric IPM motor MM-CF

 Trademarks
• Microsoft and Visual C++ are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Corporation in Japan.
• MODBUS is a registered trademark of SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC USA, INC.
• PROFIBUS and Profibus-DP are trademarks of PROFIBUS & PROFINET International.
• Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.

 Notes on descriptions in this Instruction Manual

• Connection diagrams in this Instruction Manual appear with the control logic of the input terminals as sink logic, unless
otherwise specified. (For the control logic, refer to page 72.)

 Harmonic Suppression Guidelines

All the models of the inverters used by specific consumers are covered by "the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for
Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage". (For details, refer to page 123.)

16 1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Product checking and accessories 1

Unpack the product and check the rating plate and the capacity plate of the inverter to ensure that the model agrees with the
order and the product is intact. 2
 Inverter model
3
Symbol Voltage class Symbol Structure, functionality Symbol Description Symbol Type∗1
2 200 V class 0 Standard model 00023 to 12120 Inverter SLD rated current (A) 1 FM
4 400 V class 2 Separated converter type 0.4K to 500K Inverter ND rated capacity (kW) 2 CA 4
6 IP55 compatible model

5
F R - A 8 2 0 - 00046 - 1 -
6
Circuit board Plated
Symbol Symbol Function
coating∗2 conductor
None
60
Without
With
Without
Without
None Standard type
With built-in CC-link IE
7
GF
06∗3 With With Field Network function

8
Rating plate
Inverter model 02'(/)5$ 9
Input rating ,1387;;;;;
Output rating 287387;;;;;

SERIAL 6(5,$/;;;;;;;;;
10
Country of origin 0$'(,1;;;;;

*1 Specification differs by the type. Major differences are shown in the following table.

Initial setting
Type Monitor output Rated Pr.19 Base frequency
Built-in EMC filter Control logic
frequency voltage
Terminal FM (pulse train output)
FM (terminal FM 9999 (same as the power
Terminal AM (analog voltage OFF Sink logic 60 Hz
equipped model) supply voltage)
output (0 to ±10 VDC))
Terminal CA (analog current
CA (terminal CA output (0 to 20 mADC)) 8888 (95% of the power
ON Source logic 50 Hz
equipped model) Terminal AM (analog voltage supply voltage)
output (0 to ±10 VDC))
*2 Conforming to IEC 60721-3-3 3C2/3S2
*3 Applicable for the FR-A820-00340(5.5K) or higher, and the FR-A840-00170(5.5K) or higher.

NOTE
• In this Instruction Manual, the inverter model name consists of the applicable motor capacity and the rated current.
(Example) FR-A820-00046(0.4K)

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Product checking and accessories
17
  Accessory
• Fan cover fixing screws
These screws are necessary for compliance with the EU Directives. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Startup).)
Capacity Screw size (mm) Quantity
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K)
M3 × 35 1
FR-A840-00083(2.2K), FR-A840-00126(3.7K)
FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K)
M3 × 35 2
FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K)
FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-01250(22K)
M4×40 2
FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-00620(22K)

• Eyebolt for hanging the inverter

Capacity Eyebolt size Quantity

FR-A840-04320(160K) to FR-A840-06830(280K) M12 2

 How to read the SERIAL number

The SERIAL consists of one symbol, two characters indicating the production year
Rating plate example
and month, and six characters indicating the control number.
Symbol Year Month Control number The last digit of the production year is indicated as the Year, and the Month is
SERIAL indicated by 1 to 9, X (October), Y (November), or Z (December).

18 1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Product checking and accessories
1.2 Component names 1

Component names are as follows.

2
(a)
(b)
(t)
(c) 3
(d) (u)
(e)
(o) (h)
(f) 4
(p) (g)

(s) 5
(i)
6
(q)

(j)
7
(r) (k)

8
(m)
(l)
9
(n)

10

1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Component names
19
 Refer to
Symbol Name Description
page
Connects the operation panel or the parameter unit. This connector also
(a) PU connector 84
enables the RS-485 communication.
(b) USB A connector Connects a USB memory device. 85
Connects a personal computer and enables communication with FR
(c) USB mini B connector 85
Configurator2.
(d) RS-485 terminals Enables RS-485, MODBUS RTU communication. 86
Terminating resistor selection switch Select whether or not to use the terminating resistor for RS-485
(e) 86
(SW1) communication.
(f) Plug-in option connector 1 Connects a plug-in option or a communication option. (For the FR-A800-GF, Instruction
(g) Plug-in option connector 2 a CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board is installed to the Manual of
(h) Plug-in option connector 3 connector 1. Refer to page 110.) the option
(i) Voltage/current input switches (SW2) Selects between voltage and current for the input via terminals 2 and 4. 496
(j) Control circuit terminal block Connects cables for the control circuit. 68
(k) EMC filter ON/OFF connector Turns ON/OFF the EMC filter. 120
(l) Main circuit terminal block Connects cables for the main circuit. 54
(m) Charge lamp Stays ON while the power is supplied to the main circuit. 55
This cover is removable without unplugging cables. (FR-A820-01250(22K) or
(n) Wiring cover 57
lower, FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower)
(o) Alarm lamp Turns ON when the protective function of the inverter is activated. 55
(p) Power lamp Stays ON while the power is supplied to the control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21). 55
Remove this cover for the installation of the product, installation of a plug-in
(communication) option, RS-485 terminal wiring, switching of the voltage/
(q) Upper front cover 33
current input switches, etc. (The FR-A800-GF had a front cover with an LED
display cover.)
(r) Lower front cover Remove this cover for wiring. 33
(s) Operation panel (FR-DU08) Operates and monitors the inverter. 138
Cools the inverter. (FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or higher, FR-A840-00083(2.2K) or
(t) Cooling fan 816
higher)
Switches (SW3 and SW4) for
(u) Do not change the initial setting (OFF
OFF
). —
manufacturer setting ON

20 1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Component names
1.3 Operation steps 1

: Initial setting Step of operation

2
Frequency command
(a)
Frequency

Installation/mounting
Inverter
output 3
frequency Wiring of the power
supply and motor
(b)
(Hz) Time
Start command ON (S)
Control mode selection (c) 4
How
How
o Start command via the PU connector
to
to give
e aa start
give
command?
command?
m
start and RS-485 terminal of the inverter
and plug-in option (Communication)
(d) 5

Connect a switch, relay, etc.

Start command with
on the operation panel (PU)
to the control circuit
terminal block of the inverter
6
to give a start command. (External)

How
How w to
to How
How w to
to 7
give
give aa frequency
frequency
re give
give aa frequency
frequency
re
command?
command?
m command?
command?
m

8
Perform frequency Perform frequency
Change frequency
Set from the setting by a voltage setting by a current
with ON/OFF switches
PU (operation panel/ output device output device
parameter unit).
connected to terminals
(multi-speed setting)
(Connection across
terminals 2 and 5)
(Connection across
terminals 4 and 5)
9
(PU) (External) (External) (External)
(e) (f) (g) (h)
10
Change of frequency Perform frequency Perform frequency
Set from the setting by a voltage setting by a current
with ON/OFF switches
PU (operation panel/ output device output device
connected to terminals
parameter unit). (Connection across (Connection across
(multi-speed setting)
terminals 2 and 5) terminals 4 and 5)
(PU) (External) (External) (External)

(i) (j) (k) (l)

1. INTRODUCTION
1.3 Operation steps
21
 Symbol Overview Refer to page
(a) Install the inverter. 37
(b) Perform wiring for the power supply and the motor. 55
Select the control method (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless
(c) 221
vector control).
(d) Give the start command via communication. 659
(e) Give both the start and frequency commands from the PU. (PU operation mode) 149
Give the start command from the PU and the frequency command via terminals RH, RM, and RL. (External/PU
(f) 151
combined operation mode 2)
Give the start command from the PU and the frequency command by voltage input via terminal 2. (External/PU
(g) 152
combined operation mode 2)
Give the start command from the PU and the frequency command by current input via terminal 4. (External/PU
(h) 153
combined operation mode 2)
Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command from the PU. (External/PU
(i) 155
combined operation mode 1)
Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command via terminals RH, RM, and RL.
(j) 156
(External operation mode)
Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command by voltage input via terminal 2.
(k) 157
(External operation mode)
Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command by current input via terminal 4.
(l) 160
(External operation mode)

22 1. INTRODUCTION
1.3 Operation steps
1.4 Related manuals 1

Manuals related to the FR-A800 inverter are shown in the following table.
Name Manual number
2
FR-A800 Instruction Manual (Startup) IB-0600493
FR-A800-GF Instruction Manual (Startup) IB-0600600
FR-A802 (Separated Converter Type) Instruction Manual (Hardware) IB-0600533 3
FR-A802-GF (Separated Converter Type) Instruction Manual (Hardware) IB-0600601
FR-CC2 (Converter unit) Instruction Manual IB-0600542
FR-A806 (IP55/UL Type 12 specification) Instruction Manual (Hardware) IB-0600531ENG
FR Configurator 2 Instruction Manual IB-0600516ENG
4
FR-A800/F800 PLC Function Programming Manual IB-0600492ENG
FR-A800/F800 Safety Stop Function Instruction Manual BCN-A23228-001
5

10

1. INTRODUCTION
1.4 Related manuals
23
 MEMO

24 1. INTRODUCTION
1.4 Related manuals
 CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
4

2.1 Peripheral devices ..................................................................................................................................................27

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers....................................................................33
6
2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design ....................................................................................................37
2.4 Terminal connection diagrams................................................................................................................................46
2.5 Main circuit terminals ..............................................................................................................................................54
7
2.6 Control circuit..........................................................................................................................................................68
2.7 Communication connectors and terminals..............................................................................................................84
2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control) .............................................................................................87
8
2.9 Parameter settings for a motor with encoder..........................................................................................................94
2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units ..................................................................................................................97
2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF) ............................................................................110
9

10

25
 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
This chapter explains the installation and the wiring of this product.
Always read the instructions before use.
For the separated converter type, refer to the "INSTALLATION AND WIRING" in the FR-A802 (Separated Converter Type)
Instruction Manual (Hardware).
For the IP55 compatible model, refer to the "INSTALLATION AND WIRING" in the FR-A806 (IP55/UL Type 12 specification)
Instruction Manual (Hardware).

26 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.1 Peripheral devices
1

2.1.1 Inverter and peripheral devices 2

(b) Three-phase AC power supply (a) Inverter (n) USB connector

USB host
(A connector) 3
Communication
status indicator USB
(LED)(USB host)
(c) Molded case circuit breaker
(MCCB) or earth leakage current
USB device
4
breaker (ELB), fuse
(Mini B connector)

Personal computer
5
(FR Configurator 2)

(d) Magnetic contactor (MC)

6

7
(e) AC reactor (f) DC reactor
(o) High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
(FR-HAL) (FR-HEL)

P/+(P3)
PR

IM connection PM connection 8
U VW U VW
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P/+ P1 P/+ N/-

(g) Line noise Earth

(Ground)
(p) EMC filter 9
filter (ferrite core)
(FR-BLF) (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)

(r) Contactor
Example) No-fuse
10
switch
(DSN type)

(l) Brake unit

(FR-BU2, FR-BU)

(q) Induction motor (s) IPM motor (MM-CF)

Earth (Ground)
P/+ PR
P/+
PR

(h) High power factor (i) Multifunction (m) Resistor unit

converter regeneration converter (FR-BR, MT-BR5) Earth (Ground)
(FR-HC2) (FR-XC)
(j) Power regeneration
common converter : Install these options as required.
(FR-CV)
(k) Power regeneration
converter (MT-RC)

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.1 Peripheral devices
27
 Refer to
Symbol Name Overview
page
The life of the inverter is influenced by the surrounding air temperature.
The surrounding air temperature should be as low as possible within the
permissible range. This must be noted especially when the inverter is
installed in an enclosure. 37, 46,
(a) Inverter (FR-A800)
Incorrect wiring may lead to damage of the inverter. The control signal lines 120
must be kept fully away from the main circuit lines to protect them from
noise.
The built-in EMC filter can reduce the noise.
(b) Three-phase AC power supply Must be within the permissible power supply specifications of the inverter. 826
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB),
Must be selected carefully since an inrush current flows in the inverter at
(c) earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB), or 29
power ON.
fuse
Install this to ensure safety.
(d) Magnetic contactor (MC) Do not use this to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will shorten the life 128
of the inverter.
Install this to suppress harmonics and to improve the power factor.
An AC reactor (FR-HAL) (option) is required when installing the inverter
(e) AC reactor (FR-HAL) near a large power supply system (1000 kVA or more). Under such 127
condition, the inverter may be damaged if you do not use a reactor.
Select a reactor according to the applied motor capacity.
Install this to suppress harmonics and to improve the power factor.
Select a reactor according to the applied motor capacity.
For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or
(f) DC reactor (FR-HEL) a motor with a capacity of 75 kW or higher, always connect the FR-HEL. 127
When using the DC reactor with the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-
A840-01800(55K) or lower, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and
P1 before connecting the DC reactor to the inverter.
The FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower are
(g) Noise filter (FR-BLF) 118
equipped with the common mode choke.
Suppresses the power supply harmonics significantly. Install this as
(h) High power factor converter (FR-HC2) 104
required.
Multifunction regeneration converter (FR-
(i) 105
XC)*1
Power regeneration common converter Provides a large braking capability. Install this as required.
(j) 107
(FR-CV)*1
(k) Power regeneration converter (MT-RC)*1 108
(l) Brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU)*1 Allows the inverter to provide the optimal regenerative braking capability.
100
(m) Resistor unit (FR-BR, MT-BR5)*1 Install this as required.
Connect between the inverter and a personal computer with a USB (ver.
1.1) cable.
(n) USB connection 85
Use a USB memory device to copy parameter settings or use the trace
function.
Improves the braking capability of the inverter built-in brake.
Remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX to connect this (7.5K or
(o) High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)*1 lower). 97
Always install a thermal relay when using a brake resistor for the inverters
with 11K or higher capacity.
Install this to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter.
Noise filter (ferrite core) (FR-BSF01, FR-
(p) The noise filter is effective in the range from about 0.5 to 5 MHz. A wire 118
BLF)
should be wound four turns at maximum.
(q) Induction motor Connect a squirrel-cage induction motor. —
Connect this for an application where a PM motor is driven by the load
Example)
(r) even while the inverter power is OFF. Do not open or close the contactor —
No-fuse switch (DSN type)
while the inverter is running (outputting).
Use the specified motor. An IPM motor cannot be driven by the commercial
(s) IPM motor (MM-CF) 833
power supply.
*1 To select a stand-alone option, refer to the Instruction Manual of each option.

28 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.1 Peripheral devices
 NOTE
• To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the motor and inverter. 1
• Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor, or capacitor type filter on the inverter's output side. Doing
so will cause the inverter shut off or damage the capacitor or surge suppressor. If any of the above devices is connected,
immediately remove it. When installing a molded case circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter, contact the
manufacturer of the molded case circuit breaker.
2
• Electromagnetic wave interference:
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. To minimize interference, enabling the built-in EMC filter 3
or installing an external EMC filters is effective. (Refer to page 120.)
• For details on the options and peripheral devices, refer to the respective Instruction Manual.
• A PM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
• A PM motor is a motor with permanent magnets embedded inside. High voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the 4
motor is running. Before closing the contactor at the output side, make sure that the inverter power is ON and the motor is
stopped.
5
2.1.2 Peripheral devices
Check the model of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to the capacity. 6
Refer to the following table for right selection.

10

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.1 Peripheral devices
29
  Molded case circuit breaker / earth leakage circuit breaker
• This is a matrix showing the rated current of the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB)
(NF or NV type) according to the selected inverter and rating.
Without AC/DC power factor improving reactor With AC/DC power factor improving reactor
Voltage Inverter model
SLD LD ND HD SLD LD ND HD
FR-A820-00046(0.4K) 10 A 10 A 5A 5A 10 A 10 A 5A 3A
FR-A820-00077(0.75K) 15 A 15 A 10 A 5A 15 A 15 A 10 A 5A
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) 20 A 20 A 15 A 10 A 15 A 15 A 15 A 10 A
FR-A820-00167(2.2K) 30 A 30 A 20 A 15 A 30 A 30 A 15 A 15 A
FR-A820-00250(3.7K) 50 A 50 A 30 A 20 A 40 A 40 A 30 A 15 A
FR-A820-00340(5.5K) 75 A 60 A 50 A 30 A 50 A 50 A 40 A 30 A
FR-A820-00490(7.5K) 100 A 75 A 60 A 50 A 75 A 75 A 50 A 40 A
FR-A820-00630(11K) 125 A 125 A 75 A 60 A 100 A 100 A 75 A 50 A
200 V
FR-A820-00770(15K) 150 A 150 A 125 A 75 A 125 A 125 A 100 A 75 A
class
FR-A820-00930(18.5K) 175 A 175 A 150 A 125 A 150 A 125 A 125 A 100 A
FR-A820-01250(22K) 225 A 225 A 175 A 150 A 175 A 150 A 125 A 125 A
FR-A820-01540(30K) 300 A 250 A 225 A 175 A 225 A 200 A 150 A 125 A
FR-A820-01870(37K) 350 A 300 A 250 A 225 A 250 A 225 A 200 A 150 A
FR-A820-02330(45K) 400 A 400 A 300 A 250 A 350 A 300 A 225 A 200 A
FR-A820-03160(55K) — — 400 A 300 A 500 A 400 A 300 A 225 A
FR-A820-03800(75K) — — — — 500 A 400 A 400 A 300 A
FR-A820-04750(90K) — — — — 600 A 500 A 400 A 400 A
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 3A
FR-A840-00038(0.75K) 10 A 10 A 5A 5A 10 A 10 A 5A 5A
FR-A840-00052(1.5K) 10 A 10 A 10 A 5A 10 A 10 A 10 A 5A
FR-A840-00083(2.2K) 20 A 20 A 10 A 10 A 15 A 15 A 10 A 10 A
FR-A840-00126(3.7K) 30 A 30 A 20 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 15 A 10 A
FR-A840-00170(5.5K) 30 A 30 A 30 A 20 A 30 A 30 A 20 A 15 A
FR-A840-00250(7.5K) 50 A 50 A 30 A 30 A 40 A 40 A 30 A 20 A
FR-A840-00310(11K) 60 A 60 A 50 A 30 A 50 A 50 A 40 A 30 A
FR-A840-00380(15K) 75 A 75 A 60 A 50 A 60 A 60 A 50 A 40 A
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) 100 A 100 A 75 A 60 A 75 A 75 A 60 A 50 A
FR-A840-00620(22K) 125 A 125 A 100 A 75 A 100 A 100 A 75 A 60 A
400 V FR-A840-00770(30K) 150 A 150 A 125 A 100 A 125 A 100 A 100 A 75 A
class FR-A840-00930(37K) 175 A 175 A 150 A 125 A 150 A 125 A 100 A 100 A
FR-A840-01160(45K) 200 A 200 A 175 A 150 A 175 A 150 A 125 A 100 A
FR-A840-01800(55K) — — 200 A 175 A 225 A 200 A 150 A 125 A
FR-A840-02160(75K) — — — — 225 A 225 A 200 A 150 A
FR-A840-02600(90K) — — — — 350 A 225 A 225 A 200 A
FR-A840-03250(110K) — — — — 400 A 350 A 225 A 225 A
FR-A840-03610(132K) — — — — 400 A 400 A 350 A 225 A
FR-A840-04320(160K) — — — — 500 A 400 A 400 A 350 A
FR-A840-04810(185K) — — — — 600 A 500 A 400 A 400 A
FR-A840-05470(220K) — — — — 600 A 600 A 500 A 400 A
FR-A840-06100(250K) — — — — 700 A 600 A 600 A 500 A
FR-A840-06830(280K) — — — — 800 A 700 A 600 A 600 A

NOTE
• Select an MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
• Install one MCCB per inverter. For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the
Instruction Manual (Startup) or Instruction Manual (Hardware), and select an appropriate fuse or molded case circuit breaker
(MCCB).
MCCB INV M
MCCB INV M

30 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.1 Peripheral devices
 • When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model, and select cables and reactors according to the motor output.
• When the breaker installed on the inverter input side is shut off, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal 1
parts of the inverter etc. The cause of the output shutoff must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the
breaker.
2
 Magnetic contactor at the inverter's input line
• This is a matrix showing the model name of the Mitsubishi magnetic contactor to be installed at the inverter's input line
according to the selected inverter and rating.
3
Without AC/DC power factor improving reactor With AC/DC power factor improving reactor
Voltage Inverter model
SLD LD ND HD SLD LD ND HD
FR-A820-00046(0.4K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
4
FR-A820-00077(0.75K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
FR-A820-00167(2.2K) S-T21 S-T21 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 5
FR-A820-00250(3.7K) S-T25 S-T25 S-T21 S-T10 S-T21 S-T21 S-T10 S-T10
FR-A820-00340(5.5K) S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T21 S-T35 S-T25 S-T21 S-T10
FR-A820-00490(7.5K) S-T50 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T21
FR-A820-00630(11K) S-T65 S-T50 S-T35 S-T35 S-T50 S-T50 S-T35 S-T35 6
200 V
FR-A820-00770(15K) S-T65 S-T65 S-T50 S-T35 S-T50 S-T50 S-T50 S-T35
class
FR-A820-00930(18.5K) S-T100 S-T100 S-T65 S-T50 S-T65 S-T65 S-T50 S-T50
FR-A820-01250(22K) S-N150 S-T100 S-T100 S-T65 S-T100 S-T100 S-T65 S-T50 7
FR-A820-01540(30K) S-N150 S-N150 S-T100 S-T100 S-N150 S-N125 S-T100 S-T65
FR-A820-01870(37K) S-N180 S-N180 S-N150 S-T100 S-N150 S-N150 S-N125 S-T100
FR-A820-02330(45K) S-N220 S-N220 S-N180 S-N150 S-N180 S-N180 S-N150 S-N125
FR-A820-03160(55K) — — S-N220 S-N180 S-N300 S-N300 S-N180 S-N150 8
FR-A820-03800(75K) — — — — S-N400 S-N300 S-N300 S-N180
FR-A820-04750(90K) — — — — S-N600 S-N400 S-N300 S-N300
FR-A840-00023(0.4K)
FR-A840-00038(0.75K)
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
S-T10
9
FR-A840-00052(1.5K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
FR-A840-00083(2.2K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
FR-A840-00126(3.7K) S-T21 S-T21 S-T10 S-T10 S-T12 S-T12 S-T10 S-T10 10
FR-A840-00170(5.5K) S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T10 S-T21 S-T21 S-T12 S-T10
FR-A840-00250(7.5K) S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T12
FR-A840-00310(11K) S-T35 S-T35 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21
FR-A840-00380(15K) S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T21 S-T35 S-T35 S-T21 S-T21
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T21
FR-A840-00620(22K) S-T50 S-T50 S-T35 S-T35 S-T50 S-T50 S-T35 S-T35
400 V FR-A840-00770(30K) S-T65 S-T65 S-T50 S-T35 S-T50 S-T50 S-T50 S-T35
class FR-A840-00930(37K) S-T100 S-T100 S-T65 S-T50 S-T65 S-T65 S-T50 S-T50
FR-A840-01160(45K) S-N150 S-T100 S-T100 S-T65 S-T100 S-T100 S-T65 S-T50
FR-A840-01800(55K) — — S-T100 S-T100 S-N150 S-T100 S-T100 S-T65
FR-A840-02160(75K) — — — — S-N180 S-N150 S-T100 S-T100
FR-A840-02600(90K) — — — — S-N220 S-N180 S-N150 S-T100
FR-A840-03250(110K) — — — — S-N300 S-N220 S-N180 S-N150
FR-A840-03610(132K) — — — — S-N300 S-N300 S-N220 S-N180
FR-A840-04320(160K) — — — — S-N400 S-N300 S-N300 S-N220
FR-A840-04810(185K) — — — — S-N600 S-N400 S-N300 S-N300
FR-A840-05470(220K) — — — — S-N600 S-N600 S-N400 S-N300
FR-A840-06100(250K) — — — — S-N600 S-N600 S-N600 S-N400
FR-A840-06830(280K) — — — — S-N800 S-N600 S-N600 S-N600

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.1 Peripheral devices
31
 NOTE
• The matrix shows the magnetic contactor selected according to the standards of Japan Electrical Manufacturers' Association
(JEM standards) for AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the MC is used for
emergency stops during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times. If using the MC for emergency stop during motor
driving, select the MC for the inverter input current according to the rated current against JEM 1038 standards for AC-3 class.
When installing an MC on the inverter output side to switch to the commercial-power supply operation while running a general-
purpose motor, select the MC for the rated motor current according to the rated current against JEM 1038 standards for AC-
3 class.
• When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model, and select cables and reactors according to the motor output.
• When the breaker installed on the inverter input side is shut off, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal
parts of the inverter etc. The cause of the output shutoff must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the
breaker.

32 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.1 Peripheral devices
2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel 1
or the front covers
2
 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel
• Loosen the two screws on the operation panel. • Press the upper edge of the operation panel while pulling
(These screws cannot be removed.) out the operation panel.
3

To reinstall the operation panel, align its connector on the back with the PU connector of the inverter, and insert the operation 9
panel. After confirming that the operation panel is fit securely, tighten the screws. (Tightening torque: 0.40 to 0.45 N·m)

 Removal of the lower front cover (FR-A820-01540(30K) or lower, FR-A840- 10

00770(30K) or lower)
(a) (b) (c)

Loosen

(a) Loosen the screws on the lower front cover. (These screws cannot be removed.)
(b) While holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sides of the lower front cover, pull out the cover using its upper
side as a support.
(c) With the lower front cover removed, the main circuit and the control circuit can be wired.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers
33
  Removal of the upper front cover (FR-A820-01540(30K) or lower, FR-
A840-00770(30K) or lower)
(a) (b) (c)

Loosen

(a) With the lower front cover removed, loosen the screw on the upper front cover. (This screw cannot be removed.)
(FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to FR-A820-01540(30K) and FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to FR-A840-00770(30K) have two mounting
screws.)
(b) While holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sides of the upper front cover, pull out the cover using its upper
side as a support.
(c) With the upper front cover removed, the RS-485 terminals can be wired and the plug-in option can be installed.

 Reinstallation of the front covers (FR-A820-01540(30K) or lower, FR-

A840-00770(30K) or lower)

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Tighten
Tighten

(a) Clip on the upper front cover as illustrated.

Check that it is properly secured.
(b) Tighten the screws on the lower part of the cover. (FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to FR-A820-01540(30K) and FR-A840-
00170(5.5K) to FR-A840-00770(30K) have two mounting screws.)
(c) Install the lower front cover by inserting the upper hook into the socket of the upper front cover.
(d) Tighten the screws on the lower part of the lower front cover.

NOTE
• When installing the upper front cover, fit the connector of the operation panel securely along the guides of the PU connector.

34 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers
 Removal of the lower front cover (FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher, FR-
A840-00930(37K) or higher) 1
(a) (b)
2

(a) Remove the mounting screws to remove the lower front cover. 7
(b) With the lower front cover removed, the main circuit can be wired.

 Removal of the upper front cover (FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher, FR- 8

A840-00930(37K) or higher)

(a) (b) (c) 9

10
Loosen

(a) With the lower front cover removed, loosen the screws on the upper front cover. (These screws cannot be removed.)
(b) While holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sides of the upper front cover, pull out the cover using its upper
side as a support.
(c) With the upper front cover removed, the control circuit and the RS-485 terminals can be wired and the plug-in option can
be installed.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers
35
  Reinstallation of the front covers (FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher, FR-
A840-00930(37K) or higher)

(a) (b) (c)

Tighten Tighten

(a) Clip on the upper front cover as illustrated.

Check that it is properly secured.
(b) Tighten the screws on the lower part of the cover.
(c) Attach the lower front cover using the screws.

NOTE
• Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover.

36 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the operation panel or the front covers
2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design 1

When designing or manufacturing an inverter enclosure, determine the structure, size, and device layout of the enclosure by
fully considering the conditions such as heat generation of the contained devices and the operating environment. An inverter 2
unit uses many semiconductor devices. To ensure higher reliability and long period of operation, operate the inverter in the
ambient environment that completely satisfies the equipment specifications.
3
2.3.1 Inverter installation environment
The following table lists the standard specifications of the inverter installation environment. Using the inverter in an environment 4
that does not satisfy the conditions deteriorates the performance, shortens the life, and causes a failure. Refer to the following
points, and take adequate measures.

 Standard environmental specifications of the inverter 5

Item Description

LD, ND (initial setting), HD -10 to +50°C*1 (non-freezing)

Measurement
position
6
Surrounding Inverter
air 5 cm 5 cm
temperature
SLD -10 to +40°C*2(non-freezing) Measurement
position
5 cm 7
With circuit board coating (conforming to class 3C2/3S2 in IEC 60721-3-3): 95% RH or less
Ambient humidity (non-condensing)
Without circuit board coating: 90% RH or less (non-condensing) 8
Storage temperature *3
-20 to +65°C
Atmosphere Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Altitude Maximum 2500 m*4 9
Vibration 5.9 m/s2 or less*5 at 10 to 55 Hz (in either X, Y, or Z direction)
*1 0 to +50°C for the FR-A800-GF.
*2
*3
0 to +40°C for the FR-A800-GF.
Temperature applicable for a short time, for example, in transit.
10
*4 For the installation at an altitude above 1000 m, consider a 3% reduction in the rated current per 500 m increase in altitude.
*5 2.9 m/s2 or less for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher.

 Temperature
The permissible surrounding air temperature of the inverter is between -10°C and +50°C (-10°C and +40°C at the SLD rating).
(The permissible surrounding air temperature of the FR-A800-GF is between 0 and +50°C (0 and +40°C for the SLD rating).)
Always operate the inverter within this temperature range. Operation outside this range will considerably shorten the service
lives of the semiconductors, parts, capacitors and others. Take the following measures to keep the surrounding air temperature
of the inverter within the specified range.

 Measures against high temperature

• Use a forced ventilation system or similar cooling system. (Refer to page 41.)
• Install the enclosure in an air-conditioned electric chamber.
• Block direct sunlight.
• Provide a shield or similar plate to avoid direct exposure to the radiated heat and wind of a heat source.
• Ventilate the area around the enclosure well.

 Measures against low temperature

• Provide a space heater in the enclosure.
• Do not power OFF the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter OFF.)

 Sudden temperature changes

• Select an installation place where temperature does not change suddenly.
• Avoid installing the inverter near the air outlet of an air conditioner.
• If temperature changes are caused by opening/closing of a door, install the inverter away from the door.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
37
 NOTE
• For the amount of heat generated by the inverter unit, refer to page 40.

 Humidity
Operate the inverter within the ambient air humidity of usually 45 to 90% (up to 95% with circuit board coating). Too high
humidity will pose problems of reduced insulation and metal corrosion. On the other hand, too low humidity may cause a spatial
electrical breakdown. The humidity conditions for the insulation distance defined in JEM 1103 standard "Insulation Distance
from Control Equipment" is 45 to 85%.

 Measures against high humidity

• Make the enclosure enclosed, and provide it with a hygroscopic agent.
• Provide dry air into the enclosure from outside.
• Provide a space heater in the enclosure.

 Measures against low humidity

Air with proper humidity can be blown into the enclosure from outside. Also, when installing or inspecting the unit, discharge
your body (static electricity) beforehand, and keep your body away from the parts and patterns.

 Measures against condensation

Condensation may occur if frequent operation stops change the in-enclosure temperature suddenly or if the outside air
temperature changes suddenly.
Condensation causes such faults as reduced insulation and corrosion.
• Take the measures against high humidity.
• Do not power OFF the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter OFF.)

 Dust, dirt, oil mist

Dust and dirt will cause such faults as poor contacts, reduced insulation and cooling effect due to the moisture-absorbed
accumulated dust and dirt, and in-enclosure temperature rise due to a clogged filter. In an atmosphere where conductive
powder floats, dust and dirt will cause such faults as malfunction, deteriorated insulation and short circuit in a short time.
Since oil mist will cause similar conditions, it is necessary to take adequate measures.

 Countermeasure
• Place the inverter in a totally enclosed enclosure.
Take measures if the in-enclosure temperature rises. (Refer to page 41.)
• Purge air.
Pump clean air from outside to make the in-enclosure air pressure higher than the outside air pressure.

 Corrosive gas, salt damage

If the inverter is exposed to corrosive gas or to salt near a beach, the printed board patterns and parts will corrode or the relays
and switches will result in poor contact.
In such places, take the measures given in the previous paragraph.

 Explosive, flammable gases

As the inverter is non-explosion proof, it must be contained in an explosion-proof enclosure. In places where explosion may be
caused by explosive gas, dust or dirt, an enclosure cannot be used unless it structurally complies with the guidelines and has
passed the specified tests. This makes the enclosure itself expensive (including the test charges). The best way is to avoid
installation in such places and install the inverter in a non-hazardous place.

 High altitude
Use the inverter at an altitude of within 2500 m. For use at an altitude above 1000 m, consider a 3% reduction in the rated
current per 500 m increase in altitude.
If it is used at a higher place, it is likely that thin air will reduce the cooling effect and low air pressure will deteriorate dielectric
strength.

38 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
 Vibration, impact
The vibration resistance of the inverter is up to 5.9 m/s2 (2.9 m/s2 or less for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher) at 10 to 55 1
Hz frequency and 1 mm amplitude for the directions of X, Y, Z axes. Applying vibration and impacts for a long time may loosen
the structures and cause poor contacts of connectors, even if those vibration and impacts are within the specified values.
Especially when impacts are applied repeatedly, caution must be taken because such impacts may break the installation feet. 2
 Countermeasure
• Provide the enclosure with rubber vibration isolators.
• Strengthen the structure to prevent the enclosure from resonance.
3
• Install the enclosure away from the sources of the vibration.

10

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
39
 2.3.2 Amount of heat generated by the inverter
 Installing the heat sink inside the enclosure
When the heat sink is installed inside the enclosure, the amount of heat generated by the inverter unit is shown in the following
tables.
Amount of heat generated (W)
Voltage Inverter model
SLD LD ND HD
FR-A820-00046(0.4K) 60 55 40 30
FR-A820-00077(0.75K) 95 85 60 40
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) 140 130 110 70
FR-A820-00167(2.2K) 200 185 130 100
FR-A820-00250(3.7K) 310 285 190 135
FR-A820-00340(5.5K) 355 320 240 160
FR-A820-00490(7.5K) 525 480 350 230
FR-A820-00630(11K) 570 515 370 280
200 V class FR-A820-00770(15K) 770 700 590 450
FR-A820-00930(18.5K) 950 850 720 600
FR-A820-01250(22K) 1000 950 880 840
FR-A820-01540(30K) 1450 1300 1050 880
FR-A820-01870(37K) 1650 1480 1270 1050
FR-A820-02330(45K) 2120 1900 1610 1300
FR-A820-03160(55K) 2750 2450 1830 1450
FR-A820-03800(75K) 3020 2710 2180 1700
FR-A820-04750(90K) 3960 3530 2700 2220
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) 55 50 40 30
FR-A840-00038(0.75K) 75 70 55 40
FR-A840-00052(1.5K) 85 80 70 50
FR-A840-00083(2.2K) 130 120 100 75
FR-A840-00126(3.7K) 175 160 130 90
FR-A840-00170(5.5K) 245 230 170 135
FR-A840-00250(7.5K) 345 315 220 165
FR-A840-00310(11K) 370 345 280 210
FR-A840-00380(15K) 450 415 390 285
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) 565 520 450 385
FR-A840-00620(22K) 740 675 520 450
FR-A840-00770(30K) 930 825 690 560
400 V class
FR-A840-00930(37K) 1110 1020 840 700
FR-A840-01160(45K) 1340 1220 1020 860
FR-A840-01800(55K) 2000 1640 1290 1060
FR-A840-02160(75K) 2520 2100 1790 1350
FR-A840-02600(90K) 3150 2575 2200 1770
FR-A840-03250(110K) 3600 2800 2300 1850
FR-A840-03610(132K) 4050 3600 2800 2250
FR-A840-04320(160K) 4650 3800 3450 2650
FR-A840-04810(185K) 5300 4650 3850 3400
FR-A840-05470(220K) 5850 5100 4550 3700
FR-A840-06100(250K) 6650 5850 5100 4500
FR-A840-06830(280K) 7550 6600 5900 5050

NOTE
• The figures indicate the amount of heat generated when the output current is the rated current, power supply voltage is 220 V
(200 V class) or 440 V (400 V class), and the carrier frequency is 2 kHz.

40 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
 Installing the heat sink outside the enclosure
When the heat sink is installed outside the enclosure, the amount of heat generated by the inverter unit is shown in the following 1
tables. (For details on protruding the heat sink through a panel, refer to page 44.)
Amount of heat generated (W)
Voltage Inverter model Heat sink section (outside of enclosure) Control section (inside of enclosure) 2
SLD LD ND HD SLD LD ND HD
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) 104 95 77 40 36 35 33 30
FR-A820-00167(2.2K)
FR-A820-00250(3.7K)
161
263
147
240
95
155
70
103
39
47
38
45
35
35
30
32
3
FR-A820-00340(5.5K) 265 235 174 110 90 85 66 50
FR-A820-00490(7.5K) 375 340 244 155 150 140 106 75
FR-A820-00630(11K) 405 365 261 190 165 150 109 90 4
FR-A820-00770(15K) 555 500 421 315 215 200 169 135
200 V class FR-A820-00930(18.5K) 690 615 520 430 260 235 200 170
FR-A820-01250(22K) 700 665 620 595 300 285 260 245
FR-A820-01540(30K) 1035 925 745 615 415 375 305 265
5
FR-A820-01870(37K) 1170 1040 895 735 480 440 375 315
FR-A820-02330(45K) 1520 1360 1150 920 600 540 460 380
FR-A820-03160(55K) 1960 1740 1280 1000 790 710 550 450 6
FR-A820-03800(75K) 2165 1930 1530 1180 855 780 650 520
FR-A820-04750(90K) 2860 2530 1925 1560 1100 1000 775 660
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) 20 18 12 6 35 32 28 24
FR-A840-00038(0.75K) 36 32 23 12 39 38 32 28 7
FR-A840-00052(1.5K) 42 39 33 19 43 41 37 31
FR-A840-00083(2.2K) 77 71 57 38 53 49 43 37
FR-A840-00126(3.7K) 120 109 86 53 55 51 44 37 8
FR-A840-00170(5.5K) 180 170 120 90 65 60 50 45
FR-A840-00250(7.5K) 260 235 160 115 85 80 60 50
FR-A840-00310(11K) 260 245 195 145 110 100 85 65
FR-A840-00380(15K) 315 290 275 200 135 125 115 85 9
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) 395 360 310 265 170 160 140 120
FR-A840-00620(22K) 510 465 360 305 230 210 160 145

400 V class
FR-A840-00770(30K)
FR-A840-00930(37K)
655
780
575
720
480
590
385
485
275
330
250
300
210
250
175
215
10
FR-A840-01160(45K) 970 880 740 610 370 340 280 250
FR-A840-01800(55K) 1400 1140 890 730 600 500 400 330
FR-A840-02160(75K) 1780 1470 1250 925 740 630 540 425
FR-A840-02600(90K) 2235 1820 1540 1230 915 755 660 540
FR-A840-03250(110K) 2540 1960 1590 1260 1060 840 710 590
FR-A840-03610(132K) 2830 2500 1950 1570 1220 1100 850 680
FR-A840-04320(160K) 3250 2660 2410 1850 1400 1140 1040 800
FR-A840-04810(185K) 3700 3250 2690 2380 1600 1400 1160 1020
FR-A840-05470(220K) 4090 3570 3180 2590 1760 1530 1370 1110
FR-A840-06100(250K) 4650 4090 3570 3150 2000 1760 1530 1350
FR-A840-06830(280K) 5280 4620 4130 3530 2270 1980 1770 1520

NOTE
• The figures indicate the amount of heat generated when the output current is the rated current, power supply voltage is 220 V
(200 V class) or 440 V (400 V class), and the carrier frequency is 2 kHz.

2.3.3 Cooling system types for inverter enclosure

From the enclosure that contains the inverter, the heat of the inverter and other equipment (transformers, lamps, resistors, etc.)
and the incoming heat such as direct sunlight must be dissipated to keep the in-enclosure temperature lower than the
permissible temperatures of the in-enclosure equipment including the inverter.
The cooling systems are classified as follows in terms of the cooling calculation method.
• Cooling by natural heat dissipation from the enclosure surface (totally enclosed type)
• Cooling by heat sink (aluminum fin, etc.)

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
41
 • Cooling by ventilation (forced ventilation type, pipe ventilation type)
• Cooling by heat exchanger or cooler (heat pipe, cooler, etc.)
Cooling system Enclosure structure Comment

This system is low in cost and generally used, but the

Natural ventilation (enclosed
enclosure size increases as the inverter capacity
type / open type) INV
increases. This system is for relatively small capacities.

Natural
Being a totally enclosed type, this system is the most
Natural ventilation (totally appropriate for hostile environment having dust, dirt, oil
enclosed type) mist, etc. The enclosure size increases depending on
INV the inverter capacity.

This system has restrictions on the heat sink mounting

Heat sink
Heat sink cooling position and area. This system is for relatively small
INV
capacities.

This system is for general indoor installation. This is

Forced ventilation appropriate for enclosure downsizing and cost
Forced air INV reduction, and often used.

Heat
pipe This system is a totally enclosed type, and is
Heat pipe
appropriate for enclosure downsizing.
INV

2.3.4 Inverter installation

 Inverter placement

Fix six positions for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher.

• Install the inverter on a strong surface securely with screws.

• Leave enough clearances and take cooling measures.
• Avoid places where the inverter is subjected to direct sunlight, high temperature and high humidity.
• Install the inverter on a nonflammable wall surface.
• When encasing multiple inverters in an enclosure, install them in parallel as a cooling measure.
• For heat dissipation and maintenance, keep clearance between the inverter and the other devices or enclosure surface.
The space below the inverter is required for wiring, and the space above the inverter is required for heat dissipation.
• When designing or building an enclosure for the inverter, carefully consider influencing factors such as heat generation of
the contained devices and the operating environment.

42 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
 Clearances (front) Clearances (side) 1
FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher,
FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher

10 cm
or more
20 cm
or more 2
5 cm
5 cm 5 cm 10 cm 10 cm or more
or more*1,*2 or more*1,*2 or more or more *1,*3

3
Inverter
Vertical

Allow clearance.
10 cm
or more
20 cm
or more 4
*1 For the FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower and FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or lower, allow 1 cm or more clearance.
*2 When using the FR-A820-01250(22K) or lower and FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower at the surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less (30°C or
less for the SLD rated inverter), inverters can be mounted side by side without leaving any clearance. 5
*3 There needs to be a space of at least 30 cm in front of the inverter to replace the cooling fan of the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher. Refer to
page 816 for fan replacement.

 Installation orientation of the inverter 6

Install the inverter on a wall as specified. Do not mount it horizontally or in any other way.

 Above the inverter

Heat is blown up from inside the inverter by the small fan built in the unit. Any equipment placed above the inverter should be
7
heat resistant.

 Arrangement of multiple inverters 8

When multiple inverters are placed in the same enclosure, generally arrange them horizontally as shown in the figure (a). When
it is inevitable to arrange them vertically to minimize space, take such measures as to provide guides between the inverters
since heat generated in the inverters in bottom row can increase the temperatures in the inverters in top row, causing inverter 9
failures.
When installing multiple inverters, fully take measures to prevent the surrounding air temperature of the inverter from being
higher than the permissible value by providing ventilation or increasing the enclosure size. 10

Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter

Guide Guide Guide

Inverter Inverter

Enclosure Enclosure
(a) Horizontal arrangement (b) Vertical arrangement

Arrangement of multiple inverters

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
43
  Arrangement of the ventilation fan and inverter
Heat generated in the inverter is blown up from the bottom of the unit as warm air by the cooling fan. When installing a
ventilation fan for that heat, determine the place of ventilation fan installation after fully considering an air flow. (Air passes
through areas of low resistance. Make an airway and airflow plates to expose the inverter to cool air.)

Inverter Inverter

<Good example> <Bad example>

Arrangement of the ventilation fan and inverter

2.3.5 Protruding the heat sink through a panel

When encasing the inverter to an enclosure, the heat generated in the enclosure can be greatly reduced by protruding the heat
sink of the inverter.
When installing the inverter in a compact enclosure, etc., this installation method is recommended.

 When using the panel through attachment (FR-A8CN)

For the FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 04750(90K) and the FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 03610(132K), a heat sink can be protruded
outside the enclosure using a panel through attachment (FR-A8CN). (For the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher, the attachment
is not necessary when the heat sink is to be protruded.)
For a panel cut dimension drawing and an installation procedure of the panel through attachment (FR-A8CN) to the inverter,
refer to a manual of FR-A8CN.

 Protrusion of heat sink for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher

 Panel cutting
Cut the panel of the enclosure according to the inverter capacity.
FR-A840-04320(160K) FR-A840-05470(220K)
FR-A840-04810(185K) FR-A840-06100(250K)
FR-A840-06830(280K)

6-M10 screw 6-M10 screw

484 662
300 300
15

200 200
13
954

984
954

Hole
985

Hole

（Unit：mm） （Unit：mm）
18

15

44 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
 Mount point change of installation frame from the rear to the front
The upper and lower installation frames are attached on the inverter (one for each position). 1
Change the mount point of the upper and lower installation frames from the rear to the front as shown in the figure.
When reattaching the installation frames, make sure that the installation orientation is correct.

Shift
2
Upper
installation
frame
3

5
Lower

Shift
installation
frame 6
 Installation of the inverter on the enclosure
Push the inverter heat sink part outside the enclosure, and fix the inverter to the panel with upper and lower installation frames.
Enclosure
7
Inside the
enclosure Exhausted air

There are finger guards behind the enclosure.

8
Therefore, the thickness of the panel should be
less than 10 mm (*1) and also do not place
anything around finger guards to avoid contact
Inverter
with the finger guards. 9
Enclosure
Installation
frame Finger guard
10 mm*1 140 mm 10
6 mm

Cooling Dimension of
wind the outside of
185 mm the enclosure

NOTE
• As the heat sink part protruded through the panel includes a cooling fan, this type of installation is not suitable for the
environment of water drops, oil, mist, dust, etc.
• Be careful not to drop screws, dust etc. into the inverter and cooling fan section.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
45
 2.4 Terminal connection diagrams

 Type FM
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
DC reactor Brake resistor
(FR-HEL)
DC reactor Brake resistor Brake unit
(FR-HEL) (FR-ABR) (Option)
Sink logic Brake unit R
R (Option) Jumper
Main circuit terminal Earth
(Ground) 
Control circuit terminal Jumper Jumper
Earth P1 P/+ P3 PR N/-
(Ground)
Inrush
P1 P/+ PX PR N/- current
limit circuit
MCCB MC R
R/L1 Inrush current U
Three-phase V Motor
S/L2 limit circuit M
AC power W
T/L3
supply ON EMC filter Earth (Ground)
Jumper R1/L11 ON/OFF

S1/L21 OFF connector

Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit
Control input signals Control circuit Relay output
(No voltage input allowed)
STF C1
Forward rotation start
STR B1
Reverse rotation start Relay output 1
A1 (Fault output)
STP(STOP)
Start self-holding selection
RH C2
High speed
RM B2
Multi-speed Middle speed Relay output 2
selection A2
RL
Low speed
JOG  RUN Open collector output
Jog operation Running
RT SU
Second function selection Up to frequency
MRS IPF
Output stop Instantaneous
RES OL power failure
Reset Overload
Terminal 4 input selection AU FU
Frequency detection
SOURCE

(Current input selection)

Selection of automatic restart CS SE
SINK

Open collector output common

after instantaneous
power failure Sink/source common
SD
Contact input common 24V

24VDC power supply PC

(Common for external power supply transistor)
24V external power +24 PU
supply input
SD connector
Common terminal  Voltage/current
input switch
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V) ON F/C + - Indicator
OFF USB A (FM) (Frequency meter, etc.)
10(+5V) 2 4 connector 

3 Calibration Moving-coil type

Frequency setting 0 to 5VDC Initial value
2 SD resistor  1mA full-scale
potentiometer 2 0 to 10VDC selectable
 USB
1/2W1kΩ 0 to 20mADC
1 5 mini B
(Analog common) AM (+)
connector Analog signal output
5 (0 to ±10VDC)
0 to ±10VDC Initial value (-)
Auxiliary (+) 1 0 to ±5VDC selectable
(-) 
input RS-485 terminals
TXD+
4 to 20mADC Initial value
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 Data
0 to 5VDC selectable  TXD-
(Current input) (-) 0 to 10VDC transmission
RXD+
Connector for plug-in option connection Connector 1 Connector 2 Data
RXD-
reception
Connector 3 GND
(SG)
GND
Safety stop signal Shorting 24V
wire PC Terminating
VCC 5V
resistor
S1 (Permissible load current 100mA)
Safety stop input (Channel 1)
So
Safety stop input (Channel 2) S2 Output shutoff (SO)
circuit Safety monitor output
SIC
Safety stop input common SOC
SD Safety monitor output common

46 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
*1 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or whenever a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC
reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option. Refer to page 826 to select the right DC reactor according to the applicable motor capacity.
When a DC reactor is connected to the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower or the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, if a jumper is installed across 1
terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and
the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
*2 When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21.
*3
*4
The function of these terminals can be changed using the Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 521.)
Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.
2
*5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the corresponding
switch of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly to the OFF position. To input a current, set the switch to the ON position. Terminals

*6
10 and 2 are also used as a PTC input terminal (Pr.561). (Refer to page 421.)
It is recommended to use 2 W 1 kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently. 3
*7 Remove the jumper between terminals PR and PX to connect the brake resistor. (FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or
lower).
*8 Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in the FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-
00023(0.4K) to 01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of brake resistors. (Refer to page 97.) 4
*9 Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3.
*10 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.195 or Pr.196). (Refer to page 473.)
*11 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 473.)
*12 Terminal FM can be used to output pulse trains as open collector output by setting Pr.291. 5
*13 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel.

NOTE
• To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm or more away from the power cables. Also, keep the 6
cables of the main circuit for input and output separated.
• After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter. 7
• Set the switches of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction.

10

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
47
  Type CA
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
DC reactor Brake resistor
(FR-HEL)
DC reactor Brake resistor Brake unit
(FR-HEL) (FR-ABR) (Option)
Source logic Brake unit R
R (Option) Jumper
Main circuit terminal Earth
(Ground) 
Control circuit terminal Jumper
Earth Jumper P1 P/+ P3 PR N/-
(Ground)
Inrush
P1 P/+ PX PR N/- current
limit circuit
MCCB MC R
R/L1 Inrush current U
Three-phase V Motor
S/L2 limit circuit M
AC power W
T/L3
supply ON EMC filter Earth (Ground)
Jumper R1/L11 ON/OFF

S1/L21 OFF connector

Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit
Control input signals Control circuit Relay output
(No voltage input allowed)
STF C1
Forward rotation start
STR B1
Reverse rotation start Relay output 1
A1 (Fault output)
STP(STOP)
Start self-holding selection
RH C2
High speed
RM B2
Multi-speed Middle speed Relay output 2
selection A2
RL
Low speed
JOG  RUN Open collector output
Jog operation Running
RT SU
Second function selection Up to frequency
MRS IPF
Output stop Instantaneous
RES OL power failure
Reset Overload
Terminal 4 input selection AU FU
Frequency detection
SOURCE

(Current input selection)

Selection of automatic restart CS SE
SINK

Open collector output common

after instantaneous power failure Sink/source common
Common for external power SD
24V
supply transistor
Contact input common PC
24VDC power supply

24V external power +24

supply input PU
Common terminal
SD  Voltage/current connector
input switch
F/C
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V) ON (+)
(CA) Analog current output
OFF USB A
10(+5V) 2 4 connector (-) (0 to 20mADC)
3
Frequency setting 2 0 to 5VDC Initial value
potentiometer 2 0 to 10VDC selectable
 USB AM (+)
1/2W1kΩ 0 to 20mADC Analog signal output
1 5 mini B
(Analog common) (DC0 to ±10V)
connector (-)
5
0 to ±10VDC Initial value
Auxiliary (+) 1 0 to ±5VDC selectable
(-) 
input RS-485 terminals
TXD+
4 to 20mADC Initial value
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 0 to 5VDC Data
selectable  TXD-
(Current input) (-) 0 to 10VDC transmission
RXD+
Connector for plug-in option connection Connector 1 Connector 2 Data
RXD-
reception
Connector 3 GND
(SG)
GND
Safety stop signal Shorting 24V
wire PC Terminating
VCC 5V
resistor
S1 (Permissible load current 100mA)
Safety stop input (Channel 1)
Output shutoff So
Safety stop input (Channel 2) S2 (SO)
circuit Safety monitor output
SIC
Safety stop input common SOC
SD Safety monitor output common

48 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
*1 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or whenever a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC
reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option. Refer to page 826 to select the right DC reactor according to the applicable motor capacity.
When a DC reactor is connected to the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower or the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, if a jumper is installed across 1
terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and
the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
*2 When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21.
*3 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 521.)
*4 Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.
2
*5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the corresponding
switch of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly to the OFF position. To input a current, set the switch to the ON position. Terminals
10 and 2 are also used as a PTC input terminal (Pr.561). (Refer to page 421.)
*6 It is recommended to use 2 W 1 kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently. 3
*7 Remove the jumper between terminals PR and PX to connect the brake resistor. (FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or
lower).
*8 Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in the FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-
00023(0.4K) to 01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of brake resistors. (Refer to page 97.) 4
*9 Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3.
*10 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.195 or Pr.196). (Refer to page 473.)
*11 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 473.)

NOTE
5
• To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm or more away from the power cables. Also, keep the
cables of the main circuit for input and output separated.
• After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter. 6
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
• Set the switches of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction.
7

10

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
49
  Type FM (FR-A800-GF)
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
DC reactor Brake resistor
(FR-HEL)
DC reactor Brake resistor Brake unit
(FR-HEL) (FR-ABR) (Option)
Sink logic Brake unit R
R (Option) Jumper
Main circuit terminal Earth
(Ground) 
Control circuit terminal Jumper Jumper
Earth P1 P/+ P3 PR N/-
(Ground)
Inrush
P1 P/+ PX PR N/- current
limit circuit
MCCB MC R
R/L1 Inrush current U
Three-phase V Motor
S/L2 limit circuit M
AC power W
T/L3
supply ON EMC filter Earth (Ground)
Jumper R1/L11 ON/OFF

S1/L21 OFF connector

Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit
Control input signals Control circuit Relay output
(No voltage input allowed) C1
STF
Forward rotation start
B1 Relay output 1
STR
Reverse rotation start (Fault output)
A1
STP(STOP)
Start self-holding selection
C2
RH
High speed
B2
RM Relay output 2
Multi-speed Middle speed A2
selection
RL
Low speed
JOG  RUN Open collector output
Jog operation Running
RT SU
Second function selection Up to frequency
IPF
MRS Instantaneous
Output stop
OL power failure
RES Overload
Reset
FU
Terminal 4 input selection AU Frequency detection
SOURCE

(Current input selection)

Selection of automatic restart CS SE Open collector output common
SINK

after instantaneous Sink/source common

power failure SD
Contact input common 24V
PORT 1 CC-Link IE Field Network
24VDC power supply PC communication connector
PORT 2
(Common for external power supply transistor)
24V external power +24 Connector 2 Connector for plug-in option
supply input connection
SD
Common terminal  Voltage/current Connector 3
input switch
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V) ON
OFF F/C + - Indicator
10(+5V) 2 4 (FM) (Frequency meter, etc.)
3 

Frequency setting 2 0 to 5VDC Initial value Calibration Moving-coil type

potentiometer 2 0 to 10VDC selectable
 SD resistor  1mA full-scale
1/2W1kΩ 0 to 20mADC
1 5
(Analog common)
AM (+) Analog signal output
0 to ±10VDC Initial value 5 (0 to ±10VDC)
Auxiliary (+) 1 0 to ±5VDC selectable (-)
(-) 
input
4 to 20mADC Initial value TXD+ RS-485 terminals
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 0 to 5VDC selectable  Data
(Current input) (-) 0 to 10VDC TXD-
transmission
PU connector RXD+
Data
USB A connector RXD-
reception
GND
USB mini B connector (SG)
GND
Safety stop signal 24V
Shorting wire PC Terminating
VCC 5V
S1 resistor
Safety stop input (Channel 1) (Permissible load current 100mA)
S2 Output shutoff So
Safety stop input (Channel 2) (SO)
circuit Safety monitor output
SIC
Safety stop input common
SD SOC
Safety monitor output common

*1 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or whenever a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC
reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option. Refer to page 826 to select the right DC reactor according to the applicable motor capacity.
When a DC reactor is connected to the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower or the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, if a jumper is installed across
terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and
the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)

50 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
*2 When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21.
*3 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 521.)
*4 Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse. 1
*5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the corresponding
switch of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly to the OFF position. To input a current, set the switch to the ON position. Terminals
10 and 2 are also used as a PTC input terminal (Pr.561). (Refer to page 421.)
*6
*7
It is recommended to use 2 W 1 kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.
Remove the jumper between terminals PR and PX to connect the brake resistor. (FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or
2
lower).
*8 Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in the FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-

*9
00023(0.4K) to 01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of brake resistors. (Refer to page 97.)
Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3. 3
*10 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.195 or Pr.196). (Refer to page 473.)
*11 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 473.)
*12 Terminal FM can be used to output pulse trains as open collector output by setting Pr.291.
*13 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel. 4
NOTE
• To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm or more away from the power cables. Also, keep the
cables of the main circuit for input and output separated. 5
• After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
• Set the switches of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
6
malfunction.

10

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
51
  Type CA (FR-A800-GF)
FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K)
DC reactor Brake resistor
(FR-HEL)
DC reactor Brake resistor Brake unit
(FR-HEL) (FR-ABR) (Option)
Source logic Brake unit R
R (Option) Jumper
Main circuit terminal Earth
(Ground) 
Control circuit terminal Jumper Jumper
Earth P1 P/+ P3 PR N/-
(Ground)
Inrush
P1 P/+ PX PR N/- current
limit circuit
MCCB MC R
R/L1 Inrush current U
Three-phase V Motor
S/L2 limit circuit M
AC power W
T/L3
supply ON EMC filter Earth (Ground)
Jumper R1/L11 ON/OFF

S1/L21 OFF connector

Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit
Control input signals Control circuit Relay output
(No voltage input allowed) C1
STF
Forward rotation start
B1 Relay output 1
STR
Reverse rotation start (Fault output)
A1
STP(STOP)
Start self-holding selection
C2
RH
High speed B2
RM Relay output 2
Multi-speed Middle speed A2
selection
RL
Low speed
JOG  RUN Open collector output
Jog operation Running
RT SU
Second function selection Up to frequency
IPF
MRS Instantaneous
Output stop
OL power failure
RES Overload
Reset
FU
Terminal 4 input selection AU Frequency detection
SOURCE

(Current input selection)

CS SE Open collector output common
Selection of automatic restart
SINK

after instantaneous power failure Sink/source common

Common for external power SD
24V
supply transistor PORT 1 CC-Link IE Field Network
Contact input common PC communication connector
PORT 2
24VDC power supply
Connector 2 Connector for plug-in option
24V external power +24
supply input connection
Connector 3
Common terminal
SD  Voltage/current
input switch
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 10E(+10V) ON
OFF F/C
(+)
10(+5V) 2 4 (CA) Analog current output
3
Frequency setting 2 0 to 5VDC Initial value (0 to 20mADC)
(-)
potentiometer 2 0 to 10VDC selectable

1/2W1kΩ 0 to 20mADC
1 5
(Analog common) AM (+)
Analog signal output
(DC0 to ±10V)
0 to ±10VDC Initial value (-)
Auxiliary (+) 1 0 to ±5VDC selectable 5
(-) 
input
4 to 20mADC Initial value TXD+ RS-485 terminals
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 0 to 5VDC selectable  Data
(Current input) (-) 0 to 10VDC TXD-
transmission
PU connector RXD+
Data
USB A connector RXD-
reception
GND
USB mini B connector (SG)
GND
Safety stop signal Shorting wire 24V
PC
Terminating
VCC 5V
Safety stop input (Channel 1) S1 resistor
(Permissible load current 100mA)
S2 Output shutoff So
Safety stop input (Channel 2)
circuit (SO)
SIC Safety monitor output
Safety stop input common
SD SOC
Safety monitor output common

52 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
*1 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or whenever a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC
reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option. Refer to page 826 to select the right DC reactor according to the applicable motor capacity.
When a DC reactor is connected to the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower or the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, if a jumper is installed across 1
terminals P1 and P/+, remove the jumper before installing the DC reactor. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and
the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
*2 When using separate power supply for the control circuit, remove the jumper between R1/L11 and S1/L21.
*3 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.189). (Refer to page 521.)
*4 Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to choose JOG or pulse.
2
*5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input a voltage, set the corresponding
switch of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly to the OFF position. To input a current, set the switch to the ON position. Terminals
10 and 2 are also used as a PTC input terminal (Pr.561). (Refer to page 421.)
*6 It is recommended to use 2 W 1 kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently. 3
*7 Remove the jumper between terminals PR and PX to connect the brake resistor. (FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or
lower).
*8 Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ (P3) and PR. (Terminal PR is equipped in the FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-
00023(0.4K) to 01800(55K).) Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of brake resistors. (Refer to page 97.) 4
*9 Do not connect the DC power supply (under DC feeding mode) to terminal P3.
*10 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.195 or Pr.196). (Refer to page 473.)
*11 The function of these terminals can be changed with the output terminal assignment (Pr.190 to Pr.194). (Refer to page 473.)

NOTE
5
• To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm or more away from the power cables. Also, keep the
cables of the main circuit for input and output separated.
• After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter. 6
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
• Set the switches of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction.
7

10

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
53
 2.5 Main circuit terminals

2.5.1 Details on the main circuit terminals

Refer to
Terminal symbol Terminal name Terminal function description
page
Connect these terminals to the commercial power supply.
Do not connect anything to these terminals when using the high power
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC power input factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR- —
XC)*1, or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).
Connect these terminals to a three-phase squirrel cage motor or a PM
U, V, W Inverter output —
motor.
Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To retain
the fault display and fault output, or to use the high power factor
converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC)*1,
or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), remove the
Power supply for the control jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and across S/L2 and S1/
R1/L11, S1/L21 L21, and supply external power to these terminals. The power capacity 77
circuit
necessary when separate power is supplied from R1/L11 and S1/L21
differs according to the inverter capacity.
FR-A820-00630(11K) or lower, FR-A840-00380(15K) or lower: 60 VA
FR-A820-00770(15K) or higher, FR-A840-00470(18.5K) or higher: 80
VA
Connect an optional brake resistor (FR-ABR) across terminals P/+ and
PR.
Brake resistor connection for FR-
Remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX for the inverter
P/+, PR A820-00630(11K) or lower, or
capacity that has terminal PX.
FR-A840-00380(15K) or lower
Connecting a brake resistor increases the regenerative braking
capability. 97

Brake resistor connection for FR-

Connect an optional brake resistor across terminals P3 and PR.
A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K),
P3, PR Connecting a brake resistor increases the regenerative braking
or FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to
capability.
01800(55K)
P/+, N/- Brake unit connection Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU), power regeneration
common converter (FR-CV), power regeneration converter (MT-RC),
high power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration
converter (FR-XC), or DC power supply (under DC feeding mode).
Brake unit connection for FR- When connecting multiple inverters, FR-A820-00770(15K) to
A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), 01250(22K) or FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K), in parallel using 100
P3, N/-
or FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to
the FR-CV, FR-HC2, or FR-XC*1, always use either terminal P/+ or P3
01800(55K)
for the connection. (Do not use terminals P/+ and P3 together.)
Do not connect the DC power supply between terminals P3 and N/-.
Use terminals P/+ and N/- for DC feeding.
Remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1, and connect a DC
reactor.
DC reactor connection for FR-
When a DC reactor is not connected, the jumper across terminals P/+
A820-03160(55K) or lower, or
and P1 should not be removed.
FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
P/+, P1 When using a motor with a capacity of 75 kW or higher, always connect 109
a DC reactor, which is available as an option.
DC reactor connection for FR-
A820-03800(75K) or higher, or Always connect a DC reactor, which is available as an option.
FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
When the jumper is connected across terminals PX and PR (initial
status), the built-in brake circuit is valid.
PR, PX Built-in brake circuit connection —
The built-in brake circuit is equipped in the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or
lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Be sure to earth (ground)
Earth (ground) 67
the inverter.
*1 Available when used in the common bus regeneration mode

54 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
 NOTE
• When connecting an optional brake resistor (FR-ABR) or a brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU), remove the jumpers across 1
terminals PR and PX. For the details, refer to page 97.

2.5.2 Main circuit terminal layout and wiring to power 2

supply and motor
3
FR-A820-00046(0.4K), FR-A820-00077(0.75K) FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K)
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K)
Jumper Jumper
4
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 PR
Jumper R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ PR
Jumper

R1/L11 S1/L21 N/- P/+ PX R1/L11 S1/L21 PX

5

M
Power supply Motor Charge lamp M Charge lamp 6
Power supply Motor

FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K) FR-A820-00630(11K)

FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K)
N/- P/+ PR Jumper
FR-A840-00310(11K), FR-A840-00380(15K)
Jumper
7
Jumper R1/L11 S1/L21 R1/L11 S1/L21 N/- P/+ PR

Jumper
8
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 PX Charge lamp

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

9
M
Charge lamp Power supply
10
Motor
M
Power supply Motor
FR-A820-00770(15K) to FR-A820-01250(22K) FR-A820-01540(30K)*1,
FR-A840-00470(18.5K), FR-A840-00620(22K) FR-A840-00770(30K)
R1/L11 S1/L21 Charge lamp
Charge lamp

Jumper
R1/L11 S1/L21
Jumper
Jumper
P3 PR P/+

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-

P3 PR

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+

Jumper
M
Power supply Motor

Power supply
M Motor

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
55
 FR-A820-01870(37K), FR-A820-02330(45K) FR-A820-03160(55K)
R1/L11 S1/L21 R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp Charge lamp

Jumper

Jumper

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P1 P/+

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P1 P/+

Jumper
M
Power supply Motor Jumper M
Power supply Motor
FR-A820-03800(75K), FR-A820-04750(90K) FR-A840-00930(37K) to FR-A840-01800(55K)
FR-A840-03250(110K) to FR-A840-04810(185K)*2
R1/L11 S1/L21 R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Charge lamp
Jumper

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ Jumper

P/+ R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ P3 PR

M
Power supply Motor
P/+ Jumper
(for option connection)
DC reactor M
(option)
Power supply Motor
FR-A840-02160(75K), FR-A840-02600(90K) FR-A840-05470(220K) to FR-A840-06830(280K)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Charge lamp

Jumper Jumper

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+

P/+ R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+

M
Power supply Motor
DC reactor
(option) P/+

M
Power supply DC reactor Motor
(option)

*1 Terminals P3 and PR of the FR-A820-01540(30K) are not provided with a screw. Do not connect anything to them.
*2 When an option other than the DC reactor must be connected to terminal P/+, use terminal P/+ (for option connection).

56 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
 NOTE
• Make sure the power cables are connected to the R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. (Phase need not be matched.) Never connect the 1
power cable to the U, V, and W of the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter.
• Connect the motor to U, V, and W. (The phases must be matched.)
• When wiring the inverter main circuit conductor of the FR-A840-05470(220K) or higher, tighten a nut from the right side of the
conductor. When wiring two cables, place cables on both sides of the conductor. For wiring, use bolts (nuts) provided with the
2
inverter. (Refer to the following figure.)

6
 Handling of the wiring cover
(FR-A820-00630(11K) to 01250(22K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to 00620(22K))
For the hook of the wiring cover, cut off the necessary parts using a pair of needle-nose pliers etc. 7

NOTE
• Cut off the same number of lugs as wires. If parts where no wire is put through have been cut off (10 mm or more), protective
8
structure (IEC 60529) becomes an open type (IP00).

10

2.5.3 Recommended cables and wiring length

Select a recommended size cable to ensure that the voltage drop ratio is within 2%.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, the voltage drop in the main circuit will cause the motor torque to
decrease especially at a low speed.
The following tables show the recommended cable size for cables that are 20 m in length.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
57
  For the ND rating
• 200 V class (220 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A820-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
S/L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W P1 W W
L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00046(0.4K) to
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00167(2.2K)
00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 5.5 6 8 16 10 16
00630(11K) M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16
00770(15K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 22-8 38 22 38 14 2 4 35 25 25
01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 80-10 60-10 80 60 80 22 3/0 1/0 70 70 35
02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
03160(55K) M12 (M8) 46 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
• 200 V class (220 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A820-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, U, V, U, V,
S/L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W W W
L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00046(0.4K) to
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00167(2.2K)
00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 5.5 8 8 10 10 10
00630(11K) M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16
00770(15K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 38 14 4 4 25 25 16
01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 22 1/0 1/0 70 70 35
02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
03160(55K) M12 (M8) 46 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
03800(75K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 125 125 125 38 250 250 120 120 —
04750(90K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 300 300 150 150 —
• 400 V class (440 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A840-[] size*4 (N·m) R/L1, S/ U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
L2, T/L3 W P1 W W
T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00023(0.4K)
to M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00126(3.7K)
00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 4
00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00310(11K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10
00380(15K) M5 2.5 8-5 5.5-5 8 5.5 8 5.5 8 10 10 6 10
00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 14-6 8-6 14 8 14 8 6 8 16 10 16
00620(22K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
00770(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
00930(37K) M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
01160(45K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25
01800(55K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25

58 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
 • 400 V class (440 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Crimp terminal
Cable gauge 1
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A840-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, U, V, U, V,
S/L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W W W

00023(0.4K)
L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
2
to M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00126(3.7K)
00170(5.5K)
00250(7.5K)
M4
M4
1.5
1.5
2-4
5.5-4
2-4
5.5-4
2
3.5
2
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
12
12
14
12
2.5
4
2.5
4
4
4
3
00310(11K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10
00380(15K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 8 5.5 10 10 6 6 10
00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 8-6 8-6 8 8 14 8 8 8 10 10 16 4
00620(22K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
00770(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
00930(37K)
01160(45K)
M8
M8
7.8
7.8
22-8
38-8
22-8
38-8
22
38
22
38
22
38
14
22
4
2
4
2
25
50
25
50
16
25
5
01800(55K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
02160(75K) M10 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
02600(90K) M10 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 22 3/0 3/0 50 50 25 6
03250(110K) M10 (M12) 26.5 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
03610(132K) M10 (M12) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
04320(160K)
04810(185K)
M12 (M10) 46
M12 (M10) 46
150-12 150-12 125
150-12 150-12 150
125
150
150
150
38
38
250
300
250
300
120
150
120
150
70
95
7
05470(220K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×100 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
06100(250K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×125 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
06830(280K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2×125 2×125 2×125 60 2×250 2×250 2×120 2×120 120 8
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, HIV cable (600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wire) etc. with a
continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 50°C or less
and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable) 9
etc. with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C or more. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air
temperatures of 50°C or less and housed in an enclosure.
*2 For all the 200 V class capacities and FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, THHW cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C.
It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, THHN cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. It is assumed that the cables
10
will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40°C or less and housed in an enclosure.
(For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction Manual (Startup) or Instruction Manual
(Hardware).)
*3 For the FR-A820-00770(15K) or lower and the FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, PVC cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 70°C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, XLPE cable with a continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 90°C. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40°C or less and housed in an enclosure.
(Selection example mainly for use in Europe.)
*4 Screws for terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, PX, P/+, N/-, and P1, and the screw for earthing (grounding).
The size of screws for terminals PR and PX on FR-A820-00340(5.5K) and FR-A820-00490(7.5K) is indicated in parentheses.
The size of the earthing (grounding) screw on FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher is indicated in parentheses.
The size of the screw for terminal P/+ for option connection on FR-A840-03250(110K) and FR-A840-03610(132K) is indicated in parentheses.

 For the SLD rating

• 200 V class (220 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A820-[] size*4 (N·m) R/L1, S/ U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
L2, T/L3 W P1 W W
T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00046(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00077(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00105(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 5.5 6 8 16 10 16
00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16
00630(11K) M5 2.5 22-5 22-5 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
59
 Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A820-[] size*4 (N·m) R/L1, S/ U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
L2, T/L3 W P1 W W
T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00770(15K) M6 4.4 38-6 22-6 38 22 38 14 2 4 50 25 25
00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 50 50 25
01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 80-8 80-8 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
M10
01870(37K) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
(M8)
M10
02330(45K) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
(M8)
• 200 V class (220 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, S/ R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A820-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, U, V, U, V,
L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W W W
L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00046(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00077(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00105(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 14 5.5 8 8 10 10 10
00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16
00630(11K) M5 2.5 22-5 22-5 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
00770(15K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 38 14 4 4 25 25 25
00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 50 50 25
01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 80-8 80-8 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
03160(55K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 125 125 125 38 250 250 120 120 —
03800(75K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 —
04750(90K) M12 (M8) 46 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×100 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 —
• 400 V class (440 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, S/ R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A840-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W P1 W W
L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00023(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00038(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00052(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00083(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00126(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 4
00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10
00310(11K) M5 2.5 8-5 5.5-5 8 5.5 8 5.5 8 10 10 6 10
00380(15K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 8 6 8 16 10 16
00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
00620(22K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
00770(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
00930(37K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25
01160(45K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25

60 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
 • 400 V class (440 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Crimp terminal
Cable gauge 1
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A840-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
S/L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W P1 W W

00023(0.4K) M4 1.5
L3
2-4 2-4
T/L3
2 2 2 2
cable T/L3
14 14
T/L3
2.5 2.5 2.5
cable
2
00038(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00052(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00083(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 3
00126(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 14 14 2.5 2.5 4
00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10
00310(11K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 8 5.5 10 10 6 6 10
4
00380(15K) M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 14 8 8 8 10 10 16
00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
00620(22K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 5
00770(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
00930(37K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 50 50 25
01160(45K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
01800(55K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 6
02160(75K) M10 26.5 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
02600(90K) M10 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
03250(110K) M10 (M12) 26.5 150-10 150-10 125 125 150 38 250 250 120 120 70 7
03610(132K) M10 (M12) 26.5 150-10 150-10 150 150 150 38 300 300 150 150 95
04320(160K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×100 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
04810(185K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×125 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
05470(220K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2×125 2×125 2×125 60 2×250 2×250 2×120 2×120 120 8
06100(250K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2×150 2×150 2×150 60 2×300 2×300 2×150 2×150 150
06830(280K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2×200 2×200 2×200 100 2×350 2×350 2×185 2×185 2×95
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, HIV cable (600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wire) etc. with a 9
continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 50°C or less
and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable)
etc. with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C or more. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air
temperatures of 50°C or less and housed in an enclosure.
10
*2 For all the 200 V class capacities and FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, THHW cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C.
It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, THHN cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. It is assumed that the cables
will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40°C or less and housed in an enclosure.
(For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction Manual (Startup) or Instruction Manual
(Hardware).)
*3 For the FR-A820-00770(15K) or lower and the FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, PVC cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 70°C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, XLPE cable with a continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 90°C. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40°C or less and housed in an enclosure.
(Selection example mainly for use in Europe.)
*4 Screws for terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, PX, P/+, N/-, and P1, and the screw for earthing (grounding).
The size of screws for terminals PR and PX on FR-A820-00340(5.5K) and FR-A820-00490(7.5K) is indicated in parentheses.
The size of the earthing (grounding) screw on FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher is indicated in parentheses.
The size of the screw for terminal P/+ for option connection on FR-A840-03250(110K) and FR-A840-03610(132K) is indicated in parentheses.

 For the LD rating

• 200 V class (220 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, S/ R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A820-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W P1 W W
L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00046(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00077(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00105(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
61
 Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, S/ R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A820-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W P1 W W
L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 8-5 5.5-5 14 5.5 14 5.5 6 10 16 6 16
00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16
00630(11K) M5 2.5 22-5 22-5 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
00770(15K) M6 4.4 38-6 22-6 38 22 38 14 2 4 35 25 25
00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 80-8 60-8 80 60 80 22 3/0 1/0 70 70 35
01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
• 200 V class (220 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, S/ R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A820-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, U, V, U, V,
L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W W W
L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00046(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00077(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00105(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 14 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16
00630(11K) M5 2.5 22-5 22-5 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
00770(15K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 38 14 4 4 25 25 16
00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 80 22 1/0 1/0 70 70 35
01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
03160(55K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 125 125 125 38 250 250 120 120 —
03800(75K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 2×4/0 2×4/0 150 150 —
04750(90K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 150 150 2×100 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 —
• 400 V class (440 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, S/ R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A840-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W P1 W W
L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00023(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00038(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00052(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00083(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00126(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 4
00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10
00310(11K) M5 2.5 8-5 5.5-5 8 5.5 8 5.5 8 10 10 6 10
00380(15K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 8 6 8 16 10 16
00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
00620(22K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
00770(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
00930(37K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25
01160(45K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25

62 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
 • 400 V class (440 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Crimp terminal
Cable gauge 1
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, S/ R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A840-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W P1 W W

00023(0.4K) M4 1.5
L3
2-4 2-4 2
T/L3
2 2 2
cable T/L3
14 14
T/L3
2.5 2.5 2.5
cable
2
00038(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00052(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00083(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 3
00126(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
00310(11K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 8 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
4
00380(15K) M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 14 8 8 8 10 10 10
00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
00620(22K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16 5
00770(30K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
00930(37K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 50 50 25
01160(45K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
01800(55K) M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25 6
02160(75K) M10 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
02600(90K) M10 26.5 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
03250(110K) M10 (M12) 26.5 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50 7
03610(132K) M10 (M12) 26.5 150-10 150-10 125 125 150 38 250 250 120 120 70
04320(160K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 300 300 150 150 95
04810(185K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×100 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
05470(220K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×125 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95 8
06100(250K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2×125 2×125 2×125 60 2×250 2×250 2×120 2×120 120
06830(280K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 2×150 2×150 2×150 60 2×300 2×300 2×150 2×150 150
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, HIV cable (600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wire) etc. with a 9
continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 50°C or less
and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable)
etc. with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C or more. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air
temperatures of 50°C or less and housed in an enclosure.
10
*2 For all the 200 V class capacities and FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, THHW cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C.
It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, THHN cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. It is assumed that the cables
will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40°C or less and housed in an enclosure.
(For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction Manual (Startup) or Instruction Manual
(Hardware).)
*3 For the FR-A820-00770(15K) or lower and the FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, PVC cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 70°C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, XLPE cable with a continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 90°C. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40°C or less and housed in an enclosure.
(Selection example mainly for use in Europe.)
*4 Screws for terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, PX, P/+, N/-, and P1, and the screw for earthing (grounding).
The size of screws for terminals PR and PX on FR-A820-00340(5.5K) and FR-A820-00490(7.5K) is indicated in parentheses.
The size of the earthing (grounding) screw on FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher is indicated in parentheses.
The size of the screw for terminal P/+ for option connection on FR-A840-03250(110K) and FR-A840-03610(132K) is indicated in parentheses.

 For the HD rating

• 200 V class (220 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, S/ R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A820-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W P1 W W
L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00046(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00077(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00105(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
63
 Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, S/ R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A820-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W P1 W W
L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
00630(11K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 5.5 6 8 16 10 16
00770(15K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16
00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 22-8 38 22 38 14 2 4 35 25 25
01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 80-10 60-10 80 60 80 22 3/0 1/0 70 70 35
03160(55K) M12 (M8) 46 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
• 200 V class (220 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, S/ R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A820-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W P1 W W
L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00046(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00077(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00105(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00167(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00250(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00340(5.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00490(7.5K) M5 (M4) 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
00630(11K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 5.5 8 8 10 10 10
00770(15K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16
00930(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
01250(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 38 14 4 4 25 25 16
01540(30K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
01870(37K) M10 (M8) 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
02330(45K) M10 (M8) 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 22 1/0 1/0 70 70 35
03160(55K) M12 (M8) 46 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
03800(75K) M12 (M8) 46 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
04750(90K) M12 (M8) 46 150-12 150-12 125 125 125 38 250 250 120 120 —
• 400 V class (440 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)
Cable gauge
Crimp terminal
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, S/ R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A840-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W P1 W W
L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
00023(0.4K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00038(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00052(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00083(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00126(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00310(11K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
00380(15K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 8-6 5.5-6 8 5.5 8 5.5 8 10 10 6 10
00620(22K) M6 4.4 14-6 8-6 14 8 14 8 6 8 16 10 16
00770(30K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
00930(37K) M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
01160(45K) M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
01800(55K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25

64 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
 • 400 V class (440 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Crimp terminal
Cable gauge 1
Applicable Terminal Tightening HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, S/ R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-A840-[] size*4 (N·m) U, V, P/+, U, V, U, V,
L2, T/ U, V, W S/L2, (grounding) S/L2, S/L2, (grounding)
W P1 W W

00023(0.4K) M4 1.5
L3
2-4 2-4 2
T/L3
2 2 2
cable T/L3
14 14
T/L3
2.5 2.5 2.5
cable
2
00038(0.75K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00052(1.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00083(2.2K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5 3
00126(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00170(5.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00250(7.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
00310(11K) M5 2.5 5.5-6 5.5-6 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
4
00380(15K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
00470(18.5K) M6 4.4 5.5-6 5.5-6 5.5 5.5 8 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
00620(22K) M6 4.4 8-6 8-6 8 8 14 8 8 8 10 10 10 5
00770(30K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
00930(37K) M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
01160(45K) M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
01800(55K) M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 50 50 25 6
02160(75K) M10 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
02600(90K) M10 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
03250(110K) M10 (M12) 26.5 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 22 3/0 3/0 50 50 25 7
03610(132K) M10 (M12) 26.5 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 22 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
04320(160K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
04810(185K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 125 125 150 38 250 250 120 120 70
05470(220K) M12 (M10) 46 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 300 300 150 150 95 8
06100(250K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×100 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
06830(280K) M12 (M10) 46 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×125 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, HIV cable (600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wire) etc. with a 9
continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 50°C or less
and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable)
etc. with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C or more. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air
temperatures of 50°C or less and housed in an enclosure.
10
*2 For all the 200 V class capacities and FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, THHW cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C.
It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, THHN cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. It is assumed that the cables
will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40°C or less and housed in an enclosure.
(For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction Manual (Startup) or Instruction Manual
(Hardware).)
*3 For the FR-A820-00770(15K) or lower and the FR-A840-01160(45K) or lower, PVC cable with a continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 70°C. It assumes that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or shorter.
For the FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or higher, XLPE cable with a continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 90°C. It is assumed that the cables will be used in a surrounding air temperatures of 40°C or less and housed in an enclosure.
(Selection example mainly for use in Europe.)
*4 Screws for terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, PX, P/+, N/-, and P1, and the screw for earthing (grounding).
The size of screws for terminals PR and PX on FR-A820-00340(5.5K) and FR-A820-00490(7.5K) is indicated in parentheses.
The size of the earthing (grounding) screw on FR-A820-00930(18.5K) or higher and FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher is indicated in parentheses.
The size of the screw for terminal P/+ for option connection on FR-A840-03250(110K) and FR-A840-03610(132K) is indicated in parentheses.

The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:

× wire resistance [mΩ/m] × wiring distance [m] × current [A]

Line voltage drop [V] =
1000

Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when the voltage drop (torque reduction) in the low speed range
needs to be reduced.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
65
 NOTE
• Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque.
A screw that has been tightened too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
A screw that has been tightened too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.
• Use crimp terminals with insulation sleeves to wire the power supply and motor.

 Total wiring length

 With induction motor
Connect one or more general-purpose motors within the total wiring length shown in the following table. (The wiring length
should be 100 m or shorter under Vector control.)
Pr.72 setting FR-A820-00046(0.4K) FR-A820-00077(0.75K) FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or higher
(carrier frequency) FR-A840-00023(0.4K) FR-A840-00038(0.75K) FR-A840-00052(1.5K) or higher
2 (2 kHz) or lower 300 m 500 m 500 m
3 (3 kHz) or higher 200 m 300 m 500 m

Total wiring length (FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or higher, FR-A840-00052(1.5K) or higher)

300 m

500 m or less 300 m

300 m + 300 m = 600 m

When driving a 400 V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor
terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor. In this case, take one of the following measure.
• Use a "400 V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor" and set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection according to the
wiring length.
Wiring length 50 m or Wiring length longer
Wiring length 50 to 100 m
shorter than 100 m
15 (14.5 kHz) or lower 9 (9 kHz) or lower 4 (4 kHz) or lower

• For the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, connect a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) at the output
side of the inverter. For the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, connect a sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) at the output side of
the inverter.

 With PM motor
Use the wiring length of 100 m or shorter when connecting a PM motor.
Use one PM motor for one inverter. Multiple PM motors cannot be connected to an inverter.
When the wiring length exceeds 50 m for a 400 V class motor driven by an inverter under PM sensorless vector control, set "9"
(6 kHz) or less in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.

NOTE
• Especially for long-distance wiring, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by stray capacitance of the
wiring, leading to an activation of the overcurrent protection, malfunction of the fast-response current limit operation, or even
to an inverter failure. It may also cause a malfunction or fault of the equipment connected ON the inverter output side. If the
fast-response current limit function malfunctions, disable the function. (Refer to Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection
on page 431.)
• A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) can be used under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector
control.
A sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) can be used under V/F control. Do not use the filters under different control methods.
• For details on Pr.72 PWM frequency selection, refer to page 356.
• Refer to page 130 to drive a 400 V class motor by an inverter.
• The carrier frequency is limited during PM sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.)

66 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
2.5.4 Earthing (grounding) precautions
Always earth (ground) the motor and inverter. 1
 Purpose of earthing (grounding)
Generally, an electrical apparatus has an earth (ground) terminal, which must be connected to the ground before use. 2
An electrical circuit is usually insulated by an insulating material and encased. However, it is impossible to manufacture an
insulating material that can shut off a leakage current completely, and actually, a slight current flows into the case. The purpose
of earthing (grounding) the case of an electrical apparatus is to prevent operators from getting an electric shock from this 3
leakage current when touching it.
To avoid the influence of external noises, the earthing (grounding) is important to EMI-sensitive equipment that handle low-
level signals or operate very fast such as audio equipment, sensors, computers. 4
 Earthing (grounding) system to be established
As described previously, the purpose of earthing (grounding) is roughly classified into the electrical shock prevention and the
prevention of malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic noise. These two purposes should be clearly distinguished,
5
and the appropriate earth (ground) system must be established to prevent the leakage current having the inverter's high
frequency components from reversing through another earth (ground) point for malfunction prevention by following these
instructions:
6
• Make the separate earth (ground) connection (I) for high frequency products such as the inverter from any other devices
(EMI-sensitive devices described above) wherever possible.
Establishing adequate common (single-point) earth (ground) system (II) shown in the following figure is allowed only in
7
cases where the separate earth (ground) system (I) is not feasible. Do not make inadequate common (single-point) earth
(ground) connection (III).
As leakage currents containing many high frequency components flows into the earthing (grounding) cables of the inverter 8
and peripheral devices (including a motor), the inverter must also be earthed (grounded) separately from EMI-sensitive
devices described above.
In a high building, it may be effective to use its iron structure frames as earthing (grounding) electrode for EMI prevention 9
in order to separate from the earth (ground) system for electric shock prevention.
- Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes
(NEC section 250, IEC 61140 class 1 and other applicable standards). A neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply 10
for 400 V class inverter in compliance with EN standard must be used.
- Use the thickest possible earthing (grounding) cable. The earthing (grounding) cable should be equal to the size
indicated in the table on page 57.
- The earthing (grounding) point should be as close as possible to the inverter, and the earth (ground) wire length should
be as short as possible.
- Run the earthing (grounding) cable as far away as possible from the I/O wiring of the EMI-sensitive devices and run
them in parallel in the minimum distance.

Other Other Other

Inverter equipment
Inverter Inverter
equipment equipment

(I) Separate earthing (grounding): Good (II) Common (single-point) earthing (grounding): OK (III) Inadequate common (single-point) earthing (grounding): Bad

NOTE
• To be compliant with the EU Directive (Low Voltage Directive), refer to the Instruction Manual (Startup).

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.5 Main circuit terminals
67
 2.6 Control circuit

2.6.1 Details on the control circuit terminals

 Input signal
Refer
Terminal
Type Common Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification to
symbol
page
Turn ON the STF signal to start When the STF
Forward rotation
STF*1 start
forward rotation and turn it OFF to and STR signals
stop. are turned ON
simultaneously, 722
Turn ON the STR signal to start
Reverse rotation the stop Input resistance: 4.7
STR*1 start
reverse rotation and turn it OFF to command is kΩ,
stop.
given. voltage when contacts
STP Start self-holding Turn ON the STP (STOP) signal to self-hold the start are open: 21 to 27
VDC, 722
(STOP)*1 selection signal.
current when contacts
RH
Multi-speed Multi-speed can be selected according to the are short-circuited: 4 to
RM 6 mADC 411
selection combination of RH, RM and RL signals.
RL*1
Turn ON the JOG signal to enable JOG operation
Jog mode selection (initial setting) and turn ON the start (STF or STR) 410
signal to start JOG operation.
JOG*1 Terminal JOG is also used as a pulse train input Input resistance: 2 kΩ,
SD terminal. To use as a pulse train input terminal, change current when contacts
Pulse train input 406
(sink the Pr.291 setting. are short-circuited: 8 to
(maximum input pulse: 100k pulses/s) 13 mADC
Contact input

(negative
common)) Turn ON the RT signal to enable the second function.
PC Second function When the second function such as "Second torque
RT*1 selection boost" and "Second V/F (base frequency)" is set,
525
(source
(positive turning ON the RT signal enables the selected function.
common)) Turn ON the MRS signal (20 ms or more) to stop the
inverter output. Use this signal to shut off the inverter
MRS*1 Output stop
output when stopping the motor with an
524
electromagnetic brake. Input resistance: 4.7
Use this signal to reset a fault output provided when a kΩ,
protective function is activated. Turn ON the RES voltage when contacts
signal for 0.1 second or longer, then turn it OFF. are open: 21 to 27
RES*1 Reset In the initial setting, reset is always enabled. By setting VDC, 336
Pr.75, reset can be enabled only at an inverter fault current when contacts
occurrence. The inverter recovers about 1 second after are short-circuited: 4 to
the reset is released. 6 mADC
The terminal 4 function is available only when the AU
Terminal 4 input
AU*1 selection
signal is ON. 496
Turning the AU signal ON makes terminal 2 invalid.
Selection of When the CS signal is left ON, the inverter restarts
*1 automatic restart automatically at power restoration. Note that restart 628,
CS after instantaneous setting is necessary for this operation. In the initial 635
power failure setting, a restart is disabled.

68 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
 Refer
Terminal
Type Common Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification to
symbol
page 1
10 VDC ±0.4 V,
10E 5 When connecting the frequency setting potentiometer permissible load 496
Frequency setting at an initial status, connect it to terminal 10. current: 10 mA
power supply Change the input specifications of terminal 2 using 5 VDC ±0.5 V, 2
10 5 Pr.73 when connecting it to terminal 10E. permissible load 496
current: 10 mA
Inputting 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA) provides
the maximum output frequency at 5 V (10 V, 20 mA) For voltage input, 3
and makes input and output proportional. input resistance: 10 to
Frequency setting Use Pr.73 to switch among input 0 to 5 VDC (initial 11 kΩ, maximum
2 5 496
(voltage) setting), 0 to 10 VDC, and 0 to 20 mA. Set the voltage/ permissible voltage: 20
4
Frequency setting

current input switch 1 for terminal 2 in the ON position VDC.

*2 For current input,
to select current input (0 to 20 mA).
input resistance: 245
Inputting 4 to 20 mADC (or 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) provides ±5 Ω, maximum
the maximum output frequency at 20 mA and makes permissible current: 30
input and output proportional. This input signal is valid mA. 5
only when the AU signal is ON (terminal 2 input is
Frequency setting invalid). Use Pr.267 to switch among input 4 to 20 mA Voltage/current
4 5 496
(current) (initial setting), 0 to 5 VDC, and 0 to 10 VDC. Set the
input switch

6
switch2
voltage/current input switch 2 for terminal 4 in the OFF switch1
position to select voltage input (0 to 5 V / 0 to 10 2 4
V).*2 Use Pr.858 to switch terminal functions.
Input 0 to ±5 VDC or 0 to ±10 VDC to add this signal to
Frequency setting
the frequency setting signal input via terminal 2 or 4.
Input resistance: 10 to
11 kΩ, maximum
7
1 5 Use Pr.73 to switch between input 0 to ±5 VDC and 0 496
auxiliary permissible voltage:
to ±10 VDC (initial setting). Use Pr.868 to switch
±20 VDC.
terminal functions.
Applicable PTC 8
thermistor
Thermistor

For receiving PTC thermistor outputs.

10 PTC thermistor specification, overheat
— When PTC thermistor is valid (Pr.561 ≠ "9999"), 415
2 input detection resistance:
terminal 2 is not available for frequency setting.
0.5 to 30 kΩ (Set by 9
Pr.561)
Power supply input

For connecting a 24 V external power supply.

24 V external power If a 24 V external power supply is connected, power is
Input voltage: 23 to 10
+24 SD 25.5 VDC, input 80
supply input supplied to the control circuit while the main power
current: 1.4 A or less
circuit is OFF.

*1 The terminal function can be selected by Pr.178 to Pr.196 (Input terminal function selection). (Refer to page 521.)
*2 Set Pr.73, Pr.267, and the voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
Applying a voltage with the switch ON (current input is selected) or applying a current with the switch OFF (voltage input is selected) could cause
component damage of the inverter or analog circuits of output devices. (For the details, refer to page 496.)
*3 Sink logic is initially set for the FM-type inverter.
*4 Source logic is initially set for the CA-type inverter.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
69
  Output signal
Refer
Terminal
Type Common Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification to
symbol
page
1 changeover contact output that indicates that an
A1, inverter's protective function has been activated and
B1, Relay output 1 (fault the outputs are stopped.
— 473
output) Fault: discontinuity across B and C (continuity across A Contact capacity: 230
C1*1
Relay

and C), Normal: continuity across B and C VAC 0.3 A

(discontinuity across A and C) (power factor = 0.4), 30
VDC 0.3 A
A2,
B2, — Relay output 2 1 changeover contact output 473
C2*1
The output is in LOW state when the inverter output
frequency is equal to or higher than the starting
RUN*1 SE Inverter running
frequency (initial value: 0.5 Hz). The output is in HIGH
473
state during stop or DC injection brake operation.
The output is in LOW state when the
output frequency is within the set
frequency range ±10% (initial value). Permissible load: 24
SU*1 SE Up to frequency
The output is in HIGH state during
484
VDC (27 VDC at
acceleration/deceleration and at a maximum) 0.1 A
stop. (The voltage drop is
Open collector

The output is in LOW state when 2.8 V at maximum

stall prevention is activated by the while the signal is ON.)
OL*1 SE Overload warning stall prevention function. The output The open collector 431
is in HIGH state when stall Fault code (4 transistor is ON
bits) output.
prevention is canceled. (conductive) in LOW
(Refer to page
The output is in LOW state when an state.
492.) The transistor is OFF
Instantaneous instantaneous power failure occurs 628,
IPF*1 SE
power failure or when the undervoltage protection (not conductive) in 635
is activated. HIGH state.
The output is in LOW state when the
inverter output frequency is equal to
Frequency or higher than the preset detection
FU*1 SE
detection frequency, and is in HIGH state
484
when it is less than the preset
detection frequency.
Output item: Permissible load
output current: 2 mA, pulse for
For meter 457
frequency (initial full scale: 1440 pulses/
setting) s
This terminal
Pulse

Among several monitor items such

FM*2 SD can be used for
as output frequency, select one to Maximum output
open collector
NPN open collector output it via these terminals. The pulse: 50k pulses/s,
outputs 406
output signal is not output during an permissible load
depending on
inverter reset. current: 80 mA
the Pr.291
The size of output signal is setting.
proportional to the magnitude of the
Output signal: 0 ±10
corresponding monitor item.
VDC,
Use Pr.55, Pr.56, and Pr.866 to set
full scales for the monitoring output permissible load
Analog voltage
AM 5 current: 1 mA 457
output frequency, output current, and Output item:
(load impedance 10 kΩ
Analog

torque. output
(Refer to page 457.) or more), resolution: 13
frequency (initial bits
setting)
Load impedance: 200
Analog current to 450 Ω,
CA*3 5
output output signal: 0 to 20
457
mADC
*1 The terminal function can be selected by Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 473.)
*2 Terminal FM is provided in the FM-type inverter.
*3 Terminal CA is provided in the CA-type inverter.

70 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
 Safety stop signal
Terminal
Refer 1
Terminal name Common Terminal function description Rated specification to
symbol
page
Use terminals S1 and S2 to receive the safety stop signal
Safety stop input input from the safety relay module. Terminals S1 and S2 can 2
S1 be used at a time (dual channel).
(channel 1)
The Inverter judges the condition of the internal safety circuit Input resistance: 4.7
from the status (shorted/opened) between terminals S1 and kΩ,
SIC SIC, or between S2 and SIC. When the status is opened, the input current: 4 to 6 3
inverter output is shut off. mADC (with 24 VDC
Safety stop input In the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted with input)
S2
(channel 2) terminal PC by shorting wires. Terminal SIC is shorted with
terminal SD. Remove the shorting wires and connect the
safety relay module when using the safety stop function. 82
4
The output status varies depending on the input status of the
safety stop signals.
The output is in HIGH state during occurrence of the internal
safety circuit failure. The output is in LOW state otherwise.
Permissible load: 24
VDC (27 VDC at
5
Safety monitor output (The open collector transistor is ON (conductive) in LOW maximum), 0.1 A
So (SO) SOC
(open collector output) state. The transistor is OFF (not conductive) in HIGH state.) (The voltage drop is
Refer to the Safety Stop Function Instruction Manual if the
output becomes in HIGH state even though both terminals
3.4 V at maximum
while the signal is ON.) 6
S1 and S2 are open. (Contact your sales representative for
this manual.)

 Common terminal 7
Refer
Terminal
Common Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification to
symbol
page 8
Contact input Common terminal for the contact input terminal (sink logic),
common (sink)*1 terminal FM.
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of
External transistor a transistor output (open collector output) device, such as a 9
SD — common (source)*2 programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid — —
malfunction by undesirable current.
Common terminal for the 24 VDC power supply (terminal PC,
24 VDC power supply
common
terminal +24). 10
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of
External transistor a transistor output (open collector output) device, such as a
common (sink)*1 programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid malfunction Power supply voltage
— by undesirable current. range: 19.2 to 28.8
PC 73
Contact input VDC, permissible
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic). load current: 100 mA
common (source)*2
SD 24 VDC power supply Can be used as a 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply.
Common terminal for the frequency setting signal (via terminal
Frequency setting
5 — 2, 1, or 4) and for the analog output terminals AM and CA. Do — 496
common
not earth (ground).
Open collector output
SE — Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU — —
common
Safety stop input
SIC — Common terminal for terminals S1 and S2. — 82
terminal common
Safety monitor output
SOC — Common terminal for terminal So (SO). — 82
terminal common
*1 Sink logic is initially set for the FM-type inverter.
*2 Source logic is initially set for the CA-type inverter.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
71
  Communication
Terminal Refer
Type Terminal name Terminal function description
symbol to page
RS-485 communication can be made through the PU connector (For connection
on a 1:1 basis only)
Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)
— PU connector 659
Transmission format: Multidrop link
Communication speed: 4800 to 115200 bps
Wiring length: 500 m
RS-485

TXD+ Inverter transmission

RS-485 terminals

TXD- terminal RS-485 communication can be made through the RS-485 terminals.
Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)
RXD+ Inverter reception
Transmission format: Multidrop link 661
RXD- terminal Communication speed: 300 to 115200 bps
GND Overall length: 500 m
Earthing (grounding)
(SG)
A connector (receptacle).
Plug a USB memory device into this connector
USB A connector 85
to copy parameter settings or use the trace
Interface: conforms to USB
function.
1.1 (USB 2.0 full-speed
Mini B connector (receptacle).
USB

— compatible)
By connecting the inverter to a personal Transmission speed: 12
computer via this connector, FR Configurator2
USB B connector Mbps 85
installed on the computer can be used for
setting the inverter, or monitoring or testing the
inverter operation.

 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)

Terminal Refer
Type Terminal function description
name to page
PORT 1
CC-Link IE

Communication can be made via the CC-Link IE Field Network. 110

PORT 2

2.6.2 Control logic (sink/source) change

Switch the control logic of input signals as necessary.
To change the control logic, change the jumper connector position on the control circuit board.
Connect the jumper connector to the connector pin of the desired control logic.
The control logic of input signals is initially set to the sink logic (SINK) for the type FM inverter.
The control logic of input signals is initially set to the source logic (SOURCE) for the type CA inverter.
(The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position.)

Jumper connector
SOURCE

SINK

For sink logic

72 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
 NOTE
• Make sure that the jumper connector is installed correctly. 1
• Never change the control logic while power is ON.
• To change the control logic for the FR-A800-GF, remove the control circuit terminal block and change the jumper connector
position. (Refer to page 819 for details on how to remove the terminal block.) After changing the jumper connector position,
reinstall the control circuit terminal block securely in place.
2

 Sink logic and source logic 3

• In the sink logic, a signal turns ON when a current exits from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
• In the source logic, a signal turns ON when a current enters into the corresponding signal input terminal. 4
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
Current flow concerning the input/output signal Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when sink logic is selected when source logic is selected
5
Sink logic Source logic
PC

Current
STF
Sink
connector
Current 6
R STF
R Source
connector

STR
R STR
7
R

SD
8
Inverter DC input (sink type) Inverter DC input (source type)
<Example: QX40> <Example: QX80> 9
RUN TB1 RUN TB1
R R
R
10
R

SE - + TB17 SE + - TB18

24 VDC 24 VDC

Current flow Current flow

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
73
 • When using an external power supply for transistor output
Sink logic Source logic
Use terminal PC as a common terminal, and perform wiring as Use terminal SD as a common terminal, and perform wiring as
follows. (Do not connect terminal SD on the inverter with the follows. (Do not connect terminal PC on the inverter with the
terminal of 0 V for the external power supply. When using terminal of +24 V for the external power supply. When using
terminals PC-SD as a 24 VDC power supply, do not install an terminals PC-SD as a 24 VDC power supply, do not install an
external power supply in parallel with the inverter. Doing so external power supply in parallel with the inverter. Doing so
may cause a malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable may cause a malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable
currents.) currents.)

QY40P type transistor Inverter QY80 type transistor Inverter

output unit output unit
TB1 STF PC
24 VDC
(SD)
TB1 STF 24 VDC
TB2 STR
(SD)
TB2 STR
Constant TB17 Constant

24 VDC
voltage PC voltage
circuit circuit
Fuse TB17
TB18
TB18 SD
24 VDC SD

Current flow Current flow

2.6.3 Wiring of control circuit

 Control circuit terminal layout
• Recommended cable gauge: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2
∗1
2 5 4 1 F/C +24 SD So SOC SD SIC S1 S2 PC A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2

AM 5 10E 10 SE SE RUN SU IPF OL FU PC RL RM RH RT AU STP MRS RES SD SD STF STR JOG CS

*1 This terminal operates as terminal FM for the type FM inverter. For the type CA inverter, the terminal operates as terminal CA.

 Wiring method
 Power supply connection
Use crimp terminals and stripped wire for the control circuit wiring. For single wire, the stripped wire can be used without crimp
terminal.
Connect the end of wires (crimp terminal or stranded wire) to the terminal block.

1. Strip the signal wires as follows. If too much of the wire is stripped, a short circuit may occur with neighboring wires.
If not enough of the wire is stripped, wires may become loose and fall out.
Twist the stripped end of wires to prevent them from fraying. Do not solder them.
Cable sheath stripping length

74 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
 2. Crimp the terminals on the wire.
Insert the wire into a crimp terminal, making sure that 0 to 0.5 mm of the wire protrudes from the end of the sleeve.
Check the condition of the crimp terminals after crimping. Do not use the crimp terminals of which the crimping is
1
inappropriate, or the face is damaged.
Unstranded
wires 2
ire
W
ve
ee
Sl

o0
.5m
m
Damaged Crumpled tip
Wires are not inserted
into the sleeve
3
0t

Crimp terminals commercially available (as of October 2020)

• Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
4
Wire gauge Ferrule part No. Crimping tool
(mm2) With insulation sleeve Without insulation sleeve For UL wire*1 model No.
0.3 AI 0,34-10TQ — —
5
0.5 AI 0,5-10WH — AI 0,5-10WH-GB
0.75 AI 0,75-10GY A 0,75-10 AI 0,75-10GY-GB
1 AI 1-10RD A 1-10 AI 1-10RD/1000GB
CRIMPFOX 6
6
1.25, 1.5 AI 1, 5-10BK A 1, 5-10 AI 1,5-10BK/1000GB*2
0.75 (two-wire product) AI-TWIN 2×0,75-10GY — —

*1 A ferrule terminal with an insulation sleeve compatible with the MTW wire which has a thick wire insulation. 7
*2 Applicable for terminals A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2.
• NICHIFU Co., Ltd.
Wire gauge
(mm2)
Blade terminal part
No.
Insulation cap part No.
Crimping tool model
No.
8
0.3 to 0.75 BT 0.75-11 VC 0.75 NH 69

3. Insert the wire into the terminal block. When using single wire or stranded wire without crimp terminal, 9
push an open/close button all the way down with a flathead
screwdriver, and insert the wire.
Open/close button 10

Flathead screwdriver

NOTE
• When using stranded wires without a blade terminal, twist enough to avoid short circuit with a nearby terminals or wires.
• Place the flathead screwdriver vertical to the open/close button. In case the blade tip slips, it may cause an inverter damage
or injury.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
75
  Wire removal
Pull the wire while pushing the open/close button all the way down firmly with a flathead screwdriver.

Open/close button

Flathead screwdriver

NOTE
• Pulling out the wire forcefully without pushing the open/close button all the way down may damage the terminal block.
• Use a small flathead screwdriver (tip thickness: 0.4 mm / tip width: 2.5 mm).
If a flathead screwdriver with a narrow tip is used, terminal block may be damaged.
Commercially available products (as of October 2020)

Product
Model Manufacturer
name
Screwdriver SZF 0- 0,4 × 2,5 Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

• Place the flathead screwdriver vertical to the open/close button. In case the blade tip slips, it may cause an inverter damage
or injury.

 Common terminals of the control circuit (SD, PC, 5, SE)

• Terminals SD (sink logic), PC (source logic), 5, and SE are common terminals (0 V) for I/O signals. (All common terminals
are isolated from each other.) Do not earth (ground) these terminals. Avoid connecting terminal SD (sink logic) with
terminal 5, terminal PC (source logic) with terminal 5, and terminal SE with terminal 5.
• In the sink logic, terminal SD is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, STP (STOP), RH, RM, RL,
JOG, RT, MRS, RES, AU, and CS) and the pulse train output terminal (FM*1). The open collector circuit is isolated from
the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
• In the source logic, terminal PC is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, STP (STOP), RH, RM,
RL, JOG, RT, MRS, RES, AU, CS). The open collector circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
• Terminal 5 is a common terminal for the frequency setting terminals (1, 2, and 4) and the analog output terminals (AM and
CA*2). It should be protected from external noise using a shielded or twisted cable.
• Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminals (RUN, SU, OL, IPF, and FU). The contact input
circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
*1 Terminal FM is provided in the FM-type inverter.
*2 Terminal CA is provided in the CA-type inverter.

 Signal inputs by contactless switches

The contact input terminals of the inverter (STF, STR, STP (STOP), RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, MRS, RES, AU, and CS) can be
controlled using a transistor instead of a contact switch as follows.

+24 V Inverter

PC
+24 V

STF, etc.

Inverter STF, etc.

SD R

External signal input using transistor External signal input using transistor
(sink logic) (source logic)

76 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
2.6.4 Wiring precautions
• It is recommended to use a cable of 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 for the connection to the control circuit terminals.
1
• The wiring length should be 30 m (200 m for terminal FM) at the maximum.
• Use two or more parallel micro-signal contacts or twin contacts to prevent contact faults when using contact inputs since
the control circuit input signals are micro-currents.
2

Micro signal contacts Twin contacts 4

• To suppress EMI, use shielded or twisted cables for the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and
power circuits (including the 200 V relay sequence circuit). For the cables connected to the control circuit terminals,
connect their shields to the common terminal of the connected control circuit terminal. When connecting an external power 5
supply to terminal PC, however, connect the shield of the power supply cable to the negative side of the external power
supply. Do not directly earth (ground) the shield to the enclosure, etc.
• Always apply a voltage to the fault output terminals (A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, and C2) via a relay coil, lamp, etc. 6
• When a relay coil is connected to the output terminals, use one with a surge absorbing function (reflux diode). When the
voltage application direction is incorrect, the inverter will be damaged. Pay attention to the diode direction or other
precautions to avoid incorrect wiring. 7
RUN
RA
Power 8
24 or 12 VDC
SE

9
Inverter

• For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, separate the wiring of the control circuit away
from the wiring of the main circuit. 10
Make cuts in rubber bush of the inverter side and lead the wires through.

<Wiring example>

Rubber bush
(viewed from inside)

Make cuts along the lines on

the inside with a cutter knife

2.6.5 When using separate power supplies for the

control circuit and the main circuit
 Cable size for the control circuit power supply (terminals R1/L11 and S1/
L21)
• Terminal screw size: M4

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
77
 • Cable gauge: 0.75 to 2 mm2
• Tightening torque: 1.5 N·m

 Connection method
Connection diagram If a fault occurs and the electromagnetic contactor (MC) installed at the inverter's
MC input line is opened, power supply to the control circuit is also stopped and the fault
R/L1 Inverter signals cannot be output anymore. Terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 of the control
S/L2 circuit are provided to keep outputting the fault signals in such a case. Follow the
T/L3 following steps to wire terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 on the inverter to the power
R1/L11 input lines of the MC. Do not connect the power cable to incorrect terminals. Doing
S1/L21 so may damage the inverter.
Remove the jumper

• FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower, FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or lower

(c)

S/L2
R/L1
(a) T/L3

(b)

R1/L11

(d)
S1/L21

Main circuit terminal block

(a) Remove the upper screws.

(b) Remove the lower screws.
(c) Remove the jumper.
(d) Connect the separate power cable for the control circuit to the lower terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).
• FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to FR-A820-00630(11K), FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to FR-A840-00380(15K)

(c)

R1/L11
(a) S1/L21

(b)

R/L1
(d)

Main circuit terminal block T/L3

S/L2

(a) Remove the upper screws.

(b) Remove the lower screws.
(c) Remove the jumper.
(d) Connect the separate power cable for the control circuit to the upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).

78 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
• FR-A820-00770(15K) or higher, FR-A840-00470(18.5K) or higher
R1/L11 S1/L21
Power supply
(c) 1
terminal block
for the control circuit
Power supply terminal block
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 for the control circuit
2
R1/L11
S1/L21

MC
3

Main power supply (a)

(b)
4
(d)

FR-A820-00770(15K)
to 01250(22K)
5
FR-A840-00470(18.5K), FR-A820-01540(30K) FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher
00620(22K) FR-A840-00770(30K) FR-A840-00930(37K) or higher

6
Power supply
terminal block for
the control circuit
7

(a)
(b)
Remove the upper screws.
Remove the lower screws.
9
(c) Pull the jumper toward you to remove.
(d) Connect the separate power cable for the control circuit to the upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).
10

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
79
 NOTE
• When using separate power supplies, always remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and across S/L2 and S1/
L21. The inverter may be damaged if the jumpers are not removed.
• When the control circuit power is supplied from other than the input line of the MC, the voltage of the separate power supply
must be the same as that of the main control circuit.
• The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1/L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the inverter
capacity.

Power supply
Inverter
capacity
FR-A820-00630(11K) or lower
60 VA
FR-A840-00380(15K) or lower
FR-A820-00770(15K) or higher
80 VA
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) or higher

• If the main circuit power is switched OFF (for 0.1 second or more) then ON again, the inverter is reset and a fault output will
not be held.
• When a power supply is provided for the control circuit separately from the main circuit and a capacitive device (such as an
EMC filter or a radio noise filter) is connected, refer to the following diagram. (For the wiring example to comply with ship
classification standards, refer to page 858.)

MC
R/L1
Capacitive
S/L2
device
T/L3

R1/L11
S1/L21

2.6.6 When supplying 24 V external power to the control

circuit
Connect the 24 V external power supply across terminals +24 and SD to turn the I/O terminal ON/OFF operation, keep the
operation panel ON, and carry out communication during communication operation even at power-OFF state of inverter's main
circuit power supply. When the main circuit power supply is turned ON, the power supply is switched from the 24 V external
power supply to the main circuit power supply.

 Specification of the applied 24 V external power supply

Item Rated specification
Input voltage 23 to 25.5 VDC
Input current 1.4 A or less

Commercially available products (as of October 2020)

Model Product overview Manufacturer
Specifications: Capacity 50 W, output voltage 24 VDC, output
current 2.2 A
S8FS-G05024C*1 Installation method: Direct installation, screw type terminal block
with cover
Input: Single-phase 100 to 240 VAC
Specifications: Capacity 60 W, output voltage 24 VDC, output
current 2.5 A OMRON Corporation
S8VK-S06024*1 Installation method: DIN rail, push-in (spring) type terminal block
Input: Single-phase 100 to 240 VAC
Specifications: Capacity 240 W, output voltage 24 VDC, output
current 10 A
S8VK-WA24024*1 Installation method: DIN rail, push-in (spring) type terminal block
Input: Three-phase 200 to 240 VAC

*1 For the latest information about OMRON power supply, contact OMRON corporation.

80 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
 Starting and stopping the 24 V external power supply operation
• Supplying 24 V external power while the main circuit power is OFF starts the 24 V external power supply operation. 1
Likewise, turning OFF the main circuit power while supplying 24 V external power starts the 24 V external power supply
operation.
• Turning ON the main circuit power stops the 24 V external power supply operation and enables the normal operation. 2
NOTE
• When the 24 V external power is supplied while the main circuit power supply is OFF, the inverter operation is disabled.
• In the initial setting, when the main circuit power supply is turned ON during the 24 V external power supply operation, a reset 3
is performed in the inverter, then the power supply changes to the main circuit power supply. (The reset can be disabled using
Pr.30. (Refer to page 724.))

4
 Confirming the 24 V external power supply input
• During the 24 V external power supply operation, "EV" blinks on the operation panel. The alarm lamp also blinks. Thus,
the 24 V external power supply operation can be confirmed even when the operation panel is removed. 5
Blinking

Blinking

6
POWER ALARM

• During 24 V external power supply operation, the 24 V external power supply operation (EV) signal is output. To use the 7
EV signal, set "68 (positive logic) or 168 (negative logic)" in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)
to assign function to an output terminal.

 Operation while the 24 V external power is supplied

8
• Fault history and parameters can be read and parameters can be written (when the parameter write from the operation
panel is enabled) using the operation panel keys.
9
• The safety stop function is invalid during the 24 V external power supply operation.
• During the 24 V external power supply operation, the monitor items and signals related to inputs to main circuit power
supply, such as the output current, converter output voltage, and IPF signal, are invalid.
10
• The alarms, which have occurred when the main circuit power supply is ON, continue to be output after the power supply
is changed to the 24 V external power supply. Perform the inverter reset or turn OFF then ON the power to reset the faults.
• If the power supply changes from the main circuit power supply to the 24 V external power supply while measuring the
main circuit capacitor's life, the measurement completes after the power supply changes back to the main circuit power
supply (Pr.259 = "3").
• The output data is retained when "1 or 11" is set in Pr.495 Remote output selection.

NOTE
• Inrush current equal to or higher than the 24 V external power supply specification may flow at power-ON. Confirm that the
power supply and other devices are not affected by the inrush current and the voltage drop caused by it. Depending on the
power supply, the overcurrent protection may be activated to disable the power supply. Select the power supply and capacity
carefully.
• When the wiring length between the external power supply and the inverter is long, the voltage often drops. Select the
appropriate wiring size and length to keep the voltage in the rated input voltage range.
• In a serial connection of several inverters, the current increases when it flows through the inverter wiring near the power supply.
The increase of the current causes voltage to drop further. When connecting different inverters to different power supplies, use
the inverters after confirming that the input voltage of each inverter is within the rated input voltage range. Depending on the
power supply, the overcurrent protection may be activated to disable the power supply. Select the power supply and capacity
carefully.
• "E.SAF" or "E.P24" may appear when the start-up time of the 24 V power supply is too long (less than 1.5 V/s) in the 24 V
external power supply operation.
• "E.P24" may appear when the 24 V external power supply input voltage is low. Check the external power supply input.
• Do not touch the control circuit terminal block (circuit board) during the 24 V power supply operation (when conducted).
Otherwise you may get an electric shock or burn.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
81
 2.6.7 Safety stop function
 Function description
The terminals related to the safety stop function are as follows.
Terminal
Terminal function description
symbol
S1*1 Input terminal as the safety stop channel 1. Status of both the circuit between terminals S1 and SIC and
the circuit between terminals S2 and SIC
S2*1 Input terminal as the safety stop channel 2. Open: Safety stop is activated.
Shorted: Safety stop is not activated
SIC*1 Common terminal for S1 and S2.
Output terminal used for fault detection and fault indication
display. OFF: Internal safety circuit fault*2
So (SO) The terminal is ON (conducted) while no internal safety circuit ON: No internal safety circuit failure*2
failure*2 exists.
SOC Open collector output (terminal So (SO)) common
*1 In the initial status, terminals S1 and PC, S2 and PC, and SIC and SD are respectively shorted with shorting wires. To enable the safety stop
function, remove all the shorting wires, and then connect a safety relay module as shown in the connection diagram.
*2 When any fault listed on the next page occurs in the internal safety circuit, the corresponding indication is shown on the operation panel.

NOTE
• Terminal So (SO) can be used to display a fault indication and to prevent restarting of the inverter. The signal output from
terminal So (SO) cannot be used to input a safety stop signal to other devices.

 Connection diagram
To prevent restart at failure occurrence, connect terminals So (SO) and SOC to the reset button, which are the feedback input
terminals of the safety relay module.

Inverter R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

So (SO)
Logic
SOC

IGBTs
+24V
PC Gate Gate
CPU ASIC Driver Driver
RESET
24 VDC

S2 G G

Emergency S1
stop button SIC

SD
Safety relay module /
Safety programmable controller
U V W

82 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
 Safety stop function operation
Internal Input terminal*1*2
Output Output
Operation panel indication
1
Input
safety circuit terminal signal*8*9*10 Inverter operating status
power
status S1 S2 So (SO) SAFE E.SAF*6 SA*7
OFF —
Normal
—
ON
—
ON
OFF
ON*3
OFF
OFF
Output shutoff (Safe state)
Operation enabled
Not displayed
Not displayed
Not displayed
Not displayed
2
Normal ON OFF OFF*4 OFF*4 Output shutoff (Safe state) Displayed Displayed
Normal OFF ON OFF*4 OFF*4 Output shutoff (Safe state) Displayed Displayed
Normal OFF OFF ON*3 ON*3 Output shutoff (Safe state) Not displayed Displayed
3
ON
Fault ON ON OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state) Displayed Not displayed*5
Fault ON OFF OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state) Displayed Displayed
Fault OFF ON OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state) Displayed Displayed 4
Fault OFF OFF OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state) Displayed Displayed
*1 The terminal ON state shows that the terminal is conducted (the line is closed), and the OFF state shows that the terminal is not conducted (the

*2
line is open).
When not using the safety stop function, short across terminals S1 and PC, S2 and PC, and SIC and SD to use the inverter. (In the initial status,
5
terminals S1 and PC, S2 and PC, and SIC and SD are respectively shorted with shorting wires.)
*3 If any of the faults shown in the following table occurs, terminal So (SO) and the SAFE signal turn OFF.

Fault type Operation panel indication Fault type Operation panel indication
6
Option fault E.OPT Speed deviation excess detection E.OSD
Communication option fault E.OP1 to E.OP3 Signal loss detection E.ECT
Parameter storage device fault
E.PE Excessive position fault E.OD
7
(control circuit board)
Retry count excess E.RET Brake sequence fault E.MB1 to E.MB7
Parameter storage device fault
(main circuit board)
E.PE2
CPU fault
E.CPU 8
Operation panel power supply E.5 to E.7
short circuit/RS-485 terminals E.CTE
Encoder phase fault E.EP
power supply short circuit
24 VDC power fault E.P24 Magnetic pole position unknown E.MP 9
Safety circuit fault E.SAF
Internal circuit fault E.13
Overspeed occurrence E.OS
*4 When the internal safety circuit is operated normally (no faults occurs), terminal So (SO) and the SAFE signal remains ON until "E.SAF" is 10
displayed. Terminal So (SO) and the SAFE signal turns OFF when "E.SAF" is displayed.
*5 "SA" is displayed when terminals S1 and S2 are identified as OFF due to a fault occurred in the internal safety circuit.
*6 If another fault occurs when the fault E.SAF occurs, the other fault indication may be displayed.
*7 If another warning occurs when the warning SA occurs, the other warning indication may be displayed.
*8 The ON/OFF state of the output signal is the one for the positive logic. The ON and OFF are reversed for the negative logic.
*9 To assign the function of the SAFE signal to an output terminal, set either value shown in the following table in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection).

Pr.190 to Pr.196 settings

Output signal
Positive logic Negative logic
SAFE 80 180

*10 The use of SAFE signal has not been certified for compliance with safety standards.

For more details, refer to the Safety Stop Function Instruction Manual.
Find a PDF file of the manual in the CD-ROM enclosed with the product.
The manual can also be downloaded in PDF form from the Mitsubishi Electric FA Global Website.
www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/fa

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.6 Control circuit
83
 2.7 Communication connectors and terminals

2.7.1 PU connector
 Mounting the operation panel or the parameter unit on the enclosure
surface
• Having an operation panel or a parameter unit on the enclosure surface is convenient. With a connection cable, the
operation panel or the parameter unit can be mounted to the enclosure surface and connected to the inverter.
Use the cable option FR-CB2[ ] or the following connector and cable available on the market. (To install the operation
panel, the optional connector (FR-ADP) is also required.)
Securely insert one end of the cable into the PU connector and the other end into the connection connector on the
parameter unit or the FR-ADP attached on the operation panel until the stoppers are fixed.

Parameter unit connection cable

(FR-CB2[ ]) (option)

Parameter unit (FR-PU07)

(option) Operation panel (FR-DU08)

STF FWD PU

Operation panel connection

connector (FR-ADP)
(option)

Operation panel (FR-LU08)

(option)

NOTE
• Refer to the following table when fabricating the cable on the user side. Keep the total cable length within 20 m.

Name Remarks
Communication
Cable compliant with EIA-568 (such as 10BASE-T cable)
cable

 Communication operation
• Using the PU connector as a computer network port enables communication operation from a personal computer, etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program
can run to monitor the inverter or read and write parameters.
Communication can be performed with the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link operation).
For the details, refer to page 659.

84 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.7 Communication connectors and terminals
2.7.2 USB connector
1

USB host
(A connector) USB memory device 2
Communication status
Place a flathead screwdriver,
indicator (LED)
etc. in a slot and push up the

3
cover to open. USB device
(Mini B connector)

Personal computer (FR Configurator2) 4

 USB host communication
Interface
Transmission speed
Conforms to USB 1.1
12 Mbps
5
Wiring length Maximum 5 m
Connector USB A connector (receptacle)

Compatible
Format FAT32 6
Capacity 1 GB or more (used in the recorder mode of the trace function)
USB memory
Encryption function Not available

• Different inverter data can be saved in a USB memory device. 7

The USB host communication enables the following functions.
Refer
Function Description to 8
page
• Copies the parameter settings from the inverter to the USB memory device. A maximum of 99 parameter
setting files can be saved in a USB memory device.
• The parameter setting data copied in the USB memory device can be copied to other inverters. This 9
Parameter copy function is useful in backing up the parameter setting or for sharing the parameter setting among multiple 747
inverters.
• The parameter setting file can be copied onto a personal computer from the USB memory device and
edited using FR Configurator2. 10
• The monitoring data and output status of the signals can be saved in a USB memory device.
Trace 649
• The saved data can be imported to FR Configurator2 to diagnose the operating status of the inverter.
• This function copies the PLC function project data to a USB memory device when the PLC function is
used.
PLC function data
• The PLC function project data copied in the USB memory device can be copied to other inverters. 646
copy
• This function is useful in backing up the parameter setting and for allowing multiple inverters to operate
by the same sequence programs.

• When the inverter recognizes the USB memory device without any problem, " " is briefly displayed on the
operation panel.

• When the USB memory device is removed, " " is briefly displayed on the operation panel.
• The operating status of the USB host can be checked on the LED display of the inverter.
LED display status Operating status
OFF No USB connection.
ON The communication is established between the inverter and the USB device.
Fast blinking The USB memory device is being accessed. (Do not remove the USB memory device.)
Slow blinking Error in the USB connection.

• When a device such as a USB charger is connected to the USB connector and an excessive current (500 mA or higher)

flows, USB host error " " (UF warning) is displayed on the operation panel.
• When the UF warning appears, the USB error can be canceled by removing the USB device and setting Pr.1049 = "1".
(The UF warning can also be canceled by resetting the inverter power or resetting with the RES signal.)

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.7 Communication connectors and terminals
85
 NOTE
• Do not connect devices other than a USB memory device to the inverter.
• If a USB device is connected to the inverter via a USB hub, the inverter cannot recognize the USB memory device properly.

 USB device communication

The inverter can be connected to a personal computer with a USB (ver. 1.1) cable.
Parameter setting and monitoring can be performed by using FR Configurator2.
Interface Conforms to USB 1.1
Transmission speed 12 Mbps
Wiring length Maximum 5 m
Connector USB mini B connector (receptacle)
Power supply Self-powered

NOTE
• For details on FR Configurator2, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.

2.7.3 RS-485 terminal block

 Communication operation
Conforming standard EIA-485 (RS-485)
Transmission format Multidrop link
Communication speed maximum 115200 bps
Overall length 500 m
Connection cable Twisted pair cable (4 pairs)

The RS-485 terminals enable communication operation from a personal computer, etc. When the PU connector is connected
with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can run to monitor the inverter or read and
write parameters.
Communication can be performed with the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link operation) and MODBUS RTU protocol.
For the details, refer to page 661.
Terminating resistor switch
Initially-set to "OPEN".
Set only the terminating resistor switch of
the remotest inverter to the "100Ω" position.

P5S SG SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1

(VCC) (GND) (TXD1+) (TXD1-) (RXD1+) (RXD1-)

OPEN VCC GND + TXD - + RXD -

VCC GND + TXD - + RXD -

100Ω
P5S SG SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2
(VCC) (GND) (TXD2+) (TXD2-) (RXD2+) (RXD2-)

86 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.7 Communication connectors and terminals
2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector 1
control)
2
Using encoder-equipped motors together with a Vector control compatible option enables speed, torque, and positioning
control operations under orientation control, encoder feedback control, and full-scale Vector control.
This section explains wiring for use of the FR-A8AP. 3
 Appearance and parts name of the FR-A8AP
Front view (a) Rear view 4
Terminal layout (a) (a)
(h)
(d)
5
(f) 1
2
O
N

SW2
PB1
PZ1
PA1

PIN
PG
PG

PIN and PO
(c) SW3
6
are not used.
O
N

(e)
1
2
3
4
SW1
PB2
PZ2
PA2

PO
SD
SD

(a) (a)
7
(b) (a)

Symbol Name Description Refer to page 8

(a) Mounting hole Used for installation to the inverter. —
(b) Terminal block Connected with the encoder. 91
Encoder type selection switch
(c)
(SW3)
Switches the encoder type (differential line driver/complementary). 88 9
(d) CON2 connector Used for extension. —
Terminating resistor selection
(e) Switch ON or OFF the internal terminating resistor. 88
switches (SW1)
Switches (SW2) for manufacturer Do not change the initial setting (both SW2-1 and SW2-2 switches: OFF
10
(f) —
setting ). 1
2
O
N

(g) Board mounted option connector Used to connect this product to the option connector on the inverter. 19
(h) LED for manufacturer check Not used. —

 Terminals of the FR-A8AP

Terminal
Terminal name Description
symbol
PA1 Encoder A-phase signal input terminal
PA2 Encoder A-phase inverse signal input terminal
PB1 Encoder B-phase signal input terminal
A-, B- and Z-phase signals are input from the encoder.
PB2 Encoder B-phase inverse signal input terminal
PZ1 Encoder Z-phase signal input terminal
PZ2 Encoder Z-phase inverse signal input terminal
PG Encoder power supply (positive) input terminal Input terminal for the encoder power supply.
Connect the external power supply and the encoder power cable. When the
encoder output is the differential line driver type, only 5 V can be input. Make
SD Encoder power supply ground terminal
the voltage of the external power supply same as the encoder output
voltage. (Check the encoder specification.)
PIN
Not used.
PO

NOTE
• When the encoder's output voltage differs from its input power supply voltage, the signal loss detection (E.ECT) may occur.
• Incorrect wiring or faulty setting to the encoder will cause a fault such as an overcurrent (E.OC[ ]) and an inverter overload
(E.THT). Correctly perform the encoder wiring and setting.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
87
  Switches on the FR-A8AP
• Use the encoder type selection switch (SW3) to select the differential line driver or the complementary.
It is initially set to the differential line driver. Switch its position according to the output circuit.
Differential line
driver (initial status)
1 O
2 N

SW2

SW3

O
N
1
2
3
4
Complementary

SW1
• Use the terminating resistor selection switches (SW1) to select ON/OFF of the internal terminating resistor.
Set the switches ON (initial status) when an encoder output type is differential line driver, and set OFF when
complementary.
ON: With internal terminating resistor (initial status)
OFF: Without internal terminating resistor
Internal terminating
resistor-ON
(initial status)
1 O
2 N

SW2

SW3
O
N
1
2
3
4
SW1

Internal terminating
resistor-OFF

NOTE
• Set all switches to the same setting (ON/OFF).
• Set the switches OFF when sharing an encoder with another unit (NC (computerized numerical controller), etc.) having a
terminating resistor under the differential line driver setting.

• Motor and switch setting

Encoder type selection Terminating resistor Power supply
Motor
switch (SW3) selection switches (SW1) specification*2
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor SF-JR Differential ON 5V
with encoder SF-HR Differential ON 5V
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency
Others *1 *1 *1*3
motor with encoder
SF-JRCA Differential ON 5V
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque SF-HRCA Differential ON 5V
motor with encoder
Others *1 *1 *1*3

Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU Complementary OFF 12 V

Other manufacturer's motor with encoder *1 *1 *1*3

*1 Set according to the motor (encoder).

*2 Prepare the power supply (5 V/12 V/15 V/24 V) for the encoder according to the encoder's output voltage. When the control terminal option FR-
A8TP is installed, 24 V power supply can be provided from the FR-A8TP.
*3 When the encoder output is the differential line driver type, only 5 V can be input.

NOTE
• The SW2 switches are for manufacturer setting. Do not change the setting.
• When the power supply of the inverter is turned OFF, also turn off the power supply of the encoder. Otherwise, the plug-in
option may be damaged.

88 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
 • Encoder specifications
Item Encoder for SF-JR Encoder for SF-V5RU 1
Resolution 1024 pulses/rev 2048 pulse/rev
Power supply voltage 5 VDC ± 10% 12 VDC ±10%, 24 VDC ±10%
Current consumption 150 mA 150 mA

Output signal form

Phase A and Phase B: 90 degrees out of phase, Phase A and Phase B: 90 degrees out of phase, 2
Phase Z: 1 pulse/rev Phase Z: 1 pulse/rev
Output circuit Differential line driver AM26LS31 equivalent Complementary

Output voltage
H level: 2.4 V or more,
L level: 0.5 V or less
H level: (Power supply for encoder - 3 V) or more,
L level: 3 V or less
3
 Encoder cable
 SF-JR/HR/JRCA/HRCA with encoder 4
FR-A800
F-DPEVSB 12P 0.2 mm2 D/MS3057-12A
(FR-A8AP)
5
PLG
Approx. 140 mm
11 mm

Earth cable PA1 C

PA2 R
PB1 A
PB2 N
60 mm PZ1 B
L D/MS3106B20-29S PZ2 P Positioning keyway 6
M A B
PG N C
H L
SD K
K
T P D
E
7
S R
J F
H G

D/MS3106B20-29S
(As viewed from wiring side)
8
2 mm2
PG

SD
9
Model Length L (m)
FR-JCBL5 5
FR-JCBL15 15 10
FR-JCBL30 30

 SF-V5RU, SF-THY
FR-A800
(FR-A8AP) PLG
PA1 A
PA2 B
PB1 C
PB2 D
2
PZ1 F
F-DPEVSB 12P 0.2 mm D/MS3057-12A PZ2 G Positioning keyway
Approx. 140 mm
11 mm

Earth cable
PG M A B
S N C
L
SD R T P D
60 mm K E
S R
L D/MS3106B20-29S J
H G F
A P clip for earthing (grounding) a shielded cable is provided. D/MS3106B20-29S
(As viewed from wiring side
2 mm2
PG

SD

Model Length L (m)

FR-V7CBL5 5
FR-V7CBL15 15
FR-V7CBL30 30

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
89
 • When using an encoder cable (FR-JCBL, FR-V5CBL, etc.) dedicated to the conventional motor, the cables need to be
treated as the terminal block of the FR-A8AP is an insertion type. Cut the crimp terminal of the encoder cable and strip its
sheath to make its cable wires loose. Also, treat the shielding wires of the shielded twisted pair cable to ensure that they
do not contact conductive areas.
Wire the stripped cable after twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose. In addition, do not solder it.
Cable stripping size

5 mm

NOTE
• Information on crimp terminals
Commercially available products (as of October 2020)
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

Ferrule part No.

Terminal screw Wire gauge Crimping tool
size (mm2) With insulation Without insulation model No.
sleeve sleeve
0.3 AI 0,34-6TQ A 0,34-7
M2 CRIMPFOX 6
0.5 AI 0,5-6WH A 0,5-6

NICHIFU Co., Ltd.

Terminal screw Wire gauge Blade terminal Insulation cap Crimping tool
size (mm2) part No. part No. model No.
M2 0.3 to 0.75 BT 0.75-7 VC 0.75 NH 69

• When using a blade terminal (without insulation sleeve), take caution that the twisted wires do not come out.

• Connection terminal compatibility table

Motor SF-V5RU, SF-THY SF-JR/HR/JRCA/HRCA (with encoder)
Encoder cable FR-V7CBL FR-JCBL
PA1 PA PA
PA2 Do not connect anything to this. PAR
PB1 PB PB
PB2 Do not connect anything to this. PBR
FR-A8AP terminal
PZ1 PZ PZ
PZ2 Do not connect anything to this. PZR
PG PG 5E
SD SD AG2

90 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
 Wiring example
• Speed control 1
Vector control dedicated motor (SF-
Standard motor with encoder (SF-JR), 5 V differential line driver
V5RU, SF-THY), 12 V complementary

SF-JR motor *7
MCCB MC
OCR SF-V5RU, SF-THY
2
A
MCCB MC Inverter with encoder Three-phase
B
AC power FAN
Three-phase R/L1 U U supply C
S/L2 V V
3
AC power M Inverter U U
supply T/L3 W W V V
M
E W W
Earth E
Forward rotation start STF Earth
FR-A8AP (Ground) PC (Ground) Thermal
Reverse rotation start STR External

4
PA1 C *1 thermal RH(OH) 2 W 1 kΩ G1 protector

relay input *8 G2
Contact input common SD PA2 R SD
FR-A8AP
PA1 A *1
PB1 A
PA2 B
PB2 N
5
PB1 C
10 Differential PLG PB2
Frequency command 3 PZ1 B D
2 PLG
Frequency setting 2 PZ2 P *2 Differential PZ1 F
potentiometer PZ2 G *2

1/2 W 1 kΩ 1 5 Complementary
PG H PG S

6
Complementary
Terminating SD R
Terminating SD K resistor
PG
resistor ON ON
Torque limit PG SD
(+) 1 *3 12 VDC power
command (-) SD
*3 *4 *6 (+) (-) supply *5
OFF
(±10 V) (+) (-) 5 VDC power supply
7
OFF *6
*5
*4

• Torque control
Vector control dedicated motor (SF-
Standard motor with encoder (SF-JR), 5 V differential line driver
V5RU, SF-THY), 12 V complementary 8
SF-JR motor MCCB MC SF-V5RU, SF-THY
*7 OCR
MCCB MC Inverter with encoder Three-phase
A

9
AC power B
R/L1 U U FAN
Three-phase supply C
AC power S/L2 V V
M
supply T/L3 W W Inverter U U
V V
E W W
M

10
Forward rotation start STF Earth E
(Ground) Earth
FR-A8AP
Reverse rotation start STR PA1 C *1 External PC (Ground) Thermal
2 W 1 kΩ G1 protector
thermal RH(OH)
Contact input common SD PA2 R relay input *8 G2
SD
FR-A8AP
*1
PB1 A PA1 A
PA2 B
PB2 N
10 PB1 C
Speed limit command 3 Differential PLG
PZ1 B PB2 D
Frequency setting 2 PLG
2 PZ2 P *2 Differential PZ1 F
potentiometer PZ2 G *2
1/2 W 1 kΩ 1 Complementary
5 PG H
Complementary PG S
Terminating SD K Terminating SD R
resistor ON resistor
Torque command (+) 1 PG ON PG
(±10 V) (-) *3
SD *3 12 VDC power
SD *4 *6 (+) (-) supply *5
(+) (-) 5 VDC power supply OFF
OFF *6
*5
*4

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
91
 • Position control
Vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU, SF-THY), 12 V complementary

MCCB MC OCR SF-V5RU, SF-THY

*7 A
Positioning unit Three-phase B
MELSEC-iQ-R RD75P[] FAN
AC power supply C
MELSEC-Q QD75P[ ]N/QD75P[ ]
MCCB MC
MELSEC-L LD75P[ ]
Three-phase R/L1 Inverter U U
AC power S/L2 V V
supply M
T/L3 W W
FLS
E
RLS Earth
DOG (ground) Thermal
External thermal protector PC protector
STOP relay input *8 RH(OH) 2 W 1 kΩ G1
Forward stroke end SD G2
STF
Reverse stroke end FR-A8AP
STR PA1 A *1
Pre-excitation/servo on
LX *9 PA2 B
Clear signal
CLEAR CLR *9 C
PB1
Pulse train
PULSE F JOG *10 PB2 D
Sign signal
PULSE R NP *9 Differential PLG
24 VDC power supply line driver PZ1 F
CLRCOM PC PZ2 G *2
PULSE COM SE
Complementary PG S
RDYCOM
Terminating SD R
COM resistor
Preparation ready signal ON PG
READY RDY *11
SD *3
5 12 VDC
*4 *6 (+) (-) power supply *5
OFF
Torque limit command (+) 1
(±10 V) (-)
*1 The pin number differs according to the encoder used.
Speed, control, torque control, and position control by pulse train input are available with or without the Z-phase being connected.
*2 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio must be 1:1.
*3 Earth (ground) the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure using a tool such as a P-clip. (Refer to page 93.)
*4 For the complementary, set the terminating resistor selection switches in the OFF position. (Refer to page 88.)
*5 A separate external power supply is necessary according to the encoder power specification.
When the encoder output is the differential line driver type, only 5 V can be input.
Make the voltage of the external power supply the same as the encoder output voltage, and connect the external power supply between terminals
PG and SD.
*6 For terminal compatibility of the FR-JCBL, FR-V7CBL, and FR-A8AP, refer to page 90.
*7 Single-phase power supply (200 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz) is used for the fan for a 7.5 kW or lower dedicated motor.
*8 Connect the recommended 2W1kΩ resistor between terminals PC and OH. (Recommended product: MOS2C102J 2W1kΩ by KOA Corporation)
Insert the input line and the resistor to a 2-wire blade terminal, and connect the blade terminal to terminal OH. (For the recommended 2-wire blade
terminals, refer to page 74.)
Insulate the lead wire of the resistor, for example by applying a contraction tube, and shape the wires so that the resistor and its lead wire do not
touch other cables. Caulk the lead wire securely together with the thermal protector input line using a 2-wire blade terminal. (Do not subject the
lead wire's bottom area to an excessive pressure.)
To use a terminal as terminal OH, assign the OH (External thermal relay input) signal to an input terminal. (Set "7" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189.
For details, refer to page 521.)
When OH signal is assigned to terminal RH (Pr.182 = “7”)
PC RH (OH)

2-wire blade terminal

Insulate To thermal protector

Resistor (2 W1kΩ)
Insulate
*9 Assign the function using Pr.178 to Pr.184, Pr.187 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
*10 When position control is selected, terminal JOG function is invalid and simple position pulse train input terminal becomes valid.
*11 Assign the function using Pr.190 to Pr.194 (Output terminal function selection).

92 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
 Instructions for encoder cable wiring
• Use shielded twisted pair cables (0.2 mm2 or larger) to connect the FR-A8AP. For the wiring to terminals PG and SD, use 1
several cables in parallel or use a thick cable, according to the wiring length.
To protect the cables from noise, run them away from any source of noise (such as the main circuit and power supply
voltage). 2
Example of parallel connection
with two cables
(with complementary encoder output)
FR-A800
(FR-A8AP) Encoder
3
PA1 A
PA2 B
FB1 C
FB2
PZ1
PZ2
D
F
G
4

5
PG
S
SD R

2 mm2
PG

SD
6
Wiring length Parallel connection Larger-size cable
Within 10 m At least two cables in parallel 0.4 mm2 or larger
Within 20 m At least four cables in parallel
Wire gauge 0.2
0.75 mm2 or larger
7
mm2
Within 100 m*1 At least six cables in parallel 1.25 mm2 or larger

*1 When differential line driver is set and a wiring length is 30 m or more. 8

The wiring length can be extended to 100 m by increasing the 5 V power supply (approximately to 5.5 V) while using six or more 0.2 mm2 gauge
cables in parallel or a 1.25 mm2 or larger gauge cable. The voltage applied must be within power supply specifications of encoder.
• To reduce noise of the encoder cable, earth (ground) the encoder's shielded cable to the enclosure (as close as possible
to the inverter) with a metal P-clip or U-clip.
9
Earthing (grounding) example using a P-clip

Encoder cable 10
Shield
P-clip

• When one encoder is shared between the FR-A8AP and CNC (computerized numerical controller), its output signal should
be connected as follows. In this case, the wiring length between the FR-A8AP and CNC should be as short as possible,
within 5 m.
Inverter
Encoder
(FR-A8AP)

CNC
Maximum 5 m
(two parallel cables)

NOTE
• For details on the optional encoder dedicated cable (FR-JCBL/FR-V7CBL), refer to page 89.
• The FR-V7CBL is provided with a P-clip for earthing (grounding) shielded cables.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.8 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
93
 2.9 Parameter settings for a motor with encoder

 Parameters for the encoder (Pr.359, Pr.369, Pr.851, Pr.852)

• Set the encoder specifications.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
Set when using a motor for which Set for the operation
0
forward rotation (encoder) is clockwise at 120 Hz or less.
(CW) viewed from the shaft
Set for the operation
100 CW at a frequency higher
than 120 Hz.
359 852
Encoder rotation direction 1 Set when using a motor for which Set for the operation
C141 C241 1
forward rotation (encoder) is at 120 Hz or less.
counterclockwise (CCW) viewed from
the shaft. Set for the operation
101 at a frequency higher
CCW
than 120 Hz.

369 851 Set the number of encoder pulses.

Number of encoder pulses 1024 0 to 4096
C140 C240 Set the number of pulses before it is multiplied by 4.
The parameters above can be set when a Vector control compatible option is installed.

• The following table shows parameters to be set according to the Vector control compatible option to be used.
FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-
Item FR-A8APR parameter FR-A8APS parameter FR-A8TP parameter
A8APA parameter
Encoder/Resolver rotation
Pr.359 Pr.852
direction
— (obtained via
Number of detector pulses Pr.369 — (fixed pulses of 1024) communication from the Pr.851
encoder)

94 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.9 Parameter settings for a motor with encoder
 Parameter settings for the motor under Vector control
Pr.9 Electronic Pr.81
Pr.359/Pr.852 Pr.369/Pr.851 1
Pr.71 Applied Pr.80 Motor Encoder Number of
Motor model thermal O/L Number of
motor capacity rotation encoder
relay motor poles
direction pulses

SF-JR
Rated motor
0 (initial value) Motor capacity
Number of
1 (initial value)
1024 (initial 2
current motor poles value)
SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or Rated motor 1024 (initial
Mitsubishi 20 Motor capacity 4 1 (initial value)
lower current value)
Electric
standard motor Rated motor Number of 1024 (initial 3
SF-HR 40 Motor capacity 1 (initial value)
current motor poles value)
Rated motor Number of
Others
current 0 (3)*1 Motor capacity
motor poles
*2 *2

Rated motor 1024 (initial

4
SF-JRCA 4P 1 Motor capacity 4 1 (initial value)
Mitsubishi current value)
Electric Rated motor Number of 1024 (initial
SF-HRCA 50 Motor capacity 1 (initial value)
constant-torque
motor
current
Rated motor
motor poles
Number of
value)
5
Others
current 1 (13)*1 Motor capacity
motor poles
*2 *2

SF-V5RU
0*3 30 Motor capacity 4 1 (initial value) 2048
Vector control
(1500 r/min series)
SF-V5RU
6
dedicated (other than the 1500 0*3 1 (13)*1 Motor capacity 4 1 (initial value) 2048
motor r/min series)
SF-THY 0*3 30 (33)*1 Motor capacity 4 1 (initial value) 2048 7
Other
Rated motor Number of
manufacturer’s —
current 0 (3)*1 Motor capacity
motor poles
*2 *2
standard motor
Other 8
manufacturer’s Rated motor Number of
constant-torque
—
current 1 (13)*1 Motor capacity
motor poles
*2 *2

motor
PM motor Refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8APR. 9
*1 Offline auto tuning is required. (Refer to page 532.)
*2 Set this parameter according to the motor.

10
*3 Use the thermal protector input provided with the motor.
• When using the inverter with the SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series), refer to the following table to set Pr.83 Rated motor
voltage and Pr.84 Rated motor frequency.
SF-V5RU SF-V5RU
Motor Motor
200 V 400 V 200 V 400 V
capacity capacity
Pr.83 (V) Pr.84 (Hz) Pr.83 (V) Pr.84 (Hz) Pr.83 (V) Pr.84 (Hz) Pr.83 (V) Pr.84 (Hz)
1.5 kW 188 52 345 52 18.5 kW 171 51 346 51
2.2 kW 188 52 360 52 22 kW 160 51 336 51
3.7 kW 190 52 363 52 30 kW 178 51 328 51
5.5 kW 165 51 322 51 37 kW 166 51 332 51
7.5 kW 164 51 331 51 45 kW 171 51 342 51
11 kW 171 51 320 51
55 kW 159 51 317 51
15 kW 164 51 330 51

• When using the inverter with the SF-V5RU1, SF-V5RU3, or SF-V5RU4, refer to the following table to set Pr.83 Rated
motor voltage and Pr.84 Rated motor frequency.
Pr.83 setting
Motor model Pr.84 setting
200 V class 400 V class
SF-V5RU1-30kW or lower 160 V 320 V
SF-V5RU1-37kW 170 V 340 V
33.33 Hz
SF-V5RU3-22kW or lower 160 V 320 V
SF-V5RU3, 30kW 170 V 340 V
SF-V5RU4-3.7kW and 7.5kW 150 V 300 V
SF-V5RU4 and motors other 16.67 Hz
160 V 320 V
than described above

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.9 Parameter settings for a motor with encoder
95
  Combination with the Vector control dedicated motor
When using the inverter with a Vector control dedicated motor, refer to the following table.
• Combination with the SF-V5RU and SF-THY (ND rating)
Voltage 200 V class 400 V class
Rated speed 1500 r/min
Base frequency 50 Hz
Maximum speed 3000 r/min
Motor frame Inverter model Motor frame Inverter model
Motor capacity Motor model Motor model
No. FR-A820-[] No. FR-A840-[]
1.5 kW 90L SF-V5RU1K 00167(2.2K) 90L SF-V5RUH1K 00083(2.2K)
2.2 kW 100L SF-V5RU2K 00250(3.7K) 100L SF-V5RUH2K 00083(2.2K)
3.7 kW 112M SF-V5RU3K 00340(5.5K) 112M SF-V5RUH3K 00126(3.7K)
5.5 kW 132S SF-V5RU5K 00490(7.5K) 132S SF-V5RUH5K 00250(7.5K)
7.5 kW 132M SF-V5RU7K 00630(11K) 132M SF-V5RUH7K 00310(11K)
11 kW 160M SF-V5RU11K 00770(15K) 160M SF-V5RUH11K 00380(15K)
15 kW 160L SF-V5RU15K 00930(18.5K) 160L SF-V5RUH15K 00470(18.5K)
18.5 kW 180M SF-V5RU18K 01250(22K) 180M SF-V5RUH18K 00620(22K)
22 kW 180M SF-V5RU22K 01540(30K) 180M SF-V5RUH22K 00770(30K)
30 kW 200L*2 SF-V5RU30K 01870(37K) 200L*2 SF-V5RUH30K 00930(37K)
37 kW 200L *2 SF-V5RU37K 02330(45K) 200L *2 SF-V5RUH37K 01160(45K)
45 kW 200L*2 SF-V5RU45K 03160(55K) 200L*2 SF-V5RUH45K 01800(55K)
55 kW 225S *1 SF-V5RU55K 03800(75K) 225S *1 SF-V5RUH55K 02160(75K)
75 kW 250MD SF-THY 04750(90K) 250MD SF-THY 02600(90K)
90 kW — — — 250MD SF-THY 03250(110K)
110 kW — — — 280MD SF-THY 03610(132K)
132 kW — — — 280MD SF-THY 04320(160K)
160 kW — — — 280MD SF-THY 04810(185K)
200 kW — — — 280L SF-THY 05470(220K)
250 kW — — — 315H SF-THY 06830(280K)

• Combination with the SF-V5RU1, 3, 4, and SF-THY (ND rating)

SF-V5RU[]1 (1:2) SF-V5RU[]3 (1:3) SF-V5RU[]4 (1:4)
Voltage 200 V class
Rated
1000 r/min 1000 r/min 500 r/min
speed
Base
33.33 Hz 33.33 Hz 16.6 Hz
frequency
Maximum
2000 r/min 3000 r/min 2000 r/min
speed
Motor Inverter Motor Inverter Motor Inverter
Motor
frame Motor model model frame Motor model model frame Motor model model
capacity
No. FR-A820-[] No. FR-A820-[] No. FR-A820-[]
1.5 kW 100L SF-V5RU1K1(Y) 00167(2.2K) 112M SF-V5RU1K3(Y) 00167(2.2K) 132M SF-V5RU1K4(Y) 00167(2.2K)
2.2 kW 112M SF-V5RU2K1(Y) 00250(3.7K) 132S SF-V5RU2K3(Y) 00250(3.7K) 160M SF-V5RU2K4(Y) 00250(3.7K)
3.7 kW 132S SF-V5RU3K1(Y) 00340(5.5K) 132M SF-V5RU3K3(Y) 00340(5.5K) 160L SF-V5RU3K4 00490(7.5K)*4
5.5 kW 132M SF-V5RU5K1(Y) 00490(7.5K) 160M SF-V5RU5K3(Y) 00490(7.5K) 180L SF-V5RU5K4 (Y) 00490(7.5K)
7.5 kW 160M SF-V5RU7K1(Y) 00630(11K) 160L SF-V5RU7K3(Y) 00630(11K) 200L SF-V5RU7K4(Y) 00630(11K)
11 kW 160L SF-V5RU11K1(Y) 00770(15K) 180M SF-V5RU11K3(Y) 00770(15K) 225S SF-V5RU11K4(Y) 00770(15K)
15 kW 180M SF-V5RU15K1(Y) 00930(18.5K) 180L SF-V5RU15K3(Y) 00930(18.5K) 225S SF-V5RU15K4 01250(22K)*4
18.5 kW 180L SF-V5RU18K1(Y) 01250(22K) 200L SF-V5RU18K3(Y) 01250(22K) 250MD SF-THY*5 01250(22K)
22 kW 200L SF-V5RU22K1(Y) 01540(30K) 200L SF-V5RU22K3(Y) 01540(30K) 280MD *5 01540(30K)
SF-THY
30 kW 200L*3 SF-V5RU30K1(Y) 01870(37K) 225S*1 SF-V5RU30K3(Y) 01870(37K) 280MD SF-THY*5 01870(37K)
37 kW 225S SF-V5RU37K1(Y) 02330(45K) 250MD*1 SF-THY*5 02330(45K) 280MD SF-THY*5 02330(45K)
45 kW 250MD *5 03160(55K) *1 *5 03160(55K) 280MD *5 03160(55K)
SF-THY 250MD SF-THY SF-THY
55 kW 250MD *5 03800(75K) *1 *5 03800(75K) 280L *5 03800(75K)
SF-THY 280MD SF-THY SF-THY

400 V class are developed upon receipt of order.

*1 The maximum speed is 2400 r/min.
*2 80% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 2400 r/min or faster.)
*3 90% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 1000 r/min or faster.)
*4 For motors with overload capacity 150% 60 seconds ("Y" at the end of their model names), contact your sales representative.
*5 This model is developed upon receipt of order.

96 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.9 Parameter settings for a motor with encoder
2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units 1

The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required.

Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in accordance with 2
the Instruction Manual of the corresponding option unit.

2.10.1 Connection of the brake resistor 3

• When an inverter-driven motor is driven by a load or requires rapid deceleration, install an external brake resistor. Connect
the brake resistor to terminals P/+(P3) and PR. (For the locations of terminal P/+(P3) and PR, refer to the terminal block 4
layout (page 55).)
• For the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and the FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower, the plug-in brake resistor is connected to
terminals P/+ and PX.
5
When the plug-in brake resistor does not have enough thermal capability for high-duty operation, install an external brake
resistor. At this time, remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX and connect the brake resistor to terminals P/+ and
PR. terminal block layout (page 55).)
6
Removing jumpers across terminals PR and PX disables the plug-in brake resistor (power is not supplied). The plug-in
brake resistor can be left connected to the inverter, and so is the plug-in brake resistor's lead wire connected to the
terminal.
7
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K)
FR-A820-00046(0.4K), FR-A820-00077(0.75K)
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K)

1) Remove the screws in terminals 8

1) Remove the screws in PR and PX and remove the jumper.
terminals PR and PX
and remove the jumper.
Jumper
Terminal PR
Jumper
9
Terminal PR

10
Terminal PX
2) Connect the brake resistor
across terminals P/+ and PR. Terminal P/+ Terminal PX
(The jumper should remain
Terminal PR 2) Connect the brake resistor
disconnected.)
across terminals P/+ and Terminal P/+
PR. (The jumper should Terminal PR
remain disconnected.)

Brake resistor

Brake resistor

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
97
 FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K)

1) Remove the screws in terminals PR 2) Connect the brake resistor across

and PX and remove the jumper. terminals P/+ and PR. (The jumper
should remain disconnected.)
Jumper

Terminal P/+
Terminal PR Terminal PR

Terminal PX

Brake resistor

FR-A820-00630(11K), FR-A820-00770(15K) to FR-A820-01250(22K),

FR-A840-00310(11K), FR-A840-00380(15K) FR-A840-00470(18.5K), FR-A840-00620(22K)

Connect the brake resistor Connect the brake resistor

across terminals P/+ and PR. across terminals P3 and PR. Terminal P3

Jumper∗1 Terminal PR
Terminal P/+
Terminal PR

Brake resistor
Brake resistor

FR-A840-00770(30K) FR-A840-00930(37K) to FR-A840-01800(55K)

Connect the brake resistor Connect the brake resistor

across terminals P3 and PR. across terminals P3 and PR.
Terminal P3

Terminal P3 Terminal PR
Terminal PR

Brake resistor
Brake resistor

*1 Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).

NOTE
• For the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and the FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower, the jumper across terminals PR and PX must
be disconnected before connecting the dedicated brake resistor. Doing so may damage the inverter.
• A brake resistor cannot be used with options such as brake units, high power factor converters, and power regeneration
converters.

 Connection of the dedicated external brake resistor (FR-ABR)

The FR-ABR can be applied to the FR-A820-01250(22K) or lower and the FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower.
Set parameters as follows:
• Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "1"

98 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
 • Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty = 10% (for 7.5K or lower) or 6% (for 11K or higher)
(Refer to page 724.)
1
• When the regenerative brake transistor is damaged, the following sequence is recommended to prevent overheat and
burnout of the brake resistor.
2
Thermal Thermal
relay <Example 2> relay
<Example 1>
MC Inverter (OCR)(∗2) FR-ABR MC Inverter (OCR)(∗2) FR-ABR

Power
Supply
R/L1
S/L2
P/+
(P3)
R
Power
Supply
R/L1
S/L2
P/+
(P3)
R
3
T/L3
PX T/L3 PX
T T
F PR PR
F
B
4
Disconnect jumper. (∗1) Disconnect jumper. (∗1)
MC OFF ON MC
OFF ON
C
OCR OCR
MC Contact MC Contact

*1 Since the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher are not provided with terminal PX, a jumper need not to be
removed. 5
*2 Refer to the following table for the thermal relay models for each capacity. Refer to the following diagram for the connection. (Always install a
thermal relay when using a brake resistor for the inverters with 11K or higher capacity.)

Power Thermal relay model

supply
High-duty brake
resistor
(Mitsubishi electric Rated operating current 6
voltage product)
FR-ABR-0.4K TH-T25-0.7A
FR-ABR-0.75K
FR-ABR-2.2K
TH-T25-1.3A
TH-T25-2.1A
1/L1 5/L3
7
FR-ABR-3.7K TH-T25-3.6A
200 V FR-ABR-5.5K TH-T25-5A
FR-ABR-7.5K TH-T25-6.6A 8
FR-ABR-11K TH-T25-11A 2/T1 6/T3
FR-ABR-15K TH-T25-11A To the inverter To the FR-ABR
120 VAC: 2 A (NO contact) / 3 A (NC contact),
FR-ABR-22K
FR-ABR-H0.4K
TH-T65-22A
TH-T25-0.24A
240 VAC: 1 A (NO contact) / 2 A (NC contact)
P/+ terminal
9
(AC15 class)
FR-ABR-H0.75K TH-T25-0.35A 110 VDC: 0.2 A, 220 VDC: 0.1 A (DC13 class)
FR-ABR-H1.5K TH-T25-0.9A
FR-ABR-H2.2K TH-T25-1.3A 10
FR-ABR-H3.7K TH-T25-2.1A
400 V
FR-ABR-H5.5K TH-T25-2.5A
FR-ABR-H7.5K TH-T25-3.6A
FR-ABR-H11K TH-T25-6.6A
FR-ABR-H15K TH-T25-6.6A
FR-ABR-H22K TH-T25-9A

 Connection of a brake resistor other than the FR-ABR

A brake resistor can be used with the FR-A820-01250(22K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
Use a brake resistor that has resistance and power consumption values higher than the following. Also, the brake resistor must
have a sufficient capacity to consume the regenerative power.
Voltage class Inverter Minimum resistance (Ω) Power consumption (kW)
FR-A820-00046(0.4K) 100 1.44
FR-A820-00077(0.75K) 80 1.81
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) 50 2.89
FR-A820-00167(2.2K) 33 4.38
FR-A820-00250(3.7K) 30 4.81
200 V class FR-A820-00340(5.5K) 18 8.02
FR-A820-00490(7.5K) 18 8.02
FR-A820-00630(11K) 12 12.0
FR-A820-00770(15K) 8.5 17.0
FR-A820-00930(18.5K) 6.5 22.2
FR-A820-01250(22K) 6.5 22.2

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
99
 Power consumption (kW)*1
Voltage class Inverter Minimum resistance (Ω)
Pr.977 = "0" Pr.977 = "1"
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) 371 1.56 1.66
FR-A840-00038(0.75K) 236 2.45 2.61
FR-A840-00052(1.5K) 190 3.04 3.24
FR-A840-00083(2.2K) 130 4.44 4.74
FR-A840-00126(3.7K) 83 6.96 7.42
FR-A840-00170(5.5K) 66 8.75 9.34
FR-A840-00250(7.5K) 45 12.8 13.7
400 V class FR-A840-00310(11K) 34 17.0 18.1
FR-A840-00380(15K) 34 17.0 18.1
FR-A840-00470(18.5K) 21 27.5 29.3
FR-A840-00620(22K) 21 27.5 29.3
FR-A840-00770(30K) 13.5 42.8 45.6
FR-A840-00930(37K) 13.5 42.8 45.6
FR-A840-01160(45K) 13.5 42.8 45.6
FR-A840-01800(55K) 13.5 42.8 45.6
*1 Power consumption differs according to the voltage protection level. The voltage protection level is set in Pr.977. (Refer to page 345.)

Set parameters as follows:

• Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "1"
• Set Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty according to the amount and frequency of the regenerative driving, and make
sure that the resistor can consume the regenerative power properly. (Refer to page 724.)
• When the regenerative brake transistor is damaged, install a thermal relay as shown in the following sequence to prevent
overheat and burnout of the brake resistor. Properly select a thermal relay according to the regenerative driving frequency
or the rated power or resistance of the brake resistor.

<Example 1> Thermal relay Thermal relay

MC Inverter (OCR) Brake resistor <Example 2>
MC Inverter (OCR) Brake resistor
R/L1 P/+ R R/L1 P/+ R
Power Power
S/L2 (P3) S/L2 (P3)
Supply Supply
T/L3 T/L3 PX
T PX T PR
F PR F
B Remove the jumper. (∗1)
Remove the jumper. (∗1)
OFF ON
MC ON OFF
C
OCR
OCR MC
MC Contact
MC Contact

*1 Since the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher are not provided with terminal PX, a jumper need not to be
removed.

CAUTION
• If the resistor selection is incorrect, overcurrent may damage the inverter built-in brake transistor. Besides, the resistor
may be burned due to overheat.
• If the selection of the thermal relay is incorrect, the resistor may be burned due to overheat.

2.10.2 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2)

Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2(-H)) as follows to improve the braking capability during deceleration.

100 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
 Connection example with the GRZG type discharging resistor
ON
OCR
OFF contact
1
T *2
MC MC
GRZG type *6
2
discharging
OCR resistor
MCCB MC R R
U Motor External thermal
3
R/L1
Three-phase AC
power supply
S/L2 V M relay *5
T/L3 W

Inverter FR-BU2

PR P/+
*7
*4 PR A 4
*3 (P3) P/+ B
PX *1 *1
N/- N/- C
BUE
*4
SD 5
10 m or less
*1 When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) on the inverter and on the brake unit (FR-BU2). (Incorrect connection will
damage the inverter and brake unit.)
*2
*3
When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer.
Be sure to remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX when using the FR-BU2 with the inverter of FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, or FR-
6
A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.
*4 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and discharging resistor must be within 5 m. When using twisted pair cable, use

*5
the cable within 10 m.
It is recommended to install an external thermal relay to prevent overheat of the discharging resistor.
7
*6 For the connection method of the discharging resistor, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-BU2.
*7 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). Terminal P3 has the same
function as terminal P/+ on the inverter.
• Recommended external thermal relay 8
Recommended external
brake unit Discharging resistor
thermal relay
FR-BU2-1.5K GZG 300W-50Ω (one) TH-T25 1.3A 9
FR-BU2-3.7K GRZG 200-10Ω (three in series) TH-T25 3.6A 1/L1 5/L3

FR-BU2-7.5K GRZG 300-5Ω (four in series) TH-T25 6.6A

10
FR-BU2-15K GRZG 400-2Ω (six in series) TH-T25 11A

FR-BU2-H7.5K GRZG 200-10Ω (six in series) TH-T25 3.6A 2/T1 6/T3

FR-BU2-H15K GRZG 300-5Ω (eight in series) TH-T25 6.6A To the brake To a resistor
FR-BU2-H30K GRZG 400-2Ω (twelve in series) TH-T25 11A unit terminal P/+

NOTE
• Set "1" in Pr.0 Brake mode selection in the FR-BU2 to use a GRZG type discharging resistor.
• Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
101
  Connection example with the FR-BR(-H) resistor unit
ON OFF

T *2
MC MC

FR-BR
MCCB MC
R/L1 U Motor P TH1 *5
Three phase AC
power supply S/L2 V M PR
T/L3 W TH2
*4

Inverter FR-BU2
*6 PR A
PR P/+
*3 (P3) P/+ B
PX *1
N/- N/- C
BUE
*4 SD
10 m or less
*1 When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) on the inverter and on the brake unit (FR-BU2). (Incorrect connection will
damage the inverter and brake unit.)
*2 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer.
*3 Be sure to remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX when using the FR-BU2 with the inverter of FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, or FR-
A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.
*4 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and resistor unit (FR-BR) must be within 5 m. When using twisted pair cable, use
the cable within 10 m.
*5 The contact between TH1 and TH2 is closed in the normal status and is open at a fault.
*6 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). Terminal P3 has the same
function as terminal P\+ on the inverter.

NOTE
• Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).

 Connection example with the MT-BR5 type resistor unit

After making sure that the wiring is correct and secure, set Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "1" and Pr.70 Special
regenerative brake duty = "0 (initial value)". Set Pr.0 Brake mode selection = "2" in the brake unit FR-BU2.
T ∗2

MCCB MC ON OFF CR1

Three phase Motor
R/L1 U
AC power S/L2 V M MC
supply T/L3 W MC
10 m ∗4
∗1 or less CR1
P/+ P ∗3 P TH1
N/- ∗3 N P
PR
BUE PR
SD A TH2
B
C
Inverter Brake unit Resistor unit
∗5
FR-BU2 MT-BR5
*1 When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) on the inverter and on the brake unit (FR-BU2). (Incorrect connection will
damage the inverter and brake unit.)
*2 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer.
*3 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and resistor unit (FR-BR) must be within 5 m. When using twisted pair cable, use
the cable within 10 m.
*4 The contact between TH1 and TH2 is open in the normal status and is closed at a fault.
*5 The CN8 connector used with the MT-BU5 type brake unit is not used.

NOTE
• The warning "oL" of the stall prevention (overvoltage) does not occur while Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "1" and
Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty = 0% (initial value). (Refer to page 724.)

102 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
2.10.3 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU)
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU(-H)) as follows to improve the braking capability during deceleration. 1
The FR-BU is compatible with the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
ON OFF
2
T *2
MC MC

FR-BR
3
MCCB MC
R/L1 U Motor
P TH1
4
Three-phase AC
S/L2 V M
power supply PR
T/L3 W TH2

Inverter FR-BU

PR P/+
*5 PR
HA 5
*3 P/+ HB
PX (P3)
*1
N/- N/- HC

10 m or less
*4
6
*1 When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) on the inverter and on the brake unit (FR-BU(-H)). (Incorrect connection will
damage the inverter.)
*2 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer.
*3 For the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower, be sure to remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX. 7
*4 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU) and resistor unit (FR-BR) must be within 5 m. When using twisted pair cable, use
the cable within 10 m.
*5 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). Terminal P3 has the same
function as terminal P\+ on the inverter. 8
NOTE
• If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor will overheat. Install a magnetic contactor on the inverter's
input side and configure a circuit that shut off the current in case of a fault. 9
• Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).

2.10.4 Connection of the brake unit (BU type) 10

Connect the brake unit (BU type) correctly as follows. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Remove the jumpers
across terminals HB and PC and terminals TB and HC on the brake unit, and fit one across terminals PC and TB. The BU type
brake unit is compatible with the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) and lower.
ON OFF
T *1
MC

Inverter MC
MCCB MC Motor
U
R/L1 V M
Three-phase Brake unit
AC power S/L2 W (BU type) Remove the
supply T/L3 jumper
TB
N/-
N OCR HC
P/+(P3) *3
PR HB
*2
PX HA
Discharging
resistor OCR
PC
PR Fit a jumper
P
*1 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer.
*2 For the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower, be sure to remove the jumper across terminals PR and PX.
*3 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). Terminal P3 has the same
function as terminal P\+ on the inverter.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
103
 NOTE
• The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit, and discharging resistor must be within 2 m. Even when the cable is
twisted, the wiring length must be within 5 m.
• If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor will overheat and result in a fire. Install a magnetic
contactor on the inverter's input side and configure a circuit that shut off the current in case of a fault.
• Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).

2.10.5 Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-

HC2)
When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) to suppress power harmonics, perform wiring securely as follows.
Incorrect connection will damage the high power factor converter and the inverter.
After making sure that the wiring is correct and secure, set the rated motor voltage in Pr.19 Base frequency voltage (under
V/F control) or Pr.83 Rated motor voltage (under other than V/F control) and "2 or 102" in Pr.30 Regenerative function
selection. (Refer to page 724.)

High power
Outside box factor converter
Reactor1 (FR-HCB2)
Reactor2 (FR-HC2) Inverter
MCCB MC (FR-HCL21) (FR-HCL22)

 R/  R2/ R3/  R3/ R4/  R/L1 Motor
R2/ R4/L14
L1 L12 L12 L13 L13 L14 U
Three-phase S/L2
S/ S2/ S2/ S3/ S3/ S4/ T/L3 W V M
AC power L2 L22 L23 L23 L24 S4/L24
L22
supply R1/L11 

T/ T2/ T2/ T3/ T3/ T4/

L3 L32 L32 L33 L33 L34 T4/L34 S1/L21 Earth
  P1 (ground)
Fuse 
ROH1 ROH P/+ P/+ (P3) 
ROH2 SD N/- N/- 
88R 88R
RDY X10 
88S 88S
 IPF X11 
R/L1
 S/L2  RSO RES
T/L3
R1/L11 SE SD
S1/L21  

*1 Remove jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 as well as across terminals S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the power supply for the control
circuit to terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do not connect anything to power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3). Incorrect connection will damage
the inverter. (The E.OPT fault (Option fault) occurs. (Refer to page 791.))
*2 Instead of connecting the terminals to the AC power supply, the control circuit can be powered by connecting terminal R1/L11 to terminal P/+ (P3)
and terminal S1/L21 to terminal N/-. In this case, do not connect the terminals to the AC power supply. Doing so will damage the inverter.
*3 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). When connecting multiple
inverters in parallel, always use either terminal P/+ or P3 for the connection. (Do not use terminals P/+ and P3 together.)
*4 When the FR-HC2 is connected, the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 does not affect the function. (The FR-HC2 can be connected with the
jumper connected (initial setting). Refer to page 55 for the jumper connection status in the initial setting.)
*5 Do not install an MCCB across terminals P/+ and N/- (between terminals P and P/+ or between terminals N and N/-). Connecting the opposite
polarity of terminals N/- and P/+ will damage the inverter.
*6 Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 (X11) signal. (Refer to page 521.)
For RS-485 or any other communication where the start command is only transmitted once, use the X11 signal to save the operation mode at the
time of an instantaneous power failure.
*7 Assign the IPF signal to a terminal on the FR-HC2. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-HC2.)
*8 Always connect terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 on the FR-HC2 to the power supply. Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage
the FR-HC2.
*9 Do not install an MCCB or MC across terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) on the reactor 1 and terminals (R4/L14, S4/L24, T4/L34) on the FR-HC2. Doing
so disrupts proper operation.
*10 Securely perform grounding (earthing) by using the grounding (earthing) terminal.
*11 Installation of a fuse is recommended. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-HC2.)
*12 Outside box is not available for the FR-HC2-H280K or higher. Connect filter capacitors, inrush current limit resistors, and magnetic contactors.
(Refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-HC2.)

104 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
 NOTE
• The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 and the voltage phases of terminals R4/L14, S4/L24, and T4/L34 must 1
be matched.
• The control logic (sink logic/source logic) of the high power factor converter and the inverter must be matched. (Refer to page
72.)
• Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when the FR-HC2 is connected.
2

CAUTION 3
• Always connect terminal RDY on the FR-HC2 to a terminal where the X10 signal or MRS signal is assigned on the
inverter. Always connect terminal SE on the FR-HC2 to terminal SD on the inverter. Not connecting these terminals may
damage the FR-HC2. 4

2.10.6 Connection of the multifunction regeneration

5
converter (FR-XC)
 Common bus regeneration mode with harmonic suppression disabled
6
(Pr.416 = "0")
When connecting the multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC) to improve the braking capability, perform wiring securely
as follows. Failure to do so will damage the converter and the inverter. 7
Turn ON switch 1 (connection mode setting switch) in the function selection switch assembly (SW2). If the switch setting does
not match the actual wiring, the connection mode fault "E.T" occurs.

10

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
105
 After making sure that the wiring is correct and secure, set "2 or 102" in Pr.30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to
page 724.)
Inverter

U
R/L1 *1
FR-XC V
S/L2 IM
M
W
T/L3
FR-XCL *6*11 *12 P4
MCCB MC R1/L11
Fuse *10 R/L1 R2/L12 R2/L12 *2
Junction terminal S1/L21
Power Fuse *10 S/L2 S2/L22 S2/L22 P/+ Fuse
supply P/+(P3) *3*4*5
Fuse *10 T/L3 T2/L32 T2/L32
P1
N/- Fuse
N/-

*6*7 R/L1

Open collector
S/L2 RYB X10(MRS)*8
*9 T/L3 RSO RES
SE SD
R1/L11 C
S1/L21 B
A Inverter

RES *1 U
R/L1
SOF
LOH V
S/L2 IM
M
SD W
T/L3

R1/L11
*2
Junction terminal S1/L21
Fuse
P/+(P3) *3*4*5

P1
Fuse
N/-

X10(MRS)*8
RES
SD

Inverter
*1 U
R/L1
V
S/L2 IM
M
W
T/L3

R1/L11
*2
Junction terminal S1/L21
Fuse
P/+(P3) *3*4*5

P1
Fuse
N/-

X10(MRS)*8
RES
SD

*1 Never connect the power supply to terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 on the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter and the converter.
*2 Instead of connecting the terminals to the AC power supply, the control circuit can be powered by connecting terminal R1/L11 to terminal P/+ (P3)
and terminal S1/L21 to terminal N/-. In this case, do not connect the terminals to the AC power supply. Doing so will damage the inverter.
*3 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). When connecting multiple
inverters in parallel, always use either terminal P/+ or P3 for the connection. (Do not use terminals P/+ and P3 together.)
*4 When the FR-XC is connected, the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 does not affect the function. (The FR-XC can be connected with the
jumper connected.) Refer to page 55 for the jumper connection status in the initial setting.)
*5 Connect between the inverter terminal P/+ and the converter terminal P/+ and between the inverter terminal N/- and the converter terminal N/-
for polarity consistency.
Connecting opposite polarity of terminals P/+ and N/- will damage the converter and the inverter.
*6 Confirm the correct phase sequence of three-phase current to connect between the reactor and the converter, and between the power supply
and terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3.
Incorrect connection will damage the converter.
*7 Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 of the converter. Operating the inverter without connecting them will
damage the converter.
*8 Assign the X10 signal to any of the input terminals.
*9 To use separate power supply for the control circuit, remove each jumper at terminal R1/L11 and terminal S1/L21.
*10 Install UL listed fuses on the input side of the reactor to meet the UL/cUL standards (refer to the FR-XC Instruction Manual for information about
the fuse).

106 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
 *11 Do not install an MCCB or MC between the reactor and the converter. Doing so disrupts proper operation.
*12 Do not connect anything to terminal P4.
1
CAUTION
• In the common bus regeneration mode, always connect between the converter terminal RYB and the inverter terminal
to which the X10 (MRS) signal is assigned and between the converter terminal SE and the inverter terminal SD. If the 2
terminals are not connected, the converter may be damaged.

NOTE
• The control logic (sink logic/source logic) of the converter and the inverter must be matched. The converter does not operate
3
properly if the control logic is not consistent with each other.
(Refer to page 72 for the switching of the control logic. Refer to the FR-XC Instruction Manual for the switching of the control
logic of the converter.) 4
• Keep the wiring length between terminals as short as possible.
• When the power is distorted or falls off sharply, the reactors may generate abnormal acoustic noise. This acoustic noise is
caused by the power supply fault and not by the damage of the converter.
• Configure a system so that the magnetic contactor at the converter input side shuts off the power supply at a failure of the
5
converter or the connected inverter. (The converter does not shut off the power supply by itself.) Failure to do so may overheat
and burn the resistors in the converter and the connected inverter.
• Do not connect a DC reactor to the inverter when using the converter in the common bus regeneration mode. 6
• For details on model selection and connection, refer to the FR-XC Instruction Manual.
• For details on connection in common bus regeneration mode with harmonic suppression enabled or in power regeneration
mode 2, refer to the FR-XC Instruction Manual.
7
2.10.7 Connection of the power regeneration common
8
converter (FR-CV)
When wiring for connecting the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) to the inverter, make sure to match the terminal
symbols (P/+, N/-) on the inverter and on the power regeneration common converter. 9
The FR-CV is compatible with the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
After making sure that the wiring is correct and secure, set "2 or 102" in Pr.30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to
page 724.) 10
R/L1 U
S/L2 
T/L3 V M

R1/L11 
W
S1/L21
Dedicated stand-alone FR-CV type
reactor (FR-CVL) Power regeneration Inverter
common converter
MCCB MC1
R/L11 R2/L12
Three-phase R2/L1 P1
AC power S/L21 S2/L22
S2/L2 P/L+ P/+ (P3)
supply T/L31 T2/L32
T2/L3 N/L- N/-

P24 PC
R/L11
SD SD
S/L21 
RDYA
T/MC1 
RDYB X10
RSO RES
SE
*1 Remove jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 as well as across terminals S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the power supply for the control
circuit to terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do not connect anything to power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3). Incorrect connection will damage
the inverter. (The E.OPT fault (Option fault) occurs. (Refer to page 791.))
*2 Instead of connecting the terminals to the AC power supply, the control circuit can be powered by connecting terminal R1/L11 to terminal P/+ (P3)
and terminal S1/L21 to terminal N/-. In this case, do not connect the terminals to the AC power supply. Doing so will damage the inverter.
*3 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). When connecting multiple
inverters in parallel, always use either terminal P/+ or P3 for the connection. (Do not use terminals P/+ and P3 together.)
*4 When the FR-CV is connected, the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 does not affect the function. (The FR-CV can be connected with the
jumper connected.)
*5 Do not install an MCCB across terminals P/+ and N/- (between terminals P/L+ and P/+ or between N/L- and N/-). Connecting the opposite polarity
of terminals N/- and P/+ will damage the inverter.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
107
 *6 Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 signal. (Refer to page 521.)
*7 Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, and T/MC1. Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage the
power regeneration common converter.
*8 Always connect terminal RDY on the FR-HC2 to a terminal where the X10 signal or MRS signal is assigned on the inverter. Always connect
terminal SE on the FR-HC2 to terminal SD on the inverter. Not connecting these terminals may damage the FR-CV.

NOTE
• The voltage phases of terminals R/L11, S/L21, and T/MC1 and the voltage phases of terminals R2/L1, S2/L2, and T2/L3 must
be matched.
• Use the sink logic when the FR-CV is connected. It cannot be connected when the source logic is selected.
• Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when the FR-CV is connected.

2.10.8 Connection of the power regeneration converter

(MT-RC)
When connecting the power regeneration converter (MT-RC), perform wiring securely as follows. Incorrect connection will
damage the power regeneration converter and the inverter. The MT-RC is compatible with FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
After making sure that the wiring is correct and secure, set "1" in Pr.30 Regenerative function selection and "0" in Pr.70
Special regenerative brake duty.

MCCB MC1 MC2 Inverter

R/L1 U
Three-phase
AC power S/L2 V M
supply T/L3 W
R1/L11

DCL S1/L21
P1
P1 P/+
(P3)*1 N/-
P

MT-RCL
Reset signal
R R2 P N RES
R2
S S2 STF
S2 SD
T T2
T2
C
B
R Alarm signal
A
S
RDY
T

R1 Ready signal

S1 SE

MT-RC
*1 Terminal P3 is equipped in the FR-A820-00770(15K) to 01250(22K), and FR-A840-00470(18.5K) to 01800(55K). Terminal P3 has the same
function as terminal P\+ on the inverter.

NOTE
• When using the inverter with the MT-RC, install a magnetic contactor (MC) at the input side of the inverter so that power is
supplied to the inverter after one second or more has elapsed after powering ON the MT-RC. When power is supplied to the
inverter prior to the MT-RC, the inverter and the MT-RC may be damaged or the MCCB may be shut off or damaged.
Inverter input power supply (MC2) ON

MT-RC power supply (MC1) ON

1s or more

• When connecting the power coordination reactor and others, refer to Instruction Manual of the MT-RC for precautions.

108 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
2.10.9 Connection of the DC reactor (FR-HEL)
• Keep the surrounding air temperature within the permissible range (-10 to +50°C). Keep enough clearance around the 1
reactor because it heats up. (Take 10 cm or more clearance on top and bottom and 5 cm or more on left and right
regardless of the installation direction.)
2
10 cm or more

5 cm or
more
5 cm or 5 cm or
more more
5 cm or
more 4
• When using the DC reactor (FR-HEL), connect it to terminals P/+ and P1.
In this case, the jumper connected across terminals P/+ and P1 must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not be
effective. (The jumper is not installed for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
5
P1 P/+
FR-HEL
6
Remove
the jumper

• Select a DC reactor according to the applied motor capacity (refer to page 826). For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, 7
the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, and when a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC reactor.
• Since the DC reactor (FR-HEL) is electrically connected to the enclosure through mounting screws, the DC reactor is
earthed (grounded) by being securely mounted to the enclosure. However, if the DC reactor is not earthed (grounded) 8
securely enough, an earthing (grounding) cable may be used.
When using an earthing (grounding) cable for the FR-HEL-(H)55K or lower, wire the cable to the installation hole where
varnish is removed. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-HEL.) 9
For the FR-HEL-(H)75K or higher, use an earth (ground) terminal to perform earthing (grounding). (Refer to the Instruction
Manual of the FR-HEL.)

NOTE 10
• The wiring distance must be within 5 m.
• As a reference, the cable gauge for the connection must be equal to or larger than that of the power cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
and the earthing (grounding) cable. (Refer to page 57.)

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.10 Connection of stand-alone option units
109
 2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-
A800-GF)

2.11.1 System configuration example

• Mount the "RJ71EN71", "RJ71GF11-T2", "QJ71GF11-T2", or "LJ71GF11-T2" type CC-Link IE Field Network master/local
module on the main or extension base unit having the programmable controller CPU used as the master station.
• Connect the CC-Link IE Field Network programmable controller (master station) to the inverter with an Ethernet cable.

Master station Intelligent device station

RJ71GF11-T2
Instruction manual regarding Inverter Inverter
the CC-Link IE Field Network
master station Up to 120
RJ71EN71 type, RJ71GF11-T2 type units can be
MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Field Network connected
User's Manual (Application)
...............SH-081259ENG
QJ71GF11-T2 type
MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network
Master/Local Module User's Manual
...............SH-080917ENG Power M Power M
LJ71GF11-T2 type Ethernet cable supply supply
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network
Master/Local Module User's Manual
...............SH-080972ENG

2.11.2 Network configuration

 Network topology
• The network can be wired into star topology, line topology, and ring topology.
• A network can consist of a combination of star and line topologies, but the ring topology cannot be combined with star or
line topology.
Item Description
Modules are configured into a star using a switching hub and Ethernet cables. Slave stations can be easily added in a star
Star topology
topology. Furthermore, data link continues among normally-operating stations in a star topology.*1
Modules are configured into a line with Ethernet cables. A switching hub is not required. If an error occurs, the station in
Line topology
error and the stations after that are disconnected from the network.*1
Modules are configured into a ring using Ethernet cables. Data link continues with the stations that are operating normally.
Ring topology
A switching hub is not required.*1
*1 Add/remove slave stations one by one. If multiple slave stations are added/removed at a time, all stations on the network will be reconnected,
resulting in a momentarily error in all the stations.

 Station number and connection position

• Modules can be connected in any order regardless of the station number.

 Cascade connection
• Up to 20-layer connection is available for the cascade connection.

 Replacing CC-Link IE Field Network devices

• For star topology, slave stations can be replaced without powering off the whole system.

NOTE
• Refer to the MELSEC iQ-R, MELSEC-Q, or MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual for the
detailed network configurations.

2.11.3 Network components

This section describes components comprising the CC-Link IE Field Network.

110 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
 Connection cable
• For wiring, use the 1000BASE-T compliant Ethernet cables. 1
Ethernet cable Board mounted option connector Type
The following conditioning cables:
Category 5e or higher straight cable (double shielded/
STP)
RJ-45 connector • IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T) 2
• ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5e)

• Recommended products (as of October 2020)

Model Manufacturer
3
SC-E5EW series*1 Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

*1 SC-E5EW cable is for in-enclosure and indoor uses. SC-E5EW-L cable is for outdoor use.
4
NOTE
• For CC-Link IE Field Network wiring, use the recommended wiring components by CC-Link Partner Association.
• Cables for CC-Link IE Controller Network cannot be used for CC-Link IE Field Network. 5
• Depending on the cable connector shape, the cable may not be connected to the communication connector.

 Hubs 6
• Use hubs that meet the following conditions. Operation is not guaranteed if the hubs do not meet these conditions.
- Compliance with the IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T)
- Support of the auto MDI/MDI-X function 7
- Support of the auto-negotiation function
- Switching hub (layer 2 switch)*1
*1 A repeater hub is not available. 8
• Industrial switching hub

NZ2EHG-T8
Model Manufacturer
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
9

2.11.4 Component names of the CC-Link IE Field Network 10

communication circuit board

CC-Link IE Field Network communication

circuit board

RUN D LINK
SD ERR Operation status indication LED
RD L.ERR

Connector for communication (PORT2)

Connector for communication (PORT1)

Earth plate

NOTE
• Do not remove the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board or the earth plate.

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
111
 2.11.5 Wiring method
 Ethernet cable connection
• Connect or remove an Ethernet cable after switching the power of the inverter OFF.
• When wiring the Ethernet cable to the communication connector, check the connecting direction of the Ethernet cable
connector. Insert the connector to the communication connector until it clicks.
• When removing the Ethernet cable from the communication connector, hold down the latch on the Ethernet cable
connector, and pull out the cable while holding the latch.

NOTE
• PORT 1 and PORT 2 do not need to be distinguished.
- When only one connector is used in star topology, either PORT 1 or PORT 2 is applicable.
- When using two connectors for line topology and ring topology, an Ethernet cable can be connected to the connectors in
any combination For example, the cable can be connected across two of PORT 1 or across PORT 1 and PORT 2.

Connection between Connection between

PORT1 and PORT1, PORT2 and PORT2 PORT1 and PORT2

Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector

for for for for for for for for
communication communication communication communication communication communication communication communication
(PORT2) (PORT1) (PORT2) (PORT1) (PORT2) (PORT1) (PORT2) (PORT1)

To the next connector for

To the next connector for
communication (PORT2)
communication (PORT2)

 Precautions
• Do not touch the core of the cable-side or module-side connector, and protect it from dirt or dust. If oil from your hand, dirt
or dust is attached to the core, it can increase transmission loss, arising a problem in data link.

112 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
 • Check the following:
- Is any Ethernet cable disconnected?
- Is any of the Ethernet cables shorted?
1
- Are the connectors securely connected?

• Do not use Ethernet cables with broken latches. Doing so may cause the cable to unplug or malfunction.
2
• Hold the connector part when connecting and disconnecting the Ethernet cable. Pulling a cable connected to the module
may damage the module or cable, or result in malfunction due to poor contact.
• The maximum station-to-station distance is 100 m. However, the distance may be shorter depending on the operating
3
environment of the cable. For details, contact your cable manufacturer.
• Check the instructions on page 110 before wiring, and perform correct wiring.
• When the operations listed below are performed, all stations on the network may be reconnected. At that time, a data link
4
error may momentarily occur in all the stations, and the communication error E.OP1 may occur in the connected inverters.
Network configuration Operation
Star topology • Powering ON/OFF a slave station or the switching hub
• Connecting/disconnecting an Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub
5
• Disconnecting an Ethernet cable from a slave station and connecting it to another slave station or to
the switching hub
• Disconnecting ten stations or more, or disconnecting half the number of slave stations in the system or 6
more
• Changing the network topology when adding a slave station
Line topology / ring topology • Simultaneously powering ON/OFF multiple stations
• Simultaneously connecting/disconnecting Ethernet cables to/from multiple stations (When a data link
7
faulty station returns, a data link error will occur in all the stations.)
• Disconnecting ten stations or more, or disconnecting half the number of slave stations in the system or
more 8
• Changing the network topology when adding a slave station

A momentary error
9
in all stations

10

At plug in/unplug or power ON/OFF

• To keep outputting a data link error (inverter communication error), set Pr.500 Communication error execution waiting
time or Pr.502 Stop mode selection at communication error.

NOTE
• When wiring cables to the inverter's RS-485 terminals, take caution not to let the cables touch the CC-Link IE Field Network
communication circuit board or of the inverter's circuit board. Otherwise, electromagnetic noises may cause malfunctions.
• After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter. Doing so may cause a fault, failure, or malfunction.

2.11.6 Operation status LEDs

• Check the operation status LED to confirm the CC-Link IE Field Network operating status.

RUN D LINK
SD ERR
RD L.ERR

2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
113
 LED name Description ON OFF
Normal operation (normal 5 V internal
RUN Operating status Hardware failure
voltage)*1
SD Transmission status Data transmitting No data transmitting
RD Reception status Data receiving No data receiving
D LINK Cyclic communication status Cyclic transmitting No cyclic transmitting or disconnected
ERR *2 Node failure Normal operation
Node failure status
L.ERR Link error Received data error Received data normal
*1 Also lit in no-communication state.
*2 This LED indicates a communication break between the master station and the inverter (due to cable disconnection or breakage, power-OFF of
the master power supply, or reset, etc.).

114 2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING

2.11 Wiring for use of the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
 CHAPTER 3
CHAPTER 3 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF
THE INVERTER 4

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents ..................................................................................116

3.2 Power supply harmonics.......................................................................................................................................123
6
3.3 Installation of a reactor .........................................................................................................................................127
3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC)....................................................................................................128
3.5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation........................................................130
7
3.6 Checklist before starting operation .......................................................................................................................131
3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter ...............................................................................................................134
8

10

115
 3 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER
This chapter explains the precautions for use of this product.
Always read the instructions before use.
For the separated converter type, refer to the "PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER" in the FR-A802 (Separated
Converter Type) Instruction Manual (Hardware).
For the IP55 compatible model, refer to the "PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER" in the FR-A806 (IP55/UL Type
12 specification) Instruction Manual (Hardware).

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage

currents

3.1.1 Leakage currents and countermeasures

Capacitance exists between the inverter I/O cables, other cables and earth and in the motor, through which a leakage current
flows. The amount of current leakage depends on the factors such as the size of the capacitance and the carrier frequency.
Low acoustic noise operation at an increased carrier frequency of the inverter will increase current leakage. Take the following
precautions to prevent current leakage. Earth leakage circuit breakers should be selected based on their rated current
sensitivity, independently of the carrier frequency setting.

 To-earth (ground) leakage currents

Leakage currents may flow not only into the power system of the inverter but also into the other power systems through the
earthing (grounding) cable, etc. These leakage currents may operate earth leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays
unnecessarily.

 Precautions
• If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Selecting Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive.
• By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed to suppress harmonics and surge voltage in the power system of the
inverter and other devices, operation can be performed with the carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).

NOTE
• Long wiring will increase the leakage current.
• High motor capacity will increase the leakage current. The leakage current of the 400 V class is larger than that of the 200 V
class.

 Line-to-line leakage currents

Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacitance between the inverter output cables may operate the external
thermal relay unnecessarily. When the wiring length is long (50 m or more) for the 400 V class small-capacity models (FR-
A840-00250(7.5K) or lower), the external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily because the ratio of the leakage
current to the rated motor current increases.

116 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
 Line-to-line leakage current example (200 V class)
Motor capacity Rated motor Leakage current (mA)*1
Condition
1
(kW) current (A) Wiring length 50 m Wiring length 100 m
0.4 1.8 310 500
0.75 3.2 340 530
1.5 5.8 370 560
• Motor: SF-JR 4P 2
• Carrier frequency: 14.5 kHz
2.2 8.1 400 590
• Cable: 2 mm2, 4 cores
3.7 12.8 440 630
• Cabtyre cable
5.5 19.4 490 680 3
7.5 25.6 535 725

*1 The leakage currents of the 400 V class are about twice as large.

MCCB MC Thermal relay

Motor 4
Power
supply Inverter M

Line-to-line static 5
capacitances
Line-to-line leakage currents path
 Countermeasures
• Use Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay.
6
• If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Selecting Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive.
To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a temperature sensor
7
to directly detect motor temperature.

 Installation and selection of the molded case circuit breaker 8

Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power receiving side to protect the wiring at the inverter input side. Select
an MCCB according to the inverter input side power factor, which depends on the power supply voltage, output frequency and
load. Especially for a completely electromagnetic MCCB, a slightly large capacity must be selected since its operation
9
characteristic varies with harmonic currents. (Check it in the data of the corresponding breaker.) As an earth leakage current
breaker, use the Mitsubishi earth leakage current breaker designed for harmonics and surge suppression.

 Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage circuit 10
breaker
To install the earth leakage circuit breaker on the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows, independently of
the PWM carrier frequency.
• Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents in wire path during commercial
Rated sensitivity current power supply operation
IΔn ≥ 10 × (Ig1 + Ign + Igi + Ig2 + Igm) Ign: Leakage current from noise filters on the input side of the
• Standard breaker inverter
Rated sensitivity current Igm: Leakage current from the motor during commercial power
IΔn ≥ 10 × {Ig1 + Ign + Igi + 3 × (Ig2 + Igm)} supply operation
Igi: Leakage current of inverter unit

Example of leakage current of Example of leakage current of cable path Leakage current example of three-
Leakage current example of per 1km during the commercial power supply phase induction motor during the
cable path per 1 km during the
three-phase induction motor operation when the CV cable is routed in commercial power supply operation
commercial power supply operation
during the commercial metal conduit
when the CV cable is routed in
power supply operation (Three-phase three-wire delta (Totally-enclosed fan-cooled
metal conduit
(200 V 60 Hz) connection 400 V 60 Hz) type motor 400 V 60 Hz)
(200 V 60 Hz)
Leakage currents (mA)

Leakage currents (mA)

120 2. 0
2.0
Leakage currents (mA)
Leakage currents (mA)

120 100 1. 0
100 80 0. 7
1.0
80 0.7 0. 5
60
0.5 0. 3
60 40
0.3 0. 2
40 20
0.2
20 0 0. 1
2 3.5 8 142238 80150 1. 5 3. 7 7. 5 15223755
0 0.1
2 3.5 8 14 2238 80150 1.5 3.7 7.5 15223755 5.5 30 60 100 2. 2 5.5 1118. 53045
5.5 30 60 100 2.2 5.5 11 18.5 3045 Cable size (mm )2
Motor capacity (kW)
Cable size (mm2) Motor capacity (kW)
For " " connection, the amount of leakage current is approx. 1/3 of the above value.

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
117
 Breaker designed
Item for harmonic and Standard breaker
Example surge suppression
5.5 mm2 5m 5.5 mm2 50 m 5m = 0.17
Leakage current Ig1 (mA) 33 ×
1000m
ELB Noise
filter
3φ Leakage current Ign (mA) 0 (without noise filter)
Inverter M 200 V
2.2 kW 1 (without EMC filter). For the leakage current
Leakage current Igi (mA)
Ig1 Ign Ig2 Igm of the inverter, refer to the following table.
50m = 1.65
Igi Leakage current Ig2 (mA) 33 ×
1000m
Motor leakage current Igm
0.18
(mA)
Total leakage current (mA) 3.00 6.66
Rated sensitivity current (mA)
30 100
(≥ Ig × 10)

Inverter leakage current (with and without EMC filter)

Voltage EMC filter

Remarks
(V) ON (mA) OFF (mA)
200 22 1
Phase
earthing
(grounding)
400 35 2
Input power conditions
220 V/60 Hz (200 V class) or 440 V/60 Hz
Earthed-neutral (400 V class), within 3% of power supply
system unbalance
400 2 1

NOTE
• Install the earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) on the input side of the inverter.
• In the connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is blunt against a ground fault in the inverter output side.
Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC
section 250, IEC 61140 class 1 and other applicable standards)
• When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even if the
effective value is within the rating.
In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase, leading to temperature rise.
• The following models and products are standard breakers: the models BV-C1, BC-V, NVB, NV-L, NV-G2N, NV-G3NA, and
NV-2F, the earth leakage circuit breakers with AA neutral wire open-phase protection, and the earth leakage relays (except
NV-ZHA).
The other series, models, and products are designed for harmonic and surge suppression: the NV-C series, NV-S series, MN
series, the models NV30-FA, NV50-FA, NV-H, and BV-C2, earth leakage alarm breaker NF-Z, and the earth leakage relay NV-
ZHA.

3.1.2 Techniques and measures for electromagnetic

compatibility (EMC)
Some electromagnetic noises enter the inverter to cause the inverter malfunction, and others are radiated by the inverter to
cause the peripheral devices to malfunction. (The former is called EMS problem, the latter is called EMI problem, and both is
called EMC problem.) Though the inverter is designed to be immune to noises, it requires the following basic measures and
EMS measures as it handles low-level signals. Pay attention to the electromagnetic noises that could be generated by the
inverter since the inverter chops outputs at high carrier frequency. If these electromagnetic noises cause peripheral devices to
malfunction, EMI countermeasures should be taken to suppress noises. These techniques differ slightly depending on EMI
paths.

 Basic measures
• Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in parallel with each other and do not bundle
them.

118 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
 • Use shielded twisted pair cables for the detector connecting and control signal cables and connect the sheathes of the
shielded cables to terminal SD.
• Ground (Earth) the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.
1
 EMS measures to reduce electromagnetic noises that enter the inverter
and cause it to malfunction 2
When devices that generate many electromagnetic noises (which use magnetic contactors, electromagnetic brakes, many
relays, for example) are installed near the inverter and the inverter may malfunction due to electromagnetic noises, the
following countermeasures must be taken:
3
• Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate many electromagnetic noises to suppress electromagnetic noises.
• Install data line filters to signal cables (refer to page 120).
• Ground (Earth) the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable clamp metal. 4
 EMI measures to reduce electromagnetic noises that are radiated by the
inverter to cause the peripheral devices to malfunction 5
Inverter-generated noises are largely classified into those radiated by the inverter itself and by the I/O cables connected to its
main circuit, those electromagnetically and electrostatically induced to the signal cables of the peripheral devices close to the
power cable connected to the inverter main circuit, and those transmitted through the power cables. 6
Inverter generated
Air propagated Noise directly
electromagnetic Path (a)
7
noise radiated from inverter
noise
Noise radiated from
power supply cable
Path (b)
(e) Telephone
Noise radiated from
Path (c)
motor connection cable

(g) (g)
8
Electromagnetic
Path (d), (e) (b)
induction noise
(a) Sensor
Electrostatic
induction noise
Path (f)
Instrument Receiver (c) Inverter
power supply
9
Electrical path Noise propagated through (f) (a) (f)
Path (g)
propagated noise power supply cable (d)

10
Noise from earthing
(grounding) cable due to Path (h) (c) Sensor
leakage current Motor M

Noise propagation
Countermeasure
path
When devices that handle low-level signals and are liable to malfunction due to electromagnetic noises, e.g.
instruments, receivers and sensors, are contained in the enclosure that contains the inverter or when their signal
cables are run near the inverter, the devices may malfunction due to by air-propagated electromagnetic noises. The
following countermeasures must be taken:
• Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter.
• Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables.
(a), (b), (c)
• Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle
them.
• Set the EMC filter ON/OFF connector of the inverter to the ON position. (Refer to page 120.)
• Inserting a line noise filter into the output suppresses the radiated noise from the cables.
• Use shielded cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further
effects.
When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the power cables, magnetic and static induction noises
may be propagated to the signal cables to cause malfunction of the devices and the following countermeasures must
be taken:
• Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter.
(d), (e), (f) • Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables.
• Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle
them.
• Use shielded cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further
effects.
When the peripheral devices use the power system of the inverter, its generated noises may flow back through the
power supply cables to cause malfunction of the devices and the following countermeasures must be taken:
(g)
• Set the EMC filter ON/OFF connector of the inverter to the ON position. (Refer to page 120.)
• Install the line noise filter (FR-BLF/FR-BSF01) to the power cables (output cables) of the inverter.

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
119
 Noise propagation
Countermeasure
path
When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral device wiring to the inverter, leakage currents may
(h) flow through the earthing (grounding) cable of the inverter to cause the device to malfunction. In that case,
disconnecting the earthing (grounding) cable from the device may stop the malfunction of the device.

 Data line filter

Data line filter is effective as an EMI countermeasure. Provide a data line filter for the detector cable, etc.
• Commercially available data line filter: ZCAT3035-1330 (by TDK), ESD-SR-250 (by TOKIN)
• Specification example (ZCAT3035-1330 by TDK)
Item Description
10 to 100 MHz 80
Impedance (Ω)
100 to 500 MHz 150

39 1 Cable fixing band

13 1
mount
34 1

Outline dimension drawings

30 1
(mm)
TDK

Product name Lot number

The impedance values above are reference values, and not guaranteed values.

 EMI measure example

Enclosure Decrease carrier frequency. Install filter (FR-BLF
or FR-BSF01) on
Inverter inverter output side.
power EMC FR-
Inverter BLF M Motor
supply filter
Use 4-core cable for motor
Separate inverter and power cable and use one cable
power line by more than as earth (ground) cable.
30 cm (at least 10 cm)
from sensor circuit. Use a twisted pair shielded cable.
Control Power Sensor
power supply for
supply sensor
Do not earth (ground) Do not earth (ground) shield but
enclosure directly. connect it to signal common cable.
Do not earth (ground) control cable.

NOTE
• For compliance with the EU EMC Directive, refer to the Instruction Manual (Startup).

3.1.3 Built-in EMC filter

This inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter (capacitive filter) and a common mode choke.
These are effective in reducing air-propagated noise on the input side of the inverter.
To enable the EMC filter, set the EMC filter ON/OFF connector to the ON position. The FM type is initially set to "disabled"
(OFF), and the CA type to "enabled" (ON).

120 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
The input side common mode choke, which is built in the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
inverter, is always enabled regardless of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector setting.
1
FR-A820-00046(0.4K), FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 00250(3.7K) FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to 00630(11K) FR-A820-00770(15K) or higher
00077(0.75K) FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or lower FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to 00380(15K) FR-A840-00470(18.5K) or higher
FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER
FILTER FILTER 2

OFF ON

OFF ON
OFF ON

OFF ON
FILTER FILTER

OFF

OFF
ON

ON
3
EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON EMC filter OFF EMC filter ON

FR-A820-00046(0.4K), FR-A820-00105(1.5K)
00077(0.75K) to 00250(3.7K)
FR-A820-00340(5.5K)
to 00630(11K)
FR-A820-00770(15K)
to 01250(22K)
FR-A820-01540(30K) or higher
FR-A840-00770(30K) or higher
4
FR-A840-00023(0.4K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K) FR-A840-00470(18.5K),
to 00126(3.7K) to 00380(15K) 00620(22K)

5
EMC filter
ON/OFF
connector

7
 How to enable or disable the filter
 For FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or higher and FR-A840-00023(0.4K) or higher
• Before removing a front cover, check to make sure that the indication of the inverter operation panel is OFF, wait for at 8
least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and check that there is no residual voltage using a digital
multimeter or the like.
• When disconnecting the connector, push the fixing tab and pull the connector straight without pulling the cable or forcibly 9
pulling the connector with the tab fixed.
When installing the connector, also engage the fixing tab securely.
(If it is difficult to disconnect the connector, use a pair of needle-nose pliers, etc.) 10

EMC filter Disengage connector fixing tab. With tab disengaged,

ON/OFF connector pull up the connector straight.
(Side view)

 For FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower

• Before removing a front cover, check to make sure that the indication of the inverter operation panel is OFF, wait for at
least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and check that there is no residual voltage using a digital
multimeter or the like.
• Remove the control circuit terminal block. (Refer to page 819.)
• Connect the shorting wire to the corresponding terminal to enable or disable the filter. Connect the wire to the terminal in
the same way as general wiring of the control circuit terminal block. (Refer to page 74.)
• After switching, reinstall the control circuit terminal block as it was.

NOTE
• Fit the connector or shorting wire to either ON or OFF position.
• Enabling (turning ON) the EMC filter increases leakage current. (Refer to page 117.)

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
121
 WARNING
• While power is ON or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.

122 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
3.2 Power supply harmonics 1

3.2.1 Power supply harmonics 2

The inverter may generate power supply harmonics from its converter circuit to affect the power generator, power factor
correction capacitor etc. Power supply harmonics are different from noise and leakage currents in source, frequency band and 3
transmission path. Take the following countermeasure suppression techniques.
• Differences between harmonics and noises
Item Harmonics Noise 4
Normally 40th to 50th degrees or less (3
frequency High frequency (several 10 kHz to 1 GHz order).
kHz or less).
Location To-electric channel, power impedance. To-space, distance, wiring path.
Quantitative understanding Theoretical calculation possible. Random occurrence, quantitative grasping difficult. 5
Changes with the current variation ratio. (Gets
Generated amount Nearly proportional to the load capacity.
larger as switching speed increases.)

Affected equipment immunity Specified by standards per equipment.

Different depending on maker's equipment
specifications. 6
Countermeasure Provide a reactor. Increase distance.

• Countermeasures
7
The harmonic current generated from the inverter to the input side differs according to various conditions such as the wiring
impedance, whether a reactor is used or not, and output frequency and output current on the load side.
For the output frequency and output current, we understand that this should be calculated in the conditions under the rated
load at the maximum operating frequency.
8

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)
9

MCCB MC P/+ P1 10
Power supply

R X
R/L1 U
S Y
S/L2 V M
T Z
T/L3 W
AC reactor Inverter Do not install power
(FR-HAL)
factor improving capacitor.

NOTE
• The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side may be overheated or damaged by the
harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate overcurrent
protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side when the motor is driven by the inverter.
For power factor improvement, install a reactor on the inverter input side or in the DC circuit.

3.2.2 Harmonic suppression guidelines in Japan

Inverters have a converter section (rectifier circuit) and generate a harmonic current.
Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a power transformer. The Harmonic Suppression
Guidelines was established to protect other consumers from these outgoing harmonic currents.

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.2 Power supply harmonics
123
 The three-phase 200 V input specifications 3.7 kW or lower were previously covered by "the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines
for Household Appliances and General-purpose Products" and other models were covered by "the Harmonic Suppression
Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage". However, the transistorized inverter has been
excluded from the target products covered by "the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Household Appliances and General-
purpose Products" in January 2004 and "the Harmonic Suppression Guideline for Household Appliances and General-purpose
Products" was repealed on September 6, 2004.
All capacity and all models of general-purpose inverter used by specific consumers are now covered by "the Harmonic
Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage" (hereinafter referred to as "the
Specific Consumer Guidelines").
• "Specific Consumer Guidelines"
This guideline sets forth the maximum harmonic currents outgoing from a high-voltage or especially high-voltage receiving
consumer who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. If any of the maximum values is exceeded, this
guideline requires that consumer to take certain suppression measures.
• Maximum values of outgoing harmonic currents per 1 kW contract power
Received
5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd Over 23rd
power voltage
6.6 kV 3.5 2.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.9 0.76 0.70
22 kV 1.8 1.3 0.82 0.69 0.53 0.47 0.39 0.36
33 kV 1.2 0.86 0.55 0.46 0.35 0.32 0.26 0.24

 Application of the specific consumer guidelines

Install, add or renew
equipment

Calculation of equivalent
capacity total
Equal to or less
than reference
capacity Equivalent
capacity total

Above reference
capacity
Calculation of outgoing
harmonic current

Not more than More than upper limit

harmonic current upper
limit?
Harmonic suppression
measures necessary
Equal to or less
than upper limit
Harmonic suppression
measures unnecessary

 Conversion factor
Classification Circuit type Conversion factor Ki
Without reactor K31 = 3.4
Three-phase bridge (capacitor With reactor (AC side) K32 = 1.8
3
smoothing) With reactor (DC side) K33 = 1.8
With reactors (AC, DC sides) K34 = 1.4
When a high power factor converter
5 Self-excitation three-phase bridge K5 = 0
is used

124 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.2 Power supply harmonics
 Equivalent capacity limit
Received power voltage Reference capacity 1
6.6 kV 50 kVA
22/33 kV 300 kVA
66 kV or more 2000 kVA
2
 Harmonic content (when the fundamental current is considered as 100%)
Reactor 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
Not used 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8 3
Used (AC side) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
Used (DC side) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
Used (AC, DC sides) 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4
4
 Calculation of equivalent capacity P0 of harmonic generating equipment
"Equivalent capacity" is the capacity of a 6-pulse converter converted from the capacity of consumer's harmonic generating
equipment and is calculated by the following equation. If the sum of equivalent capacities is higher than the limit (refer to the
5
list of the equivalent capacity limits), harmonics must be calculated by the equation in next subheading.
P0 = Σ (Ki × Pi) [kVA]
Ki: Conversion factor (Refer to the list of the conversion factors.)
6
Pi: Rated capacity of harmonic generating equipment*1 [kVA]
i: Number indicating the conversion circuit type
*1 Rated capacity: Determined by the capacity of the applied motor and found in the table "Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents of
inverter-driven motors". The rated capacity used here is used to calculate the generated harmonic amount and is different from the power supply
7
capacity required for actual inverter drive.

 Calculation of outgoing harmonic current

Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted from received power voltage) × operation ratio × 8
harmonic content
• Operation ratio: actual load factor × operation time ratio during 30 minutes
• Harmonic content: Refer to the list of the harmonic content. 9
 Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents of inverter-driven motors

Applicable
Fundamental
wave current (A)
Fundamental
wave current
Rated
Outgoing harmonic current converted from 6.6 kV (mA) (No reactor, 100%
operation ratio)
10
capacity
motor (kW) converted from
200 V 400 V (kVA) 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
6.6 kV (mA)
0.4 1.61 0.81 49 0.57 31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882
0.75 2.74 1.37 83 0.97 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494
1.5 5.50 2.75 167 1.95 108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006
2.2 7.93 3.96 240 2.81 156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320
3.7 13.0 6.50 394 4.61 257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092
5.5 19.1 9.55 579 6.77 376.1 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42
7.5 25.6 12.8 776 9.07 504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97
11 36.9 18.5 1121 13.1 728.7 459.6 95.29 86.32 48.20 34.75 29.15 20.18
15 49.8 24.9 1509 17.6 980.9 618.7 128.3 116.2 64.89 46.78 39.24 27.16
18.5 61.4 30.7 1860 21.8 1209 762.6 158.1 143.2 79.98 57.66 48.36 33.48
22 73.1 36.6 2220 25.9 1443 910.2 188.7 170.9 95.46 68.82 57.72 39.96
30 98.0 49.0 2970 34.7 1931 1218 252.5 228.7 127.7 92.07 77.22 53.46
37 121 60.4 3660 42.8 2379 1501 311.1 281.8 157.4 113.5 95.16 65.88
45 147 73.5 4450 52.1 2893 1825 378.3 342.7 191.4 138.0 115.7 80.10
55 180 89.9 5450 63.7 3543 2235 463.3 419.7 234.4 169.0 141.7 98.10

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.2 Power supply harmonics
125
 Fundamental Fundamental Outgoing harmonic current converted from 6.6 kV (mA) (with a DC reactor,
Rated
Applicable wave current (A) wave current 100% operation ratio)
capacity
motor (kW) converted from
200 V 400 V (kVA) 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
6.6 kV (mA)
75 245 123 7455 87.2 2237 969 626 373 350 239 224 164
90 293 147 8909 104 2673 1158 748 445 419 285 267 196
110 357 179 10848 127 3254 1410 911 542 510 347 325 239
132 — 216 13091 153 3927 1702 1100 655 615 419 393 288
160 — 258 15636 183 4691 2033 1313 782 735 500 469 344
220 — 355 21515 252 6455 2797 1807 1076 1011 688 645 473
250 — 403 24424 286 7327 3175 2052 1221 1148 782 733 537
280 — 450 27273 319 8182 3545 2291 1364 1282 873 818 600
315 — 506 30667 359 9200 3987 2576 1533 1441 981 920 675
355 — 571 34606 405 10382 4499 2907 1730 1627 1107 1038 761
400 — 643 38970 456 11691 5066 3274 1949 1832 1247 1169 857
450 — 723 43818 512 13146 5696 3681 2191 2060 1402 1315 964
500 — 804 48727 570 14618 6335 4093 2436 2290 1559 1462 1072
560 — 900 54545 638 16364 7091 4582 2727 2564 1746 1636 1200
630 — 1013 61394 718 18418 7981 5157 3070 2886 1965 1842 1351

 Determining if a countermeasure is required

A countermeasure for harmonics is required if the following condition is satisfied: outgoing harmonic current > maximum value
per 1 kW contract power × contract power.

 Harmonic suppression techniques

No. Item Description
Reactor installation (FR- Install an AC reactor (FR-HAL) on the AC side of the inverter or a DC reactor (FR-HEL) on its DC side,
1
HAL, FR-HEL) or install both to suppress outgoing harmonic currents.
This converter trims the current waveform to be a sine waveform by switching the rectifier circuit
High power factor
(converter module) with transistors. Doing so suppresses the generated harmonic amount significantly.
converter (FR-HC2),
2 Connect it to the DC area of an inverter. Use the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) with the
multifunction regeneration
accessories that come as standard. To use the FR-XC series converter, use the converter with an FR-
converter (FR-XC)
XCB box-type reactor and enable the harmonic suppression function.
Installation of power factor When used with a reactor connected in series, the power factor improving correction capacitor can
3
improving capacitor absorb harmonic currents.
Transformer multi-phase Use two transformers with a phase angle difference of 30° in combinations of to Δ and Δ to Δ, to
4
operation provide an effect corresponding to 12 pulses, reducing low-degree harmonic currents.
A capacitor and a reactor are used together to reduce impedances at specific frequencies. Harmonic
5 Passive filter (AC filter)
currents are expected to be absorbed greatly by using this technique.
This filter detects the current in a circuit generating a harmonic current and generates a harmonic current
equivalent to a difference between that current and a fundamental wave current to suppress the
6 Active filter
harmonic current at the detection point. Harmonic currents are expected to be absorbed greatly by using
this technique.

126 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.2 Power supply harmonics
3.3 Installation of a reactor 1

When the inverter is connected near a large-capacity power transformer (1000 kVA or more) or when a power factor correction
capacitor is to be switched over, an excessive peak current may flow in the power input circuit, damaging the converter circuit. 2
To prevent this, always install an AC reactor (FR-HAL), which is available as an option.

AC reactor
(kVA) 3

Power supply system

Inverter 5300
MCCB MC (FR-HAL) 5000 Capacities requiring
R X 4000 installation of

capacity
R/L1 U AC reactor

4
Power 3000
S Y
S/L2 V M 2000
supply
T Z 1000
T/L3 W
110165 247 330 420 550 kVA
Inverter capacity
5

10

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.3 Installation of a reactor
127
 3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC)

 Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)

On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes. (Refer to page 29 for selection.)
• To disconnect the inverter from the power supply at activation of a protective function or at malfunctioning of the driving
system (emergency stop, etc.).
For example, an MC prevents overheat or burnout of the brake resistor when heat capacity of the resistor is insufficient or
brake regenerative transistor is damaged with short while connecting an optional brake resistor.
• To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at power restoration after an inverter stop made by a power failure.
• To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work.
Use the inverter input current as a reference for selection of an MC to perform an emergency stop during operation, and
select the MC conforming to JEM 1038-AC-3 class rated operational current.

NOTE
• Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000 times),
frequent starts and stops of the magnetic contactor must be avoided. Turn ON or OFF the start (STF/STR) signal for the
inverter start control to run or stop the inverter.

• Inverter start/stop circuit example

As shown in the following figure, always use the start signal (turn ON or OFF the STF/STR signal) to make a start or stop.

MCCB MC
R/L1 U To the
Power motor
S/L2 V
supply
T/L3 W
R1/L11
∗2
S1/L21
T ∗1
Inverter
Operation preparation
C1
OFF ON
MC B1
A1
MC
RA
STF/STR
Start/Stop SD
MC Start
RA
Stop RA

*1 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer.

*2 To hold the Fault signal when the inverter's protective circuit is activated, connect the control circuit power supply terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21
to the input side of the MC. Before connection, remove jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and across terminals S/L2 and S1/L21. (Refer
to page 77 for removal of the jumper.)

 Handling of the magnetic contactor on the inverter's output side

Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the
magnetic contactor is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will activate.
When the magnetic contactor is provided to switch to a commercial power supply, for example, it is recommended to use the
electronic bypass function Pr.135 to Pr.139 (refer to page 563). (The commercial power supply operation is not available with
Vector control dedicated motors (SF-V5RU, SF-THY) nor with PM motors.)

128 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC)
 Handling of the manual contactor on the inverter's output side
A PM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance magnets embedded inside. High-voltage is generated at the motor 1
terminals while the motor is running even after the inverter power is turned OFF. In an application where the PM motor is driven
by the load even after the inverter is powered OFF, a low-voltage manual contactor must be connected at the inverter's output
side. 2
NOTE
• Before wiring or inspection for a PM motor, confirm that the PM motor is stopped. In an application, such as fan and blower,
where the motor is driven by the load, a low-voltage manual contactor must be connected at the inverter's output side, and 3
wiring and inspection must be performed while the contactor is open. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
• Do not open or close the contactor while the inverter is running (outputting).

10

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC)
129
 3.5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400
V class motor insulation
In the PWM type inverter, a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated at the motor terminals. Especially in a
400 V class motor, the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation. When the 400 V class motor is driven by the inverter,
consider the following countermeasures:

 Countermeasures (with induction motor)

It is recommended to take one of the following countermeasures:

 Rectifying the motor insulation and limiting the PWM carrier frequency according to the wiring
length
For the 400 V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced motor.
Specifically,
• Order a "400 V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor".
• For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use an "inverter-driven dedicated
motor".
• Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below according to the wiring length.
Wiring length
Shorter than 50 m 50 to 100 m Longer than 100 m
Pr.72 PWM frequency selection 15 (14.5 kHz) or lower 9 (9 kHz) or lower 4 (4 kHz) or lower

 Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side

• For the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) to the inverter
output side.
• For the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, connect the sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) to the inverter output side.

 Countermeasures (with PM motor)

When the wiring length exceeds 50 m, set "9" (6 kHz) or less in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.

NOTE
• For details on Pr.72 PWM frequency selection, refer to page 356. (When using an optional sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC),
set "25" (2.5 kHz) in Pr.72.)
• For details on the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) and the sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), refer to the
Instruction Manual of each option.
• A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) can be used under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector
control. A sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) can be used under V/F control. Do not use the filters under different control methods.
• The carrier frequency is limited during PM sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.)

130 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation
3.6 Checklist before starting operation 1

The FR-A800 series inverter is a highly reliable product, but incorrect peripheral circuit making or operation/handling method
may shorten the product life or damage the product. Before starting operation, always recheck the following points. 2
Refer to Check by
Checkpoint Countermeasure
page user

Crimp terminals are insulated.

Use crimp terminals with insulation sleeves to wire the power supply and the
—
3
motor.
The wiring between the power
supply (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/ Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage
L3) and the motor (terminals U, V, the inverter. Never perform such wiring.
55
4
W) is correct.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure, or malfunction. Always keep the inverter
No wire offcuts are left from the
clean. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to —
time of wiring.
allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter. 5
Use an appropriate cable gauge to suppress the voltage drop to 2% or less. If
The main circuit cable gauge is the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a voltage drop in the
57
correctly selected. main circuit will cause the motor torque to decrease especially during the output
of a low frequency. 6
Keep the total wiring length within the specified length. In long distance wiring,
The total wiring length is within the charging currents due to stray capacitance in the wiring may degrade the fast-
57
specified length. response current limit operation or cause the equipment on the inverter's output
side to malfunction. Pay attention to the total wiring length. 7
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency
Countermeasures are taken components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM
120
against EMI. radios) used near the inverter. In such case, enable the EMC filter (turn ON the
EMC filter ON/OFF connector) to minimize interference. 8
On the inverter's output side, there
is no power factor correction Doing so will shut off the inverter output or damage the capacitor or surge
—
capacitor, surge suppressor, or suppressor. If any of the above devices is connected, immediately remove it.
radio noise filter installed. 9
When performing an inspection or For a short time after the power-OFF, a high voltage remains in the smoothing
rewiring on the product that has capacitor, and it is dangerous. Before performing an inspection or rewiring, wait
been energized, the operator has 10 minutes or longer after the power supply turns OFF, then confirm that the —
waited long enough after shutting
off the power supply.
voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- of the inverter is low enough
using a digital multimeter, etc.
10
• A short circuit or ground fault on the inverter's output side may damage the
inverter module.
• Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation
The inverter's output side has no since repeated short circuits caused by peripheral circuit inadequacy or an
short circuit or ground fault earth (ground) fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation —
occurring. resistance may damage the inverter module.
• Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and phase-to-phase insulation of
the inverter's output side before power-ON. Especially for an old motor or use
in hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance, etc.
The circuit is not configured to use
Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter
the inverter's input-side magnetic
circuit, frequent starts and stops of the magnetic contactor must be avoided. 128
contactor to start/stop the inverter
Turn ON or OFF the inverter's start (STF/STR) signal to run or stop the inverter.
frequently.
A mechanical brake is not
connected to terminals P/+ and To terminals P/+ and PR, connect only an external brake resistor. 97
PR.
Application of a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O
The voltage applied to the inverter
signal circuits or opposite polarity may damage the I/O devices. Especially check
I/O signal circuits is within the 68
the wiring to prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being connected
specifications.
incorrectly to short circuit terminals 10E and 5.

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.6 Checklist before starting operation
131
 Refer to Check by
Checkpoint Countermeasure
page user
When using a switching circuit as shown below, chattering due to misconfigured
sequence or arc generated at switching may allow undesirable current to flow in
and damage the inverter. Miswiring may also damage the inverter. (The
commercial power supply operation is not available with Vector control
dedicated motors (SF-V5RU, SF-THY) nor with PM motors.)

When using the electronic bypass MC1

Interlock
operation, electrical and
Power R/L1 U
mechanical interlocks are M —
supply
provided between the electronic S/L2 V MC2
bypass contactors MC1 and MC2. T/L3 W
Undesirable current
Inverter
If switching to the commercial power supply operation while a failure such as an
output short circuit has occurred between the magnetic contactor MC2 and the
motor, the damage may further spread. If a failure has occurred between the
MC2 and the motor, a protection circuit such as using the OH signal input must
be provided.
If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power
A countermeasure is provided for failure, provide an MC on the inverter's input side and also make up a sequence
power restoration after a power which will not switch ON the start signal. If the start signal (start switch) remains —
failure. ON after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the
power is restored.
The encoder must be directly connected to a motor shaft without any backlash.
For Vector control, the encoder is
(Real sensorless vector control or PM sensorless vector control do not require 87
properly installed.
an encoder.)
On the inverter's input side, connect an MC for the following purposes:
• To disconnect the inverter from the power supply at activation of a protective
function or at malfunctioning of the driving system (emergency stop, etc.).
A magnetic contactor (MC) is • To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at power restoration after
installed on the inverter's input an inverter stop made by a power failure. 128
side. • To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance
and inspection work.
To use an MC to perform an emergency stop during operation, select the MC
conforming to JEM 1038-AC-3 rated current for the inverter rated input current.
The magnetic contactor on the
Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both
inverter's output side is properly 128
the inverter and motor are at a stop.
handled.
A PM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance magnets embedded
inside. High-voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the motor is
When using a PM motor, a low-
running even after the inverter power is turned OFF. In an application, such as
voltage manual contactor is
fan and blower, where the motor is driven by the load, a low-voltage manual 128
installed on the inverter's output
contactor must be connected on the inverter's output side, and wiring and
side.
inspection must be performed while the contactor is open. Otherwise you may
get an electric shock.
If electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter causes the frequency
setting signal to fluctuate and the motor rotation speed to be unstable when
changing the motor speed with analog signals, the following countermeasures
are effective:
An EMI countermeasure is
• Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel
provided for the frequency setting 118
with each other and do not bundle them.
signals.
• Run the signal cables as far away as possible from the power cables (inverter
I/O cables).
• Use shielded cables.
• Install a data line filter to signal cable (example: ZCAT3035-1330 by TDK).
When performing frequent starts/stops by the inverter, rise/fall in the
temperature of the transistor element of the inverter will repeat due to a repeated
flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal
fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing
A countermeasure is provided for
current at locked condition, starting current, etc. Reducing current may extend —
an overload operation.
the service life but may also cause torque shortage, which leads to a start failure.
Adding a margin to the current can eliminate such a condition. For an induction
motor, use an inverter of a higher capacity (up to two ranks). For a PM motor,
use an inverter and PM motor of higher capacities.
The specifications and rating
Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements. 826
match the system requirements.

132 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.6 Checklist before starting operation
 Refer to Check by
Checkpoint Countermeasure
page user
When a motor is driven by the inverter, axial voltage is generated on the motor
1
shaft, which may cause electrical corrosion of the bearing in rare cases
depending on the wiring, load, operating conditions of the motor or specific
inverter settings (high carrier frequency and EMC filter ON). Contact your sales
Countermeasures are taken
against electrical corrosion on the
representative to take appropriate countermeasures for the motor. The following
—
2
shows examples of countermeasures for the inverter.
motor bearing. • Decrease the carrier frequency.
• Turn OFF the EMC filter.
• Provide a common mode choke*1 on the output side of the inverter. (This is 3
effective regardless of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector setting.)
*1 Recommended common mode choke: FT-3KM F series FINEMET® common mode choke cores manufactured by Hitachi Metals, Ltd.
FINEMET is a registered trademark of Hitachi Metals, Ltd.
4

10

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.6 Checklist before starting operation
133
 3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter
When a fault is detected by the protective function, the protective function activates and outputs the Fault signal. However, the
Fault signal may not be output at an inverter's fault occurrence when the detection circuit or output circuit fails, etc. Although
Mitsubishi assures the best quality products, provide an interlock which uses inverter status output signals to prevent accidents
such as damage to the machine when the inverter fails for some reason. Also at the same time consider the system
configuration where a failsafe from outside the inverter, without using the inverter, is enabled even if the inverter fails.

 Interlock method which uses the inverter status output signals

By combining the inverter output signals to provide an interlock as shown below, an inverter failure can be detected.
Refer to
No. Interlock method Check method Used signals
page
Inverter protective function Operation check of an alarm contact.
a Fault (ALM) signal 483
operation Circuit error detection by negative logic.
b Inverter operating status Operation ready signal check. Inverter operation ready (RY) signal 479
Start (STF or STR) signal
c Inverter running status Logic check of the start signal and running signal. 479, 722
Inverter running (RUN) signal
Start (STF or STR) signal
d Inverter running status Logic check of the start signal and output current. 487, 722
Output current detection (Y12) signal
• When using various signals, assign the functions to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) referring to
the table on the left.

Output Pr.190 to Pr.196 setting

signal Positive logic Negative logic
ALM 99 199
RY 11 111
RUN 0 100
Y12 12 112

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Checking by using the Fault signal output from the inverter... (a)
When the inverter's protective function activates and the inverter output is stopped, the Fault (ALM) signal is output. (The ALM
signal is assigned to terminal A1B1C1 in the initial setting). With this signal, check that the inverter operates properly. In
addition, negative logic can be set. (ON when the inverter is normal, OFF when the fault occurs.)
Output frequency

Inverter fault occurrence

(trip)

Time
ALM ON OFF
(when output
at NC contact)
ON OFF
RES
Reset processing
(about 1 s)
Reset ON

 Checking the inverter operating status by using the Inverter operation ready signal output
from the inverter ... (b)
The Inverter operation ready (RY) signal is output when the inverter power is ON and the inverter becomes operative. Check
if the RY signal is output after powering ON the inverter.

134 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter
 Checking the inverter operating status by using the start signal input to the inverter and the
Inverter running signal output from the inverter ... (c)
The Inverter running (RUN) signal is output when the inverter is running. (The RUN signal is assigned to terminal RUN in the
1
initial setting.) Check if the RUN signal is output while a start signal (the STF/STR signal for forward/reverse rotation command)
is input to the inverter. Even after the start signal is turned OFF, the RUN signal is kept output until the inverter makes the motor
to decelerate and to stop. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter's deceleration time.
2
Power ON OFF
supply
STF
ON OFF 3
ON
RH

4
Output frequency

DC injection brake
operation point
DC injection

Pr. 13 Starting
brake operation
5
frequency
Reset
Time
processing

RY
ON OFF 6
RUN ON OFF

 Checking the motor operating status by using the start signal input to the inverter and the 7
Output current detection signal output from the inverter ... (d)
The Output current detection (Y12) signal is output when the inverter operates and currents flows into the motor.
Check if the Y12 signal is output while a start signal (the STF/STR signal for forward/reverse rotation command) is input to the
8
inverter. The Y12 signal is initially set to be output at 150% inverter rated current. Adjust the level to around 20% using no load
current of the motor as reference with Pr.150 Output current detection level.
Like the Inverter running (RUN) signal, even after the start signal is turned OFF, the Y12 signal is kept output until the inverter
stops the output to a decelerating motor. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter's deceleration time.
9
 Backup method which does not use the inverter
Even if the interlock is provided by the inverter status signal, enough failsafe is not ensured depending on the failure status of 10
the inverter itself. For example, if an inverter CPU fails in a system interlocked with the inverter's Fault, start, and RUN signals,
no Fault signals will be output and the RUN signal will be kept ON because the inverter CPU is down.
Provide a speed detector to detect the motor speed and current detector to detect the motor current, and consider the backup
system such as performing a check as follows according to the level of importance of the system.

 Start signal and actual operation check

Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to the
inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector. Note that the current is flowing
through the motor while the motor coasts to stop, even after the inverter's start signal is turned OFF. For the logic check,
configure a sequence considering the inverter's deceleration time. In addition, it is recommended to check the three-phase
current when using the current detector.

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter
135
  Command speed and actual operation check
Check for a gap between the actual speed and commanded speed by comparing the inverter's speed command and the speed
detected by the speed detector.

Controller

System failure

Inverter Sensor
(speed, temperature,
air volume, etc.)

To the alarm detection sensor

136 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter
 CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 BASIC OPERATION
4

4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)..................................................................................................................................138

4.2 Monitoring the inverter ..........................................................................................................................................143
6
4.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode .........................................................................................................144
4.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)......................................................................................146
4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation) ...........................................................................................................149
7
4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation) ...................................................................................................155
4.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation) .........................................................................................................162
8

10

137
 4 BASIC OPERATION
This chapter explains the basic operation of this product.
Always read the instructions before use.

4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)

4.1.1 Components of the operation panel (FR-DU08)

To mount the operation panel (FR-DU08) on the enclosure surface, refer to page 84.

(a) (b) (c)

(d)
(e)

(f)

(j) (g)
(k)
(l)

(m)
(h)
(i)

138 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)
No. Appearance Name Description
PU: ON when the inverter is in the PU operation mode.
EXT: ON when the inverter is in the External operation mode. (ON when the inverter in
1
Inverter operation the initial setting is powered ON.)
(a)
mode LED indicator NET: ON when the inverter is in the Network operation mode.
PU and EXT: ON when the inverter is in the External/PU combined operation mode 1
or 2. 2
MON: ON when the operation panel is in the monitor mode. Quickly blinks twice
Operation panel mode intermittently while the protective function is activated.
(b)
LED indicator Slowly blinks when the display-off function of the operation panel is valid.
PRM: ON when the operation panel is in the parameter setting mode. 3
IM: ON when the inverter is set to control the induction motor.
Controlled motor type
(c) PM: ON when the inverter is set to control the PM motor.
LED indicator
The indicator blinks during test operation.

(d)
Frequency unit LED ON when the actual frequency is monitored. (Blinks when the set frequency is 4
indicator monitored.)
Shows a numeric value (readout) of a monitor item such as the frequency or a
(e) Monitor (5-digit LED) parameter number.
(The monitor item can be changed according to the settings of Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776.) 5
PLC function LED
(f) ON when the PLC function of the inverter is valid.
indicator
FWD key: Starts forward rotation operation. Its LED is ON during forward rotation
operation. 6
REV key: Starts reverse rotation operation. Its LED is ON during reverse rotation
operation.
(g) FWD key, REV key Either LED blinks under the following conditions.
• When the frequency command is not given even if the forward/reverse command is 7
given.
• When the frequency command is equal to the starting frequency or lower.
• When the MRS signal is being input.

(h) STOP/RESET key

Stops the operation commands. 8
Used to reset the inverter when the protective function is activated.
The setting dial of the Mitsubishi Electric inverters. Turn the setting dial to change the
setting of frequency or parameter, etc.
Press the setting dial to perform the following operations: 9
(i) Setting dial • To display a set frequency on the LED display in the monitor mode. (The monitor item
shown on the display can be changed by using Pr.992.)
• To display the present setting during calibration.
• To display a fault record number in the fault history mode. 10
Switches the operation panel to a different mode.
The easy setting of the inverter operation mode is enabled by pressing this key

(j) MODE key simultaneously with .

Every key on the operation panel becomes inoperable by holding this key for 2 seconds.
The key inoperable function is invalid when Pr.161 = "0 (initial setting)". (Refer to page
341.)
Confirms each selection. Initial setting in the monitor mode
When this key is pressed during inverter Output Output Output
operation, the monitor item changes. frequency current voltage
(k) SET key
(The monitor item on each screen can be
changed according to the settings of Pr.52,
Pr.774 to Pr.776.)
Goes back to the previous display.
(l) ESC key
Holding this key for a longer time changes the display back to the monitor mode.
Switches between the PU operation mode, the PUJOG operation mode, and the
External operation mode.
The easy setting of the inverter operation mode is enabled by pressing this key
(m) PU/EXT key
simultaneously with .
Also cancels the PU stop warning.

4. BASIC OPERATION
4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)
139
 4.1.2 Basic operation of the operation panel
 Basic operation
Operation mode switchover/Frequency setting

External operation mode∗1(displayed at power-ON) PU operation mode∗1 PU Jog operation mode∗1

(Example) Alternating

Change the setting. Frequency setting written and complete

Monitor

Second screen Third screen

(Output current∗2 monitoring) (Output voltage∗2 monitoring)
First screen (Output frequency∗2 monitoring)
Parameter setting

The present setting is

displayed.

(Example) Alternating

Change the setting. Parameter write complete

∗5

Parameter clear All parameter clear Fault history clear Parameter copy

Group parameter setting Automatic parameter setting IPM initialization Initial value change list
Function

Trace function ∗3

(Example) (Example) (Example)

Blinking Blinking Blinking
Fault history

Fault record 1 ∗4 Fault record 2 ∗4 Fault record 8 ∗4

The last eight fault records can be displayed. (On the display of the last fault record
(fault record 1), a decimal point LED is ON.)
When the fault history is empty, is displayed.

Hold down
*1 For details on operation modes, refer to page 389.
*2 The monitor item can be changed. (Refer to page 446.)
*3 For details on the trace function, refer to page 649.
*4 For details on the fault history, refer to page 779.
*5 The USB memory mode indication appears while a USB memory device is connected. (Refer to page 85.)

140 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)
 Parameter setting mode
In the parameter setting mode, inverter functions (parameters) are set. 1
The following table explains the indications in the parameter setting mode.
Refer
Operation panel indication Function name Description to
page
2
Under this mode, the set value of the displayed parameter number is read
Parameter setting mode 142
or changed.
Clears and resets parameter settings to the initial values. Calibration 3
Parameter clear parameters and offline auto tuning parameters are not cleared. For 743
details on the uncleared parameters, refer to page 864.
Clears and resets parameter settings to the initial values. Calibration
All parameter clear parameters and the offline auto tuning parameters are also cleared. For 743 4
details on the uncleared parameters, refer to page 864.
Fault history clear Deletes the fault history. 774

Parameter copy
Copies the parameter settings saved in the inverter to the operation
panel. The parameters copied to the operation panel can be also copied 744
5
to other inverters.
Identifies the parameters that have been changed from their initial
Initial value change list 751
settings. 6
Changes the parameters to the settings required to drive an IPM motor
IPM initialization (MM-CF) as a batch. Also changes the parameters back to the settings 230
required to drive an induction motor.
Changes parameter settings as a batch. The target parameters include 7
Automatic parameter communication parameters for the Mitsubishi Electric human machine
350
setting interface (GOT) connection and the parameters for the rated frequency
settings of 50 Hz/60 Hz.
Group parameter setting Displays parameter numbers by function groups. 201 8

4.1.3 Digital characters and their corresponding printed

9
equivalents
Digital characters displayed on the operation panel display are as follows.
10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B(b) C c D(d)

E(e) F(f) G(g) H(h) I(i) J(j) K(k) L(l) M(m) N n O o P(p) Q(q)

R r S(s) T(t) U u V v W w X(x) Y(y) Z(z)

4. BASIC OPERATION
4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)
141
 4.1.4 Changing the parameter setting value
The following shows the procedure to change the setting of Pr.1 Maximum frequency.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

4. Selecting the parameter

Turn until " " (Pr.1) appears. Press to read the present set value.
" " (initial value) appears.

5. Changing the setting value

Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to confirm the selection. " " and " "
are displayed alternately.

• Turn to read another parameter.

• Press to show the setting again on the LCD display.

• Press twice to show the next parameter.

• Press three times to return the monitor display to the indication of the frequency.

NOTE
• If a parameter write condition is not satisfied, a parameter write error appears on the LCD display. (Refer to page 779.)

Error indication Description

Parameter write error

Write error during operation

Calibration error

Mode designation error

• When Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "0 (initial setting)," the parameter setting change is only available while the inverter
is stopped and under the PU operation mode. To enable the parameter setting change while the inverter is running or under
the operation mode other than PU operation mode, change the Pr.77 setting. (Refer to page 345.)

142 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU08)
4.2 Monitoring the inverter 1

4.2.1 Monitoring of output current and output voltage 2

3
• Press on the operation panel in the monitor mode to switch the monitor item between output frequency, output current,
and output voltage.

Operating procedure
1. Press during inverter operation to monitor the output frequency. [Hz] indicator turns ON.
5
2. Press to monitor the output current. This operation is valid under any operation mode of the inverter and
whether the inverter is running or at a stop. The unit of current "A" appears. 6
3. Press to monitor the output voltage. The unit of voltage "V" appears.

NOTE 7
• Other monitor item, such as output power or set frequency, is also available. Use Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor
selection or Pr.774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 to Pr.776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 to change the
setting. (Refer to page 446.)
8
4.2.2 First priority monitor screen
The first priority monitor screen, which is displayed first when the operation panel becomes in the monitor mode, is selectable. 9
To set it, press for a while when the desired monitor item is displayed on a monitor screen.
The following show the procedure to set the monitor screen displaying the output current as the first priority monitor screen. 10

Operating procedure
1. Change the mode of the operation panel to the monitor mode, and switch the monitor screen to the one on which
the output current can be monitored.

2. Press for a while (1 second). The output current monitor screen is set as the first priority monitor screen.

3. When the operation panel is in the monitor mode next time, the output current monitored value is displayed first.

NOTE
• Use Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection or Pr.774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 to Pr.776 Operation
panel monitor selection 3 to change the monitor item. (Refer to page 446.)

4.2.3 Displaying the set frequency

To display the present set frequency, change the mode of the operation panel to the monitor mode and press the setting dial

( ) while the inverter runs in the PU operation mode or in the External/PU combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 Operation

mode selection = "3").

NOTE
• Use Pr.992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection to change the item to be displayed. (Refer to page 446.)

4. BASIC OPERATION
4.2 Monitoring the inverter
143
 4.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode
The operation mode suitable for start and speed command combinations can be set easily using Pr.79 Operation mode
selection.
The following shows the procedure to operate with the external start command (STF/STR) and the frequency command by

using .

Operating procedure
1. Press and for 0.5 seconds.

Blinking

2. Turn until " " (External/PU combined operation mode 1) appears. (For other settings, refer to the
following table.)

Blinking

3. Press to confirm the selection. External/PU combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3") is set.
Operation method
Operation panel indication Frequency Operation mode
Start command
command

, *1 PU operation mode
Blinking

External Analog voltage

External operation mode
(STF, STR) input
Blinking

External
*1 External/PU combined operation mode 1
(STF, STR)
Blinking

Analog voltage
, External/PU combined operation mode 2
input
Blinking

*1 To use the setting dial as a potentiometer, refer to page 341.

144 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode
NOTE
• " " appears if the Pr.79 setting is tried to be changed while the inverter is set that only the parameters registered in
1
the user group are read (Pr.160 = "1") but Pr.79 is not included in the user group.

• " " appears if a setting change is attempted during inverter operation. Turn OFF the start command ( /
2
, or STF/STR signal).

• If is pressed before pressing , the easy setting is terminated and the operation panel returns to the monitor
mode. If the easy setting is terminated while Pr.79 = "0 (initial value)", check the inverter operation mode because the inverter
3
may switch its operation mode between the PU operation mode and the External operation mode.

• Reset by pressing is enabled.

4
• The priorities of the frequency commands while Pr.79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14)
> terminal 4 analog input (AU) > digital input from the operation panel".

10

4. BASIC OPERATION
4.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode
145
 4.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode
parameters)
Parameters that are frequently used for the FR-A800 series are grouped as simple mode parameters.
When Pr.160 User group read selection = "9999", only the simple mode parameters are displayed on the operation panel.
This section explains the simple mode parameters.

4.4.1 Simple mode parameter list

For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial values of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the
necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter's setting, change and check can be made
on the operation panel (FR-DU08).

• Pr.160 User group read selection can narrow down the displayed parameters to only the simple mode parameters. (In the
initial setting, all parameters are displayed.) Set Pr.160 User group read selection as required. (To change the parameter
setting, refer to page 142.)

Pr.160 setting Description

9999 Only simple mode parameters are displayed.
All parameters (simple mode parameters and extended parameters)
0 (initial value)
are displayed.
1 Only parameters registered in user groups are displayed.

146 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)
 Simple mode parameter
Pr.
Initial value*11 Refer 1
Pr. Name Increment Range Application to
group FM CA page
6%*1
4%*2
Set this parameter to obtain a higher starting 2
torque under V/F control. Also set this when a
0 G000 Torque boost 0.1% 3%*3 0 to 30% loaded motor cannot be driven, the warning 706
"OL" occurs, and the inverter output is shut off
2%*4
1%*5
with the fault indication "E.OC1". 3
Maximum 120 Hz*6
1 H400 0.01 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the upper limit for the output frequency.
frequency 60 Hz*7
Minimum
428 4
2 H401 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the lower limit for the output frequency.
frequency
Set this parameter when the rated motor
3 G001 Base frequency 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz frequency is 50 Hz. Check the rating plate of
the motor.
707
5
Multi-speed
4 D301 setting (high 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
speed)
Multi-speed Pre-set the speeds that will be switched
151, 6
156,
5 D302 setting (middle 0.01 Hz 30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz among by terminals.
411
speed)

6 D303
Multi-speed
setting (low speed)
0.01 Hz 10 Hz 0 to 590 Hz 7
5s*9
7 F010 Acceleration time 0.1 s 0 to 3600 s Sets the acceleration time.
15s*10
5s*9
367 8
8 F011 Deceleration time 0.1 s 0 to 3600 s Sets the deceleration time.
15s*10
H000 Electronic thermal 0.01 A*6 Inverter rated 0 to 500 A*6 Protects the motor from heat. Set the rated
9
C103 O/L relay 0.1 A*7 current *8
0 to 3600 A*7 motor current.
415 9
Operation mode Select the start and frequency command
79 D000 1 0 0 to 4, 6, 7 389
selection sources.

125 T022
Terminal 2
frequency setting 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
Allows the frequency at the maximum
potentiometer setting (5 V in the initial setting)
159, 10
505
gain frequency to be changed.
Terminal 4 Allows the frequency at the maximum current
161,
126 T042 frequency setting 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz input (20 mA in the initial setting) to be
505
gain frequency changed.
This function restricts the parameters that are
User group read
160 E440 1 0 0, 1, 9999 read by the operation panel and parameter 354
selection
unit.
0, 3003,
Selects the PM sensorless vector control and
PM parameter 3103, 8009,
998 E430 1 0 set the parameters that are required to drive a 230
initialization 8109, 9009,
PM motor.
9109
Changes parameter settings as a batch. The
target parameters include communication
1, 2, 10, 11,
Automatic parameters for the Mitsubishi Electric human
999 E431 1 9999 12, 13, 20, 350
parameter setting machine interface (GOT) connection and the
21, 9999
parameters for the rated frequency settings of
50/60 Hz.
*1 The initial value for the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower.
*2 The initial value for the FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K), FR-A840-00052(1.5K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K).
*3 The initial values for the FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K).
*4 The initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K).
*5 The initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) and higher.
*6 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*7 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
*8 The initial value for the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower is set to the 85% of the inverter rated current.
*9 The initial value for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.
*10 Initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840-00310(11K) and higher.
*11 The initial value in "FM" column is for the FM-type inverter that has terminal FM, and that in "CA" column is for the CA-type inverter that has
terminal CA.

4. BASIC OPERATION
4.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)
147
  Parameters for the CC-Link IE Field Network communication (FR-A800-
GF)
Refer
Initial
Pr. Pr. group Name Increment Range Application to
value
page

0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22,
DO0 output 25 to 28, 30 to 36,
313 M410 1 9999
selection 38 to 57, 60, 61,
63, 64, 68, 70, 79,
80, 84 to 99, 100 to
108, 110 to 116,
DO1 output 120, 122, 125 to Assign signals to the remote registers RX10 473,
314 M411 1 9999
selection 128, 130 to 136, to RX12. 758
138, to 157, 160,
161, 163, 164,
168, 170, 179,
DO2 output 180, 184 to 199,
315 M412 1 9999 200 to 208, 300 to
selection
308, 9999

Communication Enables the error reset function in any

0 (100)
reset selection/ operation mode.
—
Ready bit status Enables the error reset function only in the
1 (101)
selection Network operation mode.
349 1 0 663
0 Enables the error reset function in any
Communication operation mode.
N010
reset selection Enables the error reset function only in the
1
Network operation mode.
Network
434 N110 number (CC- 1 0 0 to 255 Enter the network number of the inverter.
Link IE) 752
Station number
435 N111 1 0 0 to 255 Enter the station number of the inverter.
(CC-Link IE)
Communication Set the time from when the communication
500 N011 error execution 0.1s 0s 0 to 999.8 s line error occurs until the inverter starts the
waiting time operation for the communication error
Communication
error Displays the communication error occurrence
501 N012 1 0 0
occurrence count 663
count display
Stop mode
Set the operations when the communication
selection at
502 N013 1 0 0 to 4 line error occurs and when the
communication
communication line error is removed.
error
Frequency 0 Signed frequency command value
541 N100 command sign 1 0 752
1 Unsigned frequency command value
selection
Operation Set the frequency for the operation when a
0 to 590 Hz
frequency communication error occurs.
779 N014 during 0.01 Hz. 9999 663
The motor runs at the frequency used before
communication 9999
the communication error.
error

NOTE
• When Pr.160 in the FR-A800-GF is set to "9999", the parameters for the CC-Link IE Field Network communication, as well as
the simple mode parameters, are displayed.

148 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)
4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation) 1

Select a method to give the frequency command from the list below, and refer to the specified page for its procedure.
Method to give the frequency command Refer to page
2
Setting the frequency on the operation panel in the frequency setting mode 149
Give commands by turning the setting dial like a potentiometer 150
Give commands by turning ON/OFF switches wired to inverter's terminals (multi-speed setting) 151 3
Setting the frequency by inputting voltage signals 152
Setting the frequency by inputting current signals 153

4
4.5.1 Setting the frequency on the operation panel
(example: operating at 30 Hz) 5
• Use the operation panel (FR-DU08) to give a start command and a frequency command. (PU operation)
6
Operation panel (FR-DU08)

8
The following shows the procedure to operate at 30 Hz.

Operating procedure
9
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode. 10
2. Changing the operation mode

Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.

3. Setting the frequency

Turn until the target frequency " " (30.00 Hz) appears. The indication blinks for about five seconds.

While the indication is flashing, press to confirm the selection for the frequency. " " and " "are

displayed alternately. After about three seconds of alternate display, the monitor display goes back to " " (the
indication of a monitored value).

(If is not pressed during the flashing for about five seconds, the monitor display goes back to " " (0.00

Hz). In that case, turn again and set the frequency.)

4. Start → acceleration → constant speed

Press or to start running. The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting of

Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (30.00 Hz) appears on the monitor.
(To change the set frequency, return to step 3. The previously set frequency appears.)

4. BASIC OPERATION
4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
149
 5. Deceleration → stop

Press to stop. The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting of Pr.8 Deceleration

time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating.

NOTE

• To display the set frequency under PU operation mode or External/PU combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3"), press .

(Refer to page 446.)

• can also be used like a potentiometer to perform inverter operation. (Refer to page 150.)

Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389

4.5.2 Perform PU operation using the setting dial like a

potentiometer

• Set Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection = "1" (setting dial potentiometer).

The following shows the procedure to change the frequency from 0 Hz to 60 Hz during operation.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.

3. Changing the parameter setting

Change Pr.161 setting to "1". (To change the setting, refer to page 142.)

4. Start

Press or to start the inverter operation.

5. Setting the frequency

Turn until " " appears. The value in the flashing indication is set as the value of a set frequency (The

indication blinks for about five seconds). needs not to be pressed.

NOTE
• If the indication changes from the blink of "60.00" to the display of "0.00", Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation
selection may be set to a value other than "1".

• Simply turning enables frequency setting whether the inverter is running or at a stop.
• The newly-set frequency is saved as the set frequency in EEPROM after 10 seconds.
• With the setting dial, the frequency can go up to the setting value of Pr.1 Maximum frequency. Check the Pr.1 Maximum
frequency setting, and adjust the setting according to the application.

Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428
Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selectionpage 341

150 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
4.5.3 Setting the frequency with switches (multi-speed 1
setting)
2
• Use or on the operation panel (FR-DU08) to give a start command.
• Turn ON the RH, RM, or RL signal to give a frequency command (multi-speed setting).
• Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2).
3

[Connection diagram] 4
Inverter Speed 1

Output frequency (Hz)

(High speed)

High speed RH Operation panel

(FR-DU08)
Speed 2
(Middle speed)
5
Middle speed RM Speed 3
(Low speed)
Low speed RL
Switch
6
SD Time

RH ON
ON
RM
ON
RL

The following shows the procedure to operate at a low speed (10 Hz).
7
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter 8
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode 9

Set "4" in Pr.79. [PU] and [EXT] indicators are ON. (To change the setting, refer to page 144.)

3. Setting the frequency

Turn ON the low-speed switch (RL signal). 10
4. Start → acceleration → constant speed

Press or to start running. The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting of Pr.7

Acceleration time, and " " (10.00 Hz) appears on the monitor.

5. Deceleration → stop

Press to stop. The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting of Pr.8 Deceleration

time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating. Turn OFF the low-speed switch (RL
signal).

NOTE
• Initially, the high-speed switch (RH signal) is set to 60 Hz for the FM type inverter or 50 Hz for the CA type inverter. The middle-
speed switch (RM signal) is set to 30 Hz, and the low-speed switch (RL signal) is set to 10 Hz. (To change the settings, use
Pr.4, Pr.5, and Pr.6, respectively.)
• In the initial setting, if two or more speed switches (signals) are simultaneously turned ON, priority is given to the switch (signal)
for the lower speed. For example, when both RH and RM signals turn ON, the RM signal (Pr.5) has the higher priority.
• Up to 15-speed switching operation can be performed.

Parameters referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting)page 411
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389

4. BASIC OPERATION
4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
151
 4.5.4 Setting the frequency using an analog signal
(voltage input)

• Use or on the operation panel (FR-DU08) to give a start command.

• Use the frequency setting potentiometer to give a frequency command (by connecting it to terminals 2 and 5 (voltage input)).
• Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2).

[Connection diagram] (The inverter supplies 5 V power to the frequency setting potentiometer via terminal 10.)

Inverter
Operation panel
(FR-DU08)
10
Frequency setting
2
potentiometer
5
Potentiometer

The following shows the procedure to operate at 60 Hz.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Set "4" in Pr.79. [PU] and [EXT] indicators are ON. (To change the setting, refer to page 142.)

3. Start

Press or . [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks as no frequency command is given.

4. Acceleration → constant speed

Turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the monitor increases
according to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor.

5. Deceleration
Turn the frequency setting potentiometer counterclockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the monitor
decreases according to the setting of Pr.8 Deceleration time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the
motor stops rotating. [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks.

6. Stop

Press . [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.

NOTE
• To change the frequency (60 Hz) at the maximum voltage input (initial value: 5 V), adjust Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain frequency.
• To change the frequency (0 Hz) at the minimum voltage input (initial value: 0 V), adjust the calibration parameter C2
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency.
• When terminal 10 is used, the maximum output frequency may fluctuate in a range of ±6 Hz due to fluctuations in the output
voltage (5 V ±0.5 VDC). Use Pr.125 or Pr.C4 to adjust the output frequency at the maximum analog input as required. (Refer
to page 505.)
• When terminal 10E is used, the maximum output frequency may fluctuate (in a range of ±2 to 3 Hz) due to fluctuations in the
output voltage (10 ±0.4 VDC). Use Pr. 125 or Pr. C4 to adjust the output frequency at the maximum analog input as required.
(Refer to page 505.)

152 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
 Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389 1
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505
C2(Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequencypage 505

4.5.5 Setting the frequency using an analog signal 2

(current input)
3
• Use or on the operation panel (FR-DU08) to give a start command.
• Use the current regulator which outputs 4 to 20 mA to give a frequency command (by connecting it across terminals 4 and 5
(current input)).
4
• Turn ON the AU signal.
• Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2).
5
[Connection diagram]
Inverter
Operation panel
6
AU signal AU (FR-DU08)

SD
Current signal 4(+) 7
source
(4 to 20mADC) 5(-)

The following shows the procedure to operate at 60 Hz. 8

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
9
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Set "4" in Pr.79. [PU] and [EXT] indicators are ON. (To change the setting, refer to page 142.) 10
3. Selecting the input via terminal 4
Turn ON the Terminal 4 input selection (AU) signal. Input via terminal 4 to the inverter is enabled.

4. Start

Press or . [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks as no frequency command is given.

5. Acceleration → constant speed

Input a current of 20 mA to the inverter from the regulator. The frequency value on the monitor increases according
to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor.

6. Deceleration
Input a current of 4 mA or less. The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting of Pr.8
Deceleration time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating. [FWD] or [REV] indicator
blinks.

7. Stop

Press . [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.

4. BASIC OPERATION
4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
153
 NOTE
• Pr.184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4 (initial value)" (AU signal).
• To change the frequency (60 Hz) at the maximum current input (initial value: 20 mA), adjust Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency
setting gain frequency.
• To change the frequency (0 Hz) at the minimum current input (initial value: 4 mA), adjust the calibration parameter C5
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency.

Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505
Pr.184 AU terminal function selectionpage 521
C5(Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequencypage 505

154 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation) 1

Select a method to give the frequency command from the list below, and refer to the specified page for its procedure.
Method to give the frequency command Refer to page
2
Setting the frequency on the operation panel in the frequency setting mode 155
Turning ON/OFF switches wired to inverter's terminals (multi-speed setting) 156
Setting the frequency by inputting voltage signals 157 3
Setting the frequency by inputting current signals 160

4.6.1 Setting the frequency on the operation panel 4

• Turn ON the STF/STR signal to give a start command.

5
• Use on the operation panel (FR-DU08) to give a frequency command.
• Set Pr.79 = "3" (External/PU combined operation mode 1).
6
[Connection diagram]

Inverter
Operation panel
7
Forward rotation STF (FR-DU08)
start
Reverse rotation STR
Switch
start
SD 8

The following shows the procedure to operate at 30 Hz.

9
Operating procedure
1. Changing the operation mode 10
Set "3" in Pr.79. [PU] and [EXT] indicators are ON. (To change the setting, refer to page 142.)

2. Setting the frequency

Turn until the target frequency " " (30.00 Hz) appears. The indication blinks for about five seconds.

While the indication is flashing, press to confirm the selection for the frequency. " " and " "are

displayed alternately. After about three seconds of alternate display, the monitor display goes back to " " (the

indication of a monitored value). (If is not pressed during the flashing for about five seconds, the monitor

display goes back to " " (0.00 Hz). In that case, turn again and set the frequency.)

3. Start → acceleration → constant speed

Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting
of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (30.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. [FWD] indicator is ON during the
forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is ON during the reverse rotation. (To change the set frequency, return to step
2. The previously set frequency appears.)

4. Deceleration → stop
Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting
of Pr.8 Deceleration time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating.

4. BASIC OPERATION
4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
155
 NOTE
• When both the forward rotation start switch (STF signal) and the reverse rotation start switch (STR signal) are turned ON, the
motor cannot be started. If both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
• Pr.178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr.179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61")
(initial value).
• Setting Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "3" enables multi-speed operation.

• If on the operation panel is pressed during the External operation, the inverter stops and the PU stop warning is

activated (" " appears on the LCD display of the operation panel). To reset the PU stop warning, turn OFF the start switch

(STF or STR signal), and then press (refer to page 338).

Parameters referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting)page 411, Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367
Pr.178 STF terminal function selection, Pr.179 STR terminal function selectionpage 521
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389

4.6.2 Setting the frequency and giving a start command

with switches (multi-speed setting) (Pr.4 to Pr.6)

• Turn ON the STF/STR signal to give a start command.

• Turn ON the RH, RM, or RL signal to give a frequency command (multi-speed setting).

[Connection diagram]

Speed 1
Output frequency (Hz)

Inverter (High speed)

Forward rotation start Speed 2

STF (Middle speed)
Reverse rotation start STR Speed 3
(Low speed)
High speed RH
Middle speed RM Time
Low speed RL RH ON
SD RM
ON
Switch
ON
RL

The following shows the procedure to operate at a high speed (60 Hz).

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Setting the frequency

Turn ON the high-speed switch (RH signal).

3. Start → acceleration → constant speed

Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting
of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. [FWD] indicator is ON during the
forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is ON during the reverse rotation. When the RM signal is turned ON, 30 Hz is
displayed. When the RL signal is turned ON, 10 Hz is displayed.

4. Deceleration → stop
Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting
of Pr.8 Deceleration time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating. [FWD] or [REV]
indicator turns OFF. Turn OFF the high-speed switch (RH signal).

156 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
 NOTE
• When both the forward rotation start switch (STF signal) and the reverse rotation start switch (STR signal) are turned ON, the 1
motor cannot be started. If both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
• Initially, the high-speed switch (RH signal) is set to 60 Hz for the FM type inverter or 50 Hz for the CA type inverter. The middle-
speed switch (RM signal) is set to 30 Hz, and the low-speed switch (RL signal) is set to 10 Hz. (To change the settings, use
Pr.4, Pr.5, and Pr.6, respectively.)
2
• In the initial setting, if two or more speed switches (signals) are simultaneously turned ON, priority is given to the switch (signal)
for the lower speed. For example, when both RH and RM signals turn ON, the RM signal (Pr.5) has the higher priority.
• Up to 15-speed switching operation can be performed. 3

Parameters referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting)page 411
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367
4

4.6.3 Setting the frequency using an analog signal

5
(voltage input)

• Turn ON the STF/STR signal to give a start command.

6
• Use the frequency setting potentiometer to give a frequency command (by connecting it across terminals 2 and 5 (voltage
input)).
7
[Connection diagram]
(The inverter supplies 5 V power to the frequency setting potentiometer via terminal 10.)
8
Inverter

Forward rotation start STF

Reverse rotation start STR
SD
9
Switch

10
Frequency setting
potentiometer
2
5
10
Potentiometer

The following shows the procedure to operate at 60 Hz.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Start
Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks as no frequency command is given.

3. Acceleration → constant speed

Turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the monitor increases
according to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. [FWD]
indicator is ON during the forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is ON during the reverse rotation.

4. Deceleration
Turn the frequency setting potentiometer counterclockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the monitor
decreases according to the setting of Pr.8 Deceleration time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor
stops rotating. [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks.

5. Stop
Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.

4. BASIC OPERATION
4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
157
 NOTE
• When both the forward rotation start switch (STF signal) and the reverse rotation start switch (STR signal) are turned ON, the
motor cannot be started. If both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
• Pr.178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr.179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61")
(initial value).
• When terminal 10 is used, the maximum output frequency may fluctuate in a range of ±6 Hz due to fluctuations in the output
voltage (5 V ±0.5 VDC). Use Pr. 125 or Pr. C4 to adjust the output frequency at the maximum analog input as required. (Refer
to page 505.)
• When terminal 10E is used, the maximum output frequency may fluctuate (in a range of ±2 to 3 Hz) due to fluctuations in the
output voltage (10 ±0.4 VDC). Use Pr. 125 or Pr. C4 to adjust the output frequency at the maximum analog input as required.
(Refer to page 505.)

Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367
Pr.178 STF terminal function selection, Pr.179 STR terminal function selectionpage 521

158 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
4.6.4 Changing the frequency (60 Hz, initial value) at the 1
maximum voltage input (5 V, initial value)
2
• Change the maximum frequency.

The following shows the procedure to change the frequency at 5 V from 60 Hz (initial value) to 50 Hz using a frequency setting 3
potentiometer for 0 to 5 VDC input. Set 50 Hz in Pr.125 so that the inverter outputs 50 Hz at 5 V input.

Operating procedure 4
1. Selecting the parameter

Turn until " " (Pr.125) appears.

5
Press to read the present set value. (60.00 Hz)

2. Changing the maximum frequency

6
Turn to change the set value to " ". (50.00 Hz)

Press to confirm the selection. " " and " "are displayed alternately.
7
3. Selecting the mode and the monitor item

Press three times to select the monitor mode, and change the monitor item to the frequency.
8
4. Start
Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal), and turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full.
(Refer to steps 2 and 3 in 4.6.3.) 9
The motor is operated at 50 Hz.

NOTE
• To change the frequency at the input of 0 V (minimum voltage), use the calibration parameter C2.
10
Initial value
60Hz
(50Hz)

Output frequency
(Hz)

Gain Pr.125
Bias
C2
(Pr.902)
0 100%
0 Frequency setting signal 5V
0 10V
C3(Pr.902) C4(Pr.903)

• Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting voltage gain are the following: adjustment by applying a voltage directly
across terminals 2 and 5, and adjustment using a specified point without applying a voltage across terminals 2 and 5. (Refer
to page 505.)

Parameters referred to
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505
C2(Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequencypage 505
C4(Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gainpage 505

4. BASIC OPERATION
4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
159
 4.6.5 Setting the frequency using an analog signal
(current input)

• Turn ON the STF/STR signal to give a start command.

• Turn ON the AU signal.
• Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "2" (External operation mode).

[Connection diagram]

Inverter

Forward rotation start STF

Reverse rotation start STR
Switch AU
SD
Current signal 4(+)
source
(4 to 20mADC) 5(-)

The following shows the procedure to operate at 60 Hz.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Selecting the input via terminal 4

Turn ON the Terminal 4 input selection (AU) signal. Input via terminal 4 to the inverter is enabled.

3. Start
Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). [FWD] or [REV] indicator blinks as no frequency command is given.

4. Acceleration → constant speed

Input a current of 20 mA to the inverter from the regulator. The frequency value on the monitor increases according
to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and " " (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. [FWD] indicator is ON
during the forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is ON during the reverse rotation.

5. Deceleration
Input a current of 4 mA or less. The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting of Pr.8
Deceleration time, the monitor displays " " (0.00 Hz), and the motor stops rotating. [FWD] or [REV] indicator
blinks.

6. Stop
Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). [FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF.

NOTE
• When both the forward rotation start switch (STF signal) and the reverse rotation start switch (STR signal) are turned ON, the
motor cannot be started. If both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
• Pr.184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4 (initial value)" (AU signal).

Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367
Pr.184 AU terminal function selectionpage 521

160 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
4.6.6 Changing the frequency (60 Hz, initial value) at the 1
maximum current input (at 20 mA, initial value)
2
• Change the maximum frequency.

The following shows the procedure to change the frequency at 20 mA from 60 Hz (initial value) to 50 Hz using a frequency 3
setting potentiometer for 4 to 20 mA input. Set 50 Hz in Pr.126 so that the inverter outputs 50 Hz at 20 mA input.

Operating procedure 4
1. Selecting the parameter

Turn until " " (Pr.126) appears.

5
Press to read the present set value (60.00 Hz).

2. Changing the maximum frequency

6
Turn to change the set value to " " (50.00 Hz).

Press to confirm the selection. " " and " "are displayed alternately.
7
3. Selecting the mode and the monitor item

Press three times to select the monitor mode and to monitor a frequency.
8
4. Start
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR) to apply a 20 mA current (refer to steps 3 and 4 in 4.6.5).
Operate at 50 Hz. 9
NOTE
• To change the frequency at the input of 4 mA (minimum current), use the calibration parameter C5.
10
Initial value
60Hz
(50Hz)

Output frequency
(Hz)

Gain Pr.126
Bias
C5
(Pr.904)
0 20 100%
0 4 20mA
0 1 Frequency setting signal 5V
0 2 10V
C6(Pr.904) C7(Pr.905)

• Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting current gain are the following: adjustment by applying a current through
terminals 4 and 5, and adjustment using a specified point without applying a current through terminals 4 and 5. (Refer to page
505.)

Parameters referred to
Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505
C5(Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequencypage 505
C7(Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gainpage 505

4. BASIC OPERATION
4.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
161
 4.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation)

4.7.1 Giving a start command by using external signals

for JOG operation

• JOG operation is performed while the JOG signal is ON.

• Use Pr.15 Jog frequency to set a frequency, and set Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time to set the acceleration/
deceleration time for JOG operation.
• Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "2" (External operation mode).

[Connection diagram]

Inverter

Forward rotation start STF

Reverse rotation start STR
JOG signal JOG

SD
Switch

The following shows the procedure to operate at 5 Hz.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Turning ON the JOG signal

Turn ON the JOG switch (JOG signal). The inverter is set ready for the JOG operation.

3. Start → acceleration → constant speed

Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency increases according to the setting of Pr.16 Jog
acceleration/deceleration time, and " " (5.00 Hz) appears on the LCD display. [FWD] indicator is ON during
the forward rotation, and [REV] indicator is ON during the reverse rotation.

4. Deceleration → stop
Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency decreases according to the setting of Pr.16 Jog
acceleration/deceleration time. " " (0.00 Hz) appears on the LCD display, and the motor stops rotating.
[FWD] or [REV] indicator turns OFF. Turn OFF the JOG switch (JOG signal).

NOTE
• To change the frequency, change the setting of Pr.15 Jog frequency (initial value: 5 Hz).
• To change the acceleration/deceleration time, change the setting of Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time (initial value:
0.5 second).

Parameters referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequency, Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration timepage 410
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389

162 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation)
4.7.2 Giving a start command from the operation panel 1
for JOG operation
2
• JOG operation is performed while or on the operation panel is pressed.

3
Operation panel
(FR-DU08)
4

The following shows the procedure to operate at 5 Hz.

6
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode. 7
2. Changing the operation mode

Press twice to choose the PUJOG operation mode. The display shows " ", and [PU] indicator is ON. 8
3. Start → acceleration → constant speed

Hold or down to keep the JOG operation. The frequency increases according to the setting of Pr.16 9
Jog acceleration/deceleration time, and " " (5.00 Hz) appears on the LCD display.

4. Deceleration → stop
10
Release or . The frequency decreases according to the setting of Pr.16 Jog acceleration/
deceleration time. " " (0.00 Hz) appears on the LCD display, and the motor stops rotating.

NOTE
• To change the frequency, change the setting of Pr.15 Jog frequency (initial value: 5 Hz).
• To change the acceleration/deceleration time, change the setting of Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time (initial value:
0.5 second).

Parameters referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequency, Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration timepage 410

4. BASIC OPERATION
4.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation)
163
 MEMO

164 4. BASIC OPERATION

4.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation)
 CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS
4

5.1 Parameter list........................................................................................................................................................166

5.2 Control method .....................................................................................................................................................216
6
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control ....................235
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control .............................................................272
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control ..............................................................298
7
5.6 Adjustment during Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control .......................332
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters .....................................................................................................................334
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern ............................................367
8
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command...............................................................................................389
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter.........................................................................................................................415
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring .............................................................................................................444
9
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters .........................................................................................................496
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters.............................................................................................................................528
5.14 (A) Application parameters ...................................................................................................................................562
10
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters............................................................................................................659
5.16 (G) Control parameters.........................................................................................................................................705
5.17 Parameter clear / All parameter clear ...................................................................................................................743
5.18 Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel ...................................................................................744
5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB memory .....................................................................................747
5.20 Checking parameters changed from their initial values (initial value change list).................................................751
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF) .............................................................................................................752

165
 5 PARAMETERS
This chapter explains the function setting for use of this product.
Always read the instructions before use.
The following marks are used to indicate the controls. (Parameters without any mark are valid for all the controls.)
Mark Control method Applied motor
V/F V/F control
Magnetic flux Advanced magnetic flux vector control Three-phase induction motor
Sensorless Real sensorless vector control
Vector Vector control Three-phase induction motor, PM motor
PM PM sensorless vector control PM motor

The setting range and the initial value of parameters differ depending on the structure or functions of the inverter. The following
common designations are used for each type of the inverter models.
Inverter model Common designation
FR-A8[]0 Standard model
FR-A8[]2 Separated converter type
FR-A8[]6 IP55 compatible model

5.1 Parameter list

5.1.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)

For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial values of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the
necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter's setting, change and check can be made
on the operation panel (FR-DU08).

NOTE
• Simple indicates simple mode parameters. Use Pr.160 User group read selection to indicate the simple mode parameters
only (initial setting is to indicate the extended mode parameters).
• The changing of the parameter settings may be restricted in some operating statuses. Use Pr.77 Parameter write selection
to change the setting of the restriction.
• Refer to page 864 for instruction codes for communication and availability of Parameter clear, all clear, and Parameter copy.

166 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Function Pr.
Pr.
group
Name Setting range setting
FM CA
Refer Customer
to page setting
1
increments
6%*1
4%*1
2
0 G000 Torque boost Simple 0 to 30% 0.1% 3%*1 706
2%*1
1%*1
3
120 Hz*2
1 H400 Maximum frequency Simple 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 428
60 Hz*3
2 H401 Minimum frequency Simple 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 428
4
3 G001 Base frequency Simple 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 707
Basic function

Multi-speed setting (high

4 D301 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 411
speed) Simple
Multi-speed setting (middle
5
5 D302 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 30 Hz 411
speed) Simple
Multi-speed setting (low
6 D303
speed) Simple
0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 10 Hz 411
6
*4
5s
7 F010 Acceleration time Simple 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 367
15s*5

8 F011 Deceleration time Simple 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s

5s*4
367
7
*5
15s
Electronic thermal O/L 0 to 500 A*2 0.01 A*2 415,
9
H000
C103
relay Simple
0 to 3600 A*3 0.1 A*3
Inverter rated
current
532, 8
Rated motor current Simple 551
DC injection brake operation
10 G100 0 to 120 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 3 Hz 715
DC injection brake

frequency
DC injection brake operation 9
11 G101 0 to 10 s, 8888 0.1 s 0.5 s 715
time
4%*6
12 G110
DC injection brake operation
voltage
0 to 30% 0.1% 2%*6 715 10
1%*6
381,
— 13 F102 Starting frequency 0 to 60 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.5 Hz
382
— 14 G003 Load pattern selection 0 to 5, 12 to 15 1 0 708
15 D200 Jog frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 5 Hz 410
JOG operation

Jog acceleration/
16 F002 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 410
deceleration time

— 17 T720 MRS input selection 0, 2, 4 1 0 524

High speed maximum 120 Hz*2
— 18 H402 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 428
frequency 60 Hz*3
0 to 1000 V, 8888,
— 19 G002 Base frequency voltage 0.1 V 9999 8888 707
9999
Acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration/deceleration time

20 F000 1 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 367

reference frequency

Acceleration/deceleration
21 F001 0, 1 1 0 367
time increments

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
167
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
Stall prevention operation 245,
Multi-speed setting Stall prevention

22 H500 0 to 400% 0.1% 150%

level (Torque limit level) 431

Stall prevention operation

23 H610 level compensation factor at 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 431
double speed

D304 to Multi-speed setting (speed 4

24 to 27 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 411
D307 to speed 7)

Multi-speed input
— 28 D300 0, 1 1 0 411
compensation selection
Acceleration/deceleration
— 29 F100 0 to 6 1 0 372
pattern selection
0 to 2, 10, 11, 20, 21,
100 to 102, 110, 111, 1 0
120, 121*11
Regenerative function 2, 10, 11, 102, 110,
— 30 E300 724
selection 1 10
111*12
0, 2, 10, 20, 100, 102,
1 0
110, 120*13
31 H420 Frequency jump 1A 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429
Frequency jump

32 H421 Frequency jump 1B 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429

33 H422 Frequency jump 2A 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429
34 H423 Frequency jump 2B 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429
35 H424 Frequency jump 3A 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429
36 H425 Frequency jump 3B 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429
— 37 M000 Speed display 0, 1 to 9998 1 0 444
41 M441 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 0 to 100% 0.1% 10% 484
Frequency detection

42 M442 Output frequency detection 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 484

Output frequency detection

43 M443 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 484
for reverse rotation

Second acceleration/ 367,

44 F020 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s
deceleration time 622
367,
45 F021 Second deceleration time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999
622
46 G010 Second torque boost 0 to 30%, 9999 0.1% 9999 706
Second function

47 G011 Second V/F (base frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 707
Second stall prevention
48 H600 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 431
operation level
Second stall prevention
49 H601 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 431
operation frequency
Second output frequency
50 M444 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 30 Hz 484
detection
Second electronic thermal O/ 0 to 500 A, 9999 *2 0.01 A*2 415,
H010
51 L relay 9999 532,
C203 *3
0.1 A*3
Rated second motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999 551

168 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
0, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22
Operation panel main to 36, 38 to 46, 50 to
52 M100 1 0 446
monitor selection 57, 61, 62, 64, 67, 71
to 75, 87 to 98, 100 2
Monitoring function

1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18,

21, 24, 32 to 34, 36,
FM/CA terminal function
54 M300 46, 50, 52, 53, 61, 62, 1 1 457
selection
67, 70, 87 to 90, 92, 3
93, 95, 97, 98
Frequency monitoring
55 M040 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 457
reference
0 to 500 A *2 0.01 A*2 Inverter rated
4
56 M041 Current monitoring reference 457
0 to 3600 A *3 0.1 A*3 current
628,
Automatic restart

57 A702 Restart coasting time 0, 0.1 to 30 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999

635 5
58 A703 Restart cushion time 0 to 60 s 0.1 s 1s 628
6
— 59 F101 Remote function selection 0 to 3, 11 to 13 1 0 377
Energy saving control
— 60 G030
selection
0, 4, 9 1 0 712
7
0 to 500 A, 9999 *2 0.01 A*2
Automatic acceleration/deceleration

384,
61 F510 Reference current 9999
0 to 3600 A, 9999 *3 0.1 A*3 387

62 F511
Reference value at
acceleration
0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 384 8
Reference value at
63 F512 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 384
deceleration
9
Starting frequency for
64 F520 0 to 10 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 387
elevator mode
10
— 65 H300 Retry selection 0 to 5 1 0 426
Stall prevention operation
— 66 H611 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 431
reduction starting frequency
Number of retries at fault
67 H301 0 to 10, 101 to 110 1 0 426
occurrence
Retry

68 H302 Retry waiting time 0.1 to 600 s 0.1 s 1s 426

69 H303 Retry count display erase 0 1 0 426
Special regenerative brake
— 70*14 G107
duty
0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 724

0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23,

24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43,
528,
44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73,
— 71 C100 Applied motor 1 0 532,
74, 330, 333, 334,
551
8090, 8093, 8094,
9090, 9093, 9094
0 to 15*2
— 72 E600 PWM frequency selection 1 2 356
0 to 6, 25*3
496,
— 73 T000 Analog input selection 0 to 7, 10 to 17 1 1
501
— 74 T002 Input filter time constant 0 to 8 1 1 503

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
169
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
0 to 3, 14 to 17, 1000 to
1003, 1014 to 1017
Reset selection/ 0 to 3, 14 to 17, 100 to
— disconnected PU detection/ 103, 114 to 117, 1000 14
PU stop selection to 1003, 1014 to 1017,
1100 to 1103, 1114 to 1
— 75 1117 336
E100 Reset selection 0 to 3
0
E101 Disconnected PU detection
0, 1
E102 PU stop selection 1
0*2
E107 Reset limit 1 0
0, 1*3
— 76 M510 Fault code output selection 0 to 2 1 0 492
— 77 E400 Parameter write selection 0 to 2 1 0 345
Reverse rotation prevention
— 78 D020 0 to 2 1 0 406
selection
Operation mode 389,
— 79 D000 0 to 4, 6, 7 1 0
selection Simple 398
0.4 to 55 kW, 9999*2 0.01 kW*2 221,
80 C101 Motor capacity 9999 532,
*3 *3
0 to 3600 kW, 9999 0.1 kW 551
221,
81 C102 Number of motor poles 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 9999 1 9999 532,
551
0 to 500 A, 9999*2 0.01 A*2
82 C125 Motor excitation current 9999 532
0 to 3600 A, 9999*3 0.1 A*3
200 V*7 221,
83 C104 Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 532,
*8
400 V 551
221,
84 C105 Rated motor frequency 10 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 532,
551
Excitation current break
85 G201 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 711
point
Excitation current low-speed
Motor constant

86 G202 0 to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999 711

scaling factor
Speed control gain
89 G932 (Advanced magnetic flux 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 228
vector)
0 to 50 Ω, 9999*2 0.001Ω*2 532,
90 C120 Motor constant (R1) 9999 551,
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*3 0.01mΩ *3
638
*2
0 to 50 Ω, 9999 0.001Ω*2
91 C121 Motor constant (R2) 9999 532
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*3 0.01mΩ*3
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2 0.1mH*2 532,
92 C122 9999
inductance (Ld) 0 to 400 mH, 9999*3 0.01mH*3 551

Motor constant (L2)/q-axis 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2 0.1mH*2 532,

93 C123 9999
inductance (Lq) 0 to 400 mH, 9999*3 0.01mH*3 551

0.1%*2
94 C124 Motor constant (X) 0 to 100%, 9999 9999 532
0.01%*3
95 C111 Online auto tuning selection 0 to 2 1 0 558
532,
96 C110 Auto tuning setting/status 0, 1, 11, 101 1 0 551,
638

170 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
100 G040 V/F1 (first frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 713
101 G041 V/F1 (first frequency voltage) 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0V 713
102 G042 V/F2 (second frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 713
2
Adjustable 5 points V/F

V/F2 (second frequency

103 G043 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0V 713
voltage)
104 G044 V/F3 (third frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 713

105 G045
V/F3 (third frequency
0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0V 713
3
voltage)
106 G046 V/F4 (fourth frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 713
V/F4 (fourth frequency
107 G047
voltage)
0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0V 713
4
108 G048 V/F5 (fifth frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 713
109 G049 V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage) 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 0V 713

110 F030
Third acceleration/
deceleration time
0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 367 5
111 F031 Third deceleration time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 367
Third function

112 G020 Third torque boost 0 to 30%, 9999 0.1% 9999 706
113 G021 Third V/F (base frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 707 6
Third stall prevention
114 H602 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 431
operation level
Third stall prevention
115 H603
operation frequency
0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 431
7
Third output frequency
116 M445 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 484
detection
PU communication station
117 N020
number
0 to 31 1 0 670
8
48, 96, 192, 384, 576,
118 N021 PU communication speed 1 192 670
768, 1152
PU communication stop bit
— 0, 1, 10, 11 1 9
PU connector communication

length / data length

PU communication data
119 N022 0, 1 1 0 670
length

N023
PU communication stop bit
length
0, 1 1 10
PU communication parity
120 N024 0 to 2 1 2 670
check
PU communication retry
121 N025 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 670
count
PU communication check
122 N026 0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 670
time interval
PU communication waiting
123 N027 0 to 150 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 670
time setting
PU communication CR/LF
124 N028 0 to 2 1 1 670
selection
Terminal 2 frequency setting
— 125 T022 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 505
gain frequency Simple
Terminal 4 frequency setting
— 126 T042 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 505
gain frequency Simple

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
171
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
PID control automatic
127 A612 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 601
switchover frequency
0, 10, 11, 20, 21, 40 to
43, 50, 51, 60, 61, 70,
71, 80, 81, 90, 91, 100, 601,
128 A610 PID action selection 1 0
101, 1000, 1001, 1010, 622
1011, 2000, 2001,
2010, 2011
PID operation

601,
129 A613 PID proportional band 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 100%
622
601,
130 A614 PID integral time 0.1 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1s
622
601,
131 A601 PID upper limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999
622
601,
132 A602 PID lower limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999
622
601,
133 A611 PID action set point 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999
622
601,
134 A615 PID differential time 0.01 to 10 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999
622
Electronic bypass sequence
135 A000 0, 1 1 0 563
selection
136 A001 MC switchover interlock time 0 to 100 s 0.1 s 1s 563
Bypass

137 A002 Start waiting time 0 to 100 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 563

138 A003 Bypass selection at a fault 0, 1 1 0 563
Automatic switchover
139 A004 frequency from inverter to 0 to 60 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 563
bypass operation
Backlash acceleration
140 F200 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 Hz 372
Backlash measure

stopping frequency
Backlash acceleration
141 F201 0 to 360 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 372
stopping time
Backlash deceleration
142 F202 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 Hz 372
stopping frequency
Backlash deceleration
143 F203 0 to 360 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 372
stopping time
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,
— 144 M002 Speed setting switchover 102, 104, 106, 108, 1 4 444
110, 112
PU display language
PU

145 E103 0 to 7 1 — 339

selection
Acceleration/deceleration
— 147 F022 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 367
time switching frequency
Stall prevention level at 0 V
148 H620 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 431
input
Current detection

Stall prevention level at 10 V

149 H621 0 to 400% 0.1% 200% 431
input
Output current detection
150 M460 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 487
level
Output current detection
151 M461 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 0s 487
signal delay time
152 M462 Zero current detection level 0 to 400% 0.1% 5% 487
153 M463 Zero current detection time 0 to 10 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 487
Voltage reduction selection
— 154 H631 during stall prevention 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 431
operation
RT signal function validity
— 155 T730 0, 10 1 0 525
condition selection
Stall prevention operation
— 156 H501 0 to 31, 100, 101 1 0 431
selection
245,
— 157 M430 OL signal output timer 0 to 25 s, 9999 0.1 s 0s
431

172 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18,
21, 24, 32 to 34, 36,
AM terminal function
— 158 M301 46, 50, 52 to 54, 61, 1 1 457
selection
62, 67, 70, 87 to 90, 91 2
to 98
Automatic switchover
— 159 A005 frequency range from bypass 0 to 10 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 563
to inverter operation 3
User group read
— 160 E440 0, 1, 9999 1 0 354
selection Simple

— 161 E200
Frequency setting/key lock
operation selection
0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 341 4
Automatic restart after 628,
0 to 3, 10 to 13, 1000 to
Automatic restart

162 A700 instantaneous power failure 1 0 635,

1003, 1010 to 1013

163 A704
selection
First cushion time for restart 0 to 20 s 0.1 s 0s
638
628
5
First cushion voltage for
164 A705 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 628
restart

165 A710
Stall prevention operation
0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 628 6
level for restart
Output current detection
Current detection

166 M433 0 to 10 s, 9999 0.1 s 0.1 s 487

signal retention time
7
Output current detection
167 M464 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 487
operation selection

8
E000
— 168
E080
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
E001
— 169
E081 9
170 M020 Watt-hour meter clear 0, 10, 9999 1 9999 446
User group Cumulative monitor

10
171 M030 Operation hour meter clear 0, 9999 1 9999 446

User group registered

172 E441 9999, (0 to 16) 1 0 354
display/batch clear
173 E442 User group registration 0 to 1999, 9999 1 9999 354
174 E443 User group clear 0 to 1999, 9999 1 9999 354

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
173
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
0 to 20, 22 to 28, 32,
37, 42 to 48, 50 to 53,
STF terminal function 57 to 60, 62, 64 to 74,
178 T700 1 60 521
selection 76 to 80, 85, 87 to 89,
92 to 96, 128, 129,
9999
0 to 20, 22 to 28, 32,
37, 42 to 48, 50 to 53,
STR terminal function 57 to 59, 61, 62, 64 to
179 T701 1 61 521
selection 74, 76 to 80, 85, 87 to
89, 92 to 96, 128, 129,
Input terminal function assignment

9999
RL terminal function
180 T702 1 0 521
selection
RM terminal function
181 T703 1 1 521
selection
RH terminal function
182 T704 1 2 521
selection
RT terminal function
183 T705 1 3 521
selection
0 to 20, 22 to 28, 32,
AU terminal function
184 T706 37, 42 to 48, 50 to 53, 1 4 521
selection
57 to 59, 62, 64 to 74,
JOG terminal function 76 to 80, 85, 87 to 89,
185 T707 1 5 521
selection 92 to 96, 128, 129,
CS terminal function 9999
186 T708 1 6 521
selection
MRS terminal function 24*11*13
187 T709 1 521
selection 10*12
STOP terminal function
188 T710 1 25 521
selection
RES terminal function
189 T711 1 62 521
selection

RUN terminal function 0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25

190 M400 1 0 473
selection to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to
57, 60, 61, 63, 64, 67,
SU terminal function 68, 70, 79, 80, 84, 85,
191 M401 1 1 473
selection 90 to 99, 100 to 108,
110 to 116, 120, 122,
IPF terminal function 125 to 128, 130 to 136, 2*11*13
192 M402 1 473
selection 138 to 157, 160, 161,
9999*12
163, 164, 167, 168,
Output terminal function assignment

OL terminal function 170, 179, 180, 184,

193 M403 185, 190 to 199, 200 to 1 3 473
selection
208, 211 to 213, 247,
FU terminal function 300 to 308, 311 to 313,
194 M404 347, 9999 1 4 473
selection

0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25
to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to
ABC1 terminal function 57, 60, 61, 63, 64, 67,
195 M405 68, 70, 79, 80, 84, 85, 1 99 473
selection
90, 91, 94 to 99, 100 to
108, 110 to 116, 120,
122, 125 to 128, 130 to
136, 138 to 157, 160,
161, 163, 164, 167,
168, 170, 179, 180,
184, 185, 190, 191,
ABC2 terminal function 194 to 199, 200 to 208, 1
196 M406 9999 473
selection 211 to 213, 247, 300 to
308, 311 to 313, 347,
9999

174 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
Multi-speed setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1

232 to D308 to Multi-speed setting (speed 8

0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 411
2
239 D315 to speed 15)

3
Soft-PWM operation
— 240 E601 0, 1 1 1 356
selection
Analog input display unit
— 241 M043 0, 1 1 0 505
switchover 4
Terminal 1 added
— 242 T021 compensation amount 0 to 100% 0.1% 100% 501
(terminal 2)
Terminal 1 added 5
— 243 T041 compensation amount 0 to 100% 0.1% 75% 501
(terminal 4)
Cooling fan operation 0, 1, 101 to 105, 1000,
—
selection 1001, 1101 to 1105
1 1
6
Cooling fan operation
H100 0, 1, 101 to 105 1 1
— 244 selection 423
Cooling fan operation
H106 selection during the test 0, 1 1 0 7
operation
245 G203 Rated slip 0 to 50%, 9999 0.01% 9999 736
Slip compensation

Slip compensation time

246 G204
constant
0.01 to 10 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 736 8
Constant output range slip
247 G205 0, 9999 1 9999 736
compensation selection
9
Self power management
— 248 A006 0 to 2 1 0 569
selection

— 249 H101
Earth (ground) fault detection
at start
0, 1 1 0 425 10
0 to 100 s, 1000 to
— 250 G106 Stop selection 0.1s 9999 722
1100 s, 8888, 9999
Output phase loss protection
— 251 H200 0, 1 1 1 426
selection
252 T050 Override bias 0 to 200% 0.1% 50% 501
Frequency compensation

253 T051 Override gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 501

Main circuit power OFF

— 254 A007 0 to 3600 s, 9999 1s 600 s 569
waiting time
255 E700 Life alarm status display (0 to 255) 1 0 359
Inrush current limit circuit life
256*15 E701
display
(0 to 100%) 1% 100% 359
Life check

Control circuit capacitor life

257 E702 (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 359
display
Main circuit capacitor life
258*15 E703
display
(0 to 100%) 1% 100% 359

Main circuit capacitor life

259*15 E704
measuring
0, 1, 11 1 0 359

PWM frequency automatic

— 260 E602 0, 1 1 1 356
switchover

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
175
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
261 A730 Power failure stop selection 0 to 2, 11, 12, 21, 22 1 0 642
Subtracted frequency at
262 A731 0 to 20 Hz 0.01 Hz 3 Hz 642
deceleration start
Power failure stop

Subtraction starting
263 A732 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 642
frequency
Power-failure deceleration
264 A733 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 642
time 1
Power-failure deceleration
265 A734 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 642
time 2
Power failure deceleration
266 A735 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 642
time switchover frequency
— 267 T001 Terminal 4 input selection 0 to 2 1 0 496
Monitor decimal digits
— 268 M022 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 446
selection
— 269 E023 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Stop-on contact/load torque
577,
— 270 A200 high-speed frequency 0 to 3, 11 to 13 1 0
580
control selection
High-speed setting maximum
Load torque high-speed frequency control

271 A201 0 to 400% 0.1% 50% 580

current
Middle-speed setting
272 A202 0 to 400% 0.1% 100% 580
minimum current
273 A203 Current averaging range 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 580

Current averaging filter time

274 A204 1 to 4000 1 16 580
constant

Stop-on contact excitation

Stop-on-contact

275 A205 current low-speed scaling 0 to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999 577
control

factor
0 to 9, 9999*2
PWM carrier frequency at
276 A206 1 9999 577
stop-on contact 0 to 4, 9999*3
278 A100 Brake opening frequency 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz. 3 Hz 572
279 A101 Brake opening current 0 to 400% 0.1% 130% 572
Brake opening current
280 A102 0 to 2 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 572
detection time
Brake sequence

281 A103 Brake operation time at start 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 572

282 A104 Brake operation frequency 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz. 6 Hz 572
283 A105 Brake operation time at stop 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 572
Deceleration detection
284 A106 0, 1 1 0 572
function selection
Overspeed detection
A107 269,
frequency
285 0 to 30 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz. 9999 572,
Speed deviation excess 736
H416
detection frequency
286 G400 Droop gain 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 738
Droop control

287 G401 Droop filter time constant 0 to 1 s 0.01 s 0.3 s 738

Droop function activation

288 G402 0 to 2, 10, 11, 20 to 22 1 0 738
selection

— 289 M431 Inverter output terminal filter 5 to 50 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 473
Monitor negative output 446,
— 290 M044 0 to 7 1 0
selection 457

176 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
[FM type] 0, 1, 10, 11,
406,
— 291 D100 Pulse train I/O selection 20, 21, 100 1 0
457

A110
[CA type] 0, 1
384,
2
Automatic acceleration/
— 292 0, 1, 3, 5 to 8, 11 1 0 387,
F500 deceleration
572

— 293 F513
Acceleration/deceleration
separate selection
0 to 2 1 0 384 3
— 294 A785 UV avoidance voltage gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 642
Frequency change increment
— 295 E201 0, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 0.01 0 342
amount setting 4
0 to 6, 99, 100 to 106,
Password

296 E410 Password lock level 1 9999 348

199, 9999
(0 to 5), 1000 to 9998,
297 E411 Password lock/unlock
9999
1 9999 348
5
532,
— 298 A711 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1 9999
638
Rotation direction detection
— 299 A701
selection at restarting
0, 1, 9999 1 0 628
6
313*17 M410 DO0 output selection 1 9999 473
0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25
314*17 M411 DO1 output selection
to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to
57, 60, 61, 63, 64, 68,
1 9999 473 7
70, 79, 80, 84 to 99,
315*17 M412 DO2 output selection 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 1 9999 473
120, 122, 125 to 128,
316*16 M413 DO3 output selection 130 to 136, 138 to 157, 1 9999 473 8
160, 161, 163, 164,
168, 170, 179, 180,
317*16 M414 DO4 output selection 1 9999 473
CC-Link IE

184 to 199, 200 to 208,

318*16 M415 DO5 output selection

211 to 213, 247, 248,
1 9999 473
9
300 to 308, 311 to 313,
347, 348, 9999
319*16 M416 DO6 output selection 1 9999 473
10
320*16 M420 RA1 output selection 0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 1 9999 473
to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to
57, 60, 61, 63, 64, 68,
321*16 M421 RA2 output selection
70, 79, 80, 84 to 91, 94
1 9999 473
to 99, 200 to 208, 211
322*16 M422 RA3 output selection to 213, 247, 248, 9999 1 9999 473

Inverter/converter
— 328 E310 0 to 9999 1 0 *18
switching Simple

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
177
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
RS-485 communication
331 N030 0 to 31 (0 to 247) 1 0 670
station number
3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96,
RS-485 communication
332 N031 192, 384, 576, 768, 1 96 670
speed
1152
RS-485 communication stop
— 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1
bit length / data length
RS-485 communication data
333 N032 0, 1 1 0 670
length
RS-485 communication stop
N033 0, 1 1 1
bit length
RS-485 communication

RS-485 communication
334 N034 0 to 2 1 2 670
parity check selection
RS-485 communication retry
335 N035 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 670
count
RS-485 communication
336 N036 0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 0s 670
check time interval
RS-485 communication
337 N037 0 to 150 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 670
waiting time setting
Communication operation
338 D010 0, 1 1 0 400
command source
Communication speed
339 D011 0 to 2 1 0 400
command source
Communication startup
340 D001 0 to 2, 10, 12 1 0 398
mode selection
RS-485 communication CR/
341 N038 0 to 2 1 1 670
LF selection
Communication EEPROM
342 N001 0, 1 1 0 663
write selection
343 N080 Communication error count — 1 0 686
0, 1, 100, 101, 1000,
Communication reset 1001, 1100, 1101,
— selection/Ready bit status 10000, 10001, 10100, 1 0 663
selection 10101, 11000, 11001,
11100, 11101
Communication reset
— 349*17 N010 0, 1 1 0 663
selection
N240 Ready bit status selection 0, 1 1 0 663
Reset selection after inverter
N241 0, 1 1 0 893
faults are cleared
DriveControl writing
N242 0, 1 1 0 893
restriction selection

178 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
Stop position command
350*9 A510
selection
0, 1, 9999 1 9999 585

351*9 A526 Orientation speed 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz. 2 Hz 585

2
352*9 A527 Creep speed 0 to 10 Hz 0.01 Hz. 0.5 Hz 585
353*9 A528 Creep switchover position 0 to 16383 1 511 585

354*9 A529
Position loop switchover
position
0 to 8191 1 96 585 3
DC injection brake start
355*9 A530
position
0 to 255 1 5 585

356*9 A531
Internal stop position
0 to 16383 1 0 585 4
Orientation control

command
357*9 A532 Orientation in-position zone 0 to 255 1 5 585
*9 A533 Servo torque selection 0 to 13 1 1 585
358
94, 5
*9 C141 Encoder rotation direction 0, 1, 100, 101 1 1 585,
359
736
360*9
*9
A511
A512
16-bit data selection
Position shift
0 to 127
0 to 16383
1
1
0
0
585
585
6
361
Orientation position loop
362*9 A520
gain
0.1 to 100 0, 1 1.0 585

363*9 A521
Completion signal output
0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 585
7
delay time
364*9 A522 Encoder stop check time 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 585
365*9

*9
A523 Orientation limit 0 to 60 s, 9999 1s 9999 585
8
366 A524 Recheck time 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 585
367*9 G240 Speed feedback range 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 736
Encoder feedback

368*9 G241 Feedback gain 0 to 100 0.1 1 736

9
94,
369*9 C140 Number of encoder pulses 0 to 4096 1 1024 585,
736
10
Encoder position tuning
— 373 C142 0, 1 1 0 542
setting/status
— 374 H800 Overspeed detection level 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 443
Encoder signal loss
— 376*9 C148 detection enable/disable 0, 1 1 0 561
selection
380 F300 Acceleration S-pattern 1 0 to 50% 1% 0% 372
Pulse train input S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C

381 F301 Deceleration S-pattern 1 0 to 50% 1% 0% 372

382 F302 Acceleration S-pattern 2 0 to 50% 1% 0% 372

383 F303 Deceleration S-pattern 2 0 to 50% 1% 0% 372

Input pulse division scaling

384 D101 0 to 250 1 0 406
factor
Frequency for zero input
385 D110 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 406
pulse
Frequency for maximum
386 D111 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 406
input pulse

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
179
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
393*9 A525 Orientation selection 0 to 2, 10 to 12 1 0 585
Number of machine side gear
394*9 A540
teeth
0 to 32767 1 1 585
Orientation control

Number of motor side gear

395*9 A541
teeth
0 to 32767 1 1 585

Orientation speed gain (P

396*9 A542
term)
0 to 1000 1 60 585

Orientation speed integral

397*9 A543
time
0 to 20 s 0.001 s 0.333 s 585

Orientation speed gain (D

398*9 A544
term)
0 to 100 0.1 1 585

399*9 A545 Orientation deceleration ratio 0 to 1000 1 20 585

— 413*9 M601 Encoder pulse division ratio 1 to 32767 1 1 495
PLC function operation
414 A800 0 to 2, 11, 12 1 0 646
selection
Inverter operation lock mode
PLC

415 A801 0, 1 1 0 646

setting
416 A802 Pre-scale function selection 0 to 5 1 0 646
417 A803 Pre-scale setting value 0 to 32767 1 1 646
0 to 2, 10, 100, 110,
Position command source 303,
419 B000 200, 210, 300, 310, 1 0
selection 319
1110, 1310
Command pulse scaling
420 B001 factor numerator (electronic 1 to 32767 1 1 325
gear numerator)
Command pulse
multiplication denominator
421 B002 1 to 32767 1 1 325
(electronic gear
denominator)
422 B003 Position control gain 0 to 150 s-1 1 s-1 25 s-1 328
423 B004 Position feed forward gain 0 to 100% 1% 0% 328
Position command
Position control

424 B005 acceleration/deceleration 0 to 50 s 0.001s 0s 325

time constant
Position feed forward
425 B006 0 to 5 s 0.001 s 0s 328
command filter
426 B007 In-position width 0 to 32767 pulses 1 pulse 100 pulses 327
427 B008 Excessive level error 0 to 400k pulses, 9999 1k pulses 40k pulses 327
428 B009 Command pulse selection 0 to 5 1 0 319
429 B010 Clear signal selection 0, 1 1 1 320
0 to 5, 12, 13, 100 to
105, 112, 113, 1000 to
1005, 1012, 1013,
1100 to 1105, 1112,
1113, 2000 to 2005,
430 B011 Pulse monitor selection 2012, 2013, 2100 to 1 9999 321
2105, 2112, 2113,
3000 to 3005, 3012,
3013, 3100 to 3105,
3112, 3113, 8888,
9999
Pulse train torque command
— 432*9 D120
bias
0 to 400% 1% 0% 283

Pulse train torque command

— 433*9 D121
gain
0 to 400% 1% 150% 283

434*17 N110 Network number (CC-Link IE) 0 to 255 1 0 699

CC-Link IE

435*17 N111 Station number (CC-Link IE) 0 to 255 1 0 699

— 446 B012 Model position control gain 0 to 150 s-1 1 s-1 25 s-1 328

180 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16,
20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34,
40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54,
450 C200 Second applied motor 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 1 9999 528 2
334, 8090, 8093, 8094,
9090, 9093, 9094,
9999

Second motor control

0 to 6, 10 to 14, 20, 100 3
451 G300 to 106, 110 to 114, 1 9999 221
method selection
9999
0.4 to 55 kW, 9999*2 0.01 kW*2
453 C201 Second motor capacity
0 to 3600 kW, 9999*3 0.1 kW*3
9999
532,
551 4
Number of second motor 532,
454 C202 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 9999 1 9999
poles 551
Second motor excitation 0 to 500 A, 9999*2 0.01 A*2 5
Second motor constant

455 C225 9999 532

current 0 to 3600 A, 9999*3 0.1 A *3

200 V*7 532,

456 C204 Rated second motor voltage 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V
400 V*8 551 6
Rated second motor 532,
457 C205 10 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999
frequency 551
0 to 50 Ω, 9999*2 0.001Ω*2 532,
458 C220 Second motor constant (R1)
*3 *3
9999 551, 7
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999 0.01mΩ 638
0 to 50 Ω, 9999*2 0.001Ω*2
459 C221 Second motor constant (R2) 9999 532
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*3 0.01mΩ*3 8
*2
Second motor constant (L1) / 0 to 6000 mH, 9999 0.1mH*2 532,
460 C222 9999
d-axis inductance (Ld) 0 to 400 mH, 9999*3 0.01mH*3 551

461 C223
Second motor constant (L2) / 0 to 6000 mH, 9999
*2
0.1mH*2
9999
532, 9
q-axis inductance (Lq) 0 to 400 mH, 9999*3 0.01mH*3 551

0.1%*2
462 C224 Second motor constant (X) 0 to 100%, 9999 9999 532
0.01%*3 10
532,
Second motor auto tuning
463 C210 0, 1, 11, 101 1 0 551,
setting/status
638

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
181
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
Digital position control
464 B020 sudden stop deceleration 0 to 360 s 0.1 s 0s 303
time
First target position lower 4
465 B021 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
First target position upper 4
466 B022 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Second target position lower
467 B023 0 to 9999 1 0 303
4 digits
Second target position upper
468 B024 0 to 9999 1 0 303
4 digits
Third target position lower 4
469 B025 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Third target position upper 4
470 B026 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Fourth target position lower 4
471 B027 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Fourth target position upper
472 B028 0 to 9999 1 0 303
4 digits
Fifth target position lower 4
473 B029 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Fifth target position upper 4
474 B030 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Sixth target position lower 4
475 B031 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Sixth target position upper 4
476 B032 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Seventh target position lower
Simple position control

477 B033 0 to 9999 1 0 303

4 digits
Seventh target position
478 B034 0 to 9999 1 0 303
upper 4 digits
Eighth target position lower 4
479 B035 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Eighth target position upper
480 B036 0 to 9999 1 0 303
4 digits
Ninth target position lower 4
481 B037 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Ninth target position upper 4
482 B038 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Tenth target position lower 4
483 B039 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Tenth target position upper 4
484 B040 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Eleventh target position
485 B041 0 to 9999 1 0 303
lower 4 digits
Eleventh target position
486 B042 0 to 9999 1 0 303
upper 4 digits
Twelfth target position lower
487 B043 0 to 9999 1 0 303
4 digits
Twelfth target position upper
488 B044 0 to 9999 1 0 303
4 digits
Thirteenth target position
489 B045 0 to 9999 1 0 303
lower 4 digits
Thirteenth target position
490 B046 0 to 9999 1 0 303
upper 4 digits
Fourteenth target position
491 B047 0 to 9999 1 0 303
lower 4 digits
Fourteenth target position
492 B048 0 to 9999 1 0 303
upper 4 digits
Fifteenth target position
493 B049 0 to 9999 1 0 303
lower 4 digits
Fifteenth target position
494 B050 0 to 9999 1 0 303
upper 4 digits

182 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
495 M500 Remote output selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 489
Remote
output

496 M501 Remote output data 1 0 to 4095 1 0 489

497 M502 Remote output data 2
PLC function flash memory
0 to 4095 1 0 489
2
— 498 A804 0, 9696 (0 to 9999) 1 0 646
clear
Communication error
— 500*17 N011 0 to 999.8 s 0.1 s 0s 663
execution waiting time 3
*17 Communication error
— 501 N012 0 1 0 663
occurrence count display
Stop mode selection at
— 502 N013
communication error
0 to 4, 11, 12 1 0 663
4
503 E710 Maintenance timer 1 0 (1 to 9998) 1 0 363
Maintenance

Maintenance timer 1 warning

504 E711
output set time
0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 363
5
— 505 M001 Speed setting reference 1 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 444
Display estimated main
— 506*15 E705
circuit capacitor residual life
(0 to 100%) 1% 100% 359 6
Display/reset ABC1 relay
— 507 E706 0 to 100% 1% 100% 359
contact life

— 508 E707
Display/reset ABC2 relay
contact life
0 to 100% 1% 100% 359 7
S-pattern time at a start of
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D

516 F400 0.1 to 2.5 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 372

acceleration

517 F401
S-pattern time at a
completion of acceleration
0.1 to 2.5 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 372 8
S-pattern time at a start of
518 F402 0.1 to 2.5 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 372
deceleration
9
S-pattern time at a
519 F403 0.1 to 2.5 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 372
completion of deceleration
10

— 522 G105 Output stop frequency 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 720
MODBUS RTU
— 539 N002 communication check time 0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 686
interval
Frequency command sign
— 541*17 N100
selection
0, 1 1 0 699

USB communication station

547 N040 0 to 31 1 0 701
number
USB

USB communication check

548 N041 0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 701
time interval
549 N000 Protocol selection 0, 1 1 0 663
Communication

NET mode operation

550 D012 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 400
command source selection

PU mode operation
551 D013 1 to 3, 9999 1 9999 400
command source selection

— 552 H429 Frequency jump range 0 to 30 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 429
553 A603 PID deviation limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 601
PID control

PID signal operation

554 A604 0 to 3, 10 to 13 1 0 601
selection

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
183
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
555 E720 Current average time 0.1 to 1 s 0.1 s 1s 363
Average current monitoring

556 E721 Data output mask time 0 to 20 s 0.1 s 0s 363

*2 *2
0 to 500 A 0.01 A

Current average value

Inverter rated
557 E722 monitor signal output 363
0 to 3600 A*3 0.1 A*3 current
reference current

Second frequency search 532,

— 560 A712 0 to 32767, 9999 1 9999
gain 638
PTC thermistor protection
— 561 H020 0.5 to 30 kΩ, 9999 0.01 kΩ 9999 415
level
Energization time carrying-
— 563 M021 (0 to 65535) 1 0 446
over times
Operating time carrying-over
— 564 M031 (0 to 65535) 1 0 446
times
Second motor excitation
— 565 G301 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 711
current break point
Second motor excitation
— 566 G302 current low-speed scaling 0 to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999 711
factor
Multiple rating Second motor constant

Second motor speed control

569 G942 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 228
gain

0 to 3*11*12

570 E301 Multiple rating setting 1 2 343

1, 2*13

— 571 F103 Holding time at a start 0 to 10 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 381

A680 1 to 4, 11 to 14, 21 to
— 573 4 mA input check selection 1 9999 517
T052 24, 9999
Second motor online auto
— 574 C211 0 to 2 1 0 558
tuning
Output interruption detection
575 A621 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1s 601
time
PID control

Output interruption detection

576 A622 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 601
level
Output interruption cancel
577 A623 900 to 1100% 0.1% 1000% 601
level
592 A300 Traverse function selection 0 to 2 1 0 582
593 A301 Maximum amplitude amount 0 to 25% 0.1% 10% 582
Amplitude compensation
Traverse

594 A302 0 to 50% 0.1% 10% 582

amount during deceleration
Amplitude compensation
595 A303 0 to 50% 0.1% 10% 582
amount during acceleration
596 A304 Amplitude acceleration time 0.1 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 582
597 A305 Amplitude deceleration time 0.1 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 582
175 to 215 VDC*7
/350
— 598 H102 Undervoltage level 0.1 V 9999 425
to 430 VDC*8, 9999
0*11*13
— 599 T721 X10 terminal input selection 0, 1 1 724
1*12

184 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
First free thermal reduction
Electronic thermal O/L relay

600 H001 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 415

frequency 1

601 H002
First free thermal reduction
ratio 1
1 to 100% 1% 100% 415 2
First free thermal reduction
602 H003 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 415
frequency 2

603 H004
First free thermal reduction
ratio 2
1 to 100% 1% 100% 415 3
First free thermal reduction
604 H005 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 415
frequency 3

— 606 T722
Power failure stop external
0, 1 1 1 642
4
signal input selection
— 607 H006 Motor permissible load level 110 to 250% 1% 150% 415
Second motor permissible
— 608 H016
load level
110 to 250%, 9999 1% 9999 415 5
PID set point/deviation input 601,
PID control

609 A624 1 to 5 1 2
selection 622

610 A625
PID measured value input
selection
1 to 5 1 3
601,
622
6
628,
— 611 F003 Acceleration time at a restart 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999
635
Reverse rotation excitation 7
— 617 G080 current low-speed scaling 0 to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999 711
factor
Cumulative pulse clear signal
Cumulative pulse monitoring

635*9 M610
selection
0 to 3 1 0 321
8
Cumulative pulse division
636*9 M611
scaling factor
1 to 16384 1 1 321

Control terminal option-

637*9 M612 Cumulative pulse division 1 to 16384 1 1 321 9
scaling factor

638*9 M613 Cumulative pulse storage 0 to 3 1 0 321

10
Brake opening current
639 A108 0, 1 1 0 572
selection
Brake operation frequency
640 A109 0, 1 1 0 572
selection
Second brake sequence
641 A130 0, 7, 8, 9999 1 0 572
operation selection
Second brake opening
642 A120 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz. 3 Hz 572
frequency
Second brake opening
643 A121 0 to 400% 0.1% 130% 572
current
Brake sequence

Second brake opening

644 A122 0 to 2 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 572
current detection time
Second brake operation time
645 A123 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 572
at start
Second brake operation
646 A124 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz. 6 Hz 572
frequency
Second brake operation time
647 A125 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 572
at stop
Second deceleration
648 A126 0, 1 1 0 572
detection function selection
Second brake opening
650 A128 0, 1 1 0 572
current selection
Second brake operation
651 A129 0, 1 1 0 572
frequency selection

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
185
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
653 G410 Speed smoothing control 0 to 200% 0.1% 0% 741
Analog remote output Speed smoothing control

Speed smoothing cutoff

654 G411 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 20 Hz 741
frequency

Analog remote output

655 M530 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 490
selection
656 M531 Analog remote output 1 800 to 1200% 0.1% 1000% 490
657 M532 Analog remote output 2 800 to 1200% 0.1% 1000% 490
658 M533 Analog remote output 3 800 to 1200% 0.1% 1000% 490

659 M534 Analog remote output 4 800 to 1200% 0.1% 1000% 490

Increased magnetic
excitation deceleration
Increased magnetic

660 G130 excitation deceleration 0, 1 1 0 735

operation selection
Magnetic excitation increase
661 G131 0 to 40%, 9999 0.1% 9999 735
rate

Increased magnetic
662 G132 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 735
excitation current level

Control circuit temperature

— 663 M060 0 to 100°C 1°C 0°C 494
signal output level
Regeneration avoidance
— 665 G125 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 732
frequency gain
Power failure stop frequency
— 668 A786 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 642
gain
SF-PR slip amount
— 673 G060 adjustment operation 2 to 4, 6, 9999 1 9999 714
selection
SF-PR slip amount
— 674 G061 0 to 500% 0.1% 100% 714
adjustment gain
User parameter auto storage
— 675 A805 1, 9999 1 9999 646
function selection
679 G420 Second droop gain 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 738
Second droop control

Second droop filter time

680 G421 0 to 1 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 738
constant
Second droop function 0 to 2, 10, 11, 20 to 22,
681 G422 1 9999 738
activation selection 9999
Second droop break point
682 G423 0.1 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 738
gain
Second droop break point
683 G424 0.1 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 738
torque
532,
— 684 C000 Tuning data unit switchover 0, 1 1 0
551
686 E712 Maintenance timer 2 0 (1 to 9998) 1 0 363
Maintenance

Maintenance timer 2 warning

687 E713 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 363
output set time
688 E714 Maintenance timer 3 0 (1 to 9998) 1 0 363
Maintenance timer 3 warning
689 E715 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 363
output set time
— 690 H881 Deceleration check time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1s 269

186 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
Second free thermal
Electronic thermal O/L relay

692 H011 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 415

reduction frequency 1

693 H012
Second free thermal
reduction ratio 1
1 to 100% 1% 100% 415 2
Second free thermal
694 H013 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 415
reduction frequency 2

695 H014
Second free thermal
reduction ratio 2
1 to 100% 1% 100% 415 3
Second free thermal
696 H015 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 415
reduction frequency 3
— 699 T740 Input terminal filter 5 to 50 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 521 4
702 C106 Maximum motor frequency 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 551
Induced voltage constant 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 0.1 mV
706 C130 9999 551
(phi f) 9999 (rad/s)
707 C107 Motor inertia (integer) 10 to 999, 9999 1 9999 551 5
711 C131 Motor Ld decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551
712 C132 Motor Lq decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551

717 C182
Starting resistance tuning
compensation
0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551 6
Starting magnetic pole
0 to 6000 μs, 10000 to
721 C185 position detection pulse 1 μs 9999 551
16000 μs, 9999
width 7
724 C108 Motor inertia (exponent) 0 to 7, 9999 1 9999 551
Motor protection current
Motor constant

725 C133 100 to 500%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551

level

738 C230
Second motor induced 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 0.1 mV
9999 551
8
voltage constant (phi f) 9999 (rad/s)
739 C231 Second motor Ld decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551
740 C232 Second motor Lq decay ratio 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551

741 C282
Second starting resistance
0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551
9
tuning compensation
Second motor magnetic pole 0 to 6000 μs, 10000 to
742 C285 1 μs 9999 551
detection pulse width 16000 μs, 9999
Second motor maximum
10
743 C206 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 551
frequency
Second motor inertia
744 C207 10 to 999, 9999 1 9999 551
(integer)
Second motor inertia
745 C208 0 to 7, 9999 1 9999 551
(exponent)
Second motor protection
746 C233 100 to 500%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551
current level
Second motor low-speed
— 747 G350 range torque characteristic 0, 9999 1 9999 233
selection
0, 10, 11, 20, 21, 50,
51, 60, 61, 70, 71, 80,
81, 90, 91, 100, 101,
753 A650 Second PID action selection 1 0 601
1000, 1001, 1010,
1011, 2000, 2001,
2010, 2011
PID control

Second PID control

754 A652 automatic switchover 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 601
frequency
755 A651 Second PID action set point 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 601
Second PID proportional
756 A653 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 100% 601
band
757 A654 Second PID integral time 0.1 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1s 601
758 A655 Second PID differential time 0.01 to 10 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 601
759 A600 PID unit selection 0 to 43, 9999 1 9999 615

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
187
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
760 A616 Pre-charge fault selection 0, 1 1 0 618
761 A617 Pre-charge ending level 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 618
762 A618 Pre-charge ending time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 618
Pre-charge upper detection
763 A619 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 618
level
PID Pre-charge

764 A620 Pre-charge time limit 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 618
Second pre-charge fault
765 A656 0, 1 1 0 618
selection
Second pre-charge ending
766 A657 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 618
level
Second pre-charge ending
767 A658 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 618
time
Second pre-charge upper
768 A659 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 618
detection level
769 A660 Second pre-charge time limit 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 618
Operation panel monitor
774 M101 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 1 9999 446
selection 1
Monitoring

22 to 36, 38 to 46, 50 to
Operation panel monitor
775 M102 57, 61, 62, 64, 67, 71 1 9999 446
selection 2
to 75, 87 to 98, 100,
Operation panel monitor 9999
776 M103 1 9999 446
selection 3
A681 4 mA input fault operation
— 777 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 517
T053 frequency
A682
— 778 4 mA input check filter 0 to 10 s 0.01 s 0s 517
T054
Operation frequency during
— 779 N014 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 663
communication error
Low speed range torque
— 788 G250 0, 9999 1 9999 233
characteristic selection
Acceleration time in low-
— 791 F070 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 367
speed range
Deceleration time in low-
— 792 F071 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 367
speed range
Pulse increment setting for 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
— 799 M520 0.1 kWh 1 kWh 493
output power kWh
0 to 6, 9 to 14, 20, 100
— 800 G200 Control method selection 1 20 221
to 106, 109 to 114
245,
— 801 H704 Output limit level 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999
283
— 802 G102 Pre-excitation selection 0, 1 1 0 715
Constant output range
245,
803 G210 torque characteristic 0 to 2, 10, 11 1 0
Torque command

283
selection
Torque command source
804 D400 0 to 6 1 0 283
selection
Torque command value
805 D401 600 to 1400% 1% 1000% 283
(RAM)
Torque command value
806 D402 600 to 1400% 1% 1000% 283
(RAM, EEPROM)
807 H410 Speed limit selection 0 to 2 1 0 287
Speed limit

Forward rotation speed limit/

808 H411 0 to 400 Hz 0.01 Hz. 60 Hz 50 Hz 287
speed limit
Reverse rotation speed limit/
809 H412 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 287
reverse-side speed limit

188 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
Torque limit input method
810 H700 0 to 2 1 0 245
selection

811 D030 Set resolution switchover 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0

245,
444 2
Torque limit level
812 H701 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 245
(regeneration)
Torque limit

813 H702
Torque limit level (3rd
quadrant)
0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 245 3
Torque limit level (4th
814 H703 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 245
quadrant)
815 H710 Torque limit level 2 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 245 4
Torque limit level during
816 H720 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 245
acceleration
Torque limit level during
817 H721
deceleration
0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 245
5
Easy gain tuning response
Easy gain tuning

818 C112 1 to 15 1 2 254

level setting

819 C113 Easy gain tuning selection 0 to 2 1 0 254

6

820
821
G211
G212
Speed control P gain 1 0 to 1000%
Speed control integral time 1 0 to 20 s
1%
0.001 s
60%
0.333 s
254
254
7
822 T003 Speed setting filter 1 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 503
*9 G215 Speed detection filter 1 0 to 0.1 s 0.001 s 0.001 s 332
823
Torque control P gain 1
294,
8
824 G213 (current loop proportional 0 to 500% 1% 100%
333
gain)
Torque control integral time 1 294,
825 G214
(current loop integral time)
0 to 500 ms 0.1 ms 5 ms
333 9
826 T004 Torque setting filter 1 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 503
827 G216 Torque detection filter 1 0 to 0.1 s 0.001 s 0s 332

10
Adjustment

263,
828 G224 Model speed control gain 0 to 1000% 1% 60%
328
Number of machine end
829*9 A546
encoder pulses
0 to 4096, 9999 1 9999 585

830 G311 Speed control P gain 2 0 to 1000%, 9999 1% 9999 254

831 G312 Speed control integral time 2 0 to 20 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 254
832 T005 Speed setting filter 2 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 503
833*9 G315 Speed detection filter 2 0 to 0.1 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 332
Torque control P gain 2
834 G313 (current loop proportional 0 to 500%, 9999 1% 9999 294
gain)
Torque control integral time 2
835 G314 0 to 500 ms, 9999 0.1 ms 9999 294
(current loop integral time)
836 T006 Torque setting filter 2 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 503
837 G316 Torque detection filter 2 0 to 0.1 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 332
840 G230 Torque bias selection 0 to 3, 24, 25, 9999 1 9999 265
841 G231 Torque bias 1 600 to 1400%, 9999 1% 9999 265
842 G232 Torque bias 2 600 to 1400%, 9999 1% 9999 265
843 G233 Torque bias 3 600 to 1400%, 9999 1% 9999 265
Torque bias

844 G234 Torque bias filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 265

845 G235 Torque bias operation time 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 265
Torque bias balance
846 G236 0 to 10 V, 9999 0.1 V 9999 265
compensation
Fall-time torque bias terminal
847 G237 0 to 400%, 9999 1% 9999 265
1 bias
Fall-time torque bias terminal
848 G238 0 to 400%, 9999 1% 9999 265
1 gain

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
189
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
Analog input offset
849 T007 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 503
adjustment
850 G103 Brake operation selection 0 to 2 1 0 715
Control terminal option-
851*9 C240
Number of encoder pulses
0 to 4096 1 2048 94

Control terminal option-

852*9 C241
Encoder rotation direction
0, 1, 100, 101 1 1 94

853*9 H417 Speed deviation time 0 to 100 s 0.1 s 1s 269

854 G217 Excitation ratio 0 to 100% 1% 100% 332
Control terminal option-
Additional function

855*9 C248 Signal loss detection enable/ 0, 1 1 0 561

disable selection
245,
Terminal 4 function
858 T040 0, 1, 4, 9999 1 0 431,
assignment
500
Torque current/Rated PM 0 to 500 A, 9999*2 0.01 A*2 532,
859 C126 9999
motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999*3 0.1 A*3 551
Second motor torque 0 to 500 A, 9999*2 0.01 A*2 532,
860 C226 current/Rated PM motor 9999
0 to 3600 A, 9999*3 0.1 A*3 551
current
862*9 C242 Encoder option selection 0, 1 1 0 226
Control terminal option-
863*9 M600
Encoder pulse division ratio
1 to 32767 1 1 495

864 M470 Torque detection 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 488

865 M446 Low speed detection 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 1.5 Hz 484
Indication

866 M042 Torque monitoring reference 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 457

— 867 M321 AM output filter 0 to 5 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 463

245,
Terminal 1 function
— 868 T010 0 to 6, 9999 1 0 431,
assignment
500
0.02
— 869 M334 Current output filter 0 to 5 s 0.01 s — 463
s
— 870 M440 Speed detection hysteresis 0 to 5 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 484
Control terminal option—
— 871*9 C243 Encoder position tuning 0, 1 1 0 542
setting/status
Input phase loss protection
872*15 H201 0, 1 1 0 426
Protective

selection
function

873*9 H415 Speed limit 0 to 400 Hz 0.01 Hz. 20 Hz 269

874 H730 OLT level setting 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 245
875 H030 Fault definition 0, 1 1 0 422
— *9 H022 Thermal protector input 0, 1 1 1 415
876
Speed feed forward control/
263,
877 G220 model adaptive speed 0 to 2 1 0
328
control selection
Control system

878 G221 Speed feed forward filter 0 to 1 s 0.01 s 0s 263

Speed feed forward torque
879 G222 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 263
limit
254,
880 C114 Load inertia ratio 0 to 200 times 0.1 times 7 times 263,
328
881 G223 Speed feed forward gain 0 to 1000% 1% 0% 263

190 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
Regeneration avoidance
882 G120 0 to 2 1 0 732
operation selection
Regeneration avoidance

883 G121
Regeneration avoidance
operation level
300 to 1200 V 0.1 V
DC380V*7
732 2
DC760V*8
Regeneration avoidance at
884 G122 deceleration detection 0 to 5 1 0 732
sensitivity 3
Regeneration avoidance
885 G123 compensation frequency 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 732
limit value

886 G124
Regeneration avoidance
0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 732
4
voltage gain
Control terminal option—
— 887*9 C244 Encoder magnetic pole 0 to 16383, 65535 1 65535 542
position offset 5
888 E420 Free parameter 1 0 to 9999 1 9999 350
Free parameter

889 E421 Free parameter 2 0 to 9999 1 9999 350 6

Cumulative power monitor 446,

891 M023
digit shifted times
0 to 4, 9999 1 9999
467 7
892 M200 Load factor 30 to 150% 0.1% 100% 467
Energy saving monitor 0.1 to 55 kW*2 0.01 kW*2 Inverter rated
893 M201 467
8
Energy saving monitoring

reference (motor capacity) 0 to 3600 kW*3 0.1 kW*3 capacity

Control selection during
894 M202 commercial power-supply 0 to 3 1 0 467
operation

895 M203
Power saving rate reference
0, 1, 9999 1 9999 467
9
value
896 M204 Power unit cost 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 467
Power saving monitor
897 M205
average time
0 to 1000 h, 9999 1h 9999 467 10
Power saving cumulative
898 M206 0, 1, 10, 9999 1 9999 467
monitor clear
Operation time rate
899 M207 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 467
(estimated value)

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
191
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
C0
M310 FM/CA terminal calibration — — — 463
(900)*10
C1
M320 AM terminal calibration — — — 463
(901)*10
C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting
T200 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 505
(902)*10 bias frequency
C3 Terminal 2 frequency setting
T201 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 505
(902)*10 bias
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting
T202 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 505
(903)*10 gain frequency
C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting
T203 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 505
(903)*10 gain
C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting
T400 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 505
(904)*10 bias frequency
C6 Terminal 4 frequency setting
T401 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 505
(904)*10 bias
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting
T402 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 505
(905)*10 gain frequency
C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting
T403 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 505
(905)*10 gain
C12 Terminal 1 bias frequency
T100 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 505
(917)*10 (speed)
C13
Calibration parameter

T101 Terminal 1 bias (speed) 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 505

(917)*10
C14 Terminal 1 gain frequency
T102 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 505
(918)*10 (speed)
C15
T103 Terminal 1 gain (speed) 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 505
(918)*10
C16 Terminal 1 bias command
T110 0 to 400% 0.1% 0% 510
(919)*10 (torque/magnetic flux)
C17 Terminal 1 bias (torque/
T111 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 510
(919)*10 magnetic flux)
C18 Terminal 1 gain command
T112 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 510
(920)*10 (torque/magnetic flux)
C19 Terminal 1 gain (torque/
T113 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 510
(920)*10 magnetic flux)
C8
M330 Current output bias signal 0 to 100% 0.1% — 0% 463
(930)*10
C9
M331 Current output bias current 0 to 100% 0.1% — 0% 463
(930)*10
C10
M332 Current output gain signal 0 to 100% 0.1% — 100% 463
(931)*10
C11
M333 Current output gain current 0 to 100% 0.1% — 100% 463
(931)*10
C38 Terminal 4 bias command
T410 0 to 400% 0.1% 0% 510
(932)*10 (torque/magnetic flux)
C39 Terminal 4 bias (torque/
T411 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 510
(932)*10 magnetic flux)
C40 Terminal 4 gain command
T412 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 510
(933)*10 (torque/magnetic flux)
C41 Terminal 4 gain (torque/
T413 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 510
(933)*10 magnetic flux)

192 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
C42
A630 PID display bias coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 615
(934)*10
C43
2
PID display

A631 PID display bias analog value 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 615
(934)*10
C44
A632 PID display gain coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 615
(935)*10
C45
A633 PID display gain analog value 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 615
3
(935)*10
— 977 E302 Input voltage mode selection 0 to 2 1 0 345

— 989 E490
Parameter copy alarm 10 *2
1
10 *2
744 4
release 100*3 100*3
990 E104 PU buzzer control 0, 1 1 1 340
PU

991 E105 PU contrast adjustment 0 to 63 1 58 340

5
Droop control Monitoring

0 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20,
Operation panel setting dial 22 to 36, 38 to 46, 50 to
992 M104 1 0 446
push monitor selection 57, 61, 62, 64, 67, 71
to 75, 87 to 98, 100
6
994 G403 Droop break point gain 0.1 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 738

995 G404 Droop break point torque 0.1 to 100% 0.1% 100% 738 7
— 997 H103 Fault initiation 0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 425

— 998 E430
PM parameter 0, 3003, 3103, 8009,
8109, 9009, 9109
1 0 230 8
initialization Simple
Automatic parameter 1, 2, 10, 11, 12, 13, 20,
— 999 E431 1 9999 350
setting Simple 21, 9999
— 1000 E108 Direct setting selection 0 to 2 1 0 340 9
Lq tuning target current
— 1002 C150 50 to 150%, 9999 0.1% 9999 551
adjustment coefficient
1003 G601 Notch filter frequency 0, 8 to 1250 Hz 1 Hz 0 271
10
Additional function

1004 G602 Notch filter depth 0 to 3 1 0 271

1005 G603 Notch filter width 0 to 3 1 0 271

1006 E020 Clock (year) 2000 to 2099 1 2000 334

Clock

1007 E021 Clock (month, day) Jan. 1 to Dec. 31 1 101 334

1008 E022 Clock (hour, minute) 0:00 to 23:59 1 0 334
Integral stop selection at
— 1015 A607 0 to 2, 10 to 12 1 0 601
limited frequency
PTC thermistor protection
— 1016 H021 0 to 60 s 1s 0 415
detection time
— 1018 M045 Monitor with sign selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 446

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
193
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
1020 A900 Trace operation selection 0 to 4 1 0 649
1021 A901 Trace mode selection 0 to 2 1 0 649
1022 A902 Sampling cycle 0 to 9 1 2 649
1023 A903 Number of analog channels 1 to 8 1 4 649
1024 A904 Sampling auto start 0, 1 1 0 649
1025 A905 Trigger mode selection 0 to 4 1 0 649
Number of sampling before
1026 A906 0 to 100% 1% 90% 649
trigger
Analog source selection
1027 A910 201 649
(1ch)
Analog source selection
1028 A911 202 649
(2ch)
Analog source selection
1029 A912 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 203 649
(3ch)
22 to 24, 32 to 36, 39 to
Analog source selection
1030 A913 42, 46, 52 to 54, 61, 204 649
(4ch)
62, 64, 67, 71 to 75, 87 1
Analog source selection to 98, 201 to 213, 222
1031 A914 205 649
(5ch)
to 227, 230 to 232, 235
Analog source selection to 238
1032 A915 206 649
Trace

(6ch)
Analog source selection
1033 A916 207 649
(7ch)
Analog source selection
1034 A917 208 649
(8ch)
1035 A918 Analog trigger channel 1 to 8 1 1 649
Analog trigger operation
1036 A919 0, 1 1 0 649
selection
1037 A920 Analog trigger level 600 to 1400 1 1000 649
1038 A930 Digital source selection (1ch) 1 649
1039 A931 Digital source selection (2ch) 2 649
1040 A932 Digital source selection (3ch) 3 649
1041 A933 Digital source selection (4ch) 4 649
1 to 255 1
1042 A934 Digital source selection (5ch) 5 649
1043 A935 Digital source selection (6ch) 6 649
1044 A936 Digital source selection (7ch) 7 649
1045 A937 Digital source selection (8ch) 8 649
1046 A938 Digital trigger channel 1 to 8 1 1 649
Digital trigger operation
1047 A939 0, 1 1 0 649
selection
— 1048 E106 Display-off waiting time 0 to 60 min 1 min 0 340
— 1049 E110 USB host reset 0, 1 1 0 341
DC brake judgment time for
1072 A310 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 3s 584
anti-sway control operation
Anti-sway control operation
Anti-sway control

1073 A311 0, 1 1 0 584

selection
1074 A312 Anti-sway control frequency 0.05 to 3 Hz, 9999 0.001 Hz 1 Hz 584
1075 A313 Anti-sway control depth 0 to 3 1 0 584
1076 A314 Anti-sway control width 0 to 3 1 0 584
1077 A315 Rope length 0.1 to 50 m 0.1 m 1m 584
1078 A316 Trolley weight 1 to 50000 kg 1 kg 1 kg 584
1079 A317 Load weight 1 to 50000 kg 1 kg 1 kg 584
Deceleration time at
— 1103 F040 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 367
emergency stop
Encoder magnetic pole
— 1105*9 C143
position offset
0 to 16383, 65535 1 65535 542

1106 M050 Torque monitor filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 446

Monitoring

1107 M051 Running speed monitor filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 446
Excitation current monitor
1108 M052 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 446
filter
— 1113 H414 Speed limit method selection 0 to 2, 10, 9999 1 0 287

194 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
Torque command reverse
— 1114 D403 0, 1 1 1 283
selection

— 1115 G218
Speed control integral term
clear time
0 to 9998 ms 1 ms 0s 254 2
Constant output range speed
— 1116 G206 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 254
control P gain compensation

— 1117 G261
Speed control P gain 1 (per-
unit system)
0 to 300, 9999 0.01 9999 254 3
Speed control P gain 2 (per-
— 1118 G361 0 to 300, 9999 0.01 9999 254
unit system)

— 1119 G262
Model speed control gain
(per-unit system)
0 to 300, 9999 0.01 9999 263 4
Per-unit speed control 120 Hz*2
— 1121 G260 0 to 400 Hz 0.01 Hz. 254
reference frequency 60 Hz*3
PID upper limit manipulated
5
1134 A605 0 to 100% 0.1% 100% 622
value
PID lower limit manipulated
1135 A606 0 to 100% 0.1% 100% 622
value
Second PID display bias
6
1136 A670 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 615
coefficient
Second PID display bias
1137 A671 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 615
analog value
Second PID display gain
7
1138 A672 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 615
coefficient
Second PID display gain
1139 A673 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 615
analog value 8
Second PID set point/
PID control

1140 A664 1 to 5 1 2 601

deviation input selection
Second PID measured value
1141 A665
input selection
1 to 5 1 3 601
9
1142 A640 Second PID unit selection 0 to 43, 9999 1 9999 601
1143 A641 Second PID upper limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 601
1144 A642 Second PID lower limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 601
1145 A643 Second PID deviation limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 601 10
Second PID signal operation
1146 A644 0 to 3, 10 to 13 1 0 601
selection
Second output interruption
1147 A661 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1 601
detection time
Second output interruption
1148 A662 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 601
detection level
Second output interruption
1149 A663 900 to 1100% 0.1% 1000% 601
cancel level
1150 to A810 to PLC function user
PLC

0 to 65535 1 0 646
1199 A859 parameters 1 to 50
Target position/speed
— 1220 B100 0 to 2 1 0 896
selection

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
195
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
Start command edge
1221 B101 0, 1 1 0 303
detection selection
First positioning acceleration
1222 B120 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
time
First positioning deceleration
1223 B121 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
time
1224 B122 First positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
First positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
1225 B123 1 10 303
function 102, 110 to 112
Second positioning
1226 B124 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
acceleration time
Second positioning
1227 B125 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
deceleration time
Second positioning dwell
1228 B126 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
time
Second positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
1229 B127 1 10 303
function 102, 110 to 112
Third positioning
1230 B128 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
acceleration time
Third positioning
1231 B129 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
deceleration time
1232 B130 Third positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
Third positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
Simple position control

1233 B131 1 10 303

function 102, 110 to 112
Fourth positioning
1234 B132 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
acceleration time
Fourth positioning
1235 B133 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
deceleration time
1236 B134 Fourth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
Fourth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
1237 B135 1 10 303
function 102, 110 to 112
Fifth positioning acceleration
1238 B136 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
time
Fifth positioning deceleration
1239 B137 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
time
1240 B138 Fifth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
Fifth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
1241 B139 1 10 303
function 102, 110 to 112
Sixth positioning
1242 B140 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
acceleration time
Sixth positioning
1243 B141 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
deceleration time
1244 B142 Sixth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
Sixth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
1245 B143 1 10 303
function 102, 110 to 112
Seventh positioning
1246 B144 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
acceleration time
Seventh positioning
1247 B145 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
deceleration time
Seventh positioning dwell
1248 B146 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
time
Seventh positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
1249 B147 1 10 303
function 102, 110 to 112

196 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
Eighth positioning
1250 B148 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
acceleration time

1251 B149
Eighth positioning
deceleration time
0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303 2
1252 B150 Eighth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
Eighth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
1253 B151 1 10 303
function
Ninth positioning
102, 110 to 112
3
1254 B152 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
acceleration time
Ninth positioning
1255 B153 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
deceleration time 4
1256 B154 Ninth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
Ninth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
1257 B155 1 10 303
function 102, 110 to 112

1258 B156
Tenth positioning
0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
5
acceleration time
Tenth positioning
1259 B157 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
deceleration time
1260 B158 Tenth positioning dwell time 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303 6
Tenth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
1261 B159 1 10 303
function 102, 110 to 112

1262 B160
Eleventh positioning
acceleration time
0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303 7
Eleventh positioning
1263 B161 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
deceleration time

1264 B162
Eleventh positioning dwell
time
0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303 8
Simple position control

Eleventh positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to

1265 B163 1 10 303
function 102, 110 to 112

1266 B164
Twelfth positioning
acceleration time
0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303 9
Twelfth positioning
1267 B165 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
deceleration time

1268 B166
Twelfth positioning dwell
time
0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303 10
Twelfth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
1269 B167 1 10 303
function 102, 110 to 112
Thirteenth positioning
1270 B168 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
acceleration time
Thirteenth positioning
1271 B169 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
deceleration time
Thirteenth positioning dwell
1272 B170 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
time
Thirteenth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
1273 B171 1 10 303
function 102, 110 to 112
Fourteenth positioning
1274 B172 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
acceleration time
Fourteenth positioning
1275 B173 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
deceleration time
Fourteenth positioning dwell
1276 B174 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
time
Fourteenth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
1277 B175 1 10 303
function 102, 110 to 112
Fifteenth positioning
1278 B176 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
acceleration time
Fifteenth positioning
1279 B177 0.01 to 360 s 0.01 s 5s 303
deceleration time
Fifteenth positioning dwell
1280 B178 0 to 20000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 303
time
Fifteenth positioning sub- 0, 2, 10, 12, 100, 102,
1281 B179 1 10 303
function 110, 112

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
197
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group FM CA to page setting
increments
Home position return method
1282 B180 0 to 6 1 4 303
selection
1283 B181 Home position return speed 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz. 2 Hz 303
Home position return shifting
1284 B182 0 to 10 Hz 0.01 Hz. 0.5 Hz 303
speed
Home position shift amount
1285 B183 0 to 9999 1 0 303
lower 4 digits
Home position shift amount
Home position return / position detection

1286 B184 0 to 9999 1 0 303

upper 4 digits
Travel distance after
1287 B185 proximity dog ON lower 4 0 to 9999 1 2048 303
digits
Travel distance after
1288 B186 proximity dog ON upper 4 0 to 9999 1 0 303
digits
Home position return stopper
1289 B187 0 to 200% 0.1% 40% 303
torque
Home position return stopper
1290 B188 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 303
waiting time
Position control terminal
1292 B190 0, 1 1 0 303
input selection
1293 B191 Roll feeding mode selection 0, 1 1 0 303
Position detection lower 4
1294 B192 0 to 9999 1 0 327
digits
Position detection upper 4
1295 B193 0 to 9999 1 0 327
digits
1296 B194 Position detection selection 0 to 2 1 0 327
Position detection hysteresis
1297 B195 0 to 32767 1 0 327
width
— 1298 B013 Second position control gain 0 to 150 s-1 1 s-1 25 s-1 328
Second pre-excitation
— 1299 G108 0, 1 1 0 715
selection
1300 to N500 to Communication option parameters.
—
1343 N543 For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the option.
P/PI control switchover
— 1348 G263 0 to 400 Hz 0.01 Hz. 0 Hz 254
frequency
Emergency stop operation
— 1349 G264 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 367
selection
1350 to N550 to Communication option parameters.
—
1359 N559 For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the option.
— 1410 A170 Starting times lower 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 576
— 1411 A171 Starting times upper 4 digits 0 to 9999 1 0 576
Motor induced voltage
— 1412 C135 0 to 2, 9999 1 9999 551
constant (phi f) exponent
Second motor induced
— 1413 C235 voltage constant (phi f) 0 to 2, 9999 1 9999 551
exponent

198 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Minimum Initial value
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group
increments
FM CA to page setting 1
Load characteristics
1480 H520 0, 1 (2 to 5, 81 to 85) 1 0 439
measurement mode

1481 H521
Load characteristics load
reference 1
0 to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1% 9999 439 2
Load characteristics load
1482 H522 0 to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1% 9999 439
reference 2

1483 H523
Load characteristics load
reference 3
0 to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1% 9999 439 3
Load characteristics fault detection

Load characteristics load

1484 H524 0 to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1% 9999 439
reference 4

1485 H525
Load characteristics load
reference 5
0 to 400%, 8888, 9999 0.1% 9999 439 4
Load characteristics
1486 H526 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 439
maximum frequency

1487 H527
Load characteristics
0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 439 5
minimum frequency
Upper limit warning detection
1488 H531 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 20% 439
width

1489 H532
Lower limit warning
0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 20% 439
6
detection width
Upper limit fault detection
1490 H533 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 439
width

1491 H534
Lower limit fault detection
0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 439
7
width
Load status detection signal
1492 H535 delay time / load reference 0 to 60 s 0.1 s 1s 439
measurement waiting time 8
— 1499 E415 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Pr.CLR Parameter clear (0), 1 1 0 743
Clear parameters

ALL.CL All parameter clear (0), 1 1 0 743

9
Err.CL Fault history clear (0), 1 1 0 774

10
— Pr.CPY Parameter copy (0), 1 to 3 1 0 744
— Pr.CHG Initial value change list — 1 0 751
— IPM IPM initialization 0, 3003 1 0 230
— AUTO Automatic parameter setting — — — 350
— Pr.MD Group parameter setting (0), 1, 2 1 0 201
*1 Differs according to the capacity.
6%: FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower, FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower
4%: FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K), FR-A840-00052(1.5K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K)
3%: FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K)
2%: FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K)
1%: FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
*2 The setting range or initial value for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*3 The setting range or initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
*4 The initial value for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.
*5 The initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher.
*6 Differs according to the capacity.
4%: FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower
2%: FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K)
1%: FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
*7 The value for the 200 V class.
*8 The value for the 400 V class.
*9 The setting is available only when a plug-in option that supports Vector control is installed. For the corresponding parameters of each option, refer
to the detail page.
*10 The parameter number in parentheses is that used (displayed) on the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit.
*11 The setting range or initial value for the standard model.
*12 The setting range or initial value for the separated converter type.
*13 The setting range or initial value for the IP55 compatible model.
*14 The setting is available for the standard structure model.
*15 The setting is available for the standard structure model and the IP55 compatible model.
*16 The setting is available when the PLC function is enabled.

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
199
 *17 The setting is available for the FR-A800-GF or when a compatible plug-in option is installed.
*18 Refer to the FR-A8AVP Instruction Manual (For Inverter/Converter Switching).

200 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
5.1.2 Use of a function group number for the 1
identification of parameters
A parameter identification number shown on the PU can be switched from a parameter number to a function group number. 2
As parameters are grouped by function and displayed by the group, the related parameters can be set continually at a time.

 Changing a parameter identification number to a function group number

3
Pr.MD setting Description
The setting of parameter identification number remains the same as
0
the last setting.

1
The parameter number is used for the identification of parameters, 4
and displayed in numerical order.
The function group number is used for the identification of
2
parameters, and displayed in alphanumeric order.
5
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
6
2. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears on the 12- 7
segment LCD display.)

3. Selecting a parameter 8
Turn until " " (Group parameter setting) appears.

Press to confirm the selection. The setting " " (initial value) will appear. 9
4. Selecting the use of the function group number

Turn to change the set value to " " (function group number). Press to confirm the Group parameter 10
setting. " " and " " are displayed alternately after the setting is completed.

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
201
  Selecting a parameter by function group number to change its setting
The following shows the procedure to change the setting of P.H400 (Pr.1) Maximum frequency.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears on the 12-
segment LCD display.)

4. Enabling the function group selection

Press several times until " " appears. Parameter groups can now be selected.

5. Enabling the function group selection

Turn until " " (Protective function parameter 4) appears. Press to confirm the selection.

" " will appear, which shows that the operation panel is ready for selection of a number in the group
of Protective function parameter 4.

6. Selecting a parameter

Turn until " " (P.H400 Maximum frequency) appears. Press to display the present set

value. " (initial value)" appears.

7. Changing the setting value

Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to confirm the selection. " " and

" " are displayed alternately after the setting is completed.

202 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
5.1.3 Parameter list (by function group number)
1
 E: Environment setting Pr. group Pr. Name
Refer
to page
parameters PWM frequency automatic
E602 260 356
Parameters for the inverter operating environment. switchover 2
E700 255 Life alarm status display 359
Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Inrush current limit circuit life
to page E701 256*4 display
359

E000 168
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not
set. E702 257
Control circuit capacitor life
359
3
display
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not
E001 169 Main circuit capacitor life
set. E703 258*4 display
359
E020 1006 Clock (year) 334
Main circuit capacitor life 4
E021 1007 Clock (month, day) 334 E704 259*4 measuring
359
E022 1008 Clock (hour, minute) 334 Display/reset ABC1 relay
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not E706 507 359
contact life
E023 269
set. Display/reset ABC2 relay
5
E707 508 359
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not contact life
E080 168
set. E710 503 Maintenance timer 1 363
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not
E081 169
set. E711 504
Maintenance timer 1 warning
output set time
363 6
E100 75 Reset selection 336 E712 686 Maintenance timer 2 363
E101 75 Disconnected PU detection 336 Maintenance timer 2 warning
E713 687 363
E102 75 PU stop selection 336 output set time 7
E103 145 PU display language selection 339 E714 688 Maintenance timer 3 363
E104 990 PU buzzer control 340 Maintenance timer 3 warning
E715 689 363
E105 991 PU contrast adjustment 340 output set time
E106 1048 Display-off waiting time 340 E720 555 Current average time 363 8
E107 75 Reset limit 336 E721 556 Data output mask time 363
E108 1000 Direct setting selection 340 Current average value monitor
E722 557 363
signal output reference current
E110 1049 USB host reset
Frequency setting/key lock
341
9
E200 161 341
operation selection  F: Parameters for the settings of
Frequency change increment
E201 295 342 the acceleration/deceleration time
amount setting 10
E300 30
Regenerative function
724
and the acceleration/deceleration
selection
E301 570 Multiple rating setting 343 pattern
E302 977 Input voltage mode selection 345 Parameters for the motor acceleration/deceleration
Inverter/converter characteristics.
E310 328 *7
switching Simple
Refer
E400 77 Parameter write selection 345 Pr. group Pr. Name
to page
E410 296 Password lock level 348 Acceleration/deceleration
E411 297 Password lock/unlock 348 F000 20 367
reference frequency
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not Acceleration/deceleration time
E415 1499 F001 21 367
set. increments
E420 888 Free parameter 1 350 Jog acceleration/deceleration
F002 16 410
E421 889 Free parameter 2 350 time
PM parameter 628,
E430 998 230 F003 611 Acceleration time at a restart
initialization Simple 635
Automatic parameter F010 7 Acceleration time Simple 367
E431 999 350
setting Simple F011 8 Deceleration time Simple 367
User group read selection Second acceleration/ 367,
E440 160 354 F020 44
Simple deceleration time 622
User group registered display/ 367,
E441 172 354 F021 45 Second deceleration time
batch clear 622
E442 173 User group registration 354 Acceleration/deceleration time
F022 147 367
E443 174 User group clear 354 switching frequency
E490 989 Parameter copy alarm release 744 Third acceleration/
F030 110 367
deceleration time
E600 72 PWM frequency selection 356
F031 111 Third deceleration time 367
E601 240 Soft-PWM operation selection 356

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
203
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
Deceleration time at Communication speed
F040 1103 367 D011 339 400
emergency stop command source
Acceleration time in low-speed NET mode operation command
F070 791 367 D012 550 400
range source selection
Deceleration time in low-speed PU mode operation command
F071 792 367 D013 551 400
range source selection
Acceleration/deceleration Reverse rotation prevention
F100 29 372 D020 78 406
pattern selection selection
F101 59 Remote function selection 377 245,
D030 811 Set resolution switchover
381, 444
F102 13 Starting frequency
382 406,
D100 291 Pulse train I/O selection
F103 571 Holding time at a start 381 457
Backlash acceleration Input pulse division scaling
F200 140 372 D101 384 406
stopping frequency factor
Backlash acceleration D110 385 Frequency for zero input pulse 406
F201 141 372
stopping time Frequency for maximum input
D111 386 406
Backlash deceleration pulse
F202 142 372
stopping frequency Pulse train torque command
D120 432*1 bias
283
Backlash deceleration
F203 143 372
stopping time Pulse train torque command
D121 433*1 gain
283
F300 380 Acceleration S-pattern 1 372
F301 381 Deceleration S-pattern 1 372 D200 15 Jog frequency 410
F302 382 Acceleration S-pattern 2 372 Multi-speed input
D300 28 411
compensation selection
F303 383 Deceleration S-pattern 2 372
Multi-speed setting (high
S-pattern time at a start of D301 4 411
F400 516 372 speed) Simple
acceleration
S-pattern time at a completion Multi-speed setting (middle
F401 517 372 D302 5 411
of acceleration speed) Simple
S-pattern time at a start of Multi-speed setting (low
F402 518 372 D303 6 411
deceleration speed) Simple
S-pattern time at a completion
F403 519 372 D304 to Multi-speed setting (speed 4 to
of deceleration 24 to 27 411
D307 speed 7)
384,
Automatic acceleration/ D308 to 232 to Multi-speed setting (speed 8 to
F500 292 387, 411
deceleration D315 239 speed 15)
572
Torque command source
384, D400 804 283
F510 61 Reference current selection
387
D401 805 Torque command value (RAM) 283
Reference value at
F511 62 384 Torque command value (RAM,
acceleration D402 806 283
EEPROM)
Reference value at
F512 63 384 Torque command reverse
deceleration D403 1114 283
selection
Acceleration/deceleration
F513 293 384
separate selection

F520 64
Starting frequency for elevator
387
 H: Protective function parameter
mode
Parameters to protect the motor and the inverter.

 D: Parameters for the setting of Pr. group Pr. Name

Refer
to page
operation command and Electronic thermal O/L 415,
H000 9 532,
frequency command relay Simple
551
Parameters for setting the command source to the inverter, First free thermal reduction
H001 600 415
and the motor driving frequency and torque. frequency 1
First free thermal reduction
Refer H002 601 415
Pr. group Pr. Name ratio 1
to page First free thermal reduction
Operation mode H003 602 415
389, frequency 2
D000 79
selection Simple 398 First free thermal reduction
H004 603 415
Communication startup mode ratio 2
D001 340 398
selection First free thermal reduction
H005 604 415
Communication operation frequency 3
D010 338 400
command source H006 607 Motor permissible load level 415

204 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
415, Stall prevention operation 245,
1
Second electronic thermal O/L H500 22
H010 51 532, level (Torque limit level) 431
relay
551 Stall prevention operation
H501 156 431
H011 692
Second free thermal reduction
frequency 1
415
selection
Load characteristics
2
H520 1480 439
Second free thermal reduction measurement mode
H012 693 415
ratio 1 Load characteristics load
H521 1481 439
H013 694
Second free thermal reduction
frequency 2
415
reference 1
Load characteristics load
3
H522 1482 439
Second free thermal reduction reference 2
H014 695 415
ratio 2 Load characteristics load
H523 1483 439
H015 696
Second free thermal reduction
frequency 3
415
reference 3 4
Load characteristics load
H524 1484 439
Second motor permissible reference 4
H016 608 415
load level Load characteristics load
H020 561
PTC thermistor protection
415
H525 1485
reference 5
439
5
level Load characteristics maximum
H526 1486 439
PTC thermistor protection frequency
H021 1016 415
detection time Load characteristics minimum
H022 876*1 Thermal protector input 415
H527 1487
frequency
439
6
H030 875 Fault definition 422 Upper limit warning detection
H531 1488 439
width
Cooling fan operation
H100 244 423 Lower limit warning detection
selection
Earth (ground) fault detection
H532 1489
width
439 7
H101 249 425 Upper limit fault detection
at start H533 1490 439
width
H102 598 Undervoltage level 425
Lower limit fault detection
H103 997 Fault initiation 425 H534 1491
width
439 8
Cooling fan operation
Load status detection signal
H106 244 selection during the test 423
H535 1492 delay time / load reference 439
operation
measurement waiting time
H200 251
Output phase loss protection
426 Second stall prevention 9
selection H600 48 431
operation level
Input phase loss protection
H201 872*4 selection
426 Second stall prevention
H601 49 431
H300 65 Retry selection 426
operation frequency
Third stall prevention
10
Number of retries at fault H602 114 431
H301 67 426 operation level
occurrence
Third stall prevention
H302 68 Retry waiting time 426 H603 115 431
operation frequency
H303 69 Retry count display erase 426 Stall prevention operation
H400 1 Maximum frequency Simple 428 H610 23 level compensation factor at 431
double speed
H401 2 Minimum frequency Simple 428
Stall prevention operation
High speed maximum H611 66 431
H402 18 428 reduction starting frequency
frequency
Stall prevention level at 0 V
H410 807 Speed limit selection 287 H620 148 431
input
Forward rotation speed limit/ Stall prevention level at 10 V
H411 808 287 H621 149 431
speed limit input
Reverse rotation speed limit/ Voltage reduction selection
H412 809 287
reverse-side speed limit H631 154 during stall prevention 431
H414 1113 Speed limit method selection 287 operation
H415 873*1 Speed limit 269 Torque limit input method
H700 810 245
Speed deviation excess 269, selection
H416 285
detection frequency 736 Torque limit level
H701 812 245
(regeneration)
H417 853*1 Speed deviation time 269
Torque limit level (3rd
H420 31 Frequency jump 1A 429 H702 813 245
quadrant)
H421 32 Frequency jump 1B 429
Torque limit level (4th
H422 33 Frequency jump 2A 429 H703 814 245
quadrant)
H423 34 Frequency jump 2B 429 245,
H424 35 Frequency jump 3A 429 H704 801 Output limit level
283
H425 36 Frequency jump 3B 429 H710 815 Torque limit level 2 245
H429 552 Frequency jump range 429 Torque limit level during
H720 816 245
acceleration

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
205
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
Torque limit level during Power saving monitor average
H721 817 245 M205 897 467
deceleration time
H730 874 OLT level setting 245 Power saving cumulative
M206 898 467
H800 374 Overspeed detection level 443 monitor clear
H881 690 Deceleration check time 270 Operation time rate (estimated
M207 899 467
value)
FM/CA terminal function
 M: Monitoring and its output M300 54
selection
457

signal M301 158 AM terminal function selection 457

C0
Parameters for the settings regarding the monitoring to check M310 FM/CA terminal calibration 463
(900)*2
the inverter's operating status and the output signals for the
C1
monitoring. M320 AM terminal calibration 463
(901)*2
Refer M321 867 AM output filter 463
Pr. group Pr. Name
to page C8
M330 Current output bias signal 463
M000 37 Speed display 444 (930)*2
M001 505 Speed setting reference 444 C9
M331 Current output bias current 463
M002 144 Speed setting switchover 444 (930)*2
M020 170 Watt-hour meter clear 446 C10
M332 Current output gain signal 463
Energization time carrying- (931)*2
M021 563 446
over times C11
Monitor decimal digits M333 Current output gain current 463
M022 268 446 (931)*2
selection
M334 869 Current output filter 463
Cumulative power monitor 446,
M023 891 RUN terminal function
digit shifted times 467 M400 190 473
selection
M030 171 Operation hour meter clear 446
M401 191 SU terminal function selection 473
Operating time carrying-over
M031 564 446 M402 192 IPF terminal function selection 473
times
M403 193 OL terminal function selection 473
Frequency monitoring
M040 55 457 M404 194 FU terminal function selection 473
reference
M041 56 Current monitoring reference 457 ABC1 terminal function
M405 195 473
selection
M042 866 Torque monitoring reference 457
ABC2 terminal function
Analog input display unit M406 196 473
M043 241 505 selection
switchover
Monitor negative output 446,
M410 313*5*6 DO0 output selection 473
M044 290 *5*6
selection 457 M411 314 DO1 output selection 473
M045 1018 Monitor with sign selection 446 M412 315*5*6 DO2 output selection 473
M050 1106 Torque monitor filter 446
M413 316*5 DO3 output selection 473
M051 1107 Running speed monitor filter 446
M414 *5 DO4 output selection 473
317
Excitation current monitor
M052 1108 446
filter M415 318*5 DO5 output selection 473
Control circuit temperature M416 *5 DO6 output selection 473
M060 663 494 319
signal output level
M420 320*5 RA1 output selection 473
Operation panel main monitor
M100 52 446 M421 321*5 RA2 output selection 473
selection
Operation panel monitor M422 322*5 RA3 output selection 473
M101 774 446
selection 1 245,
M430 157 OL signal output timer
Operation panel monitor 431
M102 775 446
selection 2 M431 289 Inverter output terminal filter 473
Operation panel monitor Output current detection
M103 776 446 M433 166 487
selection 3 signal retention time
Operation panel setting dial 457, M440 870 Speed detection hysteresis 484
M104 992
push monitor selection 446
M441 41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 484
M200 892 Load factor 467
M442 42 Output frequency detection 484
Energy saving monitor
M201 893 467 Output frequency detection for
reference (motor capacity) M443 43 484
reverse rotation
Control selection during
Second output frequency
M202 894 commercial power-supply 467 M444 50 484
detection
operation
Third output frequency 488,
Power saving rate reference M445 116
M203 895 467 detection 484
value
M446 865 Low speed detection 484
M204 896 Power unit cost 467
M460 150 Output current detection level 487

206 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
Output current detection Terminal 4 frequency setting
1
M461 151 487 T042 126 505
signal delay time gain frequency Simple
M462 152 Zero current detection level 487 T050 252 Override bias 501
M463 153 Zero current detection time
Output current detection
487 T051 253 Override gain 501 2
M464 167 487 T052 573 4 mA input check selection 517
operation selection
4 mA input fault operation
M470 864 Torque detection 488 T053 777 517
frequency
M500 495 Remote output selection 489 T054 778 4 mA input check filter 517 3
M501 496 Remote output data 1 489 C12 Terminal 1 bias frequency
M502 497 Remote output data 2 489 T100 505
(917)*2 (speed)
M510 76 Fault code output selection 492
Pulse increment setting for T101
C13
(917)*2
Terminal 1 bias (speed) 505 4
M520 799 493
output power
C14 Terminal 1 gain frequency
Analog remote output T102 505
M530 655 490 (918)*2 (speed)

M531 656
selection
Analog remote output 1 490 T103
C15
Terminal 1 gain (speed) 505
5
*2
(918)
M532 657 Analog remote output 2 490
C16 Terminal 1 bias command
M533 658 Analog remote output 3 490 T110 510
M534 659 Analog remote output 4 490
(919)*2
C17
(torque/magnetic flux)
6
Control terminal option- Terminal 1 bias (torque/
T111 510
M600 863*1 Encoder pulse division ratio
495 (919)*2 magnetic flux)
C18 Terminal 1 gain command
M601 413*1 Encoder pulse division ratio 495
Cumulative pulse clear signal
T112
(920)*2 (torque/magnetic flux)
510
7
M610 635*1 selection
321 C19 Terminal 1 gain (torque/
T113 510
Cumulative pulse division (920)*2 magnetic flux)
M611 636*1 321
scaling factor
Control terminal option-
T200
C2
(902)*2
Terminal 2 frequency setting
bias frequency
505 8
M612 637*1 Cumulative pulse division 321 C3 Terminal 2 frequency setting
scaling factor T201 505
(902)*2 bias
M613 638*1 Cumulative pulse storage 321
T202
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting
505
9
(903)*2 gain frequency
 T: Multi-function input terminal T203
C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting
505
(903)*2
parameters
C5
gain
Terminal 4 frequency setting
10
Parameters for the setting of the input terminals via which T400 505
(904)*2 bias frequency
commands are given to the inverter. C6 Terminal 4 frequency setting
T401 505
Refer (904)*2 bias
Pr. group Pr. Name 126
to page Terminal 4 frequency setting
T402 505
496, (905)*2 gain frequency
T000 73 Analog input selection
501 C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting
T403 505
T001 267 Terminal 4 input selection 496 (905)*2 gain
T002 74 Input filter time constant 503 C38 Terminal 4 bias command
T410 510
T003 822 Speed setting filter 1 503 (932)*2 (torque/magnetic flux)
T004 826 Torque setting filter 1 503 C39 Terminal 4 bias (torque/
T411 510
T005 832 Speed setting filter 2 503 (932)*2 magnetic flux)
T006 836 Torque setting filter 2 503 C40 Terminal 4 gain command
T412 510
T007 849 Analog input offset adjustment 503 (933)*2 (torque/magnetic flux)
245, C41 Terminal 4 gain (torque/
Terminal 1 function T413 510
T010 868 431, (933)*2 magnetic flux)
assignment
500
STF terminal function
Terminal 1 added T700 178 521
selection
T021 242 compensation amount 501
STR terminal function
(terminal 2) T701 179 521
selection
Terminal 2 frequency setting
T022 125 505 T702 180 RL terminal function selection 521
gain frequency Simple
T703 181 RM terminal function selection 521
245,
Terminal 4 function T704 182 RH terminal function selection 521
T040 858 431,
assignment T705 183 RT terminal function selection 521
500
Terminal 1 added T706 184 AU terminal function selection 521
T041 243 compensation amount 501 JOG terminal function
T707 185 521
(terminal 4) selection

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
207
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
T708 186 CS terminal function selection 521 Induced voltage constant (phi
C130 706 551
MRS terminal function f)
T709 187 521
selection C131 711 Motor Ld decay ratio 551
STOP terminal function C132 712 Motor Lq decay ratio 551
T710 188 521
selection C133 725 Motor protection current level 551
RES terminal function Motor induced voltage
T711 189 521 C135 1412 551
selection constant (phi f) exponent
T720 17 MRS input selection 524 94, 585,
T721 599 X10 terminal input selection 724
C140 369*1 Number of encoder pulses
736
Power failure stop external 94, 585,
T722 606
signal input selection
642 C141 359*1 Encoder rotation direction
736
RT signal function validity Encoder position tuning
T730 155
condition selection
525 C142 373*1 setting/status
542

T740 699 Input terminal filter 521 Encoder magnetic pole

C143 1105*1 position offset
542

 C: Motor constant parameters C148 376*1

Encoder signal loss detection
enable/disable selection
561
Parameters for the applied motor setting. Lq tuning target current
C150 1002 551
adjustment coefficient
Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Starting resistance tuning
to page C182 717 551
compensation
532,
C000 684 Tuning data unit switchover Starting magnetic pole
551 C185 721 551
position detection pulse width
528,
C100 71 Applied motor C200 450 Second applied motor 528
532
221, 532,
C201 453 Second motor capacity
C101 80 Motor capacity 532, 551
551 532,
C202 454 Number of second motor poles
221, 551
C102 81 Number of motor poles 532, 415,
551 C203 51 Rated second motor current 532,
415, 551
C103 9 Rated motor current Simple 532, 532,
C204 456 Rated second motor voltage
551 551
221, 532,
C205 457 Rated second motor frequency
C104 83 Rated motor voltage 532, 551
551 Second motor maximum
C206 743 551
221, frequency
C105 84 Rated motor frequency 532, C207 744 Second motor inertia (integer) 551
551 Second motor inertia
C208 745 551
C106 702 Maximum motor frequency 551 (exponent)
C107 707 Motor inertia (integer) 551 532,
Second motor auto tuning
C108 724 Motor inertia (exponent) 551 C210 463 551,
setting/status
532, 638
C110 96 Auto tuning setting/status 551, Second motor online auto
C211 574 558
638 tuning
C111 95 Online auto tuning selection 558 532,
Easy gain tuning response C220 458 Second motor constant (R1) 551,
C112 818 254 638
level setting
C113 819 Easy gain tuning selection 254 C221 459 Second motor constant (R2) 532
254, Second motor constant (L1) / 532,
C114 880 Load inertia ratio C222 460
263 d-axis inductance (Ld) 551
532, Second motor constant (L2) / 532,
C223 461
C120 90 Motor constant (R1) 551, q-axis inductance (Lq) 551
638 C224 462 Second motor constant (X) 532
C121 91 Motor constant (R2) 532 Second motor excitation
C225 455 532
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis 532, current
C122 92 Second motor torque current/ 532,
inductance (Ld) 551
C226 860
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis 532, Rated PM motor current 551
C123 93
inductance (Lq) 551 Second motor induced voltage
C230 738 551
C124 94 Motor constant (X) 532 constant (phi f)
C125 82 Motor excitation current 532 C231 739 Second motor Ld decay ratio 551
Torque current/Rated PM 532, C232 740 Second motor Lq decay ratio 551
C126 859
motor current 551

208 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Refer Pr. Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. Name
to page group to page
Second motor protection Second brake operation time at
1
C233 746 551 A123 645 572
current level start
Second motor induced voltage A124 646 Second brake operation frequency 572
C235 1413 551
constant (phi f) exponent
Control terminal option-
A125 647
Second brake operation time at
stop
572 2
C240 851*1 Number of encoder pulses
94
Second deceleration detection
A126 648 572
*1 Control terminal option- function selection
C241 852 94
Encoder rotation direction
A128 650
Second brake opening current
selection
572 3
C242 862*1 Encoder option selection 226
Control terminal option— Second brake operation frequency
A129 651 572
C243 871*1 Encoder position tuning 542 selection
setting/status
A130 641
Second brake sequence operation
572 4
Control terminal option— selection
C244 887*1 Encoder magnetic pole 542 A170 1410 Starting times lower 4 digits 576
position offset A171 1411 Starting times upper 4 digits 576
Control terminal option-Signal
A200 270
Stop-on contact/load torque high- 577, 5
C248 855*1 loss detection enable/disable 561 speed frequency control selection 580
selection High-speed setting maximum
Second starting resistance A201 271 580
current
C282 741
tuning compensation
551
Middle-speed setting minimum 6
Second motor magnetic pole A202 272 580
C285 742 551 current
detection pulse width A203 273 Current averaging range 580

 A: Application parameters A204 274

Current averaging filter time
constant
580 7
Parameters for the setting of a specific application. Stop-on contact excitation current
A205 275 577
low-speed scaling factor
Pr.
group
Pr. Name
Refer
to page
A206 276
PWM carrier frequency at stop-on
contact
577 8
Electronic bypass sequence A300 592 Traverse function selection 582
A000 135 563
selection A301 593 Maximum amplitude amount 582
A001 136 MC switchover interlock time 563
A302 594
Amplitude compensation amount
582
9
A002 137 Start waiting time 563 during deceleration
A003 138 Bypass selection at a fault 563 Amplitude compensation amount
A303 595 582
Automatic switchover frequency during acceleration
A004 139
from inverter to bypass operation
563
A304 596 Amplitude acceleration time 582 10
Automatic switchover frequency A305 597 Amplitude deceleration time 582
A005 159 range from bypass to inverter 563 DC brake judgment time for anti-
operation A310 1072 584
sway control operation
A006 248 Self power management selection 569 Anti-sway control operation
A311 1073 584
Main circuit power OFF waiting selection
A007 254 569
time A312 1074 Anti-sway control frequency 584
A100 278 Brake opening frequency 572 A313 1075 Anti-sway control depth 584
A101 279 Brake opening current 572 A314 1076 Anti-sway control width 584
Brake opening current detection A315 1077 Rope length 584
A102 280 572
time
A316 1078 Trolley weight 584
A103 281 Brake operation time at start 572
A317 1079 Load weight 584
A104 282 Brake operation frequency 572
A510 350*1 Stop position command selection 585
A105 283 Brake operation time at stop 572
A511 *1 16-bit data selection 585
Deceleration detection function 360
A106 284 572
selection A512 361*1 Position shift 585
A107 285 Overspeed detection frequency 572 A520 362 *1 Orientation position loop gain 585
A108 639 Brake opening current selection 572 Completion signal output delay
Brake operation frequency A521 363*1 time
585
A109 640 572
selection
A522 364*1 Encoder stop check time 585
384,
Automatic acceleration/ A523 365 *1 Orientation limit 585
A110 292 387,
deceleration
572 A524 366*1 Recheck time 585
A120 642 Second brake opening frequency 572 A525 393 *1 Orientation selection 585
A121 643 Second brake opening current 572
A526 351*1 Orientation speed 585
Second brake opening current
A122 644 572 A527 352 *1 Creep speed 585
detection time
A528 353*1 Creep switchover position 585

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
209
 Pr. Refer Pr. Refer
Pr. Name Pr. Name
group to page group to page
A529 354*1 Position loop switchover position 585 A642 1144 Second PID lower limit 601
A530 *1 DC injection brake start position 585 A643 1145 Second PID deviation limit 601
355
Second PID signal operation
A531 356*1 Internal stop position command 585 A644 1146
selection
601
A532 *1 Orientation in-position zone 585
357 A650 753 Second PID action selection 601
A533 358*1 Servo torque selection 585 A651 755 Second PID action set point 601
A540 394*1 Number of machine side gear teeth 585 Second PID control automatic
A652 754 601
switchover frequency
A541 395*1 Number of motor side gear teeth 585
A653 756 Second PID proportional band 601
A542 396*1 Orientation speed gain (P term) 585
A654 757 Second PID integral time 601
A543 397*1 Orientation speed integral time 585 A655 758 Second PID differential time 601
A544 398*1 Orientation speed gain (D term) 585 A656 765 Second pre-charge fault selection 618
A545 399 *1 Orientation deceleration ratio 585 A657 766 Second pre-charge ending level 618
Number of machine end encoder A658 767 Second pre-charge ending time 618
A546 829*1 pulses
585 Second pre-charge upper
A659 768 618
A600 759 PID unit selection 615 detection level
601, A660 769 Second pre-charge time limit 618
A601 131 PID upper limit Second output interruption
622 A661 1147 601
601, detection time
A602 132 PID lower limit Second output interruption
622 A662 1148 601
A603 553 PID deviation limit 601 detection level
A604 554 PID signal operation selection 601 Second output interruption cancel
A663 1149 601
level
A605 1134 PID upper limit manipulated value 622
Second PID set point/deviation
A606 1135 PID lower limit manipulated value 622 A664 1140 601
input selection
Integral stop selection at limited
A607 1015 601 Second PID measured value input
frequency A665 1141 601
selection
601,
A610 128 PID action selection Second PID display bias
622 A670 1136 615
coefficient
601,
A611 133 PID action set point Second PID display bias analog
622 A671 1137 615
value
PID control automatic switchover
A612 127 601 Second PID display gain
frequency A672 1138 615
coefficient
601,
A613 129 PID proportional band Second PID display gain analog
622 A673 1139 615
value
601,
A614 130 PID integral time A680 573 4 mA input check selection 517
622
4 mA input fault operation
601, A681 777 517
A615 134 PID differential time frequency
622
A682 778 4 mA input check filter 517
A616 760 Pre-charge fault selection 618
Automatic restart after 628,
A617 761 Pre-charge ending level 618
A700 162 instantaneous power failure 635,
A618 762 Pre-charge ending time 618 selection 638
A619 763 Pre-charge upper detection level 618 Rotation direction detection
A701 299 628
A620 764 Pre-charge time limit 618 selection at restarting
A621 575 Output interruption detection time 601 628,
A702 57 Restart coasting time
A622 576 Output interruption detection level 601 635
A623 577 Output interruption cancel level 601 A703 58 Restart cushion time 628
PID set point/deviation input 601, A704 163 First cushion time for restart 628
A624 609
selection 622 A705 164 First cushion voltage for restart 628
PID measured value input 601, Stall prevention operation level for
A625 610 A710 165 628
selection 622 restart
C42 532,
A630 PID display bias coefficient 615 A711 298 Frequency search gain
(934)*2 638
C43 532,
A631 PID display bias analog value 615 A712 560 Second frequency search gain
(934) *2 638
C44 A730 261 Power failure stop selection 642
A632 *2 PID display gain coefficient 615 Subtracted frequency at
(935) A731 262 642
deceleration start
C45
A633 PID display gain analog value 615 A732 263 Subtraction starting frequency 642
(935)*2
A733 264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 642
A640 1142 Second PID unit selection 601
A734 265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 642
A641 1143 Second PID upper limit 601

210 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Pr. Refer Refer
Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
group to page to page
Power failure deceleration time Position command
1
A735 266 642
switchover frequency B005 424 acceleration/deceleration time 325
A785 294 UV avoidance voltage gain 642 constant
A786
A800
668
414
Power failure stop frequency gain
PLC function operation selection
642
646
B006 425
Position feed forward
command filter
328 2
Inverter operation lock mode B007 426 In-position width 327
A801 415 646 B008 427 Excessive level error 327
setting
A802 416 Pre-scale function selection 646 B009 428 Command pulse selection 319 3
A803 417 Pre-scale setting value 646 B010 429 Clear signal selection 319
A804 498 PLC function flash memory clear 646 B011 430 Pulse monitor selection 319
User parameter auto storage B012 446 Model position control gain 328
A805 675
function selection
646
B013 1298 Second position control gain 328 4
A810 to 1150 to PLC function user parameters 1 to Digital position control sudden
646 B020 464 303
A859 1199 50 stop deceleration time
A900
A901
1020
1021
Trace operation selection
Trace mode selection
649
649
B021 465
First target position lower 4
digits
303 5
A902 1022 Sampling cycle 649 First target position upper 4
B022 466 303
A903 1023 Number of analog channels 649 digits

A904 1024 Sampling auto start 649 B023 467

Second target position lower 4
digits
303 6
A905 1025 Trigger mode selection 649
Second target position upper 4
A906 1026 Number of sampling before trigger 649 B024 468 303
digits
A910
A911
1027
1028
Analog source selection (1ch)
Analog source selection (2ch)
649
649 B025 469
Third target position lower 4
digits
303 7
A912 1029 Analog source selection (3ch) 649 Third target position upper 4
B026 470 303
A913 1030 Analog source selection (4ch) 649 digits
A914 1031 Analog source selection (5ch) 649
B027 471
Fourth target position lower 4
303 8
A915 1032 Analog source selection (6ch) 649 digits
A916 1033 Analog source selection (7ch) 649 Fourth target position upper 4
B028 472 303
A917 1034 Analog source selection (8ch) 649 digits

A918 1035 Analog trigger channel 649 B029 473

Fifth target position lower 4
303
9
digits
A919 1036 Analog trigger operation selection 649
Fifth target position upper 4
A920 1037 Analog trigger level 649 B030 474 303
digits
A930 1038 Digital source selection (1ch) 649
B031 475
Sixth target position lower 4
303
10
A931 1039 Digital source selection (2ch) 649 digits
A932 1040 Digital source selection (3ch) 649 Sixth target position upper 4
B032 476 303
A933 1041 Digital source selection (4ch) 649 digits
A934 1042 Digital source selection (5ch) 649 Seventh target position lower 4
B033 477 303
A935 1043 Digital source selection (6ch) 649 digits
A936 1044 Digital source selection (7ch) 649 Seventh target position upper
B034 478 303
A937 1045 Digital source selection (8ch) 649 4 digits

A938 1046 Digital trigger channel 649 Eighth target position lower 4
B035 479 303
digits
A939 1047 Digital trigger operation selection 649
Eighth target position upper 4
B036 480 303
digits
 B: Position control parameters B037 481
Ninth target position lower 4
303
Parameters for the position control setting. digits
Ninth target position upper 4
B038 482 303
Refer digits
Pr. group Pr. Name
to page Tenth target position lower 4
Position command source 303, B039 483 303
digits
B000 419
selection 319 Tenth target position upper 4
Command pulse scaling factor B040 484 303
digits
B001 420 numerator (electronic gear 325 Eleventh target position lower
numerator) B041 485 303
4 digits
Command pulse multiplication Eleventh target position upper
B002 421 denominator (electronic gear 325 B042 486 303
4 digits
denominator)
Twelfth target position lower 4
B003 422 Position control gain 328 B043 487 303
digits
B004 423 Position feed forward gain 328 Twelfth target position upper 4
B044 488 303
digits

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
211
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
Thirteenth target position Eighth positioning
B045 489 303 B149 1251 303
lower 4 digits deceleration time
Thirteenth target position B150 1252 Eighth positioning dwell time 303
B046 490 303
upper 4 digits Eighth positioning sub-
B151 1253 303
Fourteenth target position function
B047 491 303
lower 4 digits Ninth positioning acceleration
B152 1254 303
Fourteenth target position time
B048 492 303
upper 4 digits Ninth positioning deceleration
B153 1255 303
Fifteenth target position lower time
B049 493 303
4 digits B154 1256 Ninth positioning dwell time 303
Fifteenth target position upper B155 1257 Ninth positioning sub-function 303
B050 494 303
4 digits Tenth positioning acceleration
Target position/speed B156 1258 303
B100 1220 896 time
selection
Tenth positioning deceleration
Start command edge detection B157 1259 303
B101 1221 303 time
selection
B158 1260 Tenth positioning dwell time 303
First positioning acceleration
B120 1222 303 B159 1261 Tenth positioning sub-function 303
time
Eleventh positioning
First positioning deceleration B160 1262 303
B121 1223 303 acceleration time
time
Eleventh positioning
B122 1224 First positioning dwell time 303 B161 1263 303
deceleration time
B123 1225 First positioning sub-function 303
Eleventh positioning dwell
Second positioning B162 1264 303
B124 1226 303 time
acceleration time
Eleventh positioning sub-
Second positioning B163 1265 303
B125 1227 303 function
deceleration time Twelfth positioning
B126 1228 Second positioning dwell time 303 B164 1266 303
acceleration time
Second positioning sub- Twelfth positioning
B127 1229 303 B165 1267 303
function deceleration time
Third positioning acceleration B166 1268 Twelfth positioning dwell time 303
B128 1230 303
time
Twelfth positioning sub-
Third positioning deceleration B167 1269 303
B129 1231 303 function
time Thirteenth positioning
B130 1232 Third positioning dwell time 303 B168 1270 303
acceleration time
B131 1233 Third positioning sub-function 303 Thirteenth positioning
B169 1271 303
Fourth positioning deceleration time
B132 1234 303
acceleration time Thirteenth positioning dwell
B170 1272 303
Fourth positioning time
B133 1235 303
deceleration time Thirteenth positioning sub-
B171 1273 303
B134 1236 Fourth positioning dwell time 303 function
Fourth positioning sub- Fourteenth positioning
B135 1237 303 B172 1274 303
function acceleration time
Fifth positioning acceleration Fourteenth positioning
B136 1238 303 B173 1275 303
time deceleration time
Fifth positioning deceleration Fourteenth positioning dwell
B137 1239 303 B174 1276 303
time time
B138 1240 Fifth positioning dwell time 303 Fourteenth positioning sub-
B175 1277 303
B139 1241 Fifth positioning sub-function 303 function
Sixth positioning acceleration Fifteenth positioning
B140 1242 303 B176 1278 303
time acceleration time
Sixth positioning deceleration Fifteenth positioning
B141 1243 303 B177 1279 303
time deceleration time
B142 1244 Sixth positioning dwell time 303 Fifteenth positioning dwell
B178 1280 303
time
B143 1245 Sixth positioning sub-function 303
Fifteenth positioning sub-
Seventh positioning B179 1281 303
B144 1246 303 function
acceleration time
Seventh positioning Home position return method
B180 1282 303
B145 1247 303 selection
deceleration time
B181 1283 Home position return speed 303
B146 1248 Seventh positioning dwell time 303
Home position return shifting
Seventh positioning sub- B182 1284 303
B147 1249 303 speed
function
Home position shift amount
Eighth positioning B183 1285 303
B148 1250 303 lower 4 digits
acceleration time

212 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
Home position shift amount RS-485 communication data
1
B184 1286 303 N032 333 670
upper 4 digits length
Travel distance after proximity RS-485 communication stop
B185 1287 303 N033 333 670
dog ON lower 4 digits
Travel distance after proximity
bit length
RS-485 communication parity
2
B186 1288 303 N034 334 670
dog ON upper 4 digits check selection
Home position return stopper RS-485 communication retry
B187 1289 303 N035 335 670
torque
Home position return stopper
count
RS-485 communication check
3
B188 1290 303 N036 336 670
waiting time time interval
Position control terminal input RS-485 communication
B190 1292 303 N037 337 670
selection waiting time setting 4
B191 1293 Roll feeding mode selection 303 RS-485 communication CR/LF
N038 341 670
Position detection lower 4 selection
B192 1294 327
digits USB communication station

B193 1295
Position detection upper 4
327
N040 547
number
701
5
digits USB communication check
N041 548 701
B194 1296 Position detection selection 327 time interval
Position detection hysteresis N080 343 Communication error count 686
B195 1297
width
327
N100 541*6
Frequency command sign
699
6
selection

 N: Communication operation N110 434*6 Network number (CC-Link IE) 699

parameters N111 435*6 Station number (CC-Link IE) 699 7

N240 349*6 Ready bit status selection 663
Parameters for the setting of communication operation such
Reset selection after inverter
as the communication specifications or operating N241 349*6 faults are cleared
893

characteristics. DriveControl writing 8

N242 349*6 restriction selection
893
Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name N500 to 1300 to
to page Communication option parameters.
N543, 1343,
N000 549 Protocol selection 663 N550 to 1350 to
For details, refer to the Instruction Manual
of the option.
9
Communication EEPROM N559 1359
N001 342 663
write selection

N002 539
MODBUS RTU communication
check time interval
686  G: Control parameters 10
Communication reset Parameters for motor control.
N010 349*6 selection
663
Refer
Communication error Pr. group Pr. Name
N011 500*6 663 to page
execution waiting time
G000 0 Torque boost Simple 706
Communication error
N012 501*6 occurrence count display
663
G001 3 707
Base frequency Simple
Stop mode selection at G002 19 Base frequency voltage 707
N013 502 663
communication error G003 14 Load pattern selection 708
Operation frequency during G010 46 Second torque boost 706
N014 779 663
communication error
G011 47 Second V/F (base frequency) 707
PU communication station
N020 117 670 G020 112 Third torque boost 706
number
G021 113 Third V/F (base frequency) 707
N021 118 PU communication speed 670
Energy saving control
N022 119 PU communication data length 670 G030 60 712
selection
PU communication stop bit
N023 119 670 G040 100 V/F1 (first frequency) 713
length
G041 101 V/F1 (first frequency voltage) 713
PU communication parity
N024 120 670 G042 102 V/F2 (second frequency) 713
check
N025 121 PU communication retry count 670 V/F2 (second frequency
G043 103 713
voltage)
PU communication check time
N026 122 670 G044 104 V/F3 (third frequency) 713
interval
PU communication waiting G045 105 V/F3 (third frequency voltage) 713
N027 123 670
time setting G046 106 V/F4 (fourth frequency) 713
PU communication CR/LF G047 107 V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage) 713
N028 124 670
selection G048 108 V/F5 (fifth frequency) 713
RS-485 communication station G049 109 V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage) 713
N030 331 670
number SF-PR slip amount adjustment
N031 332 RS-485 communication speed 670 G060 673 714
operation selection

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
213
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
SF-PR slip amount adjustment Speed control integral term
G061 674 714 G218 1115 254
gain clear time
Reverse rotation excitation Speed feed forward control/
G080 617 current low-speed scaling 711 G220 877 model adaptive speed control 263
factor selection
DC injection brake operation G221 878 Speed feed forward filter 263
G100 10 715
frequency Speed feed forward torque
G222 879 263
DC injection brake operation limit
G101 11 715
time G223 881 Speed feed forward gain 263
G102 802 Pre-excitation selection 715 G224 828 Model speed control gain 263
G103 850 Brake operation selection 715 G230 840 Torque bias selection 265
G105 522 Output stop frequency 720 G231 841 Torque bias 1 265
G106 250 Stop selection 722 G232 842 Torque bias 2 265
Special regenerative brake G233 843 Torque bias 3 265
G107 70*3 duty
724
G234 844 Torque bias filter 265
Second pre-excitation G235 845 Torque bias operation time 265
G108 1299 715
selection
Torque bias balance
DC injection brake operation G236 846 265
G110 12 715 compensation
voltage
Fall-time torque bias terminal 1
Regeneration avoidance G237 847 265
G120 882 732 bias
operation selection
Fall-time torque bias terminal 1
Regeneration avoidance G238 848 265
G121 883 732 gain
operation level
Regeneration avoidance at
G240 367*1 Speed feedback range 736
G122 884 deceleration detection 732 G241 368*1 Feedback gain 736
sensitivity Low speed range torque
G250 788 233
Regeneration avoidance characteristic selection
G123 885 compensation frequency limit 732 Per-unit speed control
value G260 1121 254
reference frequency
Regeneration avoidance Speed control P gain 1 (per-
G124 886 732 G261 1117 254
voltage gain unit system)
Regeneration avoidance Model speed control gain (per-
G125 665 732 G262 1119 263
frequency gain unit system)
Increased magnetic excitation G263 1348 P/PI control switchover
G130 660 deceleration operation 735 254
frequency
selection
G264 1349 Emergency stop operation
Magnetic excitation increase 367
G131 661 735 selection
rate
Second motor control method
Increased magnetic excitation G300 451 221
G132 662 735 selection
current level
Second motor excitation
G200 800 Control method selection 221 G301 565 711
current break point
G201 85 Excitation current break point 711 Second motor excitation
Excitation current low-speed G302 566 current low-speed scaling 711
G202 86 711
scaling factor factor
G203 245 Rated slip 736 G311 830 Speed control P gain 2 254
Slip compensation time G312 831 Speed control integral time 2 254
G204 246 736
constant Torque control P gain 2
Constant output range slip G313 834 (current loop proportional 294
G205 247 736
compensation selection gain)
Constant output range speed Torque control integral time 2
G206 1116 254 G314 835 294
control P gain compensation (current loop integral time)
Constant output range torque 245, G315 833*1 Speed detection filter 2 332
G210 803
characteristic selection 283
G316 837 Torque detection filter 2 332
G211 820 Speed control P gain 1 254
Second motor low-speed
G212 821 Speed control integral time 1 254 G350 747 range torque characteristic 233
Torque control P gain 1 selection
294,
G213 824 (current loop proportional Speed control P gain 2 (per-
333 G361 1118 254
gain) unit system)
Torque control integral time 1 294, G400 286 Droop gain 738
G214 825
(current loop integral time) 333
G401 287 Droop filter time constant 738
G215 823*1 Speed detection filter 1 332 Droop function activation
G402 288 738
G216 827 Torque detection filter 1 332 selection
G217 854 Excitation ratio 332 G403 994 Droop break point gain 738

214 5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
G404 995 Droop break point torque 738 Speed control gain (Advanced
1
G932 89 228
G410 653 Speed smoothing control 741 magnetic flux vector)
Speed smoothing cutoff Second motor speed control
G411 654 741 G942 569 228

G420 679
frequency
Second droop gain 738
gain
2
*1 The setting is available when a plug-in option for Vector
Second droop filter time control is installed.
G421 680 738 *2 On the LCD operation panel or the parameter unit used as the
constant

G422 681
Second droop function
738
command source, the parameter number in parentheses
appears instead of that starting with the letter C.
3
activation selection
*3 The setting is available for the standard model.
G423 682 Second droop break point gain 738
*4 The setting is available for the standard model and the IP55
Second droop break point
G424 683
torque
738
*5
compatible model.
The setting is available when the PLC function is enabled. 4
G601 1003 Notch filter frequency 271 *6 The setting is available for the FR-A800-GF or when a
G602 1004 Notch filter depth 271 compatible plug-in option is installed.
*7 Refer to the FR-A8AVP Instruction Manual (For Inverter/
G603 1005 Notch filter width 271
Converter Switching). 5

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.1 Parameter list
215
 5.2 Control method
V/F control (initial setting), Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM
sensorless vector control are available with this inverter.

 V/F control
The inverter controls the output frequency (F) and the output voltage (V) so that the ratio of frequency to voltage (V/F) is kept
constant when the frequency is changed.

 Advanced magnetic flux vector control

The inverter performs vector calculation and divide its output current into the excitation current and the torque current. The
inverter compensates the frequency and the voltage to output a current that meets the load torque to the motor, which improves
the motor torque at low speed. The output frequency is further compensated (slip compensation) to bring the actual motor
speed closer to the commanded speed. This control method is useful when the load fluctuates are severe.

NOTE
• Advanced magnetic flux vector control requires the following conditions.
If these conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control. Otherwise, malfunctions such as insufficient torque, uneven rotation
may occur.
• For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (It must be 0.4 kW
or higher.)
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque
accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated
current.
• The motor described in the following table is used.

Motor Condition
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor (SF-JR)
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor (SF-HR)
The offline auto tuning is not required.
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA 4P / SF-HRCA)
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor (SF-PR)
Other motor (Mitsubishi motor SF-TH, etc. or other manufacturer's motor) The offline auto tuning is required.
• Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is performed.
• The wiring length from inverter to motor is 30 m or less. (When the wiring length exceeds 30 m, perform offline auto tuning with
the wiring in place.)
• A sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) is not used.

 Real sensorless vector control

• As the inverter estimates the motor speed and controls the output current more accurately, a high-level control of the speed
and the torque is enabled. Select Real sensorless vector control for a high-accuracy, fast-response control. The offline auto
tuning is required initially.
• This control method is useful for the following purposes:
- To minimize the speed fluctuation even at a severe load fluctuation
- To generate a low speed torque
- To prevent machine from damage due to a too large torque (To set the torque limit)
- To control the torque

216 5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
 NOTE
• Real sensorless vector control requires the following conditions. 1
If these conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control. Otherwise, malfunctions such as insufficient torque, uneven rotation
may occur.
• For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (It must be 0.4 kW
or higher.)
2
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque
accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated
current. 3
• Offline auto tuning is performed.
Offline auto tuning is necessary under Real sensorless vector control even when the Mitsubishi Electric motor is used.
• Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is performed.
• A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF/FR-BMF) or sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) is not used. 4

 Vector control 5
• With a vector control option installed, full-scale vector control operation of a motor with an encoder can be performed.
Speed control (zero speed control, servo lock), torque control, and position control can be performed with fast response
and high accuracy. 6
• Vector control has excellent control characteristic compared to other control methods such as V/F control. Its control
characteristic is equal to those of DC machines.
• This control method is useful for the following purposes:
7
- To minimize the speed fluctuation even at a severe load fluctuation
- To generate a low speed torque
- To prevent machine from damage due to a too large torque (To set the torque limit)
- To control the torque or position
8
- To control a torque generated in a motor in a servo-lock state (the motor with its shaft stopped)

NOTE 9
• Vector control requires the following conditions.
When the conditions are not satisfied, malfunctions such as insufficient torque, uneven rotation may occur.
• The rated motor current should be equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (It must be 0.4 kW or higher.)
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque
10
accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated
current.
• Torque control is not available for a PM motor.
• The motor described in the following table is used.

Motor Condition
Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series)
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor with encoder (SF-JR)
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor with encoder (SF-HR) The offline auto tuning is not required.
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor with encoder (SF-
JRCA 4P, SF-HRCA)
Other motors (motors other than SF-V5RU 1500 r/min series,
The offline auto tuning is required.
other manufactures' motors, etc.)

• Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is performed.

• The wiring length from inverter to motor is 30 m or less. (When the wiring length exceeds 30 m, perform offline auto tuning with
the wiring in place.)
• A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF/FR-BMF) or sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) is not used.

 PM sensorless vector control

• The inverter enables highly efficient motor control and highly accurate motor speed control of a PM (permanent magnet
embedded) motor, which is more efficient than an induction motor.
• A speed detector such as an encoder is not required as the inverter estimates the motor speed by the calculation from the
inverter output voltage and current. The inverter drives the PM motor with the least required current for a load in order to
achieve the highest motor efficiency.

5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
217
 • When using an IPM motor MM-CF, simply performing the motor parameter initialization (PM parameter initialization or IPM
initialization) enables PM sensorless vector control.
PM sensorless vector control image
Inverter Output
Speed voltage
command Inverter
Controller
circuit

Magnetic field observer

*1
Output *1 A magnetic field observer is a control
current method that calculates the motor
speed/magnetic pole position based
Speed/magnetic on the motor voltage and current of a
pole position Virtual motor virtual motor which is set up in the
drive unit.

NOTE
• The PM sensorless vector control requires the following conditions.
• The motor described in the following table is used.

Motor Condition
Mitsubishi Electric IPM motor (MM-CF) The offline auto tuning is not required.
IPM motor (other than MM-CF), SPM motor The offline auto tuning is required.
• For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (It must be 0.4 kW
or higher.)
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque
accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated
current.
• Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is performed.
• The wiring length from the inverter to the motor is 100 m or less. (Refer to page 66.) (When the wiring length from the inverter
to the IPM motor MM-CF exceeds 30 m, perform offline auto tuning.)
• A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF/FR-BMF) or sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) is not used.

5.2.1 Vector control and Real sensorless vector control

Vector control is one of the control techniques for driving an induction motor. To help explain Vector control, the fundamental
equivalent circuit of an induction motor is shown below.

r1: Primary resistance

r2: Secondary resistance
1: Primary leakage inductance
im
r1
2: Secondary leakage inductance
1 2

M: Mutual inductance
S: Slip
r2
id M iq
S id: Excitation current
iq: Torque current
im: Motor current

In the above diagram, currents flowing in the induction motor can be classified into a current id (excitation current) for making
a magnetic flux in the motor and a current iq (torque current) for causing the motor to develop torque.

218 5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
In Vector control, the voltage and output frequency are calculated to control the motor so that the excitation current and torque
current flow to the optimum as described below:
1
iq motor current im
torque current
2

excitation current
id 4

• The excitation current is controlled to place the internal magnetic flux of the motor in the optimum status.
• The torque command value is derived so that the difference between the motor speed command and the actual speed 5
(speed estimated value for Real sensorless vector control) obtained from the encoder connected to the motor shaft is zero.
Torque current is controlled so that torque as set in the torque command is developed.
6
Motor-generated torque (TM), slip angular velocity (ωs) and the motor's secondary magnetic flux (Φ2) can be found by the
following calculation:
TM Φ2 · iq 7
Φ2 = M · id

ωs = r2
L2
iq
id
8
where, L2: secondary inductance
L2 = 2 + M
9
Vector control provides the following advantages:
• Vector control has excellent control characteristic compared to V/F control and other controls. The control characteristic of
the Vector control is equal to those of DC machines.
10
• It is applicable to fast response applications with which induction motors were previously regarded as difficult to use.
Applications requiring a wide variable-speed range from extremely low speed to high speed, frequent acceleration/
deceleration operations, continuous four-quadrant operations, etc.
• Torque control is enabled (when an induction motor is used).
• It allows servo-lock torque control which generates a torque in the motor shaft while stopped. (Not available under Real
sensorless vector control.)

5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
219
 Block diagram of Real sensorless vector control

PWM
modulation

Magnetic Pre-excitation
2 id * + Vd
flux current Output
control - control voltage
id
conversion
Torque
* + Speed iq * + Vq
0
current
- control control
-
 FB iq
+ 0
 FB +
id
s Current
iq iq
conversion
Slip
calculation iq
2 Magnetic
id
flux Vd
calculation Vq
Speed estimation

Block diagram of Vector control

Encoder
PWM
modulation

2 Magnetic id * + Pre-excitation
Vd
flux current Output
control - control voltage
id
conversion

iq* Torque
* + Speed + Vq
0
current
- control control
-
 FB iq
+ ω0
 FB +
id
s Current
iq iq
conversion
Slip
calculation
2 Magnetic id
flux
calculation

220 5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
 Speed control operation is performed to zero the difference between the speed command (ω*) and actual rotation value
Speed control detected by encoder (ωFB). At this time, the motor load is found and its result is transferred to the torque current 1
controller as a torque current command (iq*).
Torque current A voltage (Vq) is calculated to flow a current (iq) which is identical to the torque current command (iq*) found by the
control speed controller.
Magnetic flux The magnetic flux (Φ2) of the motor is derived from the excitation current (id). The excitation current command (id*) is 2
control calculated to use that motor magnetic flux (Ф2) as a predetermined magnetic flux.
Excitation current A voltage (Vd) is calculated to flow a current (id) which is identical to the excitation current command (id*).
control
Output frequency Motor slip (ωs) is calculated on the basis of the torque current value (iq) and magnetic flux (Φ2). The output frequency 3
calculation (ω0) is found by adding that slip (ωs) to the feedback (ωFB) found by a feedback from the encoder.
The above results are used to make PWM modulation and run the motor.
4
5.2.2 Changing the control method and mode
Set the control method and the control mode.
V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector
5
control are the control methods available for selection.
The available control modes are speed control, torque control, and position control modes.
Select a control mode under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control. Under Real
6
sensorless vector control, select a control mode from the speed control and torque control modes. Under Vector control, select
a control mode from the speed control, torque control, and position control modes. The control method is initially set to V/F
control.
7
When using an IPM motor MM-CF, simply performing the IPM parameter initialization enables the PM sensorless vector control
and selects the speed control and position control.
• Select a control method and a control mode by setting Pr.800 (Pr.451) Control method selection.
8
• The control mode can be switched using a mode switching signal (MC).

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
221
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20,
23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40,
By selecting a standard motor or constant-torque motor,
71 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70,
Applied motor 0 the thermal characteristic and motor constant of each
C100 73, 74, 330, 333, 334,
motor are set.
8090, 8093, 8094,
9090, 9093, 9094
0.4 to 55 kW*1
80 Set the applied motor capacity.
Motor capacity 9999 0 to 3600 kW*2
C101
9999 V/F control
81 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of motor poles.
Number of motor poles 9999
C102 9999 V/F control
83
C104
Rated motor voltage 200/400 V*3 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).

84 10 to 400 Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).

Rated motor frequency 9999
C105 9999 The setting value of Pr.3 Base frequency is used.*4
0 to 6 Vector control
9 Vector control, PM sensorless vector control test operation
10 to 12 Real sensorless vector control
13, 14 PM sensorless vector control
V/F control / Advanced magnetic flux vector control / PM
800 20
Control method selection 20 sensorless vector control
G200
100 to 106 Vector control
Vector control, PM sensorless
109 Fast-response
vector control test operation
operation
110 to 112 Real sensorless vector control
110, 113, 114 PM sensorless vector control
0 to 6 Vector control
10 to 12 Real sensorless vector control
13, 14 PM sensorless vector control
20 V/F control (Advanced magnetic flux vector control)
451 Second motor control 100 to 106 Vector control
9999 Fast-response
G300 method selection 110 to 112 Real sensorless vector control
operation
110, 113, 114 PM sensorless vector control
Advanced magnetic flux vector control when the induction
9999 motor is selected in Pr.71.*5
As set in Pr.800 when the PM motor is selected in Pr.71.
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
*3 The initial value differs according to the inverter's voltage class (200/400 V class).
*4 When the IPM motor MM-CF is selected in Pr.71 Applied motor, the rated frequency of the MM-CF is used. When a PM motor other than the
MM-CF is selected for Pr.71, 75 Hz (for the motor capacity 15 kW or lower) or 100 Hz (18.5 kW or higher) is used.
*5 V/F control is set when Pr.453 and Pr.454 = "9999".

 Setting the motor capacity and the number of motor poles (Pr.80, Pr.81)
• Motor specifications (the motor capacity and the number of motor poles) must be set to select Advanced magnetic flux
vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control.
• Set the motor capacity (kW) in Pr.80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr.81 Number of motor poles.

NOTE
• Setting the number of motor poles in Pr.81 changes the Pr.144 Speed setting switchover setting automatically. (Refer to
page 444.)

222 5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
 Selection of the control method and the control mode
• Select a control method (and a control mode) from V/F control (speed control), Advanced magnetic flux vector control 1
(speed control), Real sensorless vector control (speed control or torque control), Vector control (speed control, torque
control, or position control), or PM sensorless vector control (speed control or position control).
Settings 2
of Pr.80
Pr.71 Pr.800 Pr.451
(Pr.453) Control method Control mode Remarks
(Pr.450) setting*1 setting*1
and Pr.81
(Pr.454) 3
0, 100 Speed control —
1, 101 Torque control —
MC signal ON: torque
2, 102
Speed control /
torque control
control 4
MC signal OFF: speed
switchover
control
3, 103 Position control —
MC signal ON: position
5
Speed control /
control
4, 104 Vector control*2 position control
MC signal OFF: speed
switchover
control
MC signal ON: torque 6
Position control /
control
5, 105 torque control
MC signal OFF: position
Induction switchover
control
motor*3 Torque control 7
6, 106 (variable-current —
limiter control)
9, 109 — Vector control test operation
10, 110 Speed control —
8
11, 111 Torque control —
Real sensorless vector MC signal ON: torque
Speed control /
12, 112
control
torque control
control
MC signal OFF: speed
9
switchover
Other than control
9999 20 (initial Advanced magnetic flux
20 Speed control —
value)
9999 (initial
vector control
10
— Advanced magnetic flux vector control for the second motor
value)
9, 109 — PM sensorless vector control test operation
13, 113 Position control*6 —

Speed control / MC signal ON: position

IPM motor control
14, 114 PM sensorless vector position control
(MM-CF)*4 MC signal OFF: speed
control switchover*6 control
20 (initial
20, 110 Speed control —
value), 110
0, 100*7 Speed control —
3, 103 Position control —
Vector control*9 MC signal ON: position
Speed control /
*8 control
IPM/SPM 4, 104 position control
MC signal OFF: speed
motor (other switchover
control
than MM-CF)
9, 109 — PM sensorless vector control test operation
20 (initial
value), PM sensorless vector
20, 110*10 control
Speed control —
*10
110
IPM/SPM 9999 (initial The setting value of Pr.800 is used for the second motor. (PM sensorless
—
motor value) vector control (speed control) when Pr.800 = "9 or 109")
9999*5 — — V/F control

*1 The setting values of 100 and above are used when the fast-response operation is selected.
*2 Advanced magnetic flux vector control is applied if a Vector control compatible option is not installed.
*3 For an induction motor, the setting "13, 14, 113, or 114" in Pr.800 (Pr.451) has the same meaning as the setting "10 or 110" in Pr.800 (Pr.451)
(speed control under Real sensorless vector control).

5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
223
 *4 For the IPM motor MM-CF, the setting other than "9, 13, 14, 109, 113, 114, or 9999" in Pr.800 (Pr.451) has the same meaning as the setting "20
or 110" in Pr.800 (Pr.451) (speed control under PM sensorless vector control).
*5 V/F control is applied when Pr.80 or Pr.81 is "9999", regardless of the Pr.800 setting. When Pr.71 is set to the IPM motor MM-CF, PM sensorless
vector control is enabled even if Pr.80 ≠ "9999" or Pr.81 = "9999". (When other PM motors are used, set Pr.80 and Pr.81 according to the motor.
Otherwise, proper operation cannot be performed.)
*6 Setting Pr.788 (Pr.747) = "0" (low-speed range torque characteristic disabled) selects speed control.
*7 The operation for the setting of "0 or 100" is performed when "1, 2, 6, 101, 102, or 106" is set.
*8 The operation for the setting of "4 or 104" is performed when "5 or 105" is set.
*9 Speed control under PM sensorless vector control is applied if an option for vector control for PM motor is not installed.
*10 The operation for the setting of "20 or 110" is performed when "10 to 14 or 111 to 114" is set.

 Selecting the fast-response operation (Pr.800 (Pr.451) = “100 to 106, or

109 to 114")
• Setting Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "any of 100 to 106 or 109 to 114" selects the fast-response operation. The fast-response
operation is available during Vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and PM sensorless vector control.
Speed response
Control method Fast-response operation Normal-response operation
Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "100 to 106, or 109 to 114" Pr.800 (Pr.451) = "0 to 6, or 9 to 14"
Vector control 130 Hz at maximum 50 Hz at maximum
20 Hz at maximum*2
Real sensorless vector control 50 Hz at maximum*1
10 Hz at maximum*3
PM sensorless vector control 50 Hz at maximum 30 Hz at maximum
*1 When driving a 3.7 kW no-load motor.
*2 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*3 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

NOTE
• During fast-response operation, the carrier frequency is always 4 kHz. (Refer to page 356.)
• The inverter overload trip (E.THT) is more likely to occur when fast-response operation is set at the SLD or LD rating.

 Vector control test operation, PM sensorless vector control test

operation (Pr.800 = "9 or 109")
• A test operation for speed control is available without connecting a motor to the inverter.
The speed calculation changes to track the speed command, and such speed changes can be checked on the operation
panel or by outputting it as analog signals to terminal FM/CA or AM.

NOTE
• Since current is not detected and voltage is not output, monitors related to current and voltage such as output current and
output voltage, etc. and output signals do not function.
• For speed calculation, speed is calculated in consideration of Pr.880 Load inertia ratio.
• Since current synchronization operation occurs during the test operation for PM sensorless vector control, the output
frequency becomes the same value as the command frequency.

 I/O signal status during the test operation

• During the test operation, the following signals are disabled.
Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.189) Output terminal function selection (Pr.190 to Pr.196)
• Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (THP)
• Brake opening request (BOF)
• Brake opening completion (BRI) • Second brake opening request (BOF2)
• Load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost (X17) • Orientation complete (ORA)
• V/F switchover (X18) • Orientation fault (ORM)
• Orientation command (X22) • Regenerative status output (Y32)
• Control mode switchover (MC) • In-position (Y36)
• Start-time tuning start external input (X28) • Travel completed (MEND)
• Torque bias selection 1, Torque bias selection 2 (X42, X43) • Start time tuning completion (Y39)
• Second brake sequence open completion (BRI2) • Home position return failure (ZA)
• Torque limit selection (X93) • Position detection level (FP)
• During position command operation (PBSY)
• Home position return completed (ZP)

224 5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
 Parameters referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 1
 Status of the monitoring during the test operation
○: Enabled
×: Disabled (0 is displayed at any time.) 2
Δ: A cumulative total before the test operation is displayed.
—: Not available
Monitoring on Output via FM/ Monitoring on Output via FM/
3
Monitor item Monitor item
DU/PU CA/AM DU/PU CA/AM
Output frequency ○ ○ PID deviation ○ ○*3
Fault indication ○ — Input terminal status ○ — 4
Frequency setting value ○ ○ Output terminal status ○ —
Option input terminal
Motor speed ○ ○ ○ —
status
Option output terminal
5
Converter output voltage ○ ○ ○ —
status
Electronic thermal O/L relay
×*2 ×*2 Motor thermal load factor ○*4 ○*4
load factor
×*2
6
Output current peak value ×*2 Inverter thermal load factor ○*4 ○*4
Converter output voltage peak
○ ○ PTC thermistor value ○ —
value
Load meter ○ ○ PID measured value 2 ○ ○ 7
Cumulative energization time ○ — Remote output 1 ○ ○
Reference voltage output — ○ Remote output 2 ○ ○
Actual operation time
Cumulative energy
○
Δ
—
—
Remote output 3
Remote output 4
○
○
○
○
8
Trace status ○ × PID manipulated variable ○ ○*3
Station number (RS-485
terminals)
○ — Second PID set point ○ ○
9
Station number (PU Second PID measured
○ — ○ ○
connector) value
Station number (CC-Link) ○ — Second PID deviation ○ ○*3
Second PID measured
10
Energy saving effect ○ ○ ○ ○
value 2
Second PID manipulated
Cumulative energy saving Δ —
variable
○ ○*3

PID set point ○ ○

Dancer main speed setting ○ ○
PID measured value ○ ○

*1 The monitoring-enabled items differ depending on the output interface (operation panel, parameter unit, terminal FM/CA, or terminal AM). For the
details, refer to page 457.
*2 When the inverter operation is switched to the test operation, the indication is changed to 0. When PM sensorless vector control is selected again
after the test operation, the output current peak value and the electronic thermal relay load factor from the last operation are displayed.
*3 The output is enabled via terminal AM only.
*4 When the inverter operation is switched to the test operation, the accumulated thermal value is reduced because the output current is considered
as 0.

Parameters referred to
Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 446
Pr.158 AM terminal function selectionpage 457

 Changing the control method with external terminals (RT signal, X18
signal)
• Control method (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control) can
be switched using external terminals.
The control method can be switched using either the Second function selection (RT) signal or the V/F switchover (X18)
signal.
• When using the RT signal, set the second motor in Pr.450 Second applied motor and set the second motor's control
method in Pr.451 Second motor control method selection. Turning ON the RT signal enables the second function,
enabling the switchover of the control method.

5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
225
 • When using the X18 signal, turning ON the X18 signal switches the presently-selected control method (Advanced magnetic
flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control) to the V/F control. Use this method to switch the control
method for one motor. At this time, the second functions including the electronic thermal O/L relay characteristic are not
changed. (To switch the second functions, use the RT signal.)
To input the X18 signal, set "18" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
Second motor control method Pr.453 to Pr.454
First motor control method Pr.450 setting Pr.451 setting
(RT signal-ON) settings
9999 — —
V/F control — — 9999
— 9999*2 —
Advanced magnetic flux vector
20
control Induction motor
V/F control Real sensorless vector control 10 to 14
0 to 6, 100 to
Induction motor Other than 9999
Vector control 106
IPM/SPM motor 0, 3, 4, 6
Other than
PM sensorless vector control, IPM/SPM motor
9999
Same control as the first motor*1 9999 — —
V/F control — *2 —
9999
Advanced magnetic flux vector
Advanced magnetic flux vector control*1 control 20, 9999
Induction motor
Real sensorless vector control*1 Real sensorless vector control 10 to 14
Vector control*1 0 to 6, 100 to
Induction motor Other than 9999
PM sensorless vector control Vector control 106
IPM/SPM motor 0, 3, 4, 6
Other than
PM sensorless vector control, IPM/SPM motor
9999

*1 V/F control is set by turning ON the X18 signal.

*2 V/F control when Pr.453 or Pr.454 is set to "9999" regardless of the Pr.451 setting. When Pr.450 is set to the IPM motor MM-CF, PM sensorless
vector control is enabled even if Pr.453 ≠ "9999" or Pr.454 = "9999".

NOTE
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• The RT signal is a second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 525.)
• The control method could be changed by external terminals (RT signal, X18 signal) while the inverter is stopped. If a signal is
switched during the operation, the control method changes after the inverter stops.

 Switching between two encoder-equipped motors (Pr.862)

• Using the Vector control compatible plug-in options together with the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) enables the Vector
control operation by switching between two encoder-equipped motors according to the RT signal. Use Pr.862 Encoder
option selection to set the combination of the motors (first/second), plug-in option, and control terminal option.
Pr.862 Encoder option RT signal-OFF RT signal-ON
selection (First motor) (Second motor)*1
0 (initial value) Plug-in option Control terminal option
1 Control terminal option Plug-in option

*1 When Pr.450 Second applied motor ="9999", the first motor is selected even if the RT signal turns ON.

NOTE
• Pr.862 setting is valid even when either the plug-in option or control terminal option is installed. For using the control terminal
option alone, the motor does not run when Pr.862 is the initial value as it is. (When the RT signal is OFF)

 Changing the control mode with external terminals (MC signal)

• The setting of Pr.800 or Pr.451 can be used to switch the control mode by turning ON/OFF the MC signal. Refer to page
223 to set Pr.800 or Pr.451.
To input the MC signal, set "26" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.

226 5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
 • When using an analog input terminal (terminal 1, 4) for torque limit and torque command, switching of the control mode
changes the terminal function as follows:
• Functions of the terminal 1 under different control modes
1
Speed control/torque control Speed control/position control Position control/torque control
switchover*1 switchover*2 switchover*3
Pr.868
setting Speed control (MC Torque control Speed control (MC Position control Position control Torque control
2
signal-OFF) (MC signal-ON) signal-OFF) (MC signal-ON) (MC signal-OFF) (MC signal-ON)
0 (initial Auxiliary speed Speed limit Auxiliary speed Speed limit
— —
value) setting
Magnetic flux
assistance
Magnetic flux
setting
Magnetic flux Magnetic flux Magnetic flux
assistance
Magnetic flux
3
1
command*4 command*4 command*4 command*4 command command
Regenerative Regenerative Regenerative Regenerative
2 torque limit
(Pr.810 = "1")
— torque limit
(Pr.810 = "1")
torque limit
(Pr.810 = "1")
torque limit
(Pr.810 = "1")
— 4
Torque command Torque command
3 — — — —
(Pr.804 = "0") (Pr.804 = "0")

4
Torque limit Torque command Torque limit Torque limit Torque limit Torque command 5
(Pr.810 = "1") (Pr.804 = "0") (Pr.810 = "1") (Pr.810 = "1") (Pr.810 = "1") (Pr.804 = "0")
Forward/reverse Forward/reverse
5 — rotation speed limit — — — rotation speed limit
(Pr.807 = "2") (Pr.807 = "2") 6
6 — — Torque bias — — —
9999 — — — — — —
• Terminal 4 functions by control 7
Speed control/torque control Speed control/position control Position control/torque control
Pr.858 switchover*1 switchover*2 switchover*3
setting Speed control (MC Torque control Speed control (MC Position control Position control Torque control
signal-OFF) (MC signal-ON) signal-OFF) (MC signal-ON) (MC signal-OFF) (MC signal-ON) 8
0 (initial Speed command Speed limit (AU Speed command Speed limit (AU
— —
value) (AU signal-ON) signal-ON) (AU signal-ON) signal-ON)*4

1
Magnetic flux Magnetic flux Magnetic flux Magnetic flux Magnetic flux Magnetic flux 9
command*4*5 command *4*5 command *4*5 command *4*5 command*5 command*5
Torque limit Torque limit Torque limit Torque limit
4 — —
(Pr.810 = "1")*6 (Pr.810 = "1")*6 (Pr.810 = "1")*6 (Pr.810 = "1")*6
9999 — — — — — — 10
—: No function
*1 Real sensorless vector control (Pr.800 = "12"), vector control (Pr.800 = "2")
*2 Vector control (Pr.800 = "4"), PM sensorless vector control (Pr.800 ="14")
*3 Vector control (Pr.800 = "5")
*4 This function is valid under vector control.
*5 Invalid when Pr.868 = "1".
*6 Invalid when Pr.868 = "4".

NOTE
• Switching between the speed control and the torque control is always enabled regardless of the motor status: in a stop, in
running, or in DC injection brake (during pre-excitation).
• During operation, switching between speed control and position control or between torque control and position control occurs
when the output frequency reaches Pr.865 Low speed detection or lower with no position command given.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.450 Second applied motorpage 528
Pr.804 Torque command source selectionpage 283
Pr.807 Speed limit selectionpage 287
Pr.810 Torque limit input method selectionpage 245
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500

5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
227
 5.2.3 Selecting the Advanced magnetic flux vector
control
Magnetic flux

• To use the Advanced magnetic flux vector control, set the motor capacity, the number of motor poles, and the motor type using
Pr.80 and Pr.81.

 Advanced magnetic flux vector control

Operating procedure
1. Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 46.)

2. Make the motor setting (Pr.71).

Motor Pr.71 setting*1 Remarks
SF-JR 0 (initial value) (3, 4)
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 20
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor SF-HR 40
Others 0 (3) Offline auto tuning is required.*2
SF-JRCA 4P 1
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor SF-HRCA 50
Other (SF-JRC, etc.) 1 (13) Offline auto tuning is required.*2
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance
SF-PR 70
energy-saving motor
Other manufacturer's standard motor — 0 (3) Offline auto tuning is required.*2
Other manufacturer's constant-torque motor — 1 (13) Offline auto tuning is required.*2
*1 For the other setting values of Pr.71, refer to page 528.
*2 For offline auto tuning, refer to page 532.

3. Set the motor overheat protection (Pr.9). (Refer to page 415.)

4. Set the motor capacity and number of motor poles (Pr.80, Pr.81). (Refer to page 221.)
V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).

5. Set the rated motor voltage and frequency (Pr.83, Pr.84). (Refer to page 532.)

6. Set the operation command. (Refer to page 389.)

Select the start command and speed command.

7. Perform the test operation.

As required
• Perform the offline auto tuning (Pr.96). (Refer to page 532.)
• Select the online auto tuning (Pr.95). (Refer to page 558.)

NOTE
• To perform driving in a better accuracy, perform offline auto tuning, then set the online auto tuning, and select Real sensorless
vector control.
• Under this control, rotations are more likely to be uneven than under V/F control. (This control method is not suitable for
grinder, wrapping machine, etc., which require even rotation at a low speed.)
• For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, the operation with a surge voltage suppression
filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) installed between the inverter and the motor may reduce the output torque.
• The optional sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) cannot be used between the inverter and the motor.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

228 5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
 Keeping the motor speed constant when the load fluctuates (speed
control gain) 1
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range

Speed control gain

Makes adjustments to keep the motor speed constant during variable load 2
89 0 to 200% operation under Advanced magnetic flux vector control. The reference
(Advanced magnetic flux 9999
G932 value is 100%.
vector)
9999 The gain set by Pr.71. (The gain set in accordance with the motor.)
Makes adjustments to keep the second motor speed constant during 3
569 Second motor speed 0 to 200% variable load operation under Advanced magnetic flux vector control. The
9999
G942 control gain reference value is 100%.
9999 The gain set by Pr.450. (The gain set in accordance with the motor.)
• Use Pr.89 to keep the motor speed constant during variable load operation.
4
(This parameter is useful to make adjustments on the motor speed after replacing a conventional model with an FR-A800
series model.)
5
Load torque

Speed
7
 Driving two motors under Advanced magnetic flux vector control
• Turning ON the Second function selection (RT) signal enables the second motor operation. 8
• Set a second motor in Pr.450 Second applied motor. (In the initial setting, "9999" (no second applied motor) is selected.
Refer to page 528.)
Function RT signal-ON (second motor) RT signal-OFF (first motor) 9
Applied motor Pr.450 Pr.71
Motor capacity Pr.453 Pr.80
Number of motor poles Pr.454 Pr.81 10
Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic flux
Pr.569 Pr.89
vector)
Control method selection Pr.451 Pr.800

NOTE
• The RT signal is a Second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 525.)
The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.71, Pr.450 Applied motorpage 528
Pr.800, Pr.451 Control method selectionpage 221

5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
229
 5.2.4 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control
PM

 Setting for the PM sensorless vector control by selecting IPM

initialization on the operation panel
(" ")

• The parameters required to drive an IPM motor MM-CF are automatically set by batch. (Refer to page 231.)
• [PM] indicator on the operation panel (FR-DU08) is turned ON when the PM sensorless vector control is set.

The following shows the procedure to initialize the parameter settings for an MM-CF IPM motor by selecting IPM parameter
initialization on the operation panel.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press to choose the PU operation mode.

[PU] indicator turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode.

[PRM] indicator is ON.

4. IPM initialization selection

Turn until " " (IPM initialization) appears.

5. Displaying the set value

Press to read the present set value.

" " (initial value) appears.

6. Changing the setting value

Turn to change the value to " ", and press to confirm it.

" " and " " are displayed alternately. The setting is completed.

Setting Description
0 Parameter settings for an induction motor
3003 Parameter settings for MM-CF IPM motor (rotations per minute)

NOTE
• If parameters are initialized for a PM motor in the IPM initialization mode, the Pr.998 PM parameter initialization setting is
automatically changed.
• In the initial parameter setting, the capacity same as the inverter capacity is set in Pr.80 Motor capacity. To use a motor
capacity that is one rank lower than the inverter capacity, set Pr.80 Motor capacity by selecting the mode on the operation
panel.
• To set a speed by adjusting frequencies or to monitor it, use Pr.998. (Refer to page 231.)

230 5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
 Initializing the parameters required for the PM sensorless vector control
(Pr.998) 1
• PM parameter initialization sets parameters required for driving an IPM motor MM-CF.
• The offline auto tuning enables the operation with an IPM motor other than MM-CF and with SPM motors.
• Two MM-CF PM parameter initialization methods are available; setting Pr.998 PM parameter initialization, and selecting 2
IPM initialization (" ") on the operation panel.

Pr. Name
Initial
value
Setting
range
Description 3
The setting of the motor parameters is
Parameter setting (in frequencies) for an
0 changed to the setting required to drive an
induction motor
induction motor. 4
Parameter setting (in rotations per minute)
3003 The setting of the motor parameters is
for the MM-CF IPM motor
changed to the setting required to drive an
Parameter setting (in frequencies) for the
3103 IPM motor.
MM-CF IPM motor 5
Parameter setting (in rotations per minute)
998 PM parameter 8009 for an IPM motor other than MM-CF (after The setting of the motor parameters is
0 changed to the setting required to drive an
E430 initialization tuning)
Parameter setting (in frequencies) for an
IPM motor. (Set Pr.71 Applied motor
and perform offline auto tuning in 6
8109 IPM motor other than the MM-CF (after advance. (Refer to page 551.))
tuning)
Parameter setting (in rotations per minute) The setting of the motor parameters is
9009
for an SPM motor (after tuning) changed to the setting required to drive an 7
SPM motor. (Set Pr.71 Applied motor
Parameter setting (in frequencies) for an and perform offline auto tuning in
9109
SPM motor (after tuning)
advance. (Refer to page 551.))
• To use a motor capacity that is one rank lower than the inverter capacity, set Pr.80 Motor capacity before performing PM 8
parameter initialization.
• When Pr.998 = "3003, 8009, or 9009", the monitor is displayed and the frequency is set using the motor rotations per
minute. To use frequency to display or set, set Pr.998 = "3103, 8109, or 9109". 9
• Set Pr.998 = "0" to change the PM sensorless vector control parameter settings to the parameter settings required to drive
an induction motor.
• When using an IPM motor or SPM motor other than MM-CF, set Pr.998 = "8009, 8109, 9009, or 9109". 10
NOTE
• Make sure to set Pr.998 before setting other parameters. If the Pr.998 setting is changed after setting other parameters, some
of those parameters are initialized too. (Refer to the "List of the target parameters for the motor parameter initialization".)
• To change back to the parameter settings required to drive an induction motor, perform Parameter clear or All parameter clear.
• If the setting of Pr.998 PM parameter initialization is changed between "3003, 8009, 9009 (rotations per minute)" ↔ "3103,
8109, 9109 (frequency)", the target parameters are respectively set to their initial values.
The purpose of Pr.998 is not to change the display units. Use Pr.144 Speed setting switchover to change the display units
between rotations per minute and frequency. Using Pr.144 enables switching the unit between rotations per minute and
frequencies without initializing the setting of the motor parameters.
Example) Changing the Pr.144 setting between "6" and "106" switches the display units between frequency and rotations per
minute.
• For an inverter out of the capacity range of the IPM motor MM-CF, "3003 or 3103" cannot be set. (Refer to page 833 for the
capacities of MM-CF motors.)
• The PM parameter initialization (Pr.998) changes parameter settings for the first motor. When a PM motor is used as the
second motor, parameters for the second motor must be set individually.

 List of the target parameters for the motor parameter initialization

• The parameter settings in the following table are changed to the settings required to perform PM sensorless vector control
by selecting the IPM initialization on the operation panel or by using Pr.998 PM parameter initialization. The changed
settings differ according to the specification (capacity) of the PM motor used.

5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
231
 • Performing Parameter clear or All parameter clear resets these parameter settings to the settings required to drive an
induction motor.
Setting
Induction PM motor (setting in PM motor (setting in Setting increments
motor rotations per minute) frequencies)
Pr. Name 0 (initial value) 8009 8109
9009 9109 3003,
3003 (MM- 3103 (MM- 0, 3003,
(other (other 8009,
FM CA CF) CF) 8109, 9109
than MM- than MM- 9009
CF) CF)
120 Hz*1 Maximum Maximum
motor motor
1 Maximum frequency 3000 r/min rotations 200 Hz 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
60 Hz*2 per frequency*
8
minute*8
Multi-speed setting (high
4 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
speed)
Rated Rated 0.01 A*1
Inverter rated motor motor
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay — —
current 0.1 A*2
current*10 current*10
Pr.84 × Pr.84 ×
13 Starting frequency 0.5 Hz 8 r/min*5 10% 0.5 Hz*6 10%
1 r/min 0.01 Hz

Pr.84 × Pr.84 ×
15 Jog frequency 5 Hz 200 r/min 13.33 Hz 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
10% 10%
High speed maximum 120 Hz*1
18 3000 r/min — 200 Hz — 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
frequency 60 Hz*2
Acceleration/deceleration
20 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
reference frequency
Stall prevention operation
22
level 150%*7 150%*7 0.1%

37 Speed display 0 0 1
Frequency monitoring
55 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
reference
Rated Rated 0.01 A*1
Current monitoring Inverter rated motor motor
56 Pr.859 Pr.859
reference current 0.1 A*2
current*10 current*10
71 Applied motor 0 330*3 — 330*3 — 1
Motor Motor 0.01 kW*1
80 Motor capacity 9999 capacity — capacity —
(MM-CF)*4 (MM-CF)*4 0.1 kW*2

81 Number of motor poles 9999 8*4 — 8*4 — 1

84 Rated motor frequency 9999 2000 r/min — 133.33 Hz — 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
Third output frequency
116 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
detection
Terminal 2 frequency setting
125 (903) 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
gain frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting
126 (905) 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
gain frequency
144 Speed setting switchover 4 108 Pr.81 +100 8 Pr.81 1
Soft-PWM operation
240 1 0 1
selection
Subtraction starting
263 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
frequency
Power failure deceleration
266 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
time switchover frequency
Maximum
Maximum
motor
motor
374 Overspeed detection level 9999 3150 r/min rotations 210 Hz 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
frequency
per minute
+ 10 Hz*8
+ 10 Hz*8*9
Frequency for maximum
386 60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
input pulse
505 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 133.33 Hz Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 0.01 Hz

232 5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
 Setting
Induction
motor
PM motor (setting in
rotations per minute)
PM motor (setting in
frequencies)
Setting increments
1
Pr. Name 0 (initial value) 8009 8109
9009 9109 3003,
3003 (MM- 3103 (MM- 0, 3003,
FM CA CF)
(other
than MM-
CF)
(other
than MM-
8009,
9009
8109, 9109 2
CF) CF)
Current average value Rated Rated 0.01 A*1
Inverter rated
557 monitor signal output
reference current
current
motor
current*10
Pr.859 motor
current*10
Pr.859
0.1 A*2 3
820 Speed control P gain 1 60% 30% 1%
821 Speed control integral time 1 0.333 s 0.333 s 0.001 s
Torque control P gain 1 4
824 (current loop proportional 100% 100% 1%
gain)
Torque control integral time
825
1 (current loop integral time)
5 ms 20 ms 0.1 ms
5
870 Speed detection hysteresis 0 Hz 8 r/min 0.5 Hz*9 0.5 Hz 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
Regeneration avoidance
Pr.84 × Pr.84 ×
885 compensation frequency 6 Hz 200 r/min 13.33 Hz 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
limit value
10% 10% 6
*1
Energy saving monitor Inverter rated 0.01 kW
893 Motor capacity (Pr.80)
reference (motor capacity) current 0.1 kW*2
C14 Terminal 1 gain frequency
60 Hz 50 Hz 2000 r/min Pr.84 133.33 Hz Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
7
(918) (speed)
120 Hz*1 Maximum Maximum
motor
1121
Per-unit speed control
reference frequency
3000 r/min rotations 200 Hz
motor
frequency*
1 r/min 0.01 Hz 8
60 Hz*2 per
8
minute*8
—: Not changed
*1 Initial value for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
9
*2 Initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) and higher.
*3 When Pr.71 Applied motor = "333, 334, 8093, 8094, 9093, or 9094", the Pr.71 setting is not changed.
*4
*5
When a value other than "9999" is set, the set value is not changed.
200 r/min when Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection = "0".
10
*6 13.33 Hz when Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection = "0".
*7 110% for SLD, 120% for LD, 150% for ND, and 200% for HD (Refer to Pr.570 Multiple rating setting on page 343.)
*8 The Pr.702 Maximum motor frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency (rotations per minute). When Pr.702 ="9999 (initial value)",
the Pr.84 Rated motor frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency (rotations per minute).
*9 The setting value is converted from frequency to rotations per minute. (It differs according to the number of motor poles.)
*10 Refer to page 833 for the rated motor current of MM-CF.

NOTE
• If IPM parameter initialization is performed in rotations per minute (Pr.998 = "3003, 8009, or 9009"), the parameters not listed
in the table and the monitor items are also set and displayed in rotations per minute.

5.2.5 Low-speed range torque characteristics

PM

The torque characteristics in a low-speed range under PM sensorless vector control can be changed.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Operation
value range
Disables the low-speed range torque characteristic (current
0
788 Low speed range torque synchronization operation).
9999
G250 characteristic selection Enables the low-speed range torque characteristic (high frequency
9999*1 superposition control)
Disables the low-speed range torque characteristic (current
Second motor low-speed 0
747 synchronization operation) while the RT signal is ON.
range torque characteristic 9999
G350 Enables the low-speed range torque characteristic (high frequency
selection 9999*1 superposition control) while the RT signal is ON.

5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
233
 *1 The low-speed range high-torque characteristic (current synchronization operation) is disabled for PM motors other than MM-CF, even if "9999"
is set.

 When the low-speed range torque characteristic is enabled (Pr.788 =

"9999 (initial value)")
• The high frequency superposition control provides enough torque in the low-speed range operation.
• The low-speed range high-torque characteristic is only valid with an MM-CF motor.

 When the low-speed range high-torque characteristic is disabled (Pr.788

= "0")
• The current synchronization operation reduces much motor noise compared with the high frequency superposition control.
• Since the torque in a low-speed range is low, use this setting for an operation with light start-up load.

 Low-speed range high-torque characteristic is set for the second motor

(Pr.747)
• Use Pr.747 Second motor low-speed range torque characteristic selection to switch the torque characteristic in a low-
speed range according to the application or to switch among motors connected to one inverter.
• The Pr.747 becomes valid when the RT signal turns ON.

NOTE
• Position control under PM sensorless vector control is not available when the current synchronization operation is selected.
Zero speed and servo lock are also disabled during current synchronization operation.
• For torque characteristics, refer to page 833.
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521

234 5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Control method
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector 1
control, vector control, PM sensorless vector
control 2

Purpose Parameter to set

Refer 3
to page
P.H500, P.H700
Pr.22, Pr.801,
to P.H704,
To limit the torque during speed
Torque limit
P.H710, P.H720,
Pr.803, Pr.810,
Pr.812 to 245
4
control P.H721, P.H730,
Pr.817, Pr.858,
P.T010, P.T040,
Pr.868, Pr.874
P.G210
P.C112 to Pr.818 to 5
P.C114, P.G206, Pr.821, Pr.830,
P.G211, P.G212, Pr.831, Pr.880,
To adjust the speed control gain Easy gain tuning gain adjustment 254
P.G218, P.G260, Pr.1115 to
P.G261, P.G311,
P.G312, P.G361
Pr.1118,
Pr.1121
6
P.G220 to Pr.828, Pr.877
To improve the motor trackability Speed feed forward control, model adaptive
P.G224, P.G262, to Pr.881, 263
for the speed command changes speed control
P.C114 Pr.1119 7
To stabilize the speed detection
Speed detection filter P.G215, P.G315 Pr.823, Pr.833 332
signal
To make starting torque start-up P.G230 to Pr.840 to
faster
Torque bias
P.G238 Pr.848
265
8
Speed deviation excess, speed limit, P.H415 to Pr.285, Pr.690,
To avoid motor overrunning 269
deceleration check P.H417, P.H881 Pr.853, Pr.873
P.G601 to Pr.1003 to
To avoid mechanical resonance Notch filter
P.G603 Pr.1005
271
9
To adjust the gain during PM
Speed control gain adjustment P.G211, P.G212 Pr.820, Pr.821 254
sensorless vector control
Speed control performs control so that the speed command and the actual motor rotation speed match.
10

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
235
  Control block diagram
AU signal Analog input offset adjustment
Operation mode
Terminal 2 bias [C2, C3(Pr.902)] [Pr.849]
[Pr.79]
OFF Terminal 2 gain [Pr.125, C4(Pr.903)]
Terminal 2

Terminal 4 bias [C5, C6(Pr.904)]

ON Terminal 4 gain [Pr.126, C7(Pr.905)] Analog input
Terminal 4 selection
[Pr.858 = 0] [Pr.73]

Terminal 1
[Pr.868 = 0]
RT signal [Pr.822]
OFF ≠9999
Speed setting [Pr.822]
filter =9999
[Pr.74]
[Pr.832]
ON ≠9999
[Pr.822]
=9999
[Pr.74]

RL Multi-speed
RM selection
[Pr.4 to 6,
RH 24 to 27,
REX 232 to 239]

Option
Operation panel

Acceleration/deceleration
Upper/lower limit setting

[Pr.1] Running
[Pr.13] [Pr.10]
[Pr.2] A
[Pr.7] [Pr.8] During stop

Pre-excitation selection
[Pr.802] Control mode
1 LX signal ON Vector control
Servo lock

0
Zero speed control Deceleration stop LX signal
[Pr.11] Real sensorless
ON vector control
Zero speed control
Brake operation selection
[Pr.850] Deceleration stop
1 [Pr.11] OFF
Servo lock

0
DC injection brake operation

NOTE
• The RT (Second function selection) signal and the X9 (Third function selection) signal are used to enable switching between
acceleration/deceleration time settings. The acceleration/deceleration time after switching depends on the settings in Pr.44
Second acceleration/deceleration time and Pr.45 Second deceleration time, or Pr.110 Third acceleration/deceleration
time and Pr.111 Third deceleration time. The acceleration/deceleration time is a period of time taken to reach Pr.20
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.
• Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments is used to change the setting increment.
• When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected, the inverter accelerates the motor from the frequency
search result frequency to the set frequency. (Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠ 9999, Pr.162 Automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure selection = "10, 12, 13, 1010, 1012, or 1013")
• Pr.811 Set resolution switchover is used to change the setting increment for speed setting, operation speed monitoring, and
torque limit setting.
• Pr.862 Encoder option selection is used to change the Vector control compatible plug-in option or the control terminal option
for the first and second motors.
• To avoid overdriving the motor due to incorrect encoder pulse settings, the output frequency can be limited with the set
frequency plus the value set in Pr.873 Speed limit.

236 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 B Speed controller P/PI selection 1
Droop control C

Speed feed forward control/

Speed feed forward control
Speed feed forward control/
2
model adaptive speed Speed feed forward model adaptive speed
control selection torque limit control selection
[Pr.877] [Pr.879] [Pr.877]
1 Load inertia ratio
J·s
Speed feed forward
gain
Speed feed forward
filter
1 3
[Pr.880] [Pr.881] [Pr.878]

4
dω/dt limiter 400Hz
Model speed

5
2 + control gain Iq100% 2
J
- [Pr.828] T100%
([Pr.1119])

Model adaptive speed control

6
T100%
Speed controller
7
J·Iq100%

Speed control P gain + Iq* limiter

[Pr.820] +
Speed control
([Pr.830])
integral time
2 ([Pr.1117])
[Pr.821]
([Pr.1118])
([Pr.1109(PROFIBUS)])
([Pr.831])
([Pr.1109(PROFIBUS)])
Notch filter
8
0 Iq* limiter [Pr.1003 to 1005] Iq* limiter
0,1
+ + +
+
9
- +
Absolute value

Speed control P gain

compensation amount in
Control mode
the constant output range [Pr.1116]
Torque control
Speed limit value
10
Speed command value

+ Speed control
A -

Droop speed

Control method Speed detection

Encoder option Speed detection filter value
Vector control
(FR-A8AP, [Pr.823]
FR-A8AL, ([Pr.833])
or others) E
Real sensorless vector control Torque current
Speed estimation value command value
Iq*

Torque bias
Control method D Torque limit
Torque bias selection [Pr.840] Vector control/
Real sensorless
Contact input terminal 0 Torque bias filter vector control
X42,X43 [Pr.844]
Torque bias
[Pr.841 to 843] Other control
method
Torque 0
setting filter 1,2
Terminal 1 Analog input
[Pr.868 = 6] Terminal 1 [Pr.826]
([Pr.836])
Torque bias
[Pr.846 to 848] Input filter time
[Pr.919 to 920] constant [Pr.74]
24,25
PROFIBUS communication

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
237
 Speed controller P/PI selection

X44 signal ON, or P/PI control switchover

frequency [Pr.1348] ≥ estimated speed value Speed control integral
term clear time
[Pr.1115]
[Pr.845 ≠ 9999] One of the conditions satisfied
Torque bias selection B

Torque bias operation time [Pr.845]

Droop control
Rated motor frequency Control mode
[Pr.84]
Droop filter time Droop gain Speed control
constant [Pr.286]
C [Pr.1109(PROFIBUS)]
Droop speed
[Pr.287]

Iq100% Droop function

activation selection 0
[Pr.288] Torque control
0 to 2
Rated motor frequency [Pr.84]

10,11
Speed detection value

Per-unit speed control 20 to 22

reference frequency [Pr.1121]

Constant output range torque

characteristic selection
[Pr.803]
Output limit level Output limit level
[Pr.801] [Pr.801] Control mode
Vector control
D

Real sensorless
±30% vector control

Torque limit Stall prevention operation level [Pr.22] TL signal ON During acceleration
Torque limit level (regeneration) [Pr.812] or X92 signal ON or deceleration
Torque limit level (3rd quadrant) [Pr.813]
Torque limit level
Torque limit level (4th quadrant) [Pr.814] Torque limit level 2 ON during acceleration ON
[Pr.815]
[Pr.816]
Torque limit input
method selection PROFIBUS communication
Torque limit level
[Pr.810] settings using REF 1 to 7
Analog input during deceleration
Terminal 1, 4 Terminal 1 bias 0 No OFF [Pr.817] OFF
[C16, C17 (Pr.919)]
Terminal 1 gain
Terminal 1 [C18, C19 (Pr.920)]
[Pr.868 = 4]
Torque setting
Terminal 4 bias
filter 1
[C38, C39 (Pr.932)]
[Pr.826]
Terminal 4 gain
Terminal 4 ([Pr.836])
[C40, C41 (Pr.933)]
[Pr.858 = 4] Input filter time
constant [Pr.74]

Torque setting 2
filter

[Pr.826] RT signal
≠ 9999 OFF PROFIBUS communication Yes
[Pr.826]
settings using REF 1 to 7
= 9999
[Pr.74]
Torque command source
[Pr.836] selection [Pr.804]
≠ 9999 ON Torque command value
[Pr.836] 1
[Pr.805]
= 9999 ([Pr.806])
[Pr.74]
PROFIBUS communication
3,5,6
CC-Link communication
CC-Link IE communication

238 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
Magnetic flux control / slip frequency

Secondary resistance One of the conditions satisfied

1
temperature compensation Real sensorless vector control
Magnetic flux observer enabled
FR-A8AZ Both conditions Online auto tuning selection
satisfied [Pr.95]
Both conditions satisfied 2
Motor temperature Logic inverted
detection filter [Pr.407]

Thermistor R2 compensation Magnetic flux observer ωsl

3
Slip frequency Slip frequency
operation ωsl

+
+
Output frequency
4
ωout
Excitation ratio
E
Torque current
command value
Iq* Excitation ratio
5
[Pr.854]

Speed detection
value
Rated motor frequency
[Pr.84]
6
[Pr.1109 = [][][]1]
and Vector control
selected PROFIBUS
communication
One of the conditions
satisfied 7
[Pr.868 = 1] and
Vector control

8
selected Real sensorless Stop-on contact
Analog input low-speed excitation excitation
Terminal 1

Control method Stop-on-contact control

9
100% Vector control Disabled
Magnetic flux 100%
Control mode

Excitation current
low-speed scaling factor

10
[Pr.86]
(130%) Enabled

Speed control Real sensorless

Excitation current vector control
break point
[Pr.85] Stop-on contact excitation current
(10Hz) low-speed scaling factor
[Pr.275]

70%
Torque control
Excitation current
break point
[Pr.85]
(10Hz)

Magnetic flux command value F

+ Magnetic flux
controller Excitation current
-
command value
Id*
Estimated magnetic flux value

[Pr.95=2] Magnetic flux observer enabled or

Real sensorless vector control selected
Enabled Disabled

Magnetic flux observer Magnetic flux

Estimated magnetic flux value operation

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
239
 Current control / voltage output / magnetic flux observer Soft-PWM operation selection
[Pr.240]

Soft-PWM
q-axis current controller processing

E Torque control +
Torque current + P gain + + Vq Vu +
command value - [Pr.824] + + Vv + Inverter voltage
2-phase to 3-phase
Iq* Iq ([Pr.834]) PWM
Torque control Vd conversion + output
Vw
integral time +
[Pr.825] +
([Pr.835])

Online auto tuning

Incoherent selection
operation [Pr.95]
Magnetic flux One of the conditions satisfied
observer

Real sensorless Magnetic flux observer

vector control

Magnetic flux observer

d-axis current controller Magnetic flux observer

Estimated magnetic
flux value

F Torque control Magnetic flux

P gain Slip frequency
Excitation + + - observer
[Pr.824] operation
current - + + ωsl
command value ([Pr.834]) Enabled
Id Torque control Real sensorless
Id* vector control
integral time
[Pr.825]
Estimated
([Pr.835]) Speed estimator
speed value

Control method
Real sensorless
Estimated speed + vector control
value +

Phase calculation

Slip frequency θsl + θ

ωsl +
Vector control
θIM

FR-A8AP
FR-A8AL

Torque detection filter Iq Iu

[Pr.827]
([Pr.837]) Iv Inverter output
3-phase to 2-phase conversion
Id Iw current detection

5.3.1 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector

control (speed control)
Sensorless

Operating procedure
1. Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 46.)

2. Set the motor (Pr.71). (Refer to page 528.)

Set Pr.71 Applied motor to "0" (standard motor) or "1" (constant-torque motor).

3. Set the overheat protection of the motor (Pr.9). (Refer to page 415.)

240 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 4. Set the motor capacity and number of motor poles (Pr.80 and Pr.81). (Refer to page 221.)
V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).
1
5. Set the rated motor voltage and the rated motor frequency (Pr.83 and Pr.84). (Refer to page 532.)

6. Select the control method (Pr.800). (Refer to page 221.)

Select Pr.800 = “10” (speed control) or "12" (speed/torque switchover) to enable speed control.
2
7. Set the operation command. (Refer to page 389.)
Select the start command and speed command. 3
8. Set the torque limit (Pr.810). (Refer to page 245.)
9. Perform the offline auto tuning (Pr.96) (Refer to page 532.) 4
10. Perform the test operation.
As required 5
• Select online auto tuning (Pr.95) (Refer to page 558.)
• Perform easy gain tuning. (Refer to page 256.)
• Adjust the speed control gain manually. (Refer to page 257.) 6
NOTE
• During Real sensorless vector control, offline auto tuning must be performed properly before starting operations.
• The speed command setting range under Real sensorless vector control is 0 to 400 Hz. 7
• The carrier frequency is limited during Real sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.)
• Torque control is not available in a low-speed (about 10 Hz or lower) regenerative range, or with a low speed and light load
(about 5 Hz or lower and rated torque about 20% or lower). Vector control must be selected.
• Performing pre-excitation (LX signal and X13 signal) under torque control may start the motor running at a low speed even
8
when the start signal (STF or STR) is not input. The inverter at a start command ON may also rotate the motor at a low speed
even though a speed limit value is set to zero. Therefore, confirm that the motor running does not cause any safety problem
before performing pre-excitation. 9
• Switching between the forward rotation command (STF) and reverse rotation command (STR) must not be performed during
operations under torque control. An overcurrent trip (E.OC[]) or opposite rotation deceleration fault (E.11) will occur.
• When performing continuous operations under Real sensorless vector control in the FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower or FR-
A840-00126(3.7K) or lower, the speed fluctuation increases when the value is 20 Hz or less, and in the low-speed range of
10
less than 1 Hz, there may be torque shortage. In such case, stop the inverter and restart it to improve the situation.
• In case of starting the motor while the motor is coasting under Real sensorless vector control, the frequency search must be
set for the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr.57 ≠ "9999", Pr.162 = "10"). (Refer to page 628.)
• When Real sensorless vector control is applied, there may not be enough torque provided in the ultra low-speed range of about
2 Hz or lower.
Generally, the speed control range is as follows.
For power driving, 1:200 (2, 4 or 6 poles) (available at 0.3 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz), 1:30 (8 poles or more)
(available at 2 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz).
For regenerative driving, 1:12 (2 to 10 poles) (available at 5 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz).

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
241
 5.3.2 Setting procedure of Vector control (speed control)
Vector

 Using an induction motor

Operating procedure
1. Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 91.)
Install a Vector control compatible option.

2. Set the option to be used (Pr.862).

Set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used. (Refer to page 226.)

3. Set the applied motor and encoder (Pr.71, Pr.359 (Pr.852), and Pr.369 (Pr.851)). (Refer to page 94.)

4. Set the overheat protection of the motor (Pr.9). (Refer to page 415.)
When using the SF-V5RU or a motor equipped with a thermal sensor, set Pr.9 = 0 A.

5. Set the motor capacity and number of motor poles (Pr.80 and Pr.81). (Refer to page 221.)
V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).

6. Set the rated motor voltage and the rated motor frequency (Pr.83 and Pr.84). (Refer to page 532.)

7. Select the control method (Pr.800). (Refer to page 221.)

Select Pr.800 = "0" (speed control), "2" (speed/torque switchover), or "4" (speed/position switchover) to enable
speed control.

8. Set the operation command. (Refer to page 389.)

Select the start command and speed command.

9. Set the torque limit (Pr.810). (Refer to page 245.)

10. Perform the test operation.
As required
• Perform offline auto tuning (Pr.96) (Refer to page 532)
• Select online auto tuning (Pr.95) (Refer to page 558.)
• Perform easy gain tuning. (Refer to page 256.)
• Adjust the speed control gain manually. (Refer to page 257.)

NOTE
• The speed command setting range under Vector control is 0 to 400 Hz.
• The carrier frequency is limited during Vector control. (Refer to page 356.)
• Refer to the Instruction Manual of each option for details on Vector control using the FR-A8APR, FR-A8APS, or FR-A8APA.

242 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 Using a PM motor
1
Operating procedure
1. Set the applied encoder (Pr.359 (Pr.852), Pr.369 (Pr.851)).
Refer to page 94 and set the parameters according to the option and the encoder to be used. 2
2. Set the applied motor (Pr.9, Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83, Pr.84).
Set Pr.71 Applied motor, Pr.9 Rated motor current, Pr.80 Motor capacity, Pr.81 Number of motor poles, Pr.83
Rated motor voltage, and Pr.84 Rated motor frequency according to the motor specifications. (Setting "9999
3
(initial value)" in Pr.80 or Pr.81 selects V/F control.) Set Pr.702, Pr.706, Pr.707, Pr.724 and Pr.725 as required.

3. Select Vector control (speed control). (Refer to page 221.) 4

4. Perform offline auto tuning and encoder position tuning (Pr.96). (Refer to page 542.)
Set Pr.96, and perform tuning.
5
5. Configure the initial parameter setting for the applied motor using Pr.998.
When the setting for the PM motor is selected in Pr.998 PM parameter initialization, Vector control for the PM
motor with an encoder is enabled. 6
"8009": Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF
"8109": Parameter (frequency) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF
"9009": Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an SPM motor 7
"9109": Parameter (frequency) settings for an SPM motor

6. Perform the test operation.

8
NOTE
• For PM motors, after performing offline auto tuning and encoder position tuning, first perform PM parameter initialization. If
parameter initialization is performed after setting other parameters, some of those parameters are initialized too. (Refer to
page 231 for the parameters that are initialized.) 9

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
243
 5.3.3 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control
(speed control)
PM

This inverter is set for a general-purpose motor in the initial setting. Follow the following procedure to change the setting for the
PM sensorless vector control.

 Driving an MM-CF IPM motor

Operating procedure
1. Perform IPM parameter initialization. (Refer to page 230.)
Set "3003 or 3103" in Pr.998 PM parameter initialization, or select "3003" in “ " (IPM initialization).
setting Description
Parameter settings for MM-CF IPM motor (rotations
3003
per minute)
Parameter settings for MM-CF IPM motor
3103
(frequencies)

2. Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multi-speed setting.

Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multi-speed setting as required.

3. Set the operation command. (Refer to page 389.)

Select the start command and speed command.

4. Perform the test operation.

As required
• Perform offline auto tuning for a PM motor. (Refer to page 551.)

NOTE
• To change to the PM sensorless vector control, perform PM parameter initialization at first. If parameter initialization is
performed after setting other parameters, some of those parameters are initialized too. (Refer to page 231 for the parameters
that are initialized.)
• To use a motor capacity that is one rank lower than the inverter capacity, set Pr.80 Motor capacity before performing PM
parameter initialization.
• The speed setting range for an MM-CF IPM motor is between 0 and 200 Hz.
• The carrier frequency is limited during PM sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.)
• Constant-speed operation cannot be performed in the low-speed range of 200r/min or less under current synchronization
operation. (Refer to page 233.)
• During PM sensorless vector control, the RUN signal is output about 100 ms after turning ON the start command (STF, STR).
The delay is due to the magnetic pole detection.
• During PM sensorless vector control, the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function operates only when an
MM-CF IPM motor is connected
When a built-in brake or a regeneration unit is used, the frequency search may not be available at 2200 r/min or higher.
The restart operation cannot be performed until the motor speed drops to a frequency where the frequency search is available.

244 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 Driving a PM motor other than MM-CF
1
Operating procedure
1. Setting the applied motor (Pr.9, Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83, and Pr.84). (Refer to page 528, page 551.)
Set "8093 (IPM motor other than MM-CF) or 9093 (SPM motor)" in Pr.71 Applied motor. Set Pr.9 Rated motor 2
current, Pr.80 Motor capacity, Pr.81 Number of motor poles, Pr.83 Rated motor voltage, and Pr.84 Rated
motor frequency according to the motor specifications. (Setting "9999 (initial value)" in Pr.80 or Pr.81 selects V/F
control.) 3
2. Performing the offline auto tuning for a PM motor (Pr.96) (Refer to page 551.)
Set "1" (offline auto tuning without rotating motor (for other than MM-CF)) in Pr.96, and perform tuning.
4
3. Configure the initial setting for the PM sensorless vector control using Pr.998. (Refer to page 231.)
When the setting for the PM motor is selected in Pr.998 PM parameter initialization, the PM sensorless vector
control is selected. [PM] on the operation panel (FR-DU08) is lit when the PM sensorless vector control is set. 5
setting Description
Parameter settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF
8009
(rotations per minute)
Parameter settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF
6
8109
(frequency)
Parameter settings (in rotations per minute) for an SPM
9009
motor 7
9109 Parameter settings (in frequencies) for an SPM motor

4. Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multi-speed setting.

Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multi-speed setting as required. 8
5. Set the operation command. (Refer to page 389.)
Select the start command and speed command.
9
6. Perform the test operation.

NOTE
10
• To change to the PM sensorless vector control, perform PM parameter initialization at first. If parameter initialization is
performed after setting other parameters, some of those parameters are initialized too. (Refer to page 231 for the parameters
that are initialized.)
• To use a motor capacity that is one rank lower than the inverter capacity, set Pr.80 Motor capacity before performing PM
parameter initialization.
• The carrier frequency is limited during PM sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.)
• Constant-speed operation cannot be performed in the low-speed range of 200r/min or less under current synchronization
operation. (Refer to page 233.)
• During PM sensorless vector control, the RUN signal is output about 100 ms after turning ON the start command (STF, STR).
The delay is due to the magnetic pole detection.

5.3.4 Setting the torque limit level

Sensorless Vector PM

Limit the output torque not to exceed the specified value.

The torque limit level can be set in a range of 0 to 400%. The TL signal can be used to switch between two types of torque limit.
The torque limit level can be selected by setting it with a parameter, or by using analog input terminals (terminals 1, 4). Also,
the torque limit levels of forward rotation (power driving/regenerative driving) and reverse rotation (power driving/regenerative
driving) can be set individually.
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
22 Stall prevention operation Set the torque limit level as a percentage with regards to the rated
H500 level (Torque limit level) 150/200%*1 0 to 400%
torque as 100%.

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
245
 Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
Set a frequency of the low-speed range in the constant output
0 to 400 Hz
range torque characteristic selection.
85 Excitation current break
9999 SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined frequency is
G201 point
9999 applied.
Motor other than the above: 10 Hz is applied.
Set a torque scaling factor applied to the operation in the low-
0 to 300% speed range in the constant output range torque characteristic
86 Excitation current low- selection.
9999
G202 speed scaling factor SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined scaling factor
9999 is applied.
Motor other than the above: 130% is applied.
Set the OL signal output start time at the activation of torque limit
157 0 to 25 s
OL signal output timer 0s operation.
M430
9999 No OL signal output.
0 to 400% Set the torque current limit level.
801
Output limit level 9999 The torque limit setting value is used for limiting the torque current
H704 9999
level.
The motor power output is
The torque rises in the low-
0 limited to be constant in the
speed range.
constant power range.
The torque is limited to be
The torque is kept constant in
1 constant in the constant power
the low-speed range.
range.
The torque is limited to be
Constant output range The torque is kept constant in constant in the constant power
803
torque characteristic 0 2 the low-speed range. (The range unless the output limit of
G210
selection torque current is limited.) the torque current is reached.
(The torque current is limited.)
The motor power output is
The torque is kept constant in
10 limited to be constant in the
the low-speed range.
constant power range.
The torque is limited to be
The torque rises in the low-
11 constant in the constant power
speed range.
range.
0 The internal torque limit 2 cannot be used.
Torque limit by the parameter setting (Pr.805 or Pr.806)
1
(-400 to 400%)
2 The internal torque limit 2 cannot be used
Torque limit through the CC-Link / CC-Link IE Field Network / CC-
804 Torque command source
0 3 Link IE TSN communication (FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, FR-A800-GF,
D400 selection
FR-A8NCG, FR-A800-GN)
4 The internal torque limit 2 cannot be used
5 Torque limit through the CC-Link / CC-Link IE Field Network / CC-
6 Link IE TSN communication (FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, FR-A800-GF,
FR-A8NCG, FR-A800-GN)
805 Torque command value 600 to Writes the torque limit value in RAM. Regards 1000% as 0%, and
1000%
D401 (RAM) 1400% set torque command by an offset of 1000%.
Writes the torque limit value in RAM and EEPROM.
806 Torque command value 600 to
1000% Regards 1000% as 0%, and set torque command by an offset of
D402 (RAM, EEPROM) 1400%
1000%.
0 Internal torque limit 1 (torque limited by parameter settings)
810 Torque limit input method
0 1 External torque limit (torque limited by terminals 1 and 4)
H700 selection
2 Internal torque limit 2 (torque limited by communication options)
Speed setting, running speed
0
monitor increments 1 r/min Torque limit setting increments
Speed setting, running speed 0.1%
1
811 monitor increments 0.1 r/min
Set resolution switchover 0
D030 Speed setting, running speed
10
monitor increments 1 r/min Torque limit setting increments
Speed setting, running speed 0.01%
11
monitor increments 0.1 r/min
812 Torque limit level 0 to 400% Set the torque limit level for forward rotation regenerative driving.
9999
H701 (regeneration) 9999 Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values.

246 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
813 Torque limit level (3rd 0 to 400% Set the torque limit level for reverse rotation power driving.
1
9999
H702 quadrant) 9999 Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values.
814 Torque limit level (4th 0 to 400% Set the torque limit level for reverse rotation regenerative driving.
9999
H703 quadrant) 9999 Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values. 2
When the torque limit selection (TL) signal is ON, Pr.815 is the
815 0 to 400%
Torque limit level 2 9999 torque limit value regardless of Pr.810.
H710
9999 The torque limit set to Pr.810 is valid.
816 Torque limit level during
9999
0 to 400% Set the torque limit value during acceleration. 3
H720 acceleration 9999 The same torque limit as constant speed.
817 Torque limit level during 0 to 400% Set the torque limit value during deceleration.
9999
H721
858
deceleration
Terminal 4 function
9999 The same torque limit as constant speed.
The torque limit level can be changed with setting value "4" and the
4
0 0, 1, 4, 9999
T040 assignment signal to terminal 4.
868 Terminal 1 function The torque limit level can be changed with setting value "4" and the
0 0 to 6, 9999
T010 assignment signal to terminal 1. 5
874 The inverter can be set to be shut off at activation of torque limit
OLT level setting 150% 0 to 400%
H730 and stalling of the motor. Set the output to be shut off.
*1 When changing from V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control to Real sensorless vector control or Vector control in the FR-A820-
00250(3.7K) or lower or the FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or lower, 150% changes to 200%. 6
NOTE
• The lower limit for the torque limit level under Real sensorless vector control is set to 30% even if a value lower than 30% is set.
• When the low-speed range high-torque characteristic is disabled under PM sensorless vector control (Pr.788 = "0"), the torque 7
limit is not activated in a low-speed range with a rated frequency of less than 10%.
• Under PM sensorless vector control, the torque limit level is reduced inversely proportional to the output frequency in the
constant output range of the rated motor frequency or higher.
8
 Block diagram of torque limit
<Vector control> Torque limit 9
Speed control Iq current control
Speed command +
M
- 10
Encoder

 Selecting the torque limit input method (Pr.810)

• Use Pr.810 Torque limit input method selection to select the method to limit the output torque for speed control.
The method in the initial setting is use of the parameter settings.
Torque limit input
Pr.810 setting Operation
method
Perform the torque limit operation using the parameter (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.814) settings.
0 (initial value) Internal torque limit 1 If changing the torque limit parameters via communication is enabled, the torque limit input
can be performed via communication.
1 External torque limit Torque limit using analog voltage (current) to terminal 1 or terminal 4 is valid.
The torque limit through the CC-Link (FR-A8NC) or CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A8NCE/
2 (Internal torque limit 2)
FR-A800-GF) communication is valid.

 Torque limit level using parameter settings (Pr.810 = "0", Pr.812 to Pr.814)
• The torque is limited by parameter setting (Internal torque limit 1).
• In the initial value, a limit is applied to all quadrants by Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level).

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
247
 • To set individually for each quadrant, use Pr.812 Torque limit level (regeneration), Pr.813 Torque limit level (3rd
quadrant), Pr.814 Torque limit level (4th quadrant). When "9999" is set, Pr.22 setting is regarded as torque limit level
in all the quadrants.
Torque limit
+

Reverse Forward
regeneration driving
Reverse quad4 quad1 Forward
rotation (Pr.814) (Pr.22) rotation
Speed
quad3 quad2
(Pr.813) (Pr.812)
Reverse Forward
driving regeneration

-
Rated speed

 Torque limit level using analog input (terminals 1, 4) (Pr.810 = "1", Pr.858,
Pr.868)
• The torque is limited with the analog input of terminal 1 or terminal 4. (External torque limit)
• Torque limit using analog input is valid with a limit value lower than the internal torque limit (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.814). (If
the torque limit using analog input exceeds the internal torque limit, the internal torque limit is valid.)
• When inputting the torque limit value from terminal 1, set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "4". When inputting
from terminal 4, set Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment = "4".
• When Pr.858 = "4" and Pr.868 = "2", the torque for regenerative driving is limited with the terminal 1 analog input, and the
torque for power driving is limited with the terminal 4 analog input.

Torque limit Torque limit

+

Reverse Forward
Reverse regeneration driving
Forward
regeneration driving Terminal 4 input or Terminal 4 input or
internal torque limit internal torque limit
Reverse quad4 quad1 Forward whichever is smaller whichever is smaller
∗ (Pr. 814) (Pr. 22) ∗ quad4
rotation rotation Reverse rotation quad1 Forward rotation
Speed Speed
∗ quad3 quad2 ∗
(Pr. 813) (Pr. 812) Terminal 4 input or quad3 quad2 Terminal 4 input or
internal torque limit internal torque limit
Reverse Forward whichever is smaller whichever is smaller
driving regeneration Reverse Forward
driving regeneration
- -
Rated speed Rated speed
∗ Analog input (terminal 1, 4) or internal torque control (Pr. 22 etc.) whichever is smaller
When Pr. 858=4, Pr. 868=2

• The torque limit using analog input can be corrected with the calibration parameters C16 (Pr.919) to C19 (Pr.920), and
C38 (Pr.932) to C41 (Pr.933). (Refer to page 510.)
Torque(%)

400 400
Torque(%)

150 150
Gain Gain
C18(Pr.920) C40(Pr.933)
Bias Initial Bias
Initial
C16(Pr.919) value C38(Pr.932)
value
0 100% 0 20 100%
0 Torque setting signal 5V 0 4 20mA
0 10V Torque setting signal
C17(Pr.919) C19(Pr.920) C39(Pr.932) C41(Pr.933)

Calibration example of terminal 1 Calibration example of terminal 4

248 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 NOTE
• When inputting an analog signal to the terminal 1, give a positive voltage (0 to +10 V (+5 V)). 1
When a negative voltage (0 to -10 V (-5 V)) is input, the torque limit value set by the analog signal becomes "0".

• Functions of terminals 1 and 4 by control (— : no function) 2

Pr.858 setting*1 Terminal 4 function Pr.868 setting*2 Terminal 1 function
0 (initial value) Speed setting assistance
1*4 Magnetic flux command*4 3
2 —
3 —
0 (initial value) Speed command (AU signal-ON)
4
5
Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
—
4
6 Torque bias (Pr.840 = "1 to 3")
9999 —
Magnetic flux command *4 0 (initial value) Speed setting assistance 5
*3 *4 *4
— 1 Magnetic flux command
2 —

1*4
3 — 6
*4
4 Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
Magnetic flux command
5 —
6 Torque bias (Pr.840 = "1 to 3")
9999 — 7
0 (initial value) Speed setting assistance
Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
1*4 Magnetic flux command*4
Power driving torque limit (Pr.810 =
"1")
2 Regenerative torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") 8
4*2 Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") 3 —
*3 4 Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
—
5 — 9
Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") 6 Torque bias (Pr.840 = "1 to 3")
9999 —
9999 — — — 10
*1 When Pr.868 ≠ "0", the other functions of terminal 1 (auxiliary input, override function, PID control) do not operate.
*2 When Pr.858 ≠ "0", PID control and speed commands using terminal 4 do not operate even when the AU signal is ON.
*3 When both Pr.858 and Pr.868 are "1" (magnetic flux command) or "4" (torque limit), the function of terminal 1 has higher priority, and terminal 4
does not function.
*4 Valid when Vector control compatible options are installed and the Vector control is selected.

 Torque limit level through the CC-Link / CC-Link IE Field Network / CC-
Link IE TSN communication (Pr.810 = "2", Pr.805, Pr.806)
• When the CC-Link (FR-A8NC), CC-Link IE Field network (FR-A8NCE/FR-A800-GF), or CC-Link IE TSN (FR-A8NCG/FR-
A800-GN) communication is used, the Pr.805 or Pr.806 setting is used as the torque limit value. (Internal torque limit 2)
• When the CC-Link communication (Ver. 2) is used in the quadruple or octuple setting (Pr.544 = "14, 18, 114, or 118"), the
torque limit value can be input using a remote register (RWwC).
• When the CC-Link IE Field Network or CC-Link IE TSN is used, the torque limit value can be input using a remote register
(RWw2).
Torque limit input
Pr.804 Setting
CC-Link IE Field Network / CC- Setting range*1
setting CC-Link/PLC function increments
Link IE TSN
1 Torque limit by Pr.805, Pr.806*2
Torque limit by remote register 600 to 1400
Torque limit by remote register 1%
3 (RWw2)*3 (-400% to 400%)
(RWw2)*3
Torque limit by remote register -32768 to 32767 (two's
5 Torque limit by remote register
(RWw2)*3 complement) 0.01%*4
(RWw2)*3
6 Torque limit by Pr.805, Pr.806 *2 (-327.68% to 327.67%)*4

*1 The torque limit setting is defined as an absolute value.

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
249
 *2 Can also be set from operation panel or parameter unit.
*3 The torque can also be limited by setting a value in Pr.805 or Pr.806.
*4 If set by operation panel or parameter unit, setting range is "673 to 1327 (-327% to 327%)", setting increment is 1%.

Torque limit

＋
Reverse regeneration Forward driving
Pr.805(Pr.806) Pr.805(Pr.806)
RWwC, RWw2 quad4 quad1 RWwC, RWw2
Speed
Pr.805(Pr.806) quad3 quad2 Pr.805(Pr.806)
RWwC, RWw2 RWwC, RWw2
Reverse driving Forward regeneration

Reverse rotation Forward rotation

−
Rated speed
• When the CC-Link communication (Ver. 2) is used in the quadruple or octuple setting (Pr.544 = "24, 28, or 128"), the torque
limit value can be input using a remote register (RWwC to RWwF) for each of the four quadrants.

Torque limit
＋

Reverse regeneration Forward driving

RWwF
quad4 RWwC
quad1
Speed
RWwE quad3 quad2 RWwD

Reverse driving Forward regeneration

Reverse rotation Forward rotation
−
Rated speed

NOTE
• When "2" is set in Pr.810 while the communication option is not connected, a protective function (E.OPT) is activated. (PLC
function disabled)
• For details on the FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, or FR-A8NCG, refer to the Instruction Manual of each option. For details on the CC-
Link IE Field Network, refer to page 752. For details on CC-Link IE TSN communication, refer to the CC-Link IE TSN Function
Manual.

 Second torque limit level (TL signal, Pr.815)

• For Pr.815 Torque limit level 2, when the Torque limit selection (TL) signal is ON, the setting value of Pr.815 is the limit
value regardless of the setting of Pr.810 Torque limit input method selection.
• To assign the TL signal, set "27" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Torque limit

Reverse Forward
regeneration driving
Pr.815 Pr.815
- quad4 quad1 +
Speed

Pr.815 quad3 quad2 Pr.815

Reverse Forward
driving regeneration
Reverse Forward
rotation rotation
Rated speed

250 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. 1
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Setting the torque limit values during acceleration/deceleration 2

individually (Pr.816, Pr.817)
• The torque limit during acceleration and deceleration can be set individually. Torque limit using the setting values of Pr.816
Torque limit level during acceleration and Pr.817 Torque limit level during deceleration is as follows.
3
• If 1 second elapses while the difference between the set speed and rotation speed is within ±2 Hz, the torque limit level
during acceleration/deceleration (Pr.816 or Pr.817) changes to the torque control level during constant speed (Pr.22).
• When the difference between the set speed and rotation speed is -2 Hz or less, the torque limit level during deceleration
4
Torque limit level during deceleration (Pr.817) activates.
Output
frequency
(Hz) -2 Hz < set speed - rotation speed < 2 Hz
5
Set
frequency

-2 Hz set speed - rotation speed 6

Torque limit
level Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration
Time 7
Pr.816
Pr.817
1s 8
Torque limit set to Pr.810
Torque limit level Torque limit level
during acceleration during deceleration
9
NOTE
• The Pr.816 and Pr.817 settings are invalid under position control.
10
 Changing the setting increments of the torque limit level (Pr.811)
• The setting increments of Pr.22 Torque limit level, Pr.801 Output limit level, and Pr.812 to Pr.817 Torque limit level
can be changed to 0.01% by setting Pr.811 Set resolution switchover = "10 or 11".
Increments of speed setting and running speed Torque limit setting
Pr.811 setting
monitoring*1 increments
0 1 r/min
0.1%
1 0.1 r/min
10 1 r/min
0.01%
11 0.1 r/min

*1 For details on the increments of speed setting and running speed monitoring, refer to page 444.

NOTE
• The internal resolution of the torque limit is 0.024% (100/212), and fractions below this resolution are rounded off.
• When Real sensorless vector control is selected, fractions below a resolution equivalent to 0.1% are rounded off even if Pr.811
= "10 or 11" is set.
• For details on changing the speed setting increments, refer to page 444.

 Changing the torque characteristic of the constant-power range (Pr.801,

Pr.803)
• Under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control, the torque characteristic can be changed between in the low-speed
range and in the constant power range.

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
251
 • Use Pr.85 Excitation current break point to change the low-speed range, and use Pr.86 Excitation current low-speed
scaling factor to change the torque in the low-speed range. When Pr.85 = "9999 (initial value)", a predetermined
frequency is used. When Pr.86 = "9999 (initial value)", a predetermined scaling factor is used (refer to page 711).

Torque characteristic in low- Torque characteristic in constant-power range

Pr.803 setting
speed range Torque characteristic Output limit
The torque changes according to
0 (initial value) Constant motor output —
the scaling factor set in Pr.86.*1
1 Constant torque Constant torque Without
2 Constant torque Constant torque With
10 Constant torque Constant motor output —
The torque changes according to
11 Constant torque Without
the scaling factor set in Pr.86.*1

*1 This is applicable only under Real sensorless vector control. The upper limit of the torque at 0 Hz is determined by multiplying the torque limit in
the constant-torque range by the scaling factor set in Pr.86.

• To avoid overload or overcurrent of the inverter or motor, use Pr.801 Output limit level to limit the torque current.
Pr.801 setting Description
0 to 400% Set the torque current limit level.
9999 The torque limit setting value (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.817, etc.) is used for limiting the torque current.

Pr.803=0 Pr.803=1
Torque Torque
Low-speed Constant torque Low-speed Constant torque
range range Constant power range range range Constant power range

Constant power limit

Torque rise limit Constant torque limit Constant torque limit

Pr.85 Rated speed Speed Pr.85 Rated speed Speed

Pr.803=2
Torque
Low-speed Constant torque
range range Constant power range

Pr.801 Torque reduction when the

output is limited

When the output limit

Constant torque Constant torque is not exceeded
limit limit
Pr.85 Rated speed Speed

Pr.803=10 Pr.803=11
Torque Torque
Low-speed Constant torque Low-speed Constant torque
range range Constant power range range range Constant power range

Constant power limit

Torque rise limit Constant torque limit

Constant torque limit

Pr.85 Rated speed Speed Pr.85 Rated speed Speed

NOTE
• When the torque limit setting value (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.817, etc.) is less than the value set in Pr.801, the Pr.801 setting is
used for limiting the torque current.

 Trip during torque limit operation (Pr.874)

• The inverter can be set to be shut off at activation of torque limit and stalling of the motor.

252 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 • When a high load is applied and the torque limit is activated under speed control or position control, the motor stalls. At
this time, if a state where the rotation speed is lower than the value set in Pr.865 Low speed detection and the output
torque exceeds the level set in Pr.874 OLT level setting continues for 3 seconds, Stall prevention stop (E.OLT) is
1
activated and the inverter output is shut off.

2
Torque

Pr.874 Torque limit

Output torque
Time 3
Output
frequency

Pr.865
4
Time
Start signal
(STF)
3s 5
Fault signal
(ALM) E.OLT occurrence

NOTE 6
• Under V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control, if the output frequency drops to 0.5 Hz due to the stall prevention
operation and this state continues for 3 seconds, a fault indication (E.OLT) appears, and the inverter output is shut off. This
operation is activated regardless of the Pr.874 setting.
• This fault does not occur under torque control.
7

 Adjusting the signal output under torque limit operation and output 8
timing (OL signal, Pr.157)
• If the output torque exceeds the torque limit level and the torque limit is activated, the overload warning (OL signal) is turned
ON for 100 ms or longer. When the output torque drops to the torque limit level or lower, the output signal also turns OFF. 9
• Pr.157 OL signal output timer can be used to set whether to output the OL signal immediately, or whether to output it
after a certain time period has elapsed.
Pr.157 setting
10
Description
value
0 (initial value) Output immediately.
0.1 to 25 Output after the set time (s).
9999 Not output.

• The OL signal is also output during the regeneration avoidance operation (" " display (overvoltage stall)).
Overload state
(OL operation)

OL output signal

Pr.157 Set time(s)

NOTE
• The OL signal is assigned to terminal OL in the initial status. The OL signal can also be assigned to other terminals by setting
"3 (positive logic) or 103 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 431
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
Pr.840 Torque bias selectionpage 265
Pr.865 Low speed detectionpage 484

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
253
 5.3.5 Performing high-accuracy, fast-response control
(gain adjustment for Real sensorless vector
control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector
control)
Sensorless Vector PM

The load inertia ratio (load moment of inertia) for the motor is calculated in real time from the torque command and rotation
speed during motor driving by the Vector control. Because the optimum gain for speed control and position control is set
automatically from the Load inertia ratio and the response level, the work required for gain adjustment is reduced. (Easy gain
tuning)
If the load inertia ratio cannot be calculated due to load fluctuations, or under Real sensorless vector control or PM sensorless
vector control, the control gain can be set automatically by entering the load inertia ratio manually.
Manual gain adjustment is useful for achieving optimum machine performance or improving unfavorable conditions, such as
vibration and acoustic noise during operation with high load inertia or gear backlash.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
818 Easy gain tuning response level Set the response level.
2 1 to 15
C112 setting 1 (Slowest) to 15 (Fastest)
0 No easy gain tuning
819 Gain is calculated with load calculation
Easy gain tuning selection 0 1
C113 (This function is valid under Vector control.)
2 Gain is calculated with load (Pr.880) manual input
The proportional gain during speed control is set. (Setting this
820 parameter higher improves the trackability for speed command
Speed control P gain 1 60% 0 to 1000%
G211 changes. It also reduces the speed fluctuation caused by external
disturbance.)
The integral time during speed control is set. (Setting this
821
Speed control integral time 1 0.333 s 0 to 20 s parameter lower shortens the return time to the original speed
G212
when the speed fluctuates due to external disturbance.)
830 0 to 1000% Second function of Pr.820 (valid when RT signal is ON)
Speed control P gain 2 9999
G311 9999 The Pr.820 setting is applied to the operation.
831 0 to 20 s Second function of Pr.821 (enabled when the RT signal is ON)
Speed control integral time 2 9999
G312 9999 The Pr.821 setting is applied to the operation.
880
Load inertia ratio 7-fold 0 to 200-fold Set the load inertia ratio for the motor.
C114
1115 Speed control integral term Set time until the integral term is reduced and cleared after P
0 ms 0 to 9998 ms
G218 clear time control switching.
1116 Constant output range speed Set a compensation amount of the speed control P gain in the
0% 0 to 100%
G206 control P gain compensation constant output range (rated speed or higher).
1117 Speed control P gain 1 (per-unit 0 to 300 Set a proportional gain under speed control in the per-unit system.
9999
G261 system) 9999 The Pr.820 setting is applied to the operation.
1118 Speed control P gain 2 (per-unit 0 to 300 Second function of Pr.1117 (valid when RT signal ON)
9999
G361 system) 9999 The Pr.1117 setting is applied to the operation.
1121 Per-unit speed control 120 Hz*1 Set the speed at 100% when setting speed control P gain or
0 to 400 Hz
G260 reference frequency 60 Hz*2 model speed control gain in the per-unit system.
1348 P/PI control switchover
0 Hz 0 to 400 Hz Set the motor speed for the P/PI control switchover.
G263 frequency
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

254 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 Block diagram of easy gain tuning function
<Vector control> Automatic setting Load 1
inertia
moment

Detector

Command
+
Speed control/position loop gain
Model speed control gain
+ Current
M Encoder
2
- - control
[Pr.820, Pr.821, Pr.828, Pr.422]

ON when [Pr.819 = "1, 2"] 3

Torque command
ON when
[Pr.819 = "1"]

Gain table Load inertia ratio

Load inertia
ratio estimation Actual motor speed 4
[Pr.880] section

5
Response level
setting [Pr.818]

Speed/position feedback 6
NOTE
• Easy gain tuning is valid for the first motor. When applying the second motor (RT signal is ON), tuning is not performed. 7
 Execution procedure for easy gain tuning (Pr.819 = "1" Load inertia ratio
automatic calculation) 8
Easy gain tuning (load inertia ratio automatic calculation) is only valid in the speed control and position control modes of Vector
control. It is invalid under torque control, V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control,
and PM sensorless vector control.
9
1. Set the response level in Pr.818 Easy gain tuning response level setting.
Setting this parameter higher improves the trackability for commands, but setting it too high causes vibration. The 10
following figure shows the relationship between the setting and the response level.
Pr. 818 setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Slowest Middle Fastest
Response level response response response
Guideline of
mechanical resonance 8 10 12 15 18 22 28 34 42 52 64 79 98 122 150
frequency (Hz)

Large General machine

conveyor tool, conveyor
Inverter
application

Arm robot Precision

machine tool

2. The load inertia ratio is calculated during acceleration/deceleration, and from this value and the value of Pr.818 Easy
gain tuning response level setting, the gain for each control is set automatically.
Pr.880 Load inertia ratio is used as the initial value of the load inertia ratio when performing tuning. During tuning,
the estimated value is set in Pr.880.
The calculation of the load inertia ratio may take excessive time or otherwise not be performed properly if the
following conditions are not satisfied.

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
255
 • The time in acceleration/deceleration driving until 1500 r/min is reached in 5 seconds or less.
• The rotation speed in driving is 150 r/min or higher.
• The acceleration/deceleration torque is 10% or higher.
• No sudden external disturbances during acceleration/deceleration.
• The load inertia ratio is about 30-fold or lower.
• No gear backlash or belt sagging.

3. Press or to calculate the continuous load inertia ratio, or calculate the gain.
(The operation command during External operation is the STF or STR signal.)

 Execution procedure for easy gain tuning (Pr.819 = "2" Load inertia ratio
manual input)
Easy gain tuning (Load inertia ratio manual input) is valid in the speed control mode under Real sensorless vector control, the
speed control and position control modes under Vector control, and the speed control mode under PM sensorless vector
control.

1. Set the load inertia ratio for the motor in Pr.880 Load inertia ratio.

2. Set "2" (easy gain tuning enabled) in Pr.819 Easy gain tuning selection. After setting, Pr.820 Speed control P
gain 1 and Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1 are set automatically.
Operation is performed with the adjusted gain from the next operation.

3. Perform the test operation, and set the response level in Pr.818 Easy gain tuning response level setting. Setting
this parameter higher improves the trackability for commands, but setting it too high causes vibration. (The response
level can be adjusted during operation when Pr.77 Parameter write selection ="2" (parameters can be written
during operation).)

NOTE
• When Pr.819 = "1 or 2" is set, even if the Pr.819 setting value is returned to "0" after tuning is performed, the data that was
set in each parameter is retained in the tuning results.
• If good precision cannot be obtained even after executing easy gain tuning, because of external disturbances or other reasons,
perform fine adjustment manually. At this time, set the setting value of Pr.819 to "0" (no easy gain tuning).

 Parameters set automatically by easy gain tuning

The following table shows the relationship between the easy gain tuning function and gain adjustment parameters.
Easy gain tuning selection (Pr.819) setting
0 1 2
The inertia calculation result (RAM) using easy gain
tuning is displayed.
The parameter is set at the following times.
• Every hour after turning ON the power
Pr.880 Load inertia ratio Manual input Manual input
• When Pr.819 is set to a value other than "1"
• After changing to a control other than Vector
control (such as V/F control) using Pr.800
Write (manual input) is available only during a stop.
Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 Gain is calculated when Pr.819 is
The tuning result (RAM) is displayed.
Pr.821 Speed control integral set to "2", and the result is set in
The parameter is set at the following times.
time 1 the parameter.
• Every hour after turning ON the power
Pr.828 Model speed control When read, the tuning result
Manual input • When Pr.819 is set to a value other than "1"
gain (parameter setting value) is
• After changing to a control other than Vector
Pr.422 Position control gain displayed.
control (such as V/F control) using Pr.800
Pr.446 Model position control Write (manual input) is not
Write (manual input) is not available
gain available

NOTE
• If easy gain tuning is executed at an inertia equal to or higher than the specified value under Vector control, a fault such as
hunting may occur. Also, if the motor shaft is fixed by the servo lock or position control, the bearing may be damaged. In this
case, do not perform easy gain tuning. Adjust the gain manually.
• The load inertia ratio is only calculated under Vector control.

256 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 Adjusting the speed control gain manually (Pr.819 = "0" No easy gain
tuning) 1
• The speed control gain can be adjusted for the conditions such as abnormal machine vibration, acoustic noise, slow
response, and overshoot.
• Setting 60% (initial value) in Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 is equivalent to 120 rad/s (speed response of a single motor). 2
(Equivalent to the half the rad/s value during Real sensorless vector control or with the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and
the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher during Vector control.) Setting this parameter higher speeds up the response, but
setting this too high causes vibration and acoustic noise. 3
• Setting Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1 lower shortens the return time to the original speed during speed fluctuation,
but setting it too low causes overshoot.
Proportional gain 4
200 rad/s*1

120 rad/s*1
5
Pr.820
60% 100%
(initial value*2)
Setting
6
*1 The following shows the response level to the proportional gain.

Response level (rad/s)

Pr.820
FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher 7
FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
setting
Real sensorless Real sensorless
Vector control Vector control
vector control vector control
60 120 60 60 30 8
100 200 100 100 50

*2 Performing PM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 231.)

9
• Actual speed gain is calculated as follows when load inertia is applied.

Load
fluctuation 10
Speed
Since increasing the proportional gain enhances the
response level and decreases the speed fluctuation.

Decreasing the integral time shortens the return time taken.

JM JM: Motor inertia

Actual speed gain = Speed gain of a single motor
JM+JL JL: Load inertia converted as the motor axis inertia

 Adjustment procedure
1. Change the Pr.820 setting while checking the conditions.

2. If it cannot be adjusted well, change Pr.821 setting, and perform step 1 again.

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
257
 No. Movement / condition Adjustment method
Set Pr.820 and Pr.821 higher.
If acceleration is slow, raise the setting by 10% and then set the value to 80 to 90% of the
Pr.820
1 Load inertia is too high. setting immediately before vibration/noise starts occurring.
If overshoots occur, set about 80 to 90% of the maximum value without overshooting while
Pr.821
increasing the setting value by twice.
Set Pr.820 lower and Pr.821 higher.
Vibration or acoustic Set about 80 to 90% of the maximum value without any vibration/noise while decreasing the
Pr.820
2 noise are generated from setting value by 10%.
machines. If overshoots occur, set about 80 to 90% of the maximum value without overshooting while
Pr.821
increasing the setting value by twice.
Set Pr.820 higher.
3 Response is slow. If acceleration is slow, set about 80 to 90% of the maximum value without any vibration/
Pr.820
acoustic noise while increasing the setting value by 5%.
Set Pr.821 lower.
Return time (response
4 Set about 80 to 90% of the maximum value without overshooting or unstable movements while
time) is long.
decreasing the setting value of Pr.821 by half.
Set Pr.821 higher.
Overshoots or unstable
5 Set about 80 to 90% of the maximum value without overshooting or unstable movements while increasing
movements occur.
the setting value of Pr.821 by double.

NOTE
• When adjusting the gain manually, set Pr.819 Easy gain tuning selection to "0" (no easy gain tuning) (initial value).
• Pr.830 Speed control P gain 2 and Pr.831 Speed control integral time 2 are valid when terminal RT is ON. In this case,
replace them for Pr.820 and Pr.821 in the description above.

 When using a multi-pole motor (8 poles or more)

• If the motor inertia is known, set Pr.707 Motor inertia (integer) and Pr.724 Motor inertia (exponent). (Refer to page 532.)
• Under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control, adjust Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr.824 Torque control
P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) to suit the motor, by referring to the following methods.
• Setting the parameter of Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 higher speeds up the response, but setting this too high causes
vibration and acoustic noise.
• Setting the parameter of Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) too low causes current ripple,
and a noise synchronous with this will be emitted from the motor.
• Adjustment method:
No. Movement / condition Adjustment method
Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 must be set higher according to the motor inertia.
For multi-pole motors, because the inertia of the motor itself tends to be large, first
Motor rotation speed in the low- perform broad adjustment to improve the unstable movements, and then perform
1
speed range is unstable. fine adjustment by referring to the response level based on this setting. Also, for
Vector control, gain adjustment appropriate for the inertia can be easily performed
by using easy gain tuning (Pr.819 = "1").
2 Rotation speed trackability is poor. Set Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 higher. Raise the setting by 10%s and set a
value that approximately 80% to 90% of the setting right before vibration/noise
Large fluctuation of the rotation
3 starts occurring. If it cannot be adjusted well, double Pr.821 Speed control integral
speed relative to load fluctuation.
time 1 and perform the adjustment of Pr.820 again.
Torque shortage or motor Set the speed control gain higher. (The same as No.1.) If this cannot be prevented
backlash occurs when starting or through gain adjustment, raise Pr.13 Starting frequency for a fault that occurs
4
passing a low-speed range under when starting, or shorten the acceleration time and avoid continuous operation in a
Real sensorless vector control. low-speed range.
Unusual vibration, noise and
5 overcurrent of the motor or
Set Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) lower.
machine occurs.
Lower the setting by 10% and set a value that is approximately 80% to 90% of the
Overcurrent or overspeed (E.OS)
setting immediately before the condition improves.
6 occurs when starting under Real
sensorless vector control.

258 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 Compensating the speed control P gain in the constant output range
(Pr.1116) 1
• In the constant output range (rated speed or higher), the response of speed control is reduced due to weak field. Thus, the
speed control P gain is needed to be compensated using Pr.1116 Constant output range speed control P gain
compensation. 2
• In Pr.1116, set a compensation amount for the doubled rated speed regarding the speed control P gain at the rated speed
or lower as 100%.
(Speed control P gain at rated speed or higher) = (Speed control P gain at rated speed or lower) × (100% + compensation 3
amount)
Compensation amount = Pr.1116/Rated speed × (Speed - Rated speed)

Ratio multiplied to
4
speed control P gain
Pr.1116=100%

200% 5
Pr.1116=50%
150%

100% Pr.1116=0%(Initial value) 6

0%
Rated speed Rated speed×2
Speed
7
 Setting the speed control P gain in the per-unit system (Pr.1117, Pr.1118,
Pr.1121) 8
• The speed control P gain can be set in the per-unit (pu) system.
• In the per-unit system:
When "1" is set, the torque (Iq) command is 100% (rated Iq) when the speed deviation is 100%. 9
When "10" is set, the torque (Iq) command is 10% (rated Iq) when the speed deviation is 100%.
Set the 100% speed in Pr.1121 Per-unit speed control reference frequency.

• The speed control P gain becomes as follows according to Pr.1117 Speed control P gain 1 (per-unit system), Pr.1118 10
Speed control P gain 2 (per-unit system), and the RT signal.
Pr.1117 Pr.1118 Pr.830 RT signal Speed control P gain
— OFF Pr.820
9999 ON Pr.820
9999 9999
Other than
ON Pr.830
9999
Other than
9999 — — Pr.1117
9999
Other than OFF Pr.820
9999 —
9999 ON Pr.1118
Other than Other than OFF Pr.1117
—
9999 9999 ON Pr.1118

NOTE
• The per-unit system setting is available only under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control.
• When the speed control P gain or model speed control gain is set in the per-unit system, the easy gain tuning selection
(Pr.819 = "1 or 2") becomes invalid.

 Switching over P/PI control (Pr.1115, X44 signal)

• In speed control under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control, whether or not to add the integral time (I) when
performing gain adjustment with P gain and integral time can be performed with the P/PI control switchover signal (X44).
When X44 signal is OFF...PI control
When X44 signal is ON...P control

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
259
 • To input the X44 signal, set "44" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to
a terminal.
• The shock of P/PI control switchover is absorbed by setting Pr.1115 Speed control integral term clear time. When the
X44 signal is turned ON, integration is stopped and the accumulated integral term is reduced and cleared according to the
setting of Pr.1115 Speed control integral term clear time (initial value is 0 ms).
In Pr.1115, set time when the integral term is reduced from 100% to 0% regarding the rated torque current (Iq) as 100%.
Turning OFF the X44 signal resumes the integral operation.

[Function block diagram]

Speed
command
Speed
command Speed
+ + Torque
proportional M
operation control
- +

X44-OFF Speed
integral
operation
Integral term
reduction
0
X44-ON
Speed estimator

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• The speed loop integration can be disabled at the emergency stop using Pr.1349 Emergency stop operation selection.
(Refer to page 367.)

 P/PI control switchover according to the motor speed (Pr.1348)

• When the motor speed falls below the Pr.1348 setting during speed control under Real sensorless vector control or Vector
control, speed loop integration is stopped and the accumulated integral term is cleared.
Pr.1348 setting or more: PI control
Less than the Pr.1348 setting: P control
• The shock of P/PI control switchover is absorbed by setting Pr.1115 Speed control integral term clear time. When the
motor speed falls below the Pr.1348 setting, speed loop integration is stopped and the accumulated integral term is
reduced and cleared according to the Pr.1115 setting (initial value is 0 ms). In Pr.1115, set time when the integral term is
reduced from 100% to 0% regarding the rated torque current (Iq) as 100%. When the motor speed is increased to the
Pr.1348 setting plus 2 Hz or more, integral operation is resumed.

NOTE
• The speed loop integration can be disabled at the emergency stop using Pr.1349 Emergency stop operation selection.
(Refer to page 367.)

260 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
5.3.6 Troubleshooting in the speed control
Sensorless Vector PM
1
No. Condition Possible cause Countermeasure
• Check the wiring. 2
Set V/F control (set Pr.80 Motor capacity or Pr.81 Number of motor poles to
"9999") and check the motor rotation direction. For SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series),
set Pr.19 Base frequency voltage to 170 V (340 V) when the value is 3.7 kW or
lower, and set it to 160 V (320 V) when the value is higher, and set Pr.3 Base
frequency to 50 Hz.
3
Motor wiring is incorrect.
• When a forward signal is input, rotation in the counterclockwise direction as
viewed from the motor shaft direction is correct. (Clockwise rotation means that
the phase sequence of the inverter secondary side wiring is different.)
4

Encoder type selection

switch (Vector control
• Check the encoder specifications. 5
Check the encoder type selection switch of differential/complementary (Vector
compatible option) is
control compatible option).
incorrect.
• When using the system where the motor shaft can be rotated by an external force
other than the motor without any safety troubles at Vector control setting, rotate
6
The motor does not
the motor counterclockwise and check if FWD is indicated.
1 rotate. (Vector
If REV is indicated, the phase sequence of the encoder is incorrect.
control)
The wiring of the Check the wiring, and set Pr.359 (Pr.852) Encoder rotation direction in
encoder is incorrect. accordance with the motor specification. (Refer to page 87.) 7
If the clockwise direction is forward as viewed from the motor shaft side, set
Pr.359(Pr.852) = "0".
If the counterclockwise direction is forward as viewed from the motor shaft side,
set Pr.359 (Pr.852) = "1". 8
The parameter setting
• If the parameter setting value is lower than the number of encoder pulses used,
and the number of
the motor does not rotate. Set Pr.369 (Pr.852) Number of encoder pulses
encoder pulses used are
different.
correctly. (Refer to page 87.)
9
• Check the encoder power specifications (5 V/12 V/15 V/24 V), and input the
Encoder power
external power supply. When the encoder output is the differential line driver type,
specifications are
only 5 V can be input. Make the voltage of the external power supply same as the
incorrect. Alternatively,
power is not input.
encoder output voltage, and connect the external power supply between PG and 10
SD.
The option to be used
• Correctly set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be
and parameter settings
used. (Refer to page 226.)
do not match.
Speed command from
the controller is different • Check that the speed command sent from the controller is correct. (Take EMC
from the actual speed. measures.)
The speed command is • Lower the setting of Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.
affected by noise.
The command speed
Motor does not run at and the speed • Adjust the bias and gain Pr.125, Pr.126, C2 to C7, C12 to C15 of the speed
the correct speed.
recognized by the command again.
2 (Command speed
inverter are different.
and actual speed
differ.) The setting for the
number of encoder • Check the settings of Pr.369 (Pr.851) (under Vector control). (Refer to page 87.)
pulses is incorrect.
Enable the online auto tuning at startup (set Pr.95 (Pr.574) = "1") (under Real
The motor constant
sensorless vector control). (Refer to page 558.)
varies due to increase in
To perform the online auto tuning at startup for a lift, use of the Start-time tuning
the motor temperature.
start external input (X28) signal is recommended.
Torque shortage. • Raise the torque limit.
The speed does not The torque limit is (Refer to the torque limit for speed control on page 245.)
3 accelerate to the operating. • Increase the capacity.
command speed. Only P (proportional) • Speed deviation occurs under P (proportional) control when the load is heavy.
control is performed. Select PI control.

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
261
 No. Condition Possible cause Countermeasure
• Check that the speed command sent from the controller is correct. (Take EMC
measures.)
Speed command varies.
• Set Pr.72 lower.
• Set Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1 higher. (Refer to page 503.)
Motor speed • Raise the torque limit.
4 Torque shortage.
fluctuates. (Refer to the torque limit for speed control on page 245.)
• Perform easy gain tuning.
Speed control gain is not
• Adjust Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr.821 Speed control integral time
suitable for the machine.
1.
(Resonance occurs.)
• Perform speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control.
• Perform easy gain tuning.
Speed control gain is too
Hunting (vibration or • Set Pr.820 lower and Pr.821 higher.
high.
acoustic noise) • Perform speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control.
5
occurs in the motor Torque control gain is
• Set Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) lower.
or the machine. too high.
Motor wiring is incorrect. • Check the wiring.
Acceleration/ • Raise the torque limit.
deceleration time is Torque shortage. (Refer to the torque limit for speed control on page 245.)
6
different from the • Perform speed feed forward control.
setting. Load inertia is too high. • Set acceleration/deceleration time suitable for the load.
• Perform easy gain tuning.
Speed control gain is not
• Adjust Pr.820 and Pr.821.
suitable for the machine.
• Perform speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control.
Machine movement Response is slow
7
is unstable. because of the inverter's
acceleration/ • Set the optimum acceleration/deceleration time.
deceleration time
setting.
High carrier frequency is
Rotation ripple affecting the motor • Set Pr.72 lower.
8 occurs during the rotation.
low-speed operation. Speed control gain is too
• Set Pr.820 higher.
low.

Parameters referred to
Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.19 Base frequency voltagepage 707
Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 356
Pr.80 Motor capacity, Pr.81 Number of motor polespage 221
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505
Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction, Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses, Pr.851 Control terminal option-Number of encoder pulses, Pr.852 Control terminal
option-Encoder rotation directionpage 87
Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1page 503
Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain)page 294

262 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
5.3.7 Speed feed forward control, model adaptive speed
control 1
Sensorless Vector PM

• Speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control can be selected using parameter settings. 2
Under speed feed forward control, the motor trackability for speed command changes can be improved.
Under model adaptive speed control, the speed trackability and the response level to motor external disturbance torque
can be adjusted individually. 3
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
828
G224
Model speed control gain 60% 0 to 1000% Set the gain for the model speed controller. 4
Speed feed forward 0 Perform normal speed control.
877
control/model adaptive 0 1 Perform speed feed forward control.
G220
speed control selection 2 Model adaptive speed control becomes valid. 5
878 Set the primary delay filter for the result of the speed feed forward
Speed feed forward filter 0s 0 to 1 s
G221 calculated from the speed command and load inertia ratio.
879 Speed feed forward torque
G222 limit
150% 0 to 400% Set a maximum limit for the speed feed forward torque.
6
880
Load inertia ratio 7-fold 0 to 200-fold Set the load inertia ratio for the motor.
C114
881
G223
Speed feed forward gain 0% 0 to 1000% Set the calculation result for speed feed forward as the gain. 7
1119 Model speed control gain 0 to 300 Set the gain for the model speed controller in the per-unit system.
9999
G262 (per-unit system) 9999 The Pr.828 setting is applied to the operation.
1121 Per-unit speed control 120 Hz *1
0 to 400 Hz
Set the speed at 100% when setting speed control P gain or model 8
G260 reference frequency 60 Hz*2 speed control gain in the per-unit system.

*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.

*2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
9
• When using model adaptive speed control, use the data obtained from the easy gain tuning for Pr.828 Model speed control
gain setting. Make the setting with easy gain tuning (at the same time). (Refer to page 254.)
10
 Speed feed forward control (Pr.877 = "1")
• When the load inertia ratio is set in Pr.880, the required torque for the set inertia is calculated according to the acceleration
and deceleration commands, and the torque is generated quickly.
• When the speed feed forward gain is 100%, the calculation result for speed feed forward is applied as is.
• If the speed command changes suddenly, the torque is increased by the speed feed forward calculation. The maximum
limit for the speed feed forward torque is set in Pr.879.
• The speed feed forward result can also be lessened with a primary delay filter in Pr.878.
[Block diagram]
Speed feed forward control
[Pr. 879] [Pr. 878]
Speed feed Speed feed
forward torque forward
Load inertia ratio limit filter
Speed feed
J .s forward
[Pr. 880] gain
[Pr. 881]

Speed +
+ control +
Speed command Torque control M
P gain 1
- [Pr. 820] +
Speed control
Actual speed controller
integral time 1
[Pr. 821]

Speed estimator

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
263
 NOTE
• The speed feed forward control is enabled for the first motor.
• Even if the driven motor is switched to the second motor while Pr.877 = "1", the second motor is operated as Pr.877 = "0".
• Under PM sensorless vector control, the notch filter is available when low-speed range high-torque characteristic is enabled
by Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection ="9999 (initial value)". (Refer to page 233.)

 Model adaptive speed control (Pr.877 = "2", Pr.828, Pr.1119)

• The model speed of the motor is calculated, and the feedback is applied to the speed controller on the model side. Also,
this model speed is set as the command of the actual speed controller.
• The inertia ratio of Pr.880 is used when the speed controller on the model side calculates the torque current command
value.
• The torque current command of the speed controller on the model side is added to the output of the actual speed controller,
and set as the input of the iq current control.
Pr.828 is used for the speed control on the model side (P control), and first gain Pr.820 is used for the actual speed
controller.
• The model speed control gain can be set in the per-unit (pu) system in Pr.1119.
• In the per-unit system:
When "1" is set, the torque (Iq) command is 100% (rated Iq) when the speed deviation is 100%.
When "1" is set, the torque (Iq) command is 100% (rated Iq) when the speed deviation is 100%.
Set the 100% speed in Pr.1121 Per-unit speed control reference frequency.
[Block diagram]

Model adaptive speed control

J
Torque coefficient
(J: [Pr. 880])

+ Model speed + Speed control +

1 + Torque
Speed command control gain P gain 1 M
J s control
- [Pr. 828] - [Pr. 820] +
Model speed Speed control
calculation Actual speed controller integral time 1
[Pr. 821]

Speed
estimator

NOTE
• The model adaptive speed control is enabled for the first motor.
• Even if the driven motor is switched to the second motor while Pr.877 ="2", the second motor is operated as Pr.877 = "0".
• Under PM sensorless vector control, the notch filter is available when low-speed range high-torque characteristic is enabled
by Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection ="9999 (initial value)". (Refer to page 233.)
• Under model adaptive speed control, because the appropriate gain values for the model and actual loop sections are based
on the response that was set for easy gain tuning, when raising the response level, Pr.818 Easy gain tuning response level
setting must be re-evaluated (raised).
• The per-unit system setting (Pr.1119) is available only under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control.
• When the speed control P gain or model speed control gain is set in the per-unit system, the easy gain tuning selection
(Pr.819 = "1 or 2") becomes invalid.

264 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 Combining with easy gain tuning
• The following table shows the relationship between speed feed forward and model adaptive speed control, and the easy 1
gain tuning function.
Easy gain tuning selection (Pr.819) setting
0 1 2 2
The inertia ratio value
calculated by easy gain
Pr.880 Load inertia ratio . Manual input tuning is displayed. Manual Manual input
input is available only during 3
a stop.
The tuning result is The tuning result is
Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 Manual input displayed. Write is not displayed.
available. Write is not available. 4
The tuning result is The tuning result is
Pr.821 Speed control integral time
Manual input displayed. Write is not displayed.
1
available. Write is not available.
The tuning result is The tuning result is 5
Pr.828 Model speed control gain Manual input displayed. Write is not displayed.
available. Write is not available.
Pr.881 Speed feed forward gain Manual input Manual input Manual input
6
Parameters referred to
Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1, Pr.830 Speed control P gain 2page 254
Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1, Pr.831 Speed control integral time 2page 254
Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selectionpage 233 7
5.3.8 Torque bias
Sensorless Vector 8
The torque bias function can be used to make the starting torque start-up faster. At this time, the motor starting torque can be
adjusted with a contact signal or analog signal.

Pr. Name Initial value

Setting
Description
9
range
Set the torque bias amount using contact signals (X42, X43) in Pr.841
0
to Pr.843.
Set the torque bias amount using terminal 1 in any of C16 to C19.
10
1
(When the squirrel cage rises during forward motor rotation.)
Set the torque bias amount using terminal 1 in any of C16 to C19.
2
(When the squirrel cage rises during reverse motor rotation.)
840
Torque bias selection 9999 The torque bias amount using terminal 1 can be set automatically in
G230 3
C16 to C19 and Pr.846 according to the load.
Torque bias command via PROFIBUS-DP communication (FR-A8NP)
24
(-400% to 400%)
Torque bias command via PROFIBUS-DP communication (FR-A8NP)
25
(-327.68% to 327.67%)
9999 No torque bias, rated torque 100%
841
Torque bias 1 600 to 999% Negative torque bias amount (-400% to -1%)
G231
842 1000 to
Torque bias 2 9999 Positive torque bias amount (0 to 400%)
G232 1400%
843
Torque bias 3 9999 No torque bias setting
G233
844 0 to 5 s The time until the torque starts up.
Torque bias filter 9999
G234 9999 The same operation as 0 s.
845 Torque bias operation 0 to 5 s The time for retaining the torque of the torque bias amount.
9999
G235 time 9999 The same operation as 0 s.
846 Torque bias balance 0 to 10 V Set the voltage for the balanced load.
9999
G236 compensation 9999 The same operation as 0 V. (Fixed to 0 V/0%.
847 Fall-time torque bias 0 to 400% The bias value setting in the torque command.
9999
G237 terminal 1 bias 9999 The same as (C16, C17 (Pr.919)) when ascending
848 Fall-time torque bias 0 to 400% The gain value setting in the torque command.
9999
G238 terminal 1 gain 9999 The same as (C18, C19 (Pr.920)) when ascending

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
265
  Block diagram
Speed command Speed command + Speed + + Torque
control M
P gain + + control
-
Speed
control PLG
integral time CW

0 Cage
Integration cleared to 0
[Pr. 845]
Internal parameters
[Pr. 840 = 0] [Pr. 840 = 1, 2, 3]
X42 [Pr. 841]
Torque bias selection 1
X43 [Pr. 842]
Torque bias selection 2 [Pr. 843]
C16, C17 CW Cage
SD +
[Pr. 919] [Pr. 826]
-
C18, C19 Torque setting filter 1
[Pr. 846] [Pr. 920] CW > Cage Terminal 1 Load
detector

 Setting the torque bias amount using contact input (Pr.840 = "0", Pr.841
to Pr.843)
• Select the torque bias amount shown in the following table using the corresponding contact signal combination.
• To input the X42 signal, set "42" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to
a terminal, and to input the X43 signal, set "43".
Torque bias selection 1 Torque bias selection 2
Torque bias amount
(X42) (X43)
OFF OFF 0%
Pr.841 -400% to +400% (Setting value: 600 to
ON OFF
1400%)
Pr.842 -400% to +400% (Setting value: 600 to
OFF ON
1400%)
Pr.843 -400% to +400% (Setting value: 600 to
ON ON
1400%)

When Pr.841 = "1025", the torque bias is 25%. When Pr.842 = "975", the torque bias is -25%. When Pr.843 = "925", the torque
bias is -75%.

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Setting the torque bias amount using terminal 1 (Pr.840 ="1, 2", Pr.847,
Pr.848)
• Calculate the torque bias from the load input to terminal 1 as shown in the following diagram, and then apply the torque
bias.
• To set the torque bias amount with a voltage input to terminal 1, set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment ="6".

266 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 • The torque bias amount (Pr.847) and gain amount (Pr.848) when descending (reverse motor rotation when the Pr.840
setting is "1", forward motor rotation when the setting is "2") can be set in a range of 0 to 400%. When Pr.847 or
Pr.848 ="9999", the setting is the same for both descending and ascending (C16 to C19).
1
Pr.840
When ascending When descending
setting
(Forward motor rotation) (Reverse motor rotation)
2
Bias amount Bias amount
Torque command
terminal 1 gain
C18(Pr. 920)
Fall-time
torque bias 3
terminal 1
C17(Pr. 919) bias C17(Pr. 919)
1 Terminal 1 Terminal 1
Pr. 848 input
4
input

Torque command Voltage for Fall-time Voltage for

terminal 1 bias max. load torque bias max. load
C16(Pr. 919) Voltage for C19(Pr. 920) terminal 1 Voltage for C19(Pr. 920)
balanced load gain balanced load
Pr. 846 Pr. 847 Pr. 846 5
(Reverse motor rotation) (Forward motor rotation)
Bias amount Bias amount
Voltage for
Fall-time
6
Torque command balanced load Voltage for
Pr. 846 Voltage for torque bias balanced load
terminal 1 bias terminal 1 Pr. 846 Voltage for
max. load bias
C16(Pr. 919) max. load
2 C19(Pr. 920)
Terminal 1
Pr. 847
Fall-time
C19(Pr. 920)
7
input Terminal 1
C17(Pr. 919) torque bias C17(Pr. 919) input
terminal 1
Torque command gain
terminal 1 gain
C18(Pr. 920)
Pr. 848
8

NOTE
• Input 0 to 10 V (torque command) to the terminal 1 that is used for the torque bias function. Any negative input voltage is
9
regarded as 0 V.

10
 Setting the torque bias amount automatically using terminal 1 (Pr.840 =
"3", Pr.846)
• The settings of C16 Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux), C17 Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic flux),
C18 Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux), C19 Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux) and Pr.846
Torque bias balance compensation can be set automatically according to the load.
• To set the torque bias amount with a voltage input to terminal 1, set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "6".

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
267
 • Set the terminal 1 to accept inputs of load detection voltage, set "3" in Pr.840 Torque bias selection, and adjust the
parameter settings according to the following procedures.

Setting C16, C17 (Pr.919)

The load input at no load

When the speed Press . is set as the terminal 1
Drive with no load stabilizes, read C16, bias, and a terminal 1 bias
(C16, C17 (Pr.919) command is automatically
C17 (Pr.919)
setting completed) set according to the load.

Setting C18, C19 (Pr.920)

The load input at the
maximum load is set as
When the speed Press .
Drive under the the terminal 1 gain, and a
stabilizes, read C18,
maximum load (C18, C19 (Pr.920) terminal 1 gain command
C19 (Pr.920)
setting completed) is automatically set
according to the load.

Setting Pr.846

Press . The load input at a

balanced load is
Drive with a balanced The torque balance automatically set as a
Read Pr.846
load compensation for torque bias balance
power driving is compensation for power
completed. driving.

NOTE
• To perform a torque bias operation after the automatic setting is completed, set Pr.840 to "1" or "2".

 Torque bias command via PROFIBUS-DP communication (Pr.840 = "24 or

25")
• A torque bias command value can be set using the FR-A8NP (PROFIBUS-DP communication).
Pr.840 Setting
Method to give torque bias command Setting range
setting increments
Torque bias command from the buffer
24 600 to 1400 (-400% to 400%) 1%
memory of PROFIBUS (REF1 to 7)
-32768 to 32767 (two's
Torque bias command from the buffer
25 complement) 0.01%
memory of PROFIBUS (REF1 to 7)
(-327.68% to 327.67%)

NOTE
• For details on the FR-A8NP setting, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8NP.

 Torque bias operation (Pr.844, Pr.845)

• The torque start-up can be made slower by setting Pr.844 Torque bias filter ≠ "9999". The torque start-up operation at
this time is the time constant of the primary delay filter.

268 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 • Set the time for continuing the output torque simply by using the command value for the torque bias in Pr.845 Torque bias
operation time.
1
Speed
2
Torque bias

Torque bias filter

3
Pr. 844
primary delay time
constant

Output torque 4
Time when torque is Pr. 845
generated by
torque bias setting
5
Pre-excitation LX ∗1

Start signal

*1 When pre-excitation is not performed, the torque bias functions at the same time as the start signal.
6
NOTE
• When torque bias is enabled and Pr.868 = "6", terminal 1 operates as a torque command instead of a frequency setting
auxiliary. When override compensation is selected using Pr.73 Analog input selection and terminal 1 is the main speed, no
7
main speed (main speed = 0 Hz) is set.
• The torque bias is valid for the first motor. When applying the second motor (RT signal is ON), the torque bias function is not
performed. 8
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

9
Parameters referred to
Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
C16 to C19 (Pr.919, Pr.920) (torque setting voltage (current) bias/gain)page 510 10
5.3.9 Avoiding motor overrunning
Vector

Motor overrunning due to excessive load torque or an error in the setting of the number of encoder pulses can be avoided.
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
Set the speed deviation excess detection frequency
(difference between the actual rotation speed and speed
285 Speed deviation excess detection 0 to 30 Hz
9999 command value) at which the protective function (E.OSD)
H416 frequency*1 activates.
9999 No speed deviation excess
Set the time from when the speed deviation excess state
853*2 Speed deviation time 1.0 s 0 to 100 s is entered to when the protective function (E.OSD)
H417 activates.
873*2 Speed limit 20 Hz 0 to 400 Hz
Set the frequency limit with the set frequency + Pr.873
H415 value.
Set the time required to shut off output due to
690 0 to 3600 s
Deceleration check time 1.0 s deceleration check after the start signal is OFF.
H881
9999 No deceleration check
*1 This is the overspeed detection frequency under encoder feedback control. (Refer to page 736.)
*2 The setting is available when a Vector control compatible option is installed.

 Speed deviation excess detection (Pr.285, Pr.853)

• A shutoff can be set for when the deviation between the set frequency and actual rotation speed is large, such as when
the load torque is excessive.

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
269
 • When the difference (absolute value) between the speed command value and actual rotation speed in speed control under
Vector control is equal to or higher than the setting value in Pr.285 Speed deviation excess detection frequency for a
continuous time equal to or longer than the setting value in Pr.853 Speed deviation time, the speed deviation excess
detection (E.OSD) activates to shut off the inverter output.
Set frequency
Frequency

Pr.285
(Hz)

Actual speed

Time
Pr.853
Fault output OFF ON
(ALM)
Speed deviation
excessive fault activated
(E. OSD)

 Speed limit (Pr.873)

• This function prevents overrunning even when the setting value for and the value of the actual number of pulses are
different. When the setting value for the number of encoder pulses is lower than the actual number of pulses, because the
motor may increase speed, the output frequency is limited with the frequency of (set frequency + Pr.873).
Set speed + Pr. 873 value

Value of Pr. 873

Actual speed
Set speed
at error occurrence
Speed during
normal operation

NOTE
• When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected (Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠ "9999") and
the setting value for the number of encoder pulses is lower than the actual number of pulses, the output speed is limited with
the synchronous speed of the value of Pr.1 Maximum frequency + Pr.873.
• When a regenerative driving torque limit is applied and the speed limit function activates, the output torque may drop suddenly.
Also, when the speed limit function activates during pre-excitation operation, output phase loss (E.LF) may occur.
If the setting for the number of encoder pulses is confirmed as correct, it is recommended that Pr.873 be set to the maximum
value (400 Hz).
• Even if the set frequency is lowered after inverter operation, the speed limit value is not lowered. During deceleration, the
speed is limited at frequency command value + Pr.873.

 Deceleration check (Pr.690)

• This function can stop the inverter output when the motor is accelerated accidentally during rotation. This prevents a
malfunction due to incorrect encoder pulse settings.
• The function is activated when the difference between the actual motor speed and the speed command value exceeds 2
Hz.
• If the motor does not decelerate within the time period set in Pr.690, the speed deviation excess detection (E.OSD) is
activated to shut off the inverter output.
Motor coasting
Motor speed

2Hz
Speed command
Time
Fault output Pr.690
(ALM) ON

E.OSD

270 5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 NOTE
• The deceleration check is enabled in the speed control of the Vector control. 1
• If the protective function (E.OSD) operates due to deceleration check, check whether the Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses
setting is correct.

2
Parameters referred to
Pr.285 Overspeed detection frequencypage 736
Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses, Pr.851 Control terminal option-Number of encoder pulsespage 94
3
5.3.10 Notch filter
4
Sensorless Vector PM

The response level of speed control in the resonance frequency band of mechanical systems can be lowered to avoid
mechanical resonance.

Pr. Name
Initial
value
Setting range Description 5
1003 0 No notch filter
Notch filter frequency 0
G601 8 to 1250 Hz Set the frequency for the center of gain attenuation.
1004
Notch filter depth 0 0 to 3 0 (Deep) → 3 (Shallow) 6
G602
1005
Notch filter width 0 0 to 3 0 (Narrow) → 3 (Wide)
G603
7
Pr.1003
Gain
Notch filter frequency
0dB Frequency
8

Pr.1005
Notch filter width 9

Pr.1004
Notch filter depth
10
 Pr.1003 Notch filter frequency
• This sets the frequency for the center when attenuating the gain. If the mechanical resonance frequency is unknown, lower
the notch frequency in order from the highest. The point where the resonance is smallest is the optimum setting for the
notch frequency.

 Pr.1004 Notch filter depth

• A deeper notch depth has a greater effect in reducing mechanical resonance, but because the phase delay is larger,
swinging may increase. Adjust by starting from the shallowest value.
Setting 3 2 1 0
Gain -4 dB -40 dB
-8 dB -14dB
(depth) (Shallow) (Deep)

 Pr.1005 Notch filter width

• This sets the width of the frequency to which to apply the notch filter. The setting can be adjusted according to the width
of the frequency range to be excluded.
• If the width is too wide, the response level of speed control will drop, and the system may become unstable.

NOTE
• If a value higher than 500 Hz is set in Pr.1003 while the response speed is normal (Pr.800 = any of "0 to 5 and 9 to 14"), the
inverter operates at 500 Hz.

Parameters referred to
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221

5. PARAMETERS
5.3 Speed control under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, PM sensorless vector control
271
 5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector
control and Vector control

Refer
Purpose Parameter to set
to page
Torque command source selection or P.D400 to P.D403, P.G210, Pr.801, Pr.803 to Pr.806,
Torque command 283
torque command value setting P.H704 Pr.1114
To prevent the motor from
Speed limit P.H410 to P.H412, P.H414 Pr.807 to Pr.809, Pr.1113 287
overspeeding
Torque control gain P.G213, P.G214, P.G313, Pr.824, Pr.825, Pr.834,
To raise precision of torque control 294
adjustment P.G314 Pr.835
Torque detection
To stabilize torque detection signal P.G216, P.G316 Pr.827, Pr.837 332
filter

5.4.1 Torque control

• Under torque control, output torque is controlled to output the torque as commanded.
• Motor rotation speed is steady when the motor output torque and load torque are balanced.
Thus, motor speed during torque control is determined by the load.
• Under torque control, motor speed accelerates so motor output torque does not exceed motor load.
In order to prevent the motor from overspeeding, set a speed limit.
(Speed control is performed instead of torque control during speed limit.)
• If speed limit is not set, speed limit value setting is regarded as 0 Hz and torque control is not enabled.

272 5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
 Block diagram
1
Speed limit

2
Analog input offset
AU signal Terminal 2 bias [C2, C3(Pr.902)] adjustment [Pr.849] Acceleration/deceleration*
OFF Terminal 2 gain [Pr.125, C4(Pr.903)] Upper/lower limit setting
Terminal 2
[Pr.1]
Terminal 4 bias [C5,C6(Pr.904)]
Terminal 4 ON Terminal 4 gain [Pr.126,C7(Pr.905)] Analog input A
[Pr.2]
3
[Pr.858 = 0] selection
[Pr.73] [Pr.7] [Pr.8]
Terminal 1
[Pr.868 = 0] * Acceleration/deceleration is
RT signal [Pr.822] disabled when Pr.807 = "2" and
OFF ≠9999 the setting value in Pr.1 Maximum
[Pr.822]
4
Speed setting
frequency is used for limiting the
filter =9999
[Pr.74] speed.

[Pr.832]
ON ≠9999
[Pr.832]

5
=9999 Speed limit
[Pr.74]
Operation mode selection
RL Multi-speed [Pr.79] [Pr.807]
RM selection 0
[Pr.4 to 6,
RH 1
24 to 27,
REX 232 to 239] 2
6
Option
Operation panel

Parameter
[Pr.808, Pr.809]
7
Maximum Terminal 1 input, 0 to 10 V Reverse
frequency
[Pr.1] Terminal 1 input, -10 to 0 V Forward

Terminal 1
Terminal 1 bias [C12,C13(Pr.917)]
Terminal 1 gain [C14,C15(Pr.918)] Terminal 1 input, 0 to 10 V Forward
8
[Pr.868 = 5]
RT signal [Pr.822] Terminal 1 input, -10 to 0 V Reverse
OFF ≠9999
Speed setting
filter =9999
[Pr.822]
[Pr.74]
9
[Pr.832]
ON ≠9999
[Pr.832]
=9999
[Pr.74] 10

NOTE
• To select coasting instead of deceleration stop with speed limit when the start command is turned OFF, set Pr.250 Stop
selection.
• The RT (Second function selection) signal and the X9 (Third function selection) signal are used to enable switching between
acceleration/deceleration time settings. The acceleration/deceleration time after switching depends on the settings in Pr.44
Second acceleration/deceleration time and Pr.45 Second deceleration time, or Pr.110 Third acceleration/deceleration
time and Pr.111 Third deceleration time. The acceleration/deceleration time is a period of time taken to reach Pr.20
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.
• Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments is used to change the setting increment.
• When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected, the inverter accelerates the motor from the frequency
search result frequency to the set frequency. (Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠ 9999, Pr.162 Automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure selection = "10, 12, 13, 1010, 1012, or 1013")
• Pr.811 Set resolution switchover is used to change the setting increment for speed setting, operation speed monitoring, and
torque limit setting.
• Pr.862 Encoder option selection is used to change the Vector control compatible plug-in option or the control terminal option
for the first and second motors.
• Pr.1113 Speed limit method selection is used to change the direction of rotation, torque command polarity, and power
driving / regenerative driving status.

5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
273
 Mode 2
0

Speed control P gain Speed control

[Pr.820] integral time Mode 3
0 Iq* limiter
([Pr.830]) [Pr.821] C
([Pr.1117]) ([Pr.831]) Torque current
([Pr.1118]) ([Pr.1109(PROFIBUS)]) command value
([Pr.1109(PROFIBUS)]) Mode 4 Iq*
0
Mode 2
B
Mode 2, 3 -1
Absolute
Enabled
Enabled value Torque limit selection
-1
Reverse rotation speed limit/
reverse-side speed limit
[Pr.809]
Disabled +
Reverse-side speed limit value
- Absolute
value

Speed control P gain compensation

amount in the constant output range
[Pr.1116]

Speed controller 2

Terminal 1 bias
[C16, C17 (Pr.919)] Torque command selection
Analog input Terminal 1 gain
Terminal 1 [C18, C19 (Pr.920)] Torque command Constant output range Mode 1
Torque setting
source selection torque characteristic selection
filter
[Pr.868 = 3, 4] [Pr.804] [Pr.803]
[Pr.826]
([Pr.836]) 0
Both conditions satisfied
RT signal [Pr.826] Torque command value 1
Torque OFF ≠ 9999 [Pr.805]
[Pr.826] Mode 1
setting = 9999 ([Pr.806])
filter [Pr.74] 2
One of the
[Pr.836] PROFIBUS conditions satisfied
ON ≠ 9999 CC-Link 3, 5, 6
[Pr.836] CC-Link IE Mode 1
= 9999
[Pr.74] 16-bit digital
4 0
input
Pulse train torque command bias FR-A8AX Speed control
[Pr.432] P gain Mode 2
Pulse train torque command gain - [Pr.820] Speed control
Pulse train [Pr.433] 0
([Pr.830]) integral time
input + 0
([Pr.1117]) [Pr.821] Mode 3
FR-A8AL Mode 2
-1 ([Pr.1118]) ([Pr.831])
Speed limit selection Absolute ([Pr.1109 ([Pr.1109 0
Enabled value (PROFIBUS)]) (PROFIBUS)])
Mode 4
Speed limit value 0
Disabled Speed controller
A - Absolute
value Notch filter
[Pr.1003 to Pr.1005]
Speed control P gain compensation
amount in the constant output range
[Pr.1116]

Control mode
Speed
Encoder option Vector Speed detection value
detection
(FR-A8AP, control
filter
FR-A8AL,
[Pr.823]
or others)
([Pr.833])

Speed estimation
value Real sensorless
vector control

274 5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
 Constant output

1
range torque
Torque limit selection characteristic selection Control mode
[Pr.803] [Pr.801 ≠ 9999]
Output limit level Vector control = 9999
[Pr.801]

TL signal ON
or During
2
X92 signal ON acceleration
or deceleration Real sensorless
Torque limit level Constant output
±30% vector control
Torque limit level 2 ON during acceleration ON range torque

3
[Pr.815] [Pr.816] characteristic selection
Torque limit input Torque limit level Pre-excitation [Pr.803]
method selection during deceleration selection Output limit level Control mode
[Pr.810] [Pr.817] [Pr.802] [Pr.801]
Stall prevention operation level [Pr.22] OFF OFF Vector control
Torque limit level (regeneration) [Pr.812] 0 ≠ 9999
B
4
Torque limit level (3rd quadrant) [Pr.813]
Torque limit level (4th quadrant) Pr.814]

Torque setting Real sensorless

Analog input filter 1 ±30% vector control
Terminal 1, 4 [Pr.826]
([Pr.836]) 5
PROFIBUS communication
CC-Link communication
CC-Link IE communication
2
6

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
275
 Magnetic flux control / slip frequency

Secondary resistance One of the conditions satisfied

temperature compensation Real sensorless vector control
Magnetic flux observer enabled
FR-A8AZ Both conditions Online auto tuning selection
satisfied [Pr.95]
Both conditions satisfied
Motor temperature Logic inverted
detection filter [Pr.407]

Thermistor R2 compensation Magnetic flux observer ωsl

Slip frequency Slip frequency

operation ωsl

+
+ Output frequency
ωout
Excitation ratio
C
Torque current
command value
Iq* Excitation ratio
[Pr.854]

Speed detection
value
Rated motor frequency
[Pr.84]
[Pr.1109 = [][][]1]
and Vector control
selected PROFIBUS
communication
One of the conditions
satisfied

[Pr.868 = 1] and
Vector control
selected Real sensorless Stop-on contact
Analog input low-speed excitation excitation
Terminal 1

Control method Stop-on-contact control

100% Vector control Disabled
Magnetic flux 100%
Control mode

Excitation current
low-speed scaling factor
[Pr.86]
(130%) Enabled

Speed control Real sensorless

Excitation current vector control
break point
[Pr.85] Stop-on contact excitation current
(10Hz) low-speed scaling factor
[Pr.275]

70%
Torque control
Excitation current
break point
[Pr.85]
(10Hz)

Magnetic flux command value D

+ Magnetic flux
controller Excitation current
-
command value
Id*
Estimated magnetic flux value

[Pr.95=2] Magnetic flux observer enabled or

Real sensorless vector control selected
Enabled Disabled

Magnetic flux observer Magnetic flux

Estimated magnetic flux value operation

276 5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
 Current control / voltage output / magnetic flux observer
1
Soft-PWM operation selection
[Pr.240]

Soft-PWM
q-axis current controller processing

2
C Torque control +
Torque current + P gain + + Vq Vu +
command value - [Pr.824] + + Vv + Inverter voltage
2-phase to 3-phase
Iq* Iq ([Pr.834]) PWM
Vd conversion + output
3
Torque control Vw
integral time +
[Pr.825] +
([Pr.835])

Online auto tuning

Incoherent
operation
selection
[Pr.95] 4
Magnetic flux One of the conditions satisfied
observer

Magnetic flux observer

5
Real sensorless
vector control

Magnetic flux observer

6

d-axis current controller Magnetic flux observer

Estimated magnetic 7
flux value

D Torque control Magnetic flux

P gain Slip frequency
Excitation -
8
+ + observer
[Pr.824] operation
current - + + ωsl
command value ([Pr.834]) Enabled
Id Torque control Real sensorless
Id* vector control
integral time
[Pr.825]
Estimated
([Pr.835]) Speed estimator

9
speed value

Control method
Real sensorless
Estimated speed
value
+
+
vector control
10
Phase calculation

Slip frequency θsl + θ

ωsl +
Vector control
θIM

FR-A8AP
FR-A8AL

Torque detection filter Iq Iu

[Pr.827]
([Pr.837]) Iv Inverter output
3-phase to 2-phase conversion
Id Iw current detection

5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
277
  Operation transition
Speed limit value is
increased up to preset value
according to the Pr.7
Acceleration time setting. Speed limit value Speed limit value is decreased
down to zero according to the Pr.8
Deceleration time setting.

Speed Torque control

Speed limit Speed limit

Start signal
Output torque is provided
according to the terminal 1
Speed control is performed during speed setting.
Output torque
limit. (Thus, torque according to the
commanded is not developed.)

• If the setting value of Pr.7 and Pr.8 is "0", turning OFF the start signal enables speed control, and the output torque is
controlled by the torque limit value.
Speed limit value

Speed Torque control

Speed control
(speed limit)
Start signal
Output torque is provided
according to the terminal 1
setting.
Output torque
Limit at the torque limit value

Item Description
External
STF, STR signal
operation
Start signal
PU operation or of operation panel/ parameter unit
Torque Select the method to give the torque command, and give the torque
command command.
Select the method to give the speed limit command, and input the speed
Speed limit
limit value.

 Operation example (when Pr.804 = "0")

Torque control is possible when actual rotation speed does not exceed the speed limit value.
When the actual speed reaches or exceeds the speed limit value, speed limit is activated, torque control is stopped and speed
control (proportional control) is performed.

278 5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
The following diagram indicates operation relative to commands given by analog input via terminal 1.

1
Speed
Speed limit value
Pr.7 ∗ Pr.8

∗ ∗
Speed
2

STF
Time
3
(Forward
rotation
command) Speed limit Speed limit Torque Speed limit
Torque control operation
operation
(Speed control)
operation control operation
(Speed control) operation (Speed control) 4
OL ON ON ON
∗When the speed limit activates, torque according to the commanded is not developed.

• At the STF signal ON, the speed limit value is raised in accordance with the setting of Pr.7. 5
• Speed control is performed when the actual speed exceeds the speed limit value.
• At the STF signal OFF, the speed limit value is lowered in accordance with the setting of Pr.8.
• Under torque control, the actual operation speed is a constant speed when the torque command and load torque are 6
balanced.
• The direction of motor torque generation is determined by a combination of the input torque command polarity and the start
signal, as given in the following table. 7
Polarity of torque Torque generation direction
command STF signal ON STR signal ON
Forward direction (forward Reverse direction (forward 8
+ torque command power driving / reverse regenerative driving / reverse
regenerative driving) power driving)
Reverse direction (forward Forward direction (forward
- torque command regenerative driving / reverse power driving / reverse 9
power driving) regenerative driving)

NOTE
• Once the speed limit is activated, speed control is performed and internal torque limit (Pr.22 Torque limit level) is enabled.
10
(Initial value) In this case, it may not be possible to return to torque control.
Torque limit should be external torque limit (terminals 1 and 4). (Refer to page 245.)
• Under torque control, the undervoltage avoidance function (Pr.261 = "11" or "12"), which is one of the power failure time
deceleration-to-stop function, is invalid.
When Pr.261 = "11 (12)", the operation is performed in the same manner as if Pr.261 = "1 (2)".
• Under torque control, perform linear acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 = "0 (initial value)"). When acceleration/deceleration
patterns other than the linear acceleration/deceleration are selected, the protective function of the inverter may be activated.
(Refer to page 372.)
• Performing pre-excitation (by using the LX or X13 signal) during torque control (under Real sensorless vector control) may
rotate a motor at a low speed even though a start command (STF or STR) is not given. The inverter at a start command ON
may also rotate the motor at a low speed even though a speed limit value is set to 0. It must be confirmed that the motor running
does not cause any safety problem before performing pre-excitation.

5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
279
 5.4.2 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector
control (torque control)
Sensorless

Operating procedure
1. Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 46.)

2. Make the motor setting (Pr.71). (Refer to page 528.)

Set Pr.71 Applied motor to "0" (standard motor) or "1" (constant-torque motor).

3. Set the motor overheat protection (Pr.9). (Refer to page 415.)

4. Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles (Pr.80 and Pr.81). (Refer to page 221.)
V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).

5. Set the rated motor voltage and frequency (Pr.83 and Pr.84). (Refer to page 532.)

6. Select the control method (Pr.800). (Refer to page 221.)

Select Pr.800 Control method selection = "11" (torque control) or "12" (speed/torque switchover) to enable torque
control.

7. Set the torque command (Pr.804). (Refer to page 283.)

8. Set the speed limit (Pr.807). (Refer to page 287.)
9. Perform the offline auto tuning (Pr.96). (Refer to page 532.)
10. Set the acceleration time to "0" (Pr.7). (Refer to page 367.)
11. Perform the test operation.
As required
• Select online auto tuning (Pr.95). (Refer to page 558.)
• Adjust the torque control gain manually. (Refer to page 294.)

280 5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
NOTE
• During Real sensorless vector control, offline auto tuning must be performed properly before starting operations. 1
• The carrier frequency is limited during Real sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.)
• Torque control is not available in a low-speed (about 10 Hz or lower) regenerative range, or with a low speed and light load
(about 5 Hz or lower and rated torque about 20% or lower).
• Performing pre-excitation (LX signal and X13 signal) under torque control may start the motor running at a low speed even
2
when the start signal (STF or STR) is not input. The inverter at a start command ON may also rotate the motor at a low speed
even though a speed limit value is set to 0. Confirm that the motor running does not cause any safety problem before
performing pre-excitation. 3
• Switching between the forward rotation command (STF) and reverse rotation command (STR) must not be performed during
operations under torque control. An overcurrent trip (E.OC[]) or opposite rotation deceleration fault (E.11) will occur.
• When performing continuous operations under Real sensorless vector control in the FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower or FR-
A840-00126(3.7K) or lower, the speed fluctuation increases when the value is 20 Hz or less, and in the low-speed range of 4
less than 1 Hz, there may be torque shortage. In such case, stop the inverter and restart it to improve the situation.
• If starting may occur while the motor is coasting under Real sensorless vector control, the frequency search must be set for
the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr.57 ≠ "9999", Pr.162 = "10"). 5
• When Real sensorless vector control is applied, there may not be enough torque provided in the ultra low-speed range of about
2 Hz or lower.
Generally, the speed control range is as follows.
For power driving, 1:200 (2, 4 or 6 poles) (available at 0.3 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz), 1:30 (8 poles or more) 6
(available at 2 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz).
For regenerative driving, 1:12 (2 to 10 poles) (available at 5 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz).
• To give the constant torque command in the constant output range, set "1 or 11" in Pr.803 Constant output range torque
characteristic selection. (Refer to page 283.)
7
• For the settings for the SF-V5RU, refer to page 94.

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
281
 5.4.3 Setting procedure for Vector control (torque
control)
Vector

Operating procedure
1. Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 91.)
Install a Vector control compatible option.

2. Set the option to be used (Pr.862).

Set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used. (Refer to page 226.)

3. Set the motor and the encoder (Pr.71, Pr.359 (Pr.852), and Pr.369 (Pr.851)). (Refer to page 94.)

4. Set the overheat protection of the motor (Pr.9). (Refer to page 415.)
When using the SF-V5RU or a motor equipped with a thermal sensor, set Pr.9 = 0 A.

5. Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles (Pr.80 and Pr.81). (Refer to page 221.)
V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).

6. Set the rated motor voltage and frequency (Pr.83 and Pr.84). (Refer to page 94.)

7. Select the control method (Pr.800). (Refer to page 221.)

Select Pr.800 Control method selection = "1" (torque control), "2" (speed/torque switchover), or "5" (position/
torque switchover) to enable torque control.

8. Set the torque command (Pr.804). (Refer to page 283.)

9. Set the speed limit (Pr.807). (Refer to page 287.)
10. Set the acceleration time to "0" (Pr.7). (Refer to page 367.)
11. Perform the test operation.
As required
• Perform offline auto tuning (Pr.96). (Refer to page 532.)
• Select the online auto tuning (Pr.95). (Refer to page 558.)
• Adjust the torque control gain manually. (Refer to page 294.)

NOTE
• The carrier frequency is limited during Vector control. (Refer to page 356.)
• Torque control is not available under the Vector control with PM motors.
• To give the constant torque command in the constant output range, set "1 or 11" in Pr.803 Constant output range torque
characteristic selection. (Refer to page 283.)
• For the settings for the SF-V5RU, refer to page 94.

282 5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
5.4.4 Torque command
Sensorless Vector
1
For torque control selection, the torque command source can be selected.

Pr. Name
Initial
value
Setting range Description 2
432 Pulse train torque For 0 pulses/s, set the torque to be used during stall prevention
0% 0 to 400%
D120*1 command bias operation.
433 Pulse train torque
150% 0 to 400%
For 400k pulses/s, set the torque command to be used during stall 3
D121*1 command gain prevention operation.
801 0 to 400% Set the torque current limit level.
Output limit level 9999
H704 9999 The torque limit setting value is used for limiting the torque current level.
0, 10 Constant motor output command 4
1, 11 Constant torque command
Constant output range In the torque command setting,
803 The torque is constant unless the
torque characteristic 0 select torque command for the
G210
selection 2
output limit of the torque current is
reached. (The torque current is
constant output area. 5
limited.)
0 Torque command given by analog input via terminal 1

1
Torque command (-400% to 400%) given by the parameter setting
(Pr.805 or Pr.806)
6
2 Torque command given by the pulse train input (FR-A8AL)
Torque command through the CC-Link / CC-Link IE Field Network / CC-
Link IE TSN communication (FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, FR-A800-GF, FR- 7
804 Torque command 3 A8NCG, FR-A800-GN)
0 Torque command given through PROFIBUS-DP communication (FR-
D400 source selection
A8NP)
4 12/16-bit digital input (FR-A8AX) 8
5 Torque command through the CC-Link / CC-Link IE Field Network / CC-
Link IE TSN communication (FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, FR-A800-GF, FR-
A8NCG, FR-A800-GN)
6
Torque command given through PROFIBUS-DP communication (FR-
A8NP)
9
805 Torque command value Writes the torque command value in RAM. Regards 1000% as 0%, and
1000% 600 to 1400%
D401 (RAM) set torque command by an offset of 1000%.
806 Torque command value
1000% 600 to 1400%
Writes the torque command value in RAM and EEPROM. Regards 10
D402 (RAM, EEPROM) 1000% as 0%, and set torque command by an offset of 1000%.
0 Not reversed Select whether to reverse the
1114 Torque command torque command polarity or not
1
D403 reverse selection 1 Reversed when the reverse rotation
command (STR) is turned ON.
*1 The setting is available when the FR-A8AL is installed.

 Control block diagram

[Pr. 804] Torque command Speed
source selection estimated <Speed limit value
Analog input 0 value +
Torque control M
1,3,5,6
Parameter [Pr. 805, Pr. 806]
16-bit digital input 4 -
(FR-A8AX)
Pulse train input 2
(FR-A8AL) + Speed control Encoder
Speed limit input
Speed (proportional control)
estimated Speed limit value
- value
Speed estimator
Real sensorless vector control

Vector control

NOTE
• When the torque command exceeding the torque limit value (Pr.22, Pr.810, Pr.812 to Pr.817) is given, the output torque is
within the torque limit value. (Refer to page 272.)

5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
283
  Torque command given by analog input (terminal 1) (Pr.804 = "0 (initial
value)")
• Torque commands are given by voltage (current) input via terminal 1.
• Set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "3 or 4" to give the torque command via terminal 1.
• Torque commands given by analog inputs can be calibrated by the calibration parameters C16 (Pr.919) to C19 (Pr.920)
(Refer to page 510.)
Torque command
150%

-100% 0 100% Terminal 1

(-10V) (+10V) analog input

-150%

 Torque command given by parameter (Pr.804 = "1")

• Set Pr.805 Torque command value (RAM) or Pr.806 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM) to set the torque
command value.
For Pr.805 or Pr.806, regard 1000% as 0%, and set torque command by offset from 1000%.
The following diagram shows relation between the Pr.805 or Pr.806 setting and the actual torque command value.
• To change the torque command value frequently, write it in Pr.805. Writing values in Pr.806 frequently will shorten the life
of the EEPROM.
• When the CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A8NCE/FR-A800-GF) or CC-Link IE TSN (FR-A8NCG/FR-A800-GN)
communication is used, the torque command given from the remote register (RWw2) is valid.
Torque command value

400%

Pr.805, Pr.806
600% settings
1000% 1400%

Torque command value

-400% =Pr.805(or Pr.806)-1000%

NOTE
• When the torque command is set by Pr.805 (RAM), powering OFF the inverter erases the changed parameter value.
Therefore, the parameter set value is the one saved by Pr.806 (EEPROM) when the power is turned back on.
• If giving torque command by parameter setting, set the speed limit value properly to prevent overspeeding. (Refer to page
287.)

 Torque command using pulse train (Pr.804 = "2")

• Torque command given by the pulse train input to the FR-A8AL is available.

284 5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
 • Use Pr.428 Command pulse selection to select a type of pulse train input to the FR-A8AL.
Pr.428 setting Command pulse train type During forward rotation During reverse rotation 1
Forward pulse train PP
0 (initial value)
Reverse pulse train NP

PP 2
Negative
1 Pulse train + sign
logic NP L H

2
A phase pulse train PP 3
B phase pulse train NP

PP
3
Forward pulse train
Reverse pulse train NP
4
Positive PP
4 Pulse train + sign
logic NP H L
5
A phase pulse train PP
5
B phase pulse train NP
6
• Use Pr.432 Pulse train torque command bias and Pr.433 Pulse train torque command gain to set the bias and gain
values for the torque command respectively.
Torque command value 7
Pr.433 setting

Pr.432 setting
0
Pulse train input frequency
400k pulses/s
8

9
NOTE
• For details on the FR-A8AL, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8AL.

10
 Torque command given through the CC-Link / CC-Link IE Field Network /
CC-Link IE TSN / PROFIBUS-DP (Pr.804 = "3, 5, 6")
• Set the torque command value through the CC-Link (FR-A8NC/PLC function), CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A8NCE/FR-
A800-GF), CC-Link IE TSN (FR-A8NCG/FR-A800-GN), or PROFIBUS-DP (FR-A8NP) communication.
• For speed limit when "3 or 5" is set in Pr.804 through the CC-Link communication, Pr.807 Speed limit selection becomes
invalid and Pr.808 Forward rotation speed limit/speed limit and Pr.809 Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-side
speed limit become valid. (When Pr.544 CC-Link extended setting = "0, 1, 12, 100, or 112")

5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
285
 • For the CC-Link communication, Pr.807 is valid when the extended cyclic setting of CC-Link communication is quadruple
or octuple. For CC-Link IE Field Network or CC-Link IE TSN, Pr.807 is always valid.
Torque command input
Pr.804 CC-Link IE Field Setting
Setting range
setting CC-Link/PLC function Network / CC-Link IE PROFIBUS-DP increments
TSN
Torque command by Torque command by
1
Pr.805, Pr.806*1 Pr.805, Pr.806*1
Torque command by
remote register Torque command by the 600 to 1400
Torque command by 1%
buffer memory of (-400% to 400%)
3 remote register (RWw1 (RWw2)*2
PROFIBUS-DP (REF1 to
or RWwC)*2
7)*2
Torque command by the
Torque command by
buffer memory of
5 remote register (RWw1 Torque command by PROFIBUS-DP (REF1 to -32768 to 32767 (complement of 2)
or RWwC)*2 remote register 0.01%*3
7)*2 (-327.68% to 327.67%)*3
(RWw2)*2
Torque command by Torque command by
6
Pr.805, Pr.806*1 Pr.805, Pr.806*1
*1 The torque command can also be given from operation panel or parameter unit.
*2 The torque command can also be given by setting a value in Pr.805 or Pr.806.
*3 Setting range if set by operation panel or parameter unit is "673 to 1327 (-327% to 327%)"; setting increment is 1%.

NOTE
• For details on the FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, FR-A8NCG, or FR-A8NP setting, refer to the Instruction Manual for each
communication option. For details on the CC-Link IE Field Network, refer to page 752. For details on CC-Link IE TSN
communication, refer to the CC-Link IE TSN Function Manual.
• For details on the setting using the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.

 Torque command given by 16-bit digital input (Pr.804 = "4")

• Give the torque command by 12-bit or 16-bit digital input using FR-A8AX (plug-in option).

NOTE
• For details on FR-A8AX setting, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-A8AX

 Changing the torque characteristic of the constant-power range (Pr.801,

Pr.803)
• According to the motor's characteristics, base frequency or higher decreases the torque. To give the constant torque
command in base frequency or higher, set "1 or 11" in Pr.803 Constant output range torque characteristic selection.
• Torque in a low-speed range is constant during torque control regardless of the setting of Pr.803. However, when "2" is
set in Pr.803 under Real sensorless vector control, the torque may not be kept constant in the low-speed range.
Torque characteristic in constant-power range
Pr.803 setting
Torque characteristic Output limit
0 (initial value), 10 Constant motor output —
1, 11 Constant torque Without
2 Constant torque With

• To avoid overload or overcurrent of the inverter or motor, use Pr.801 Output limit level to limit the torque current in the
constant power range.
Pr.801 setting Description
0 to 400% Set the torque current limit level.
9999 The torque limit setting value (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.817, etc.) is used for limiting the torque current.

286 5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
 Pr.803 = 0, 1, 10, 11
Torque 1
Constant power range
Constant torque range Pr. 803 = 1, 11:
constant torque command
2
Pr. 803 = 0, 10:
constant power command
(torque reduction)

Rated speed
Speed 3
Pr.803 = 2
Torque
Constant torque range Constant power range
4
Pr.801 Torque reduction
when the output is
limited
5
When the output limit
Constant torque is not exceeded
command 6
Rated speed Speed

 Reverse selection of the torque command (Pr.1114)

• The Pr.1114 Torque command reverse selection setting determines whether or not the torque command polarity is
7
reversed when the reverse rotation command (STR) is turned ON.

Pr.1114 setting
Torque command polarity at STR signal ON
(sign)
8
0 Not reversed
1 (Initial value) Reversed
9
Parameters referred to
Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500
Calibration parameter C16 (Pr.919) to C19 (Pr.920) (terminal 1 bias, gain torque)page 510

10
5.4.5 Speed limit
Sensorless Vector

When operating under torque control, motor overspeeding may occur if the load torque drops to a value less than the torque
command value, etc. Set the speed limit value to prevent overspeeding.
If the actual speed reaches or exceeds the speed limit value, the control method switches from torque control to speed control,
preventing overspeeding.
Initial value Setting
Pr. Name Description
FM CA range
0 Uses the speed command during speed control as the speed limit.
Sets speed limits for forward and reverse directions individually by
1
807 using Pr.808 and Pr.809.
Speed limit selection 0
H410 Forward/reverse rotation speed limit
2 Applies speed limit by analog voltage input to the terminal 1. Speed
limit for forward/reverse side is switched by its polarity.
808 Forward rotation speed
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 400 Hz Sets the forward side speed limit.
H411 limit/speed limit
Reverse rotation speed 0 to 400 Hz Sets the reverse side speed limit.
809
limit/reverse-side speed 9999
H412 9999 Pr.808 setting value is effective.
limit
9999 Speed limit mode 1
0 Speed limit mode 2
1113 Speed limit method 1 Speed limit mode 3
0
H414 selection 2 Speed limit mode 4
X93 signal OFF: Speed limit mode 3,
10
X93 signal ON: Speed limit mode 4

5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
287
  Speed limit method selection (Pr.1113)
Pr.1113
Speed limit method Speed limit value
setting
Forward rotation speed limit
Pr.807 = "0": Speed command during speed control
Pr.807 = "1": Pr.808
Pr.807 = "2": Analog input at analog input of 0 to 10 V, or Pr.1 at analog input of -10 to 0 V
9999 Speed limit mode 1
Reverse rotation speed limit
Pr.807 = "0": Speed command during speed control
Pr.807 = "1": Pr.809, or Pr.808 when Pr.809 = "9999"
Pr.807 = "2": Pr.1 at analog input of 0 to 10 V, or analog input at analog input of -10 to 0 V
0 (initial Speed limit
Speed limit mode 2
value) Pr.807 = "0 or 2": Speed command during speed control
1 Speed limit mode 3 Pr.807 = "1": Pr.808
Reverse-side speed limit
2 Speed limit mode 4 Pr.809, or Pr.808 when Pr.809 = "9999"
Switching by external X93 signal OFF: Speed limit mode 3,
10
terminals X93 signal ON: Speed limit mode 4

 Control block diagram (speed limit mode 1)

Speed estimated value < speed limit value
Torque command +
Torque control M
Pr. 807 Speed limit selection
Same method 0 -
as speed command input
1 + Speed control
Parameter(Pr. 808, Pr. 809) Encoder
(proportional control)
Forward/reverse rotation 2
speed limit - Speed estimated value speed limit value
Speed estimator
Real sensorless vector control

Vector control

 Using the speed command during speed control (Pr.1113 = "9999", Pr.807
= "0").
• Speed limit is set by the same method as speed setting during speed control. (Speed setting by PU (operation panel/
parameter unit), multi-speed setting, plug-in option, etc.)
• When the start signal turns ON, the limit level increases from 0 Hz to the set speed by taking the time set in Pr.7
Acceleration time. When the start signal turns OFF, the limit level at the time decreases to the operation start level of
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency, by taking the time set in Pr.8 Deceleration time.
The speed setting
Speed
value is the speed
Forward rotation limit value.
Pr.7 Pr.8
Speed setting
value during
speed control
Time

Torque controllable
range
Reverse rotation
STF(STR) ON OFF

NOTE
• The second and third acceleration/deceleration time can be set.
• When speed limit command exceeds Pr.1 Maximum frequency setting, the speed limit value becomes Pr.1 setting. When
speed limit command falls below Pr.2 Minimum frequency setting, the speed limit value becomes Pr.2 setting. Also, the
speed limit command is smaller than Pr. 13 Starting frequency, the speed limit value becomes 0 Hz.
• To perform speed limit by analog input, calibrate analog input terminals 1, 2 and 4. (Refer to page 505.)
• To use analog inputs to perform speed limit, turn the external signals (RH, RM, RL) OFF. If any of the external signals (RH,
RM, RL) is ON, speed limit by multi-speed are enabled.

288 5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
 Setting separately for forward and reverse rotation (Pr.1113 = "9999",
Pr.807 = "1") 1
• Sets speed limits for forward and reverse directions individually by using Pr.808 Forward rotation speed limit/speed
limit Pr.809 Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-side speed limit.
• When Pr.809 = "9999" (initial value), speed limit is determined by the setting value of Pr.808 for both forward and reverse 2
rotations.
Speed
Torque controllable range
Forward rotation 3
Forward rotation
Speed limit Pr.808 Pr.7 Pr.8
Speed limit Pr.808
4
150 150
Time
Output torque
(%)
0
Speed limit Pr.809 5
Speed limit Pr.809 Torque controllable range
Reverse rotation
Reverse rotation

STF(STR) ON OFF
6
 Forward/reverse rotation speed limit using analog input (Pr.1113 =
"9999", Pr.807 = "2") 7
• When performing speed limit by analog inputs to terminal 1, speed limit can be switched between forward and reverse
rotation by its voltage polarity.
• When Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "5", forward/reverse speed limit is enabled.
8
• If 0 to 10 V is input, forward rotation speed limit is applied. Reverse rotation speed limit at this time is the value of Pr.1
Maximum frequency.
• If -10 to 0 V is input, reverse rotation speed limit is applied. Forward rotation speed limit at this time is the value of Pr.1
9
Maximum frequency.

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
289
 • Upper speed limit is the value of Pr.1 for both forward and reverse rotations.

 When terminal 1 input is "-10 to 0 V"  When terminal 1 input is "0 to 10 V"

Speed
Torque controllable range Speed
Forward rotation
Pr.1 Forward rotation

Terminal 1
input
150 0 150 150 0 150
Output torque (%) Output
torque (%)
Terminal 1 input

Reverse rotation Pr.1

Torque controllable range

Reverse rotation

Speed
Torque controllable range
Speed
Torque controllable range
Pr.1
Pr.7 Pr.8
The forward rotation
Terminal 1 input (0 to 10 V)
speed limit
The forward rotation speed
limit

Time Time
Terminal 1 input
(-10 to 0 V)
Pr.7 Pr.8
The reverse Pr.1
rotation speed The reverse rotation
limit speed limit

Start signal OFF ON Start signal OFF ON

NOTE
• To perform speed limit by using terminal 1, calibrate terminal 1. (Refer to page 505.)

 Speed limit mode 2 (Pr.1113 = "0" initial value)

• Following the polarity change in the torque command, the polarity of the speed limit value changes. This prevents the
speed from increasing in the torque polarity direction. (When the torque command value is 0, the polarity of the speed limit
value is positive.)
• When Pr.807 Speed limit selection = "0, 2", the setting during speed control is applied for the speed limit. When Pr.807
Speed limit selection = "1", Pr.808 Forward rotation speed limit/speed limit is applied for the speed limit.

290 5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
 • When the load has reversed the rotation opposite to the torque polarity, the setting of Pr.809 Reverse rotation speed
limit/reverse-side speed limit is applied for the speed limit. (The speed limit value and reverse-side speed limit value are
limited at Pr.1 Maximum frequency (maximum 400 Hz under Vector control).)
1
Reverse-side Torque
speed limit value command
-Pr.809 value Speed limit value
2
Range where torque
control is available
3
Rotation speed

4
-Speed limit value Reverse-side
speed limit value
Pr.809 5
Range where torque
Rotation speed control is available
Rotation speed Range where torque

6
control is available
Pr.809
Pr.7 Pr.8 Reverse-side
Speed limit value speed limit value

Time Time 7
Speed limit value
Pr.7 Pr.8
-Pr.809
Reverse-side
speed limit value
8
Start signal OFF ON Start signal OFF ON

When the torque command value is positive When the torque command value is negative 9
 Speed limit mode 3 (Pr.1113 = "1")
• Select this mode when the torque command is positive. The forward rotation command is for power driving (such as 10
winding) and the reverse rotation command is for regenerative driving (such as unwinding). (Refer to each following
figures.)
• When Pr.807 Speed limit selection = "0, 2", the setting during speed control is applied for the speed limit. When Pr.807
Speed limit selection = "1", Pr.808 Forward rotation speed limit/speed limit is applied for the speed limit.

5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
291
 • When the torque command becomes negative, the setting of Pr.809 Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-side speed
limit is applied to prevent the speed from increasing in the reverse rotation direction. (The speed limit value and reverse-
side speed limit value are limited at Pr.1 Maximum frequency (maximum 400 Hz under Vector control).)

Unwinding Winding
(regenerative driving) (power driving)

Forward Forward
rotation rotation

Winding Unwinding
(power driving) (regenerative driving)

Reverse
Reverse rotation
rotation

Reverse-side Torque Reverse-side Speed

speed limit value command speed limit value limit
-Pr.809 value Speed limit value -Pr.809 value Torque command value

Forward rotation Reverse rotation

power driving regenerative driving

Rotation speed Rotation speed

Range where torque Range where torque

control is available control is available

For forward rotation command For reverse rotation command

Rotation speed Range where torque

Rotation speed Range where torque
control is available
control is available Time
Pr.7 Pr.8
Speed limit value
Speed limit value

Time
-Pr.809
Reverse-side
Pr.7 Pr.8
-Pr.809 speed limit value
Reverse-side
speed limit value

Start signal OFF ON Start signal OFF ON

For power driving For regenerative driving

by forward rotation command (winding) by reverse rotation command (unwinding)

 Speed limit mode 4 (Pr.1113 = "2")

• Select this mode when the torque command is negative. The forward rotation command is for regenerative driving (such
as unwinding) and the reverse rotation command is for power driving (such as winding). (Refer to each following figures.)
• When Pr.807 Speed limit selection = "0, 2", the setting during speed control is applied for the speed limit. When Pr.807
Speed limit selection = "1", Pr.808 Forward rotation speed limit/speed limit is applied for the speed limit.

292 5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
 • When the torque command becomes negative, the setting of Pr.809 Reverse rotation speed limit/reverse-side speed
limit is applied to prevent the speed from increasing in the reverse rotation direction. (The speed limit value and reverse-
side speed limit value are limited at Pr.1 Maximum frequency (maximum 400 Hz under Vector control).)
1
Unwinding Winding
(regenerative driving) (power driving)
Forward
2
Forward
rotation rotation

3
Winding Unwinding
(power driving) (regenerative driving)

Reverse
4
Reverse rotation
rotation

5
Torque Reverse-side Torque Reverse-side
command speed limit value command speed limit value
Speed limit value value Pr.809 value Speed limit value Pr.809

Range where torque

6
control is available

Rotation speed Rotation speed 7

Reverse rotation Forward rotation
power driving regenerative driving

Range where torque

control is available 8
For reverse rotation command For forward rotation command

Rotation speed Range where torque 9

Rotation speed control is available

Range where torque Pr.809

10
control is available Reverse-side
Pr.809 speed limit value
Reverse-side
Speed limit value
speed limit value

Time
Pr.7 Pr.8 Time
Speed limit value
Pr.7 Pr.8

Start signal OFF ON Start signal OFF ON

For power driving For regenerative driving

by reverse rotation command (winding) by forward rotation command (unwinding)

 Speed limit mode switching via external terminals (Pr.1113 = "10")

• The speed limit mode can be switched between 3 and 4 using the Torque control selection (X93) signal.
• To assign the X93 signal, set "93" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
X93 signal Speed limit mode
Mode 3 (positive torque command, same status as
OFF
setting Pr.1113 = "1")
Mode 4 (negative torque command, same status
ON
as setting Pr.1113 = "2")

5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
293
 NOTE
• During the speed limit operation, " " (SL) is displayed on the operation panel and the OL signal is output.
• OL signal is assigned to terminal OL in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect
the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.2 Minimum frequencypage 428
Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to 27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 (multi-speed operation)page 411
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection)page 473
Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500
Pr.125, Pr.126, C2 to C7, C12 to C15 (Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain)page 505

5.4.6 Torque control gain adjustment

Sensorless Vector

Operation is normally stable enough in the initial setting, but some adjustments can be made if abnormal vibration, noise or
overcurrent occur for the motor or machinery.
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
Torque control P
824
gain 1 (current loop 100% 0 to 500% Set the current loop proportional gain.
G213
proportional gain)
Torque control
825 integral time 1
5 ms 0 to 500 ms Set current loop integral compensation time.
G214 (current loop integral
time)
Torque control P Sets the current loop proportional gain when RT signal
834 0 to 500%
gain 2 (current loop 9999 is ON.
G313
proportional gain) 9999 The Pr.824 setting is applied to the operation.
Torque control Sets the current loop integral compensation time when
0 to 500 ms
835 integral time 2 RT signal is ON.
9999
G314 (current loop integral
9999 The Pr.825 setting is applied to the operation.
time)

 Current loop proportional (P) gain adjustment (Pr.824)

• The 100% current loop proportional gain is equivalent to 1000 rad/s during Real sensorless vector control, and to 1400
rad/s during Vector control.
• For ordinary adjustment, try to set within the range of 50 to 500%.
• Set the proportional gain for during torque control.
• If setting value is large, changes in current command can be followed well and current fluctuation relative to external
disturbance is smaller. If the setting value is however too large, it becomes unstable and high frequency torque pulse is
produced.

 Current control integral time adjustment (Pr.825)

• Set the integral time of current control during torque control.
• Torque response increases if set small; current however becomes unstable if set too small.
• If the setting value is small, it produces current fluctuation toward disturbance, decreasing time until it returns to original
current value.

 Using two types of gain (Pr.834, Pr.835)

• Use Pr.834 Torque control P gain 2 (current loop proportional gain), Pr.835 Torque control integral time 2 (current
loop integral time) if the gain setting needs to be switched according to application or if multiple motors are switched by
a single inverter.
• Pr.834, Pr.835 is enabled when the second function selection (RT) signal is turned ON.

294 5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
 NOTE
• The RT signal is a second function selection signal which also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 525.) 1
• The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.

2
 Adjustment procedure
Adjust if any of phenomena such as unusual vibration, noise, current or overcurrent is produced by the motor or machinery.

1. Change the Pr.824 setting while checking the conditions.

3
2. If it cannot be adjusted well, change the Pr.825 setting, and perform step 1 again.
Adjustment method 4
Set Pr.824 lower and Pr.825 longer. First, lower Pr.824 and then check of there is still any abnormal vibration, noise or
current from the motor If it still requires improvement, make Pr.825 longer.

Pr.824
Lower the setting by 10% each time and set a value that is approximately 80 to 90% of the setting
immediately before the abnormal noise or current improves. 5
If set too low, current ripple is produced and produces a sound from the motor that synchronizes with it.
Lengthen the current setting by doubling it each time and set a value that is approximately 80 to 90% of the
Pr.825 setting value, immediately before abnormal noise or current is improved.
If set too long, current ripple is produced and produces a sound from the motor that synchronizes with it. 6

5.4.7 Troubleshooting in torque control 7

Sensorless Vector

Condition Possible cause Countermeasure

• There is incorrect phase sequence
8
between the motor wiring and • Check the wiring. (Refer to page 91.)
encoder wiring.
• Pr.800 Control method selection
is not appropriate.
• Check the Pr.800 setting. (Refer to page 221.) 9
• The speed limit value has not been • Set the speed limit value. (If speed limit value is not input, it
input. becomes 0 Hz by default and the motor does not run.)
• Check that the torque command sent from the controller is
correct.
10
• Torque command varies.
Torque control does not • Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection lower.
1
operate properly. • Set Pr.826 Torque setting filter 1 higher.
• Re-calibrate the settings of C16 Terminal 1 bias command
• The torque command and the torque (torque/magnetic flux), C17 Terminal 1 bias (torque/
recognized by the inverter are magnetic flux), C18 Terminal 1 gain command (torque/
different. magnetic flux), C19 Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic
flux) (Refer to page 510.)
• Torque fluctuation due to motor • Select the magnetic flux observer by Pr.95 Online auto
temperature variation tuning selection. (Refer to page 558.)
• The option to be used and • Correctly set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to
parameter settings do not match. the option to be used. (Refer to page 226.)
When a small torque
command is given, the
• Torque offset calibration is
2 motor rotates in a • Re-calibrate C16 and C17. (Refer to page 510.)
inaccurate.
direction opposite to the
start signal.
• Speed limit is operating.
Torque control cannot
(Speed limit may operate because • Set the acceleration/deceleration time shorter.
operate normally during
the speed limit value will increase or Alternatively, set "0" for the acceleration/deceleration time.
3 acceleration/
decrease according to acceleration/ (Forward/reverse rotation speed limit at this time is the value
deceleration.
deceleration time setting of Pr.7 and at a constant speed.)
The motor vibrates.
Pr.8 when Pr.807 = "0 or 2".)
Output torque is
4 nonlinear for the torque Torque shortage. Return Pr.854 Excitation ratio to the initial value.
command.

Parameters referred to
Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 356
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221

5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
295
 Pr.807 Speed limit selectionpage 287
C16 to C19 (torque setting voltage (current) bias/gain)page 510

5.4.8 Torque control by variable-current limiter control

Vector

By changing the torque limit value for speed control, torque control can be performed.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
6 Vector control
Variable-current limiter
Torque control under Vector control
106 torque control)
(fast-response operation)
0 to 5, 100 to 105 Vector control
800 Control method
20 9, 109 Vector control test operation
G200 selection
10 to 12, 110 to 112 Real sensorless vector control
13 to 14, 113, 114 (PM sensorless vector control)
V/F control (Advanced magnetic flux vector control, PM sensorless
20
vector control)
Select the control method for the second motor.
0 to 6, 10 to 14, 20,
451 Second motor control The second motor is enabled when the RT signal is ON.
9999 100 to 106, 110 to 114
G300 method selection The setting range is the same as that of Pr.800.
9999 The setting value of Pr.800 is used.
• By adding the bias amount to the line speed (master speed) as the speed command value to saturate the speed controller
and changing the torque limit value, torque control can be performed.
• For a positive bias amount (the speed command value faster than the line speed), power driving is applied, and for a
negative bias amount (the speed command value slower than the line speed), regenerative driving is applied.
• Speed control is the basic control. For how to set the speed command and torque limit value, refer to the description of
speed control (page 235).

Speed command value

Line speed

Torque limit value

(absolute value)
0

Generated torque
Power driving
0
Regenerative driving

• Under speed control with Pr.800 = "0 or 100", when the speed command value is changed by an external force, the torque
limit is invalid during a change in the speed command value to adjust the internal speed command value to the actual
speed.
Under variable speed limiter control with Pr.800 = "6 or 106", the process to adjust the speed command value to the actual
speed is not performed, and thus the torque limit remains valid. This prevents torque from suddenly changing at a speed
change.

Speed command Speed command

value value
Line speed Line speed

0 0
Torque limit value Torque limit value
(absolute value) (absolute value)
0 0

Generated torque

0 0
Pr.800=0, 100 Pr.800=6, 106

296 5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
 NOTE
• When Pr.800 = "6 or 106" (torque control by a variable-current limiter), Pr.690 Deceleration check time and Pr.873 Speed 1
limit are ignored.

Parameters referred to 2
Pr.690 Deceleration check timepage 269
Pr.873 Speed limitpage 269
Pr.800 Control method selection, Pr.451 Second motor control method selectionpage 221

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.4 Torque control under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control
297
 5.5 Position control under vector control and PM
sensorless vector control

Refer to
Purpose Parameter to set
page
Pr.419, Pr.464 to
P.B000, P.B020 to P.B050,
To perform Simple position control Parameter position Pr.494, Pr.1221 to
P.B101, P.B120 to P.B188, 303
by setting parameters command Pr.1290, Pr.1292,
P.B190 to P.B195
Pr.1293
To perform position control by pulse Simple pulse train position
P.B000, P.B009, P.B010 Pr.419, Pr.428, Pr.429 319
input to the inverter command
To adjust the gear ratio of the motor
Electronic gear settings P.B001, P.B002, P.B005 Pr.420, Pr.421, Pr.424 325
and machine
Position adjustment P.B007 to P.B008, P.B192 Pr.426 to Pr.427,
327
parameter settings to P.B195 Pr.1294 to Pr.1297
To improve the precision of the
P.B003, P.B004, P.B006, Pr.422, Pr.423, Pr.425,
position control Position control gain
P.B012, P.B013, P.G220, Pr.446, Pr.828, Pr.877, 328
adjustment
P.G224, P.C114 Pr.880, Pr.1298
Pulse monitor selection P.B011 Pr.430 321
To monitor pulses
Cumulative pulse monitoring P.M610 to P.M613 Pr.635 to Pr.638 321

5.5.1 About position control

Vector PM

• In position control, speed commands, which are calculated to eliminate the difference between the command pulse
(parameter setting) and the feedback pulse number, are output to rotate the motor.
• This inverter can perform simple positioning by contact input or position control by simple pulse input to the inverter.

 Control block diagram

Point table
Position Speed Acceleration/deceleration time Dwell time Auxiliary function

Pr.4 to 6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,

Position command Position feed
Pr.232 to Pr.239
RH source selection forward
Pr.465 to Pr.494
Pr.419 command filter Position feed
RM Pr.1222 to Pr.1281 forward gain
Pr.425
RL 0, 10, 100, 110 Pr.423
REX Travel Multi-speed,
STF distance communication

STR
Model position Model speed
Electronic Pr.424 control gain control gain
Command pulse Command pulse selection gear Pr.446 Pr.828
(FR-A8AL) 1 + +
Pr.420 J
Pr.428 Torque coefficient
PGP, PP Pr.421 - -
Command pulse
(FR-A8AL) Position command
integral integral
acceleration/deceleration 0
PGN, NP
time constant Speed feed
forward gain
Command pulse Command pulse selection 2 Pr.877
0,1 2 0,1 2 1 2 0
Pr.428 Position
JOG
loop gain
Pulse train sign Pr.422 +
+ +
Deviation +
NP M
- counter - +
Speed control Torque
control
Pr.429 Differentiation
Clear signal Encoder
selection

Position feedback

298 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 Operation example
• Calculate the speed command so that the difference between the number of pulses of the internal pulse train (if Pr.419 = 1
"0", command pulses are used in the inverter from the number of pulses defined by parameters (Pr.465 to Pr.494)) and
the number of pulses in the feedback from the motor terminal encoder (estimated value when PM sensorless vector control
is used) is 0, and then rotate the motor based on the calculation. 2
1) Once a pulse train is input, pulses are accumulated in the deviation counter, and the droop pulses in this counter
become position control pulses and speed command.
2) When the motor starts to rotate in response to the speed command from the inverter, feedback pulses are also 3
generated by the encoder at the same time. Subtract the encoder feedback pulses or feedback estimate value from the
droop pulses in the deviation counter. The deviation counter keeps rotating the motor while keeping a certain droop
amount. 4
3) If the command pulse input stops, the amount of droop pulses in the deviation counter decreases and thus the speed
slows down. When there is no droop pulse, the motor stops.
4) If the number of droop pulses becomes smaller than the value set in Pr.426 In-position width, the system determines
that positioning is complete and the In-position (Y36) signal is turned ON.
5

Droop pulse value 6

Motor speed
Motor speed [r/min] 7
Command pulse frequency Pulse distribution
[pulses/s]

Acceleration Deceleration Time 8

Stop settling time

9
Pulse train Rough Fine Rough

LX signal 10
Servo on
STF (STR)
Forward (reverse)
Y36 signal
In-position signal

• The pulses are slow during motor acceleration and fast at full speed. The pulses become slower during deceleration, and
eventually reach 0 and the motor stops a little after the command pulse.
This time difference is necessary to ensure stop accuracy and is called stop setting time.

NOTE
• To assign the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal, set "23" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
• To assign the In-position (Y36) signal, set "36" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
• Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
299
 5.5.2 Setting procedure of Vector control (position
control)
Vector

 Using an induction motor

Operating procedure
1. Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 87.)
Install a Vector control compatible option.

2. Set the option to be used (Pr.862).

Set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to the option to be used. (Refer to page 221.)

3. Set the motor and the encoder (Pr.71, Pr.359 (Pr.852), Pr.369 (Pr.851)). (Refer to page 94.)

4. Set the overheat protection of the motor (Pr.9). (Refer to page 415.)
When using the SF-V5RU or a motor equipped with a thermal sensor, set Pr.9 = 0 A.

5. Set the motor capacity and number of motor poles (Pr.80, Pr.81). (Refer to page 221.)
V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).

6. Set the rated motor voltage and frequency (Pr.83, Pr.84). (Refer to page 95.)

7. Select the control method (Pr.800). (Refer to page 221.)

Set Pr.800 = "3" (position control), "4" (speed - position switching), or "5" (position - torque switching) to enable
position control.

8. Select the position command source (Pr.419).

• For position command given by point table, set Pr.419 = "0 (initial value), 10, 100, or 110” to set the positioning
parameters (Pr.465 to Pr.494, Pr.1222 to Pr.1281). (Refer to page 303.)
• For position command given by inverter pulse train input, set Pr.419 = "2" to select a pulse train type for
commands (Pr.428). (Refer to page 320.)
• For position command given from the positioning module of the programmable controller, set Pr.419 = "1" to
select a pulse train type for commands (Pr.428). (Refer to page 316.)

9. Perform the test operation.

As required
• Set the electronic gear. (Refer to page 325.)
• Set the position adjustment parameters. (Refer to page 327.)
• Adjust the position control gain. (Refer to page 328.)
• Set the torque limit. (Refer to page 245.)

NOTE
• The carrier frequency is limited during Vector control. (Refer to page 356.)
• Refer to the Instruction Manual of each option for details on Vector control using the FR-A8APR, FR-A8APS, or FR-A8APA.
• To perform operation in position control mode, the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal needs to be turned ON. To assign the
LX signal, set "23" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).

300 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 Using a PM motor
1
Operating procedure
1. Set the applied encoder (Pr.359 (Pr.852), Pr.369 (Pr.851)).
Refer to page 94 and set the parameters according to the option and the encoder to be used. 2
2. Set the applied motor (Pr.9, Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83, Pr.84).
Set Pr.71 Applied motor, Pr.9 Rated motor current, Pr.80 Motor capacity, Pr.81 Number of motor poles, Pr.83
Rated motor voltage, and Pr.84 Rated motor frequency according to the motor specifications. (Setting "9999 (initial
3
value)" in Pr.80 or Pr.81 selects V/F control.) Set Pr.702, Pr.706, Pr.707, Pr.724 and Pr.725 as required.

3. Select Vector control (speed control). (Refer to page 221.) 4

4. Perform offline auto tuning and encoder position tuning (Pr.96). (Refer to page 542.)
Set Pr.96, and perform tuning.
5
5. Configure the initial parameter setting for the applied motor using Pr.998.
When the setting for the PM motor is selected in Pr.998 PM parameter initialization, Vector control for the PM
motor with an encoder is enabled. 6
"8009": Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF
"8109": Parameter (frequency) settings for an IPM motor other than MM-CF
"9009": Parameter (rotations per minute) settings for an SPM motor 7
"9109": Parameter (frequency) settings for an SPM motor

6. Set Pr.800 to position control.

7. Perform the test operation.

8
NOTE
• For PM motors, after performing offline auto tuning and encoder position tuning, first perform PM parameter initialization. If 9
parameter initialization is performed after setting other parameters, some of those parameters are initialized too. (Refer to
page 231 for the parameters that are initialized.)

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
301
 5.5.3 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control
(position control)
PM

Operating procedure
1. Perform IPM parameter initialization. (Refer to page 230.)
Set "3003 or 3103" in Pr.998 PM parameter initialization or select "3003" in “ " (IPM parameter initial
settings).
Setting Description
3003 Parameter settings for MM-CF IPM motor (rotations per minute)
3103 Parameter settings for MM-CF IPM motor (frequencies)

2. Select the control mode (Pr.800). (Refer to page 221.)

Set Pr.800 = "13" (position control) or "14" (speed/position switchover) to enable position control.

3. Select the position command source (Pr.419).

• For position command given by point table, set Pr.419 = "0 (initial value), 10, 100, or 110” to set the positioning
parameters (Pr.465 to Pr.494, Pr.1222 to Pr.1281). (Refer to page 303.)
• For position command given by inverter pulse train input, set Pr.419 = "2" to select a pulse train type for
commands (Pr.428). (Refer to page 319.)
• For position command given from the positioning module of the programmable controller, set Pr.419 = "1" to
select a pulse train type for commands (Pr.428). (Refer to page 316.)

4. Perform the test operation.

As required
• Set the electronic gear. (Refer to page 325.)
• Set the position adjustment parameters. (Refer to page 327.)
• Adjust the position control gain. (Refer to page 328)
• Set the torque limit. (Refer to page 245.)

NOTE
• The carrier frequency is limited during PM sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 356.)
• Position deviation may occur due to motor temperature changes. In such case, shut off the inverter outputs, and restart.
• Perform position control under PM sensorless vector control only when using an MM-CF IPM motor with low-speed range high-
torque characteristic (Pr.788 = "9999 (initial value)")
• Position control is performed on the assumption of 4096 pulses/motor rotation.
The positioning accuracy is 200 pulses/rev for 1.5K or lower, and 100 pulses/rev for 2K or higher (under no load).
• To perform operation in position control mode, the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal needs to be turned ON. To assign the
LX signal, set "23" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).

302 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
5.5.4 Simple positioning function by parameters
Vector PM
1
Set positioning parameters such as the number of pulses (position) and acceleration/deceleration time in advance to create a
point table (point table method). Positioning operation is performed by selecting the point table.
2
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Simple position control by point table (Settings are
0, 10, 100, 110, 200,
available for the home position data at servo-OFF, clearing
210, 300, 310, 1110,
1310
of the current position 2 monitor value, and the absolute
position control.)
3
419 Position command
0 Position command given by the pulse train input to the FR-
B000 source selection
1
A8AL*1

2
Simple pulse train position command given by the pulse 4
train input to the inverter
Digital position control Set the time period until the inverter stops when the forward
464
sudden stop 0s 0 to 360 s rotation (reverse rotation) command is turned OFF with the
B020
deceleration time position feed forward function. 5
465 First target position
0 0 to 9999
B021 lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 1.
466 First target position
B022 upper 4 digits
0 0 to 9999 6
467 Second target position
0 0 to 9999
B023 lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 2.
468
B024
Second target position
upper 4 digits
0 0 to 9999 7
469 Third target position
0 0 to 9999
B025 lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 3.
470
B026
Third target position
upper 4 digits
0 0 to 9999 8
471 Fourth target position
0 0 to 9999
B027 lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 4.
472
B028
Fourth target position
upper 4 digits
0 0 to 9999 9
473 Fifth target position
0 0 to 9999
B029 lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 5.
474 Fifth target position
0 0 to 9999 10
B030 upper 4 digits
475 Sixth target position
0 0 to 9999
B031 lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 6.
476 Sixth target position
0 0 to 9999
B032 upper 4 digits
477 Seventh target position
0 0 to 9999
B033 lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 7.
478 Seventh target position
0 0 to 9999
B034 upper 4 digits
479 Eighth target position
0 0 to 9999
B035 lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 8.
480 Eighth target position
0 0 to 9999
B036 upper 4 digits
481 Ninth target position
0 0 to 9999
B037 lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 9.
482 Ninth target position
0 0 to 9999
B038 upper 4 digits
483 Tenth target position
0 0 to 9999
B039 lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 10.
484 Tenth target position
0 0 to 9999
B040 upper 4 digits
485 Eleventh target position
0 0 to 9999
B041 lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 11.
486 Eleventh target position
0 0 to 9999
B042 upper 4 digits

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
303
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
487 Twelfth target position
0 0 to 9999
B043 lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 12.
488 Twelfth target position
0 0 to 9999
B044 upper 4 digits
489 Thirteenth target
0 0 to 9999
B045 position lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 13.
490 Thirteenth target
0 0 to 9999
B046 position upper 4 digits
491 Fourteenth target
0 0 to 9999
B047 position lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 14.
492 Fourteenth target
0 0 to 9999
B048 position upper 4 digits
493 Fifteenth target position
0 0 to 9999
B049 lower 4 digits
Set the target position of the point table 15.
494 Fifteenth target position
0 0 to 9999
B050 upper 4 digits
Turning OFF the forward (reverse) rotation command stops
0
1221 Start command edge the motor in the setting time of Pr.464.
0
B101 detection selection Position forward is continued even if the forward (reverse)
1
rotation command is turned OFF.
1222 First positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B120 acceleration time
1223 First positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B121 deceleration time
Set the characteristics of the point table 1.
1224 First positioning dwell
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
B122 time
1225 First positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B123 function 102, 110 to 112
1226 Second positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B124 acceleration time
1227 Second positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B125 deceleration time
Set the characteristics of the point table 2.
1228 Second positioning
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
B126 dwell time
1229 Second positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B127 function 102, 110 to 112
1230 Third positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B128 acceleration time
1231 Third positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B129 deceleration time
Set the characteristics of the point table 3.
1232 Third positioning dwell
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
B130 time
1233 Third positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B131 function 102, 110 to 112
1234 Fourth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B132 acceleration time
1235 Fourth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B133 deceleration time
Set the characteristics of the point table 4.
1236 Fourth positioning dwell
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
B134 time
1237 Fourth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B135 function 102, 110 to 112
1238 Fifth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B136 acceleration time
1239 Fifth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B137 deceleration time
Set the characteristics of the point table 5.
1240 Fifth positioning dwell
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
B138 time
1241 Fifth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B139 function 102, 110 to 112

304 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1242
B140
Sixth positioning
acceleration time
5s 0.01 to 360 s 1
1243 Sixth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B141 deceleration time
Set the characteristics of the point table 6.
1244
B142
Sixth positioning dwell
time
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms 2
1245 Sixth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B143 function 102, 110 to 112
1246
B144
Seventh positioning
acceleration time
5s 0.01 to 360 s 3
1247 Seventh positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B145 deceleration time
Set the characteristics of the point table 7.
1248 Seventh positioning
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms 4
B146 dwell time
1249 Seventh positioning 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B147 sub-function 102, 110 to 112
1250 Eighth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
5
B148 acceleration time
1251 Eighth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B149 deceleration time
1252 Eighth positioning dwell
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
Set the characteristics of the point table 8.
6
B150 time
1253 Eighth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B151 function 102, 110 to 112
1254 Ninth positioning 7
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B152 acceleration time
1255 Ninth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B153 deceleration time
1256 Ninth positioning dwell
Set the characteristics of the point table 9. 8
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
B154 time
1257 Ninth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B155
1258
function
Tenth positioning
102, 110 to 112
9
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B156 acceleration time
1259 Tenth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B157
1260
deceleration time
Tenth positioning dwell
Set the characteristics of the point table 10. 10
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
B158 time
1261 Tenth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B159 function 102, 110 to 112
1262 Eleventh positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B160 acceleration time
1263 Eleventh positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B161 deceleration time
Set the characteristics of the point table 11.
1264 Eleventh positioning
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
B162 dwell time
1265 Eleventh positioning 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B163 sub-function 102, 110 to 112
1266 Twelfth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B164 acceleration time
1267 Twelfth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B165 deceleration time
Set the characteristics of the point table 12.
1268 Twelfth positioning
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
B166 dwell time
1269 Twelfth positioning sub- 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B167 function 102, 110 to 112
1270 Thirteenth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B168 acceleration time
1271 Thirteenth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B169 deceleration time
Set the characteristics of the point table 13.
1272 Thirteenth positioning
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
B170 dwell time
1273 Thirteenth positioning 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B171 sub-function 102, 110 to 112

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
305
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1274 Fourteenth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B172 acceleration time
1275 Fourteenth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B173 deceleration time
Set the characteristics of the point table 14.
1276 Fourteenth positioning
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
B174 dwell time
1277 Fourteenth positioning 0 to 2, 10 to 12, 100 to
10
B175 sub-function 102, 110 to 112
1278 Fifteenth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B176 acceleration time
1279 Fifteenth positioning
5s 0.01 to 360 s
B177 deceleration time
Set the characteristics of the point table 15.
1280 Fifteenth positioning
0 ms 0 to 20000 ms
B178 dwell time
1281 Fifteenth positioning 0, 2, 10, 12, 100, 102,
10
B179 sub-function 110, 112
0 Dog type
1 Count type
2 Data set type
1282 Home position return 3 Stopper type
4
B180 method selection Ignoring the home position (servo-ON position as the home
4
position)
5 Dog type back end reference
6 Count type with front end reference
1283 Home position return
2 Hz 0 to 30 Hz Set the speed for the home position return operation.
B181 speed
1284 Home position return
0.5 Hz 0 to 10 Hz Set the speed immediately before the home position return.
B182 shifting speed
1285 Home position shift
0 0 to 9999 Set the home position shift distance.
B183 amount lower 4 digits
Home position shift amount = Pr.1286 × 10000 digits +
1286 Home position shift
0 0 to 9999 Pr.1285
B184 amount upper 4 digits
Travel distance after
1287
proximity dog ON lower 2048 0 to 9999
B185 Set the travel distance after detecting the proximity dog.
4 digits
Travel distance after proximity dog = Pr.1288 × 10000 +
Travel distance after
1288 Pr.1287
proximity dog ON upper 0 0 to 9999
B186
4 digits
1289 Home position return Set the activation level of torque limit operation for the
40% 0 to 200%
B187 stopper torque stopper-type home position return.
1290 Home position return Set the waiting time until home position return is started
0.5 s 0 to 10 s
B188 stopper waiting time after the inverter detects the pressing status.
Sudden stop signal (X87) normally open input (NO contact
0
1292 Position control terminal input)
0
B190 input selection Sudden stop signal (X87) normally closed input (NC
1
contact input)
1293 Roll feeding mode 0 Roll feed disabled
0
B191 selection 1 Roll feed enabled
*1 During position control under Vector control, if Pr.419 = "1" while the FR-A8AL is not installed (or is disabled), a protective function (E.OPT) is
activated.

 Selecting the position command input method (Pr.419)

• Use Pr.419 to set simple position control by point table.
• Settings are available for the home position data at servo-OFF, clearing of the current position 2 monitor value, and the
absolute position control.
Item Description
Position command The position command input method can be selected.
Home position retention Select whether to retain the home position data when the LX signal is OFF (servo-OFF).
Select whether to clear the current position 2 monitor value when the home position return is completed
Monitor value clearing
or when position control is switched to other control mode.
Absolute position control Select the availability of absolute position control.

306 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 Monitor value clearing*1

Pr.419
Position command Home position retention When home position
When position
control is switched
Absolute position 1
setting control
return is completed to other control
mode

0
Simple position control by point
table (position command given 2
by setting parameters)
Position command given by the
1 pulse train input to the FR-
A8AL*2
Not retained
Not cleared Cleared 3
Simple pulse train position
2 command given by the pulse

10
train input to the inverter
Retained
Disabled
4
100 Not retained
Cleared Cleared
110 Retained
200
Simple position control by point
Not retained
Not cleared Not cleared
5
210 Retained
table (position command given
300 by setting parameters) Not retained
Cleared Not cleared
310
1110 Cleared Cleared Enabled (with the
6
Retained
FR-A8APS
1310 Cleared Not cleared
installed)*3
*1 Timing to clear the current position 2 monitor value differs depending on the setting value. (Refer to page 321.) 7
*2 During position control under Vector control, if Pr.419 = "1" while the FR-A8AL is not installed (or is disabled), a protective function (E.OPT) is
activated.
*3 During position control under Vector control, if Pr.419 = "1110 or 1310" while the FR-A8APS is not installed (or is disabled), a protective function
(E.OPT) is activated. 8
 Positioning by a point table (Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239,
Pr.465 to Pr.494, and Pr.1222 to Pr.1281)
• Create a the point table by setting the following parameters.
9
Position data
[Command Maximum Acceleration Deceleration Auxiliary Point table selection signal
Point table
side] speed time time
Dwell time
function 10
Upper Lower REX RH RM RL
1 Pr.466 Pr.465 Pr.4 Pr.1222 Pr.1223 Pr.1224 Pr.1225 OFF ON OFF OFF
2 Pr.468 Pr.467 Pr.5 Pr.1226 Pr.1227 Pr.1228 Pr.1229 OFF OFF ON OFF
3 Pr.470 Pr.469 Pr.6 Pr.1230 Pr.1231 Pr.1232 Pr.1233 OFF OFF OFF ON
4 Pr.472 Pr.471 Pr.24 Pr.1234 Pr.1235 Pr.1236 Pr.1237 OFF OFF ON ON
5 Pr.474 Pr.473 Pr.25 Pr.1238 Pr.1239 Pr.1240 Pr.1241 OFF ON OFF ON
6 Pr.476 Pr.475 Pr.26 Pr.1242 Pr.1243 Pr.1244 Pr.1245 OFF ON ON OFF
7 Pr.478 Pr.477 Pr.27 Pr.1246 Pr.1247 Pr.1248 Pr.1249 OFF ON ON ON
8 Pr.480 Pr.479 Pr.232 Pr.1250 Pr.1251 Pr.1252 Pr.1253 ON OFF OFF OFF
9 Pr.482 Pr.481 Pr.233 Pr.1254 Pr.1255 Pr.1256 Pr.1257 ON OFF OFF ON
10 Pr.484 Pr.483 Pr.234 Pr.1258 Pr.1259 Pr.1260 Pr.1261 ON OFF ON OFF
11 Pr.486 Pr.485 Pr.235 Pr.1262 Pr.1263 Pr.1264 Pr.1265 ON OFF ON ON
12 Pr.488 Pr.487 Pr.236 Pr.1266 Pr.1267 Pr.1268 Pr.1269 ON ON OFF OFF
13 Pr.490 Pr.489 Pr.237 Pr.1270 Pr.1271 Pr.1272 Pr.1273 ON ON OFF ON
14 Pr.492 Pr.491 Pr.238 Pr.1274 Pr.1275 Pr.1276 Pr.1277 ON ON ON OFF
15 Pr.494 Pr.493 Pr.239 Pr.1278 Pr.1279 Pr.1280 Pr.1281 ON ON ON ON

 Position data settings

• Set the position feed length to Pr.465 to Pr.494.
• The feed length set to each point table is selected by multi-speed terminals (RH, RM, RL and REX).
• Under Vector control with encoder, set the value calculated with the following formula as the position feed length: (encoder
resolution × number of rotations × 4).
• For example, to stop the motor after 100 times of rotations using the SF-V5RU,

The value is calculated with 2048 (pulses/rev) ×100 (rotations per minute) × 4 (multiplier) = 819200 (feed length)

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
307
 To set 819200 as the first feed length, separate the number into the upper and lower 4 digits as follows:

Pr.466 (upper digits) = 81 (decimal), Pr.465 (lower digits) = 9200 (decimal)

• The position feed length of PM sensorless vector control is fixed at 4096 for each motor rotation.

 Acceleration/deceleration time setting

• Set the acceleration/deceleration time for parameters corresponding to each point table.
• The frequency which is the basis of acceleration/deceleration time is Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency. However, 1 Hz/s is the minimum acceleration/deceleration rate (acceleration/deceleration frequency divided
by acceleration/deceleration time). If the acceleration/deceleration rate is smaller than 1, the motor runs at 1 Hz/s or in the
deceleration time.
• The maximum acceleration/deceleration time is limited at 360 seconds.
• During position control, acceleration/deceleration pattern is always the liner acceleration/deceleration, and the Pr.29
Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection setting is ignored.

 Setting the waiting (dwell) time

• Set the waiting (dwell) time which is the interval from the completion of the position command of a selected point table to
the start of the position command of the next point table.
• Set the dwell time from 0 to 20000 ms for parameters corresponding to each point table.

 Auxiliary function setting

• Set the handling and operation methods of the position data in each point table.
• Set the auxiliary function for parameters corresponding to each point table.
Auxiliary function Command method Operation method
Sign (100s digit)
parameter setting (tens place) (ones place)
0 Individual (0)
1 Absolute position Continuous (1)
2 command (0) Loop operation using the point table selected at the
start of the operation (2)
Plus (0)
10 Individual (0)
11 Incremental position Continuous (1)
12 command (1) Loop operation using the point table selected at the
start of the operation (2)
100 Individual (0)
101 Absolute position Continuous (1)
102 command (0) Loop operation using the point table selected at the
start of the operation (2)
Minus (1)
110 Individual (0)
111 Incremental position Continuous (1)
112 command (1) Loop operation using the point table selected at the
start of the operation (2)

• For the sign, select the sign of position data.

• For the command method, select the absolute position command or incremental position command. For the absolute
position command, specify the distance from the home position. For the incremental position command, specify the
distance from the current position command.
• Position commands cannot be received until the completion of the home position return.
• For the operation method, select "individual", "continuous", or "loop operation using the point table selected at the start".
When continuous operation is selected, next point table is executed after a command has been executed.
Set "individual" as the operation method for the point table which is the last of the continuous operation.
When "loop operation using the point table selected at the start" is selected, the positioning operation is the loop. To stop
the operation, turn OFF the STF (STR) signal, or turn ON the X87 (sudden stop) input signal.
• Individual operation is only executed in the selected point table. The dwell time setting is disabled in individual operation.
• Continuous operation setting is not available for the point table 15 ("0, 2, 10, 12, 100, 102, 110 or 112" can be set to
Pr.1281).

308 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 Example 1 of positioning operation using point table (automatic
continuous positioning operation) 1
The following figure shows an operation example using the following point table.
Target position Maximum Acceleration Deceleration Dwell time
Point table
Upper Lower speed (Hz) time(s) time(s) (ms)
Auxiliary function 2
1 (absolute position,
1 100 0 60 5 5 1000
continuous)

2 50 0 30 6 6 0
10 (incremental position,
individual)
3

Position command Point table 1 Point table 2

speed
60Hz(Pr.4)
4
30Hz(Pr.5)
5s 5s

0
(Pr.1222) (Pr.1223) 6s
(Pr.1226)
6s
(Pr.1227) Time
5
Dwell time (Pr.1224)
Target position 1000000 500000
6
Servo ON
(LX) ON

STF ON

RH ON 7
NOTE
• During continuous operation, the position command speed drops to 0 in each point table operation before starting the next
point table operation. 8
• During continuous operation, no point table selection signal is received. Select the position feed length using point table before
turning ON the start command. Only the maximum frequency can be changed during operation.

9
 Example 2 of positioning operation using point table (Automatic loop
positioning operation using the point table selected at the start of the
operation) 10
The following figure shows a loop operation example using the point table 2 to point table 4 in the following point table. The
operation is started from the point table 2 (start point). Set "12" in the auxiliary function of the point table 4 (end point).
Maximum Acceleration Deceleration Dwell time
Point table Target position Auxiliary function
speed (Hz) time (s) time (s) (ms)*1
1 (absolute position,
1 50000 60 1 1 100
continuous)
11 (incremental position,
2 70000 20 2 2 100
continuous)
1 (absolute position,
3 100000 10 4 4 100
continuous)
12 (incremental position,
4 60000 5 3 3 100
continuous)

*1 The positioning operation is the loop. To stop the operation, turn OFF the STF (STR) signal, or turn ON the X87 (sudden stop) input signal.
Operation:

1. The operation is started from the point table 2 (start point).

2. The operation is switched to the one using the point table 3.

3. The operation is switched to the one using the point table 4 (end point).

4. According to the setting in the auxiliary function for the point table 4 (Pr.1237 = "12"), the operation is switched to
the one using the point table 2 selected at the start (loops back to the start point from the end point).

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
309
 5. The loop of operations 1 to 4 executes.
Position command
speed Point table Point table Point table Point table Point table Point table Point table Point table
No.2 No.3 No.4 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.2 No.3
20Hz 20Hz 20Hz
10Hz
5Hz 5Hz
0
Time
100ms 100ms 100ms 100ms 10Hz 100ms 100ms 100ms 10Hz 100ms
Position feed
70000 30000 60000 70000 -130000 60000 70000 -130000
length
0 70000 100000 160000 230000 100000 160000 230000 100000
Servo ON
(LX) ON
STF ON
RM ON

 Example 3 of positioning operation using point table (variable speed

operation)
• The maximum frequency can be changed during positioning operation. Use as many point tables as the number of
maximum speeds to be set.
• The following figure shows an operation example using the following point table.
Target position Maximum Acceleration Deceleration Dwell time
Point table Auxiliary function
Upper Lower speed (Hz) time (s) time (s) (ms)
1 (absolute position,
1 5 0 30 1 1 0
continuous)
11 (incremental
2 3 0 20 Invalid Invalid 0
position, individual)
1 (absolute position,
3 10 0 10 Invalid Invalid 0
continuous)
10 (incremental
4 6 0 5 Invalid Invalid 0
position, individual)

Position command Acceleration time (1 s)

speed of point table 1 Deceleration time (1 s)
30 Hz of point table 1
(Pr.4) 20 Hz
(Pr.5)
10 Hz
(Pr.6) 5 Hz
(Pr.24)
0
50000 30000 20000 60000 Time

Position feed length

0 50000 80000 100000 160000
Servo ON
(LX) ON
STF ON

RH ON

RM

RL
• Set "0" as the dwell time to perform variable speed operation.

 Return to home position during point table positioning

• Home position return is performed to match the command coordinates with the machine coordinates.
• The returned home position can be set as point 0, and positioning operation is available using this.

 Home position return procedure

1. Set parameters related to home position return.

310 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 • Set the home position return method (Pr.1282).
• Set the home position return speed (Pr.1283)
• Set the home position creep speed (Pr.1284)
1
• Set the home position return shift amount if necessary(Pr.1286 × 10000 + Pr.1285).
• Set the post proximity dog travel distance if necessary. (Pr.1288 × 10000 + Pr.1287)
2
2. Turn OFF all point table selections.
• Turn OFF all RH, RM, RL and REX signals.

3. Turn ON the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal. 3

4. Turn ON the start signal (STF or STR).
• Home position return is performed according to the settings.
4
NOTE
• The setting values of the point table 1 are used as acceleration/deceleration time.
• After turning ON the start signal, only the setting values of Pr.1283 Home position return speed, Pr.1284 Home position
return shifting speed can be changed. 5
• Perform home position return at the motor switchover.

 Selecting the home position return method (Pr.1282 to Pr.1288)

6
Pr.1282 Home position return
Description
setting method
Deceleration starts when the Proximity dog signal is turned ON. For the home position after turn OFF
7
of the Proximity dog signal, the position specified by the first Z-phase signal or the position of the first
Z-phase signal shifted by the home position shift amount (Pr.1285, Pr.1286) is used.

Position command
Home position
Point table 1 8
return speed
speed deceleration time
Home position
Creep speed shift amount
0 Dog type*1
Vector
Point table 1 Home 9
acceleration time position
0
Z-phase Time

X76 Proximity dog

10
Point table selection signal

LX
STF
Deceleration starts when the proximity dog signal is turned ON. After the proximity dog, the motor
travels the specified travel distance (Pr.1287, Pr.1288). Then, it uses the position specified by the first
Z-phase signal or position of the Z-phase signal shifted by the home position shift amount (Pr.1285,
Pr.1286).

Home position
Position command Point table 1
return speed
speed deceleration time
Home position
Creep speed
1 Count type*1 shift amount
Point table 1 Travel distance
Vector Home
after proximity
acceleration time dog position
0
Time
Z-phase
X76 Proximity dog

Point table selection signal

LX
STF
The position at which the start signal is input is used as the home position.

Position command speed

Data set type Home position
2 Vector 0
PM
Time
Point table selection signal
LX
STF

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
311
 Pr.1282 Home position return
Description
setting method
A workpiece is pressed to a mechanical stopper, and the position where it is stopped is set as the
home position.
Pressing is confirmed when the estimated speed value remains equal to or lower than the value set in
Pr.865 Low speed detection for 0.5 second during the torque limit operation. (While the stopper-type
home position is performed, Pr.1289 Home position return stopper torque is applied.) After Pr.1290
Home position return stopper waiting time has passed after pressing is confirmed, the home
position is shifted by the home position shift distance (Pr.1285 and Pr.1286). After a position
command is created and the absolute value of the droop pulse (after electronic gear) falls below the
in-position width, the home position return is completed.

Normal
Torque limit level Normal
(Pr.22)
Pressing confirmation level (Pr.1289)
(Pr.22)

Point table 1 Home position

Stopper type Position command
acceleration time return speed
3 Vector speed
PM Home position
shift amount
Home position
0
Time
Point table 1 acceleration time
Creep speed
0.5s Pr.1290
Point table 1
Torque limit deceleration time

Point table selection Pressing confirmed

signal
Servo-ON (LX)
Start signal
The servo ON position is used as the home position.

Ignoring the home Position command speed

position (servo ON Home position
position as the home 0
4 (initial
Time
value) position) Point table selection signal
Vector
LX
PM STF

RDY

Deceleration starts at the front end of the proximity dog. After the back end is passed, the position is
shifted by the post-dog travel distance and home position shift amount. The position after the shifts is
set as the home position.
Set pulses required for deceleration from the creep speed or more as the total of the post-dog travel
distance and home position shift amount.

Point table 1 Point table 1 Post-dog

acceleration time Home position deceleration time travel distance
Position command return speed +
Dog type back end speed Home position
reference Creep speed shift amount
5 Vector Home
PM position
0
Proximity dog Time
Proximity dog
signal (X76)
Point table selection
signal
Servo-ON (LX)
Start signal (STF)

312 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 Pr.1282 Home position return
Description
setting method
Deceleration starts at the front end of the proximity dog, and the position is shifted by the post-dog
1
travel distance and home position shift distance. The position after the shifts is set as the home
position.
Set pulses required for changing the speed from the home position speed to the creep speed or more
as the total of the post-dog travel distance and home position shift amount. 2
Point table 1 Point table 1 Post-dog
acceleration time Home position deceleration time travel distance

Count type with front

Position command
speed
return speed +
Home position 3
end reference Creep speed shift amount
6 Vector
Home

4
PM position
0
Proximity dog Time
Proximity dog
signal (X76)
Point table selection
signal
5
Servo-ON (LX)
Start signal (STF)

*1 If it is set under PM sensorless vector control, Home position return parameter setting error (HP3) occurs.
6
NOTE
• Home position return automatic back-off function
In a system that uses home position return with proximity dog, if the home position return is commanded while the motor is in
7
a position within the proximity dog, the motor moves out of the proximity dog once, then starts deceleration to stop when it
comes to the proximity dog again. The home position return is performed automatically after that.
Creep speed 8
Home position
Home position
Home position return start position
return speed
X76 Proximity dog 9

 Home position return error 10

• If home position return is not normally completed, the following warnings appear on the operation panel.
Operation panel
Name Possible cause
indication
HP1 Home position return setting error • The home position setting has failed.
• Start signal for the point table positioning has turned ON without completing the
home position return.
• The proximity dog signal is turned OFF during transition from the home position
return speed to the creep speed when home position return is performed in the
dog type or dog type back end reference.
• The position command is given for the motor to reach the post-dog travel
distance during transition from the home position return speed to the creep speed
HP2 Home position return uncompleted
when home position return is performed in the count type.
• The position command is given for the motor to reach the total of the post-dog
travel distance and home position shift distance during deceleration from the
creep speed after the proximity dog signal is turned OFF in the dog type back end
reference.
• The speed did not reach the creep speed in the count type with front end
reference.
Home position return parameter
HP3 • An unavailable home position return method is selected.
setting error

• The home position return failure (ZA) signal is output while the home position return warning is occurring. To use the ZA
signal, set "56 (positive logic) or 156 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to
assign the function.

 Sudden stop (Pr.464, Pr.1221, and X87 signal)

• The operation performed during STF(STR)-OFF can be selected with Pr.1221 Start command edge detection selection.

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
313
 • If STF(STR) is turned OFF during positioning or home position returning when Pr.1221 = "0 (initial value)" is set, it stops
in the time set as Pr.464 Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time.

When Pr.1221="0 (initial value)" is set When Pr.1221="1" is set

Position command Position command

speed speed

0 0
Time Time
Pr.464
Servo ON Servo ON
(LX) ON (LX) ON

STF ON STF ON

• Turning ON the Sudden stop signal (X87) during positioning operation or home position return operation, the motor stops
in the setting time of Pr.464. To assign the X87 signal, set "87" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection).

Position command
speed

0
Time
Pr.464
Servo ON
(LX) ON

STF ON

X87 ON

• The input logic of the X87 signal Pr.1292 Position control terminal input selection can be set using.
Pr.1292 setting Input logic (X87)
Normally open input (NO contact
0 (initial value)
input specification)
Normally closed input (NC contact
1
input specification)

NOTE
• When deceleration time longer than the normal deceleration time (including Pr.1223) is set in Pr.464, the normal deceleration
time is applied.
• The X87 signal is effective during position control JOG operation.

 Roll feed mode (Pr.1293)

• If the roll feed mode is enabled in an application that needs repeated positioning in the same direction, such as a conveyor,
positioning can be performed repeatedly without position command overflow.
• When the roll feed mode is enabled (Pr.1293 = "1"), the position where the first position command is created is set as the
home position and the droop pulses are cleared.
When Pr.1293 = "1", simple positioning is available even if home position return cannot be completed.
• Positioning modes which enables the roll feed mode are the point table mode, the home position return mode, and the
JOG mode.

314 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 • Basic operation example
Position command
speed 1

Indication of position
0 1000 0 1000
command or 2
Point table selection current position
signal

3
Servo-ON (LX)
Start signal (STF)

 Input/output signals for point table positioning

Pr.190 to Pr.196 setting
4
Input/ Pr.178 to Pr.189
Signal name Function Positive Negative
output setting
logic logic

X76 Proximity dog

ON: dog ON,
76 — 5
OFF: dog OFF
Input
When turned ON, the motor decelerates and
X87 Sudden stop 87 —
stops according to Pr.464.
Turns ON when the position command 6
operation has completed while the number of
MEND Travel completed — 38 138
droop pulses is within the positioning
completion width.

Output ZA
Home position return Turns ON while the home position return
— 56 156
7
failure warning occurs.
During position
PBSY Turns ON during position command operation. — 61 161
command operation

ZP
Home position return Turns ON after home position return operation
— 63 163
8
completed is complete.

• Output signal operation during positioning by point table

9
Position command
Speed
Motor speed
10
Dwell time
Point table 1
Point table 2
0
Time
Point table selection signal
(RH)
LX
STF
Y36
MEND
PBSY

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
315
 • Output signal operation during positioning with home position return
Home position
Speed return speed
Home position
Creep speed shift amount
Home
position
0
Z-phase Time

X76 Proximity dog

Point table selection signal

LX
STF
ZP
Y36
PBSY
MEND

NOTE
• When the LX signal is turned OFF, the home position return completed (ZP) signal is turned OFF. When the LX signal is turned
ON again while Pr.419 = "10", the ZP signal is also turned ON.

Parameters referred to
Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequencypage 367
Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selectionpage 372

5.5.5 Position control by the FR-A8AL pulse train input

Vector PM

Position control by the command from the positioning module of the programmable controller is available using the FR-A8AL.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0, 10, 100, 110,
Simple position control by point table (Settings are available for
200, 210, 300,
the home position data at servo-OFF, clearing of the current
310, 1110,
419 Position command source position 2 monitor value, and the absolute position control.)
0 1310
B000 selection
1 Position command given by the FR-A8AL pulse train input*1
Simple pulse train position command given by the pulse train
2
input to the inverter
0 Forward/Reverse pulse train
1 Pulse train + rotation direction sign Negative logic
428 2 A/B phase pulse train
Command pulse selection 0
B009 3 Forward/Reverse pulse train
4 Pulse train + rotation direction sign Positive logic
5 A/B phase pulse train
*1 During position control under Vector control, if Pr.419 = "1" while the FR-A8AL is not installed (or is disabled), a protective function (E.OPT) is
activated.

316 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 Connection diagram
• Connection with the positioning module of RD75P type MELSEC iQ-R series is also available. 1
Vector-control-dedicated motors
MCCB Inverter
R/L1 U U
Three-phase
AC power
supply
S/L2
T/L3
V
W
V
W
M 2
E
Forward stroke end
Earth
LSP
(Ground)
Reverse stroke end LSN 3
Pre-excitation (servo on) LX *6
Torque limit SD
Positioning module
command (+) 1
4
MELSEQ iQ-R RD75P
(±10V) (-) 5
FLS
RLS
FR-A8AL
DOG
STOP SD Complementary
PA A *1
5
PAR B
CLEAR CR
PB C
PP Differential

*7
PULSE F
PGP Terminating
PBR D
Encoder 6
NP resistor PZ F
PULSE R ON
PGN PZR G *2

CLRCOM
PG024
SD
VDD
OFF
PG
SD
S
R
7
*4
PG0COM FPZ2 PG24
RDYCOM VDD *5 *3
COM
READY
OPC 8
RDY

*1 The pin number differs according to the encoder used. Speed control, torque control, and position control by pulse train input are available with
or without the Z-phase being connected. 9
*2 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio must be 1:1.
*3 Earth (ground) the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure using a tool such as a P-clip. (Refer to page 87.)
*4 For the complementary, set the terminating resistor selection switch to the OFF position (initial status). (Refer to page 87.)
*5 A separate external power supply of 15 V is necessary according to the encoder power specification. When the encoder output is the differential
line driver type, only 5 V can be input. When the 24 V power supply of the FR-A8AL is used, the power is supplied to the encoder through terminal
10
PG24. When the 5 V/12 V power supply of the FR-A8AL is used, the power is supplied to the encoder through terminal PGV. Do not use the
external power supply simultaneously with the 5 V/12 V power supply or the 24 V power supply. Make the voltage of the external power supply
the same as the encoder output voltage, and connect the external power supply between terminals PG and SD.
*6 Assign the function using Pr.178 to Pr.184, Pr.187 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
*7 The pulse signal from the position module is available for both open collector and differential line driver. However, the connections are different.
(The following figure shows an example for differential line driver.) For the connection method, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8AL.

 Operation outline
• If the pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal is turned ON, output shutoff is canceled and the position control preparation
ready (RDY) signal is turned ON after 0.1 second. When the LSP signal (forward stroke end) or the LSN signal (reverse
stroke end) is turned ON, the motor rotates according to the command pulse. When the forward (reverse) stroke end signal
is turned OFF, the motor does not rotate in the corresponding direction.
• To use the LSP or LSN signal, set the corresponding number in the following table in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input
terminal function selection) to assign the function to an input terminal. When the LSP and LSN signals are not assigned,
the STF signal is used as the forward stroke end signal, and the STR signal is used as the reverse stroke end signal.
Pr.178 to Pr.189 setting Signal
88 LSP
89 LSN

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
317
 • The LSP and LSN signals can be input via an external terminal only regardless of the setting in Pr.338 Communication
operation command source or Pr.339 Communication speed command source.

Forward rotation
Actual rotation
Reverse rotation

Base signal
Servo on (LX)
Forward stroke end (LSP)
Reverse stroke end (LSN)
Position control preparation ready (RDY)
0.1s
Forward rotation pulse train (PGP/PP)
Reverse rotation pulse train (PGN/NP)
In-position (Y36)

 Interface between the position module and the inverter.

• To operate an inverter using a positioning module, the interfaces for the position command pulse train must agree with
each other.
Output form Hardware Input pulse frequency

Command unit Connect Inverter (FR-A8AL)

externally +24
VDD

OPC
Open collector PP(NP) Max 200k pulses/s

SD

*: Wiring length : max. 2 m

Command unit Do not Inverter (FR-A8AL)

connect +24
VDD

OPC
Differential line driver PP(NP) Max 500k pulses/s

PGP(PGN)

*: Wiring length : max. 10 m

 Selecting the pulse train type (Pr.428)

• To select the pulse train input to the FR-A8AL, set "1" in Pr.419 after installing the FR-A8AL on the inverter.

318 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 • The command pulse is switchable according to the position module as shown in the following table.

Command pulse train type

During forward
rotation
During reverse
rotation
Setting of
Pr.428
Remarks 1
Forward pulse RD75 (CW/CCW mode)
train PP Note: When (CW/CCW mode) and (PULSE/
0 (initial value)
Reverse pulse
train
NP SIGN mode) are connected incorrectly, the
motor moves only one direction.
2
PP
Pulse train + sign 1 RD75 (PULSE/SIGN mode)
Negative
logic
NP L H
3
The number of pulses are multiplied by 4 to
count. When differential line driver is used,
A phase pulse
PP the number of pulses after the number
train
B phase pulse NP
2 encoder pulses is quadruplicated should be
500k pulses/s or lower. When open collector
4
train
is used, the number should be 200k pulses/s
or lower.
Forward pulse
train PP 5
3
Reverse pulse NP
train

Pulse train + sign

PP
4
6
NP H L
Positive
logic The number of pulses are multiplied by 4 to
A phase pulse
PP
count. When differential line driver is used,
the number of pulses after the number
7
train
5 encoder pulses is quadruplicated should be
B phase pulse NP 500k pulses/s or lower. When open collector
train
is used, the number should be 200k pulses/s
or lower. 8
5.5.6 Position control by pulse train input to the inverter
Vector PM
9
The simple position pulse train command can be input by pulse train input and simple position pulse train signal (NP) to the
JOG terminal.
10
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0, 10, 100, 110,
Simple position control by point table (Settings are available for
200, 210, 300,
the home position data at servo-OFF, clearing of the current
310, 1110,
419 Position command source position 2 monitor value, and the absolute position control.)
0 1310
B000 selection
1 Position command given by the FR-A8AL pulse train input
Simple pulse train position command given by the pulse train
2
input to the inverter
428 0 to 2 Pulse train + rotation direction Negative logic
Command pulse selection 0
B009 3 to 5 sign Positive logic

 Operation outline
• If the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal is turned ON, output shutoff is canceled and the Position control preparation
ready (RDY) signal is turned ON after 0.1 second. When the LSP signal (forward stroke end) or the LSN signal (reverse
stroke end) is turned ON, the motor rotates according to the command pulse. When the forward (reverse) stroke end signal
is turned OFF, the motor does not rotate in the corresponding direction.
• To use the LSP or LSN signal, set the corresponding number in the following table in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input
terminal function selection) to assign the function to an input terminal. When the LSP and LSN signals are not assigned,
the STF signal is used as the forward stroke end signal, and the STR signal is used as the reverse stroke end signal.
Pr.178 to Pr.189 setting Signal
88 LSP
89 LSN

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
319
 • The LSP and LSN signals can be input via an external terminal only regardless of the setting in Pr.338 Communication
operation command source or Pr.339 Communication speed command source.

Forward rotation
Actual rotation
Reverse rotation

Base signal
Servo on (LX)
Forward stroke end (LSP)
Reverse stroke end (LSN)
Operation ready completion (RDY)
0.1s
Inverter pulse train command
Sign signal (NP)
In-position (Y36)

 Selecting the pulse train type (Pr.428 and NP signal)

• Set Pr.419 Position command source selection = "2" (simple pulse train position command).
• Set "68" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the Simple position pulse train sign (NP)
to the input terminal.
• Select the command pulse train with Pr.428 Command pulse selection.
Pr.428 setting Command pulse train type During forward rotation During reverse rotation

Negative Pulse train + rotation JOG

0 to 2
logic direction sign NP L H

Positive Pulse train + rotation JOG

3 to 5
logic direction sign NP H L

• Select Vector control or PM sensorless vector control to select the position control method.

NOTE
• If Pr.419 = "2" (simple pulse train position command) is set, terminal JOG is used for the simple position pulse train input
regardless of the Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection pulse train input/output selection setting.

5.5.7 Clear signal selection

Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
The values of the position pulse (command pulse, droop
pulse, current position, and current position 2) are cleared
0
429 at the rising edge when the clear (CLR/CLRN) signal is
Clear signal selection 1
B010 switched from OFF to ON.
The values of the position pulse are cleared while the clear
1
(CLR/CLRN) signal is turned ON.
• This function is useful to reset the number of droop pulses to 0 when home position return is performed.
• The Simple position droop pulse clear (CLR) signal is valid when the inverter is in the External operation mode. The NET
position pulse clear (CLRN) signal is valid when the inverter is in the Network operation mode (not applicable when the
FR-A8NS is installed).
• If the simple position droop pulse clear (CLR) signal is turned ON when Pr.429 Clear signal selection = "0", the deviation
counter is cleared at the edge of the signal. The CLR/CLRN signal is also turned ON in synchronization with the zero pulse
signal of the encoder such as the home position return signal, and the deviation counter is cleared.
• For a terminal used for the CLR signal, set "69" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign
the function.

320 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 • For a terminal used for the CLR signal, set "59" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign
the function.
1
When Pr. 429 = "0" When Pr. 429 = "1 (initial value)"

2
Deviation counter Deviation counter
image image
CLR/CLRN ON CLR/CLRN ON 3
Counter clear at the edge of Counter clear while ON
turning on of the signal

NOTE 4
• The accumulated number of pulses is cleared at base shutoff or when the CLR/CLRN signal is turned ON.
• Refer to page 321 for the condition to clear the values of the position pulse.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. 5
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to 6
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521

5.5.8 Pulse monitor 7

Vector PM

Various pulses can be monitored.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 8
0 to 5, 12, 13, 100 to 105,
112, 113, 1000 to 1005,
1012, 1013, 1100 to 1105,

430
1112, 1113, 2000 to 2005, Shows the various pulse conditions during 9
Pulse monitor selection 9999 2012, 2013, 2100 to 2105, operation as the number of pulses.
B011
2112, 2113, 3000 to 3005,
3012, 3013, 3100 to 3105,
3112, 3113 10
8888, 9999 Shows the frequency monitor.
635*1 Cumulative pulse clear signal
0 0 to 3
Select the clearing method for the cumulative
M610 selection pulse monitor.
Set the division scaling factor on the cumulative
636*1 Cumulative pulse division
1 1 to 16384 pulse for the Vector control compatible plug-in
M611 scaling factor
option.
Control terminal option-
637*1 Cumulative pulse division 1 1 to 16384
Set the division scaling factor on the cumulative
M612 pulse for the control terminal option (FR-A8TP).
scaling factor
Select the processing method for the cumulative
638*1 Cumulative pulse storage 0 0 to 3 pulse monitor value when the power is turned OFF
M613 or the inverter is reset.
*1 The setting is available when a Vector control compatible option is installed.

 Pulse monitor selection (Pr.430)

• Shows the various pulse conditions during operation as the number of pulses. Set "0" in Pr.52 Operation panel main
monitor selection to display the output frequency monitor.

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
321
 • Also, setting "26 to 31" in Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992 (multifunction monitor) changes the electronic gear operation
setting in the case of monitoring pulses. (Refer to page 446.)
Pr.430 setting Description
[][][]0 Displays the lower of the position command (accumulated value of command pulses).
[][][]1 Displays the upper of the position command (accumulated value of command pulses).
[][][]2 Displays the lower of the current position (accumulated value of feedback pulses*1).
[][][]3 Pulse monitor Displays the upper of the current position (accumulated value of feedback pulses*1).
[][][]4 selection Displays the lower of the accumulated value of droop pulses.
[][][]5 Displays the upper of the accumulated value of droop pulses.
[][]12 Displays the lower of the current position 2 (accumulated value of feedback pulses*1).
[][]13 Displays the upper of the current position 2 (accumulated value of feedback pulses*1).
[]0[][] Displays the monitor item selected in the pulse monitor selection after the electronic gear operation.
For pulse monitor
Displays the monitor item selected in the pulse monitor selection before the electronic gear
[]1[][] selection
operation.
Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor (position command, current position,
and droop pulse) before the electronic gear operation.
0[][][]
Displays the item in the PLC function special register (position command, current position, droop
pulse, and current position 2) before the electronic gear operation.
Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor (position command, current position,
and droop pulse) after the electronic gear operation.
1[][][]
For the multifunction Displays the item in the PLC function special register (position command, current position, droop
monitor / PLC pulse, and current position 2) after the electronic gear operation.
function special Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor (position command, current position,
register and droop pulse) before the electronic gear operation.
2[][][]
Displays the item in the PLC function special register (position command, current position, droop
pulse, and current position 2) before the electronic gear operation.
Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor (position command, current position,
and droop pulse) after the electronic gear operation.
3[][][]
Displays the item in the PLC function special register (position command, current position, droop
pulse, and current position 2) after the electronic gear operation.
Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor (position command, current position,
and droop pulse) after the electronic gear operation.
8888
Displays the item in the PLC function special register (position command, current position, droop
Output frequency pulse, and current position 2) after the electronic gear operation.
display Displays the monitor item selected in the multifunction monitor (position command, current position,
and droop pulse) before the electronic gear operation.
9999
Displays the item in the PLC function special register (position command, current position, droop
pulse, and current position 2) before the electronic gear operation.
*1 Accumulated value of estimated feedback pulses when PM sensorless vector control is used

• Position pulses are cleared according to the following conditions.

Position command / current position / droop pulse
Clearing condition Pr.419 setting
0, 100, 200, 300 10, 110, 210, 310 1, 2 1110, 1310
Servo-OFF (LX-OFF)
○ × ○ ×
(output shutoff)
Clear signal input*2 ○ ○*3 ○ ×*5
Home position return
completed ○*1 ○*1*4 —*6 ○*1*4

When position control is

switched to other control ○ ○ ○ ○
mode
Clear signal input
(under the control mode
× × × ×
other than position
control)

322 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 Current position 2
Clearing condition
0 10 100 110 1, 2
Pr.419 setting
1110 200 210 300 310 1310
1
Servo-OFF (LX-OFF)
× × × × × × × × × × ×
(output shutoff)
Clear signal input*2 ○ ○*3 ○ ○*3 ○ ×*5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ×*5 2
Home position return
completed
× × ○ ○ —*6 ○ × × ○ ○ ○

When position control is

switched to other control ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×*7 ×*7 ×*7 ×*7 ×*7 3
mode
Clear signal input
(under the control mode
other than position
× × × × × × ○*7 ○*7 ○*7 ○*7 ○*7 4
control)
○: cleared, ×: not cleared
*1
*2
The droop pulses are not cleared.
The CLR/CLRN signal is input when a value other than "1" is set in Pr.419, and the signal is input through terminal CR of the FR-A8AL when
5
Pr.419 = "1".
*3 Pulses are cleared when a clear signal is input. (The home position information is not retained.)
*4 Pulses are cleared only when the home position return is completed. Once the pulses are cleared, they are not cleared even if the LX signal is
turned ON. 6
*5 The data is cleared when absolute position control is disabled.
*6 The home position return is not available.
*7 The following shows the example of the clearing the value of the current position 2 monitor under the control mode other than the position control
mode. 7
MC ON OFF ON STF ON OFF
STF ON CLR OFF ON
Monitor value
Cleared to 0
8
updated
by turning ON
Monitoring of Monitoring of of the CLR signal

9
current position 2 current position 2

0 0
Position Other than position Position
control control (speed) control
Other than position control (speed)
10
Not cleared to 0 at Not cleared to 0 at
the control switchover the control switchover

NOTE
• The monitor value of the current position 2 is not cleared when switching between the first and second motors.
• For details on the special register for the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.

 Pulse monitoring on the operation panel (FR-DU08)

• The position command, current position and the status of droop pulses can be displayed on the operation panel.
• If displayed data has signs, minus signs appear for both upper and lower digits.
• If -99999999 or 99999999 is exceeded on the pulse monitor, the monitor value is reset to 0.
Display data Monitor display without signs Monitor display with signs
Lower monitor
-10000
Upper monitor
Lower monitor
-100
Upper monitor

NOTE
• The pulse count starts at servo on.

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
323
  Cumulative pulse monitoring
• When the Vector control compatible plug-in option or the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) is used, the accumulated value
of the encoder pulses can be monitored.
• The cumulative pulse monitor is available when "71 to 74" is set in the monitor selection parameters (Pr.52, Pr.774, Pr.775,
Pr.776, and Pr.992).
Pr.52, Pr.774 to Display with
Monitor item Description
Pr.776, Pr.992 minus sign
The cumulative number of pulses is displayed (for Vector control compatible
Cumulative pulse 71 ○*1 plug-in option). (Monitoring range: -32767 to 32767)
Cumulative pulse The number of the cumulative pulses carrying overflow times is displayed (for
overflow times
72 ○*1 Vector control compatible plug-in option).
Cumulative pulse The cumulative number of pulses is displayed (for the FR-A8TP). (Monitoring
(control terminal option)
73 ○*1 range: -32767 to 32767)
Cumulative pulse
overflow times (control 74 ○*1 The number of the cumulative pulse overflow times is displayed (for FR-A8TP).
terminal option)
*1 Negative values are not displayed on the operation panel. The values "-1 to -32767" are displayed as "65535 to 32769" on the operation panel.

 Cumulative pulse division scaling factor (Pr.636, Pr.637)

• Set the division scaling factor on the cumulative pulse in Pr.636 or Pr.637.
• Cumulative pulse count value calculation method
Cumulative pulse count value = Cumulative pulse division scaling factor × (Cumulative pulse overflow times × 32768 +
Cumulative pulse monitor value)
Cumulative pulse count value: Number of pulses multiplied by 4
Cumulative pulse division scaling factor: Pr.636, Pr.637

 Cumulative pulse monitor value clear (Pr.635)

• The cumulative pulse monitor and the cumulative pulse overflow times can be cleared by X52 signal or X53 signal.
• To input the X52 or X53 signal, set "52 (X52)" or "53 (X53)" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)
to assign the function to a terminal.
• Use Pr.635 Cumulative pulse division scaling factor to select the clearance method for the cumulative pulse monitor
and the cumulative pulse overflow times.
X52 signal X53 signal
Pr.635 setting
Cumulative pulse monitor value clear Cumulative pulse monitor clear (control terminal option)
0 Cleared at the edge when the signal is switched to ON. Cleared at the edge when the signal is switched to ON.
1 Cleared while the signal is ON. Cleared at the edge when the signal is switched to ON.
2 Cleared at the edge when the signal is switched to ON. Cleared while the signal is ON.
3 Cleared while the signal is ON. Cleared while the signal is ON.

Cumulative pulse Cumulative pulse

Cumulative pulse Cumulative pulse
overflow times overflow times

Clear signal Clear signal

(X52, X53) ON (X52, X53) ON

Cleared at the ON edge Cleared while the signal is ON

 Cumulative pulse storage

• The cumulative pulse monitor value and cumulative pulse overflow times can be retained when the power is turned OFF
or the inverter is reset.
Cumulative pulse monitor / Cumulative pulse overflow Cumulative pulse monitor / Cumulative pulse overflow
Pr.638
times times (Control terminal option)
setting
At power-OFF At reset At power-OFF At reset
0 Not stored in the EEPROM Cleared Not stored in the EEPROM Cleared
1 Stored in the EEPROM Retained Not stored in the EEPROM Cleared
2 Not stored in the EEPROM Cleared Stored in the EEPROM Retained
3 Stored in the EEPROM Retained Stored in the EEPROM Retained

324 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 NOTE
• When the power is turned OFF during the reset process, the cumulative pulse monitor value and the cumulative pulse overflow 1
times are not stored in the EEPROM.
• For storing the cumulative pulse monitor value and the cumulative pulse overflow times in the EEPROM at power OFF, connect
R1/L11 with P/+, and S1/L21 with N/- so that the control power is retained. When connecting the FR-HC2 high power factor
converter or the converter unit (FR-CC2), assign the FR-HC2/FR-CC2 instantaneous power failure detection (X11) signal to
2
an input terminal to input the IPF signal from the FR-HC2/FR-CC2 to the terminal for X11 signal.

3
Parameters referred to
Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 446

5.5.9 Electronic gear settings 4

Vector PM

Set the gear ratio between the machine gear and motor gear.
5
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
Command pulse scaling factor
420
B001
numerator (electronic gear 1 1 to 32767 6
numerator) Set the electronic gear.
Command pulse multiplication Pr.420 is the numerator and Pr.421 is the denominator.
421
denominator (electronic gear 1 1 to 32767
B002
denominator) 7
Use it when the rotation is not smooth because the
424 Position command acceleration/
0s 0 to 50 s electronic gear ratio is large (10 times or larger) and the
B005 deceleration time constant
rotation speed is slow.
8
 Gear ratio calculation (Pr.420, Pr.421)
The position resolution (travel distance per pulse Δ [mm]) is the travel distance per motor rotation Δs [mm] and the feedback
pulse Pf [pulses/rev] of the detector. 9
Δ : Travel distance per pulse [mm]
Δs
Δ ＝ Δs: Travel distance in one motor rotation [mm]
Pf pf: Number of feedback pulses [pulse/rev] (the number of pulses after the number encoder
pulses is quadruplicated) 10
The travel distance in 1 command pulse can be separately specified with a parameter and so an integer can be set as the travel
distance in 1 command pulse.
Δs Pr.420
Δ ＝ ×
Pf Pr.421

The following formula shows the relationship between the motor speed and internal command pulse frequency.
Pr.420 No fo: internal command pulse frequency [pulses/s]
fo × = Pf ×
Pr.421 60 No: motor rotation speed [r/min]

NOTE
• Set the electronic gear ratio in the range of 1/50 to 20. Note that, if the setting value is too small, the speed command will also
be too small; while if it is too large, the speed ripple will be too large.

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
325
 Setting example 1 Setting example 2
In a driving system whose ball screw pitch is PB = 10 (mm) and the
reduction ratio is 1/n = 1, the electronic gear ratio is Δ s = 10 (mm)
Find the internal command pulse frequency for the rated motor speed
when Δ = 0.01 (mm) and Pf = 4000 (pulses/rev) is set as the number of the dedicated motor.
of feedback pulses. Based on this, use the following formula: Where the command pulse ratio (Pr.420/ Pr.421) = 1,
the number of encoder pulses = 2048 (pulses/rev), and the feedback
s Pr.420
 = × pulse pf = 2048 × 4.
Pf Pr.421
No Pr.421
fo = 2048 × 4 × ×
Pr.420 Pf 60 Pr.420
=  ×
Pr.421 s
= 204800
4000 4 The internal command pulse is 204800 (pulses/s) in accordance with
= 0.01 × =
10 1 the above formula.
Thus, set the parameters as follows: Pr.420 = "4", Pr.421 = "1".

 Relationship between the position resolution and system accuracy

The system accuracy (the positioning accuracy of the machine) is the sum of electric deviation and mechanical deviation.
Normally try to prevent the total deviation from being affected by the electronic deviation. Refer to the following relationship as
a reference.
1 1
Δ <( to ) × Δε Δε: positioning accuracy
5 10

 Motor stop characteristics

When running the motor by the parameter settings, the relationship between the internal command pulse frequency and the
number of motor rotations is as shown in the figure on page 299. Pulses as much as the motor speed delay are accumulated
in the deviation counter. These pulses are called droop pulses (ε). The relationship between the command frequency (fo) and
position loop gain (Kp: Pr.422) is shown in the following formula.
fo 204800
ε= [pulse] [pulse] (with the rated motor speed)
Kp 25

The number of droop pulses (ε) is 8192 with the initial value Kp = 25 s-1.

Since the inverter has droop pulses during operation, a stop settling time (ts), which is the time between the zero command
output and the motor stop, is required. Set the operation pattern taking into the account the stop setting time.
1
ts = 3 × [s]
Kp

The stop settling time (ts) is 0.12 second for the initial value Kp = 25 s-1.
The accuracy of positioning Δε is (5 to 10) × Δ = Δε [mm]

 Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (Pr.424)

• If the electronic gear ratio is large (1:10 or larger) and the rotation speed is slow, the rotation is not smooth and the rotation
shape becomes like a pulse.
Set this option in such a case to smoothen the rotation.
• If the command pulse frequency varies rapidly when no acceleration time can be assigned to the command pulse,
overshoot or excessive error alarms may occur. Set this option in such a case to set the acceleration/deceleration time.
Normally it is set to 0.

Parameters referred to
Pr.422 Position control gainpage 328

326 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
5.5.10 Position adjustment parameter settings
Vector PM
1
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
426
In-position width 100 pulses 0 to 32767 pulses
Set the number of droop pulses that triggers the In-position 2
B007 (Y36) signal.
Set the number of droop pulses that activates Excessive
427 0 to 400K
Excessive level error 40K position fault (E.OD).
B008
9999 Function disabled 3
1294 Position detection lower
0 0 to 9999 Set the lower four digits of the position detection value.
B192 4 digits
1295 Position detection upper
B193 4 digits
0 0 to 9999 Set the upper four digits of the position detection value. 4
0 The position is detected on both the plus and minus sides.
1296 Position detection
0 1 The position is detected on the plus side only.
B194 selection

1297 Position detection

2 The position is detected on the minus side only.
Set the hysteresis width for the detected position where the
5
0 0 to 32767
B195 hysteresis width Position detection level (FP) signal turns ON.

6
 In-position width (Pr.426, Y36 signal)
• The Y36 signal is used as the in-position signal.
• If the number of droop pulses is equal to or smaller than the Pr.426 setting value, the In-position (Y36) signal turns ON. 7
• To use the Y36 signal, set "36 (positive logic) or 136 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function.

 Excessive level error (Pr.427) 8

• If the number of droop pulses exceeds the Pr.427 setting, a position error is detected, Excessive position fault (E.OD) is
activated and the inverter output is shut off. Increase the error threshold level when a small value is set as the Pr.422
Position control gain setting value. Set a small value for early detection even when the load is heavy.
9
• If Pr.427 = "9999", E.OD is not activated regardless of the amount of droop pulses.

 Position detection signal (Pr.1294 to Pr.1297, FP signal) 10

• The Position detection level (FP) signal is turned ON when the current position [before the electronic gear] exceeds the
Pr.1295 × 10000 + Pr.1294 position detected. To use the FP signal, set "60 (positive logic) or 160 (negative logic)" in any
of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function.
• Whether the position detection is determined on the plus side or minus side can be selected by Pr.1296 Position
detection selection. When "0" is set, the position is detected on both the plus and minus sides. When "1" is set, the
position is detected on the plus side only. When "2" is set, the position is detected on the minus side only.

Position Position detection level Pr.1295 10000 + Pr.1294

[before electronic gear]
0 Time
Position detection level
Pr.1295 10000 + Pr.1294

ON ON
FP (For Pr.1296 = 0)
ON
FP (For Pr.1296 = 1)
ON
FP (For Pr.1296 = 2)

• When a current position varies, the Position detection level (FP) signal may repeat ON/OFF (chatter). Setting hysteresis
to the detected position prevents chattering of the signal. Use Pr.1297 Position detection hysteresis width to set a
hysteresis width.

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
327
 Current position
Position
[before electronic gear]
Pr.1297
Position detection level
Pr.1295 10000 + Pr.1294 Pr.1297

Time
ON ON ON
FP

5.5.11 Position control gain adjustment

Vector PM

Easy gain tuning is provided as an easy tuning method. For details about easy gain tuning, refer to page 254.
If easy gain tuning does not produce any effect, make fine adjustments by using the following parameters.
Set "0" to Pr.819 Easy gain tuning selection before setting the following parameters.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
422
B003
Position control gain 25 s-1 0 to 150 s -1 Set the gain for the position loop.

1298
Second position control gain 25 s-1 0 to 150 s-1 Set the position loop gain for the second motor.
B013
423 Function to cancel a delay caused by the droop pulses in the
Position feed forward gain 0% 0 to 100%
B004 deviation counter.
425 Position feed forward
0s 0 to 5 s Input the primary delay filter for the feed forward command.
B006 command filter
446
B012
Model position control gain 25 s-1 0 to 150 s-1 Set the gain for the model position controller.

828
Model speed control gain 60% 0 to 1000% Set the gain for the model speed controller.
G224
Speed feed forward control/ 0, 1 Perform position feed forward control.
877
model adaptive speed 0
G220 2 Model adaptive position control becomes valid.
control selection
880
Load inertia ratio 7-fold 0 to 200-fold Set the load inertia ratio for the motor.
C114

 Position loop gain (Pr.422, Pr.1298)

• Make adjustment when any of such a phenomena as unusual vibration, noise and overcurrent of the motor/machine
occurs.
• Increasing the setting improves traceability for the position command and also improves servo rigidity at a stop, but
oppositely makes an overshoot and vibration more liable to occur.
• Normally set this parameter within the range about 5 to 50.
Movement/ condition How to adjust Pr.422
Increase the setting value.

Response is slow. Increase the setting value by 3 s-1 until immediately before an overshoot,
stop-time vibration or other instable phenomenon does not occur, and set
about 80 to 90% of that value.
Lower the setting value.
Overshoot, stop-time
vibration or other instable Lower the setting value by 3 s-1 until immediately before an overshoot, stop-
phenomenon occurs. time vibration or other instable phenomenon does not occur, and set about
80 to 90% of that value.

 Position feed forward gain (Pr.423)

• This function is designed to cancel a delay caused by the droop pulses in the deviation counter. Set this parameter when
a sufficient position response cannot be obtained after setting Pr.422.
• When a tracking delay for command pulses poses a problem, increase the setting gradually and use this parameter within
the range where an overshoot or vibration will not occur.
• This function has no effects on servo rigidity at a stop.
• Normally set this parameter to 0.
• When setting Pr.423, set Pr.877 = "0 or 1" to enable position feed forward control.

328 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 Model adaptive position control (Pr.446)
• Set each response for position commands and for load and external disturbances individually. 1
• Set this parameter when a sufficient position response cannot be obtained after setting Pr.422.
• When setting Pr.446, set Pr.877 = "2" to enable the model adaptive position control, Pr.828 Model speed control gain ≠
"0", and a load inertia ratio in Pr.880 Load inertia ratio. 2
• Set a small value in Pr.446 first, and then increase the setting gradually and use this parameter within the range where an
overshoot or vibration will not occur.
3
5.5.12 Troubleshooting in position control
4
Vector PM

Condition Possible cause Countermeasure

There is incorrect phase sequence
between the motor wiring and encoder
wiring.
Check the wiring. (Refer to page 87.)
5
The setting of Pr.800 Control method
Check the Pr.800 setting. (Refer to page 221.)
selection is not appropriate.
No LX signal or STF/STR signal is input. Check if the signals are properly input. 6
Check if the command pulse is properly input (check the
accumulated value for command pulses in Pr.430 Pulse monitor
A command pulse or NP signal is not selection). Check the command pulse type in Pr.428 Command

The motor does not rotate.

correctly input. pulse selection.
Check that the position pulse sign (NP) is assigned to an input
7
terminal (inverter pulse input).
The setting in Pr.419 Position
command source selection is
incorrect.
Check the Pr.419 Position command source selection. 8
When simple position control by a point
table (Pr.419 = "0") is used, the position
Check the position feed length in Pr.465 to Pr.494.
feed length set by Pr.465 to Pr.494 is not
correct.
9
The option to be used and parameter Correctly set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to the
settings do not match. option to be used. (Refer to page 226.)
Check the command pulse type in Pr.428 Command pulse
selection.
10
Check if the command pulse is properly input (check the
A command pulse is not correctly input.
accumulated value of command pulses in Pr.430). Check that the
The position is unfavorably position pulse sign (NP) is assigned to an input terminal (inverter
shifted.
pulse input).
The command is affected by noise. Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection lower.
Noise is superpositioned on the encoder Change the earthing (grounding) position of the shielded cable.
feedback signals. Alternatively, do not connect it.
Position loop gain is too high. Set Pr.422 Position control gain lower.
Hunting occurs in the motor Perform easy gain tuning.
or the machine. Speed loop gain is too high. Set Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1 lower and Pr.821
Speed control integral time 1 higher.
Machine movement is Acceleration/deceleration time settings
Set Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time lower.
unstable. are affecting adversely.

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
329
  Flowchart
Position control is not
exercised normally

Have you checked N

the speed control items?

Check the speed

Y control measures.

Position shift occurs. Y

N Have you made N

the electronic gear
setting?
Set the electronic gear.
Y
(Pr. 420, Pr. 421)

The forward (reverse) Y

rotation stroke end signal has
turned off before completion
of positioning. Do not turn off the forward
(reverse) rotation stroke end
signal before completion of
N positioning.

Motor or machine is Y
hunting.

N
The position loop gain N
(Pr. 422) is high.

Y
Perform easy gain tuning.
The speed control gain is high.
Decrease Decrease the speed control
the position loop gain proportional gain (Pr. 820).
(Pr. 422). Increase the speed control
integral time (Pr. 821).
Machine operation is Y
unstable.
Insufficient torque.
N Increase the excitation
ratio (Pr. 854).

Please contact your sales

representative.

NOTE
• The speed command of position control is related to speed control. (Refer to page 235.)

330 5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
 Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration timepage 367
Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367
1
Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 356
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221
Pr.802 Pre-excitation selectionpage 715
Pr.819 Easy gain tuning selectionpage 254
Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1page 254 2
Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1page 254

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.5 Position control under vector control and PM sensorless vector control
331
 5.6 Adjustment during Real sensorless vector control,
Vector control, PM sensorless vector control

Refer to
Purpose Parameter to set
page
To stabilize speed and torque feedback Speed detection filter, torque P.G215, P.G216, Pr.823, Pr.827,
332
signal detection filter P.G315, P.G316 Pr.833, Pr.837
To change excitation ratio Excitation ratio P.G217 Pr.854 332

5.6.1 Speed detection filter and torque detection filter

Sensorless Vector PM

Set time constant of primary delay filter for speed feedback signal and torque feedback signal.
Speed loop response is reduced. Under ordinary circumstances, therefore, use the initial value as it is.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 Without filter
823
Speed detection filter 1 0.001 s Set the time constant of primary delay filter for speed
G215*1 0.001 to 0.1 s
feedback signal.
0 Without filter
827
Torque detection filter 1 0s Set the time constant of primary delay filter torque
G216 0.001 to 0.1 s
feedback signal.
Second function of Pr.823 (enabled when the RT
833 0 to 0.1 s
*1 Speed detection filter 2 9999 signal is ON)
G315
9999 Same as Pr.823 setting
Second function of Pr.827 (enabled when the RT
837 0 to 0.1 s
Torque detection filter 2 9999 signal is ON)
G316
9999 Same as Pr.827 setting

*1 The setting is available when a Vector control compatible option is installed.

 Stabilizing speed detection (Pr.823, Pr.833)

• Speed loop response is reduced. Under ordinary circumstances, therefore, use the initial value as it is.
If there is speed ripple due to high frequency disturbance, adjust until speed stabilizes by gradually raising the setting.
Speed is oppositely destabilized if the setting value is too large.
• This setting is valid under Vector control only.

 Stabilizing torque detection (Pr.827, Pr.837)

• Current loop response is reduced. Under ordinary circumstances, therefore, use the initial value as it is.
If there is torque ripple due to high frequency disturbance, adjust until speed stabilizes by gradually raising the setting.
Speed is oppositely destabilized if the setting value is too large.

 Employing multiple primary delay filters

• Use Pr.833 and Pr.837 if changing filter according to application. Pr.833, Pr.837 is enabled when the Second function
selection (RT) signal is turned ON.

NOTE
• The RT signal is a second function selection signal which also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 525.)
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.

5.6.2 Excitation ratio

Sensorless Vector

The excitation ratio can be lowered to enhance efficiency for light loads. (Motor magnetic noise can be reduced.)

332 5. PARAMETERS
5.6 Adjustment during Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control
 Pr. Name Initial value
Setting
range
Description 1
854
Excitation ratio 100% 0 to 100% Set an excitation ratio when there is no load.
G217
2
Excitation ratio
[%]

100
3
(Initial value)

Pr.854
setting
4

0 100 Load[%]
5
NOTE
• When excitation ratio is reduced, output torque startup is less responsive.
• The setting of Pr.854 is invalid if Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment or Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment is set 6
to "1" (flux command according to terminal).

5.6.3 Gain adjustment of current controllers for the d 7

axis and the q axis
PM
8
The gain of the current controller can be adjusted.

Pr. Name
Initial
value
Setting
range
Description 9
824 Torque control P gain 1 (current
100% 0% to 500% The proportional gain of the current controller is set.
G213 loop proportional gain)
825
G214
Torque control integral time 1
(current loop integral time)
5 ms 0 to 500 ms The integral time of the current controller is set. 10
• Use Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) to adjust the proportional gain of current
controllers for the d axis and the q axis. The 100% gain is equivalent to 1000 rad/s. Setting this parameter higher improves
the trackability for current command changes. It also reduces the current fluctuation caused by external disturbances.
• Use Pr.825 Torque control integral time 1 (current loop integral time) to set the integral time of current controllers for
the d axis and the q axis. If the setting value is small, it produces current fluctuation against external disturbances,
decreasing time until it returns to original current value.

NOTE
• Pr.834 Torque control P gain 2 (current loop proportional gain) and Pr.835 Torque control integral time 2 (current loop
integral time) are valid when the RT signal turns ON.
In this case, replace them for Pr.824 and Pr.825 in the description above.

5. PARAMETERS
5.6 Adjustment during Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control
333
 5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters

Refer to
Purpose Parameter to set
page
To set the time Real time clock function P.E020 to P.E022 Pr.1006 to Pr.1008 334
To set a limit for the reset function.
Reset selection/
To shut off output if the operation panel
disconnected PU P.E100 to P.E102,
disconnects. Pr.75 336
detection/PU stop P.E107
To force deceleration to a stop on the
selection/reset limit
operation panel.
To select the display language of the PU display language
P.E103 Pr.145 339
parameter unit selection
To control the buzzer of the parameter unit and
PU buzzer control P.E104 Pr.990 340
operation panel
To adjust the LCD contrast of the parameter
PU contrast adjustment P.E105 Pr.991 340
unit
To turn OFF the operation panel when not
Display-off setting P.E106 Pr.1048 340
using it for a certain period of time
To switch the monitor display of the operation
panel to the PID set point setting screen by Direct setting P.E108 Pr.1000 340
simply turning the setting dial
To use the USB memory USB host reset P.E110 Pr.1049 341
To use the setting dial of the operation panel
Operation panel operation
like a potentiometer to set the frequency. P.E200 Pr.161 341
selection
To disable the operation panel.
To change the frequency change increments
Frequency change
which changes when using the setting dial of P.E201 Pr.295 342
increment amount setting
the operation panel
To use the regeneration unit to increase the Regenerative brake
P.E300, P.G107 Pr.30, Pr.70 724
motor braking torque selection
To change the overload current rating
Multiple rating setting P.E301 Pr.570 343
specification
Input voltage mode
To input a voltage between 480 V and 500 V P.E302 Pr.977 345
selection
Parameter write disable
To prevent parameter rewriting P.E400 Pr.77 345
selection
To restrict parameters with a password Password P.E410, P.E411 Pr.296, Pr.297 348
To use parameters freely Free parameter P.E420, P.E421 Pr.888, Pr.889 350
To change parameter settings for an IPM motor
IPM parameter initialization P.E430 Pr.998 231
as a batch
Automatic parameter
To set multiple parameters by batch P.E431 Pr.999 350
setting
Applicable parameter
Pr.160, Pr.172 to
To display the required parameters display and user group P.E440 to P.E443 354
Pr.174
function
Parameter copy alarm
To release the Parameter copy warning (CP) P.E490 Pr.989 744
release
PWM carrier frequency Pr.72, Pr.240,
To reduce the motor noise and EMI P.E600 to P.E602 356
changing Pr.260
Pr.255 to Pr.259,
Inverter parts life display P.E700 to P.E705 359
Pr.506
To understand the maintenance time of
Maintenance output Pr.503 to Pr.504,
inverter parts and peripheral devices P.E710 to P.E715 363
function Pr.686 to Pr.689
Current average monitor P.E720 to P.E722 Pr.555 to Pr.557 363

5.7.1 Real time clock function

The time can be set. The time can only be updated while the inverter power is ON.

334 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
The real time clock function is enabled using an optional LCD operation panel (FR-LU08).
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 1
1006
Clock (year) 2000 (year) 2000 to 2099 Set the year.
E020
Set the month and day.
101 to 131, 201 to 228, (229), 301 to 331, 1000's and 100's digits: Month (1 (January) to 12 2
1007 Clock (month, 101 (January 401 to 430, 501 to 531, 601 to 630, 701 to (December)).
E021 day) 1) 731, 801 to 831, 901 to 930, 1001 to 10's and 1's digits: Day (1 to the last day of the
1031, 1101 to 1130, 1201 to 1231 month (28, 29, 30, or 31)).
For December 31, set "1231". 3
0 to 59, 100 to 159, 200 to 259, 300 to
359, 400 to 459, 500 to 559, 600 to 659,
700 to 759, 800 to 859, 900 to 959, 1000 Set the hour and minute using the 24-hour clock.
1008
E022
Clock (hour,
minute)
0 (00:00)
to 1059, 1100 to 1159, 1200 to 1259,
1300 to 1359, 1400 to 1459, 1500 to
1000's and 100's digits: 0 to 23 hours,
10's and 1's digits: 0 to 59 minutes.
4
1559, 1600 to 1659, 1700 to 1759, 1800 For 23:59, set "2359".
to 1859, 1900 to 1959, 2000 to 2059,
2100 to 2159, 2200 to 2259, 2300 to 2359
5
 Simple clock function
• When the current year, month, day, hour and minute are set in the parameters above, the inverter internal clock starts
ticking. The set date and time can be checked by reading the parameters. 6
NOTE
• The time data of the internal clock is saved in the inverter's EEPROM every 10 minutes.
• The clock does not run while the control circuit power is OFF. The clock needs to be set every time after turning ON the inverter 7
power. Prepare separate power supply, such as an external 24 V power supply, to supply power continuously to the control
circuit for the simple clock function.
• However, if the power to the main circuit of the inverter is turned ON with the control circuit power already ON, the clock data 8
is reset to the data stored in EEPROM because the Inverter reset is performed whenever the power is supplied to the main
circuit of the inverter in the initial setting. To prevent the clock from resetting, set Pr.30 Regenerative function selection.
(Refer to page 724.)
• The set time is used for functions such as the Fault history. 9

 Real time clock function 10

Hz Out 1:00
Count-up Hz Out 2:00
Count-up Hz Out 3:00

0. 00 Hz 0. 00 Hz 0. 00 Hz
−−− STOP PU −−− STOP PU −−− STOP PU

1:00
PREV SET NEXT

2:00
PREV SET NEXT

3:00
PREV SET NEXT

Synchronization Synchronization

1:00 1:00 3:00

Power-OFF Power-ON
Inverter internal clock Inverter internal clock Inverter internal clock

• When the FR-LU08 is connected to the inverter, the internal clock of the inverter can be synchronized with the clock in the
FR-LU08 (Real time clock function). The FR-LU08 with battery (CR1216) backup can keep its clock function running even
if the main power of the inverter is turned OFF. (The inverter internal clock stops running when the inverter power is turned
OFF.)
• To adjust the clock in the FR-LU08, set Pr.1006 to Pr.1008 on the FR-LU08.

NOTE
• Time synchronization between the inverter internal clock and the clock in the FR-LU08 is performed every one minute.
• If the FR-LU08 clock is reset due to dead battery for example, the data in the inverter internal clock is used.

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
335
 5.7.2 Reset selection / disconnected PU detection / PU
stop selection
The acceptance of reset command, the inverter operation in the event of detection of the PU (operation panel / parameter unit)
disconnected, and the acceptance of stop command from the PU (PU stop function) can be selected using Pr.E100 (Reset
selection), Pr.E101 (Disconnected PU detection), and Pr.E102 (PU stop selection), respectively, or using Pr.75 alone.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0 to 3, 14 to 17, 1000 to
Reset selection/ 1003, 1014 to 1017*1
In the initial setting, the reset command input is always enabled,
disconnected PU 0 to 3, 14 to 17, 100 to
75 14 the inverter operation continues even when PU is disconnected,
detection/PU stop 103, 114 to 117, 1000 to and the operation can be stopped on the PU.
selection 1003, 1014 to 1017, 1100
to 1103, 1114 to 1117*2
0 Reset input is always enabled.
Reset input is enabled only when the protective function is
1
activated.
E100 Reset selection 0
2 Reset input is enabled only when the start signal is OFF.
Reset input is enabled when the protective function is activated
3
and the start signal is OFF.
Disconnected PU 0 Operation continues even when the PU is disconnected.
E101 0
detection 1 The inverter output is shut off when the PU is disconnected.
The inverter decelerates to a stop when the STOP key on the PU
0 is pressed in PU operation mode. (The PU stop function is
disabled.)
E102 PU stop selection 1
The inverter decelerates to a stop when the STOP key on the PU
1 is pressed in any operation mode of the PU, external, or Network.
(The PU stop function is enabled.)
0 Reset limit is disabled.
E107 Reset limit 0
1*2 Reset limit is enabled.

The parameters above do not return to their initial values even if Parameter clear/All parameter clear is executed.
*1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
*2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher

336 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
 Operation after PU
Pr.75 setting Reset input disconnection is PU stop function Reset limit function 1
detected
0 Always enabled. Operation continues. Disabled Disabled
1 When the protective function is activated. Operation continues. Disabled Disabled
2 Always enabled. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Disabled 2
3 When the protective function is activated. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Disabled
14 (initial
Always enabled. Operation continues. Enabled Disabled
value)
15 When the protective function is activated. Operation continues. Enabled Disabled
3
16 Always enabled. Inverter output shutoff Enabled Disabled
17 When the protective function is activated. Inverter output shutoff Enabled Disabled
100 Always enabled. Operation continues. Disabled Enabled*3 4
101 When the protective function is activated. Operation continues. Disabled Enabled*3
102 Always enabled. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Enabled*3
103 When the protective function is activated. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Enabled*3 5
114 Always enabled. Operation continues. Enabled Disabled
115 When the protective function is activated. Operation continues. Enabled Disabled
116 Always enabled. Inverter output shutoff Enabled Disabled 6
117 When the protective function is activated. Inverter output shutoff Enabled Disabled
1000 When the start signal is OFF. Operation continues. Disabled Disabled
When the protective function is activated
1001
and the start signal is OFF.
Operation continues. Disabled Disabled
7
1002 When the start signal is OFF. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Disabled
When the protective function is activated
1003 Inverter output shutoff Disabled Disabled
and the start signal is OFF.
1014 When the start signal is OFF. Operation continues. Enabled Disabled 8
When the protective function is activated
1015 Operation continues. Enabled Disabled
and the start signal is OFF.
1016 When the start signal is OFF.
When the protective function is activated
Inverter output shutoff Enabled Disabled
9
1017 Inverter output shutoff Enabled Disabled
and the start signal is OFF.
1100 When the start signal is OFF. Operation continues. Disabled Enabled*3

1101
When the protective function is activated
Operation continues. Disabled Enabled*3
10
and the start signal is OFF.
1102 When the start signal is OFF. Inverter output shutoff Disabled Enabled*3
When the protective function is activated
1103
and the start signal is OFF.
Inverter output shutoff Disabled Enabled*3

1114 When the start signal is OFF. Operation continues. Enabled Enabled*3
When the protective function is activated
1115
and the start signal is OFF.
Operation continues. Enabled Enabled*3

1116 When the start signal is OFF. Inverter output shutoff Enabled Enabled*3
When the protective function is activated
1117
and the start signal is OFF.
Inverter output shutoff Enabled Enabled*3

*3 The setting is available for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

 Reset selection (P.E100)

• While P.E100 = "1", or Pr.75 = "1, 3, 15, 17, 101, 103, 115, or 117", the reset command input is enabled (using the RES
signal or through communication) only when the protective function is activated.
• While P.E100 = "2" or Pr.75 = "1000, 1002, 1014, 1016, 1100, 1102, 1114, or 1116", the reset command input is enabled
(using the RES signal or through communication) only when the start signal is OFF.
• While P.E100 = "3" or Pr.75 = "1001, 1003, 1015, 1017, 1101, 1103, 1115, or 1117", the reset command input is enabled
(using the RES signal or through communication) only when the protective function is activated with the start signal OFF.

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
337
 NOTE
• When the RES signal is input during operation, the motor coasts since the inverter being reset shuts off the output. Also, the
cumulative values of electronic thermal O/L relay and regenerative brake duty are cleared.
• When "reset input always enabled" is selected, the reset key on the PU is enabled only when the protective function is
activated.
• The following table shows applicable start commands. (When both the STF and STR signals are ON, the start signal status is
OFF.)

Start signal input interface Applicable start signal

External terminal X13, X22, LX, X28, JOGF, JOGR, STF, or STR
Forward/reverse rotation command given by
PU
pressing the FWD/REV key
Communication X13, X22, LX, X28, STF, or STR

 Disconnected PU detection (P.E101)

• When the inverter detects that the PU (FR-DU08/FR-PU07) is disconnected from the inverter for 1 second or more while
P.E101 or Pr.75 is set to shut off the inverter output upon disconnection of the PU, the PU disconnection ("E.PUE")
indication is displayed and the inverter output is shut off.

NOTE
• When the PU has been disconnected before power-ON, the output is not shut off.
• To restart the inverter operation, confirm that the PU is connected before reset.
• When the inverter detects that the PU is disconnected during PU JOG operation while P.E101 or Pr.75 is set to continue the
inverter operation even when the PU is disconnected, the inverter decelerates the motor to a stop.
• During RS-485 communication operation via the PU connector, the Reset selection function and the PU stop selection function
are enabled but the Disconnected PU detection function is disabled. (The communication is checked according to Pr.122 PU
communication check time interval.)

 PU stop selection (P.E102)

• When the PU stop function is enabled, the motor can be decelerated to a stop by pressing on the PU in either PU,
External, or Network operation mode.
• The table below describes situations in which the PU stop function is activated. The indication " " is displayed on the

PU, and the operation cannot be restarted while the indication remains on. However, the Fault signal is not output.
Operation mode Operation
External
External/PU combined 1 on the PU is pressed during operation.
Network

on the PU is pressed while the inverter is operated by a command source other than
PU operation mode
the PU. (The command interface/source is selected by setting Pr.551 PU mode operation
command source selection.)

 How to restart the inverter which has been stopped in the External
operation mode by using on the PU ("PS" (PU stop) warning reset
method)
• For the operation panel (FR-DU08)

1. After completion of deceleration stop, turn OFF the STF and STR signals.

2. Press three times (" " is cleared)

when Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "0 (initial value) or 6".
When Pr.79 = "2, 3, or 7", the PU stop warning can be cleared with one keystroke.

• For the parameter unit (FR-PU07)

338 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
 1. After completion of deceleration stop, turn OFF the STF or STR signal.

2. Press EXT (" " is cleared). 1

Speed

2
Time
Key
Operation
panel
STF ON
Key 3
(STR) OFF

Stop/restart example for External operation

4
• The inverter can be restarted by performing the reset operation (by turning OFF and ON the power or inputting the RES
signal).

NOTE 5
• Even when Pr.250 Stop selection ≠ "9999" is set and coasting stop is selected, using the PU stop function in the External
operation mode does not provide coasting stop but deceleration stop.

6
 Reset limit (P.E107)
• Setting P.E107 = "1" or Pr.75 = any of "100 to 103, 114 to 117, 1100 to 1103, or 1114 to 1117" will make the inverter to
refuse any reset operation (RES signal input, etc.) for 3 minutes after the first activation of an electronic thermal O/L relay
7
or protective function (E.THM, E.THT, E.OC[]).
• The reset limit function is available with the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
8
NOTE
• Resetting the inverter power (turning OFF the control power) clears the accumulated thermal value.
• When the retry function is set enabled (Pr.67 Number of retries at fault occurrence ≠ "0"), the reset limit function is disabled.
9

CAUTION
• Do not perform a reset while a start signal is being input. Doing so will cause a sudden start of the motor, which
10
is dangerous.

Parameters referred to
Pr.67 Number of retries at fault occurrencepage 426
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Pr.250 Stop selectionpage 722
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selectionpage 400

5.7.3 PU display language selection

You can switch the display language of the parameter unit (FR-PU07) to another.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 Japanese
1 English
2 German
145 PU display language 3 French
—
E103 selection 4 Spanish
5 Italian
6 Swedish
7 Finnish

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
339
 5.7.4 Buzzer control
The PU (operation panel or parameter unit) key sound and buzzer can be turned ON/OFF.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
990 0 Turns the key sound and buzzer OFF.
PU buzzer control 1
E104 1 Turns the key sound and buzzer ON.

NOTE
• When the buzzer is set to ON, a warning sound will be audible when a fault occurs.

5.7.5 PU contrast adjustment

Contrast of the LCD display on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) can be adjusted.
Decreasing the setting value lowers the contrast.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
991
PU contrast adjustment 58 0 to 63 0: Low → 63: High
E105
This parameter can be selected from among simple mode parameters only when the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the
parameter unit (FR-PU07) is connected to the inverter.

5.7.6 Display-off setting

The LED display of the operation panel (FR-DU08) can be turned OFF when the operation panel has not been used for a certain
period of time.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 Display-off setting is disabled.
1048
Display-off waiting time 0 Set time until the LED of the operation panel is turned
E106 1 to 60 (minutes)
OFF.
• When the operation panel has not been operated for the time set in Pr.1048, the display-off setting is activated and the
LED display turns OFF.
• In the display-off state, the [MON] indicator blinks slowly.
• The time interval counting for display-off is reset at removal/reinstallation of the operation panel, power-ON/OFF of the
inverter, or the Inverter reset.
• The triggers for display-on are as follows:
- Operation of the operation panel,
- Occurrence of a warning, alarm, or fault,
- Removal/reinstallation of the operation panel, power-ON/OFF of the inverter, or the Inverter reset,
- Connection/disconnection at the USB A connector.

NOTE
• The [P.RUN] indicator is ON even if the operation panel is in the display-off state (while the PLC function is enabled).

5.7.7 Direct setting

The PID set point setting screen (direct setting screen) can be displayed first on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) according
to the parameter setting.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 Displays the Frequency setting screen.
1000 1 Displays the direct setting screen (for set point setting).
Direct setting selection 0
E108 Displays the direct setting screen (for set point setting)
2
and the frequency setting screen.
• This function is useful for setting the PID set point on the LCD operation panel.

340 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
 • The monitor display can be switched from the main monitor screen to the set point setting screen for the PID action simply

by turning , according to the setting of Pr.1000 Direct setting selection. On each setting screen, turn to input 1
a setting value, and press (SET)
to confirm the setting.
2
Example of screen switching and shifting when the PID control is enabled (Pr.128 ≠ "0")
∗2,∗3 ∗2,∗3 ∗3
Output frequency 12: 34 PID act set pnt 2ndPID set point Frequency Setting

3
Pres value 10.0PSI Pres value 10.0PSI Pres value 0.00Hz
Set value 10.0PSI (NEXT) Set value 10.0PSI (NEXT) Set value 100.00Hz
0.00 Hz
STOP PU STOP PU STOP PU STOP PU
PREV SET NEXT BACK SET NNEXT
EXT BACK SET NNEXT
EXT BACK SET NNEXT
EXT
One of the Main monitor screen Direct #1 screen ∗4 Direct #2 screen ∗4 Frequency setting screen ∗5
4
∗1 ∗2
∗3
(NEXT)
(NEXT)

5
*1 When Pr.1000 = "0"
*2 When Pr.1000 = "1"
*3 When Pr.1000 = "2"
*4 Not displayed when PID control is disabled (Pr.128 = "0"). 6
*5 Indication of "NEXT" is not displayed when Pr.1000 = "0".
• To switch back the monitor display from the Extended direct screen or the Frequency setting screen to the Main monitor

screen, press (BACK)

. 7
Parameters referred to
Pr.128 PID action selection page 601
8
5.7.8 Resetting USB host errors
When a USB device is connected to the USB connector (connector A), the USB host error can be canceled without performing
the Inverter reset.
9
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1049 0 Read only
E110
USB host reset 0
1 Resets the USB host. 10
• Parameter copy (refer to page 744) or the trace function (refer to page 649) is available when a USB device (such as a
USB memory) is connected to the USB connector (connector A).
• When a device such as a USB charger is connected to the USB connector and an excessive current (500 mA or higher)

flows, USB host error " " (UF warning) is displayed on the operation panel.
• When the UF warning appears, the USB error can be canceled by removing the USB device and setting Pr.1049 = "1".
(The UF warning can also be canceled by resetting the inverter power or resetting with the RES signal.)

5.7.9 Easy frequency setting (Volume-knob-like setting)

and key lock function selection
The frequency can be easily set with the setting dial on the operation panel (FR-DU08) like a volume knob.
The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 Normal frequency setting
Key lock function
Easy frequency setting
1 disabled.
161 Frequency setting/key lock (Volume-knob-like setting)
0
E200 operation selection 10 Normal frequency setting
Key lock function
Easy frequency setting enabled.
11
(Volume-knob-like setting)

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
341
  Setting the frequency by turning the setting dial like a volume knob
• The frequency can be set by simply turning the setting dial on the operation panel (FR-DU08) during operation (Volume-

knob-like setting). needs not to be pressed. (For details on the operation method, refer to page 150.)

NOTE
• If the display changes from blinking "60.00" to "0.00", the setting value of Pr.161 may not be "1".
• The newly-set frequency is be saved as the set frequency in EEPROM after 10 seconds.
• When setting the frequency by turning the setting dial, the frequency goes up to the set value of Pr.1 Maximum frequency.
Be aware of what frequency Pr.1 is set to, and adjust the setting of Pr.1 according to the application.

 Disabling the setting dial and keys on the operation panel (by holding
down the MODE key for 2 seconds)
• The setting dial and keys on the operation panel (FR-DU08) can be disabled to prevent parameter changes, unexpected
starts or frequency changes.

• Set Pr.161 to "10 or 11" and then press for 2 seconds to disable setting dial and keys.

• When setting dial and keys are disabled, " " appears on the operation panel. If setting dial or key operation is

attempted while dial and keys are disabled, " " appears. (After no setting dial or key operation for 2 seconds,
the display returns to the monitoring screen.)

• To enable the setting dial and keys again, press for 2 seconds.

NOTE
• Even if setting dial and keys are disabled, the monitor indicator and are enabled.
• The PU stop warning cannot be reset by using keys while the key lock function is enabled.

Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428

5.7.10 Frequency change increment amount setting

When setting the set frequency with the setting dial of the operation panel (FR-DU08), the frequency changes in 0.01 Hz
increments in the initial status. Setting this parameter to increase the frequency increment amount that changes when the
setting dial is rotated can improve usability.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 Function disabled
0.01
295 Frequency change
0 0.10 The minimum change width when the set frequency is
E201 increment amount setting
1.00 changed with the setting dial can be set.
10.00

342 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
 Basic operation
• When Pr.295 ≠ "0", the minimum increment when the set frequency is changed with the setting dial can be set. 1
For example, when Pr.295 = 1.00 Hz, one click (one dial gauge) of the setting dial changes the frequency in increments
of 1.00 Hz, such as 1.00 Hz → 2.00 Hz → 3.00 Hz.
When Pr.295="1" 2

5
1 click 1 click
6
NOTE
• When machine speed display is selected in Pr.37 Speed display, the minimum increments of change are determined by
Pr.295 as well. Note that the setting value may differ as speed setting changes the set machine speed and converts it to the
speed display again. 7
• For Pr.295, the increments are not displayed.
• The Pr.295 setting is enabled only for the changes to the set frequency. It does not apply to the settings of other parameters
related to frequency.
• When 10 is set, the frequency setting changes in 10 Hz increments. Be cautious of excessive speed (in potentiometer mode).
8

Parameters referred to 9
Pr.37 Speed displaypage 444

5.7.11 Multiple rating setting 10

Four rating types of different rated current and permissible load can be selected. The optimal inverter rating can be chosen in
accordance with the application, enabling equipment size to be reduced.
Setting Description (overload current rating,
Pr. Name Initial value
range surrounding air temperature)
SLD rating.
110% for 60 seconds, 120% for 3 seconds (inverse-
0*1 time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature
of 40°C.
LD rating.
120% for 60 seconds, 150% for 3 seconds (inverse-
1
time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature
570 of 50°C.
Multiple rating setting 2
E301 ND rating.
150% for 60 seconds, 200% for 3 seconds (inverse-
2
time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature
of 50°C.
HD rating.
200% for 60 seconds, 250% for 3 seconds (inverse-
3*1 time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature
of 50°C.

*1 Not compatible with the IP55 compatible model.

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
343
  Changing the parameter initial values and setting ranges
• When inverter reset and all parameter clear are performed after setting Pr.570, the parameter initial values are changed
according to each rating, as shown below.
Pr.570 setting Refer to
Pr. Name
0 1 2 (initial value) 3 page
0 Torque boost *1 *1 *1 *1 706
7 Acceleration time *1 *1 *1 *1 367
8 Deceleration time *1 *1 *1 *1 367
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay SLD rated current*2 LD rated current*2 ND rated current*2*3 HD rated current*2*3 415
DC injection brake operation *1 *1 *1 *1
12 715
voltage
22 Stall prevention operation level 110% 120% 150% 200% 245, 431
Second stall prevention operation
48 110% 120% 150% 200% 431
level
56 Current monitoring reference SLD rated current*2 LD rated current*2 ND rated current*2 HD rated current*2 457
Third stall prevention operation
114 110% 120% 150% 200% 431
level
148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input 110% 120% 150% 200% 431
149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input 120% 150% 200% 250% 431
150 Output current detection level 110% 120% 150% 200% 487
Stall prevention operation level
165 110% 120% 150% 200% 628
for restart
Current average value monitor
557
signal output reference current SLD rated current*2 LD rated current*2 ND rated current*2 HD rated current*2 363

874 OLT level setting 110% 120% 150% 200% 245

Energy saving monitor reference SLD rated motor LD rated motor ND rated motor HD rated motor
893 467
(motor capacity) capacity*2 capacity*2 capacity*2 capacity*2

*1 Initial values differ depending on the rating as follows.

200 V class FR-A820-[]

00046 00077 00105 00167 00250 00340 00490 00630 00770 00930 01250 01540 01870 02330 03160 03800 04750
(0.4K) (0.75K) (1.5K) (2.2K) (3.7K) (5.5K) (7.5K) (11K) (15K) (18.5K) (22K) (30K) (37K) (45K) (55K) (75K) (90K)
Pr.570 400 V class: FR-A840-[]
Pr.
setting 02600
00023 00038 00052 00083 00126 00170 00250 00310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160 01800 02160 (90K)
(0.4K) (0.75K) (1.5K) (2.2K) (3.7K) (5.5K) (7.5K) (11K) (15K) (18.5K) (22K) (30K) (37K) (45K) (55K) (75K) or
higher
0, 1 6 4 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1.5 1.5 1 1 1
0 (%) 2 6 6 4 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
3 6 6 6 4 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
0, 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
7 (s) 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
0, 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
8 (s) 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
0, 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
12 (%) 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
*2 The rated current and motor capacity differ depending on the inverter capacity. Refer to the inverter rated specifications (page 826).
*3 The initial value for the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and the FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower is set to the 85% of the inverter rated current.
• Setting Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration = "5 or 6 (lift mode)" changes the stall prevention operation level as
shown below.
Pr.570 setting Refer to
Pr. setting
0 1 2 (initial value) 3 page
5 110% 120% 150% 200%
292 384
6 115% 140% 180% 230%

344 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
 NOTE
• When Pr.570 = "0" (SLD rating), carrier frequency automatic reduction is enabled regardless of the setting in Pr.260. 1
• To use the FR-A820-03160(55K) and the FR-A840-01800(55K) in the LD and SLD ratings, a DC reactor, which is available
as an option, corresponding to the applied motor is required.
• Setting the LD or SLD rating to the FR-A820-03160(55K) and the FR-A840-01800(55K) changes their parameter setting
increments and setting ranges in the same way as for the FR-A820-03800(75K) and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher. In an
2
example of Pr.9, the setting increment changes from "0.01 A" to "0.1 A" and the setting range changes from "0 to 500 A" to "0
to 3600 A". For the setting of each parameter, refer to the parameter list (on page 166).
3
Parameters referred to
Pr.260 PWM frequency automatic switchoverpage 356
4
5.7.12 Using the power supply exceeding 480 VAC
To input a voltage between 480 VAC and 500 VAC to the 400 V class inverter, change the voltage protection level.
Setting
5
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
0 400 V class voltage protection level
977 Input voltage mode
E302 selection
0 1 500 V class voltage protection level 6
2 For manufacturer setting. Do not set.
• To use a voltage between 480 VAC and 500 VAC, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection = "1". The setting is applied
after a reset. 7
• Setting Pr.977 = "1" changes the voltage protection level to the one for the 500 V class.
• The increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation level is 740 V. Use Pr.660 Increased magnetic excitation
deceleration operation selection to select the increased magnetic excitation deceleration.) 8
NOTE
• To check availability of stand-alone options when the input voltage is between 480 and 500 VAC, refer to the Instruction
Manual or catalog of each option for details on the ratings. 9
• Changing the Pr.977 setting does not affect the voltage level to activate the regenerative overvoltage trip (E.OV1 to E.OV3).
• Changing the Pr.977 setting does not affect the voltage level set in Pr.883 Regeneration avoidance operation level.
• The setting of Pr.977 is invalid for the 200 V class inverter.
10
Parameters referred to
Pr.660 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation selectionpage 735

5.7.13 Parameter write selection

Whether to enable the writing to various parameters or not can be selected. Use this function to prevent parameter values from
being rewritten by misoperation.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 Parameter write is enabled only during stop.
77 1 Parameter writing is disabled.
Parameter write selection 0
E400 Parameter writing is enabled in any operation mode
2
regardless of the operation status.
• Pr.77 can be set at any time regardless of the operation mode or operation status. (Setting through communication is
unavailable.)

 Parameter write enabled only during stop (Pr.77 = "0 (initial value)")
• Parameters can be written only during a stop in the PU operation mode.
• The following parameters can always be written regardless of the operation mode or operation status.

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
345
 Pr. Name Pr. Name
(Multi-speed setting high-speed, middle-speed,
4 to 6
low-speed) 551*2 PU mode operation command source selection

22 Stall prevention operation level 555 to 557 (Current average value monitoring)
24 to 27 (Multi-speed setting speed 4 to speed 7) 656 to 659 (Analog remote output)
52 Operation panel main monitor selection 663 Control circuit temperature signal output level
54 FM/CA terminal function selection 675 User parameter auto storage function selection
55 Frequency monitoring reference 750, 751 Motor thermistor interface
56 Current monitoring reference 759 PID unit selection
72*1 PWM frequency selection 774 to 776 (PU/DU monitor selection)
Reset selection/Disconnected PU detection/PU
75 805 Torque command value (RAM)
stop selection
77 Parameter write selection 806 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM)
79*2 Operation mode selection 838 DA1 terminal function selection
129 PID proportional band 866 Torque monitoring reference
130 PID integral time 888, 889 (Free parameter)
133 PID action set point 891 to 899 (Energy saving monitoring)
134 PID differential time C0 (900) FM/CA terminal calibration
158 AM terminal function selection C1 (901) AM terminal calibration
160 User group read selection C8 (930) Current output bias signal
232 to 239 (Multi-speed setting speed 8 to speed 15) C9 (930) Current output bias current
*1 Soft-PWM operation selection C10 (931) Current output gain signal
240
241 Analog input display unit switchover C11 (931) Current output gain current
268 Monitor decimal digits selection 990 PU buzzer control
271 High-speed setting maximum current 991 PU contrast adjustment
272 Middle-speed setting minimum current 992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection
273 Current averaging range 997 Fault initiation
274 Current averaging filter time constant 998*2 PM parameter initialization
Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed
275*1 scaling factor 999*2 Automatic parameter setting

290 Monitor negative output selection 1000 Direct setting selection

295 Frequency change increment amount setting 1006 Clock (year)
296, 297 (Password setting) 1007 Clock (month, day)
306 Analog output signal selection 1008 Clock (hour, minute)
310 Analog meter voltage output selection 1018 Monitor with sign selection
*2 Communication startup mode selection 1019 Analog meter voltage negative output selection
340
345, 346 (DeviceNet communication) 1048 Display-off waiting time
416, 417 (PLC) 1142 Second PID unit selection
434, 435 (CC-Link communication) 1150 to 1199 (PLC function user parameters)
496, 497 (Remote output) 1283 Home position return speed
498 PLC function flash memory clear 1284 Home position return shifting speed
550*2 NET mode operation command source selection
*1 Writing during operation is enabled in PU operation mode, but disabled in External operation mode.
*2 Writing during operation is disabled. To change the parameter setting value, stop the operation.

 Parameter write disabled (Pr.77 = "1")

• Parameter write, Parameter clear, and All parameter clear are disabled. (Parameter read is enabled.)
• The following parameters can be written even if Pr.77 = "1".

Pr. Name Pr. Name

22 Stall prevention operation level 345, 346 (DeviceNet communication)
Reset selection/Disconnected PU detection/PU stop
75 496, 497 (Remote output)
selection
77 Parameter write selection 656 to 659 (Analog remote output)
79*1 Operation mode selection 805 Torque command value (RAM)
160 User group read selection 806 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM)
296 Password lock level 997 Fault initiation
297 Password lock/unlock
*1 Writing during operation is disabled. To change the parameter setting value, stop the operation.

346 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
 Parameter write enabled during operation (Pr.77 = "2")
• These parameters can always be written. 1
• The following parameters cannot be written during operation even if Pr.77 = "2". To change the parameter setting value,
stop the operation.
2
Pr. Name Pr. Name
Stall prevention operation level compensation
23 455 Second motor excitation current
factor at double speed
48 Second stall prevention operation level 456 Rated second motor voltage 3
49 Second stall prevention operation frequency 457 Rated second motor frequency
60 Energy saving control selection 458 to 462 (Second motor constant)
61 Reference current
Stall prevention operation reduction starting
463 Second motor auto tuning setting/status
4
66 507, 508 (Display/reset ABC relay contact life)
frequency
71 Applied motor 541 Frequency command sign selection
79 Operation mode selection 560 Second frequency search gain 5
80 Motor capacity 561 PTC thermistor protection level
81 Number of motor poles 570 Multiple rating setting
82 Motor excitation current 574 Second motor online auto tuning
83 Rated motor voltage 598 Undervoltage level 6
Power failure stop external signal input
84 Rated motor frequency 606
selection
90 to 94
95
(Motor constant)
Online auto tuning selection
639, 640
641, 650, 651
(Brake sequence)
(Second brake sequence)
7
96 Auto tuning setting/status 660 to 662 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration
SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation
135 to 139 (Electronic bypass sequence parameter) 673
selection 8
178 to 196 (Input and output terminal function selection) 699 Input terminal filter
248 Self power management selection 702 Maximum motor frequency
706, 707, 711,
254 Main circuit power OFF waiting time 712, 717, 721, (PM motor tuning) 9
724, 725, 1412
261 Power failure stop selection 738 to 746, 1413 (Second PM motor tuning)
Second motor low-speed range torque
289 Inverter output terminal filter 747
characteristic selection 10
Low speed range torque characteristic
291 Pulse train I/O selection 788
selection
292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration 800 Control method selection
293 Acceleration/deceleration separate selection 819 Easy gain tuning selection
298 Frequency search gain 858 Terminal 4 function assignment
313 to 322 (Extended output terminal function selection) 859 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
Second motor torque current/Rated PM motor
329 Digital input unit selection 860
current
373 Encoder position tuning setting/status 862 Encoder option selection
406 High resolution analog input selection 868 Terminal 1 function assignment
414 PLC function operation selection 977 Input voltage mode selection
415 Inverter operation lock mode setting 998 PM parameter initialization
418 Extension output terminal filter 999 Automatic parameter setting
419 Position command source selection 1002 Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient
420, 421 (Electronic gear) 1105 Encoder magnetic pole position offset
450 Second applied motor 1292 Position control terminal input selection
451 Second motor control method selection 1293 Roll feeding mode selection
453 Second motor capacity
1348 P/PI control switchover frequency
454 Number of second motor poles

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
347
 5.7.14 Password
Registering a 4-digit password can restrict access to parameters (reading/writing).
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Password protection enabled. Setting the access
0 to 6, 99, 100 to
296 (reading/writing) restriction level to parameters locked
Password lock level 9999 106, 199
E410 with a password enables writing to Pr.297.
9999 No password protection
Input a 4-digit password to lock parameters, or input the
1000 to 9998
valid password to unlock the locked parameters.
297 Number of failed password attempts (read only,
Password lock/unlock 9999
E411 (0 to 5)*1 displayed after any of "100 to 106, or 199" is set in
Pr.296 and a password to lock parameters is input).
9999*1 No password protection

These parameters can be set when Pr.160 User group read selection = "0". However, when Pr.296 ≠ 9999 (password lock
is set), Pr.297 can always be set, regardless of the setting in Pr.160.
*1 Although "0 or 9999" can be input in Pr.297, the value is invalid. (The display cannot be changed.)

 Parameter reading/writing restriction level (Pr.296)

• The access (reading/writing) restriction level to parameters in the PU operation mode or NET operation mode can be
selected with Pr.296.

PU operation mode operation NET operation mode operation command*4

Pr.296 setting command*3 RS-485 terminals / PLC function*7 via communication option
*1 *2
Read Write Read Write*2 Read Write*2
9999 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0, 100*6 × × × × × ×
1, 101 ○ × ○ × ○ ×
2, 102 ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○
3, 103 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ×
4, 104 × × × × ○ ×
5, 105 × × ○ ○ ○ ○
6, 106 ○ ○ × × ○ ×
Only the parameters registered in the user group can be read/written. (For the parameters not registered in the user
99, 199
group, the restriction level when "4 or 104" is set applies.)*5
○: Enabled, ×: Disabled
*1 If the parameter reading is restricted by the setting of Pr.160 User group read selection, those parameters cannot be read even when "○" is
indicated.
*2 If the parameter writing is restricted by the setting of Pr.77 Parameter write selection, those parameters cannot be written even when "○" is
indicated.
*3 Access from the command source in the PU operation mode (the operation panel (FR-DU08) or the parameter unit in the initial setting) is
restricted. (For the PU operation mode command source selection, refer to page 400.)
*4 Access from the command source in the Network operation mode (the RS-485 terminals or a communication option in the initial setting) is
restricted. (For the NET operation mode command source selection, refer to page 400.)
*5 Read/write is enabled only for the simple mode parameters registered in the user group when Pr.160 = "9999". Pr.296 and Pr.297 can be read
or written regardless of whether they are registered to the user group.
*6 If a communication option is installed, the Option fault (E.OPT) occurs, and the inverter output shuts off. (Refer to page 791.)
*7 The PLC function user parameters (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199) can be written and read by the PLC function regardless of the Pr.296 setting.

 Locking parameters with a password (Pr.296, Pr.297)

• The procedure of locking parameters with a password is as follows.

1. Set the parameter reading/writing restriction level to enable the password protection. (Set a value other than "9999"
in Pr.296.)
Allowable number of failed password
Pr.296 setting Pr.297 readout
attempts
0 to 6 or 99 Unlimited Always 0
100 to 106, 199*1 Limited to 5 times Number of failed password attempts (0 to 5)

*1 If an invalid password is input 5 times while any of "100 to 106, or 199" is set in Pr.296, the password is locked up afterward (the locked parameters
cannot be unlocked even with the valid password). All parameter clear is required to reset the password. (After All parameter clear is performed,
the parameters are returned to their initial values.)

348 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
 2. Write a four-digit number (1000 to 9998) to Pr.297 as a password (writing is disabled when Pr.296 = "9999"). After
a password is set, parameters are locked and access (reading/writing) to the parameters is limited at the level set
in Pr.296 until the valid password is input to unlock the locked parameters.
1
NOTE
• After a password is set, the Pr.297 readout is always any of "0 to 5". 2
• " " appears when a password-protected parameter is attempted to be read/written.
• Even if a password is set, the parameters which are written by the inverter, such as parameters related to the life check of
inverter parts, are overwritten as needed. 3
• Even if a password is set, Pr.991 PU contrast adjustment can be read/written when the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is
connected.

4
 Unlocking the locked parameters (Pr.296, Pr.297)
• There are two ways to unlock the locked parameters.
• Enter the password in Pr.297. When a valid password is input, the locked parameters can be unlocked. When an invalid 5
password is input, an error indication appears and the parameters cannot be unlocked. If an invalid password is input 5
times while any of "100 to 106, or 199" is set in Pr.296, the locked parameters cannot be unlocked afterward even with the
valid password (the password is locked up). 6
• Perform All parameter clear.

NOTE
• If the password is forgotten, it can be reset by performing All parameter clear, but the other parameters are also reset.
7
• All parameter clear cannot be performed during the inverter operation.
• When using FR Configurator2 in the PU operation mode, do not set "0, 4, 5, 99, 100, 104, 105, or 199" (parameter read is
disabled) in Pr.296. Doing so may cause abnormal operation. 8
• The means to reset the password varies according to how the reset command is sent (from the PU, through RS-485
communication, or via a communication option).

PU (operation panel or RS-485 Communication 9

parameter unit) communication option
All parameter clear ○ ○ ○
Parameter clear × × ○
10
○: Password reset enabled, ×: Password reset disabled
• For the information how to perform Parameter clear or All parameter clear with the parameter unit or via a communication
option, refer to the Instruction Manual of the parameter unit or the option. (For the operation panel (FR-DU08), refer to page
743. For RS-485 communication using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol, refer to page 672. For RS-485 communication using
the MODBUS RTU communication protocol, refer to page 686.)

 Access to parameters according to the password status

Password protection disabled / Parameters
Parameters locked Password locked up
unlocked
Parameter
Pr.296 = "9999", Pr.296 ≠ "9999", Pr.296 ≠ "9999", Pr.296 = "100 to 106, 199"
Pr.297 = "9999" Pr.297 = "9999" Pr.297 = "0 to 4" (read value) Pr.297 = "5" (read value)
Read ○*1 ○ ○ ○
Pr.296
Write ○*1 ○ *1 × ×
Read ○*1 ○ ○ ○
Pr.297
Write × ○ ○ ○*3
Pr.CLR write
(Parameter clear)
○ ○ ×*4 ×*4
ALL.C write (All
parameter clear)
○ ○ ○*2 ○*2

Pr.CPY write
○ ○ × ×
(Parameter copy)
○: Enabled, ×: Disabled
*1 Reading/writing is disabled if reading is restricted by the Pr.160 setting. (Reading is available in the Network operation mode regardless of the
Pr.160 setting.)
*2 All parameter clear cannot be performed during the operation.

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
349
 *3 Inputting a password is possible but the locked-up password cannot be unlocked or reset even with the valid password.
*4 Parameter clear can be performed only via a communication option.

NOTE
• When "4, 5, 104, or 105" is set in Pr.296 and a password is set, Pr.15 Jog frequency is not listed on the parameter unit (FR-
PU07).
• When a password has been set and parameters are locked, Parameter copy cannot be performed using the operation panel,
parameter unit, or a USB memory device.

Parameters referred to
Pr.77 Parameter write selectionpage 345
Pr.160 User group read selectionpage 354
Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selectionpage 400
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selectionpage 400

5.7.15 Free parameter

Any number within the setting range of 0 to 9999 can be input.
For example, these numbers can be used:
• As a unit number when multiple units are used.
• As a pattern number for each operation application when multiple units are used.
• As the year and month of introduction or inspection.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
888
Free parameter 1 9999 0 to 9999 Any value can be input.
E420
The settings are retained even if the inverter power is turned
889
Free parameter 2 9999 0 to 9999 OFF.
E421

NOTE
• Pr.888 and Pr.889 do not influence the operation of the inverter.

5.7.16 Setting multiple parameters by batch

The setting of particular parameters is changed by batch, such as communication parameters for connection with the Mitsubishi
Electric human machine interface (GOT), the parameters for the rated frequency (50/60 Hz) setting, or the parameters for
acceleration/deceleration time increment.
Multiple parameters are changed automatically. Users do not have to consider each parameter number (automatic parameter
setting).
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
1 Standard PID display setting
2 Extended PID display setting
10 GOT initial setting (PU connector) "Controller Type" in GOT:
FREQROL 500/700/800,
11 GOT initial setting (RS-485 terminal)
SENSORLESS SERVO
999 Automatic parameter
E431 setting 9999*1 12 GOT initial setting (PU connector) "Controller Type" in GOT:
FREQROL 800 (Automatic
13 GOT initial setting (RS-485 terminal)
Negotiation)
20 50 Hz rated frequency
21 60 Hz rated frequency
9999 No action
*1 The read value is always "9999".

350 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
 Automatic parameter setting (Pr.999)
• Select which parameters to automatically set from the following table, and set them in Pr.999. Multiple parameter settings 1
are changed automatically. Refer to page 352 for the list of parameters that are changed automatically.
Pr.999
Description Operation in the automatic parameter setting mode
setting 2
" " (AUTO) → " " (PID) → Write
1 Sets the standard monitor indicator setting of PID control.
"1".

" " (AUTO) → " " (PID) → Write

3
2 Automatically sets the monitor indicator for PID control.
"2".
Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT
10 connection with a PU connector ("Controller Type" in GOT:
" " (AUTO) → " " (GOT) → Write
4
FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO) "1".
Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT
11 connection with RS-485 terminals ("Controller Type" in GOT: —
FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO) 5
Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT
" " (AUTO) → " " (GOT) → Write
12 connection with a PU connector ("Controller Type" in GOT:
FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation)) "2".
Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT 6
13 connection with RS-485 terminals ("Controller Type" in GOT: —
FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation))

20
50 Hz rated
frequency Sets the related parameters of the rated
" " (AUTO) → " " (F50) → Write
7
frequency according to the power supply "1".
60 Hz rated frequency
21 —
frequency
8
NOTE
• If the automatic setting is performed with Pr.999 or the automatic parameter setting mode, the settings including the changed
parameter settings (changed from the initial setting) will be automatically changed. Before performing the automatic setting,
confirm that changing the parameters will not cause any problem.
9

 PID monitor indicator setting (Pr.999 = "1 or 2") 10

Pr. Name Initial value Pr.999 = "1" Pr.999 = "2" Refer to page
759 PID unit selection 9999 9999 4
615
1142 Second PID unit selection 9999 9999 4
774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 9999 9999 52
775 Operation panel monitor selection 2 9999 9999 53 446
776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 9999 9999 54
C42 (934) PID display bias coefficient 9999 9999 0
C44 (935) PID display gain coefficient 9999 9999 100
615
1136 Second PID display bias coefficient 9999 9999 0
1138 Second PID display gain coefficient 9999 9999 100
— 3-line monitor setting — Invalid Enabled*1*2*3 —
— Direct setting — Invalid *3 —
Enabled
— Dedicated parameter list function — Invalid Enabled*3 —

*1 Enabled when the FR-LU08 (-01) is used.

*2 Enabled when the FR-PU07 is used.
*3 Enabled when the FR-PU07-01 is used.

 3-line monitor setting

On the operation panel or parameter unit, the 3-line monitor is used as the first monitor.

 Direct setting
Pressing the [FUNC] key on the FR-PU07-01 displays the direct setting screen. The PID action set point can be directly set
regardless of the operation mode or Pr.77 Parameter write selection setting.

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
351
 Pressing the [FUNC] key on the direct setting screen displays the function menu.
Direct setting Parameter to be set
Direct setting 1 Pr.133 PID action set point
Direct setting 2 Pr.755 Second PID action set point

 Dedicated parameter list function

Pressing the [PrSET] key of the FR-PU07-01 displays the dedicated parameter list. Parameters that need to be set first for the
PID extended display setting are listed.
Dedicated parameter list Parameter to be set
No.1 Pr.999 Automatic parameter setting
No.2 Pr.934 PID display bias coefficient
No.3 Pr.935 PID display bias analog value

NOTE
• The display of parameters other than the above may be changed due to changes in C42 or C44. Set the PID monitor indicator
before changing the settings of other parameters.
• To use the direct setting on the LCD operation panel, set Pr.1000 Direct setting selection. (Refer to page 340.)

 GOT initial setting (PU connector) (Pr.999 = "10, 12")

Pr. Name Initial value Pr.999 = "10" Pr.999 = "12" Refer to page
79 Operation mode selection 0 1 1 389
118 PU communication speed 192 192 1152
119 PU communication stop bit length / data length 1 10 0
120 PU communication parity check 2 1 1
121 PU communication retry count 1 9999 9999 670
122 PU communication check time interval 9999 9999 9999
123 PU communication waiting time setting 9999 0 ms 0 ms
124 PU communication CR/LF selection 1 1 1
340 Communication startup mode selection 0 0 0 398
414 PLC function operation selection 0 — *1 646
2

*1 The setting is changed when Pr.414 = "0" (initial setting).

 Initial setting with the GOT2000 series

• When "FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT setting, set Pr.999
= "10" to configure the GOT initial setting.
• When "FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation)" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT setting, the GOT automatic
connection can be used. When "FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation)" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT
setting and the GOT automatic connection is not used, set Pr.999 = "12" to configure the GOT initial setting. (Refer to page
701.)

 Initial setting with the GOT1000 series

• Set Pr.999 = "10" to configure the GOT initial setting.

NOTE
• Always perform an inverter reset after the initial setting.
• For details on connection with GOT, refer to the Instruction Manual of GOT.

352 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
 GOT initial setting (RS-485 terminals) (Pr.999 = "11, 13")
Pr. Name Initial value Pr.999 = "11" Pr.999 = "13" Refer to page 1
79 Operation mode selection 0 0 0 389
332 RS-485 communication speed 96 192 1152

333
RS-485 communication stop bit length / data
length
1 10 0 2
334 RS-485 communication parity check selection 2 1 1 670
335 RS-485 communication retry count 1 9999 9999
336 RS-485 communication check time interval 0s 9999 9999 3
337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting 9999 0 ms 0 ms
340 Communication startup mode selection 0 1 1 398
341 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection 1 1 1 670
414 PLC function operation selection 0 — 2*1 646
4
549 Protocol selection 0 0 0 686

*1 The setting is changed when Pr.414 = "0" (initial setting).

5
 Initial setting with the GOT2000 series
• When "FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT setting, set Pr.999
= "11" to configure the GOT initial setting.
6
• When "FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation)" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT setting, the GOT automatic
connection can be used. When "FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation)" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT
setting and the GOT automatic connection is not used, set Pr.999 = "13" to configure the GOT initial setting. (Refer to page
7
701.)

 Initial setting with the GOT1000 series

• Set Pr.999 = "11" to configure the GOT initial setting. 8
NOTE
• Always perform an inverter reset after the initial setting.
• For details on connection with GOT, refer to the Instruction Manual of GOT. 9

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
353
  Rated frequency (Pr.999 = "20" (50 Hz) or "21" (60 Hz))
Initial value Refer to
Pr. Name Pr.999 = "21" Pr.999 = "20"
FM type CA type page
3 Base frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 707
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 411
Acceleration/deceleration reference
20 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 367
frequency
37 Speed display 0 0 444
55 Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 457
Stall prevention operation reduction
66 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 431
starting frequency
116 Third output frequency detection 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 431
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
125 (903) 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz
frequency
505
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
126 (905) 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz
frequency
263 Subtraction starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz
Power failure deceleration time 642
266 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz
switchover frequency
386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 406
505 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 444
Forward rotation speed limit/speed
808 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 287
limit
C14 (918) Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 505

5.7.17 Extended parameter display and user group

function
This function restricts the parameters that are read by the operation panel and parameter unit.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
9999 Only simple mode parameters are displayed.
160 User group read
0 0 Displays simple mode and extended parameters.
E440 selection
1 Only parameters registered in user groups are displayed.
Displays the number of parameters that are registered in the
172 User group registered (0 to 16)
0 user groups. (Read-only)
E441 display/batch clear
9999 Batch clear of user group registrations
173
E442
User group registration 9999*1 0 to 1999, 9999 Sets the parameter number to register for the user group.

174
E443
User group clear 9999*1 0 to 1999, 9999 Sets the parameter number to clear from the user group.

*1 The read value is always "9999".

 Display of simple mode parameters and extended parameters (Pr.160)

• When Pr.160 = "9999", only the simple mode parameters are displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU08) and parameter
unit (FR-PU07). (For the simple mode parameters, refer to the parameter list on page 166.)
• With the initial value (Pr.160 = "0", simple mode parameters and extended parameters can be displayed.

354 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
 NOTE
• When a plug-in option in installed on the inverter, the option parameters can also be read. 1
• Every parameter can be read regardless of the Pr.160 setting when reading parameters via a communication option.
• When reading the parameters using the RS-485 terminals, all parameters can be read regardless of the Pr.160 setting by
setting Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection and Pr.551 PU mode operation command source
selection.
2
Pr.551 Pr.550 Pr.160 enabled/disabled
1 (RS-485) — Enabled
0 (Communication option) Enabled 3
2 (PU),
1 (RS-485) Disabled (All can be read)
3 (USB),
With communication option: Enabled
9999 (Automatic determination) 9999 (Automatic determination)
(initial value) (initial value)
Without communication option: Disabled
(All can be read)
4
• When the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is installed, Pr.15 Jog frequency, Pr.16 Jog
acceleration/deceleration time, C42 (Pr.934) PID display bias coefficient, C43 (Pr.934) PID display bias analog value,
C44 (Pr.935) PID display gain coefficient, C45 (Pr.935) PID display gain analog value, Pr.991 PU contrast adjustment,
5
Pr.1136 Second PID display bias coefficient, Pr.1137 Second PID display bias analog value, Pr.1138 Second PID
display gain coefficient, and Pr.1139 Second PID display gain analog value are displayed as simple mode parameters.
6
 User group function (Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174)
• The user group function is a function for displaying only the parameters required for a setting.
7
• A maximum of 16 parameters from any of the parameters can be registered in a user group. When Pr.160 = "1", reading/
writing is enabled only for the parameters registered in user groups. (Parameters not registered in user groups can no
longer be read.)
8
• To register a parameter in a user group, set the parameter number in Pr.173.
• To clear a parameter from a user group, set the parameter number in Pr.174. To batch clear all the registered parameters,
set Pr.172 = "9999".
9
 Registering a parameter in a user group (Pr.173)
• To register Pr.3 in a user group
10
Operating procedure
1. Power ON
Make sure the motor is stopped.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears)

4. Selecting a parameter

Turn until " " (Pr.173) appears.

5. Parameter read

Press ." " appears.

6. Parameter registration

Turn until " " (Pr.3) appears. Press to register the parameter.

" " and " "are displayed alternately.

To continue adding parameters, repeat steps 5 and 6.

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
355
  Clearing a parameter from a user group (Pr.174)
• To delete Pr.3 from a user group.

Operating procedure
1. Power ON
Make sure the motor is stopped.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears)

4. Selecting a parameter

Turn until " " (Pr.174) appears.

5. Parameter read

Press ." " appears.

6. Clearing the parameter

Turn until " " (Pr.3) appears. Press to delete the parameter.

" " and " "are displayed alternately.

To continue deleting parameters, repeat steps 5 and 6.

NOTE
• Pr.77 Parameter write selection, Pr.160, Pr.296 Password lock level, Pr.297 Password lock/unlock and Pr.991 PU
contrast adjustment can always be read regardless of the user group setting. (For Pr.991, only when the FR-LU08 or the
FR-PU07 is connected.)
• Pr.77, Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174, Pr.296, and Pr.297 cannot be registered in a user group.
• When Pr.174 is read, "9999" is always displayed. "9999" can be written, but it does not function.
• Pr.172 is disabled if set to a value other than "9999".

Parameters referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequency, Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration timepage 410
Pr.77 Parameter write selectionpage 345
Pr.296 Password lock level, Pr.297 Password lock/unlockpage 348
Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selectionpage 400
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selectionpage 400
Pr.991 PU contrast adjustmentpage 340

5.7.18 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control

The motor sound can be changed.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0 to 15*1 The PWM carrier frequency can be changed. The setting value
72 represents the frequency in kHz. However, "0" indicates 0.7
PWM frequency selection 2
E600 0 to 6, 25*2 kHz, "15" indicates 14.5 kHz, and "25" indicates 2.5 kHz.
(The setting value "25" is for the sine wave filter only.)
240 Soft-PWM operation 0 Soft-PWM control disabled.
1
E601 selection 1 Soft-PWM control enabled.
PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function disabled
260 PWM frequency automatic 0
1 (for the LD, ND, or HD rating)
E602 switchover
1 PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function enabled

*1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
*2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher

356 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
 Changing the PWM carrier frequency (Pr.72)
• The PWM carrier frequency of the inverter can be changed. 1
• Changing the PWM carrier frequency can be effective for avoiding the resonance frequency of the mechanical system or
motor, as a countermeasure against EMI generated from the inverter, or for reducing leakage current caused by PWM
switching. 2
• Under Real sensorless vector control, vector control, and PM sensorless vector control, the following carrier frequencies
are used.
(For the control method and fast-response mode selection, refer to Pr.800 Control method selection on page 221.) 3
Carrier frequency (kHz)
Pr.72 setting Real sensorless vector control,
PM sensorless vector control, Fast-response mode

0
Vector control
4
1
2
3
2 6*1
4
5
4
5
6
7
6
6*2 6
8
9
10
8
7
11 *2
10 10
12
13
14
12 8
14*2 14
15

*1
*2
When low-speed range high-torque characteristic is disabled (Pr.788 = "0"), 2 kHz is used.
In the low-speed range (less than 3 Hz) under Real sensorless vector control, the carrier frequency is automatically changed to 2 kHz. 9
(For the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and the FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower)
• When using an optional sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), set "25" (2.5 kHz) in Pr.72. (FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-
A840-02160(75K) or higher.) 10
NOTE
• In the low-speed range (less than about 10 Hz), the carrier frequency may be automatically lowered.
Motor noise increases, but not to the point of failure.
• When Pr.72 = "25", the following limitations apply.
- V/F control is forcibly set.
- Soft-PWM control is disabled.
- The maximum output frequency is 60 Hz.

 Soft-PWM control (Pr.240)

• Soft-PWM control is a function that changes the motor noise from a metallic sound into an inoffensive, complex tone.
• Setting Pr.240 = "1" will enable the Soft-PWM control.
• To enable the Soft-PWM control, set Pr.72 to 5 kHz or less for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower or the FR-A840-
01800(55K) or lower. For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher or the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, set Pr.72 to 4 kHz or
less.

NOTE
• While a sine wave filter (Pr.72 = "25") is being used, the Soft-PWM control is disabled.

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
357
  PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function (Pr.260)
• Setting Pr.260 = "1 (initial value)" will enable the PWM carrier frequency auto-reduction function. If a heavy load is
continuously applied while the inverter carrier frequency is set to 3 kHz or higher (Pr.72 ≥ "3"), the carrier frequency is
automatically reduced to prevent occurrence of the inverter overload trip (electronic thermal O/L relay function) (E.THT).
The carrier frequency is reduced to as low as 2 kHz. Motor noise increases, but not to the point of failure.
• When the carrier frequency automatic reduction function is used, operation with the carrier frequency set to 3 kHz or higher
(Pr.72 ≥ 3) automatically reduces the carrier frequency for heavy-load operation as shown below.
Carrier frequency automatic reduction operation
Pr.260
Pr.570 setting FR-A820-04750(90K) or lower, FR-A840-
setting FR-A840-03250(110K) or higher
02600(90K) or lower
The carrier frequency will reduce automatically with continuous operation of 85% of the inverter rated
0 (SLD), 1 (LD)
current or higher.
1 The carrier frequency will reduce automatically with Continuous operation with the 85% or higher
2 (ND), 3 (HD) operation of 150% of the inverter ND rated current inverter rated current for the ND rating reduces the
or higher. carrier frequency automatically.
The carrier frequency will reduce automatically with continuous operation of 85% of the inverter rated
0 (SLD)
current or higher.
Without carrier frequency automatic reduction (Perform continuous operation with the carrier frequency
1 (LD)
set to 2 kHz or lower or with less than 85% of the inverter rated current for the ND rating.)
0
Without carrier frequency automatic reduction
(Perform continuous operation with the carrier
2 (ND), 3 (HD) Without carrier frequency automatic reduction
frequency set to 2 kHz or lower or with less than
85% of the inverter rated current for the ND rating.)

NOTE
• Reducing the PWM carrier frequency is effective as a countermeasure against EMI from the inverter or for reducing leakage
current, but doing so increases the motor noise.
• When the PWM carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or lower (Pr.72 ≤ 1), the increase in the harmonic current causes the fast-
response current limit to activate before the stall prevention operation, which may result in torque shortage. In this case,
disable the fast-response current limit in Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection.
• The lower limit of carrier frequency after the reduction under PM sensorless vector control (low-speed range high-torque
characteristic enabled) is 6 kHz.
• During fast-response operation, the carrier frequency automatic reduction function is disabled.

Parameters referred to
Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selectionpage 431
Pr.570 Multiple rating settingpage 343
Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selectionpage 233
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221

358 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
5.7.19 Inverter parts life display
The degree of deterioration of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, inrush current limit circuit, and 1
relay contacts of terminals A, B, and C can be diagnosed on the monitor. When a part approaches the end of its life, an alarm
can be output by self diagnosis to prevent a fault. (Note that the life diagnosis of this function should be used as a guideline
only, because with the exception of the main circuit capacitor, the life values are theoretical calculations.) 2
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Displays whether or not the parts of the control circuit
255
Life alarm status display 0 (0 to 255)*1
capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and 3
E700 inrush current limit circuit have reached the life alarm
output level. Read-only.
256 Inrush current limit circuit life Displays the degree of deterioration for the inrush
E701*2 display
100% (0 to 100%)
current limit circuit. Read-only. 4
257 Control circuit capacitor life Displays the degree of deterioration for the control
100% (0 to 100%)
E702 display circuit capacitor. Read-only.

258
Main circuit capacitor life display 100% (0 to 100%)
Displays the degree of deterioration for the main circuit
capacitor. Read-only. 5
E703*2
The value measured by Pr.259 is displayed.
Setting "1" and turning the power supply OFF starts the

0, 1
measurement of the main circuit capacitor life.
If the setting value of Pr.259 becomes "3" after turning
6
(2, 3, 8, 9) the power supply ON again, it means that the
measurement is completed. The degree of
259 deterioration is read to Pr.258.
E704*2
Main circuit capacitor life
measuring
0
When "11" is set, turning OFF the power supply starts
7
the measurement of the main circuit capacitor life.
11 If the setting value of Pr.259 becomes "13" after turning
(12, 13, 18, 19) the power supply ON again, it means that the
measurement is completed. The degree of 8
deterioration is read to Pr.258.
506 Display estimated main circuit Displays the estimated residual life of the main circuit
100% (0 to 100%)
E705*2 capacitor residual life capacitor. Read-only.
507 Display/reset ABC1 relay contact Displays the degree of deterioration of the relay
9
100% 0 to 100%
E706 life contacts of terminals A1, B1, and C1.
508 Display/reset ABC2 relay contact Displays the degree of deterioration of the relay
100% 0 to 100%
E707 life contacts of terminals A2, B2, and C2.
10
*1 The setting range (read-only) differs depending on the inverter model (standard model, separate converter type, or IP55 compatible model).
*2 The setting is available for the standard structure model and the IP55 compatible model.

 Life alarm display and signal output (Y90 signal, Pr.255)

• In the life diagnosis of the main circuit capacitor, the Life alarm (Y90) signal is not output unless measurement by turning OFF
the power supply is performed.

• Whether or not the parts of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, inrush current limit circuit,
internal air circulation fans, or relay contacts of terminals A, B, and C have reached the life alarm output level can be
checked with Pr.255 Life alarm status display and the Life alarm (Y90) signal. (Internal air circulation fans are equipped
with IP55 compatible models.)

bit 15 7 0 • Pr.255 read • Pr.255 setting read

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

bit0 Control circuit capacitor life

Bit image is displayed
bit1 Main circuit capacitor life in decimal
(Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)
bit2 Cooling fan life
bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life (Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)
bit4 Life of internal air circulation fans (IP55 compatible models only)
bit5 Estimated residual-life of main circuit capacitor (Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)
bit6 ABC1 relay contact life
bit7 ABC2 relay contact life

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
359
 • When the parts have reached the life alarm output level, the corresponding bits of Pr.255 turns ON. The ON/OFF state of
the bits can be checked with Pr.255. The following table shows examples.
Pr.255
bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Remarks
Decimal Binary
All parts have reached alarm output level for
239 11101111 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○
standard structure models.
Control circuit capacitor and cooling fan have
5 101 × × × × × ○ × ○
reached alarm output level.
0 0 × × × × × × × × No parts have reached alarm output level.
○: Parts reaching alarm output level ×: Parts not reaching alarm output level
• Diagnosable parts differ depending on the type of the inverter.
Applicable inverter
Part
Standard model Separated converter type IP55 compatible model
Control circuit capacitor ○ ○ ○
Main circuit capacitor ○ × ○
Cooling fan ○ ○ ○
Inrush current limit circuit ○ × ○
Internal air circulation fan × × ○
Main circuit capacitor (estimated ○ × ○
residual life)
ABC relay contact ○ ○ ○
○: Diagnosable, ×: Undiagnosable

• The Life alarm (Y90) signal turns ON when the life alarm output level is reached for either of the following: the control circuit
capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life, internal air circulation fan life,
estimated residual-life of the main circuit capacitor, ABC1 relay contact life, or ABC2 relay contact life.
• For the terminal used for the Y90 signal, set "90" (positive logic) or "190" (negative logic) in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection).

NOTE
• When using an option (FR-A8AY, FR-A8AR, FR-A8NC, FR-A8NCE, or FR-A8NCG), warning signals can be output
individually: the Control circuit capacitor life (Y86) signal, Main circuit capacitor life (Y87) signal, Cooling fan life (Y88) signal,
Inrush current limit circuit life (Y89) signal, Estimated residual-life of main circuit capacitor (Y248) signal, ABC1 relay contact
life (Y249) signal, and ABC2 relay contact life (Y250) signal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Life display of the inrush current limit circuit (Pr.256) (Standard models
and IP55 compatible models)
• The life of the inrush current limit circuit (relay, contactor and inrush resistor) is displayed in Pr.256.
• The number of contact (relay, contactor, thyristor) ON times is counted, and it is counted down from 100% (0 time) every
1%/10,000 times. When the counter reaches 10% (900,000 times), bit 3 of Pr.255 is turned ON (set to 1) and the Y90
signal is also output as an alert.

 Life display of the control circuit capacitor (Pr.257)

• The degree of deterioration for the control circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr.257.
• In the operating status, the control circuit capacitor life is calculated from the energization time and temperature, and is
counted down from 100%. When the counter goes down from 10%, bit 0 of Pr.255 is turned ON (set to 1) and the Y90
signal is also output as an alert.

360 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
 Life display of the main circuit capacitor (Pr.258, Pr.259) (Standard
models and IP55 compatible models) 1

• For accurate life measurement of the main circuit capacitor, wait three hours or longer after turning OFF. The temperature left
in the main circuit capacitor affects measurement.
2

• The degree of deterioration for the main circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr.258.
• With the main circuit capacitor capacity at factory shipment as 100%, the capacitor life is displayed in Pr.258 every time
3
measurement is made. When the measured value falls to 85% or lower, bit 1 of Pr.255 is turned ON (set to 1) and the Y90
signal is also output as an alert.
• Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the degree of deterioration for the capacitor
4
capacity.

1. Check that the motor is connected and at a stop. 5

2. Set "1 or 11" (measuring start) in Pr.259.

3. Switch the power OFF. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the
6
inverter is OFF.

4. After confirming that the power lamp is OFF, turn ON the power again.

5. Check that "3 or 13" (measurement complete) is set in Pr.259, read Pr.258, and check the degree of deterioration
7
for the main circuit capacitor.

0
Pr.259 Description
No measurement Initial value
Remarks
8
Measurement starts when the power supply is switched OFF. (Only
once when Pr.259 = "1")
1, 11 Start measurement
When Pr.259 = "11", the measurement starts every time the power
supply is turned OFF.
9
2, 12 During measurement
3, 13 Measurement complete Only displayed and cannot be set. (When "11" is set in Pr.259, "12,
8, 18 Forced end 13, 18, or 19" is displayed.) 10
9, 19 Measurement error

NOTE
• When the main circuit capacitor life is measured under the following conditions, "forced end" (Pr.259 = "8 or 18"), or
"measurement error" (Pr.259 = "9 or 19") may occur, or the status may remain in "measurement start" (Pr.259 = "1 or 11"). To
perform measurement, first eliminate the following conditions. Under the following conditions, even if "measurement complete"
(Pr.259 = "3 or 13") is reached, measurement cannot be performed correctly.
- FR-HC2, FR-XC (common bus regeneration mode), FR-CV, MT-RC, or a sine wave filter (when Pr.72 = "25") is
connected.
- Terminals R1/L11, S1/L21 or DC power supply is connected to terminals P/+ and N/-.
- The power supply is switched ON during measurement.
- The motor is not connected to the inverter.
- The motor is running (coasting).
- The motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by two ranks or more.
- The inverter output is shut off or a fault occurred while the power was OFF.
- The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal.
- The start command is given while measuring.
- The applied motor setting is incorrect.
• Operation environment: Surrounding air temperature (annual average of 40°C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil
mist, dust and dirt)).
Output current: 80% of the inverter rating
• Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit, frequent starts and stops of the
magnetic contactor must be avoided.

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
361
 WARNING
• When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr.259 = "1 or 11"), the DC voltage is applied to the motor for about
1 second at power OFF. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering OFF to prevent an electric shock.

 Life display of the cooling fan

• If a cooling fan speed of less than the specified speed is detected, Fan alarm " " (FN) is displayed on the operation
panel or the parameter unit. As an alert output, bit 2 of Pr.255 is turned ON (set to 1), and the Y90 signal and Alarm (LF)
signal are also output.
• For the terminal used for the LF signal, set "98" (positive logic) or "198" (negative logic) in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection).

NOTE
• When the inverter is mounted with two or more cooling fans, "FN" is displayed even only one of the fans is detected.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• For replacement of each part, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.

 Estimated residual life display of the main circuit capacitor (Pr.506)

(Standard models and IP55 compatible models)
• Even when the power supply cannot be turned OFF, the remaining life of the main circuit capacitor can be estimated
without stopping the operation. Note that the remaining life of the main circuit capacitor estimated by this function is
theoretical, and should be used as a guideline only.
• The estimated residual life of the main circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr.506.
• The remaining life of the main circuit capacitor is calculated from the energization time and the inverter output power (100%
= Start of service life). When the remaining life of the main circuit capacitor falls below 10%, bit 5 of Pr.255 Life alarm
status display turns ON and a warning is output by the Y90 signal.

 Life display of the relay contacts of terminals A, B, and C (Pr.507, Pr.508)

• The degree of deterioration of the relay contacts of terminals A1, B1, and C1 is displayed in Pr.507, and that for terminals
A2, B2, and C2 is displayed in Pr.508.
• The number of times the contacts of relay turn ON is counted down from 100% (0 time) by 1% (500 times). When the
counter reaches 10% (45,000 times), bit 6 or bit 7 of Pr.255 turns ON and a warning is output by the Y90 signal.
• Any value can be set in Pr.507 and Pr.508. After replacement of the control circuit terminal block or installation of a control
terminal option, set Pr.507 and Pr.508 again.

 Life display of internal air circulation fans (IP55 compatible models)

• IP55 compatible models are equipped with the internal air circulation fan inside the inverter other than the cooling fan. The

internal fan fault " " (FN2) appears on the operation panel (FR-DU08) when the rotations per minute is less than
70% of the rated value for the internal air circulation fan. (FN is displayed on the parameter unit (FR-PU07).) As an alarm
display, Pr.255 bit 4 is turned ON and also a warning is output to the Y90 signal and Alarm (LF) signal.
• For the terminal used for the LF signal, set "98" (positive logic) or "198" (negative logic) in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection).

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• For replacement of each part, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.

362 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
5.7.20 Maintenance timer alarm
The Maintenance timer (Y95) signal is output when the inverter's cumulative energization time reaches the time period set with 1
the parameter. MT1, MT2 or MT3 is displayed on the operation panel. This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance
time of peripheral devices.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
2
Displays the inverter's cumulative energization time in
503 increments of 100 h (read-only). Writing the setting of "0"
Maintenance timer 1 0 0 (1 to 9998)
E710 clears the cumulative energization time while Pr.503 = "1 to
9998". (Writing is disabled when Pr.503 = "0".)
3
Set the time until the Maintenance timer (Y95) signal is output.
504 Maintenance timer 1 0 to 9998
9999 "MT1" is displayed on the operation panel.
E711 warning output set time
9999 Without the function 4
686
Maintenance timer 2 0 0 (1 to 9998) The same function as Pr.503.
E712
687 Maintenance timer 2 0 to 9998 The same function as Pr.504.
E713 warning output set time
9999
9999 "MT2" is displayed on the operation panel. 5
688
Maintenance timer 3 0 0 (1 to 9998) The same function as Pr.503.
E714
0 to 9998
689
E715
Maintenance timer 3
warning output set time
9999
9999
The same function as Pr.504.
"MT3" is displayed on the operation panel. 6
First power ON
9998 7
(999800h) Set "0" in Pr.503

Maintenance
timer 1
(Pr. 503)
Pr.504 8
Time

Y95 signal OFF ON ON 9

MT1 display
Operation example of the maintenance timer 1 (Pr.503, Pr.504) (with both MT2 and MT3 OFF)
10
• The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored in the EEPROM every hour and displayed in Pr.503 (Pr.686,
Pr.688) in 100 h increments. Pr.503 (Pr.686, Pr.688) is clamped at 9998 (999800 h).
• When the value in Pr.503 (Pr.686, Pr.688) reaches the time (100 h increments) set in Pr.504 (Pr.687, Pr.689), the

Maintenance timer (Y95) signal is output, and also " " (MT1), " " (MT2), or " " (MT3) is
displayed on the operation panel.
• For the terminal used for the Y95 signal output, assign the function by setting "95 (positive logic)" or "195 (negative logic)"
in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).

NOTE
• The Y95 signal turns ON when any of MT1, MT2 or MT3 is activated. It does not turn OFF unless all of MT1, MT2 and MT3
are cleared.
• If all of MT1, MT2 and MT3 are activated, they are displayed in the priority of "MT1 > MT2 > MT3".
• The cumulative energization time is counted every hour. Energization time of less than 1 h is not counted.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

5.7.21 Current average value monitor signal

The output current average value during constant-speed operation and the maintenance timer value are output to the Current
average monitor (Y93) signal as a pulse. The output pulse width can be used in a device such as the I/O unit of a programmable
controller as a guideline for the maintenance time for mechanical wear, belt stretching, or deterioration of devices with age.

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
363
 The pulse is repeatedly output during constant-speed operation in cycles of 20 seconds to the Current average monitor (Y93)
signal.

Programmable controller
Output Input
unit unit
Inverter
maintenance
time

parts have
reached their life

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

555 Set the time for calculating the average current during start
Current average time 1s 0.1 to 1 s
E720 pulse output (1 second).
556 Set the time for not obtaining (masking) transitional state
Data output mask time 0s 0 to 20 s
E721 data.
Current average value 0 to 500 A*1
557 Inverter rated Set the reference (100%) for outputting the output current
monitor signal output
E722 current 0 to 3600 A*2 average value signal.
reference current
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

 Operation example
• The pulse output of the Current average monitor (Y93) signal is indicated below.
• For the terminal used for the Y93 signal output, assign the function by setting "93 (positive logic)" or "193 (negative logic)"
in any of Pr.190 to Pr.194 (Output terminal function selection). (This cannot be assigned by setting in Pr.195 ABC1
terminal function selection or Pr.196 ABC2 terminal function selection.)

From acceleration to constant speed operation

Output
frequency

Time
1 cycle (20 s) Next cycle

Y93 signal
Data output mask time End pulse
When the speed has changed to constant output as low pulse
from acceleration/deceleration, Y93 signal is shape for 1 to 16.5 s
not output for Pr. 556 time.
Maintenance timer pulse
Start pulse The maintenance timer value (Pr. 503) is output
Output as Hi pulse shape for 1 s (fixed) as Hi output pulse shape for 2 to 9 s (16000h to
The output currents are averaged during the time 72000h).
period set in Pr.555. Pr. 503 100h
Signal output time= 5s
40000h
Output current average value pulse
The averaged current value is output as low pulse shape for
0.5 to 9 s (10 to 180%) during start pulse output.
output current average value (A)
Signal output time= 5s
Pr. 557 (A)

 Pr.556 Data output mask time setting

• Immediately after acceleration/deceleration is shifted to constant-speed operation, the output current is unstable
(transitional state). Set the time for not obtaining (masking) transitional state data in Pr.556.

 Pr.555 Current average time setting

• The output current average is calculated during start pulse (1 second) HIGH output. Set the time for calculating the average
current during start pulse output in Pr.555.

364 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
 Pr.557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current
setting 1
Set the reference (100%) for outputting the output current average value signal. The signal output time is calculated with the
following formula.

Output current average value

2
×5s (Output current average value 100%/5 s)
Pr.557 setting value

The output time range is 0.5 to 9 seconds. When the output current average value is less than 10% of the setting value in 3
Pr.557, the output time is 0.5 seconds, and when it is more than 180%, the output time is 9 seconds.
For example, when Pr.557 = 10 A and the output current average value is 15 A:
15 A/10 A × 5 s = 7.5 s, thus the Current average monitor signal maintains LOW output for 7.5 seconds. 4
Signal output time

(s)
9
5
0.5
10 180 (%)
Output current average value
6
 Pr.503 Maintenance timer 1 output
After LOW output of the output current value is performed, HIGH output of the maintenance timer value is performed. The
maintenance timer value output time is calculated with the following formula.
7
Pr.503 × 100
×5s (Maintenance timer value 100%/5 s)
40000h 8
The output time range is 2 to 9 seconds. When Pr.503 is less than 16000 hours, the output time is 2 seconds. When it is more
than 72000 hours, the output time is 9 seconds.
9
Signal output time

(s)
9

2 10
16000 72000 (h)
Maintenance timer value

5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
365
 NOTE
• Masking of the data output and sampling of the output current are not performed during acceleration/deceleration.
• If constant speed changes to acceleration or deceleration during start pulse output, it is judged as invalid data, and the signal
maintains HIGH start pulse output for 3.5 seconds and LOW end pulse output for 16.5 seconds. After the start pulse output is
completed, minimum 1-cycle signal output is performed even if acceleration/deceleration is performed.

The speed is changed to deceleration from

Output frequency the constant speed during start pulse output

Time
Previous cycle Invalid cycle (20 s) Next cycle
Y93
signal
Start pulse End signal
Output as high pulse shape for 3.5 s Output as low pulse shape for 16.5 s

• If the output current value (inverter output current monitor) is 0 A at the completion of the 1-cycle signal output, no signal is
output until the next constant-speed state.
• Under the following conditions, the Y93 signal maintains LOW output for 20 seconds (no data output).
- When acceleration or deceleration is operating at the completion of the 1-cycle signal output
- When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠ "9999") is set, and the 1-
cycle signal output is completed during the restart operation.
- When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr.57 ≠ "9999") is set, and the restart operation was being
performed at the completion of data output masking.

• Pr.686 Maintenance timer 2 and Pr.688 Maintenance timer 3 cannot be output.

• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
Pr.503 Maintenance timer 1, Pr.686 Maintenance timer 2, Pr.688 Maintenance timer 3page 363

366 5. PARAMETERS
5.7 (E) Environment setting parameters
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and 1
acceleration/deceleration pattern
2
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.16,
P.F000 to P.F003,
P.F010, P.F011,
Pr.20, Pr.21, Pr.44, 3
Pr.45, Pr.110,
To set the motor acceleration/ Acceleration/deceleration P.F020 to P.F022,
Pr.111, Pr.147, 367
deceleration time time P.F030, P.F031,
Pr.611, Pr.791,
P.F040, P.F070,
P.F071, P.G264
Pr.792, Pr.1103, 4
Pr.1349
P.F100, P.F200 to Pr.29, Pr.140 to
Acceleration/deceleration
To set the acceleration/deceleration P.F203, P.F300 to Pr.143, Pr.380 to
pattern suitable for an application
pattern and backlash
measures
P.F303, P.F400 to Pr.383, Pr.516 to
372
5
P.F403 Pr.519
To command smooth speed transition
Remote setting function P.F101 Pr.59 377
with terminals

To set the starting frequency

Starting frequency and start-
P.F102, P.F103 Pr.13, Pr.571 381, 382
6
time hold
To set optimum acceleration/ Automatic acceleration/ P.F500, P.F510 to Pr.61 to Pr.63,
384
deceleration time automatically deceleration P.F513 Pr.292

To set V/F pattern for lift automatically

Lift operation (Automatic P.F500 to P.F510, Pr.61 to Pr.64,
387
7
acceleration/deceleration) P.F520 Pr.292

5.8.1 Setting the acceleration and deceleration time 8

The following parameters are used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time.
Set a larger value for a slower acceleration/deceleration, or a smaller value for a faster acceleration/deceleration.
9

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
367
 For the acceleration time at automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, refer to Pr.611 Acceleration time at a restart
(page 628, page 635).
Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
Acceleration/ Set the frequency that is the basis of acceleration/deceleration time.
20 deceleration As acceleration/deceleration time, set the time required to change
60 Hz 50 Hz 1 to 590 Hz
F000 reference the frequency from a stop status (0 Hz) to the frequency set in Pr.20
frequency and vice versa.
Acceleration/ 0 Increment: 0.1 s Select the increment for
21
deceleration time 0 the acceleration/
F001 1 Increment: 0.01 s
increments deceleration time setting.
16 Jog acceleration/ Set the acceleration/deceleration time for JOG operation (from stop
0.5 s 0 to 3600 s
F002 deceleration time status to Pr.20). Refer to page 410.
0 to 3600 s Set the acceleration time for restart (from stop status to Pr.20).
611 Acceleration time
9999 Standard acceleration time (for example, Pr.7) is applied as the
F003 at a restart 9999
acceleration time at restart. Refer to page 628, page 635.
7 5s*1 Set the motor acceleration time (time required to change the
Acceleration time 0 to 3600 s
F010 15s*2 frequency from a stop status (0 Hz) to the frequency set in Pr.20).

8 5s*1
Deceleration time 0 to 3600 s Set the motor deceleration time (from Pr.20 to stop status).
F011 15s*2
Second
44 Set the acceleration/deceleration time used while the RT signal is
acceleration/ 5s 0 to 3600 s
F020 ON.
deceleration time
45 Second 0 to 3600 s Set the deceleration time used while the RT signal is ON.
9999
F021 deceleration time 9999 The acceleration time applies to the deceleration time.
Acceleration/ Set the frequency where the acceleration/deceleration time
0 to 590 Hz
147 deceleration time switches to the time set in Pr.44 and Pr.45.
9999
F022 switching
9999 Function disabled.
frequency
Third 0 to 3600 s Set the acceleration/deceleration time when the X9 signal is ON.
110
acceleration/ 9999
F030 9999 Third acceleration/deceleration is disabled.
deceleration time
111 Third deceleration 0 to 3600 s Set the deceleration time when the X9 signal is ON.
9999
F031 time 9999 The acceleration time applies to the deceleration time.
Set the acceleration time in a low-speed range (less than 1/10 of the
Acceleration time 0 to 3600 s
791 rated motor frequency).
in low-speed 9999
F070 The acceleration time set in Pr.7 is applied. (While the RT signal or
range 9999
the X9 signal is ON, the second or third function is enabled.)
Set the deceleration time in a low-speed range (less than 1/10 of the
Deceleration time 0 to 3600 s
792 rated motor frequency).
in low-speed 9999
F071 The deceleration time set in Pr.8 is applied. (While the RT signal or
range 9999
the X9 signal is ON, the second or third function is enabled.)
1103 Deceleration time Set the motor deceleration time at a deceleration by turning ON the
5s 0 to 3600 s
F040 at emergency stop X92 signal.
Speed loop integration
0 Droop control enabled.
enabled.
Speed loop integration
Emergency stop 1 Droop control enabled.
1349 disabled.
operation 0
G264 Speed loop integration
selection 10 Droop control disabled.
enabled.
Speed loop integration
11 Droop control disabled.
disabled.
*1 The initial value for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.
*2 Initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and FR-A840-00310(11K) and higher.

368 5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
 Control block diagram
Output frequency 10% of the rated motor frequency
1
JOG-ON
JOG
Acceleration time
(Pr.16)
Output frequency Pr.147 or

Acceleration and
(or Pr.147= “9999” ) RT-OFF X9-OFF deceleration time
2
deceleration time
(Pr.7, Pr.8) JOG-OFF

Output frequency Pr.147

Second acceleration and
deceleration time 3
(Pr.44, Pr.45)
Third acceleration and RT-ON
deceleration time
(Pr.110, Pr.111)
X9-ON 4
Acceleration and
deceleration time
in low-speed range
Output frequency 10% of the rated motor frequency
(Pr.791, Pr.792)
5
 Acceleration time setting (Pr.7, Pr.20)
• Use Pr.7 Acceleration time to set the acceleration time required to change the frequency to the frequency set in Pr.20
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency from stop status.
6
• Set the acceleration time according to the following formula.

Acceleration time setting = Pr.20 setting × (Acceleration time to change the frequency from stop status to maximum
frequency) / (Maximum frequency - Pr.13 setting)
7
• For example, the following calculation is performed to find the setting value for Pr.7 when increasing the output frequency
to the maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 seconds with Pr.20 = 60 Hz (initial value) and Pr.13 = 0.5 Hz.
8
Pr.7 setting = 60 Hz × 10 s / (50 Hz - 0.5 Hz) ≈ 12.1 s

Pr.20
(60Hz/50Hz) Set
9
frequency
frequency (Hz)

10
Output

Time

Acceleration Pr.7 Deceleration Pr.8

time Pr.44 time Pr.45
Pr.110 Pr.111

 Deceleration time setting (Pr.8, Pr.20)

• Use Pr.8 Deceleration time to set the deceleration time required to change the frequency to a stop status from the
frequency set in Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.
• Set the deceleration time according to the following formula.

Deceleration time setting = Pr.20 setting × (Deceleration time to change the frequency from maximum frequency to stop
status) / (Maximum frequency - Pr.10 setting)
• For example, the following calculation is used to find the setting value for Pr.8 when decreasing the output frequency from
the maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 seconds with Pr.20 = 120 Hz and Pr.10 = 3 Hz.

Pr.8 setting = 120 Hz × 10 s / (50 Hz - 3 Hz) ≈ 25.5 s

NOTE
• If the acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the
shortest acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system J (moment of inertia) and motor torque.
• If the Pr.20 setting is changed, the Pr.125 and Pr.126 (frequency setting signal gain frequency) settings do not change.
Set Pr.125 and Pr.126 to adjust the gains.
• Under PM sensorless vector control, if the protective function (E.OLT) is activated due to insufficient torque in the low-speed
range, set longer acceleration/deceleration times only in the low-speed range in Pr.791 Acceleration time in low-speed range
and Pr.792 Deceleration time in low-speed range.

5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
369
  Changing the minimum increment of the acceleration/deceleration time
(Pr.21)
• Use Pr.21 to set the minimum increment of the acceleration/deceleration time.
Setting value "0" (initial value): minimum increment 0.1 s
Setting value "1": minimum increment 0.01 s
• Pr.21 setting allows the minimum increment of the following parameters to be changed.
Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.16, Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.110, Pr.111, Pr.264, Pr.265, Pr.791, Pr.792, Pr.1103

NOTE
• Pr.21 setting does not affect the minimum increment setting of Pr.611 Acceleration time at a restart.
• The FR-DU08 and the FR-PU07 provide a five-digit readout (including the number of decimal places) on a value of parameters.
Therefore, a value of "1000" or larger is set/displayed only in increments of 0.1 second even if Pr.21 = "1".

 Setting multiple acceleration/deceleration times (RT signal, X9 signal,

Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.110, Pr.111, Pr.147)
• Pr.44 and Pr.45 are valid when the RT signal is ON or when the output frequency is equal to or higher than the frequency
set in Pr.147 Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency. Pr.110 and Pr.111 are valid when the X9 signal is
ON.
• Even at the frequency lower than the Pr.147 setting, turning ON the RT signal (X9 signal) switches the acceleration/
deceleration time to the second (third) acceleration/deceleration time. The priority of the signals and settings is X9 signal
> RT signal > Pr.147 setting.
• To input the X9 signal, set "9" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to the
terminal.
• When "9999" is set in Pr.45 and Pr.111, the deceleration time becomes equal to the acceleration time (Pr.44, Pr.110).
• When Pr.110 = "9999" is set, the third acceleration/deceleration function is disabled.
• If the Pr.147 setting is equal to or less than the Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency or the Pr.13 Starting
frequency setting, the acceleration/deceleration time switches to the Pr.44 (Pr.45) when the output frequency reaches or
exceeds the Pr.10 or Pr.13 setting.
Pr.147 setting Acceleration/deceleration time Description
Acceleration/deceleration time is not
9999 (initial value) Pr.7, Pr.8
automatically changed.
Second acceleration/deceleration time is
0.00 Hz Pr.44, Pr.45
applied from the start.
Output frequency < Pr.147: Pr.7, Pr.8 Acceleration/deceleration time is
0.01 Hz ≤ Pr.147 ≤ Set frequency
Pr.147 ≤ Output frequency: Pr.44, Pr.45 automatically changed.
Not changed as the frequency has not
Set frequency < Pr.147 Pr.7, Pr.8
reached the switchover frequency.

Output frequency
(Hz)
Set
frequency

Pr. 147
setting
Time
Pr.7 Pr.44 Pr.110 Pr.111 Pr.44 Pr.8 Pr.7 Pr.44 Pr.44 Pr.8
(Pr.45) (Pr.45)

RT signal ON

X9 signal ON

370 5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
 NOTE
• The reference frequency during acceleration/deceleration depends on the Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern 1
selection setting. (Refer to page 372.)
• The RT and X9 signals can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• The RT (X9) signal acts as the second (third) function selection signal and makes the other second (third) functions valid.
2
(Refer to page 525.)
• The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal. 3
 Setting the acceleration/deceleration time in the low-speed range (Pr.791,
Pr.792) 4
• If torque is required in the low-speed range (less than 10% of the rated motor frequency) under PM sensorless vector
control, set the Pr.791 Acceleration time in the low-speed range and Pr.792 Deceleration time in low-speed range
settings higher than the Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time settings so that the mild acceleration/
5
deceleration is performed in the low-speed range. Such a setting is especially effective when the low-speed range high-
torque characteristic is disabled (Pr.788 = "0"). (When RT signal or X9 signal is turned ON, the second or third acceleration/
deceleration time setting is prioritized.)
6

7
frequency (Hz)
Output

Low-speed range
(rated motor frequency/10)
Time 8
Acceleration time Deceleration time
in low-speed range in low-speed range
Slope set by Pr. 791 Slope set by Pr.792
Acceleration time Deceleration time 9
Slope set by Pr.7 Slope set by Pr.8

NOTE
• Set Pr.791 (Pr.792) to a value larger than the Pr.7 (Pr.8) setting. If set as Pr.791 < Pr.7, the operation is performed as Pr.791 10
= Pr.7. If set as Pr.792 < Pr.8, the operation is performed as Pr.792 = Pr.8.
• Refer to page 833 for the rated motor frequency of MM-CF.

 Emergency stop function (Pr.1103)

• When the Emergency stop (X92) signal is ON, the deceleration stop is performed according to the settings in the Pr.1103
Deceleration time at emergency stop and Pr.815 Torque limit level 2.
• To input the X92 signal, set "92" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to
a terminal.
• The X92 signal is a normally closed input (NC contact input).
• "PS" is displayed on the operation panel during activation of the emergency stop function.
Deceleration
Output frequency by an emergency stop
Normal
acceleration

Time
Start signal ON OFF ON
X92 ON OFF ON

5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
371
 • The droop control and the speed loop integration at the emergency stop by the Emergency stop (X92) signal can be
enabled/disabled using Pr.1349 Emergency stop operation selection.

Pr.1349 Description
setting Droop control Speed loop integration
0 Enabled Enabled
1 Enabled Disabled
10 Disabled Enabled
11 Disabled Disabled

NOTE
• The X92 signals can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• Refer to page 738 for details on the droop control.
• Refer to page 254 for details on the speed loop integration.

Parameters referred to
Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequencypage 715
Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selectionpage 372
Pr.125, Pr.126 (frequency setting gain frequency)page 505
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.264 Power-failure deceleration time 1, Pr.265 Power-failure deceleration time 2page 505

5.8.2 Acceleration/deceleration pattern

The acceleration/deceleration pattern can be set according to the application. In addition, the backlash measures that stop
acceleration/deceleration by the frequency or time set with parameters at acceleration/deceleration can be set.

Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0 Linear acceleration/deceleration
1 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A
2 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B
29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern
0 3 Backlash measure
F100 selection
4 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C
5 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D
6 Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration
140 Backlash acceleration stopping
1 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
F200 frequency
141 Backlash acceleration stopping
0.5 s 0 to 360 s Set the stopping frequency and time during backlash
F201 time
measures.
142 Backlash deceleration stopping
1 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Valid by backlash measures (Pr.29 = "3").
F202 frequency
143 Backlash deceleration stopping
0.5 s 0 to 360 s
F203 time
380
Acceleration S-pattern 1 0 0 to 50%
F300 Set the time for drawing the S-pattern from acceleration/
381 deceleration start to linear acceleration as a ratio (%) of
Deceleration S-pattern 1 0 0 to 50%
F301 acceleration/deceleration time (Pr.7, 8, etc.). The
382 acceleration/deceleration curve can be switched by the X20
Acceleration S-pattern 2 0 0 to 50%
F302 signal.
383 Valid by S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C (Pr.29 = "4").
Deceleration S-pattern 2 0 0 to 50%
F303
516 S-pattern time at a start of
0.1 s 0.1 to 2.5 s
F400 acceleration
517 S-pattern time at a completion of
0.1 s 0.1 to 2.5 s Set the time required for acceleration (S-pattern) of S-
F401 acceleration
pattern acceleration/deceleration.
518 S-pattern time at a start of Valid by S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D (Pr.29 = "5").
0.1 s 0.1 to 2.5 s
F402 deceleration
519 S-pattern time at a completion of
0.1 s 0.1 to 2.5 s
F403 deceleration

372 5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
 Linear acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 = "0 (initial value)")
• When the frequency is changed for acceleration, deceleration, etc. during inverter operation, the output frequency is 1
changed linearly (linear acceleration/deceleration) to reach the set frequency without straining the motor and inverter.
Linear acceleration/deceleration has a uniform frequency/time slope.
Setting value "0" 2
Output frequency

[Linear acceleration
/ deceleration]

3
(Hz)

Time

 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A (Pr.29 = "1") 4

• Use this when acceleration/deceleration is required for a short time until a high-speed area equal to or higher than the base
frequency, such as for the main shaft of the machine.
• The acceleration/deceleration pattern has the Pr.3 Base frequency (Pr.84 Rated motor frequency under PM motor
5
control) (fb) as the point of inflection in an S-pattern curve, and the acceleration/deceleration time can be set to be suitable
for the motor torque reduction in the constant-power operation range at the base frequency (fb) or more.
6
Output frequency

[S-pattern acceleration
/deceleration A]

fb 7
(Hz)

Time

• Acceleration/deceleration time calculation method when the set frequency is equal to or higher than the base frequency 8
Acceleration time t = (4/9) × (T/fb2) × f2 + (5/9) × T
Where T is the acceleration/deceleration time (s), f is the set frequency (Hz), and fb is the base frequency (rated motor
frequency) 9
• Reference (0 Hz to set frequency) of acceleration/deceleration time when Pr.3 = 60 Hz

Acceleration/deceleration Set frequency (Hz) 10

time (s) 60 120 200 400
5 5 12 27 102
15 15 35 82 305

NOTE
• For the acceleration/deceleration time setting of the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A, set the time to Pr.3 (Pr.84 under
PM sensorless vector control) instead of Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.

 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B (Pr.29 = "2")

• This is useful for preventing collapsing stacks such as on a conveyor. S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B can reduce
the impact during acceleration/deceleration by accelerating/decelerating while maintaining an S-pattern from the present
frequency (f2) to the target frequency (f1).
[S-pattern acceleration
/deceleration B]
Set frequency
(Hz)

f1
Output frequency

f2
(Hz)

Time

5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
373
 NOTE
• When the RT or X9 signal turns ON during acceleration or deceleration with the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B enabled,
a pattern of acceleration or deceleration changes to linear at the moment.

 Backlash measures (Pr.29 = "3", Pr.140 to Pr.143)

• Reduction gears have an engagement gap and have a dead zone between forward rotation and reverse rotation. This dead
zone is called backlash, and this gap disables a mechanical system from following motor rotation. More specifically, a
motor shaft develops excessive torque when the direction of rotation changes or when constant-speed operation shifts to
deceleration, resulting in a sudden motor current increase or regenerative status.
• To avoid backlash, acceleration/deceleration is temporarily stopped. Set the acceleration/deceleration stopping frequency
and time in Pr.140 to Pr.143.
Output frequency (Hz)

[Anti-backlash measure
function]
Pr. 142

Pr. 140
Pr. 13
Time
Pr. 141 Pr. 143

NOTE
• Setting the backlash measures increases the acceleration/deceleration time by the stopping time.

 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C (Pr.29 = "4", Pr.380 to Pr.383)

• Switch the acceleration/deceleration curve by the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover (X20) signal.
• To input the X20 signal, set "20" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to
the terminal.
X20 signal During acceleration During deceleration
OFF Pr.380 Acceleration S-pattern 1 Pr.381 Deceleration S-pattern 1
ON Pr.382 Acceleration S-pattern 2 Pr.383 Deceleration S-pattern 2

Frequency
Pr.381
Pr.382

Output frequency Pr.383

Set frequency

Pr.380

S-pattern Time
acceleration/
OFF ON OFF
deceleration
C switchover
(X20)
• Set the ratio (%) of time for drawing an S-shape in Pr.380 to Pr.383 with the acceleration time as 100%.

Parameter setting (%) = Ts / T × 100%

S-pattern
acceleration

Linear
acceleration

Ts Ts
T

374 5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
 NOTE
• At a start, the motor starts at Pr.13 Starting frequency when the start signal turns ON. 1
• If there is a difference between the speed command and speed at a start of deceleration due to torque limit operation etc., the
speed command is matched with the speed to make deceleration.
• Change the X20 signal after the speed becomes constant. S pattern operation before switching continues even if the X20
signal is changed during acceleration or deceleration.
2
• The X20 signal can be assigned to an input terminal by setting any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• When the RT or X9 signal turns ON during acceleration or deceleration with the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C enabled, 3
a pattern of acceleration or deceleration changes to linear at the moment.

 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D (Pr.29 = "5", Pr.516 to Pr.519) 4

• Set the time required for S-pattern operation part of S-pattern acceleration/deceleration with Pr.516 to Pr.519.
Set each S-pattern operation time for acceleration start (Pr.516), acceleration completion (Pr.517), deceleration start
(Pr.518), and deceleration completion (Pr.519). 5
• When S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D is set, the acceleration/deceleration time becomes longer, as shown below.
The set acceleration/deceleration time T1 indicates the actual time taken for linear acceleration/deceleration as calculated
based on Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.110, and Pr.111. 6
Actual acceleration time T2 = set acceleration time T1 + (S-pattern time at start of acceleration +
S-pattern time at completion of acceleration) / 2
Actual deceleration time T2 = set deceleration time T1 + (S-pattern time at start of deceleration + 7
S-pattern time at completion of deceleration) / 2
Output frequency

Pr.516 Pr.517 Pr.518 Pr.519

8

Time 9
Start signal ON

NOTE
• Even if the start signal is turned OFF during acceleration, the inverter does not decelerate immediately to avoid sudden 10
frequency change. (Likewise, the inverter does not immediately accelerate when deceleration is changed to re-acceleration
by turning the start signal ON during deceleration, etc.)

5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
375
 • For example, the following table shows the actual acceleration time when starting the inverter by selecting S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration D from a stop to 60 Hz, as shown below, with the initial parameter settings.
Pr. 517
Acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency (Pr. 20)
Pr. 517/2

Pr. 516

Pr. 516/2 Linear acceleration

Slope of Pr. 7, Pr. 44, Pr. 110

Starting frequency
T1 (Pr. 13)

T2

Set acceleration time T1 = (set frequency - Pr.13) × Pr.7 / Pr.20

= (60 Hz - 0.5 Hz) × 5 s / 60 Hz
4.96s (actual acceleration time at linear acceleration)
Actual acceleration time T2 = set acceleration time T1 + (Pr.516 + Pr.517) / 2
= 4.96 s + (0.1 s + 0.1 s) / 2
= 5.06 s (acceleration time at S-pattern acceleration)
• The following table shows the actual deceleration time when stopping the inverter by selecting S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration D from operation to 0 Hz, as shown below, with the initial parameter settings.
Acceleration/
deceleration Pr.518
reference
frequency
(Pr. 20) Pr.518/2 Linear deceleration
Pr. 8, Pr. 45, Pr. 111

Pr.519

Pr.519/2

DC injection
brake operation
T1 frequency
(Pr. 10)
T2

Set deceleration time T1 = (set frequency - Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency) × Pr.8 / Pr.20
= (60 Hz - 3 Hz) × 5 s / 60 Hz
4.75 s (actual deceleration time at linear deceleration)
Actual deceleration time T2 = set deceleration time T1 + (Pr.518 + Pr.519) / 2
= 4.75 s + (0.1 s + 0.1 s) / 2
= 4.85 s (deceleration time at S-pattern deceleration)

NOTE
• When acceleration/deceleration time (such as Pr.7 and Pr.8) is set to "0 s" under Real sensorless vector control, Vector
control, and PM sensorless vector control (with MM-CF and Pr.788 Low speed range torque characteristic selection
="9999 (initial value)"), linear acceleration and deceleration are performed for the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A to D
and backlash measures (Pr.29 ="1 to 5").
• Set linear acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 ="0 (initial setting)") when torque control is performed under Real sensorless vector
control or Vector control. When acceleration/deceleration patterns other than the linear acceleration/deceleration are selected,
the protective function of the inverter may be activated.

376 5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
 Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 = "6")
• This function is useful for variable-torque load such as a fan and blower to accelerate/decelerate in short time. 1
Linear acceleration/deceleration is performed in the area where the output frequency > base frequency.
[Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration]
Output frequency
2
Set frequency

Pr.3 Base frequency

3
Pr.7 Pr.8 Time
Acceleration time Deceleration time
4
NOTE
• When the base frequency is out of the range 45 to 65 Hz, the linear acceleration/deceleration is performed even if Pr.29 = "6".
• Even if Pr.14 Load pattern selection = "1 (variable torque load)", variable torque acceleration/deceleration setting is 5
prioritized and the inverter operates as Pr.14 = "0 (constant torque load)".
• For the variable torque acceleration/deceleration time setting, set the time period to reach Pr.3 Base frequency. (Not the time
period to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.)
• The variable torque acceleration/deceleration is disabled during PM sensorless vector control. (Linear acceleration/
6
deceleration is performed.)

7
Parameters referred to
Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time, Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequencypage 367
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequencypage 715
Pr.14 Load pattern selectionpage 708
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
8

5.8.3 Remote setting function

9
Even if the operation panel is located away from the enclosure, contact signals can be used to perform continuous variable-
speed operation, without using analog signals.

Pr. Name
Initial Setting
Description 10
value range RH, RM, RL signal Frequency setting Deceleration to the
function storage main speed or lower
0 Multi-speed setting —
1 Remote setting Enabled
2 Remote setting Disabled
Disabled Not available
(Turning OFF the STF/STR
3 Remote setting
signal clears the remotely-
59 Remote function
0 set frequency.)
F101 selection
11 Remote setting Enabled
12 Remote setting Disabled
Disabled Available
(Turning OFF the STF/STR
13 Remote setting
signal clears the remotely-
set frequency.)

 Remote setting function

• When Pr.59 ≠ "0" (remote setting enabled), the functions of the signals are as shown in the following table.
Signal name Function Description
The inverter accelerates the motor in the forward or reverse direction up to
STF/STR Forward/Reverse
the main speed or to the frequency stored by the remote setting function.
RH Acceleration The set frequency increases according to the Pr.44 setting.
RM Deceleration The set frequency decreases according to the Pr.45 setting.
RL Clear The set frequency is cleared and the main speed is applied.
The setting of the main speed is used as a base. The main speed is
Terminal 2 (analog signal) Main speed
increased by the RH signal and decreased by the RM signal.

5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
377
 Inverter Set frequency Decreased according to
Forward Increased
rotation (Hz) the Pr.45 setting
STF according to the
Acceleration
Pr.44 setting
RH
Deceleration
RM 10
Clear
RL 2 Cleared by RL
Terminal 2
SD 5
(main speed)

Connection
diagram for remote setting Time
RH (Acceleration) ON
RM (Deceleration) ON
RL (Clear) ON
STF (Forward) ON

 Main speed
• The main speed used in the remote setting corresponds with each of the following operation modes.
Operation mode Main speed
PU operation mode / NET operation mode Digital setting
External operation mode / PU/External combined operation mode 2 (Pr.79 = "4") Analog input*1
PU/External combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3") Analog input via terminal 4 (AU signal ON)*1
*1 Set Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selection to "1" when enabling compensation for input via terminal 1.

 Acceleration/deceleration operation
• The output frequency changes as follows when the set frequency is changed by the remote setting function.
Frequency Time setting Description
The set frequency increases/decreases by remote setting according to the Pr.44/Pr.45
Set frequency Pr.44/Pr.45
setting.
The output frequency increases/decreases by the set frequency according to the Pr.7/
Output frequency Pr.7/Pr.8
Pr.8 setting.

Acceleration (RH) ON

Deceleration (RM) ON

Set frequency

Time
Pr.44 Pr.45
Output frequency

Time
Pr.7 Pr.8

NOTE
• If the time setting of the output frequency is longer than the time setting of the set frequency, the motor accelerates/decelerates
according to the time setting of the output frequency.

378 5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
 • Deceleration to the main speed or lower
By setting Pr.59 = "11 to 13", the speed can be decelerated to the frequency lower than the main speed (set by the External
operation frequency (except multi-speed setting) or PU operation frequency).
1
Pr.59 = “ 1, 2, 3”
Output frequency Decelerates to the main speed
(Hz)
2
Main speed Pr.59 = “ 11, 12, 13”
Decelerates to the minimum frequency
Minimum
frequency
Time
3
0
Forward rotation(STF) ON
ON
Acceleration(RH)
Deceleration(RM)
ON 4
• Regardless of whether the remote setting is enabled or disabled, the acceleration/deceleration time set for the output
frequency can be changed to the second or third acceleration/deceleration time by turning ON the RT or X9 signal.
• The acceleration/deceleration time setting of the set frequency is fixed at the Pr.44/Pr.45 setting.
5
 Frequency setting storage
• The remotely set frequency is stored, held, or cleared according to the Pr.59 setting. When the inverter is turned ON again 6
and the operation is resumed, the setting shown in the parentheses will be applied.
Pr.59 setting Power OFF STF/STR signal OFF
1, 11 Stored (stored frequency) Held (stored frequency) 7
2, 12 Cleared (main speed) Held (stored frequency)
3, 13 Clear (main speed) Cleared (main speed)

• Storage conditions 8
The remotely-set frequency is stored at the point when the start signal (STF or STR) turns OFF. The remotely-set
frequency is stored every minute after turning OFF (ON) the RH and RM signals together. Every minute, the frequency is
overwritten in the EEPROM if the latest frequency is different from the previous one when comparing the two. This cannot 9
be written using the RL signal.

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
379
 NOTE
• When switching the start signal from ON to OFF, or changing frequency by the RH or RM signal frequently, set the frequency
setting value storage function (write to EEPROM) invalid (Pr.59 = "2, 3, 12, 13"). If the frequency setting value storage function
is valid (Pr.59 = "1, 11"), the frequency is written to EEPROM frequently, and this will shorten the life of the EEPROM.
• The range of frequency changeable using the acceleration (RH) signal and the deceleration (RM) signal is 0 to the maximum
frequency (set in Pr.1 or Pr.18). Note that the maximum value of set frequency is equal to the total of the main speed and the
maximum frequency.
(Hz) The set frequency is clamped at (main speed + Pr.1)

Output frequency is Set frequency

clamped at Pr.1
Output frequency
Pr.1
Pr.59="1, 2, 3"
Main speed setting
Pr.59="11, 12, 13"
0Hz Time
Acceleration(RH) ON
Deceleration(RM) ON
Forward rotation(STF) ON

• Even if the start signal (STF or STR) is OFF, turning ON the RH or RM signal varies the preset frequency.
• The RH, RM, or RL signal can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection). Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each
terminal.
• The inverter can be used in the Network operation mode.
• The remote setting function is invalid during JOG operation and PID control operation.
• The multi-speed operation function is invalid when remote setting function is selected.

When the setting frequency is "0"

• Even when the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning ON the clear (RL) signal after turning OFF (ON) both the RH and
RM signals, the inverter operates at the remotely-set frequency stored in the last operation if power is reapplied before one
minute has elapsed since turning OFF (ON) both the RH and RM signals.
Remotely-set frequency stored last time
Output frequency
(Hz)

Within 1 minute

Remotely-set frequency stored last time

Time

Acceleration (RH) ON
Deceleration (RM) OFF
ON
Clear (RL)
Forward rotation ON ON
(STF)
Power supply ON ON

380 5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
 • When the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning ON the clear (RL) signal after turning OFF (ON) both the RH and RM
signals, the inverter operates at the frequency in the remotely-set frequency cleared state if power is reapplied before one
minute has elapsed since turning OFF (ON) both the RH and RM signals. 1
Remotely-set frequency stored last time
One minute
More than

Output frequency
(Hz)
one minute
Operation is performed at the set
frequency 0Hz.
2

Time

ON
3
Acceleration (RH)
Deceleration (RM) OFF
ON
Clear (RL)

Forward rotation (STF) ON

ON
ON
ON
4
Power supply

5
CAUTION
• When using the remote setting function, set the maximum frequency again according to the machine.

Parameters referred to
6
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequencypage 428
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time, Pr.44 Second acceleration/deceleration time, Pr.45 Second deceleration timepage 367
Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selectionpage 411
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521 7
5.8.4 Starting frequency and start-time hold function
V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector 8
It is possible to set the starting frequency and hold the set starting frequency for a certain period of time.
Set these functions when a starting torque is needed or the motor drive at start needs smoothing.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
9
13 Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is turned
Starting frequency 0.5 Hz 0 to 60 Hz
F102 ON.
571
F103
Holding time at a start 9999
0 to 10 s
9999
Set the holding time of the frequency set in Pr.13.
The holding function at start is disabled.
10
 Starting frequency setting (Pr.13)
• The frequency at start can be set in the range of 0 to 60 Hz.
• Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is turned ON.
Output
frequency
(Hz)
60
Setting range

Pr.13
0
Time

STF ON

NOTE
• The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal has a value lower than that of Pr.13.
For example, while Pr.13 = 5 Hz, the inverter output starts when the frequency setting signal reaches 5 Hz.

 Start-time hold function (Pr.571)

• This function holds during the period set in Pr.571 and the output frequency set in Pr.13 Starting frequency.

5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
381
 • This function performs initial excitation to smooth the motor drive at a start.
Output
frequency
(Hz)
60
Setting range

Pr.13
0
Time
Pr. 571 setting time
STF ON

NOTE
• When Pr.13 = 0 Hz, the starting frequency is held at 0.01 Hz.
• When the start signal was turned OFF during start-time hold, deceleration is started at that point.
• At switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation, the starting frequency is valid but the start-time hold function is
disabled.

CAUTION
• Note that when Pr.13 is set to a value equal to or lower than the setting of Pr.2 Minimum frequency, simply turning ON
the start signal runs the motor at the frequency set in Pr.2 even if the command frequency is not given.

Parameters referred to
Pr.2 Minimum frequencypage 428

5.8.5 Minimum motor speed frequency and hold

function at the motor start up
PM

Set the frequency where the PM motor starts running.

Set the deadband in the low-speed range to eliminate noise and offset deviation when setting a frequency with analog input.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

13 Minimum frequency / Set the frequency where the motor starts
Starting frequency 0 to 60 Hz
F102 minimum rotations per minute running.
571 0 to 10 s Set the time to hold 0.01 Hz.
Holding time at a start 9999
F103 9999 The holding function at start is disabled.

 Starting frequency setting (Pr.13)

• The frequency where the PM motor starts running can be set in the range of 0 to 60 Hz.
• When the frequency command specifies the frequency less than the one set in Pr.13 Starting frequency, the PM motor
is stopped.
When the frequency command specifies the frequency equal to the set frequency or higher, the PM motor accelerates
according to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time.
Output
frequency
(Hz)
60
Setting range

Set frequency
Output
frequency
Pr.13
0
Time
Output from 0.01Hz
STF ON

382 5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
 NOTE
• Under induction motor control (under V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and 1
Vector control), the output starts at the frequency set in Pr.13. Under PM sensorless vector control, the output always starts
at 0.01 Hz.
• The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal has a value lower than that of Pr.13. For example, while Pr.13 = "20
Hz", the inverter output starts when the frequency setting signal reaches 20 Hz.
2

 Start-time hold function (Pr.571) 3

• This function holds 0.01 Hz during the period set in Pr.571.
• Pr.571 is active when the low-speed range high-torque characteristic is enabled (Pr.788 = "9999").
Output
frequency
4
(Hz)
60
Setting range

5
0
Time
Holds 0.01 Hz 6
Pr.571 setting time
STF ON

7
CAUTION
• Note that when Pr.13 is set to a value equal to or lower than Pr.2 Minimum frequency, simply turning ON the start signal
runs the motor at the frequency set in Pr.2 even if the command frequency is not given. 8
Parameters referred to
Pr.2 Minimum frequencypage 428
Pr.7 Acceleration timepage 367
9

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
383
 5.8.6 Shortest acceleration/deceleration and optimum
acceleration/deceleration (automatic acceleration/
deceleration)
V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector
The inverter can be operated with the same conditions as when the appropriate value is set to each parameter even when
acceleration/deceleration time and V/F pattern are not set. This function is useful for operating the inverter without setting
detailed parameters.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0 Normal operation
1 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (without brakes)
292 Automatic acceleration/ 11 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (with brakes)
0
F500 deceleration 3 Optimum acceleration/deceleration
5, 6 Lift operation 1, 2 (Refer to page 387.)
7, 8 Brake sequence 1, 2 (Refer to page 572.)
0 to 500 A*1 Set the reference current during shortest (optimum)
61 acceleration/deceleration.
Reference current 9999 0 to 3600 A*2
F510
9999 Rated output current value reference of the inverter
Set the speed limit value (optimum value) during shortest
0 to 400%
(optimum) acceleration.
62 Reference value at
9999 Shortest acceleration/deceleration: 150% as the limit value,
F511 acceleration
9999 optimum acceleration/deceleration: 100% as the optimum
value
Set the speed limit value (optimum value) during shortest
0 to 400%
(optimum) deceleration.
63 Reference value at
9999 Shortest acceleration/deceleration: 150% as the limit value,
F512 deceleration
9999 optimum acceleration/deceleration: 100% as the optimum
value
Shortest (optimum) acceleration/deceleration for both
0
acceleration and deceleration
293 Acceleration/deceleration Shortest (optimum) acceleration/deceleration for
0 1
F513 separate selection acceleration only
Shortest (optimum) acceleration/deceleration for
2
deceleration only
*1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
*2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher

 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (Pr.292 = "1, 11", Pr.293)

• Set this parameter to accelerate/decelerate the motor at the shortest time. This function is useful when the motor needs
to be accelerated/decelerated at a shorter time, such as for a machine, but the designed value of the machine constant is
not known.
• At acceleration/deceleration, this function adjusts the motor to accelerate/decelerate with the maximum inverter output
torque using the Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time setting as reference. (Pr.7 and Pr.8 settings are not
changed.)
• Use Pr.293 Acceleration/deceleration separate selection to apply the shortest acceleration/deceleration to one of
acceleration and deceleration only.
When "0 (initial value)" is set, the shortest acceleration/deceleration is performed for both acceleration and deceleration.
• Since the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower capacity inverters are equipped with built-in
brake resistors, set Pr.292 to "11". Set "11" also when a high-duty brake resistor or brake unit is connected. The
deceleration time can further be shortened.

384 5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
 • When the shortest acceleration/deceleration is selected under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control, the
stall prevention operation level during acceleration/deceleration becomes 150% (adjustable using Pr.61 to Pr.63). The
setting of Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level and stall level by analog input are used only during a constant speed
1
operation.
Under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control, the torque limit level (Pr.22, etc.) is applied during acceleration/
deceleration. The adjustments by Pr.61 to Pr.63 are disabled.
2
• It is inappropriate to use for the following applications.
- Machines with large inertia (10 times or more), such as a fan. Since stall prevention operation is activated for a long
time, this type of machine may be shut off due to motor overloading, etc. 3
- When the inverter is always operated at a specified acceleration/deceleration time.

NOTE 4
• Even if automatic acceleration/deceleration has been selected, inputting the JOG signal (JOG operation), RT signal (Second
function selection) or X9 signal (Third function selection) during an inverter stop switches to the normal operation and give
priority to JOG operation, second function selection or third function selection. Note that during operation, an input of JOG and 5
RT signal does not have any influence even when the automatic acceleration/deceleration is enabled.
• Since acceleration/deceleration is made with the stall prevention operation being activated, the acceleration/deceleration
speed always varies according to the load conditions.
• By setting Pr.7 and Pr.8 appropriately, it is possible to accelerate/decelerate with a shorter time than when selecting the 6
shortest acceleration/deceleration.

 Optimum acceleration/deceleration (Pr.292 = "3", Pr.293) 7

• The inverter operates at the most efficient level within the rated range that can be used continuously with reasonable
inverter capacity. Using self-learning, the average current during acceleration/deceleration is automatically set so as to
become the rated current. This is ideal for applications operated with a predetermined pattern and minimal load
8
fluctuations, such as by an automatically operated conveyor.
• When the optimum acceleration/deceleration is selected, at first, the operation is performed with the values set in Pr.0
Torque boost, Pr.7 Acceleration time, and Pr.8 Deceleration time. After the first operation is completed, average and
9
peak currents are calculated based on the motor current during acceleration/deceleration, and the obtained values are
compared with the reference current (initially set to the rated inverter current) to adjust the Pr.0, Pr.7, and Pr.8 settings to
their optimal values. The operation is the performed with the updated Pr.0, Pr.7, and Pr.8 values onwards, and those
10
parameters settings are adjusted each time. Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control
and Vector control, however, the Pr.0 setting is not changed.
• When a Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop (E.OV3) occurs during deceleration, the setting of Pr.8
is multiplied by 1.4.
• The optimum values of Pr.0, Pr.7 and Pr.8 are written to both the parameter RAM and EEPROM only three times of
acceleration (deceleration) after the optimum acceleration/deceleration has been selected or after the power is switched
ON or the inverter is reset. At or after the fourth attempt, they are not stored into EEPROM. Hence, after power-ON or
inverter reset, the values changed at the third time are valid. However, the optimum values are calculated even for the
fourth time and later, and Pr.0, Pr.7, and Pr.8 are set to the RAM; therefore, these can be stored to the EEPROM by
reading and writing the settings with the operation panel (FR-DU08).

Number of optimum value Pr.0, Pr.7, Pr.8

Operating condition
changes EEPROM value RAM value
1 to 3 times Updated Updated Updated
4 and more times Unchanged from the 3rd value Updated Updated
• Either acceleration or deceleration can be made in the optimum acceleration/deceleration using Pr.293 Acceleration/
deceleration separate selection. When the setting value is "0" (initial value), both acceleration and deceleration are made
in the optimum acceleration/deceleration.
• It is inappropriate for machines which change in load and operation conditions. Optimum values are saved for the next
operation. If the operating condition changes before the next operation, a fault such as overcurrent trip or a lack of
acceleration/deceleration may occur.

5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
385
 NOTE
• Even if automatic acceleration/deceleration has been selected, inputting the JOG signal (JOG operation), RT signal (Second
function selection) or X9 signal (Third function selection) during an inverter stop will switch to the normal operation and give
priority to JOG operation, second function selection or third function selection. Note that JOG and RT signal input is invalid
even if JOG signal and RT signal are input during operation in the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode.
• Because of the learning method, the impact of the optimum acceleration/deceleration is not apparent in the first operation after
setting to the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode.
• The optimum value are calculated for only acceleration from 0 to 30 Hz or higher or deceleration from 30 Hz or higher to 0 Hz.
• The optimum acceleration/deceleration will not operate if the motor was not connected or the output current is less than 5%
of the rated current of the inverter.
• A Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop (E.OV3) may occur during deceleration even if the optimum
acceleration/deceleration is selected with Pr.293 ="1 (optimum acceleration/deceleration during acceleration only)" setting. In
such case, set Pr.8 setting longer.

 Shortest and optimum acceleration/deceleration mode adjustment (Pr.61

to Pr.63)
• The application range can be expanded by setting the parameters for adjustment of Pr.61 to Pr.63.
Pr. Name Setting range Description
0 to 500 A *1 Set the rated motor current value such as when the motor capacity and inverter capacity
differ.
Shortest acceleration/deceleration: Set the reference current (A) of the stall prevention
*2 operation level during acceleration/deceleration.
61 Reference current 0 to 3600 A
Optimum acceleration/deceleration: Set the reference current (A) of the optimum current
during acceleration/deceleration.
9999 (initial
The rated inverter current value is the reference.
value)
Set this when changing the reference level of acceleration and deceleration.
Shortest acceleration/deceleration: Set the stall prevention operation level (percentage of
Reference value 0 to 400% current value of Pr.61) during acceleration/deceleration.
62, at acceleration, Optimum acceleration/deceleration: Set the optimum current level (percentage of current
63 Reference value value of Pr.61) during acceleration/deceleration.
at deceleration Shortest acceleration/deceleration: Stall prevention operation level is 150% for the
9999 (initial
shortest acceleration/deceleration.
value)
Optimum acceleration/deceleration: 100% as the optimum value.
*1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
*2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher

NOTE
• When Real sensorless vector control or Vector control is selected with the shortest acceleration/deceleration, Pr.61 to Pr.63
are invalid.
• Even if Pr.61 to Pr.63 are set once, changing the setting to other than the shortest acceleration/deceleration (Pr.292 ≠ "1 or
11") automatically resets to the initial setting (9999). Set Pr.61 to Pr.63 after setting Pr.292.

Parameters referred to
Pr.0 Torque boostpage 706
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 431
Pr.22 Torque limit levelpage 245

386 5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
5.8.7 Lift operation (automatic acceleration/
deceleration) 1
V/F

The inverter can be operated according to the load pattern of the lift with counterweight. 2
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0 Normal operation
Shortest acceleration/deceleration
3
1
(without brakes)
(Refer to page
Shortest acceleration/deceleration
11 384.)
292
F500
Automatic acceleration/
deceleration
0 (with brakes) 4
3 Optimum acceleration/deceleration
5 Lift operation 1 (stall prevention operation level 150%)
6 Lift operation 2 (stall prevention operation level 180%)
7, 8 Brake sequence 1, 2 (Refer to page 572.) 5
0 to 500 A*1 Set the reference current during shortest (optimum)
61
Reference current 9999 0 to 3600 A*2 acceleration/deceleration.
F510
9999 Rated output current value reference of the inverter 6
64 Starting frequency for 0 to 10 Hz Set the starting frequency for the lift operation.
9999
F520 elevator mode 9999 The starting frequency is 2 Hz.

*1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower 7
*2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher

 Lift operation (Pr.292 = "5, 6")

• When Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration is set to "5" or "6", the lift operation is selected, and each setting is 8
changed, as shown in the following table.
• During power driving, sufficient torque is generated, and during regenerative driving and during driving with no load, the
torque boost setting is adjusted automatically so as not to activate the overcurrent protective function by overexcitation. 9
Multi-rating Lift operation (Pr.292)
Name Normal operation
(Pr.570) 5 6

Torque boost Pr.0 (6/4/3/2/1%)

Changes according to the output 10
current (as shown below)
Pr.64 (2 Hz) Accelerate after 100 ms
Starting frequency Pr.13 (0.5 Hz)
hold.
Base frequency voltage Pr.19 (9999) 220 V class (440 V class)
0 (SLD) 110% 115%
1 (LD) 120% 140%
Stall prevention operation level Pr.22 (150%), etc. 2 (ND) initial
150% 180%
value
3 (HD) 200% 230%

When Pr.0 =6%

Torque boost (%) Pr.292 = "5"

Pr.292 = "6"
6%
Pr.0

3%
Torque boost 0%
Regenerative Driving
0 100 120 140
current 115 current
(%)
• If the lift has a load in which the rated current of the inverter is exceeded, the maximum torque may be insufficient.
For a lift without counterweight, setting Pr.14 Load pattern selection to "2 or 3" (for lift load) and setting Pr.19 Base
frequency voltage appropriately give the maximum torque a greater advantage than when selecting the lift operation.

5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
387
 NOTE
• The stall prevention operation level is automatically lowered according to the cumulative value of the electronic thermal O/L
relay so as to prevent an inverter overload trip (E.THT) and the motor overload trip (E.THM) from occurring.

 Lift operation adjustment (Pr.61, Pr.64)

• The application range can be expanded by setting the parameters for adjustment of Pr.61 and Pr.64.
Pr. Name Setting range Description
0 to 500 A *1 Set the rated motor current value such as when the motor capacity and
inverter capacity differ.
61 Reference current 0 to 3600 A*2 Set the reference current (A) of the stall prevention operation level.
9999 (initial value) The rated inverter output current value is the reference.
Starting frequency for 0 to 10 Hz Set the starting frequency for the lift operation.
64
elevator mode 9999 (initial value) The starting frequency is 2 Hz.
*1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
*2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher

NOTE
• Even if the lift operation has been selected, inputting the JOG signal (JOG operation), RT signal (Second function selection)
or X9 signal (Third function selection) during an inverter stop will disable the automatic acceleration/deceleration and give
priority to JOG operation, second function selection or third function selection. Note that during operation, an input of JOG and
RT signal does not have any influence even when the automatic acceleration/deceleration is enabled.
• Even if Pr.61 and Pr.64 are set, changing Pr.292 automatically resets to the initial setting (9999). Set Pr.61 and Pr.64 after
setting Pr.292.

Parameters referred to
Pr.0 Torque boostpage 706
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381
Pr.14 Load pattern selectionpage 708
Pr.19 Base frequency voltagepage 707
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 431
Pr.570 Multiple rating settingpage 343

388 5. PARAMETERS
5.8 (F) Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command 1

Purpose Parameter to set

Refer to 2
page
To select the operation mode Operation mode selection P.D000 Pr.79 389
To start up the inverter in Network operation Communication startup
mode at power-ON mode selection
P.D000, P.D001 Pr.79, Pr.340 398 3
Operation and speed
command sources during
To select the command source during Pr.338, Pr.339, Pr.550,
communication operation, P.D010 to P.D013 400
communication operation
command source
Pr.551
4
selection
To prevent the motor from rotating Reverse rotation
P.D020 Pr.78 406
reversely prevention selection
To change the setting resolution of speed Set resolution switchover P.D030 Pr.811 444 5
To change the setting resolution of the
Set resolution switchover P.D030 Pr.811 444
torque limit

To set the frequency using pulse train input Pulse train input
P.D100, P.D101,
P.D110, P.D111
Pr.291, Pr.384 to
Pr.386
406 6
To perform JOG (inching) operation JOG operation P.D200, P.F002 Pr.15, Pr.16 410
Pr.28, Pr.4 to Pr.6,
To control the frequency with combinations
of terminals
Multi-speed operation P.D300 to P.D315 Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232
to Pr.239
411
7
To select the torque command method Torque command source P.D120, P.D121, Pr.432, Pr.433, Pr.804
283
during torque control selection P.D400 to P.D402 to Pr.806
8
5.9.1 Operation mode selection
Select the operation mode of the inverter.
The mode can be changed among operations using external signals (External operation), operation by the operation panel or
9
the parameter unit (PU operation), combined operation of PU operation and External operation (External/PU combined
operation), and Network operation (when RS-485 terminals or a communication option is used).
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
10
79
Operation mode selection 0 0 to 4, 6, 7 Selects the operation mode.
D000

The following table lists valid and invalid commands in each operation mode.

5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
389
 LED indicator
Pr.79 Refer to
Description : OFF
setting page
: ON
PU operation
mode

External/PU switchover mode. External operation

0 (initial mode
The inverter operation mode can be switched between PU and External by pressing . 394
value)
At power ON, the inverter is in the External operation mode.
NET operation
mode

Operation mode Frequency command Start command

PU operation
Sent by pressing or mode
1 Fixed at PU operation Sent from the operation panel 394
mode. or parameter unit. on operation panel or
parameter unit.
External operation
mode
Fixed at External operation
Sent using external signals
mode.
(input via terminal 2 or 4, using
However, the inverter Sent using external signals (via
2 the JOG signal, using the 394
operation mode can also be terminal STF or STR). NET operation
multi-speed setting function,
changed to the Network mode
etc.).
operation mode.

Sent from the operation panel

or parameter unit or sent using
External/PU combined external signals (input using Sent using external signals (via
3 External/PU 394
operation mode 1 the multi-speed setting terminal STF or STR).
combined
function or via terminal 4).*1 operation mode
Sent using external signals
(input via terminal 2 or 4, using Sent by pressing or
External/PU combined
4 the JOG signal, using the 395
operation mode 2 on operation panel or
multi-speed setting function,
etc.). parameter unit.
PU operation
Operation mode switchover during operation. mode
6 Switching from among the PU, External, and NET operation modes can be performed during 395
operation.
External operation
mode

External operation mode (PU operation interlock).

X12 signal ON: Switchover to PU operation mode enabled (signal is OFF during External
7 NET operation 395
operation).
mode
X12 signal OFF: Switchover to PU operation mode disabled.

*1 The following is the frequency commands listed in descending order of priority when "3" is set in Pr.79: Multi-speed setting function (RL/RM/RH/
REX signal) > PID control (X14 signal) > terminal 4 analog input (AU signal) > digital input from the operation panel.

 Operation mode basics

• The operation mode specifies the source of the start command and the frequency command for the inverter.

390 5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
• Basic operation modes are as follows.
External operation mode: For giving a start command and a frequency command with an external potentiometer or switches which are
connected to the control circuit terminal. 1
PU operation mode : For giving a start command and a frequency command from the operation panel, parameter unit, or through
RS-485 communication via the PU connector.
Network operation mode :
(NET operation mode)
For giving a start command and a frequency command via the RS-485 terminals or communication option.
2
• The operation mode can be selected from the operation panel or with the communication instruction code.

Programmable controller

Network operation
Personal computer 4
PU operation mode
mode
Inverter

PU connector
Operation panel
Personal computer 5
RS-485 PU operation mode
terminals
USB
6
connector Personal computer

Network operation mode

7
Communication
option
Programmable controller
Personal computer
External operation mode 4
5 6 8
External terminal 1
2
3 7
8
9
10

Potentiometer Switch
9
NOTE
• There is a choice of two settings, "3" and "4", for the External/PU combined operation mode. The startup method differs 10
according to the setting value.

• In the initial setting, the PU stop selection (function to stop the inverter operation by pressing on the operation panel
or the parameter unit) is enabled even in the operation mode other than the PU operation mode. (Refer to Pr.75 on page 336.)

5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
391
  Operation mode switching method
External operation
When "0, 1, or 2" is set in Pr. 340

Switching through the network Switching with the PU

Switch to External Press on

operation mode through the PU to light
Press on
the network. Switch to the Network operation
mode through the network. the PU to light

Network operation PU operation

When "10 or 12" is set in Pr. 340

Press on the PU to light
Network operation PU operation

Press on the PU to light

NOTE
• For details on switching by external terminals, refer to the following pages.
PU operation external interlock (X12 signal)page 395
PU/External operation switchover (X16 signal)page 396
PU/NET operation switchover (X65 signal), External/NET operation switchover (X66 signal)page 397
Pr.340 Communication startup mode selectionpage 398

392 5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
 Operation mode selection flow
Referring to the following table, select the basic parameter settings or terminal wiring related to the operation mode. 1
Method to give
Method to give
frequency setting Input interface Parameter setting Operation method
start command
command
Terminal STF (forward
2
Using external signals • Frequency setting:
rotation) / STR (reverse
(input via terminal 2/4, Pr.79 = "2" (Fixed Turn ON a terminal used for
rotation). (Refer to page page
using the JOG signal, at External frequency setting.
using the multi-speed
722.)
Terminal 2 and 4 (analog),
operation mode) • Start command: 3
setting function, etc.) Turn ON terminal STF/STR.
RL, RM, RH, JOG, etc.
Pr.79 = "3" • Frequency setting:
Terminal STF (forward
(External/PU Use the DU (digital setting).
From PU (digital setting) rotation) / STR (reverse
rotation). (Refer to page 722.)
combined • Start command: 4
Using external operation mode 1) Turn ON terminal STF/STR.
signals (via terminal
Terminal STF (forward • Frequency setting:
STF/STR)
rotation) / STR (reverse Transmit a frequency command
Through communication
(via RS-485 terminals)
rotation). (Refer to page 722.)
Pr.338 = "1"
Pr.340 = "1 or 2"
through communication. 5
RS-485 terminals (Refer to • Start command:
page 661.) Turn ON terminal STF/STR.
• Frequency setting:
Through communication
Terminals for communication
option (Refer to the Pr.338 = "1"
Transmit a frequency command 6
(via communication through communication.
Instruction Manual of the Pr.340 = "1"
option) • Start command:
communication option.)
Turn ON terminal STF/STR.
Using external signals
Pr.79 = "4"
• Frequency setting: 7
(input via terminal 2/4, Turn ON a terminal used for
Terminals 2/4 (analog), RL, (External/PU
using the JOG signal, frequency setting.
RM, RH, JOG, etc. combined
using the multi-speed • Start command:
setting function, etc.)
operation mode 2)
Press the FWD/REV key. 8
From PU (using • Frequency setting:
Pr.79 = "1" (Fixed
FWD/REV key) Use the PU (digital setting).
From PU (digital setting) — at PU operation
• Start command:
mode)
Press the FWD/REV key. 9
Through communication
(via RS-485 terminals / Not available.
communication option)

Using external signals

• Frequency setting: 10
RS-485 terminals (Refer to Turn ON a terminal used for
(input via terminal 2/4,
page 661.) Pr.339 = "1" frequency setting.
using the JOG signal,
Terminal 2 and 4 (analog), Pr.340 = "1 or 2" • Start command:
using the multi-speed
RL, RM, RH, JOG, etc. Transmit a start command through
setting function, etc.)
Through communication.
communication (via From PU (digital setting) Not available.
RS-485 terminals) • Frequency setting:
Transmit a frequency command
Through communication RS-485 terminals (refer to through communication.
Pr.340 = "1 or 2"
(via RS-485 terminals) page 661) • Start command:
Transmit a start command through
communication.
Terminals on communication • Frequency setting:
Using external signals
option (Refer to the Turn ON a terminal used for
(input via terminal 2/4,
Instruction Manual of the Pr.339 = "1" frequency setting.
using the JOG signal,
communication option.) Pr.340 = "1" • Start command:
using the multi-speed
Terminal 2 and 4 (analog), Transmit a start command through
Through setting function, etc.)
RL, RM, RH, JOG, etc. communication.
communication (via
From PU (digital setting) Not available.
communication
option) • Frequency setting:
Terminals on communication Transmit a frequency command
Through communication
option (Refer to the through communication.
(via communication Pr.340 = "1"
Instruction Manual of the • Start command:
option)
communication option.) Transmit a start command through
communication.

5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
393
  External operation mode (Pr.79 = "0 (initial value) or 2")
• Select the External operation mode when the start command and the frequency command are applied from a frequency
setting potentiometer, start switch, etc. which are provided externally and connected to the control circuit terminals of the
inverter.
• Generally, parameter change cannot be performed in the External operation mode. (Some parameters can be changed.
Refer to Pr.77 on page 345.)
• When Pr.79 = "0 or 2", the inverter starts up in the External operation mode at power-ON. (When using the Network
operation mode, refer to page 398.)
• When parameter changing is seldom necessary, setting "2" fixes the operation mode to the External operation mode.
When frequent parameter changing is necessary, setting "0 (initial value)" allows the operation mode to be changed easily

to the PU operation mode by pressing on the operation panel. After switching to the PU operation mode, always
return to the External operation mode.
• The STF or STR signal is used as a start command. The input voltage or current via terminal 2 or 4, multi-speed setting
signal, or JOG signal is used as a frequency command.
Inverter

Forward rotation start STF

Reverse rotation start STR
Switch SD

10
Frequency setting
2
potentiometer
5
Potentiometer

 PU operation mode (Pr.79 = "1")

• Select the PU operation mode when giving start and frequency commands by only the key operation of the operation panel
or the parameter unit.
Also select the PU operation mode when giving commands through communication via the PU connector.
• When Pr.79 ="1", the inverter starts up in the PU operation mode at power-ON. The mode cannot be changed to other
operation modes.
• The frequency can also be set by simply turning the setting dial on the operation panel like a volume knob. (Refer to Pr.161
Frequency setting/key lock operation selection on page 341.)
• When the PU operation mode is selected, the PU operation mode (PU) signal can be output.
For the terminal used for the PU signal, set "10 (positive logic)" or "110 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) to assign the function.
Operation panel (FR-DU08)

 PU/External combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3")

• Select the PU/External combined operation mode 1 when giving a frequency command from the operation panel or the
parameter unit and giving a start command with the external start switches.
• Set "3" in Pr.79. The mode cannot be changed to other operation modes.
• When the frequency commands are given using the multi-speed setting signals (external signals), they have a higher
priority than the frequency commands given from the PU. When the AU signal is ON, inputting the command signals via
terminal 4 is enabled.

394 5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
 Inverter
Operation panel
(FR-DU08)
1
Forward rotation STF
start
Reverse rotation STR
start
Switch SD
2

 PU/External combined operation mode 2 (Pr.79 = "4") 3

• Select the PU/External combined operation mode 2 when giving a frequency command from the external potentiometer,
or using the multi-speed setting signals or the JOG signal, and giving a start command by key operation of the operation
panel or the parameter unit. 4
• Set "4" in Pr.79. The mode cannot be changed to other operation modes.
Inverter
Operation panel 5
(FR-DU08)
10
Frequency setting
2
potentiometer
Potentiometer
5
6

 Operation mode switchover during operation (Pr.79 = "6") 7

• During operation, the inverter operation mode can be switched from among the PU, External, and Network (Network
operation mode is selectable when RS-485 terminals or communication option is used).
Operation mode
8
Operation/operating status
switchover
Use the operation panel or parameter unit to change to the PU operation mode.
External operation→PU
• The direction of motor rotation does not change due to the operation mode change from the External
operation mode. 9
operation
• The previous setting of frequency which has been set using a potentiometer (frequency command) is taken
over. (However, note that the setting disappears when the power is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset.)
Give the command through communication to change the operation mode to the Network operation mode.
• The direction of motor rotation does not change due to the operation mode change from the External 10
External operation→NET
operation mode.
operation
• The previous setting of frequency which has been set using a potentiometer (frequency command) is taken
over. (However, note that the setting disappears when the power is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset.)
Press the key on the operation panel or parameter unit to change the operation mode to the External operation
PU operation→External mode.
operation • The direction of operation is determined by external input signals used in the External operation mode.
• The setting frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.
Give the command through communication to change the operation mode to the Network operation mode.
PU operation→NET
• The direction of motor rotation and the frequency setting does not change due to the operation mode change
operation
from the PU operation mode.
Give the command through communication to change the operation mode to the External operation mode.
NET operation→External
• The direction of operation is determined by external input signals used in the External operation mode.
operation
• The setting frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.
Use the operation panel or parameter unit to change to the PU operation mode.
NET operation→PU
• The direction of motor rotation and the frequency setting does not change due to the operation mode change
operation
from the Network operation mode.

 PU operation interlock (Pr.79 = "7")

• The operation mode can be forcibly switched to the External operation mode by turning OFF the PU operation external
interlock (X12) signal. This function will be usable in a case where the inverter does not reply to external command signals
during operation due to the operation mode accidentally unswitched from the PU operation mode to the External operation
mode.
• To input the X12 signal, set "12" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
(For details on Pr.178 to Pr.189, refer to page 521.)
• Set Pr.79 = "7" (PU operation interlock).

5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
395
 • If the X12 signal is not assigned, the function of the MRS signal is switched to the PU operation interlock signal from MRS
(output stop).
Function/Operation
X12 (MRS) signal
Operation mode Parameter writing*1
Switching of the operation mode (External, PU, and NET) is
ON Enabled.
enabled. The signal is OFF during External operation.
Operation mode is forcefully changed to the External operation
mode.
OFF External operation is enabled. Disabled except for Pr.79.
Switching to the PU or NET operation mode from the External
operation mode is disabled.

*1 Depends on the Pr.77 Parameter write selection setting and other parameter write conditions. (Refer to page 345.)
• Functions/operations by X12 (MRS) signal ON/OFF
Operating status
Operation Switching to PU or
Operation X12 (MRS) signal Operating status
Status mode NET operation mode
mode
During stop ON→OFF*1 If frequency and start commands are given Disabled
PU/NET During External*2 from external source, the inverter runs by
running ON→OFF*1 those commands. Disabled

OFF→ON Enabled
During stop During stop
ON→OFF Disabled
External External*2
During OFF→ON Running→Output stop Disabled
running ON→OFF Output stop→Running Disabled
*1 The mode is switched to the External operation mode regardless of the ON/OFF state of the start signal (STF/STR). Thus, the motor runs under
the External operation mode when the X12 (MRS) signal turns OFF while the STF or STR signal is ON.

*2 When a fault occurs, the inverter can be reset by pressing on the operation panel.

NOTE
• The operation mode cannot be switched to the PU operation mode with the start signal (STF/STR) ON state even if the X12
(MRS) signal turns ON.
• If the MRS signal is ON and Pr.79 is written to a value other than "7" when the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal,
the MRS signal will act as a regular MRS function (output stop). Also, when Pr.79 = "7", the MRS signal becomes the PU
interlock signal.
• The logic of the signal follows the setting of Pr.17 MRS input selection also when the MRS signal is used as the PU operation
interlock signal. When Pr.17 = "2", ON and OFF in the above explanation are reversed.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Switching operation mode by external signal (X16 signal)

• When External operation and the operation from the operation panel are used together, the PU operation mode and
External operation mode can be switched during a stop (during motor stop, start command OFF) by using the PU/External
operation switchover (X16) signal.
• When Pr.79 = "0, 6, or 7", switching between the PU operation mode and External operation mode is possible. (When
Pr.79 ="6", switchover is enabled during operation.)

396 5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
 • To input the X16 signal, set "16" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to
a terminal.
1
X16 signal status and operation mode
Pr.79 setting Remarks
ON (External) OFF (PU)
External operation Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation modes is
0 (initial value)
mode
PU operation mode
enabled. 2
1 PU operation mode Fixed at PU operation mode.
Fixed at External operation mode (Switching to NET operation mode
2 External operation mode

3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode

enabled).
Fixed at External/PU combined operation mode.
3
External operation Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode is
6 PU operation mode
mode enabled during operation.
X12 (MRS)
ON
External operation
mode
PU operation mode
Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode is
enabled (signal is OFF in the External operation mode).
4
7
X12 (MRS) Fixed at External operation mode (forcibly switched to External
External operation mode
OFF operation mode).
5
NOTE
• The operation mode is determined by the setting of Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection and the ON/OFF state
of the X65 and X66 signals. (For the details, refer to page 397.)
• The priority of Pr.79 and Pr.340 and signals is Pr.79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr.340. 6
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
7
 Switching the operation mode by external signals (X65, X66 signals)
• When Pr.79 = "0, 2 or 6", the PU operation mode and External operation modes can be changed to the Network operation
mode during a stop (during motor stop, start command OFF) by the PU/NET operation switchover (X65) signal, or the
8
External/NET operation switchover (X66) signal. (When Pr.79 = "6", switchover is enabled during operation.)
• To switch between the Network operation mode and the PU operation mode
9
1. Set Pr.79 = "0 (initial value) or 6".

2. Set Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection = "10 or 12".

10
3. Set "65" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 to assign the PU/NET operation switchover (X65) signal to a terminal.

4. When the X65 signal is ON, the PU operation mode is selected. When the X65 signal is OFF, the NET operation
mode is selected.

Pr.340 X65 signal state

Pr.79 setting Remarks
setting ON (PU) OFF (NET)
0 (initial value) PU operation mode*1 NET operation mode*2 —
1 PU operation mode Fixed at PU operation mode.
2 NET operation mode Fixed at NET operation mode.
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Fixed at External/PU combined operation mode.
10, 12 The operation mode can be changed during
6 PU operation mode*1 NET operation mode*2 operation.
X12 (MRS) Switching between the External operation mode The signal is OFF during operation in the External
ON and PU operation mode is enabled.*2 operation mode.
7
X12 (MRS) The operation mode is forcibly switched to the
External operation mode
OFF External operation mode.
*1 When the X66 signal is ON, the NET operation mode is selected.
*2 When the X16 signal is OFF, the PU operation mode is selected. Also, when "0" is set for Pr.550 NET mode operation command source
selection and the communication option is not connected (communication option is the command source), the PU operation mode is selected.
When the X16 signal is ON, the External operation mode is selected.

• To switch between the Network operation mode and the External operation mode

1. Set Pr.79 = "0 (initial value), 2, 6, or 7". (When Pr.79 = "7" and the X12 (MRS) signal is ON, the operation mode can
be switched.)

2. Set Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection = "0" (initial value), "1" or "2".

5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
397
 3. Set "66" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 to assign the NET-External operation switching signal (X66) to a terminal.

4. When the X66 signal is ON, the NET operation mode is selected. When the X66 signal is OFF, the External
operation mode is selected.

Pr.340 X66 signal state

Pr.79 setting Remarks
setting ON (NET) OFF (External)
External operation
0 (initial value) NET operation mode*1 —
mode*2
1 PU operation mode Fixed at PU operation mode.
*1 External operation
2 NET operation mode Switching to PU operation mode is disabled.
mode
0 (initial 3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Fixed at External/PU combined operation mode.
value), 1, 2 External operation The operation mode can be changed during
6 NET operation mode*1
mode*2 operation.
X12 (MRS) External operation The signal is OFF during operation in the External
NET operation mode*1
ON mode*2 operation mode.
7
X12 (MRS) The operation mode is forcibly switched to the
External operation mode
OFF External operation mode.
*1 When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "0" (communication option control source) and no communication option is
connected, the External operation mode is selected.
*2 When the X16 signal is OFF, the PU operation mode is selected. Also, when the X65 signal is assigned, the operation mode follows the ON/OFF
state of the X65 signal.

NOTE
• The priority of Pr.79 and Pr.340 and signals is as follows: Pr.79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr.340.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequencypage 410
Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 Multi-speed operationpage 411
Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selectionpage 336
Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selectionpage 341
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
Pr.340 Communication startup mode selectionpage 398
Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selectionpage 400

5.9.2 Startup of the inverter in Network operation mode

at power-ON
When power is switched ON or when power comes back ON after an instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be started
up in the Network operation mode.
After the inverter starts up in the Network operation mode, parameter writing and operation can be commanded from programs.
Set this mode when performing communication operation using the RS-485 terminals or a communication option.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
79 Selects the operation mode.
Operation mode selection 0 0 to 4, 6, 7
D000 (Refer to page 389.)
The inverter starts up in an operation mode selected in
0
Pr.79.
The inverter starts up in the Network operation mode.
If an instantaneous power failure occurs when "2" is
1, 2
set, the operating status before the instantaneous
340 Communication startup mode power failure is maintained.
0
D001 selection The inverter starts up in the Network operation mode.
The operation mode can be changed between the PU
operation mode and Network operation mode from the
10, 12
operation panel. If an instantaneous power failure
occurs when "12" is set, running is continued at the
condition before the instantaneous power failure.

398 5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
 Selecting the operation mode for power-ON (Pr.340)
• Depending on the Pr.79 and Pr.340 settings, the operation mode at power-ON (reset) changes as described below. 1
Pr.340 Pr.79 Operation mode at power-ON, at
Operation mode switching
setting setting power restoration, or after a reset
0 (initial
value)
External operation mode
Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation modes is
enabled*2
2
1 PU operation mode Fixed at PU operation mode.
Switching between the External and NET operation modes is enabled.
2 External operation mode
Switching to PU operation mode is disabled. 3
0 (initial 3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Operation mode switching is disabled.
value) Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode is
6 External operation mode
enabled while running.
X12 (MRS) signal ON: External Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation modes is 4
operation mode enabled*2
7
X12 (MRS) signal OFF: External Fixed at External operation mode (forcibly switched to External

0
operation mode
NET operation mode
operation mode).
5
1 PU operation mode
2 NET operation mode
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode 6
1, 2*1 6 NET operation mode Same as Pr.340 = "0".
X12 (MRS) signal ON: NET operation
mode
7
X12 (MRS) signal OFF: External 7
operation mode
0 NET operation mode Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is enabled.*3
1 PU operation mode Same as Pr.340 = "0". 8
2 NET operation mode Fixed at NET operation mode.
10, 12*1 3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Same as Pr.340 = "0".
Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is enabled while
6 NET operation mode
running.*3 9
7 External operation mode Same as Pr.340 = "0".
*1 Use Pr.340 = "2 or 12" setting to perform communication with the RS-485 terminals. Even if an instantaneous power failure occurs while Pr.57
Restart coasting time ≠ "9999", the inverter continues running at the condition before the instantaneous failure. When Pr.340 = "1 or 10", if a
power failure occurs while the start signal is being input through communication, the start signal is OFF at power restoration.
10
*2 The operation mode cannot be directly changed between the PU operation mode and Network operation mode.

*3 Switching between the PU and NET operation modes is available with the key on the operation panel and the X65 signal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389

5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
399
 5.9.3 Start command source and frequency command
source during communication operation
The start and frequency commands given from an external device can be made valid when using the RS-485 terminals or the
communication option. The command source in the PU operation mode can also be selected.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
Communication 0 Start command source is communication.
338
operation command 0
D010 1 Start command source is external.
source
0 Frequency command source is communication.
1 Frequency command source is external.
339 Communication speed
0 Frequency command source is external. (When there is no external
D011 command source
2 input, the frequency command given via communication is valid, and
the frequency command given via terminal 2 is invalid.)
The communication option is the command source when in the NET
0
operation mode.
NET mode operation The RS-485 terminals are the command source when in the NET
550 1
command source 9999 operation mode.
D012
selection The communication option is recognized automatically. Normally, the
9999 RS-485 terminals are the command source. When the communication
option is mounted, the communication option is the command source.
The RS-485 terminals are the command source when in the PU
1
operation mode.
The PU connector is the command source when in the PU operation
2
PU mode operation mode.
551
command source 9999 The USB connector is the command source when in the PU operation
D013 3
selection mode.
USB automatic recognition. Normally, the PU connector is the
9999 command source. When the USB is connected, the USB connector is
the command source.

 Selection of command source in the network (NET) operation mode

(Pr.550)
• Either of the RS-485 terminals or the communication option can be specified for the command source in the Network
operation mode.
• For example, whether or not the communication option is installed, set Pr.550 = "1" to write parameters or give the start
and frequency commands via RS-485 terminals in the Network operation mode.

NOTE
• In the initial setting, "9999" (communication option automatic recognition) is set for Pr.550. Thus, if the communication option
is mounted, parameters cannot be written or the start and frequency commands cannot be sent by communications that use
the RS-485 terminals. (Monitoring or parameter reading can be performed.)

 Selection of the command source of the PU operation mode (Pr.551)

• Any of the PU connector, RS-485 terminals, or USB connector can be specified as the command source in the PU
operation mode.
• To write parameters or execute the start and frequency commands through communication in the PU operation mode, set
Pr.551 = "1" for communication via the RS-485 terminals, or set Pr.551 = "3" or "9999" for communication via the USB
connector.

400 5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
 NOTE
• When Pr.550 = "1" (NET mode RS-485 terminals) and Pr.551 = "1" (PU mode RS-485 terminals), the PU operation mode has 1
a precedence. For this reason, if the communication option is not mounted, switching to the Network operation mode is no
longer possible.
• Changed setting values are enabled at power-ON or inverter reset.
2
Command source
Pr.550 Pr.551
setting setting PU connector USB connector RS-485 terminals
Communication
option
Remarks
3
PU operation mode NET operation
1 × × *1
mode*2

2 PU operation mode × ×
NET operation 4
mode*2
0 NET operation
3 × PU operation mode ×
mode*2
9999 PU operation mode PU operation mode NET operation
5
(initial *3 *3 ×
value) mode*2

1 × ×
PU operation mode
*1 ×
Switching to NET operation mode
disabled
6
NET operation
2 PU operation mode × ×
mode
1
3 × PU operation mode
NET operation
mode
× 7
9999 PU operation mode PU operation mode NET operation
(initial *3 *3 ×
mode
value) 8
PU operation mode NET operation
1 × × *1
mode*2
NET operation

2 PU operation mode ×
×
mode*2
With communication option 9
NET operation
× Without communication option
mode
9999
(initial ×
NET operation
mode*2
With communication option 10
value) 3 × PU operation mode
NET operation
× Without communication option
mode
NET operation
9999 × With communication option
PU operation mode PU operation mode mode*2
(initial *3 *3
value) NET operation
× Without communication option
mode
*1 The MODBUS RTU protocol cannot be used in the PU operation mode. To use the MODBUS RTU protocol, set Pr.551 = "2".
*2 If the communication option is not mounted, switching to the NET operation mode is not possible.
*3 When Pr.551 = "9999", the priority of the PU command source is USB connector > PU connector.

5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
401
  Controllability through communication
Controllability in each operation mode
Conditions Combined Combined
Command NET operation
(Pr.551 Item PU External operation operation NET operation
interface (via RS-485
setting) operation operation mode 1 mode 2 *7 (via option)*8
terminals)
(Pr.79 = "3") (Pr.79 = "4")
Operation (start)
○ × × ○ ×
command
2 (PU
Operation (stop)
connector),
command
○ Δ*4 Δ*4 ○ Δ*4
9999
(automatic Frequency setting ○ × ○ × ×
recognition, Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
without USB Parameter write ○*5 ×*6 ○*5 ○*5 ×*6
connection)
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
PU Inverter reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
connector*1 Operation (start)
× × × × ×
command
Operation (stop)
command Δ*4 Δ*4 Δ*4 Δ*4 Δ*4
Terminals
other than Frequency setting × × × × ×
the above Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Parameter write ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Inverter reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Operation command
○ × × ○ ×
(start, stop)
Frequency setting ○ × ○ × ×
1 (RS-485 Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
terminals)
Parameter write ○*5 ×*6 ○*5 ○*5 ×*6
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
RS-485 Inverter reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
terminals Operation command
(start, stop)
× × × × ○*2 ×

Frequency setting × × × × ○*2 ×

Terminals
other than Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
the above Parameter write ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ○*5 ×*6
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Inverter reset × × × × ○*3 ×
Operation command
3 (USB ○ × × ○ ×
(start, stop)
connector),
Frequency setting ○ × ○ × ×
9999
(automatic Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
recognition, Parameter write ○*5 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6
with USB
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
connection)
USB Inverter reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
connector Operation command
× × × × ×
(start, stop)
Frequency setting × × × × ×
Terminals
other than Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
the above Parameter write ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Inverter reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Operation command
(start, stop)
× × × × × ○*2

Frequency setting × × × × × ○*2

Option — monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Parameter write ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ○*5
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Inverter reset × × × × × ○*3

402 5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
 Controllability in each operation mode

Command
Conditions
(Pr.551 Item PU External
Combined
operation
Combined
operation
NET operation
NET operation
1
interface (via RS-485
setting) operation operation mode 1 mode 2 *7 (via option)*8
terminals)
(Pr.79 = "3") (Pr.79 = "4")
External
control
Inverter reset
Operation command
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2
— (start, stop)
× ○ ○ × ×*2
circuit
terminal Frequency setting × ○ × ○ ×*2
○: Valid, ×: Invalid, Δ: Partially valid 3

*1
*2
RS-485 communication via PU connector
Follows the Pr.338 Communication operation command source and Pr.339 Communication speed command source settings. (Refer to
4
page 400.)
*3 At occurrence of RS-485 communication error, the inverter cannot be reset from the computer.
*4 Only PU stop is enabled. "PS" is displayed on the operation panel during PU stop. The operation follows the Pr.75 Reset selection/
disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection setting. (Refer to page 336.)
5
*5 Writing of some parameters may be disabled by the Pr.77 Parameter write selection setting and the operating condition. (Refer to page 345.)
*6 Some parameters are write-enabled independently of the operation mode and command source presence/absence. Writing is also enabled when
Pr.77 = "2"
(refer to page 345). Parameter clear is disabled. 6
*7 When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "1" (RS-485 terminals enabled), or Pr.550 NET mode operation command
source selection = "9999" with no communication option connected.
*8 When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "0" (communication option enabled), or Pr.550 NET mode operation
command source selection = "9999" with communication option connected. 7
 Operation when a communication error occurs
Operation in each operation mode at error occurrences
Combined Combined
8
Conditions (Pr.551 NET operation NET
Fault type External operation operation
setting) PU operation (via RS-485 operation (via
operation mode 1 mode 2
terminals)*5 option)*6

Inverter fault — Stop

(Pr.79 = "3") (Pr.79 = "4")
9
2 (PU connector),
PU connector 9999 (automatic Stop/continued*1*4
disconnection recognition)
10
Other than 2 Stop/continued*1
Stop/ Stop/
Communication error 2 (PU connector) Continued Continued
continued*2 continued*2
at PU connector
Other than 2 Continued
Stop/ Stop/
1 (RS-485 terminals) Continued Continued
Communication error continued*2 continued*2
at RS-485 terminals Stop/
Other than 1 Continued Continued
continued*2
3 (USB connector), Stop/
Communication error 9999 (automatic Continued
recognition) continued*2
at USB connector
Other than 3 Continued
Communication error Stop/
at communication — Continued
option continued*3

*1 Selectable with Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.

*2 Selectable with Pr.122 PU communication check time interval, Pr.336 RS-485 communication check time interval, and Pr.548 USB
communication check time interval.
*3 The operation depends on the communication option setting.
*4 In the PU JOG operation mode, operation always stops when the PU is disconnected. The operation at a PU disconnection fault (E.PUE)
occurrence is as set in Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.
*5 When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "1" (RS-485 terminals enabled), or Pr.550 NET mode operation command
source selection = "9999" with no communication option connected.
*6 When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "0" (communication option enabled), or Pr.550 NET mode operation
command source selection = "9999" with communication option connected.

5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
403
  Selecting the command interface in the Network operation mode (Pr.338,
Pr.339)
• Selecting a command interface is required for the following two types of commands: the operation command using the start
signals and the signals related to the inverter function selection, and the speed command using signals related to the
frequency setting.
• The following table shows the command interface for each function in the Network operation mode, determined by the
parameter settings: an external terminal or a communication interface (RS-485 terminals or communication option).

Pr.338 Communication operation command source 0: NET 1: EXT

0: 1: 2: 0: 1: 2: Remarks
Pr.339 Communication speed command source
NET EXT EXT NET EXT EXT
Frequency setting through communication NET — NET NET — NET
Terminal 2 — EXT — — EXT —
Terminal 4 — EXT — EXT
Terminal 1 Compensation
Low-speed operation command/Remote setting
RL*1 (setting clear)/Stop-on-contact selection 0
NET EXT NET EXT
Pr.59 = "0" (multi-speed),
Middle-speed operation command/Remote setting Pr.59 ≠ "0" (remote), Pr.270
RM*1 (deceleration)
NET EXT NET EXT
="1, 3, 11, or 13" (stop-on-
High-speed operation command/ Remote setting contact)
RH*1 (acceleration)
NET EXT NET EXT

Second function selection/ Stop-on-contact Pr.270 ="1, 3, 11, or 13" (stop-

RT*1 selection 1
NET EXT
on-contact)
AU*1 Terminal 4 input selection — Combined — Combined
JOG*1 Jog operation selection — EXT
EXT or NET is selected
Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous according to the setting in
CS*1 power failure / flying start
EXT or NET EXT
Pr.162.*2
OH*1 External thermal relay input EXT
REX *1 15-speed selection NET EXT NET EXT Pr.59 ="0" (multi-speed)

X9*1 Third function selection NET EXT

*1 Inverter run enable EXT
X10
FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection, instantaneous
X11*1 power failure detection
EXT

X12*1 PU operation external interlock EXT

*1 External DC injection brake operation start NET EXT
X13
*1 PID control valid NET EXT NET EXT
X14
*1 Brake opening completion NET EXT
BRI
X16*1 PU/External operation switchover EXT
Load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation
X17*1 boost
NET EXT

X18*1 V/F switchover NET EXT

*1 Load torque high-speed frequency NET EXT
X19
X20*1 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover NET EXT
X22*1 Orientation command NET EXT
LX*1 Pre-excitation/servo ON NET EXT
Output stop Combined EXT Pr.79 ≠ "7"
Pr.79 = "7".
MRS*1
PU operation interlock EXT When X12 signal is not
assigned.
STP
Start self-holding selection — EXT
(STOP)*1
MC*1 Control mode switchover NET EXT
*1 Torque limit selection NET EXT
TL
X28*1 Start-time tuning start external input NET EXT
X32 *1 External fault input EXT
X37*1 Traverse function selection NET EXT

404 5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
 Pr.338 Communication operation command source 0: NET 1: EXT

Pr.339 Communication speed command source

0:
NET
1:
EXT
2:
EXT
0:
NET
1:
EXT
2:
EXT
Remarks
1
X42*1 Torque bias selection 1 NET EXT
*1 Torque bias selection 2 NET EXT
X43
X44*1 P/PI control switchover NET EXT 2
BRI2*1 Second brake sequence open completion NET EXT
TRG*1 Trace trigger input Combined EXT
TRC *1 Trace sampling start/end Combined EXT 3
X48*1 Power failure stop external EXT
Pr.414 = "1": Valid when there
SQ*1 Sequence start EXT or NET* EXT is EXT or NET input.
Pr.414 = "2": EXT
4
X51*1 Fault clear Combined EXT
*1 Cumulative pulse monitor clear NET EXT
X52
Cumulative pulse monitor clear (control terminal
5
X53*1 option)
NET EXT

JOGF*1 JOG forward rotation command — EXT

JOGR *1 JOG reverse rotation command — EXT 6
CLRN *1 NET position pulse clear NET

STF*1 Forward rotation command NET EXT

STR *1 Reverse rotation command NET EXT 7
RES*1 Inverter reset EXT
X64*1 PID forward/reverse action switchover NET EXT NET EXT
X65*1 PU/NET operation switchover EXT 8
*1 External/NET operation switchover EXT
X66
X67*1 Command source switchover EXT
NP *1 Simple position pulse train sign EXT 9
*1 Simple position droop pulse clear EXT
CLR
X70*1 DC feeding operation permission signal NET EXT
X71 *1 DC feeding cancel signal NET EXT 10
*1 PID P control switchover NET EXT NET EXT
X72
*1 Second PID P control switchover NET EXT NET External
X73
X74*1 Magnetic flux decay output shutoff NET EXT
*1 Proximity dog EXT
X76
X77*1 Pre-charge end command NET EXT NET EXT
*1 Second pre-charge end command NET EXT NET EXT
X78
X79*1 Second PID forward/reverse action switchover NET EXT NET EXT
*1 Second PID control valid NET EXT NET EXT
X80
X85*1 SSCNET III communication disabled EXT
X87*1 Sudden stop Combined EXT
LSP*1 Forward stroke end EXT
LSN*1 Reverse stroke end EXT
*1 Emergency stop EXT
X92
*1 Torque control selection NET EXT
X93
Control signal input for main circuit power supply
X94*1 MC
EXT

X95*1 Converter unit fault input EXT

*1 Converter unit fault (E.OHT, E.CPU) input EXT
X96
*1 Low-speed forward rotation command — — EXT
RLF
*1 Low-speed reverse rotation command — — EXT
RLR
*1 Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to an input terminal. (Refer to page 521.)
*2 When Pr.77 = "2", Pr.162 setting can be changed during operation. The new setting is applied after stop. Until the inverter has stopped, the
previous setting of the interface for the operation command and the speed command in the Network operation mode is valid.

5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
405
 [Explanation of Terms in Table]
EXT: External terminal only
NET: Communication interface only
Combined: Either external terminal or communication interface
—: Neither external terminal nor communication interface
Compensation: Only commands given via the external terminal are valid when Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selection = "1".

NOTE
• The communication interface selection is determined by the setting of Pr.550 and Pr.551.
• The setting of Pr.338 and Pr.339 can be changed during operation when Pr.77 = "2". Note that the changed setting is applied
after the inverter has stopped. Until the inverter has stopped, the previous setting of the interface for the operation command
and the speed command in the Network operation mode is valid.

 Changing the command interface using a signal input via external

terminal (X67 signal)
• In the Network operation mode, the command interface for the operation command and the speed command can be
changed using the Command source switchover (X67) signal. This method may be useful to use both external terminal
and communication interface by using a different interface according to the command type.
• For the X67 signal, set "67" to any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a
control terminal.
• When the X67 signal is OFF, the command interface for the operation command and the speed command is the control
terminal.
Interface for the operation
X67 signal state Interface for the speed command
command
Signal not assigned
Determined by Pr.338 setting Determined by Pr.339 setting
ON
OFF Control terminal only

NOTE
• The ON/OFF state of the X67 signal is applied only during a stop. When the terminals are switched during operation, the ON/
OFF state is reflected after a stop.
• When the X67 is OFF, a reset via communication is disabled.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selectionpage 411
Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 367
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389

5.9.4 Reverse rotation prevention selection

This function can prevent reverse rotation fault resulting from the incorrect input of the start signal.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
78 Reverse rotation
0 1 Reverse rotation disabled
D020 prevention selection
2 Forward rotation disabled
• Set this parameter to limit the motor rotation to only one direction.
• This parameter is valid for all of the reverse rotation and forward rotation keys of the operation panel and of the parameter
unit, the start signals (STF, STR signals) via external terminals, and the forward and reverse rotation commands through
communication.

5.9.5 Frequency setting using pulse train input

A pulse train input via terminal JOG can be used to set the inverter's speed command.

406 5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
Moreover, speed synchronized operation of an inverter can be performed by using the pulse train input and output together.
Initial value Description 1
Pr. Name Setting range Pulse train input Pulse train output
FM CA
(terminal JOG) (terminal FM)
0 JOG signal*1 FM output*2
1 Pulse train input FM output*2
2
High-speed pulse train output
10*2 JOG signal*1 (50% duty)

11*2 Pulse train input

High-speed pulse train output (50%
duty)
3
291
Pulse train I/O selection 0 High-speed pulse train output
D100 20*2 JOG signal*1 (ON width fixed)

21*2 Pulse train input

High-speed pulse train output (ON
width fixed)
4
High-speed pulse train output
(ON width fixed).
100*2 Pulse train input
Output the pulse train input without
changes.
5
0 Pulse train input disabled
384 Input pulse division
0 Division ratio on the input pulse. The frequency resolution on the
D101 scaling factor 1 to 250
input pulse changes according to this setting. 6
385 Frequency for zero input Set the frequency applicable to the time when the input pulse is
0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
D110 pulse zero (bias).
386 Frequency for maximum Set the frequency applicable to the time when the input pulse is
D111 input pulse
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
maximum (gain). 7
*1 Function assigned to Pr.185 JOG terminal function selection.
*2 Valid only for the FM type inverters.

 Selection of pulse train input (Pr.291) 8

• Setting Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "1, 11, 21, or 100" and Pr.384 Input pulse division scaling factor ≠ "0" allows
the function of terminal JOG to change into a pulse train input for setting of the inverter frequency. In the initial setting, the
JOG signal is assigned to terminal JOG. A maximum pulse train of 100k pulses/s can be input. 9
• Connection with an open collector output system pulse generator
Sink logic Source logic
Inverter Inverter
10
PC PC

Pull up resistor ∗1
JOG JOG 2 kΩ
2 kΩ
Pull down resistor ∗1
SD
SD

*1 When the wiring length is long with open collector outputs, the influence of stray capacitance causes the pulse to flatten out and prevents the
input pulse from being recognized.
When the wiring length is long (10 m or longer of shielded twisted pair cable with a recommended cable gauge of 0.75 mm2), connect the open
collector output signal to the power supply by an external pull-up resistor. The following table shows the reference resistance values for wiring
length. The stray capacitance of the wiring changes considerably according to how the cable is laid, thus the above wiring lengths are not
guaranteed values. When using a pull-up/down resistor, check the permissible power of the resistor and the permissible load current of the output
transistor, and use within the permissible range.

Wiring length Less than 10 m 10 to 50 m 50 to 100 m

Pull-up/down resistor Not required 1 kΩ 470 Ω
Load current (reference) 10 mA 35 mA 65 mA

5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
407
 • Connection with a complementary output system pulse generator

Sink logic Source logic

Inverter Inverter
PC
PC

JOG JOG 2 kΩ
24 V power 24 V power
2 kΩ
SD
SD

NOTE
• When pulse train input is selected, the function assigned to terminal JOG by Pr.185 JOG terminal function selection is
invalid.
• When "2" (simple position pulse train command given by pulse train input) is set to Pr.419 Position command source
selection, the JOG terminal becomes the simple position pulse train terminal regarding of the Pr.291 setting.
• Pr.291 is the selection parameter for pulse train output/FM output. Thus, before changing the setting, check the specifications
of the device connected to the terminal FM. (For the pulse train output, refer to page 461.)

 Pulse train input specification

Item Specification
Open collector output / complementary output (24 V power
Supported pulse method
supply voltage)
HIGH input level 20 V or more (voltage between JOG and SD)
LOW input level 5 V or less (voltage between JOG and SD)
Maximum input pulse rate 100k pulses/s
Minimum input pulse width 2.5 μs
Input resistance/load current 2 kΩ (typ) / 10 mA (typ)
Maximum wiring length Open collector output method 10 m (0.75 mm2/twisted pair)
(reference value) Complementary output method 100 m (output resistance 50 Ω)*1
Detection resolution 1/3750

*1 The wiring length of complementary output is dependent on the output wiring specification of the complementary output unit. The stray
capacitance of the wiring changes considerably according to how the cable is laid, so the maximum wiring length is not a guaranteed value.

 Adjustment of pulse train and frequency (Pr.385, Pr.386)

• The frequency during zero input pulse and maximum input pulse can be set with Pr.385 Frequency for zero input pulse
and Pr.386 Frequency for maximum input pulse, respectively.

Limit value
60Hz(50Hz)
Pr. 386
frequency
Output

(Hz)
Input pulse
0Hz (pulse/s)
0 Maximum input pulse
Pr. 385

*1 Limit value = (Pr.386 - Pr.385) × 1.1 + Pr.385

 How to calculate the input pulse division scaling factor (Pr.384)

The maximum number of input pulses can be calculated by the following formula with Pr.384 Input pulse division scaling
factor:
Maximum number of pulses (pulse/s) = Pr.384 × 400 (maximum 100k pulses/s)
(number of detectable pulses = 11.45 pulses/s)
For example, to run the invert at 0 Hz when pulse train input is zero and at 30 Hz when pulse train is 4000 pulses/sec, set the
inverter as follows:
Pr.384 = "10" (maximum number of input pulses 4000 pulses/s)

408 5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
Pr.385 = 0 Hz, Pr.386 = 30 Hz (pulse train limit value 33 Hz)

NOTE 1
• The priority of the frequency command given by the external signals is as follows: JOG operation > multi-speed operation >
terminal 4 analog input > pulse train input. When pulse train input is enabled (Pr.291 = "1, 11, 21, or 100" and Pr.384 ≠ "0"),
terminal 2 analog input becomes disabled.
2
 Speed synchronized operation by pulse input/output
3
Inverter (master) Pull up To next inverter (slave)
resistor*1
PC
Speed
command Pulse train
Speed 4
command
JOG input FM
FM JOG
5
Pulse train
To next inverter (slave)
Pulse train
output output SD
SD SD

*1 When the wiring length between FM and JOG is long, the influence of stray capacitance causes the pulse to flatten out and prevents the input
pulse from being recognized. When the wiring length is long (10 m or longer of shielded twisted pair cable with a recommended cable size of 0.75 6
mm2), connect between terminal JOG and terminal PC with an external pull-up resistor. The following table shows the reference resistance values
for wiring length.

Wiring length
Pull-up resistor
Less than 10 m
Not required 1 kΩ
10 to 50 m
470 Ω
50 to 100 m
7
Load current (reference) 10 mA 35 mA 65 mA

The stray capacitance of the wiring changes considerably according to how the cable is laid, thus the above wiring lengths are not guaranteed
values.
8
When using a pull-up/down resistor, check the permissible power of the resistor and the permissible load current (terminal PC: 100 mA, high-
speed pulse train output: 85 mA), and use within the permissible range.
• Setting "100" in Pr.291 allows the use of the entire pulse train input for the pulse train output (via terminal FM) just as they
are.
9
Connecting in a daisy chain enables speed synchronized operation of multiple inverters.
• Set Pr.384 to "125" for inverters that receive pulse train since the maximum pulse train output is 50k pulses/s.
• The maximum number of input pulses should be 50k pulses/s.
10
• When performing synchronized operation, wire according to the following procedure. (This is to prevent contact input of 24
V being applied to terminal FM.)

1. Set pulse train output (setting other than "0 or 1") to Pr.291 on the master side inverter.

2. Inverter power OFF

3. Wire the slave side terminal JOG-SD to the master side terminal FM-SD.

4. Turn the inverter power supply ON.

NOTE
• After changing the Pr.291 setting, connect the JOG terminal to the terminal FM-SD. When FM output (voltage output) is taken
as the pulse train, take caution to prevent voltage from being applied to the terminal FM.
• Use sink logic (factory setting) for the slave side inverter. The inverter does not operate properly with source logic.

 Speed synchronized operation specification

Item Specification
Output pulse format Pulse width fixed (10 μs)
Pulse rate 0 to 50k pulses/s
Pulse propagation delay 1 to 2 μs per unit*1

*1 A pulse propagation delay of about 1 to 2 μs in the slave occurs and further increases when the wiring length is long.

Parameters referred to
Pr.291 (Pulse train output)page 457
Pr.419 Position command source selectionpage 319

5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
409
 5.9.6 JOG operation
The frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for JOG operation can be set. JOG operation is possible in both External
operation and PU.
JOG operation can be used for conveyor positioning, test operation, etc.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
15
Jog frequency 5 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency for JOG operation.
D200
Set the motor acceleration/deceleration time during JOG operation.
For the acceleration/deceleration time, set the time until the
16 Jog acceleration/
F002 deceleration time
0.5 s 0 to 3600 s frequency*1 set in Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency is reached.
The acceleration/deceleration times cannot be set separately.
Note that these parameters are categorized as a simple mode parameter when the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the
parameter unit (FR-PU07) is used. Setting of this parameter is enabled when the operation panel (FR-DU08) is connected and
"0" is set to Pr.160 User group read selection. (Refer to page 354.)
*1 The Pr.20 initial value is set to 60 Hz for the FM type and to 50 Hz for the CA type.

 JOG operation using the external signals

• Operation can be started and stopped by the start signals (STF and STR signals) when the Jog operation selection (JOG)
signal is ON. (For the operation method, refer to page 162.)
• While the JOGF or JOGR signal is input, Jog frequency setting (Pr.15) is used for operation. The rotation is forward while
the JOGF signal is input, and the rotation is reverse while the JOGR signal is input. (Direct JOG function)
• Use the JOG acceleration/deceleration time function (Pr.16) to set the acceleration/deceleration time for JOG operation.
• To use each signal, set the corresponding number selected from the following table in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input
terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
Input signal Pr.178 to Pr.189 settings
JOG 5 (Pr.185 initial value)
JOGF 57
JOGR 58

Output frequency(Hz)
Output frequency(Hz) Pr.20
Pr.20 Pr.15 Forward
setting range rotation
Pr.15 Forward Reverse
Time
setting range rotation rotation
Reverse Time
rotation Pr.16
Pr.16

JOG signal ON

Forward rotation STF ON JOGF signal ON

Reverse rotation STR ON JOGR signal ON

 JOG operation using the PU

• When the operation panel or parameter unit is in the JOG operation mode, the motor jogs only while the start button is
pressed. (For the operation method, refer to page 163.)

410 5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
 NOTE
• The reference frequency during acceleration/deceleration depends on the Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern 1
selection setting. (Refer to page 372.)
• The Pr.15 setting should be equal to or higher than the Pr.13 Starting frequency setting.
• The JOG signal can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
2
• During JOG operation, the second acceleration/deceleration function using the RT signal is disabled. (Other second functions
are enabled (refer to page 525).)
• When the JOGR or STR signal is input while the JOGF signal is input, the motor is decelerated to stop. 3
• When the JOGF or STF signal is input while the JOGR signal is input, the motor is decelerated to stop.
• The three-wire type connection is not available for the JOGF and JOGR signals.

• When Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "4", JOG operation is started by one push of / on the operation panel 4
and stopped by .
• This function is invalid when Pr.79 = "3".
• Under the position control, when the position command speed creation is completed and the droop pulse is within in-position
5
width, the external JOG operation can be operated. (The JOG operation cannot be performed from PU.)
• To perform the JOG operation using the external signals, select the setting of "JOG signal" for the input via terminal JOG in
Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection. (Refer to page 406.) 6

Parameters referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381 7
Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time incrementspage 367
Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selectionpage 372
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
8
5.9.7 Operation by multi-speed setting
Use these parameters to change among pre-set operation speeds with the terminals. The speeds are pre-set with parameters.
9

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
411
 Any speed can be selected by simply turning ON/OFF the contact signals (RH, RM, RL, and REX signals).
Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
28 Multi-speed input compensation 0 Without compensation
0
D300 selection 1 With compensation
4
Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Sets the frequency when RH is ON.
D301
5 Multi-speed setting (middle
30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Sets the frequency when RM is ON.
D302 speed)
6
Multi-speed setting (low speed) 10 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Sets the frequency when RL is ON.
D303
24
Multi-speed setting (speed 4)
D304
25
Multi-speed setting (speed 5)
D305
26
Multi-speed setting (speed 6)
D306
27
Multi-speed setting (speed 7)
D307
232
Multi-speed setting (speed 8)
D308
233 Frequency from 4th speed to 15th speed can
Multi-speed setting (speed 9)
D309 be set according to the combination of the RH,
9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
234 RM, RL and REX signals.
Multi-speed setting (speed 10)
D310 9999: Not selected
235
Multi-speed setting (speed 11)
D311
236
Multi-speed setting (speed 12)
D312
237
Multi-speed setting (speed 13)
D313
238
Multi-speed setting (speed 14)
D314
239
Multi-speed setting (speed 15)
D315

 Multi-speed setting (Pr.4 to Pr.6)

• The inverter operates at frequencies set in Pr.4 when the RH signal is ON, Pr.5 when the RM signal is ON, or Pr.6 when
the RL signal is ON.

Inverter Speed 1
Output frequency (Hz)

(High speed)

Forward rotation start STF Speed 2

(Middle speed)
Reverse rotation start STR Speed 3
(Low speed)
High speed RH
Middle speed RM Time
Low speed RL ON
RH
SD ON
Switch RM
RL ON

NOTE
• In the initial setting, if two or more speed switches (signals) are simultaneously turned ON, priority is given to the switch (signal)
for the lower speed. For example, when both RH and RM signals turn ON, the RM signal (Pr.5) has the higher priority.
• The RH, RM and RL signals are assigned to the terminals RH, RM and RL, respectively, in the initial status. To assign each
signal to a different terminal, set "0" (RL signal), "1" (RM signal), or "2" (RH signal) in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal
function selection).

 Multi-speed setting for 4th speed or more (Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239)
• The frequency from 4th speed to 15th speed can be set according to the combination of the RH, RM, RL, and REX signals.
Set the running frequencies in Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239. (In the initial status, 4th to 15th speeds are invalid.)

412 5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
 • For the terminal used for REX signal input, set "8" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign
the function.
1

Output frequency
Speed 10
Speed 5 Speed 11
Speed 6 Speed 12

2
Speed 9
Speed 13
Inverter Speed 4 Speed 8
Speed 14
Forward rotation STF

(Hz)
Speed 7 Speed 15
REX

Multi-speed
RH
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Time
3
RM RH
selection
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RL RM
ON ON ON ON ON ON
SD RL
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 4
REX
∗1

*1 When the RH, RM and RL signals are OFF and the REX signal is ON while "9999" is set to Pr.232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8), the inverter
operates at the frequency set in Pr.6.
5
 Direct multi-speed setting
• While the RLF or RLR signal is input, the operation is according to Pr.6 Multi-speed setting (low-speed). The rotation is 6
forward while the RLF signal is input, and the rotation is reverse while the RLR signal is input.

Low-speed forward rotation command RLF 7

Low-speed reverse rotation command RLR Inverter
SD

Pr.6 9
Forward rotation
Output frequency
Reverse rotation Time 10
Pr.6

RLF
ON

RLR
ON

NOTE
• The Pr.6 setting should be equal to or higher than the Pr.13 Starting frequency setting.
• To assign the RLF and RLR signals to input terminals, set "128 (RLF)" and "129 (RLR)" in any two parameters from Pr.178 to
Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
• The direct multi-speed operation is enabled when the inverter operates in External operation mode or External/PU combined
operation mode 1.
• When the RLR or STR signal is input while the RLF signal is input, the motor is decelerated to stop.
• When the RLF or STF signal is input while the RLR signal is input, the motor is decelerated to stop.
• When Pr.59 Remote function selection ≠ "0", the RLF signal is used as the STF signal, and the RLR signal is used as the
STR signal.
• When the stop-on-contact function is enabled, the RLF signal is used as the STF signal, and the RLR signal is used as the
STR signal.

 Input compensation of multi-speed setting (Pr.28)

• Speed (frequency) can be compensated for the multi-speed setting and the remote setting by inputting the frequency
setting compensation signal (terminals 1, 2).

5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
413
 NOTE
• The priority of the frequency commands given by the external signals is as follows: JOG operation > multi-speed operation >
terminal 4 analog input > pulse train input > terminal 2 analog input. (For details on frequency commands given by analog
input, refer to page 505.)
• The input compensation of multi-speed setting is enabled when the inverter is in the External operation mode or PU/External
combined operation mode (Pr.79 = "3 or 4").
• Multi-speed parameters can also be set during PU operation or External operation.
• The Pr.24 to Pr.27 and Pr.232 to Pr.239 settings have no priority among them.
• When Pr.59 Remote function selection ≠ "0", the multi-speed setting is invalid since the RH, RM, and RL signals are for
remote setting.
• When performing analog input compensation, set Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selection to "1".
• Select the terminals (terminals 1, 2) to use for compensation input voltage (0 to ± 5 V, 0 to ± 10 V) at Pr.73 Analog input
selection.
• When using terminal 1 for compensation input, set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "0 (initial value)".
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequencypage 410
Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 377
Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500

414 5. PARAMETERS
5.9 (D) Operation command and frequency command
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter 1

Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page 2

P.H000, P.H006, Pr.9, Pr.51, Pr.561,
To protect the motor from overheating Electronic thermal O/L relay P.H010, P.H016, Pr.607, Pr.608, 415
P.H020 to P.H022 Pr.876, Pr.1016
To set the overheat protection
Free thermal O/L relay
P.H001 to P.H005, Pr.600 to Pr.604,
422
3
characteristics for the motor P.H011 to P.H015 Pr.692 to Pr.696
To decelerate and stop when the motor
Fault definition P.H030 Pr.875 422
thermal protection is activated

To extend the life of the cooling fan

Cooling fan operation
P.H100 Pr.244 423
4
selection
Earth (ground) fault detection
To detect an earth (ground) fault at start P.H101 Pr.249 425
at start
To vary the operating level of the
5
Undervoltage level P.H102 Pr.598 425
undervoltage protective function
To initiate an inverter protective
Fault initiation P.H103 Pr.997 425
function
To disable the I/O phase loss protective
6
I/O phase loss P.H200, P.H201 Pr.251, Pr.872 426
function
To restart using the retry function when
Retry operation P.H300 to P.H303 Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 426
the protective function is activated
To set the upper and lower limits of the Maximum/minimum
7
P.H400 to P.H402 Pr.1, Pr.2, Pr.18 428
output frequency frequency
To prevent the motor from
Speed limit P.H410 to P.H412 Pr.807 to Pr.809 287
overspeeding under torque control 8
To avoid overdriving the motor during Pr.285 to Pr.853,
Overdriving prevention P.H415 to P.H417 269
speed control Pr.873
P.H420 to P.H425, Pr.31 to Pr.36,
To operate avoiding resonance points Frequency jump
P.H429 Pr.552
429
9
P.H500, P.H501, Pr.22, Pr.23, Pr.48,
P.H600 to P.H603, Pr.49, Pr.66, Pr.114,
To limit the output current so that the
P.H610, P.H611, Pr.115, Pr.148,
inverter protective function does not
activate
Stall prevention
P.H620, P.H621,
P.H631, P.M430,
Pr.149, Pr.154,
Pr.156, Pr.157,
431
10
P.T010, P.T040 Pr.858, Pr.868
P.H500, P.H700 to Pr.22, Pr.801,
P.H704, P.H710, Pr.803, Pr.810,
To limit the torque during speed control Torque limit P.H720, P.H721, Pr.812 to Pr.817, 245
P.H730, P.T010, Pr.858, Pr.868,
P.T040, P.G210 Pr.874
Load characteristics fault P.H520 to P.H527,
To monitor for load faults Pr.1480 to Pr.1492 439
detection P.H531 to P.H535
To shut off output if the operation panel
Overspeed detection level P.H800 Pr.374 443
disconnects
To shut off output if the operation panel
Deceleration check P.H881 Pr.690 270
disconnects

5.10.1 Motor overheat protection (electronic thermal O/L

relay)
Set the current of the electronic thermal relay function to protect the motor from overheating. Such settings provide the optimum
protective characteristic considering the low cooling capability of the motor during low-speed operation.

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
415
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Inverter rated *2
9 0 to 500 A
Electronic thermal O/L relay Set the rated motor current.
H000 current*1 0 to 3600 A*3
600 First free thermal reduction 0 to 590 Hz
9999
H001 frequency 1 9999
601 First free thermal reduction 1 to 100%
100% The electronic thermal O/L relay operation level can
H002 ratio 1 9999 be changed to match the motor temperature
602 First free thermal reduction 0 to 590 Hz characteristics with the combination of these three
9999
H003 frequency 2 9999 points (Pr.600, Pr.601), (Pr.602, Pr.603), (Pr.604,
1 to 100% Pr.9).
603 First free thermal reduction
100% 9999: Free thermal O/L relay invalid
H004 ratio 2 9999
604 First free thermal reduction 0 to 590 Hz
9999
H005 frequency 3 9999
607 Set the permissible load according to the motor
Motor permissible load level 150% 110 to 250%
H006 characteristics.
0 to 500 A*2 Enabled when the RT signal is ON.
51 Second electronic thermal O/L
9999 0 to 3600 A*3 Set the rated motor current.
H010 relay
9999 Second electronic thermal O/L relay invalid
692 Second free thermal reduction 0 to 590 Hz
9999
H011 frequency 1 9999
693 Second free thermal reduction 1 to 100%
100% The electronic thermal O/L relay operation level can
H012 ratio 1 9999 be changed to match the second motor temperature
694 Second free thermal reduction 0 to 590 Hz characteristics with the combination of these three
9999
H013 frequency 2 9999 points (Pr.692, Pr.693), (Pr.694, Pr.695), (Pr.696,
1 to 100% Pr.51) when the RT signal is ON.
695 Second free thermal reduction
100% 9999: Second free thermal O/L relay invalid
H014 ratio 2 9999
696 Second free thermal reduction 0 to 590 Hz
9999
H015 frequency 3 9999
Set the permissible frequency when the RT signal is
110 to 250%
608 Second motor permissible load ON.
9999
H016 level The Pr.607 setting is applied even when the RT signal
9999
is ON.
561 0.5 to 30 kΩ Set the PTC thermistor protection level (resistance).
PTC thermistor protection level 9999
H020 9999 PTC thermistor protection disabled
Set the time from when the resistance of the PTC
1016 PTC thermistor protection
0s 0 to 60 s thermistor reaches the protection level until the
H021 detection time
protective function is activated.
0 Terminal OH of the control terminal option (FR-A8TP)
876 is invalid.
Thermal protector input 1
H022*4 1 Terminal OH of the control terminal option (FR-A8TP)
is valid.
*1 The initial value for the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower is set to the 85% of the inverter rated current.
*2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower The minimum setting increment is 0.01 A.
*3 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher The minimum setting increment is 0.1 A.
*4 The setting is available when the FR-A8TP is installed.

 Electronic thermal O/L relay operation characteristic for induction motor

(Pr.9)
• This function detects the overload (overheat) of the motor and shut off the inverter output by stopping the operation of the
transistor at the inverter output side.
• Set the rated current (A) of the motor in Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (If the motor has both 50 Hz and 60 Hz ratings
and the Pr.3 Base frequency is set to 60 Hz, set to 1.1 times the 60 Hz rated motor current.)
• Set "0" in Pr.9 to avoid activating the electronic thermal relay function; for example, when using an external thermal relay
for the motor.
(Note that the output transistor protection of the inverter is activated. (E.THT))

416 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
 • When using the Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor, set Pr.71 Applied motor = "1, 13 to 16, 50, 53, 54". (This setting
enables the 100% constant-torque characteristic in the low-speed range.)
1
Pr.9 = 50% setting of Pr.9 = 100% setting
inverter rating*1*2
Operation time (min) of inverter rating*2

2
Minute display in

70 30Hz or more*3
30Hz
this region

or more*3 20Hz Operation region

20Hz 10Hz Region on the right of
60 characteristic curve
10Hz
6Hz Non-operation region
6Hz
3
0.5Hz Region on the left of
50 0.5Hz characteristic curve
Characteristic when
electronic thermal relay
Second display in this region

240 function for motor

4
protection is turned off
Operation time (s)

(When Pr.9 setting is 0(A))

180

120 Range for

the transistor
protection*4
5
60

52.5% 105%
50 100
Inverter output power (%)
150 230 6
(% to the inverter rated current)

*1 When setting Pr.9 to a value (current value) of 50% of the inverter rated current
*2
*3
The % value denotes the percentage to the rated inverter current. It is not the percentage to the rated motor current.
When you set the electronic thermal relay function dedicated to the Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor, this characteristic curve applies to
7
operation at 6 Hz or higher. (For selection of the operation characteristic, refer to page 528.)
*4 Transistor protection is activated depending on the temperature of the heat sink. The protection may be activated even with less than 150%
depending on the operating conditions.
8
NOTE
• The internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset to the initial value by the inverter's power
reset or reset signal input. Avoid unnecessary reset and power-OFF.
• Install an external thermal relay (OCR) between the inverter and motors to operate several motors, a multi-pole motor or a
9
dedicated motor with one inverter. When setting an external thermal relay, note that the current indicated on the motor rating
plate is affected by the line-to-line leakage current. (Refer to page 116.) The cooling effect of the motor drops during low-speed
operation. Use a thermal protector or a motor with built-in thermistor. 10
• The protective characteristic of the electronic thermal O/L relay is degraded when there is a large difference in capacity
between the inverter and motor, and when the set value is small. In such case, use an external thermal relay.
• A dedicated motor cannot be protected by an electronic thermal O/L relay. Use an external thermal relay.
• Set Pr.9 = "0" for Vector-control-dedicated motors (SF-V5RU) because they are equipped with thermal protectors.
• The transistor protection thermal O/L relay is activated early when the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting is increased.

 Electronic thermal O/L relay when using IPM motor (Pr.9)

• This function detects the overload (overheat) of the motor and shut off the inverter output by stopping the operation of the
transistor at the inverter output side.
• Set the rated current (A) of the motor in Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. Performing IPM parameter initialization
automatically sets the rated current of the IPM motor. (Refer to page 231.)
• Set "0" in Pr.9 to avoid activating the electronic thermal relay function; for example, when using an external thermal relay
for the motor.
(Note that the output transistor protection of the inverter is activated. (E.THT))

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
417
 • Operational characteristic of the electronic thermal O/L relay when MM-CF is used.
70
operation time [min]
Minute display in

2000r/min
Thermal relay

(133.33Hz) or lower
this region

60

3000r/min
50 (200Hz)

240

2000r/min
Thermal relay operation time [s]
Second display in this region

(133.33Hz) or lower
180
3000r/min
(200Hz)
120
Range for the
transistor
protection
60

0
80 100 120 140 160 200 220 240 260 280 300
Current [%] *1
Protective function activated area: the area right of the characteristic curve
Normal operation area: the area left of the characteristic curve

*1 The % value denotes the percentage to the rated motor current.

NOTE
• The internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset to the initial value by the inverter's power
reset or reset signal input. Avoid unnecessary reset and power-OFF.
• When using a PM motor other than MM-CF, set the free thermal parameters (Pr.600 to Pr.604) in accordance with the motor
characteristic.
• The transistor protection thermal O/L relay is activated early when the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting is increased.

 Set two types of electronic thermal O/L relays (Pr.51)

MC
M

MC
U
V M
W

RT
SD

• These settings are used when rotating two motors with different rated current separately by a single inverter. (When
rotating two motors together, use an external thermal relay.)
• Set the rated motor current for the second motor in Pr.51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay.

418 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
 • While the RT signal is ON, the setting values of Pr.51 is referred to provide thermal protection.

Pr.450 Pr.9 Pr.51 RT signal OFF RT signal ON 1

Second applied Electronic thermal Second electronic thermal Second Second
First motor First motor
motor O/L relay O/L relay monitor monitor
9999 × × × ×
9999 0 0 × × × × 2
0.01 to 500 (0.1 to 3600) × Δ × ○
9999 ○ × ○ ×
9999 Other than 0 0
0.01 to 500 (0.1 to 3600)
○
○
×
Δ
Δ
Δ
×
○
3
9999 × × × ×
Other than 9999 0 0 × × × ×
0.01 to 500 (0.1 to 3600) × Δ × ○ 4
9999 ○ Δ Δ ○
Other than 9999 Other than 0 0 ○ × Δ ×
0.01 to 500 (0.1 to 3600) ○ Δ Δ ○
5
○: Values are accumulated by using the output current.
Δ: Values are accumulated by assuming the output
current is 0 A (cooling processing).
×: Electronic thermal O/L relay does not operate.
6
NOTE
• The RT signal is the Second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 525.)
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function 7
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.

 Acceleration time setting (Pr.607, Pr.608) 8

The electronic thermal O/L relay operation characteristic can be changed by setting the permissible load level according to the
motor characteristics.
Motor permissible
9
load 150% (Initial value)
Motor permissible
Motor permissible
load 110%
load 200%
10
Thermal relay operation time (s)

240

Range for
180
the transistor
protection
120

60

0
80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Inverter output power (%)
(% to the inverter rated current)
Example of motor permissible load setting
(when Pr.9="100% of the inverter rating")

 Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (TH) and warning signal (THP
signal)
• If the accumulated electronic thermal value reaches 85% of the Pr.9 or Pr.51 setting, electronic thermal O/L relay function
pre-alarm (TH) is displayed and the electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (THP) signal is output. If the value reaches
100% of the Pr.9 setting, the motor thermal protection (E.THM/E.THT) is activated to shut off the inverter output. The
inverter output is not shut off with the TH display.

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
419
 • For the terminal used for the THP signal output, assign the function by setting "8 (positive logic) or 108 (negative logic)" in
any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
Electronic thermal 100%
relay function 85%
operation level

Electronic thermal O/L

relay alarm (THP) OFF ON ON
Time

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 External thermal relay input (OH signal, E.OHT)

Thermal relay protector
Inverter
Motor
U
V M
W
OH
SD

External thermal relay input connection diagram

• The External thermal relay input (OH) signal is used when using the external thermal relay or the thermal protector built
into the motor to protect the motor from overheating.
• When the thermal relay is activated, the inverter output is shut off by the external thermal relay (E.OHT).
• For the terminal used for the OH signal input, set "7" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to
assign the function.
• Vector-control-dedicated motors (SF-V5RU) are equipped with thermal protectors.
Inverter SF-V5RU
∗1
PC
2W1kΩ G1
OH
G2
SD

Connecting the SF-V5RU thermal protector

*1 Connect the recommended 2 W 1 kΩ resistor between terminals PC and OH. (Refer to page 91.)

• When the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) is used, valid/invalid setting of the terminal OH can be changed using Pr.876
thermal protector input.

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

420 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
 PTC thermistor input (Pr.561, Pr.1016, E.PTC)
This function is used to protect the motor from overheating by inputting outputs from the motor's built-in PTC thermistor to the 1
inverter. It is recommended that a PTC thermistor whose resistance increases most rapidly around the rated activating
temperature (TN±DT) is used.
Thermistor resistance 2

Inverter R2
Thermistor curve
3
Motor
U Pr.561
V

4
W R1

10
2 Thermistor temperature
Temperature - resistance
existing range TN-DT TN+DT
TN
TN: Rated operating temperature 5
PTC thermistor input connection diagram Example of PTC thermistor characteristics

• Output from the PTC thermistor, which is built into the motor, can be input to terminals 2 and 10. If the input from the PTC
thermistor reaches the resistor value set in Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level, the PTC thermistor operation
6
(E.PTC) shuts off the inverter output.
• To use the PTC thermistor input function, select voltage input (initial setting) for terminal 2 using the voltage/current input
selection switch. (For details on the voltage/current input switch assembly, refer to page 496.)
7
• Confirm the characteristic of the PTC thermistor to be used, and set the resistance for Pr.561 around the center of the R1
and R2 values shown on the figure above so that it does not deviate from the protective function activating temperature
TN. If the Pr.561 setting becomes too close to R1 or R2, the protective function activating temperature may be too hot
8
(protection is delayed), or too cold (too much protection).
• When the PTC thermistor protection is enabled (Pr.561 ≠ "9999"), the resistance value for the PTC thermistor can be
displayed on the operation panel or via RS-485 communication. (Refer to page 446.)
9
• When the PTC thermistor protection level setting is used, use Pr.1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time to set
the time from when the resistance of the PTC thermistor reaches the protection level until the protective function (E.PTC)
is activated.
10
• If the resistance of the PTC thermistor falls below the protection level within the protection detection time, the elapsed time
count is cleared.

PTC thermistor resistance

The elapsed time count is cleared.

Pr.561
setting

Time
Pr.1016

ALM

E.PTC

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
421
 NOTE
• When using terminal 2 for PTC thermistor input (Pr.561 ≠ "9999"), the terminal 2 does not operate as an analog frequency
command terminal. The PID and dancer control functions assigned to the terminal 2 is also disabled. Use Pr.133 PID action
set point to set the set point for the PID function.
• To input power to the PTC thermistor power supply, always use the terminal 10 and do not use any other terminals or an
external power supply. Otherwise, the PTC thermistor protection (E.PTC) does not operate properly.
• When E.PTC is activated, the alarm display, "External protection (AU terminal)", may appear on the parameter unit (FR-PU07),
but it is not a fault.

 Overheat protection to match the characteristic of the motor (Pr.600 to

Pr.604, Pr.692 to Pr.696)
• The activation level of the electronic thermal O/L relay can be varied to match the motor temperature characteristic.
• The electronic thermal O/L relay operation level can be set with the combination of three points (Pr.600, Pr.601), (Pr.602,
Pr.603), (Pr.604, Pr.9). Two or more points are required for setting.
• The electronic thermal O/L relay operation level can be set with the combination of three points (Pr.692, Pr.693), (Pr.694,
Pr.695), (Pr.696, Pr.51) when the RT signal is ON.
Continuous operation characteristic
Load ratio (ratio to Pr.9 (Pr.51)) [%]
100%

Pr.603
(Pr.695)
Pr.601
(Pr.693)

Pr.600 Pr.602 Pr.604 Output frequency

(Pr.692) (Pr.694) (Pr.696)

Setting Load ratio Setting Load ratio

example 1 example 2
100% 100%
Pr.9=100% of the rated Pr.600=120Hz
motor current 70% Pr.601=60%
Pr.600=6Hz Pr.602=3Hz 60%
Pr.601=50% 50% Pr.603=50% 50%
Pr.602=30Hz Pr.604=60Hz
Pr.603=70%
Pr.604=60Hz
6Hz 30Hz 60Hz Frequency
3Hz 60Hz 120Hz Frequency

• When setting Pr.600, Pr.602, and Pr.604 (Pr.692, Pr.694, and Pr.696) to the same frequency, the graph shows a step
plot.
Load ratio [%]
100
Pr.600 = 10Hz
80 Pr.601 = 80%
Pr.602 = 10Hz
50 Pr.603 = 50%
Pr.604 = 10Hz

10 Outout frequency[Hz]

NOTE
• Make sure to set the parameters according to the temperature characteristic of the motor used.

Parameters referred to
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528
Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 356
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

5.10.2 Fault definition

Fault output can be done after deceleration stop when motor thermal protection is activated.

422 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
875 0 Normal operation 1
Fault definition 0
H030 1 Decelerates to stop at activation of motor thermal protection.

 Output shutoff at activation of any protective function (Pr.875 = "0" initial

2
value)
• At activation of a protective function, output is shutoff, and the alarm output 2 signal (ER) and the fault signal (ALM) are
output. 3
 Deceleration stop at motor thermal protection activation (Pr.875 = "1")
• At activation of the external thermal relay (E.OHT), motor load (electronic thermal O/L relay) (E.THM) and PTC thermistor
(E.PTC) protective functions, the alarm output 2 (ER) signal is displayed, and the motor decelerates to stop. After it stops, 4
a fault signal (ALM) is output.
• When the ER signal comes ON, reduce the load or take other measures to allow the inverter to decelerate.
• During fault occurrence aside from the E.OHT, THM and E.PTC, the output is immediately shut off, and the fault is signal 5
(ALM) is output.
• To use the ER signal, set "97 (positive logic)" or "197 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal. 6
When Pr.875 = "1"

Output
frequency 7
Time

Fault output
(ALM, ALM2)
ON 8
ON
Alarm output 2
(ER)
E.OHT
occurrence
E.OHT
display
9
NOTE
• Regardless of the Pr.875 setting, when the protective function is operating during position control, output is immediately shut 10
off. (No deceleration stop)
• For systems with a large load-side torque that prevents deceleration, setting value "0" is recommended.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

5.10.3 Cooling fan operation selection

A cooling fan is built into the inverter and its operation can be controlled.

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
423
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Cooling fan ON/OFF control is invalid. (The cooling fan is always ON at
0 power ON)
A cooling fan operates at power ON.
Cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled.
The fan is always ON while the inverter is running. During a stop, the
1
inverter status is monitored and the fan switches ON/OFF according to
the temperature.
Cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled.
101 to 105
Set the cooling fan stop delay time within 1 to 5 seconds.
Cooling fan Cooling fan ON/OFF control is invalid. (The
244 1
operation selection 1000 cooling fan is always ON at power ON)
A cooling fan operates at power ON.
The cooling fan can be set
Cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled.
to always OFF during
The fan is always ON while the inverter is
Vector control test
1001 running. During a stop, the inverter status
operation or PM
is monitored and the fan switches ON/OFF
sensorless vector control
according to the temperature.
test operation.
Cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled.
1101 to 1105 Set the cooling fan stop delay time within 1
to 5 seconds.
Cooling fan ON/OFF control is invalid. (The cooling fan is always ON at
0 power ON)
A cooling fan operates at power ON.
Cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled.
Cooling fan
H100 1 The fan is always ON while the inverter is running. During a stop, the
operation selection 1
inverter status is monitored and the fan switches ON/OFF according to
the temperature.
Cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled.
101 to 105
Set the cooling fan stop delay time within 1 to 5 seconds.
Cooling fan The cooling fan operates according to the H100 setting during Vector
0
operation selection control test operation or PM sensorless vector control test operation.
H106 0
during the test The cooling fan can be set to always OFF during Vector control test
operation 1
operation or PM sensorless vector control test operation.

 Cooling fan always ON (Pr.244 = "0")

• When Pr.244 = "0", the cooling fan operates at power ON. If the fan stops at this time, the inverter finds that the fan

operation is faulty and " " (FN), the indication of the Fan alarm, is displayed on the operation panel. The Fan fault
output (FAN) signal and the Alarm (LF) signal are output.
• For the terminal used for the FAN signal output, set "25 (positive logic)" or "125 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196
(Output terminal function selection) and for LF signal, set "98 (positive logic)" or "198 (negative logic)".

 Cooling fan operation control (Pr.244 (P.H100) = "1" (initial value), "101 to
105")
• The cooling fan operation is controlled when Pr.244 = "1". When the inverter is running, the cooling fan operates constantly.
When the inverter is stopped, the cooling fan operates depending on the temperature of the inverter heat sink. If the fan
stops although it meets the conditions for running, fan operation is regarded as faulty, [FN] is displayed on the operation
panel, and the fan signal and LF signals are output.
• To prevent the cooling fan from turning ON and OFF repeatedly during frequent starts/stops (inching), the cooling fan stop
waiting time can be set. The waiting time when Pr.244 = "101 to 105" is Pr.244 - 100 (or 1 second, if the Pr.244 = "101").

 Cooling fan operation command (Y206) signal

• The Cooling fan operation command (Y206) signal can be output when the inverter cooling fan meets the conditions for
running. The function can be used when the fan installed on the enclosure is synchronized with the inverter cooling fan.
• The Y206 signal indicates the operating command condition of the inverter cooling fan depending on the power supply ON/
OFF or the Pr.244 settings. The signal does not indicate the actual operation of the cooling fan. (The signal is output even
if the cooling fan is stopped due to a fault.)
• To use the Y206 signal, set "206 (positive logic) or 306 (negative logic)" in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection) to assign function to an output terminal.

424 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
 Cooling fan operation selection during the test operation (Pr.244 = "1000,
1001, 1101 to 1105" (P.H106 = "1")) 1
• When P.H106 = "1" or Pr.244 = "1000, 1001, or 1101 to 1105", the cooling fan can be set to always OFF during Vector
control test operation or PM sensorless vector control test operation.
2
NOTE
• The cooling fan is installed on the FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-00083(2.2K) or higher.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. 3

Parameters referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473 4
5.10.4 Earth (ground) fault detection at start
V/F Magnetic flux
5
Select whether to make earth (ground) fault detection at start. When enabled, earth (ground) fault detection is performed
immediately after a start signal input to the inverter.
6
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Without the earth (ground) fault detection at
249 Earth (ground) fault detection at 0
0 start
H101 start
1 With the earth (ground) fault detection at start 7
• If a ground fault is detected at start while Pr.249 = "1", the output-side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) is displayed
and the outputs are shut off. (Refer to page 790.)
• Pr.249 setting is enabled during V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control.
8
• When the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting is high, enable the ground fault detection at start.

NOTE 9
• Because the detection is performed at start, output is delayed for approx. 20 ms every start.
• Use Pr.249 to enable/disable ground fault detection at operation start. Ground faults are detected always during operation
regardless of the Pr.249 setting.
10
5.10.5 Varying the activation level of the undervoltage
protective function
If the undervoltage protection (E.UVT) activates due to unstable voltage in the power supply, the undervoltage level (DC bus
voltage value) can be changed.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
175 to 215 VDC*1
Set the DC voltage value at which E.UVT occurs.
598 350 to 430 VDC*2
Undervoltage level 9999
H102
E.UVT occurs at 215 VDC (200 V class) / 430 VDC (400
9999
V class).
*1 For the 200 V class
*2 For the 400 V class

NOTE
• Do not use this function when switching to an external battery, since the inrush current when power is restored increases, as
the undervoltage level is decreased.
• For the 200 V class inverters, the setting is available for the FR-A820-02330(45K) or lower.
• The Pr.598 setting is valid for induction motors. When either of the first or second motor is a PM motor, the Pr.598 setting is
invalid.

5.10.6 Initiating a protective function

A fault (protective function) is initiated by setting the parameter.

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
425
 This function can be used to check how the system operates at activation of a protective function.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

The setting range is same with the one for fault data codes of the
16 to 253 inverter (which can be read through communication). Written data is not
997
Fault initiation 9999 stored in EEPROM.
H103
The read value is always "9999". The protective function is not
9999
activated with this setting.
• To initiate a fault (protective function), set the assigned number of the protective function to be initiated in Pr.997.
• The value set in Pr.997 is not stored in EEPROM.
• When a protective function activates, the inverter output is shut off, a fault is displayed, and a fault signal (ALM, ALM2) is
output.
• The latest fault in the fault history is displayed while the fault initiation function is in operation. After a reset, the fault history
goes back to the previous status. (The protective function generated by the fault is not saved in the fault history.)
• Perform inverter reset to cancel the protective function.
• For the selectable parameter by Pr.997 and the corresponding protective functions, refer to page 776.

NOTE
• If a protective function is already operating, no fault can be activated by Pr.997.
• The retry function is disabled when a protective function has been initiated by the fault initiation function.
• If a fault occurs after a protective function has been activated, the protective function indication does not change. The fault is
not saved in the fault history either.

5.10.7 I/O phase loss protection selection

The output phase loss protection function, which stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's
output side (load side) is lost, can be disabled.
The input phase loss protective function on the inverter input side (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) can be enabled.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

251 Output phase loss 0 Output phase loss protection disabled
1
H200 protection selection 1 Output phase loss protection enabled
872 Input phase loss 0 Input phase loss protection disabled
0
H201*1 protection selection 1 Input phase loss protection enabled
*1 The setting is available for the standard structure model and the IP55 compatible model.

 Output phase loss protection selection (Pr.251)

• When Pr.251 is set to "0", output phase loss protection (E.LF) becomes invalid.

 Input phase loss protection selection (Pr.872) (Standard models and IP55
compatible models)
• When Pr.872 is set to "1", Input phase loss (E.ILF) protection is activated if one of three phases is lost for 1 second.

NOTE
• When several motors are connected, output phase loss cannot be detected even if the wiring to one motor loses phase.
• If an input phase is lost while Pr.872 = "1" (with input phase loss protection), Pr.261 Power failure stop selection ≠ "0" (power
failure stop function enabled), the motor decelerates to stop without outputting E.ILF.
• In the case of R/L1, S/L2 phase loss, the input phase loss protection does not operate, and the inverter output is shut off.
• If an input phase loss continues for a long time, the lives of converter section and capacitor of the inverter become shorter.

Parameters referred to
Pr.261 Power failure stop selectionpage 642

5.10.8 Retry function

This function allows the inverter to reset itself and restart at activation of the protective function (fault indication). The retry
generating protective functions can also be selected.

426 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected (Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠ 9999), the
restart operation is also performed after a retry operation as well as after an instantaneous power failure. (For restart operation,
refer to page 628 and page 635 for selection.)
1

Initial
Pr. Name
value
Setting range Description
2
65
Retry selection 0 0 to 5 Faults which trigger the retry operation can be selected.
H300
0 The retry function disabled.
Set the number of retries at a fault occurrence. 3
1 to 10
67 Number of retries at fault A fault output is not provided during the retry operation.
0
H301 occurrence Set the number of retries at a fault occurrence. (The setting value minus
101 to 110 100 is the number of retries.) A fault output is provided during the retry
operation. 4
68 Set the time delay from when an inverter fault occurs until the retry
Retry waiting time 1s 0.1 to 600 s
H302 operation starts.
69
H303
Retry count display
erase
0 0
Setting "0" clears the retry success counter ("retry success" means that
the inverter successfully restarts).
5
 Setting the retry function (Pr.67, Pr.68)
• When the inverter protective function is operating (fault indication), the retry function automatically cancels (resets) the 6
protective function after the time set in Pr.68. The retry function then restarts the operation from the starting frequency.
• The retry function is enabled when the Pr.67 setting is other than "0". Set the number of retries at activation of the protective
function in Pr.67. 7
Fault output during retry
Pr.67 setting Retry count
operation
0
1 to 10
—
Not available
No retry function
1 to 10 times
8
101 to 110 Available 1 to 10 times

• When retries fail consecutively more than the number of times set in Pr.67, a retry count excess (E.RET) occurs, resulting 9
in an inverter retries. (Refer to the Retry failure example.)
• Use Pr.68 to set the waiting time from a protective function activation to a retry in the range of 0.1 to 600 seconds.
• During retry operation, the During retry (Y64) signal is ON. For the Y64 signal, set "64 (positive logic)" or "164 (negative
10
logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function.

 Retry count check (Pr.69)

• Reading the Pr.69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times made by retries. The cumulative count
in Pr.69 increases by 1 when a retry is successful. Retry is regarded as successful when normal operation continues
without a fault for the Pr.68 setting multiplied by four or longer (3.1 seconds at the shortest). (When retry is successful, the
cumulative number of retry failures is cleared.)
• Writing "0" in Pr.69 clears the cumulative count.
Retry success

Pr. 68 × 4
Pr.68 (If it is below 3.1s, 3.1s is set.) Pr.68 Pr.68 Pr.68
Inverter Inverter
output output
frequency frequency
0 0 Time
Time
Retry start Success count + 1 First Second Third
Fault occurrence retry retry retry Retry failure
Fault Fault Fault (E.RET)
Retry success count occurrence occurrence occurrence
Fault signal ON
(ALM)
Y64 ON Y64 ON ON ON

Retry success example Retry failure example

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
427
  Selecting retry generating faults (Pr.65)
• Using Pr.65, the fault that causes a retry is selectable. No retry is made for the fault not indicated. (For the fault details,
refer to page 779.) ● indicates the faults selected for retry.

Retry-making Pr.65 setting Retry-making Pr.65 setting

fault 0 1 2 3 4 5 fault 0 1 2 3 4 5
E.OC1 ● ● ● ● ● E.MB3 ● ●
E.OC2 ● ● ● ● E.MB4 ● ●
E.OC3 ● ● ● ● ● E.MB5 ● ●
E.OV1 ● ● ● ● E.MB6 ● ●
E.OV2 ● ● ● ● E.MB7 ● ●
E.OV3 ● ● ● ● E.OS ● ●
E.THM ● E.OSD ● ●
E.THT ● E.PTC ●
E.IPF ● ● E.CDO ● ●
E.UVT ● ● E.SER ● ●
E. BE ● ● E.USB ● ●
E. GF ● ● E.ILF ● ●
E.OHT ● E.PID ● ●
E.OLT ● ● E.PCH ● ●
E.OPT ● ● E.SOT ● ● ● ● ●
E.OP1 ● ● E.LCI ● ●
E. PE ● ● E.LUP ● ●
E.MB1 ● ● E.LDN ● ●
E.MB2 ● ●

NOTE
• Use the retry function only when the operation can be resumed after resetting a protective function activation. Making a retry
against the protective function, which is activated by an unknown condition, will lead the inverter and motor to be faulty. Identify
and remove the cause of the protective function activation before restarting the operation.
• If the retry function operates during PU operations, the operating conditions (forward/reverse rotation) are stored; and
operations resume after retry reset.
• Only the fault details for the first fault that occurred during retry are stored in the fault history.
• The reset by the retry function does not clear the accumulated data of the electronic thermal O/L relay, regenerative brake
duty, etc. (This is different from power supply reset or reset by RES signal.)
• When the parameter storage device fault (E.PE) is occurring and reading of the retry-function-related parameters is not
possible, retry cannot be operated.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

CAUTION
• When the retry function is set enabled, stay away from the motor and machine in the case of an output shutoff. The motor
and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after the shutoff. When the retry function is selected,
apply the supplied CAUTION stickers to easily visible places.

Parameters referred to
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635

5.10.9 Limiting the output frequency (maximum/minimum

frequency)
Motor speed can be limited. Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency.

428 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1 120 Hz *1 1
Maximum frequency 0 to 120 Hz Set the upper limit of the output frequency.
H400 60 Hz*2
2
H401
Minimum frequency 0 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency.
2
18 High speed maximum 120 Hz*1
0 to 590 Hz Set when operating at 120 Hz or higher.
H402 frequency 60 Hz*2
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower. 3
*2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

 Setting the maximum frequency (Pr.1, Pr.18)

• Set Pr.1 Maximum frequency to the upper limit of the output frequency. If the value of the frequency command given is 4
higher than the setting, the output frequency is clamped at the maximum frequency.
• To operate at a frequency higher than the 120 Hz, adjust the upper output frequency limit with Pr.18 High speed
maximum frequency. (When setting a frequency in Pr.18, the Pr.1 setting automatically changes to the frequency set in 5
Pr.18. Also, when setting a frequency in Pr.1, the Pr.18 setting automatically changes to the frequency set in Pr.1.)
Clamped at the

6
Output frequency maximum frequency
(Hz)

Pr.1
Pr.18
7
Pr.2 Frequency setting

0 5, 10V
Clamped at the (4mA) (20mA)
minimum frequency 8
 Setting the minimum frequency (Pr.2)
• Set Pr.2 Minimum frequency to the lower limit of the output frequency.
• If the set frequency is Pr.2 or less, the output frequency is clamped at Pr.2 (does not fall below Pr.2).
9
NOTE
• To operate with a frequency higher than 60 Hz using frequency-setting analog signals, change the Pr.125 (Pr.126) (frequency 10
setting gain) setting. Simply changing the Pr.1 and Pr.18 settings does not enable the operation at a frequency higher than
60 Hz.
• During Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control, the upper and lower limits are for the
commanded frequency. The final output frequency that is decided by each control may exceed the lower or upper limits.
• When Pr.15 Jog frequency is equal to or less than Pr.2, the Pr.15 setting takes precedence.
• If a jump frequency that exceeds Pr.1 (Pr.18) is set for the 3-point frequency jump, the maximum frequency setting is the set
frequency. If the jump frequency is less than the setting of Pr.2, the jump frequency is the set frequency. (The set frequency
can be equal to or lower than the frequency lower limit.) When stall prevention is activated to decrease the output frequency,
the output frequency may drop to Pr.2 or below.

CAUTION
• Note that when Pr.2 is set to any value equal to or higher than Pr.13 Starting frequency, simply turning ON the start
signal runs the motor at the frequency set in Pr.2 even if the command frequency is not given.

Parameters referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382
Pr.15 Jog frequencypage 410
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505

5.10.10 Avoiding machine resonance points (frequency

jump)
When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters allow
resonant frequencies to be jumped.

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
429
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
31
Frequency jump 1A
H420
32
Frequency jump 1B
H421
33
Frequency jump 2A
H422 0 to 590 Hz, 1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B are frequency jumps (3-point jump).
9999
34 9999 9999: Function disabled
Frequency jump 2B
H423
35
Frequency jump 3A
H424
36
Frequency jump 3B
H425
552 0 to 30 Hz Set the jump range for the frequency jumps (6-point jump).
Frequency jump range 9999
H429 9999 3-point jump

 3-point frequency jump (Pr.31 to Pr.36)

• Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom point of each area.
• The settings of frequency jumps 1A, 2A, 3A are jump points, and operation is performed at these frequencies in the jump
areas.

Frequency jump
Pr.36
frequency jump (Hz)
Set frequency after

Pr.35

Pr.33
Pr.34

Pr.32
Pr.31

Input set frequency (Hz)

Example 1) To fix the frequency to 30 Hz in the range of 30 Hz to 35 Hz, set 35 Hz in Pr.34 and 30 Hz in Pr.33.
Pr.34: 35 Hz
Pr.33: 30 Hz

Example 2) To jump the frequency to 35 Hz in the range of 30 Hz to 35 Hz, set 35 Hz in Pr.33 and 30 Hz in Pr.34.

Pr.33: 35 Hz
Pr.34: 30 Hz

 6-point frequency jump (Pr.552)

• A total of six jump areas can be set by setting the common jump range for the frequencies set in Pr.31 to Pr.36.
• When frequency jump ranges overlap, the lower limit of the lower jump range and the upper limit of the upper jump range
are used.

430 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
 • When the set frequency decreases and falls within the jump range, the upper limit of the jump range is the set frequency.
When the set frequency increases and falls within the jump range, the lower limit of the jump range is the set frequency.
1
Set frequency after frequency jump
Pr.36

Pr.35
2
Set frequency after
Pr.33 frequency jump
Jump range
Pr.34
3
Pr.32 Pr.32
Pr.552 Jump range
Pr.552
4
Pr.31 Jump range Pr.31
Pr.552 Pr.552

0 Input set frequency 0 Input set frequency

NOTE 5
• During acceleration/deceleration, the frequency within the set area is valid.
• If the setting ranges of individual groups (1A and 1B, 2A and 2B, 3A and 3B) overlap, Parameter write error (Er1) occurs.
• Setting Pr.552 = "0" disables frequency jumps.
• If a jump frequency that exceeds Pr.1 (Pr.18) Maximum frequency is set for the 3-point frequency jump, the maximum 6
frequency setting is the set frequency. If the jump frequency is less than the setting of Pr.2 Minimum frequency, the jump
frequency is the set frequency. (The set frequency can be equal to or lower than the frequency lower limit.)
Example with 6-point frequency jump 7
Output frequency Output frequency

Pr.552 Pr.552 8
Maximum Minimum
frequency Pr.552 frequency Pr.552

0 Set frequency 0 Set frequency 9

Maximum frequency and frequency jump Minimum frequency and frequency jump

Parameters referred to 10
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.2 Minimum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequencypage 428

5.10.11 Stall prevention operation

V/F Magnetic flux

This function monitors the output current and automatically changes the output frequency to prevent the inverter from shutting
off due to overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. It can also limit the stall prevention and fast-response current limit operation during
acceleration/deceleration and power/regenerative driving.
This function is disabled during Real sensorless vector control, Vector control and PM sensorless vector control.
• Stall prevention:
If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the output frequency of the inverter is automatically
changed to reduce the output current. Also, the second stall prevention function can limit the output frequency range in
which the stall prevention function is enabled.
• Fast-response current limit:
If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is shut off to prevent an overcurrent.

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
431
 Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
0 Stall prevention operation disabled.
22 Stall prevention
150% Set the current limit at which the stall prevention operation
H500 operation level 0.1 to 400%*1 starts.
156 Stall prevention Enable/disable the stall prevention operation and the fast-
0 0 to 31, 100, 101
H501 operation selection response current limit operation.
Second stall 0 Second stall prevention operation disabled.
48
prevention operation 150% The stall prevention operation level can be changed using the
H600 0.1 to 400%*1
level RT signal.
0 Second stall prevention operation disabled.
Second stall
49 Set the frequency at which the Pr.48 stall prevention
prevention operation 0 Hz 0.01 to 590 Hz
H601 operation starts.
frequency
9999 Pr.48 is enabled when the RT signal is ON.
0 Third stall prevention operation disabled.
114 Third stall prevention
150% The stall prevention operation level can be changed using the
H602 operation level 0.1 to 400%*1 X9 signal.
0 Third stall prevention operation disabled.
115 Third stall prevention
0 Hz Set the frequency at which the stall prevention operation
H603 operation frequency 0.01 to 590 Hz
starts when the X9 signal turns ON.
Stall prevention The stall operation level when running at high speeds above
0 to 200%
23 operation level the rated frequency can be reduced.
9999
H610 compensation factor at
double speed 9999 Stall prevention operation disabled at double speed.

Stall prevention
66 Set the frequency at which the stall operation level reduction
operation reduction 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
H611 starts.
starting frequency
148 Stall prevention level at
H620 0 V input
150% 0 to 400%*1
The stall prevention operation level can be changed by the
149 Stall prevention level at analog signal input to the terminal 1 (terminal 4).
H621 10 V input
200% 0 to 400%*1
Output voltage reduction
0 Enable/disable the output
enabled
voltage reduction during stall
Output voltage reduction prevention operation.
1
disabled.
Voltage reduction
154 Output voltage reduction Use this setting when the
selection during stall 1 10
H631 enabled overvoltage protective function
prevention operation
(E.OV[]) is activated during stall
Output voltage reduction prevention operation in an
11
disabled. application with large load
inertia.
Set the OL signal output start time when stall prevention is
157 0 to 25 s
OL signal output timer 0s activated.
M430
9999 No OL signal output.
858 Terminal 4 function When set "4", the stall prevention level can be changed with
0 0, 1, 4, 9999
T040 assignment the signal to the terminal 4.
868 Terminal 1 function When set "4", the stall prevention level can be changed with
0 0 to 6, 9999
T010 assignment the signal to the terminal 1.
*1 The upper limit of stall prevention operation is limited internally to the following.
120% (SLD rating), 150% (LD rating), 220% (ND rating), or 280% (HD rating)

432 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
 Setting of stall prevention operation level (Pr.22)
• For Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level, set the ratio 1
Output current of the output current to the inverter's rated current at which
Pr.22
the stall prevention operation is activated. Normally, use

Output frequency
this parameter in the initial setting. 2
• Stall prevention operation stops acceleration (makes
n De
io deceleration) during acceleration, makes deceleration
at ce
er
3
l le
ce Constant ra during constant speed, and stops deceleration during
Ac speed tio
n
deceleration.
Time
OL • When the stall prevention operation is performed, the
Stall prevention operation example Overload warning (OL) signal is output. 4
NOTE
• A continuous overloaded condition may activate a protective function such as motor overload trip (electronic thermal O/L relay
function) (E.THM).
5
• When Pr.156 has been set to activate the fast response current limit (initial value), the Pr.22 setting should not be higher than
170%. Such setting prevents torque generation.
• When Real sensorless vector control or Vector control is selected using Pr.800 Control method selection, Pr.22 serves as 6
the torque limit level.
For the FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower and the FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or lower, the initial value of Pr.22 is 200% instead of
150%.
7

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
433
  Disabling the stall prevention operation and fast-response current limit
according to operating conditions (Pr.156)
• Referring to the following table, enable/disable the stall prevention operation and the fast-response current limit operation,
and also set the operation at OL signal output.

Fast-response Stall prevention operation selection

OL signal output
current limit ○: enabled
Pr.156 setting ○: enabled
○: enabled ●: disabled
●: disabled*1
●: disabled Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration
0 (initial value) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 ● ○ ○ ○ ○
2 ○ ● ○ ○ ○
3 ● ● ○ ○ ○
4 ○ ○ ● ○ ○
5 ● ○ ● ○ ○
6 ○ ● ● ○ ○
7 ● ● ● ○ ○
8 ○ ○ ○ ● ○
9 ● ○ ○ ● ○
10 ○ ● ○ ● ○
11 ● ● ○ ● ○
12 ○ ○ ● ● ○
13 ● ○ ● ● ○
14 ○ ● ● ● ○
15 ● ● ● ● —*2
16 ○ ○ ○ ○ ●
17 ● ○ ○ ○ ●
18 ○ ● ○ ○ ●
19 ● ● ○ ○ ●
20 ○ ○ ● ○ ●
21 ● ○ ● ○ ●
22 ○ ● ● ○ ●
23 ● ● ● ○ ●
24 ○ ○ ○ ● ●
25 ● ○ ○ ● ●
26 ○ ● ○ ● ●
27 ● ● ○ ● ●
28 ○ ○ ● ● ●
29 ● ○ ● ● ●
30 ○ ● ● ● ●
31 ● ● ● ● —*2
Power driving ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
100*3 Regenerative
driving
● ● ● ● —*2

Power driving ● ○ ○ ○ ○
101*3 Regenerative
driving
● ● ● ● —*2

*1 When "operation stop at OL signal output" is selected, the fault output " " (stop due to stall prevention) is displayed, and
operation stops.
*2 The OL signal and E.OLT are not outputted because fast-response current limit and stall prevention are not operating.
*3 Setting values "100, 101" can be individually set for power driving and regenerative driving. The setting value "101" disables the fast-response
current limit during power driving.

NOTE
• When the load is heavy or the acceleration/deceleration time is short, stall prevention operates and acceleration/deceleration
may not be performed according to the time set. Set Pr.156 and stall prevention operation level to the optimum values.
• For lift applications, make settings to disable the fast-response current limit. Otherwise, the torque may be insufficient, causing
the load to drop.

434 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
 Adjusting the stall prevention operation signal and output timing (OL
signal, Pr.157) 1
• If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level and stall prevention is activated, Overload warning (OL)
signal turns ON for 100 ms or more. The output signal turns OFF when the output current falls to the stall prevention
operation level or less. 2
• Pr.157 OL signal output timer can be used to set whether to output the OL signal immediately, or whether to output it
after a certain time period has elapsed.

• This function also operates during regeneration avoidance operation " " (overvoltage stall).
3
Pr.157 setting Description
0 (initial value)
0.1 to 25
Output immediately.
Output after the set time (s).
4
9999 Not output.

Overload state 5
(OL operation)

OL output signal

Pr.157 Set time(s)

6
NOTE
• OL signal is assigned to the terminal OL in the initial status. The OL signal can be assigned to other terminals by setting "3
(positive logic) or 103 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
7
• If the stall prevention operation has lowered the output frequency to 0.5 Hz and kept the level for 3 seconds, the stall prevention
stop (E.OLT) is activated to shut off the inverter output.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other 8
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Setting for stall prevention operation in the high-frequency range (Pr.22, 9

Pr.23, Pr.66)
10
Always at the Pr.22 level Setting example (Pr.22 = 120%, Pr.23 = 100%, Pr.66 = 60Hz)
when Pr.23 = "9999"
Pr.22
Stall prevention operation

120
Stall prevention operation

72
level (%)

36
level (%)

Stall prevention operation level 24

as set in Pr.23 18

Pr.66 400Hz 0 60 100 200 300 400

Output frequency (Hz)
Output frequency (Hz)

• When operating at the rated motor frequency or higher, acceleration may not be made because the motor current does
not increase. Also, when operating in the high-frequency range, the current flowing to the locked motor becomes less than
the rated output current of the inverter; and even if the motor is stopped, the protective function does not operate (OL). In
a case like this, the stall prevention level can be reduced in the high-frequency range to improve the motor's operating
characteristics. This is useful when operating up to the high speed range, such as when using a centrifuge. Normally, set
Pr.66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency to 60 Hz, and Pr.23 Stall prevention operation level
compensation factor at double speed to 100%.
• Calculation formula for stall prevention operation level
Stall prevention operation level (%) Pr.22 - A Pr.23 - 100
in the high-frequency range = A + B × [ Pr.22 - B ] × [ 100
]

Pr.66 (Hz) × Pr.22 (%) Pr.66 (Hz) × Pr.22 (%)

Where, A= ,B=
Output frequency (Hz) 400 Hz

• When Pr.23 = "9999" (initial value), the stall prevention operation level is constant at the Pr.22 level up to 590 Hz.

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
435
  Setting multiple stall prevention operation levels (Pr.48, Pr.49, Pr.114,
Pr.115)
• Setting Pr.49 Second stall prevention operation frequency = "9999" and turning ON the RT signal enables Pr.48
Second stall prevention operation level.
• For Pr.48 (Pr.114), set the stall prevention operation level that is effective in the output frequency range between 0 Hz and
Pr.49 (Pr.115). However, the operation level is Pr.22 during acceleration.
• Stop-on-contact operation can be used by decreasing the Pr.48 (Pr.114) setting and loosening the reduction torque.
• Pr.114 and Pr.115 are enabled when the X9 signal is ON. To input the X9 signal, set "9" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 Input
terminal function selection to assign the function to the terminal.
Pr.49 setting Pr.115 setting Operation
0 (initial value) The second (third) stall prevention function disabled.
0.01 Hz to 590 Hz The second (third) stall prevention function operates according to the frequency.*1
The second stall prevention function operates according to the RT signal.
Setting not
9999*2 available
RT signal ON: stall level set in Pr.48,
RT signal OFF: stall level set in Pr.22

*1 For the stall prevention operation level, the smaller of Pr.22 and Pr.48 (Pr.115) has precedence.
*2 When Pr.858 = "4 (analog input to terminal 4 for stall prevention operation level)" or Pr.868 = "4 (analog input to terminal 1 for stall prevention
operation level)", turning ON the RT (X9) signal does not enable the second (third) stall prevention function. (Input to the terminal 4 or terminal 1
is valid.)
operation current
Stall prevention

Output
Output frequency (Hz) Output
During acceleration frequency (Hz)
Output frequency
frequency Set frequency
Pr.49(Pr.115) Pr.49(Pr.115)
Set frequency

Stall Time Time

Pr.48 During deceleration/constant speed Stall
prevention
Pr.114 level prevention Pr.22 used
Pr.49 Output frequency level
Pr.22 used Pr.48(Pr.114) used Pr.48(Pr.114) used
Pr.115
Set frequency is Pr.49(Pr.115) or less Set frequency exceeds Pr.49(Pr.115)

NOTE
• When Pr.49 ≠ "9999" (level change according to frequency) and Pr.48 = "0%", the stall prevention function is disabled at or
lower than the frequency set in Pr.49.
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• The RT (X9) signal acts as the second (third) function selection signal and makes the other second (third) functions valid.
(Refer to page 525.)

 Stall prevention operation level setting (analog variable) from terminal 1

(terminal 4) (Pr.148, Pr.149, Pr.858, Pr.868)
• To use the terminal 1 (analog voltage input) to set the stall prevention operation level, set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function
assignment = "4". Then, input a 0 to 5 V (or 0 to 10 V) to the terminal 1. To choose whether 5 V or 10 V, use Pr.73 Analog
input selection. In the initial status, Pr.73 = "1 (initial value)" is set to choose 0 to ±10 V input.
• When setting the stall prevention operation level from terminal 4 (analog current input), set Pr.858 Terminal 4 function
assignment = "4". Input a 0 to 20 mA to the terminal 4. There is no need to turn ON the AU signal.
• Set Pr.148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input to the current limit level when input voltage is 0 V (0 mA).

436 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
 • Set Pr.149 Stall prevention level at 0 V input to the current limit level when input voltage is 10 V/5 V (20 mA).
Current limit level (%) Set the current limit level at 10V/5V input
power (input current 20mA) using Pr.149.
1
200%
150%
100%
2
50%

(-5V/10VDC) 0V
0mA
(5V/10VDC)
Input voltage (V)
Input current (mA) 3
(20mA)
Set the current limit level at 0V input
voltage (input current 0mA) using Pr.148.
4
V/F, Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Pr.858 setting Pr.868 setting
Terminal 4 function Terminal 1 function
0 (initial value) Auxiliary frequency 5
1 —
2 —

0 (initial value)
3
4*1
Frequency command (AU signal-ON)
—
Stall prevention
6
5 —
6 —
9999 — 7
0 (initial value) —
1 —
2
3
—
—
8
1 —
4*1 Stall prevention
5 —
6 — 9
9999 —
0 (initial value) Auxiliary frequency
1
2
Stall prevention —
—
10
3 — —
4*2
4*1 — *3 Stall prevention
5 —
6 Stall prevention —
9999 —
9999 — — —
*1 When Pr.868 = "4" (analog stall prevention), the other functions of terminal 1 (auxiliary input, override function, PID control) do not operate.
*2 When Pr.858 = "4" (analog stall prevention), PID control and speed commands via terminal 4 do not operate even when the AU signal is ON.
*3 When both Pr.858 and Pr.868 are set to "4" (stall prevention), terminal 1 functions take priority and terminal 4 has no function.

NOTE
• The fast-response current limit cannot be set.

 Further prevention of a trip (Pr.154)

• Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "0, 10", the output voltage is reduced during
stall prevention operation. By making this setting, an overcurrent trip becomes less likely to occur. Use this setting when
torque reduction does not pose a problem. (Under V/F control, the output voltage is reduced only during the stall prevention
operation is activated.)

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
437
 • Set Pr.154 = "10 or 11" when the overvoltage protective function (E.OV[]) is activated during stall prevention operation in
an application with large load inertia. Note that turning OFF the start signal (STF/STR) or varying the frequency command
during stall prevention operation may delay the acceleration/deceleration start.
Pr.154 E.OC[] countermeasure E.OV[] countermeasure
0 Enabled —
1 (initial value) — —
10 Enabled Enabled
11 — Enabled

CAUTION
• Do not set the stall prevention operation current too low.
Doing so will reduce the generated torque.
• Be sure to perform the test operation.
Stall prevention operation during acceleration may extend the acceleration time.
Stall prevention operation during constant-speed operation may cause sudden speed changes.
Stall prevention operation during deceleration may extend the deceleration time.

Parameters referred to
Pr.22 Torque limit levelpage 245
Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500

438 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
5.10.12 Load characteristics fault detection
This function is used to monitor whether the load is operating in normal condition by storing the speed/torque relationship in 1
the inverter to detect mechanical faults or for maintenance. When the load operating condition deviates from the normal range,
the protective function is activated or the warning is output to protect the inverter or the motor.
Initial value Setting
2
Pr. Name Description
FM CA range
Load characteristics measurement mode does not start. (Measurement
0
of load characteristics complete without fault.) 3
1480 Load characteristics 1 Load characteristics measurement mode starts.
0
H520 measurement mode 2, 3, 4, 5,
81, 82, 83, The load characteristics measurement status is displayed. (Read-only)
84, 85 4
1481 Load characteristics
9999
H521 load reference 1
1482 Load characteristics
H522 load reference 2
9999 5
Set the reference value of normal load characteristics.
1483 Load characteristics
9999 0 to 400% 8888: The present load status is written as reference status.
H523 load reference 3
9999: The load reference is invalid.
1484 Load characteristics
H524 load reference 4
9999 6
1485 Load characteristics
9999
H525 load reference 5
1486
H526
Load characteristics
maximum frequency
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
Set the maximum frequency of the load characteristics fault detection
range.
7
1487 Load characteristics Set the minimum frequency of the load characteristics fault detection
6 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
H527 minimum frequency range.
1488
H531
Upper limit warning
detection width
20%
0 to 400%
9999
Set the detection width when the upper limit load fault warning is output.
Function disabled
8
1489 Lower limit warning 0 to 400% Set the detection width when the lower limit load fault warning is output.
20%
H532 detection width 9999 Function disabled

1490 Upper limit fault 0 to 400%

Set the detection width when output is shut off when the upper limit load 9
9999 fault occurs.
H533 detection width
9999 Function disabled
Set the detection width when output is shut off when the lower limit load
1491 Lower limit fault
9999
0 to 400%
fault occurs. 10
H534 detection width
9999 Function disabled
Load status detection Set the waiting time after the load fault is detected until warning output
signal delay time / load or output shutoff.
1492
reference 1s 0 to 60 s In the load characteristics measurement mode, set the waiting time
H535
measurement waiting after the load measurement frequency is reached until the load
time reference is set.

 Load characteristics reference setting (Pr.1481 to Pr.1487)

• Use Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 to set the reference value of load characteristics.

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
439
 • Use Pr.1486 Load characteristics maximum frequency and Pr.1487 Load characteristics minimum frequency to set
the output frequency range for load fault detection.

Upper limit warning detection width

Load status (Pr.1488)
Upper limit fault detection width
(Pr.1490)
Load reference 5 (Pr.1485)
Lower limit fault detection width
(Pr.1491)

Lower limit warning detection width

Load reference 4 (Pr.1484) (Pr.1489)

Load reference 3 (Pr.1483) Normal load range

Load reference 2 (Pr.1482)

Load reference 1 (Pr.1481)

f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 Output frequency
(Pr.1487) (Pr.1486)

 Automatic measurement of the load characteristics reference (Load

characteristics measurement mode) (Pr.1480)

• Perform measurement under actual environment with the motor connected.

• Set Pr.1487 Load characteristics minimum frequency to a value higher than the Pr.13 Starting frequency setting.

• Setting Pr.1480 Load characteristics measurement mode = "1" enables automatic measurement of the load
characteristics reference. (Load characteristics measurement mode)
• Use Pr.1486 and Pr.1487 to set the frequency band for the measurement, and set Pr.1480 = "1". After setting, when the
inverter is started, the measurement starts. (When the value set in Pr.1486 is smaller than the value set in Pr.1487, the
measurement does not start.)
• The automatically measured load characteristics reference is written in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485.
• After the measurement is started, read Pr.1480 to display the status of the measurement. If "8" appears in the tens place,
the measurement has not properly completed.
Read value of Pr.1480
Status
Tens place Ones place
— 1 During measurement from the starting point to Point 1
— 2 During measurement from Point 1 to Point 2
— 3 During measurement from Point 2 to Point 3
— 4 During measurement from Point 3 to Point 4
— 5 During measurement from Point 4 to Point 5
— 0 Normal completion
Termination of measurement by an activation of a protective function, Inverter reset, turning ON of MRS
8 1 to 5 signal, turning OFF of the start command, or timeout. (The value in the ones place represents the above-
mentioned measurement point.)

• While measuring automatically, the During load characteristics measurement (Y213) signal is output. For the Y213 signal,
assign the function by setting "213 (positive logic)" or "313 (negative logic)" in any of in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection).

440 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
 • Setting "8888" in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 enables fine adjustment of load characteristics. When setting Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 =
"8888" during operation, the load status at that point is set in the parameter. (Only when the set frequency is within ±2 Hz
of the frequency of the measurement point, and SU signal is in the ON state.)
1
Example of starting measurement from the stop state

Frequency(Hz)
Load reference 5 recorded 2
f5(Pr.1486) Pr.41
Load reference 4 recorded
f4
Load reference 3 recorded
Pr.41 3
f3 Pr.41
Load reference 2 recorded
f2
Load reference
Pr.41 Operation at the
set frequency 4
1 recorded
f1(Pr.1487) Pr.41

STF＝ON
Pr.1480=1 Time
5
Measurement start
Pr.1492 Pr.1492 Pr.1492 Pr.1492 Pr.1492

Read value of Pr.1480 1 2 3 4 5 0 6

STF ON
Y213 ON
SU signal ON ON ON ON ON ON 7
NOTE
• Even if the load measurement is not properly completed, the load characteristics fault is detected based on the load
characteristics found by the already-completed portion of the measurement.
8
• During the load characteristics measurement, the load characteristics fault detection is not performed.
• During the load characteristics measurement, linear acceleration/deceleration is performed even if the S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration is set. 9
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

10
 Setting the load characteristics reference manually (Pr.1481 to Pr.1485)
• Set Pr.1480 Load characteristics measurement mode = "0" (initial value).
• Set Pr.1486 and Pr.1487 to specify the frequency band for the measurement, and calculate the frequency as the load
characteristics reference (f2 to f4) using the following table.
• Start the inverter operation, and set Pr.1481 = "8888" during operation at the frequency of the load characteristics
reference 1 (f1). The load status at that point is set in Pr.1481 (only when the set frequency is within ±2 Hz of the frequency
of the measurement point, and the SU signal is ON).
• Set load references in Pr.1482 to Pr.1485 in the same way as Pr.1481.
Reference Frequency Load reference
Load characteristics reference 1 f1: load characteristics minimum frequency (Pr.1487) Pr.1481
Load characteristics reference 2 f2 = (f5 - f1)/4 + f1 Pr.1482
Load characteristics reference 3 f3 = (f5 - f1)/2 + f1 Pr.1483
Load characteristics reference 4 f4 = (f5 - f1) × 3/4 + f1 Pr.1484
Load characteristics reference 5 f5: load characteristics maximum frequency (Pr.1486) Pr.1485

NOTE
• When inputting values directly in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 under V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control, input the
load meter value monitored at each reference frequency.
• When inputting values directly in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless
vector control, input the motor torque value monitored at each reference frequency.

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
441
  Load fault detection setting (Pr.1488 to Pr.1491)
• When the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1488 Upper limit warning detection width, the Upper limit
warning detection (LUP) signal is output. When the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1489 Lower limit
warning detection width, the Lower limit warning detection (LDN) signal is output. At the same time, the Load fault
warning (LDF) appears on the operation panel.
• For the LUP signal, assign the function by setting "211 (positive logic)" or "311 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196
(Output terminal function selection). For the LDN signal, assign the function by setting "212 (positive logic)" or "312
(negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
• When the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1490 Upper limit fault detection width, the protective
function (E.LUP) is activated and the inverter output is shut off. When the load is deviated from the detection width set in
Pr.1491 Lower limit fault detection width, the protective function (E.LDN) is activated and the inverter output is shut off.
• To prevent the repetitive on/off operation of the signal due to load fluctuation near the detection range, Pr.1492 Load
status detection signal delay time / load reference measurement waiting time can be used to set the delay time. Even
when a fault is detected out of the detection range once, the warning is not output if the characteristics value returns to the
normal range from a fault state within the output delay time.

Load status Upper limit fault detection width (Pr.1490)

Pr.1492 Upper limit warning detection width (Pr.1488)

Load reference
Pr.1492 Lower limit warning detection width (Pr.1489)

Lower limit fault detection width (Pr.1491)

Pr.1492

Pr.1492
LUP ON
LDN ON ON
E.LDN Output shutoff
LDF warning indication ON ON ON

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Setting example
• The load characteristics are calculated from the parameter setting and the output frequency.
• A setting example is as follows. The reference value is linearly interpolated from the parameter settings. For example, the
reference when the output frequency is 30 Hz is 26%, which is linearly interpolated from values of the reference 2 and the
reference 3.
Reference Frequency Load reference
Load characteristics reference 1 f1: Load characteristics minimum frequency (Pr.1487) = 10 Hz Pr.1481 = 15%
Load characteristics reference 2 f2 = (f5 - f1)/4 + f1 = 22.5 Hz Pr.1482 = 20%
Load characteristics reference 3 f3 = (f5 - f1)/2 + f1 = 35 Hz Pr.1483 = 30%
Load characteristics reference 4 f4 = (f5 - f1) × 3/4 + f1 = 47.5 Hz Pr.1484 = 60%
Load characteristics reference 5 f5: Load characteristics maximum frequency (Pr.1486) = 60 Hz Pr.1485 = 100%

442 5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
 Load(%)
120 1
100

80
2
60

26
40
3
20

4
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Frequency(Hz)

NOTE
• When the load reference is not set for five points, the load characteristics value is determined by linear interpolation of the set
load reference values only. If there is only one load reference setting, the set load reference is used as the load reference all 5
through the range.

Parameters referred to
6
Pr.41 Up-to-frequency sensitivitypage 484
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

5.10.13 Motor overspeeding detection 7

The Overspeed occurrence (E.OS) is activated when the motor speed exceeds the overspeed detection level. This function
prevents the motor from accidentally speeding over the specified value, due to an error in parameter setting, etc. 8
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
If the motor rotation speed exceeds the speed set in Pr.374 during
0 to 590 Hz
encoder feedback control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector 9
control or PM sensorless vector control, Overspeed occurrence
(E.OS) occurs, the inverter output is shut off.
374 Overspeed detection
9999 If the speed exceeds "the maximum speed (Pr.1, Pr.18) + 20 Hz"
H800 level
during encoder feedback control, Real sensorless vector control, or 10
9999 Vector control, E.OS occurs.
During PM sensorless vector control, E.OS occurs when the speed
exceeds the "maximum motor frequency + 10 Hz"*1.
*1 The motor maximum frequency is set in Pr.702 Maximum motor frequency. When Pr.702 = "9999 (initial value)", the Pr.84 Rated motor
frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency.

Motor speed

Pr.374
Coast to stop

Time

ON
ALM

E.OS

NOTE
• During the encoder feedback control operation or under Vector control, the motor speed is compared against Pr.374. Under
Real sensorless vector control or PM sensorless vector control, the output frequency is compared against Pr.374.

5. PARAMETERS
5.10 (H) Protective function parameter
443
 5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring

Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page

To display the motor speed (the
number of rotations per minute). Speed indication and its
P.M000 to P.M002, Pr.37, Pr.144,
To switch the unit of measure to set setting change to rotations 444
P.D030 Pr.505, Pr.811
the operation speed from frequency per minute
to motor speed.
Pr.52, Pr.170,
P.M020 to P.M023, Pr.171, Pr.268,
Operation panel monitor item
P.M030, P.M031, Pr.290, Pr.563,
To change the item monitored on the selection, clearing the
P.M044, P.M045, Pr.564, Pr.774 to 446
operation panel and parameter unit cumulative value during
P.M050 to P.M052, Pr.776, Pr.891,
monitoring
P.M100 to P.M104 Pr.992, Pr.1018,
Pr.1106 to Pr.1108
To change the monitor item whose P.M040 to P.M042, Pr.54, Pr.55, Pr.56,
Terminal FM (CA) function
data is output via terminal FM (CA) or P.M044, P.M300, Pr.158, Pr.290, 457
selection
AM P.M301, P.D100 Pr.291, Pr.866
Pr.867, Pr.869, C0
P.M310, P.M320,
To adjust the output via terminal FM Terminal FM (CA)/AM (Pr.900), C1
P.M321, P.M330 to 463
(CA) or AM calibration (Pr.901), C8 (Pr.930)
P.M334
to C11 (Pr.931)
P.M023, P.M100,
Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158,
To check the effects of energy saving Energy saving monitoring P.M200 to P.M207, 467
Pr.891 to Pr.899
P.M300, P.M301
P.M400 to P.M406,
Pr.190 to Pr.196,
To assign functions to the output Output terminal function P.M410 to P.M416,
Pr.289, Pr.313 to 473
terminals assignment P.M420 to P.M422,
Pr.322
P.M431
Up-to-frequency sensitivity Pr.41 to Pr.43, Pr.50,
To detect the output frequency Output frequency detection P.M440 to P.M446 Pr.116, Pr.865, 484
Low speed detection Pr.870
Output current detection P.M433, P.M460 to Pr.150 to Pr.153,
To detect the output current 487
Zero current detection P.M464 Pr.166, Pr.167
To detect the output torque Output torque detection P.M470 Pr.864 488
To use the remote output function Remote output P.M500 to P.M502 Pr.495 to Pr.497 489
To use the analog remote output
Analog remote output P.M530 to P.M534 Pr.655 to Pr.659 490
function
To output the fault code via a terminal Fault code output function P.M510 Pr.76 492
Pulse train output of output
To detect the specified output power P.M520 Pr.799 493
power
To detect the control circuit Control circuit temperature
P.M060 Pr.663 494
temperature monitoring
To monitor pulses Cumulative pulse monitoring P.M610 to P.M613 Pr.635 to Pr.638 321
Encoder pulse dividing
To output divided encoder pulses P.M600, P.M601 Pr.413, Pr.863 495
output

5.11.1 Speed indication and its setting change to

rotations per minute
The frequency monitored or set on the operation panel can be changed to the motor speed or the machine speed.

444 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Initial value
Pr. Name
FM CA
Setting range Description 1
0 Monitoring and setting of frequency
37
Speed display 0 Set a number for the speed of machine operated at the
M000 1 to 9998*1

505 Speed setting

speed (frequency) set in Pr.505.
2
60 Hz 50 Hz 1 to 590 Hz Set the reference speed (frequency) for Pr.37.
M001 reference
144 Speed setting 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 102, Set the number of motor poles for the indication of the
4
M002 switchover 104, 106, 108, 110, 112 motor speed.
Speed setting, running speed
3
0
monitor increments 1 r/min Torque limit setting
Speed setting, running speed increments 0.1%
1
811
D030
Set resolution
switchover
0
monitor increments 0.1 r/min 4
Speed setting, running speed
10
monitor increments 1 r/min Torque limit setting
Speed setting, running speed increments 0.01%
11
monitor increments 0.1 r/min 5
*1 The maximum value of the setting range differs according to the Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.505 Speed setting reference, and it can be
calculated from the following formula.
The maximum value of Pr.37 < 65535 × Pr.505 / Pr.1 setting value (Hz).
The maximum setting value of Pr.37 is 9998 if the result of the above formula exceeds 9998. 6
 Indication of motor speed (Pr.37, Pr.144)
• To change the indication to the motor speed, set the number of motor poles (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12) or the number of motor
poles with the addition of 100 (102, 104, 106, 108, 110, or 112) in Pr.144.
7
• Whenever the number of motor poles set in Pr.81 Number of motor poles is changed, the Pr.144 setting changes
automatically in conjunction with Pr.81. However, the Pr.81 setting does not automatically change when the Pr.144 setting
is changed.
8
Example 1) Changing the initial value of Pr.81 to "2" will change the Pr.144 setting from "4" to "2".
Example 2) Changing the Pr.81 setting to "2" while Pr.144 = "104" will change the Pr.144 setting from "104" to "102".
9
 Indication of machine speed (Pr.37, Pr.505)
• To change the indication to the machine speed, set a number in Pr.37 which corresponds to the speed of machine
operated at the frequency set in Pr.505. 10
• For example, when Pr.505 is set to 60 Hz and Pr.37 is set to "1000", the operation panel indicates "1000" as the monitor
value of machine speed while the output frequency is 60 Hz. "500" is displayed while the output frequency is 30 Hz.

 Changing the increment of the speed monitoring and setting (Pr.811)

• When Pr.811 = "1 or 11", the speed can be set in increments of 0.1 r/min on the PU, or can be set and monitored in
increments of 0.1 r/min via RS-485 communication or other communication with a corresponding communication option
installed. (The parameter setting is in 1 r/min increments.)
• For the information of the availability of changing the increments of speed setting on communication options, refer to the
Instruction Manual of each communication option.
• Refer to page 245 for details on the setting increments for the torque limit level.

 Monitoring/setting items and its increments

• When both settings of Pr.37 and Pr.144 are changed from the initial values, a precedence order for these settings is as
follows:
Pr.144 = "102 to 112" > Pr.37 = "1 to 9998" > Pr.144 = "2 to 12".
• The monitoring/setting items and its increments are listed with the following matrix to show the combination of the Pr.37
and Pr.144 settings.

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
445
 Output frequency Set frequency Running speed Indication of frequency
Pr.37 setting Pr.144 setting
indication indication indication setting parameter
0 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 r/min*1*2 0.01 Hz.
0 (initial *1*2
2 to 12 0.01 Hz (initial setting) 0.01 Hz (initial setting) 1 r/min (initial 0.01 Hz (initial setting)
value) setting)
102 to 112 1 r/min*1*2 1 r/min*1*2 1 r/min*1*2 1 r/min*1
0 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 (machine speed*1) 0.01 Hz.
1 to 9998 2 to 12 1 (machine speed*1 ) 1 (machine speed ) *1
1 (machine speed ) *1
1 (machine speed*1)
102 to 112 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 r/min*1*2 0.01 Hz.
*1 Motor speed r/min conversion formula: frequency × 120 / number of motor poles (Pr.144)
Machine speed conversion formula: Pr.37 × frequency / Pr.505
The Pr.144 value in the above formula is “Pr.144 - 100" when any of "102 to 112" is set in Pr.144. The value is "4" when Pr.37 = 0 and Pr.144 = 0.
The item set in Pr.505 is consistently a frequency (Hz).
*2 The increment can be changed in Pr.811 from 1 r/min to 0.1 r/min.

NOTE
• The inverter's output frequency is displayed as synchronous speed under V/F control. The displayed value is "actual motor
speed" + "motor slip". When Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or PM sensorless vector
control is selected, the actual motor speed (estimated value by motor slip calculation) is used. When the encoder feedback
control or vector control is selected, the actual motor speed from the encoder is used.
• When Pr.37 = "0" and Pr.144 = "0", the running speed monitor is displayed with the number of motor poles 4. (Displays 1800
r/min at 60 Hz)
• To change the PU main monitor (PU main display), refer to Pr.52.
• If the setting increment is changed to 1 r/min (Pr.811 = "0 or 10") after setting the running speed in 0.1 r/min (Pr.811 = "1 or
11"), the 0.1 r/min increment may be dropped, in order for the rotations per minute resolution to change from 0.1 r/min to 0.3
r/min (when using four poles).
• When using the machine speed display for the parameter unit (FR-PU07), do not change the speed with the up/down key if a
set speed above 65535 is displayed. The set speed may become an undetermined value.
• When a certain type of communication option is used, the frequency display (setting) is used regardless of the Pr.37 and
Pr.144 settings. Refer to the Instruction Manual of each communication option for details. (The frequency display (setting) is
always used for HMS network options.)
• When Pr.811 = "1 or 11" with the 0.1 r/min increment, the upper limit is as follows.
Speed command setting range: 6000 r/min for 2 to 10 motor poles, 5900 r/min for 12 motor poles
Running speed monitor such as the operation panel: 6553.5 r/min
Full scale of the running speed motor for analog output (terminals FM, CA and AM): 6000 r/min

CAUTION
• Make sure to set the running speed and the number of motor poles.
Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the machine.

Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428
Pr.22 Torque limit levelpage 245
Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 446
Pr.81 Number of motor polespage 221
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221
Pr.811 Set resolution switchoverpage 245

5.11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via

communication
The monitor item to be displayed on the operation panel or the parameter unit can be selected.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

0, 5 to 14, 17 to
20, 22 to 36, 38
Select the item monitored on the operation panel or
52 Operation panel main 0 (output to 46, 50 to 57,
parameter unit.
M100 monitor selection frequency) 61, 62, 64, 67,
Refer to page 447 for the monitor item selection.
71 to 75, 87 to
98, 100

446 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
774
M101
Operation panel monitor
selection 1
1 to 3, 5 to 14,
17 to 20, 22 to Each of the initial items monitored on the operation panel or
1
775 Operation panel monitor 36, 38 to 46, 50 parameter unit in the monitor mode (output frequency,
M102 selection 2 9999 to 57, 61, 62, output current, and output voltage) can be switched to a
64, 67, 71 to 75, user-designated item.
776 Operation panel monitor 87 to 98, 100, 9999: Follows the Pr.52 setting. 2
M103 selection 3 9999
0 to 3, 5 to 14,
17 to 20, 22 to
992 Operation panel setting dial
0 (set frequency)
36, 38 to 46, 50 Select the monitor item displayed on the operation panel at 3
M104 push monitor selection to 57, 61, 62, the time when the setting dial is pressed.
64, 67, 71 to 75,
87 to 98, 100
0 Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter. 4
Set "10" to monitor the cumulative power in the range of 0 to
170 10
Watt-hour meter clear 9999 9999 kWh via communication.
M020
Set "9999" to monitor the cumulative power in the range of
9999
0 to 65535 kWh via communication. 5
563 Energization time carrying- (0 to 65535) The number of times that the cumulative energization time
0
M021 over times (Read-only) exceeded 65535 hours is displayed (read-only).

268 Monitor decimal digits

9999
0
1
Value is displayed in 1 increments (an integer).
Value is displayed in 0.1 increments.
6
M022 selection
9999 No function
Set the number of digits to move the decimal point of the

891 Cumulative power monitor

0 to 4 cumulative energy monitored value to the left. The readout
peaks out at the upper limit of readout.
7
9999
M023 digit shifted times
The function of moving the decimal point is not available.
9999
The readout is reset to 0 when it exceeds the upper limit.

171
0 Set "0" to clear the operation hour meter. 8
Operation hour meter clear 9999 The readout is always 9999. Nothing changes when "9999"
M030 9999
is set.
564 Operating time carrying- (0 to 65535) The number of times that the operating time reaches 65535
M031 over times
0
(Read-only) hours is displayed. Read-only. 9
Set the availability of negative signals output via terminal
290 Monitor negative output
0 0 to 7 AM, to the operation panel, and through communication.
M044 selection
(Refer to page 455.)
1018
Monitor with sign selection 9999 0, 1, 9999
Select the item group to enable the indication of negative 10
M045 signed numbers.
The filter time constant is selectable for monitoring of the
1106 0 to 5 s
Torque monitor filter 9999 torque. A larger setting results in slower response.
M050
9999 0.3 s filter
The filter time constant is selectable for monitoring of the
1107 Running speed monitor 0 to 5 s
9999 running speed. A larger setting results in slower response.
M051 filter
9999 0.08 s filter
The filter time constant is selectable for monitoring of the
1108 Excitation current monitor 0 to 5 s motor excitation current. A larger setting results in slower
9999 response.
M052 filter
9999 0.3 s filter

 Monitor item list (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992)

• Use Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, or Pr.992 to select the item to monitor on the operation panel or the parameter unit.
• Refer to the following table to find the setting value for each monitoring. The value in the Pr. setting column is set in each
of the parameters for monitoring (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, and Pr.992) to determine the monitored item. The value in the
RS-485 column is used for the RS-485 communication special monitor selection. The value in the MODBUS RTU column
is used for the MODBUS RTU real time monitor. (The items marked with “—" cannot be selected. The circle in the negative
indication (-) column indicates that the indication of negative signed numbers is available.)

Negative
Increment Pr. MODBUS
Monitor item RS-485 indication Description
and unit setting RTU
(-)*1
Output frequency
0.01 Hz*17 1/0/100 H01 40201 ○*21 The inverter output frequency is displayed.
(speed)*18
Output current*7*9*18 0.01/0.1 A*6 2/0/100 H02 40202 The inverter output current effective value is displayed.

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
447
 Negative
Increment Pr. MODBUS
Monitor item RS-485 indication Description
and unit setting RTU
(-)*1
Output voltage*7*18 0.1 V 3/0/100 H03 40203 The inverter output voltage is displayed.
Fault indication — 0/100 — — Each of the last 8 faults is displayed individually.
Set frequency / motor
speed setting 0.01 Hz*17 5*2 H05 40205 The set frequency is displayed.

The motor speed is displayed (depending on the settings

of Pr.37 and Pr.144). (Refer to page 444.)
Operation speed 1 (r/min) 6*2 H06 40206 ○*21 During encoder feedback control operation or under
Vector control, the actual motor speed according to
encoder signals is displayed.
The motor torque is displayed as a percentage (0%
Motor torque 0.1% 7*2 H07 40207 ○ under V/F control), considering the rated torque as
100%.
Converter output
0.1 V 8*2 H08 40208 The DC bus voltage value is displayed.
voltage*7
Regenerative brake Brake duty set in Pr.70 for the regeneration unit set in
0.1% 9*2 H09 40209
duty*8 Pr.30 is displayed.
Electronic thermal O/ The motor thermal cumulative value is displayed,
L relay load factor
0.1% 10*2 H0A 40210
considering the thermal operation level as 100%.
Output current peak The peak value of output current, which is constantly
0.01/0.1 A*6 11*2 H0B 40211 stored, is displayed. (It is reset with every startup of the
value*7 inverter.)

Converter output The DC bus voltage peak value, which is constantly

*7 0.1 V 12*2 H0C 40212 stored, is displayed. (It is reset with every startup of the
voltage peak value inverter.)
Input power 0.01/0.1 kW*6 13*2 H0D 40213 The power at the inverter input side is displayed.
*9 *6 *2 H0E 40214 The power at the inverter output side is displayed.
Output power 0.01/0.1 kW 14
Torque current is displayed as a percentage, considering
Pr.56 setting value as 100% (considering the motor rated
Load meter 0.1% 17 H11 40217
torque as 100% under Real sensorless vector control or
Vector control).
Motor excitation
0.01 A/0.1 A*6 18 H12 40218 The motor excitation current is displayed.
current*7
The number of pulses per motor rotation during
*11 orientation control operation or in the position control
Position pulse — 19 H13 40219
mode is displayed. (The output voltage is displayed when
a Vector control option is not installed.)
The cumulative energization time since the inverter
Cumulative shipment is displayed. The number of times an
1h 20 H14 40220
energization time*3 integrated value has reached the maximum value of
65535 hours can be checked in Pr.563.
Monitoring is enabled only during orientation control
*11 operation. (The output voltage is displayed when a
Orientation status 1 22 H16 40222
Vector control option is not installed.) (Refer to page
585.)
The cumulative operation time is displayed. The number
Actual operation of times an integrated value has reached the maximum
1h 23 H17 40223 value of 65535 hours can be checked in Pr.564. Use
time*3*4 Pr.171 to reset the cumulative operation time. (Refer to
page 454.)
The output current value is displayed as a percentage,
considering the inverter rated current value as 100%.
Motor load factor 0.1% 24 H18 40224
Readout (%) = present output current value / inverter
rated current value × 100

0.01/0.1 The cumulative energy based on the monitored output

Cumulative energy*7 *5*6 25 H19 40225 power is displayed. Use Pr.170 to reset it. (Refer to page
kWh 454.)
Position command
1 26 H1A 40226 ○
(lower digits) The position command (decimal) before the electronic
Position command gear is set is displayed.*10
1 27 H1B 40227 ○
(upper digits)

448 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Negative
Increment Pr. MODBUS
Monitor item RS-485 indication Description
and unit setting RTU
(-)*1 1
Current position
1 28 H1C 40228 ○ The converted number of the position feedback pulse
(lower digits)
into the number of pulses before the electronic gear is set
Current position
(upper digits)
1 29 H1D 40229 ○ is displayed.*10 2
Droop pulse (lower
1 30 H1E 40230 ○
digits) The droop pulse before the electronic gear is set is
Droop pulse (upper
digits)
1 31 H1F 40231 ○
displayed.*10
3
The torque command value adjusted with Vector control
Torque command 0.1% 32 H20 40232 ○
is displayed.
Torque current
command
0.1% 33 H21 40233 ○
The command value of the current for torque is
displayed.
4
The output of a machine connected to the motor shaft is
Motor output 0.01/0.1 kW*6 34 H22 40234 displayed. It is determined by multiplying the present
output torque with the present motor speed. 5
The number of pulses fed back from the encoder in one
cycle of the sampling is displayed (kept displayed during
a stop). (The output voltage is displayed when a Vector

Feedback pulse*11 — 35 H23 40235

control option is not installed.)
The sampling time period varies depending on the
6
Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses setting.
1050 or less: 1 s,
1051 to 2100: 0.5 s,
2101 to 4096: 0.25 s 7
Torque (positive
polarity for driving
The value equal to the motor torque is displayed.
torque/negative
polarity for
0.1% 36 H24 40236 ○ A positive value for driving torque or a negative value for
regenerative braking torque is displayed.
8
regenerative braking
torque)
Trace status 1 38 H26 40238 The trace status is displayed. (Refer to page 649.)
SSCNET III The SSCNET III communication status between the 9
communication inverter and the controller is displayed.
1 39 H27 40239
status*11 The output voltage is displayed when the FR-A8NS is not
installed.
PLC function user The user-designated monitor item is displayed using the 10
40 H28 40240
monitor 1 PLC function.
PLC function user Increment set Each value of the following special registers is displayed.
in the register 41 H29 40241 SD1216: displayed with the setting value "40",
monitor 2
SD1215 SD1217: displayed with the setting value "41",
PLC function user SD1218: displayed with the setting value "42"
42 H2A 40242
monitor 3 (Refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.)
Station number (RS- The station number of the inverter enabling
1 43 H2B 40243
485 terminals) communication via the RS-485 terminals is displayed.
The station number of the inverter enabling
Station number (PU) 1 44 H2C 40244
communication via the PU connector is displayed.
The station number of the inverter enabling CC-Link
Station number (CC-
1 45 H2D 40245 communication is displayed. ("0" is displayed when the
Link)
FR-A8NS is not installed.)
The temperature of the Vector control dedicated motor
Motor temperature*11 1°C 46 H2E 40246 ○ with thermistor (SF-V5RU[]T/A) is displayed (for the FR-
A8AZ).
Power saving effect Increment 50 H32 40250 The energy saving effect monitoring is enabled. The item
and unit vary to monitor is selectable from among the saved power, the
Cumulative energy depending on average energy saving, and the energy cost savings.
51 H33 40251
saving the parameter Some of them can be displayed as a percentage
settings. according to the parameter settings. (Refer to page 467.)
PID set point 0.1% 52 H34 40252
The set point, measured value, and deviation during PID
PID measured value 0.1% 53 H35 40253
control operation is displayed. (Refer to page 610.)
PID deviation 0.1% 54 H36 40254 ○

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
449
 Negative
Increment Pr. MODBUS
Monitor item RS-485 indication Description
and unit setting RTU
(-)*1
The ON/OFF state of the input terminals on the inverter
Input terminal status — H0F*12 40215*12 is displayed. (Refer to page 453 for details on indication
on the DU.)
55*19
The ON/OFF state of the output terminals on the inverter
Output terminal
status
— H10*13 40216*13 is displayed. (Refer to page 453 for details on indication
on the DU.)
Option input terminal The ON/OFF state of the input terminals on the digital
— 56 — — input option (FR-A8AX) is displayed on the DU. (Refer to
status*11 page 453 for details.)
The ON/OFF state of the output terminals on the digital
Option output output option (FR-A8AY) or the relay output option (FR-
— 57 — —
terminal status*11 A8AR) is displayed on the DU. (Refer to page 453 for
details.)

Option input terminal The ON/OFF state of the input terminals X0 to X15 on the
status 1 (for digital input option (FR-A8AX) is monitored via RS-485
— — H3A*14 40258 *14
communication or other communication when the
communication)*11 communication option is installed.
Option input terminal The ON/OFF state of the input terminal DY on the digital
status 2 (for input option (FR-A8AX) is monitored via RS-485
— — H3B*15 40259*15 communication or other communication when the
communication)*11 communication option is installed.
The ON/OFF state of the output terminals on the digital
Option output output option (FR-A8AY) or the relay output option (FR-
terminal status (for — — H3C*16 40260*16 A8AR) is monitored via RS-485 communication or other
communication)*11 communication when the communication option is
installed.
The accumulated heat value of the motor thermal O/L
Motor thermal load relay is displayed.
0.1% 61 H3D 40261
factor The Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay
function) (E.THM) occurs at 100%.
The accumulated heat value of the inverter thermal O/L
Inverter thermal load relay is displayed.
0.1% 62 H3E 40262
factor The Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay
function) (E.THT) occurs at 100%.
The PTC thermistor resistance is displayed when Pr.561
PTC thermistor
0.01 kΩ 64 H40 40264 PTC thermistor protection level ≠ 9999. (The output
resistance
voltage is displayed when Pr.561 = 9999.)
The PID measured value is displayed while the PID
PID measured value control is enabled (Pr.128 ≠ "0"), even if PID control
0.1% 67 H43 40267
2 operating conditions are not satisfied. (Refer to page
610.)
The cumulative number of pulses is displayed (for Vector
Cumulative pulse*11 — 71 H47 40271 ○*20 control compatible plug-in option). (Monitoring range: -
32767 to 32767)
Cumulative pulse The number of the cumulative pulses carrying overflow
— 72 H48 40272 ○*20 times is displayed (for Vector control compatible plug-in
overflow times*11 option).
Cumulative pulse
(control terminal The cumulative number of pulses is displayed (for the
— 73 H49 40273 ○*20 FR-A8TP). (Monitoring range: -32767 to 32767)
option)*11
Cumulative pulse
overflow times The number of the cumulative pulse overflow times is
(control terminal — 74 H4A 40274 ○*20 displayed (for the FR-A8TP).
option)*11
Multi-revolution The multi-revolution encoder counter is monitored when
*11 1 75 H4B 40275 the FR-A8APS is installed. (The output voltage is
counter monitored when the FR-A8APS is not installed.)

450 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Negative
Increment Pr. MODBUS
Monitor item RS-485 indication Description
and unit setting RTU
(-)*1 1
32-bit cumulative
1 kWh — H4D 40277
energy (lower 16 bits) The upper or lower 16 bits of the 32-bit cumulative
energy is displayed on each indication.
32-bit cumulative
energy (upper 16 bits)
1 kWh — H4E 40278 It is monitored via RS-485 communication or other 2
0.01 kWh/0.1 communication with a communication option installed.
32-bit cumulative
— H4F 40279 (To find the monitor codes for each communication
energy (lower 16 bits) kWh*6
option, refer to the Instruction Manual of each
32-bit cumulative 0.01 kWh/0.1
— H50 40280
communication option.) 3
energy (upper 16 bits) kWh*6
Remote output value
0.1% 87 H57 40287
1
Remote output value
0.1% 88 H58 40288
4
2 Each setting value of Pr.656 to Pr.659 (Analog remote
○
Remote output value output 1 to 4) is displayed. (Refer to page 490.)
0.1% 89 H59 40289
3
Remote output value
0.1% 90 H5A 40290
5
4
PID manipulated The PID control manipulated amount is displayed. (Refer
0.1% 91 H5B 40291 ○
amount to page 610.)
Second PID set point 0.1% 92 H5C 40292 6
The set point, measured value, or deviation is displayed
Second PID
0.1% 93 H5D 40293 during the second PID control operation. (Refer to page
measured value
610.)
Second PID deviation 0.1% 94 H5E 40294 ○
The PID measured value is displayed while the second
7
Second PID PID control is enabled (Pr.753 ≠ "0"), even if PID control
0.1% 95 H5F 40295
measured value 2 operating conditions are not satisfied. (Refer to page

Second PID
610.)
The second PID control manipulated amount is
8
0.1% 96 H60 40296 ○
manipulated amount displayed. (Refer to page 610.)
Dancer main set The set speed for main speed during the dancer control
0.01 Hz. 97 H61 40297
speed operation is displayed. 9
The temperature of the control circuit board is displayed.
Control circuit (Refer to page 494.)
1°C 98 H62 40298 ○
temperature When negative number not displayed: 0 to 100°C
When negative number displayed: -20 to 100°C
10
*1 Indication with a minus sign is not possible via RS-485 or MODBUS RTU communication.
*2 To monitor the item on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) in the monitor mode, use Pr.774 to Pr.776 or the
monitor function of the FR-LU08 or the FR-PU07 for setting.
*3 The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0.
*4 The actual operation time does not increase if the cumulative running time before power OFF is less than an hour.
*5 On the parameter unit (FR-PU07), the unit "kW" is displayed.
*6 The increment differs according to the inverter capacity. (Increment left of a slash for FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or
lower. Increment right of a slash for FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
*7 Since each readout of the output voltage and output current displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU08) is a four-digit number, a value of more
than 9999 is displayed as "----".
*8 The setting is available for the standard model.
*9 The inverter regards the output current which is less than the specified current level (5% of the rated inverter current) as 0 A. Therefore, each
readout of an output current and output power may show "0" if a too small-capacity motor is used as contrasted with the inverter capacity and the
output current falls below the specified value.
*10 The displayed item can be changed to the pulse after the electronic gear is set by using Pr.430 Pulse monitor selection. (Refer to page 321.)
*11 Monitoring is available when the compatible plug-in option or control terminal option is installed.
*12 The details of bits for the input terminal status are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the inverter. "—" denotes an indefinite
(null) value.)

b15 b0
STP
S1 S2 - - CS RES MRS JOG RH RM RL RT AU STR STF
(STOP)
*13 The details of bits for the output terminal status are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the inverter. "—" denotes an indefinite
(null) value.)

b15 b0
- - - - - - - - So (SO) ABC2 ABC1 FU OL IPF SU RUN

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
451
 *14 The details of bits for the option input terminal status 1 are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the FR-A8AX.) Every bit is 0
(OFF) when the option is not installed.

b15 b0
X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
*15 The details of bits for the option input terminal status 2 are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the FR-A8AX. "—" denotes an
indefinite (null) value.) Every bit is 0 (OFF) when the option is not installed.

b15 b0
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DY
*16 The details of bits for the option output terminal status are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the FR-A8AY/A8AR. "—" denotes
an indefinite (null) value.) Every bit is 0 (OFF) when the option is not installed.

b15 b0
- - - - - - RA3 RA2 RA1 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
*17 The increment is 1 when Pr.37 = "1 to 9998" or when Pr.144 = "2 to 12" or "102 to 112". (Refer to page 444.)
*18 The monitored values are retained even if an inverter fault occurs. Resetting clears the retained values.
*19 Parameter setting is not available for setting the item as the main monitor item on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-
PU07). Use the monitor function of the FR-LU08 or the FR-PU07 for setting.
*20 Negative values are not displayed on the operation panel. The values "-1 to -32767" are displayed as "65535 to 32769" on the operation panel.
*21 Setting of Pr.1018 Monitor with sign selection is required. Also, it will be displayed without a minus sign on the operation panel. Confirm the
rotation direction with the [FWD] or [REV] indicator.

 Monitor display for operation panel (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776)

• When Pr.52 = "0" (initial value), the monitoring of output frequency, output current, output voltage and fault display can be

selected in sequence by pressing .

• Among the items set in Pr.52, the load meter and motor load factor are displayed in the second screen (initially set to
monitor the output current). Other items are displayed in the third screen (initially set to monitor the output voltage).
• The first screen (initially set to monitor the output frequency) is displayed at power-ON in the initial setting. To change the

screen displayed at power-ON, display the screen you want to display at power-ON, and hold down for 1 second.

To monitor the output frequency at power-ON again, display the screen of output frequency, and hold down for 1
second.
• First screen (displayed at power-ON) • Second screen • Third screen • Fault record
With fault

Output frequency monitoring Output current Output voltage monitoring

monitoring

The following is the screen flow diagram when Pr.52 = "20" (cumulative energization time).
• First screen (displayed at power-ON) • Second screen • Third screen • Fault record
With fault

Output frequency monitoring Output current monitoring Cumulative energization time monitoring

• The monitor item to be displayed is set using Pr.774 for the first screen, Pr.775 for the second screen, and Pr.776 for the
third screen. When Pr.774 to Pr.776 = "9999" (initial value), the Pr.52 setting value is used.

NOTE
• On the operation panel (FR-DU08), the "Hz" unit indicator is lit while displaying the output frequency, the "Hz" blinks when
displaying the set frequency.

452 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Displaying the set frequency during stop (Pr.52)
• When Pr.52 = "100", the set frequency is displayed during stop, and output frequency is displayed during running. (LED 1
of Hz blinks during stop and is lit during operation.)
Pr.52 setting Status Output frequency Output current Output voltage Fault monitor

0
During running/
Output frequency
2
stop
Output current Output voltage Fault monitor
During stop Set frequency*1
100
During running Output frequency
3
*1 Displays the frequency that is output when the start command is ON. The value considers the maximum/minimum frequency and frequency
jumps. It is different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr.52 = "5".

NOTE 4
• During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence appears.
• During output shutoff by the MRS signal, the values displayed are the same as during a stop.
• During offline auto tuning, the tuning state monitor takes priority.
5
 Operation panel setting dial push display (Pr.992)
• Use Pr.992 to select the monitor that appears when the setting dial on the operation panel (FR-DU08) is pushed. 6
• When Pr.992 = "0 (initial value)", keep pressing the setting dial when in PU operation mode or External/PU combined
operation mode 1 (Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "3") to show the presently set frequency.
• When Pr.992 = "100", the set frequency is displayed during stop, and output frequency is displayed during running. 7
Pr.992 setting Status Monitor displayed by the setting dial push
0 During running/stop Set frequency (PU direct-in frequency)

100
During stop Set frequency*1 8
During running Output frequency

*1 Displays the frequency that is output when the start command is ON. The value considers the maximum/minimum frequency and frequency
jumps. It is different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr.992 = "5". 9
 Monitoring I/O terminals on the operation panel (FR-DU08) (Pr.52, Pr.774
to Pr.776, Pr.992)
• When Pr.52 (Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992) = "55 to 57", the I/O terminal state can be monitored on the operation panel (FR-
10
DU08).
• When a terminal is ON, the corresponding LED segment is ON. The center LED segments are always ON.
Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776,
Monitor item Monitor description
Pr.992 setting
55 I/O terminal status Displays the I/O terminal ON/OFF state of the inverter.
*1 Option input terminal status Displays input terminal ON/OFF state of the digital input option (FR-A8AX)
56
Displays output terminal ON/OFF state of the digital output option (FR-A8AY) or
57*1 Option output terminal status
the relay output option (FR-A8AR).
*1 The setting value "56 or 57" can be set even if the option is not installed. All are OFF when the option is not connected.

• On the I/O terminal monitor, the upper LEDs indicate the input terminal status, and the lower LEDs indicate the output
terminal status.
STP (STOP) Segments corresponding
RM RH AU RES STF JOG CS S1
to input terminals
RT MRS STR S2 - Display example -
RL
When signals STF,
The center LED segments are RH and RUN are on
always ON. A

ABC1 RUN OL
SU FU Segments corresponding
ABC2 IPF So (SO)
to output terminals

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
453
 • The decimal point of the last digit on the LED is lit for the input option terminal monitor.
X1 X2 X4 X5 X7 X8
X0 X3 X6 X9

The center LED segments are always ON.

X10 X11 X12 X15

X13 X14 DY

Decimal point LED of the last digit LED is always ON

• The decimal point of the second last digit on the LED is lit for the output option terminal monitor.
FR-A8AY
Y1 Y2 Y4 Y5
Y0 Y3 Y6

The center LED segments are always ON.

RA1 RA2RA3
FR-A8AR
Decimal point LED of the second last digit LED is always ON

 Monitoring and resetting cumulative power (Pr.170, Pr.891)

• When the cumulative power is monitored (Pr.52 = "25"), the output power monitor value is added up and is updated in 100
ms increments.
• The values are stored in EEPROM every 10 minutes. The values are also stored in EEPROM at power OFF or inverter
reset.
• Increments and ranges of monitoring on the operation panel or parameter unit and via communication (RS-485
communication or other communication with communication option installed) are as follows (when Pr.891 = "9999 (initial
value)").
On operation panel or parameter unit*1 Via communication
Range
Range Increment Increment
Pr.170 = "10" Pr.170 = "9999"
0 to 999.99 kWh 0.01 kWh*2
0 to 65535 kWh
1000.0 to 9999.9 kWh 0.1 kWh 0 to 9999 kWh 1 kWh
(initial value)
10000 to 99999 kWh 1 kWh

*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, the value is measured in 0.01 kWh increments and the upper five digits
are displayed. For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, the value is measured in 0.1 kWh increments and the
upper five digits are displayed.
For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower, the cumulative energy up to 999.99 kWh is displayed in 0.01
increments such as "999.99", and that of 1000 kWh or more is displayed in 0.1 increments such as "1000.0".
*2 The display in 0.01 kWh increments is available only for the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
• The decimal point position on the watt-hour meter can be shifted to left. The number of digits to be shifted is equal to the
setting of Pr.891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times. For example, when Pr.891 = "2", the cumulative power
value 1278.56 kWh is displayed as 12.78 (in 100 kWh increments) on the operation panel, or displayed as 12 on a display
used for monitoring via communication.
• When Pr.891 = "0 to 4", the meter stops at the maximum number. When Pr.891 = "9999", the meter returns to 0 and the
counting starts again.
• Writing "0" in Pr.170 clears the cumulative power monitor.

NOTE
• When Pr.170 is read just after "0" has been written in Pr.170, the setting "9999" or "10" is displayed.

 Monitoring cumulative energization time (Pr.563)

• When the cumulative energization time is selected as a monitor item (Pr.52 = "20"), the counter of cumulative energization
time since the inverter shipment accumulated every hour is displayed.
• The cumulative energization time is displayed in 0.001-hour increments until the cumulative time reaches one hour, and
then the time is displayed in 1-hour increments.

454 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 • The EEPROM is updated every minute until the cumulative energization time reaches one hour, and then the EEPROM is
updated every 10 minutes. The EEPROM is also updated at power OFF.
• When the cumulative energization time counter reaches 65535, it starts from 0 again. The number of times the cumulative
1
energization time counter reaches 65535 can be checked with Pr.563.

NOTE 2
• The cumulative energization time does not increase if the power is turned OFF after less than an hour.

 Actual operation time monitoring (Pr.171, Pr.564) 3

• On the actual operation time monitoring (Pr.52 = "23"), the inverter running time is added up every hour. (Time is not added
up during a stop.)
• The time is displayed in 1-hour increments.
4
• The values are stored in EEPROM every 10 minutes. The EEPROM is also updated at power OFF.
• When the cumulative energization time counter reaches 65535, it starts from 0 again. The number of times the actual
operation time counter reaches 65535 can be checked with Pr.564. 5
• Setting "0" in Pr.171 clears the actual operation time meter.

NOTE 6
• The actual operation time does not increase if the cumulative running time before power OFF is less than an hour.
• Once "0" is set in Pr.171, the setting of Pr.171 is always turned to "9999" afterwards. Setting "9999" does not clear the actual
operation time meter.
7
 Hiding the decimal places for the monitors (Pr.268)
• The numerical figures after a decimal point displayed on the operation panel may fluctuate during analog input, etc. The 8
decimal places can be hidden by selecting the decimal digits with Pr.268.
Pr.268 setting Description
9999 (initial value) No function 9
For the first or second decimal places (0.1 increments or 0.01 increments) of the monitor, numbers
0 in the first decimal place and smaller are rounded to display an integral value (1 increments). The
monitor value equal to or smaller than 0.99 is displayed as 0.
When monitoring with the second decimal place (0.01 increments), the 0.01 decimal place is 10
1 dropped and the monitor displays the first decimal place (0.1 increments). When monitoring with the
first decimal place, the display will not change.

NOTE
• The number of readout digits of the cumulative energization time (Pr.52 = "20"), actual operation time (Pr.52 = "23"),
cumulative energy (Pr.52 = "25"), and cumulative energy saving (Pr.52 = "51") does not change.

 Enabling display of negative numbers during monitoring (Pr.290)

• Negative signal outputs can be selected for the items monitored via terminal AM (analog voltage output), via a
communication option, and on the operation panel. To check which items can be monitored with indication of negative
numbers, refer to the monitor items list (on page 447).
Negative indication (-)
Pr.290 setting
Terminal AM Operation panel Communication option*1 FR Configurator2 etc.*2
0 (initial value) — — — —
1 Enabled — — —
2 — Enabled — —
3 Enabled Enabled — —
4 — — Enabled Enabled
5 Enabled — Enabled Enabled
6 — Enabled Enabled Enabled
7 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
—: Negative numbers indication disabled (positive only)
*1 Indication with a minus sign is not possible via the following communication methods.
RS-485 communication (Mitsubishi inverter protocol, MODBUS RTU), SLMP communication

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
455
 *2 Under the condition that the high-speed sampling and the negative output are selected for FR Configurator2, the display range of the output
frequency (Monitor No.1) is -300.00 to 300.00 Hz.
A value outside the range is clamped at -300.00 Hz or 300.00 Hz. Under the same condition, the display range of the running speed (Monitor
No.6) is -30000 to 30000 r/min. A value outside the range is clamped at -30000 r/min or 30000 r/min. During the trace sampling, the same display
ranges are applied. A value outside the ranges is clamped.

• Select the item group to enable the indication of negative signed numbers by setting Pr.1018 Monitor with sign selection.
Pr.1018 setting
Monitor item
9999 0 1
Output frequency — ○ *1 ○*1
Motor speed — ○*1 ○*1
Motor torque ○ ○ ○
Position command (lower)*4 ○*2 ○*2 ○*3
*4 *2 *2
Position command (upper) ○ ○ ○*3
Current position (lower)*4 ○*2 ○*2 ○*3
Current position (upper)*4 ○*2 ○*2 ○*3
Droop pulse (lower)*4 ○*2 ○*2 ○*3
Droop pulse (upper)*4 ○*2 ○*2 ○*3
Torque command ○ ○ ○
Torque current command ○ ○ ○
Torque (positive polarity for driving torque/negative ○ ○ ○
polarity for regenerative braking torque)
Motor temperature ○ ○ ○
PID deviation ○ ○ ○
Cumulative pulse ○ ○ ○
Cumulative pulse overflow times ○ ○ ○
Cumulative pulse (control terminal option) ○ ○ ○
Cumulative pulse overflow times (control terminal ○ ○ ○
option)
Remote output 1 ○ ○ ○
Remote output 2 ○ ○ ○
Remote output 3 ○ ○ ○
Remote output 4 ○ ○ ○
PID manipulated amount ○ ○ ○
Second PID deviation ○ ○ ○
Second PID manipulated amount ○ ○ ○
Control circuit temperature ○ ○ ○

○: Negative numbers displayed with minus sign, —: Negative numbers not displayed (positive only)
*1 Negative numbers are not displayed on the operation panel. Confirm the rotation direction with the [FWD] or [REV] indicator.
*2 Signed values are displayed only on the FR-DU08 (-9999 to 9999). Unsigned values (0 to 9999) are displayed on other devices.
*3 Full 32-bit data (-2147483648 to 2147483647) is displayed during monitoring via the communication option.
*4 Monitor the lower and upper digits at the same timing. Otherwise, the data may not be reliable.

NOTE
• When the output via terminal AM (analog voltage output) is set to "Negative numbers indication enabled", the output is within
the range of -10 to +10 VDC. Connect the meter with which output level is matched.
• Parameter unit (FR-PU07) displays only positive values.

456 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Monitor filter (Pr.1106 to Pr.1108)
• The response level (filter time constant) of the following monitor indicators can be adjusted. Increase the setting when a 1
monitor indicator is unstable, for example.
Pr. Monitor number Monitor indicator name
7 Motor torque 2
17 Load meter
1106 32 Torque command
33
36
Torque current command
Torque monitor
3
1107 6 Motor speed
1108 18 Motor excitation current
4
Parameters referred to
Pr.30 Regenerative function selection, Pr.70 Special regenerative brake dutypage 724
Pr.37 Speed display, Pr.144 Speed setting switchoverpage 444
Pr.55 Frequency monitoring reference, Pr.56 Current monitoring reference, Pr.866 Torque monitoring referencepage 457
5
5.11.3 Monitor display selection for terminals FM/CA and
AM 6
Monitored values are output in either of the following: analog voltage (terminal AM), pulse train (terminal FM) for the FM type
inverter, or analog current (terminal CA) for the CA type inverter.
The signal (monitor item) to be output to terminal FM/CA and terminal AM can be selected. 7

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
457
 Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18,
21, 24, 32 to 34, 36,
54 FM/CA terminal function
46, 50, 52 to 53, 61, Select the item monitored via terminal FM or CA.
M300 selection
62, 67, 70, 87 to 90,
1 (output
92, 93, 95, 97, 98
frequency)
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18,
158 21, 24, 32 to 34, 36,
AM terminal function selection Select the item monitored via terminal AM.
M301 46, 50, 52 to 54, 61,
62, 67, 70, 87 to 98
Set the full-scale value when outputting the
55 Frequency monitoring
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz frequency monitor value to terminals FM, CA and
M040 reference
AM.
0 to 500 A*1 Enter the full-scale value of a meter which
56 Inverter rated
Current monitoring reference corresponds to the output via terminal FM/CA or
M041 current 0 to 3600 A*2 terminal AM to monitor the output current.
Enter the full-scale value of a meter which
866
Torque monitoring reference 150% 0 to 400% corresponds to the output via terminal FM/CA or
M042
terminal AM to monitor the motor torque.
Set the availability of negative signals output via
290 Monitor negative output
0 0 to 7 terminal AM, to the operation panel, and through
M044 selection
communication. (Refer to page 455.)
Pulse train input Pulse train output
(terminal JOG) (terminal FM)
0 JOG signal*3 FM output*4
1 Pulse train input FM output*4
High-speed pulse train
10*4 JOG signal*3 output (50% duty)
High-speed pulse train
11*4 Pulse train input
output (50% duty)
291
Pulse train I/O selection 0
D100 High-speed pulse train
20*4 JOG signal*3 output (ON width fixed)
High-speed pulse train
21*4 Pulse train input output
(ON width fixed)
High-speed pulse train
output (ON width fixed).
100*4 Pulse train input
Output the pulse train
input without changes.
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
*3 Function assigned to Pr.185 JOG terminal function selection.
*4 Valid only for the FM type inverters.

 Monitor description list (Pr.54, Pr.158)

• Set Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection for monitoring via terminal FM (pulse train output) or terminal CA (analog
current output).
• Set Pr.158 AM terminal function selection for monitoring via terminal AM (analog voltage output). Negative signals can
be output via terminal AM (in the range of -10 to +10 VDC). The circle in the Negative output column indicates that the
output of negative signals is available via terminal AM. (To enable or disable the output of negative signals, refer to page
446.)
• Refer to the following table and select the item to be monitored. (Refer to page 447 for the list of monitor items.)

Negative
Increment Pr.54 (FM/CA), Terminal FM, CA, AM
Monitor item (-) Remarks
and unit Pr.158 (AM) setting full-scale value
output
Output frequency 0.01 Hz 1 Pr.55 ○*3
*2 *1 2 Pr.56
Output current 0.01/0.1 A
200 V class: 400 V,
Output voltage 0.1 V 3
400 V class: 800 V
Frequency setting value 0.01 Hz 5 Pr.55

458 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Negative
Increment Pr.54 (FM/CA), Terminal FM, CA, AM
Monitor item (-) Remarks
and unit Pr.158 (AM) setting full-scale value
output 1
The value converted
Refer to page 444 for the monitoring of
Motor speed 1 (r/min) 6 with the Pr.37, Pr.144 ○*3 the operation speed.
value from Pr.55.
Motor torque 0.1% 7 Pr.866 ○ 2
Converter output 200 V class: 400 V,
0.1 V 8
voltage*2 400 V class: 800 V
Regenerative brake
0.1% 9
Brake duty decided by 3
duty*4 Pr.30, Pr.70.
Electronic thermal O/L Electronic thermal O/L
0.1% 10
relay load factor relay (100%)
Output current peak
0.01/0.1 A*1 11 Pr.56
4
value
Converter output voltage 200 V class: 400 V,
0.1 V 12
peak value 400 V class: 800 V
Inverter rated power × 5
Input power 0.01/0.1 kW*1 13
2
Inverter rated power ×
Output power*2 0.01/0.1 kW*1 14
2
Load meter 0.1% 17 Pr.866 6
Motor excitation current 0.01 A/0.1 A*1 18 Pr.56
Terminal FM: When Pr.291 = "0 or 1",

Reference voltage output — 21 —

output is 1440 pulses/s. When Pr.291 ≠
"0 or 1", output is 50k pulses/s.
7
Terminal CA: Output is 20 mA.
Terminal AM: Output is 10 V.
Motor load factor 0.1% 24 200% 8
Torque command 0.1% 32 Pr.866 ○
Torque current command 0.1% 33 Pr.866 ○
Motor output 0.01/0.1 kW*1 34 Rated motor capacity
Torque (positive polarity
9
for driving torque/
negative polarity for 0.1% 36 Pr.866 ○
regenerative braking
torque) 10
Motor temperature 1°C 46 Pr.751 ○ Enabled when the FR-A8AZ is used.
Increment and
unit vary
For the information of the power saving
Energy saving effect depending on 50 Inverter capacity
effect monitoring, refer to page 467.
the parameter
settings.
PID set point 0.1% 52 100%
PID measured value 0.1% 53 100% Refer to page 610 for the PID control.
PID deviation 0.1% 54*5 100% ○
Motor thermal
Motor thermal load factor 0.1% 61 activation level
(100%)
Inverter thermal
Inverter thermal load
0.1% 62 activation level
factor
(100%)
PID measured value 2 0.1% 67 100% Refer to page 610 for the PID control.
PLC function analog Enabled by Pr.414 = "1 or 2".
0.1% 70 100% ○
output Refer to page 646 for the PLC function.
Remote output value 1 0.1% 87 1000%
Remote output value 2 0.1% 88 1000% Refer to page 490 for the analog
Remote output value 3 0.1% 89 1000% remote output.
Remote output value 4 0.1% 90 1000%

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
459
 Negative
Increment Pr.54 (FM/CA), Terminal FM, CA, AM
Monitor item (-) Remarks
and unit Pr.158 (AM) setting full-scale value
output
PID manipulated amount 0.1% 91*5 100% ○
Second PID set point 0.1% 92 100%
Second PID measured
0.1% 93 100%
value
Second PID deviation 0.1% 94*5 100% ○ Refer to page 610 for the PID control.
Second PID measured
0.1% 95 100%
value 2
Second PID manipulated
amount
0.1% 96*5 100% ○

Dancer main speed For details on dancer control, refer to

0.01 Hz. 97 Pr.55
setting page 622.
Control circuit Terminal FM/CA: 0 to 100°C,
1°C 98 100°C ○
temperature Terminal AM: -20 to 100°C
*1 The increment differs according to the inverter capacity. (Increment left of a slash for FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or
lower. Increment right of a slash for FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)
*2 The inverter regards the output current which is less than the specified current level (5% of the rated inverter current) as 0 A. Therefore, each
readout of an output current and output power may show "0" if a too small-capacity motor is used as contrasted with the inverter capacity and the
output current falls below the specified value.
*3 Setting of Pr.1018 Monitor with sign selection is required.
*4 This signal is available only for the standard model.
*5 The setting is available only in Pr.158 (terminal AM).

 Frequency monitor reference (Pr.55)

• Enter the full scale value of a meter used to monitor the output frequency, the frequency setting value, or the dancer main
speed setting via terminal FM/CA or terminal AM.
• For the FM type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the meter corresponding to a pulse train of 1440 pulses/s (or 50k
pulses/s) output via terminal FM. Enter the frequency value (for example, 60 Hz or 120 Hz) at full scale of the meter (1 mA
analog meter) installed between terminal FM and terminal SD. Pulse speed is proportional to the output frequency of the
inverter. (The maximum output pulse train is 2400 pulses/s (or 55k pulses/s).)
Pulse speed (pulses/s)

2400
(55k)
1440
(50k)

1Hz 60Hz Output frequency 590Hz

(initial value)

Setting range of Pr.55

• For the CA type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the meter corresponding to a current of 20 mADC output via terminal
CA. Enter the current value (for example, 60 Hz or 120 Hz) at full scale of the meter (20 mADC ammeter) installed between
terminal CA and terminal 5. Output current is proportional to the frequency. (The maximum output current is 20 mADC.)

Output Current
20 mADC

50Hz 590Hz
(initial value)

Setting range of Pr.55

• Enter the full-scale value of the meter corresponding to a voltage of 10 VDC output via terminal AM. Enter the current value
(for example, 60 Hz or 120 Hz) at full scale of the meter (10 VDC voltmeter) installed between terminal AM and terminal
5. Output voltage is proportional to the frequency. (The maximum output voltage is 10 VDC.)

460 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Output voltage

10VDC 1

60Hz
2
60Hz *1 590Hz
(initial value)
*2
Setting range of Pr.55
3
-10VDC

*1
*2
FM type: 60 Hz, CA type: 50 Hz
Output of negative signals enabled when Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection = "1 or 3"
4
 Current monitor reference (Pr.56)
• Enter the full scale value of a meter used to monitor the output current, the output current peak value, or the motor 5
excitation current via terminal FM/CA or terminal AM.
• For the FM type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the meter corresponding to a pulse train of 1440 pulses/s (or 50k
pulses/s) output via terminal FM. Enter the current value at full scale of the meter (1 mA analog meter) installed between 6
terminal FM and terminal SD. Pulse speed is proportional to the output current monitored. (The maximum output pulse
train is 2400 pulses/s (or 55k pulses/s).)
• For the CA type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the current meter corresponding to a current of 20 mADC output via 7
terminal CA. Enter the current value at full scale of the meter (20 mADC ammeter) installed between terminal CA and
terminal 5. Output current is proportional to the output current monitored. (The maximum output current is 20 mADC.)
• Enter the full-scale value of the current meter corresponding to a voltage of 10 VDC output via terminal AM. Enter the 8
current value at full scale of the meter (10 VDC voltmeter) installed between terminal AM and terminal 5. Output voltage is
proportional to the output current monitored. (The maximum output voltage is 10 VDC.)

 Torque monitor reference (Pr.866) 9

• Enter the full scale value of a meter used to monitor the output torque via terminal FM/CA or terminal AM.
• For the FM type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the torque meter corresponding to a pulse train of 1440 pulses/s (or
50k pulses/s) output via terminal FM. Enter the torque value at full scale of the meter (1 mA analog meter) installed between 10
terminal FM and terminal SD. Pulse speed is proportional to the torque monitored. (The maximum output pulse train is
2400 pulses/s (or 55k pulses/s).)
• For the CA type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the torque meter corresponding to a current of 20 mADC output via
terminal CA. Enter the torque value at full scale of the meter (20 mADC ammeter) installed between terminal CA and
terminal 5. Output current is proportional to the torque monitored. (The maximum output voltage is 20 mADC.)
• Enter the full-scale value of the torque meter corresponding to a voltage of 10 VDC output via terminal AM. Enter the torque
value at full scale of the meter (10 VDC voltmeter) installed between terminal AM and terminal 5. Output voltage is
proportional to the torque monitored. (The maximum output voltage is 10 VDC.)

 Terminal FM pulse train output (Pr.291)

• Two kinds of pulse trains can be outputted via terminal FM.
• When Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "0 (initial value) or 1", pulse train is output via terminal FM, with a maximum
output of 8 VDC and 2400 pulses/s.
The pulse width can be adjusted on the operation panel or the parameter unit by using the calibration parameter C0
(Pr.900) FM/CA terminal calibration.
• A 1 mA full-scale DC ammeter or a digital meter can be used to give commands (such as inverter output frequency
command).

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
461
 FM output circuit

Inverter
24V

2.2K 3.3K FM

20K SD

Indicator
1mA full-scale (Digital indicator)
analog meter
1mA 1440 pulses/s(+) (-)
FM FM
(+) (-) T1

Calibration
resistor *1 8VDC
SD SD
T2
Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr.55 (frequency monitor)
Set with Pr.56 (current monitor)
*1 Not needed when the operation panel or the parameter unit is used for calibration.
Use a calibration resistor when the indicator (frequency meter) needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located
far from the inverter.
However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, calibrate additionally with
the operation panel or parameter unit.
*2 In the initial setting, 1 mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s terminal FM are used at 60 Hz.

• When Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "10, 11, 20, 21, or 100", this is high-speed pulse train output for open collector
output. A maximum pulse train of 55k pulses/s is outputted.
There are two types of pulse width: "50% duty" and "fixed ON width"; this cannot be adjusted with the calibration parameter
C0 (Pr.900) FM/CA terminal calibration.

High-speed pulse train output circuit

(example of connection to pulse counter)
Pulse counter
Pull up resistance *3

Inverter
FM

SD

*1 The pulses may weaken due to stray capacitance in the wiring if the wiring is long, and the pulse counter will be unable to recognize the pulses.
Connect the open collector output to the power source with a pull-up resistor if the wiring is too long.
Check the pulse counter specs for the pull-up resistance.
The resistance should be at 80 mA of the load current or less.

• When Pr.291 = "10, or 11", the pulse cycle is 50% duty (ON width and OFF width are the same).
• When Pr.291 = "20, 21, or 100", the pulse ON width is output at a fixed width (approx. 10 μs).
• At the "100" setting, the same pulse train from the pulse train input (terminal JOG) will be outputted. This is used when
running at a synchronized speed with more than one inverter. (Refer to page 406.)

Pulse of Pr.291 = "10, 11" Pulse of Pr.291 = "20, 21, 100"

Approx. 10 μs Approx. 10 μs
50%duty 50%duty

Hi *4 Low
Hi *4 Low

462 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 *1 "HIGH" indicates when the open collector output transistor is OFF.

Item
High-speed pulse train output
specifications
1
Output method NPN open collector output
Voltage between collector-emitter 30 V (max.)
Maximum permissible load current 80 mA 2
Output pulse rate *1
0 to 55k pulses/s
Output resolution 3 pulses/s (excluding jitter)

*1 50k pulses/s when the monitor output value is 100%. 3

NOTE
• Terminal JOG input specifications (pulse train input or contact input) can be selected with Pr.291. When changing the setting
value, be careful not to change the terminal JOG input specifications. (Refer to page 406 for pulse train input.) 4
• Install a meter between terminals FM and SD after changing the Pr.291 setting value. During output the pulse train via terminal
FM (voltage output), be careful that voltage is not added to terminal FM.
• The meter cannot be used for the pulse input in a source logic type.
• If the All parameter clear is performed when the high-speed pulse train output is selected (Pr.291 = "10, 11, 20, 21, or 100"),
5
the output via terminal FM is changed from high-speed pulse train output to the voltage output because the Pr.291 setting
resets to the initial value "0". To perform the All parameter clear, remove the device connected to terminal FM first.
6
FM output circuit

3.3kΩ Pr.291
0, 1 Terminal FM 7
8.2V

10, 11,
20, 21, 100 8
Open collector output circuit

9
5.11.4 Adjustment of terminal FM/CA and terminal AM
The output via terminal FM/CA or terminal AM corresponding to the full-scale value of a meter can be adjusted (calibrated) on 10
the operation panel or the parameter unit.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

C0
(900) Calibrates the scale of the meter connected to terminals FM and
FM/CA terminal calibration — —
*1 CA.
M310
C1 (901) Calibrates the scale of the analog meter connected to terminal
AM terminal calibration — —
M320*1 AM.
C8 (930)
Current output bias signal 0% 0 to 100% Set the signal value at the minimum analog current output.
M330*1
C9 (930)
Current output bias current 0% 0 to 100% Set the current value at the minimum analog current output.
M331*1
C10 (931) Sets the signal value when the analog current output is at
Current output gain signal 100% 0 to 100%
M332*1 maximum.
C11 (931)
Current output gain current 100% 0 to 100% Set the current value at the maximum analog current output.
M333*1
867
AM output filter 0.01 s 0 to 5 s Set a filter for output via terminal AM.
M321
869
Current output filter 0.01 s 0 to 5 s Set a filter for output via terminal CA.
M334
*1 The parameter number in parentheses is that used (displayed) on the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit.

 Terminal FM calibration (C0 (Pr.900))

• The output via terminal FM is set to the pulse output. By setting C0 (Pr.900), the meter connected to the inverter can be
calibrated by parameter setting without use of a calibration resistor.

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
463
 • The pulse train output via terminal FM can be used for digital display on a digital counter. The output is 1440 pulses/s at
full scale. (Refer to page 457 for the full-scale value of each monitor item.)

Indicator
1mA full-scale (Digital indicator)
analog meter
1mA 1440 pulses/s(+) (-)
FM FM
(+) (-) T1

Calibration
resistor *1 8VDC
SD SD
T2
Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr.55 (frequency monitor)
Set with Pr.56 (current monitor)

*1 Not needed when the operation panel or the parameter unit is used for calibration.
Use a calibration resistor when the indicator (frequency meter) needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located
far from the inverter.
However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, perform calibration using
the operation panel or parameter unit.
*2 In the initial setting, 1 mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s terminal FM are used at 60 Hz.

• Calibrate the output via terminal FM in the following procedure.

1. Connect an indicator (frequency meter) across terminals FM and SD on the inverter. (Note the polarity. Terminal FM
is positive.)

2. When a calibration resistor has already been connected, adjust the resistance to "0" or remove the resistor.

3. Set a monitor item in Pr.54 AM terminal function selection. (Refer to page 457.)
When the output frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor, set the output frequency or current
value at which the output signal will be 1440 pulses/s, using Pr.55 Frequency monitoring reference or Pr.56
Current monitoring reference beforehand. Normally, at 1440 pulses/s the meter deflects to full-scale.

4. If the meter needle does not point to maximum even at maximum output, calibrate it with C0 (Pr.900).

NOTE
• When outputting an item such as the output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr.54 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and calibrate. A pulse train of 1440 pulses/s are output via terminal FM.
• When Pr.310 Analog meter voltage output selection = "21", the output via terminal AM cannot be calibrated. For details on
Pr.310, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8AY.
• The wiring length to terminal FM should be 200 m at maximum.
• The initial value of the calibration parameter C0 (Pr.900) is set to 1 mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s terminal FM pulse train
output at 60 Hz. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400 pulses/s.
• When connecting a frequency meter between terminals FM-SD and monitoring the output frequency, it is necessary to change
Pr.55 to the maximum frequency, since the FM terminal output will be saturated at the initial value when the maximum
frequency reaches 100 Hz or greater.
• Calibration with the calibration parameter C0 (Pr.900) cannot be done when Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "10, 11, 20,
21, or 100" (high-speed pulse train output).

464 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Calibration procedure for terminal FM when using the operation panel
(FR-DU08)
1
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
2
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode 3

Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.
Calibration is also possible in the External operation mode.
4
3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
5
4. Calibration parameter selection

Turn until " " appears. Press to display " ".

6
5. Selecting a parameter

Turn until " " (C0 (Pr.900) FM/CA terminal calibration) appears. Press to enable the
7
parameter setting.
The monitored value of the item (initially the output frequency) selected by Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function
selection will appear.
8
6. Pulse output via terminal FM

If stopped, press or to start the inverter operation. (To monitor the output frequency, motor connection
9
is not required.)
When a monitor that does not require inverter operation is set in Pr.54, calibration is also possible during a stop
status.
10
7. Scale adjustment

Turn to move the meter needle to a desired position.

8. Setting completed

Press to confirm the selection. The monitored value and " " blink alternately.

• Turn to read another parameter.

• Press to return to the " " display.

• Press twice to show the next parameter.

NOTE
• Calibration can also be made for External operation. Set the frequency in the External operation mode, and make calibration
in the above procedure.
• Calibration can be performed during operation.
• For the operation from the parameter unit, refer to the Instruction Manual of the parameter unit.

 Terminal CA calibration (C0 (Pr.900), C8 (Pr.930) to C11 (Pr.931))

• Terminal CA is initially set to provide a 20 mADC output in the full-scale state of the corresponding monitor item. The
calibration parameter C0 (Pr.900) allows the output current ratio (gains) to be adjusted according to the meter scale. Note
that the maximum output current is 20 mADC.

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
465
 • Set a value at the minimum current output in the calibration parameters C8 (Pr.930) and C9 (Pr.930). The calibration
parameters C10 (Pr.931) and C11 (Pr.931) are used to set a value at the maximum current output.
• Set the output signal values (output monitor set with Pr.54) at zero or at the maximum current output via terminal CA using
the calibration parameters C8 (Pr.930) and C10 (Pr.931). The full scale for each monitor is 100% at this time.
• Set the output current values (output monitor set with Pr.54) at zero and at the maximum current output via terminal CA
(using the calibration parameters C9 (Pr.930) and C11 (Pr.931). The output current calibrated by the calibration parameter
C0 (Pr.900) is 100% at this time.

Output signal value

(ammeter) Analog output current for minimum analog output
0 to 20mADC (CA) (C10 (Pr.931))
CA Analog current
(+) (-) CO (Pr.900) 20mA output value for
100% maximum
output signal
5 (C11 (Pr.931))

(initial setting)

Output signal value

0 Output signal value
for zero analog current output
(C8 (Pr.930))
Analog current output value for zero output signal
(C9 (Pr.930))

• Calibrate the output via terminal CA in the following procedure.

1. Connect a 0-20 mADC indicator (frequency meter) across terminals CA and 5 on the inverter. (Note the polarity.
Terminal CA is positive.)

2. Set the initial value of the calibration parameter C8 (Pr.930) to C11 (Pr.931). If the meter needle does not indicate
zero when the current input is at zero, calibrate the meter using C8 (Pr.930) and C9 (Pr.930).

3. Set a monitor item in Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection. (Refer to page 457.)
When the output frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor, set the output frequency or current
value at which the output signal will be 20 mA, using Pr.55 or Pr.56 beforehand.

4. If the meter needle does not point to maximum even at maximum output, calibrate it with C0 (Pr.900).

NOTE
• When outputting an item such as output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr.54 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and calibrate. A current of 20 mADC is output via terminal CA.
• When Pr.310 Analog meter voltage output selection = "21", the output via terminal CA cannot be calibrated. For details on
Pr.310, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8AY.
• The output via terminal CA is enabled even if C8 (Pr.930) ≥ C10 (Pr.931), C9 (Pr.930) ≥ C11 (Pr.931).

 Adjusting the response of terminal CA (Pr.869)

• Using Pr.869, the output voltage response of terminal CA can be adjusted in the range of 0 to 5 seconds.
• Increasing the setting stabilizes the output via terminal CA more but reduces the response level. (Setting "0" sets the
response level to 7 ms.)

466 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Calibration of terminal AM (C1 (Pr.901))
• Terminal AM is initially set to provide a 10 VDC output in the full-scale state of the corresponding monitor item. The
1
calibration parameter C1 (Pr.901) AM terminal calibration allows the output voltage ratio (gains) to be adjusted according
to the meter scale. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10 VDC.
2
Inverter
AM

10VDC 3
5

4
• Calibrate the output via terminal AM in the following procedure.

1. Connect a 0-10 VDC indicator (frequency meter) across terminal AM and terminal 5 on the inverter. (Note the
polarity. Terminal AM is positive.) 5
2. Set a monitor item in Pr.158 AM terminal function selection. (Refer to page 457.)
When the output frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor, set the output frequency or current
value at which the output signal is 10 V, using Pr.55 or Pr.56 beforehand.
6
3. If the meter needle does not point to maximum even at maximum output, calibrate it with C1 (Pr.901).

NOTE
7
• When outputting an item such as the output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr.158 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and calibrate. A voltage of 10 VDC is output via terminal AM.
• When Pr.306 Analog output signal selection = "21", the output via terminal AM cannot be calibrated. For details on Pr.306, 8
refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8AY.
• Use Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection to enable negative signals output via terminal AM. The output voltage range
is -10 to +10 VDC. Calibrate the maximum positive value output via terminal AM.
9
 Adjusting the response of terminal AM (Pr.867)
• Use Pr.867 to adjust the output voltage response of the terminal AM in the range of 0 to 5 seconds. 10
• Increasing the setting stabilizes the output via terminal AM more but reduces the response level. (Setting "0" means the
setting of the response level to 7 ms.)

Parameters referred to
Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selectionpage 457
Pr.55 Frequency monitoring referencepage 457
Pr.56 Current monitoring referencepage 457
Pr.158 AM terminal function selectionpage 457
Pr.290 Monitor negative output selectionpage 457
Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selectionpage 406

5.11.5 Energy saving monitoring

From the power consumption estimated value during commercial power supply operation, the energy saving effect by use of
the inverter can be monitored and output.

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
467
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
52 Operation panel main 0 (output
M100 monitor selection frequency)
774 Operation panel monitor
M101 selection 1
775 Operation panel monitor
9999 Refer to page 50: Energy saving effect monitoring,
M102 selection 2
446. 51: Cumulative energy saving monitoring
776 Operation panel monitor
M103 selection 3
Operation panel setting
992
dial push monitor 0 (set frequency)
M104
selection
54 FM/CA terminal function
M300 selection 1 (output Refer to page
50: Energy saving effect monitoring
158 AM terminal function frequency) 457.
M301 selection
Set the number of times to move the digit of cumulative power
Cumulative power 0 to 4 monitored value. The readout peaks out at the upper limit of
891
monitor digit shifted 9999 readout.
M023
times The function of moving the decimal point is not available. The
9999
readout is reset to 0 when it exceeds the upper limit.
Set the load factor for the commercial power supply operation.
892 The setting is used for calculation of the estimated power
Load factor 100% 30 to 150%
M200 consumption during commercial power supply operation by
being multiplied by the power consumption rate (page 472).
Energy saving monitor 0.1 to 55 kW*1 Set the motor capacity (pump capacity). Setting this parameter
893 Inverter rated
reference (motor is required for calculating the rate of saved power, the rate of
M201 capacity 0 to 3600 kW*2
capacity) average energy saving, and the commercial power.
0 Discharge damper control (fan)
Control selection during
894 1 Inlet damper control (fan)
commercial power- 0
M202 2 Valve control (pump)
supply operation
3 Commercial power supply drive (fixed value)
0 Consider the commercial power as 100%.
895 Power saving rate
9999 1 Consider the power set in Pr.893 as 100%
M203 reference value
9999 No function
Set the power unit cost. Setting this parameter is required for
896 0 to 500 displaying the energy cost savings in the energy saving
Power unit cost 9999 monitoring.
M204
9999 No function
0 The time period for averaging is 30 minutes.
897 Power saving monitor
9999 1 to 1000 h Set the number of hours for averaging.
M205 average time
9999 No function
0 Clear the cumulative monitor value
1 Hold the cumulative monitor value
898 Power saving cumulative
9999 10 Continue accumulation (upper limit communication data is 9999)
M206 monitor clear
Continue accumulation (upper limit communication data is
9999
65535)
Setting this parameter is required for calculating the annual
899 Operation time rate 0 to 100% energy saving. Set an annual operating rate (considering a 24-
9999 hours-a-day and 365-days-a-year operation as 100%).
M207 (estimated value)
9999 No function
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

468 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Energy saving monitoring list
• The items in the energy saving effect monitoring (items which can be monitored when "50" is set in Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158, 1
Pr.774 to Pr.776, and Pr.992) are listed below.
(The items which can be monitored via terminal FM or CA (Pr.54 setting) and via terminal AM (Pr.158 setting) are limited
to [1 Power saving] and [3 Average power saving].) 2
Energy saving Unit and Parameter setting
Description and formula
monitor item increment Pr.895 Pr.896 Pr.897 Pr.899
The difference between the input power
calculated by the inverter and the estimated
3
power required to run a motor off a commercial 0.01/0.1
1 Power saving power supply. 9999
kW*3
[Input power for commercial power supply
operation] - [Monitored value of inverter input
4
power]
It is defined as the power saving expressed as a
percentage. The rate of the power saving with
respect to the estimated input power for the
5
commercial power supply operation is — 9999
0
determined using the following formula.

2 Power saving rate

[1 Power saving]
Power during commercial power supply operation
×100
0.1%
6
The rate of the power saving with respect to the
Pr.893 setting is determined using the following
formula. 1 7
[1 Power saving]
× 100
Pr.893
It is defined as the average hourly energy saving
during a monitoring time (set in Pr.897). —
8
0.01/0.1
3 Average power saving 9999
∑ ([1 Power saving] × ∆t) kWh*3
Pr.897
It is defined as the average hourly energy saving 9
expressed as a percentage. The rate of the
average hourly energy saving with respect to the
estimated input power for the commercial power
supply operation is determined using the 0
9999
10
following formula.
Average power saving ∑ ([2 Power saving rate] × ∆t) 0 to 1000 h
4 × 100 0.1%
rate Pr.897
The rate of the average hourly energy saving
with respect to the Pr.893 setting is determined
using the following formula. 1
[3 Average power saving]
× 100
Pr.893
It is defined as a monetary value of the average
Average power cost hourly energy saving, determined using the
5
savings following formula. 0.01/0.1*3 — 0 to 500
[3 Average power saving] × Pr.896 setting

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
469
 • The items in the cumulative energy saving monitoring (items which can be monitored when "51" is set in Pr.52, Pr.774 to
Pr.776, and Pr.992) are listed below.
(The digit of the cumulative energy saving monitored value can be moved to the right according to the setting of Pr.891
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times.)

Energy saving Unit and Parameter setting

Description and formula
monitor item increment Pr.895 Pr.896 Pr.897 Pr.899
It is defined as a cumulative energy saving during 0.01 kWh/
Power saving monitoring, determined by multiplying the saved 0.1 kWh
6 — 9999
amount power by the number of inverter operating hours. *1*2*3
Σ ([1 Power saving] × Δt) 9999
It is defined as a monetary value of the cumulative 0.01/
7 Power cost savings energy saving. — 0 to 500
[6 Power saving amount] × Pr.896 setting 0.1*1*3
—
It is defined as an estimated annual energy saving.
0.01 kWh/
Annual power saving [6 Power saving amount] Pr.899
0.1
8 × 24 × 365 × — 9999
amount Operation time during power 100 kWh*1*2*3 0 to
saving accumulation
100%
It is defined as a monetary value of annual energy 0.01/
Annual power cost
9 saving. — 0 to 500
savings
[8 Annual power saving amount] × Pr.896 setting 0.1*1*3

*1 For monitoring via communication (RS-485 communication, or other communication using a communication option), the increments are 1 in no
units. For example, a value "10.00 kWh" is converted into "10" for communication data.
*2 On the LCD operation panel or the parameter unit, a readout is displayed in units of kilowatt-hours (kW).
*3 The increment differs according to the inverter capacity. (Increment left of a slash for FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or
lower. Increment right of a slash for FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.)

NOTE
• The operation panel and the parameter unit have a 5-digit display. This means, for example, that a monitored value up to
999.99 is displayed in 0.01 increments and a monitor value of 1000 or more is displayed in 0.1 increments as "1000.0". The
maximum monitored value displayed is "99999".
• The maximum monitored value via communication (RS-485 communication or other communication with communication
option installed) is 65535 when Pr.898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear = "9999". The maximum monitored value on
monitoring in 0.01 increments is "655.35", and that on monitoring in 0.1 increments is "6553.5".

 Power saving real-time monitoring ([1 Power saving], [2 Power saving

rate])
• During [1 Power saving] monitoring, an energy saving effect (power difference) of using the inverter as compared to the
commercial power supply operation is calculated and displayed on the main monitor.
• In the following cases, the monitored value of [1 Power saving] is "0".
The result of calculating the saved power is negative value.
DC injection brake works.
The motor is not connected with the inverter (monitored value of output current is 0 A).

• On [2 Power saving rate] monitoring, the rate of the saved power considering the consumed power (estimate) during the
power supply operation as 100% is displayed when Pr.895 Power saving rate reference value is set to "0". When Pr.895
is set to "1", the rate of the saved power with respect to the setting of Pr.893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor
capacity) that is referenced as 100% is displayed.

 Average power saving monitoring ([3 Average power saving], [4 Average

power saving rate], [5 Average power cost savings])
• The average power saving monitors are displayed by setting a value other than 9999 in Pr.897 Power saving monitor
average time.
• On [3 Average power saving] monitoring, the average hourly energy saving every preset time period is displayed.

470 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 • When the setting of Pr.897 is changed, when the inverter is powered ON, or when the inverter is reset, the averaging is
restarted. The Energy saving average value updated timing (Y92) signal is inverted every time the averaging is restarted.
1
When Pr.897=4 [Hr] Power
is off
Pr.897
Power saving During stop
instantaneous
value [kW] 2
Time
0 4 8 12 16 20
Operation start Average Average Last value
Average
Average power
saving [kW]
0 in the first
measurement
Average
Time
3
Stores Hi/Low when the
power is off and starts.
Y92
0 4 8 12 16 0 4 4
• On [4 Average power saving rate] monitoring, the average hourly monitored value of [2 Power saving rate]) is displayed
when Pr.895 Power saving rate reference value is set to "0 or 1".
• On [5 Average power cost savings] monitoring, a monetary value of the average hourly energy saving ([3 Average 5
power saving] × Pr.896 setting) is displayed when the unit price, power cost per kilowatt (hour), is set in Pr.896 Power
unit cost.

 Cumulative energy saving monitoring ([6 Power saving amount], [7 6

Power cost saving], [8 Annual power saving amount], [9 Annual power
cost savings]) 7
• The digit of the cumulative energy monitored value can be moved to the right by the number set in Pr.891 Cumulative
power monitor digit shifted times. For example, when the cumulative energy is 1278.56 kWh and Pr.891 is set to "2",
"12.78" is displayed (in 100's of units) on the PU/DU and the communication data is converted into "12". When Pr.891 =
8
"0 to 4" and the cumulative energy reaches more than the upper limit of readout, the readout peaks out at the upper limit,
which indicates that moving digit is necessary. When Pr.891 = "9999" and the cumulative energy reaches more than the
upper limit of readout, cumulative value is reset to 0 and the metering restarts. The readout of other items in the cumulative
9
energy saving monitoring peaks out at the upper limit of readout.
• With the monitored value of [6 Power saving amount], a cumulative energy saving during a desired time period can be
measured. Follow this procedure.
10
1. Set "10" or "9999" in Pr.898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear.

2. Change the setting of Pr.898 to "0" when you want to start measuring the energy saving. The cumulative value is
cleared and the cumulative energy saving meter restarts.

3. Change the setting of Pr.898 to "1" when you want to stop measuring the energy saving. The meter stops and the
cumulative value is fixed.

Power saving Running During stop Running

instantaneous Power is off
value [kW]
Time
0
Accumulation
Power saving
amount [kWh]
Time
0 Accumulation start Pause
Clear (Pr.898=0)
(Pr.898=0) (Pr.898=1)
Resume accumulation
(Pr.898=10 or 9999)

NOTE
• The cumulative value of energy saving is refreshed every hour. This means that the last cumulative value is displayed at a
restart of the inverter and the cumulative meter restarts if the time elapsed between turning OFF and re-turning ON of the
inverter is shorter than an hour. (In some cases, the cumulative energy value may decrease.)

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
471
  Estimated input power for the commercial power supply operation
(Pr.892, Pr.893, Pr.894)
• Select the pattern of the commercial power supply operation from among four patterns (discharge damper control (fan),
suction damper control (fan), valve control (pump) and commercial power drive), and set it in Pr.894 Control selection
during commercial power-supply operation.
• Set the motor capacity (pump capacity) in Pr.893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity).
• Refer to the following graph to find the rate of power consumption (%) during commercial power supply operation based
on the selected pattern and the rate of motor rotations per minute with respect to the rated speed (the result of dividing the
present output frequency by Pr.3 Base frequency setting).
Commercial power-supply drive
110
100
Discharge side
90 damper control
(fan)
Power consumption [%]

80
Valve control
70 (pump)

60
50
40 Inlet damper control
(fan)
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100110
Ratio of speed to rating [%]
• The estimated input power (kW) for the commercial power supply operation is calculated from the motor capacity set in
Pr.893, the setting of Pr.892 Load factor, and the rate of power consumption using the following formula.

Estimated consumed power during Consumed power (%) Pr.892 (%)

commercial power supply operation (kW) ＝ Pr.893 (kW) × 100
×
100

NOTE
• If the output frequency rises to the setting of Pr.3 Base frequency or higher, it stays at a constant value because the rotations
per minute cannot rise higher than the power supply frequency during commercial power supply operation.

 Annual energy saving and its monetary value (Pr.899)

• When the operation time rate (ratio of the time period in year when the inverter drives the motor) [%] is set in Pr.899, the
annual energy saving effect can be estimated.
• When the inverter is operated in specific patterns, the estimate annual energy saving can be calculated by measuring the
energy saving in a certain period.
• Refer to the following procedure to set the operation time rate.

1. Estimate the average operation time per day (h/day).

2. Calculate the operation days per year (days/year) using the following formula: Average operation days per month ×
12 (months).

3. Calculate the annual operation time (h/year) from values determined in Step 1 and Step 2, using the following
formula.
Annual operation time (h/year) = average time (h/day) × number of operation days (days/year)

4. Calculate the operation time rate using the following formula, and set it in Pr.899.
Annual operation time (h/year)
Operation time rate (%) = × 100(%)
24 (h/day) × 365 (days/year)

472 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 NOTE
• Setting example for operation time rate: In the case where the average operation time per day is about 21 hours and the 1
average operation days per month is 16 days.
Annual operation time = 21 (h/day) × 16 (days/month) × 12 (months) = 4032 (h/year)

Operation time rate (%) =

4032 (h/year)
× 100(%) ＝ 46.03% 2
24 (h/day) × 365 (days/year)

Therefore, set 46.03% in Pr.899.

3
• Calculate the annual energy saving from the value of [3 Average power saving] cumulated according to the setting of
Pr.899 Operation time rate (estimated value).

With Pr.898 = 10 or 9999, average power Pr.899

4
Annual power saving amount (kWh/year) = × 24h × 365 days ×
saving (kW) during cumulative period 100

• When the power cost per hour is set in Pr.896 Power unit cost, the annual energy cost savings can be monitored.
5
The annual energy cost savings is determined by calculation using the following formula.
Annual power cost saving = annual power saving amount (kWh/year) × Pr.896

NOTE 6
• During regenerative driving, substitute the output power during the commercial power supply operation for the saved power
(therefore, input power = 0).
7
Parameters referred to
Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707
Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 446
Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selectionpage 457 8
Pr.158 AM terminal function selectionpage 457

5.11.6 Output terminal function selection 9

Use the following parameters to change the functions of the open collector output terminals and relay output terminals.

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
473
 Initial
Pr. Name Signal name Setting range
value
190 RUN terminal
0 RUN (Inverter running)
M400 function selection
191 SU terminal function
1 SU (Up to frequency) 0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to 57,
M401 selection
60, 61, 63, 64, 67, 68, 70, 79, 80, 84, 85, 90 to
For open IPF (Instantaneous power
2*1 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120, 122, 125 to
192 IPF terminal function collector failure/undervoltage) 128, 130 to 136, 138 to 157, 160, 161, 163,
M402 selection output
9999*2 No function 164, 167, 168, 170, 179, 180, 184, 185, 190 to
terminal
199, 200 to 208, 211 to 213, 247, 300 to 308,
193 OL terminal function
3 OL (Overload warning) 311 to 313, 347, 9999
M403 selection
194 FU terminal function FU (Output frequency
4
M404 selection detection)
195 ABC1 terminal 0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to 57,
99 ALM (Fault)
M405 function selection 60, 61, 63, 64, 67, 68, 70, 79, 80, 84, 85, 90, 91,
For relay 94 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120, 122, 125
output to 128, 130 to 136, 138 to 157, 160, 161, 163,
196 ABC2 terminal terminal 164, 167, 168, 170, 179, 180, 184, 185, 190,
9999 No function
M406 function selection
191, 194 to 199, 200 to 208, 211 to 213, 247,
300 to 308, 311 to 313, 347, 9999
313 DO0 output
9999 No function
M410*3*4 selection
314 DO1 output
9999 No function
M411*3*4 selection
315 DO2 output 0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to 57,
9999 No function
M412*3*4 selection 60, 61, 63, 64, 68, 70, 79, 80, 84 to 99, 100 to
316 108, 110 to 116, 120, 122, 125 to 128, 130 to
DO3 output
9999 No function 136, 138 to 157, 160, 161, 163, 164, 168, 170,
M413*3 selection
179, 180, 184 to 199, 200 to 208, 211 to 213,
317 DO4 output 247, 248, 300 to 308, 311 to 313, 347, 348,
For 9999 No function
M414*3 selection 9999
terminal
318 DO5 output on the 9999 No function
M415*3 selection option
319 DO6 output
9999 No function
M416*3 selection
320
RA1 output selection 0 RUN (Inverter running)
M420*3
321 0 to 8, 10 to 20, 22, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 38 to 57,
RA2 output selection 1 SU (Up to frequency)
M421*3 60, 61, 63, 64, 68, 70, 79, 80, 84 to 91, 94 to 99,
IPF (Instantaneous power 200 to 208, 211 to 213, 247, 248, 9999
322 2*1 failure/undervoltage)
RA3 output selection
M422*3
9999*2 No function

Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
289 Inverter output terminal 5 to 50 ms Set the time delay for the output terminal response.
9999
M431 filter 9999 No filtering of the output terminal.
*1 The initial value is for standard models and IP55 compatible models.
*2 The initial value is for separated converter types.
*3 The setting is available when the PLC function is enabled or when a compatible plug-in option is installed.
*4 The setting is available for the FR-A800-GF.

 Output signal list

• A function listed below can be set to each output terminal.
• Refer to the following table and set the parameters. (0 to 99, 200 to 299: Positive logic, 100 to 199, 300 to 399: Negative
logic)

Setting Refer
Signal Related
Positive Negative Function Operation to
name parameter
logic logic page
Outputted during operation when the inverter
0 100 RUN Inverter running output frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting — 479
frequency or higher.

474 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Setting Refer
Signal Related
Positive Negative
logic logic
name
Function Operation
parameter
to
page 1
Outputted when the output frequency
1 101 SU Up to frequency *1 reaches the set frequency.
Pr.41 484

2 102 IPF
Instantaneous power failure/ Outputted when an instantaneous power
failure or undervoltage protection operation Pr.57
628, 2
undervoltage*5 occurs.
635

Pr.22, Pr.23,
Outputted while the stall prevention function
3 103 OL Overload warning
works.
Pr.66, Pr.148,
Pr.149, Pr.154
431
3
Outputted when the output frequency
4 104 FU Output frequency detection reaches the frequency set in Pr.42 (Pr.43 Pr.42, Pr.43 484

Second output frequency

during reverse rotation) or higher.
Outputted when the output frequency
4
5 105 FU2 Pr.50 484
detection reaches the frequency set in Pr.50 or higher.
Outputted when the output frequency
Third output frequency
6 106 FU3
detection
reaches the frequency set in Pr.116 or
higher.
Pr.116 484 5
Regenerative brake Outputted when the regenerative brake duty
7 107 RBP Pr.70 724
prealarm*2 reaches 85% of the setting of Pr.70.
Outputted when the cumulative electronic 6
thermal O/L relay value reaches 85% of the
Electronic thermal O/L relay
8 108 THP trip level. (The electronic thermal O/L relay Pr.9 415
pre-alarm
function (E.THT/E.THM) is activated when
the value reaches 100%.) 7
Outputted when the PU operation mode is
10 110 PU PU operation mode Pr.79 389
selected.
Outputted when the reset process is
11 111 RY Inverter operation ready
completed after powering ON the inverter or
— 479 8
when the inverter is ready to start operation
with the start signal ON or during operation.
Outputted when the output current is higher
12 112 Y12 Output current detection than the Pr.150 setting for the time set in Pr.150, Pr.151 487 9
Pr.151 or longer.
Outputted when the output current is lower
13 113 Y13 Zero current detection than the Pr.152 setting for the time set in Pr.152, Pr.153 487
Pr.153 or longer. 10
Outputted when the input value is lower than
14 114 FDN PID lower limit the lower limit set for the PID control
operation.
Outputted when the input value is higher than Pr.127 to Pr.134,
601
15 115 FUP PID upper limit the upper limit set for the PID control Pr.575 to Pr.577
operation.
PID forward/reverse rotation Outputted during forward rotation operation
16 116 RL
output in the PID control operation.
17 — MC1 Electronic bypass MC1
Pr.135 to Pr.139,
18 — MC2 Electronic bypass MC2 Used to work the electronic bypass function. 563
Pr.159
19 — MC3 Electronic bypass MC3
Outputted to release the brake while the Pr.278 to Pr.285,
20 120 BOF Brake opening request
brake sequence function is enabled. Pr.292
Outputted to release the brake while the 572
22 122 BOF2 Second brake opening request second brake sequence function is enabled Pr.641 to Pr.648
(while the RT signal is ON).
25 125 FAN Fan fault output Outputted when a fan fault occurs. Pr.244 423
Outputted when the heat sink temperature
rises to 85% of temperature at which the
26 126 FIN Heat sink overheat pre-alarm — 788
protective function of the Heat sink overheat
is activated.
Orientation complete
27 127 ORA (output for a Vector control
Pr.350 to Pr.366,
compatible option)*4 Outputted while the orientation control
Pr.369, Pr.393, 585
Orientation fault operation is enabled.
Pr.396 to Pr.399
28 128 ORM (output for a Vector control
compatible option)*4

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
475
 Setting Refer
Signal Related
Positive Negative Function Operation to
name parameter
logic logic page
Forward rotation output
(output for a Vector control Outputted while a motor rotates in forward
30 130 Y30 482
direction.
compatible option)*4
Reverse rotation output
(output for a Vector control Outputted while a motor rotates in reverse
31 131 Y31 — 482
direction.
compatible option)*4
Regenerative status output
(output for a Vector control Outputted while the motor is in a regenerative
32 132 Y32 482
braking state under Vector control.
compatible option)*4
Outputted while pre-excitation is enabled or
during normal operation under Real
33 133 RY2 Operation ready 2 — 479
sensorless vector control, Vector control, or
PM sensorless vector control.
Outputted when the output frequency drops
34 134 LS Low speed detection Pr.865 484
to the Pr.865 setting or lower.
Outputted when the motor torque is higher
35 135 TU Torque detection Pr.864 488
than the Pr.864 setting.
Outputted when the number of droop pulses
36 136 Y36 In-position Pr.426 327
drops below the setting.
Outputted when the droop pulse is within the
38 138 MEND Travel completed in-position width and the position command Pr.426 327
operation is completed.
Outputted when tuning at start-up is
39 139 Y39 Start time tuning completion Pr.95, Pr.574 558
completed.
Pr.1020 to
40 140 Y40 Trace status Outputted during trace operation. 649
Pr.1047
41 141 FB Speed detection Outputted when the actual motor rotations
Pr.42 to Pr.50,
42 142 FB2 Second speed detection per minute (estimate) reaches the setting of 484
Pr.116
43 143 FB3 Third speed detection Pr.42, Pr.50, or Pr.116.
Outputted while the Forward rotation
command signal or Reverse rotation
command signal is ON. Outputted during
deceleration even while the Forward rotation
command signal or Reverse rotation
command signal is OFF
(except while pre-excitation is enabled (the
44 144 RUN2 Inverter running 2 — 479
LX signal is ON)).
Also outputted while the Orientation
command (X22) signal is ON. Outputted
while the servo-lock function is working (the
LX signal is ON) in the position control mode.
(The signal output stops when the servo-lock
function stops (the LX signal is OFF).)
Inverter running and start Outputted while the inverter is running or
45 145 RUN3 — 479
command ON while the start command signal is ON.
Outputted when the power-failure
During deceleration at deceleration function is activated.
46 146 Y46 Pr.261 to Pr.266 642
occurrence of power failure (The signal output is retained until the
function stops.)
Pr.127 to Pr.134,
47 147 PID During PID control activated Outputted during the PID control operation. 601
Pr.575 to Pr.577
Outputted when the absolute deviation value Pr.127 to Pr.134,
48 148 Y48 PID deviation limit 601
exceeds the limit value. Pr.553, Pr.554
49 149 Y49 During pre-charge operation
Outputted while the pre-charge function is
During second pre-charge
50 150 Y50 working.
operation
Pr.127 to Pr.134,
51 151 Y51 Pre-charge time over Outputted when the time period while the pre- Pr.241, Pr.553,
charge function is working reaches the time
52 152 Y52 Second pre-charge time over Pr.554, Pr.575 to 618
limit set in Pr.764 or Pr.769.
Pr.577, Pr.753 to
53 153 Y53 Pre-charge level over Outputted when the value higher than the Pr.769, C42, C45
detection level set in Pr.763 or Pr.768 is
54 154 Y54 Second pre-charge level over measured until the pre-charge function stops
during pre-charge operation.

476 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Setting Refer
Signal Related
Positive Negative
logic logic
name
Function Operation
parameter
to
page 1
Motor temperature detection Outputted when the temperature of the
55 155 Y55 *4 thermistor-equipped vector control motor Pr.750 —
(for FR-A8AZ) (SF-V5RU[]T/A) exceeds the detection level.
Outputted while the Home position return
2
56 156 ZA Home position return failure — 303
failure warning is output.
During PM sensorless vector Outputted while the operation is performed Pr.71 to Pr.80,
57 157 IPM 230
control under PM sensorless vector control.
Outputted when the current position exceeds
Pr.998
3
Pr.1294 to
60 160 FP Position detection level the position detection judgment value (set in 327
Pr.1297
Pr.1294 and Pr.1295).

61 161 PBSY
During position command
operation
Outputted during the position command
operation.
4
— 303
Home position return Outputted when the home position return
63 163 ZP
completed operation is completed.
64 164 Y64 During retry Outputted during retry operation. Pr.65 to Pr.69 426 5
Outputted when the inverter power output is
shut off due to power failure or undervoltage
67 167 Y67 Power failed*3 or when the power failure time deceleration-
Pr.261 to Pr.266 642
to-stop function is activated. 6
24 V external power supply Outputted while the inverter operated with a
68 168 EV — 80
operation 24 V power supplied from an external source.
Outputted while PID output suspension Pr.127 to Pr.134,
70 170 SLEEP PID output interruption
function is activated. Pr.575 to Pr.577
601
7
Outputted in pulses every time the
Pulse train output of output
79 179 Y79 cumulative value of energy outputted from Pr.799 493
power
the inverter reaches the Pr.799 setting.

80 180 SAFE Safety monitor output

Outputted while the safety stop function is
— 82
8
activated.
Outputted when the servo-lock function is
Position control preparation Pr.419, Pr.428 to
84 184 RDY working (the LX signal turns ON) and the 319
ready
inverter is ready to operate.
Pr.430
9
Outputted during power failure or
85 185 Y85 DC current feeding*5 undervoltage of the AC power supply.
Pr.30 724

Control circuit capacitor life Outputted when the control circuit capacitor
86 186 Y86
(for Pr.313 to Pr.322)*6 approaches the end of its life. 10
Main circuit capacitor life Outputted when the main circuit capacitor
87 187 Y87
(for Pr.313 to Pr.322)*5*6 approaches the end of its life.
Cooling fan life Outputted when the cooling fan approaches
88 188 Y88
(for Pr.313 to Pr.322)*6 the end of its life. Pr.255 to Pr.259 359
Inrush current limit circuit life Outputted when the inrush current limit circuit
89 189 Y89
(for Pr.313 to Pr.322)*5*6 approaches the end of its life.
Outputted when any of the control circuit
capacitor, main circuit capacitor, inrush
90 190 Y90 Life alarm
current limit circuit, or the cooling fan
approaches the end of its life.
Fault output 3 (Power-OFF Outputted when the Fault occurs due to an
91 191 Y91 — 483
signal) inverter circuit fault or connection fault.
Switches between ON and OFF every time
the average energy saving is updated during Pr.52, Pr.54,
Energy saving average value
92 192 Y92 the energy saving monitoring. This signal Pr.158, Pr.891 to 467
updated timing
cannot be assigned to any of the relay output Pr.899
terminal (Pr.195, Pr.196, Pr.320 to Pr.322).
Outputted in pulses for transmission of the
average current value and the maintenance
93 193 Y93 Current average monitor timer value. This signal cannot be assigned to Pr.555 to Pr.557 363
any of the relay output terminal (Pr.195,
Pr.196, Pr.320 to Pr.322).
Outputted when the inverter's protective
function is activated to stop the power output
94 194 ALM2 Fault output 2 (when the Fault occurs). The signal output — 483
continues during the inverter reset and stops
after the inverter reset finishes. *7

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
477
 Setting Refer
Signal Related
Positive Negative Function Operation to
name parameter
logic logic page
Outputted when the value of Pr.503 reaches
95 195 Y95 Maintenance timer Pr.503, Pr.504 363
the Pr.504 setting or higher.
Outputted via a terminal by setting a proper
96 196 REM Remote output Pr.495 to Pr.497 489
number in a relative parameter.
The ER signal output follows the ALM signal
output when Pr.875 = "0 (initial value)".
When Pr.875 = "1" and when any of E.OHT,
E.THM, or E.PTC occurs, the inverter
97 197 ER Alarm output 2 Pr.875 422
decelerates the motor to a stop at a time of
the ER signal ON. When any of other faults
occurs, the ER signal outputs when the
inverter output stops.
Outputted when an Alarm fault (fan fault or a 423,
98 198 LF Alarm Pr.121, Pr.244
communication error) occurs. 663
Outputted when the inverter's protective
function is activated to stop the power output
99 199 ALM Fault — 483
(when the Fault occurs). The signal output
stops when the inverter reset starts.
Outputted when the input value is lower than
200 300 FDN2 Second PID lower limit the lower limit set for the second PID control
operation.
Outputted when the input value is higher than
201 301 FUP2 Second PID upper limit the upper limit set for the second PID control
Pr.753 to Pr.758
operation.
Second PID forward/reverse Outputted during forward rotation operation
202 302 RL2
rotation output in the second PID control operation.
601
During second PID control Outputted during the second PID control
203 303 PID2
activated operation.
Pr.753 to Pr.758,
During second PID output Outputted while the second PID output
204 304 SLEEP2 Pr.1147 to
shutoff suspension function is activated.
Pr.1149
Outputted when the absolute deviation value
Pr.753 to Pr.758,
205 305 Y205 Second PID deviation limit exceeds the limit value during the second PID
Pr.1145, Pr.1146
control operation.
Cooling fan operation Outputted when the cooling fan operation is
206 306 Y206 Pr.244 423
command commanded.
Outputted when the temperature of the
207 307 Y207 Control circuit temperature control circuit board reaches the detection Pr.663 494
level or higher.
208 308 PS PU stopped Outputted while the PU is stopped. Pr.75 336
Outputted when the load fault upper limit
211 311 LUP Upper limit warning detection
warning is detected.
Outputted when the load fault lower limit Pr.1480 to
212 312 LDN Lower limit warning detection 439
warning is detected. Pr.1492
During load characteristics Outputted during measurement of the load
213 313 Y213
measurement characteristics.
Output when phase synchronization for
Phase synchronization bypass switching has completed (for FR-
247 347 LSYN Pr.139 —
completion
A8AVP).*4
Estimated residual-life of main
248 348 Y248 circuit capacitor (for Pr.313 to Output when the main circuit capacitor Pr.255, Pr.506 359
approaches the end of its estimated life.
Pr.322)*5*6
9999 — No function — — —
*1 Note that changing the frequency setting with an analog signal or the setting dial on the operation panel (FR-DU08) may cause the turning ON
and OFF of Up to frequency (SU) signal depending on its changing speed and the timing of the speed change determined by the acceleration/
deceleration time setting. (The signal state changing does not occur when the acceleration/deceleration time is set to 0 seconds.)
*2 This signal is available only for the standard model.
*3 This signal cannot be assigned to any of the output terminals for plug-in options (FR-A8AY and FR-A8AR).
*4 This signal is available when the compatible plug-in option or control terminal option is installed.
*5 The setting is available for the standard structure model and the IP55 compatible model.
*6 This signal is available for the FR-A800-GF, when the PLC function is enabled, or when an option (FR-A8AY, FR-A8AR, FR-A8NC, or FR-A8NCE)
is installed. Use Pr.313 to Pr.322 to assign the function to the terminal. For the information of the availability of these parameters for each option,
refer to the Instruction Manual of the option.
*7 On restarting the inverter, the Fault output 2 (ALM2) signal turns OFF at the time the inverter power turns OFF.

478 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 NOTE
• One function can be assigned to more than one terminal. 1
• The function works during the terminal conducts when the parameter setting is any of "0 to 99, 200 to 299", and the function
works during the terminal does not conduct when the setting is "100 to 199, 300 to 399".
• When Pr.76 Fault code output selection = "1", the outputs of terminals SU, IPF, OL, and FU are used only for outputting the
fault code according to the Pr.76 setting. (When the inverter's protective function is activated, the signal for the fault code is
2
output.)
• The output of terminal RUN and the outputs of the relay output terminals are not affected by the Pr.76 setting.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other 3
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• Do not assign the signal to terminals A1, B1, and C1 or terminals A2, B2, and C2 which frequently changes its state between
ON and OFF. Otherwise, the life of the relay contact may be shortened.
4
 Adjusting the output terminal response level (Pr.289)
• The responsivity of the output terminals can be delayed in a range between 5 to 50 ms. (The following is the operation 5
example of the RUN signal.)
Output frequency

Time 7
RUN ON OFF
Pr.289 = 9999
ON OFF
RUN
Pr.289 ≠ 9999
Pr.289 Pr.289 8
NOTE
• When Pr.157 OL signal output timer is set for the Overload warning (OL) signal output, the OL signal is output when the set
time of (Pr.157 + Pr.289) elapses. 9
• The signal output for the PLC function (see page 646) and for the fault code output (see page 492) are not affected by the
Pr.289 setting (not filtered for responsivity).
10
 Inverter operation ready signals (RY, RY2 signals) and inverter running
signals (RUN, RUN2, RUN3 signals)
 Operation under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control
• When the inverter is ready for operation, the Inverter operation ready (RY) signal turns ON (and stays ON during
operation).
• When the inverter output frequency reaches the setting of Pr.13 Starting frequency or higher, the inverter running signals
(RUN, RUN2 signals) turn ON. The signals are OFF while the inverter is stopped or during the DC injection brake operation.

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
479
 • The Inverter running and start command ON (RUN3) signal is ON while the inverter is running or while the start command
signal is ON (When the start command signal is ON, the RUN3 signal is ON even while the inverter's protective function
is activated or while the MRS signal is ON.) The RUN3 signal is ON even during the DC injection brake operation, and the
signal is OFF when the inverter stops.

Power ON OFF
supply
ON OFF
STF
ON
RH
Output frequency

DC injection brake
operation point

DC injection
brake
Pr. 13 operation

Reset Time
processing

ON OFF
RY
RUN ON OFF
(RUN2)
ON OFF
RUN3
• The ON/OFF state of each signal according to the inverter operating status is shown in the matrix below.
Automatic restart after
Inverter output instantaneous power failure
Start signal During DC
Start signal Start signal shutoff*2
Output ON injection During coasting Inverter
OFF (inverter ON (inverter
signal (inverter brake running
stopped) stopped) Start Start Start Start
running) operation after
signal ON signal OFF signal ON signal OFF restart
RY*3 ON ON ON ON OFF ON*1 ON
RY2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
RUN OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
RUN2 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
RUN3 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

*1 The signal is OFF during power failure or undervoltage.

*2 This means the state during a fault occurrence or while the MRS signal is ON, etc.
*3 The signal is OFF while power is not supplied to the main circuit.

 Operation under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector
control
• When the inverter is ready for operation, the Inverter operation ready (RY) signal turns ON (and stays ON during
operation).
• When the inverter output frequency reaches the setting of Pr.13 Starting frequency or higher, the Inverter running (RUN)
turns ON. The signal is OFF during an inverter stop, during the DC injection brake operation, during tuning at start-up, or
during pre-excitation.
• The Inverter running 2 (RUN2) signal is ON while the inverter is running or while the start command signal is ON. (When
the inverter's protective function is activated or the MRS signal is ON, the RUN2 signal turns OFF.)
• The Inverter running and start command ON (RUN3) signal is ON while the inverter is running or while the start command
signal is ON.
• The RUN2 and RUN3 signals are also ON when the start command signal is ON or during pre-excitation with the speed
command value 0. (However, the RUN2 signal is OFF during pre-excitation with the LX signal ON.)

480 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 • The Operation ready 2 (RY2) signal turns ON when the pre-excitation starts. The signal is ON during pre-excitation even
while the inverter stops its output. The signal is OFF during the inverter output shutoff.
1
Power
supply ON OFF

STF ON OFF
2
RH ON

MRS ON

3
Output frequency

Pre-excitation 4
(zero speed control)
Pr. 13

5
Reset
Time
processing

ON OFF
RY
ON OFF
RY2
ON OFF
6
RUN
ON OFF
RUN2

RUN3
ON OFF 7
NOTE
• When pre-excitation works with the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal ON, the RY2 signal turns ON after 100 ms (500 ms
for FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher) from the time the LX signal turns ON. (When online auto
8
tuning at start-up is selected (Pr.95 = "1"), the time the signal turns ON is delayed by the tuning time.)
LX ON
100(500)ms
9
RY2 ON

• The ON/OFF state of each signal according to the inverter operating status is shown in the matrix below. 10
During DC Automatic restart after
Inverter output
Start injection instantaneous power failure
signal
Start signal Start LX signal
brake shutoff*5
Output ON*1 (during signal ON ON (during During coasting Inverter
OFF operation
signal pre- (inverter pre- Start Start Start running
(inverter (during Start
excitation) running) excitation) signal signal signal after
stopped) pre- signal ON
OFF ON OFF restart
excitation)
RY*6 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON*2 ON
RY2 OFF ON ON ON*3 ON OFF OFF ON
RUN OFF OFF ON *4 OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF
RUN2 OFF ON ON OFF*4 OFF OFF OFF ON
RUN3 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
*1 When the start signal is ON and the frequency command is 0 Hz, such state is designated as "during pre-excitation".
*2 The signal is OFF during power failure or undervoltage.
*3 The RY2 signal turns ON after 100 ms (500 ms for FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher) from the time the LX signal
turns ON.
*4 The signal is ON while the servo-lock function is ON (the LX signal is ON) in the position control mode.
*5 This means the state during a fault occurrence or while the MRS signal is ON, etc.
*6 The signal is OFF while power is not supplied to the main circuit.

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
481
 • To use the RY, RY2, RUN, RUN2, or RUN3 signal, set the corresponding number selected from the following table in any
of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
Pr.190 to Pr.196 settings
Output signal
Positive logic Negative logic
RY 11 111
RY2 33 133
RUN 0 100
RUN2 44 144
RUN3 45 145

NOTE
• The RUN signal (positive logic) is initially assigned to the terminal RUN.

 Forward rotation output (Y30) signal and Reverse rotation output (Y31)
signal
• Under Vector control, the Forward rotation output (Y30) signal or the Reverse rotation output (Y31) signal is output
according to the actual rotation direction of the motor.
• During pre-excitation (zero-speed or servo-lock function ON) in the speed or torque control mode, the Y30 signal and the
Y31 signal are OFF. During the servo-lock function ON in the position control mode, however, the Y30 signal or the Y31
signal is ON according to the actual rotation direction of the motor, as well as during normal operation.
• To use the Y30 signal, set "30 (positive logic) or 130 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
• To use the Y31 signal, set "31 (positive logic) or 131 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
Pre-excitation
Actual Forward
motor rotation
Time
speed Reverse
rotation

ON
Y30

Y31 ON

NOTE
• The Y30 and Y31 signals are always OFF under V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector
control, and PM sensorless vector control.
• If the motor is rotated by an external force while the inverter is stopped, the Y30 signal and the Y31 signal keep OFF state.

 Regenerative status output (Y32) signal

• When the motor gets in a regenerative braking (dynamic braking) state under Vector control, the Regenerative status
output (Y32) signal turns ON. Once the signal turns ON, the signal is retained ON for at least 100 ms.
• The signal is OFF during an inverter stop or during pre-excitation.

482 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 • To use the Y32 signal, set "32 (positive logic) or 132 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
1
Driving
+

2
Time

Regeneration Less than 100 ms

- 3
Y32 ON OFF ON

4
Signal is retained for 100 ms.

NOTE
• The Y32 signal is always OFF under V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and
PM sensorless vector control. 5

 Fault (ALM) signal and Fault output 2 (ALM2) signal

• The fault signal (ALM or ALM2 signal) is output when an inverter protective function is activated.
6
• The ALM2 signal stays ON during the resetting the inverter after the Fault occurs.
• To use the ALM2 signal, set "94 (positive logic) or 194 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
7
• The ALM signal is initially assigned to the relay terminals A1, B1, and C1.
Inverter fault occurrence
8
Output frequency

(trip)

9
Time
ALM ON OFF

ALM2 ON OFF
10
RES ON OFF
Reset processing
(about 1s)

Reset ON

NOTE
• For details on the inverter faults, refer to page 779.

 Input power shutoff like magnetic contactor (Y91 signal)

• The Fault output 3 (Y91) signal is output when a fault originating in the inverter circuit or a connection fault occurs.
• To use the Y91 signal, set "91 (positive logic) or 191 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
483
 • The following is the list of faults that output the Y91 signal. (For details on faults, refer to page 779.)
Fault type
Inrush current limit circuit fault (E.IOH)
CPU fault (E.CPU)
CPU fault (E.6)
CPU fault (E.7)
Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board) (E.PE)
Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board) (E.PE2)
24 VDC power fault (E.P24)
Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485 terminals power supply short circuit
(E.CTE)
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF)
Output phase loss (E.LF)
Brake transistor alarm detection (E.BE)
Internal circuit fault (E.13/E.PBT)

 Changing the special relay function for the PLC function

• For the PLC function, the function of special relays (SM1225 to SM1234) can be changed by setting Pr.313 to Pr.322. (For
details on the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.)

Parameters referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382
Pr.76 Fault code output selectionpage 492

5.11.7 Output frequency detection

If the inverter output frequency which reaches a specific value is detected, the relative signal is output.

Initial value Setting

Pr. Name Description
FM CA range
41 Up-to-frequency
10% 0 to 100% Set the level where the SU signal turns ON.
M441 sensitivity
42 Output frequency
6 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the FU (or FB) signal turns ON.
M442 detection
Output frequency Set the frequency at which the FU (or FB) signal turns ON only
43 0 to 590 Hz
detection for reverse 9999 while the motor rotates in reverse direction.
M443
rotation 9999 The frequency same as the Pr.42 setting is set.
50 Second output
30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the FU2 (or FB2) signal turns ON.
M444 frequency detection
116 Third output frequency
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the FU3 (or FB3) signal turns ON.
M445 detection
865
Low speed detection 1.5 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the LS signal turns ON.
M446
870 Speed detection
0 Hz 0 to 5 Hz Set the hysteresis width for the detected frequency.
M400 hysteresis

 Setting the notification zone of the output frequency reaching the set
point (SU signal, Pr.41)
• The Up to frequency (SU) signal is output when the output frequency reaches the set frequency.
• Set the value in the range of 1 to 100% in Pr.41 to determine tolerance for the set frequency (considered as 100% point).
• It may be useful to use this signal to start operating related equipment after checking that the set frequency has been
reached.
Set frequency Adjustment
Output frequency

range Pr.41
(Hz)

Time

OFF ON OFF
SU

484 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Output frequency detection (FU, FU2, FU3 signals, FB, FB2, FB3 signals,
Pr.42, Pr.43, Pr.50, Pr.116) 1
• The Output frequency detection (FU) signal and the Speed detection (FB) signal are output when the output frequency
reaches or exceeds the Pr.42 setting.
• The FU, FU2, and FU3 signals are useful for applying or releasing electromagnetic brake, etc. 2
• The FU, FU2, and FU3 signal is output when the output frequency (frequency command) reaches the set frequency. On
the other hand, the FB, FB2, and FB3 signal is output when the detected actual speed (estimated speed under Real
sensorless vector control, or feedback value under Vector control) of the motor reaches the set frequency. The FU signal 3
and the FB signal are output at the same manner under V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control or during the
encoder feedback control operation.
• The frequency detection dedicated to motor rotation in reverse direction is enabled by setting the frequency in Pr.43. This 4
setting is useful when the timing of the electromagnetic braking during forward rotation operation (for example, during lifting
up in the lifts operation) is different from that during reverse rotation operation (lifting down).
• When Pr.43 ≠ "9999", the Pr.42 setting is for the forward rotation operation and the Pr.43 setting is for the reverse rotation 5
operation.
• When a different detection point of the frequency is required, Pr.50 and Pr.116 are available. The FU2 (or FB2) signal can
be set to be output when the output frequency reaches the Pr.50 setting or higher, and the FU3 (or FB3) signal can be set 6
to be output when the output frequency reaches the Pr.116 setting or higher.

Forward
rotation 7
Output frequency

Pr.116
Pr.50
Pr.42

Pr.43 Time
8
Pr.50
(Hz)
Pr.116
Output
signal
Reverse
rotation
9
FU/FB OFF ON OFF ON OFF

FU2/FB2 OFF ON OFF ON OFF

10
FU3/FB3 OFF ON OFF ON OFF

• To use each signal, set the corresponding number selected from the following table in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
Pr.190 to Pr.196 settings Related
Output signal
Positive logic Negative logic Parameter
FU 4 104
42, 43
FB 41 141
FU2 5 105
50
FB2 42 142
FU3 6 106
116
FB3 43 143

 Low speed detection (LS signal, Pr.865)

• When the output frequency drops to the setting of Pr.865 Low speed detection or lower, the Low speed detection (LS)
signal is output.
• In the speed control mode under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control, the fault
occurs, the indication "E.OLT" appears, and the inverter output power shuts off if the inverter condition that the output
frequency drops to the Pr.865 setting and the output torque exceeds the setting of Pr.874 OLT level setting by torque
limit operation continues for 3 seconds or longer.

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
485
 • To use the LS signal, set "34 (positive logic) or 134 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
Output frequency

Pr.865
(Hz)

Time
LS ON OFF ON

 Speed detection hysteresis (Pr.870)

Setting the hysteresis width for the detected frequency prevents chattering of the Speed detection (FB) signal. When an output
frequency fluctuates, the following signals may chatter (turns ON and OFF repeatedly).
• Up to frequency (SU) signal
• Speed detection (FB, FB2, FB3) signals
• Low speed detection (LS) signal
Setting hysteresis to the detected frequency prevents chattering of these signals.

Output frequency
(Hz)
Pr.870
SU output level
Pr.870
Output
frequency Pr.41
(Hz) Set frequency

Pr.42 Pr.870
Pr.870 SU output level
Pr.870

Time

ON SU signal ON ON
FB
ON ON ON
Example of the speed detection (FB) signal Example of the up to frequency (SU) signal

NOTE
• In the initial setting, the FU signal is assigned to terminal FU, and the SU signal is assigned to terminal SU.
• All signals shown in the following table are OFF during the DC injection brake operation, during the pre-excitation (zero speed
control or servo lock) operation, and during tuning at start-up.
• The reference frequency in comparison with the set frequency differs depending on the control method.

Reference frequency
Control method or function
FU, FU2, FU3 FB, FB2, FB3, SU, LS
V/F control Output frequency Output frequency
Advanced magnetic flux vector Output frequency before the slip Output frequency before the slip
control compensation compensation
Estimated frequency (actual motor
Real sensorless vector control Frequency command value
speed)
Frequency converted from actual Frequency converted from actual motor
Encoder feedback control
motor speed speed
Frequency converted from actual motor
Vector control Frequency command value
speed
Estimated frequency (actual motor
PM sensorless vector control Frequency command value
speed)
• Setting a higher value in Pr.870 causes a lower responsivity of the signals for frequency detection (SU, FB, FB2, FB3, and LS
signals).
• The logic (ON/OFF switching) of the LS signal is the reverse of that of the FB signal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
Pr.874 OLT level settingpage 245

486 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
5.11.8 Output current detection function
If the inverter output current which reaches a specific value is detected, the relative signal is output via an output terminal. 1
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description

150 Output current detection

value
Set the level to detect the output current. Consider the value of
2
150% 0 to 400%
M460 level the rated inverter current as 100%.
Set the timing to detect the output current. Enter the delay time
151
M461
Output current detection
signal delay time
0s 0 to 10 s
between the time when the output current reaches the set
current or higher and the time when the Output current
3
detection (Y12) signal is output.
152 Set the level to detect the zero current. Consider the value of
Zero current detection level 5% 0 to 400%
M462 the inverter rated current as 100%. 4
Set the time from the time when the output current drops to the
153
Zero current detection time 0.5 s 0 to 10 s Pr.152 setting or lower to the time when the Zero current
M463
detection (Y13) signal is output.

166 Output current detection

0 to 10 s Set the retention time period during which the Y12 signal is ON. 5
0.1 s The Y12 signal is retained ON. The signal turns OFF at the next
M433 signal retention time 9999
start-up of the inverter.
167 Output current detection Select the inverter operation at the time when the Y12 signal
M464 operation selection
0 0, 1, 10, 11
and the Y13 signal turn ON. 6
 Output current detection (Y12 signal, Pr.150, Pr.151, Pr.166, Pr.167)
• The output current detection function is useful for overtorque detection.
• If the inverter output during inverter running remains higher than the Pr.150 setting for the time set in Pr.151 or longer, the
7
Output current detection (Y12) signal is output from the inverter's open collector or the relay output terminal.
• When the Y12 signal turns ON, the ON state is retained for the time set in Pr.166.
• When Pr.166 = "9999", the ON state is retained until the next start-up of the inverter.
8
• Setting Pr.167 = "1" while the Y12 signal is ON does not cause the fault E.CDO. The Pr.167 setting becomes valid after
the Y12 signal is turned OFF.
• To use the Y12 signal, set "12 (positive logic) or 112 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
9
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
• Use Pr.167 to select the inverter operation at the time when Y12 signal turns ON, whether the inverter output stops or the
inverter operation continues.
10
Pr.167 setting When the Y12 signal turns ON When the Y13 signal turns ON
0 (initial value) Operation continues. Operation continues.
1 Operation stops by fault (E.CDO). Operation continues.
10 Operation continues. Operation stops by fault (E.CDO).
11 Operation stops by fault (E.CDO). Operation stops by fault (E.CDO).

Pr.166 "9999", Pr.167 = "0"

Pr.150

Output current
Pr.151
Time

Pr.166
Output current
detection signal OFF ON OFF
(Y12)

 Zero current detection (Y13 signal, Pr.152, Pr.153)

• If the inverter output during inverter running remains higher than the Pr.152 setting for the time set in Pr.153 or longer, the
Zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from the inverter's open collector or the relay output terminal.
• Once the Zero current detection (Y13) signal turns ON, the signal is retained ON for at least 0.1 second.

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
487
 • If the inverter output current drops to zero, slippage due to gravity may occur, especially in a lift application, because the
motor torque is not generated. To prevent this, the Y13 signal can be output from the inverter to apply the mechanical brake
at zero current output.
• To use the Y13 signal, set "13 (positive logic) or 113 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
• Use Pr.167 to select the inverter operation at the time when Y13 signal turns ON, whether the inverter output stops or the
inverter operation continues.
Pr.167 = "0"

Output
current
Pr.152
Pr.152
0[A]
0.1s ∗ Time
OFF ON
Start signal

Zero current OFF ON OFF ON

detection time
(Y13) Pr.153 Pr.153
Detection time Detection time

∗ When the output is restored to the Pr.152 level, the Y13

signal is turned OFF after 0.1 s.

NOTE
• This function is enabled during online or offline auto tuning.
• The response time of the Y12 and Y13 signals is approximately 0.1 second. However, the response time varies according to
the load condition.
• When Pr.152 = "0", the zero current detection function is disabled.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

CAUTION
• The setting of the zero current detection level should not be too low, and the setting of the zero current detection time
should not be too long. Doing so may cause the signal for the zero current detection not to be outputted when the output
current is very low and the motor torque is not generated.
• A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided to prevent machines or equipment in hazardous
conditions even if the Zero current detection is used.

Parameters referred to
Online auto tuningpage 558
Offline auto tuningpage 532, page 551
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

5.11.9 Output torque detection function

Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector PM
If the motor torque which reaches a specific value is detected, the relative signal is output.
The signal is useful for applying or releasing electromagnetic brake, etc.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

864 Set a value of the torque at which the TU
Torque detection 150% 0 to 400%
M470 signal turns ON.
• The Torque detection (TU) signal turns ON when the motor output torque reaches the value of torque set in Pr.864 or
higher. The TU signal turns OFF when the motor output torque drops lower than the set value.
• Pr.864 is not available under V/F control.

488 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 • To use the TU signal, set "35 (positive logic) or 135 (negative logic)" in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
1

Output torque (%)

Pr.864 2

3
Time
TU ON OFF

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
4

Parameters referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
5
5.11.10 Remote output function
The signal can be turned ON or OFF via the output terminal on the inverter as if the terminal is the remote output terminal for
6
a programmable controller.

Pr. Name Initial value

Setting
Description
7
range
Remote output data is cleared when
0 Remote output data is
the inverter power is turned OFF.
Remote output data is retained even
cleared during an inverter 8
1 reset.
495 after the inverter power is turned OFF.
Remote output selection 0
M500 Remote output data is cleared when
10 Remote output data is
the inverter power is turned OFF.
Remote output data is retained even
retained during an inverter 9
11 reset.
after the inverter power is turned OFF.
496 Set a decimal number to enter a binary number in every bit
Remote output data 1 0 0 to 4095
M501 corresponding to each of the output terminals on the inverter.
Set a decimal number to enter a binary number in every bit
10
497
Remote output data 2 0 0 to 4095 corresponding to each of the output terminals on the option FR-
M502
A8AY or FR-A8AR.

 Remote output setting (REM signal, Pr.496, Pr.497)

• The signal assigned to each of the output terminal can be turned ON or OFF according to the settings of Pr.496 and Pr.497.
The signal assigned to each of the remote output terminal can be turned ON or OFF through communication via the PU
connector, via the RS-485 terminals, or via a communication option.
• To use the Remote output (REM) signal, set "96 (positive logic) or 196 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) to assign the function to the terminal.
• Refer to the following figures to check correspondences between the bit and the actual terminal. When "1" is set in the bit
corresponding to the terminal to which the REM signal assigned by setting a number in Pr.496 and Pr.497 each, the signal
turns ON (or OFF in negative logic setting). Also, setting "0" allows the signal to turn OFF (or ON in negative logic setting).
• For example, when Pr.190 RUN terminal function selection = "96" (positive logic) and "1" (H01) is set in Pr.496, the REM
signal assigned to terminal RUN turns ON.
Pr.496
b11 b0
ABC2

ABC1

RUN
IPF

SU
FU

OL
∗1

∗1

∗1

∗1

∗1

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
489
 Pr.497
b11 b0

RA3 ∗3

RA2 ∗3

RA1 ∗3

Y6 ∗2

Y5 ∗2

Y4 ∗2

Y3 ∗2

Y2 ∗2

Y1 ∗2

Y0 ∗2
∗1

∗1

*1 Any value
*2 Y0 to Y6 are available when the output-extending option (FR-A8AY) is installed.
*3 RA1 to RA3 are available when the relay output option (FR-A8AR) is installed.

 Remote output data retention (REM signal, Pr.495)

• When the inverter power is reset (or a power failure occurs) while Pr.495 = "0 (initial value) or 10", the REM signal setting
is cleared. (The ON/OFF state of the signal assigned to each terminal is determined by the settings in Pr.190 to Pr.196.)
The settings in Pr.496 and Pr.497 are reset to "0".
• When Pr.495 = "1 or 11", the remote output data is stored in EEPROM before the inverter power is turned OFF. This means
that the signal output setting after power restoration is the same as that before the power was turned OFF. However, when
Pr.495 = "1", the data during an inverter reset (terminal reset or reset request via communication) is not saved.
• When Pr.495 = "10 or 11", the remote output data in the signal before the reset is stored even during an inverter reset.
ON/OFF example for positive logic Inverter
reset time
Pr.495 = 0, 10 Pr.495 = 1, 11 (about 1s)
Power OFF Power OFF
supply supply

REM OFF REM ON

REM signal clear REM signal held

REM signal is saved
Signal condition during a reset
Pr.495 = 0, 1 Pr.495 = 10, 11

Reset ON Reset ON

REM ON OFF REM ON

∗
∗ When Pr.495 = "1", the signal condition saved in EEPROM
(condition of the last power OFF) is applied.

NOTE
• The output terminal to which the REM signal is not assigned by using Pr.190 to Pr.196 does not turn ON or OFF when "1 or
0" is set in bit corresponding to each of the terminals by using Pr.496 and Pr.497. (ON/OFF command affects only the terminal
to which the REM signal is assigned.)
• When Pr.495 = "1 or 11" (remote output data retained at power OFF), take measures to keep the control circuit power ON,
such as connecting terminal R1/L11 with terminal P/+ and connecting terminal S1/L21 with terminal N/- . If the control power
is not retained, the output signal after the inverter power turns ON is not guaranteed to work. When the high power factor
converter (FR-HC2) or the converter unit (FR-CC2) is connected to the inverter, assign the FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection,
instantaneous power failure detection (X11) signal to an input terminal and input the IPF signal from the FR-HC2/FR-CC2 to
the inverter via the terminal to which the X11 signal is assigned.

Parameters referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

5.11.11 Analog remote output function

An analog value can be output via the analog output terminal on the inverter.

490 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Initial Setting
Pr. Name
value range
Description
1
Remote output data is cleared when the
0
inverter power is turned OFF. Remote output data is cleared
Remote output data is retained even after during an inverter reset.
655 Analog remote output
0
1
the inverter power is turned OFF. 2
M530 selection Remote output data is cleared when the
10 Remote output data is
inverter power is turned OFF.
retained during an inverter
11
Remote output data is retained even after
the inverter power is turned OFF.
reset. 3
Value output via the terminal for which "87"
656 800 to
Analog remote output 1 1000% is set in the terminal function selection
M531 1200%
parameter (Pr.54 or Pr.158)
Value output via the terminal for which "88"
4
657 800 to Set the analog value outputted
Analog remote output 2 1000% is set in the terminal function selection
M532 1200% via terminal FM or CA, via
parameter (Pr.54 or Pr.158)
terminal AM, and via the
658
Analog remote output 3 1000%
800 to
Value output via the terminal for which "89"
is set in the terminal function selection
analog output terminal on the 5
M533 1200% option FR-A8AY.
parameter (Pr.54 or Pr.158)
Value output via the terminal for which "90"
659 800 to
M534
Analog remote output 4 1000%
1200%
is set in the terminal function selection
parameter (Pr.54 or Pr.158) 6
 Analog remote output (Pr.656 to Pr.659)
• The analog signal of the value set in Pr.656 to Pr.659 (Analog remote output) can be output via terminal FM or CA, 7
terminal AM and the analog output terminal on the option FR-A8AY.
• When Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or 90" (Remote output value), the type FM inverter can
output a pulse train via terminal FM. 8
• For FM output (when Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "0 (initial value) or 1"):
Terminal FM output [pulses/s] = 1440 [Hz] × (Analog remote output value - 1000)/100
Where the output range is 0 to 2400 pulses/s. 9
• For high-speed pulse output (when Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection = "10, 11, 20, or 21"):
Terminal FM output [pulses/s] = 50k [Hz] × (Analog remote output value - 1000)/100
Where the output range is 0 to 55k pulses/s.
10
Pulse speed Pulse speed
[pulse/s] [pulse/s]
2400

55K
1440 50K

0 0
800 1000 1100 1200 800 1000 1100 1200
Analog remote output value [%] Analog remote output value [%]
Terminal FM (FM output) Terminal FM (High-speed pulse train output)

• When Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or 90" (remote output), the type CA inverter can output
any analog current via terminal CA.
• Terminal CA output [mA] = 20 [mA] × (Analog remote output value - 1000)/100
Where the output range is 0 to 20 mA.
Output current [mA]
20

0
800 1000 1100 1200
Analog remote output value [%]
Terminal CA

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
491
 • When Pr.158 AM terminal function selection = "87, 88, 89, or 90", an analog voltage can be output via terminal AM.
• Terminal AM output [V] = 10 [V] × (Analog remote output value - 1000)/100
The output range is -10 to +10 V regardless of the Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection setting.
Output voltage [V]

10

800 900 0
1000 1100 1200
Analog remote output value [%]

-10
Terminal AM

 Analog remote output data retention (Pr.655)

• When the power supply is reset (including a power failure) while Pr.655 Analog remote output selection = "0" (initial
value) or 10" and, the remote analog output (Pr.656 to Pr.659) returns to its initial value (1000%).
• When Pr.655 = "1 or 11", the remote output data is stored in EEPROM before the inverter power is turned OFF. This means
that the signal output setting after power restoration is the same as that before the power was turned OFF. However, when
Pr.655 = "1", the data during an inverter reset (terminal reset or reset request via communication) is not saved.
• When Pr.655 = "10 or 11", the remote output data in the signal before the reset is stored even during an inverter reset.
• When the setting in Pr.655 is changed, the remote analog output (Pr.656 to Pr.659) returns to its initial value (1000%).
ON/OFF example for positive logic Inverter
reset time
Pr.655 = 0, 10 Pr.655 = 1, 11 (about 1s)
Power OFF Power OFF
supply supply

Analog Analog
output output
Analog output Analog Analog
clear output output
saved held
Signal condition during a reset
Pr.655 = 0, 1 Pr.655 = 10, 11

Reset ON Reset ON

Analog Analog
output output
∗
∗ When Pr.655 = "1", the signal condition saved in EEPROM
(condition of the last power OFF) is applied.

NOTE
• When Pr.655 = "1 or 11" (remote output data retained at power OFF), take measures to keep the control circuit power ON,
such as connecting terminal R1/L11 with terminal P/+ and connecting terminal S1/L21 with terminal N/- (while power is
supplied via input terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3). If the control power is not retained, the output signal after the inverter power
turns ON is not guaranteed to work. When connecting the high power factor converter FR-HC2, assign the instantaneous
power failure detection (X11) signal to an input terminal to input the IPF signal from the FR-HC2 to the terminal for X11 signal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selectionpage 457
Pr.158 AM terminal function selectionpage 457
Pr.290 Monitor negative output selectionpage 457
Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selectionpage 457

5.11.12 Fault code output selection

When a fault occurs, the corresponding data can be output as a 4-bit digital signal using via an open collector output terminal.
The fault code can be read using an input module of programmable controller, etc.

492 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 Without fault code output 1
76
Fault code output selection 0 1 With fault code output
M510
2 Fault code is output only when a fault occurs
• Fault codes can be output to the output terminals by setting Pr.76 Fault code output selection = "1 or 2". 2
• When the setting is "2", a fault code is only output when a fault occurs. In normal operation the terminal outputs the signal
assigned in Pr.191 to Pr.194 (Output terminal function selection).
• The fault codes that can be output are shown in the following table. (0: Output transistor OFF, 1: Output transistor ON) 3
Operation panel Output terminal operation
Fault code
indication (FR-DU08) SU IPF OL FU
Normal*1 0 0 0 0 0 4
E.OC1 0 0 0 1 1
E.OC2 0 0 1 0 2
E.OC3
E.OV1 to E.OV3
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
3
4
5
E.THM 0 1 0 1 5
E.THT 0 1 1 0 6
E.IPF 0 1 1 1 7 6
E.UVT 1 0 0 0 8
E.FIN 1 0 0 1 9
E.BE 1 0 1 0 A
E. GF 1 0 1 1 B
7
E.OHT 1 1 0 0 C
E.OLT 1 1 0 1 D
E.OPT,
E.OP1 to E.OP3
1 1 1 0 E 8
Terminals other than the
1 1 1 1 F
above

*1 When Pr.76 = "2", the terminal outputs the signal assigned by Pr.191 to Pr.194.
9
NOTE
• If an error occurs while Pr.76 ≠ "0", the output terminals SU, IPF, OL, and FU output the signals in the table above regardless
of the settings in Pr.191 to Pr.194 (Output terminal function selection). Take caution when controlling the inverter with the
10
output signals set by Pr.191 to Pr.194.

Parameters referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

5.11.13 Pulse train output to announce cumulative output

energy
Every time when the output energy cumulated from the time at power ON or at an inverter reset or when the setting of Pr.799
Pulse increment setting for output power has been changed increments by the set value, the Pulse train output of output
power (Y79) signal is output in pulses.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

0.1 kWh, 1 kWh, The Pulse train output of output power (Y79) signal is output
799 Pulse increment setting for
1 kWh 10 kWh, 100 kWh, in pulses every time when the output energy increments by
M520 output power
1000 kWh the set amount of energy (kWh).

 Pulse increment setting for output power (Y79 signal, Pr.799)

• Every time when the output energy cumulated from the time at power ON or at an inverter reset increments by the set value
of Pr.799 Pulse increment setting for output power, the Pulse train output of output power (Y79) signal is output in
pulses.

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
493
 • The inverter does not stop cumulating (can continue to cumulate) the output energy even if the retry function or the
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function works because the cause of the function activation is a mini
power failure which is too short to cause an inverter reset.
• If a power failure occurs, the cumulative value is reset to 0 kWh and restart cumulating.
• To use the Y79 signal, set "79 (positive logic) or 179 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.

Output power

20kWh

10kWh

Pulse output of
output power OFF Time
(Y79)
ON for 0.15s
When Pr.799 = 10

NOTE
• Because the accumulated data in the inverter is cleared when control power is lost by power failure or at an inverter reset, the
value on the monitor cannot be used to charge electricity bill.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. (Refer to page 473.)
• Do not assign the signal to terminal ABC1 or terminal ABC2 whose pulse outputs are frequently turned ON/OFF. Otherwise,
the life of the relay contact may be shortened.

Parameters referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

5.11.14 Detection of control circuit temperature

The temperature of the control circuit board can be monitored, and a signal can be output according to a predetermined
temperature setting.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
663 Control circuit temperature Set the temperature where the Y207 signal turns
0°C 0 to 100°C
M060 signal output level ON.

 Control circuit temperature monitoring

• The temperature of the control circuit board can be monitored within the range of 0 to 100°C on the operation panel, or via
terminal FM/CA, or terminal AM. Refer to page 446 for information on how to select the monitor item.
• When Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection is set to enable display of the negative numbers for monitoring on the
operation panel or via terminal AM, the range of monitoring is -20 to 100°C.
• The monitor value is a rough approximation of the change in the surrounding air temperature of the inverter. Use this
parameter to grasp the operating environment of the inverter.

 Control circuit temperature detection (Pr.663, Y207 signal)

• The Y207 signal can be output when the control circuit temperature reaches the Pr.663 setting or higher.
• To use the Y207 signal, set "207 (positive logic) or 307 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.

NOTE
• The Y207 signal is turned OFF when the control circuit temperature becomes 5°C or more lower than the Pr.663 setting.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selectionpage 457
Pr.158 AM terminal function selectionpage 457
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
Pr.290 Monitor negative output selectionpage 457

494 5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
5.11.15 Encoder pulse dividing output
The encoder pulse signal at the motor end can be divided in division ratio set in the parameter and be output. 1
Use this parameter to make the response of the machine to be input slower, etc. The FR-A8AL or the FR-A8TP is required to
be installed.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
2
413
Encoder pulse division ratio
M601*1
863 Control terminal option-
1 1 to 32767 Set a numerical value by which pulses are divided.
3
*2 Encoder pulse division ratio
M600
*1 This parameter is available when the FR-A8AL (option) is installed.
*2 This parameter is available when the FR-A8TP (option) is installed.
4
• Division waveform by division ratio
Both ON-OFF width is division times (50% duty).
• Pulse waveform example at 1000 pulse input when Pr.413 or Pr.863 = "2"
5
Division ratio A-phases (1000 pulses)

6
1/1 B-phases

2 divisions
Division ratio A-phases (500 pulses)
1/2 B-phases 7
NOTE
• Control of motor rotation (forward or reverse) by phase difference between A phase and B phase is as follows. 8
When A phase is 90° advanced as compared to B phase: Forward rotation
When A phase is 90° behind as compared to B phase: Reverse rotation

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.11 (M) Item and output signal for monitoring
495
 5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters

Refer to
Purpose Parameter to set
page
To inverse the rotation direction with the
voltage/current analog input selection Analog input selection P.T000, P.T001 Pr.73, Pr.267 496
(terminals 1, 2, and 4)
To assign functions to analog input Terminal 1 and terminal 4
P.T010, P.T040 Pr.858, Pr.868 500
terminals function assignment
Analog auxiliary input and
P.T000, P.T021,
To adjust the main speed by the analog compensation (addition Pr.73, Pr.242, Pr.243,
P.T041, P.T050, 501
auxiliary input compensation and override Pr.252, Pr.253
P.T051
functions)
Pr.74, Pr.822, Pr.826,
To eliminate noise on analog inputs Analog input filter P.T002 to P.T007 Pr.832, Pr.836, 503
Pr.849
Pr.125, Pr.126,
P.T100 to P.T103,
Pr.241, C2 to C7
To adjust analog input frequency/voltage Frequency setting voltage P.T200 to P.T203,
(Pr.902 to Pr.905), 505
(current) (calibration) (current) bias and gain P.T400 to P.T403,
C12 to C15 (Pr.917 to
P.M043
Pr.918)
Pr.241, C16 to C19
P.T110 to P.T113,
To adjust analog input torque/voltage Torque setting voltage (current) (Pr.919 to Pr.920),
P.T410 to P.T413, 510
(current) (calibration) bias and gain C38 to C41 (Pr.932 to
P.M043
Pr.933)
To continue operating at analog current Pr.573, Pr.777,
4 mA input check P.T052 to P.T054 517
input loss Pr.778
Input terminal function P.T700 to P.T711, Pr.178 to Pr.189,
To assign functions to input terminals 521
selection P.T740 Pr.699
Output stop (MRS) signal input
P.T720 Pr.17 524
selection
To change the input specification (NO/NC Inverter run enable (X10) signal
P.T721 Pr.599 727
contact) of input signals input selection
Power failure stop external
P.T722 Pr.606 642
(X48) signal input selection
To enable the second function only RT signal function validity
P.T730 Pr.155 525
during the constant speed condition selection
To assign start and forward/reverse Start signal (STF/STR) operation
P.G106 Pr.250 722
commands to different signals selection

5.12.1 Analog input selection

The functions to switch the analog input terminal specifications, override function, forward/reverse rotation by the input signal
polarity are selectable.
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
0 to 5, 10 Switch 1 - OFF The terminal 2 input specification (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10
to 15 (initial status) V, 0 to 20 mA) and terminal 1 input specification (0
73
Analog input selection 1 to ±5 V, 0 to ±10 V) are selectable. Also the
T000 6 to 7, 16,
Switch 1 - ON override and reversible operation settings are
17
selectable.
Switch 2 - ON
0 Terminal 4 input, 4 to 20 mA
267 Terminal 4 input (initial status)
0
T001 selection 1 Terminal 4 input, 0 to 5 V
Switch 2 - OFF
2 Terminal 4 input, 0 to 10 V

496 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
 Analog input specification selection
• For terminals 2 and 4 used for analog input, the voltage input (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) and current input (0 to 20 mA) are 1
selectable. To change the input specification, change the setting of Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input selection
switch (switch 1 or switch 2).
Voltage/current 2
input switch
Switch 2
Switch 1

2 4 3

Switch state Input specification

Input
terminal
Rated specification 6
ON Current input For voltage input, the input resistance is 10±1 kΩ and the
Switch 1 Terminal 2
OFF Voltage input (initial status) maximum permissible voltage is 20 VDC.

Switch 2
ON Current input (initial status)
Terminal 4
For current input, the input resistance is 245±5 Ω and the
maximum permissible current is 30 mA.
7
OFF Voltage input

• Change the setting of the voltage/current input selection switch to change the rated specification of terminal 2 or 4.
• Set Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input selection switch according to the analog signal input. The incorrect 8
settings shown in the following table cause a failure. The inverter does not operate properly with other incorrect settings.
Setting causing a failure
Switch setting Terminal input
Operation 9
Causes an analog signal output circuit failure in an external device (due to increased loads on the
ON (Current input) Voltage input
signal output circuit of the external device).

OFF (Voltage input) Current input

Causes an input circuit failure in the inverter (due to an increased output power in the analog signal
output circuit of an external device).
10
NOTE
• Check the number of the voltage/current input selection switch before setting, because it is different from the switch number
indicated on the FR-A700 series inverter.

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
497
 Set Pr.73 and the voltage/current input selection switch according to the following table.
Compensation input
Terminal 2 Terminal 1
Pr.73 setting Switch 1 terminal compensation Reversible polarity
input input
method
0 0 to 10 V*1 OFF 0 to ±10 V
1 (initial value) 0 to 5 V*1 OFF 0 to ±10 V Terminal 1 addition
2 0 to 10 V *1 OFF 0 to ±5 V compensation

3 0 to 5 V*1 OFF 0 to ±5 V Not applied (state in which a negative

polarity frequency command signal is not
4 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to ±10 V*1 accepted)
Terminal 2 override
5 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to ±5 V*1
6 0 to 20 mA*1 ON 0 to ±10 V
7 0 to 20 mA*1 ON 0 to ±5 V
10 0 to 10 V*1 OFF 0 to ±10 V Terminal 1 addition
11 0 to 5 V*1 OFF 0 to ±10 V compensation

12 0 to 10 V*1 OFF 0 to ±5 V
13 0 to 5 V*1 OFF 0 to ±5 V
Applied
14 0 to 10 V OFF 0 to ±10 V*1
Terminal 2 override
15 0 to 5 V OFF 0 to ±5 V*1
16 0 to 20 mA*1 ON 0 to ±10 V Terminal 1 addition
17 0 to 20 mA*1 ON 0 to ±5 V compensation

*1 The main speed setting is indicated.

• When the Terminal 4 input selection (AU) signal is turned ON, terminal 4 is used to set the main speed. In this case,
terminals 1 and 2 are not used to set the main speed.
• Set Pr.267 and the voltage/current input selection switch according to the following table.
Pr.267 setting Terminal 4 input Switch 2
0 (initial value) 4 to 20 mA ON
1 0 to 5 V OFF
2 0 to 10 V OFF

NOTE
• To enable terminal 4, turn ON the AU signal.
• Set the parameters and the switch settings so that they agree. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure, or malfunction.
• The frequency setting auxiliary input through terminal 1 is added to the main speed setting signal input through terminal 2 or 4.
• When the override setting is selected, terminal 1 or 4 is set to the main speed setting, and terminal 2 is set to the override
signal (0 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V, and 50% to 150%). (If the main speed signal is not input through terminal 1 or 4, the compensation
by terminal 2 is disabled.)
• Use Pr.125 (Pr.126) (frequency setting gain) to change the maximum output frequency at the input of the maximum output
frequency command voltage (current). At this time, the command voltage (current) need not be input. Also, the acceleration/
deceleration time, which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, is not affected by the change
in Pr.73 setting.
• When "4" is set in Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment (Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment), the stall prevention
operation level is input through terminal 1 (4). To input frequency through terminal 1 (4), set "0 (initial value)" in Pr.858 (Pr.868).
• Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input signal with Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input
selection switch.
• When Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level ≠ "9999", terminal 2 is not used for the analog frequency command.

 Running with analog input voltage

• For the frequency setting signal, input 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 VDC) between terminals 2 and 5. The 5 V (10 V) input is the
maximum output frequency.

498 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
 • The power supply 5 V (10 V) can be input by either using the internal power supply or preparing an external power supply.
The internal power supply is 5 VDC output between terminals 10 and 5, and 10 VDC output between terminals 10E and 5.
1
Inverter internal power source
Terminal Frequency setting resolution Pr.73 (terminal 2 input voltage)
voltage
10 5 VDC 0.030/60 Hz 0 to 5 VDC input
10E 10 VDC 0.015/60 Hz 0 to 10 VDC input 2
• To supply the 10 VDC input to terminal 2, set "0, 2, 4, 10, 12, or 14" in Pr.73. (The initial value is 0 to 5 V.)
• Set "1 (0 to 5 VDC)" or "2 (0 to 10 VDC)" in Pr.267 and turn OFF the voltage/current input selection switch to input voltage
through terminal 4. Turning ON the AU signal activates the terminal 4 input. 3
Inverter Inverter Forward Inverter
Forward
rotation
STF
Voltage/current
Forward
rotation
STF Voltage/current
input switch
rotation STF
AU Voltage/current
4
SD input switch SD Terminal 4 input switch
0 to 5 VDC 0 to 10 VDC input selection SD
10 10E
0 to 5 VDC
Frequency
setting
2
5 2 4
Frequency
setting
2
5 2 4 Frequency
10
4
5
setting 2 4
5
Connection diagram using Connection diagram
terminal 2 (0 to 5 VDC)
6
using terminal 2 (0 to 10 VDC) Connection diagram
using terminal 4 (0 to 5 VDC)

NOTE
• The wiring length of terminal 10, 2, and 5 should be 30 m at maximum.
7
 Running with analog input current
• For constant pressure or temperature control with fans, pumps, or other devices, automatic operation is available by setting 8
the regulator output signal 4 to 20 mADC to between terminals 4 and 5.
• To use terminal 4, the AU signal needs to be turned ON.
9
Inverter
Forward STF
rotation AU Voltage/current

10
input switch
SD
4 to 20mADC
Frequency Current
input
4
setting equipment 5 2 4

Connection diagram using

terminal 4 (4 to 20mADC)

• Set "6, 7, 16, or 17" in Pr.73 and turn ON the voltage/current input selection switch to input current through terminal 2. In
this case, the AU signal does not need to be turned ON.

Inverter
Forward STF
Voltage/current
rotation SD input switch

4 to 20mADC
Frequency Current
input
2
setting equipment 5 2 4

Connection diagram using

terminal 2 (4 to 20mADC)

 Performing forward/reverse rotation with the analog input (polarity

reversible operation)
• Setting "10 to 17" in Pr.73 enables the polarity reversible operation.

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
499
 • Set a positive or negative input (0 to ±5 V or 0 to ±10 V) to terminal 1 to allow the operation of forward/reverse rotation
according to the polarity of the input value.

Reverse Set frequency Forward

(Hz)
rotation rotation
60

Reversible
Not reversible +5
(+10)
-5 0 Terminal 1 input (V)
(-10)

Compensation input characteristics

when STF is ON

Parameters referred to
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 431
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 505
Pr.252, Pr.253 Override bias/gainpage 501
Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection levelpage 415
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500

5.12.2 Analog input terminal (terminal 1, 4) function

assignment
The analog input terminal 1 and terminal 4 functions are set and changeable with parameters.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
868 Terminal 1 function
0 0 to 6, 9999 Select the terminal 1 function.
T010 assignment
858 Terminal 4 function
0 0, 1, 4, 9999 Select the terminal 4 function.
T040 assignment
• For terminals 1 and 4 used for analog input, the frequency (speed) command, magnetic flux command, torque command,
and other similar commands are usable. The functions available are different depending on the control method and control
mode as shown in the following table. (For details on the control methods, refer to page 221.)
• Functions of terminal 1 under different control modes
V/F control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control
Pr.868
Advanced magnetic flux vector
setting Speed control Torque control Position control
control
0 (initial
Auxiliary frequency setting Auxiliary speed setting Auxiliary speed limit —
value)
1 — Magnetic flux command*1 Magnetic flux command*1 Magnetic flux command*1
Regenerative torque limit Regenerative torque limit
2 — —
(Pr.810 = "1") (Pr.810 = "1")
Torque command (Pr.804
3 — — —
= "0")
Torque command (Pr.804
4 Stall prevention operation level input Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")
= "0")
Forward/reverse rotation
5 — — —
speed limit (Pr.807 = "2")
Torque bias input (Pr.840 =
6 — — —
"1, 2, or 3")
9999 — — — —
• Functions of terminal 4 under different control modes
V/F control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, PM sensorless vector control
Pr.858
Advanced magnetic flux vector
setting Speed control Torque control Position control
control
0 (initial Frequency command (AU signal- Speed command (AU signal-
Speed limit (AU signal-ON) —
value) ON) ON)
1 — Magnetic flux command *1*2 Magnetic flux command *1*2 Magnetic flux command *1*2
Stall prevention operation level
4
input Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")*3 — Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1")*3
9999 — — — —

500 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
—: No function
*1
*2
This function is valid under Vector control.
Invalid when Pr.868 = "1". 1
*3 Invalid when Pr.868 = "4".

NOTE
• When Pr.868 = "1" (magnetic flux command) or "4" (stall prevention / torque limit), the terminal 4 function is enabled regardless 2
of the ON/OFF state of the AU signal.

Parameters referred to
3
Advanced magnetic flux vector controlpage 228
Real sensorless vector controlpage 221
Pr.804 Torque command source selectionpage 283
Pr.807 Speed limit selectionpage 287
Pr.810 Torque limit input method selectionpage 245 4
Pr.840 Torque bias selectionpage 265

5.12.3 Analog input compensation 5

The analog input for multi-speed operation or speed setting (main speed) through terminal 2 or 4 can be compensated by
adding an input, or terminal 2 can be used for an auxiliary input to compensate the analog input at a fixed ratio using the
override function. 6
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
73 0 to 3, 6, 7, 10 to 13, 16, 17 Compensation by addition
Analog input selection 1
T000 4, 5, 14, 15 Compensation using the override function 7
Terminal 1 added
242 Set the percentage of addition when terminal 2
compensation amount 100% 0 to 100%
T021 is used to set the main speed.
(terminal 2)

243
Terminal 1 added
Set the percentage of addition when terminal 4 8
compensation amount 75% 0 to 100%
T041 is used to set the main speed.
(terminal 4)
252 Set bias compensation for the override
Override bias 50% 0 to 200%
T050 function. 9
253 Set gain compensation for the override
Override gain 150% 0 to 200%
T051 function.

 Compensation by addition (Pr.242, Pr.243) 10

Forward Inverter
rotation
STF
SD
10
2
5
Auxiliary input 1
0 to 10V( 5V)

Example of addition compensation connection

• A compensation signal can be added to the main speed setting for such as synchronous or continuous speed control
operation.
• Set "0 to 3, 6, 7, 10 to 13, 16, or 17" in Pr.73 to add the voltage determined by the terminal 1 input when the main speed
setting is input through terminal 2.
• When a negative voltage obtained from the addition, it is regarded as 0 and the operation is stopped when Pr.73 = "0 to
3, 6, or 7", and the operation is reversed (polarity reversible operation) after the STF signal is turned ON when Pr.73 = "10
to 13, 16, or 17".
• The terminal 1 compensation input can be added to the multi-speed setting or terminal 4 (initial value: 4 to 20 mA).

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
501
 • The degree of addition to terminal 2 is adjustable with Pr.242 and the degree of addition to terminal 4 is adjustable with
Pr.243.
Pr.242
Analog command value with use of terminal 2 = terminal 2 input + terminal 1 input ×
100(%)

Pr.243
Analog command value with use of terminal 4= terminal 4 input + terminal 1 input ×
100(%)
Output frequency Output frequency
When voltage across When voltage across
terminals 2 and 5 is 2.5 V terminals 2 and 5 is 2.5 V
(5 V) (5 V)

When voltage
When voltage
across terminals
across terminals
2 and 5 is 0 V
2 and 5 is 0 V

-5 V -2.5 V 0 +2.5 V +5 V Terminal 1 -5 V -2.5 V 0 +2.5 V +5 V Terminal 1

(-10 V) (-5 V) (+5 V) (+10 V) (-10 V) (-5 V) (+5 V) (+10 V)

Forward rotation Reverse rotation Forward rotation

STF Signal STF Signal
ON ON

Forward rotation Reverse rotation Forward rotation

STF Signal STF Signal
ON ON
(a) When Pr.73 setting is 0 to 3 (b) When Pr.73 setting is 10 to 13
Auxiliary input characteristics

NOTE
• After changing the Pr.73 setting, check the setting of the voltage/current input selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a
fault, failure, or malfunction. (Refer to page 496 for the setting.)

 Override function (Pr.252, Pr.253)

Forward Inverter
rotation
STF
SD
10
Override
setting 2
5
Main (+) 1
speed (-)

Connection example for the

override function
• Use the override function to make the main speed changed at a specified rate.
• Set "4, 5, 14, or 15" in Pr.73 to select the override function.
• When the override function is selected, terminal 1 or 4 is used for the main speed setting, and terminal 2 is used for the
override signal. (If the main speed signal is not input through terminal 1 or 4, the compensation by terminal 2 is disabled.)
• Specify the scope of override by using Pr.252 and Pr.253.
• How to calculate the set frequency when the override function is used:
Main speed setting frequency (Hz): Terminals 1 or 4 input, multi-speed setting
Compensation (%): Terminal 2 input

Compensation (%)
Set frequency (Hz) = Main speed setting frequency (Hz) ×
100(%)

502 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
 • Example) When Pr.73 = "5"
By the terminal 1 (main speed) and terminal 2 (auxiliary) input, the setting
200
frequency is set as shown in the figure below. 1
Override value (%)
150 90 Terminal 2 5VDC
input(150%) 2

Set frequency (Hz)

Pr.252
Initial value
100 60 Terminal 2 2.5VDC
Pr.253 (50% to 150%)
input(100%)
45
50 30 Terminal 2 0V 3
input(50%)
15
0 0
0V 2.5V
(5V)
5V
(10V)
0 2.5 5
Terminal 1 input voltage (V)
4
Voltage across terminals 2 and 5

NOTE
• To use terminal 4, the AU signal needs to be turned ON. 5
• To make compensation input for multi-speed operation or remote setting, set Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation
selection = "1" (with compensation) (initial value "0").
• After changing the Pr.73 setting, check the setting of the voltage/current input selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a 6
fault, failure, or malfunction. (Refer to page 496 for the setting.)

Parameters referred to 7
Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selectionpage 411
Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496

5.12.4 Response level of analog input and noise 8

elimination
The response level and stability of frequency command/torque command using the analog input signal (terminal 1, 2, or 4) can 9
be adjusted.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

74
Set the primary delay filter time constant to the analog input 10
Input filter time constant 1 0 to 8 command. If the setting is too large, response becomes
T002
slow.
Set the primary delay filter time constant to the external
822 0 to 5 s
Speed setting filter 1 9999 speed command (analog input command).
T003
9999 As set in Pr.74.
Set the primary delay filter time constant to the external
826 0 to 5 s
Torque setting filter 1 9999 torque command (analog input command).
T004
9999 As set in Pr.74.
832 Second function of Pr.822 (enabled when the RT signal is
Speed setting filter 2 9999 0 to 5 s, 9999
T005 ON)
836 Second function of Pr.826 (enabled when the RT signal is
Torque setting filter 2 9999 0 to 5 s, 9999
T006 ON)
Set offset for the analog speed input (terminal 2). The motor
849 Analog input offset
100% 0 to 200% is prevented from rotating due to noise in the analog input
T007 adjustment
or other factors when a zero speed command is given.

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
503
  Block diagram
Pr.74
Pr.822 = 9999
Speed command
RT-OFF
Pr.822
Terminal 1 (2, 4) input

RT-ON Pr.822 9999

Pr.74
Pr.826 = 9999
Torque command

Pr.826

Pr.826 9999

Pr.832 = 9999

Pr.832

Pr.832 9999

Pr.836 = 9999
Pr.836

Pr.836 9999

 Analog input time constant (Pr.74)

• Use this parameter to eliminate noise on the frequency setting circuit.
• Increase the filter time constant if the operation is unstable due to noise or other factors.
If the setting is too large, response becomes slow. (The time constant can be between 0 and 8, which are about 2 ms to 1
second.)

 Analog speed command input time constant (Pr.822, Pr.832)

• Use Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1 to set the primary delay filter time constant to the external speed command (analog
input command). Increase the setting of the time constant to allow delays in follow-up of the speed command or when the
analog input voltage is unstable.
• Use Pr.832 Speed setting filter 2 to change the time constant to use one inverter to switch operation between two or more
motors.
• Pr.832 Speed setting filter 2 is enabled when the RT signal is ON.

 Analog torque command input time constant (Pr.826, Pr.836)

• Use Pr.826 Torque setting filter 1 to set the primary delay filter time constant to the external torque command (analog
input command). Increase the setting of the time constant to allow delays in follow-up of the torque command or when the
analog input voltage is unstable.
• Use Pr.836 Torque setting filter 2 to change the time constant to use one inverter to switch operation between two or
more motors.
• Pr.836 Torque setting filter 2 is enabled when the RT signal is ON.

 Analog speed command input offset adjustment (Pr.849)

• Use this parameter to set a range in which the motor is stopped for prevention of incorrect motor operation in a very low
speed rotation when the speed command is an analog input.
• The voltage range is offset according to the setting in Pr.849 Analog input offset adjustment, assuming that 100%
corresponds to zero.
100% < Pr.849 ...... Positive side
100% > Pr.849 ...... Negative side
The detailed calculation of the offset voltage is as described below:
Offset voltage [V] = Voltage at the time of 100% (5 V or 10 V*1) × (Pr.849 - 100) / 100

504 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
 *1 It depends on the Pr.73 setting.

Frequency 1
command Slope determined
according to Pr.125
and C2 to C4
Slope does not
change.
2

3
0% 100% Speed setting
(10V or 5V) signal
0% 100% 200% Pr.849 setting

NOTE
• The analog input filter is invalid (no filter) during PID control operation. 4

Parameters referred to
Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496
5
Pr.125, C2 to C4 (bias and gain of the terminal 2 frequency setting)page 505

5.12.5 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain 6

The magnitude (slope) of the output frequency can be set as desired in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5 VDC, 0
to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA). Use Pr.73 Analog input selection (Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection) and the voltage/current
input selection switch to switch among input of 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 V, and 4 to 20 mA. (Refer to page 496.) 7
Initial value Setting
Pr. Name Description
FM CA range
C2 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting
0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the bias frequency for the terminal 2 input. 8
T200*1 bias frequency
C3 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting Set the converted % of the bias voltage (current) for the terminal
0% 0 to 300%
T201*1 bias 2 input.
125 (903) 9
T202 Terminal 2 frequency setting
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the gain (maximum) frequency for the terminal 2 input.
gain frequency
T022*1
C4 (903)
T203*1
Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain
100% 0 to 300%
Set the converted % of the gain voltage (current) for the terminal
2 input.
10
C5 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting
0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the bias frequency for the terminal 4 input.
T400*1 bias frequency
C6 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting Set the converted % of the bias current (voltage) for the terminal
20% 0 to 300%
T401*1 bias 4 input.
126 (905)
T402 Terminal 4 frequency setting
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the gain (maximum) frequency for the terminal 4 input.
gain frequency
T042*1
C7 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting Set the converted % of the gain current (voltage) for the terminal
100% 0 to 300%
T403*1 gain 4 input.
C12 (917) Terminal 1 bias frequency Set the bias frequency (speed) for the terminal 1 input. (Speed
0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
T100*1 (speed) limit)
C13 (917) Set the converted % of the bias voltage for the terminal 1 input.
Terminal 1 bias (speed) 0% 0 to 300%
T101*1 (Speed limit)
C14 (918) Terminal 1 gain frequency Set the gain (maximum) frequency (speed) for the terminal 1
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
T102*1 (speed) input. (Speed limit)
C15 (918) Set the converted % of the gain voltage for the terminal 1 input.
Terminal 1 gain (speed) 100% 0 to 300%
T103*1 (Speed limit)
241 Analog input display unit 0 % display
0 Select the unit for analog input display.
M043 switchover 1 V/mA display

*1 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit.

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
505
  Relationship between the analog input terminal function and the
calibration parameter
• Calibration parameter according to the terminal 1 function

Pr.868 Calibration parameter

Terminal function
setting Bias setting Gain setting
C2 (Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
bias frequency, frequency,
C3 (Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting C4 (Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting
0 (initial Auxiliary frequency (speed) bias, gain,
value) setting C5 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
bias frequency, frequency,
C6 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias gain
C16 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias command C18 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain command
(torque/magnetic flux), (torque/magnetic flux),
1 Magnetic flux command
C17 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/ C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/
magnetic flux) magnetic flux)
Regenerative driving torque
2
limit C16 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias command C18 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain command
3 Torque command (torque/magnetic flux), (torque/magnetic flux),
Stall prevention operation C17 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/ C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/
4 level*1/ torque limit / torque magnetic flux) magnetic flux)
command
C12 (Pr.917) Terminal 1 bias frequency C14 (Pr.918) Terminal 1 gain frequency
Forward/reverse rotation speed
5 (speed), (speed),
limit
C13 (Pr.917) Terminal 1 bias (speed) C15 (Pr.918) Terminal 1 gain (speed)
C16 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias command C18 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain command
(torque/magnetic flux), (torque/magnetic flux),
6 Torque bias input
C17 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/ C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/
magnetic flux) magnetic flux)
9999 No function — —
• Calibration parameter according to the terminal 4 function

Pr.858 Calibration parameter

Terminal function
setting Bias setting Gain setting
C5 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
0 (initial bias frequency, frequency,
Frequency command
value) C6 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias gain
C38 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias command C40 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain command
(torque/magnetic flux), (torque/magnetic flux),
1 Magnetic flux command
C39 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias (torque/ C41 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/
magnetic flux) magnetic flux)
C38 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias command C40 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain command
Stall prevention operation (torque/magnetic flux), (torque/magnetic flux),
4
level*1/ torque limit C39 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias (torque/ C41 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/
magnetic flux) magnetic flux)
9999 No function — —
*1 Use Pr.148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input or Pr.149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input to adjust bias or gain for setting the stall prevention
operation level.

 Changing the frequency for the maximum analog input (Pr.125, Pr.126)
• Use Pr.125 (Pr.126) to change the frequency setting (gain) for the maximum analog input voltage (current).
(C2 (Pr.902) to C7 (Pr.905) settings do not need to be changed.)

 Analog input bias/gain calibration (C2 (Pr.902) to C7 (Pr.905), C12 (Pr.917)

to C15 (Pr.918))
• The "bias" and "gain" functions serve to adjust the relationship between a setting input signal and the output frequency. A
setting input signal is such as a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mADC signal externally input to set the output
frequency.
• Set the bias frequency of the terminal 2 input using C2 (Pr.902). (It is initially set to the frequency at 0 V.)
• Use Pr.125 to set the output frequency to the frequency command voltage (current) set by Pr.73 Analog input selection.

506 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
 • Set the bias frequency of the terminal 1 input using C12 (Pr.917). (It is initially set to the frequency at 0 V.)
• Set the gain frequency of the terminal 1 input using C14 (Pr.918). (It is initially set to the frequency at 10 V.)
• Set the bias frequency of the terminal 4 input using C5 (Pr.904). (It is initially set to the frequency at 4 mA.)
1
• Use Pr.126 to set the output frequency to the 20 mA input of the frequency command current (4 to 20 mA).

Initial value Initial value 2

Output frequency

60Hz 60Hz
(50Hz) (50Hz)
(Hz)

Output frequency
(Hz)
3
Gain
Pr.125 Gain Pr.126

4
Bias C14(Pr.918) Bias
C2(Pr.902) C5
C12(Pr.917) (Pr.904)
0 100% 0 20 100%
0 5V 0 4 20mA
Frequency setting signal
0
0
10V
20mA
0
0
1 Frequency setting signal
2
5V
10V
5
C3(Pr.902) C4(Pr.903) C6(Pr.904) C7(Pr.905)
C13(Pr.917) C15(Pr.918)

• There are three methods to adjust the bias/gain frequency setting voltage (current). 6
Adjustment by applying voltage (current) between terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5) to set the voltage (current) at the bias/gain
frequency. page 508
Adjustment by selecting the voltage (current) at the bias/gain frequency without applying voltage (current) between 7
terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5). page 508
Adjustment by changing the frequency without adjusting the voltage (current). page 510

NOTE
8
• When the slope of the frequency is changed after calibration of terminal 2, the slope of the frequency is also changed for
terminal 1.
• When voltage is applied to terminal 1 while calibration of terminal 2 or terminal 4 is in progress, the terminal 1 input value is 9
added to the terminal 2 (4) input value.
• Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input signal with Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input
selection switch.
10
 Display unit changing for analog input (Pr.241)
• The analog input display unit (%/V/mA) can be changed for analog input bias/gain calibration.
• Depending on the terminal input specification setting of Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input switch, the unit of the
displayed value of C3 (Pr.902), C4 (Pr.903), C6 (Pr.904) and C7 (Pr.905) changes as shown below:
Analog command (via terminal 2 or 4)
(depending on the settings of Pr.73
Pr.241 = "0 (initial value)" Pr.241 = "1"
(Pr.267) and the voltage/current input
selection switch)
0 to 5 V input 0 to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 5 V (0.01 V)
0 to 10 V input 0 to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 10 V (0.01 V)
0 to 20 mA input 0 to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 20 mA (0.01 mA)

NOTE
• When voltage is applied to terminal 1 while the terminal 1 input specification (0 to ±5 V, 0 to ±10 V) does not agree with the
main speed (terminal 2 or terminal 4 input) specification (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA), the analog input is not correctly
displayed. (For example, when 0 V is applied to terminal 2 and 10 V is applied to terminal 1 in the initial status, the value is
indicated as 5 V (100%).)
Set "0 (initial value)" in Pr.241 to use the % display.

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
507
  Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain adjustment method
 Adjustment by applying voltage (current) between terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5) to set the voltage
(current) at the bias/gain frequency (Example of adjustment at the gain frequency)
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press to choose the PU operation mode. The [PU] indicator turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

4. Calibration parameter selection

Turn until " " appears. Press to display " ".

5. Selecting a parameter

Turn until " " (C4 (Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain) appears for terminal 2, or

" " (C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain) for terminal 4.

6. Analog voltage (current) display

Press to display the analog voltage (current) value (%) currently applied to terminal 2 (4).

Do not touch until calibration is completed.

7. Voltage (current) application

Apply a 5 V (20 mA). (Turn the external potentiometer connected between terminals 2 and 5 (terminals 4 and 5) to
a desired position.)

8. Setting completed

Press to confirm the selection. The analog voltage (current) % and " ( )" are displayed
alternately.

• Turn to read another parameter.

• Press to return to the " " display.

• Press twice to show the next parameter.

 Adjustment by selecting the voltage (current) at the bias/gain frequency without applying
voltage (current) between terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5) (Example of adjustment at the gain
frequency)
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press to choose the PU operation mode. The [PU] indicator turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

508 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
 4. Calibration parameter selection

Turn until " " appears. Press to display " ". 1

5. Selecting a parameter

Turn until " " (C4 (Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain) appears for terminal 2, or 2
" " (C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain) for terminal 4.

6. Analog voltage (current) display

3
Press to display the analog voltage (current) value (%) currently applied to terminal 2 (4).

7. Analog voltage (current) adjustment

4
When is turned, the gain voltage (current) value (%) currently set to the parameter appears.

Turn until the desired gain voltage (current) value (%) appears.
5
8. Setting completed

Press to confirm the selection. The analog voltage (current) % and " ( )" are displayed
6
alternately.

• Turn to read another parameter.

7
• Press to return to the " " display.

• Press twice to show the next parameter.

8
NOTE
• Press after step 6 to check the present bias/gain frequency setting. The setting cannot be checked after step 7.
9

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
509
  Adjustment by changing the frequency without adjusting the voltage (current) (Example of
changing the gain frequency from 60 Hz to 50 Hz)
Operating procedure
1. Selecting the parameter

Turn until " " (Pr.125) appears for terminal 2, or " " (Pr.126) for terminal 4.

Press to read the present set value. (60.00 Hz)

2. Changing the maximum frequency

Turn to change the set value to " ". (50.00 Hz)

Press to confirm the selection. " " and " ( )" are displayed alternately.

3. Selecting the mode and the monitor item

Press three times to select the monitor mode, and change the monitor item to the frequency.

4. Start
Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal), and turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full.
(Refer to steps 2 and 3 in page 157.)
The motor is operated at 50 Hz.

NOTE
• If the frequency meter (display meter) connected between terminal FM and SD (CA and 5) does not indicate exactly 60 Hz,
set the calibration parameter C0 FM/CA terminal calibration. (Refer to page 463.)

• If the voltage (current) values at the gain and bias frequencies are too close to each other, an error " " may be
indicated.
• Changing C4 (Pr.903) or C7 (Pr.905) (gain adjustment) will not change Pr.20.
Input to terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) is added to the frequency setting signal.
• For operation outline of the parameter unit (FR-PU07), refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-PU07.
• To set the value to 120 Hz or higher, the Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency needs to be 120 Hz or higher. (Refer to
page 428.)
• Use the calibration parameter C2 (Pr.902) or C5 (Pr.904) to set the bias frequency. (Refer to page 506.)

CAUTION
• Be cautious when setting any value other than "0" as the bias frequency at 0 V (0 mA). Even if a speed command is not
given, simply turning ON the start signal will start the motor at the preset frequency.

Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequencypage 428
Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequencypage 367
Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selectionpage 496
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500

5.12.6 Torque (magnetic flux) setting voltage (current)

bias and gain
Sensorless Vector PM

The magnitude (slope) of the torque can be set as desired in relation to the torque setting signal (0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or
4 to 20 mA).

510 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
Use Pr.73 Analog input selection or Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection to switch among input 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 V, and 4 to
20 mA. (Refer to page 496.)
1
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
C16 (919) Terminal 1 bias command (torque/ Set the bias torque (magnetic flux) for the terminal 1
T110*1 magnetic flux)
0% 0 to 400%
input. 2
C17
(919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic Set the converted % of the bias voltage for the terminal
0% 0 to 300%
flux) 1 input.
T111*1
C18
3
(920) Terminal 1 gain command (torque/ Set the gain (maximum) torque (magnetic flux) for the
150% 0 to 400%
magnetic flux) terminal 1 input.
T112*1
C19
Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic Set the converted % of the gain voltage for the terminal
4
(920) 100% 0 to 300%
flux) 1 input.
T113*1
C38
(932) Terminal 4 bias command (torque/
magnetic flux)
0% 0 to 400%
Set the bias torque (magnetic flux) for the terminal 4
input.
5
*1
T410
C39
(932) Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic Set the converted % of the bias current (voltage) for the
20% 0 to 300%
T411 *1 flux) terminal 4 input. 6
C40
(933) Terminal 4 gain command (torque/ Set the gain (maximum) torque (magnetic flux) for the
150% 0 to 400%
magnetic flux) terminal 4 input.
T412*1
C41
7
(933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic Set the converted % of the gain current (voltage) for the
100% 0 to 300%
flux) terminal 4 input.
T413*1
241 Analog input display unit
0
0 % display Select the unit for analog input 8
M043 switchover 1 V/mA display display.
*1 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit.

 Changing the function of analog input terminal 9

• In the initial setting, terminal 1 is used for analog input of the auxiliary speed setting (auxiliary speed limit), and terminal 4
is used for the speed command (speed limit). To use the analog input terminal to input the torque command, torque limit,
or magnetic flux command, set Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment or Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment to 10
change the function. (Refer to page 500.) The magnetic flux command is valid under Vector control only.

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
511
  Relationship between the analog input terminal function and the
calibration parameter
• Calibration parameter according to the terminal 1 function

Pr.868 Calibration parameter

Terminal function
setting Bias setting Gain setting
C2 (Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
bias frequency, frequency,
C3 (Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting C4 (Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting
0 (initial Auxiliary Frequency (speed) bias, gain,
value) setting C5 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
bias frequency, frequency,
C6 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias gain
C16 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias command C18 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain command
(torque/magnetic flux), (torque/magnetic flux),
1 Magnetic flux command
C17 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/ C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/
magnetic flux) magnetic flux)
2 Regenerative driving torque limit
3 Torque command C16 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias command C18 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain command
(torque/magnetic flux), (torque/magnetic flux),
Stall prevention operation
C17 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/ C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/
4 level*1/ torque limit / torque magnetic flux) magnetic flux)
command
C12 (Pr.917) Terminal 1 bias frequency C14 (Pr.918) Terminal 1 gain frequency
Forward/reverse rotation speed
5 (speed), (speed),
limit
C13 (Pr.917) Terminal 1 bias (speed) C15 (Pr.918) Terminal 1 gain (speed)
C16 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias command C18 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain command
(torque/magnetic flux), (torque/magnetic flux),
6 Torque bias input
C17 (Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/ C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/
magnetic flux) magnetic flux)
9999 No function — —

*1 Use Pr.148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input and Pr.149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input to adjust bias and gain for setting the stall
prevention operation level.
• Calibration parameter according to the terminal 4 function

Pr.858 Calibration parameter

Terminal function
setting Bias setting Gain setting
C5 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
0 (initial Frequency (speed) command / bias frequency, frequency,
value) speed limit C6 (Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias gain
C38 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias command C40 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain command
(torque/magnetic flux), (torque/magnetic flux),
1 Magnetic flux command
C39 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias (torque/ C41 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/
magnetic flux) magnetic flux)
C38 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias command C40 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain command
Stall prevention operation (torque/magnetic flux), (torque/magnetic flux),
4
level*2/ torque limit C39 (Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias (torque/ C41 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/
magnetic flux) magnetic flux)
9999 No function — —

*2 Use Pr.148 Stall prevention level at 0 V input and Pr.149 Stall prevention level at 10 V input to adjust bias and gain for setting the stall
prevention operation level.

 Changing the torque for the maximum analog input (C18 (Pr.920), C40
(Pr.933))
• Use C18 (Pr.920) or C40 (Pr.933) to change the torque setting (gain) for the maximum analog input voltage (current).

 Analog input bias/gain calibration (C16 (Pr.919) to C19 (Pr.920), C38

(Pr.932) to C41 (Pr.933))
• The "bias" and "gain" functions serve to adjust the relationship between a setting input signal and the torque. A setting
input signal is such as a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mADC signal externally input to set the torque command or
the torque limit.
• Set the bias torque of the terminal 1 input using C16 (Pr.919). (The initial value is the torque for 0 V.)

512 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
 • Use C18 (Pr.920) to set the torque to the torque command voltage set by Pr.73 Analog input selection. (The initial value
is 10 V.)
• Set the bias torque of the terminal 4 input using C38 (Pr.932). (The initial value is the torque for 4 mA.)
1
• Use C40 (Pr.933) to set the torque to the 20 mA input of the torque command current (4 to 20 mA).

400
2
Torque(%)
400

Torque(%)
(-5V)
150
Gain
C18(Pr.920) 150 Gain 3
(-10V) Bias Initial value C40
-100% C16(Pr.919) (Pr.933)
0 100%
0 Torque setting signal 5V
0 10V
Bias
C38
Initial value
4
C17(Pr.919) C19(Pr.920) (Pr.932)
-150 0 20 100%
∗1
0 4 20mA
Calibration example of terminal 1 C39(Pr.932)
Torque setting signal
C41(Pr.933) 5
Calibration example of terminal 4

*1 A negative voltage (0 to -10 V (-5 V)) is valid as a torque command. However, when a negative voltage is input as a torque limit value, the torque
limit is regarded as "0". 6
• There are three methods to adjust the bias/gain torque setting voltage (current).
Adjustment by applying voltage (current) between terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5) to set the voltage (current) at the bias/gain
level. page 513 7
Adjustment by selecting the voltage (current) at the bias/gain level without applying voltage (current) between terminals 1
and 5 (4 and 5). page 515
Adjustment by changing the torque without adjusting the voltage (current). page 516 8
NOTE
• Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input signal with Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input
selection switch. 9

 Display unit changing for analog input (Pr.241)

• The analog input display unit (%/V/mA) can be changed for analog input bias/gain calibration.
10
• Depending on the terminal input specification setting of Pr.73 (Pr.267), the unit of the displayed value of C17 (Pr.919), C19
(Pr.920), C39 (Pr.932), and C41 (Pr.933) changes as shown below:
Analog command (via terminal 1 or 4)
(depending on the settings of Pr.73 Pr.241 = "0" (initial value) Pr.241 = "1"
(Pr.267))
0 to 5 V input 0 to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 5 V (0.01 V)
0 to 10 V input 0 to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 10 V (0.01 V)
0 to 20 mA input 0 to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 20 mA (0.01 mA)

 Torque setting voltage (current) bias/gain adjustment method

 Adjustment by applying voltage (current) between terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5) to set the voltage
(current) at the bias/gain torque
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears)

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
513
 4. Calibration parameter selection

Turn until " " appears. Press to display " ".

5. Selecting a parameter

Turn until " " (C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux)) appears for terminal 1, or

" " (C41 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux)) for terminal 4.

6. Analog voltage (current) display

Press to display the analog voltage (current) % currently applied to the terminal 1 (4).

Do not touch until calibration is completed.

7. Voltage (current) application

Apply a 5 V (20 mA). (Turn the external potentiometer connected between terminals 1 and 5 (terminals 4 and 5) to
a desired position.)

8. Setting completed

Press to confirm the selection. The analog voltage (current) % and " " (" ") are displayed
alternately.

• Turn to read another parameter.

• Press to return to the " " display.

• Press twice to show the next parameter.

514 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
 Adjustment by selecting the voltage (current) at the bias/gain torque without applying voltage
(current) between terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5) 1
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter 2
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

3
Press to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears)
4
4. Calibration parameter selection
5
Turn until " " appears. Press to display " ".

5. Selecting a parameter
6
Turn until " " (C19 (Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux)) appears for terminal 1, or
" " (C41 (Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux)) for terminal 4.

6. Analog voltage (current) display 7

Press to display the analog voltage (current) % currently applied to the terminal 1 (4).

7. Analog voltage (current) adjustment 8

When is turned, the gain voltage (current) value (%) currently set to the parameter appears.

Turn until the desired gain voltage (current) value (%) appears. 9
8. Setting completed

Press to confirm the selection. The analog voltage (current) % and " " (" ") are displayed 10
alternately.

• Turn to read another parameter.

• Press to return to the " " display.

• Press twice to show the next parameter.

NOTE

• Press after step 6 to check the present bias/gain torque setting. The setting cannot be checked after step 7.

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
515
  Adjustment by changing the torque without adjusting the voltage (current) (Example of
changing the gain torque from 150% to 130%)
Operating procedure
1. Selecting the parameter

Turn until " " (Pr.920) appears for terminal 1, or " " (Pr.933) for terminal 4.

Press to read the present set value. (150.0%)

2. Torque setting change

Turn to change the set value to " " (130.0%)

Press to confirm the selection. " " and " " (" ") are displayed alternately.

3. Selecting the mode and the monitor item

Press three times to select the monitor mode, and change the monitor item to the frequency.

4. Start
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR) to apply a voltage across terminals 1 and 5 (4 and 5),
Operation is performed with 130% torque.

NOTE
• If the voltage (current) values at the gain and bias torques are too close to each other, an error (" ") may be
indicated.
• For operation outline of the parameter unit (FR-PU07), refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-PU07.
• Use the calibration parameter C16 (Pr.919) or C38 (Pr.932) to set the bias torque. (Refer to page 512.)

CAUTION
• Be cautious when setting any value other than "0" as the bias torque at 0 V (0 mA). Even if a torque command is not
given, simply turning ON the start signal will supply torque to the motor.

Parameters referred to
Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequencypage 367
Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selectionpage 496
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignmentpage 500

516 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
5.12.7 Checking of current input on analog input terminal
When current is input to the analog input terminal 2 or terminal 4, the input current can be checked and the operation when the 1
input falls below the specified level (the analog current input is lost) can be selected. The operation can be continued even
when the analog current input is lost.
Initial Setting
2
Pr. Name Description
value range
Operation continues with output frequency
1
before the current input loss. 3
4 mA input fault (E.LCI) is activated when the
2
current input loss is detected. Check the
The inverter output decelerates the motor to a current input
3
stop when the current input loss is detected. on terminals 2
After the motor is stopped, 4 mA input fault and 4.
4
(E.LCI) is activated.
Operation continues at the frequency set in
4
Pr.777. 5
Operation continues at the output frequency
11
before the current input loss.
4 mA input fault (E.LCI) is activated when the
12
current input loss is detected.
Check the
6
The inverter output decelerates the motor to a current input
573
4 mA input check selection 9999 stop when the current input loss is detected.
T052 13 on terminal 4.
After the motor is stopped, 4 mA input fault
(E.LCI) is activated. 7
Operation continues at the frequency set in
14
Pr.777.
Operation continues at the output frequency
21
before the current input loss. 8
4 mA input fault (E.LCI) is activated when the
22
current input loss is detected.
Check the
The inverter output decelerates the motor to a current input
23
stop when the current input loss is detected.
on terminal 2.
9
After the motor is stopped, 4 mA input fault
(E.LCI) is activated.
Operation continues at the frequency set in
24
Pr.777. 10
9999 No current input check
777 Set the frequency to continue operation when current input is
4 mA input fault operation 0 to 590 Hz
T053 9999 lost. (Valid when Pr.573 = "4")
frequency
A681 9999 No current input check when Pr.573 = "4"
778
T054 4 mA input check filter 0s 0 to 10 s Set the current input loss detection time.
A682

 Analog current input loss condition (Pr.778)

• When the current input to terminal 4 (terminal 2) continues to be 2 mA or less for the period set in Pr.778, it is considered
as loss of analog current input and the Alarm (LF) signal is turned ON. The LF signal turns OFF when the current input
becomes 3 mA or higher.
• For the LF signal, set "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
Set frequency
When C3 (C6) = 0%
60Hz
Current input
decrease detection

∗1
2mA 4mA 20mA
Analog input

Normal use range

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
517
 *1 When Pr.573 ≠ "9999" and the terminal 4 (terminal 2) input is calibrated to 2 mA or less in C2 (Pr.902) (C5 (Pr.904)), the operation set in Pr.573
is applied to the frequency at the input of 2 mA or less.

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Continuing operation when the analog current input is lost (Pr.573 = "1,
4, 11, 14, 21, or 24", and Pr.777)
• When Pr.573 = "1, 11, or 21", operation continues at the output frequency before the current input loss.
• When Pr.573 = "4, 14, or 24" and Pr.777 ≠ "9999", operation continues at the frequency set in Pr.777.
• When the start command is turned OFF during current input loss, the inverter output decelerates the motor to a stop
immediately, and the operation is not restarted even if a start command is input again.
• When the current input is restored, the LF signal is turned OFF, and operation is performed according to the current input.
• The following is the operation example during External operation.
Pr.573=1, 11, 21 : Operation continued with the frequency before being lost
Pr.573=4, 14, 24 : Operation continued with Pr.777 setting

Output frequency

Analog input Return

Input current
20mA decrease

4mA 3mA
2mA
Time
STF

LF signal

• The following is the operation example during PID control (reverse action) operation.
Pr.573=1, 11, 21 : Operation continued with the frequency before being lost
Pr.573=4, 14, 24 : Operation continued with Pr.777 setting
Output frequency

Input current
20mA
Set point (fixed) decrease
Return
Measured value
4mA 2mA 3mA

Time
STF
LF signal

PID signal On during input decrease

NOTE
• When the setting is changed to the continuous operation (Pr.573 = "1, 4, 11, 14, 21, or 24") after the input current loss, the
frequency before loss is regarded as 0 Hz.

 Fault output (Pr.573 = "2, 12, or 22")

• When the analog current input becomes 2 mA or lower, the protective function E.LCI (4 mA input fault) is activated and the
output is shut off.

518 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
 • The following is the operation example during PID control (reverse action) operation.

Output frequency
E.LCI occurs 1

Input current
2
20mA decrease
Set point (fixed)
Return
Measured value
4mA 2mA 3mA 3
Time
STF
LF signal 4
PID signal

5
ALM signal

 Fault output after deceleration to stop (Pr.573 = "3, 13, or 23")

• When the analog current input becomes 2 mA or lower, the inverter output decelerates the motor to a stop, and then the
protective function E.LCI (4 mA input fault) is activated and the output is shut off.
6
• When the analog current input is restored during the deceleration, the motor is accelerated again and operates according
to the current input.
• The following is the operation example during PID control (reverse action) operation.
7
Decelerates as the input current is lost
Output frequency
After deceleration stop, E.LCI occurs
8

20mA
Set point (fixed)
Input current
decrease 9
Return
Measured value
3mA
10
4mA 2mA
Time
STF
LF signal

PID signal

ALM signal

• The following is the operation example when the analog input current is restored during deceleration under PID control
(reverse action).

Decelerates as the input current is lost

Normal operation after the current is restored
Output frequency

Input current
20mA
Set point (fixed) decrease
Return
Measured value
4mA 2mA 3mA

Time
STF

LF signal
OFF during
deceleration
PID signal

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
519
  Functions related to current input check
Refer to
Function Operation
page
When the operation continues, the minimum frequency setting is valid even during current
Minimum frequency 428
input loss.
The multi-speed setting signal is prioritized even during current input loss (the motor operates
according to the multi-speed setting even during continuous operation at the predetermined
frequency or during deceleration to a stop).
Multi-speed operation 411
When the multi-speed setting signal is turned OFF while the input current is lost during the
multi-speed operation, the motor is decelerated to a stop even if the parameter is set to
continue operation when the current input is lost.
JOG operation is prioritized even during current input loss (the motor operation switches to
JOB operation even during continuous operation at the predetermined frequency or during
deceleration to a stop).
JOG operation 410
When the JOG signal is turned OFF while the input current is lost during the JOG operation,
the motor is decelerated to a stop even if the parameter is set to continue operation when the
current input is lost.
The MRS signal is enabled even during current input loss (output is shut off by turning ON the
MRS signal MRS signal even during continuous operation at the predetermined frequency or during 524
deceleration to a stop).
When the operation using the remote setting function is changed to the continuous operation
Remote setting after the current input is lost, acceleration, deceleration, and clear operations by the remote 377
setting are disabled. The operations are enabled after restoration of current input.
When the protective function is activated during continuous operation after the current input
Retry function is lost and the retry function is used successfully, operation continues without clearing the 426
frequency setting.
When the operation using compensation by addition or override compensation is changed to
Compensation by addition,
the continuous operation after the current input is lost, compensation by addition or override 501
override compensation
compensation is disabled. The operations are enabled after restoration of current input.
The current before the filter time is applied is used for input loss detection.
Input filter time constant The current after the filter time is applied is used for continuous operation at the output 517
frequency before the input loss.
PID calculation is stopped during current input loss. However, PID control is not disabled (the
operation does not return to normal).
During the pre-charge, end determination or fault determination by the pre-charge function is
PID control not performed when the current input is lost. 601
The sleep function is prioritized even during current input loss. When the clearing condition of
the sleep function is met during current input loss, continuous operation at the predetermined
frequency is restored.
The power failure stop function is prioritized even if current input loss is detected during power
failure.
After the power failure stop and re-acceleration, operation continues at the output frequency
Power failure stop 642
before the input loss.
When the protective function E.LCI is selected when the current input is lost, E.LCI is
activated after the power failure stop.
Traverse operation is performed based on the frequency even during continuous operation
Traverse function 582
during current input loss.

Parameters referred to
Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selectionpage 496

520 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
5.12.8 Input terminal function selection
Use the following parameters to select or change the input terminal functions. 1
Initial
Pr. Name Initial signal Setting range
value

178 STF terminal

0 to 20, 22 to 28, 32, 37, 42 to 48, 50 to 53, 57 2
60 STF (Forward rotation command) to 60, 62, 64 to 74, 76, 77 to 80, 85, 87 to 89, 92
T700 function selection
to 96, 128, 129, 9999
0 to 20, 22 to 28, 32, 37, 42 to 48, 50 to 53, 57
179
T701
STR terminal
function selection
61 STR (Reverse rotation command) to 59, 61, 62, 64 to 74, 76, 77 to 80, 85, 87 to 89, 3
92 to 96, 128, 129, 9999
180 RL terminal function
0 RL (Low-speed operation command)
T702 selection
181 RM terminal function
1 RM (Middle-speed operation command)
4
T703 selection
182 RH terminal function
2 RH (High-speed operation command)
T704 selection
183 RT terminal function 5
3 RT (Second function selection)
T705 selection
184 AU terminal function
4 AU (Terminal 4 input selection)
T706 selection 0 to 20, 22 to 28, 32, 37, 42 to 48, 50 to 53, 57
185 JOG terminal to 59, 62, 64 to 74, 76, 77 to 80, 85, 87 to 89, 92 6
5 JOG (Jog operation selection) to 96, 128, 129, 9999
T707 function selection
186 CS terminal function CS (Selection of automatic restart after
6
T708 selection instantaneous power failure / flying start)
7
187 MRS terminal 24*1 MRS (Output stop)
T709 function selection 10*2 X10 (Inverter run enable)
188 STOP terminal
T710 function selection
25 STP (STOP) (Start self-holding selection) 8
189 RES terminal
62 RES (Inverter reset)
T711 function selection

Pr. Name
Initial
Setting range Description
9
value
699 5 to 50 ms Set the time delay for the input terminal response.
Input terminal filter 9999
T740 9999 No filter for the input terminal
*1 The initial value is for standard models and IP55 compatible models.
10
*2 The initial value is for separated converter types.

 Input terminal function assignment

• Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 to set the functions of the input terminals.
• Refer to the following table and set the parameters.
Signal Refer to
Setting Function Related parameter
name page
Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,
Pr.59 = 0 (initial value) Low-speed operation command 411
Pr.232 to Pr.239
0 RL
Pr.59 ≠ 0 *1 Remote setting (setting clear) Pr.59 377
*2 Stop-on-contact selection 0 Pr.270, Pr.275, Pr.276 577
Pr.270 = "1, 3, 11, 13"
Middle-speed operation Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,
Pr.59 = 0 (initial value) 411
1 RM command Pr.232 to Pr.239
Pr.59 ≠ 0 *1 Remote setting (deceleration) Pr.59 377
Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,
Pr.59 = 0 (initial value) High-speed operation command 411
2 RH Pr.232 to Pr.239
Pr.59 ≠ 0*1 Remote setting (acceleration) Pr.59 377
Pr.44 to Pr.51, Pr.450 to
Second function selection Pr.463, Pr.569, Pr.832, 525
3 RT Pr.836, etc.
Pr.270 = "1, 3, 11, 13"*2 Stop-on-contact selection 1 Pr.270, Pr.275, Pr.276 577
4 AU Terminal 4 input selection Pr.267 496
5 JOG Jog operation selection Pr.15, Pr.16 410

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
521
 Signal Refer to
Setting Function Related parameter
name page
Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.162 to
628, 635
flying start Pr.165, Pr.299, Pr.611
6 CS
Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.135 to
Electronic bypass function 563
Pr.139, Pr.159
7 OH External thermal relay input*3 Pr.9 415
15-speed selection (Combination with multi-speeds of RL, RM, and Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,
8 REX 411
RH) Pr.232 to Pr.239
9 X9 Third function selection Pr.110 to Pr.116 525
10 X10 Inverter run enable (FR-HC2/FR-XC/FR-CV/FR-CC2 connection) Pr.30, Pr.70, Pr.599 724
FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection, instantaneous power failure
11 X11 Pr.30, Pr.70 724
detection
12 X12 PU operation external interlock Pr.79 389
13 X13 External DC injection brake operation start Pr.10 to Pr.12 715
Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to
14 X14 PID control valid 601
Pr.577
15 BRI Brake opening completion Pr.278 to Pr.285 572
16 X16 PU/External operation switchover (External operation with X16-ON) Pr.79, Pr.340 389
Load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost (For
17 X17 Pr.14 708
constant-torque with X17-ON)
18 X18 V/F switchover (V/F control with X18-ON) Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.800 221
19 X19 Load torque high-speed frequency Pr.270 to Pr.274 580
20 X20 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover Pr.380 to Pr.383 372
22 X22 *4*6 Pr.350 to Pr.369 585
Orientation command (for Vector control compatible options)
23 LX Pre-excitation/servo ON *5 Pr.850 715
Output stop Pr.17 524
24 MRS Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.135 to
Electronic bypass function 563
Pr.139, Pr.159
STP
25 Start self-holding selection Pr.250 722
(STOP)
26 MC Control mode switchover Pr.800 221
27 TL Torque limit selection Pr.815 245
28 X28 Start-time tuning start external input Pr.95 558
32 X32 External fault input — 525
37 X37 Traverse function selection Pr.592 to Pr.597 582
42 X42 Torque bias selection 1 Pr.840 to Pr.845 265
43 X43 Torque bias selection 2 Pr.840 to Pr.845 265
Pr.820, Pr.821, Pr.830,
44 X44 P/PI control switchover (P control with X44-ON) 254
Pr.831
45 BRI2 Second brake sequence open completion Pr.641 to Pr.648 572
46 TRG Trace trigger input Pr.1020 to Pr.1047 649
47 TRC Trace sampling start/end Pr.1020 to Pr.1047 649
Pr.261 to Pr.266, Pr.294,
48 X48 Power failure stop external 642
Pr.668
50 SQ Sequence start Pr.414 646
51 X51 Fault clear Pr.414 646
52 X52 Cumulative pulse monitor clear (for Vector control compatible plug-
in options)
Pr.635 321
53 X53 Cumulative pulse monitor clear (control terminal option) (for FR-
A8TP)
57 JOGF JOG forward rotation command Pr.15, Pr.16 410
58 JOGR JOG reverse rotation command Pr.15, Pr.16 410
Pr.291, Pr.419 to Pr.430,
59 CLRN NET position pulse clear 320
Pr.464
Forward rotation command (assignable to the STF terminal
60 STF Pr.250 722
(Pr.178) only)
Reverse rotation command (assignable to the STR terminal
61 STR Pr.250 722
(Pr.179) only)
62 RES Inverter reset Pr.75 336
64 X64 PID forward/reverse action switchover Pr.127 to Pr.134 601
65 X65 PU/NET operation switchover (PU operation with X65-ON) Pr.79, Pr.340 389

522 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
 Signal Refer to
Setting Function Related parameter
name page
66 X66 External/NET operation switchover (NET operation with X66-ON) Pr.79, Pr.340 389
1
Command source switchover (command by Pr.338 or Pr.339
67 X67 Pr.338, Pr.339 400
enabled with X67-ON)

68 NP Simple position pulse train sign

Pr.291, Pr.419 to Pr.430,
Pr.464
320 2
Pr.291, Pr.419 to Pr.430,
69 CLR Simple position droop pulse clear 320
Pr.464
70 X70 DC feeding operation permission*7 Pr.30 724 3
71 X71 DC feeding cancel *7 Pr.30 724
Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to
72 X72 PID P control switchover 601
Pr.577
Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to
4
73 X73 Second PID P control switchover 601
Pr.577
74 X74 Magnetic flux decay output shutoff Pr.850 717
76 X76 Proximity dog Pr.1282 to Pr.1288 303 5
77 X77 Pre-charge end command Pr.760 to Pr.764 618
78 X78 Second pre-charge end command Pr.765 to Pr.769 618
79 X79 Second PID forward/reverse action switchover Pr.753 to Pr.758 601
80 X80 Second PID control valid Pr.753 to Pr.758 601 6
85 X85 SSCNET III communication disabled (for FR-A8NS) *6 Pr.499 —
87 X87 Sudden stop Pr.464 to Pr.494 303
88 LSP Forward stroke end
Pr.419 316, 319 7
89 LSN Reverse stroke end
92 X92 Emergency stop Pr.1103 367
93 X93 Torque control selection Pr.1113 287
94 X94 Control signal input for main circuit power supply MC Pr.30, Pr.137, Pr.248, Pr.254 569 8
95 X95 Converter unit fault input Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.135 to
563
96 X96 Converter unit fault (E.OHT, E.CPU) input Pr.139, Pr.159
128 RLF Low-speed forward rotation command
Pr.6 411 9
129 RLR Low-speed reverse rotation command
9999 - No function — —
*1
*2
When Pr.59 Remote function selection ≠ "0", functions of the RL, RM, and RH signals are changed as shown in the table.
When Pr.270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection = "1, 3, 11, or 13", functions of the RL and RT signals are 10
changed as shown in the table.
*3 The OH signal is activated when the relay contact is open.
*4 When a stop position command is input from outside for orientation control, the FR-A8AX (16-bit digital input option) is required.
*5 Servo ON is enabled in the position control mode.
*6 Available when the plug-in option is connected. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of each option.
*7 The setting is available for the standard structure model and the IP55 compatible model.

NOTE
• The same function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the logic of terminal input is OR.
• The priorities of the speed commands are defined as follows: JOG > multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL, REX) > PID (X14).
• When the Inverter run enable (X10) signal is not assigned, or when the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal is not
assigned while Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", the MRS signal performs the same function.
• The same terminals are used to assign the multi-speed (7-speed) setting and the remote setting. The multi-speed setting and
the remote setting cannot be assigned separately.
• When the Load pattern selection forward/reverse rotation boost (X17) signal is not assigned, the RT signal performs the same
function.
• When Pr.419 = "2" (simple pulse train position command), the terminal JOG is used for the simple position pulse train input
regardless of the setting in Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection.
• When the terminal assignment is changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), wiring may be
mistaken due to different terminal name and signal contents, or may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming
the function of each terminal.

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
523
  Adjusting the response of input terminals (Pr.699)
• Response of the input terminals can be delayed in a range between 5 to 50 ms. (The following is the operation example
of the STF signal.)
Output frequency

Time
ON OFF
STF
Pr.699 9999

Pr.699 Pr.699

NOTE
• The Pr.699 setting is invalid (no filter) for the following signals.
— Input signals which are already in the ON state when the power is turned ON
— Input signals used for the PLC function
— Inverter run enable (X10) signal, Simple position pulse train sign (NP) signal, Simple position droop pulse clear (CLR) signal

5.12.9 Inverter output shutoff

The inverter output can be shut off with the MRS signal. The logic of the MRS signal can also be selected.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0 Normally open input
2 Normally closed input (NC contact input specification)
17
MRS input selection 0 External terminal: Normally closed input (NC contact input
T720
4 specification)
Communication: Normally open input

 Output shutoff signal (MRS signal)

Setting value "0" (Initial Setting value "2"

Motor coasts value)
Output frequency
to stop
Inverter Inverter

MRS MRS
SD SD

Time

MRS signal ON
STF (STR)
signal ON

• When the Output stop (MRS) signal is turned ON while operating the inverter, the inverter output is instantaneously shut
off.
• The response time of the MRS signal is within 2 ms.
• The MRS signal is used in the following cases.
Application Description
To stop the motor using a mechanical brake (e.g.
The inverter output is shut off when the mechanical brake operates.
electromagnetic brake)
To provide interlock to disable the motor operation by the With the MRS signal ON, the motor cannot be driven by the inverter even if
inverter the start signal is input to the inverter.
When the start signal is turned OFF, the inverter decelerates the motor to
To coast the motor to a stop a stop in the preset deceleration time, but when the MRS signal is turned
ON, the motor coasts to a stop.

524 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
 MRS signal logic inversion (Pr.17 = "2")
• When "2" is set in Pr.17, the input specification of the MRS signal is changed to normally closed (NC contact). The inverter 1
will shut off the output when the MRS signal is turned OFF (when the contact is opened).

 Assigning a different action for each MRS signal input via

2
communication and external terminal (Pr.17 = "4")
• When Pr.17 = "4", the MRS signal input from an external terminal is normally closed (NC contact), and the MRS signal
input from communication is normally open (NO contact). This function is useful to perform operation via communication 3
while keeping the ON state of the MRS signal input from the external terminal.
Pr.17 setting
External MRS Communication MRS
0 2 4 4
OFF OFF Operation enabled Output shutoff Output shutoff
OFF ON Output shutoff Output shutoff Output shutoff
ON OFF Output shutoff Output shutoff Operation enabled
ON ON Output shutoff Operation enabled Output shutoff 5
NOTE
• The MRS signal is assigned to terminal MRS in the initial status. By setting "24" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal
function selection), the MRS signal can be assigned to the other terminal.
6
• When using an external terminal to input the MRS signal, the MRS signal shuts off the output in any of the operation modes.
• The MRS signal is valid regardless of whether it is input through the external terminal or via network, but when the MRS signal
is used as the Inverter run enable (X10) signal, input the signal through the external terminal. 7
• When the terminal assignment is changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), wiring may be
mistaken due to different terminal name and signal contents, or may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming
the function of each terminal.
8
Parameters referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
9
5.12.10 External fault input signal
The inverter output can be shut off by inputting the External fault input (X32) signal when an external fault occurs. To assign 10
the X32 signal, set "32" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).

 Details of the operation

• When the External fault input (X32) signal turns OFF during operation, the inverter activates the protective function with
the indication "E.EF" displayed to shut off the output.
• When the X32 signal turns OFF during a stop, the protective function is not activated ("E.EF" is not displayed).
• When the inverter operation is started with the X32 signal OFF, the inverter activates the protective function immediately
to shut off the output.

NOTE
• When the X32 signal turns OFF during zero speed control or pre-excitation while the start signal is OFF, the inverter output is
shut off.
• When the inverter operation is started with the X32 signal OFF, the inverter may output the AC voltage for an extremely brief
moment.

5.12.11 Selecting the condition to activate the Second

function selection (RT) signal or the Third function
selection (X9) signal
The second function can be selected using the RT signal, and the third function can be selected using the X9 signal.

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
525
 The condition to activate the second or third function can be also set.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
The second function is immediately enabled when the
0 RT signal is turned ON, and the third function is immediately
RT signal function enabled when the X9 signal is turned ON.
155
validity condition 0 The function cannot be changed to the second or third function
T730
selection during acceleration/deceleration. When the signal is turned ON
10
during acceleration/deceleration, the function is changed after
the acceleration/deceleration is finished.
• Turning ON the Second function selection (RT) signal enables the second functions.
• Turning ON the Third function selection (X9) signal enables the third functions. For the X9 signal, set "9" in any of Pr.178
to 189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
• The following are the examples of the applications of the second (third) functions.
Switching between regular use and emergency use
Switching between heavy load and light load
Changing the acceleration/deceleration time by break point acceleration/deceleration
Switching characteristics of main motor and sub motor
Connection diagram example for the second function Example of the second acceleration/deceleration time

Setting value "0" (initial value)

Inverter
Output frequency

Start STF/STR
Second function selection RT
Acceleration
High speed RH time is applied
Middle speed Time
RM
SD RT
RH
RM

526 5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
 • Turning ON the RT signal enables the second function, and turning ON the X9 signal enables the third function. The
following table shows the functions which can be changed to the second or third function.
1
First function parameter Second function parameter Third function
Function Refer to page
number number parameter number
Torque boost Pr.0 Pr.46 Pr.112 706
Base frequency Pr.3 Pr.47 Pr.113 707 2
Acceleration time Pr.7 Pr.44 Pr.110 367
Deceleration time Pr.8 Pr.44, Pr.45 Pr.110, Pr.111 367
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
Pr.9 Pr.51 *2 3
Free thermal Pr.600 to Pr.604 Pr.692 to Pr.696 *2 415

Motor permissible load level *1 Pr.607 Pr.608 *2

Stall prevention Pr.22 Pr.48, Pr.49 Pr.114, Pr.115 431 4

Applied motor *1 Pr.71 Pr.450 *2 528
Pr.80 to Pr.84, Pr.90 to
Pr.94, Pr.298, Pr.702, Pr.453 to Pr.457, Pr.560, 5
Motor constant*1 Pr.706, Pr.707, Pr.711, Pr.458 to Pr.462, Pr.738 to *2 532, 551
Pr.712, Pr.717, Pr.721, Pr.747, Pr.860
Pr.724, Pr.725, Pr.859
Excitation current low-speed
scaling factor
Pr.85, Pr.86 Pr.565, Pr.566 *2 711 6
Speed control gain (Advanced *2
Pr.89 Pr.569 228
magnetic flux vector)
Offline auto tuning*1 Pr.96 Pr.463 *2 532, 551 7
*1 Pr.95 Pr.574 *2 558
Online auto tuning
PID control Pr.127 to Pr.134 Pr.753 to Pr.758 *2 601
PID pre-charge function Pr.760 to Pr.764 Pr.765 to Pr.769 *2 618 8
Pr.278 to Pr.285, Pr.639, Pr.641 to Pr.648, Pr.650 to
Brake sequence*1 Pr.640 Pr.651
*2 572

Pr.286 to Pr.288, Pr.994

Droop control
to Pr.995
Pr.679 to Pr.683 *2 738 9
Low-speed range torque *2
Pr.788 Pr.747 233
characteristics*1
Motor control method *1 Pr.800 Pr.451 *2 221 10
Speed control gain Pr.820, Pr.821 Pr.830, Pr.831 *2 254
Analog input filter Pr.822, Pr.826 Pr.832, Pr.836 *2 503
Speed detection filter Pr.823 Pr.833 *2 332
Torque control gain Pr.824, Pr.825 Pr.834, Pr.835 *2 294
Torque detection filter Pr.827 Pr.837 *2 332
*1 The function can be changed by switching the RT signal ON/OFF while the inverter is stopped. If a signal is switched during operation, the
operation method changes after the inverter stops. (Pr.450 ≠ 9999)
*2 When the RT signal is OFF, the first function is valid. When it is ON, the second function is valid.

NOTE
• The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. By setting "3" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection), the RT signal can be assigned to the other terminal.
• When both the RT and X9 signals are ON, the X9 signal (third function) is valid.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521

5. PARAMETERS
5.12 (T) Multi-function input terminal parameters
527
 5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters

Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page

To select the motor to be used Applied motor P.C100, P.C200 Pr.71, Pr.450 528
P.C000, P.C100 to
Pr.9, Pr.51, Pr.71,
P.C105, P.C107,
Pr.80 to Pr.84, Pr.90 to
P.C108, P.C110,
Pr.94, Pr.96, Pr.450,
To maximize the performance of the P.C120 to P.C126,
Offline auto tuning Pr.453 to Pr.463, 532
induction and vector motors P.C200 to P.C205,
Pr.684, Pr.707, Pr.724,
P.C207, P.C208,
Pr.744, Pr.745, Pr.859,
P.C210, P.C220 to
Pr.860
P.C226
Pr.9, Pr.51, Pr.71,
Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83,
P.C000, P.C100 to
Pr.84, Pr.90, Pr.92,
P.C108, P.C110,
Pr.93, Pr.96, Pr.450,
P.C120, P.C122,
Pr.453, Pr.454, Pr.456
P.C123, P.C126,
to Pr.458, Pr.460,
To maximize the performance of the PM motor offline auto P.C130 to P.C133,
Pr.461, Pr.463, Pr.684,
PM motor to perform Vector control tuning (under Vector P.C135, P.C150, 542
Pr.702, Pr.706, Pr.707,
operation control) P.C200 to P.C208,
Pr.711, Pr.712, Pr.724,
P.C210, P.C220,
Pr.725, Pr.738 to
P.C222, P.C223,
Pr.740, Pr.743 to
P.C226, P.C230 to
Pr.746, Pr.859, Pr.860,
P.C233, P.C235
Pr.1002, Pr.1412,
Pr.1413
Pr.9, Pr.51, Pr.71,
P.C000, P.C100 to
Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83,
P.C108, P.C110,
Pr.84, Pr.90, Pr.92,
P.C120, P.C122,
Pr.93, Pr.96, Pr.450,
P.C123, P.C126,
Pr.453, Pr.454, Pr.456
P.C130 to P.C133,
to Pr.458, Pr.460,
To maximize the performance of the P.C135, P.C150,
PM motor offline auto Pr.461, Pr.463, Pr.684,
PM motor to perform PM sensorless P.C182, P.C185, 551
tuning Pr.702, Pr.706, Pr.707,
vector control operation P.C200 to P.C208,
Pr.711, Pr.712, Pr.717,
P.C210, P.C220,
Pr.721, Pr.724, Pr.725,
P.C222, P.C223,
Pr.738 to Pr.747,
P.C226, P.C230 to
Pr.788, Pr.859, Pr.860,
P.C233, P.C235,
Pr.1002, Pr.1412,
P.C282, P.C285
Pr.1413
To perform high accuracy operation
without being affected by temperature Online auto tuning P.C111, P.C211 Pr.95, Pr.574 558
and high-torque/ultra-low speed
Encoder P.C140, P.C141, Pr.359, Pr.369, Pr.851,
To use the motor with encoder 94
specifications P.C240, P.C241 Pr.852
To detect loss of encoder signals Signal loss detection P.C148, P.C248 Pr.376, Pr.855 561

5.13.1 Applied motor

By setting the applied motor type, the thermal characteristic appropriate for the motor can be selected.
When using a constant-torque or PM motor, the electronic thermal O/L relay function is set according to the motor.

528 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
When the Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector
control is selected, the motor constant necessary for control (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA, SF-V5RU (1500 r/
min series), MM-CF, etc.) is also selected at the same time.
1
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

71
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 30,
33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, By selecting a motor, the thermal characteristic
2
Applied motor 0
C100 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090, and motor constant of each motor are set.
8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24,
30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, Set this parameter when using the second motor
3
450
Second applied motor 9999 70, 73, 74, 330, 333, 334, 8090, (the same specifications as Pr.71).
C200
8093, 8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
9999 The function is disabled.
4
 Setting the applied motor
• Refer to the following list and set the parameters according to the applied motor.
Electronic thermal O/L relay
5
Motor constant value range when performing function
Pr.71 Pr.450 Motor
offline auto tuning (increment) Constant-
Standard PM

0 (Pr.71 initial
torque
6
Standard motor (such as SF-JR) ○
value)
Constant-torque motor (SFJRCA,
1
etc.)
SF-V5RU (other than the 1500 r/
Pr.82 (Pr.455) and Pr.859 (Pr.860) ○ 7
• 0 to 500 A, 9999 (0.01 A)*2
min series)
• 0 to 3600 A, 9999 (0.1 A)*3
Standard motor (such as SF-JR)
Pr.90 (Pr.458), Pr.91 (Pr.459)
2 — Adjustable 5 points V/F (refer to
page 713) • 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 (0.001 Ω)*2
○
8
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor • 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999 (0.01 mΩ)*3
20 Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461) (Induction motor) ○
(SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or lower)
• 0 to 6000 mH, 9999 (0.1 mH)*2
30
Vector control dedicated motor
SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) • 0 to 400 mH, 9999 (0.1 mH)*3 ○
9
SF-THY Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461) (PM motor)
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency • 0 to 500 mH, 9999 (0.01 mH)*2
40 ○
motor SF-HR
Mitsubishi Electric constant-
• 0 to 50 mH, 9999 (0.001 mH)*3
Pr.94 (Pr.462)
10
50 ○
torque motor SF-HRCA • 0 to 100%, 9999 (0.1%)*2
Mitsubishi Electric high- • 0 to 100%, 9999 (0.01%)*3
70 performance energy-saving motor Pr.706 (Pr.738) ○
SF-PR • 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999 (0.1 mV/(rad/s))
330*1 IPM motor MM-CF ○
8090 IPM motor (other than MM-CF) ○
9090 SPM motor ○

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
529
 Electronic thermal O/L relay
Motor constant value range when performing function
Pr.71 Pr.450 Motor
offline auto tuning (increment) Constant-
Standard PM
torque
3 (4)*4 Standard motor (such as SF-JR) ○
Constant-torque motor (SFJRCA,
etc.)
13 (14)*4 SF-V5RU (other than the 1500 r/
○
min series)
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor
23 (24)*4 (SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or lower)
○

Vector control dedicated motor

33 (34)*4 SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) Pr.82 (Pr.455), Pr.859 (Pr.860), Pr.90 (Pr.458), ○
SF-THY Pr.91 (Pr.459), Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461),
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency Pr.94 (Pr.462), Pr.706 (Pr.738)
43 (44)*4 motor SF-HR • Internal data value 0 to 65534, 9999 (1) ○

Mitsubishi Electric constant- The display increment can be changed in Pr.684.

53 (54)*4 torque motor SF-HRCA
○

Mitsubishi Electric high-

73 (74)*4 performance energy-saving motor ○
SF-PR
333 (334)*1*4 IPM motor MM-CF ○
*4 IPM motor (other than MM-CF) ○
8093 (8094)
9093 (9094)*4 SPM motor ○

5 Standard motor Pr.82 (Pr.455) and Pr.859 (Pr.860) ○

• 0 to 500 A, 9999 (0.01 A)*2
Wye
• 0 to 3600 A, 9999 (0.1 A)*3
connection
Pr.90 (Pr.458), Pr.91 (Pr.459)
15 Constant-torque motor • 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 (0.001 Ω)*2 ○
*3
• 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999 (0.01 mΩ)
Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461)
6 Standard motor • 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 (0.001 Ω)*2 ○
• 0 to 3600 mΩ, 9999 (0.1 mΩ)*3
Delta
Pr.94 (Pr.462)
connection
• 0 to 500 Ω, 9999 (0.01 Ω)*2
16 Constant-torque motor • 0 to 100 Ω, 9999 (0.01 Ω)*3 ○

— 9999
(initial No second applied motor
value)
*1 The setting is available for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or lower.
*2 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*3 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
*4 The same operation is performed for the both settings.

NOTE
• Regardless of the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting, offline auto tuning can be performed according to Pr.96 (Pr.463) Auto tuning
setting/status. (Refer to page 532 for offline auto tuning.)

 Using two types of motors (RT signal, Pr.450)

• When using two types of motors with one inverter, set Pr.450 Second applied motor.
• The setting value "9999" (initial value) disables the second motor.
• If Pr.450 ≠ 9999, the following parameters will be enabled by turning ON the Second function selection (RT) signal.

530 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
 Function RT signal ON (second motor) RT signal OFF (first motor)
Electronic thermal O/L relay Pr.51 Pr.9 1
Applied motor Pr.450 Pr.71
Control method selection Pr.451 Pr.800
Motor capacity
Number of motor poles
Pr.453
Pr.454
Pr.80
Pr.81
2
Motor excitation current Pr.455 Pr.82
Rated motor voltage Pr.456 Pr.83
Rated motor frequency Pr.457 Pr.84 3
Motor constant (R1) Pr.458 Pr.90
Motor constant (R2) Pr.459 Pr.91
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld)
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq)
Pr.460
Pr.461
Pr.92
Pr.93
4
Motor constant (X) Pr.462 Pr.94
Auto tuning setting/status Pr.463 Pr.96
Frequency search gain Pr.560 Pr.298 5
Online auto tuning selection Pr.574 Pr.95
Induced voltage constant (phi f) Pr.738 Pr.706
Motor Ld decay ratio
Motor Lq decay ratio
Pr.739
Pr.740
Pr.711
Pr.712
6
Starting resistance tuning compensation Pr.741 Pr.717
Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse
Pr.742 Pr.721
width 7
Maximum motor frequency Pr.743 Pr.702
Motor inertia (integer) Pr.744 Pr.707
Motor inertia (exponent) Pr.745 Pr.724
Motor protection current level Pr.746 Pr.725 8
Torque current/Rated PM motor current Pr.860 Pr.859

NOTE
• The RT signal is the Second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 525.)
9
• The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. 10
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Automatic change of torque boost for the SF-PR motor

• When the SF-PR motor is selected (Pr.71 = "70, 73, or 74"), the Pr.0 Torque boost is automatically changed to enable
output of the 6 Hz 150% torque under V/F control by setting Pr.81 Number of motor poles according to the number of
the SF-PR motor poles.

NOTE
• When selecting the automatic change of torque boost for the SF-PR motor, set Pr.14 Load pattern selection = "0 (initial
value)".
• When the Pr.0 setting is changed from its initial value, the automatic change is not performed.

 Automatic change of Pr.0 Torque boost and Pr.12 DC injection brake

operation voltage
• When initial values are set in Pr.0 and Pr.12, the Pr.0 and Pr.12 settings are automatically changed to the values in the
following table by changing the Pr.71 setting.

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
531
 Pr.12 value (%) after automatic
Inverter Pr.0 value (%) after automatic change
change
Constant-
Standard
torque SF-PR*3 Constant-
motor*1 Standard
FR-A820-[] FR-A840-[] motor *2 torque SF-PR *3
motor*1 *2
SLD/ ND/ SLD/ ND/ Pr.81 ≠ motor
Pr.81 = 2 Pr.81 = 4 Pr.81 = 6
LD HD LD HD 2, 4, 6
00046 (0.4K) 00023 (0.4K) 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
00077(0.75K) 00038(0.75K) 6 6 4 7.4 6 6.4 4 4 4
00105(1.5K) 00052(1.5K) 4 4 3 5.8 5 3.7 4 4 2.5
00167(2.2K) 00083(2.2K) 4 4 2.5 6 4.5 3.3 4 4 2.5
00250(3.7K) 00126(3.7K) 4 4 2.5 6.4 4.5 4.2 4 4 2.5
00340(5.5K) 00170(5.5K) 3 2 2 4.5 3.7 3.3 4 2 2
00490(7.5K) 00250(7.5K) 3 2 2 4.4 4.5 3.8 4 2 2
00630(11K) 00310(11K) 2 2 1.5 3.5 3.3 3.5 2 2 1.5
00770(15K) 00380(15K) 2 2 1.5 4.5 3 3.5 2 2 1.5
00930(18.5K) 00470(18.5K) 2 2 1.5 4 3.2 3 2 2 1.5
01250(22K) 00620(22K) 2 2 1.5 2.5 3.4 3 2 2 1
01540(30K) 00770(30K) 2 2 1 3 2 2.5 2 2 1
01870(37K) 00930(37K) 2 2 1 2 2.5 2.6 2 2 1
02330(45K) 01160(45K) 1.5 2 1.5 2 1 2 2 2.4 2 2 1
03160(55K) 01800(55K) 1.5 2 1.5 2 0.7 2 2 0.7 2 2 1
03800 (75K) or 02160 (75K) or
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
higher higher
*1 Pr.71 = "0, 2 to 6, 20, 23, 24, 40, 43, or 44" (standard motor)
*2 Pr.71 = "1, 13 to 16, 50, 53, or 54" (constant-torque motor)
*3 Pr.71 = "70, 73, or 74" (SF-PR)

NOTE
• When the Pr.0 and Pr.12 settings are changed from their initial values, the automatic change is not performed.
• When the SF-PR motor is selected (Pr.71 = "70, 73, or 74"), the output current may become large due to a small load by setting
Pr.81 Number of motor poles according to the number of the SF-PR motor poles.
• When the SF-PR motor is used, the output current tends to increase compared with the case where the SF-JR or SF-HR motor
is used. Depending on the load conditions, the output current may increase even though the torque boost value has been
automatically changed. When the protective function such as the electronic thermal O/L relay (E.THT, E.THM) or stall
prevention (OL, E.OLT) is activated, adjust the Pr.0 Torque boost according to the load.

CAUTION
• Make sure to set this parameter correctly according to the motor used. Incorrect setting may cause the motor and the
inverter to overheat and burn.

Parameters referred to
Pr.0 Torque boostpage 706
Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltagepage 715
Pr.14 Load pattern selectionpage 708
Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/statuspage 532
Pr.100 to Pr.109 (Adjustable 5 points V/F)page 713
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.684 Tuning data unit switchoverpage 532
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221

5.13.2 Offline auto tuning for an induction motor

Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector

The offline auto tuning enables the optimal operation of a motor.

• Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or Vector control, automatic measurement
of motor constants (offline auto tuning) enables optimal operation of motors even when motor constants vary, when a motor
of another company is used, or when the wiring distance is long.

532 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
For the offline auto tuning for a PM motor, refer to page 551.

Pr. Name
Initial
value
Setting range Description 1
684 Tuning data unit 0 Internal data converted value
0
C000 switchover 1 The value is indicated in A, Ω, mH, or %.
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24, 2
30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50,
71 By selecting a motor, the thermal characteristic and motor
Applied motor 0 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330, 333,
C100 constant of each motor are set.
334, 8090, 8093, 8094,
9090, 9093, 9094 3
0.4 to 55 kW*2
80 Set the applied motor capacity.
Motor capacity 9999 0 to 3600 kW*3
C101
9999
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
V/F control
Set the number of motor poles.
4
81 Number of motor
9999
C102 poles 9999 V/F control
Inverter 0 to 500 A*2
9
C103
Electronic
thermal O/L relay
rated Set the rated motor current. 5
current*1 0 to 3600 A*3
83 Rated motor
C104 voltage 200/400 V*4 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).

84 Rated motor 10 to 400 Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz). 6

9999
C105 frequency 9999 The setting value of Pr.3 Base frequency is used.
707 Motor inertia Set the motor inertia.
9999 10 to 999, 9999
C107
724
(integer)
Motor inertia
9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR,
SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA, SF-V5RU (1500 r/min
7
9999 0 to 7, 9999
C108 (exponent) series) and so on) is used.
0 No offline auto tuning

96 Auto tuning
1 Offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating. 8
0 Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor (V/F
C110 setting/status 11
control, IPM motor MM-CF). (Refer to page 638.)
101 Offline auto tuning is performed with the motor rotating.
90 Motor constant 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 *2*5 9
9999
C120 (R1) 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*3*5
91 Motor constant 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*2*5
C121 (R2)
9999
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*3*5 10
Motor constant 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2*5
92
(L1)/d-axis 9999
C122 0 to 400 mH, 9999*3*5 Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is
inductance (Ld)
Motor constant automatically set.)
93 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2*5
(L2)/q-axis 9999 9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR,
C123 0 to 400 mH, 9999*3*5 SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA, SF-V5RU (1500 r/min
inductance (Lq)
series) and so on) is used.
94 Motor constant
C124 (X)
9999 0 to 100%, 9999*5

82 Motor excitation 0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5

9999
C125 current 0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
Torque current/ 0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5
859
Rated PM motor 9999
C126 0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
current
The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for
0 to 32767
298 Frequency search the frequency search.
9999
A711 gain The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-
9999
JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23,
24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44,
Set this parameter when using the second motor
450 Second applied 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330,
9999 (the same specifications as Pr.71).
C200 motor 333, 334, 8090, 8093, 8094,
9090, 9093, 9094
9999 The function is disabled.
0.4 to 55 kW*2
453 Second motor Set the capacity of the second motor.
9999 0 to 3600 kW*3
C201 capacity
9999 V/F control

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
533
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
Number of 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of poles of the second motor.
454
second motor 9999
C202 9999 V/F control
poles
0 to 500 A*2 This function is enabled when the RT signal is ON.
51 Second electronic
9999 0 to 3600 A*3 Set the rated motor current.
C203 thermal O/L relay
9999 Second electronic thermal O/L relay disabled.
456 Rated second
C204 motor voltage 200/400 V*4 0 to 1000 V Set the rated voltage (V) of the second motor.

457 Rated second 10 to 400 Hz Set the rated frequency (Hz) of the second motor.
9999
C205 motor frequency 9999 The Pr.84 Rated motor frequency setting is used.
744 Second motor
9999 10 to 999, 9999 Set the inertia of the second motor.
C207 inertia (integer)
9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR,
745 Second motor
9999 0 to 7, 9999 SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.
C208 inertia (exponent)
0 No auto tuning for the second motor.
Offline auto tuning is performed without the second motor
Second motor 1
463 rotating.
auto tuning 0
C210 Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor (V/F
setting/status 11
control, IPM motor MM-CF). (Refer to page 638.)
101 Offline auto tuning is performed with the second motor rotating.
458 Second motor 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*2*5
9999
C220 constant (R1) 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*3*5
459 Second motor 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*2*5
9999
C221 constant (R2) 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*3*5
Second motor 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2*5
460 constant (L1) / d-
9999
C222 axis inductance 0 to 400 mH, 9999*3*5
(Ld) Tuning data of the second motor.
Second motor 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*2*5 (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically
461 constant (L2) / q- set.)
9999
C223 axis inductance 0 to 400 mH, 9999*3*5 9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR,
(Lq) SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.
462 Second motor
C224 constant (X)
9999 0 to 100%, 9999*5

455 Second motor 0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5

9999
C225 excitation current 0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
Second motor 0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5
860 torque current/
9999
C226 Rated PM motor 0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
current
The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for
0 to 32767
Second the frequency search of the second motor.
560
frequency search 9999 The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-
A712
gain 9999 JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used for the
second motor.
*1 For the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower, it is set to 85% of the inverter rated current.
*2 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*3 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
*4 The initial value differs according to the voltage class (200 V / 400 V).
*5 The setting range and unit change according to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting.

534 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
 • The function is enabled under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and Vector control. 1
• By using the offline auto tuning function, the optimum operation characteristics are obtained for a motor other than Mitsubishi
Electric standard motors (SF-JR 0.4 kW or higher), high-efficiency motors (SF-HR 0.4 kW or higher), Mitsubishi Electric
constant-torque motors (SF-JRCA 4P, SF-HRCA 0.4 kW to 55 kW), Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-serving
motor (SF-PR), or Vector control dedicated motors (SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series)), such as an induction motor of other
2
manufacturers, SF-JRC, or SF-TH, or with a long wiring length (30 m or longer).
• Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor.
• During offline auto tuning, the motor rotation can be locked (Pr.96 = "1") or unlocked (Pr.96 = "101"). The tuning is more 3
accurate when the motor rotates.
• Reading/writing of the motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled. The offline auto tuning data (motor constants)
can be copied to another inverter using the operation panel.
• The offline auto tuning status can be monitored on the operation panel or the parameter unit. 4

 Before performing offline auto tuning 5

Check the following points before performing offline auto tuning:
• Check that a value other than "9999" is set in Pr.80 and Pr.81, and Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless
vector control, or Vector control is selected (with Pr.800). 6
• Check that a motor is connected. (Check that the motor is not rotated by an external force during tuning.)
• Select a motor with the rated current equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (The motor capacity must be 0.4 kW
or higher.) If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed
7
and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the
inverter rated current.
• Tuning is not available for a high-slip motor, high-speed motor, or special motor.
8
• The maximum frequency is 400 Hz.
• The motor may rotate slightly even if offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/
status = "1"). (The slight motor rotation does not affect the tuning performance.)
9
Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates.
(Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications.)
• Check the following points for the offline auto tuning with motor rotation (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "101").
The torque is not sufficient during tuning.
10
Check that the motor can be rotated up to the speed close to the rated speed.
Check that the mechanical brake is released.
• Offline auto tuning is not performed correctly when the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) is inserted
between the inverter and motor. Be sure to remove it before performing tuning.
• Make sure to connect the encoder to the motor without coaxial misalignment for Vector control. Set the speed ratio to 1:1.

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
535
  Settings
• To perform tuning, set the following parameters about the motor.
First Second
motor motor Name Initial value Description
Pr. Pr.
80 453 Motor capacity 9999 (V/F control) Set the motor capacity (kW).
81 454 Number of motor poles 9999 (V/F control) Set the number of motor poles (2 to 12).
Control method Set this parameter under Vector control or Real sensorless vector
800 451 20
selection control.
Electronic thermal O/L
9 51 Inverter rated current Set the rated motor current (A).
relay
83 456 Rated motor voltage 200 V / 400 V*1 Set the rated motor voltage (V) printed on the motor's rating plate.*2

84 457
Rated motor
9999 Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).*2When the setting is "9999", the
frequency Pr.3 Base frequency setting is used.
Set this parameter according to the motor.*3 Three types of motor
71 450 Applied motor 0 (standard motor) constant setting ranges, units and tuning data can be stored according
to settings.
Set "1" or "101".
1: Tuning is performed without the motor rotating. (Excitation noise
Auto tuning setting/
96 463 0 occurs at this point.)
status
101: Tuning is performed with the motor rotating. The motor can rotate
up to the speed near the rated motor frequency.
*1 The initial value differs according to the voltage class (200 V / 400 V).
*2 For the settings for the SF-V5RU, refer to page 94.
*3 Set Pr.71 Applied motor according to the motor to be used and the motor constant setting range. According to the Pr.71 setting, the range of
the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be changed. (For other setting values of Pr.71, refer to page 528.)

Pr.71 setting
Motor constant Motor constant
Motor Motor constant parameter
parameter mH, %, parameter internal
Ω, mΩ, and A unit setting
and A unit setting data setting
Mitsubishi Electric SF-JR, SF-TH 0 (initial value) 3 (4) —
standard motor SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 20 23 (24) —
Mitsubishi Electric SF-HR 40 43 (44) —
high-efficiency motor Others 0 (initial value) 3 (4) —
SF-JRCA 4P, SF-TH (constant-
1 13 (14) —
Mitsubishi Electric torque)
constant-torque motor SF-HRCA 50 53 (54) —
Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 1 13 (14) —
Mitsubishi Electric
high-performance SF-PR 70 73 (74) —
energy-saving motor
SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series)
30 33 (34) —
Vector control SF-THY
dedicated motor SF-V5RU (other than the 1500 r/min
1 13 (14) —
series)
Other manufacturer's 5 (wye connection motor)
— 0 (initial value) 3 (4)
standard motor 6 (delta connection motor)
Other manufacturer's 15 (wye connection motor)
— 1 13 (14)
constant-torque motor 16 (delta connection motor)

NOTE
• When the SF-V5RU (other than the 1500 r/min series) is used, be sure to perform auto tuning after setting "1, 13, or 14" in
Pr.71 and setting Pr.83 and Pr.84.
• When Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time = "0" or Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage = "0", offline auto
tuning is performed at the initial setting of Pr.11 or Pr.12.
• When position control is selected (Pr.800 = "3 or 5" (when the MC signal is OFF)), offline auto tuning is not performed.
• If "wye connection" or "delta connection" is incorrectly selected in Pr.71, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real
sensorless vector control, and Vector control are not performed properly.

536 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
 • For tuning accuracy improvement, set the following parameters when the motor constants are known in advance.

First motor Second

Name
Mitsubishi Electric motor
(SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, Other motors
1
Pr. motor Pr.
SF-HRCA, SF-V5RU)
707 744 Motor inertia (integer) Motor inertia*4
724 745 Motor inertia (exponent)
9999 (initial value)
Jm = Pr.707 × 10^(-Pr.724) (kg·m2) 2
*4 The setting is valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in both Pr.707 (Pr.744) and Pr.724 (Pr.745).

 Performing tuning
3
• Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit if the inverter is in the state ready
for tuning. The motor starts by turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable.
4

• In the PU operation mode, press / on the operation panel.

For External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
5
NOTE
• Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of the MRS signal. 6
• To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or on the operation panel.

(Turning OFF the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) also ends tuning.)
• During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid (initial value). 7
Input terminals <valid signals>: STP (STOP), OH, MRS, RT, RES, STF, STR, S1, and S2
Output terminals: RUN, OL, IPF, FM/CA, AM, A1B1C1, and So (SO)
• When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM/CA and AM, the progress status of offline 8
auto tuning is output in 15 steps from FM/CA and AM.
• Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the Second function selection (RT) signal during offline auto tuning. Auto tuning will not
be performed properly.
• Setting offline auto tuning (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "1 or 101") will make pre-excitation invalid. 9
• When the offline auto tuning with motor rotation is selected (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "101"), take caution and
ensure safety against the rotation of the motor.
• Since the Inverter running (RUN) signal turns ON when tuning is started, pay close attention especially when a sequence which
releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
10
• When executing offline auto tuning, input the operation command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
of the inverter.
• While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn ON the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal for tuning in the PU
operation mode.

• During tuning, the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as follows.

Operation panel (FR-DU08) display LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) display
Tuning status
Pr.96 = "1" Pr.96 = "101" Pr.96 = "1" Pr.96 = "101"

AutoTune 12:34 AutoTune 12:34

TUNE TUNE
(1) Setting 1 101
--- STOP PU --- STOP PU
PREV NEXT PREV NEXT

AutoTune 12:34 AutoTune 12:34

TUNE TUNE
(2) During tuning 102
2
STF FWD PU STF FWD PU
PREV NEXT PREV NEXT

AutoTune 12:34 AutoTune 12:34

(3) Normal TUNE TUNE

completion Completed 3 Completed 103

STF STOP PU STF STOP PU
Blinking Blinking PREV NEXT
PREV NEXT

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
537
 • Note: Offline auto tuning time (with the initial setting)
Offline auto tuning setting Time
No motor rotation (Pr.96 = "1") About 25 to 120 s. (The time depends on the inverter capacity and motor type.)
About 40 s. (The following offline auto tuning time is set according to the acceleration/deceleration time
With motor rotation (Pr.96 = "101")
setting. Offline auto tuning time = acceleration time + deceleration time + about 30 s)

• When offline auto tuning ends, press on the operation panel during PU operation. For External operation, turn OFF
the start signal (STF signal or STR signal).
This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)

NOTE
• The motor constants measured once during offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until offline
auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared when performing All parameter clear.
• Changing Pr.71 (Pr.450) after tuning completion will change the motor constant. For example, if "3" is set in Pr.71 after tuning
is performed with Pr.71 = "0", the tuning data becomes invalid. To use the tuned data, set "0" again in Pr.71.

• If offline auto tuning has ended in error (see the following table), motor constants are not set. Perform an inverter reset and
restart tuning.

Error display Error cause Countermeasures

8 Forced end Set Pr.96 = "1 or 101" and try again.
9 Inverter protective function operation Make the setting again.
Set the acceleration/deceleration time longer.
91 The current limit (stall prevention) function is activated. Set Pr.156 Voltage reduction selection during
stall prevention operation = "1".
Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation.
92 The converter output voltage fell to 75% of the rated voltage.
Check the Pr.83 Rated motor voltage setting.
Calculation error. Check the Pr.83 and Pr.84 settings.
93
The motor is not connected. Check the motor wiring and make the setting again.
Rotation tuning frequency setting error.
Check the Pr.1 Maximum frequency and Pr.31 to
94 (The frequency command for the tuning was given to exceed the
Pr.36 Frequency jump settings.
maximum frequency setting, or to be in the frequency jump range.)

• When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto
tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
• When the rated power supply of the motor is 200/220 V (400/440 V) 60 Hz, set the rated motor current multiplied by 1.1 in
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay after tuning is complete.
• For a motor with a PTC thermistor, thermal protector, or other thermal detector, set "0" (motor overheat protection by
inverter invalid) in Pr.9 to protect the motor from overheating.

NOTE
• An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is restored, the inverter starts
normal operation. Therefore, when the STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor starts forward (reverse) rotation.
• Any fault occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. However, if the retry function is set, no retry is
performed.
• The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.

CAUTION
• Note that the motor may start running suddenly.
• For performing offline auto tuning with the motor rotating in vertical lift applications, etc., caution is required to avoid falling
due to insufficient torque.

538 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
  Changing the motor constants
• The motor constants can be set directly when the motor constants are known in advance, or by using the data measured 1
during offline auto tuning.
• According to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be
changed. The changed settings are stored in the EEPROM as the motor constant parameters. 2
 Changing the motor constants (when setting the Pr.92 and Pr.93 motor
constants in units of mH) 3
• Set Pr.71 as follows.
Motor Pr.71 setting

Mitsubishi Electric standard motor

SF-JR 0 (initial value) 4
SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 20
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor
SF-HR 40
SF-JRCA 4P 1
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor
SF-HRCA 50 5
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance
SF-PR 70
energy-saving motor

Vector control dedicated motor

SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series)
SF-V5RU (other than the 1500 r/min series) 1
30
6
• Use the following formula to find the Pr.94 setting value and set a desired value as the motor constant parameter.

M2 7
The setting value of Pr.94 =（1 - ）×100(％)
L1×L2

R1 I1 I2 8
R1: Primary resistance
R2: Secondary resistance
I1: Primary leakage inductance

V M R2/S
I2: Secondary leakage inductance
M: Excitation inductance
9
S: Slip

L1= I1+ M: Primary inductance

L2= I2+ M: Secondary inductance 10
Equivalent circuit diagram of the motor

First motor Second Setting

Name Setting range Initial value
Pr. motor Pr. increments
Motor excitation current (no load 0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
82 455
current) 0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
*1
0 to 50 Ω, 9999 0.001 Ω*1
90 458 Motor constant (R1)
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*2 0.01 mΩ*2
0 to 50 Ω, 9999*1 0.001 Ω*1
91 459 Motor constant (R2)
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*2 0.01 mΩ*2
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*1 0.1 mH*1
92 460
inductance (Ld) 0 to 400 mH, 9999*2 0.01 mH*2 9999

Motor constant (L2)/q-axis 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*1 0.1 mH *1

93 461
inductance (Lq) 0 to 400 mH, 9999 *2
0.01 mH*2
0.1%*1
94 462 Motor constant (X) 0 to 100%, 9999
0.01%*2
Torque current/Rated PM motor 0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
859 860
current 0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1

*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.

*2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
539
 NOTE
• If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi Electric motors (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-
JRCA, SF-HRCA and SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) and so on) are used.

 Changing the motor constants (when setting motor constants in the

internal data of the inverter)
• Set Pr.71 as follows.
Motor Pr.71 setting
SF-JR, SF-TH 3 (4)
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 23 (24)
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor SF-HR 43 (44)
Others 3 (4)
SF-JRCA 4P, SF-TH (constant-torque) 13 (14)
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor SF-HRCA 53 (54)
Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13 (14)
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance
SF-PR 73 (74)
energy-saving motor
SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series), SF-THY 33 (34)
Vector control dedicated motor
SF-V5RU (other than the 1500 r/min series) 13 (14)
Other manufacturer's standard motor — 3 (4)
Other manufacturer's constant-torque
— 13 (14)
motor

• Set desired values as the motor constant parameters. The display units of the read motor constants can be changed with
Pr.684 Tuning data unit switchover. Setting Pr.684 = "1" disables parameter setting changes.
Pr.684 = 0 (initial value) Pr.684 = 1
First motor Second Initial
Name Setting Unit
Pr. motor Pr. Setting range Range indication value
increments indication
0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
82 455 Motor excitation current
0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
0 to 50 Ω, 9999*1 0.001 Ω*1
90 458 Motor constant (R1)
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*2 0.01 mΩ*2
0 to 50 Ω, 9999*1 0.001 Ω*1
91 459 Motor constant (R2)
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*2 0.01 mΩ*2
Motor constant (L1)/d- 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*1 0.1 mH*1
92 460 0 to ***, 9999 1
axis inductance (Ld) 0 to 400 mH, 9999*2 0.01 mH*2 9999

Motor constant (L2)/q- 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*1 0.1 mH *1

93 461
axis inductance (Lq) 0 to 400 mH, 9999*2 0.01 mH*2
0.1%*1
94 462 Motor constant (X) 0 to 100%, 9999
0.01%*2
Torque current/Rated 0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
859 860
PM motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1 0 to 32767, 9999 1
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

NOTE
• As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****), refer to the following
setting example when making setting. (The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Therefore, simple
addition of a value to the displayed value does not bring the desired effect.)
Setting example: To slightly increase the Pr.90 value (5%)
When "2516" is displayed for Pr.90, set 2642 (2516 × 1.05 = 2641.8) in Pr.90.
• If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi Electric motors (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-
JRCA, SF-HRCA and SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) and so on) are used.

540 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
 Changing the motor constants (when setting the Pr.92, Pr.93, and Pr.94
motor constants in units of Ω) 1
• Set Pr.71 as follows.
Pr.71 setting
Applied motor
Wye connection motor Delta connection motor 2
Standard motor 5 6
Constant-torque motor 15 16

• Set desired values as the motor constant parameters.

3
Iq = torque current, I100 = rated current, I0 = no load current
Iq = I1002 - I02
4
First motor Second
Name Setting range Setting increments Initial value
Pr. motor Pr.

82 455
Motor excitation current (no 0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1 5
load current) 0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
0 to 50 Ω, 9999*1 0.001 Ω*1
90 458 Motor constant (r1)
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*2 0.01 mΩ*2 6
0 to 50 Ω, 9999*1 0.001 Ω*1
91 459 Motor constant (r2)
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*2 0.01 mΩ*2

92 460 Motor constant (x1)

0 to 50 Ω, 9999*1 0.001 Ω*1 7
0 to 3600 mΩ, 9999*2 0.1 mΩ*2 9999

0 to 50 Ω, 9999*1 0.001 Ω*1

93 461 Motor constant (x2)
0 to 3600 mΩ, 9999*2 0.1 mΩ*2 8
*1
0 to 500 Ω, 9999
94 462 Motor constant (xm) 0.01 Ω
0 to 100 Ω, 9999*2

859 860
Torque current/Rated PM motor 0 to 500 A, 9999
*1
0.01 A*1 9
current 0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1
*1
*2
For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
10
NOTE
• If "wye connection" or "delta connection" is incorrectly selected in Pr.71, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real
sensorless vector control, and Vector control are not performed properly.
• If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi Electric motors (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-
JRCA, SF-HRCA and SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series) and so on) are used.

 Tuning the second motor

• When one inverter switches the operation between two different motors, set the second motor in Pr.450 Second applied
motor. (Refer to page 528.) In the initial setting, no second motor is applied.
• Turning ON the RT signal enables the parameter settings for the second motor as follows.
Function RT signal ON (second motor) RT signal OFF (first motor)
Motor capacity Pr.453 Pr.80
Number of motor poles Pr.454 Pr.81
Motor excitation current Pr.455 Pr.82
Rated motor voltage Pr.456 Pr.83
Rated motor frequency Pr.457 Pr.84
Motor constant (R1) Pr.458 Pr.90
Motor constant (R2) Pr.459 Pr.91
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) Pr.460 Pr.92
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) Pr.461 Pr.93
Motor constant (X) Pr.462 Pr.94
Auto tuning setting/status Pr.463 Pr.96
Frequency search gain Pr.560 Pr.298

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
541
 NOTE
• The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 415
Pr.31 to Pr.36 Frequency jumppage 429
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528
Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selectionpage 431
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221

5.13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (under Vector

control)
Vector

The offline auto tuning enables the optimal operation of a PM motor (under Vector control).
• Automatic measurement of motor constants (offline auto tuning) enables optimal operation of motors for Vector control
even when motor constants vary or when the wiring distance is long.
For the offline auto tuning under Vector control (for induction motor), refer to page 532.

Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
684 Tuning data unit 0 Internal data converted value
0
C000 switchover 1 The value is indicated in A, Ω, mH, or mV.
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24,
30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50,
71 By selecting a motor, the thermal characteristic and motor
Applied motor 0 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330,
C100 constant of each motor are set.
333, 334, 8090, 8093,
8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
0.4 to 55 kW*2
80 Set the applied motor capacity.
Motor capacity 9999 0 to 3600 kW*3
C101
9999 V/F control
81 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of motor poles.
Number of motor poles 9999
C102 9999 V/F control
Inverter 0 to 500 A*2
9 Electronic thermal O/L rated Set the rated motor current.
C103 relay 0 to 3600 A*3
current*1
83 200/400
Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).
C104 V*4
10 to 400 Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
84
Rated motor frequency 9999 As the internal data of the inverter is used, set it correctly
C105 9999
according to the motor specifications.
702 Maximum motor 0 to 400 Hz Set the permissible speed (frequency) of the motor.
9999
C106 frequency 9999 The Pr.84 setting is used.
707
Motor inertia (integer) 9999 10 to 999, 9999
C107 Set the motor inertia.
724 Motor inertia 9999: Inverter internal data
9999 0 to 7, 9999
C108 (exponent)
0 No offline auto tuning
1 Offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating.
96 Auto tuning setting/ Offline auto tuning is performed only for motor constant R1
0 11
C110 status (without motor rotation).
Encoder position tuning and offline auto tuning are performed
101
(with the motor rotating slightly).

542 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
90 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*2*5
1
Motor constant (R1) 9999
C120 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*3*5
0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5
92
C122
Motor constant (L1)/d-
axis inductance (Ld)
9999
0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is 2
automatically set.)
93 Motor constant (L2)/q- 0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5 9999: Inverter internal data is used.
9999
C123 axis inductance (Lq) 0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5
859 Torque current/Rated 0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5
3
9999
C126 PM motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)*5 Set this parameter according to the PM motor specifications.
706
C130
Induced voltage
constant (phi f)
9999 The value calculated from the parameter setting for motor 4
9999
constant is used.
Motor induced voltage Set the exponent n when the induced voltage constant phi f
1412 0 to 2
C135
constant (phi f)
exponent
9999
9999
(Pr.706) is multiplied by 10n.
No exponent setting
5
711
Motor Ld decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is
C131
712
Motor Lq decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999
automatically set.)
9999: Inverter internal data is used. 6
C132
725 Motor protection 100 to 500% Set the maximum current (OCT) level of the motor.
9999
C133 current level 9999 200%

1002
Lq tuning target 50 to 150% Adjust the target current during tuning. 7
current adjustment 9999
C150 9999 100%
coefficient
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 20,
23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 8
44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, Set this parameter when using the second motor
450 330, 333, 334, 8090, (the same specifications as Pr.71).
Second applied motor 9999
C200
8093, 8094, 9090, 9093,
9094 9
9999 The function is disabled.
0.4 to 55 kW*2
453 Set the capacity of the second motor.
C201
Second motor capacity 9999 0 to 3600 kW*3 10
9999 V/F control
454 Number of second 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of poles of the second motor.
9999
C202 motor poles 9999 V/F control
0 to 500 A*2
51 Second electronic Set the rated current of the second motor.
9999 0 to 3600 A*3
C203 thermal O/L relay
9999 The second electronic thermal O/L relay is disabled.
456 Rated second motor 200 V/ 400
0 to 1000 V Set the rated voltage (V) of the second motor.
C204 voltage V*4
10 to 400 Hz Set the rated frequency (Hz) of the second motor.
457 Rated second motor
9999 As the inverter internal data is used for the second motor, set it
C205 frequency 9999
correctly according to the motor specifications.
743 Second motor 0 to 400 Hz Set the permissible speed (frequency) of the second motor.
9999
C206 maximum frequency 9999 The Pr.457 setting is used.
744 Second motor inertia
9999 10 to 999, 9999
C207 (integer) Set the motor inertia of the second motor.
745 Second motor inertia 9999: Inverter internal data
9999 0 to 7, 9999
C208 (exponent)
0 No auto tuning for the second motor.
1 Offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating.
463 Second motor auto Offline auto tuning is performed only for motor constant R1
0 11
C210 tuning setting/status (without motor rotation)
Encoder position tuning and offline auto tuning are performed
101
(with the motor rotating slightly).

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
543
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
458 Second motor 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*2*5
9999
C220 constant (R1) 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*3*5
Second motor 0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5
460
constant (L1) / d-axis 9999 Tuning data of the second motor.
C222 0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5
inductance (Ld) (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically
Second motor 0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5 set.)
461
constant (L2) / q-axis 9999 9999: Inverter internal data is used.
C223 0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5
inductance (Lq)
Second motor torque 0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5
860
current/Rated PM 9999
C226 0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
motor current
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)*5 Set this parameter according to the PM motor specifications.
738 Second motor induced
9999 The value calculated from the parameter setting for motor
C230 voltage constant (phi f) 9999
constant is used.
Second motor induced Set the exponent n when the induced voltage constant phi f
1413 0 to 2
voltage constant (phi f) 9999 (Pr.738) is multiplied by 10n.
C235
exponent 9999 No exponent setting
739 Second motor Ld Tuning data of the second motor.
9999 0 to 100%, 9999
C231 decay ratio (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically
740 Second motor Lq set.)
9999 0 to 100%, 9999
C232 decay ratio 9999: Inverter internal data is used.
Second motor 100 to 500% Set the maximum current (OCT) level of the second motor.
746
protection current 9999
C233 9999 200%
level
373 Encoder position 0 Encoder position tuning disabled.
0
C142*6 tuning setting/status 1 Encoder position tuning enabled.
Control terminal 0 Encoder position tuning disabled.
871 option—Encoder
0
C243*7 position tuning setting/ 1 Encoder position tuning enabled.
status
1105 Encoder magnetic pole 0 to 16383 Encoder position tuning data set.
65535
C143*6 position offset 65535 Encoder position tuning not performed.
Control terminal 0 to 16383 Encoder position tuning data set.
887 option—Encoder
65535
C143*7 magnetic pole position 65535 Encoder position tuning not performed.
offset
*1 For the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower, it is set to 85% of the inverter rated current.
*2 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*3 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
*4 The initial value differs according to the voltage class (200 V / 400 V).
*5 The setting range and unit change according to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting.
*6 The setting is available when the FR-A8AL/FR-A8APR/FR-A8APS/FR-A8APA is installed.
*7 The setting is available when the FR-A8TP is installed.

• Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor.

• Reading/writing of the motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled. The offline auto tuning data (motor constants)
can be copied to another inverter using the operation panel.
• The offline auto tuning status can be monitored on the operation panel or the parameter unit.

 Before performing offline auto tuning

Check the following points before performing offline auto tuning:
• The Vector control is selected.
• Check that a motor is connected. (Check that the motor is not rotated by an external force during tuning.)
• The rated motor current should be equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (The motor capacity must be 0.4 kW or
higher.)
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque
accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter
rated current.
• The maximum frequency is 400 Hz.

544 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
• The motor may rotate slightly even if the offline auto tuning without motor rotation (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status =
"1") is selected. (It does not affect the tuning performance.)
Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates.
1
(Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications.)
• Tuning is not available during position control.
• Tuning may be disabled depending on the motor characteristics.
2
 Settings
• To perform tuning, set the following parameters about the motor. 3
First motor Second
Name Setting value
Pr. motor Pr.
80 453 Motor capacity Motor capacity (kW) 4
81 454 Number of motor poles Number of motor poles (2 to 12)
9 51 Electronic thermal O/L relay Rated motor current (A)
84 457 Rated motor frequency Rated motor frequency (Hz)
83 456 Rated motor voltage Rated motor voltage (V)
5
8090, 8093 (IPM motor),
71 450 Applied motor
9090, 9093 (SPM motor)*1
96 463 Auto tuning setting/status 1, 101 6
*1 Set Pr.71 Applied motor according to the motor to be used. According to the Pr.71 setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting
values and units can be changed. (For other setting values of Pr.71, refer to page 528.)

Pr.71 setting 7
Motor Motor constant parameter Motor constant parameter
Ω, mH, and A unit setting internal data setting
IPM motor 8090 8093 (8094)
SPM motor 9090 9093 (9094)
8
• For tuning accuracy improvement, set the following parameters when the motor constants are known in advance.
First motor Second
Name Setting value 9
Pr. motor Pr.
702 743 Maximum motor frequency Maximum motor frequency (Hz)
707 744 Motor inertia (integer) Motor inertia*1
724 745 Motor inertia (exponent) Jm = Pr.707 × 10^(-Pr.724) (kg·m2) 10
725 746 Motor protection current level Maximum current level of the motor (%)

*1 The setting is valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in both Pr.707 (Pr.744) and Pr.724 (Pr.745).

 Performing tuning

• Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit if the inverter is in the state ready
for tuning. The motor starts by turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable.

• In the PU operation mode, press / on the operation panel.

For External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
545
 NOTE
• Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of the MRS signal.

• To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or on the operation panel. (Turning OFF the start signal (STF signal

or STR signal) also ends tuning.)

• During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid (initial value).
Input terminals <valid signals>: STP (STOP), OH, MRS, RT, RES, STF, STR, S1, and S2
Output terminals: RUN, OL, IPF, FM/CA, AM, A1B1C1, and So (SO)
• When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM/CA and AM, the progress status of offline
auto tuning is output in 15 steps from FM/CA and AM.
• Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the Second function selection (RT) signal during offline auto tuning. Auto tuning will not
be performed properly.
• A motor with 14 or more poles cannot be tuned.
• Since the Inverter running (RUN) signal turns ON when tuning is started, pay close attention especially when a sequence which
releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
• When executing offline auto tuning, input the operation command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
of the inverter.
• While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn ON the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal for tuning in the PU
operation mode.
• Setting offline auto tuning (Pr.96 = "1") will make pre-excitation invalid.

• During tuning, the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as follows.

Pr.96 (Pr.463) 1 101 1 101

setting Operation panel (FR-DU08) display LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) display

AutoTune 12:34 AutoTune 12:34

TUNE TUNE
(1) Setting 1 101
--- STOP PU --- STOP PU
PREV NEXT PREV NEXT

AutoTune 12:34 AutoTune 12:34

TUNE TUNE
(2) During tuning 2 102
STF FWD PU STF FWD PU
PREV NEXT PREV NEXT

AutoTune 12:34 AutoTune 12:34

(3) Normal TUNE TUNE

completion Completed 3 Completed 103

Blinking
STF STOP PU STF STOP PU
Blinking PREV NEXT PREV NEXT

• When offline auto tuning ends, press on the operation panel during PU operation. For External operation, turn OFF
the start signal (STF signal or STR signal). This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the PU's monitor display
returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)

NOTE
• The motor constants measured once during offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until offline
auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared when performing All parameter clear.
• Changing Pr.71 after tuning completion will change the motor constant. For example, if the Pr.71 setting is changed to "8093"
after tuned with Pr.71 = "8090", the tuning data become invalid. To use the tuned data, set "8090" again in Pr.71.

546 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
 • If offline auto tuning has ended in error (see the following table), motor constants are not set.
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
1
Error display Error cause Countermeasures
8 Forced end Set Pr.96 (Pr.463)="1 or 101" and try again.
9 Inverter protective function operation Make the setting again.
Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation.
2
92 The converter output voltage fell to 75% of the rated voltage.
Check the Pr.83 Rated motor voltage setting.
Calculation error.
93 Check the motor wiring and make the setting again.
The motor is not connected.
Rotation tuning frequency setting error.
3
(The frequency command for the tuning was given to exceed Check the Pr.1 Maximum frequency and Pr.31 to Pr.36
94
the maximum frequency setting, or to be in the frequency Frequency jump settings.
jump range.)
4
• When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto
tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
5
NOTE
• An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter starts normal operation. Therefore, when the STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor starts
6
forward (reverse) rotation.
• Any fault occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. However, if the retry function is set, no retry is
performed even when a protective function that performs a retry is activated. 7
• The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.

8
CAUTION
• Note that the motor may start running suddenly.
9
 Parameters updated by tuning results after tuning
Tuning according to Pr.96 (Pr.463) setting
Pr. Name Description
101 1 11 10
90 (458) Motor constant (R1) ○ ○ ○ Resistance per phase
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance
92 (460) ○ ○ — d-axis inductance
(Ld)
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance
93 (461) ○ ○ — q-axis inductance
(Lq)
711 (739) Motor Ld decay ratio ○ ○ — d-axis inductance decay ratio
712 (740) Motor Lq decay ratio ○ ○ — q-axis inductance decay ratio
859 (860) Torque current/Rated PM motor current ○ ○ —
96 (463) Auto tuning setting/status ○ ○ ○
373*1 871*2 Encoder position tuning setting/status ○ — — Encoder position tuning status
Turning data of encoder
1105*1 887*2 Encoder magnetic pole position offset ○ — —
position tuning
○: Tuned, ―: Not tuned
*1 The setting is available when the FR-A8AL/FR-A8APR/FR-A8APS/FR-A8APA is installed.
*2 The setting is available when the FR-A8TP is installed.

NOTE
• If the offline auto tuning is started before the encoder position tuning is finished (Pr.1105 (Pr.887) = "65535") for a PM motor,
the protective function (E.MP) is activated.

 Tuning adjustment (Pr.1002)

• The overcurrent protective function may be activated during Lq tuning for an easily magnetically saturated motor (motor
with a large Lq decay ratio). In such case, adjust the target flowing current used for tuning with Pr.1002 Lq tuning target
current adjustment coefficient.

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
547
  Changing the motor constants
• The motor constants can be set directly when the motor constants are known in advance, or by using the data measured
during offline auto tuning.
• According to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be
changed. The changed settings are stored in the EEPROM as the motor constant parameters.

 Changing the motor constants (when setting motor constants in units of

Ω, mH, or A)
• Set Pr.71 as follows.
Motor Pr.71 setting
IPM motor 8090
SPM motor 9090

• Set desired values as the motor constant parameters.

First motor Second Setting
Name Setting range Initial value
Pr. motor Pr. increments
0 to 50 Ω, 9999*1 0.001 Ω*1
90 458 Motor constant (R1)
*2
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999 0.01 mΩ*2
0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
92 460 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld)
*2
0 to 50 mH, 9999 0.001 mH*2
0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
93 461 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) 9999
0 to 50 mH, 9999*2 0.001 mH*2
706 738 Induced voltage constant (phi f) 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999 0.1 mV (rad/s)
0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
Motor induced voltage constant (phi f)
1412 1413 0 to 2, 9999 1
exponent
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

NOTE
• If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid and the inverter internal constant is used.
• To change a motor induced voltage constant of PM motors, the setting in Pr.706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) or Pr.738
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) must be changed. If the constant after the change exceeds the setting range
of Pr.706 or Pr.738 (0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)), set Pr.1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent or Pr.1413
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent. Set a value in the exponent n in the formula, Pr.706 (Pr.738) ×
10n [mV (rad/s)], to set the induced voltage constant (phi f).
• When Pr.71 (Pr.450) = "8093, 8094, 9093, or 9094", or Pr.1412 (Pr.1413) = "9999", the motor induced voltage constant is as
set in Pr.706 (Pr.738). (No exponent setting)

 Changing the motor constants (when setting a motor constants in the

internal data of the inverter)
• Set Pr.71 as follows.
Motor Pr.71 setting
IPM motor 8093 (8094)
SPM motor 9093 (9094)

548 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
 • Set desired values as the motor constant parameters. The displayed increments of the read motor constants can be
changed with Pr.684 Tuning data unit switchover. Setting Pr.684 = "1" disables parameter setting changes.
1
Pr.684 = 0 (initial value) Pr.684 = 1
First motor Second Initial
Name Setting Setting
Pr. motor Pr. Setting range Setting range value
increments increments
0 to 50 Ω, 9999*1 0.001 Ω*1
2
90 458 Motor constant (R1)
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*2 0.01 mΩ*2
Motor constant (L1)/d- 0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
92 460
axis inductance (Ld) 0 to 50 mH, 9999*2 0.001 mH*2
3
Motor constant (L2)/q- 0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
93 461
axis inductance (Lq) 0 to 50 mH, 9999 *2
0.001 mH*2

706 738
Induced voltage
0 to ***, 9999 1
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s),
0.1 mV (rad/s)
9999
4
constant (phi f) 9999
Torque current/Rated 0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
859 860
PM motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999 *2
0.1 A*2 5
Motor induced voltage
1412 1413 constant (phi f) 0 to 2, 9999 1
exponent

*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.

6
*2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

NOTE
• As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****), refer to the following
7
setting example when making setting. (The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Therefore, simple
addition of a value to the displayed value does not bring the desired effect.)
Setting example: to slightly increase the Pr.90 value (5%) 8
When "2516" is displayed for Pr.90, set 2642 (2516 × 1.05 = 2641.8) in Pr.90.
• If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid. The MM-CF constant is used for the IPM motor MM-CF, and the inverter internal
constant is used for a PM motor other than MM-CF.
• To change a motor induced voltage constant of PM motors, the setting in Pr.706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) or Pr.738 9
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) must be changed. If the constant after the change exceeds the setting range
of Pr.706 or Pr.738 (0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)), set Pr.1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent or Pr.1413 Second
motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent. Set a value in the exponent n in the formula, Pr.706 (Pr.738) × 10n [mV 10
(rad/s)], to set the induced voltage constant (phi f).
• When Pr.71 (Pr.450) = "8093, 8094, 9093, or 9094", or Pr.1412 (Pr.1413) = "9999", the motor induced voltage constant is as
set in Pr.706 (Pr.738). (No exponent setting)

 Encoder position tuning

Encoder position tuning is required when a PM motor with an encoder is driven. The measured offset value between the motor
home magnetic pole position and the encoder home position is stored. Only encoder position tuning can be performed when
offline auto tuning is not required, such as when the parameters for motor constant are set manually, or when offline auto tuning
is already performed.

 Before performing encoder position tuning

• Check that an option for vector control for PM motor, a motor, and an encoder are properly connected.
• Check that a motor (single, stop status) is connected. (Check that the motor is not rotated by an external force during
tuning.)
• The mechanical brake is released.
• Check that the vector control (speed control) for the PM motor with an encoder is selected. (Refer to page 221.)

NOTE
• Encoder position tuning is required when a PM motor is used. (It is disabled when an induction motor is used.)
• When auto tuning is performed while Pr.96 = "101", offline auto tuning and encoder position tuning can be performed at the
same time.

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
549
  Setting
• To perform tuning, set Pr.373 (Pr.871) ="1".

 Performing tuning

• Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit if the inverter is in the state ready
for tuning. The motor starts by turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable.

• In the PU operation mode, press / on the operation panel.

In the external operation mode, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.

NOTE
• The motor shaft rotates up to 2 times during tuning.

• During tuning, the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as follows.

LCD operation panel (FR-LU08)
Status Operation panel (FR-DU08) display
display

AutoTune 12:34
TUNE
(1) Setting
1
--- STOP PU
PREV NEXT

AutoTune 12:34
TUNE
(2) During tuning
2
STF FWD PU
PREV NEXT

AutoTune 12:34
(3) Normal TUNE

completion Completed 3
Blinking STF STOP PU
PREV NEXT

• When encoder position tuning ends, press on the PU in the PU operation mode. For External operation, turn OFF
the start signal (STF signal or STR signal). This operation resets encoder position tuning, and the PU's monitor display
returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)

NOTE
• The encoder position tuning data is stored in Pr.1105 (Pr.887) until encoder position tuning is performed again. However,
performing All parameter clear resets the tuning data.

• If encoder position tuning has ended in error (see the following table), motor constants are not set.
Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
Pr.373 (Pr.871)
Error cause Countermeasures
setting
8 Forced end Set "1" in Pr.373 (Pr.871) and retry.
Identify and remove the cause of the protective function
9 Inverter protective function operation
activation, and make the setting again.
Check the wiring of the motor and the encoder, the brake
93 The motor or the encoder is not connected.
opening, and make the setting again.

• When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, the tuning
does not end properly. (The tuning data have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.

550 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
 • When the protective function (E.EP) is activated during tuning, check the wiring of the motor and the encoder, Pr.359
(Pr.852) setting, and then perform tuning again.
• When tuning ends properly, the counter value of the offset between the motor home magnetic pole position and the
1
encoder home position is written in Pr.1105 (Pr.887).

Parameters referred to
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 415
2
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221
3
5.13.4 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant
tuning) 4
PM

The offline auto tuning enables the optimal operation of a PM motor.

• Automatic measurement of motor constants (offline auto tuning) enables optimal operation of motors for PM sensorless 5
vector control even when motor constants vary or when the wiring distance is long. IPM and SPM motors other than the
MM-CF IPM motor can also be used.
For the offline auto tuning under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and Vector control, 6
refer to page 532.

Pr. Name
Initial
value
Setting range Description 7
684 Tuning data unit 0 Internal data converted value
0
C000 switchover 1 The value is indicated in A, Ω, mH, or mV.
0 to 6, 13 to 16, 20, 23, 24,
30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50,
8
71 By selecting a motor, the thermal characteristic and motor
Applied motor 0 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, 330,
C100 constant of each motor are set.
333, 334, 8090, 8093,
8094, 9090, 9093, 9094
9
0.4 to 55 kW*2
80 Set the applied motor capacity.
Motor capacity 9999 0 to 3600 kW*3
C101

81
9999
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
V/F control
Set the number of motor poles.
10
Number of motor poles 9999
C102 9999 V/F control
Inverter 0 to 500 A*2
9 Electronic thermal O/L rated Set the rated motor current.
C103 relay 0 to 3600 A*3
current*1
83 200/400
Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).
C104 V*4
10 to 400 Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).

84 The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM-CF is

Rated motor frequency 9999 selected, and the inverter internal data is used when a PM
C105 9999
motor other than MM-CF is selected. Use the correct setting
according to the motor specification.
0 to 400 Hz Set the permissible speed (frequency) of the motor.
702 Maximum motor The MM-CF motor maximum frequency is used when the IPM
9999
C106 frequency 9999 motor MM-CF is selected, and Pr.84 setting is used when a PM
motor other than MM-CF is selected.
707
Motor inertia (integer) 9999 10 to 999, 9999
C107 Set the motor inertia.
724 Motor inertia 9999: The MM-CF inertia is used for the IPM motor MM-CF.
9999 0 to 7, 9999
C108 (exponent)
0, 101 No offline auto tuning
Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor
96 Auto tuning setting/ 1
0 (motor other than IPM motor MM-CF).
C110 status
Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor (for
11
IPM motor MM-CF).

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
551
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
90 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*2*5
Motor constant (R1) 9999
C120 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*3*5
92 Motor constant (L1)/d- 0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5 Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is
9999
C122 axis inductance (Ld) *3*5 automatically set.)
0 to 50 mH, 9999
9999: The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM-
93 Motor constant (L2)/q- 0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5 CF is selected, and the inverter internal data is used when a PM
9999
C123 axis inductance (Lq) 0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5 motor other than MM-CF is selected.

859 Torque current/Rated 0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5

9999
C126 PM motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)*5 Set this parameter according to the PM motor specifications.
706 Induced voltage
9999 The value calculated from the parameter setting for motor
C130 constant (phi f) 9999
constant is used.
Motor induced voltage Set the exponent n when the induced voltage constant phi f
1412 0 to 2
constant (phi f) 9999 (Pr.706) is multiplied by 10n.
C135
exponent 9999 No exponent setting
711
Motor Ld decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999
C131
712 Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is
Motor Lq decay ratio 9999 0 to 100%, 9999
C132 automatically set.)
717 Starting resistance 9999: The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM-
9999 0 to 200%, 9999
C182 tuning compensation CF is selected, and the inverter internal data is used when a PM
Starting magnetic pole motor other than MM-CF is selected.
721 0 to 6000 μs, 10000 to
position detection 9999
C185 16000 μs, 9999
pulse width
100 to 500% Set the maximum current (OCT) level of the motor.
725 Motor protection The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM-CF is
9999
C133 current level 9999 selected, and 200% when a PM motor other than MM-CF is
selected.
Lq tuning target 50 to 150% Adjust the target current during tuning.
1002
current adjustment 9999
C150 9999 100%
coefficient
0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 20,
23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43,
44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, 74, Set this parameter when using the second motor
450
Second applied motor 9999 330, 333, 334, 8090, (the same specifications as Pr.71).
C200 8093, 8094, 9090, 9093,
9094
9999 The function is disabled.
*2
0.4 to 55 kW
453 Set the capacity of the second motor.
Second motor capacity 9999 0 to 3600 kW*3
C201
9999 V/F control
454 Number of second 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of poles of the second motor.
9999
C202 motor poles 9999 V/F control
0 to 500 A*2
51 Second electronic Set the rated current of the second motor.
9999 0 to 3600 A*3
C203 thermal O/L relay
9999 The second electronic thermal O/L relay is disabled.
456 Rated second motor 200 V/ 400
0 to 1000 V Set the rated voltage (V) of the second motor.
C204 voltage V*4
10 to 400 Hz Set the rated frequency (Hz) of the second motor.
The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM-CF is
457 Rated second motor
9999 selected for the second motor, and the inverter internal data is
C205 frequency 9999
used when a PM motor other than MM-CF is selected. Use the
correct setting according to the motor specification.
0 to 400 Hz Set the permissible speed (frequency) of the second motor.
743 Second motor The MM-CF motor maximum frequency is used when the MM-
9999
C206 maximum frequency 9999 CF is selected, and Pr.457 setting is used when a motor other
than MM-CF is selected.
744 Second motor inertia
9999 10 to 999, 9999
C207 (integer) Set the inertia of the second motor.
745 Second motor inertia 9999: The MM-CF inertia is used for the IPM motor MM-CF.
9999 0 to 7, 9999
C208 (exponent)

552 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0, 101 No auto tuning for the second motor.
1
Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor
463 Second motor auto 1
0 (motor other than IPM motor MM-CF).
C210 tuning setting/status
11
Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor (for
IPM motor MM-CF).
2
458 Second motor 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*2*5
9999
C220 constant (R1) 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*3*5
Second motor 0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5 Tuning data of the second motor.
3
460
constant (L1) / d-axis 9999 (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically
C222 0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5
inductance (Ld) set.)
461
C223
Second motor
constant (L2) / q-axis 9999
0 to 500 mH, 9999*2*5 9999: The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM-
CF is selected, and the inverter internal data is used when a PM 4
inductance (Lq) 0 to 50 mH, 9999*3*5 motor other than MM-CF is selected.
Second motor torque 0 to 500 A, 9999*2*5
860
current/Rated PM 9999
C226
motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999*3*5 5
0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)*5 Set this parameter according to the PM motor specifications.
738 Second motor induced
9999 The value calculated from the parameter setting for motor
C230 voltage constant (phi f) 9999
constant is used.
Set the exponent n when the induced voltage constant phi f
6
Second motor induced 0 to 2
1413
voltage constant (phi f) 9999 (Pr.738) is multiplied by 10n.
C235
exponent 9999 No exponent setting
739 Second motor Ld
9999 0 to 100%, 9999
7
C231 decay ratio
740 Second motor Lq Tuning data of the second motor.
9999 0 to 100%, 9999
C232 decay ratio (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically
Second starting set.) 8
741
resistance tuning 9999 0 to 200%, 9999 9999: The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM-
C282
compensation CF is selected, and the inverter internal data is used when a PM
Second motor motor other than MM-CF is selected.
742
C285
magnetic pole 9999
0 to 6000 μs, 10000 to
16000 μs, 9999
9
detection pulse width
100 to 500% Set the maximum current (OCT) level of the second motor.
Second motor
746
C233
protection current 9999
9999
The MM-CF constant is used when the IPM motor MM-CF is
selected, and 200% when a PM motor other than MM-CF is
10
level
selected.
*1 For the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower, it is set to 85% of the inverter rated current.
*2 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*3 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
*4 The initial value differs according to the voltage class (200 V / 400 V).
*5 The setting range and unit change according to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting.

• The settings are valid under PM sensorless vector control.

• The offline auto tuning enables the operation with SPM motors and IPM motors other than MM-CF. (When a PM motor other
than the IPM motor MM-CF is used, always perform offline auto tuning.)
• Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor.
• Reading/writing of the motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled. The offline auto tuning data (motor constants)
can be copied to another inverter using the operation panel.
• The offline auto tuning status can be monitored on the operation panel or the parameter unit.

 Before performing offline auto tuning

Check the following points before performing offline auto tuning:
• Check that PM sensorless vector control is selected.
• Check that a motor is connected. (Check that the motor is not rotated by an external force during tuning.)

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
553
 • The rated motor current should be equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (The motor capacity must be 0.4 kW or
higher.)
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque
accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter
rated current.
• The maximum frequency under PM sensorless vector control is 400 Hz.
• The motor may rotate slightly even if offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/
status = "1 or 11"). (It does not affect the tuning performance.)
Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates.
(Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications.)
• Tuning is not available during position control under PM sensorless vector control.
• Tuning may be disabled depending on the motor characteristics.

 Settings
• To perform tuning, set the following parameters about the motor.
First motor Second Setting for a PM motor other than
Name Setting for MM-CF
Pr. motor Pr. MM-CF
80 453 Motor capacity Motor capacity (kW)
81 454 Number of motor poles Number of motor poles (2 to 12) Set by the IPM parameter initialization.
9 51 Electronic thermal O/L relay Rated motor current (A) (Refer to page 231.)
84 457 Rated motor frequency Rated motor frequency (Hz)
83 456 Rated motor voltage Rated motor voltage (V) Initial value (200 V or 400 V)
8090, 8093 (IPM motor),
71 450 Applied motor 330, 333*1
9090, 9093 (SPM motor)*1
96 463 Auto tuning setting/status 1 11
*1 Set Pr.71 Applied motor according to the motor to be used. According to the Pr.71 setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting
values and units can be changed. (For other setting values of Pr.71, refer to page 528.)

Pr.71 setting
Motor Motor constant parameter Motor constant parameter
Ω, mH, and A unit setting internal data setting
MM-CF 330 333 (334)
IPM motor
Other than MM-CF 8090 8093 (8094)
SPM motor 9090 9093 (9094)

NOTE
• Under PM sensorless vector control, tuning cannot be performed even when Pr.96 = "101". When the MM-CF is set to the
applied motor, tuning cannot be performed even when Pr.96 = "1 or 101".

• For tuning accuracy improvement, set the following parameters when the motor constants are known in advance.
First motor Second
Name Setting for a PM motor other than MM-CF Setting for MM-CF
Pr. motor Pr.
702 743 Maximum motor frequency Maximum motor frequency (Hz) 9999 (initial value)
707 744 Motor inertia (integer) Motor inertia*1
9999 (initial value)
724 745 Motor inertia (exponent) Jm = Pr.707 × 10^(-Pr.724) (kg·m2)
725 746 Motor protection current level Maximum current level of the motor (%) 9999 (initial value)
*1 The setting is valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in both Pr.707 (Pr.744) and Pr.724 (Pr.745).

 Performing tuning

• Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit if the inverter is in the state ready
for tuning. The motor starts by turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable.

554 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
 • In the PU operation mode, press / on the operation panel.
For External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts. 1
NOTE
• Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of the MRS signal.
2
• To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or on the operation panel. (Turning OFF the start signal (STF signal

or STR signal) also ends tuning.)

• During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid (initial value). 3
Input terminals <valid signals>: STP (STOP), OH, MRS, RT, RES, STF, STR, S1, and S2
Output terminals: RUN, OL, IPF, FM/CA, AM, A1B1C1, and So (SO)
• When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM/CA and AM, the progress status of offline
auto tuning is output in 15 steps from FM/CA and AM.
4
• Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the Second function selection (RT) signal during offline auto tuning. Auto tuning will not
be performed properly.
• A motor with 14 or more poles cannot be tuned. 5
• Since the Inverter running (RUN) signal turns ON when tuning is started, pay close attention especially when a sequence which
releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
• When executing offline auto tuning, input the operation command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
of the inverter. 6
• While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn ON the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal for tuning in the PU
operation mode.
• Setting offline auto tuning (Pr.96 = "1 or 11") will make pre-excitation invalid. 7
• During tuning, the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as follows.

Pr.96 (Pr.463) 1 11 1 11 8
setting Operation panel (FR-DU08) display LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) display

9
AutoTune 12:34 AutoTune 12:34
TUNE TUNE
(1) Setting 1 11
--- STOP PU --- STOP PU
PREV NEXT PREV NEXT

AutoTune
TUNE
12:34 AutoTune
TUNE
12:34 10
(2) During tuning 2 12
STF FWD PU STF FWD PU
PREV NEXT PREV NEXT

AutoTune 12:34 AutoTune 12:34

(3) Normal TUNE TUNE

completion Completed 3 Completed 13

Blinking
STF STOP PU STF STOP PU
Blinking PREV NEXT PREV NEXT

• When offline auto tuning ends, press on the operation panel during PU operation. For External operation, turn OFF
the start signal (STF signal or STR signal). This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the PU's monitor display
returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)

NOTE
• The motor constants measured once during offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until offline
auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared when performing All parameter clear.
• Changing Pr.71 after tuning completion will change the motor constant. For example, if the Pr.71 setting is changed to "8093"
after tuned with Pr.71 = "8090", the tuning data become invalid. To use the tuned data, set "8090" again in Pr.71.

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
555
 • If offline auto tuning has ended in error (see the following table), motor constants are not set.
Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
Error display Error cause Countermeasures
8 Forced end Set Pr.96 (Pr.463)="1 or 11" and try again.
9 Inverter protective function operation Make the setting again.
Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation.
92 The converter output voltage fell to 75% of the rated voltage.
Check the Pr.83 Rated motor voltage setting.
Calculation error.
93 Check the motor wiring and make the setting again.
The motor is not connected.
Rotation tuning frequency setting error.
(The frequency command for the tuning was given to exceed Check the Pr.1 Maximum frequency and Pr.31 to Pr.36
94
the maximum frequency setting, or to be in the frequency Frequency jump settings.
jump range.)

• When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto
tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.

NOTE
• An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter starts normal operation. Therefore, when the STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor starts
forward (reverse) rotation.
• Any fault occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. However, if the retry function is set, no retry is
performed even when a protective function that performs a retry is activated.
• The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.

CAUTION
• Note that the motor may start running suddenly.

 Parameters updated by tuning results after tuning

First motor Second Other than MM-CF V/F control, MM-CF
Name Description
Pr. motor Pr. Pr.96 (Pr.463) = 1 Pr.96 (Pr.463) = 11
90 458 Motor constant (R1) ○ ○ Resistance per phase
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis
92 460 ○ — d-axis inductance
inductance (Ld)
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis
93 461 ○ — q-axis inductance
inductance (Lq)
711 739 Motor Ld decay ratio ○ — d-axis inductance decay ratio
712 740 Motor Lq decay ratio ○ — q-axis inductance decay ratio
Starting resistance tuning
717 741 ○ ○
compensation
When the setting value is
10000 or more: With polarity
Starting magnetic pole position
721 742 ○ — inversion for compensation,
detection pulse width
voltage pulse (Pr. setting
minus 10000) μs
Torque current/Rated PM
859 860 ○ —
motor current
96 463 Auto tuning setting/status ○ ○

 Tuning adjustment (Pr.1002)

• The overcurrent protective function may be activated during Lq tuning for an easily magnetically saturated motor (motor
with a large Lq decay ratio). In such case, adjust the target flowing current used for tuning with Pr.1002 Lq tuning target
current adjustment coefficient.

 Changing the motor constants

• The motor constants can be set directly when the motor constants are known in advance, or by using the data measured
during offline auto tuning.

556 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
 • According to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be
changed. The changed settings are stored in the EEPROM as the motor constant parameters.
1
 Changing the motor constants (when setting motor constants in units of
Ω, mH, or A)
• Set Pr.71 as follows.
2
Motor Pr.71 setting
MM-CF 330
IPM motor
Other than MM-CF 8090
3
SPM motor 9090

• Set desired values as the motor constant parameters.

4
First motor Second Setting
Name Setting range Initial value
Pr. motor Pr. increments
0 to 50 Ω, 9999*1 0.001 Ω*1
90 458 Motor constant (R1)
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*2 0.01 mΩ*2
5
0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
92 460 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld)
*2
0.001 mH*2
0 to 50 mH, 9999
0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
6
93 461 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) 9999
0 to 50 mH, 9999*2 0.001 mH*2
706 738 Induced voltage constant (phi f) 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999 0.1 mV (rad/s)
0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
7
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
0 to 3600 A, 9999*2 0.1 A*2
Motor induced voltage constant (phi f)
1412 1413
exponent
0 to 2, 9999 1
8
*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
*2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

NOTE 9
• If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid. The MM-CF constant is used for the IPM motor MM-CF, and the inverter internal
constant is used for a PM motor other than MM-CF.
• To change a motor induced voltage constant of PM motors, the setting in Pr.706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) or Pr.738
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) must be changed. If the constant after the change exceeds the setting range
10
of Pr.706 or Pr.738 (0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)), set Pr.1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent or Pr.1413
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent. Set a value in the exponent n in the formula, Pr.706 (Pr.738) ×
10n [mV (rad/s)], to set the induced voltage constant (phi f).
• When Pr.71 (Pr.450) = "8093, 8094, 9093, or 9094", or Pr.1412 (Pr.1413) = "9999", the motor induced voltage constant is as
set in Pr.706 (Pr.738). (No exponent setting)

 Changing the motor constants (when setting a motor constants in the

internal data of the inverter)
• Set Pr.71 as follows.
Motor Pr.71 setting
MM-CF 333 (334)
IPM motor
Other than MM-CF 8093 (8094)
SPM motor 9093 (9094)

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
557
 • Set desired values as the motor constant parameters. The displayed increments of the read motor constants can be
changed with Pr.684 Tuning data unit switchover. Setting Pr.684 = "1" disables parameter setting changes.
Pr.684 = 0 (initial value) Pr.684 = 1
First motor Second Initial
Name Setting Setting
Pr. motor Pr. Setting range Setting range value
increments increments
0 to 50 Ω, 9999*1 0.001 Ω*1
90 458 Motor constant (R1)
0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*2 0.01 mΩ*2
Motor constant (L1)/d- 0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
92 460
axis inductance (Ld) 0 to 50 mH, 9999*2 0.001 mH*2
Motor constant (L2)/q- 0 to 500 mH, 9999*1 0.01 mH*1
93 461
axis inductance (Lq) 0 to 50 mH, 9999 *2
0.001 mH*2
0 to ***, 9999 1 9999
Induced voltage 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s),
706 738 0.1 mV (rad/s)
constant (phi f) 9999
Torque current/Rated 0 to 500 A, 9999*1 0.01 A*1
859 860
PM motor current 0 to 3600 A, 9999 *2
0.1 A*2
Motor induced voltage
1412 1413 constant (phi f) 0 to 2, 9999 1
exponent

*1 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.

*2 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

NOTE
• As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****), refer to the following
setting example when making setting. (The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Therefore, simple
addition of a value to the displayed value does not bring the desired effect.)
Setting example: to slightly increase the Pr.90 value (5%)
When "2516" is displayed for Pr.90, set 2642 (2516 × 1.05 = 2641.8) in Pr.90.
• If "9999" is set, tuning data will be invalid. The MM-CF constant is used for the IPM motor MM-CF, and the inverter internal
constant is used for a PM motor other than MM-CF.
• To change a motor induced voltage constant of PM motors, the setting in Pr.706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) or Pr.738
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) must be changed. If the constant after the change exceeds the setting range
of Pr.706 or Pr.738 (0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)), set Pr.1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent or Pr.1413 Second
motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent. Set a value in the exponent n in the formula, Pr.706 (Pr.738) × 10n [mV
(rad/s)], to set the induced voltage constant (phi f).
• When Pr.71 (Pr.450) = "8093, 8094, 9093, or 9094", or Pr.1412 (Pr.1413) = "9999", the motor induced voltage constant is as
set in Pr.706 (Pr.738). (No exponent setting)

Parameters referred to
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 415
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221

5.13.5 Online auto tuning

Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector

If online auto tuning is selected under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or Vector control,
favorable torque accuracy is retained by adjusting temperature even when the resistance value varies due to increase in the
motor temperature.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 No online auto tuning
95
Online auto tuning selection 0 1 Online auto tuning is performed at startup.
C111
2 Magnetic flux observer (continuous tuning)
574 Select online auto tuning for the second motor.
Second motor online auto tuning 0 0 to 2
C211 (The settings are the same as those in Pr.95.)

 Online auto tuning at startup (Pr.95/Pr.574 = "1")

• By promptly tuning the motor status at startup, accurate operation without being affected by motor temperature is achieved.
Also high torque can be provided at very low speed and stable operation is possible.

558 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
 • Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control (Pr.80 Motor capacity, Pr.81 Number of motor poles) or Real sensorless
vector control (Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.800 Control method selection), select the online auto tuning at start.
• Make sure to perform offline auto tuning before performing online auto tuning.
1
Operating procedure
1. Perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to page 532.) 2
2. Check that Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "3 or 103" (offline auto tuning completion).

3. Set Pr.95 Online auto tuning selection = "1" (online auto tuning at start). 3
Online auto tuning is enabled at the next start.

4. Check that the following parameters are set before starting operation.
4
Pr. Description
9 Rated motor current or electronic thermal O/L relay
71 Applied motor
80 Motor capacity (with the rated motor current equal to or less than the inverter rated current)*1
5
81 Number of motor poles
*1 If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due
to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current. 6
5. In the PU operation mode, press / on the operation panel.
For External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal).
7
NOTE
• When performing the online auto tuning at start for a lift, consider using a brake sequence function for the brake opening timing
at a start, or tuning using the external terminal. The tuning takes about 500 ms at the most after starting. However, during this
time, it is possible that not enough torque is provided and caution is required to prevent the object from dropping. Use of the 8
Start-time tuning start external input (X28) signal is recommended to perform tuning. (Refer to page 559.)
• Perform online auto tuning at startup when the motor is stopped.
• The online auto tuning is disabled when the MRS signal is being input, the setting speed is Pr.13 Starting frequency or lower 9
(V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control), an inverter fault is occurring, or the inverter's startup condition is not
satisfied.
• Online auto tuning does not operate during deceleration and restart from DC injection brake operation.
• It is disabled during JOG operation. 10
• If automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected, automatic restart is prioritized. (Online auto tuning at startup
is not performed during frequency search.)
If automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is used together, perform online auto tuning while stopping operation with
the X28 signal. (Refer to page 559.)
• Zero current detection and output current detection are enabled during online auto tuning.
• The RUN signal is not output during online auto tuning. The RUN signal is turned ON at operation startup.
• If the time between the inverter stop and restart is within 4 seconds, tuning is performed at startup but its result will not be
applied.

 Online auto tuning at startup using the external terminal (Pr.95/Pr.574 =

"1", X28 signal, Y39 signal)
• Before turning ON the start signal (STF or STR), online auto tuning can be performed by turning ON the Start-time tuning
start external input (X28) signal in a stopped status in order to minimize the startup delay by tuning at start.
• Perform offline auto tuning and set "1" (tuning at start) in Pr.95.
• When the Start time tuning completion (Y39) signal is OFF, tuning at start can be performed with the X28 signal.
• The tuning takes about 500 ms at the most.
• To use the X28 signal, set "28" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to
an input terminal.

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
559
 • To use the Y39 signal, set "39 (positive logic) or 139 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
Output frequency (Hz)

Time
X28 signal ON

Tuning status Completed

at starting Tune
Y39 signal

Start signal

While the motor is stopped While the X28 signal is OFF

Tuning is performed at start when X28 signal is OFF

ON ON ON ON ON (even when Y39 is ON).
X28 Signal OFF X28 Signal OFF

Tune Tune Tune Tune Tune Tune

Tuning status Completed Completed Completed Tuning status Completed Completed Completed
at starting Secondary magnetic Secondary magnetic at starting Secondary magnetic Secondary magnetic
flux exists a few seconds flux exists a few seconds flux exists a few seconds flux exists a few seconds
ON ON ON ON
OFF Y39 signal OFF
Y39 signal
Y39 signal is OFF when the motor is stopped Tuning is not
and X28 is turned OFF. However if the performed if the
secondary magnetic flux exists after motor stop, Y39 signal is ON. OFF
the signal remains ON. Start signal
Start signal OFF

Output frequency
0Hz
Time
While the X28 signal is ON Switching motor

ON Second motor
X28 Signal OFF Motor First motor First motor
switching
Tuning is not performed at start since X28 signal
and Y39 signal is ON. RT signal ON
Tune
Tuning status OFF
Completed X28 signal
at starting
Tune
ON
Tuning status Completed
Y39 signal OFF
at starting Y39 turns OFF when the
ON ON driven motor is switched
to the second motor
OFF
OFF Y39 signal
Start signal Y39 turns ON due
Secondary magnetic to the residual second
ON flux exists a few seconds magnetic flux at the
Start OFF first motor.
signal
Output
frequency 0Hz Output
Time frequency
0Hz
Time

NOTE
• Even if the start signal is turned ON during zero speed control or servo lock, tuning is performed at startup.
• The Y39 signal remains ON after the motor is stopped as long as the second flux remains.
• The X28 signal is disabled while the Y39 signal is ON.
• The STF and STR signals are enabled after completing tuning at start.
• The Inverter running (RUN) signal is not turned ON during online auto tuning. The RUN signal is turned ON after starting up.
• This function is disabled under V/F control or PM sensorless vector control.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) or Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

560 5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
 Magnetic flux observer (continuous tuning) (Pr.95/Pr.574 = "2")
• Performing Vector control with a motor with encoder improves the torque accuracy. Estimate or measure the flux within 1
the motor using the current running through the motor and the inverter output voltage. Since the flux of a motor can be
accurately estimated continuously (even during operation), optimum characteristics can be obtained without being affected
by temperature change in the second resistor. 2
• Under Vector control (Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.800), select the magnetic flux observer.

NOTE
• Offline auto tuning is not necessary when magnetic flux observer is selected for SF-V5RU, SF-JR (with encoder), SF-HR (with 3
encoder), SF-JRCA (with encoder) or SF-HRCA (with encoder). (However, when the wiring length is long (30 m or longer as
a reference), perform offline auto tuning so that the resistance arises in the long wiring can be reflected to the operation.)
4
 Tuning the second motor (Pr.574)
• When one inverter switches the operation between two different motors, set the second motor in Pr.450 Second applied
motor. (In the initial setting, no second motor is applied. (Refer to page 528.))
5
• Perform tuning using Pr.574 Second motor online auto tuning.
• Pr.574 is enabled when the Second function selection (RT) signal is turned ON.
6
Pr. Description
450 Applied motor
453 Motor capacity (with the rated motor current equal to or less than the inverter rated current)*1
454 Number of motor poles 7
*1 If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due
to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
8
NOTE
• The RT signal is the Second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 521.)
The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal. 9
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

10
Parameters referred to
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 415
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528
Pr.80 Motor capacitypage 221, page 532, page 551
Pr.81 Number of motor polespage 221, page 532, page 551
Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/statuspage 532, page 551
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 221

5.13.6 Signal loss detection of encoder signals

V/F Magnetic flux Vector

Signal loss detection (E.ECT) is turned ON to shut off the inverter output when the encoder signal is lost during encoder
feedback control or orientation control operation or under Vector control.
Signal loss detection (E.ECA) is activated to shut off the inverter output when the machine end encoder signal is lost during
machine end orientation control.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
376 855 Encoder signal loss 0 Signal loss detection disabled
detection enable/ 0
C148*1 C248*2 disable selection
1 Signal loss detection enabled

*1 The setting is available when a Vector control compatible plug-in option is installed.
*2 These parameters are available when the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) is installed.

5. PARAMETERS
5.13 (C) Motor constant parameters
561
 5.14 (A) Application parameters

Refer to
Purpose Parameter to set
page
To operate by switching between the
inverter and the commercial power Electronic bypass function P.A000 to P.A005 Pr.135 to Pr.139, Pr.159 563
supply operation
P.A002, P.A006, Pr.30, Pr.137, Pr.248,
To reduce the standby power Self power management 569
P.A007, P.E300 Pr.254
P.A100 to P.A106,
To stop the motor with a mechanical
P.F500, P.A108, Pr.278 to Pr.285, Pr.292,
brake (operation timing of mechanical Brake sequence function 572
P.A109, P.A120 to Pr.639 to Pr.651
brake)
P.A130
To count the number of inverter starting
Start count monitor P.A170, P.A171 Pr.1410, Pr.1411 576
times
To stop the motor with a mechanical
P.A200, P.A205,
brake (vibration control at stop-on- Stop-on-contact control Pr.270, Pr.275, Pr.276 577
P.A206
contact)
Load torque high-speed P.D301, P.D302, Pr.4, Pr.5, Pr.270 to
To increase the speed at light load 580
frequency control P.A200 to P.A204 Pr.274
To strengthen or weaken the frequency
Traverse operation P.A300 to P.A305 Pr.592 to Pr.597 582
at a constant cycle
To suppress the swinging of an object
Anti-sway control P.A310 to P.A317 Pr.1072 to Pr.1079 584
moved by crane control
P.A510 to P.A512,
P.A520, P.A524,
To adjust the stop position (orientation P.A525, P.A526 to Pr.350 to Pr.366, Pr.369,
Orientation control 585
control) of the rotating shaft P.A533, P.A540 to Pr.393 to Pr.399
P.A545, P.C140,
P.C141
Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.553,
P.A601 to P.A607,
Pr.554, Pr.575 to Pr.577,
P.A610 to P.A615,
Pr.609, Pr.610, Pr.753 to
P.A621 to P.A625,
PID control Pr.758, Pr.1015, Pr.1134, 601
P.A640 to P.A644,
Pr.1135, Pr.1140,
P.A650 to P.A655,
To perform process control, such as for Pr.1141, Pr.1143 to
P.A661 to P.A665
the pump flow volume and air volume Pr.1149
P.A616 to P.A620,
PID Pre-charge function Pr.760 to Pr.769 618
P.A656 to P.A660
P.A600, P.A630 to Pr.759, C42 to C45
PID display adjustment P.A633, P.A670 to (Pr.934, Pr.935), Pr.1136 615
P.A673 to Pr.1139
P.A601, P.A602,
P.A605, P.A606,
Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.128 to
To control the dance roll for winding/ P.A610, P.A611,
Dancer control Pr.134, Pr.609, Pr.610, 622
unwinding P.A613 to P.A615,
Pr.1134, Pr.1135
P.A624, P.A625,
P.F020, P.F021
To continue operating at analog current
4 mA input check P.A680 to P.A682 Pr.573, Pr.777, Pr.778 517
input loss
Automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure P.A700 to P.A705, Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.162 to
628
/ flying start function for P.A710 to P.F003 Pr.165, Pr.299, Pr.611
induction motors
Frequency search accuracy P.A700, P.A711,
To restart without stopping the motor at Pr.96, Pr.162, Pr.298,
improvement (V/F control, P.A712, P.C110, 638
instantaneous power failure Pr.463, Pr.560
offline auto tuning) P.C210
Automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure P.A700, P.A702,
Pr.57, Pr.162, Pr.611 635
/ flying start function for P.F003
IPM motors
Power failure time
To decelerate the motor to a stop at P.A730 to P.A735,
deceleration-to-stop Pr.261 to Pr.266, Pr.294 642
power failure P.A785
function

562 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Refer to
Purpose Parameter to set
page
Pr.414 to Pr.417, Pr.498,
1
P.A800 to P.A805,
To operate with sequence program PLC function Pr.675, Pr.1150 to 646
P.A811 to P.A859
Pr.1199

To store the inverter running status to a

Trace function
P.A900 to P.A906,
P.A910 to P.A920, Pr.1020 to Pr.1047 649 2
USB memory device
P.A930 to P.A939

5.14.1 Electronic bypass function 3

V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector
The inverter contains complicated sequence circuits for switching between the commercial power supply operation and inverter
operation. Therefore, interlock operation of the magnetic contactor for switching can be easily performed by simply inputting 4
start, stop, and automatic switching selection signals.

Pr. Name
Initial
Setting range Description
5
value
0 Coasting time differs according to the inverter capacity.*1
57
A702
Restart coasting time 9999 0.1 to 30 s
Set the delay time for the inverter to perform a restart after restoring
power due to an instantaneous power failure. 6
9999 No restart
58
Restart cushion time 1s 0 to 60 s Set the voltage cushion time for restart.
A703
135 Electronic bypass 0 Electronic bypass sequence function disabled.
7
0
A000 sequence selection 1 Electronic bypass sequence function enabled.
136 MC switchover
A001 interlock time
1s 0 to 100 s Set the operation interlock time for MC2 and MC3.
8
137 Set a time period that is a little longer than the time period from the ON
Start waiting time 0.5 s 0 to 100 s
A002 signal input to the actual pick-up operation of MC3 (0.3 to 0.5 s).
0 Inverter output stop (motor coasting) at inverter failure
138 Bypass selection at a
0
Automatic switchover to commercial power supply operation at inverter 9
A003 fault 1 failure. (Switchover is not possible when an external thermal relay
(E.OHT) or CPU fault (E.CPU) is occurring.)
Set the frequency where the inverter operation is switched to commercial
power supply operation. 10
0 to 60 Hz The inverter operation is performed from a start to Pr.139 setting, then it
switches automatically to the commercial power supply operation when
Automatic switchover the output frequency is equal to or above Pr.139.
139
frequency from inverter 9999 When the FR-A8AVP is installed, the phase-synchronized bypass
A004
to bypass operation switching function is enabled. (For details, refer to the FR-A8AVP
8888 Instruction Manual.)
When the FR-A8AVP is not installed, the operation is the same as the one
when the setting is "9999".
9999 Automatic bypass switching disabled
Set the frequency where the commercial power supply operation, which
has been switched from the inverter operation with Pr.139, switches back
to inverter operation.
When the frequency command becomes less than (Pr.139 - Pr.159), the
0 to 10 Hz
motor switches automatically to inverter operation and operates at the
Automatic switchover
frequency of the frequency command. Turning OFF a inverter start
159 frequency range from
9999 command (STF/STR) also switches the operation to the inverter
A005 bypass to inverter operation.
operation
To switch the commercial power supply operation, which has been
switched from the inverter operation with Pr.139, to the inverter operation
9999 again, the inverter start command (STF/STR) is turned OFF. The
operation switches to the inverter operation, and the motor decelerates to
a stop.
*1 The coasting time when Pr.57 = "0" is as shown below. (When Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection is set to
the initial value.)
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00052(1.5K) or lower: 0.5 s
FR-A820-00167(2.2K) to FR-A820-00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00083(2.2K) to FR-A840-00250(7.5K): 1 s
FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K): 3.0 s
FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher: 5.0 s

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
563
  Electronic bypass sequence function
• When operating the motor at 60 Hz (or 50 Hz), the motor can be more efficiently operated with a commercial power supply.
In addition, if the motor cannot be stopped for a long period of time even for an inverter maintenance and inspection, it is
recommended that a commercial power supply circuit be installed.
• When switching between inverter operation and commercial power supply operation, commercial power supply may be
accidentally applied to the output side of the inverter. To avoid such situation, provide an interlock where the magnetic
contactor at the commercial power supply side turns ON at turn OFF of the magnetic contactor at the inverter output side.
The inverter's electronic bypass sequence that outputs timing signals for the magnetic contactors can act as a complicated
interlock between the commercial power supply operation and the inverter operation.

NOTE
• The commercial power supply operation is not available with Mitsubishi Electric Vector control dedicated motors (SF-V5RU).

 Connection diagram
• A typical connection diagram of the electronic bypass sequence is shown below.

MC2

External
MCCB MC1 thermal relay
MC3
R/L1 U
S/L2 V M
T/L3 W
R1/L11
S1/L21
Inverter start MC1
(forward rotation) 
STF MC1
Inverter/bypass CS
operation interlock MRS MC2
 MC3
 MC2 

External thermal OH 24VDC

Reset RES MC3
 MC2
SD
MC3
Frequency 10
setting signal 2 SE
5

Standard models and IP55 compatible models

MC2

External
Converter unit Inverter thermal relay
MCCB MC1
P/+ MC3
R/L1 P/+ U
S/L2 N/- N/- V M
T/L3 Inverter start W
(forward rotation) STF
R1/L11 Inverter/bypass CS
S1/L21 operation interlock MRS  MC1
SE SD 
MC1
RDA X10
 ALM MC2
External X95   MC3
OH MC2 

thermal  Y214 X96  24VDC

Reset RES
SD RSO RES MC3
 MC2
Frequency 10
2 MC3
setting signal
5
SE
R1/L11
S1/L21

Separated converter type

564 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 *1 Be careful of the capacity of the sequence output terminals.
The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).

Output terminal capacity Output terminal permissible load

1
Open collector output of inverter (RUN, SU, IPF, OL, FU) 24 VDC 0.1 A
Inverter relay output (A1-C1, B1-C1, A2-B2, B2-C2) 230 VAC 0.3 A
Relay output option (FR-A8AR) 30 VDC 0.3 A 2
*2 When connecting a DC power supply, insert a protective diode.
When connecting an AC power supply, use the relay output option (FR-A8AR), and use contact outputs.
*3 The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)
*4 To use the signal, assign the function to the output terminal Pr.190 to Pr.195 (Output terminal function selection) of the converter unit. Always 3
set the negative logic for the ALM signal.

NOTE
• To use the electronic bypass function, the wiring terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 must be connected to a separate power source 4
that does not go through MC1. Be sure to connect using a separate power supply.
• Be sure to provide a mechanical interlock for MC2 and MC3.

5
• Operation of magnetic contactor (MC1, MC2, MC3)
Operation status
Magnetic
contactor
Installation location
During commercial
During inverter 6
power supply During inverter fault
operation
operation
Between power supply and
MC1 Shorted Shorted Open (shorted after the reset)
inverter input side 7
Open (Selected by Pr.138. Always
Between power supply and
MC2 Shorted Open open when the external thermal
motor
relay is operating.)

MC3
Between inverter output side
Open Shorted Open
8
and motor

• The input signals are as shown below.

MC operation*8
9
Signal Terminal Function Operation status
MC1*6 MC2 MC3
ON: Electronic bypass switching
Electronic bypass ○ — —
MRS MRS*1 switching function
function enabled. 10
OFF: Electronic bypass switching
(enable/disable)*2 ○ × Unchanged
function disabled.
Inverter/commercial ON Inverter operation ○ × ○
CS CS power supply operation OFF Commercial power supply
○ ○ ×
switchover*3 operation
Inverter operation ON Forward rotation (reverse
○ × ○
command (disabled rotation)
STF STF during commercial
(STR) (STR) power supply OFF Stop ○ × ○
operation)*4
Selected from Pr.180 External thermal relay ON Motor normal ○ — —
OH
to Pr.189 to set "7". input OFF Motor fault × × ×
ON Reset Unchanged × Unchanged
RES RES Operation status reset*5
OFF Normal operation ○ — —
X95 signal OFF, X96 signal OFF.
× × ×
Converter fault (E.OHT, E.CPU).
Selected from Pr.180 Converter unit fault / X95 signal ON, X96 signal ON.
○ — —
X95/X96 to Pr.189 to set "95/ Converter unit fault Converter normal.
96". (E.OHT, E.CPU) X95 signal OFF, X96 signal ON.
Converter fault (other than E.OHT or × —*7 ×
E.CPU).
*1 For separated converter types, the X10 signal is assigned to the terminal MRS in the initial setting. For the MRS signal, set "24" to any of Pr.180
to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to another terminal.
*2 When the MRS signal is OFF, neither the commercial power supply operation nor the inverter operation can be performed.
*3 The CS signal operates only when the MRS signal is ON.
*4 STF (STR) operates only when the MRS and CS signals are both ON.
*5 Whether or not to enable reset input using the RES signal depends on the setting of Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU
stop selection. When the RES signal and another input signal are simultaneously input, the MC operation by the RES signal has a higher priority.
*6 MC1 opens at an inverter fault.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
565
 *7 MC2 opens when Pr.138 (Automatic bypass switching after inverter fault) = "0" (disabled), and MC2 closes when Pr.138 = "1" (enabled).
*8 MC operation is as shown below.

Notation MC operation
○ ON
× OFF
MC2-OFF, MC3-ON during inverter operation,
—
MC2-ON, MC3-OFF during commercial power supply operation
Unchanged The status of the MC remains the same after turning ON or OFF of the signal.

• Output signal list

Terminal
Signal Description
(Pr.190 to Pr.196 setting)
MC1 17 Output signal to control MC1 installed on the inverter input side.
MC2 18 Output signal to control MC2 installed for commercial power supply operation.
MC3 19 Output signal to control MC3 installed on the inverter output side.

 Electronic bypass operation sequence

• Example of operation sequence without automatic bypass sequence (Pr.139 = "9999")
ON
Power supply
OFF
Operation interlock ON ON : Operation enabled
(MRS) OFF OFF: Operation disabled
Inverter run command ON ON : Forward rotation
(STF) OFF OFF: Stop
Inverter/commercial ON ON : Inverter operation
power supply (CS) OFF OFF: Commercial power supply operation

Inverter input side MC ON

Off only at inverter alarm
(MC1) OFF

Inverter output side MC ON

(MC3) OFF

MC for commercial ON Indicates the delay time until

power supply operation OFF the MC turns on (off).
(MC2)
Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time
Pr.137 MC3 start (waiting time)
Pr.137 Pr.58
Pr.57 Reset time
Each timer
Pr.58 Switchover cushion time
Pr.57 Pr.136 Pr.136 Pr.57

Operating status
(motor speed)
INV Coasting Bypass Coasting INV Stop
operation operation operation

• Example of operation sequence with automatic bypass sequence (Pr.139 ≠ "9999", Pr.159 = "9999")
ON
STF
OFF
Output frequency Pr.139

Frequency command

Time
Actual motor speed

Time
INV ON
operation MC3
OFF
Commercial ON
power supply MC2 OFF
operation
C A A B C D
A : Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time B : Pr.137 Start waiting time
C : Pr.57 Restart coasting time D : Pr.58 Restart cushion time

566 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • Example of operation sequence with automatic bypass sequence (Pr.139 ≠ "9999", Pr.159 ≠ "9999")

STF
ON
OFF 1
Output frequency Pr.139
Pr.159
Frequency command

Time
2
Actual motor speed

Time
3
INV ON
operation MC3 OFF

Commercial
power supply MC2
ON
OFF
4
operation
C A A B C D A A B C D

5
A : Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time B : Pr.137 Start waiting time
C : Pr.57 Restart coasting time D : Pr.58 Restart cushion time

Operating procedure
• Operation flowchart 6
• Pr.135 = "1"
Power supply ON • Pr.136 = 2.0 s
• Pr.137 = 1.0 s (Set the time until MC3 is actually turned ON and the inverter and motor 7
Setting the parameters are electrically connected. If the time is short, the restart may not function properly.)
• Pr.57 = 0.5 s
Start inverter operation • Pr.58 = 0.5 s (Always set this to switchover from the commercial power supply operation 8
to the inverter operation.)
Constant-speed commercial
power supply operation
9
Deceleration (stop)
inverter operation

10
• Signal operation after setting parameters
Status MRS CS STF MC1 MC2 MC3 Remarks
OFF → ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF→ON OFF External operation mode (PU
Power ON (OFF →
(OFF) (OFF) (OFF) (OFF→ON) (OFF) operation mode)
ON)
At start
OFF→ON OFF→ON OFF→ON ON OFF ON
(inverter)
During constant-speed MC2 turns ON after MC3 turns OFF.
operation ON ON→OFF ON ON OFF→ON ON→OFF The delay time is 2 s (while
(commercial power supply) coasting).
Switching to inverter MC3 turns ON after MC2 turns OFF.
operation due to ON OFF→ON ON ON ON→OFF OFF→ON The delay time is 4 s (while
deceleration (inverter) coasting).
Stop ON ON ON→OFF ON OFF ON

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
567
 NOTE
• Take power from any point between the power supply and MC1 to the terminals for control circuit power input (R1/L11 and S1/
L21). If power is taken from any point between MC1 and the inverter, the electronic bypass sequence function does not work.
• The electronic bypass sequence function is enabled only when Pr.135 = "1" and the inverter is in the External operation mode
or the PU/External combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3" (frequency command using the PU and start command using the
external signals)). When Pr.135 = "1" but the inverter is in the operation mode other than mentioned above, the MC1 and MC3
signals are ON.
• MC3 turns ON when the MRS and CS signals are ON and the STF (STR) signal is OFF. If the motor coasted to a stop from
commercial power supply operation at the previous stop, the motor starts running after the time set in Pr.137.
• Inverter operation is only available when the MRS, STF (STR), and CS signals are ON. In all other cases (when the MRS signal
is ON), commercial power supply operation is available.
• When the CS signal is OFF, the motor switches to the commercial power supply operation. However, when the STF (STR)
signal is OFF, the motor decelerates to a stop during inverter operation.
• From the point where MC2 and MC3 are both turned OFF, there is a delay time set with Pr.136, till MC2 or MC3 is turned ON.
• Even when the electronic bypass sequence is enabled (Pr.135 = "1"), the Pr.136 and Pr.137 settings are disabled in PU
operation mode.
In addition, the input terminals (STF, CS, MRS, OH) return to perform their normal functions.
• When both the electronic bypass sequence function and the PU operation interlock function are enabled at the same time
(Pr.135 = "1" and Pr.79 = "7") and the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal is not assigned to any input terminal, the
MRS signal will have another function as the X12 signal. (In this case, the inverter operation is enabled when both the MRS
signal and the CS signal are ON.)
• Set the acceleration time to the level that does not activate the stall prevention operation.
• If switching to the commercial power supply operation while a failure such as an output short circuit has occurred between the
magnetic contactor MC3 and the motor, the damage may further spread. If a failure has occurred between the MC3 and the
motor, a protection circuit such as using the OH signal input must be provided.
• Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.
• Switching with the electronic bypass sequence is not available during retry. Switching occurs after the retry. When the
electronic bypass is valid at a fault (Pr.138 = "1"), switching occurs also during retry.
• When the electronic bypass sequence function and the retry function of the converter unit are used at the same time for the
separated converter type, set 101 or more in the number of retries at fault occurrence (Pr.67) on the converter unit side. When
a value less than 100 is set, the ALM signal does not turn ON until the retry count is exceeded. In this case, the electronic
bypass at a fault is not performed until the retry count is exceeded.
• To use X95 and X96 signals for the separated converter type, use a converter unit manufactured in August 2014 or later.

 Precautions for electronic bypass sequence function

• The response time of the inverter to the signals depends on the command source, NET or External.
After the communication with the inverter is established, the motor operation is performed according to the command via
NET. The commercial power supply operation with the motor is performed when the MRS signal turns ON before the
communication is established. It is recommended to turn the MRS signal ON after the communication is established.
Example: the response time of the inverter to the signals in the Network operation mode (power-ON). The command
source is External for the MRS signal and NET for the STF (STR) and CS signals.

Power supply ON

Communication status ON

Until the communication with the inverter is established

From when the communication is established until the inverter receives a command

MRS(External) ON

ON
STF(NET)
ON
CS(NET)

Commercial
power supply Inverter operation
operation

568 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Operation in combination with the self power management function for
the separated converter type 1
• When the self power management function is used with the separated converter type, the input signal operations are as
follows.
X96 X94 MC operation*3
2
X95
(Converter unit (Control signal for
(Converter unit Converter status
fault (E.OHT, main circuit power MC1 MC2 MC3
fault)
E.CPU)) supply MC)
Converter fault
3
ON ○*2 × ×
(E.OHT (Pr.248 = "2"))
OFF OFF
Converter fault
OFF × × ×

ON ON ON ○*2 — —
(E.OHT (Pr.248 = "1"), E.CPU)
Converter normal
4
Converter fault
ON ○*2 —*1 × (other than the circuit failure fault or E.OHT)
OFF ON (Pr.248 = "2") 5
*1 Converter fault
OFF × — ×
(other than E.OHT or E.CPU)
*1 When Pr.138 = "0 (electronic bypass invalid at a fault)", MC2 is OFF. When Pr.138 = "1 (electronic bypass valid at a fault)", MC2 is ON.
*2 The self power management operation is followed. 6
*3 MC operation is as shown below.

Notation MC operation
○ ON 7
× OFF
MC2-OFF, MC3-ON during inverter operation,
—
MC2-ON, MC3-OFF during commercial power supply operation
8
Parameters referred to
Pr.11 DC injection brake operation timepage 715
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635
Pr.58 Restart cushion timepage 628
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
9
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

5.14.2 Self power management 10

V/F Magnetic flux PM

By turning ON the magnetic contactor (MC) on the input side before the motor is started and turning OFF the MC after the motor
is stopped, power is not supplied to the main circuit, reducing the standby power.

Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 Self power management function disabled
Self power management function enabled (main circuit OFF at protective
248 Self power management 1
0 function activation)
A006 selection
Self power management function enabled (main circuit OFF at protective
2
function activation due to a circuit failure)
137 Set a time period that is a little longer than the time period from the ON
Start waiting time 0.5 s 0 to 100 s
A002 signal input to the actual pick-up operation of MC1 (0.3 to 0.5 s).
Set the delay time until the main circuit power supply is turned OFF after
1 to 3600 s
254 Main circuit power OFF the motor is stopped.
600 s
A007 waiting time The main circuit power supply is turned OFF only when the protective
9999
function selected by Pr.248 is activated.
Power supply to the inverter: AC (terminals R, S, and T).
When power is supplied only to the control circuit, and then switched to
100, 101
be supplied to both the control and main circuits, inverter reset is not
performed.
30 Regenerative function
0 0 to 2, 10,
E300 selection
11, 20, 21,
102, 110, For other settings, refer to page 724.
111, 120,
121

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
569
  Connection diagram
• Terminal R1, S1 inputs

MC1 Inverter Converter unit Inverter

MCCB MCCB MC1
R/L1 U R/L1 P/+ P/+ U
S/L2 V M S/L2 N/- N/- V M
T/L3 W T/L3 W
R1/L11 R1/L11 RDA X10
S1/L21 S1/L21 RSO RES
MC1 Y17 X94 MC1
MC1 SE SD MC1

24VDC R1/L11 24VDC

SE S1/L21 SE

Standard models Separated converter type

• 24 V external power supply input

MCCB MC1 Inverter MCCB MC1 Converter unit Inverter

R/L1 U R/L1 P/+ P/+ U
S/L2 V M S/L2 N/- N/- V M
T/L3 W T/L3 W
R1/L11 R1/L11 RDA X10
S1/L21 S1/L21 RSO RES
MC1 MC1
Y17 X94
MC1 SE SD MC1
+24
+24 +24
24VDC 24VDC 24VDC
SD 24VDC 24VDC
SE SD SD SE

Standard models and IP55 compatible models Separated converter type

 Operation of the self power management function

• This function controls the magnetic contactor (MC) on the input side using the output relay to reduce the standby power
during inverter stop. With the terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 (refer to page 77) and 24 V external power supply input (refer
to page 80), the main circuit power supply and control circuit power supply are separated, and the MC for main circuit power
supply is controlled by the electronic bypass MC1 signal.
• Set Pr.248 Self power management selection = "1 or 2", Pr.30 Regenerative function selection ≠ "20, 21, 120, or 121"
(other than DC feeding mode 2), and Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) = "17 (positive logic)" to
assign the Electronic bypass MC1 (MC1) signal to an output terminal.
• After the inverter is stopped and the time set in Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time and Pr.254 Main circuit power
OFF waiting time have passed, turning OFF the MC1 signal releases the MC on the input side (main circuit power supply
OFF). Set Pr.254 to prevent frequent MC operation.
• Turning ON the start signal turns ON the MC1 signal and closes the MC on the input side (main circuit power supply ON).
After the time set in Pr.137 Start waiting time has passed, the inverter starts. Set time slightly longer (about 0.3 to 0.5 s)
than the time period from the MC1-ON to the actual pick-up operation of the MC is turned ON in Pr.137.

Output frequency
(Hz)

DC brake

Time
Pr.11 Pr.254 Pr.137

STF ON OFF ON

MC1 ON OFF ON

R1S1 input/
Power supply mode RST input RST input
external 24 V input

Main circuit power supply ON OFF ON

570 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • When the protective function of the inverter is activated, the MC1 signal is immediately turned OFF according to the Pr.248
setting. (The MC1 signal is turned OFF before the time set in Pr.254 has passed.)
When Pr.248 ="1", the MC1 signal is turned OFF when the protective function is activated due to any cause.
1
When Pr.248 ="2", the MC1 signal is turned OFF only when the protective function is activated due to an error resulted
from a failure in the inverter circuit or a wiring error (refer to the following table). (For the fault details, refer to page 779.)
2
Fault type
Inrush current limit circuit fault (E.IOH)
CPU fault (E.CPU)
CPU fault (E.6)
3
CPU fault (E.7)
Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board) (E.PE)
Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board) (E.PE2) 4
24 VDC power fault (E.P24)
Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485 terminals power supply short circuit
(E.CTE)
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) 5
Output phase loss (E.LF)
Brake transistor alarm detection (E.BE)
Internal circuit fault (E.13/E.PBT)
6
• To enable the self power management function for the separated converter type, enable the self power management
function also on the converter unit side. To activate the self power management function when a converter unit fault occurs,
connect the terminal to which the Y17 signal of the converter unit is assigned and the terminal to which X94 signal of the 7
inverter is assigned.

Y17 output signal

(converter unit)
MC1 output signal
(inverter)
MC1 output signal actual
operation
Main circuit power supply 8
OFF OFF OFF Stop
OFF ON OFF Stop
ON OFF OFF Stop 9
ON ON ON Supplied
• To use the X94 signal, set "94" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to
an input terminal. 10

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
571
 NOTE
• When the start signal is turned OFF before the time set in Pr.137 has passed after the start signal is turned ON, the inverter
does not start and the MC1 signal is turned OFF after the time set in Pr.254 has passed. If the start signal is turned ON again
before the time set in Pr.254 has passed, the inverter immediately starts outputting.

Output frequency Output frequency

(Hz) (Hz)

Time Time
STF ON OFF STF ON OFF ON

MC1 ON OFF MC1 ON

Pr.137 Pr.137
Pr.254 Pr.254
• At inverter reset, the status of the MC1 signal is held and operation of the magnetic contactor is not performed.
• When the inverter stops the output due to, for example, the Output stop (MRS) signal, the MC1 signal is turned OFF after the
time set in Pr.254 has passed.
• During the stop, turning ON the External DC injection brake operation start signal (X13) and Pre-excitation/servo ON signal
(LX) turns ON the MC1 signal.
• To avoid inverter reset when supplying power to the main circuit is started when power is supplied only to the control circuit,
set 100 or more in Pr.30. (For the separated converter type, setting Pr.30 of the converter unit is also required.)
• When supplying power to the main circuit is started when power is supplied only to the control circuit, there is a slight delay
before starting.
• Repeated operation of the magnetic contactor due to frequent start and stop or activation of the protective function may shorten
the inverter life.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) and Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• To use X94 signal for the separated converter type, use a converter unit manufactured in August 2014 or later.

Parameters referred to
Pr.11 DC injection brake operation timepage 715
Pr.30 Regenerative function selectionpage 724
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

5.14.3 Brake sequence function

This function outputs operation timing signals of the mechanical brake from the inverter, such as for lift applications.
This function is useful in preventing load slippage at a start due to poor mechanical brake timing and overcurrent alarm in stop
status and enable secure operation.

Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
278 Set the rated slip frequency of the motor + approx. 1.0 Hz. This can be
Brake opening frequency 3 Hz 0 to 30 Hz
A100 set only when Pr.278 ≤ Pr.282.
Set between 50 and 90% because load slippage is more likely to occur
279 when a start setting is too low.
Brake opening current 130% 0 to 400%
A101 The inverter rated current is regarded as 100%, or the rated motor
torque is regarded as 100%. (According to Pr.639 setting)
280 Brake opening current
0.3 s 0 to 2 s Generally set between 0.1 and 0.3 s.
A102 detection time
Set the mechanical delay time until braking eases. When Pr.292 = "8",
281
Brake operation time at start 0.3 s 0 to 5 s set the mechanical delay time until braking eases + approx. 0.1 to 0.2
A103
s.
Turn OFF the Brake opening request (BOF) signal and set the
282 frequency for operating the electromagnetic brake. Generally, set the
Brake operation frequency 6 Hz 0 to 30 Hz
A104 setting value of Pr.278 + 3 to 4 Hz. This can be set only when Pr.282
≥ Pr.278.
When Pr.292 = "7", set the mechanical delay time until the brake
283
Brake operation time at stop 0.3 s 0 to 5 s closes + 0.1 s. When Pr.292 = "8", set the mechanical delay time until
A105
the brake closes + approx. 0.2 to 0.3 s.

572 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 The deceleration detection function disabled.
1
284 Deceleration detection
0 The protective function is activated when the deceleration speed of
A106 function selection 1
the deceleration operation is not normal.

285 Overspeed detection 0 to 30 Hz

The Brake sequence fault (E.MB1) is activated when the difference
between the detection frequency and output frequency is equal to or
2
9999
A107 frequency*1 greater than the setting value under encoder feedback control.
9999 Overspeed detection disabled.
0 Normal operation 3
Operation with the shortest acceleration/deceleration time. (Refer to
1, 11
page 384.)
292 Operation with the optimum acceleration/deceleration time. (Refer to
Automatic acceleration/
A110
F500
deceleration
0 3
page 384.) 4
5, 6 Lift operation 1, 2. (Refer to page 387.)
7 Brake sequence mode 1
8 Brake sequence mode 2
639 Brake opening current 0 Brake opening by output current
5
0
A108 selection 1 Brake opening by motor torque
0 Brake closing operation by frequency command
640 Brake operation frequency
A109 selection
0
1
Brake closing operation by the actual motor rotation speed (estimated
value)
6
0 Normal operation when the RT signal is ON
641 Second brake sequence 7 Second brake sequence 1 when the RT signal is ON
A130 operation selection
0
8 Second brake sequence 2 when the RT signal is ON 7
9999 First brake sequence is valid when the RT signal is ON
642 Second brake opening
3 Hz 0 to 30 Hz Refer to Pr.278.
A120 frequency
643
8
Second brake opening current 130% 0 to 400% Refer to Pr.279.
A121
644 Second brake opening current
0.3 s 0 to 2 s Refer to Pr.280.
A122
645
detection time
Second brake operation time
9
0.3 s 0 to 5 s Refer to Pr.281.
A123 at start
Set the second brake sequence function.
646 Second brake operation
6 Hz 0 to 30 Hz Refer to Pr.282. The second brake sequence function is
A124
647
frequency
Second brake operation time
enabled when the RT signal is ON. 10
0.3 s 0 to 5 s Refer to Pr.283.
A125 at stop
648 Second deceleration speed
0 0, 1 Refer to Pr.284.
A126 detection selection
650 Second brake opening current
0 0, 1 Refer to Pr.639.
A128 selection
651 Second brake operation
0 0, 1 Refer to Pr.640.
A129 frequency selection
*1 The speed deviation excess detection frequency is used when Vector control compatible option is mounted during Vector control. (Refer to page
269 for details.)

 Connection diagram
MC
Sink logic
Mechanical
Pr.184 = 15 brake
Pr.190 = 20
MCCB
R/L1 U
Power
S/L2 V M
supply
T/L3 W
Start signal STF 24VDC
Multi-speed signal RH *2
*3 MC
RUN(BOF) Brake opening request
Brake opening completion signal AU(BRI) *1 signal (BOF)
(BRI)
SD SE

*1 The input signal terminals differ by the settings of Pr.178 to Pr.189.

*2 The output signal terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
573
 *3 Be careful of the permissible current of the built-in transistors on the inverter. (24 VDC 0.1 A)

NOTE
• The automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function and orientation function do not operate when brake sequence
is selected.
• To use this function, set the acceleration/deceleration time to 1 s or higher.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) and Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Setting the brake sequence operation

• Set Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration = "7 or 8 (braking sequence operation)".
To ensure sequence operation, it is recommended to use with Pr.292 = "7" (with brake opening completion signal input).
• Set "15" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), and assign the Brake opening completion (BRI)
signal to the input terminal.
• Set "20" (positive logic) or "120" (negative logic) in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection), and
assign the brake opening request signal (BOF) to the output terminal.
• Use Pr.639 Brake opening current selection to select whether the output current or the motor torque is used as a
reference for the brake opening operation. (Under V/F control, this operation is activated regardless of the Pr.639 setting.)
• Under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control, use Pr.640 Brake operation
frequency selection to select whether the frequency command or the actual motor speed (estimated value) is used as a
reference for brake closing operation. If the brake operation timing is different from the motor speed because of the load,
set Pr.640 = "1 (brake operation with the actual motor speed (estimated value))".
• Under V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control, the frequency command is used as a reference for brake
operation regardless of the Pr.640 setting.

NOTE
• Under torque control, position control, or PM sensorless vector control (with the low-speed range high torque characteristic
disabled), the brake sequence function is disabled.

 Operation with brake opening completion signal input (Pr.292 = "7")

• When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running, and when the output frequency reaches the
frequency set in Pr.278 Brake opening frequency and the output current or the motor torque is equal to or greater than
the Pr.279 Brake opening current setting, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is output after the time set in Pr.280
Brake opening current detection time. The Brake opening completion (BRI) signal is input, and the output frequency is
increased to the set speed after the set time in Pr.281 Brake operation time at start.

574 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • When the inverter decelerates to the frequency set to Pr.282 Brake operation frequency during deceleration, the inverter
turns OFF the brake opening request signal (BOF) and decelerates further to the frequency set in Pr.278. After
electromagnetic brake operation completes and the inverter recognizes the turn OFF of the BRI signal, the inverter holds
1
the frequency set in Pr.278 for the time set in Pr.283 Brake operation time at stop. And after the time set in Pr.283
passes, the inverter decelerates again. The inverter outputs is shut off when the frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting
frequency setting or 0.5 Hz, whichever is lower.
2
Output frequency(Hz)

Target frequency
Pr.13 setting
3
Pr.280 or 0.5Hz,
Pr.282 Pr.281 whichever is lower
Pr.278

4
Pr.13
Time
ON Pr.283
STF
Output current or motor torque Pr.279
(select by Pr.639)
Brake opening request ON
5
(BOF signal)
Brake opening completion ON

6
(BRI signal)
Electromagnetic brake Closed Opened Closed
operation

 Operation without Brake opening completion (Pr.292 = "8") signal input

• When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running, and when the output frequency reaches the
7
frequency set in Pr.278 Brake opening frequency and the output current or the motor torque is equal to or greater than
the Pr.279 Brake opening current setting, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is output after the time set in Pr.280
Brake opening current detection time.
8
After the BOF signal is output, the output frequency is increased to the set speed after the set time in Pr.281 Brake
operation time at start.
• When the inverter decelerates to the frequency set to Pr.282 Brake operation frequency during deceleration, the inverter
9
turns OFF the brake opening request signal (BOF) and decelerates further to the frequency set in Pr.278. And after the
time set in Brake operation time at stop passes, the inverter decelerates again. Pr.13 Starting frequency setting or 0.5
Hz, whichever is lower
10
Output frequency(Hz)

Target frequency
Pr.280 Pr.13 setting
Pr.282 or 0.5Hz,
Pr.281
Pr.278 whichever is lower
Pr.13
Time
ON Pr.283
STF
Output current or motor torque
(select by Pr.639) Pr.279
Brake opening request ON
(BOF signal)
Electromagnetic brake Closed Opened Closed
operation

NOTE
• Even if the brake sequence operation has been selected, inputting the JOG signal (JOG operation) changes the operation
method to normal operation and give a priority to the JOG operation. Note that the JOG signal input by the brake sequence
function is invalid during operation.

 Set multiple brake sequence functions (Pr.641)

• When the second brake sequence function is set, it is possible to switch between and use two types of brake sequence
functions. Turning ON the Second function selection (RT) signal enables the Second brake sequence function.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
575
 • Select the operation of the Second brake sequence function with Pr.641 Second brake sequence operation selection.
Pr.641 setting Brake sequence function when the RT signal is ON
0 (initial value) Normal operation (The first and second brake sequence functions invalid)
7 Second brake sequence mode 1
8 Second brake sequence mode 2
9999 First brake sequence mode is valid

• Set "45" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the Second brake sequence open
completion signal (BRI2) to the input terminal.
• To use the Second brake opening request signal (BOF2), set "22 (positive logic)" or "122 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190
to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
• The method of setting the second brake sequence parameters is the same as that for the corresponding first brake
sequence function parameters.
• Switchover of the brake sequence function by RT signal is valid when the inverter is stopped.

 Protective function
• If one of the following faults occur while the brake sequence function is enabled, the inverter enters an fault status, shuts
off output, and turns OFF the brake opening request signal (BOF).
Fault
Description
indication
When (detection frequency) - (output frequency) ≥ Pr.285 during encoder feedback control.
E.MB1
When Pr.285 (Overspeed detection function) = 9999, overspeed is not detected.
When deceleration is not normal during deceleration operation from the set frequency to the frequency set in Pr.282. (when
E.MB2
Pr.284 = 1) (except stall prevention operation)
E.MB3 When the BOF signal turned ON while the motor is at a stop. (load slippage prevention function)
When more than 2 s have elapsed after the start command (forward or reverse rotation) is input, but the BOF signal does
E.MB4
not turn ON.
E.MB5 When more than 2 s have elapsed after the BOF signal turned ON, but the BRI signal does not turn ON.
E.MB6 When the inverter had turned ON the brake opening request signal (BOF), but the BRI signal turned OFF.
E.MB7 When more than 2 s have elapsed after the BOF signal turned OFF at a stop, but the BRI signal does not turn OFF.

NOTE
• During PM sensorless vector control, the brake sequence function is available with the IPM motor MM-CF only.
• During deceleration, inverter output is shut OFF when the frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting frequency or 0.5 Hz, whichever
is lower. For Pr.278 Brake opening frequency, set a frequency equal to or higher than the Pr.13 setting or 0.5 Hz.
• Pr.285 Overspeed detection frequency is valid under encoder feedback control (used with the FR-A8AP (option)) even if a
value other than "7 or 8" is set in Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration.
• Setting Pr.278 too high activates the stall prevention and may cause E.MB4.
• E.MB4 occurs when the acceleration time from Pr.13 to Pr.278 + Pr.280 reaches or exceeds 2 s.
Output frequency (Hz)

Less than 2s
Output
frequency
Pr.278 (Hz)

Pr.13
Pr.280
Time

ON
Brake opening request
(BOF signal)

Parameters referred to
Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

5.14.4 Start count monitor

The inverter starting times can be counted.

576 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
Confirming the starting times can be used to determine the timing of the maintenance, or can be used as a reference for system
inspection or parts replacement.
1
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1410 Starting times lower 4 Displays the lower four digits of the number of the inverter starting
0 0 to 9999
A170 digits times.
1411 Starting times upper 4
0 0 to 9999
Displays the upper four digits of the number of the inverter starting 2
A171 digits times.
• Every start signal input (the RUN signal ON) while the inverter output is stopped is counted as the inverter starting time.
(Starting during pre-excitation is also counted.) 3
STF ON ON ON ON ON

LX ON

RUN ON ON ON ON
4
Output
frequency

Time
5
4
3

Start count 1
2
6
indication

• The lower four digits of the number of starting times is displayed in Pr.1410 Starting times lower 4 digits, and the upper
four digits of the number of starting times is displayed in Pr.1411 Starting times upper 4 digits. 7
• The maximum count is "99999999". When "99999999" is exceeded on the monitor, the monitor value is reset to 0.
Display data Monitor display
Pr.1410 (Lower digits monitor) 8
10000
Pr.1411 (Upper digits monitor)

100
Pr.1410 (Lower digits monitor) 9
Pr.1411 (Upper digits monitor)

NOTE 10
• Any value can be set in Pr.1410 or Pr.1411. Set "0" to clear the number on the monitor.
• Starting during offline auto tuning is not counted.
• Under position control, the count increases when the LX signal turns ON.
• The counting is enabled even if the RUN signal is not assigned to an output terminal.
• For the RUN signal, refer to page 473.
• Starting during the test operation (Pr.800 = "9") is not counted.

5.14.5 Stop-on-contact control

Magnetic flux Sensorless

To ensure accurate positioning at the upper limit, etc. of a lift, stop-on-contact control causes the mechanical brake to close
while the motor creates a holding torque to keep the load in contact with a mechanical stopper, etc.
This function suppresses vibration that is likely to occur when the load is stopped upon contact in lift applications, thereby
ensuring reliable and highly accurate positioning stop.
<Without stop-on-contact control> <With stop-on-contact control>

Vibration Complete stop

Lift Lift

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
577
 Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
6 Multi-speed setting (low
10 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the output frequency for stop-on-contact control.
D303 speed)
22 Stall prevention operation
150% 0 to 400%
H500 level Set the stall prevention operation level for stop-on-contact control.
48 Second stall prevention The smaller value set in either Pr.22 or Pr.48 has priority.
150% 0 to 400%
H600 operation level
0 Normal operation
1 Stop-on-contact control
2 Load torque high-speed frequency control (Refer to page 580.)
Stop-on contact/load torque Stop-on contact + load torque high speed frequency control (Refer
270 3
high-speed frequency control 0 to page 580.)
A200
selection 11 Stop-on-contact control
Stop-on contact + load torque high E.OLT is invalid under stop-
13 speed frequency control (Refer to on-contact control
page 580.)
Stop-on contact excitation Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on-contact control.
275 0 to 300%
current low-speed scaling 9999 Normally, set the scaling factor between 130 to 180%.
A205
factor 9999 Not compensated.
0 to 9*1 Set a PWM carrier frequency for stop-on-contact control.
For Real sensorless vector control, the carrier frequency is always 2
276 PWM carrier frequency at
9999 0 to 4*2 kHz when the setting value is 0 to 5 and always 6 kHz when the
A206 stop-on contact
setting value is 6 to 9. (Valid at the output frequency of 3 Hz or less.)
9999 As set in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.
*1 The setting range of the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and the FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
*2 The setting range of the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher

 Connection and operation example

Stop-on contact
Output frequency

Normal mode control mode

Pr.4
MC
•Sink logic
Mechanical Pr.5
brake
Pr.6
MCCB 0 Time
R/L1 U
Power (a) (b) (c)
S/L2 V M
supply RH ON
T/L3 W
RM OFF ON
Forward rotation command STF
High-speed operation command RH RL OFF ON
Middle-speed operation command RM ∗
RT OFF ON
Stop-on contact selection 0 RL
Stop-on contact selection 1 RT ∗ Goes into stop-on-contact control mode when
SD both RL and RT switch on.
RL and RT may be switched on in any order
with any time difference
 The input terminal used differs according to the Pr.180 to Pr.189 settings. (a): Acceleration time(Pr.7)
(b): Deceleration time(Pr.8)
(c): Second deceleration time(Pr.44/Pr.45)

 Setting the stop-on-contact control

• Make sure that the inverter is in External or Network operation mode. (Refer to page 389.)
• Select either Real sensorless vector control (speed control) or Advanced magnetic flux vector control.
• Set "1, 3, 11 or 13" in Pr.270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection.
• Set the output frequency for stop-on-contact control in Pr.6 Multi-speed setting (low speed).
Set the frequency as low as possible (about 2 Hz). If a frequency higher than 30 Hz is set, it operates with 30 Hz.
• When both the RT and RL signals are switched ON, the inverter enters the stop-on-contact control, and operation is
performed at the frequency set in Pr.6 independently of the preceding speed.

578 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • Setting Pr.270 = "11 or 13" disables stall prevention stop (E.OLT) during stop-on-contact control (with both RL and RT
signals ON).
1
NOTE
• By increasing the Pr.275 setting, the low-speed (stop-on-contact) torque increases, but overcurrent fault (E.OC[]) may occur
or the machine may oscillate in stop-on-contact status. 2
• The stop-on-contact function is different from the servo-lock function, and if used to stop or hold a load for an extended period,
this function can cause the motor to overheat. After a stop, immediately switch to a mechanical brake to hold the load.
• Under the following operating conditions, the stop-on-contact function is invalid:
PU operation (Pr.79), JOG operation (JOG signal), PU + External operation (Pr.79), PID control function operation (Pr.128), 3
Remote setting function operation (Pr.59), Automatic acceleration/deceleration operation (Pr.292), Start time tuning,
Orientation control function operation
• When performing stop-on-contact control during encoder feedback control, encoder feedback control is invalid due to a
transition to the stop-on-contact control mode.
4

 Function switching of stop-on-contact control selection 5

Normal operation (Either RL or RT is OFF or both
Stop-on-contact control (Both RL and RT are ON.)
are OFF.)
Main functions
Real sensorless vector
control
Advanced magnetic flux
vector control
Real sensorless vector
control
Advanced magnetic flux
vector control
6
Output frequency Multi-speed, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, etc. Pr.6 setting
Stall prevention operation The smaller value set in
level
— Pr.22 setting —
either Pr.22 or Pr.48*1 7
Torque limit level Pr.22 setting — Pr.22 setting —
Excitation current low-speed The current is compensated by Pr.275 (0 to 300%)
—
scaling factor setting from normal operation.
When output frequency is 3 Hz or lower,
8
Carrier frequency Pr.72 setting
Pr.276 setting (Pr.72 when Pr.276 = "9999")
Fast-response current limit — Enabled — Disabled

*1 When RL and RT are ON, Pr.49 Second stall prevention operation frequency is invalid. 9
 Set frequency and validity of the stop-on-contact control (Pr.270 = "1, 3,
11, 13") 10
• The following table lists the frequencies set when the input terminals (RH, RM, RL, RT, JOG) are selected together.
• Stop-on-contact control is disabled when remote setting function is selected (Pr.59 = 1 to 3).

Input signal Set Stop-on-contact Input signal Set Stop-on-contact

RH RM RL RT JOG frequency control RH RM RL RT JOG frequency control
ON Pr.4 ON ON ON Pr.15
ON Pr.5 ON ON ON Pr.15
ON Pr.6 ON ON ON Pr.6 Enabled
ON *1 ON ON ON Pr.15
ON Pr.15 ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON Pr.26 ON ON ON Pr.6 Enabled
ON ON Pr.25 ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON Pr.4 ON ON ON Pr.26
ON ON Pr.15 ON ON ON Pr.27
ON ON Pr.24 ON ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON Pr.5 ON ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON Pr.15 ON ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON Pr.6 Enabled ON ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON Pr.15 ON ON ON ON Pr.6 Enabled
ON ON Pr.15 ON ON ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON ON Pr.15 *1

*1 By 0 to 5 V (0 to 10 V), 4 to 20 mA input

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
579
 NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27 (multi-speed setting)page 411
Pr.15 Jog frequencypage 410
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level, Pr.48 Second stall prevention operation level levelpage 431
Pr.22 Torque limit levelpage 245
Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 377
Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 356
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Pr.95 Online auto tuning selectionpage 558
Pr.128 PID action selectionpage 601
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selectionpage 580
Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/decelerationpage 384, page 387

5.14.6 Load torque high-speed frequency control

Load torque high-speed frequency control is a function that automatically sets the maximum operable frequency according to
the load.
The load size during power driving is estimated by detecting average currents at set timings after a start. When the load is light,
the frequency is increased from the originally-set frequency. (In regenerative driving, the frequency is not increased.)
This function is designed to increase speed automatically under light load, for example to minimize the incoming/outgoing time
in a multi-story parking lot.

<Without high-speed <With high-speed

frequency control> frequency control>
Light

Faster

Whether there is a load or The lift with a light load or without

not, the lift is moved a load is moved faster than the lift
vertically at the same speed. with a load.
(The output frequency is increased
only during power driving.)

Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
4 Multi-speed setting
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the higher-speed frequency.
D301 (high speed)
5 Multi-speed setting
30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the lower-speed frequency.
D302 (middle speed)
0 Normal
1 Stop-on-contact control (Refer to page 577.)
2 Load torque high-speed frequency control
Stop-on contact/load
Stop-on contact + load torque high speed frequency control (Refer
270 torque high-speed 3
0 to page 577.)
A200 frequency control
selection 11 Stop-on-contact control
Stop-on contact + load torque high E.OLT is invalid under stop-
13 speed frequency control (Refer to on-contact control.
page 577.)
271 High-speed setting
50% 0 to 400%
A201 maximum current Set the upper and lower limits of the current at high and middle
272 Middle-speed setting speeds.
100% 0 to 400%
A202 minimum current
Set the average current during acceleration from (Pr.273 × 1/2) Hz
0 to 590 Hz
273 Current averaging to (Pr.273) Hz.
9999
A203 range Set the average current during acceleration from (Pr.5 × 1/2) Hz to
9999
(Pr.5) Hz.
Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the output
274 Current averaging filter current.
16 1 to 4000
A204 time constant (The time constant [ms] is 0.5 × Pr.274, and the initial value is 8 ms.)
A larger setting results in a stable operation with poorer response.

580 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Connection diagram
Sink logic
MC 1
Mechanical
Pr.186 = 19 brake

MCCB
2
R/L1 U
Power supply S/L2 V M
T/L3 W
3
Start signal STF

Load torque high-speed frequency CS(X19) 

SD 4
*1 The applied terminals differ by the settings of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)

 Load torque high speed frequency control setting 5

• Set "2, 3 or 13" in Pr.270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection.
• When the Load torque high-speed frequency (X19) signal ON, the inverter automatically adjusts the maximum frequency
in the range between the Pr.4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) and Pr.5 in accordance with the average current in the
6
current averaging range. The current averaging range is from the 1/2 the Pr.5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) to the
full Pr.5 setting (in the current averaging range).
• To use the X19 signal, set "19" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to
7
an input terminal.
• This is valid in External operation mode and Network operation mode.
• The control can be activated at every start.
8
 Operation of load torque high speed frequency control
• When the average current of the current averaging range (chart A below) during operation with the X19 signal ON is the 9
"inverter rated current ×Pr.271 setting (%)" or less, the maximum frequency automatically becomes the Pr.4 Multi-speed
setting (high speed) setting value.
• When the average current of the current averaging range (chart B below) during operation with the X19 signal ON is greater 10
than the "inverter rated current × Pr.272 setting (%)", the maximum frequency automatically becomes the Pr.5 Multi-
speed setting (middle speed) setting value.
• During regeneration load operation, the Pr.5 setting is the maximum frequency regardless of the average current.
• When Pr.273 is used, the current averaging range can be set between one half of the frequency of the Pr.273 setting value
and the Pr.273 set frequency. (However, the setting value must be smaller than Pr.5 setting.)
Output frequency

Power running Regenerating

Pr.4

Pr.5
1
Pr.5
2

A B Time
Current averaging range Current averaging range
Less than Pr.272 setting rated current
Pr.271 setting rated current or more
STF
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
(STR)
X19 ON ON ON OFF

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
581
 • When the average current is larger than "inverter rated current × Pr.271 setting (%)" and smaller than "inverter rated
current × Pr.272 setting (%)", linear compensation is performed as shown below.

Frequency
Pr.4
(60Hz/50Hz)
Pr.5
(30Hz)

Pr.271 Pr.272 Average current

(50%) (100%)

Value in parenthesis is initial value.

NOTE
• When the current averaging range includes the constant-output range, the output current may become large in the constant-
output range.
• When the average current value in the current averaging range is small, deceleration time becomes longer as the output
frequency increases.
• The automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function, fast-response current limit operation, fast-response current
limit operation, shortest acceleration/deceleration, and optimum acceleration/deceleration are invalid.
• Changing the terminal assignment with Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• Under the following operating conditions, the load torque high-speed frequency function is invalid:
PU operation (Pr.79), PU + External operation (Pr.79), JOG operation, PID control function operation (Pr.128), remote setting
function operation (Pr.59), orientation control function operation, multi-speed setting (RH, RM, and RL signals), torque control,
position control.
• When the average current during acceleration is too small, it may be judged as regeneration, and the maximum frequency may
become the setting of Pr.5.
• The output frequency may change due to the load, so do not get unnecessarily close to the motor or machine.

Parameters referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27 (multi-speed setting)page 411
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635
Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 377
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Pr.128 PID action selectionpage 601
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521

5.14.7 Traverse function

The traverse operation, which oscillates the frequency at a constant cycle, is available.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 Traverse function invalid
Traverse function valid only in External operation
592 Traverse function 1
0 mode
A300 selection
Traverse function valid regardless of the operation
2
mode
593 Maximum amplitude
10% 0 to 25% Level of amplitude during traverse operation
A301 amount
Amplitude
594 Compensation amount during amplitude inversion
compensation amount 10% 0 to 50%
A302 (from acceleration to deceleration)
during deceleration
Amplitude
595 Compensation amount during amplitude inversion
compensation amount 10% 0 to 50%
A303 (from deceleration to acceleration)
during acceleration
596 Amplitude acceleration Time period of acceleration during traverse
5s 0.1 to 3600 s
A304 time operation
597 Amplitude deceleration Time period of deceleration during traverse
5s 0.1 to 3600 s
A305 time operation
• Setting Pr.592 Traverse function selection = "1 or 2" enables the traverse function.

582 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • Assigning the Traverse function selection (X37) signal to the input terminal enables the traverse function only when the
X37 signal is ON. (When the X37 signal is not assigned, the traverse function is always available.) To input the X37 signal,
set "37" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal.
1
Output frequency(Hz) Traverse operation

f2
f0: set frequency
f1: amplitude amount from the set frequency 2
f1 Pr.7 (f0 × Pr.593/100)
f2: compensation amount at transition from
f0
acceleration to deceleration
f1
f3
Pr.8
(f1 × Pr.594/100)
f3: compensation amount at transition from 3
deceleration to acceleration
(f1 × Pr.595/100)
Pr.7 t2 t1 t1: time from acceleration during traverse
(Pr.597) (Pr.596)
Time(s)
operation (Time from (f0 − f1) to (f0 + f1))
(Pr.596)
4
STF(STR) t2: time from deceleration during traverse
ON
signal operation (Time from (f0 + f1) to (f0 − f1))
ON (Pr.597)
X37 signal
5
• The motor accelerates to the set frequency f0 according to the normal Pr.7 Acceleration time at turn ON of the start
command (STF or STR).
• When the output frequency reaches f0 and the X37 signal turns ON, the inverter begins traverse operation and accelerates 6
to f0 + f1. The acceleration time at this time is according to the Pr.596 setting. (If the X37 signal turns ON before the output
frequency reaches f0, traverse operation begins after the output frequency reaches f0.)
• After the inverter accelerates the motor to f0 + f1, this is compensated with f2 (f1 × Pr.594), and the motor decelerates to 7
f0 - f1. The deceleration time at this time is according to the Pr.597 setting.
• After the inverter decelerates the motor to f0 - f1, this is compensated with f3 (f1 × Pr.595), and the motor accelerates again
to f0 + f1. 8
• When the X37 signal turns OFF during traverse operation, the inverter accelerates/decelerates the motor to f0 according
to the normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr.7, Pr.8). If the start command (STF or STR) is turned OFF during traverse
operation, the inverter decelerates the motor to a stop according to the normal deceleration time (Pr.8).
9
NOTE
• If the set frequency (f0) and traverse operation parameters (Pr.593 to Pr.597) are changed during traverse operation, this is
applied in operations after the output frequency reaches f0 before the change was made. 10
• If the output frequency exceeds Pr.1 Maximum frequency or Pr.2 Minimum frequency during traverse operation, the output
frequency is clamped at the maximum/minimum frequency when the set pattern exceeds the maximum/minimum frequency.
• When the traverse function and S-pattern acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 ≠ "0") are selected, S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration operation occurs only in the range operated at the normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr.7, Pr.8).
Acceleration/deceleration during traverse operation is performed linearly.
• If stall prevention activates during traverse operation, traverse operation stops and normal operation begins. When stall
prevention operation is completed, the inverter accelerates/decelerates to f0 at the normal acceleration/deceleration time
(Pr.7, Pr.8). After the output frequency reaches f0, the traverse operation begins again.
• If the value of the amplitude inversion compensation amount (Pr.594, Pr.595) is too large, an overvoltage trip or stall
prevention occurs, and pattern operation cannot be performed as set.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
583
 5.14.8 Anti-sway control
When an object is moved by a gantry crane, swinging is suppressed on the crane's traveling axis.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
DC brake judgment time Set the time from when the output frequency becomes the Pr.10 DC injection
1072
for anti-sway control 3s 0 to 10 s brake operation frequency or less to when the DC injection brake (zero speed
A310
operation control or the servo lock) operation starts.
1073 Anti-sway control 0 Anti-sway control disabled
0
A311 operation selection 1 Anti-sway control enabled
0.05 to 3 Hz Set a swinging frequency of the object.
1074 Anti-sway control
1 Hz Anti-sway control is performed using a swinging frequency estimated by the
A312 frequency 9999
inverter according to the settings of Pr.1077 to Pr.1079.
1075
Anti-sway control depth 0 0 to 3 0 (Deep) → 3 (Shallow)
A313
1076
Anti-sway control width 0 0 to 3 0 (Narrow) → 3 (Wide)
A314
1077
Rope length 1m 0.1 to 50 m Set the rope length of the crane.
A315
1078 1 to 50000
Trolley weight 1 kg Set the weight of the trolley.
A316 kg
1079 1 to 50000
Load weight 1 kg Set the weight of the object.
A317 kg

 Anti-sway control operation (Pr.1073)

• Setting Pr.1073 Anti-sway control operation selection = "1" enables anti-sway control. (Anti-sway control is not
available under zero speed or servo lock control.)
• During operation under anti-sway control, the travel distance becomes longer. Input a stop command earlier to avoid a
collision with an obstacle.
• A deceleration to stop without anti-sway control is applied for stopping as a result of PU stop, an emergency stop command
input from a communication option, Pr.875 Fault definition, or an emergency stop input (X92 signal).
Frequency

Frequency command Frequency command of anti-sway control

Time
RL ON

RM ON

STF ON

NOTE
• Under torque control or position control, the anti-sway control is disabled.
• During operation of the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function, or when the automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure is enabled (Pr.57 ≠ "9999"), the anti-sway control is disabled.

 Swinging frequency setting (Pr.1074 to Pr.1079)

• Set a swinging frequency in Pr.1074 Anti-sway control frequency. The swinging frequency is used as a notch filter
frequency. Lower the response level of speed control in the frequency band with the width set in the Pr.1076 Anti-sway
control width by the gain set in the Pr.1075 Anti-sway control depth.
• A deeper notch depth has a greater effect in reducing mechanical resonance, but because the phase delay is larger,
swinging may increase. Adjust by starting from the shallowest value.
Setting 3 2 1 0
Gain (depth) -4 dB (shallow) -8 dB -14 dB -∞ (deep)

584 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • If the Pr.1076 setting is too large (the width is too wide), the response level of speed control drops, and the system may
become unstable.
• After setting Pr.1074 = "9999", set the crane rope length in the Pr.1077 Rope length, the trolley weight in the Pr.1078
1
Trolley weight, and the weight of an object in the Pr.1079 Load weight. Then, anti-sway control is performed using a
swinging frequency estimated by the inverter.
2
 Delay time for brake operation of anti-sway control (Pr.1072)
• Set the time from when the output frequency becomes the Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency or less to when
the zero speed control or the servo lock operation starts in the Pr.1072 DC brake judgment time for anti-sway control 3
operation.

Frequency command
4
Frequency command of anti-sway control

Actual rotation
Pr.10 DC injection brake 5
operation frequency

Time

Pr.1072 Zero speed control 6

Servo lock
STF ON

7
NOTE
• During anti-sway control operation, even if the motor rotation is restricted to one direction in the Pr.78 Reverse rotation
prevention selection, the motor may rotate in a direction opposite to the setting.
• A protective function (E.OSD) may be activated during vibration control. When using anti-sway control, set Pr.690
8
Deceleration check time = "9999 (initial value)" to disable the deceleration check function.
• When anti-sway control is enabled, regeneration avoidance, shortest acceleration/deceleration, and the traverse function are
disabled. 9
• Do not set anti-sway control and droop control together.

Parameters referred to 10
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequencypage 715
Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selectionpage 406
Pr.286 Droop gainpage 738
Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/decelerationpage 384
Pr.592 Traverse function selectionpage 582
Pr.690 Deceleration check timepage 269
Pr.875 Fault definitionpage 422
Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation selectionpage 732

5.14.9 Orientation control

V/F Magnetic flux Vector

The inverter can adjust the stop position (Orientation control) using a position detector (encoder) attached to a place such as
the main shaft of the machine.
A Vector control compatible option is required.
Because Pr.350 Stop position command selection is initially set to "9999", the orientation control function is invalid.

Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 Internal stop position command (Pr.356)
350 Stop position
9999 1 External stop position command (FR-A8AX 16-bit data)
A510*1 command selection
9999 Orientation control disabled
351
Orientation speed 2 Hz 0 to 30 Hz Turning ON the X22 signal decelerates the motor speed to the set value.
A526*1
352
Creep speed 0.5 Hz 0 to 10 Hz After the speed reaches the orientation speed, the speed decreases to the
A527*1
creep speed set in Pr.352 as soon as the current position pulse reaches the
353 Creep switchover
511 0 to 16383 creep switchover position set in Pr.353.
A528*1 position

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
585
 Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
354 Position loop As soon as the current position pulses reach the set position loop switchover
96 0 to 8191
A529*1 switchover position position, control is changed to the position loop.

355 After the motor moves into the position loop, the motor stops by the DC
DC injection brake
5 0 to 255 injection brake when the current position pulses reach the specified start
A530*1 start position
position of the DC injection brake.
356 Internal stop position When "0" is set in Pr.350, the internal position command is activated and the
0 0 to 16383
A531*1 command setting value of Pr.356 becomes the stop position.
357 Orientation in-
5 0 to 255 Set the in-position width at a stop of the orientation.
A532*1 position zone
358 Servo torque
1 0 to 13 Operation at orientation completion can be selected.
A533*1 selection
Set when using a motor for which
forward rotation (encoder) is Set for the operation at 120 Hz or
0
less.
clockwise (CW) viewed from the shaft

CW
Set for the operation at a frequency
100
higher than 120 Hz.
359 852
C141 C241 Encoder rotation 1 Set when using a motor for which
*2 *3 direction Set for the operation at 120 Hz or
1 forward rotation (encoder) is
less.
counterclockwise (CCW) viewed from
the shaft.

CCW Set for the operation at a frequency

101
higher than 120 Hz.

0 Speed command When Pr.350 = "1" is set and the FR-

16-bit data is used as the external A8AX is installed together, set the
360 1 stop position using 16-bit data.
16-bit data selection 0 position command as is.
*1 The stop position command is input
A511
Set the stop position by dividing up to as binary regardless of the Pr.304
2 to 127
128 stop positions. setting.
361 Shift the home position using a compensation value without changing the
Position shift 0 0 to 16383 home position of the encoder. The stop position is a position obtained by
A512*1 adding the setting of Pr.361 to the position command.
When the servo torque function is selected using Pr.358, the output
362 Orientation position frequency for generating servo torque gradually increases to the Pr.352
1 0.1 to 100
A520*1 loop gain according to the slope set in Pr.362. Although the operation becomes faster
when the value is increased, hunting may occur in the machine.
363 The Orientation complete (ORA) signal turns ON after going into the in-
Completion signal
*1 0.5 s 0 to 5 s position width and waiting for the set time. Also, the signal turns OFF after
A521 output delay time
going out of the in-position width and waiting for the set time.
If the Orientation complete (ORA) signal has never been output and the
364 encoder stays stopped for the set time without completing orientation, the
Encoder stop check
0.5 s 0 to 5 s Orientation fault (ORM) signal is output. If the ORA signal has been output
A522*1 time
before but the orientation cannot be completed within the set time, the ORM
signal is also output.
The time elapses after passing the creep switchover position is measured. If
365 0 to 60 s orientation cannot be completed within the set time, the Orientation fault
Orientation limit 9999
A523*1 (ORM) signal is output.
9999 Set to 120 s.
When the start signal is turned OFF with the Orientation command (X22) ON
after stopping the motor by orientation control, the present position is
366 0 to 5 s
Recheck time 9999 checked again after the set time elapses, and the Orientation complete
A524*1 (ORA) signal or Orientation fault (ORM) signal is output.
9999 Not checked.
369 851
C140 C240 Number of encoder 1024 0 to 4096
Set the number of encoder pulses.
*4 *3 pulses Set the number of pulses before it is multiplied by 4.

586 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
Orientation is executed from the
1
0
current rotation direction.
Orientation from the forward rotation
1 Motor end orientation
direction
Orientation from the reverse rotation
2
2
393 direction
Orientation selection 0
A525*1 Orientation from the current rotation
10
direction
Orientation from the forward rotation
3
11
direction Machine end orientation*6

Orientation from the reverse rotation

12
direction 4
394 Number of machine
A540*5 side gear teeth
1 0 to 32767 Set the encoder orientation gear ratio.
395 Number of motor side
A841*5 gear teeth 5
396 Orientation speed
60 0 to 1000
A542*1 gain (P term) Response level during position control loop (servo rigidity) can be adjusted
397 Orientation speed
0.333 0 to 20 s
at orientation stop.
6
A543*1 integral time
398 Orientation speed
1 0 to 100 Lag/advance compensation gain can be adjusted.
A544*1 gain (D term)
399 Orientation
20 0 to 1000
Make adjustment when the motor runs back at orientation stop or the 7
A545*1 deceleration ratio orientation time is long.
Set the number of pulses output from the encoder connected to the end of
829
A546*7
Number of machine
end encoder pulses
9999
0 to 4096 the machine.
Set the number of pulses before it is multiplied by 4. 8
9999 Machine end orientation invalid.
First motor: plug-in option that

0
supports the Vector control
Second motor: control terminal option Machine end orientation invalid
9
that supports the Vector control*8
First motor: control terminal option
862
C242*1
Encoder option
selection
0
that supports the Vector control
Second motor: plug-in option that
Machine end orientation invalid
(when Pr.393 = "0, 1, or 2")
10
supports the Vector control*8
1
Motor end: control terminal option that
supports the Vector control Machine end orientation valid (when
Machine end: plug-in option that Pr.393 = "10, 11, or 12")
supports the Vector control
*1 The setting is available when a Vector control compatible option is installed.
*2 These parameters are available when a plug-in option (FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-A8APR/FR-A8APS) is installed.
*3 These parameters are available when the option (FR-A8TP) is installed.
*4 The setting is available when the FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL is installed.
*5 The setting is available when the FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-A8APR/FR-A8TP is installed.
*6 To perform machine end orientation, the plug-in option (FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL/FR-A8APR/FR-A8APS) and control terminal option (FR-A8TP) are
required.
*7 The setting is available when the FR-A8AL is installed.
*8 When the second motor is selected, the orientation control is disabled.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
587
  Motor end orientation connection example
MCCB MC Inverter SF-JR motor with encoder For complementary type (SF-V5RU)
R/L1 U U MCCB MC OCR SF-V5RU
Three-phase *1 A
S/L2 V V Three-phase
AC power M AC power
B
FAN
supply T/L3 W W supply C
E
Inverter U U
Forward rotation start STF V V
FR-A8AP Earth (Ground) W W
M
Reverse rotation start STR PA1 C *2 E
Orientation command X22 *3 PA2 R External Earth (Ground)
SD PC
Contact input common thermal relay 2W1kΩ Thermal
PB1 A input *11 CS(OH) relay
ORA *4 G1 protector
PB2 N
ORM SD G2
*4 Encoder
PZ1 B FR-A8AP PA1 A *2
SE Differential PZ2 P *5 PA2 B
SD PB1 C
PG H
PB2 D
X15 Complementary
SD K Encoder
Differential PZ1 F
X14
PG PZ2 G *5
Terminating
X1 resistor ON SD *6 Complementary PG S

X0 *7 *8 (+) (-) 5VDC power SD R

Terminating
DY supply *9 resistor ON PG
OFF SD *6
*8 (+) (-) 12VDCpower
FR-A8AX OFF
*7 supply *9
*10

*1 Single-phase power supply (200 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz) is used for the fan for a 7.5 kW or lower dedicated motor.
*2 The pin number differs according to the encoder used.
*3 Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal. (Refer to page 521.)
*4 Use Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal. (Refer to page 473.)
*5 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio must be 1:1.
*6 Connect the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure using a tool such as a P-clip. (Refer to page 93.)
*7 For the differential line driver, set the terminating resistor selection switch to the ON position (initial status) to use. (Refer to page 88.)
Note that the terminating resistor switch should be set to the OFF position when sharing the same encoder with another unit (NC, etc.) or when
the terminating resistor is connected to another unit. For the complementary, set the switch to the OFF position.
*8 For terminal compatibility of the FR-JCBL, the FR-V5CBL, and the FR-A8AP, refer to page 88.
*9 A separate external power supply is necessary according to the encoder power specification. Make the voltage of the external power supply the
same as the encoder output voltage, and connect the external power supply between terminals PG and SD. When performing encoder feedback
control and Vector control together, an encoder and power supply can be shared.
*10 When a stop position command is input from outside, a plug-in option FR-A8AX is required. Refer to page 589 for the external stop position
command.
*11 Connect the recommended 2W1kΩ resistor between terminals PC and OH. (Recommended product: MOS2C102J 2W1kΩ by KOA Corporation)
Insert the input line and the resistor to a 2-wire blade terminal, and connect the blade terminal to terminal OH. (For the recommended 2-wire blade
terminals, refer to page 74.)
Insulate the lead wire of the resistor, for example by applying a contraction tube, and shape the wires so that the resistor and its lead wire do not
touch other cables. Caulk the lead wire securely together with the thermal protector input line using a 2-wire blade terminal. (Do not subject the
lead wire's bottom area to an excessive pressure.)
To use a terminal as terminal OH, assign the External thermal relay input (OH) signal to an input terminal. (Set "7" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189.)
When OH signal is assigned to terminal RH (Pr.182 = “7”)
PC RH (OH)

2-wire blade terminal

Insulate To thermal protector

Resistor (2 W1kΩ)
Insulate

 Setting
• When the Orientation command (X22) signal is turned ON during operation after the parameters are set, the motor is
decelerated to the orientation switchover speed. Then, the inverter calculates the orientation stop distance, further
decelerates the motor and the motor enters the orientation state (servo lock). The Orientation complete (ORA) signal is
output when the motor is within the orientation complete width.

588 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Setting I/O signals
Signal Signal name Description 1
Orientation Turn ON the X22 signal to start the orientation operation.
X22
command For the X22 signal input, set "22" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 to assign the function.

ORA
Orientation
The output is in LOW state when the orientation stop can be made within the orientation complete width while
the start signal and X22 signal are input (ON). 2
complete
For the ORA signal output, set "27 (positive logic)" or "127 (negative logic)" in Pr.190 to Pr.196.
The output is in LOW state when the orientation stop cannot be made within the orientation complete width
ORM Orientation fault while the start signal and X22 signal are input (ON).
For the ORM signal output, set "28 (positive logic)" or "128 (negative logic)" in Pr.190 to Pr.196. 3
 Selecting stop position command (Pr.350 Stop position command
selection) 4
• Select either to use the internal stop position command (Pr.356 Internal stop position command) or the external stop
position command (16-bit data using the FR-A8AX).
Pr.350 setting Stop position command source
5
0 Internal stop position command (Pr.356: 0 to 16383)
1 External stop position command (FR-A8AX) 16-bit data
9999 (initial value) Orientation control disabled 6
• When the internal stop position command (Pr.350 = "0") is selected, the Pr.356 setting is used as the stop position.
• When the number of encoder pulses is 1024 pulses/r, one revolution (360°) of the encoder is divided by 4096 pulses
(quadruplicated) so that the degree per pulse can be calculated as 7
360° / 4096 pulses = 0.0879°/pulse.
Refer to the following figure. Stop position (address) is shown within parentheses.
Origin (0)
CW
Origin (0) 8
CCW

270 90 90 270
(3072) (1024) (1024) (3072)
9
180 (2048) 180 (2048)
Pr.359 = 0 Pr.359 = 1

• When the external stop position command (Pr.350 = "1") is selected while the FR-A8AX option is installed, 16-bit data
10
(binary input) is used to give the stop position.
• The value set in Pr.360 16-bit data selection should be the divided value minus 1.
Pr.360 setting Description
0 External position command is invalid (speed command or torque command via the FR-A8AX)
Position command direct input.
The 16-bit digital signal via the FR-A8AX is the direct stop position command.
<Example>
1
When the Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses setting is "1024", the stop position command "0 to 4095" can be input using
the FR-A8AX, and the digital signal of "2048 (H800)" is input to stop the motor at a 180° position. A command greater than
4096 is considered as 4095.
Set the stop position command by dividing up to 128 stop positions.
If the external stop command input is greater than the setting, the stop positions are the same as those in the maximum
2 to 127 external stop command value.
<Example>
When the number of stop positions is 90 (divided at intervals of 4°), 90 - 1 = 89. Hence, set "89".

[Example 1] When Pr.369 = "1024" [Example 2] With 8 stop positions [Example 3] With 120 stop positions
Pr.360 = "1" Pr.360 = "7" Pr.360 = "119"
Origin (0) (7 or more) Origin(0) (1) Origin (0)
CW 315 45 CW CW

90 90 270 At intervals 90
270 (6)270 of 3
(1024(H400)) (2) (90) (30)
(3072(HC00))
(5)225 135
180 180 (3) 180
(2048(H800)) (4) (60)

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
589
 NOTE
• Values in parentheses indicate binary data input from the terminals. Even if the position pulse monitor (Pr.52 Operation panel
main monitor selection = "19") is selected, the data monitored is not the number of stop positions. It is the number of pulses
from 0 to 65535.
• FR-A8AX parameters (Pr.300 to Pr.305) are invalid. (Valid when Pr.360 = "0")
• Terminal DY (data read timing input signal) becomes invalid during Vector control. (The position data is downloaded at the
start of orientation.)
• Internal stop position command is given when no option is installed or Pr.360 = "0" even if "1" (external stop position command)
is set in Pr.350.

• Relationship between stop position command and 16-bit data

Operation
Pr.350 Stop position
Pr.360 16-bit data selection 16-bit data (FR-
command selection Stop position command Speed command
A8AX)
0: speed command Internal (Pr.356) Speed command 16-bit data
0: internal 1, 2 to 127: position External command
Internal (Pr.356) Disabled
command (or PU)
0: speed command Internal (Pr.356) Speed command 16-bit data
External
1: EXT 1, 2 to 127: position External command
(Internal when the FR-A8AX is not Position command
command (or PU)
installed (Pr.356))

 Pr.361 Position shift (initial value "0")

• The stop position is a position obtained by adding the setting of Pr.361 to the position command.
• Position shift function
Shift the home position using a compensation value without changing the home position of the position detector (encoder).

NOTE
• When orientation control is valid using Pr.350 Stop position command selection with the Vector control compatible option
installed, the rotation direction of the encoder is displayed on the rotation direction display of the PU (operation panel/
parameter unit).
Make settings so that "FWD" is displayed at turn ON of the STF signal and "REV" is displayed at turn ON of the STR signal.

 Monitor display change

Monitor Remarks
When "19" is set in Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, the position pulse
Position pulse monitor monitor is displayed instead of the output voltage monitor of the PU.
(Displayed only when the Vector control compatible option is mounted.)
When "22" is set in Pr.52, the orientation status is displayed instead of the output voltage
monitor of the PU. (Displayed only when the Vector control compatible option is mounted.)
0: Other than orientation operation or orientation speed is not reached
1: Orientation speed is reached
2: Creep speed is reached
Orientation status*1 3: Position loop is reached
4: Orientation complete
5: Orientation fault (pulse stop)
6: Orientation fault (orientation limit)
7: Orientation fault (recheck)
8: Continuous multi-point orientation

*1 Invalid during Vector control. ("0" is always displayed.)

 Pr.357 Orientation in-position zone (initial value "5")

• The in-position width for orientation stop can be set.
The initial value of Pr.357 is "5". To change the Δθ value, make fine adjustments by changing in increments of ± 10.

590 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • If the position detection value from the encoder enters ±Δθ during orientation stop, the Orientation complete (ORA) signal
is output.
Set point
1

2
360
Pr.357
Pr.369
4 times
Number of encoder pulses
3
 Orientation at the running status (under V/F control, Advanced magnetic
flux vector control)
4
1. When the orientation command (X22) turns on, the motor speed decreases to the Pr.351 Orientation speed.
(Pr.351 is initially set to: 2 Hz)

2. After the speed reaches the orientation speed, the speed further decreases to the Pr.352 Creep speed as soon as 5
the current position pulse reaches the Pr.353 Creep switchover position.
(Pr.352 is initially set to 0.5 Hz, Pr.353 is initially set to "511".)
6
3. Moreover, as soon as the current position pulse reaches the Pr.354 Position loop switchover position, control is
changed to the position loop. (Pr.354 is initially set to "96".)

4. After the motor moves into the position loop, the motor decelerates and stops by the DC injection brake as soon as 7
the current position pulse reaches the Pr.355 DC injection brake start position. (Pr.355 is initially set to "5".)

5. When the motor stops in Pr.357 Orientation in-position zone, the orientation complete (ORA) signal is output after
Pr.363 Completion signal output delay time. If the motor does not stop within the in-position width because of
8
external force, etc., the ORA signal turns OFF after the time set in Pr.363. (Pr.357 is initially set to "5", Pr.363 is
initially set to 0.5 s.)
9
6. If the orientation is not completed continuously in Pr.365 Orientation limit after passing the creep switchover
position, the orientation fault signal (ORM) is output.

7. After the orientation starts, if the motor is stopped by external force, etc. before reaching the in-position width and 10
the ORA signal is not output, the ORM signal is output after the Pr.364 Encoder stop check time. If the motor is
moved out of the in-position width by external force, etc. after the ORA signal has been output once, the ORA signal
turns OFF after the set time in Pr.363. If the orientation is not completed within the time set in Pr.364, the ORM
signal is output.

8. If the ORA and ORM signals have been output once, but the start signal (STF or STR) is turned OFF while the X22
signal is ON, the ORA or ORM signal is output again after Pr.366 Recheck time.

9. The ORA and ORM signals cannot be output while the X22 signal is OFF.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
591
 NOTE
• When the orientation command turns OFF while the start signal is ON, the speed accelerates to the command speed.

Orientation Position loop

speed Home position
Orientation stop position command
DC injection brake
Creep switchover position Position loop switchover position
Creep
speed
• If hunting of the motor shaft occurs during orientation stop, set a larger value in Pr.354 or a smaller value in Pr.352 to prevent it.
Orientation speed (set with Pr.351)

Main spindle speed (encoder) Creep speed (set with Pr.352)

1)
Pr.351 2) 3) 4)
Pr.352
0 Time
Start signal (STF, STR) ON OFF
Orientation command (X22) OFF OFF
ON
Creep switchover position
(set with Pr.353)
DC injection Position loop switchover
Current position signal brake start
position (set with Pr.354)
(set with Pr.355) Stop position command
Origin signal
DC injection brake OFF ON OFF

Orientation complete signal (ORA) OFF 5) ON OFF

 Orientation from the stop status (under V/F control, Advanced magnetic
flux vector control)
• Turning ON the start signal after turning ON the Orientation command (X22) signal increases the motor speed to the Pr.351
Orientation speed, and then the same orientation operation is performed as the operation shown in "Orientation at the
running status".
• Note that the DC injection brake operates without increasing to the orientation speed if the position signal is within the DC
injection brake start position.
Main spindle speed (encoder) Orientation speed (orientation switchover speed)

Pr.351 Creep speed (orientation deceleration ratio)

Pr.352
Time
Start signal (STF, STR) OFF ON OFF

Orientation command (X22) OFF ON OFF

DC injection brake OFF ON OFF

Orientation complete signal (ORA) OFF ON OFF

592 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Continuous multi-point orientation (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux
vector control) 1
• Orientation during orientation operation or start signal is ON

Main spindle speed (encoder) Orientation speed (orientation switchover speed)

Creep speed (orientation deceleration ratio)
2
Pr.351
Pr.352

Start signal ON
3
Orientation command ON

Orientation complete signal Servo-in Servo-in

4
ON ON
DY
50ms or more is necessary
5
Position signal
Position command latch Position command latch

• The position data is read at the rising edge of DY. (For the details, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR-A8AX). 6
• When the position signal is within the creep switchover position, the speed starts up to the creep speed not to the
orientation speed.
• When the position signal is outside the creep switchover position, the speed starts up to the orientation speed. 7
• The DC injection brake operates if the position signal is within the DC injection brake start position.
• 16-bit data with the FR-A8AX is valid only when the DY signal is ON.

NOTE 8
• Couple the encoder with the motor shaft or with the shaft that stops the main shaft at the specified position. Couple it with the
speed ratio of 1:1 and without any mechanical looseness.
• The DC injection brake operates at orientation stop. Release the DC injection brake as soon as possible (within several
seconds), as continuous operation of the DC injection brake will cause the motor to overheat, leading to burnout.
9
• Because the servo lock function is not available after orientation stop, provide a holding mechanism, such as a mechanical
brake or knock pin, when secure holding of the main shaft is required.
• To ensure correct positioning, the encoder must be set in the proper rotation direction, and the A and B phases must be 10
connected correctly.
• If the pulse signal from the encoder stops due to encoder signal loss, etc. during orientation, the Orientation fault (ORM) signal
may be output.
• When performing orientation control, enable the DC injection brake (refer to page 715). When the DC injection brake is
disabled, orientation operation cannot be completed.
• When orientation control is performed, the DC injection brake operates regardless of the External DC injection brake operation
start (X13) signal even when Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time = "8888" (DC injection brake external selection).
• To terminate orientation, the start signal (STF or STR) must be first switched OFF, and then the Orientation command (X22)
signal must be switched OFF. As soon as this X22 signal is switched OFF, orientation control ends. (Depending on the Pr.358
Servo torque selection setting, the orientation status continues if the X22 signal remains ON even if the DC injection brake
is released by turning OFF the start signal. Because of this, the orientation status on the monitor does not show "0".)
• When the retry function of Pr.358 Servo torque selection is selected, the retry operation is performed three times including
the first orientation.
• When performing orientation control, properly set Pr.350 Stop position command selection and Pr.360 16-bit data
selection (external position command selection). If the values set are incorrect, proper orientation control will not be
performed.
• When orientation control is performed, PID control is disabled.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
593
  Servo torque selection (Pr.358) (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux
vector control)
Operation for each Pr.358 setting
Function and description Remarks
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
a. Servo torque function until
○: With servo torque function.
output of the Orientation × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × × ○
×: Without servo torque function.
complete (ORA) signal
○: With retry function.
b. Retry function × × × × × × × ○ × × × ○ × ×
×: Without retry function.
c. Output frequency
○: With frequency compensation.
compensation when the motor × × ○ ○ × ○ ○ × × × × × ○ ○
×: Without frequency compensation.
stops outside the in-position zone
d. DC injection brake and servo
torque when the motor exits the
○: DC injection brake enabled.
in-position zone after output of ○ × × × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
×: Servo torque enabled.
the Orientation complete (ORA)
signal
○: When the start signal (STF, STR) or
e. Turning OFF the Orientation
orientation command is turned OFF.
complete (ORA) signal when the ○ ○ ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × × ×
×: When the orientation command is
orientation operation is ended.
turned OFF.
○: Turns OFF the complete signal
when the motor exits the in-position
f. Complete signal when the
zone.
motor exits the in-position zone
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × × × × × × × ×: Complete signal remains ON even if
after output of the Orientation
the motor exits the in-position zone
complete (ORA) signal
(the Orientation fault (ORM) signal is
not output).

594 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 NOTE
• When the orientation command turns OFF while the start signal is ON, the motor accelerates to the command speed. 1
• When the motor shaft stops outside of the set setting range of the stop position, the motor shaft is returned to the stop position
by the servo torque function (if enough torque is generated).

2
a. Servo torque function until output of the Orientation complete signal
Select whether or not servo torque is available using Pr.358 Servo torque selection. Servo torque is not generated if the
current position pulse is in between the orientation stop position and DC injection brake start position. The shaft is fixed
3
using the DC injection brake, and when the motor exits the width by external force, etc., the servo torque is generated to
move the motor back within the width. Once the Orientation complete (ORA) signal is output, the operation is performed

b.
as described in d.
Retry function
4
Select retry function using Pr.358. Note that the retry function cannot be used together with the servo torque function. If
the motor shaft does not stop within the in-position zone when the motor stop is checked, orientation operation is
performed again by the retry function. This retry function is performed three times including the first orientation. The
5
maximum retry number is three. (The Orientation fault (ORM) signal is not output during retry operation.)
c. Frequency compensation when the motor stops outside the orientation complete width
When the motor stops before entering the in-position width due to external force, etc., the output frequency is increased 6
to move the shaft to the orientation stop position. The output frequency is gradually increased to the Pr.352 Creep speed.
This function cannot be used with the retry function.
d. DC injection brake and servo torque selection when the position pulse exits the in-position zone after output of the ORA 7
signal
If the motor exits the in-position width, select the setting either to fix the shaft with the DC injection brake or by returning
the motor to the orientation stop position with the servo torque. 8
e. Turning OFF the Orientation complete (ORA) signal when the orientation operation is ended.
When ending the orientation operation, first turn OFF the start (STF or STR) signal, and then turn OFF the Orientation
command X22 signal. At this time, select when to turn OFF the ORA signal from either the time the start signal is turned 9
OFF or the time the orientation command signal is turned OFF.
f. Complete signal when the motor exits the in-position zone after output of the Orientation complete (ORA) signal
Select to turn OFF the ORA signal or to keep the ORA signal ON (the ORM signal is not output) when the motor exits the 10
in-position width.

 Position loop gain (Pr.362) (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector
control)
• When the servo torque function is selected using Pr.358 Servo torque selection, the output frequency for generating
servo torque gradually increases to the Pr.352 Creep speed according to the slope set in Pr.362 Orientation position
loop gain.
• Although the operation becomes faster when the value is increased, hunting may occur in the machine.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
595
  Description of orientation operation (Vector control)
• Setting the rotation direction (Pr.393 Orientation selection)
Rotation
Pr.393 setting Remarks
direction
0 (initial value) Pre-orientation Orientation is executed to the current rotation direction.
Orientation is executed to the forward rotation direction.
Forward rotation
1 (If the motor is running in reverse, orientation is executed to the forward
orientation
rotation direction after deceleration.) Motor end orientation
Orientation is executed to the reverse rotation direction.
Reverse rotation
2 (If the motor is running forward, orientation is executed to the reverse
orientation
rotation direction after deceleration.)
10 Pre-orientation Orientation is executed to the current rotation direction.
11 Forward rotation Orientation is executed to the forward rotation direction. (If the motor is
orientation running in reverse, orientation is executed to the forward rotation direction
after deceleration.) Machine end orientation
12 Reverse rotation Orientation is executed to the reverse rotation direction. (If the motor is
orientation running forward, orientation is executed to the reverse rotation direction
after deceleration.)

 Orientation to the current rotation direction (Pr.393 = "0 (initial value),

10") (Vector control)
• When the Orientation command (X22) signal is input, the motor speed decelerates from the running speed to Pr.351
Orientation speed. At the same time, the orientation stop position command is read in. (The stop position command is
determined by the setting of Pr.350 Stop position command selection, Pr.360 16-bit data selection.)

Speed Speed [t]

(forward (reverse
rotation) rotation)
[t]

X22 OFF ON X22 OFF ON

ORA OFF ON ORA OFF ON

• When the orientation switchover speed is reached, the encoder Z phase pulse is confirmed, and the control changes from
speed control to position control (Pr.362 Orientation position loop gain).
• The distance to the orientation stop position is calculated at switching of the control, and the motor decelerates to a stop
with a set deceleration pattern (Pr.399 Orientation deceleration ratio) and enters the orientation (servo lock) state.
• Once in the Pr.357 Orientation in-position zone, the Orientation complete (ORA) signal is output.
• The home position can be moved using Pr.361 Position shift.

CAUTION
• If the X22 is turned OFF while the start signal is input, the motor accelerates toward the speed of the current speed
command. Therefore, to stop, turn the Forward rotation (Reverse rotation) signal OFF.

 Orientation to the forward rotation direction (Pr.393 = "1, 11") (Vector

control)
• This method is used to improve the stopping precision and maintain the mechanical precision when the backlash is large.
• If the motor is running in the forward rotation direction, it makes an orientation stop with the same method as "orientation
to the current rotation direction".

596 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • If the motor is running in reverse, it decelerates, change to the forward rotation direction, and then orientation stop is
executed.
1
Speed
(forward
rotation) [t]
Speed
(reverse
[t]
2
rotation)
X22
X22
ORA
ORA 3
 Orientation to the reverse rotation direction (Pr.393 = "2, 12") (Vector
control) 4
• If the motor is running in the reverse rotation direction, it executes an orientation stop with the same method as "orientation
to the current rotation direction".
• If the motor is running in forward, it decelerates, change to the reverse rotation direction, and then orientation stop is
5
executed.

6
Speed Speed [t]
(forward (reverse
rotation) [t] rotation)

X22
7
X22
ORA ORA

8
NOTE
• Couple the encoder with the motor shaft that stops the shaft at the specified position. Couple it with the speed ratio of 1:1 and
without any mechanical looseness.
• To ensure correct positioning, the encoder must be set in the proper rotation direction, and the A and B phases must be 9
connected correctly.
• If the pulse signal from the encoder stops due to encoder signal loss, etc. during orientation, orientation may not be completed.
• To terminate orientation, the start (STF or STR) signal must be first switched OFF, and then the Orientation (X22) signal must
be switched OFF. As soon as this X22 signal is switched OFF, orientation control ends.
10
• When performing orientation control, properly set Pr.350 Stop position command selection and Pr.360 16-bit data
selection.
If the values set are incorrect, proper orientation control will not be performed.
• When orientation control is performed, PID control is disabled.
• If Signal loss detection (E.ECT) is displayed when the X22 signal is ON, causing the inverter to trip, check for a break in the
cable of the Z phase of the encoder.

 Servo rigidity adjustment (Pr.362, Pr.396 to Pr.398) (Vector control)

• To increase the servo rigidity*1 during orientation stop using Pr.396 Orientation speed gain (P term) or Pr.397
Orientation speed integral time, make adjustments with the following procedures.

1. Increase the Pr.362 Orientation position loop gain value to the extent that rocking*2 does not occur during
orientation stop.

2. Increase Pr.396 and Pr.397 at the same rate.

Normally, adjust Pr.396 in the range from 10 to 100, and Pr.397 from 0.1 to 1.0 s.
(Note that these do not need to be set to the same rate.)
<Example>
When the Pr.396 value is multiplied by 1.2, divide the Pr.397 value by 1.2.
If vibration occurs during orientation stop, the scale cannot be raised any higher.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
597
 3. Pr.398 Orientation speed gain (D term) is the lag/advance compensation gain.
The limit cycle*3 can be prevented by increasing the value, and operation can be stopped stably. However, the
torque decreases in relation to the position deviation, and the motor stops with deviation.
*1 Servo rigidity: The response when a position control loop is configured.
When the servo rigidity is raised, the holding force increases and operation becomes stabilized, but vibration occurs more easily.
When the servo rigidity is lowered, the holding force decreases, and the settling time increases.
*2 Rocking: Movement in which return occurs when the stopping position is exceeded.
*3 Limit cycle: This is a phenomenon that generates ± continuous vibration centering on the target position.

• Application of lag/advance control and PI control

PI control can be applied by setting Pr.398 to 0. Normally, use the lag/advance control. PI control should be used when using
a machine with a high spindle static friction torque and requires a stop position accuracy.

 Pr.399 Orientation deceleration ratio (initial value: 20) (Vector control)

• Make adjustments, as shown below, according to the orientation status. (Make adjustments in the order of a, b, and c.)
Normally, adjust Pr.362 Orientation position loop gain in the range from 5 to 20, and Pr.399 Orientation deceleration
ratio from 5 to 50.
Condition Adjustment procedure
a. Decrease the Pr.399 setting.
Rocking occurs during stopping b. Decrease the Pr.362 setting.
c. Increase the Pr.396 and Pr.397 settings.
a. Increase the Pr.399 setting.
The orientation time is long.
b. Increase the Pr.362 setting.
a. Decrease the Pr.362 setting.
Hunting occurs during stopping
b. Decrease the Pr.396 setting and increase the Pr.397 setting.
a. Increase the Pr.396 setting and decrease the Pr.397 setting.
Low servo rigidity during stopping
b. Increase the Pr.362 setting.

NOTE
• Orientation stop operation fails, causing an excessive position error, or if the motor performs forward/reverse reciprocation
operation, review the settings of Pr.393 Orientation selection (on page 587) and Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction (on
page 586).

 Pr.351 Orientation speed (initial value: 2 Hz) (Vector control)

• Set the speed when switching between the speed control mode and the position control mode is performed under
orientation operation.
Decreasing the set speed enables stable orientation stop. Note that the orientation time increases.
[Hz]
Frequency

Pr.351 Orientation speed Decelerate according to the deceleration ratio of Pr.399

Orientation command completion

Time[t]

Orientation start OFF ON

(X22)
Orientation complete ON
(ORA)

Encoder Z phase pulse

NOTE
• When "19" is set in Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, the position pulse monitor is displayed instead of the
output voltage monitor on the PU.

598 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Machine end orientation connection diagram (Vector control)
• To perform machine end orientation control, the following settings are required. 1
- Install a plug-in option (FR-A8AP/FR-A8AL or FR-A8APR) and a control terminal option (FR-A8TP) to the inverter, a motor end
encoder to the control terminal option, and a machine end encoder to the plug-in option.
- Set "1" in Pr.862 Encoder option selection.
- Set Pr.393 Orientation selection = "10 to 12". (Refer to page 596.) 2
- Set the gear ratio by setting Pr.394 Number of machine side gear teeth and Pr.395 Number of motor side gear teeth. (Refer to
page 599.)

3
MCCB MC Inverter SF-JR motor with encoder For 24 V complementary type (SF-V5RU)
R/L1 U U MCCB MC OCR SF-V5RU
Three-phase 
S/L2 V V
AC power
4
M Three-phase
FAN
supply T/L3 W W AC power
supply
E
Earth Inverter U U
V V
FR-A8TP (Ground) W
M
W
Forward rotation start STF PA3 C 
E
Reverse rotation start
Orientation command
STR
X22
PAR3 R
FR-A8TP PC
Earth
(Ground)
Thermal
relay
5
PB3 A External OH
G1 protector
Contact input common thermal relay
SD PBR3 N input  SD G2
ORA Encoder 

6
Differential B PA3 A
ORM PZ3
 P PAR3 B
PZR3 
PB3 C
SE Complementary PG H Differential PBR3 D
SD SD K PZ3 F
Encoder

7
Terminating
resistor ON
Complementary PZR3 G 
PG
Terminating PG S
 SD  resistor ON
SD R
 (+) (-) 5 VDC power  PG24
OFF
supply  OFF  

FR-A8AX FR-A8AP FR-A8AP
PA1 A 

8
X15  PA1 A 
Machine end Machine end
X14 PA2 A encoder encoder
PB1 B
Differential (differential
9
Differential
X1 PB1 B line driver) Encoder
PZ1 Z
X0 PB2 B Complementary

Complementary
DY Encoder
PZ1 Z Terminating PG +
resistor ON
Terminating SD -
PZ2 Z 
resistor ON


PG + OFF
 PG
SD  10
(+) (-) Power supply 
SD - 
OFF
PG
SD 
(+) (-) Power supply 

*1 Single-phase power supply (200 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz) is used for the fan for a 7.5 kW or lower dedicated motor.
*2 The pin number differs according to the encoder used.
*3 Use Pr.178 to Pr.182, Pr.185, or Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal. (Refer to page 521.)
*4 Use Pr.190 to Pr.192, or Pr.195 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal. (Refer to page 473.)
*5 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio must be 1:1.
*6 Earth (ground) the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure using a tool such as a P-clip. (Refer to page 88.)
*7 For the differential line driver, set the terminating resistor selection switch to the ON position. (Refer to page 93.)
Note that the terminating resistor switch should be set to the OFF position (initial status) when sharing the same encoder with another unit (NC,
etc.) having a terminating resistor under the differential line driver setting.
For the complementary, set the switch to the OFF position.
*8 For terminal compatibility between the FR-A8TP and the FR-JCBL/FR-V7CBL, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8TP.
*9 A separate external power supply is necessary according to the encoder power specification. When the encoder output is the differential line
driver type, only 5 V can be input. Make the voltage of the external power supply the same as the encoder output voltage, and connect the external
power supply between terminals PG and SD. If using the 24V power supply of the FR-A8TP, 24V power can be supplied from terminal PG24.
When performing encoder feedback control and Vector control together, an encoder and power supply can be shared.
*10 When a stop position command is input from outside, a plug-in option FR-A8AX is required. Refer to page 589 for the external stop position
command.
*11 To enable terminal OH, set Pr.876 Thermal protector input = "1 (initial value)". (Refer to page 420.)

 Encoder orientation gear ratio setting (Pr.394, Pr.395) (Vector control)

• Set the encoder orientation gear ratio for machine end orientation control.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
599
 • Set the encoder orientation gear ratio in Pr.394 Number of machine side gear teeth, Pr.395 Number of motor side gear
teeth An accurate gear ratio (or pulley ratio) from the motor shaft to the spindle is necessary.
Set the correct numbers of gear teeth in Pr.394 and Pr.395.
Pr.394 = A × C × E
Pr.395 = B × D × F
Exercise care so that the A × C × E and B × D × F settings do not exceed 32767. If either or both of them exceed that value, make
approximations.

Spindle A
B
C
D E
(A to F indicate the
numbers of gear teeth.) F Motor

NOTE
• Pulley ratio: Ratio of vector-driven motor side pulley diameter to spindle side pulley diameter

A B A
B

Spindle side Motor side

• Setting example (When the numbers of gear teeth are as follows)

A: 15, C: 43, E: 60, B: 10, D: 28, F: 55
Pr.394 = 15 × 43 × 60 = 38700
Pr.395 = 10 × 28 × 55 = 15400
Since Pr.394 setting exceeds 32767 at this time, make approximations as follows.
Pr.394/Pr.395 = 38700/15400=3870/1540

 Machine end simple orientation control

• Machine end simple orientation control is available when the FR-A8AL option is installed on the inverter and connected to
a machine end encoder. Both machine end orientation control and encoder feedback control/ Vector control is also enabled
at the same time.
• Set the orientation speed at the motor end encoder in Pr.351 Orientation speed.
• Set the rotation direction of the encoder in Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction. If the rotation directions of the motor end
encoder and the machine end encoder differ, set the rotation direction of the motor end encoder.
• To perform encoder feedback control or Vector control using the machine end encoder, set Pr.369 Number of encoder
pulses with the number of motor end encoder pulses converted from the number of machine end encoder pulses.
• To enable encoder feedback control or Vector control and machine end orientation control at the same time using the
machine end encoder, set the number of machine end encoder pulses in Pr.829 Number of machine end encoder
pulses and "0" in Pr.862 Encoder option selection.
Pr.829 setting Pr.862 setting Description
9999 — Machine end simple orientation control invalid
Other than 9999 (The Encoder feedback control / Vector control and machine end orientation control at
0
number of machine end the same time using the machine end encoder is enabled.
encoder pulses (before
multiplied by four) is set.) 1 Machine end simple orientation control invalid

• When the number of machine end encoder pulses is 4000 and the gear ratio between motor end and machine end is 4:1
(4 rotations of motor equals one rotation of machine), set the value as Pr.369 = "1000", Pr.829 = "4000" (the number of
machine end encoder pulses) according to the following formula,
The equivalent of number of motor end encoder pulses = 4000 × 1/4 = 1000

NOTE
• For other settings, refer to descriptions of motor end orientation control in this manual.

600 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
5.14.10 PID control
Process control such as flow rate, air volume or pressure are possible on the inverter. 1
A feedback system can be configured and PID control can be performed using the terminal 2 input signal or parameter setting
value as the set point and the terminal 4 input signal as the feedback value.
2
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Set the value at which control is automatically switched to PID
127 PID control automatic 0 to 590 Hz
A612 switchover frequency
9999
9999
control.
No PID control automatic switchover function
3
0, 10, 11, 20, 21,
50, 51, 60, 61, 70,

128
71, 80, 81, 90, 91,
100, 101, 1000,
Select how to input the deviation value, measured value and set 4
PID action selection 0 point, and forward and reverse action.
A610 1001, 1010,
1011, 2000,
2001, 2010, 2011
40 to 43 Refer to page 622.
5
If a narrow proportional band is set (small parameter setting value),
the manipulated amount changes considerably by slight changes in
129
A613
PID proportional band 100%
0.1 to 1000% the measured value. As a result, response improves as the
proportional band becomes narrower, though stability worsens as 6
shown by the occurrence of hunting. Gain Kp=1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
With deviation step input, this is the time (Ti) used for obtaining the
same manipulated amount as proportional band (P) by only integral
7
130 0.1 to 3600 s
PID integral time 1s (I) action. Arrival to the set point becomes quicker the shorter an
A614
integral time is set, though hunting is more likely to occur.
9999 No integral control
Set the upper limit. The FUP signal is output when the feedback
8
131 0 to 100% value exceeds this setting. The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of
PID upper limit 9999
A601 the measured value is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
Set the lower limit. The FDN signal is output when the measured
9
132 0 to 100% value falls below the setting range. The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/
PID lower limit 9999 10 V) of the measured value is equivalent to 100%.
A602
9999 No function 10
133 0 to 100% Set the set point during PID control.
PID action set point 9999
A611 9999 Set point set by Pr.128.
With deviation ramp input, this is the time (Td) used for obtaining the
manipulated amount only by proportional action (P). Response to
134 0.01 to 10 s
PID differential time 9999 changes in deviation increase greatly as the differential time
A615 increases.
9999 No differential control
The Y48 signal is output when the absolute value of the deviation
553 0 to 100%
PID deviation limit 9999 exceeds the deviation limit value.
A603
9999 No function
The action when the upper or lower limit for a measured value input
554 PID signal operation is detected or when a limit for the deviation is detected can be
0 0 to 3, 10 to 13
A604 selection selected. The operation for PID output suspension function can be
selected.
When the output frequency after PID calculation stays less than the
575 Output interruption 0 to 3600 s Pr.576 setting for the time set in Pr.575 or more, the inverter
1s operation is suspended.
A621 detection time
9999 No output interruption function
576 Output interruption
0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which output interruption is performed.
A622 detection level
577 Output interruption Level at which the PID output suspension function is released. Set
1000% 900 to 1100%
A623 cancel level "Pr.577 - 1000%".
1 The set point or deviation value is input through terminal 1.
2 The set point or deviation value is input through terminal 2.
609 PID set point/deviation
2 3 The set point or deviation value is input through terminal 4.
A624 input selection
4 The set point or deviation value is input via communication.
5 The set point or deviation value is input by the PLC function.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
601
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1 The measured value is input through terminal 1.
2 The measured value is input through terminal 2.
610 PID measured value
3 3 The measured value is input through terminal 4.
A625 input selection
4 The measured value is input via communication.
5 The measured value is input by the PLC function.
Integral stopped at the limit, manipulation range of ±100%, integral
0
cleared during output interruption
Integral continued at the limit, manipulation range of ±100%,
1
integral cleared during output interruption
Integral stopped at the limit, manipulation range of 0 to 100%,
2
1015 Integral stop selection at integral cleared during output interruption
0
A607 limited frequency Integral stopped at the limit, manipulation range of ±100%, integral
10
stopped during output interruption
Integral continued at the limit, manipulation range of ±100%,
11
integral stopped during output interruption
Integral stopped at the limit, manipulation range of 0 to 100%,
12
integral stopped during output interruption
0, 10, 11, 20, 21,
50, 51, 60, 61, 70,
71, 80, 81, 90, 91,
753 Second PID action
0 100, 101, 1000, Refer to Pr.128.
A650 selection
1001, 1010,
1011, 2000,
2001, 2010, 2011
Second PID control
754
automatic switchover 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 Refer to Pr.127.
A652
frequency
755 Second PID action set
9999 0 to 100%, 9999 Refer to Pr.133.
A651 point
756 Second PID proportional 0.1 to 1000%,
100 Refer to Pr.129.
A653 band 9999
757 0.1 to 3600 s,
Second PID integral time 1 s Refer to Pr.130.
A654 9999
758 Second PID differential
9999 0.01 to 10 s, 9999 Refer to Pr.134.
A655 time
1140 Second PID set point/ Set the second PID control.
2 1 to 5 Refer to Pr.609.
A664 deviation input selection For how to enable the second PID
1141 Second PID measured control, refer to page 613.
3 1 to 5 Refer to Pr.610.
A665 value input selection
1143
Second PID upper limit 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 Refer to Pr.131.
A641
1144
Second PID lower limit 9999 0 to 100%, 9999 Refer to Pr.132.
A642
Refer to Pr.553.
1145 Second PID deviation
9999 0 to 100%, 9999 (The Y205 signal is
A643 limit
output.)
1146 Second PID signal
0 0 to 3, 10 to 13 Refer to Pr.554.
A644 operation selection
Second output
1147
interruption detection 1s 0 to 3600 s, 9999 Refer to Pr.575.
A661
time
Second output
1148
interruption detection 0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Refer to Pr.576.
A662
level
1149 Second output
1000% 900 to 1100% Refer to Pr.577.
A663 interruption cancel level

602 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Basic configuration of PID control
 Pr.128 ="10, 11" (deviation value signal input) 1
Inverter circuit

PID operation Manipulated Motor

Set point
+-
Deviation signal
Terminal 1 *1
1
Kp 1+ Ti S +Td S
variable
M 2
0 to 10 VDC
To outside (0 to 5 V)

Feedback signal (measured value) 3

Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
*1 Set "0" to Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment. When Pr.868 ≠ "0", PID control is invalid.

 Pr.128 = "20, 21" (measured value input) 4

Inverter circuit
Pr.133 or Manipulated Motor
PID operation
terminal 2 *2
Set point
+- 1
Kp 1+ Ti S +Td S
variable
M 5
0 to 5 VDC
(0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA) Terminal 4 *3

6
Feedback signal (measured value) 4 to 20 mADC (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V)
Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
*2 Note that the input of terminal 1 is added to the set point of terminal 2 as a set point.
*3 Set "0" to Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment. When Pr.858 ≠ "0", PID control is invalid.

7
 PID action outline
 PI action 8
PI action is a combination of proportional action (P) and integral action (I), and applies a manipulated amount according to the
size of the deviation and transition or changes over time.
[Example of action when the measured value changes in a stepped manner]
Deviation Set point
9
Measured value

P action
10
Time

I action
Time

PI action
Time

(Note) PI action is the result of P and I actions being added together.

 PD action
PD action is a combination of proportional action (P) and differential action (D), and applies a manipulated amount according
to the speed of the deviation to improve excessive characteristics.
[Example of action when the measured value changes proportionately]
Set point

Deviation

Measured value
P action
Time

D action
Time

PD
action
Time

(Note) PD action is the result of P and D actions being added together.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
603
  PID action
PID action is a combination of PI and PD action, which enables control that incorporates the respective strengths of these
actions.
Set point

Deviation
Measured value
P action
Time

I action
Time
D action
Time

y = at2 + bt + c

PID action
Time
(Note) PID action is the result of all P, I and D actions being added together.

 Reverse action
When deviation X = (set point - measured value) is a plus value, the manipulated amount (output frequency) is increased, and
when the deviation is a minus value, the manipulated amount is decreased.
Deviation Set point
[Heating]
+ X>0
Set Cold Increase
point X<0 Hot Decrease
- Measured value
Feedback signal
(measured value)

 Forward action
When deviation X = (set point - measured value) is a minus value, the manipulated amount (output frequency) is increased,
and when the deviation is a plus value, the manipulated amount is decreased.
Measured value
[Cooling]
+ X>0 Set point
Set Too cold Decrease
point - X<0 Hot Increase

Feedback signal
(measured value) Deviation

Relationship between deviation and manipulated amount (output frequency)

Deviation
PID action setting
Plus Minus
Reverse action
Forward action

604 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Connection diagram
• Sink logic
MCCB
Inverter 1
Motor Pump
• Pr.128 = 20 R/L1 U
Power supply
• Pr.183 = 14 S/L2 V M P
T/L3 W
• Pr.191 = 47 2
• Pr.192 = 16 Forward
rotation STF
• Pr.193 = 14 Reverse STR
• Pr.194 = 15 rotation
RT(X14)∗3 2-wire type 3-wire
3
PID control
selection SD ∗2(PID)SU During PID action Detector type
∗2(FUP)FU Upper limit
Setting
Potentiometer
10
2
∗2(FDN)OL

∗2(RL)IPF
Lower limit
Forward rotation
- + + - + 4
output
(Set point setting) Reverse rotation
5
output
1 (OUT) (24V)
4 ∗4 SE Output signal common (COM) 5
(Measured value) 4 to 20mA

0 24V
Power
6
supply ∗1

AC1φ
200/220V 50/60Hz 7
*1 Prepare a power supply matched to the power supply specifications of the detector.
*2 The applied output terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
*3 The applied input terminals differ by the settings of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) 8
*4 The AU signal need not be input.

 Selection of deviation value, measured value and set point input method,
and PID action method (Pr.128, Pr.609, Pr.610) 9
• Using Pr.128, select the input method for the PID set point, measured value detected by the meter, and externally
calculated deviation. Also, select forward or reverse action.
10

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
605
 • Switch the power voltage/current specifications of terminals 2 and 4 by Pr.73 Analog input selection or Pr.267 Terminal
4 input selection to match the specification of the input device. After changing the Pr.73 or Pr.267 settings, check the
voltage/current input selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure, or malfunction. (Refer to page 496 for
the setting.)
Pr.128 Pr.609
PID action Set point input Measured value input Deviation input
setting Pr.610
0 PID invalid — — —
10 Reverse action
— — Terminal 1
11 Invalid Forward action
20 Reverse action
Terminal 2 or Pr.133*1 Terminal 4 —
21 Forward action
40 to 43 Enabled Dancer control For details on dancer control, refer to page 622.
50 Reverse action
— — Communication*2
51 Forward action
60 Reverse action
Communication*2 Communication*2 —
61 Forward action
70 Reverse action PLC function (applied
— —
71 Forward action to the frequency)*3
80 Reverse action PLC function (applied to the PLC function (applied to
Invalid —
81 Forward action frequency)*3 the frequency)*3
90 Reverse action PLC function (not
— — applied to the
91 Forward action
frequency)*3
100 Reverse action PLC function (not
PLC function (not applied to
*3
applied to the —
101 Forward action the frequency)
frequency)*3
1000 Reverse action
According to Pr.609*1 According to Pr.610 —
1001 Forward action
1010 Reverse action
— — According to Pr.609
1011 Forward action
Reverse action (without
2000
Enabled frequency reflected)
According to Pr.609*1 According to Pr.610 —
Forward action (without
2001
frequency reflected)
Reverse action (without
2010
frequency reflected)
— — According to Pr.609
Forward action (without
2011
frequency reflected)
*1 When Pr.133 ≠ "9999", the Pr.133 setting is valid.
*2 CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network, or LONWORKS communication is available. For details on communication, refer to the Instruction Manual of
each option.
*3 For details on the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.

• The set point/deviation input method can also be flexibly selected by Pr.609 PID set point/deviation input selection and
the measured value input method can be selected by Pr.610 PID measured value input selection. Selection by Pr.609
and Pr.610 is valid when Pr.128 = "1000 to 2011".
Pr.609 to Pr.610 settings Input method
1 Terminal 1*4
2 Terminal 2*4
3 Terminal 4*4
4 Communication*5
5 PLC function

*4 When the same input method has been selected for the set point and measured value at Pr.609 and Pr.610, set point input is invalid. (Inverter
runs at set point 0%)
*5 CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network, or LONWORKS communication is available. For details on communication, refer to the Instruction Manual of
each option.

606 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 NOTE
• When terminals 2 and 4 are selected for deviation input, perform bias calibration using C3 and C6 to prevent a minus voltage 1
from being entered as the deviation input signal. Input of a minus voltage might damage devices and the inverter.

2
• The following shows the relationship between the input values of the analog input terminals and set point, measured value
and deviation. (Calibration parameter initial values)

Input terminal
Input Relationship with analog input
Calibration parameter
3
specification*6 Set point Result Deviation
0 V = 0% 0 V = 0% 0 V = 0%
0 to 5 V
5 V = 100%
0 V = 0%
5 V = 100%
0 V = 0%
5 V = 100%
0 V = 0%
4
Terminal 2 0 to 10 V Pr.125, C2 to C4
10 V = 100% 10 V = 100% 10 V = 100%
0 mA = 0% 0 mA = 0% 0 mA = 0%
0 to 20 mA
20 mA = 100% 20 mA = 100% 20 mA = 100%
-5 V = -100%
5
-5 to 0 V = 0% -5 to 0 V = 0%
0 to ±5 V 0 V = 0% When Pr.128 = "10", Pr.125
+5 V = +100% +5 V = +100%
+5 V = +100% setting, C2 to C4.
Terminal 1

0 to ±10 V
-10 to 0 V = 0% -10 to 0 V = 0%
-10 V = -100%
0 V = 0%
When Pr.128 ≥ "1000": C12
to C15.
6
+10 V = +100% +10 V = +100%
+10 V = +100%
0 V = -20%
0 to 1 V = 0% 0 to 1 V = 0%
0 to 5 V
5 V = 100% 5 V = 100%
1 V = 0%
5 V = 100%
7
0 V = -20%
0 to 2 V = 0% 0 to 2 V = 0%
Terminal 4 0 to 10 V 2 V = 0% Pr.126, C5 to C7
10 V = 100% 10 V = 100%
10 V = 100%
0 mA = -20%
8
0 to 4 mA = 0% 0 to 4 mA = 0%
0 to 20 mA 4 mA = 0%
20 mA = 100% 20 mA = 100%
20 mA = 100%
*6 Can be changed by Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection and the voltage/current input switch. (Refer to page 496.) 9
NOTE
• Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input specification with Pr.73 and Pr.267, and the voltage/current
input selection switch. 10

 Input/output signals
• Assigning the PID control valid signal (X14) to the input terminal by Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)
enables PID control to be performed only when the X14 signal is turned ON. When the X14 signal is OFF, regular inverter
running is performed without PID action. (When the X14 signal is not assigned, PID control is enabled only by setting
Pr.128 ≠ "0".)
• Input signal
Pr.178 to
Signal Function Pr.189 Description
setting
X14 PID control valid 14 When this signal is assigned to the input terminal, PID control is enabled when this
X80 Second PID control valid 80 signal is ON.
PID forward/reverse
X64 64
action switchover
PID control is switched between forward and reverse action without changing
Second PID forward/ parameters by turning ON this signal.
X79 reverse action 79
switchover
X72 PID P control switchover 72
Second PID P control Integral and differential values can be reset by turning ON this signal.
X73 73
switchover

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
607
 • Output signal
Pr.190 to Pr.196
setting
Signal Function Description
Positive Negative
logic logic
FUP PID upper limit 15 115 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr.131 PID upper limit
FUP2 Second PID upper limit 201 301 (Pr.1143 Second PID upper limit).
FDN PID lower limit 14 114 Output when the measured value signal falls below Pr.132 PID lower limit
FDN2 Second PID lower limit 200 300 (Pr.1144 Second PID lower limit).
PID forward/reverse
RL 16 116 "Hi" is output when the output display of the parameter unit is forward rotation
rotation output
(FWD) and "Low" is output when the display is reverse rotation (REV) and
Second PID forward/
RL2 202 302 stop (STOP).
reverse rotation output
During PID control Turns ON during PID control.
PID 47 147
activated When the PID calculation result is reflected to the output frequency (Pr.128 <
"2000"), the PID signal turns OFF at turn OFF of the start signal.
During second PID When the PID calculation result is not reflected to the output frequency
PID2 203 303 (Pr.128 ≥ "2000"), the PID signal turns ON during PID calculation regardless
control activated
of the start signal status.
Y48 PID deviation limit 48 148
Output when the absolute deviation value exceeds the limit value set in
Second PID deviation
Y205 205 305 Pr.553 PID deviation limit (Pr.1145 Second PID deviation limit).
limit
SLEEP PID output interruption 70 170 Set Pr.575 Output interruption detection time (Pr.1147 Second output
During second PID interruption detection time) ≠ "9999". This signal turns ON when the PID
SLEEP2 204 304
output shutoff output suspension function is activated.

NOTE
• Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.

 PID automatic switchover control (Pr.127)

• The system can be started up more quickly by starting up without PID control activated.
• When Pr.127 PID control automatic switchover frequency is set, the startup is made without PID control until the output
frequency reaches the Pr.127 setting. Once the PID control starts, the PID control is continued even if the output frequency
drops to Pr.127 setting or lower.

Output frequency
Without PID
control PID control

Pr.127

Time
STF

PID

 Operation selection and sleep function stop selection when a value error
is detected (FUP signal, FDN signal, Y48 signal, Pr.554)
• Using Pr.554 PID signal operation selection, set the action when the measured value input exceeds the upper limit
(Pr.131 PID upper limit) or lower limit (Pr.132 PID lower limit), or when the deviation input exceeds the permissible value
(Pr.553 PID deviation limit).
• Choose whether to output the signals (FUP, FDN, Y48) only or to activate the protective function to output the inverter
shutoff.

608 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • The stop action when the inverter output is shut off by the sleep function can be selected.

Pr.554 setting
Inverter operation 1
At FUP/FDN signal output*1 At Y48 signal output*1 At sleep operation start
0 (initial value) Signal output only
Signal output only
1 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)
2 Signal output only
Coasts to stop 2
Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)
3 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)
10 Signal output only
Signal output only
11 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)
Deceleration stop 3
12 Signal output only
Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)
13 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)

*1 When each of Pr.131, Pr.132 and Pr.553 settings corresponding to each of the FUP, FDN and Y48 signals is "9999" (no function), signal output
and protective function are not available.
4
 PID output suspension function (sleep function) (SLEEP signal, Pr.575 to
Pr.577) 5
• When a status where the output frequency after PID calculation is less than Pr.576 Output interruption detection level
has continued for the time set in Pr.575 Output interruption detection time or longer, inverter running is suspended. This
allows the amount of energy consumed in the inefficient low-speed range to be reduced. 6
• When the deviation (set point - measured value) reaches the PID output shutoff release level (Pr.577 setting value -1000%)
while the PID output suspension function is activated, the PID output suspension function is released, and PID control
operation is automatically restarted. 7
• Whether to allow motor to coast to a stop or perform a deceleration stop when sleep operation is started can be selected
using Pr.554.
• While the PID output suspension function is activated, the PID output interruption (SLEEP) signal is output. During this 8
time, the Inverter running (RUN) signal turns OFF and the During PID control activated (PID) signal turns ON.
• For the terminal used for the SLEEP signal, set "70 (positive logic)" or "170 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196
(Output terminal function selection). 9
When Pr.554="0 to 3", reverse operation (Pr.128="10")
Deviation

Cancel
10
Pr.577 - 1000%
level

Output frequency

Pr.576

Less than Pr.575

Pr.575 or more SLEEP period
Time

RUN OFF

PID
SLEEP ON

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
609
 When Pr.554="10 to 13", reverse operation (Pr.128="10")

Deviation

Pr.577 - 1000% Cancel

level

Output frequency

Deceleration stop 
Pr.576

Less than Pr.575

Pr.575 or more SLEEP period
Time

RUN OFF

PID
SLEEP ON

*1 When the PID output shutoff release level is reached during a deceleration stop, output shutoff is released, operation is re-accelerated and PID
control is continued. During deceleration, Pr.576 Output interruption detection level is invalid.

 Integral stop selection when the frequency is limited (Pr.1015)

• The operation for the integral term can be selected when the frequency or the manipulated amount is limited during PID
control. The operation during output suspension can be selected for the integral term using the PID output suspension
(sleep) function.
• The manipulation range can be selected.
Operation at limited Operation during output
Pr.1015 setting Range of manipulation
frequency interruption
0 (initial value) Integral stop
-100% to +100%
1 Integral continuation Integral clear
2 Integral stop 0 to 100%
10 Integral stop
-100% to +100%
11 Integral continuation Integral stop
12 Integral stop 0 to 100%

NOTE
• While the integral stop is selected, the integral stop is enabled when any of the following conditions is met.

Integral stop conditions

• The frequency reaches the upper or lower limit.
• The manipulated amount reaches plus or minus 100% (Pr.1015 = "0 or 10").
• The manipulated amount reaches 0% or 100% (Pr.1015 = "2 or 12").

 PID monitor function

• This function displays the PID control set point, measured value and deviation on the operation panel, and can output these
from the terminals FM/CA and AM.
• An integral value indicating a negative % can be displayed on the deviation monitor. 0% is displayed as 1000. (These
values cannot be output on the deviation monitor from terminals FM and CA.)

610 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
• Set the following values to Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, Pr.774 to Pr.776 (Operation panel monitor
selection), Pr.992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection, Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection
and Pr.158 AM terminal function selection for each monitor.
1
Monitor range
Parameter Monitor Minimum
Setting description increment
Terminal FM/
CA
Terminal
AM
Operation
panel
Remarks
2
52 PID set point
Second PID set
0.1% 0 to 100%*1
92 point/deviation
input selection "0" is displayed at all times when PID control
3
PID measured is based in deviation input.
53
value
0.1% 0 to 100%*1
93
Second PID
measured value
4
PID measured Displays PID measured value even if the PID
67
value 2 control operating conditions are not satisfied
Second PID
0.1% 0 to 100%*1 while the PID control is enabled.
"0" is displayed at all times when PID control
5
95
measured value 2
is based in deviation input.
54 PID deviation 900% to

0.1%
Setting not -100% to
1100%
or
Using Pr.290 Monitor negative output 6
Second PID selection, negative values can be output to
94 available 100%*1*2 -100% to
deviation the terminal AM and displayed with a minus
100%*1 sign on the operation panel (FR-DU08).

91
PID manipulated 900% to When signed indication is invalid, the
indicated values are from "900%" to "1100%"
7
amount 1100%
Setting not -100% to on the operation panel. (0% is offset and
Second PID 0.1% or
available 100%*2 -100% to displayed as "1000%".)
96 manipulated
amount 100% 8
*1 When C42 (Pr.934) and C44 (Pr.935) are set, the minimum increment changes from unit % to no unit, and the monitor range can be changed.
(Refer to page 615.)
*2 When the minus value display is set disabled using Pr.290, the terminal AM output becomes "0".
9
 Adjustment procedure
1. Enable PID control
When Pr.128 ≠ "0", PID control is enabled. 10
Set the set point, measured value and deviation input methods at Pr.128, Pr.609 and Pr.610.

2. Setting the parameter

Adjust the PID control parameters of Pr.127, Pr.129 to Pr.134, Pr.553, Pr.554, Pr.575 to Pr.577.

3. Terminal setting
Set the I/O terminals for PID control. (Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), Pr.190 to Pr.196
(Output terminal function selection))

4. Turn the X14 signal ON

When the X14 signal is assigned to the input terminal, PID control is enabled by the X14 signal turning ON.

5. Operation

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
611
  Calibration example
(Adjust room temperature to 25°C by PID control using a detector that outputs 4 mA at 0°C and 20 mA at 50°C.)
Start

Determination of set point Set the room temperature to 25°C.

Determine the set point of what is

desired to be adjusted.

Conversion of set point into % Detector specifications

When 0°C 4mA and 50°C 20mA are used, the set point 25°C is 50%
Calculate the ratio of the set point to
on the assumption that 4mA is 0% and 20mA is 100%.
the detector output.

Make calibration. Make the following calibration∗1 when the target setting input (0 to 5 V)
and detector output (4 to 20mA) must be calibrated.

Setting of set point • To set the set point to 50% using voltage input
The terminal 2 specification is 0 V for 0%, and 5 V for 100%. Thus, to set to 50%, input 2.5 V to the terminal 2.
Input a voltage across terminals 2-5
• To set the set point to 50% using parameters
according to the set value %.
Set Pr.133 = "50". (If C42 (Pr.934) and C44 (Pr.935) ≠ "9999", set "25 (no % conversion)" directly in Pr.133.)

Operation When performing operation, first set the proportional band (Pr. 129) to a slightly larger value, the integral time
(Pr. 130) to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134) to "9999" (no function), and while looking
Set the proportional band (Pr. 129) at the system operation, decrease the proportional band (Pr. 129) and increase the integral time (Pr. 130).
to a slightly larger value, the integral
time (Pr. 130) to a slightly longer For slow response system where a deadband exists, differential control (Pr. 134) should be turned ON and
time, and the differential time (Pr. increased slowly.
134) to "9999" (no function), and turn
ON the start signal.

Yes
Is the set point stable?

No

Parameter adjustment Parameter optimization

To stabilize the measured value, change While the measured value is stable
the proportional band (Pr. 129) to a larger throughout the operation status, the
value, the integral time (Pr. 130) to a proportional band (Pr. 129) may be
slightly longer time, and the differential decreased, the integral time (Pr. 130)
time (Pr. 134) to a slightly shorter time. decreased, and the differential time (Pr. 134)
may be increased.

Adjustment end

*1 When calibration is required

Calibrate detector output and set point input by Pr.125, C2 (Pr.902) to C4 (Pr.903) (terminal 2) or Pr.126, C5 (Pr.904) to C7 (Pr.905) (terminal
4). (Refer to page 505.)
When both C42 (Pr.934) and C44 (Pr.935) are other than "9999", calibrate the detector output and set point input by Pr.934 and Pr.935 (terminal
4). (Refer to page 615.)
Make calibration in the PU operation mode during an inverter stop.

• Calibrating set point input

(Example: To enter the set point on terminal 2)

1. 1. Apply the input (for example, 0 V) of set point setting 0% across terminals 2 and 5.

2. Using C2 (Pr.902), enter the frequency (for example, 0 Hz) to be output by the inverter when the deviation is 0%.

3. Using C3 (Pr.902), set the voltage value at 0%.

4. Apply the input (for example, 5 V) of set point setting 100% across terminals 2 and 5.

5. Using Pr.125, enter the frequency (for example, 60 Hz) to be output by the inverter when the deviation is 100%.

6. Using C4 (Pr.903), set the voltage value at 100%.

612 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 NOTE
• When the set point is set at Pr.133, the setting frequency of C2 (Pr.902) is equivalent to 0% and the setting frequency of Pr.125 1
(Pr.903) is equivalent to 100%.

• Measured value input calibration 2

1. Apply the input (for example, 4 mA) of measured value 0% across terminals 4 and 5.

2. Perform calibration by C6 (Pr.904). 3

3. Apply the input (for example, 20 mA) of measured value 100% across terminals 4 and 5.

4. Perform calibration by C7 (Pr.905).

4
NOTE
• Set the frequencies set at C5 (Pr.904) and Pr.126 to each of the same values set at C2 (Pr.902) and Pr.125.
• The display unit for analog input can be changed from "%" to "V" or "mA". (Refer to page 507.) 5
• The following figure shows the results of having performed the calibration above.
6
[Set point setting] [Measured value] [Manipulated variable]
Manipulated variable (Hz)
(%) (%)
100 100 60 7

0 0 0
8
0 5 (V) 0 4 20 (mA) 0 100 Deviation (%)

 Setting multiple PID functions 9

• When the second PID function is set, two sets of PID functions can be switched for use. The PID setting is selected as
shown in the following table.
Pr.128 setting (first PID Pr.753 setting (second PID PID setting applied to the output
10
Pr.155 setting*1 RT signal
setting) setting) frequency
"0" or not applied to the "0" or not applied to the
— — Control other than PID control
frequency frequency
"0" or not applied to the
Applied to the frequency — — Second PID setting
frequency
"0" or not applied to the
Applied to the frequency — — First PID setting
frequency
OFF First PID setting
0
Applied to the frequency Applied to the frequency ON Second PID setting
10 — First PID setting
Dancer control Not applied to the frequency*2 — — Dancer control

*1 While Pr.155 = "0", the second function is enabled immediately after the RT signal turns ON. While Pr.155 = "10", the second function is enabled
only during constant speed operation when the RT signal turns ON. (For the details, refer to page 525.)
*2 When dancer control is selected, the setting is not applied to the frequency.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
613
 • The parameters and signals for the second PID function are in the same way as the following parameters and signals of
the first PID function. Refer to the first PID function when setting the second PID functions.
First PID function parameters Second PID function parameters
Classification
Pr. Name Pr. Name
PID control automatic switchover Second PID control automatic
127 754
frequency switchover frequency
128 PID action selection 753 Second PID action selection
129 PID proportional band 756 Second PID proportional band
130 PID integral time 757 Second PID integral time
131 PID upper limit 1143 Second PID upper limit
132 PID lower limit 1144 Second PID lower limit
133 PID action set point 755 Second PID action set point
134 PID differential time 758 Second PID differential time
Parameter 553 PID deviation limit 1145 Second PID deviation limit
554 PID signal operation selection 1146 Second PID signal operation selection
Output interruption detection Second output interruption detection
575 1147
time time
Output interruption detection Second output interruption detection
576 1148
level level
577 Output interruption cancel level 1149 Second output interruption cancel level
PID set point/deviation input Second PID set point/deviation input
609 1140
selection selection
PID measured value input Second PID measured value input
610 1141
selection selection

First PID function parameters Second PID function parameters

Classification
Signal Name Signal Name
X14 PID control valid X80 Second PID control valid
PID forward/reverse action Second PID forward/reverse action
Input signal X64 X79
switchover switchover
X72 PID P control switchover X73 Second PID P control switchover
FUP PID upper limit FUP2 Second PID upper limit
FDN PID lower limit FDN2 Second PID lower limit
PID forward/reverse rotation Second PID forward/reverse rotation
RL RL2
Output signal output output
PID During PID control activated PID2 During second PID control activated
SLEEP PID output interruption SLEEP2 During second PID output shutoff
Y48 PID deviation limit Y205 Second PID deviation limit

614 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 NOTE
• Even if the X14 signal is ON, PID control is stopped and multi-speed or JOG operation is performed when the multi-speed 1
operation (RH, RM, RL, or REX) signal or JOG signal (JOG operation) is input.
• PID control is invalid under the following settings.
Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "6" (Switchover mode)
• Note that input to the terminal 1 is added to the terminals 2 and 4 inputs. For example when Pr.128 = "20 or 21", the terminal
2
1 input is considered as a set point and added to the set point of the terminal 2.
• To use terminal 4 and 1 inputs in PID control, set "0" (initial value) to Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment and Pr.868
Terminal 1 function assignment. When a value other than "0", PID control is invalid. 3
• Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.
• When PID control is selected, the minimum frequency becomes the frequency of Pr.902 and the maximum frequency becomes
the frequency of Pr.903. 4
(The Pr.1 Maximum frequency and Pr.2 Minimum frequency settings also are valid.)
• During PID operation, the remote operation function is invalid.
• When control is switched to PID control during normal operation, the frequency during that operation is not carried over, and 5
the value resulting from PID calculation referenced to 0 Hz becomes the command frequency.

PID set point

6
Frequency
command
7
Frequency command
during normal operation

PID action ON
Normal operation PID operation Normal operation
8
Operation when control is switched to PID control during normal operation

Parameters referred to
Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 377
9
Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
Pr.290 Monitor negative output selectionpage 457
10
C2 (Pr.902) to C7 (Pr.905) Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gainpage 505

5.14.11 Changing the display increment of numerical

values used in PID control
When the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) is used, the display unit of parameters and monitor
items related to PID control can be changed to various units.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
615
 Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
Change the unit of the PID control-related values that is
759 0 to 43 displayed on the LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) or the
PID unit selection 0
A600 parameter unit (FR-PU07).
9999 Without display unit switching
Set the coefficient of the bias side (minimum) of measured value
C42 (934) 0 to 500
*1 PID display bias coefficient 9999 input.
A630
9999 Displayed in %.
C43 (934) Set the converted % of the bias side (minimum) current/voltage
PID display bias analog value 20% 0 to 300%
A631*1 of measured value input.
Set the coefficient of the gain side (maximum) of measured value
C44 (935) 0 to 500
PID display gain coefficient 9999 input.
A632*1
9999 Displayed in %.
C45 (935) Set the converted % of the gain side (maximum) current/voltage
PID display gain analog value 100% 0 to 300%
A633*1 of measured value input.
1136 Second PID display bias 0 to 500
9999 Refer to C42 (934).
A670 coefficient 9999
1137 Second PID display bias
20% 0 to 300% Refer to C43 (934).
A671 analog value
1138 Second PID display gain 0 to 500
9999 Refer to C44 (935). Second PID control
A672 coefficient 9999
1139 Second PID display gain
100% 0 to 300% Refer to C45 (935).
A673 analog value
1142 0 to 43,
Second PID unit selection 9999 Refer to Pr.759.
A640 9999
*1 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the LCD operation panel and the parameter unit.

 Calibration of PID display bias and gain (C42 (Pr.934) to C45 (Pr.935))
• When both C42 (Pr.934) and C44 (Pr.935) ≠ "9999", the bias and gain values for the set point, measured value and
deviation in PID control can be calibrated.
• "Bias"/"gain" function can adjust the relation between PID displayed coefficient and measured value input signal that is
externally input. Examples of these measured value input signals are 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mADC. (The
terminals used for measured value input can be selected at Pr.128, Pr.609, Pr.610.)
• Set the value that is displayed when the PID measured value (control amount) is 0% to C42 (Pr.934) and the value that is
displayed when the PID measured value (control amount) is 100% to C44 (Pr.935).
• When both of C42 (Pr.934) and C44 (Pr.935) ≠"9999" and Pr.133 is set as the set point, the setting of C42 (Pr.934) is
treated as 0%, and C44 (Pr.935) as 100%.
Initial value
100
Coefficient

Gain
Bias C44 (Pr.935)
C42 (Pr.934)

0 20 100%
0 4 20mA
Frequency setting signal
0 1 5V
0 2 10V
C43 (Pr.934) C45 (Pr.935)

• There are three methods to adjust the PID display bias/gain.

Method to adjust any point by application of a current (voltage) to the measured value input terminal
Method to adjust any point without application of a current (voltage) to the measured value input terminal
Method to adjust only the display coefficient without adjustment of current (voltage)
(Refer to page 505 for details, and make the necessary adjustments by considering C7 (Pr.905) as C45 (Pr.935) and Pr.126
as C44 (Pr.935).)

616 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 NOTE
• Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input specification with Pr.73 and Pr.267, and the voltage/current 1
input selection switch.

• Take caution when the following condition is satisfied because the inverter recognizes the deviation value as a negative 2
(positive) value even though a positive (negative) deviation is given: Pr.934 (PID bias coefficient) > Pr.935 (PID gain
coefficient).
To perform a reverse action, set Pr.128 PID action selection to forward action. Alternatively, to perform a forward action, 3
set Pr.128 to reverse action. In this case, the PID output shutoff release level is (1000 - Pr.577).
Pr.934 < Pr.935 (normal setting) Pr.934 ≥ Pr.935
Reverse action Reverse action setting to Pr.128 Reverse action Forward action setting to Pr.128 4
Forward action Forward action setting to Pr.128 Forward action Reverse action setting to Pr.128
PID output shutoff release level Pr.577 - 1000 PID output shutoff release level 1000 - Pr.577
(Example) Set the following: Pr.934 = "500" or 20% (4 mA is applied), Pr.935 = "100" or 100% (20 mA is applied). 5
When the set point = 400 and the measured value = 360, the deviation is +40 (>0), but the inverter recognizes the deviation
as -10% (<0). Because of this, operation amount does not increase in the reverse operation setting.
The operation amount increases when the forward operation is set. 6
To perform PID output shutoff release at deviation of +40 or higher, set Pr.577 = "960".

500
7
Set point 400
Deviation +40
8
Measured value 360

100 9
0
20% 100%
* ( ) indicates the deviation value
which the inverter can recognize
(0%) (25%) (35%) (100%)
10
Deviation -10%

• The display of the following parameters is changed according to the C42 (Pr.934), C44 (Pr.935), Pr.1136, and Pr.1138
settings.
Pr. Name Pr. Name
131 PID upper limit 1143 Second PID upper limit
132 PID lower limit 1144 Second PID lower limit
133 PID action set point 755 Second PID action set point
553 PID deviation limit 1145 Second PID deviation limit
577 Output interruption cancel level 1149 Second output interruption cancel level
761 Pre-charge ending level 766 Second pre-charge ending level
763 Pre-charge upper detection level 768 Second pre-charge upper detection level

 Changing the PID display coefficient of the LCD operation panel (FR-
LU08) or the parameter unit (FR-PU07) (Pr.759)
• Use Pr.759 PID unit selection to change the unit of the displayed value on the FR-LU08 or the FR-PU07. For the
coefficient set in C42 (Pr.934) to C44 (Pr.935), the units can be changed as follows.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
617
 Unit Unit
Pr.759 setting Unit name Pr.759 setting Unit name
indication indication
9999 % % 21 CMS Cubic Meter per Second
0 — (No indication) 22 ftM Feet per Minute
1 K Kelvin 23 ftS Feet per Second
2 C Degree Celsius 24 m/M Meter per Minute
3 F Degree Fahrenheit 25 m/S Meter per Second
4 PSI Pound-force per Square Inch 26 lbH Pound per Hour
5 MPa Mega Pascal 27 lbM Pound per Minute
6 kPa Kilo Pascal 28 lbS Pound per Second
7 Pa Pascal 29 iWC Inch Water Column
8 bar Bar 30 iWG Inch Water Gauge
9 mbr Millibar 31 fWG Feet of Water Gauge
10 GPH Gallon per Hour 32 mWG Meter of Water Gauge
11 GPM Gallon per Minute 33 iHg Inches of Mercury
12 GPS Gallon per Second 34 mHg Millimeters of Mercury
13 L/H Liter per Hour 35 kgH Kilogram per Hour
14 L/M Liter per Minute 36 kgM Kilogram per Minute
15 L/S Liter per Second 37 kgS Kilogram per Second
16 CFH Cubic Feet per Hour 38 ppm Pulse per Minute
17 CFM Cubic Feet per Minute 39 pps Pulse per Second
18 CFS Cubic Feet per Second 40 kW Kilowatt
19 CMH Cubic Meter per Hour 41 hp Horse Power
42 Hz Hertz
20 CMM Cubic Meter per Minute
43 rpm Revolution per Minute

5.14.12 PID Pre-charge function

This function drives the motor at a certain speed before starting PID control. This function is useful for a pump with a long hose,
since PID control would start before the pump is filled with water, and proper control would not be performed without this
function,

Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
Fault indication with output shutoff immediately after pre-charge fault
760 0
Pre-charge fault selection 0 occurs.
A616
1 Fault indication with deceleration stop after pre-charge fault occurs.
761 0 to 100% Set the measured amount to end the pre-charge operation.
Pre-charge ending level 9999
A617 9999 Without pre-charge ending level
762 0 to 3600 s Set the time to end the pre-charge operation.
Pre-charge ending time 9999
A618 9999 Without pre-charge ending time
Set the upper limit for the pre-charged amount. A pre-charge fault
763 Pre-charge upper detection 0 to 100% occurs when the measured value exceeds the setting during pre-
9999 charging.
A619 level
9999 Without Pre-charge upper detection level
Set the time limit for the pre-charged amount. A pre-charge fault occurs
764 0 to 3600 s
Pre-charge time limit 9999 when the pre-charge time exceeds the setting.
A620
9999 Without Pre-charge time limit
765 Second pre-charge fault
0 0, 1 Refer to Pr.760.
A656 selection
766 Second pre-charge ending 0 to 100%,
9999 Refer to Pr.761.
A657 level 9999
Set the second pre-charge function.
767 Second pre-charge ending 0 to 3600 s,
9999 Refer to Pr.762. The second pre-charge function is
A658 time 9999
valid when the RT signal is ON.
768 Second pre-charge upper 0 to 100%,
9999 Refer to Pr.763.
A659 detection level 9999
769 0 to 3600 s,
Second pre-charge time limit 9999 Refer to Pr.764.
A660 9999

618 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Operation selection for the pre-charge function
• To enable the pre-charge function when PID control is enabled, set the pre-charge end conditions at Pr.761 Pre-charge 1
ending level and at Pr.762 Pre-charge ending time, or set "77" to Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
When operation is started, the inverter runs at the frequency set to Pr.127 PID control automatic switchover frequency
to enter the pre-charge state. 2
• Pre-charge ends and PID control starts after a pre-charge ending condition is satisfied.
• The pre-charge function is also activated at a start after release of a PID output suspension (sleep) state or MRS (output
shutoff). The PID output suspension (sleep) function is not activated until the started pre-charge operation ends. 3
• During pre-charge operation, the During pre-charge operation (Y49) signal is output. For the terminal used for the Y49
signal output, set "49 (positive logic)" or "149 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function. 4
• The pre-charge function valid/invalid settings and pre-charge ending conditions are as follows:
Pre-charge ending condition setting Pre-charge
Pr.127 setting Valid pre-charge ending condition*1
Pr.761 setting Pr.762 setting X77 signal function 5
9999 — — —
Disabled —
Not assigned
9999
Assigned — — X77
9999
Not assigned — Time — 6
Other than 9999
Other than Assigned — Time X77
9999 Not assigned Enabled Result — —
9999
Other than 9999
Assigned Result — X77 7
Not assigned Result Time —
Other than 9999
Assigned Result Time X77
*1 When two or more ends conditions are satisfied, the pre-charge operation ends by the first-satisfied condition.
8
NOTE
• During the pre-charge operation, it is regarded as integrated value = estimated value. The motor speed may drop shortly from
the automatic switchover frequency depending on the parameter settings.
• Parameter changes and switchover to the second PID control are applied immediately. If PID control has not started when the
9
settings were changed, PID control starts with changed settings. (If PID control has already started, these settings do not
apply. If the changed settings already satisfies a condition to start PID control, the PID control starts as soon as these are
changed.) 10
• The pre-charge also ends when PID control is set to invalid, the start command has been turned OFF, and output has been
shut off.

 Example of the pre-charge operation

• When the measured amount reaches the pre-charge ending level (Pr.761 Pre-charge ending level ≠ "9999")
The pre-charge operation ends when the measured value reaches the Pr.761 setting or higher, then the PID control is
performed.
Measured value[PSI]
Pr.761
Ending level

Time
PID control
Output frequency[Hz]
Pr.127

0Hz Time
STF
Y49

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
619
 • When the elapsed time reaches the pre-charge ending time (Pr.762 Pre-charge ending time ≠ "9999")
The pre-charge operation ends when the pre-charge time reaches the Pr.762 setting or higher, then the PID control is
performed.
Output frequency[Hz]

Pr.127
Ending time
Pr.762 PID control

0Hz Time
STF
Y49

• When the signal is input to end the pre-charge operation

When the X77 signal turns ON, the pre-charge operation ends, and the PID control starts. (If a start command is given
while the X77 signal is ON, the pre-charge operation is not performed, and PID control starts.)

Output frequency[Hz]

Pr.127

PID control
Time
0Hz

STF
10ms or more
X77
Y49

NOTE
• When the PID output suspension (sleep) function is in use, and the X77 signal is set to valid after this function is released, set
the X77 signal to OFF after checking that the during the During pre-charge operation (Y49) signal is OFF.
• When the PID output suspension (sleep) function is in use, and PID control is to be performed immediately after this function
is released, leave the X77 signal ON until PID control ends.
• When the pre-charge operation is valid, the pre-charge operation is performed at the output shutoff cancellation (MRS signal,
etc.). (The pre-charge operation is also performed in the case of instantaneous power failure when the automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure is valid.)
• When the control method is changed to PID control from a control with higher priority in frequency command (multi-speed
setting, JOG operation, etc.), the motor is accelerated/decelerated until its speed reaches the automatic switchover frequency
(Pr.127), and the pre-charge is performed.

 Operation setting at pre-charge fault

• The protective function can be activated when limit values are exceeded if the time limit is set at Pr.764 Pre-charge time
limit and the measured value limit level is set at Pr.763 Pre-charge upper detection level.
• Whether to shut off output immediately after the protective function is activated or after a deceleration stop can be selected
by Pr.760 Pre-charge fault selection. (Pre-charge protective function is effective regardless of the setting of pre-charge
ending conditions.)
• When the time limit is exceeded, the Pre-charge time over (Y51) signal is output. When the measured value limit level is
exceeded, the Pre-charge level over (Y53) signal is output. For the Y51 signal, set "51 (positive logic)" or "151 (negative
logic)" to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection), and for the Y53 signal, set "53 (positive logic)" or "153
(negative logic)" in Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the functions to terminals.

NOTE
• For Pr.764 Pre-charge time limit, set a value greater than Pr.762 Pre-charge ending time.
• For Pr.763 Pre-charge upper detection level, set a value greater than Pr.761 Pre-charge ending level.

620 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • Example of protective function by time limit (Pr.760 = "0")

Measured value[PSI]
Ending level
1
Pr.761

2
Time
Output frequency[Hz]

3
Pr.127 When Pr.760 = "0",
output is immediately shut off.
Pr.764

0Hz Time
STF
Y49
4
Y51
ALM

E.PCH 5
• Example of protective function measured value limit (Pr.760 = "1")

Measured value[PSI]
6
Pr.763

7
Time
Output frequency[Hz]

Pr.127 8
When Pr.760 = "1",
output is shut off after the motor decelerates to a stop.
0Hz
9
Time
STF
Y49
Y53
ALM
10
E.PCH

 Setting multiple PID pre-charge functions

• When the second pre-charge function is set, two sets of pre-charge functions can be switched for use. The second pre-
charge function is enabled by the turning ON RT signal.
• The second pre-charge function parameters and signals function in the same way as the following parameters and signals
of the first pre-charge function. Refer to the first pre-charge function when setting the second pre-charge functions.

First pre-charge function parameters Second pre-charge function parameters

Classification
Pr. Name Pr. Name
760 Pre-charge fault selection 765 Second pre-charge fault selection
761 Pre-charge ending level 766 Second pre-charge ending level
Parameter 762 Pre-charge ending time 767 Second pre-charge ending time
763 Pre-charge upper detection level 768 Second pre-charge upper detection level
764 Pre-charge time limit 769 Second pre-charge time limit

First pre-charge function parameters Second pre-charge function parameters

Classification
Signal Name Signal Name
Input signal X77 Pre-charge end command X78 Second pre-charge end command
Y49 During pre-charge operation Y50 During second pre-charge operation
Output signal Y51 Pre-charge time over Y52 Second pre-charge time over
Y53 Pre-charge level over Y54 Second pre-charge level over

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
621
 NOTE
• The second PID pre-charge function is valid also when the first pre-charge function is set to invalid and the second pre-charge
function is set.
• When "10" (second function enabled only during constant-speed operation) is set to Pr.155, the second PID function is not
selected even if the RT signal turns ON.

5.14.13 Dancer control

PID control is performed using detected dancer roll position as feedback data. The dancer roll is controlled to be at a designated
position.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

Set the acceleration/deceleration time during dancer control.
44 Second acceleration/ In dancer control, this parameter becomes the acceleration/deceleration
5s 0 to 3600 s
F020 deceleration time time of the main speed.
This setting does not operate as the second acceleration/deceleration time.
Set the deceleration time during dancer control.
In dancer control, this parameter becomes the deceleration time of the
45 Second deceleration 0 to 3600 s
9999 main speed.
F021 time
This setting does not operate as the second deceleration time.
9999 Pr.44 is the deceleration time.
0 No PID action
40 PID reverse action Additive method: Fixed
128 41 PID forward action Additive method: Fixed
PID action selection 0 For dancer control
A610 42 PID reverse action Additive method: Ratio
43 PID forward action Additive method: Ratio
Others Refer to page 601.
If a narrow proportional band is set (small parameter setting value), the
manipulated amount changes considerably by slight changes in the
measured value.
129 0.1 to 1000%
PID proportional band 100% As a result, response improves as the proportional band becomes
A613
narrower, though stability worsens as shown by the occurrence of hunting.
Gain Kp=1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
With deviation step input, this is the time (Ti) used for obtaining the same
manipulated amount as proportional band (P) by only integral (I) action.
130 0.1 to 3600 s
PID integral time 1s Arrival to the set point becomes quicker the shorter an integral time is set,
A614 though hunting is more likely to occur.
9999 No integral control
Set the upper limit.
The FUP signal is output when the feedback value exceeds this setting.
131 0 to 100%
PID upper limit 9999 The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured value (terminal 4)
A601 is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
Set the lower limit.
The FDN signal is output when the measured value (terminal 4) falls below
132 0 to 100% the setting range.
PID lower limit 9999 The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured value is equivalent
A602
to 100%.
9999 No function
133 0 to 100% Set the set point during PID control.
PID action set point 9999
A611 9999 Input of set point by terminal selected by Pr.609
With deviation ramp input, this is the time (Td) used for obtaining the
manipulated amount only by proportional action (P).
134 0.01 to 10 s
PID differential time 9999 Response to changes in deviation increase greatly as the differential time
A615
increases.
9999 No differential control
1 The set point is input through terminal 1.
2 The set point is input through terminal 2.
609 PID set point/deviation
2 3 The set point is input through terminal 4.
A624 input selection
4 The set point is input via communication
5 The set point is input by the PLC function.

622 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1
2
The measured value is input through terminal 1.
The measured value is input through terminal 2.
1
610 PID measured value
3 3 The measured value is input through terminal 4.
A625 input selection
4 The measured value is input via communication.
5 The measured value is input by the PLC function. 2
1134 PID upper limit
100% 0 to 100% Set the upper limit of PID action.
A605 manipulated value
1135 PID lower limit
A606 manipulated value
100% 0 to 100% Set the lower limit of PID action. 3
 Block diagram of dancer control
Acceleration/deceleration
of main speed 4
Main speed command Target frequency
*1

PID deviation
Ratio 5
Acceleration/
Limit deceleration
Pr.128 = 42, 43 +
PID control X14
Dancer roll
setting point
+
Kp(1+
1
+Td S)
+
6
- Ti S Pr.128 = 40, 41
Pr.133

PID set point PID feedback M

7
Convert to 0 to 100%
Potentiometer
8
Terminal 4

Dancer roll position detection

9
*1 The main speed can be selected in all operation modes, External (analog voltage input, multi-speed), PU (digital frequency setting) and
Communication (RS-485).
10
 Outline of dancer control
• Dancer control is performed by setting "40 to 43" in Pr.128 PID action selection. The main speed command is the speed
command for each operation mode (External, PU, and communication). PID control is performed by the dancer roll position
detection signal, and the control result is added to the main speed command. For the main speed acceleration/deceleration
time, set the acceleration time to Pr.44 Second acceleration/deceleration time and the deceleration time to Pr.45
Second deceleration time.

Output frequency PID adding value

Output frequency
Main speed

Time

STF ON

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
623
 NOTE
• Normally, set Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time to 0 s. When the Pr.7 and Pr.8 settings are large, dancer
control response becomes slow during acceleration/deceleration.
• The Pr.127 PID control automatic switchover frequency setting is enabled. The larger setting value between Pr.7 and
Pr.44 is used as the acceleration time during normal operation. For the deceleration time, the larger setting value between
Pr.8 and Pr.45 is used. (For details on Pr.127, refer to page 601.)
• If an automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is activated during dancer control, E.OC[] or E.OV[] is likely to occur.
In such case, disable the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr.57 = "9999").

 Connection diagram
• Sink logic Inverter
MCCB
• Pr.128 = 41 Motor
R/L1 U
• Pr.182 = 14 Power supply S/L2 V IM
T/L3 W
• Pr.193 = 14
• Pr.194 = 15
Forward rotation STF
• Pr.133 = Set point
Reverse rotation STR

PID control selection RH(X14) ∗3

SD
∗2 (FUP)FU Upper limit

∗2 (FDN)OL Lower limit

10
Main speed command
2
setting potentiometer ∗1
5 SE Output signal common
Feedback value of
dancer roll position 4 ∗4

*1 The main speed command differs according to each operation mode (External, PU, communication).
*2 The applied output terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
*3 The applied input terminals differ by the settings of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
*4 The AU signal need not be input.

 Dancer control operation selection (Pr.128)

Pr.128 setting PID action Additive method Set point input Measured value input
0 PID disabled — — —
40 Reverse action
Fixed
41 Forward action Set by Pr.133 or input by Input by terminal selected by
42 Reverse action terminal selected by Pr.609*1 Pr.610
Ratio
43 Forward action
Others Refer to page 601.
*1 When Pr.133 ≠ "9999", the Pr.133 setting is valid.

• To enable dancer control, set "40 to 43" in Pr.128 PID action selection.
• Dancer control is enabled only when the PID control valid (X14) signal turns ON when "14" is set in one of Pr.178 to Pr.182
(Input terminal function selection) and X14 signal is assigned. When the X14 signal is not assigned, dancer control is
enabled only by the Pr.128 setting.
• Input the main speed command (External, PU, Communication). Dancer control is also supported by the main speed
command in all operation modes.
• Input the set point between the terminals 2 and 5 (the setting can be selected using Pr.133 or Pr.609) and input the
measured value signal (dancer roll position detection signal) between the inverter terminals 4 and 5 (the setting can be
selected using Pr.610).
• The action of Pr.129 PID proportional band, Pr.130 PID integral time, Pr.131 PID upper limit, Pr.132 PID lower limit
and Pr.134 PID differential time is the same as PID control action. In the relationship between the control amount (%)
and frequency in PID control, 0% and 100% are equivalent to the frequencies set to Pr.902 and Pr.903, respectively.

624 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 NOTE
• When Pr.128 is set to "0" or the X14 signal is OFF, regular inverter running not dancer control is performed. 1
• Dancer control is enabled by turning ON/OFF the bits of terminals assigned the X14 signal by RS-485 communication or over
the network.
• When dancer control is selected, set the PID output suspension function (Pr.575 Output interruption detection time =
"9999").
2
• When Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level ≠ "9999", terminal 2 cannot be used for the main speed command. Terminal
2 becomes the PTC thermistor input terminal.
3
 Selection of set point/measured value input method (Pr.609, Pr.610)
• Select the set point input method by Pr.609 PID set point/deviation input selection and the measured value input
method by Pr.610 PID measured value input selection. Switch the power voltage/current specifications of terminals 2
4
and 4 by Pr.73 Analog input selection or Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection to match the specification of the input
device.
• When Pr.133 PID action set point ≠ "9999", Pr.133 is the set point. When the set point is set at Pr.133, the setting
5
frequency of Pr.902 is equivalent to 0% and the setting frequency of Pr.903 is equivalent to 100%.
Pr.609, Pr.610 settings Input method
6
1 Terminal 1*1
2 Terminal 2*1
3 Terminal 4*1
7
4 Communication*2
5 PLC function

*1 When the same input method has been selected for the set point and measured value at Pr.609 and Pr.610, set point input is invalid. (Inverter
runs at set point 0%)
8
*2 CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network, or LONWORKS communication is available. For details on communication, refer to the Instruction Manual of
each option.

NOTE 9
• After changing the Pr.73 or Pr.267 settings, check the voltage/current input selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a
fault, failure or malfunction. (Refer to page 496 for the setting.)
• When terminals 2 and 4 are selected for deviation input, perform bias calibration using C3 and C6 to prevent a minus voltage 10
from being entered as the deviation input signal. Input of a minus voltage might damage devices and the inverter.

• The following shows the relationship between the input values of the analog input terminals, and the set point and
measured value.

Input Relationship with analog input

Input terminal Calibration parameter
specification*3 Set point Result
0 V = 0% 0 V = 0%
0 to 5 V
5 V = 100% 5 V = 100%
0 V = 0% 0 V = 0%
Terminal 2 0 to 10 V Pr.125, C2 to C4
10 V = 100% 10 V = 100%
0 mA = 0% 0 mA = 0%
0 to 20 mA
20 mA = 100% 20 mA = 100%
-5 to 0 V = 0% -5 to 0 V = 0%
0 to ±5 V
+5 V = +100% +5 V = +100% When Pr.128 = "10", Pr.125 setting, C2 to C4.
Terminal 1
-10 to 0 V = 0% -10 to 0 V = 0% When Pr.128 ≥ "1000", C12 setting, C2 to C15.
0 to 10 V
+10 V = +100% +10 V = +100%
0 to 1 V = 0% 0 to 1 V = 0%
0 to 5 V
5 V = 100% 5 V = 100%
0 to 2 V = 0% 0 to 2 V = 0%
Terminal 4 0 to 10 V Pr.126, C5 to C7
10 V = 100% 10 V = 100%
0 to 4 mA = 0% 0 to 4 mA = 0%
0 to 20 mA
20 mA = 100% 20 mA = 100%

*3 Can be changed by Pr.73 and Pr.267 and the voltage/current input switch. (Refer to page 496.)

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
625
  Selection of additive method for PID calculation result
• When ratio is selected as the additive method (Pr.128 = "42, 43"), PID calculation result × (ratio of main speed) is added
to the main speed. The ratio is determined by the Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency and C2 (Pr.902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency settings. In the initial status, 0 to 60 Hz is set for 0 to 100%. Thus, 60 Hz
main speed is regarded as 100%, and the 30 Hz main speed is regarded as 50%.

Output frequency Initial value

60Hz

Gain
Pr.125
Bias
C2(Pr.902)
0 100%
Frequency setting signal

NOTE
• Even if C4 (Pr.903) is set to other than 100%, the frequency setting signal is treated as 100%.
• Even if C3 (Pr.902) is set to other than 0%, the frequency setting signal is treated as 0%.
• If C2 (Pr.902) is set to other than 0 Hz, the frequency setting signal is 0% at the C2 (Pr.902) frequency setting or below.

 Setting the upper and lower limits of the PID manipulated amount
(Pr.1134, Pr.1135)
• Set the upper and lower limits of the PID manipulated amount.
• The upper limit of the manipulated amount is the frequency obtained by adding the value resulting from frequency
conversion of Pr.1134 to the main speed.
The lower limit of the manipulated amount is the frequency obtained by subtracting the value resulting from frequency
conversion of Pr.1135 from the main speed.

Upper limit of PID manipulated amount

Output frequency
Main speed

Lower limit of PID manipulated amount

Output frequency considering upper/lower limit

of PID manipulated amount

Time

 Input/output signals
• The following signals can be used by assigning functions to Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) and
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
• Input signal
Pr.178 to
Signal Function Pr.189 Description
setting
When this signal is assigned to the input terminal, PID control is enabled when this signal is
X14 PID control valid 14
ON.
PID forward/
PID control is switched between forward and reverse action without changing parameters by
X64 reverse action 64
turning ON this signal.
switchover
PID P control
X72 72 Integral and differential values can be reset by turning ON this signal.
switchover

626 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • Output signal
Pr.190 to Pr.196
setting
1
Signal Function Description
Positive Negative
logic logic

FUP PID upper limit 15 115

Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr.131 PID upper limit 2
(Pr.1143 Second PID upper limit).
Output when the measured value signal falls below Pr.132 PID lower limit
FDN Lower limit output 14 114
(Pr.1144 Second PID lower limit).

PID forward/reverse
"Hi" is output when the output display of the parameter unit is forward rotation 3
RL 16 116 (FWD) and "Low" is output when the display is reverse rotation (REV) and stop
rotation output
(STOP).
During PID control
PID
activated
47 147 Turns ON during PID control.
4
NOTE
• Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after 5
confirming the function of each terminal.

 PID monitor function 6

• This function displays the PID control set point and measured value on the operation panel, and can output these from the
terminals FM, AM, and CA.
• Set the following values to Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, Pr.774 to Pr.776 (Operation panel monitor 7
selection), Pr.992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection, Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection
and Pr.158 AM terminal function selection for each monitor.
Monitor range
8
Parameter Monitor Minimum
Terminal Terminal Operation Remarks
Setting description increment
FM/CA AM panel

97
Dancer main set
0.01 Hz. 0 to 590 Hz
When outputting through terminals FM, CA and
AM, the full scale value can be adjusted by Pr.55
9
speed
Frequency monitoring reference.

NOTE
• Refer to page 610 for details on other PID control monitors.
10

 Priority of main speed commands

• The priority of main speed command sources when the speed command source is External is as follows:
JOG signal > multi-speed setting signal (RL/RM/RH/REX) > pulse train input > 16-bit digital input (option FR-A8AX) >
analog input (terminals 2, 4, 1)
• The priority of main speed command sources when "3" is set to Pr.79 Operation mode selection is as follows:
Multi-speed setting signal (RL/RM/RH/REX) > frequency setting (digital setting by PU or operation panel)
• Even if the remote operation function is selected by Pr.59 Remote function selection ≠ "0", compensation of the remote
setting frequency against the main speed is ignored. (The value is "0".)
• If terminal 1 is selected for the first and second PID, terminal 1 added compensation of the main speed is invalid.
• If terminal 2 is selected for the first and second PID, the terminal 2 override function of the main speed is invalid.
• If the same terminal as an external input terminal having a speed command source (external terminal where a main speed
is input) is specified as the measured value input or set point input, the main speed is treated as "0".
• Polarity reversible operation of the main speed is not possible.
• Setting "10 to 17" in Pr.73 Analog input selection enables the polarity reversible operation of the main speed command
to which PID manipulated amount added. (Polarity reversible operation of the main speed command without addition is not
possible.)
• When the polarity reversible operation is enabled, the integral term cannot be limited by the maximum and minimum
frequency when Pr.1015 Integral stop selection at limited frequency = "0 or 10".

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
627
  Adjustment procedure for dancer roll position detection signal
• When the input of terminal 4 is voltage input, 0 V and 5 V (10 V) are the lower limit position and upper limit position,
respectively (initial value). When it is current input, 4 mA and 20 mA are the lower limit position and upper limit position,
respectively (initial value). When the potentiometer has an output of 0 to 7 V, C7 (Pr.905) must be calibrated at 7 V.

20mA 5V(10V) Upper limit

position

4mA 0V
0% 100% Lower limit Potentiometer, etc.
Feedback value position

(Example) To execute control at the dancer center position using a 0 to 7 V potentiometer

1. Switch the current/voltage input selection switch to "OFF", set "2" to Pr.267 and set terminal 4 input to voltage input.

2. Input 0 V across terminals 4 and 5, and calibrate C6 (Pr.904). (The % display that is indicated at analog calibration
is not related to the % of the feedback value.)

3. Input 7 V across terminals 4 and 5, and calibrate C6 (Pr.905). (The % display that is indicated at analog calibration
is not related to the % of the feedback value.)

4. Set Pr.133 to "50%".

NOTE
• After changing the Pr.267 setting, check the voltage/current selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction. (Refer to page 496 for the setting.)
• If the Multi-speed operation (RH, RM, RL, or REX) signal, or JOG signal is input during regular PID control, PID control is
interrupted. However, at dancer control, these signals are treated as main speed commands, so PID control is continued.
• During dancer control, Pr.44 and Pr.45 (Second acceleration/deceleration time) is the parameter for setting the acceleration/
deceleration time for the main speed command. This function does not work as a second function.
• When the switchover mode is set by setting "6" to Pr.79, dancer control (PID control) is invalid.
• The acceleration/deceleration action of the main speed command is the same as that when the frequency is increased or
decrease by analog input. The SU signal sometimes stays ON even if operation is turned ON/OFF by the start signal. The set
frequency monitor is the value "main speed command + PID control" which is constantly changing.
• With the main speed setting frequency setting, acceleration/deceleration is performed for the acceleration/deceleration time
set in Pr.44 and Pr.45, and with the output frequency setting, acceleration/deceleration is performed for the acceleration/
deceleration time set in Pr.7 and Pr.8. For this reason, with the output frequency, when the time set in Pr.7 and Pr.8 is longer
than the time set in Pr.44 and Pr.45, acceleration/deceleration is performed for the acceleration/deceleration time set in Pr.7
and Pr.8.
• The limit of the integral term is the smaller of 100% and the value after conversion of the straight line after interpolation of Pr.1
Maximum frequency by Pr.902 and Pr.903 to the PID manipulated amount.
However, note that the lower limit frequency limits the output frequency, but does not restrict the action of the integral item.

Parameters referred to
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628
Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 377
Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 496
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection levelpage 415
C2 (Pr.902) to C7 (Pr.905) Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gainpage 505

5.14.14 Automatic restart after instantaneous power

failure/flying start with an induction motor
V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector
The inverter can be restarted without stopping the motor operation in the following situations:

628 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • When switching from commercial power supply operation over to inverter running
• When an instantaneous power failure occurs during inverter running
• When the motor is coasting at start
1

Initial Setting
Pr. Name
value range
Description
2
0, 1000 Frequency search only performed at the first start
1, 1001 Reduced voltage start only at the first start (no frequency search)

162
Automatic restart after
2, 1002
3, 1003
Encoder detection frequency search
Frequency search only performed at the first start (reduced impact restart)
3
instantaneous power 0
A700 10, 1010 Frequency search at every start
failure selection
11, 1011 Reduced voltage start at every start (no frequency search)
12, 1012 Encoder detection frequency search at every start 4
13, 1013 Frequency search at every start (reduced impact restart)
0 Rotation direction detection disabled
1 Rotation direction detection enabled
299
Rotation direction
detection selection at 0 When Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection = "0", with rotation
5
A701 direction detection
restarting 9999
When Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection= "1 or 2", without
rotation direction detection
0 Coasting time differs according to the inverter capacity.*1
6
57 Set the time delay for the inverter to perform a restart after restoring power
Restart coasting time 9999 0.1 to 30 s
A702 due to an instantaneous power failure.
9999 No restart 7
58
Restart cushion time 1s 0 to 60 s Set the voltage cushion time for restart.
A703
163 First cushion time for
A704 restart
0s 0 to 20 s Set the voltage cushion time for restart.
Consider this matched to the size of the load amount (moment of inertia/
8
164 First cushion voltage for torque).
0% 0 to 100%
A705 restart
165 Stall prevention operation Set the stall prevention level at restart operation on the assumption that the
A710 level for restart
150% 0 to 400%
inverter rated current is 100%. 9
Set the acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration
0 to 3600 s
611 Acceleration time at a reference frequency at restart.
9999
F003 restart Standard acceleration time (for example, Pr.7) is applied as the acceleration
9999
time at restart. 10
*1 The coasting time when Pr.57 = "0" is as shown below. (When Pr.162 and Pr.570 are set to the initial value.)
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00052(1.5K) or lower: 0.5 s
FR-A820-00167(2.2K) to FR-A820-00490(7.5K) and FR-A840-00083(2.2K) to FR-A840-00250(7.5K): 1 s
FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K): 3.0 s
FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher: 5.0 s

• To operate the inverter with the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function enabled, check the following
points.
• Set Pr.57 Restart coasting time = "0".
• When the Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start (CS) signal is assigned to the input
terminal, restart operation is enabled at turn-ON of the CS signal.

 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function

15 to 100 ms ∗1
Power
ON OFF
supply
IPF OFF ON

∗1 10 to 100 ms for IP55 compatible models

• The inverter output is shut off at the activation of the Instantaneous power failure (E.IPF) or Undervoltage (E.UVT). (Refer
to page 788 for E.IPF or E.UVT.)
• When E.IPF or E.UVT is activated, the Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage (IPF) signal is output.
• The IPF signal is assigned to terminal IPF in the initial status. By setting "2 (positive logic) or 102 (negative logic)" in any
of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection), the IPF signal can be assigned to another terminal.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
629
 • When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, motor driving is resumed at the power
restoration after an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage. (E.IPF and E.UVT are not activated.)

 Connection (CS signal)

MC2

MCCB MC1 MC3

R/L1 U
S/L2 V M
T/L3 W
R1/L11
S1/L21
STF
CS MC
SD switchover
sequence

With electronic bypass sequence Converter unit Inverter

For use for only automatic
CS RDA X10
restart after instantaneous IPF X11
SD
power failure or flying start, CS
turn ON the CS signal in
SE SD
advance.
Only with restart after instantaneous power failure Separated converter type

• Restart is enabled at turn-ON of the Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start (CS)
signal.
• The inverter operation is disabled at turn-OFF of the CS signal while Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠ "9999" (with restart).
• Separated converter types detect the instantaneous power failure on the converter unit side. Perform wiring so that the IPF
signal transmitted from the converter unit is input to the terminal to which the X11 signal is assigned.
On the converter unit side, enable the restart operation. (For setting the converter unit, refer to the Instruction Manual of
the converter unit.)
• For the terminal used for the X10 or X11 signal, set "10" (X10) or "11" (X11) in Pr.178 to Pr.189 and assign the function.
(For separated converter types, the X10 signal is assigned to the terminal MRS in the initial setting.)
• For the X10 signal of separated converter types, NC contact input specification is selected in the initial setting. Set Pr.599
= "0" to change the input specification to NO contact.

NOTE
• The CS signal is assigned to terminal CS in the initial setting. By setting "6" to any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection), the CS signal can be assigned to other terminals. Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• If the CS signal is not assigned to any input terminal, solely setting Pr.57 enables the restart operation at all times.

630 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Setting for the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
operation (Pr.162) 1
• The Pr.162 settings and the instantaneous power failure automatic restart operation under each operation mode are as
shown in the following table.
Automatic restart operation selection after instantaneous power failure
2
CS signal
V/F control,
Pr.162 Restart command
Advanced magnetic flux vector Real sensorless Vector PM sensorless
setting timing source
control
Without encoder With encoder
vector control control vector control
selection 3
0 (initial
Frequency search Frequency search
value)

1
Reduced voltage
start
Reduced voltage
start
4
At first start Encoder detection
2 Frequency search
frequency search
Frequency search Frequency search 5
3 (reduced impact (reduced impact
restart) restart) Always External
10 Frequency search Frequency search

11
Reduced voltage Reduced voltage 6
start start
At every Encoder detection
12 Frequency search
start frequency search
Frequency search Frequency search Frequency 7
Encoder
13 (reduced impact (reduced impact Frequency search search for PM
detection
restart) restart) (reduced impact motor
frequency
1000 Frequency search Frequency search restart) (Refer to page
Reduced voltage Reduced voltage
search
635.) 8
1001
start start
Encoder detection
1002 At first start Frequency search

Frequency search
frequency search
Frequency search
9
1003 (reduced impact (reduced impact
restart) restart) Determined by
the Pr.338
1010 Frequency search
Reduced voltage
Frequency search
Reduced voltage
setting 10
1011
start start
At every Encoder detection
1012 Frequency search
start frequency search
Frequency search Frequency search
1013 (reduced impact (reduced impact
restart) restart)

 Restart operation with frequency search (Pr.162 = "0, 3, 10, 13, 1000,
1003, 1010, or 1013", Pr.299)
• When Pr.162 = "0 (initial value), 3, 10, 13, 1000, 1003, 1010, or 1013", the motor speed is detected at a power restoration
so that the motor can re-start smoothly.
• The encoder also detects the rotation direction so that the inverter can re-start smoothly even during the reverse rotation.
• Whether or not to detect the rotation direction can be selected by Pr.299 Rotation direction detection selection at
restarting. If the motor capacity is different from the inverter capacity, set Pr.299 = "0" (no rotation direction detection).
• When the rotation direction is detected, the following operation is performed according to Pr.78 Reverse rotation
prevention selection setting.
Pr.78 setting
Pr.299 setting
0 1 2
9999 ○ × ×
0 (initial value) × × ×
1 ○ ○ ○
○: With rotation direction detection ×: Without rotation direction detection

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
631
 • By setting "3, 13, 1003, or 1013" in Pr.162, the restart can be made smoother with even less impact than when "0, 10,
1000, or 1010" is set in Pr.162. When the inverter is restarted with "3, 13, 1003, or 1013" set in Pr.162, offline auto tuning
is required. (For details on offline auto tuning of Advanced magnetic flux vector control and Real sensorless vector control,
refer to page 532, and for details on offline auto tuning of V/F control, refer to page 638.)

V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control
Instantaneous (power failure) time Instantaneous (power failure) time
Power supply
Power supply
(R/L1, S/L2,
(R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3)
T/L3)
Motor speed N Motor speed N
(r/min)
(r/min)
Inverter output * Inverter output
frequency f(Hz) frequency f(Hz)
output voltage *
Inverter output
voltage E(V) E(V)
Speed
Restart cushion Coasting + detection Acceleration time
Speed time (Pr.57) time
Coasting time (Pr.58 setting) at a restart
+ detection (Pr.611 setting)
time (Pr.57) time
* The output shut off timing differs
* The output shut off timing differs Acceleration time according to the load condition.
according to the load condition. at a restart
(Pr.611 setting)

NOTE
• The rotation speed detection time (frequency search) changes according to the rotation speed of the motor. (maximum 1 s)
• When the inverter capacity is two ranks or greater than the motor capacity, the overcurrent protective function (E.OC[]) is
sometimes activated and prevents the inverter from restarting.
• If two or more motors are connected to one inverter, this function operates abnormally. (The inverter does not restart
successfully.)
• Because a DC injection brake is applied instantaneously at speed detection during a restart, the speed might drop if the
moment of inertia (J) of the load is small.
• If reverse operation is detected when "1" (reverse rotation disabled) is set to Pr.78, operation decelerates by reverse rotation
and then changes to forward rotation when the start command is forward rotation. The inverter does not restart when the start
command is reverse rotation.
• When "3, 13, 1003, or 1013" is set to Pr.162, limit the wiring length to within 100 m.

 Restart operation without frequency search (Pr.162 ="1, 11, 1001, or

1011")
• When Pr.162 = "1 11, 1001, or 1011", reduced voltage start is used for the restart operation. In this method, the voltage is
raised gradually while keeping the output frequency level at the level before an instantaneous power failure, regardless of
the motor's coasting speed.
V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Instantaneous (power failure) time
Power supply
(R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3)
Motor speed N
(r/min)
Inverter output *
frequency f(Hz)

Inverter output
voltage E(V)

Coasting time
Pr.57 setting Restart cushion time
(Pr.58 setting)
* The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.

632 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 NOTE
• This restart method uses the output frequency that was active before the instantaneous power failure stored in memory. If the 1
instantaneous power failure time is 0.2 s or more, the output frequency can no longer be stored and held in memory, so the
restart is performed from Pr.13 Starting frequency (initial value: 0.5 Hz).
• During Real sensorless vector control, Pr.162 is set to "3, 13, 1003, or 1013" (reduced impact restart).
2
 Restart operation with encoder detection frequency search (Pr.162 = "2,
12, 1002, or 1012") 3
• When "2, 12, 1002, or 1012" is set in Pr.162 by encoder feedback control, the inverter is restarted by the motor speed and
direction of rotation that were detected by the encoder at the power restoration.
• By encoder detection frequency search, the Pr.299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting setting are 4
invalid.
Instantaneous (power failure) time
Power supply
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
5
Motor speed N
(r/min)
Inverter output 6
frequency f(Hz) ∗
Output voltage E(V)

Coasting
time (Pr.57)
Acceleration time 7
at a restart (Pr.611)

Restart cushion time (Pr.58)

∗ The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
8
NOTE
• When "2, 12, 1002, or 1012" are set in Pr.162 when encoder feedback control is invalid, the automatic restart is with a
frequency search (Pr.162 = "0, 10, 1000, or 1010"). 9
• In Vector control, encoder detection frequency search is used regardless of the Pr.162 setting. The Pr.58 and Pr.299 settings
are invalid at this time.
• For the encoder feedback control, refer to page 736.
10
 Restart at every start (Pr.162 ="10 to 13, or 1010 to 1013")
• When "10 to 13, or 1010 to 1013" is set in Pr.162, a restart operation is performed at each start and automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure (after the time period set in Pr.57 elapsed). When "0 (initial value) to 3, or 1000 to 1003" is set
in Pr.162, a restart operation is performed at the first start after a power-ON, and from the second power-ON onwards, a
start from the starting frequency is performed.

 Automatic restart operation of the MRS (X10) signal

• The restart operation after restoration from output shutoff by the MRS (X10) signal is as shown in the following table
according to the Pr.30 setting.
Pr.30 setting Operation after restoration from output shutoff by the MRS (X10) signal
2, 10, 11, 102, 110, 111 Restart operation (starting from the coasting speed)
Other than the above Starting from Pr.13 Starting frequency.

NOTE
• When output is shut off using safety stop function (terminals S1 and S2), the inverter restarts in the same way as when output
is shut off by the MRS (X10) signal.

 Adjustment of restart coasting time (Pr.57)

• Restart coasting time is the time period from the occurrence of instantaneous power failure until the operation is restarted
after power is restored.
With frequency search, the motor speed is detected and operation is restarted after the coasting time.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
633
 • To enable restart operation, set "0" to Pr.57 Restart coasting time. If "0" is set to Pr.57, the coasting time is automatically
set to the following number of seconds. Generally, this setting does not interfere with inverter operation.
200 V class FR-A820-[]
00046 00077 00105 00167 00250 00340 00490 00630 00770 00930 01250 01540 01870 02330 03160 03800 04750
(0.4K) (0.75K) (1.5K) (2.2K) (3.7K) (5.5K) (7.5K) (11K) (15K) (18.5K) (22K) (30K) (37K) (45K) (55K) (75K) (90K)
Pr.570 Pr.162
setting setting 400 V class: FR-A840-[]
02600
00023 00038 00052 00083 00126 00170 00250 00310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160 01800 02160
(90K) or
(0.4K) (0.75K) (1.5K) (2.2K) (3.7K) (5.5K) (7.5K) (11K) (15K) (18.5K) (22K) (30K) (37K) (45K) (55K) (75K)
higher
Other
than 3,
0.5 0.5 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5
13, 1003,
0 (SLD), 1013
1 (LD)
3, 13,
1003, 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5
1013
Other
than 3,
0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5
13, 1003,
2 (ND) 1013
3, 13,
1003, 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5
1013
Other
than 3,
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5
13, 1003,
3 (HD) 1013
3, 13,
1003, 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5
1013

Interruption > Pr.57 setting Interruption ≤ Pr.57 setting

Instantaneous power failure Instantaneous power failure
(interruption) time (interruption) time
Power supply Power supply
(R/L1、S/L2、T/L3) (R/L1、S/L2、T/L3)

Inverter output Inverter output

frequency f (Hz) frequency f (Hz)

Coasting time Coasting time

Pr.57 setting Pr.57 setting

• Inverter operation is sometimes hindered by the size of the moment of inertia (J) of the load, output frequency, or the
residual magnetic flux in the motor. Adjust this coasting time within the range 0.1 to 30 seconds to match the load
specification.
• Set 3 seconds or more time delay when the sine wave filter is used (Pr.72 PWM frequency selection = "25").

NOTE
• Note that the coasting time setting is different from that of the FR-A700 series inverter. (Refer to page 856.)

 Restart cushion time (Pr.58)

• The cushion time is the time taken to raise the voltage to the level required for the specified speed after the motor speed
detection (output frequency before the instantaneous power failure when Pr.162 = "1, 11, 1001, or 1011").
• Normally, the motor runs at the initial value as it is. However, adjust to suit the moment of inertia (J) of the load or the size
of the torque.

NOTE
• Pr.58 is invalid under Real sensorless vector control or Vector control.

634 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Adjustment of restart operation (Pr.163 to Pr.165, Pr.611)
• The voltage cushion time at a restart can be adjusted by Pr.163 and Pr.164 as shown in the figure on the left. 1
Voltage
100%
2
Pr.164
3

(Pr.163) Pr.58 Time 4

• The stall prevention operation level at a restart operation can be set in Pr.165.
• Using Pr.611, the acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency after a restart
operation can be set. This can be set individually from the normal acceleration time. 5
NOTE
• Pr.163 to Pr.165 are invalid under Real sensorless vector control and Vector control.
• Changing the Pr.21 setting does not affect the Pr.611 setting increment. 6
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• When the restart operation is selected, Undervoltage (E.UVT) and Instantaneous power failure (E.IPF) of the fault output
signals become invalid.
7
• The SU and FU signals are not output during the restart. These signals are output after the restart cushion time passes.
• Restart operation is also performed after the inverter reset is released or after the retry by the retry function occurs.
• The automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is invalid when the load torque high-speed frequency control 8
(Pr.270 = "2, 3, or 13") is set.

 Operation command source selection for the CS signal during 9

communication operation (Pr.162 = "1000 to 1003, 1010 to 1013")
• When "1000 to 1003, or 1010 to 1013" is set in Pr.162, the CS signal input via communication is enabled depending on
10
the setting in Pr.338 Communication operation command source. (When Pr.162 = "0 to 3, or 10 to 13", the CS signal
can be input via an external terminal only.)

CAUTION
• Provide a mechanical interlock for MC1 and MC2. The inverter will be damaged if power supply is input to the
inverter output section.
• When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, the motor suddenly starts
(after reset time passes) when an instantaneous power failure occurs. Stay away from the motor and machinery.
Apply the supplied CAUTION stickers to easily visible places when automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure has been selected.

Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time incrementspage 367
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382
Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 Retry functionpage 426
Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selectionpage 406
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521

5.14.15 Automatic restart after instantaneous power

failure/flying start with a PM motor
PM

When using the IPM motor MM-CF, the inverter operation can be restarted without stopping the motor operation.
When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, the motor driving is resumed in the following
situations:

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
635
 • When power comes back ON during inverter driving after an instantaneous power failure
• When the motor is coasting at start

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

0 No delay
57 Set the delay time for the inverter to perform a restart after restoring
Restart coasting time 9999 0.1 to 30 s
A702 power due to an instantaneous power failure.
9999 No restart
0 to 3, 1000 to
Automatic restart after Frequency search only performed at the first start
162 1003
instantaneous power 0
A700 10 to 13, 1010 to
failure selection Frequency search at every start
1013
Set the acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration
0 to 3600 s
611 Acceleration time at a reference frequency at restart.
9999
F003 restart Standard acceleration time (for example, Pr.7) is applied as the
9999
acceleration time at restart.

 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function

15 to 100 ms ∗1
Power ON
supply OFF

IPF OFF ON

∗1 10 to 100 ms for IP55 compatible models

• The inverter output is shut off at the activation of the Instantaneous power failure (E.IPF) or Undervoltage (E.UVT). (Refer
to page 779 for E.IPF or E.UVT.)
• When E.IPF or E.UVT is activated, the Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage (IPF) signal is output.
• The IPF signal is assigned to terminal IPF in the initial status. By setting "2 (positive logic) or 102 (negative logic)" in any
of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection), the IPF signal can be assigned to another terminal.
• When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, motor driving is resumed at the power
restoration after an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage. (E.IPF and E.UVT are not activated.)

 Connection (CS signal)

• When the Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start (CS) signal is assigned to an input
terminal (initial setting), a restart operation is enabled at turn-ON of the CS signal.
• The inverter operation is disabled at turn-OFF of the CS signal while Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠ "9999" (with restart).

NOTE
• The CS signal is assigned to terminal CS in the initial setting. By setting "6" to any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection), the CS signal can be assigned to other terminals. Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• If the CS signal is not assigned to any input terminal, solely setting Pr.57 enables the restart operation at all times.
• If the restart operation is selected, instantaneous power failure (E.IPF) is disabled while the fault output signal is output at an
instantaneous power failure.
• The SU and FU signals are not output during the restart. These signals are output after the restart cushion time passes.
• Restart operation is also performed after the inverter reset is released or after the retry by the retry function occurs.
• The automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is invalid when the load torque high-speed frequency control
(Pr.270 = "2, 3, 13") is set.

 Selection of restart operation (Pr.162)

• At a power restoration, the encoder detects the motor speed by a frequency search so that the inverter can re-start
smoothly.
• The encoder also detects the rotation direction so that the inverter can re-start smoothly even during the reverse rotation.

636 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • When "10 to 13, or 1010 to 1013" is set in Pr.162, a restart operation is performed at each start and automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure. When "0 to 2, or 1000 to 1002" is set in Pr.162, a restart operation is performed at the first
start after a power-ON, and from the second power-ON onwards, a start from the starting frequency is performed.
1
Instantaneous (power failure) time

Power supply
(R/L1,S/L2,T/L3)
2
Motor
speed N (r/min)
Inverter output
frequency f (Hz)
* 3
Inverter output
voltage E (V)

Speed
4
Coasting + detection
time (Pr.57) time
Acceleration time
at a restart
* The output shut off timing differs
according to the load condition
(Pr.611 setting) 5
NOTE
• Because a DC injection brake is applied instantaneously at speed detection during a restart, the speed might drop if the 6
moment of inertia (J) of the load is small.
• Restart operation with reduced voltage is not available for PM sensorless vector control.

7
 Restart coasting time (Pr.57)
• Coasting time is the time from the motor speed detection to the restart operation start.
• To enable restart operation, set "0" (no coasting time) in Pr.57 Restart coasting time. Generally, this setting does not 8
interfere with inverter operation.
• Inverter operation is sometimes hindered by the size of the moment of inertia (J) of the load or the output frequency. Adjust
this coasting time within the range 0.1 to 30 seconds to match the load specification. 9
 Adjustment of restart operation (Pr.611)
• Using Pr.611, the acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency after a restart
10
operation can be set. This can be set individually from the normal acceleration time.

NOTE
• Changing the Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting does not affect the Pr.611 setting increment.
• An IPM motor is a motor with interior permanent magnets. Regression voltage is generated when the motor coasts at an
instantaneous power failure or at a flying start. The inverter's DC bus voltage rises if the motor coasts fast or makes a flying
start in this condition.
When using the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr.57 ≠ "9999"), it is recommended to also use
the regenerative avoidance function (Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection = "1") to make startups stable. If
the overvoltage protective function (E.OV[]) still occurs with the regeneration avoidance function, also use the retry function
(Pr.67).
• During PM sensorless vector control, the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function operates only when an
IPM MM-CF motor is connected.
When a built-in brake or a regeneration unit is used, the frequency search may not be available at 2200 r/min or higher. The
restart operation cannot be performed until the motor speed drops to a frequency where the frequency search is available.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
637
 CAUTION
• An IPM motor is a motor with interior permanent magnets. High voltage is generated at motor terminals while the motor
is running.
Do not touch motor terminals and other parts until the motor stops to prevent an electric shock.
• When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, the motor suddenly starts (after reset
time passes) when an instantaneous power failure occurs.
Stay away from the motor and machinery.
Apply the supplied CAUTION stickers to easily visible places when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
has been selected.

Parameters referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382
Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 Retry functionpage 426
Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selectionpage 406
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation selectionpage 732

5.14.16 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search

V/F PM

Under V/F control or when driving the IPM motor MM-CF, the accuracy of the "frequency search", which is used to detect the
motor speed for the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure and flying start, can be improved.

Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0, 1000 Frequency search only performed at the first start
1, 1001 Reduced voltage start only at the first start (no frequency search)
2, 1002 Encoder detection frequency search
Automatic restart after Frequency search only performed at the first start (reduced impact
162 3, 1003
instantaneous power 0 restart)
A700
failure selection 10, 1010 Frequency search at every start
11, 1011 Reduced voltage start at every start (no frequency search)
12, 1012 Encoder detection frequency search at every start
13, 1013 Frequency search at every start (reduced impact restart)
The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the
0 to 32767
298 frequency search.
Frequency search gain 9999
A711*1 The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-
9999
HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA, or MM-CF) is used.
The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the
0 to 32767
560 Second frequency frequency search of the second motor.
9999
A712*1 search gain The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-
9999
HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA, or MM-CF) is used for the second motor.
0 No offline auto tuning
Offline auto tuning is performed under Advanced magnetic flux
96 Auto tuning setting/ 1, 101 vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or Vector control.
0
C110 status (Refer to page 532 and page 542.)
Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the motor (for IPM
11
motor MM-CF).
0 to 50 Ω, 9999*2 Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is
90 automatically set.)
Motor constant (R1) 9999
C120 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*3 9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-
JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.
0 No auto tuning for the second motor.
Offline auto tuning is performed for the second motor. (Refer to page
1, 101
463 Second motor auto 532 and page 542.)
0
C210 tuning setting/status Offline auto tuning is performed without rotating the second motor
11 (under V/F control or PM sensorless vector control (IPM motor MM-
CF)).
458 Second motor 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*2
9999 Tuning data of the second motor (same asPr.90)
C220 constant (R1) 0 to 400 mΩ, 9999*3
*1 Tuning is not available under PM sensorless vector control.
*2 For the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.

638 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 *3 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search (reduced impact restart) 1

• When an induction motor is used and the frequency search (reduced impact restart) is selected by setting Pr.162
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection = "3, 13, 1003, or 1013", perform offline auto tuning.
• When the MM-CF motor is used and the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected, it is recommended 2
that offline auto tuning is performed.

 Before performing offline auto tuning

Check the following points before performing offline auto tuning:
3
• Check that V/F control or PM sensorless vector control (IPM motor MM-CF) is selected.
• Check that a motor is connected. (Check that the motor is not rotated by an external force during tuning.)
• Select a motor with the rated current equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (The motor capacity must be 0.4 kW
4
or higher.)
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque
accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter
5
rated current.
• The target motor is other than a high-slip motor, a high-speed motor, or a special motor.
• The motor may rotate slightly even if the offline auto tuning without motor rotation (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status =
6
"11") is selected. Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that it is safe even if the
motor rotates. (Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications.) Note that even if the motor runs slightly, tuning
performance is unaffected.
7
• Offline auto tuning is not performed correctly when the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) and sine
wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) are inserted between the inverter and motor. Be sure to remove them before performing tuning.
8
 Setting
1. Set "11" in Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status.
9
2. Set the rated motor current (initial value is inverted rated current) in Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to
page 415.)

3. Set Pr.71 Applied motor according to the motor to be used. 10

Motor Pr.71 setting
SF-JR, SF-TH 0 (3, 4)
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 20 (23, 24)
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor SF-HR 40 (43, 44)
Others 0 (3, 4)
SF-JRCA 4P,
1 (13, 14)
SF-TH (constant-torque)
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor
SF-HRCA 50 (53, 54)
Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 1 (13, 14)
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-
SF-PR 70 (73, 74)
saving motor
Other manufacturer's standard motor — 0 (3, 4)
Other manufacturer’s constant-torque motor — 1 (13, 14)

 Performing tuning

• Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit if the inverter is in the state ready
for tuning. The motor starts by turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable.

• In the PU operation mode, press / on the operation panel.

For External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts. (At this time, excitation noise
occurs.)

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
639
 NOTE
• It takes about 10 s for tuning to complete. (The time depends on the inverter capacity and motor type.)
• Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of the MRS signal.

• To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or on the operation panel.
(Turning OFF the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) also ends tuning.)
• During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid (initial value).
Input terminals <valid signals>: STP (STOP), OH, MRS, RT, RES, STF, STR, S1, and S2
Output terminals: RUN, OL, IPF, FM/CA, AM, A1B1C1, and So (SO)
• When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM/CA and AM, the progress status of offline
auto tuning is output in 15 steps from FM/CA and AM.
• Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the Second function selection (RT) signal during offline auto tuning. Auto tuning will not
be performed properly.
• Since the RUN signal turns ON when tuning is started, pay close attention especially when a sequence which releases a
mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
• When executing offline auto tuning, input the operation command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
of the inverter.
• While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal ON to tune in the PU
operation mode.

• During tuning, the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as follows.

Status Operation panel (FR-DU08) display LCD operation panel (FR-LU08) display

AutoTune 12:34
TUNE
Setting 11
--- STOP PU
PREV NEXT

AutoTune 12:34
TUNE
Tuning in progress 12
STF FWD PU
PREV NEXT

AutoTune 12:34
TUNE

Normal end Completed 13

STF STOP PU
PREV NEXT
Blinking

• When offline auto tuning ends, press on the operation panel during PU operation. For External operation, turn OFF
the start signal (STF signal or STR signal). This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the PU's monitor display
returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
• At tuning completion, the tuning results are set in the following parameters:
Parameter Name
90 Motor constant (R1)
298 Frequency search gain
96 Auto tuning setting/status

NOTE
• The motor constants measured once during offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until offline
auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared when performing All parameter clear.

• If offline auto tuning has ended in error, motor constants are not set.

640 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
Error display Error cause Countermeasures 1
8 Forced end Set "11" in Pr.96 and retry.
9 Inverter protective function operation Make the setting again.
Set the acceleration/deceleration time longer.
91 The current limit (stall prevention) function is activated.
Set Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection = "1". 2
92 The converter output voltage fell to 75% of the rated voltage. Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation.
Calculation error.
93 Check the motor wiring and make the setting again.
The motor is not connected.
Rotation tuning frequency setting error.
3
(The frequency command for the tuning was given to exceed Check the Pr.1 Maximum frequency and Pr.31 to Pr.36
94
the maximum frequency setting, or to be in the frequency jump Frequency jump settings.
range.)
4
• When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto
tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again. 5
• When the rated power supply of the motor is 200/220 V (400/440 V) 60 Hz, set the rated motor current multiplied by 1.1 in
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay after tuning is complete.
• For a motor with a PTC thermistor, thermal protector or other thermal detection, set "0" (motor overheat protection by 6
inverter invalid) in Pr.9 to protect the motor from overheating.

NOTE 7
• An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is restored, the inverter starts
normal operation. Therefore, when the STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor starts forward (reverse) rotation.
• Any fault occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. However, if the retry function is set, no retry is
performed. 8
• The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.

 Tuning the second motor (Pr.463) 9

• When one inverter switches the operation between two different motors, set the second motor in Pr.450 Second applied
motor, set Pr.463 Second motor auto tuning setting/status = "11", and perform tuning of the second motor.
10
• Turning ON the RT signal enables the parameter settings for the second motor as shown in the following table.
Function RT signal ON (second motor) RT signal OFF (first motor)
Motor constant (R1) Pr.458 Pr.90
Frequency search gain Pr.560 Pr.298
Auto tuning setting/status Pr.463 Pr.96

NOTE
• The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

CAUTION
• Note that the motor may start running suddenly.
• For the offline auto tuning in vertical lift applications, etc., caution is required to avoid falling due to insufficient torque.

Parameters referred to
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 415
Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 Retry functionpage 426
Pr.71 Applied motor, Pr.450 Second applied motorpage 528
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selectionpage 431
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
641
 5.14.17 Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function
This is a function to decelerate the motor to a stop when an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occurs.
Initial value Setting
Pr. Name Description
FM CA range
0 Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function disabled
261 Power failure stop
0 1, 2, 11, 12, Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function enabled.
A730 selection
21, 22 Select action at an undervoltage or when a power failure occurs.
Normally, the motor runs at the initial value as it is. However,
262 Subtracted frequency at
3 Hz 0 to 20 Hz adjust to suit the size of the load specification (moment of inertia,
A731 deceleration start
torque).
When the output frequency ≥ the frequency set in Pr.263:
The motor decelerates if the output frequency decreases by the
263 Subtraction starting 0 to 590 Hz frequency set in Pr.262.
60 Hz 50 Hz
A732 frequency When the output frequency < the frequency set in Pr.263:
The motor decelerates at frequencies of the output frequency.
9999 The motor decelerates from the output frequency - Pr.262.
264 Power-failure Set the slope applicable from the deceleration start to the Pr.266
5s 0 to 3600 s
A733 deceleration time 1 set frequency.
Set the slope applicable for the frequency range starting at Pr.266
265 Power-failure 0 to 3600 s
9999 and downward.
A734 deceleration time 2
9999 Same as Pr.264.
Power failure
266 Set the frequency at which the slope during deceleration switches
deceleration time 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
A735 from the Pr.264 setting to the Pr.265 setting.
switchover frequency
Adjust the response at undervoltage avoidance operation. Setting
294 UV avoidance voltage
100% 0 to 200% a large value improves the response to changes in the bus
A785 gain
voltage.
668 Power failure stop Adjust the response level for the operation where the deceleration
100% 0 to 200%
A786 frequency gain time is automatically adjusted.
Power failure stop 0 Normally open input (NO contact input specification)
606
external signal input 1
T722 1 Normally closed input (NC contact input specification)
selection

 Connection and parameter setting

Keep the jumpers between
terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21
connected.
Inverter
Converter unit Inverter
R/L1
Power supply R/L1 P/+ P/+ U
S/L2 Power supply S/L2 N/- N/- V M
T/L3 T/L3 W
Remove the jumper R1/L11
S1/L21 Remove the jumper R1/L11 R1/L11
P/+ S1/L21 S1/L21
N/-
Connect terminals
R1/L11 and P/+ Connect terminals
and terminals Standard models R1/L11 and P/+ RDA MRS(X10)
S1/L21 and N/-. and terminals RSO RES
S1/L21 and N/-. PWF X48
SE SD

Separated converter type

• For the standard model, remove the jumpers between terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and terminals S/L2 and S1/L21, and
connect terminals R1/L11 and P/+ and terminals S1/L21 and N/-.
• If an undervoltage, power failure or input phase loss occurs when Pr.261 Power failure stop selection ≠ "0", the motor
decelerates to a stop.

642 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • The power failure time deceleration-to-stop function operates as follows at an input phase loss.
Pr.261 Pr.872 Operation when an input phase loss occurs 1
0 Operation continues
0
1 Input phase loss (E.ILF)
0 Operation continues
1, 2
1 Deceleration stop 2
21, 22 — Deceleration stop

• For the separated converter type, remove the jumpers between terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and terminals S/L2 and S1/
L21 of the converter unit, and connect terminals R1/L11 and P/+ and terminals S1/L21 and N/-. Do not remove the jumpers
3
of terminal R1/L11 and terminal S1/L21 of the inverter. (In the initial status of the separated converter type, terminals P/+
and R1/L11 and terminals N/- and S1/L21 are connected.)
• For the separated converter type, connect the terminal to which the PWF signal of the converter unit is assigned and the
4
terminal to which the X48 signal of the inverter is assigned. Also, set Pr.261 of the converter unit in accordance with the
inverter setting. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the converter unit.)
5
 Outline of operation of deceleration stop at a power failure
• If an undervoltage or power failure occurs, the output frequency is turned OFF only for the frequency set to Pr.262
Subtracted frequency at deceleration start. 6
• The motor decelerates for the time set to Pr.264 Power-failure deceleration time 1. (The deceleration time setting is the
time it takes for the motor to stop from Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.)
• Change the deceleration time (slope) to stop using Pr.265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 when the frequency is too 7
low to obtain the regenerative energy or in other instances.
Power supply

Output
Pr.264 8
Subtracted Power-failure
frequency frequency at deceleration time 1
Power-failure deceleration start Pr.265
9
deceleration Pr.262 Power-failure
time switchover deceleration
frequency time 2
Pr.266 Time

 Action setting at undervoltage and power failure 10

• Set Pr.261 to select the action at an undervoltage and power failure.
Power restoration during
Pr.261 Action at undervoltage and Undervoltage avoidance
deceleration at occurrence Deceleration stop time
setting power failure function
of power failure
0 Coasts to stop Coasts to stop — —
1 Deceleration stop Not available
2 Re-acceleration According to Pr.262 to Pr.266 Not available
11 Deceleration stop setting Available
Deceleration stop
12 Re-acceleration Available
21 Deceleration stop Automatic adjustment of Not available
22 Re-acceleration deceleration time Not available

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
643
  Power failure stop function (Pr.261 = "1, 11, or 21")
• Even if power is restored during deceleration triggered by a power failure, deceleration stop is continued after which the
inverter stays stopped. To restart operation, turn the start signal OFF then ON again.

Pr.261 = "1"
Power
supply
During deceleration at
Output frequency

occurrence of power failure

During stop at
occurrence of
power failure

Time
STF

Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again

Y46

NOTE
• If the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected (Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠ "9999") while the power
failure time deceleration-to-stop function is set enabled (Pr.261 = "1, 11, or 21"), the power failure time deceleration stop
function is disabled.
• When the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is enabled (Pr.261 = "1, 11 or 21"), the inverter does not start even
if the power is turned ON or inverter reset is performed with the start signal (STF/STR) ON. Turn OFF the start signal once
and then ON again to make a start.

Power supply ON
Not started as inverter Output
is stopped due to power frequency
failure

Time
STF OFF ON
Y46 ON
• During cyclic transmission or the like (in which start commands are periodically transmitted), operation is restarted if the power
is restored during the deceleration even when the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is enabled.

 Continuous operation function at instantaneous power failure (Pr.261 =

"2, 12, or 22")
• The motor re-accelerates to the set frequency when the power restores during the deceleration triggered by a power
failure.
• Combining with the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function enables a deceleration triggered by a
power failure and re-acceleration at a power restoration.
If the power is restored after stoppage by a power failure, a restart operation is performed when automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure (Pr.57 ≠ "9999") is selected.
When power is restored during When used with automatic restart
Pr.261 = 2 Pr.261 = 2, Pr.57 9999 after instantaneous power failure
deceleration at occurrence of
power failure
IPF During power failure
Power Power
supply supply
Output Output
frequency During deceleration frequency During deceleration Automatic restart
at occurrence of at occurrence of after instantaneous
Reacceleration ∗1 power failure
power failure power failure
Time Time
Y46 Reset time + Pr.57
Y46
*1 Acceleration time depends on Pr.7 (Pr.44)

 Undervoltage avoidance function (Pr.261 = "11 or 12", Pr.294)

• When "11 or 12" is set to Pr.261, the deceleration time is adjusted (shortened) to prevent an undervoltage from occurring
during deceleration at occurrence of power failure.

644 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • Adjust the downward frequency slope and the response level using Pr.294 UV avoidance voltage gain. Setting a large
value improves the response to the bus voltage.
1
NOTE
• The undervoltage avoidance function is invalid under torque control by Real sensorless vector control. When Pr.261 = "11
(12)", the operation is performed in the same manner as if Pr.261 = "1 (2)". 2
 Automatic adjustment of deceleration time (Pr.261 = "21 or 22", Pr.294,
Pr.668) 3
• When "21 or 22" is set to Pr.261, the deceleration time is automatically adjusted to keep (DC bus) voltage constant in the
converter when the motor decelerates to a stop at a power failure. Setting of Pr.262 to Pr.266 is not required.
• If a phenomenon such as motor vibration occurs during operation of the deceleration time automatic adjustment function,
4
adjust the response level by setting the Pr.668 Power failure stop frequency gain. Increasing the setting improves the
response to change in the bus voltage. However, the output frequency may become unstable.
• If setting Pr.294 UV avoidance voltage gain lower also does not suppress the vibration, set Pr.668 lower.
5
Pr.261 = 21
Power
supply
During deceleration at
6
occurrence of power failure
Deceleration time : Automatic adjustment
Output
frequency During stop at occurrence
of power failure 7
Time

STF 8
Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again
Y46
9
 Deceleration stop by the Power failure stop external (X48) signal
• By turning OFF X48 signal, the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is activated. This function is used, for
example, when an external power failure detection circuit is installed. 10
• To use the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function for the separated converter type, use X48 signal. Connect the
terminal to which the PWF signal of the converter unit is assigned and the terminal to which the X48 signal of the inverter
is assigned.
• In the initial setting, the X48 signal is used with the normally closed (NC contact) input specification. Use Pr.606 Power
failure stop external signal input selection to change the specification to the normally open (NO contact) input.
• To use the X48 signal, set "48" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to
an input terminal.

 During deceleration at occurrence of power failure (Y46) signal

• After deceleration by a power failure, the inverter is not restarted even though the start command is input. Check the During
deceleration at occurrence of power failure (Y46) signal at a power failure. (For example, when input phase loss protection
(E.ILF) occurs.)
• The Y46 signal is turned ON during deceleration at occurrence of power failure and in a stop status after deceleration at
occurrence of power failure.
• For the Y46 signal, set "46 (positive logic)" or "146 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function.

 Power failed (Y67) signal

• Y67 signal turns ON when the output is shut off due to detection of power failure (power supply fault) or undervoltage, or
the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is activated.
• To use the Y67 signal, assign the function by setting "67 (positive logic)" or "167 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196
(Output terminal function selection).

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
645
 NOTE
• When Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "2" and the FR-HC2, FR-XC (in common bus regeneration mode), or FR-CV
is used, the deceleration stop function is invalid at power failure.
• If the "output frequency - Pr.262" at undervoltage or at power failure is a negative value, it is regarded as 0 Hz. (DC injection
brake operation is performed without deceleration.)
• The power failure time deceleration stop function is disabled during a stop or when the breaker is tripped.
• The Y46 signal turns ON if an undervoltage occurs even if a deceleration at a power failure has not occurred. For this reason,
the Y46 signal is sometimes output instantaneously when the power supply is turned OFF, but this is not a fault.
• When the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is selected, undervoltage protection (E.UVT), instantaneous power
failure protection (E.IPF) and input phase loss protection (E.ILF) are invalid.
• When the load is high during PM sensorless vector control, an undervoltage sometimes causes the coasting stop.
• To use the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function for the separated converter type, use a converter unit manufactured
in August 2014 or later.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) and Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

CAUTION
• Even if the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is set, some loads might cause the inverter to trip and the
motor to coast.
The motor coasts if sufficient regenerative power is not obtained from the motor.

Parameters referred to
Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltagepage 715
Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time incrementspage 367
Pr.30 Regenerative function selectionpage 724
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
Pr.872 Input phase loss protection selectionpage 426

5.14.18 PLC function

The inverter can be run in accordance with a sequence program.
In accordance with the machine specifications, a user can set various operation patterns: inverter movements at signal inputs,
signal outputs at particular inverter status, and monitor outputs, etc.

646 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Initial Setting
Pr. Name
value range
Description
1
0 PLC function disabled
The SQ signal is enabled by input from a
414 PLC function operation 1, 11 command source (external input terminal/
A800 selection
0
PLC function enabled communication). 2
The SQ signal is enabled by input from an
2, 12
external input terminal.

415 Inverter operation lock

0
The inverter start command is enabled regardless of the operating status of
the sequence program. 3
0
A801 mode setting The inverter start command is enabled only while the sequence program is
1
running.
Unit scale factor
0: No function When the pulse train is input from terminal
4
1: ×1 JOG, the number of sampling pulses can be
416 Pre-scale function
0 0 to 5 2: ×0.1 converted.
A802 selection
3: ×0.01
4: ×0.001
The result of conversion is stored to SD1236.
Number of sampled pulses = Input pulse value 5
5: ×0.0001 per count cycle × Pre-scale setting value
417 (Pr.417) × Unit scale factor (Pr.416)
Pre-scale setting value 1 0 to 32767 Pre-scale setting value
A803
0: Clears the flash memory fault display (no operation after 6
writing while the flash memory is in normal operation).
9696: Clears the flash memory (no operation after writing Write

498 PLC function flash 0, 9696 (0 to

while the flash memory is at a fault).
Other than 0 and 9696: Outside the setting range
7
0
A804 memory clear 9999) 0: Normal display
1: The flash memory is not cleared because the PLC
function is enabled. Read 8
9696: During flash memory clearing operation or flash
memory fault
User parameter auto 1 Auto storage function enabled
675
A805
storage function
selection
9999
9999 Auto storage function disabled 9
Desired values can be set.
1150 to
Because devices D206 to D255 used by the PLC function can be mutually
1199 User parameters 1 to
A810 to User parameters 50
0 0 to 65535 accessed, the values set to Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 can be used by the
sequence program. The result of performing calculation by a sequence
10
A859
program can also be monitored by Pr.1150 to Pr.1199.

 Outline of PLC function

• To enable the PLC function, set a value other than "0" in Pr.414 PLC function operation selection. When "2 or 12" is set
in Pr.414, the Sequence startup (SQ) signal from the external input terminal is valid regardless of the setting of the Pr.338
Communication operation command source. (The Pr.414 setting change becomes valid after inverter reset.)
• Switch the execution key (RUN/STOP) of the sequence program by turning the SQ signal ON/OFF. The sequence program
can be executed by turning the SQ signal ON. To input the SQ signal, set "50" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal
function selection) to assign the function to a terminal.
• When "1" is set in Pr.415 Inverter operation lock mode setting, the inverter can be operated only when the sequence
program is running. By changing the PLC program status from RUN to STOP during inverter operation, the motor
decelerates to stop. To stop the inverter operation at the STOP status of the PLC program while performing auto operation
using SD1148 (or SM1200 to 1211) of the PLC program, set Pr.415 = "1".
• For reading or writing sequence programs, use FR Configurator2 on the personal computer connected to the inverter via
RS-485 communication or USB. (When Pr.414 ≠ "0", sequence programs can be read from or written to FR Configurator2.)
• The following shows the required conditions to enable the SQ signal.
SQ signal
Pr.414 setting Pr.338 setting Input via a communication virtual
Input via an external (physical) terminal
terminal
0 ON ON
1, 11
1 ON —
2, 12 — ON —

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
647
 —: Not required to enable the SQ signal

 User parameter (data register (D)) auto storage function selection

• Setting Pr.675 = "1" enables the auto storage function for user parameters.
• The user parameter auto storage function is used to store the setting of Pr.1195 PLC function user parameters 46 (D251)
to Pr.1199 PLC function user parameters 50 (D255) automatically in EEPROM at power OFF or inverter reset.
• The auto storage function is disabled while the inverter performs any of the following.
Measurement of the main circuit capacitor's life, offline auto tuning, or measurement of load characteristics

NOTE
• The auto storage function may fail if the EEPROM is accessed by other functions at the same time at power OFF. To ensure
the auto storage, provide a power source for the control circuit separately from that of the main circuit.

 User parameter reading from EEPROM

• User parameters (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199) are read from RAM or EEPROM according to the settings in Pr.342
Communication EEPROM write selection and Pr.414 PLC function operation selection. When Pr.414 = "11 or 12",
RAM data is read regardless of the Pr.342 setting.

Device Pr.342 Pr.414 Read from Written to

0, 1, 2 EEPROM
0 EEPROM
Inverter (via communication), 11, 12 RAM
FR Configurator2 0, 1, 2 RAM
1 RAM
11, 12 RAM
0, 1, 2 (Differs according to the option type.)
0 EEPROM
11, 12 RAM
Communication option
0, 1, 2 RAM
1 RAM
11, 12 RAM
0, 1, 2 EEPROM
0 EEPROM
Parameter unit 11, 12 RAM
Operation panel 0, 1, 2 EEPROM
1 RAM
11, 12 RAM

NOTE
• For details on the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual and the Instruction Manual of FR
Configurator2.

 Copying the PLC function project data to USB memory

• This function copies the PLC function project data to a USB memory device. The PLC function project data copied in the
USB memory device can be copied to other inverters. This function is useful in backing up the parameter setting and for
allowing multiple inverters to operate by the same sequence programs.
• Refer to page 85 for an outline of the USB communication function.

648 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Monitor mode Parameter setting mode Function mode Fault history mode

USB memory mode 2

7
Overwrite the inverter project data file onto the designated
file in the USB memory device.

8
Write the designated project data file of the USB memory
device onto a data file of the inverter.
Project data file number 9
(displays 1 to 99,
unrelated to the number
of files saved in the USB Verify the designated project data file of the USB memory
memory device) device against the project data file of the inverter. 10

• The following data can be copied by copying the project data via USB memory device.
Copy from inverter to USB Copy from USB memory
Extension File type
memory device device to inverter
.QPA Parameter file Supported Supported
.QPG Program file Supported Supported
.C32 Function block source information Supported Supported
.QCD Global text comment information Supported Supported
.DAT Project management information Supported Not available
.TXT Copy information Supported Not available

NOTE
• If the project data of the PLC function is locked with a password using FR Configurator2, copying to the USB memory device
and verification are disabled. Also if set to write-disabled, writing to the inverter is disabled. (For details on the PLC function,
refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual and the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.)

Parameters referred to
Pr.338 Communication operation command sourcepage 400

5.14.19 Trace function

• The operating status of the inverter can be traced and stored on a USB memory device.
• Stored data can be monitored by FR Configurator2, and the status of the inverter can be analyzed.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
649
 Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
0 Without trace operation (The read value is always "0".)
1 Sampling start
1020
Trace operation selection 0 2 Forced trigger
A900
3 Sampling stop
4 Transfer of data to USB memory device
0 Memory mode
1021
Trace mode selection 0 1 Memory mode (automatic transfer)
A901
2 Recorder mode
Set the sampling cycle.
0: approx. 0.125 ms, 1: approx. 0.25 ms, 2: 1 ms, 3: 2 ms, 4: 5 ms,
1022
Sampling cycle 2 0 to 9 5: 10 ms, 6: 50 ms, 7: 100 ms, 8: 500 ms, 9: 1 s
A902
(For the setting values "0" and "1", the cycle varies according to the
control mode.)
1023 Number of analog
4 1 to 8 Select the number of analog channels for sampling.
A903 channels
0 Manual sampling start
1024
Sampling auto start 0 Sampling starts automatically when the power supply is turned ON
A904 1
or at a reset
0 Fault trigger
1 Analog trigger
1025
Trigger mode selection 0 2 Digital trigger
A905
3 Analog or digital trigger (OR logic)
4 Both analog and digital triggers (AND logic)
1026 Number of sampling Set the percentage of the pre-trigger sampling time with respect to
90% 0 to 100%
A906 before trigger the overall sampling time.
1027 Analog source selection
201
A910 (1ch)
1028 Analog source selection
202 1 to 3, 5 to
A911 (2ch)
14, 17 to 20,
1029 Analog source selection 22 to 24, 32
203
A912 (3ch) to 36, 39 to
1030 Analog source selection 42, 46, 52 to
204
A913 (4ch) 54, 61, 62,
Select the analog data (monitor item) for sampling on each channel.
1031 Analog source selection 64, 67, 71 to
205 75, 87 to 98,
A914 (5ch)
1032 Analog source selection 201 to 213,
206 222 to 227,
A915 (6ch)
230 to 232,
1033 Analog source selection
207 235 to 238
A916 (7ch)
1034 Analog source selection
208
A917 (8ch)
1035
Analog trigger channel 1 1 to 8 Select the analog channel to be the trigger.
A918
Sampling starts when the value of the analog monitor exceeds the
0
1036 Analog trigger operation value set at the trigger level (Pr.1037)
0
A919 selection Sampling starts when the value of the analog monitor falls below the
1
value set at the trigger level (Pr.1037)
Set the level at which the analog trigger turns ON.
1037
Analog trigger level 1000 600 to 1400 The trigger level is the value obtained by subtracting 1000 from the
A920
set value.

650 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
1038 Digital source selection
1
1
A930 (1ch)
1039 Digital source selection
2
A931
1040
(2ch)
Digital source selection
2
3
A932 (3ch)
1041 Digital source selection
4
A933
1042
(4ch)
Digital source selection
1 to 255 Select the digital data (I/O signal) for sampling on each channel. 3
5
A934 (5ch)
1043 Digital source selection
6
A935 (6ch) 4
1044 Digital source selection
7
A936 (7ch)
1045 Digital source selection
A937 (8ch)
8
5
1046
Digital trigger channel 1 1 to 8 Select the digital channel to be the trigger.
A938
1047 Digital trigger operation 0 Tracing starts when the signal turns ON
A939 selection
0
1 Tracing starts when the signal turns OFF 6
 Operation outline
• This function is used to sample the status data (analog monitor and digital monitor) of the inverter, trace the sampling data
when a trigger (trace start condition) occurs, and stores the resulting trace data.
7
• When the trace function is set enabled, samplings are collected and the inverter goes into the pre-trigger status.
• In the pre-trigger status, samples are collected, and the trigger standby status is entered when sufficient samples for the
number of pre-trigger samples have been collected.
8
• When a trigger occurs in the trigger standby status, tracing is started and the trace data is stored.

If the data is short for the pre-trigger sampling, 9

the inverter goes into the pre-trigger state.

Sampling start Pre-trigger sampling number

10
Sampling data
0% 90%

Once the enough data is collected for trigger sampling,

Data in the period the inverter goes into the trigger-ready state.
is discarded.
Sampling start Pre-trigger sampling number

Sampling data
0% 90% 100%

At trigger generation, samples equivalent to the 100%

Data in the period pre-trigger sampling number are collected and saved.
is discarded.
Sampling start Trace start A trigger occurs Trace completed

Sampling data
0% 90% 100%

 Tracing procedure
1. Preparing a USB memory device
Select a USB memory device with ample capacity to store the necessary amount of trace data. When the trace
function is used in the recorder mode, use a USB memory device with at least 1 GB of free space.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
651
 2. Prior setting for tracing
Set Pr.1021 to select a trace mode.
Set Pr.1022 Sampling cycle and Pr.1023 Number of analog channels according to the necessary sampling time.
Use Pr.1027 to Pr.1034 to set analog sources, and Pr.1038 to Pr.1045 to set digital sources.
Set a trigger type in Pr.1025.

3. Tracing
Set Pr.1020 or Pr.1024 to start sampling or store trace data in the USB memory device.
The trace status can be monitored. (Refer to page 658.)

4. Waveform check
By using FR Configurator2, trace data stored in a USB memory device can be displayed on a computer screen. For
details, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.

 Selection of trace mode (Pr.1021)

• Select how to store the trace data which results from sampling the inverter status.
• There are two methods to store trace data, memory mode and recorder mode.
Pr.1021
Mode Description Storing trace data
setting
To store trace data on a USB memory device, set
Trace data is stored sequentially to the internal RAM Pr.1020 Trace operation selection = "4" after the
0 Memory mode
in the inverter.
sampling and tracing is completed.*1
Memory mode Trace data is stored sequentially to the internal RAM
Trace data is automatically stored on the USB
1 (automatic in the inverter, and automatically transferred to the
memory device after tracing is completed.
transfer) USB memory device.
Trace data is stored directly on the USB memory To stop sampling and complete storing trace data
device. Sampling data is fixed at 8 analog channels after the sampling is started, set "2" (forced trigger) or
2 Recorder mode and 8 digital channels. The sampling cycle in this "3" (sampling stop) in Pr.1020 Trace operation
mode is longer than in the memory mode. (1 ms or
longer) selection.*1

*1 For details on Pr.1020, refer to page 657.

NOTE
• When the trace function is used in the recorder mode, use USB memory device having at least 1 GB of free space.
• Data transferred to the USB memory device is stored in the "TRC" folder under the "FR_INV" folder.
• Up to 99 sets of trace data can be stored in the USB memory device in the memory mode. When a data set is transferred to
the USB memory that contains 99 sets of data, its "MEM001.tr1" file will be overwritten. REC001.tr1 is the only data file stored
in the recorder mode.
• The data sampled in the recorder mode will be corrupted by resetting or turning OFF the inverter during sampling.
• By using FR Configurator2, the trace data of the internal RAM can be directly transmitted to the personal computer via the
USB cable. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.

652 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Selection of sampling time (Pr.1022, Pr.1023)
• The sampling time is determined by the sampling cycle and the number of data acquisition points. The number of data 1
acquisition points differs between the memory mode and the recorder mode.

Memory mode 2
The sampling time varies depending on the setting in Pr.1022 Sampling cycle and Pr.1023 Number of analog channels.
Pr.1023 Memory mode sampling time
Number of data
Number of analog
channels Minimum (Pr.1022 = "0") Maximum (Pr.1022 = "9") acquisition points 3
1 213 ms 1704 s 1704
2 160 ms 1280 s 1280
3 128 ms 1024 s 1024 4
4 106.5 ms 852 s 852
5 91 ms 728 s 728
6
7
80 ms
71 ms
640 s
568 s
640
568
5
8 64 ms 512 s 512

Recorder mode 6
The sampling time varies depending on the setting in Pr.1023 Number of analog channels.
Recorder mode sampling time Number of data
Analog channel number
Minimum (Pr.1022 = "2")*1 Maximum (Pr.1022 = "9") acquisition points 7
Fixed to 8ch (analog source
Approx. 14 hours Approx. 621 days 53687091
selection)

*1 Sampling is performed at a sampling cycle of 1 ms even if "0 or 1" is set to Pr.1022 Sampling cycle.
8

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
653
  Analog source (monitor item) selection
• Select the analog sources (monitor items) to be set to Pr.1027 to Pr.1034 from the following table.
Trigger Trigger
Setting Minus (-) Minus (-)
Monitor item*1 level Setting Monitor item*1 level
value display*2 display*2
criterion*3 criterion*3
*4 Cumulative pulse overflow times *4
1 Output frequency/speed 74 ○
(control terminal option)
2 Output current *4 75 Multi-revolution counter 65535
3 Output voltage *4 87 Remote output value 1 ○ *4

Frequency setting value/motor *4 *4

5 88 Remote output value 2 ○
speed setting
6 Running speed *4 89 Remote output value 3 ○ *4

7 Motor torque *4 90 Remote output value 4 ○ *4

8 Converter output voltage *4 91 PID manipulated amount ○ *4

Second PID set point/deviation

9*5 Regenerative brake duty *4 92
input selection
*4

Electronic thermal O/L relay load *4 *4

10 93 Second PID measured value
factor
11 Output current peak value *4 94 Second PID deviation ○ *4

Converter output voltage peak *4 *4

12 95 Second PID measured value 2
value
13 Input power *4 96 Second PID manipulated amount ○ *4

14 Output power *4 97 Dancer main set speed *4

17 Load meter *4 98 Control circuit temperature ○ *4

18 Motor excitation current *4 201 *Output frequency Pr.84

ND rated
19 Position pulse 65535 202 *U-phase output current ○
current
ND rated
20 Cumulative energization time 65535 203 *V-phase output current ○
current
ND rated
22 Orientation status 65535 204 *W-phase output current ○
current
23 Actual operation time 65535 205 Converter output voltage 400 V/800 V
*4 ND rated
24 Motor load factor 206 *Output current (all three phases)
current
*4 ND rated
32 Torque command 207 *Excitation current (A)
current
*4 ND rated
33 Torque current command 208 *Torque current (A)
current
34 Motor output *4 209 Terminal 2 100%
35 Feedback pulse 65535 210 Terminal 4 100%
Torque monitor (power driving/
36 regenerative driving polarity ○ *4 211 Terminal 1 ○ 100%
switching)
SSCNET III communication
39 65535 212 *Excitation current (%) ○ 100%
status*7
40 PLC function user monitor 1 ○ *4 213 *Torque current (%) ○ 100%
41 PLC function user monitor 2 ○ *4 222 Position command 65535
42 PLC function user monitor 3 ○ *4 223 Position command (upper digits) ○ 65535
46 Motor temperature ○ *4 224 Current position 65535
52 PID set point *4 225 Current position (upper digits) ○ 65535
53 PID measured value *4 226 Droop pulse 65535
54 PID deviation ○ *4 227 Droop pulse (upper digits) ○ 65535
61 Motor thermal load factor *4 230 *Output frequency (signed) ○ Pr.84
62 Inverter thermal load factor *4 231 *Motor speed (with sign) ○ *6

64 PTC thermistor resistance Pr.561 232 *Speed command (with sign) ○ *6

67 PID measured value 2 *4 235 *Torque command ○ 100%

71 Cumulative pulse ○ *4 236 *Motor torque ○ 100%

654 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 Trigger Trigger
Setting Minus (-) Minus (-)
Monitor item*1 level Setting Monitor item*1 level
value display*2
criterion*3
display*2
criterion*3 1
72 Cumulative pulse overflow times ○ *4 237 *Excitation current command ○ 100%
Cumulative pulse (control *4
73 ○ 238 *Torque current command ○ 100%
terminal option)
2
*1 "*" shows a monitor item with a high-speed sampling cycle.
*2 The monitor items with a circle (○) represents that its monitor value can be indicated with minus sign.
*3 Indicates a criterion at 100% when the analog trigger is set.
*4
*5
Refer to the full-scale value of terminal FM/CA, or AM (page 458).
Monitoring is available only for standard models.
3
*6 Rated motor frequency × 120 / number of motor poles
*7 Inverter output voltage is displayed when the FR-A8NS is not installed.

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
655
  Digital source (monitor item) selection
• Select the digital sources (input/output signals) to be set to Pr.1038 to Pr.1045 from the following table. When a value
other than the ones in the following table is set, "0" (OFF) is applied for indication.

Setting Setting
Signal name Remarks Signal name Remarks
value value
0 — 101 RUN
1 STF 102 SU
2 STR 103 IPF
For details on the signals, refer to
3 AU 104 OL
page 473.
4 RT 105 FU
5 RL 106 ABC1
For details on the signals, refer to
6 RM 107 ABC2
page 521.
7 RH 121 DO0
8 JOG 122 DO1
9 MRS 123 DO2 For details on the signals, refer to
10 STP (STOP) 124 DO3 the Instruction Manual of the FR-
11 RES 125 DO4 A8AY (option).
12 CS 126 DO5
21 X0 127 DO6
22 X1 128 RA1 For details on the signals, refer to
23 X2 129 RA2 the Instruction Manual of the FR-
24 X3 130 RA3 A8AR (option).
25 X4
26 X5
27 X6
28 X7 For details on the signals, refer to
29 X8 the Instruction Manual of the FR-
30 X9 A8AX (option).
31 X10
32 X11
33 X12
34 X13
35 X14
36 X15
37 DY

 Trigger setting (Pr.1025, Pr.1035 to Pr.1037, Pr.1046, Pr.1047)

• Set the trigger generating conditions and the trigger target channels.
Pr.1025 Selection of trigger
Trigger generating conditions
setting target channel
0 Tracing starts when inverter enters an fault status (protective function activated) —
1 Tracing starts when analog monitor satisfies trigger conditions Pr.1035
2 Tracing starts when digital monitor satisfies trigger conditions Pr.1046
3 Tracing starts when either of analog or digital monitor satisfies trigger conditions (OR) Pr.1035, Pr.1046
4 Tracing starts when both of analog or digital monitor satisfies trigger conditions (AND) Pr.1035, Pr.1046
• Set the trigger generation conditions for the analog monitor.
Pr.1036
Trigger generation conditions Trigger level setting
setting
Sampling starts when the analog data targeted for the trigger exceeds the value specified
0 Set the trigger level from 600 to
at the trigger level
1400 (-400 to 400%*1) in
Sampling starts when the analog data targeted for the trigger falls below the value specified
1 Pr.1037.
at the trigger level

*1 In Pr.1037, set the number obtained by adding 1,000 to the trigger level.

656 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
 • Set the trigger generation conditions for the digital monitor.
Pr.1047
setting
Trigger generation conditions 1
0 Tracing starts when the digital data targeted for the trigger turns ON
1 Tracing starts when the digital data targeted for the trigger turns OFF
2
 Start of sampling and copying of data (Pr.1020, Pr.1024)
• Set the trace operation. The trace operation is set by one of two ways, by setting Pr.1020 Trace operation selection and
by setting in the trace mode on the operation panel. 3
• When "1" is set in Pr.1020, sampling starts.
• When "2" is set in Pr.1020, it is regarded that a trigger occurs (forced trigger), and the sampling stops and the tracing starts.
• When "3" is set in Pr.1020, sampling stops.
4
• When "4" is set in Pr.1020, the trace data in internal RAM is transferred to USB memory device. (Trace data cannot be
transferred during sampling.)
• To start sampling automatically when the power supply at power-ON or at a recovery after an inverter reset, set "1" in
5
Pr.1024 Sampling auto start.
Pr.1020 setting Trace mode Operation

0 Sampling standby 6
1 Sampling start

2 Forced trigger (sampling stop) 7

3 Sampling stop

4 Data transmission
8
• The read value of Pr.1020 is always "0".
• Trace operation can also be set in the trace mode on the operation panel.

Monitor mode No function Sampling stop

9

10

Parameter setting mode Sampling start Data transmission

Function mode Trace method Forced trigger (Sampling stop)

 Selection of trace operation by input terminal (TRG signal, TRC signal)

• Trace operation can be selected by signal inputs.
• A forced trigger can be applied when the Trace trigger input (TRG) signal is ON.
• Sampling is started and stopped by the Trace sampling start/end (TRC) signal turning ON and OFF, respectively.
• To input the TRG signal, set "46" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), and to input the TRC
signal, set "47" to assign the function to a terminal.

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
657
  Monitoring the trace status
• The trace status can be monitored on the operation panel by setting "38" in Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor
selection, Pr.774 to Pr.776 (Operation panel monitor selection), or Pr.992 Operation panel setting dial push
monitor selection.
The content depends on the digits on the operation panel.

1000s place 1s place

Indicates internal RAM state. Indicates trace operation.
100s place 10s place
Indicates USB memory access state. Indicates trigger state.

Trace status
Monitor value
Fourth digit Third digit Second digit First digit
0 or no display*1 No trace data in internal RAM USB memory not accessed Trigger not detected Tracing stopped
USB memory being
1 Trace data in internal RAM Trigger detected Trace operation
accessed
2 — USB memory transfer error — —
3 — USB buffer overrun — —
*1 The value(s) "0" to the left of the leftmost non-zero value is(are) not shown in the monitor display. For example, if no trace data is in internal RAM,
the USB memory is not accessed, no trigger is detected, and the trace operation is performed, "1" appears. (not "0001")

• When copying the traced data to a USB memory device, the operating status of the USB host can be checked with the
inverter LED.
Refer to page 85 for an outline of the USB communication function.
LED display status Operating status
OFF No USB connection.
ON The communication is established between the inverter and the USB device.
Traced data is being transmitted. (In the memory mode, transmission command is being issued. In the recorder mode,
Blinking rapidly
sampling is being performed.)
Blinking slowly Error in the USB connection.
• During trace operation, the Trace status (Y40) signal can be output.
To use the Y40 signal, set "40 (positive logic) or 140 (negative logic)" in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign function to an output terminal.

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 446
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473

658 5. PARAMETERS
5.14 (A) Application parameters
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters 1

Refer 2
Purpose Parameter to set to
page
Pr.549, Pr.342,
To start operation via
communication
Initial setting of operation via
communication
P.N000, P.N001,
P.N010 to P.N014
Pr.349, Pr.500 to 663 3
Pr.502, Pr.779
Initial setting of computer link
To communicate via PU connector P.N020 to P.N028 Pr.117 to Pr.124
communication (PU connector)
Initial setting of computer link
P.N030 to P.N038
Pr.331 to Pr.337,
670
4
communication (RS-485 terminals) Pr.341
To communicate via RS-485
terminals P.N002, P.N030, Pr.539, Pr.331,
MODBUS RTU communication specification P.N031, P.N034, Pr.332, Pr.334, 686
P.N080 Pr.343 5
To communicate via the CC-Link IE P.N100 to P.N110, Pr.434 to Pr.435,
CC-Link IE Field Network 699
Field Network (FR-A800-GF) P.N111 Pr.541
To Communicate using USB (FR
Configurator2)
USB communication P.N040, P.N041 Pr.547, Pr.548 701 6
To connect a GOT GOT automatic recognition P.N020, P.N030 Pr.117, Pr.331 701
To back up the data of parameter
settings and PLC function to the
GOT
Backup/restore P.N110, P.N111 Pr.434, Pr.435 702
7

5.15.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector 8

Using the PU connector as a computer network port enables communication operation from a personal computer, etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA, or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can
run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
9
 PU connector pin-outs
Inverter
(Receptacle side) 10
Front view

8 to 1

Pin number Name Description

1 SG Earth (ground) (connected to terminal 5)
2 — Operation panel power supply
3 RDA Inverter receive+
4 SDB Inverter send-
5 SDA Inverter send+
6 RDB Inverter receive-
7 SG Earth (ground) (connected to terminal 5)
8 — Operation panel power supply

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
659
 NOTE
• Pins No. 2 and 8 provide power to the operation panel or parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.
• Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket, or telephone modular connector. The
product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.

 Wiring and configuration of PU connector communication system

• System configuration

Station 0 Computer Station 0

Inverter Computer Inverter
Inverter RS-232C
FR-DU08 PU connector
Operation PU
RS-485 PU RS-232C
panel connector Maximum connector
interface/ connector cable 15 m
connector
FR-ADP terminals RS-232C-RS-485
(option) converter
RJ-45 connector
RJ-45 RJ-45
RJ-45 connector
Communication cable connector connector
Communication cable Communication cable

• Wiring between a computer and an inverter for RS-485 communication

Inverter
Computer Side Terminals Cable connection and signal direction
PU connector
Signal name Description
Communication cable
RDA Receive data SDA
RDB Receive data SDB
SDA Send data RDA
SDB Send data RDB
RSA Request to send
RSB Request to send
∗1
CSA Clear to send
CSB Clear to send
0.2 mm2 or more
SG Signal ground SG
FG Frame ground

*1 Make connection in accordance with the Instruction Manual of the computer to be used with. Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer
since they vary with the model.

NOTE
• When performing RS-485 communication with multiple inverters, use the RS-485 terminals. (Refer to page 662.)
• Computer-inverter connection cable
Refer to the following for the connection cable (RS-232C to RS-485 converter) between the computer with an RS-232C
interface and an inverter. Commercially available products (as of October 2020)

Model Manufacturer
Interface embedded cable
DAFXIH-CAB (D-SUB25P for personal computer)
DAFXIH-CABV (D-SUB9P for personal computer)
+ Diatrend Corp.
Connector conversion cable DINV-485CAB (for inverter)*2
Interface embedded cable dedicated for inverter
DINV-CABV*2
*2 The conversion cable cannot connect multiple inverters. (The computer and inverter are connected in a 1:1 pair.) This is an RS232C-to-
RS485 converter-embedded conversion cable. No additional cable or connector is required. For the product details, contact the
manufacturer.
• Use Ethernet cables compliant with the following standards when fabricating the cable.

Ethernet cable Connector Type

Category 5e or higher straight cable The following conditioning cables:

RJ-45 connector • IEEE 802.3 (1000BASE-T)
(double shielded / STP)*3 • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5e)

660 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 *3 Do not use pins No. 2 and 8 of the communication cable.

1
5.15.2 Wiring and configuration of RS-485 terminals
 RS-485 terminal layout 2
Terminating resistor switch
Initially-set to "OPEN".
Set only the terminating resistor switch of
the remotest inverter to the "100Ω" position.
3
P5S SG SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1
(VCC) (GND) (TXD1+) (TXD1-) (RXD1+) (RXD1-)
4
OPEN VCC GND + TXD - + RXD -

6
VCC GND + TXD - + RXD -
100Ω
P5S SG SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2
(VCC) (GND) (TXD2+) (TXD2-) (RXD2+) (RXD2-)

7
Name Description
RDA1 (RXD1+) Inverter receive+ 8
RDB1 (RXD1-) Inverter receive-
RDA2 (RXD2+) Inverter receive + (for branch)
RDB2 (RXD2-) Inverter receive - (for branch)
SDA1 (TXD1+) Inverter send+ 9
SDB1 (TXD1-) Inverter send-
SDA2 (TXD2+) Inverter send + (for branch)
SDB2 (TXD2-) Inverter send - (for branch) 10
P5S (VCC) 5 V (permissible load current 100 mA)
SG (GND) Earthing (grounding) (connected to terminal SD)

 Connection of RS-485 terminals and wires

• The size of RS-485 terminal block is the same as that of the control circuit terminal block. Refer to page 74 for the wiring
method.

NOTE
• To avoid malfunction, keep the RS-485 terminal wires away from the control circuit board.
• When the FR-A820-01250(22K) or lower, or the FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower is used with a plug-in option, lead the wires
through the hole on the side face of the front cover for wiring of the RS-485 terminals.

Cut off with

a nipper, etc.

• When the FR-A820-01540(30K) of higher, or the FR-A840-00770(30K) or higher is used with a plug-in option, lead the wires
on the left side of the plug-in option for wiring of the RS-485 terminals.

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
661
  System configuration of RS-485 terminals
• Computer and inverter connection (1:1)

Computer Computer
Inverter Inverter
RS-485 RS-485
RS-485 terminals Maximum terminals
interface/ ∗ RS-232C 15 m ∗
terminals cable
Converter

Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable

∗Set the terminating resistor switch to the "100Ω" position.

• Combination of a computer and multiple inverters (1:n)

Computer Station 0 Station 1 Station n

Inverter Inverter Inverter
RS-485 RS-485 RS-485
RS-485 terminals terminals terminals
interface terminals
∗ ∗ ∗

∗Set only the terminating resistor switch of the

Twisted pair cable remotest inverter to the "100Ω" position.

Computer Station 0 Station 1 Station n

RS-232C Inverter Inverter Inverter
converter
RS-485 RS-485 RS-485
Maximum terminals terminals terminals
RS-232C
15m ∗ ∗ ∗
cable
Converter

∗Set only the terminating resistor switch of the

Twisted pair cable remotest inverter to the "100Ω" position.

 RS-485 terminal wiring method

• Wiring between a computer and an inverter for RS-485 communications

Computer
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
∗2
+
+
-

RSB
∗1
CSA
SDB1
SDA1
RDB1
RDA1

CSB
SG SG
FG

662 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 • Wiring between a computer and multiple inverters for RS-485 communication

Computer
1
RDA
RDB
SDA 2
SDB
RSA
∗2
3

+
+

+
+

+
+
+

+
-
-
-

-
-
-

-
RSB
∗1
CSA

SDB1
SDA1
SDB2
SDA2
RDB1
RDA1
RDB2
RDA2
SDB1
SDA1
SDB2
SDA2
RDB1
RDA1
RDB2
RDA2

SDB1
SDA1
RDB1
RDA1
CSB
SG
FG
SG
Station 0
SG SG
Station 1
SG SG
Station n 4
*1 Make connection in accordance with the Instruction Manual of the computer to be used with.
Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since they vary with the model.
*2 On the inverter most remotely connected with the computer, set the terminating resistor switch in the ON (100 Ω) position. 5
NOTE
• To connect the terminals in series, refer to the following.

VCC TXD RXD VCC TXD RXD

6
To computer ground
To computer receive 7
To computer send To receiving terminal
of the next inverter
To sending terminal
of the next inverter 8
To next inverter
To earth (ground)
terminal

• To connect multiple inverters using RS-485 distributors, refer to the following.

9
Commercially available products (as of October 2020)

Product name Model

BMJ-8-28N (Pins No. 2 and No. 8 are not connected internally.)
Manufacturer
10
HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
(A plug with a terminating resistor is not used.)
RS-485
DMDH-3PN (Pins No. 2 and No. 8 are not connected internally.)
distributor
DMDH-10PN (Pins No. 2 and No. 8 are not connected Diatrend Corp.
internally.)

 Two-wire type connection

• If the computer is 2-wire type, a connection from the inverter can be changed to 2-wire type by passing wires across
reception terminals and transmission terminals of the RS-485 terminals.

Computer Inverter
TXD+
Transmission TXD-
enable RXD+

Reception RXD-
Pass a wire
enable SG SG

NOTE
• A program should be created so that transmission is disabled (receiving state) when the computer is not sending and reception
is disabled (sending state) during sending to prevent the computer from receiving its own data.

5.15.3 Initial setting of operation via communication

Set the action when the inverter is performing operation via communication.

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
663
 • Set the RS-485 communication protocol. (Mitsubishi inverter protocol / MODBUS RTU protocol)
• Set the action at fault occurrence or at writing of parameters.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

549 0 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link)
Protocol selection 0
N000 1 MODBUS RTU protocol
Communication Parameter values written by communication are written to the EEPROM
342 0
EEPROM write 0 and RAM.
N001
selection 1 Parameter values written by communication are written to the RAM.
0 Enables the error reset function in any operation mode.
1 Enables the error reset function only in the Network operation mode.
100, 101 For details, refer to page 895 and page 897.
Communication reset 1000, 1001,
349*1 selection/Ready bit 0 1100, 1101,
status selection 10000, 10001,
For details, refer to page 893.
10100, 10101,
11000, 11001,
11100, 11101
Communication reset 0 Enables the error reset function in any operation mode.
N010*1 selection 0
1 Enables the error reset function only in the Network operation mode.
Ready bit status 0 The status of Ready bit in communication data can be changed when an
N240*1 selection 0
HMS network option is installed.
1
500 Set the time from when the communication line error occurs until the
Communication error
0 0 to 999.8 s inverter starts the operation for the communication error (when a
N011*1 execution waiting time
communication option is used).
501 Communication error
Displays the communication error occurrence count (when a
occurrence count 0 0
N012*1 display
communication option is used).

502 Stop mode selection at

0 0 to 4, 11, 12 Select the operation at a communication error occurrence.
N013 communication error
Operation frequency 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency for the operation when a communication error occurs.
779
during communication 9999 Operation continues at the same frequency before the communication
N014 9999
error error.
*1 The setting is available only when a communication option is installed.
*2 If in communication by the communication option, "E.OP1" is displayed.

 Setting the communication protocol (Pr.549)

• Select the RS-485 communication protocol.
• The MODBUS RTU protocol can be used by communication from the RS-485 terminals.
Pr.549 setting Communication protocol
0 (initial value) Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link)
1 MODBUS RTU protocol

 Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr.342)

• When parameter write is performed via the inverter PU connector, RS-485 terminal, USB communication, or a
communication option, the parameters storage device can be changed to "RAM only" from "EEPROM and RAM". Use this
function if parameter settings are changed frequently.
• When changing the parameter values frequently, set "1" in Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection to write
them to the RAM only. The life of the EEPROM will be shorter if parameter write is performed frequently with the setting
unchanged from "0 (initial value)" (EEPROM write).

NOTE
• Turning OFF the inverter's power supply clears the modified parameter settings when Pr.342 = "1 (write only to RAM)".
Therefore, the parameter values at next power-ON are the values last stored in EEPROM.
• The parameter setting written in RAM cannot be checked on the operation panel. (The values displayed on the operation panel
are the ones stored in EEPROM.)

 Operation selection at a communication error (Pr.502, Pr.779)

• For communication using RS-485 terminals or a communication option, operation at a communication error can be
selected. The operation is active under the Network operation mode.

664 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 • Select the stop operation at the retry count excess (Pr.335, enabled only when the Mitsubishi inverter protocol is selected)
or at a signal loss detection (Pr.336, Pr.539).
1
At fault occurrence At fault removal
Pr.502
Fault type Fault (ALM) Fault (ALM)
setting Operation Indication Operation Indication
signal signal 2
0 (initial Output stop
value)
Output shutoff E. SER*1 ON
status E. SER*1 ON
1, 11 Output to "E.SER" ON after stop continues.

Communication 2, 12
decelerate and indication after
OFF Restart*3 Normal OFF
3
stop the motor. stop*1
line
3 Operation Normal
continues at
4 the frequency "CF" warning
OFF Normal Normal OFF 4
*2
set in Pr.779.
0, 3 Output shutoff "E. 1" ON
Output stop

Communication
1, 2, 11,
Output to
decelerate and "E. 1" after stop ON after stop
status "E. 1" ON 5
12 continues.
option (when a stop the motor.
communication Operation Operation
option is used)
4
continues at
the frequency "CF" warning OFF
continues at
the frequency
"CF" warning OFF 6
*2 set in Pr.779.
set in Pr.779.
*1 If in communication by the communication option, "E.OP1" is displayed.
*2
*3
Under position control, the operation is continued to the target position.
When the communication error is removed during deceleration, the motor re-accelerates. Under position control, the motor does not re-accelerate
7
even when the communication error is removed during deceleration.

• The motor is decelerated to a stop according to the setting of Pr.111 Third deceleration time when an error occurs while
8
Pr.502 = "11 or 12".
Pr.502 setting Operation to a stop at a communication error occurrence
0
1 to 4
Output shutoff
Deceleration stop according to the selected deceleration time (selectable using the RT or X9 signal)
9
11, 12 Deceleration stop according to the setting of Pr.111

• When a communication error is detected while communication with the RS-485 terminals is performed, the Alarm (LF) 10
signal is output to an output terminal of the inverter. To use the LF signal, set "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)"
in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal. (To output
the LF signal even if communication through RS-485 terminals is not performed for the time set in Pr.336 or longer, or
during communication using a communication option, set "3 or 4" in Pr.502.)

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
665
 • The following charts show operations when a communication line error occurs.

Pr.502 = "0" (initial value) Pr.502 = "1"

Fault occurrence Fault removal Fault occurrence Fault removal

Communication OFF ON OFF Communication OFF ON OFF

fault fault
Motor coasting Decelerates
Output frequency

Output frequency
to stop

Time Time
Fault display Display Fault display Display
(E.SER/E.OP1) (E.SER/E.OP1)
Fault output OFF ON Fault output OFF ON
(ALM) (ALM)
Alarm output OFF ON OFF Alarm output OFF ON OFF
(LF) (LF)

Pr.502 = "2" Pr.502 = "3"

Fault occurrence Fault removal Fault recognition Fault removal

Communication OFF ON OFF Communication OFF ON OFF

fault fault
Pr.779 = “9999”
Decelerates
Output frequency

to stop
Output frequency

Pr.779 ≠“9999”
(Runs at the frequency setting of Pr.779)

Time Time
Fault display Display Fault display Not displayed
(E.SER/E.OP1)
Fault output OFF Fault output OFF
(ALM) (ALM)
Alarm output OFF ON OFF Alarm output OFF ON OFF
(LF) (LF)

Pr.502 = "4"
Fault recognition Fault removal

Communication OFF ON OFF

fault
Pr.779 = “9999”
Output frequency

Pr.779
Pr.779 ≠“9999”
(Runs at the frequency setting of Pr.779)

Time
Warning display Display
(CF)
Fault output OFF
(ALM)
Alarm output OFF ON OFF
(LF)

666 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 • The following charts show operations when a communication option fault occurs.

Pr.502 = "0 (initial value) or 3" Pr.502 = "1 or 2" 1

Fault occurrence Fault removal Fault occurrence Fault removal

Fault OFF ON OFF Fault OFF ON OFF

Motor coasting
2
Output frequency

Output frequency
Decelerates to stop

Time Fault display Time

Fault display
(E.1) Display (E.1) Display 4
Fault output Fault output
(ALM) OFF ON (ALM) OFF ON
Alarm output Alarm output
(LF) OFF (LF) OFF
5
Pr.502 = "4" Fault occurrence Fault removal

Fault OFF ON OFF 6

Pr.779 = “9999”
Output frequency

7
Pr.779
Pr.779 ≠“9999”
(Runs at the frequency setting of Pr.779)

Time
8
Warning display
(CF) Display
Fault output
(ALM) OFF
9
Alarm output
(LF) OFF ON

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
667
 NOTE
• When a communication option is used, the protective function [E.OP1 (fault data: HA1)] is activated at error occurrences on
the communication line. The protective function [E.1 (fault data: HF1)] is activated at error occurrences in the communication
circuit inside the option.
• Fault output indicates the Fault (ALM) signal and an alarm bit output.
• When the fault output is set enabled, fault records are stored in the fault history. (A fault record is written to the fault history at
a fault output.)
• When the fault output is not enabled, a fault record is overwritten to the fault history temporarily but not stored.
• After the fault is removed, the fault indication goes back to normal indication on the monitor, and the fault history goes back to
the previous status.
• When Pr.502 ≠ "0", the normal deceleration time setting (settings like Pr.8, Pr.44, and Pr.45) is applied as the deceleration
time. Normal acceleration time setting (settings like Pr.7 and Pr.44) is applied as the acceleration time for restart.
• When Pr.502 = "2, 3, or 4", the inverter operates with the start command and the speed command, which were used before
the fault.
• If a communication line error occurs, then the error is removed during deceleration while Pr.502 = "2", the motor re-accelerates
from that point. (When a communication option is used, acceleration does not restart at a communication option error.)
• The Pr.502 and Pr.779 settings are valid when communication is performed via the RS-485 terminals or a communication
option.
• These parameters are valid under the Network operation mode. When performing communication through RS-485 terminals,
set Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection ≠ "1".
• Pr.502 is valid for the device that has the command source under the Network operation mode. If a communication option is
installed while Pr.550 = "9999 (initial setting)", a communication error in RS-485 terminals occurs and Pr.502 becomes invalid.
• If the communication error setting is disabled with Pr.335 = "9999" or Pr.539 = "9999" while Pr.502 = "3 or 4", the inverter does
not operate with the frequency set in Pr.779 when a communication error occurs.
• If a communication error occurs while continuous operation at Pr.779 is selected with Pr.502 = "3 or 4", the inverter operates
at the frequency set in Pr.779 even though the speed command source is at the external terminals.
Example) If a communication error occurs while Pr.339 = "2" and the RL signal is input through an external terminal, the
operation is continued at the frequency set in Pr.779.
• During position control, an error occurs even if "2" is set in Pr.502.

CAUTION
• When Pr.502 = "3" and a communication line error occurs, or Pr.502 = "4" and a communication line error or a
communication option fault occurs, the operation continues. When setting "3 or 4" in Pr.502, provide a safety stop
countermeasure other than via communication. For example, input a signal through an external terminal (RES, MRS, or
X92) or press the PU stop on the operation panel.

 Waiting time setting from the communication line error occurrence to the
communication error activation (Pr.500)
• When a communication option is used, use Pr.500 Communication error execution waiting time to set the time from
when the communication line error occurs until the inverter starts the operation for the communication error.
• When a communication line error occurs and lasts longer than the time set in Pr.500, it is recognized as a communication
error. If the communication returns to normal within the time, it is not recognized as a communication error, and the
operation continues.

Normal Error Normal Error

Communication line status

Communication error Recognition

(E.OP1)
Pr.500 Pr.500
setting time setting time
ON
Alarm signal(LF)
(Pr.502 = 3)

668 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 • Operation from the error occurrence until the Pr.500 setting time elapses

Fault type
Pr.502
setting
Operation Indication Fault output 1
0
1
Communication line 2
Operation
continues.*1
Normal*1 Not provided.*1 2
3
4
0, 3 Output shutoff
Output to decelerate
"E. 1" Output
3
Communication option 1, 2 "E. 1" after stop Output after stop
and stop the motor.
4 Operation continues. "CF" warning Not output

*1 When the communication returns to normal within the time period set in Pr.500, the protective function (E.OP1) is not activated.
4
 Displaying and clearing the communication error count (Pr.501)
• When a communication option is used, the cumulative count of communication error occurrences can be displayed. Write 5
"0" to clear this cumulative count.
• When a communication line error occurs, the setting of Pr.501 Communication error occurrence count display
increases by one. 6
• The cumulative count of communication error occurrences is counted from 0 to 65535. When the count exceeds 65535,
the displayed value is cleared and the counting starts over from 0 again.

Count timing depending on Normal Error Normal Error 7

communication line status
Incremented by 1 Incremented by 1

NOTE 8
• Communication error count is temporarily stored in the RAM memory. The error count is stored in EEPROM only once per
hour. If power reset or inverter reset is performed, Pr.501 setting will be the one that is last stored to EEPROM depending on
the reset timing.
9
 Error reset operation selection at inverter fault (Pr.349)
• An error reset command from a communication option can be invalidated in the External operation mode or the PU 10
operation mode.
Pr.349 setting Description
0 (initial value) Error reset is enabled independently of operation mode.
1 Error reset is enabled in the Network operation mode.
100, 101 For details, refer to page 895 and page 897.
1000, 1001, 1100, 1101, 10000,
10001, 10100, 10101, 11000, For details, refer to page 895.
11001, 11100, 11101

 Operation mode switching and communication startup mode (Pr.79,

Pr.340)
• Check the following before switching the operation mode.
The inverter is at a stop.
Both the STF and STR signals are off.
The Pr.79 Operation mode selection setting is correct. (Check the setting on the operation panel of the inverter.) (Refer
to page 389.)
• The operation mode at power ON and at restoration from instantaneous power failure can be selected. Set a value other
than "0" in Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection to select the Network operation mode. (Refer to page 398.)
• After the inverter starts up in the Network operation mode, parameter write can be commanded via the network.

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
669
 NOTE
• The changed value in Pr.340 is applied after the next power-ON or inverter reset.
• The Pr.340 setting can be changed on the operation panel in any operation mode.
• When setting a value other than "0" in Pr.340, make sure that the communication settings of the inverter are correct.

Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time, Pr.111 Third deceleration timepage 367
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 389
Pr.340 Communication startup mode selectionpage 398
Pr.335 RS-485 communication retry countpage 670
Pr.336 RS-485 communication check time intervalpage 670
Pr.539 MODBUS RTU communication check time intervalpage 686
Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selectionpage 400
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selectionpage 400

5.15.4 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485

communication
Use the following parameters to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the inverter and a personal
computer.
• Use the PU connector on the inverter or RS-485 terminals as communication interface.
• Parameter setting, monitoring, etc. can be performed using Mitsubishi inverter protocol or MODBUS RTU communication
protocol.
• To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, setting of the communication specifications must
be made to the inverter in advance. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if there is
any setting error.

670 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 Parameters related to PU connector communication
Pr. Name Initial value
Setting
Description
1
range
Use this parameter to specify the inverter station number.
117 PU communication
0 0 to 31 Enter the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are
N020 station number
connected to one personal computer. 2
48, 96, 192, Select the communication speed.
118 PU communication
192 384, 576, The setting value × 100 equals the communication speed.
N021 speed
768, 1152 For example, enter 192 to set the communication speed of 19200 bps.
PU communication 0 Data length 8 bits 3
N022 0
data length 1 Data length 7 bits
PU communication 0 Stop bit length 1 bit
N023 1
stop bit length 1 Stop bit length 2 bits 4
0 Stop bit length 1 bit
PU communication Data length 8 bits
1 Stop bit length 2 bits
119 stop bit length / data 1
10 Stop bit length 1 bit
length
11 Stop bit length 2 bits
Data length 7 bits 5
0 Parity check disabled.
120 PU communication
2 1 Parity check (odd parity) enabled.
N024 parity check
2 Parity check (even parity) enabled.
Set the permissible number of retries for unsuccessful data reception.
6
0 to 10 If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value, the
121 PU communication
1 inverter output will be stopped.
N025 retry count
9999
The inverter output will not be shut off even when a communication
error occurs.
7
0 PU connector communication is disabled.
Set the interval of the communication check (Signal loss detection)
122 PU communication
9999 0.1 to 999.8 s
time. 8
N026 check time interval If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible
time, the inverter output will be shut off.
9999 No communication check (Signal loss detection)

0 to 150 ms
Set the time delay between data transmission to the converter and the 9
123 PU communication response.
9999
N027 waiting time setting The time delay is not set in this parameter but in communication data.
9999
Delay time: Number set in the data × 10 ms
0 Without CR/LF 10
124 PU communication CR/
1 1 With CR
N028 LF selection
2 With CR/LF

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
671
  Parameters related to RS-485 terminal communication
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
331 RS-485 communication 0 to 31 (0 to Enter the station number of the inverter.
0
N030 station number 247)*1*2 (Same specifications as Pr.117)
3, 6, 12, 24,
332 RS-485 communication 48, 96, 192, Select the communication speed.
96
N031 speed 384, 576, (Same specifications as Pr.118)
768, 1152
RS-485 communication
N032
data length
0 0, 1 Select the data length. (Same specifications as P.N022)*3

RS-485 communication
N033
stop bit length
1 0, 1 Select the stop bit length. (Same specifications as P.N023)*4
RS-485 communication Select the stop bit length and data bit length. (Same specifications as
333 stop bit length / data 1 0, 1, 10, 11
length Pr.119)*3*4
334 RS-485 communication Select the parity check specifications.
2 0, 1, 2
N034 parity check selection (Same specifications as Pr.120)
335 RS-485 communication 0 to 10, Set the permissible number of retries for unsuccessful data reception.
1
N035*5 retry count 9999 (Same specifications as Pr.121)
RS-485 communication is available, but the inverter trips in the NET
0
operation mode.
336 RS-485 communication
0s 0.1 to 999.8 Set the interval of the communication check (Signal loss detection) time.
N036*5 check time interval
s (Same specifications as Pr.122)
9999 No communication check (Signal loss detection)
337 RS-485 communication 0 to 150 ms, Set the waiting time between data transmission to the inverter and the
9999
N037*5 waiting time setting 9999 response. (Same specifications as Pr.123)
341 RS-485 communication Select the presence/absence of CR/LF.
1 0, 1, 2
N038*5 CR/LF selection (Same specifications as Pr.124)
*1 When "1" (MODBUS RTU protocol) is set in Pr.549, the setting range within parentheses is applied.
*2 When a value outside the setting range is set, the inverter operates at the initial value.
*3 In the MODBUS RTU protocol, the data length is fixed at 8 bits.
*4 In the MODBUS RTU protocol, Pr.334 setting is applied as the stop bit length. (Refer to page 686.)
*5 In the MODBUS RTU protocol, this is invalid.

NOTE
• The monitor items and parameter settings can be read during communication with the Pr.336 RS-485 communication check
time interval = "0 (initial value)" setting, but such operation will become faulty once the operation mode is changed to the NET
operation mode. When the NET operation mode is selected as the start-up operation mode, communication is performed once,
then a Communication fault (inverter) (E.SER) occurs. To perform operation or parameter writing via communication, set
"9999" or a large setting value in Pr.336. (The setting value is determined by the computer program.) (Refer to page 678.)
• Always reset the inverter after making the initial settings of the parameters. After changing the communication-related
parameters, communication cannot be made until the inverter is reset.

5.15.5 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link

communication)
Parameter setting and monitoring, etc. are possible by using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) via
inverter PU connector and the RS-485 terminals.

672 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 Communication specifications
• The communication specifications are shown in the following table. 1
Related
Item Description
parameter
Communication protocol
Conforming standard
Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
EIA-485 (RS-485)
Pr.551
—
2
Pr.117
Number of connectable units 1: N (maximum 32 units), the setting range of station number is 0 to 31.
Pr.331

Communication
PU connector Selected among 4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/76800/115200 bps. Pr.118 3
Selected among 300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/76800/
speed RS-485 terminals Pr.332
115200 bps.
Control procedure Asynchronous method —
Communication method Half-duplex system — 4
Pr.119
Character system ASCII (7 bits or 8 bits can be selected.)
Pr.333
Start bit 1 bit —
Pr.119
5
Stop bit length 1 bit or 2 bits can be selected.
Communication Pr.333
specifications Pr.120
Parity check Check (at even or odd numbers) or no check can be selected.

Error check Sum code check

Pr.334
—
6
Pr.124
Terminator CR/LF (whether or not to use it can be selected)
Pr.341

Time delay setting Availability of the setting is selectable.

Pr.123 7
Pr.337

 Communication procedure
• Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in the following procedure.
8
(a) Request data is sent from the computer to the inverter. (The inverter will not send data unless requested.)
(b) Communication waiting time
(c) The inverter sends reply data to the computer in response to the computer request. 9
(d) Inverter data processing time
(e) An answer from the computer in response to reply data (c) of the inverter is transmitted. (Even if (e) is not sent, subsequent
communication is made properly.)
10
When data is read
Computer
↓ (Data flow)
∗2
Inverter a d e
Time
Inverter b c
∗1
↓ (Data flow)
When data is written
Computer
*1 If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, perform retry operation with the user program. The inverter output is shut off if the number
of consecutive retries exceeds the parameter setting.
*2 On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns reply data (c) to the computer again. The inverter output is shut off if the number of
consecutive data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.

 Communication operation presence/absence and data format types

• Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in ASCII code (hexadecimal code).

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
673
 • Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows.
Operation Operation Multi Parameter Inverter Parameter
Symbol Operation Monitor
command frequency command write reset read
Communication request is sent to the
a inverter in accordance with the user A, A1 A A2 A A B B
program in the computer.
b Inverter data processing time With With With With Without With With
No error*1 E, E1,
(Request C C C1*3 C C*2 E2, E3
E
Reply data from the
accepted)
c inverter (Data (a) is
checked for an error.) With error
(Request D D D D D*2 D D
rejected)
d Computer processing delay time 10 ms or more
*1
No error Without Without
(No inverter Without Without Without Without Without (C)
Reply from computer in (C) (C)
processing)
response to reply data c
e With error
(Data c is checked for
error.) (Inverter
Without Without F Without Without F F
outputs c
again.)
*1 In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter, the time of 10 ms or more is also required after an acknowledgment (ACK)
signal showing "No data error detected" is sent. (Refer to page 677.)
*2 Reply from the inverter to the inverter reset request can be selected. (Refer to page 681.)
*3 At mode error, and data range error, C1 data contains an error code. (Refer to page 686.) Except for those errors, the error is returned with data
format D.
• Data writing format
a. Communication request data from the computer to the inverter
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Inverter
ENQ Instruction
A *1
station *3 Data Sum check *4
code
number*2
Inverter
ENQ Instruction
A1 *1
station *3 Data Sum check *4
code
number*2
Inverter Send Receive
ENQ Instruction
A2 *1
station *3 data data Data 1 Data 2 Sum check *4
code
number*2 type type

c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (No data error detected)
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Inverter
ACK
C *1
station *4

number *2

* Inverter Send Receive

STX station Error Error ETX* Sum *4
C1 data data Data 1 Data 2
1 code 1 code 2 1 check
number *2 type type

c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (Data error detected)
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5
D NAK*1 Inverter station number *2 Error code *4

*1 A control code.
*2 The inverter station number is specified in hexadecimal in the range of H00 to H1F (stations No. 0 to 31).
*3 Set the delay time. When Pr.123 PU communication waiting time setting or Pr.337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting is set to
other than "9999", create the communication request data without "delay time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
*4 CR+LF code: When a computer transmits data to the inverter, some computers automatically provide either one or both of the codes CR (carriage
return) and LF (line feed) at the end of a data group. In this case, the same setting is required for data sent from the inverter to the computer. Use
Pr.124 or Pr.341 for the CR+LF code setting.
• Data reading format

674 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 a. Communication request data from the computer to the inverter

Format
Number of characters 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inverter station
B ENQ*1 Instruction code *3 Sum check *4
number *2
2
c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (No data error detected)
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 3
Inverter station
E STX*1 Read data ETX *1 Sum check *4
number *2
Inverter station
E1 STX*1
number *2
Read data ETX*1 Sum check *4
4
Inverter station
E2 STX*1 Read data ETX*1 Sum check *4
number *2

Number of characters 5
Format
1 2 3 4 to 23 24 25 26 27
Inverter station
E3 STX*1 Read data (Inverter model information) ETX*1 Sum check *4
number*2 6
c. Reply data from the inverter to the computer (Data error detected)
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5
7
Inverter station Error
D NAK*1 *4
number *2 code

e. Transmission data from the computer to the inverter when reading data
8
Number of characters
Format

C (No data error

1 2 3
Inverter station
4
9
ACK*1 *4
detected) number *2
F (Data error Inverter station
NAK*1
10
*4
detected) number *2

*1 A control code.
*2 The inverter station number is specified in hexadecimal in the range of H00 to H1F (stations No. 0 to 31).
*3 Set the delay time. When Pr.123 PU communication waiting time setting or Pr.337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting is set to
other than "9999", create the communication request data without "delay time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
*4 CR+LF code: When a computer transmits data to the inverter, some computers automatically provide either one or both of the codes CR (carriage
return) and LF (line feed) at the end of a data group. In this case, the same setting is required for data sent from the inverter to the computer. Use
Pr.124 or Pr.341 for the CR+LF code setting.

 Data definitions
• Control code
Signal name ASCII code Description
STX H02 Start Of Text (Start of data)
ETX H03 End Of Text (End of data)
ENQ H05 Enquiry (Communication request)
ACK H06 Acknowledge (No data error detected)
LF H0A Line Feed
CR H0D Carriage Return
NAK H15 Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)

• Inverter station number

Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.
• Instruction code
Specify the processing request, for example, operation or monitoring, given by the computer to the inverter. Therefore, the
operation or monitoring an item is enabled by specifying the corresponding instruction code. (Refer to page 681.)
• Data

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
675
 Read/write data such as parameters transmitted from/to the inverter. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined
in accordance with the instruction codes. (Refer to page 681.)
• Time delay
Specify the delay time (time period between the time when the inverter receives data from the computer and the time when
the inverter starts transmission of reply data). Set the delay time in accordance with the response time of the computer in
the range of 0 to 150 ms in 10 ms increments. (For example, "1" for 10 ms or "2" for 20 ms.)
When Pr.123 PU communication waiting time setting or Pr.337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting is set
to other than "9999", create the communication request data without "delay time" in the data format. (The number of
characters decreases by 1.)

Computer Inverter data processing time

= Waiting time*1 + data check time*2
Inverter

Inverter

Computer
*1 Number set in data × 10 (ms) when Pr.123 = "9999". Pr.123 setting (ms) when Pr.123 ≠ "9999".
*2 About 10 to 30 ms. It varies depending on the instruction code.

NOTE
• The data check time varies depending on the instruction code. (Refer to page 677.)

• Sum check code

The sum check code is a 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum derived from the
checked ASCII data.

(Example 1) Sum
*Waiting

Instruction
ENQ Station code Data check
time

Computer Inverter code

number
0 1 E 1 1 0 7 A D F 4 Binary code
ASCII Code H05 H30 H31 H45 H31 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34

H30+H31+H45+H31+H31+H30+H37+H41+H44
= H1F4
Sum
* When the Pr.123 or Pr.337 (Waiting time setting) "9999", create the communication request
data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)

(Example 2) Sum
Data read
STX Station ETX
check
Inverter Computer number code
0 1 1 7 7 0 3 0 Binary code
ASCII Code H02 H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30

H30+H31+H31+H37+H37+H30

= H130
Sum

• Error code

676 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its error definition is sent back to the computer together with the
NAK code.
1
Error code Error item Error description Inverter operation
The number of errors consecutively detected in
H0 Computer NAK error communication request data from the computer is greater
than the permissible number of retries. 2
H1 Parity error The parity check result does not match the specified parity.
The sum check code in the computer does not match that of The inverter output is shut off
H2 Sum check error
the data received by the inverter. (E.PUE/E.SER) if error occurs
The data received by the inverter has a grammatical mistake. continuously more than the
3
Or, data receive is not completed within the predetermined permissible number of retries.
H3 Protocol error
time. The CR or LF code specification is not the same as the The LF signal is output.
setting of the parameter.
H4 Framing error The stop bit length differs from the initial setting. 4
New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter
H5 Overrun error
completes receiving the preceding data.
H6 — — —
The inverter does not accept the
5
The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F,
H7 Character error received data. However, the
control code).
inverter output is not shut off.
H8 — — — 6
H9 — — —
Parameter write was attempted when the inverter does not
perform computer link communication, when the operation
HA Mode error
commands are not given through communication, or during The inverter does not accept the 7
inverter operation. received data. However, the
HB Instruction code error The specified instruction code does not exist. inverter output is not shut off.
Invalid data has been specified for parameter writing,
HC Data range error
frequency setting, etc. 8
HD — — —
HE — — —
HF Normal (no error) — —
9
 Response time
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
Inverter data processing time Waiting time Data check time 10
Computer (setting 10 ms) (depends on the
instruction code*3)
Inverter
Time
Inverter 10 ms or more necessary
Computer Data sending time (refer to the following formula)

[Formula for data transmission time]

1 Communication specifications
Number of data characters *1 (Total number of bits) *2 data transmission time (s)
Communication
speed (bps)
*1 Refer to page 673.
*2 Communication specifications

Name Number of bits

1 bit
Stop bit length
2 bits
7 bits
Data length
8 bits
With 1 bit
Parity check
Without 0

In addition to the above, 1 start bit is necessary.

Minimum number of total bits: 9 bits
Maximum number of total bits: 12 bits

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
677
 *3 Data check time

Item Check time

Monitoring, operation command, frequency setting (RAM) Less than 12 ms
Parameter read/write, frequency setting (EEPROM) Less than 30 ms
Parameter clear / All parameter clear Less than 5 s
Reset command No reply

 Retry count setting (Pr.121, Pr.335)

• Set the permissible number of retries at data receive error occurrence. (Refer to page 676 for data receive error for retry.)
• When the data receive errors occur consecutively and the number of retries exceeds the permissible number setting, a
communication fault (PU connector communication: E.PUE, RS-485 terminal communication: E.SER) occurs and the
inverter output is shut off.
• When a data transmission error occurs while "9999" is set, the inverter does not shut off its output but outputs the Alarm
(LF) signal. To use the LF signal, set "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.

Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = "1" (initial value)

Fault (E.PUE)
ENQ

ENQ
Computer Inverter Illegal Illegal
ACK

NAK

NAK
Inverter Computer

Reception error Reception error

ALM ON

Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = "9999"

ENQ

ENQ

ENQ
Computer Inverter Illegal Illegal Normal
ACK

NAK

NAK

ACK
Inverter Computer

Reception error Reception error

LF OFF ON ON

ALM OFF

NOTE
• For the RS-485 terminal communication, the operation at a communication error occurrence depends on the Pr.502 Stop
mode selection at communication error setting. (Refer to page 663.)

 Signal loss detection (Pr.122, Pr.336 RS-485 communication check time

interval)
• If signal loss is detected between the inverter and computer, communication error "E.PUE" (PU connector communication)
or "E.SER" (RS-485 terminal communication) will occur and the inverter output is shut off.
• The LF signal is not output when a signal loss is detected. However, when a signal loss is detected via communication
through the RS-485 terminals while Pr.502 = "3 or 4", the LF signal is output.
• When the setting is "9999", communication check (signal loss detection) is not made.
• When the setting is "0", communication through the PU connector is not possible. The monitor items and parameter
settings can be read during communication via RS-485 terminals, but a communication error (E.SER) occurs instantly
when the operation mode is switched to the Network operation.
• Setting any value from 0.1 second to 999.8 seconds will enable signal loss detection. To detect signal loss, data must be
sent from the computer within the communication check time interval (for further information on control codes, refer to page
675). (The inverter makes a communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station
number setting of the data sent from the master).

678 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
• Communication check is started at the first communication in the operation mode having the operation source (PU
operation mode for PU connector communication in the initial setting or Network operation mode for RS-485 terminal
communication).
1

Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 122 = "0.1 to 999.8s"

2
Operation Mode External PU

ENQ
Computer Inverter
Inverter Computer

Fault (E.PUE)

Pr.122
Check start
4
Communication
check counter
Time

ALM OFF ON
5

 Programming instructions
• When data from the computer has any error, the inverter does not accept that data. Hence, in the user program, always
6
insert a retry program for data error.
• All data communication, for example, run command or monitoring, are started when the computer gives a communication
request. The inverter does not return any data without the computer's request. Hence, design the program so that the
7
computer gives a data read request for monitoring, etc. as required.
• Program example: To switch to the Network operation mode
8

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
679
 Microsoft® Visual C++® (Ver.6.0) programming example

#include <stdio.h>
#include <windows.h>

void main(void){
HANDLE hCom; // Communication handle
DCB hDcb; // Structure for setting communication settings
COMMTIMEOUTS hTim; // Structure for setting timeouts

char szTx[0x10]; // Send buffer

char szRx[0x10]; // Receive buffer
char szCommand[0x10];// Command
int nTx,nRx; // For storing buffer size
int nSum; // For calculating sum code
BOOL bRet;
int nRet;
int i;

// **** Open COM1 port ****

hCom = CreateFile("COM1", (GENERIC_READ | GENERIC_WRITE), 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL);
if(hCom != NULL) {
// **** Set COM1 port communication ****
GetCommState(hCom,&hDcb); // Get current communication information
h D c b . D C B l en g th = s ize o f( DC B ) ; // Structure size setting
hDcb.BaudRate = 19200; // Communication speed = 19200 bps
hDcb.ByteSize = 8; // Data length = 8 bits
hDcb.Parity = 2; // Parity check at even numbers
hDcb.StopBits = 2; // Stop bit = 2 bits
bRet = SetCommState(hCom,&hDcb); // Setting of changed communication information
if(bRet == TRUE) {
// **** Set COM1 port timeout ****
GetCommTimeouts(hCom,&hTim); // Get current timeout values
hTim.WriteTotalTimeoutConstant = 1000; // Write timeout 1 second
hTim.ReadTotalTimeoutConstant = 1000; // Read timeout 1 second
hTim.ReadTotalTimeoutConstantSetCommTimeouts(hCom,&hTim);// Setting of changed timeout values
// **** Setting of command for switching the station number 1 inverter to the Network operation mode ****
sprintf(szCommand,"01FB10000"); // Send data (NET operation write)
nTx = strlen(szCommand); // Send data size
// **** Generate sum code ****
nSum = 0; // Initialize sum data
for(i = 0;i < nTx;i++) {
nSum += szCommand[i]; // Calculate sum code
nSum &= (0xff); // Mask data
}

// **** Generate send data ****

memset(szTx,0,sizeof(szTx)); // Initialize send buffer
memset(szRx,0,sizeof(szRx)); // Initialize receive buffer
sprintf(szTx,"\5%s%02X",szCommand,nSum);// ENQ code + send data + sum code
nTx = 1 + nTx + 2; // ENQ code + number of send data + number of sum codes

nRet = WriteFile(hCom,szTx,nTx,&nTx,NULL);
// **** Send ****
if(nRet != 0) {
nRet = ReadFile(hCom,szRx,sizeof(szRx),&nRx,NULL);
// **** Receive ****
if(nRet != 0) {
// **** Display receive data ****
for(i = 0;i < nRx;i++) {
printf("%02X ",(BYTE)szRx[i]);// Output received data to console
// Display ASCII code in Hexadecimal' In case of 0', "30" is displayed.
}
printf("\n\r");
}
}
}
CloseHandle(hCom); // Close communication port
}
}

680 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
General flowchart

Port open 1
Communication setting

Time out setting

2
Send data processing
○Data setting
○Sum code calculation
○Data transmission 3
Receive data waiting

Receive data processing

○Receive data processing 4
○Screen display

CAUTION 5
• Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation to prevent hazardous conditions.
• Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a communication
request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc., the inverter cannot be stopped. 6
When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter output will be shut off (E.PUE, E.SER).
Turn the RES signal of the inverter ON or shut off the power supply to coast the motor to a stop.
• If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc., the inverter does not detect such a fault. 7
This should be fully noted.

 Setting items and set data

• After completion of parameter settings, set the instruction codes and data, then start communication from the computer to
8
allow various types of operation control and monitoring.

Item
Read/ Instruction
Data description
Number of
data digits
9
write code
(format)*1
H0000: Network operation
4 digits (B and
Read H7B H0001: External operation, External operation (JOG operation)
H0002: PU operation, External/PU combined operation, PUJOG operation
E/D) 10
H0000: Network operation (Setting is available via communication through
Operation mode
the RS-485 terminals.)
4 digits (A and
Write HFB H0001: External operation
C/D)
H0002: PU operation (Setting is available via communication through the PU
connector.)

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
681
 Number of
Read/ Instruction
Item Data description data digits
write code
(format)*1
Output H0000 to HFFFF: Output frequency in 0.01 Hz increments. (The display can
4 digits (B and
frequency / Read H6F be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144 and Pr.811.
E/D)
speed (Refer to page 446.))
H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal)
Increment 0.01 A (FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or
4 digits (B and
Output current Read H70 lower)
E/D)
Increment 0.1 A (FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or
higher)
4 digits (B and
Output voltage Read H71 H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1 V increments
E/D)
H0000 to HFFFF: Data of the monitor item selected with the instruction code 4 digits (B and
Special monitor Read H72
HF3. E/D)
2 digits (B and
Read H73
Special monitor E1/D)
Monitor selection data (Refer to page 446 for details on selection No.)
selection No. 2 digits (A1 and
Write HF3
C/D)
H0000 to HFFFF: Two fault records per code.

b15 b8 b7 b0
Monitor

H74 Second latest fault Latest fault

H75 Fourth latest fault Third latest fault

H76 Sixth latest fault Fifth latest fault

H77 Eighth latest fault Seventh latest fault

4 digits (B and
Fault record Read H74 to H77
Fault record display example (instruction code H74) E/D)
With the read data H30A0
(Second fault : THT)
(Latest fault : OPT)
b15 b8 b7 b0
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Second fault Latest fault

(H30) (HA0)

(Refer to page 776 for details on fault record read data.)

Operation command 4 digits (A and
Write HF9 Control input commands such as the Forward rotation command (STF) signal
(extended) C/D)
and the Reverse rotation command (STR) signal can be set. (For the details,
2 digits (A1 and
Operation command Write HFA refer to page 685.)
C/D)
Inverter status 4 digits (B and
Read H79 The states of the output signals such as the Forward rotation output, Reverse E/D)
monitor (extended)
rotation output, and Inverter running (RUN) signals can be monitored. (For
Inverter status 2 digits (B and
Read H7A the details, refer to page 685.)
monitor E1/D)
Set frequency Read the set frequency/speed from the RAM or EEPROM.
H6D
(RAM) H0000 to HFFFF: Set frequency in 0.01 Hz increments. 4 digits (B and
Read
Set frequency (The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144 E/D)
H6E
(EEPROM) and Pr.811. (Refer to page 446.))
Set frequency Write the set frequency/speed into the RAM or EEPROM.
HED
(RAM) H0000 to HE678 (0 to 590.00 Hz): frequency in 0.01 Hz increments.
(The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144 4 digits (A and
Write
Set frequency (RAM, and Pr.811. (Refer to page 446.)) C/D)
HEE
EEPROM) To change the set frequency consecutively, write data to the inverter RAM.
(Instruction code: HED)
H9696: Inverter reset
4 digits (A and
As the inverter is reset at the start of communication by the computer, the
C/D)
inverter cannot send reply data back to the computer.
Inverter reset Write HFD H9966: Inverter reset
After the computer correctly starts communication and send data to the 4 digits (A and
inverter, the inverter returns the ACK signal to the computer before being D)
reset.

682 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 Number of
Read/ Instruction
Item Data description data digits
write code
(format)*1 1
Fault history clear Write HF4 H9696: Fault history is cleared. 4 digits (A,C/D)
All parameters return to initial values.
Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be selected
according to the data. 2
• Parameter clear
H9696: Parameters including communication parameters are cleared.
H5A5A: Parameters other than communication parameters are cleared.*2
• All parameter clear 3
H9966: Parameters including communication parameters are cleared.
Parameter clear / All 4 digits (A and
Write HFC H55AA: Parameters other than communication parameters are cleared.*2
parameter clear C/D)
For details on whether or not to clear parameters, refer to page 864.
When a clear is performed with H9696 or H9966, communication related 4
parameter settings also return to the initial values. When resuming the
operation, set the parameters again.
Performing a clear will clear the instruction code HEC, HF3, and HFF
settings. 5
Only H9966 and H55AA (All parameter clear) are valid when a password is
registered (refer to page 348).
4 digits (B and

Parameter
Read H00 to H6B Refer to the instruction code (page 864) and write and/or read parameter
values as required. When setting Pr.100 and later, the link parameter
E/D) 6
extended setting must be set. 4 digits (A and
Write H80 to HEB
C/D)
2 digits (B and
Link parameter
Read H7F Parameter settings are changed according to the instruction code settings.
For details on the settings, refer to the extended code in the instruction code
E1/D) 7
extended setting 2 digits (A1 and
Write HFF list (on page 864).
C/D)

Second parameter Read H6C When setting the calibration parameters*3

H00: Frequency *4
2 digits (B and
E1/D) 8
changing (instruction
H01: Parameter-set analog value 2 digits (A1 and
code HFF = 1, 9) Write HEC
H02: Analog value input from terminal C/D)

Multi command
Read/
write
HF0
Available for writing 2 commands, and monitoring 2 items for reading data.
(Refer to page 686 for details.)
10 digits (A2
and C1/D)
9
The inverter model can be read in ASCII code.
"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area. 20 digits (B and
Model Read H7C
Example) FR-A840-1 (FM type): E3/D) 10
Product profile

H46,H52,H2D,H41,H38,H34,H30,H2D,H31,H20,H20...H20
The capacity in the inverter model can be read in ASCII code.
Data is read in increments of 0.1 kW, and rounds down to 0.01 kW
6 digits (B and
Capacity Read H7D increments.
E2/D)
"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
Example) 0.75K: " 7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)
*1 Refer to page 673 for data formats (A, A1, A2, B, C, C1, D, E, E1, E2, E3, F).
*2 Turning OFF the power supply while clearing parameters with H5A5A or H55AA returns the communication parameter settings to the initial
settings.
*3 Refer to the following calibration parameter list for details on the calibration parameters.
*4 The gain frequency can be also written using Pr.125 (instruction code: H99) or Pr.126 (instruction code: H9A).

NOTE
• Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
• For the instruction codes HFF, HEC, and HF3, their values once written are held, but cleared to zero when an inverter reset
or all clear is performed.
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned.

Example) When reading the C3 (Pr.902) and C6 (Pr.904) settings from the inverter of station No. 0.
Computer send data Inverter send data Description
a ENQ 00 FF 0 01 7D ACK 00 "H01" is set in the extended link parameter.
b ENQ 00 EC 0 01 79 ACK 00 "H01" is set in the second parameter changing.
c ENQ 00 5E 0 0A STX 00 0000 ETX 20 C3 (Pr.902) is read. 0% is read.
d ENQ 00 60 0 F6 STX 00 0000 ETX 20 C6 (Pr.904) is read. 0% is read.

To read/write C3 (Pr.902) or C6 (Pr.904) after inverter reset or parameter clear, execute from (a) again.

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
683
  List of calibration parameters
Instruction code
Pr. Name
Read Write Extended
C2 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 5E DE 1
C3 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 5E DE 1
125 (903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 5F DF 1
C4 (903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 5F DF 1
C5 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 60 E0 1
C6 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 60 E0 1
126 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 61 E1 1
C7 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 61 E1 1
C12 (917) Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) 11 91 9
C13 (917) Terminal 1 bias (speed) 11 91 9
C14 (918) Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) 12 92 9
C15 (918) Terminal 1 gain (speed) 12 92 9
C16 (919) Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux) 13 93 9
C17 (919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 13 93 9
C18
Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux) 14 94 9
(920)
C19
Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux) 14 94 9
(920)
C8
Current output bias signal 1E 9E 9
(930)
C9
Current output bias current 1E 9E 9
(930)
C10
Current output gain signal 1F 9F 9
(931)
C11
Current output gain current 1F 9F 9
(931)
C38
Terminal 4 bias command (torque/magnetic flux) 20 A0 9
(932)
C39
Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 20 A0 9
(932)
C40 (933) Terminal 4 gain command (torque/magnetic flux) 21 A1 9
C41 (933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux) 21 A1 9
C42 (934) PID display bias coefficient 22 A2 9
C43 (934) PID display bias analog value 22 A2 9
C44 (935) PID display gain coefficient 23 A3 9
C45 (935) PID display gain analog value 23 A3 9

684 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 Operation command
Item
Instruction
Bit length Description*1*4 Example
1
code
b0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection)
b1: Forward rotation command
b2: Reverse rotation command [Example 1] H02 Forward rotation 2
b3: RL (Low-speed operation b7 b0
command)
Operation b4: RM (Middle-speed operation
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
HFA 8 bits
command command)
[Example 2] H00 Stop
3
b5: RH (High-speed operation
command) b7 b0
b6: RT (Second function selection) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b7: MRS (Output stop)*2 4
b0: AU (Terminal 4 input selection)
b1: Forward rotation command
b2: Reverse rotation command
b3: RL (Low-speed operation 5
command)
b4: RM (Middle-speed operation
command) [Example 1] H0002 Forward rotation
b5: RH (High-speed operation
command)
b15 b0 6
Operation 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
b6: RT (Second function selection)
command HF9 16 bits
(extended) b7: MRS (Output stop)*2 [Example 2] H0804 Low-speed reverse operation
b8: JOG (Jog operation selection)*3
b9: CS (Selection of automatic
(When Pr. 189 RES terminal function selection is set to "0")
7
b15 b0
restart after instantaneous power 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
failure / flying start)*3
b10: STP (STOP) (Start self-holding 8
selection)*3
b11: RES (Inverter reset)*3
b12 to b15: –
*1 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal 9
function selection) (page 521).
*2 The Inverter run enable signal is in the initial status for the separated converter type.
*3 JOG operation/automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/start self-holding selection/reset cannot be controlled over a network, so in the
initial status bit 8 to bit 11 are invalid. To use bit 8 to bit 11, change the signal by Pr.185, Pr.186, Pr.188, or Pr.189 (Input terminal function 10
selection) (page 521) (A reset can be executed by the instruction code HFD.)
*4 During RS-485 communication through the PU connector, only the Forward rotation command and Reverse rotation command signals can be
used.

 Inverter status monitor

Instruction Bit
Item Description*1 Example
code length
b0: RUN (Inverter running)
b1: Forward rotation output [Example 1] H03 During forward
b2: Reverse rotation output b7 rotation
b0
Inverter b3: SU (Up to frequency) 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
status H7A 8 bits b4: OL (Overload warning)
monitor b5: IPF (Instantaneous power failure/ [Example 2] H80 Stop at fault
*2 occurrence
undervoltage) b7 b0
b6: FU (Output frequency detection) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b7: ABC1 (Fault)
b0: RUN (Inverter running)
b1: Forward rotation output
b2: Reverse rotation output
b3: SU (Up to frequency) [Example 1] H0003 During forward rotation
b4: OL (Overload warning)
Inverter b5: IPF (Instantaneous power failure/
b15 b0
status *2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
H79 16 bits undervoltage)
monitor
(extended) b6: FU (Output frequency detection) [Example 2] H8080 Stop at fault occurrence
b7: ABC1 (Fault) b15 b0
b8: ABC2 (–)
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b9: Safety monitor output
b10 to b14: –
b15: Fault occurrence

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
685
 *1 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection).
*2 No function is assigned in the initial status for the separated converter type.

 Multi command (HF0)

• Sending data format from computer to inverter
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Inverter Send Receive
Instruction Time data data CR/
A2 ENQ station
code (HF0) delay Data 1*3 Data 2*3 Sum check
LF
number type*1 type*2
• Reply data format from inverter to computer (No data error detected)
Number of characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Inverter Send Receive Error Error
data data code code CR/
C1 STX station Data 1*4 Data 2*4 ETX Sum check
LF
number type*1 type*2 1*5 2*5
*1 Specify the data type of sending data (from computer to inverter).
*2 Specify the data type of reply data (from inverter to computer).
*3 Combination of data 1 and data 2 for sending

Data type Data 1 Data 2 Remarks

Operation command
0 Set frequency (RAM)
(extended) Run command (extended) is same as instruction code HF9. (Refer
Operation command Set frequency (RAM, to page 685.)
1
(extended) EEPROM)
*4 Combination of data 1 and data 2 for reply

Data type Data 1 Data 2 Remarks

Inverter status monitor Output frequency Inverter status monitor (extended) is same as instruction code H79.
0
(extended) (speed) (Refer to page 685.)
Inverter status monitor Replies the monitor item specified in instruction code HF3 for special
1 Special monitor
(extended) monitor. (Refer to page 446.)
*5 The error code for sending data 1 is set in error code 1, and the error code for sending data 2 is set in error code 2. Mode error (HA), instruction
code error (HB), data range error (HC) or no error (HF) is replied. (Refer to page 776 for details on the error codes.)

5.15.6 MODBUS RTU communication specification

Operation by MODBUS RTU communication or parameter setting is possible by using the MODBUS RTU communication
protocol through the RS-485 terminals of the inverter.

686 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 Initial Setting
Pr. Name
value range
Description
1
0 Broadcast communication
331 RS-485 communication Specify the inverter station number.
0
N030 station number 1 to 247 Enter the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are
connected to one personal computer. 2
3, 6, 12, 24,
Select the communication speed.
332 RS-485 communication 48, 96, 192,
96 The setting value × 100 equals the communication speed.
N031 speed 384, 576,
768, 1152
For example, enter 96 to set the communication speed of 9600 bps. 3
RS-485 communication stop 0 Stop bit length 1 bit Valid when Pr.N034 (Pr.334) =
N033 1
bit length 1 Stop bit length 2 bits "0"

RS-485 communication stop

0
1
Stop bit length 1 bit
Stop bit length 2 bits
4
333 1 Valid when Pr.334 = "0"
bit length / data length 10 Stop bit length 1 bit
11 Stop bit length 2 bits

0
Without parity check 5
Stop bit length 1 bit / 2 bits (depends on the setting of Pr.333)
334 RS-485 communication parity With parity check at odd numbers.
2 1
N034 check selection Stop bit length: 1 bit.

2
With parity check at even numbers. 6
Stop bit length: 1 bit.
343 Displays the communication error count during MODBUS RTU
Communication error count 0 —
N080 communication. Read-only.
MODBUS RTU communication is available, but the inverter output is 7
0
MODBUS RTU shut off in the NET operation mode.
539
communication check time 9999 Set the interval of the communication check (signal loss detection)
N002 0.1 to 999.8 s
interval time (same specifications as Pr.122).
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection)
8
549 0 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link)
Protocol selection 0
N000 1 MODBUS RTU protocol
9
NOTE
• To use the MODBUS RTU protocol, set "1" in Pr.549 Protocol selection.
• If MODBUS RTU communication is performed from the master to the address 0 (station number 0), the data is broadcasted,
and the inverter does not send any reply to the master. To obtain replies from the inverter, set Pr.331 RS-485 communication 10
station number ≠ "0 (initial value)".
• Some functions are disabled in broadcast communication. (Refer to page 689.)
• If a communication option is installed with Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "9999 (initial value)",
commands (operation commands) transmitted via RS-485 terminals become invalid. (Refer to page 400.)

 Communication specifications
• The communication specifications are shown in the following table.
Item Description Related parameter
Communication protocol MODBUS RTU protocol Pr.549
Conforming standard EIA-485 (RS-485) —
Number of connectable units 1: N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 247 stations Pr.331
Selected among 300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/76800/
Communication speed Pr.332
115200 bps.
Control procedure Asynchronous method —
Communication method Half-duplex system —
Character
Binary (fixed at 8 bits) —
system
Start bit 1 bit —
Stop bit length Select from the following three types:
Communication
No parity check, stop bit length 1 bit / 2 bits (depends on the setting of Pr.333). Pr.333
specifications
Parity check Odd parity check, stop bit length 1 bit. Pr.334
Even parity check, stop bit length 1 bit.
Error check CRC code check —
Terminator Not available —
Time delay setting Not available —

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
687
  Outline
• The MODBUS communication protocol was developed by Modicon for programmable controllers.
• The MODBUS protocol uses exclusive message frames to perform serial communication between a master and slaves.
These exclusive message frames are provided with a feature called "functions" that allows data to be read or written. These
functions can be used to read or write parameters from the inverter, write input commands to the inverter or check the
inverter's operating status, for example. This product classifies the data of each inverter into holding register area (register
address 40001 to 49999). The master can communicate with inverters (slaves) by accessing pre-assigned holding register
addresses.

NOTE
• There are two serial transmission modes, the ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) mode and the RTU
(Remote Terminal Unit) mode. However, this product supports only the RTU mode, which transfers 1 byte data (8 bits) as it
is. Also, only communication protocol is defined by the MODBUS protocol. Physical layers are not stipulated.

 Message format
Inverter response time
Query communication (Refer to the following table for the
data check time)
Query Message
Programmable controller
(Master)
Inverter (slave) Response Message
Data absence time
(3.5 bytes or more)
Broadcast communication

Query Message
Programmable controller
(Master)
Inverter (slave) No Response

• Data check time

Item Check time
Monitoring, operation command,
Less than 12 ms
frequency setting (RAM)
Parameter read/write, frequency setting
Less than 30 ms
(EEPROM)
Parameter clear / All parameter clear <5s
Reset command No reply

• Query
A message is sent to the slave (the inverter) having the address specified by the master.
• Normal response
After the query from the master is received, the slave executes the request function, and returns the corresponding normal
response to the master.
• Error Response
When an invalid function code, address or data is received by the slave, the error response is returned to the master.
This response is appended with an error code that indicates the reason why the request from the master could not be
executed.
This response cannot be returned for errors, detected by the hardware, frame error and CRC check error.
• Broadcast
The master can broadcast messages to all slaves by specifying address 0. All slaves that receive a message from the
master execute the requested function. With this type of communication, slaves do not return a response to the master.

NOTE
• During broadcast communication, functions are executed regarded of the set inverter station number (Pr.331).

688 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 Message frame (protocol)
• Communication method 1
Basically, the master sends a query message (inquiry), and slaves return a response message (response). At normal
communication, the device address and function code are copied as they are, and at erroneous communication (illegal
function code or data code), bit 7 (= H80) of the function code is turned ON, and the error code is set at data bytes. 2
Query message from Master
Device Address
Function Code
Device Address
Function Code 3
Eight-Bit Eight-Bit
Data Bytes Data Bytes
4
Error Check Error Check
Response message from slave

Message frames comprise the four message fields shown in the figures above. 5
A slave recognizes message data as one message when a 3.5 character long no-data time (T1: start/end) is added before
and after the data.
• Details of protocol 6
The following table explains the four message fields.
Start Address Function Data CRC check End
L H 7
T1 8 bits 8 bits n × 8 bits T1
8 bits 8 bits

Message field Description

"0 to 247" can be set in the single-byte (8-bit) length field. Set "0" when sending broadcast messages 8
(instructions to all addresses), and "1 to 247" to send messages to individual slaves.
Address field
The response from the slave also contains the address set by the master. The value set in Pr.331 RS-485
communication station number is the slave address.
"1 to 255" can be set as the function code in the single-byte (8-bit) length filed. The master sets the function to 9
be sent to the slave as the request, and the slave performs the requested operation. Refer to the function code
list for details on the supported function codes. An error response is generated when a function code other than
Function field
those in the function code list is set.
The normal response from the slave contains the function code set by the master. The error response contains
H80 and the function code.
10
The format changes according the function code. (Refer to page 690.) The data, for example, includes the byte
Data field
count, number of bytes, and accessing content of holding registers.
Errors in the received message frame are detected. Errors are detected in the CRC check, and the 2 bytes length
data is appended to the message. When the CRC is appended to the message, the lower bytes of the CRC are
appended first, followed by the upper bytes.
CRC check field
The CRC value is calculated by the sender that appends the CRC to the message. The receiver recalculates
the CRC while the message is being received, and compares the calculation result against the actual value that
was received in the error check field. If the two values do not match, the result is treated as an error.

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
689
  Function code list
Message
Read/ Broadcast format
Function name Code Outline
write communication reference
page
The data of the holding registers is read.
The various data of the inverter can be read from MODBUS
registers.
System environmental variable (Refer to page 695.)
Read holding register Read H03 Not available page 690
Real time monitor (Refer to page 447.)
Fault history (Refer to page 697.)
Product profile (Refer to page 698.)
Inverter parameters (Refer to page 696.)
Data is written to a holding register.
Data can be written to MODBUS registers to output instructions
Preset single register Write H06 to the inverter or set parameters. Available page 691
System environmental variable (Refer to page 695.)
Inverter parameters (Refer to page 696.)
Functions are diagnosed. (communication check only)
A communication check can be made since the query message
Diagnostics Read H08 is sent and the query message is returned as it is as the return Not available page 691
message (subfunction code H00 function).
Subfunction code H00 (Return query data).
Data is written to multiple consecutive holding registers.
Data can be written to consecutive multiple MODBUS registers to
Preset multiple
Write H10 output instructions to the inverter or set parameters. Available page 692
registers
System environmental variable (Refer to page 695.)
Inverter parameters (Refer to page 696.)
The number of registers that were successfully accessed by the
previous communication is read.
Queries by function codes H03 and H10 are supported.
Read holding register
Read H46 The number and start address of holding registers successfully Not available page 693
access log
accessed by the previous communication are returned.
"0" is returned for both the number and start address for queries
other than function code H03 and H10.

 Read holding register (reading data of holding registers) (H03 or 03)

• Query message
a. Slave address b. Function c. Starting address d. No. of points CRC check
H03 H L H L L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
• Normal response (Response message)
a. Slave address b. Function e. Byte count f. Data CRC check
H03 H L ... L H
(8 bits) (8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (n × 16 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

• Query message setting

Message Description
Set the address to send messages to. Broadcast communication is not possible. (Invalid when "0"
a Slave address
is set.)
b Function Set H03.
Set the holding register address from which to start reading the data.
Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001
c Starting address
For example, when starting register address 0001 is set, the data of holding register address 40002
is read.
d No. of points Set the number of holding registers for reading data. Data can be read from up to 125 registers.

• Content of normal response

Message Description
The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250).
e Byte count
Twice the number of reads specified by (d) is set.
The amount of data specified by (d) is set. Read data is output Hi bytes first followed by Lo bytes,
f Data and is arranged as follows: data of start address, data of start address+1, data of start address+2,
and so forth.

690 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 Example) Read the register values of 41004 (Pr.4) to 41006 (Pr.6) from slave address 17 (H11).
Query message
1
Slave address Function Starting address No. of points CRC check
H11 H03 H03 HEB H00 H03 H77 H2B
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
Normal response (Response message)
2
Slave address Function Byte count Data CRC check
H11
(8 bits)
H03
(8 bits)
H06
(8 bits)
H17
(8 bits)
H70
(8 bits)
H0B
(8 bits)
HB8
(8 bits)
H03
(8 bits)
HE8
(8 bits)
H2C
(8 bits)
HE6
(8 bits)
3
Read value
Register 41004 (Pr.4): H1770 (60.00 Hz)
Register 41005 (Pr.5): H0BB8 (30.00 Hz)
4
Register 41006 (Pr.6): H03E8 (10.00 Hz)

 Preset single register (writing data to holding registers) (H06 or 06) 5

• The content of the system environmental variables and inverter parameters (refer to page 694) assigned to the holding
register area can be written.
• Query message 6
a. Slave address b. Function c. Register address d. Preset data CRC check
H06 H L H L L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) 7
• Normal response (Response message)
a. Slave address b. Function c. Register address d. Preset data CRC check

(8 bits)
H06 H L H L L H 8
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

• Query message setting

Message Description 9
a Slave address Set the address to send messages to. Setting "0" enables broadcast communication.
b Function Set H06.

c Register address
Set the holding register address to write data to.
Register address = holding register address (decimal) - 40001
10
For example, when register address 0001 is set, data is written to holding register address 40002.
d Preset Data Set the data to write to the holding register. Write data is fixed at 2 bytes.
• Content of normal response
The contents in the normal response (a to d, including the CRC check) are the same as those in the query messages.
In the case of broadcast communication, no response is returned.

 Example) Write 60 Hz (H1770) to 40014 (set frequency RAM) of slave address 5 (H05).
Query message
Slave address Function Register address Preset data CRC check
H05 H06 H00 H0D H17 H70 H17 H99
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
Normal response (Response message)
The same data as those in the query message

NOTE
• With broadcast communication, no response is generated even if a query is executed, so when the next query is made, it must
be made after waiting for the inverter data processing time after the previous query is executed.

 Diagnostics (diagnosis of functions) (H08 or 08)

• A communication check can be made since the query message is sent and the query message is returned as it is as the
return message (subfunction code H00 function). Subfunction code H00 (Return query data)

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
691
 • Query message
a. Slave address b. Function c. Subfunction d. Data CRC check
H08 H00 H00 H L L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
• Normal response (Response message)
a. Slave address b. Function c. Subfunction d. Data CRC check
H08 H00 H00 H L L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
• Query message setting
Message Description
Set the address to send messages to. Broadcast communication is not possible. (Invalid when "0" is
a Slave address
set.)
b Function Set H08.
c Subfunction Set H0000.
d Data Any 2-byte long data can be set. The setting range is H0000 to HFFFF.

• Content of normal response

The contents in the normal response (a to d, including the CRC check) are the same as those in the query messages.

NOTE
• With broadcast communication, no response is generated even if a query is executed, so when the next query is made, it must
be made after waiting for the inverter data processing time after the previous query is executed.

 Preset multiple registers (writing data to multiple holding registers) (H10

or 16)
• Data can be written to multiple holding registers.
• Query message
a. Slave c. Starting d. No. of
b. Function e. Byte count f. Data CRC check
address address registers
...
H10 H L H L H L L H
(8 bits) (8 bits) (n × 2 × 8
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
bits)

• Normal response (Response message)

a. Slave address b. Function c. Starting address d. No. of registers CRC check
H10 H L H L L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

• Query message setting

Message Description
a Slave address Set the address to send messages to. Setting "0" enables broadcast communication.
b Function Set H10.
Set the holding register address from which to start writing the data.
c Starting address Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001
For example, when starting address 0001 is set, data is written to holding register 40002.
d No. of registers Set the number of holding registers for writing data. Data can be written to up to 125 registers.
e Byte count The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250). Set twice the value specified by d.
Set the amount of data specified by d. Write data is output Hi bytes first followed by Lo bytes, and
f Data is arranged as follows: data of start address, data of start address+1, data of start address+2, and
so forth.
• Content of normal response
The contents in the normal response (a to d, including the CRC check) are the same as those in the query messages.

692 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 Example) Write 0.5 s (H05) to 41007 (Pr.7) and 1 s (H0A) to 41008 (Pr.8) of slave address 25
(H19).
Query message
1
Slave
Function Starting address No. of registers Byte count Data CRC check
address
H19 H10 H03 HEE H00 H02 H04 H00 H05 H00 H0A H86 H3D
2
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

Normal response (Response message)

3
Slave
Function Starting address No. of registers CRC check
address
H19 H10 H03 HEE H00 H02 H22 H61
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) 4
 Read holding register access log (H46 or 70)
• Queries by function codes H03 and H10 are supported. The number and start address of holding registers successfully 5
accessed by the previous communication are returned. "0" is returned for both the number and start address for queries
other than the function codes above.
• Query message 6
a. Slave address b. Function CRC check
H46 L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
7
• Normal response (Response message)
a. Slave address b. Function c. Starting address d. No. of points CRC check

(8 bits)
H46 H L H L L H 8
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

• Query message setting

Message Description
9
Set the address to send messages to. Broadcast communication is not possible. (Invalid when "0"
a Slave address
is set.)
b Function Set H46. 10
• Content of normal response
Message Description
The start address of the holding register that was successfully accessed is returned.
Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001
c Starting address
For example, when starting address 0001 is returned, the holding register address that was
successfully accessed is 40002.
d No. of points The number of holding registers that were successfully accessed is returned.

 Example) Read the successful register start address and number of successful accesses from
slave address 25 (H19).
Query message
Slave address Function CRC check
H19 H46 H8B HD2
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

Normal response (Response message)

Slave address Function Starting address No. of points CRC check
H19 H10 H03 HEE H00 H02 H22 H61
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

The number of holding registers that were successfully accessed was returned as two with the start address 41007 (Pr.7).

 Error response
• An error response is returned if the query message received from the master contains an illegal function, address or data.
No response is returned for parity, CRC, overrun, framing, and busy errors.

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
693
 NOTE
• No response is also returned in the case of broadcast communication.

• Error response (Response message)

a. Slave address b. Function c. Exception code CRC check
H80 + Function L H
(8 bits) (8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

Message Description
a Slave address Set the address received from the master.
b Function The function code requested by the master and H80 is set.
c Exception code The codes in the following table are set.

• Error code list

Code Error item Error description
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION The query message from the master has a function code that cannot be handled by the slave.
The query message from the master has a register address that cannot be handled by the slave.
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS*1 (No parameter, parameter cannot be read, parameter cannot be written)
The query message from the master has data that cannot be handled by the slave.
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
(Out of parameter write range, a mode is specified, or other error)

*1 An error response is not returned in the following cases:

(a) Function code H03 (reading data of holding registers)
When the number of registers is specified as one or more and there are one or more holding registers from which data can be read
(b) Function code H10 (writing data to multiple holding registers)
When the number of registers is specified as one or more and there are one or more holding registers to which data can be written.

In other words, when function code H03 or H10 is used and multiple holding registers are accessed, an error response is not returned even if a
nonexistent holding register or holding register that cannot be read or written from/to is accessed.

NOTE
• An error response is returned if none of the accessed holding registers exist. When an accessed holding register does not
exist, the read value is 0 and the written data is invalid.

• Error detection of message data

The following errors are detected in message data from the master. The inverter output is not shut off even if an error is
detected.
Error check items
Error item Error description Inverter operation
The data received by the inverter is different from the
Parity error
specified parity (Pr.334 setting).
The data received by the inverter is different from the stop
Framing error
bit length (Pr.333/Pr.334) setting.
When this error occurs, Pr.343 is
The next data has been sent by the master before the
Overrun error incremented by one.
inverter completes receiving the preceding data.
When this error occurs, the LF signal is
The data length of the message frame is checked, and an output.
Message frame error error is generated if the received data length is less than
4 bytes.
An error is generated if the data in the message frame
CRC check error
does not match the calculation result.

NOTE
• The LF signal can be assigned to an output terminal by setting Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 MODBUS register
• The following shows the MODBUS registers for system environment variables (read/write), real time monitor items (read),
parameters (read/write), fault history data (read/write), and model information monitor items (read).

694 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
• System environment variables
Register Definition Read/write Remarks 1
40002 Inverter reset Write Any value
40003 Parameter clear Write Set H965A.
40004 All parameter clear Write Set H99AA.
40006 Parameter clear *1 Write Set H5A96. 2
40007 All parameter clear*1 Write Set HAA99.
40009 *2 Read/write Refer to the following.
Inverter status / control input command
40010 Operation mode / inverter setting*3 Read/write Refer to the following. 3
40014 Set frequency (RAM value) Read/write The display can be changed to the rotations
per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144 and Pr.811.
40015 Set frequency (EEPROM value) Write (Refer to page 446.)
4
*1 Settings in the communication parameters are not cleared.
*2 The data is written as a control input command for writing.
The data is read as the inverter status for reading.
*3 The data is written as an operation mode setting for writing.
The data is read as the operation mode status for reading.
5
• Inverter status / control input command
Definition
Bit
Control input command Inverter status
6
0 Stop command RUN (Inverter running)*6
1 Forward rotation command Forward running
2 Reverse rotation command Reverse running 7
3 RH (High-speed operation command)*4 SU (Up to frequency)*6
4 RM (Middle-speed operation command)*4 OL (Overload warning)*6

5 RL (Low-speed operation command)*4

IPF (Instantaneous power failure/ 8
undervoltage)*6*7
6 JOG (Jog operation selection)*4 FU (Output frequency detection)*6
7 RT (Second function selection)*4 ABC1 (Fault)*6
9
8 AU (Terminal 4 input selection)*4 ABC2 (-)*6
CS (Selection of automatic restart after
9 Safety monitor output
instantaneous power failure / flying start)*4
10 MRS (Output stop)*4*5 0
10
11 STP (STOP) (Start self-holding selection)*4 0
12 RES (Inverter reset)*4 0
13 — 0
14 — 0
15 — Fault occurrence

*4 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal
function selection) (page 521).
The signals assigned to the input terminals may be valid or invalid in the NET operation mode. (Refer to page 404.)
*5 The Inverter run enable signal is in the initial status for the separated converter type.
*6 The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection) (page 473).
*7 No function is assigned in the initial status for the separated converter type.
• Operation mode / inverter setting
Mode Read value Write value
EXT H0000 H0010*8
PU H0001 H0011*8
EXT
H0002 —
JOG
PU
H0003 —
JOG
NET H0004 H0014
PU + EXT H0005 —

*8 Writing is available depending on the Pr.79 and Pr.340 settings. (For details, refer to page 398.)
Restrictions in each operation mode conform with the computer link specification.

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
695
 • Real time monitor
Refer to page 446 for the register numbers and monitor items of the real time monitor.
• Parameters
Pr. Register Name Read/write Remarks
For details on parameter names,
41000 to
0 to 999 refer to the parameter list (page Read/write The parameter number + +41000 is the register number.
41999
166).
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
C2 (902) 41902 Read/write
(frequency)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
42092 Read/write Analog value (%) set to C3 (902)
(analog value)
C3 (902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias Analog value (%) of the voltage (current) applied to
43902 Read
(terminal analog value) terminal 2
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
125 (903) 41903 Read/write
(frequency)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
42093 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C4 (903)
(analog value)
C4 (903)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain Analog value (%) of the voltage (current) applied to
43903 Read
(terminal analog value) terminal 2
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
C5 (904) 41904 Read/write
(frequency)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
42094 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C6 (904)
(analog value)
C6 (904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
43904 Read
(terminal analog value) terminal 4
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
126 (905) 41905 Read/write
(frequency)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
42095 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C7 (905)
(analog value)
C7 (905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
43905 Read
(terminal analog value) terminal 4
Terminal 1 bias frequency
C12 (917) 41917 Read/write
(speed)
42107 Terminal 1 bias (speed) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C13 (917)
C13 (917) Terminal 1 bias (speed) (terminal
43917 Read Analog value (%) of voltage applied to terminal 1
analog value)
Terminal 1 gain frequency
C14 (918) 41918 Read/write
(speed)
42108 Terminal 1 gain (speed) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C15 (918)
C15 (918) Terminal 1 gain (speed) (terminal
43918 Read Analog value (%) of voltage applied to terminal 1
analog value)
Terminal 1 bias command
C16 (919) 41919 Read/write
(torque/magnetic flux)
Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic
42109 Read/write Analog value (%) set to C17 (919)
flux)
C17 (919)
Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic
43919 Read Analog value (%) of voltage applied to terminal 1
flux) (terminal analog value)
Terminal 1 gain command
C18 (920) 41920 Read/write
(torque/magnetic flux)
Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic
42110 Read/write Analog value (%) set to C19 (920)
flux)
C19 (920)
Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic
43920 Read Analog value (%) of voltage applied to terminal 1
flux) (terminal analog value)
Motor temperature detection
42115 Read/write
calibration (analog input)
C29 (925) Motor temperature detection
Analog value (%) between terminals TH1 and TH2 of the
43925 calibration (analog input) Read
FR-A8AZ
(terminal analog value)
Terminal 6 bias frequency
C30 (926) 41926 Read/write
(speed)
42116 Terminal 6 bias (speed) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C31 (926)
C31 (926) Terminal 6 bias (speed) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 6 of the
43926 Read
analog value) FR-A8AZ
Terminal 6 gain frequency
C32 (927) 41927 Read/write
(speed)

696 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 Pr. Register Name Read/write Remarks

C33
42117 Terminal 6 gain (speed)
Terminal 6 gain (speed) (terminal
Read/write Analog value (%) set in C33 (927)
Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 6 of the
1
(927) 43927 Read
analog value) FR-A8AZ
C34 Terminal 6 bias command
41928 Read/write
(928)
42118
(torque)
Terminal 6 bias (torque) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C35 (928)
2
C35
Terminal 6 bias (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 6 of the
(928) 43928 Read
analog value) FR-A8AZ
C36
41929
Terminal 6 gain command
Read/write
3
(929) (torque)
42119 Terminal 6 gain (torque) Read/write Analog value (%) set in C37 (929)
C37
Terminal 6 gain (torque) (terminal Analog value (%) of the voltage applied to terminal 6 of the
(929) 43929
analog value)
Read
FR-A8AZ 4
C8
41930 Current output bias signal Read/write
(930)
C9
(930)
42120 Current output bias current Read/write Analog value (%) set in C9 (930) 5
C10
41931 Current output gain signal Read/write
(931)
C11
(931)
42121 Current output gain current Read/write Analog value (%) set in C11 (931) 6
C38 Terminal 4 bias command
41932 Read/write
(932) (torque/magnetic flux)

42122
Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic
flux)
Read/write Analog value (%) set in C39 (932) 7
C39 (932)
Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
43932 Read
flux) (terminal analog value) terminal 4

C40 (933) 41933

Terminal 4 gain command
(torque/magnetic flux)
Read/write 8
Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic
42123 Read/write Analog value (%) set in C41 (933)
flux)
C41 (933)
43933
Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic
flux) (terminal analog value)
Read
Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
terminal 4
9
C42 (934) 41934 PID display bias coefficient Read/write
42124 PID display bias analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set in C43 (934)
C43 (934)
43934
PID display bias analog value
Read
Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to 10
(terminal analog value) terminal 4
C44 (935) 41935 PID display gain coefficient Read/write
42125 PID display gain analog value Read/write Analog value (%) set in C45 (935)
C45 (935) PID display gain analog value Analog value (%) of the current (voltage) applied to
43935 Read
(terminal analog value) terminal 4
For details on parameter names,
1000 to 45000 to
refer to the parameter list (page Read/write The parameter number + 44000 is the register number.
1999 45359
166).
• Fault history
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
40501 Fault record 1 Read/write
40502 Fault record 2 Read
40503 Fault record 3 Read Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as H00○○.
Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the error code. (For details on
40504 Fault record 4 Read
error codes, refer to page 776.)
40505 Fault record 5 Read The fault history is cleared by writing to register 40501.
40506 Fault record 6 Read Set any value as data.
40507 Fault record 7 Read
40508 Fault record 8 Read

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
697
 • Product profile
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
44001 Model (1st and 2nd characters) Read
44002 Model (3rd and 4th characters) Read
44003 Model (5th and 6th characters) Read
44004 Model (7th and 8th characters) Read The inverter model can be read in ASCII code.
44005 Model (9th and 10th characters) Read "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
44006 Model (11th and 12th characters) Read Example) FR-A840-1 (FM type):
44007 Model (13th and 14th characters) Read H46, H52, H2D, H41, H38, H34, H30, H2D, H31, H20......H20
44008 Model (15th and 16th characters) Read
44009 Model (17th and 18th characters) Read
44010 Model (19th and 20th characters) Read
44011 Capacity (1st and 2nd characters) Read The capacity in the inverter model can be read in ASCII code.
44012 Capacity (3rd and 4th characters) Read Data is read in increments of 0.1 kW, and rounds down to 0.01
kW increments.
44013 Capacity (5th and 6th characters) Read "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.
Example) 0.75K: " 7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)

NOTE
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned.

 Pr.343 Communication error count

• The communication error occurrence count can be checked.
Parameter Setting range Minimum setting range Initial value
343 (Read-only) 1 0

NOTE
• The communication error count is temporarily stored in the RAM memory. The value is not stored in EEPROM, and so is
cleared to 0 when power is reset and the inverter is reset.

 Alarm (LF) signal output (communication error warning)

• During a communication error, the Alarm (LF) signal is output by open collector output. Assign the terminal to be used using
any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).

Master Alarm data Alarm data Normal data Alarm data Normal data
Slave Reply data Reply data
Not increased
Communication
error count 0 1 2
(Pr. 343)

Signal LF OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Turns off when normal data is received

Communication error count is increased in Alarm data : Data resulting in

synchronization with leading edge of LF signal communication error.

NOTE
• The LF signal can be assigned to an output terminal by setting Pr.190 to Pr.196. Changing the terminal assignment may affect
other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Signal loss detection (Pr.539 RS-485 communication check time interval)

• If a signal loss (communication) is detected between the inverter and the master as a result of a signal loss detection, the
Communication fault (inverter) (E.SER) occurs and the inverter output is shut off.
• When the setting is "9999", communication check (signal loss detection) is not made.
• When the setting is "0", reading, etc. of monitors and parameters is possible, though E.SER occurs instantly when the
operation mode is switched to the Network operation.

698 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
 • A signal loss detection is made when the setting is any of "0.1 s to 999.8 s". In order to enable the signal loss detection,
data must be sent by the master at an interval equal to or less than the time set for the communication check. (The inverter
makes a communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting of the
1
data sent from the master).
• The communication check is made from the first communication in the Network operation mode (can be changed by Pr.551
PU mode operation command source selection).
2
• The communication check time by query communication includes a no-data time (3.5 bytes).
This no-data time differs according to the communication speed, so take this no-data time into consideration when setting
the communication check time.
3
Example: RS-485 terminal communication, Pr. 539 = "0.1 to 999.8 s"
Query communication 4
Operation mode External NET

Query Message1 Query Message2 5

PLC (master) Data absence time
Inverter (slave) (3.5 bytes or more)
Inverter (slave)
PLC (master) Fault 6
Response Message1 Response Message2 (E.SER)
Pr.539
Communication
check counter
7
Check start Time

ALM OFF ON
8
Broadcast communication
Operation mode External NET
9
Query Message1 Query Message2
PLC (master)
Inverter (slave)
Inverter (slave) 10
PLC (master) Data absence time Fault
(3.5 bytes or more) (E.SER)
Pr.539
Communication
check counter
Check start Time
ALM OFF ON

NOTE
• For the RS-485 terminal communication, the operation at a communication error occurrence depends on the Pr.502 Stop
mode selection at communication error setting. (Refer to page 663.)

5.15.7 CC-Link IE Field Network function setting (FR-

A800-GF)
Use the following parameters to perform required settings for CC-Link IE Field Network communication between the inverter
and other stations.
• For details on the CC-Link IE Field Network, refer to page 752.
• For the inverter operation at communication error, refer to page 663.
• Set the parameters other than Pr.434, Pr.435, and Pr.541 in the same way as when a communication option is used.

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
699
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
434 Network number (CC-
0 0 to 255 Enter the network number of the inverter.
N110 Link IE)
435 Station number (CC-Link
0 0 to 255 Enter the station number of the inverter.
N111 IE)
541 Frequency command 0 Signed frequency command value
0
N100 sign selection 1 Unsigned frequency command value

 Network number and station number setting (Pr.434, Pr.435)

• Enter the inverter network number in Pr.434 Network number (CC-Link IE).
• The setting range of Pr.434 is "0 to 255", but its active range is "1 to 239". The values out of the active range are invalid
because such values cannot be transmitted to the master station.
• Use Pr.435 Station number (CC-Link IE) to enter the station number of the inverter.
• The setting range of Pr.435 is "0 to 255", but its active range is "1 to 120". The values out of the active range are invalid
because such values cannot be transmitted to the master station.

NOTE
• Use different station numbers for different devices. (If different devices have the same station number, the communication
cannot be performed properly. If an error occurs due to a duplicated number, re-assign the station numbers, then reset the
master station and the inverter power.)
• Station numbers do not have to be consecutive numbers.
• The Pr.434 and Pr.435 settings are applied after an inverter reset or next power-ON.

 Frequency command with sign (Pr.541)

• By adding a sign to the frequency command value, the start command (forward/reverse rotation) can be inverted to start
operation
• The Pr.541 Frequency command sign selection setting is applied to the frequency command from RWw0.
Rotations per minute
(machine speed) setting Pr.541 setting Sign Setting range Actual frequency command
using Pr.37 and Pr.144
0 Without 0 to 59000 0 to 590.00 Hz
Without
1 With -32768 to 32767 (two's complement) -327.68 to 327.67 Hz
0 Without 0 to 65535 It depends on Pr.37, Pr.144, and Pr.811
With
1 With -32768 to 32767 (two's complement) settings (in 1 or 0.1 increments).
• Relationship between the start command and sign (Pr.541 = "1")
Sign of the frequency Actual operation
Start command
command command
+ Forward rotation
Forward rotation
- Reverse rotation
+ Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
- Reverse rotation

NOTE
• When Pr.541 = "1" (with sign)
- When EEPROM write is specified by turning ON of RY22, write mode error (error code H01) will occur.
- When both RY21 and RY22 are turned ON, RY21 has precedence.
- When power is turned ON (inverter reset), the initial setting status of the sign bit is "positive" and the set frequency is 0 Hz.
(The motor does not operate at the frequency set before turning OFF the power (inverter reset).)
- When set frequency is written with the instruction code of HED or HEE, the sign of the frequency command is not changed.

Parameters referred to
Pr.37 Speed display, Pr.144 Speed setting switchover, Pr.811 Set resolution switchoverpage 444

700 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
5.15.8 USB device communication
A personal computer and an inverter can be connected with a USB cable. Setup of the inverter can be easily performed with 1
FR Configurator2.
The inverter can be connected easily to a personal computer by a USB cable.
2
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
547*1
N040
USB communication
station number
0 0 to 31 Specify the inverter station number. 3
USB communication is possible, however the inverter output is shut
0
off (E.USB) when the mode changes to the PU operation mode.
548*1
N041
USB communication
check time interval
9999
0.1 to 999.8 s
Set the communication check time interval.
If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible
4
time, the inverter output is shut off (E.USB).
9999 No communication check
*1 The changed value is applied after the next power-ON or inverter reset. 5
 USB communication specifications
Interface
Transmission speed
Conforms to USB 1.1 (USB 2.0 full speed)
12 Mbps
6
Wiring length Maximum 5 m
Connector USB mini B connector (receptacle)
Power supply Self-powered 7
Recommended USB cable MR-J3USBCBL3M (cable length 3 m)

8
USB cable USB connector

10

• At the initial setting (Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection = "9999"), communication with FR
Configurator2 can be made in the PU operation mode simply by connecting a USB cable. To fix the command source to
the USB connector in the PU operation mode, set "3" in Pr.551.
• Parameter setting and monitoring can be performed by using FR Configurator2. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual
of FR Configurator2.

Parameters referred to
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selectionpage 400

5.15.9 Automatic connection with GOT

When the automatic connection is enabled in the GOT2000 series, the inverter can communicate with the GOT2000 series
with only setting the station number and connecting the GOT. This eliminates the need for the communication parameter
setting.

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
701
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Use this parameter to specify the inverter station number.
117 PU communication
0 0 to 31 The inverter station number setting is required when multiple inverters are
N020 station number
connected to one GOT (PU connector communication).
RS-485 0 to 31 (0 to Specify the inverter station number.
331
communication 0 The inverter station number setting is required when multiple inverters are
N030
station number 247)*1*2 connected to one GOT (RS-485 terminal communication).
*1 When Pr.549 Protocol selection = "1" (MODBUS RTU protocol), the setting range is as shown in the parentheses.
*2 When a value outside the setting range is set, the inverter operates at the initial value.

 Automatic connection system configuration

Four-wire multidrop

GOT2000
Terminating resistor

 GOT2000 series automatic recognition

• When the GOT2000 series is connected, the parameters required for the GOT connection are automatically changed by
setting the automatic recognition on the GOT2000 series side.
• Set the station number (Pr.117 or Pr.331) of the inverter before the automatic recognition is performed.
• Connect all the stations of inverters with GOT before the automatic recognition is performed. The inverter newly added
after automatic recognition will not be recognized automatically. (When an inverter is added, perform the initial setting in
Pr.999 Automatic parameter setting or set the automatic recognition on the GOT side again.)
Automatic change parameter
Automatic change item Setting value after change
PU connector connection RS-485 terminal connection
Communication speed Pr.118 Pr.332
Data length / stop bit Pr.119 Pr.333
Depending on the setting of the connected
Parity Pr.120 Pr.334
device on the GOT side.
Time delay setting Pr.123 Pr.337
CR/LF selection Pr.124 Pr.341
Number of communication
Pr.121 Pr.335 9999 (fixed)
retries
Communication check
Pr.122 Pr.336 9999 (fixed)
time interval
(Pr.549 holds the value before
Protocol selection Pr.549 0 (fixed to Mitsubishi inverter protocol)
the automatic recognition.)

NOTE
• If the automatic recognition cannot be performed, initial setting in Pr.999 is required.
• For connection to a device other than the GOT2000 series, initial setting in Pr.999 is required.
• For details, refer to the GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Product).

Parameters referred to
Pr.999 Automatic parameter settingpage 350

5.15.10 Backup/restore
The GOT can be used for backing up inverter parameters and the data used in the PLC function of inverter.

702 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
The backup data stored in the GOT can be used to restore the data in the inverter.

Pr. Name
Initial
value
Setting range Description 1
434 Network number (CC-Link
0 0 to 255 Enter the network number of the inverter.
N110*1 IE)
435
Station number (CC-Link IE) 0 0 to 255 Enter the station number of the inverter.
2
N111*1
*1 The setting is available in the inverter on which the FR-A8NCE is installed or when the FR-A800-GF inverter is used.

Ethernet CC-Link IE Field Network 3

Backup
4

Restore
5
MELSEC iQ-R
GOT2000
6

FR-A800 (with the FR-A8NCE installed)

FR-A800-GF 7
 Connected devices
• To enable backup/restore, connect either the general-purpose inverter with the FR-A8NCE or the FR-A800-GF inverter to 8
a programmable controller (master station) via the CC-Link IE Field Network.

NOTE
• The backup/restore function is enabled only when the inverter is connected to a master station programmable controller. 9
• For details on the connected devices, refer to the GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor).

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
703
  Data to be backed up and restored
• The following data can be backed up and restored. The data other than those listed in the following table cannot be backed
up or restored.
Item
Inverter parameters
Parameters used for activating the PLC function
Programs (including SFCs) used in the PLC function
Global device comment information used in the PLC function
Function block source information

 Backup/restore operation
• The GOT backs up all applicable data in all the inverters that can be identified with the network numbers and station
numbers in the controller list file.
• The GOT restores all relevant data of the inverters selected based on the network numbers and station numbers using the
backup data.
• The backup/restore cannot be performed in the following cases.
Operation Inverter status
Backup During an inverter reset
A password is registered or password protection is enabled (Pr.297 ≠ "9999").
During parameter copy using an operation panel or USB memory device (during writing to the inverter)
During restore
While password protection is enabled for files used in the PLC function (read protection)
While PLC function project data is written to, read from, or verified against a USB memory device
Restore During an inverter reset
During running
During auto tuning
A password is registered or password protection is enabled (Pr.297 ≠ "9999").
While parameter write is disabled (Pr.77 = "1")
During parameter copy using an operation panel or USB memory device (during writing to / reading from /
verification against the inverter)
During backup operation
During the RUN status of the PLC function
While password protection is enabled for files used in the PLC function (write protection)
While PLC function project data is written to, read from, or verified against a USB memory device

• On the operation panel, "RD" is displayed during backup, and "WR" is displayed during restore.

NOTE
• To enable the restore operation, Pr.434 Network number (CC-Link IE) and Pr.435 Station number (CC-Link IE) must be
set.
• Backup is performed for parameters for which parameter copy can be performed.
• For details on backup/restore function, refer to the GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor).

704 5. PARAMETERS
5.15 (N) Communication operation parameters
5.16 (G) Control parameters
1
Refer to
Purpose Parameter to set
page 2
P.G000 to P.G010, Pr.0 to Pr.46,
To set the starting torque manually Manual torque boost 706
P.G020 Pr.112
Base frequency, base frequency P.G001, P.G002, Pr.3, Pr.19, Pr.47,
To set the motor constant
voltage P.G011, P.G021 Pr.113
707
3
To select the V/F pattern matching the
Load pattern selection P.G003 Pr.14 708
application
P.G003, P.G080, Pr.14, Pr.85,
To improve the torque in a low-speed range
Excitation current low-speed
scaling factor
P.G201, P.G202, Pr.86, Pr.565, 711 4
P.G301, P.G302 Pr.566, Pr.617
To perform energy saving operation Energy saving operation P.G030 Pr.60 712
P.C100, P.G040 to Pr.71, Pr.100 to
To use a special motor Adjustable 5 points V/F
P.G049 Pr.109
713 5
To compensate the motor slip amount when
SF-PR slip amount adjustment
replacing an SF-JR motor with an SF-PR P.G060, P.G061 Pr.673, Pr.674 714
mode
motor
DC injection brake, zero speed
P.G100 to P.G103,
Pr.10 to Pr.12, 6
To adjust the motor braking torque control, servo lock, magnetic flux Pr.802, Pr.850, 715
P.G108 to P.G110
decay output shutoff Pr.1299
Output stop function P.G105 Pr.522 720
To coast the motor to a stop
Selection of motor stop method P.G106 Pr.250 722
7
To use the regeneration unit to increase the P.E300 to P.G107, Pr.30, Pr.70,
Regenerative brake selection 724
motor braking torque P.T721 Pr.599
To operate the inverter with DC power supply DC feeding mode
To avoid overvoltage fault due to
P.E300 Pr.30 724
8
Pr.882 to Pr.886,
regenerative driving by automatic Regeneration avoidance function P.G120 to P.G125 732
Pr.665
adjustment of output frequency
To decrease the deceleration time of the
motor
Increased magnetic excitation
deceleration
P.G130 to P.G132 Pr.660 to Pr.662 735 9
To select the control method Control method selection P.G200, P.G300 Pr.800, Pr.451 221
To secure the low-speed torque by
compensating the slip of the motor
Slip compensation P.G203 to P.G205 Pr.245 to Pr.247 736
10
Constant output range torque
To select the torque characteristic P.G210 Pr.803 245, 283
characteristic selection
P.G211, P.G212, Pr.820, Pr.821,
To adjust the speed control gain Speed control gain 254
P.G311, P.G312 Pr.830, Pr.831
P.G213, P.G214, Pr.824, P.825,
To adjust the torque control gain Torque control gain 294
P.G313, P.G314 Pr.834, P.835
To stabilize speed and torque feedback Speed detection filter, torque P.G215, P.G216, Pr.823, Pr.827,
332
signal detection filter P.G315, P.G316 Pr.833, Pr.837
To change excitation ratio Excitation ratio P.G217 Pr.854 332
To improve the motor trackability for the Speed feed forward control, P.G224, P.G220 to Pr.828, Pr.877 to
263
speed command changes model adaptive speed control P.G222, P.G223 Pr.879, Pr.881
To make starting torque start-up faster Torque bias P.G230 to P.G238 Pr.840 to Pr.848 265
P.M002, P.A107, Pr.144, Pr.285,
To make the motor speed constant by the
Encoder feedback control P.C140, P.C141, Pr.359, Pr.367 to 736
encoder
P.G240, P.G241 Pr.369
To select low-speed range torque Low-speed range torque
P.G250, P.G350 Pr.788, Pr.747 233
characteristics characteristics
Emergency stop operation
To select operation at emergency stop P.G264 Pr.1349 367
selection
Pr.286 to Pr.288,
To perform frequency control appropriate for P.G400 to P.G404,
Droop control Pr.679 to Pr.683, 738
load torque P.G420 to P.G424
Pr.994, Pr.995
Speed smoothing control P.G410, P.G411 Pr.653, Pr.654 741
To suppress the machine resonance
Notch filter P.G601 to P.G603 Pr.1003 to Pr.1005 271
To adjust the speed gain for Advanced
Speed control gain P.G932, P.G942 Pr.89, Pr.569 228
magnetic flux vector control

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
705
 5.16.1 Manual torque boost
V/F

Voltage drop in the low-frequency range can be compensated, improving reduction of the motor torque in the low-speed range.
• Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted according to the load, increasing the motor torque at the start up.
• By using the RT signal or X9 signal, it is possible to switch between 3 types of torque boost.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

6%*1
4%*2
0
G000
Torque boost 3%*3 0 to 30% Set the output voltage at 0 Hz in %.
2%*4
1%*5
46 0 to 30% Set the torque boost value at when the RT signal is ON.
Second torque boost 9999
G010 9999 Without the second torque boost
112 0 to 30% Set the torque boost value at when the X9 signal is ON.
Third torque boost 9999
G020 9999 Without the third torque boost
*1 The initial value for the FR-A820-00077(0.75K) or lower and FR-A840-00038(0.75K) or lower.
*2 The initial value for the FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to FR-A820-00250(3.7K), FR-A840-00052(1.5K) to FR-A840-00126(3.7K).
*3 The initial values for the FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K), FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K).
*4 The initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K).
*5 The initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) and higher.

 Starting torque adjustment

• Assuming Pr.19 Base frequency voltage is 100%, set the output voltage at 0 Hz to Pr.0 (Pr.46, Pr.112) in percentage.
• Perform the adjustment of the parameter little by little (approximately 0.5%), and confirm the status of the motor each time.
The motor may overheat when the value is set too high. Do not use more than 10% as a guideline.

100%

Output
voltage

Pr.0 Setting
Pr.46
Pr.112 range
0 Output Base
frequency frequency
(Hz)

 Setting multiple torque boosts (RT signal, X9 signal, Pr.46, Pr.112)

• When changing the torque boost depending on the application or when using single inverter switching between multiple
motors, use the second (third) torque boost.
• Pr.46 Second torque boost is enabled when the RT signal is ON.
• Pr.112 Third torque boost is enabled when the X9 signal is ON. Set "9" in Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the X9 signal function to a terminal.

NOTE
• The RT (X9) signal acts as the second (third) function selection signal and makes the other second (third) functions valid.
(Refer to page 525.)
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Set a larger value when the distance between the inverter and the motor is long or when there is not enough motor torque in
the low-speed range. It may cause overcurrent trip when it is set too large.
• Setting for Pr.0, Pr.46, and Pr.112 becomes enabled only when the V/F control is selected.
• When the initial value is set in Pr.0, the Pr.0 setting is automatically changed by changing the Pr.71 Applied motor or Pr.81
Number of motor poles setting. (Refer to page 528.)
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

706 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 Parameters referred to
Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.19 Base frequency voltagepage 707
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528 1
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521

5.16.2 Base frequency voltage 2

V/F

Use this function to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to match with the motor rating.
3
Initial value
Pr. Name Setting range Description
FM CA
3 Set the frequency at the rated motor torque. (50/60
G001
Base frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
Hz) 4
0 to 1000 V Set the base voltage.
19
Base frequency voltage 9999 8888 8888 95% of the power supply voltage
G002

47 Second V/F (base

9999
0 to 590 Hz
Same as the power supply voltage
Set the base frequency when the RL signal is ON.
5
9999
G011 frequency) 9999 Second V/F disabled
113 Third V/F (base 0 to 590 Hz Set the base frequency when the X9 signal is ON.
9999
G021 frequency) 9999 Third V/F disabled 6
 Base frequency setting (Pr.3)
• When operating a standard motor, generally set the rated frequency of the motor in Pr.3 Base frequency. When the motor
operation require switching to the commercial power supply, set the power supply frequency in Pr.3.
7
• When the frequency described on the motor rating plate is "50 Hz" only, make sure to set to 50 Hz. When it is set to 60 Hz,
the voltage will drop too much, causing insufficient torque. As a result, the inverter output may be shut off due to overload.
A caution is required especially in case of Pr.14 Load pattern selection = "1" (variable torque load).
8
• When using the Mitsubishi Electric constant torque motor, set Pr.3 to 60 Hz.

9
Output voltage (V)

10
Pr.19
Output frequency
(Hz)
Pr.3
Pr.47
Pr.113

 Setting multiple base frequencies (Pr.47, Pr.113)

• To change the base frequency when using a single inverter switching between multiple motors, use Pr.47 Second V/F
(base frequency) and Pr.113 Third V/F (base frequency).
• Pr.47 is enabled when the RT signal is ON and Pr.113 is enabled when the X9 signal is ON. To input the X9 signal, set
"9" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal.

NOTE
• The RT (X9) signal acts as the second (third) function selection signal and makes the other second (third) functions valid.
(Refer to page 525.)
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.

 Setting of base frequency voltage (Pr.19)

• Use Pr.19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage (for example, rated motor voltage).
• When it is set lower than the power supply voltage, maximum output voltage of the inverter will be the voltage set in Pr.19.

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
707
 • Pr.19 can be used in following cases.
(a) When regenerative driving (continuous regeneration, etc.) is performed frequently
Output voltage will get higher than the specification during the regenerative driving, which may cause overcurrent trip
(E.OC[]) by the increase in motor current.
(b) When the fluctuation of power supply voltage is high
When the power supply voltage exceeds the rated voltage of the motor, fluctuation of rotation speed or overheating
of motor may occur due to excessive torque or increase in motor current.
• When operating a Vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU, SF-V5RU1, SF-V5RU3, SF-V5RU4, SF-VR) with V/F control,
perform following settings.

Motor model Pr.19 setting Pr.3 setting

SF-V5RU, 3.7 kW or lower 170 V
SF-V5RU, 5.5 kW or higher 160 V
50 Hz
SF-V5RUH, 3.7 kW or lower 340 V
SF-V5RUH, 5.5 kW or higher 320 V
SF-V5RU1, 30 kW or lower 160 V
SF-V5RU1, 37 kW 170 V
33.33 Hz
SF-V5RU3, 22 kW or lower 160 V
SF-V5RU3, 30 kW 170 V
SF-V5RU4, 3.7 kW and 7.5 kW 150 V
16.67 Hz
SF-V5RU4 and motors other than described above 160 V
SF-VR 160 V
50 Hz
SF-VRH 320 V

NOTE
• When the operation becomes not possible due to failure in encoder, etc., under Vector control, set Pr.80 Motor capacity or
Pr.81 Number of motor poles = "9999" to perform V/F control.
• When the Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector
control is selected, Pr.3, Pr.47, Pr.113, and Pr.19 will become disabled, and Pr.83 and Pr.84 will become enabled.
However, S-pattern curve with Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection = "1" (S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
A) will make Pr.3 or Pr.47 and Pr.113 enabled. (S-pattern curve under PM sensorless vector control is the rated frequency of
the motor.)
• When Pr.71 Applied motor = "2" (adjustable 5 points V/F), setting for Pr.47 and Pr.113 will become disabled. Also, Pr.19
cannot be set to "8888" or "9999".
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.14 Load pattern selectionpage 708
Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selectionpage 372
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528
Pr.83 Rated motor voltage, Pr.84 Rated motor frequencypage 532
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521

5.16.3 Load pattern selection

V/F

Optimal output characteristics (V/F characteristics) for application or load characteristics can be selected.

Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
0 For constant-torque load
1 For variable-torque load
2 For constant-torque lift (boost at reverse rotation: 0%)
3 For constant-torque lift (boost at forward rotation: 0%)
14
Load pattern selection 0 RT signal ON... for constant-torque load,
G003 4
RT signal OFF... for constant-torque lift, boost at reverse rotation 0%
RT signal ON... for constant-torque load,
5
RT signal OFF... for constant-torque lift, boost at forward rotation 0%
12 to 15 Excitation current low-speed scaling factor (Refer to page 711.)

708 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 Application for constant-torque load (Pr.14 ="0", initial value)
• The output voltage will change linearly against the output frequency at the base frequency or lower. 1
• Set this parameter when driving a load that has constant load torque even when the rotation speed is changed, such as
conveyor, dolly, or roll drive.

Pr.14 = 0
2
100%

Output voltage
Pr. 3 Base frequency
4
Output frequency (Hz)

Select for constant-torque load (setting value "0") even for fan and pump in following cases.
5
• When accelerating a blower with large moment of inertia (J) in a short period of time.
• When it is a constant-torque load such as rotary pump or gear pump.
• When the load torque increases in low speed such as screw pump. 6

 Application for variable-torque load (Pr.14 ="1")

• The output voltage will change in square curve against the output frequency at the base frequency or lower. (1.75th-power
7
curve for the FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher, and the FR-A840-00930(37K) or higher)
• Set this parameter when driving a load with load torque change proportionally against the square of the rotation speed,
such as a fan or pump.
8
Pr.14 = 1

100%
9
Output voltage

10
Pr. 3 Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)

 Vertical lift load applications (Pr.14 = "2, 3")

• Set "2" when a vertical lift load is fixed as power driving load at forward rotation and regenerative load at reverse rotation.
• Pr.0 Torque boost is valid during forward rotation, and torque boost is automatically changed to "0%" during reverse
rotation.
• Set "3" for an elevated load that is in the driving mode during reverse rotation and in the regenerative load mode during
forward rotation according to the load weight, e.g. counterweight system.

Pr.14 = 2 Pr.14 = 3
For vertical lift loads For vertical lift loads
At forward rotation boost...Pr.0 setting At forward rotation boost...0%
At reverse rotation boost...0% At reverse rotation boost...Pr.0 setting

100% 100%
Forward Reverse
voltage

voltage
Output

Output

rotation rotation

Reverse Forward
Pr.0 rotation Pr.0 rotation
Base frequency Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz)

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
709
 NOTE
• When torque is continuously regenerated as vertical lift load, it is effective to set the rated voltage in Pr.19 Base frequency
voltage to prevent trip due to current at regeneration.

 Switching load pattern using signal (Pr.14 = "4, 5")

• The output characteristics can be switched between for constant-torque load and for lift with the RT signal or X17 signal.
• To input the X17 signal, set "17" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
• Switching with the RT signal will become disabled when the X17 signal is assigned.
Pr.14 setting RT (X17) signal Output characteristics
ON For constant-torque load (same as setting value "0")
4
OFF For lift, boost at reverse rotation 0% (same as setting value "2")
ON For constant-torque load (same as setting value "0")
5
OFF For lift, boost at forward rotation 0% (same as setting value "3")

NOTE
• The RT signal is assigned to the terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to 189 may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function
of each terminal.
• Pr.14 will become enabled under V/F control.
• Other second functions will become enabled when the RT signal is ON.

Parameters referred to
Pr.0 Torque boostpage 706
Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521

710 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
5.16.4 Excitation current low-speed scaling factor
Magnetic flux Sensorless
1
Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control or Real sensorless vector control, the excitation current scaling factor in the low-
speed range can be adjusted.
2
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.86
0 to 5
Refer to page 708 for details on the operation under V/F control.
Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.86 3
12*1 Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.617
Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.617
14 13*1 Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.86
G003
Load pattern selection 0
Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.86 4
14*1 Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.617
(X17-OFF), Pr.86 (X17 signal-ON)

15*1
Forward rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.617
(X17-OFF), Pr.86 (X17 signal-ON) 5
Reverse rotation excitation current low-speed scaling factor: Pr.86
0 to 400 Hz Set the frequency at which increased excitation is started.
85
G201
Excitation current break
point
9999
9999
SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined frequency is
applied.
6
Motor other than the above: 10 Hz is applied.
0 to 300% Set an excitation current scaling factor at 0 Hz.
86
G202
Excitation current low-
speed scaling factor
9999
9999
SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined scaling factor
is applied.
7
Motor other than the above: 130% is applied.
Set an excitation current scaling factor when different excitation
0 to 300%
617
Reverse rotation excitation
current low-speed scaling 9999
current scaling factors are used for forward and reverse rotation.
SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined scaling factor
8
G080
factor 9999 is applied.
Motor other than the above: 130% is applied.

565 Second motor excitation

0 to 400 Hz Set an excitation current break point when the RT signal is ON. 9
SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined frequency is
9999
G301 current break point 9999 applied.
Motor other than the above: 10 Hz is applied.

0 to 300%
Set an excitation current low-speed scaling factor when the RT 10
Second motor excitation signal is ON.
566
current low-speed scaling 9999 SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor: The predetermined scaling factor
G302
factor 9999 is applied.
Motor other than the above: 130% is applied.
*1 The setting is valid only under Advanced magnetic flux vector control or Real sensorless vector control. When Pr.14 = "12 to 15" and V/F control
is selected, the operation is the same as the one for constant-torque load (Pr.14 = "0"). (Refer to page 708.)

• Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control or Real sensorless vector control, excitation current in the low-speed range
can be increased to improve torque. When Pr.14 = "12 to 15", the excitation current scaling factor can be switched for the
forward/reverse rotation.
• Increased excitation is applied when the output frequency is equal to or lower than the setting in Pr.85 Excitation current
break point. The excitation current scaling factor at 0 Hz is set in Pr.86 Excitation current low-speed scaling factor.
Use Pr.565 Second motor excitation current break point and Pr.566 Second motor excitation current low-speed
scaling factor for the setting for using the second motor (RT signal-ON).
Excitation current scaling factor
Pr.86
(Pr.566)

100%

0
Pr.85 Output frequency
(Pr.565)

• When Pr.14 = "14 or 15" and the X17 signal is turned ON, the excitation current scaling factor is switched from the value
set in Pr.617 to the value set in Pr.86.

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
711
 • An excitation current low-speed scaling factor set in the parameter shown in the table is used according to the Pr.14 setting
and other conditions.
During forward rotation During reverse rotation
Pr.14 setting X17 signal
RT signal OFF RT signal ON RT signal OFF RT signal ON
0 to 5 — Pr.86 Pr.566 Pr.86 Pr.566
12 — Pr.86 Pr.566 Pr.617 Pr.617
13 — Pr.617 Pr.617 Pr.86 Pr.566
OFF Pr.86 Pr.566 Pr.617 Pr.617
14
ON Pr.86 Pr.566 Pr.86 Pr.566
OFF Pr.617 Pr.617 Pr.86 Pr.566
15
ON Pr.86 Pr.566 Pr.86 Pr.566
• When the SF-PR/SF-HR/SF-HRCA motor is used (Pr.71 = "40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 70, 73, or 74") and "9999" is set in Pr.85/
Pr.86, the predetermined setting in the following table is applied.

Motor SF-PR SF-HR/SF-HRCA

capacity Pr.81 = "2" Pr.81 = "4" Pr.81 = "6" Pr.81 = "2" Pr.81 = "4" Pr.81 = "6"
(kW) Pr.85 Pr.86 Pr.85 Pr.86 Pr.85 Pr.86 Pr.85 Pr.86 Pr.85 Pr.86 Pr.85 Pr.86
0.4 — — — — — — 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130%
0.75 20 Hz 130% 20 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130%
1.5 30 Hz 140% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130%
2.2 10 Hz 150% 10 Hz 130% 20 Hz 130% 20 Hz 150% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130%
3.7 30 Hz 150% 25 Hz 133% 20 Hz 130% 30 Hz 160% 30 Hz 140% 10 Hz 130%
5.5 10 Hz 150% 10 Hz 130% 30 Hz 130% 30 Hz 140% 30 Hz 140% 20 Hz 140%
7.5 10 Hz 150% 30 Hz 118% 30 Hz 130% 30 Hz 140% 30 Hz 140% 30 Hz 150%
11 10 Hz 150% 20 Hz 140% 10 Hz 130% 30 Hz 140% 10 Hz 130% 30 Hz 130%
15 10 Hz 150% 30 Hz 130% 30 Hz 130% 20 Hz 140% 10 Hz 130% 30 Hz 130%
18.5 10 Hz 150% 30 Hz 130% 20 Hz 130% 30 Hz 150% 30 Hz 140% 30 Hz 140%
22 30 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 30 Hz 150% 30 Hz 140% 20 Hz 140%
30 10 Hz 150% 20 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 30 Hz 150% 20 Hz 150% 10 Hz 130%
37 20 Hz 140% 10 Hz 140% 20 Hz 130% 20 Hz 160% 20 Hz 150% 10 Hz 130%
45 10 Hz 140% 20 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 10 Hz 130% 20 Hz 140% 10 Hz 140%
55 20 Hz 140% 30 Hz 130% — — 10 Hz 140% 20 Hz 150% — —

5.16.5 Energy saving control

V/F Magnetic flux

The inverter will automatically perform energy saving operation without setting detailed parameters.
This control method is suitable for applications such as fans and pumps.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

0 Normal operation
60 Energy saving
0 4 Energy saving operation
G030 control selection
9 Optimum excitation control

 Energy saving operation (Pr.60 = "4")

• Setting Pr.60 = "4" will select the energy saving operation.
• With the energy saving operation, the inverter will automatically control the output voltage so the inverter output power
during the constant-speed operation will become minimal.
• Energy saving operation will be enabled under V/F control.

 Optimum excitation control (Pr.60 = "9")

• Setting Pr.60 = "9" will select the Optimum excitation control.
• The Optimum excitation control is a control method to decide the output voltage by controlling the excitation current so the
efficiency of the motor is maximized.
• Optimum excitation control will be enabled under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control.

712 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 NOTE
• In the energy saving operation mode, an energy saving effect is not expected for applications with high load torque or with the 1
equipment with frequent acceleration and deceleration.
• In the Optimum excitation control mode, an energy saving effect is not expected when the motor capacity is extremely small
compared with the inverter capacity or when multiple motors are connected to a single inverter.
• When the energy saving operation mode or Optimum excitation control mode is selected, the deceleration time may become
2
longer than the setting value. Also, it may cause overvoltage more often compared to constant-torque load characteristics, so
set the deceleration time longer.
• When the motor becomes unstable during the acceleration, set the acceleration time longer. 3
• Output current may increase slightly with the energy saving operation mode or the Optimum excitation control mode since the
output voltage is controlled.

4
5.16.6 Adjustable 5 points V/F
V/F

By setting a desired V/F characteristic from the start up to the base frequency or base voltage with the V/F control (frequency
5
voltage/frequency), a dedicated V/F pattern can be generated.
The optimal V/F pattern matching the torque characteristics of the facility can be set.
6
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Standard motor (such as SF-JR)
2
71
C100
Applied motor 0 Adjustable 5 points V/F 7
Others Refer to page 528.
100
V/F1 (first frequency) 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
G040
101 V/F1 (first frequency
0V 0 to 1000 V
8
G041 voltage)
102 V/F2 (second
9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
G042 frequency)
103 V/F2 (second frequency
0V 0 to 1000 V
9
G043 voltage)
104
V/F3 (third frequency) 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
G044 Set each point of the V/F pattern (frequency, voltage).
105 V/F3 (third frequency 9999: Do not set V/F. 10
0V 0 to 1000 V
G045 voltage)
106
V/F4 (fourth frequency) 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
G046
107 V/F4 (fourth frequency
0V 0 to 1000 V
G047 voltage)
108
V/F5 (fifth frequency) 9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
G048
109 V/F5 (fifth frequency
0V 0 to 1000 V
G049 voltage)
• By setting the V/F1 (first frequency voltage/first frequency) to V/F5 parameters in advance, a desired V/F characteristic
can be obtained.
• For an example, with the equipment with large static friction factor and small dynamic friction factor, large torque is required
only at the start up, so a V/F pattern that will raise the voltage only at the low-speed range is set.
• Setting procedure

1. Set the rated motor voltage in Pr.19 Base frequency voltage.

(No function at the setting of "9999" or "8888".)

2. Set Pr.71 Applied motor = "2" (adjustable 5 points V/F).

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
713
 3. Set frequency and voltage to be set in Pr.100 to Pr.109.
Voltage
Base
frequency
voltage
Pr.19 V/F5

V/F4

Torque V/F3
boost V/F1
Pr.0 V/F2 Frequency
0 Base
V/F Characteristic frequency
Pr.3

CAUTION
• Make sure to set the parameters correctly according to the motor used. Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat
and burn.

NOTE
• The adjustable 5 points V/F is enabled under V/F control.
• When Pr.19 Base frequency voltage = "8888 or 9999", setting of Pr.71 = "2" is not available. To set "2" in Pr.71, set the rated
motor voltage in Pr.19.

• A write disable error " " is generated when the same frequency value is used for multiple points.
• Set frequency or voltage for each point in Pr.100 to Pr.109 within the range of Pr.3 Base frequency or Pr.19 Base frequency
voltage.
• When Pr.71 = "2", Pr.47 Second V/F (base frequency) and Pr.113 Third V/F (base frequency) are not available.
• When Pr.71 = "2", the inverter calculates the characteristic of the electronic thermal relay for a standard motor.
• By simultaneously using Pr.60 Energy saving control selection and the adjustable 5 points V/F, further energy saving effect
is expected.
• The Pr.0 Torque boost and Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage settings are automatically changed according to
the Pr.71 setting. (Refer to page 531.)

Parameters referred to
Pr.0 Torque boostpage 706
Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.19 Base frequency voltagepage 707
Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltagepage 715
Pr.47 Second V/F (base frequency), Pr.113 Third V/F (base frequency)page 713
Pr.60 Energy saving control selectionpage 712
Pr.71 Applied motor, Pr.450 Second applied motorpage 528

5.16.7 SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode

V/F

• As compared to our conventional SF-JR motor, the slip amount is small for the high-performance energy-saving SF-PR
motor. When replacing the SF-JR to the SF-PR, the slip amount is reduced and the rotations per minute increases.
Therefore, when the SF-PR is used with the same frequency setting as that of the SF-JR, power consumption may
increase as compared to the SF-JR.
• By setting the slip amount adjustment mode, the frequency command can be adjusted to keep the rotations per minute of
the SF-PR equivalent to those of the SF-JR for power consumption reduction.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

673 SF-PR slip amount adjustment 2, 4, 6 Set the number of SF-PR motor poles.
9999
G060 operation selection 9999 The slip amount adjustment is disabled.
674 SF-PR slip amount adjustment
100% 0 to 500% Setting is available for fine adjustment of the slip amount.
G061 gain
• By setting the number of SF-PR motor poles in Pr.673 SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation selection, the SF-PR
slip amount adjustment mode is activated.
• The SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode is available only under V/F control.

714 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 • Use Pr.674 SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain to fine-tune the rotations per minute. To reduce the rotations per minute
(to increase the compensation frequency), set a larger value in Pr.674. To increase the rotations per minute (to reduce the
compensation frequency), set a smaller value in Pr.674. (Lower rotations per minute reduce the power consumption, and
1
higher rotations per minute increase the power consumption.)

NOTE 2
• The slip amount adjustment is not available in the following conditions.
During acceleration/deceleration, during DC injection brake operation, during PID control, during orientation control, during
encoder feedback control, during stall prevention operation, during regeneration avoidance operation, during traverse
operation, and while the slip compensation is valid (Pr.245).
3
• The slip amount adjustment is not available when the applicable motor capacity of the inverter is not compatible with the SF-
PR. (For details on applicable motor capacity, refer to page 826.)
4
5.16.8 DC injection brake, zero speed control, and servo
lock 5
• Adjust the braking torque and timing to stop the motor using the DC injection brake.
Zero speed control is also available under Real sensorless vector control, and zero speed control and servo lock are
selectable under Vector control or PM sensorless vector control.
6
When the DC injection brake operation is used, DC voltage is applied to the motor to prevent rotation of the motor shaft,
and when the zero speed control is used, Vector control is performed to keep 0 r/min. Either way, when a motor shaft is
rotated by external force, it does not go back to the original position.
7
When the servo lock control is used, the position of the motor shaft is held. When a motor shaft is rotated by external force,
it goes back to the original position.
• Select the magnetic flux decay output shutoff function to decay the magnetic flux before shutting off the output at a stop.
8
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

10 DC injection brake 0 to 120 Hz

Set the operation frequency for the DC injection brake (zero speed 9
3 Hz control / servo lock).
G100 operation frequency
9999 The operation starts at the frequency set in Pr.13 or lower.
0 Without DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock)
11 DC injection brake Set the operation time for the DC injection brake (zero speed control
10
0.5 s 0.1 to 10 s
G101 operation time / servo lock).
8888 The operation continues while the X13 signal is ON.
4%*1
12 DC injection brake Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque). When set to "0", the DC
G110 operation voltage 2%*2 0 to 30%
injection brake is not applied.
1%*3
802 Pre-excitation 0 Zero speed control
0
G102 selection 1 Servo lock
1299 Second pre- 0 Zero speed control The pre-excitation operation of the
0
G108 excitation selection 1 Servo lock second motor can be selected.
0 DC injection brake operation
850 Brake operation
0 1 Zero speed control (Real sensorless vector control)
G103 selection
2 Magnetic flux decay output shutoff (Real sensorless vector control)
*1 The initial value for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.
*2 The initial value for the FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-03160(55K), FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-01800(55K).
*3 The initial value for the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) and higher.

 Setting of operating frequency (Pr.10)

• By setting the frequency to operate the DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock) to Pr.10 DC injection brake
operation frequency, the DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock) will operate when it reaches this frequency
at the time of deceleration.
• When Pr.10 = "9999", DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock) will start when the frequency reaches Pr.13
Starting frequency.

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
715
 • The DC injection brake operation frequency depends on the stopping method.
Stopping method Parameter setting DC injection brake operation frequency
0.5 Hz or higher in Pr.10 Pr.10 setting
Press the STOP key on the operation panel. Lower than 0.5 Hz in Pr.10, and 0.5 Hz or
0.5 Hz
Turn OFF the STF/STR signal. higher in Pr.13
Lower than 0.5 Hz in both Pr.10 and Pr.13 Pr.10 or Pr.13 setting, whichever larger
Set frequency to 0 Hz — Pr.13 setting or 0.5 Hz, whichever smaller
• The DC injection brake operation frequency will be fixed to 0 Hz under PM sensorless vector control (low-speed range
high-torque mode disabled).

(Hz)
Output
frequency
Pr. 10 Operation
frequency
Time
DC injection Pr.12
brake Operation
voltage voltage
Time

Pr. 11 Operation time

NOTE
• When executing pre-excitation (zero speed control) under Real sensorless vector control, set Pr.10 DC injection brake
operation frequency to 0.5 Hz or lower since it may cause motor vibration, etc., at the time of deceleration stop.
• The initial value of Pr.10 will automatically switch to 0.5 Hz under Vector control.

 Setting of operation time (X13 signal, Pr.11)

• Set the operation time for the DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock) to Pr.11 DC injection brake operation
time.
• When the motor does not stop due to large load moment (J), increase the setting to ensure the effect.
• When Pr.11 = "0 s", DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock) will not operate. (The motor will coast to stop.)
• When Pr.11 = "8888", DC injection brake (zero speed control / servo lock) will operate when the X13 signal is turned ON.
DC injection brake will operate when the X13 signal is turned ON even while operating.
• For the X13 signal input, set "13" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 to assign the function.

When Pr. 11 = "8888"

frequency
Output

(Hz)

Time

Pr.12
DC injection
brake voltage Time

X13 signal ON ON OFF

STF ON

NOTE
• Under Real sensorless vector control, when the X13 signal turns ON while Pr.11 = "8888", the zero speed control is activated
regardless of the Pr.850 Brake operation selection setting.
• Under Vector control or PM sensorless vector control, zero speed control or servo lock will operate depending of the setting
of Pr.802.
• The X13 signal is disabled during PM sensorless vector control.

716 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 Setting of operation voltage (torque) (Pr.12)
• Set the percentage against the power supply voltage in Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage. (The setting is not 1
used for zero speed control or servo lock.)
• The DC injection brake operation is not available when the setting of Pr.12 is 0%. (The motor will coast to stop.)

NOTE
2
• When the setting of Pr.12 is the initial value, the setting corresponding to the motor is set according to the Pr.71 Applied motor
setting. (Refer to page 531.) However, when an energy saving motor (SF-HR or SF-HRCA) is used, change the Pr.12 setting
as shown below. 3
Inverter Pr.12 setting
FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower
4%
FR-A840-00126(3.7K) or lower
FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K)
4
3%
FR-A840-00170(5.5K), FR-A840-00250(7.5K)
FR-A820-00630(11K) to FR-A820-01250(22K), FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher
2%
FR-A840-00310(11K) to FR-A840-00620(22K), FR-A840-00930(37K) or higher 5
FR-A820-01540(30K)
1.5%
FR-A840-00770(30K)

• Even if the setting value of Pr.12 is made larger, braking torque will be limited so the output current will be within the rated
current of the inverter.
6

 Braking operation selection under Real sensorless vector control (Pr.850 7

= "0 or 1")
• The braking operation under Real sensorless vector control can be selected between the DC injection brake operation
(initial setting) and zero speed control. 8
By setting Pr.850 Brake operation selection = "1", zero speed control will be performed at the frequency set in Pr.10 DC
injection brake operation frequency or lower.
9
NOTE
• Under Real sensorless vector control, when the X13 signal turns ON while Pr.11 = "8888", zero speed control is activated
regardless of the Pr.850 setting.
• When restarting the operation after a brake operation under Real sensorless vector control, set Pr.850 = "1" (zero speed 10
control). Setting "0" (DC injection brake) may cause a delay of about 2 seconds from the time the start up command is input
until it actually is output.

 Magnetic flux decay output shutoff and the Magnetic flux decay output
shutoff signal (X74 signal, Pr.850 = "2")
• Frequent starts/stops (inching) under Real sensorless vector control may cause an inverter failure or create a difference
in operation with the motor. The reason is that some magnetic flux is left in the motor at shutoff of the inverter output. If this
is the case, set Pr.850 = "2" (magnetic flux decay output shutoff) or turn ON the Magnetic flux decay output shutoff (X74)
signal to decay the magnetic flux at a stop, and then shut off the output.
• While Pr.850 = "2", deceleration starts at turning OFF of the start command, and the magnetic flux decay output shutoff is
activated when the estimated speed becomes lower than Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency.
• While the brake sequence function is active, the magnetic flux decay output shutoff is activated when the running frequency
drops to 0.5 Hz or Pr.13 Starting frequency, whichever is smaller.

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
717
 • Inverter output voltage shutoff timing when Pr.850 = "2"

Normal operation During brake sequence

Start command Start command
(STF, STR) (STF, STR)

Speed command Speed command

(rotation per (rotation per
second) minute)
Pr.10 DC injection Pr.13 Starting
brake operation frequency or 0.5Hz
frequency (whichever is lower)
ON
Magnetic flux decaying
ON Magnetic flux
Magnetic flux decaying
Magnetic flux decay decay
processing time*1 processing time*1
Output voltage ON
Output voltage ON
RUN ON
RUN ON
RY2 ON
RY2 ON
Mechanical brake ON
Mechanical brake ON
MC on the output side ON
MC on the output side ON
Do not turn OFF MC
during this period
Do not turn OFF MC
during this period

*1 Maximum processing time of the magnetic flux decay

• Tuning ON the Magnetic flux decay output shutoff (X74) signal starts the magnetic flux decay output shutoff regardless of
the Pr.850 setting. For the X74 signal, set "74" in any of Pr.178 to 189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.
• Inverter output shutoff timing with X74 signal

X74 signal MRS signal

X74 ON MRS ON
Magnetic flux decay
processing time*1

Output voltage ON Output voltage ON

RUN ON RUN ON

Mechanical brake ON Mechanical brake ON

MC on the output side ON MC on the output side ON

Do not turn off MC

during this processing time
*1 Maximum processing time of the magnetic flux decay
• Since the torque will decrease at the time of magnetic flux decay output shutoff, set up so the mechanical brake will
operate.
• The magnetic flux decay output shutoff will be canceled at the time of restart and when the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX)
signal or External DC injection brake operation start (X13) signal is turned ON.
• If an MC is installed at the inverter's output side, set to open the MC after the operation time of the magnetic flux decay
output shutoff elapses. (See below.)
Motor capacity (Pr.80 setting) 2.2 kW or lower 3.7 kW to 11 kW 15 kW to 30 kW 37 kW to 55 kW 75 kW or higher
Magnetic flux decay process time 250 ms 500 ms 800 ms 900 ms 1100 ms

718 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 NOTE
• When operating under controls other than Real sensorless vector control, the inverter will immediately shutoff the output when 1
the X74 signal is turned ON.
• Even under Real sensorless vector control, the inverter will immediately shutoff the output when the X74 signal is turned ON
during the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure and online auto tuning during the start up.
• If another output-shutoff trigger (inverter fault, turn-ON of the MRS signal, etc.) occurs during the magnetic flux decay
2
operation, the magnetic flux decay operation is terminated, and the output is shut off immediately.
• Unlike the MRS signal, voltage is output during the magnetic flux decay output shutoff operation, so take caution on electric
shocks. 3
• When the release timing of the mechanical brake is too fast, the motor shaft may be rotated by dropping or external force.
When the release timing is too late, the overcurrent prevention operation, stall prevention operation, or electronic thermal O/
L relay function may be activated. Perform release of the mechanical brake matching the equipment using the Output
frequency detection (FU) signal or Output current detection (Y12) signal. 4
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
5
 Braking operation selection under Vector control or PM sensorless
vector control (Pr.802, Pr.1299) 6
• Pr.802 Pre-excitation selection to select the braking operation when the pre-excitation is performed from either zero speed
control or servo lock.
• Turning ON the RT signal enables the second pre-excitation selection (when Pr.450 ≠ "9999").
7
Pr.802
Pre-
(Pr.1299) Description
excitation
setting
Even under a load, the inverter does not rotate the motor and holds 0 r/min. However, it will not return to 8
Zero speed its original position when the shaft moves due to external force.
0 (initial value)
control This setting is invalid during position control. The inverter operates according to this setting only during
speed control.
Even under a load, the inverter holds the position of the motor shaft. When the shaft moves due to external 9
force, it will return to its original position after the external force is removed.
1 Servo lock
To perform the position control, this loop gain can be adjusted using Pr.422 Position control gain
(Pr.1298 Second position control gain).
10
• The relation between the DC injection brake operation and pre-excitation operation is as follows.
Control Pr.802 X13-ON
Control method Pr.850 Deceleration stop LX-ON
mode (Pr.1299) (Pr.11 = "8888")
V/F control — — — DC injection brake — DC injection brake
Advanced magnetic flux vector
— — — DC injection brake — DC injection brake
control
— 0 DC injection braking
Zero speed Zero speed
— 1 Zero speed
Speed
Magnetic flux decay
— 2 Zero speed Zero speed
output shutoff
Real sensorless vector control
— 0 DC injection braking
Zero speed Zero speed
— 1 Zero speed
Torque
Magnetic flux decay
— 2 Zero speed Zero speed
output shutoff
0 — Zero speed Zero speed Zero speed
Speed
1 — Servo lock Servo lock Servo lock
Vector control
Torque — — Zero speed Zero speed Zero speed
Position — — — Servo lock —
PM sensorless vector control,
low-speed range high-torque Speed — — DC injection brake — —
mode disabled
PM sensorless vector control, 0 Zero speed Zero speed
Speed — —
low-speed range high-torque 1 Servo lock Servo lock
mode enabled Position — — — Servo lock —

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
719
  Pre-excitation signal (LX signal)
• When the Pre-excitation/servo ON (LX) signal is turned ON while the motor stops under Real sensorless vector control,
Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control, pre-excitation (zero speed control / servo lock) starts.
• To input the LX signal, set "23" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
When Pr. 850 = 1

Output frequency
Pr. 10
Operation
frequency

(Hz) Time

Zero speed control

Servo lock
Normal operation Pr. 11 Normal operation
Operation time
LX signal ON

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• Performing pre-excitation (by using the LX or X13 signal) during torque control (under Real sensorless vector control) may
rotate a motor at a low speed even though a start command (STF or STR) is not input. The inverter at a start command ON
may also rotate the motor at a low speed even though a speed limit value is set to zero. It must be confirmed that the motor
running will not cause any safety problem before performing pre-excitation.
• Note that during the pre-excitation operation, a voltage is applied to the motor even with the FWD/REV indicator OFF on the
operation panel.
• When offline auto tuning (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "1, 11, or 101") is performed during pre-excitation operation,
pre-excitation is disabled.

CAUTION
• During the orientation operation, do not set "0 or 8888" in Pr.11 and do not set "0" in Pr.12. The motor may not stop
properly.
• Install a mechanical brake to make an emergency stop or to stay stopped for a long time.
Wait until the machine stops completely, and fix the motor with a mechanical brake, then turn the LX signal (pre-
excitation) OFF.

Parameters referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 528
Pr.80 Motor capacitypage 532
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.422 Position control gain, Pr.1298 Second position control gainpage 328

5.16.9 Output stop function

The motor coasts to a stop (inverter output is shutoff) when the inverter output frequency falls to Pr.522 setting or lower.

Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
522 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency to start coasting to a stop (output shutoff).
Output stop frequency 9999
G105 9999 No function
• When both of the frequency setting signal and output frequency fall to the frequency set in Pr.522 or lower, the inverter
stops the output and the motor coasts to a stop.
• The motor re-starts when the frequency setting signal exceeds Pr.522 + 2 Hz and is accelerated at the Pr.13 Starting
frequency (0.01 Hz under PM sensorless vector control).

720 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 Example of when target frequency>Pr.522+2Hz, and start signal is ON/OFF
1
Output frequency∗1
Target frequency
(fixed)

Pr.522+2Hz
2
Pr.522

Pr.13
Time
3
Inverter output shutoff
STF

RUN
4

Example of: target frequency = analog input command, start signal always ON
Analog input command 5
Pr.522+2Hz
Pr.522 6
Time

Output frequency
∗2 ∗3 ∗3
7
Pr.522+2Hz
Pr.522

∗1 ∗1
8
Pr.13

Inverter output Inverter output Time

STF
shutoff shutoff
9
RUN
*1 The output frequency to be compared with the Pr.522 setting is the output frequency before slip compensation (V/F control or Advanced
magnetic flux vector control), or the speed command value converted into the frequency (Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, 10
or PM sensorless vector control).
*2 The motor is accelerated at the Pr.13 Starting frequency (0.01 Hz under PM sensorless vector control).
*3 The steepness of the slope depends on the acceleration/deceleration time settings such as Pr.7.

NOTE
• When the output stop function is enabled (Pr.522 ≠ "9999"), the DC injunction brake (zero speed control / servo lock) operation
is disabled and the motor coasts to stop when the output frequency drops to the Pr.522 setting or lower.
• The motor starts acceleration again at Pr.13 Starting frequency (0.01 Hz under PM sensorless vector control) when the
command value exceeds Pr.522 + 2 Hz again if the start signal remains ON while the motor is coasting after the frequency
drops to the Pr.522 setting or lower. Re-acceleration during coasting may cause an output shutoff of the inverter depending
on the parameter setting. (Activation of the restart function is recommended especially for a PM motor.)
• The output stop frequency function is disabled during PID control, JOG operation, power failure stop, traverse function
operation, offline auto tuning, orientation control, position control, torque control, or stop-on contact control.
• The output stop function does not operate during reverse rotation deceleration. However, when the frequency setting signal
and output frequency fall to Pr.522 or lower, the inverter output is shut off.
• During the output stop due to the output stop function (when forward/reverse command is given, but frequency command is
not given), the FWD/REV LED indicator on the operation panel blinks fast. (When the frequency command is not given even
if the forward/reverse command is given.)

CAUTION
• A PM motor is a motor with interior permanent magnets. High voltage is generated at motor terminals while the motor is
running.
Do not touch motor terminals and other parts until the motor stops to prevent an electric shock.

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
721
 Parameters referred to
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency, Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time, Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltagepage 715
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382

5.16.10 Start signal operation selection / stop selection

Select the stopping method (deceleration stop or coasting) at turn-OFF of the start signal.
Coasting can be selected for the cases such that the motor is stopped with a mechanical brake at turn-OFF of the start signal.
The operation of the start signal (STF/STR) can be selected.

Description
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range
Start signal (STF/STR) Stop operation
The motor coasts to a stop after a
STF signal: Forward rotation start
0 to 100 s lapse of the setting time when the
STR signal: Reverse rotation start
start signal is turned OFF.
The motor coasts to a stop after a
STF signal: Start signal
lapse of the (Pr.250 - 1000)
1000 to 1100 s STR signal: Forward/reverse rotation
250 Stop seconds when the start signal is
9999 signal
G106 selection turned OFF.
STF signal: Forward rotation start
9999
STR signal: Reverse rotation start
The motor is decelerated to a stop
STF signal: Start signal
when the start signal is turned OFF.
8888 STR signal: Forward/reverse rotation
signal

 Stop selection
 To decelerate the motor to a stop
• Set Pr.250 = "9999 (initial value) or 8888".
• The motor is decelerated to a stop when the start signal (STF/STR) is turned OFF.

Deceleration starts
Output frequency

when start signal turns OFF

Deceleration time
(Time set in Pr. 8, etc.)
(Hz)

DC brake
Time
Start
ON OFF
signal
RUN
signal ON OFF

 To coast the motor to a stop

• Set the time required to shut off the output after the start signal is turned OFF in Pr.250. When "1000 to 1100" is set, output
is shut off after a lapse of the (Pr.250 - 1000) seconds.
• The output is shut off after a lapse of the setting time of Pr.250 when the start signal is turned OFF. Motor coasts to a stop.
• The RUN signal is turned OFF when the output is shut off.
Output is shut off when
Output frequency

set time elapses after

start signal turns OFF
Pr.250

Motor coasts to stop

(Hz)

Time

Start signal ON OFF

RUN signal ON OFF

722 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 NOTE
• The stop selection setting is disabled when following functions are operating. 1
Position control
Power failure stop function (Pr.261)
PU stop (Pr.75)
Deceleration stop due to fault definition (Pr.875)
2
Deceleration stop due to communication error (Pr.502)
Offline auto tuning (with motor rotation)

• When Pr.250 ≠ "9999 or 8888", acceleration/deceleration is performed in accordance to the frequency command until the 3
output is shut off by turning OFF the start signal.
• When the restart signal is turned ON during the motor coasting, the operation is resumed from Pr.13 Starting frequency.
• Even with the setting of coasting to a stop, when the LX signal is turned ON, the motor does not coast but zero speed control 4
or servo lock is applied.

 Start signal operation selection 5

 2-wire type (STF signal, STR signal)
• The following figure shows the 2-wire type connection.
• As an initial setting, the forward/reverse rotation signals (STF/STR) acts as both start and stop signals. Either one turned 6
ON will be enabled, and the operation will follow that signal. The motor will decelerate to a stop when both are turned OFF
(or both are turned ON) during the operation.
• The frequency can be set by inputting 0 to 10 VDC between the speed setting input terminals 2 and 5, or with Pr.4 to Pr.6 7
Multi-speed setting (high speed, middle speed, and low speed). (For the multi-speed operation, refer to page 411.)
• By setting Pr.250 = "1000 to 1100, 8888", the STF signal input becomes the start command and the STR signal input
becomes the forward/reverse command. 8

Forward
rotation start STF Start signal STF 9
Reverse STR Inverter Forward/ STR Inverter
rotation start SD reverse SD
10
signal
10 10
2 2
5 5
Reverse Forward

Reverse Forward
rotation rotation

rotation rotation
Output frequency

Output frequency

Time Time

ON ON
STF STF
ON ON
STR STR
2-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "9999") 2-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "8888")

NOTE
• By setting Pr.250 = "0 to 100, 1000 to 1100", the motor will coast to a stop when the start command is turned OFF.
• The STF and STR signals are assigned to terminals STF and STR in the initial status. The STF signal can be assigned to
terminal STF only using Pr.178 STF terminal function selection, and the STR signal can be assigned to terminal STR only
using Pr.179 STR terminal function selection.

 3-wire type (STF signal, STR signal, STP (STOP) signal)

• The following figure shows the 3-wire type connection.
• The self-holding function is enabled when the STP (STOP) signal is turned ON. In such case, the forward/reverse signal
is simply used as a start signal.

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
723
 • Even if a start signal (STF or STR) is turned ON and then OFF, the start command remains valid and the motor operation
continues. To change the rotation direction, turn the STR (STF) signal ON once and then OFF.
• In order to decelerate the motor to a stop, turn OFF the STP (STOP) signal once.

Stop Forward Stop Start

rotation start
STF STF
Inverter Inverter
Reverse
rotation start
STR STP (STOP)

STP (STOP) STR

Forward rotation
/reverse rotation
SD SD

Reverse Forward
Reverse Forward

rotation rotation
rotation rotation

Output frequency
Output frequency

Time Time

ON ON ON
STF STF
ON
STR STR ON

STP (STOP) ON STP (STOP) ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF
3-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "9999") 3-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "8888")

NOTE
• The STP (STOP) signal is assigned to terminal STP (STOP) in the initial status. Set "25" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 to assign
the STP (STOP) signal to another terminal.
• When the JOG operation is enabled by turning ON the JOG signal, the STP (STOP) signal will be disabled.
• Even when the output is stopped by turning ON the MRS signal, the self-holding function is not canceled.

 Start signal selection

Pr.250 setting and inverter status
STF STR
0 to 100 s, 9999 1000 to 1100 s, 8888
OFF OFF Stop
Stop
OFF ON Reverse rotation
ON OFF Forward rotation Forward rotation
ON ON Stop Reverse rotation

Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367
Pr.4 to Pr.6 (Multi-speed setting)page 411
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 381, page 382
Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selectionpage 336
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.261 Power failure stop selectionpage 642
Pr.419 Position command source selectionpage 298
Pr.502 Stop mode selection at communication errorpage 663
Pr.875 Fault definitionpage 422

5.16.11 Regenerative brake selection and DC feeding

mode
• When performing frequent start and stop operation, usage rate of the regenerative brake can be increased by using the
optional high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) or the brake unit (FR-BU2, BU, or FR-BU).

724 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 • The multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC in power regeneration mode 1 or 2), power regeneration common
converter (FR-CV), and power regeneration converter (MT-RC) are used for continuous operation during regenerative
driving. The high power factor converter (FR-HC2) and multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC in common bus
1
regeneration mode) can also be used to reduce harmonics, improve power factor, and operate continuously during
regenerative driving.
• It is possible to choose between the DC feeding mode 1, which will operate with DC power supply (terminals P and N), and
2
DC feeding mode 2, which will normally operate in AC power supply (terminals R, S, and T) and operate in DC power
supply (terminal P and N), such as batteries, at the time of power failure.
• While the power is supplied only to the control circuit, the reset operation when the power is supplied to the main circuit
3
can be selected.

Pr. Name
Initial
Setting range Description
4
value
0 to 2, 10, 11,
20, 21, 100 to
102, 110, 111, 5
*1
120, 121
30 Regenerative function 0*1*3, 2, 10, 11, 102, Set the applied regeneration unit, the terminal used for power supply, and
E300 selection 10*2 whether to reset the inverter when the power is supplied to the main circuit.
110, 111*2
0, 2, 10, 20,
6
100, 102, 110,
120*3
70 Special regenerative
0% 0 to 100% Set the %ED of the built-in brake transistor operation.
7
G107*4 brake duty
599 X10 terminal input 0*1*3, 0 Normally open input
T721 selection 1 *2 1 Normally closed input (NC contact input specification)
8
*1 The initial value or setting range for the standard model.
*2 The initial value or setting range for the separated converter type.
*3 The initial value or setting range for the IP55 compatible model.
*4 The setting is available for the standard model. 9
 Details of the setting value
• FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower
Power supply
10
Pr.30 Pr.70
Regeneration unit terminals of Remarks
setting*4 setting
inverter
0 (initial The regenerative brake duty will be as follows.
R, S, T
Built-in brake*3, value), 100 • FR-A820-00046(0.4K) to 00250(3.7K): 3%
brake unit P, N 10, 110 • FR-A820-00340(5.5K), 00490(7.5K): 2%
—
(FR-BU2 (GZG/GRZG/FR- • FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00250(7.5K): 2%
BR), FR-BU, BU) R, S, T/P, N 20, 120 • Other than above: 0% (without the built-in brake
resistor)
R, S, T 1, 101
High-duty brake resistor 10%*1 The FR-ABR can be used with FR-A820-01250(22K) or
P, N 11, 111
(FR-ABR) 6%*2 lower and the FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower.
R, S, T/P, N 21, 121
Multifunction regeneration
converter (FR-XC) (power R, S, T 0 (initial value) — —
regeneration mode 1 or 2)
High power factor converter
(FR-HC2),
multifunction regeneration
0% (initial
converter (FR-XC) (common P, N 2, 102 —
value)
bus regeneration mode),
power regeneration common
converter (FR-CV)

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
725
 • FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
Power supply terminals of
Regeneration unit Pr.30 setting*4 Pr.70 Setting
inverter
R, S, T 0 (initial value), 100
Without regenerative function P, N 10, 110 —
R, S, T/P, N 20, 120
R, S, T 1, 101
Brake unit (FR-BU2 (MT-BR5)) P, N 11, 111 0% (initial value)
R, S, T/P, N 21, 121
Power regeneration converter (MT-RC) R, S, T 1, 101 0% (initial value)
High power factor converter (FR-HC2) P, N 2, 102 —
Multifunction regeneration converter
(FR-XC) (power regeneration mode 1 or R, S, T 0 (initial value) —
2)
• FR-A842-07700(315K) or higher
Regeneration unit Pr.30 setting*4
Without regenerative function (FR-CC2) 10 (initial value), 110
Brake unit (FR-CC2+FR-BU2 (MT-BR5)) 11, 111
High power factor converter (FR-HC2) 2, 102

*1 For the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.

*2 For the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher, and FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher.
*3 The built-in brake is installed on FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower and FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.
*4 While the power is supplied only to the control circuit with Pr.30 = "100 or higher", the inverter reset is not performed when the power is supplied
to the main circuit.

NOTE
• For the use of a brake resistor other than the FR-ABR, contact your sales representative.

 When using the built-in brake resistor or brake unit (FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU)
(FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower)
• When using the built-in brake, using the FR-BU2 in combination with the GZG/GRZG/FR-BR, or using the BU or FR-BU,
set Pr.30 = "0 (initial value), 10, 20, 100, 110, or 120". The Pr.70 setting is invalid. At this time, the regenerative brake duty
is as follows.
Inverter Regenerative brake duty
FR-A820-00250(3.7K) or lower 3%
FR-A820-00340(5.5K), FR-A820-00490(7.5K) 2%
FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower 2%
Other than the above 0% (without the built-in brake resistor)

NOTE
• The built-in brake resistor is equipped for the FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, and the FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower.

 When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) (FR-A820-01250(22K)

or lower, FR-A840-00620(22K) or lower)
• Set "1, 11, or 21" in Pr.30.
• Set Pr.70 as follows.
Inverter Pr.70 setting
FR-A820-00490(7.5K) or lower, FR-A840-00250(7.5K) or lower 10%
FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher, FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher 6%

 When using the brake unit (FR-BU2) (FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-

A840-02160(75K) or higher)
• To use the FR-BU2 in combination with the MT-BR5, set as follows.
• Set "1, 11, or 21" in Pr.30.

726 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 • Set Pr.70 = 0% (initial value).
• Set the brake unit FR-BU2, Pr.0 Brake mode selection = "2".
1
NOTE
• The stall prevention (overvoltage), oL, does not occur while Pr.30 = "1, 11, or 21".
2
 When using the power regeneration converter (MT-RC)
• Set "1 or 101" in Pr.30.
• Set Pr.70 = 0% (initial value).
3
 When using the high power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction
regeneration converter (FR-XC), power regeneration common converter 4
(FR-CV), or converter unit (FR-CC2)
• To use the FR-HC2 or FR-CV, set Pr.30 = "2 or 102". The Pr.70 setting is invalid.
• To use the FR-XC in common bus regeneration mode, set Pr.30 = "2 or 102".
5
• To use the FR-XC in power regeneration mode, set Pr.30 = "0 or 100".
• When using the FR-CC2, set Pr.30 = "10" (initial value of the separated converter type).
• Use any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function assignment) to assign the following signals to the contact input
6
terminals.
(a) Inverter run enable (X10) signal: FR-HC2 connection, FR-XC connection, FR-CV connection, FR-CC2 connection
To ensure coordinated protection of the FR-HC2, FR-XC (common bus regeneration mode), FR-CV, or FR-CC2, use 7
the X10 signal to shut off the inverter output.
Input the RDY signal of the FR-HC2 (the RYB signal of the FR-XC, the RDYB signal of FR-CV, or the RDA signal of
FR-CC2). 8
(b) FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection, instantaneous power failure detection (X11) signal: FR-HC2 connection, FR-CC2
connection
During the operation using RS-485 communication, with the remote output and analog remote output functions
9
enabled, the X11 signal is used to store the status when the inverter is set to store the status before an instantaneous
power failure.
Input the FR-HC2/FR-CC2 connection, instantaneous power failure detection signal.
10
• For the terminal used for the X10 or X11 signal, set "10" (X10) or "11" (X11) in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 and assign the
function. (For the separated converter type, the X10 signal is assigned to terminal MRS in the initial setting.)

NOTE
• For details of the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR), brake unit, high power factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction
regeneration converter (FR-XC), or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) connections, refer to page 97. Also, for
details on each option, refer to the Instruction Manual of each option.
• Setting Pr.30 = "2" will reset the inverter, and "Err" is displayed on the operation panel during the reset.

 Logic reversing of the Inverter run enable signal (X10 signal, Pr.599)
• Use Pr.599 X10 terminal input selection to select the X10 signal input specification between normally open (NO contact)
and normally closed (NC contact). With the normally closed (NC contact) input specification, the inverter output is shut off
by turning OFF (opening) the X10 signal.
• Changing the inverter logic (NO/NC contact) with the Pr.599 setting is required according to the logic of the Inverter run
enable signal sent from the option unit.

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
727
 • The response time of the X10 signal is within 2 ms.

Output frequency Motor coasts to stop

Time

X10 signal (Pr.599=0) ON

X10 signal (Pr.599=1) OFF

• Relationship between Pr.599 and the Inverter run enable signal of each option unit
Corresponding signals of the option unit Operation according to the X10
Pr.599 setting
FR-HC2 FR-XC FR-CV FR-CC2 signal status
0
RDY (negative logic) X10-ON: Inverter output shutoff (NO
(initial value of standard structure RYB RDYB RDB
(initial setting) contact)
models and IP55 compatible models)
1
X10-OFF: Inverter output shutoff (NC
(initial value of separated converter RDY (positive logic) RYA RDYA RDA
contact)
types)

NOTE
• If the X10 signal is unassigned while Pr.30 = "2" (FR-HC2/FR-XC/FR-CV connection) or "10 or 11" (DC feeding mode 1), the
MRS signal can be used as the X10 signal. At this time, logic setting for the signal will follow Pr.17 MRS input selection.
• The MRS signal is valid from either of communication or external, but when the MRS signal is to be used as the Inverter run
enable (X10) signal, it must be input from external.
• When the FR-HC or MT-HC is connected, set Pr.599 = "0 (initial value)".
• When the terminal assignment is changed with Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), wiring may be mistaken
due to different terminal name and signal contents, or may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function
of each terminal.

 Regenerative brake duty warning output and the warning signal (RBP
signal) (standard models)
• When the regenerative brake duty reaches 85% of the Pr.70 setting, "RB" is indicated on the operation panel and the
Regenerative brake prealarm signal (RBP) signal is output. When it reaches 100% of the Pr.70 setting, it will become
regenerative overvoltage (E.OV[]).
• The inverter output is not shut off with the warning signal.
• For the terminal to be used for the RBP signal output, set "7 (positive logic) or 107 (negative logic)" to one of Pr.190 to
Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection), and assign the function.

100%: Regeneration overvoltage protection operation value

Ratio of brake duty 100%
to the Pr. 70 setting 85%

Regenerative Time
brake pre-alarm OFF ON ON
(RBP)

NOTE
• When Pr.30 = "0 (initial value), 10, or 20" for the FR-A820-00630(11K) or higher and the FR-A840-00310(11K) or higher, "RB"
is not indicated.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

728 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 Selection between resetting or not resetting during power supply to main
circuit (Pr.30 = "100, 101, 102, 110, 111, 120, or 121") 1
• Inverter reset is not performed if Pr.30 = "100" or more, and supplying power to the main circuit (input through terminals
R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) is started when power is supplied only to the control circuit (input through terminals R1/L11 and S1/
L12, or 24 V external power supply input). 2
• When a communication option, etc. is used, communication interruption due to the inverter reset can be avoided.

NOTE
• When supplying power to the main circuit is started while the protective function of the inverter is activated, inverter reset is
3
performed even when "not resetting after power-ON" is selected.

4
 DC feeding mode 1 (Pr.30 = "10 or 11") (standard models and IP55
compatible models)
• For standard models and IP55 compatible models, setting Pr.30 = "10 or 11" allows operation with a DC power supply. 5
• Keep the AC power supply connection terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 open, and connect the DC power supply between
terminals P/+ and N/-. Also, for the standard model, remove the jumpers between terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and between
terminals S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 to the terminals P/+ and N/- respectively. 6
• The following diagram shows a connection example.
Inverter

R/L1
S/L2
Inrush
current
limit circuit
U
V
7
M
T/L3 W

8
R1/L11
DC power MC S1/L21 Earth
(+) P/+ (Ground)
N/-
(-)

Forward rotation start STF

9
Reverse rotation start STR
Contact input common SD

3
10 10
Frequency command 2
2
Frequency setting
potentiometer 1 5
1/2 W 1 k

CAUTION
• Do not connect a separated converter type inverter to a DC power supply. Doing so may damage the inverter.

 DC feeding mode 2 (Pr.30 = "20 or 21") (standard models and IP55

compatible models)
• When Pr.30 = "20 or 21", it will normally operate with AC power supply and operate with DC power supply such as batteries
at the time of power failure.
• Connect the AC power supply to the AC power supply connecting terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3, and connect the DC
power supply to the terminals P/+ and N/-. Also, for the standard model, remove the jumpers between terminals R/L1 and
R1/L11 and between terminals S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 to the terminals P/+ and
N/- respectively.
• Operation with DC current is possible by turning ON the DC feeding operation permission (X70) signal. For details on the
I/O signals, refer to following table.

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
729
 Signal name Name Description Parameter setting
To operate with DC feeding, turn ON the X70 signal.
When the inverter output is shutoff due to power failure, it will be
possible to start up 200 ms after turning ON the X70 signal. (Automatic
DC feeding operation Set "70" in any of Pr.178 to
X70 restart after instantaneous power failure can start after the time set in
permission Pr.189.
Pr.57 has elapsed.)
When the X70 signal is turned OFF while operating the inverter, output
shutoff (Pr.261 = "0") or deceleration stop (Pr.261 ≠ "0") will occur.
Input
Turn ON when stopping the DC feeding.
When the X71 signal is turned ON during the operation of the inverter
and X70 signal is ON, output shutoff (Pr.261 = "0") or deceleration
Set "71" in any of Pr.178 to
X71 DC feeding cancel stop (Pr.261 ≠ "0") will occur, and Y85 signal will turn OFF after
Pr.189.
stopping.
After turning ON the X71 signal, operation is not possible even if the
X70 signal is turned ON.
This signal will turn ON during power failure or undervoltage of the AC
power supply. It will turn OFF when the X71 signal turns ON or power
restoration.
Set "85 (positive logic) or
The Y85 signal will not turn OFF even with the power restoration while
Output Y85 DC current feeding 185 (negative logic)" in any
the inverter is running, but turns OFF after stopping the inverter.
of Pr.190 to Pr.196.
When the Y85 signal is turned ON due to undervoltage, the Y85 signal
will not turn OFF even when the undervoltage is resolved.
The ON/OFF status is maintained when the inverter is reset.
• Following is the connection diagram of switching to DC power supply using the power failure detection of the inverter.
Inverter
MCCB MC Inrush
R/L1 current U
Three-phase AC S/L2 limit circuit V
power supply M
T/L3 W

R1/L11
DC power MC1 S1/L21 Earth
P/+ (Ground)
(+)
N/-
(-)

Forward rotation start STF

Reverse rotation start STR
DC feeding permission signal X70 
DC feeding signal
DC feeding cancel signal X71  MC1

Y85
Contact input common SD
10
Frequency command 3 24VDC
Frequency setting 2 SE
2
potentiometer
1/2W1k 1 5

*1 Assign the function using Pr.178 to Pr.182 (Input terminal function selection).
*2 Assign the function using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).

730 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
• Operation example at the time of power failure occurrence 1

1
Control power AC power supply DC power supply
supply
AC power supply ON

Y85(MC) ON

X70 ON 2
X71 ON

STF(STR) ON ON
3
Motor

4
Output coasting
frequency
(Hz)

Time

Approx. 5
200ms

Back up operation

6
• Operation example at the time of power failure occurrence 2 (when the AC power supply is restored)
Control power supply AC DC AC

AC power supply ON Power restoration 7

Turns off after stop
Y85(MC) ON while running

ON
X70
8
X71 OFF

STF(STR) ON ON

9
Motor
Output coasting
frequency
(Hz)
10
Time

Approx.200ms
Back up operation

• Operation example at the time of power failure occurrence 3 (when continuing the operation)
Control power AC DC AC
supply
ON Power restoration
AC power supply

Y85(MC) ON Remains on while running

X70 ON

X71 OFF

STF(STR) ON

Output
frequency
(Hz)

Time
Back up operation

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
731
  Power supply specification for DC feeding (standard models and IP55
compatible models)
Rated input DC voltage 283 to 339 VDC
200 V class
Permissible fluctuation 240 to 373 VDC
Rated input DC voltage 537 VDC to 707 VDC
400 V class
Permissible fluctuation 457 VDC to 777 VDC

NOTE
• The voltage between terminals P and N briefly increases to 415 V (830 V) or higher during the regenerative driving, so take
caution on the selection of the DC power supply.
• When an AC power supply is connected to terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 during DC feeding with Pr.30 = "2, 10, or 11" (DC
feeding), an option fault (E.OPT) will occur.
• When the input voltage is insufficient during inverter operation with Pr.30 = "2, 10, 11, 20, or 21" (DC feeding), the inverter
output will be shut off. (The undervoltage protection function (E.UVT) is not activated.)
• When the inverter is operated with Pr.30 = "2, 10, 11, 20, or 21" (DC feeding), detection of Instantaneous power failure (E.IPF)
is not performed.
• When the DC power is switched ON, an inrush current higher than that for the AC power flows in the inverter. Minimize the
number of power-ON events.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) or Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

WARNING
• The value set in Pr.70 must not exceed the setting of the brake resistor used.
It may cause overheating.

Parameters referred to
Pr.17 MRS input selectionpage 524
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 628, page 635
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 521
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 473
Pr.261 Power failure stop selectionpage 642

5.16.12 Regeneration avoidance function

The regenerative status can be detected and avoided by raising the frequency.
• The operation frequency is automatically increased to prevent the regenerative operations. This function is useful when a
load is forcibly rotated by another fan in the duct.

732 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 Setting
Pr. Name Initial value
range
Description
1
0 The regeneration avoidance function is disabled.
Regeneration
882 1 The regeneration avoidance function is always enabled.
avoidance operation 0
G120
selection 2
The regeneration avoidance function is enabled only during
constant-speed operation. 2
200 V Set the bus voltage level to operate the regeneration avoidance
380 VDC
class operation. When the bus voltage level is set low, it will be harder
Regeneration
883
G121
avoidance operation
400 V
to generate overvoltage error, but actual deceleration time will
300 to 1200 V be longer. 3
level 760 VDC Set the setting value higher than the (power supply voltage ×
class
√2 ) value.
Regeneration 0
The regeneration avoidance is disabled due to bus voltage 4
change rate.
884 avoidance at
0 Set the sensitivity to detect the bus voltage change rate.
G122 deceleration detection
1 to 5 Setting value 1 (detection sensitivity: low) to 5 (detection
sensitivity
sensitivity: high) 5
Regeneration Set the limit value for frequency to rise when the regeneration
0 to 590 Hz
885 avoidance avoidance function is activated.
6 Hz
G123 compensation
frequency limit value 9999 The frequency limit is disabled.
6
886 Regeneration Adjust the response during the regeneration avoidance
100% 0 to 200%
G124 avoidance voltage gain operation. Increasing the setting improves the response to
Regeneration change in the bus voltage. However, the output frequency may
665
G125
avoidance frequency 100% 0 to 200% become unstable. If setting a smaller value in Pr.886 does not 7
gain suppress the vibration, set a smaller value in Pr.665.

 Regeneration avoidance operation (Pr.882, Pr.883)

• When the regenerative voltage increases, the DC bus voltage will rise, which may cause an overvoltage fault (E.OV[]). The 8
regenerative status can be avoided by detecting this rise of bus voltage, and raising the frequency when the bus voltage
level exceeds Pr.883 Regeneration avoidance operation level.
• The regeneration avoidance operation can be selected to operate constantly or operate only during constant speed. 9
• The regeneration avoidance function is enabled by setting "1 or 2" in Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation
selection.
10
Regeneration avoidance operation Regeneration avoidance operation Regeneration avoidance operation
example for acceleration example for constant speed example for deceleration
Bus voltage
Bus voltage

Pr. 883
(VDC)

Pr. 883
Bus voltage

(VDC)

Pr. 883
(VDC)

Time
frequency(Hz)

Time Time
frequency(Hz)
frequency(Hz)

Output
Output

Output

During regeneration
avoidance function operation During regeneration
During regeneration Time
Time avoidance function operation Time
avoidance function operation

NOTE
• The slope of frequency rising or lowering by the regeneration avoidance operation will change depending on the regenerative
status.

• The DC bus voltage of the inverter will be approximately √2 times of the normal input voltage.
The bus voltage is about 311 VDC (622 VDC) when the input voltage is 220 VAC (440 VAC). However, it may vary depending
on the input power supply waveform.
• Make sure that the setting value of Pr.883 will not get under DC bus voltage level. The frequency will rise with operation of the
regeneration avoidance function even during operation other than the regenerative operation.
• The stall prevention (overvoltage) (oL) will only operate during deceleration, stopping the lowering of output frequency, but on
the other hand, the regeneration avoidance function will constantly operate (Pr.882 = "1") or operate only at constant speed
(Pr.882 = "2"), and raise the frequency depending on the amount of regeneration.
• When the motor becomes unstable due to operation of the stall prevention (overcurrent) (OL) during the regeneration
avoidance operation, increase the deceleration time or lower the setting of Pr.883.
• During position control, the regeneration avoidance function is not activated.

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
733
  Detecting the regenerative status faster during deceleration (Pr.884)
• Since a rapid change in bus voltage cannot be handled by bus voltage level detection during the regeneration avoidance
operation, deceleration is stopped by detecting the change in bus voltage and if it is equal to or lower than Pr.883
Regeneration avoidance operation level. Set the detectable bus voltage change rate as the detection sensitivity in
Pr.884 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity. A larger set value increases the detection
sensitivity.

NOTE
• When the setting value is too small (detection sensitivity is not good), detection will not be possible, and regeneration
avoidance will operate even with the bus voltage change caused by a change in the input power.

 Limiting the regeneration avoidance operation frequency (Pr.885)

• It is possible to assign a limit to the output frequency corrected (rise) by the regeneration avoidance operation.
• Limit of the frequency is output frequency (frequency before regeneration avoidance operation) + Pr.885 Regeneration
avoidance compensation frequency limit value for during acceleration and constant speed. During deceleration, when
the frequency increases due to the regeneration avoidance operation and exceeds the limit value, the limit value will be
retained until the output frequency is reduced to be the half the Pr.885 setting.
• When the frequency that have increased by the regeneration avoidance operation exceeds Pr.1 Maximum frequency, it
will be limited to the maximum frequency.
• When Pr.885 = "9999", the regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit is disabled.
• Set the frequency around the motor rated slip frequency. Increase the setting value if the overvoltage protection function
(E.OV[]) is activated at the start of deceleration.

Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency – rated rotation speed

Rated motor slip frequency = × Rated motor frequency
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency

Limit level
frequency(Hz)

Output frequency (Hz)

Output

Pr.885

Pr.885/2
Time

 Adjusting the regeneration avoidance operation (Pr.665, Pr.886)

• If the frequency becomes unstable during regeneration avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr.886 Regeneration
avoidance voltage gain. On the other hand, if an overvoltage fault occurs due to a sudden regeneration, increase the
setting.
• If setting a smaller value in Pr.886 does not suppress the vibration, set a smaller value in Pr.665 Regeneration avoidance
frequency gain.

NOTE
• During the regeneration avoidance operation, the stall prevention (overvoltage) "oL" is displayed and the Overload warning
(OL) signal is output. Set the operation pattern at an OL signal output using Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection.
Use Pr.157 OL signal output timer to set the OL signal output timing.
• The stall prevention is enabled even during regeneration avoidance operation.
• The regeneration avoidance function cannot decrease the actual deceleration time for the motor to stop. Since the actual
deceleration time is determined by the regenerative power consumption performance, consider using a regeneration unit (FR-
BU2, BU, FR-BU, FR-CV, FR-HC2, or FR-XC) or a brake resistor (such as the FR-ABR) to decrease the deceleration time.
• When using a regeneration unit (FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU, FR-CV, FR-HC2, or FR-XC) or a brake resistor (such as the FR-ABR)
to consume the regenerative power at constant speed, set Pr.882 = "0 (initial value)" (the regeneration avoidance function is
disabled). When consuming the regenerative power at the time of deceleration with the regeneration unit, etc., set Pr.882 =
"2" (enables regeneration avoidance function only at the constant speed).
• When using the regeneration avoidance function under Vector control, noise may be generated from the motor during
deceleration. In such case, adjust the gain by performing easy gain tuning, etc. (Refer to page 254.)

734 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428
Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 367 1
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 431

5.16.13 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration 2

V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector
Increase the loss in the motor by increasing the magnetic flux during deceleration. The deceleration time can be reduced by
suppressing the stall prevention (overvoltage) (oL). 3
The deceleration time can further be shortened without a brake resistor. (When a brake resistor is used, the duty can be
reduced.)
4
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
Increased magnetic 0 Without the increased magnetic excitation deceleration function
660
G130
excitation deceleration
operation selection
0
1 With the increased magnetic excitation deceleration function 5
0 to 40% Set the increase of excitation.
The magnetic excitation increase rate is 10% under V/F control and
661
G131
Magnetic excitation
increase rate
9999
9999
Advanced magnetic flux vector control. 6
The magnetic excitation increase rate is 0% under Real sensorless
vector control and Vector control.
The increased magnetic excitation rate is automatically lowered
662
G132
Increased magnetic
excitation current level
100% 0 to 300% when the output current exceeds the setting value during increased 7
magnetic excitation deceleration.

 Setting of increased magnetic excitation rate (Pr.660, Pr.661)

• To enable the increased magnetic excitation deceleration, set Pr.660 Increased magnetic excitation deceleration 8
operation selection = "1".
• Set the amount of excitation increase in Pr.661 Magnetic excitation increase rate. Increased magnetic excitation
deceleration will be disabled when Pr.661 = "0". 9
• When the DC bus voltage exceeds the increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation level during the deceleration,
excitation is increased in accordance with the setting value in Pr.661.
• The increased magnetic excitation deceleration will continue even if the DC bus voltage goes under the increased 10
magnetic excitation deceleration operation level during increased magnetic excitation deceleration.
Increased magnetic excitation
Inverter
deceleration operation level
200 V class 340 V
400 V class 680 V
With 500 V input 740 V

• When the stall prevention (overvoltage) occurs during the increased magnetic excitation deceleration operation, increase
the deceleration time or raise the setting value of Pr.661. When the stall prevention (overcurrent) occurs, increase the
deceleration time or lower the setting value of Pr.661.
• Increased magnetic excitation deceleration is enabled under V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real
sensorless vector control (speed control), and Vector control (speed control).

NOTE
• Increased magnetic excitation deceleration will be disabled in the following conditions:
During PM sensorless vector control, power failure stop, orientation control, operation with the FR-HC2, FR-XC (in common
bus regeneration mode), or FR-CV, energy saving operation, Optimum excitation control, and stop-on-contact control.

 Overcurrent prevention function (Pr.662)

• The overcurrent prevention function is enabled under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control.
• The increased magnetic excitation rate is lowered automatically when the output current exceeds the level set in Pr.662
during increased magnetic excitation deceleration.

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
735
 • When the inverter protective function (E.OC[], E.THT) is activated due to increased magnetic excitation deceleration,
adjust the level set in Pr.662.
• The overcurrent preventive function is disabled when Pr.662 = "0".

NOTE
• When the level set in Pr.662 is more than the one set in Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level, the overcurrent preventive
function is activated at the level set in Pr.22. (The level set in Pr.662 is applied when Pr.22 = "0".)

Parameters referred to
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 431
Pr.30 Regenerative function selectionpage 724
Pr.60 Energy saving control selectionpage 712
Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selectionpage 628, page 635
Pr.270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selectionpage 577
Pr.261 Power failure stop selectionpage 642
Pr.350 Stop position command selectionpage 585

5.16.14 Slip compensation

V/F

Under V/F control, the slip of the motor is estimated from the inverter output current to maintain the rotation of the motor
constant.

Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
245 0.01 to 50% Set the rated motor slip.
Rated slip 9999
G203 0, 9999 No slip compensation
Set the response time of the slip compensation. Reducing the
246 Slip compensation time
0.5 s 0.01 to 10 s value improves the response, but the regenerative overvoltage
G204 constant
(E.OV[]) error is more likely to occur with a larger load inertia.
No slip compensation in the constant power range (frequency
247 Constant output range slip 0
9999 range higher than the frequency set in Pr.3).
G205 compensation selection
9999 Slip compensation is performed in the constant power range.
• Calculate the rated motor slip and set the value in Pr.245 to enable slip compensation.
Slip compensation is not performed when Pr.245 = "0 or 9999".
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency - rated rotation speed
Rated slip = × 100 [%]
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency

NOTE
• When the slip compensation is performed, the output frequency may become larger than the set frequency. Set Pr.1 Maximum
frequency higher than the set frequency.
• Slip compensation will be disabled in the following conditions:
Stall prevention (oL, OL) operation, regeneration avoidance operation, auto tuning, encoder feedback control operation

Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428
Pr.3 Base frequencypage 707

5.16.15 Encoder feedback control

V/F Magnetic flux

This controls the inverter output frequency so that the motor speed is constant to the load variation by detecting the motor
speed with the speed detector (encoder) to feed back to the inverter.
A Vector control compatible option is required.

736 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 Initial
Pr. Name
value
Setting range Description
1
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,
144 Set the number of motor poles for the encoder
Speed setting switchover 4 102, 104, 106, 108,
M002 feedback control under V/F control.
110, 112
When the difference between the detected frequency 2
and the output frequency exceeds the set value during
285 Overspeed detection 0 to 30 Hz
9999 encoder feedback control, an inverter fault (E.MB1) is
H416 frequency*1 generated.
9999 Overspeed detection is disabled. 3
Set when using a motor for Set for the operation
0
which forward rotation at 120 Hz or less.
(encoder) is clockwise (CW)
viewed from the shaft
Set for the operation
4
100 CW at a frequency
higher than 120 Hz.
359*2*3 852*4 Encoder rotation direction 1 5
C141 C241 Set when using a motor for Set for the operation
1
which forward rotation at 120 Hz or less.
(encoder) is counterclockwise
(CCW) viewed from the shaft.
Set for the operation 6
101 at a frequency
CCW
higher than 120 Hz.

0 to 590 Hz Set the range of speed feedback control. 7

367*2G240 Speed feedback range 9999
9999 The encoder feedback control is disabled.
368*2G241 Feedback gain 1 0 to 100 Set when the rotation is unstable or response is slow.
369*2*3
851 *4
Number of encoder pulses 1024 0 to 4096
Set the number of encoder pulses. 8
C140 C240 Set the number of pulses before it is multiplied by 4.
*1 The speed deviation excess detection frequency is used when Vector control compatible option is mounted during Vector control. (Refer to page

*2
269 for details.)
The setting is available when a Vector control compatible option is installed. 9
*3 The parameter number is the one for use a Vector control compatible option. (Pr.369 is applicable for the FR-A8AP and FR-A8AL.)
*4 The parameter number is the one for use with the control terminal option (FR-A8TP).

 Setting before operation (Pr.144, Pr.359, Pr.369) 10

• For the operation during encoder feedback control under V/F control, set the number of motor poles in Pr.144 Speed
setting switchover in accordance with the applied motor. Since the Pr.81 Number of motor poles setting is used during
Advanced magnetic flux vector, the Pr.144 setting does not need to be changed.
• Use Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction and Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses to set the rotation direction and the number
of pulses for the encoder.

NOTE
• Operating the inverter with Pr.144 = "0, 10, 12, 110, or 112" causes E.1 to E.3.
• When "102, 104, 106, or 108" is set in Pr.144, the value obtained by subtracting 100 from the set value will be set as the
number of poles.
• The Pr.144 setting changes automatically when setting the motor poles in Pr.81, but even if Pr.144 is changed, Pr.81 will not
automatically change.
• Control with correct speed is not possible if the number of poles for the applied motor is incorrect. Check first before operation.
• Encoder feedback control is not possible when the rotation direction setting of the encoder is incorrect. (Operation of the
inverter is possible.)
Check the indicator on the parameter unit to confirm the direction.

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
737
  Selection of encoder feedback control (Pr.367)
• When a value other than "9999" is set in Pr.367 Speed feedback range, encoder feedback control is enabled. Set a target
value (frequency at which stable speed operation is performed) and specify the range around the value. Normally, use the
frequency converted from the slip amount (r/min) at the rated motor speed (rated load). If the setting is too large, response
becomes slow.
Speed feedback range Driven load Regenerative load

Set value
(Set command)

• Example: when the rated speed of a motor (4 poles) is 1740 r/min at 60 Hz

Slip Nsp = Synchronous speed - Rated speed
= 1800 - 1740
= 60 (r/min)
Frequency equivalent to slip (fsp) = Nsp × Number of poles/120
= 60 × 4/120
= 2 (Hz)

 Feedback gain (Pr.368)

• Set Pr.368 Feedback gain when the rotation is unstable or response is slow.
• Response of the feedback will become slow when the acceleration/deceleration time is long. In such case, increase the
setting value of Pr.368.
Pr.368 setting Description
Pr.368 > 1 Response will become faster but it may cause overcurrent or unstable operation.
1 > Pr.368 Response will become slower but the operation will become more stable.

 Overspeed detection (Pr.285)

• To prevent malfunction when the correct pulse signal cannot be detected from the encoder, when
[detection frequency] - [output frequency] ≥ Pr.285
during encoder feedback control, a protective function (E.MB1) will be activated to shut off the inverter output.
• Overspeed detection is not performed when Pr.285 = "9999".

NOTE
• Couple the encoder on the same axis as the motor axis without any mechanical clatter, with speed ratio of 1:1.
• Encoder feedback control is not performed during the acceleration and deceleration to prevent unstable operation such as
hunting.
• Encoder feedback control is performed after the output frequency has reached [set frequency] ± [speed feedback range] once.
• When following status occurs during encoder feedback control operation, the inverter output is not shut off, the output
frequency becomes the value obtained by [set frequency] ± [speed feedback range], and tracking of the motor speed is not
performed.
When the pulse signal from the encoder is lost due to a break, etc.
When correct pulse signal cannot be detected due to induction noise, etc.
When the motor is forcefully accelerated (regenerative rotation) or decelerated (motor lock) due to large external force
• Use the Inverter running (RUN) signal when releasing the brake from the motor with a brake. (The brake may not be released
when the Output frequency detection (FU) signal is used.)
• Do not turn OFF the external power supply for the encoder during encoder feedback control. Normal encoder feedback control
will not be possible.

Parameters referred to
Pr.81 Number of motor polespage 221, page 532

5.16.16 Droop control

Magnetic flux Sensorless Vector PM
This is a function to give droop characteristics to the speed by balancing the load in proportion with the load torque during the
Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control.

738 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
This is effective in balancing the load when multiple inverters are connected.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

1
0 Normal operation
286 Droop control enabled.
Droop gain 0%
G400 0.1 to 100% Set the droop amount at the time of rated torque as % value of
the rated motor frequency.
2
287
Droop filter time constant 0.3 s 0 to 1 s Set the time constant of the filter relative to the torque current.
G401

0
No droop control during
acceleration/deceleration
3
(with 0 limit)
Continuous droop control The Pr.84 setting is the droop
1
during operation (with 0 limit) compensation reference. 4
Continuous droop control
2 during operation (without 0
limit)
No droop control during 5
10 acceleration/deceleration
288 Droop function activation (with 0 limit) The motor speed is the droop
0
G402 selection compensation reference.
Continuous droop control
11
during operation (with 0 limit) 6
No droop control during
20 acceleration/deceleration
(with 0 limit)

21
Continuous droop control
The Pr.1121 setting is the
droop compensation
7
during operation (with 0 limit)
reference.
Continuous droop control
22 during operation (without 0
limit) 8
Set the droop amount to be changed as % value of the rated
994 0.1 to 100%
Droop break point gain 9999 motor frequency.
G403
9999 No function
995
Droop break point torque 100% 0.1 to 100% Set the torque to change the droop amount.
9
G404
0 to 100% Refer to Pr.286.
679
Second droop gain 9999
G420 9999
The first droop control setting
is applied. 10
0 to 1 s Refer to Pr.287.
680 Second droop filter time
9999 The first droop control setting
G421 constant 9999
is applied.
0 to 2, 10, 11, Set the second droop control.
Refer to Pr.288.
681 Second droop function 20 to 22 The second droop control is
9999
G422 activation selection The first droop control setting enabled when the RT signal is
9999
is applied. ON.
0.1 to 100% Refer to Pr.994.
682 Second droop break point
9999 The first droop control setting
G423 gain 9999
is applied.
0.1 to 100% Refer to Pr.995.
683 Second droop break point
9999 The first droop control setting
G424 torque 9999
is applied.

 Droop control
• Droop control is enabled under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and
PM sensorless vector control.
• In the droop control, the speed command changes depending on the amount of the current for torque.
Set the droop amount at the rated torque in Droop gain as % value of the rated motor frequency (or motor speed when
Pr.288 = "10 or 11").
• The upper limit of the droop compensation frequency is 400 Hz or Pr.1 Maximum frequency, whichever smaller.

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
739
 • During PM sensorless vector control, the upper limit of the droop compensation frequency is 400 Hz, the frequency set in
Pr.1, or the maximum motor frequency, whichever the smallest.
Frequency
Droop compensation
Droop compensation frequency
reference Droop
gain

Torque
-100% 0 100%

• The droop compensation frequency is calculated as follows.

Current for torque after filtering Droop compensation reference × Droop gain
Droop compensation frequency = ×K×
Rated torque current 100

When the output frequency is equal to or lower than the rated frequency set in Pr.84: K＝1
Rated frequency (Pr.84)
When the output frequency is higher than the rated frequency set in Pr.84: K =
Output frequency

NOTE
• Set the droop gain equivalent to the rated slip of the motor.
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency - rated rotation speed
Rated slip = × 100[%]
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency
• The speed loop integration can be disabled at the emergency stop using Pr.1349 Emergency stop operation selection.
(Refer to page 367.)

 Limiting the frequency after the droop compensation (0 limit)

• Under Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control, the lower limit can be set for the
frequency command value by setting Pr.288 when the value falls below zero after droop compensation.
When the output frequency after droop Droop compensation
Pr.288 setting Operation
compensation is negative reference
Rated motor frequency
0 (initial value)
(Pr.84 setting)
10*1 No droop control during Motor speed
acceleration/deceleration Per-unit speed control
20*1 reference frequency
Limited at 0 Hz (limited at 0.5 Hz under Advanced (Pr.1121 setting)
magnetic flux vector control) Rated motor frequency
1*1 (Pr.84 setting)
11*1 Continuous droop control during Motor speed
operation Per-unit speed control
21*1 reference frequency
(Pr.1121 setting)
Rated motor frequency
2*1 (Pr.84 setting)
• Not limited (but reversed) under Vector control or PM
Continuous droop control during
sensorless vector control Per-unit speed control
operation
22*1 • Limited at 0 Hz under Real sensorless vector control reference frequency
(Pr.1121 setting)

*1 Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, the operation is the same as the one when the setting is "0".

740 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
 Setting the break point for droop control (Pr.994, Pr.995)
• Set Pr.994 and Pr.995 to have a break point on a droop compensation frequency line. Setting a break point allows the 1
inverter to raise the droop compensation frequency for light-load (no load) operation without raising it for heavy-load
operation.
Increased amount of the
droop compensation Frequency 2
frequency
Droop break point gain
Droop compensation (Pr.994)
reference Droop gain 3
Droop compensation (Pr.286)
frequency
Droop break point torque
(Pr.995) 4
Torque
-100% 0 100%

NOTE 5
• The droop break point function is disabled when any of the following conditions is met. (Linear compensation by Pr.286 is
performed.)
Pr.995 = 100% (initial value)
Pr.286 < Pr.994
6
Pr.994 ≤ Pr.995 × Pr.286 / 100%

7
 Setting multiple droop control types (Pr.679 to Pr.683)
• When the second droop control is set, two sets of droop controls can be switched for use. Turning ON the Second function
selection (RT) signal enables the second droop control. 8
NOTE
• The RT signal is the Second function selection signal which also enables other second functions.
• The RT signal is assigned to terminal RT in the initial status. Set "3" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function 9
selection) to assign the RT signal to another terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
10
Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 428
Pr.178 to Pr.189 Input terminal function selection page 521

5.16.17 Speed smoothing control

V/F

The output current (torque) of the inverter sometimes becomes unstable due to vibration caused by mechanical resonance.
Such vibration can be suppressed by reducing fluctuation of the output current (torque) by changing the output frequency.

Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
653 Speed smoothing Check the effect by increasing and decreasing the value at around
0% 0 to 200%
G410 control 100%.
654 Speed smoothing
20 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the minimum frequency for the torque variation cycle.
G411 cutoff frequency

5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
741
  Control block diagram
Acceleration/deceleration
processing

+ Output frequency
Speed Frequency output
V/F control
command Voltage output
-
Speed smoothing control
Cutoff frequency
Pr.654

Proportional gain
Current for torque
Pr.653

 Setting method
• When vibration caused by mechanical resonance occurs, set 100% in Pr.653 Speed smoothing control, perform
operation at the frequency with the largest vibration, and check if the vibration is suppressed after few seconds.
• If the setting is not effective, gradually increase the value set in Pr.653 and repeat the operation to check the effect to
determine the most effective value (Pr.653).
• If the vibration increases by increasing the value in Pr.653, decrease the value in Pr.653 from 100% to check the effect.
• When the vibrational frequency at which mechanical resonance occurs (during fluctuation of torque, speed, or converter
output voltage) is measured using an instrument such as a tester, set 1/2 to 1 times of the vibrational frequency in Pr.654
Speed smoothing cutoff frequency. (Setting the resonance frequency range mitigates vibration more effectively.)
Cutoff frequency
Current for
torque

Torque fluctuation
detection range

0 Pr.654 159Hz (fixed) Vibrational frequency

NOTE
• Depending on the equipment, the vibration may not be suppressed sufficiently or the setting is not effective.

742 5. PARAMETERS
5.16 (G) Control parameters
5.17 Parameter clear / All parameter clear 1

2
• Set "1" to Pr.CLR Parameter clear or ALL.CL All parameter clear to initialize all parameters. (Parameters cannot be cleared
when Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "1".)
• Pr.CLR does not clear calibration parameters or the terminal function selection parameters.
• Refer to the parameter list on page 864 for parameters cleared with this operation. 3

Operating procedure 4
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

5
Press to choose the PU operation mode. The [PU] indicator turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

6
Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

4. Selecting the parameter 7

Turn to " " for Parameter clear or turn it to " " for All parameter clear, and press

." (initial value)" appears.

8
5. Parameter clear

Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to set. " " and " "
9
(" ") are displayed alternately after parameters are cleared.

• Turn to read another parameter.

10
• Press to show the setting again.

• Press twice to show the next parameter.

Description
Setting
Pr.CL Parameter clear ALL.CL All parameter clear
0 Initial display (Parameters are not cleared.)
The settings of all the parameters, including calibration
The settings of parameters except for calibration parameters
1 parameters and terminal function selection parameters, are
and terminal function selection parameters are initialized.
initialized.

NOTE
• " " and " " are displayed alternately when the operation mode is other than the PU operation mode.

1) Press .

turns ON, and " " appears on the monitor. (When Pr.79 ="0" (initial value))

2) Press to clear the parameter.

• Stop the inverter first. Writing error occurs if parameter clear is attempted while the inverter is running.
• To clear parameters, the inverter must be in the PU operation mode even if "2" is set to Pr.77.
• For availability of the Parameter clear or All parameter clear operation for each parameter, refer to the parameter list on page
864.

5. PARAMETERS
5.17 Parameter clear / All parameter clear
743
 5.18 Copying and verifying parameters on the operation
panel

Pr.CPY setting value Description

0.--- Initial display
1.RD Copy the parameters from the source inverter to the operation panel.
2.WR Write the parameters stored in the operation panel to the target inverter.
3.VFY Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel. (Refer to page 746.)

NOTE
• When the copy destination is other than the FR-A800 series or when parameter copy is attempted after the parameter copy

reading was stopped, the product series error " " appears.
• Refer to the parameter list on page 864 for the availability of parameter copy.
• When the power is turned OFF or an operation panel is disconnected, etc. during parameter copy writing, write again or check
the setting values by parameter verification.
• When parameters are copied from a different-capacity inverter, there are parameters with different initial values depending on
the inverter capacity, so the setting values of some parameters will be automatically changed. After performing a parameter
copy from a different-capacity inverter, check all the parameter settings. (Refer to the parameter list (page 166) for details on
parameters with different initial values depending on individual inverter capacity.)
• While password protection is enabled, parameter copy and parameter verification cannot be performed. (Refer to page 348.)
• If parameters are copied from an older inverter to a newer inverter that has additional parameters, out-of-range setting values
may be written in some parameters. In that case, those parameters operate as if they were set to initial values.

5.18.1 Parameter copy

• Inverter parameter settings can be copied to another inverter.

 Reading the parameter settings in the inverter and storing them in the
operation panel
Operating procedure
1. Connect the operation panel to the source inverter.

2. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

3. Selecting the parameter

Turn to " " (Parameter copy) and press .

" " appears.

4. Reading to and storing in the operation panel

Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to start reading the parameter settings by the

operation panel. (It takes about 30 seconds to read and store all the settings. During reading, " " blinks.)

5. End of reading and storing

" " and " " are displayed alternately after the reading and storing are completed.

NOTE
• " " appears when a parameter read error occurred. Perform the operation from step 3 again.

744 5. PARAMETERS
5.18 Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel
 Copying parameter settings stored in the operation panel to the inverter
1
Operating procedure
1. Connect the operation panel to the destination inverter.
2
2. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

3. Selecting the parameter

3
Turn to " " (Parameter copy), and press .

" " appears.

4
4. Selecting parameter copy

Turn to change the set value to " ", then press .

5
appears.

5. Copying to the inverter

6
Press to start copying to the inverter. (It takes about 60 seconds to copy all the settings. During copying,

" " blinks.) 7

● Perform this step while the inverter is stopped. (Parameter settings cannot be copied during operation.)

6. End of copying
8
" " and " " are displayed alternately after copying ends.

7. When parameters are written to the destination inverter, reset the inverter before operation by, for example, turning
9
the power supply OFF.

NOTE
• " " appears when a parameter write error occurred. Perform the operation from step 3 again.
10
• " " and " " are displayed alternately when parameter copy is performed between the FR-A820-03160(55K)
or lower or FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower inverters and the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher or FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
inverters. When CP and 0.00 are displayed alternately, set Pr.989 Parameter copy alarm release as shown in the following
table (initial value).

Pr.989 setting Operation

10 Cancels the warning of FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
100 Cancels the warning of FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.
• After setting Pr.989, perform setting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.61, Pr.70, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.82, Pr.90 to Pr.94,
Pr.453, Pr.455, Pr.458 to Pr.462, Pr.557, Pr.859, Pr.860, and Pr.893 again.

5. PARAMETERS
5.18 Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel
745
 5.18.2 Parameter verification
• Whether the parameter settings of inverters are the same or not can be checked.

Operating procedure
1. Copy the parameter settings of the verification source inverter to the operation panel according to the procedure on
page 744.

2. Detach the operation panel from the source inverter and attach it to the verification target inverter.

3. Turning ON the power of the inverter

The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

4. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

5. Selecting the parameter

Turn to " " (Parameter copy) and press .

" " appears.

6. Parameter verification

Turn to change to setting value " " (Parameter copy verification mode).

Press . Verification of the parameter settings copied to the operation panel and the parameter settings of the
verification destination inverter is started. (It takes about 60 seconds to verify all the settings. During verification,

" " blinks.)

● If there are different parameters, the different parameter number and " " are displayed alternately.

● To continue verification, press .

7. " " and " " are displayed alternately after verification ends.

NOTE
• When " " blinks, the set frequency may be incorrect. To continue verification, press .

746 5. PARAMETERS
5.18 Copying and verifying parameters on the operation panel
5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB 1
memory
2
• Inverter parameter settings can be copied to a USB memory device.
• Parameter setting data stored in a USB memory device can be copied to another inverter or verified to see if they differ
from the parameter settings of another inverter. 3
• Parameter settings can also be imported to a personal computer and edited in FR Configurator2.

 Changes in the USB memory copy operation states

• Insert the USB memory device into the inverter. The USB memory mode is displayed and the USB memory operations are
4
enabled.

Monitor mode Parameter setting mode Function mode Fault history mode 5

6
USB memory mode

10
Copy the parameter setting
from the inverter to the USB
memory device.

Overwrite the inverter parameter setting onto the

designated file in the USB memory device.

Write the designated

parameter setting file of
Parameter setting the USB memory device
file number saved in to a parameter file of the
the USB memory inverter.
device Verify the designated
(up to 99) parameter setting file of
the USB memory device
against the parameter file
of the inverter.

5. PARAMETERS
5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB memory
747
 NOTE
• When parameter settings are copied to the USB memory without specifying a parameter setting file number in the USB
memory, numbers are automatically assigned.
• Up to 99 files can be saved in the USB memory. When the USB memory already has 99 files, attempting copying of another
file to the USB memory causes the file quantity error (rE7).
• Refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2 for the details on importing files to FR Configurator2.
• While password protection is enabled, parameter copy and parameter verification cannot be performed. (Refer to page 348.)

 Procedure for copying parameters to the USB memory

Operating procedure
1. Insert the USB memory device into the copy source inverter.

2. USB memory mode

Press to change to the USB memory mode.

3. Displaying the file selection screen

Press three times to display " " (file selection screen) and press . (To overwrite files on

the USB memory, display the file selection screen, turn to select the file number, and press .)

4. Copying to the USB memory

Turn to change to " ". Press to copy the parameter settings at the copy source to the USB

memory. (It takes about 15 seconds to copy all the settings. During copying, " " blinks.)

" " and the file number are displayed alternately after copying ends.

 Procedure for copying parameters from the USB memory to the inverter
Operating procedure
1. Insert the USB memory device into the destination inverter.

2. USB memory mode

Press to change to the USB memory mode.

3. Displaying the file selection screen

Press three times to display " " (file selection screen).

4. Selecting the file number

Turn to select the file number to copy to the inverter, and press .

5. Turn to display " " and press ." " appears.

6. Writing to the inverter

Press to start writing the parameter settings stored in the USB memory to the destination inverter. (It takes

about 15 seconds to copy all the settings. During copying, " " blinks.)

" " and the file number are displayed alternately after copying ends.
● Perform this step while the inverter is stopped.

7. When parameters are written to the destination inverter, reset the inverter before operation by, for example, turning
the power supply OFF.

748 5. PARAMETERS
5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB memory
 NOTE

• " " or " " appears when a USB memory device error occurred. Check the connection of the USB memory
1
device and try the operation again.

• " " and " " are displayed alternately when parameter copy is performed between the FR-A820-03160(55K)
or lower or FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower inverters and the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher or FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher
2
inverters. When CP and 0.00 are displayed alternately, set Pr.989 Parameter copy alarm release as shown below (initial
value).

Pr.989 setting Operation

3
10 Cancels the warning of FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower and FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower.
100 Cancels the warning of FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher and FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher.

• After setting Pr.989, perform setting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.61, Pr.70, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.82, Pr.90 to Pr.94,
4
Pr.453, Pr.455, Pr.458 to Pr.462, Pr.557, Pr.859, Pr.860, and Pr.893 again.
• When the destination inverter is other than the FR-A800 series or when Parameter copy is attempted after the parameter copy

reading was stopped, the model error " " appears.

5
• Refer to the parameter list on page 864 for the availability of parameter copy.
• When the power is turned OFF or an operation panel is disconnected, etc. during parameter copy writing, write again or check
the setting values by parameter verification. 6
• When parameters are copied from a different-capacity inverter, there are parameters with different initial values depending on
the inverter capacity, so the setting values of some parameters will be automatically changed. After performing a parameter
copy from a different-capacity inverter, check all the parameter settings. (Refer to the parameter list (page 166) for details on
parameters with different initial values depending on individual inverter capacity.)
7

 Procedure for verifying parameters in the USB memory 8

Operating procedure
1. Copy the parameter settings of the verification source inverter to the USB memory according to the procedure on
9
page 748.

2. Move the USB memory device to the inverter to be verified.

3. Turning ON the power of the inverter

10
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

4. USB memory mode

Press to change to the USB memory mode.

5. Displaying the file selection screen

Press three times to display " " (file selection screen).

6. Selecting the file number

Turn to select the file number to be verified, and press .

7. Parameter verification

Turn to display the setting " " (Parameter copy verification mode), and press .

" " appears.

Press to start verification of the parameter settings copied to the USB memory and the parameter settings of
the verification destination inverter. (It takes about 15 seconds to verify all the settings. During verification,

" " blinks.)

● If there are different parameters, the different parameter number and " " are displayed alternately.

● To continue verification, press .

5. PARAMETERS
5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB memory
749
 8. The verified file number and " " are displayed alternately after verification ends.

NOTE
• When " " blinks, the set frequency may be incorrect. To continue verification, press .

750 5. PARAMETERS
5.19 Copying and verifying parameters using a USB memory
5.20 Checking parameters changed from their initial 1
values (initial value change list)
2
Parameters changed from their initial values can be displayed.

Operating procedure
3
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Selecting the parameter setting mode 4

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

3. Selecting a parameter 5
Turn to " " (Initial value change list), and press .

" " appears. 6

4. Checking the Initial value change list

Turn . The parameter numbers that have been changed from their initial value appear in order. 7
● When is pressed with a changed parameter displayed, the parameter settings can be changed as they are.
(Parameter numbers are no longer displayed in the list when they are returned to their initial values.)
8
Other changed parameters appear by turning .

● The indication returns to " " when the last changed parameter is displayed.
9
NOTE
• The calibration parameters (C0 (Pr.900) to C7 (Pr.905), C42 (Pr.934) to C45 (Pr.935)) are not displayed even when these
are changed from the initial settings.
• Only the simple mode parameters are displayed when the simple mode is set (Pr.160 ="9999").
10
• Only user groups are displayed when user groups are set (Pr.160 = "1").
• Pr.160 is displayed independently of whether the setting value is changed or not.
• Parameter setting using the Initial value change list is also possible.

5. PARAMETERS
5.20 Checking parameters changed from their initial values (initial value change list)
751
 5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)

5.21.1 Cyclic transmission

Data communication is available periodically among stations on the same network. Link devices (RX, RY, RWr, and RWw) are
used.

 Data flow and link device assignment (master and slave stations (except
for local stations))
One-to-one communication is possible between the master and slave stations.
The status information of the link devices (RY and RWw) of the master station is output to the external device of the slave
station, and the input status information from the external device of the slave station is stored in the link devices (RX and RWr)
of the master station.

Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.2

CPU Master Slave station Slave station
module station
Device (5)
RX, RWr RX, RWr
(7) Station (5)
No.1 (6) Station No.1
RX, RWr
Sequence
scan
Link refresh Station
D

(6) Station No.2

EN

No.2

Link
scan
Device (4)
RY, RWw RY, RWw
Station (4)
(2) Station No.1
No.1 (3) RY, RWw
Sequence
scan Station
Link refresh (3) Station No.2
D
EN

No.2

M0 Area for sending to

Y (1)
1 other stations

Status No. Description

(1) The device of the CPU module turns ON.
The device status data of the CPU module are stored in the link devices (RY and RWw) of the master
(2)
station by link refresh.
Output from the master
The status data of the link devices (RY and RWw) of the master station are stored in the link devices (RY
station (3)
and RWw) of each slave station by link scan.
The inverter starts according to the link device (RY and RWw) conditions (input signals such as STF and
(4)
STR) of the slave station.
Inverter conditions (output signals such as RUN and SU, monitoring) are stored in the link devices (RX and
(5)
RWr) of the slave station.
Input from the slave The status data of the link devices (RX and RWr) of the slave station are stored in the link devices (RX and
(6)
station RWr) of the master station by link scan.
The status data of the link devices (RX and RWr) of the master station are stored in the devices of the CPU
(7)
module by link refresh.

752 5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
 NOTE
• Refer to the MELSEC iQ-R, MELSEC-Q, or MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual for the 1
detailed assignment methods for the link devices and link refresh.

5.21.2 I/O signal list 2

 Remote I/O (64 points (fixed))
Refer Refer
3
Device No.*5 Signal Device No.*5 Signal
to page to page
RYn0 Forward rotation command*2 756 RXn0 Forward running 758
RYn1 Reverse rotation command*2 756 RXn1 Reverse running 758 4
High-speed operation command (terminal
RYn2 756 RXn2 Running (terminal RUN function)*3 758
RH function)*1

RYn3
Middle-speed operation command
(terminal RM function)*1
756 RXn3 Up to frequency (terminal SU function)*3 758 5
Low-speed operation command (terminal
RYn4 756 RXn4 Overload alarm (terminal OL function)*3 758
RL function)*1

RYn5
Jog operation selection (terminal JOG
756 RXn5
Instantaneous power failure (terminal IPF
758
6
function)*1 function)*3
Second function selection (terminal RT Frequency detection (terminal FU
RYn6 756 RXn6 758
function)*1 function)*3
Current input selection (terminal AU
7
RYn7 *1 756 RXn7 Error (terminal ABC1 function)*3 758
function)
Selection of automatic restart after
RYn8 instantaneous power failure (terminal CS
*1
756 RXn8 — (terminal ABC2 function)*3 758 8
function)
RYn9 Output stop (terminal MRS function)*1 756

RYnA
Start self-holding selection (terminal STOP
function)*1
756
RXn9 to
9
Reserved —
RXnF
RYnB Reset (terminal RES function)*1 756
RYnC to
RYnF 10
Reserved — RX(n+1)0 Pr.313 assignment function (DO0)*4 758
RY(n+1)0 to
RY(n+1)2
RX(n+1)1 Pr.314 assignment function (DO1)*4 758
RX(n+1)2 Pr.315 assignment function (DO2)*4 758
RY(n+1)3 to RX(n+1)3 to
Reserved — Reserved —
RY(n+1)F RX(n+1)F
RY(n+2)0 Monitor command 756 RX(n+2)0 Monitoring 758
RY(n+2)1 Frequency setting command (RAM) 756 RX(n+2)1 Frequency setting completion (RAM) 758
Frequency setting command (RAM, Frequency setting completion (RAM,
RY(n+2)2 756 RX(n+2)2 758
EEPROM) EEPROM)
Torque command / torque limit setting
RY(n+2)3 Torque command / torque limit (RAM) 757 RX(n+2)3 758
completion (RAM)
Torque command / torque limit (RAM, Torque command / torque limit setting
RY(n+2)4 757 RX(n+2)4 758
EEPROM) completion (RAM, EEPROM)
RY(n+2)5 Instruction code execution request 757 RX(n+2)5 Instruction code execution completed 758
RY(n+2)6 to RX(n+2)6 to
Reserved — Reserved —
RY(n+3)9 RX(n+3)9
RY(n+3)A Error reset request flag 757 RX(n+3)A Error status flag 758
RX(n+3)B Remote station ready 758
RY(n+3)B to
Reserved — RX(n+3)C to
RY(n+3)F Reserved —
RX(n+3)F

*1 These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.180 to Pr.189, input signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed. (Refer to page
521.)
*2 The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters.
*3 These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.190 to Pr.196, output signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed. (Refer to page
473.)
*4 Output signal can be assigned using Pr.313 to Pr.315. (Refer to page 473.)
*5 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.

5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
753
  Remote register (128 words (fixed))
Description Refer Description Refer
Address*3 Address*3
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits to page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits to page
RWwn Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments) 759 RWrn Reply code 760
RWwn+1 Reserved — RWrn+1 Reserved —
RWwn+2 Torque command / torque limit 759 RWrn+2 Reply code 760
RWwn+3 Reserved — RWrn+3 Reserved
RWwn+4 *1 759 RWrn+4 Reply code 760
PID set point (0.01% increments)
RWwn+5 PID measured value (0.01% increments)*1 759 RWrn+5 Reply code 760
RWwn+6 PID deviation (0.01% increments)*1 759 RWrn+6 Reply code 760
RWwn+7 to RWrn+7 to
Reserved — Reserved —
RWwn+F RWrn+F
Link parameter
RWwn+10
extended setting Instruction code*2 759 RWrn+10 Reply code 760

RWwn+11 Write data 759 RWrn+11 Read data*2 760

Link parameter
RWwn+12
extended setting Instruction code*2 759 RWrn+12 Reply code 760

RWwn+13 Write data 759 RWrn+13 Read data*2 760

Link parameter
RWwn+14
extended setting Instruction code*2 759 RWrn+14 Reply code 760

RWwn+15 Write data 759 RWrn+15 Read data*2 760

Link parameter
RWwn+16
extended setting Instruction code*2 759 RWrn+16 Reply code 760

RWwn+17 Write data 759 RWrn+17 Read data*2 760

Link parameter
RWwn+18
extended setting Instruction code*2 759 RWrn+18 Reply code 760

RWwn+19 Write data 759 RWrn+19 Read data*2 760

Link parameter
RWwn+1A
extended setting Instruction code*2 759 RWrn+1A Reply code 760

RWwn+1B Write data 759 RWrn+1B Read data*2 760

RWwn+1C
RWrn+1C to
to Reserved — Reserved —
RWrn+1F
RWwn+1F
RWwn+20 Reserved — RWrn+20 Error status 760
Fault record (fault
RWwn+21 Fault history No. 759 RWrn+21 Fault history No. 760
data)
RWrn+22 Fault record (output frequency) 760
RWwn+22
RWrn+23 Fault record (output current) 760
to Reserved —
RWrn+24 Fault record (output voltage) 760
RWwn+25
RWrn+25 Fault record (energization time) 760
RWwn+26 Monitor code 1 759 RWrn+26 First monitor value 760
RWwn+27 Monitor code 2 759 RWrn+27 Second monitor value 760
RWwn+28 Monitor code 3 759 RWrn+28 Third monitor value 760
RWwn+29 Monitor code 4 759 RWrn+29 Fourth monitor value 760
RWwn+2A Monitor code 5 759 RWrn+2A Fifth monitor value 760
RWwn+2B Monitor code 6 759 RWrn+2B Sixth monitor value 760
RWwn+2C Monitor code 7 759 RWrn+2C Seventh monitor value 760
RWwn+2D Monitor code 8 759 RWrn+2D Eighth monitor value 760
RWwn+2E Monitor code 9 759 RWrn+2E Ninth monitor value 760
RWwn+2F Monitor code 10 759 RWrn+2F Tenth monitor value 760
RWrn+30 Output frequency 760
RWrn+31 Reserved —
RWrn+32 Output current 760
RWrn+33 Output voltage 760
RWwn+30 RWrn+34 Reserved —
to Reserved —
RWrn+35 Frequency setting value 760
RWwn+39
RWrn+36 Motor speed 760
RWrn+37 Motor torque 760
RWrn+38 Converter output voltage 760
RWrn+39 Regenerative brake duty 760

754 5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
 Description Refer Description Refer
Address*3 Address*3
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits to page
RWrn+3A
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits
Electric thermal relay function load factor
to page
760
1
RWrn+3B Output current peak value 760
RWrn+3C Converter output voltage peak value 760
RWrn+3D Input power 760 2
RWrn+3E Output power 760
RWrn+3F Input terminal status 760
RWrn+40
RWrn+41
Output terminal status
Load meter
760
760
3
RWrn+42 Motor excitation current 760
RWrn+43 Position pulse 760
RWrn+44 Cumulative energization time 760 4
RWrn+45 Reserved —
RWrn+46 Orientation status 760
RWrn+47 Actual operation time 760
RWrn+48 Motor load factor 760
5
RWrn+49 Cumulative power 760
RWrn+4A Position command (lower) 760
RWrn+4B Position command (upper) 760 6
RWrn+4C Current position (lower) 760
RWrn+4D Current position (upper) 760
RWrn+4E Droop pulse (lower) 760
RWrn+4F Droop pulse (upper) 760 7
RWrn+50 Torque command 760
RWrn+51 Torque current command 760
RWrn+52 Motor output 760 8
RWrn+53 Feedback pulse monitor 760
RWrn+54 Torque monitor 760
RWwn+3A
RWrn+55 Reserved —
to
RWwn+73
Reserved —
RWrn+56 Trace status 760 9
RWrn+57 Reserved —
RWrn+58 PLC function user monitor 1 760
RWrn+59
RWrn+5A
PLC function user monitor 2
PLC function user monitor 3
760
760
10
RWrn+5B Station number (RS-485 terminals) 760
RWrn+5C Station number (PU) 760
RWrn+5D Station number (CC-Link) 760
RWrn+5E Motor temperature 760
RWrn+5F to
Reserved —
RWrn+61
RWrn+62 Power saving effect 760
RWrn+63 Cumulative energy saving 760
RWrn+64 PID set point 760
RWrn+65 PID measured value 760
RWrn+66 PID deviation 760
RWrn+67 to
Reserved —
RWrn+69
RWrn+6A Option input terminal status 1 760
RWrn+6B Option input terminal status 2 760
RWrn+6C Option output terminal status 760
RWrn+6D Motor thermal load factor 760
RWrn+6E Inverter thermal load factor 760
RWrn+6F Reserved —
RWrn+70 PTC thermistor value 760
RWrn+71
Reserved —
RWrn+72
RWrn+73 PID measured value 2 760

5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
755
 Description Refer Description Refer
Address*3 Address*3
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits to page Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits to page
RWrn+74 to
Reserved —
RWrn+76
RWrn+77 Cumulative pulse 760
RWwn+74 RWrn+78 Cumulative pulse overflow times 760
to Reserved — RWrn+79 Cumulative pulse (control terminal option) 760
RWwn+7F Cumulative pulse overflow times (control
RWrn+7A 760
terminal option)
RWrn+7B to
Reserved —
RWrn+7F
*1 When Pr.128 = "50, 51, 60, or 61", the register is valid.
*2 Instructions will be processed in the order they are received. Thus, the read value of an instruction may differ at different timings if other writing
requests are being made.
*3 "n" indicates a value determined by the station number setting.

5.21.3 Details of the remote input and output signals

The following device numbers are for the station number 1.
For the station number 2 and later, the device numbers are different. (Refer to the manual for the CC-Link master module for
the correspondence between device numbers and station numbers.)

 Output signals (from the master module to the inverter)

Output signals from the master module are as follows. (Input signals to the inverter)
Device No. Signal Description
0: Stop command • When "1" is set, a start command is input to the
RY0 Forward rotation command
1: Forward rotation start inverter. When "1" is set in RY0 and RY1, a stop
command is input.
0: Stop command • The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using
RY1 Reverse rotation command
1: Reverse rotation start
parameters.
High-speed operation command
RY2
(terminal RH function)
Middle-speed operation command
RY3
(terminal RM function)
Low-speed operation command
RY4
(terminal RL function)
Jog operation selection (terminal JOG
RY5 • Functions assigned to terminals RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, AU, CS, MRS, STOP
function)
and RES are activated.
Second function selection (terminal RT
RY6 • These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.180 to Pr.189, input signals
function)
assigned to the device numbers can be changed. Some signals are not
Current input selection (terminal AU
RY7 controllable via network depending on the settings of Pr.338 and Pr.339. For
function)
example, RYB reset (terminal RES function) cannot be controlled via network.
Selection of automatic restart after
RY8 instantaneous power failure (terminal
CS function)
RY9 Output stop (terminal MRS function)
Start self-holding selection (terminal
RYA
STOP function)
RYB Reset (terminal RES function)
When "1" is set in the monitor command (R20), the monitored value is set in the
RY20 Monitor command remote register RWr26 to RWr2F, and "1" is set in the monitoring (RX20). While
"1" is set in the monitor command (RY20), the monitored data is always updated.
When "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RY21), the set frequency
(RWw0) is written to RAM of the inverter. While "1" is set, the set frequency
RY21 Frequency setting command (RAM)
(RWw0) is always applied.
After the writing completes, "1" is set in the frequency setting completion (RX21).
When "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RY22), the set frequency
Frequency setting command (RAM, (RWw0) is written to RAM and EEPROM of the inverter.
RY22
EEPROM) After the writing completes, "1" is set in the frequency setting completion (RX22).
To change the frequency consecutively, be sure to write data to the inverter RAM.

756 5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
 Device No. Signal Description
When "1" is set in the torque command / torque limit (RY23), the set torque
command / torque limit (RWw2) is written to RAM of the inverter.
1
After the writing completes, "1" is set in the torque command / torque limit setting
RY23 Torque command / torque limit (RAM) completion (RX23).
The following value is written to RAM.
• During torque control*1: Torque command value 2
• During speed control / position control: Torque limit value
When "1" is set in the torque command / torque limit (RY24), the set torque
command / torque limit (RWw2) is written to RAM and EEPROM of the inverter.
After the writing completes, "1" is set in the torque command / torque limit setting
3
completion (RX24).
Torque command / torque limit (RAM, The following value is written to RAM and EEPROM.
RY24
EEPROM)
• During torque control*1: Torque command value
• During speed control / position control: Torque limit value
4
To change the torque command or the torque limit consecutively, be sure to write
data to the inverter RAM.
When "1" is set in the instruction code execution request (RY25), processes 5
corresponding to the instruction codes set to RWw10, 12, 14, 16, 18 and 1A are
RY25 Instruction code execution request executed. "1" is set in the instruction code execution completed (RX25) after
completion of instruction codes. When an instruction code execution error occurs,
a value other than "0" is set in the reply code (RWr10, 12, 14, 16, 18, and 1A).
When "1" is set in the error reset request flag (RY3A) at an inverter fault, the
6
RY3A Error reset request flag inverter is reset, then "0" is set in the error status flag (RX3A). Refer to page
669 for operation conditions of inverter reset.
*1 Torque control cannot be performed with a PM motor. 7

10

5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
757
  Input signals (from the inverter to the master module)
Input signals to the master module are as follows. (Output signals from the inverter)
Device No. Signal Description
0: Other than forward running (during stop or reverse rotation)
RX0 Forward running
1: Forward running
0: Other than reverse running (during stop or forward rotation)
RX1 Reverse running
1: Reverse running
RX2 Running (terminal RUN function)
RX3 Up to frequency (terminal SU function)
RX4 Overload alarm (terminal OL function)
• Functions assigned to terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU, ABC1 and ABC2 are
Instantaneous power failure (terminal
RX5 activated.
IPF function)
• These signals are set in the initial setting. Using Pr.190 to Pr.196, output
Frequency detection (terminal FU signals assigned to the device numbers can be changed.
RX6
function)
RX7 Error (terminal ABC1 function)
RX8 — (terminal ABC2 function)
RX10 — (DO0 function) • Functions assigned to Pr.313 to Pr.315 are activated.
RX11 — (DO1 function) • No signal is assigned in the initial setting. Use Pr.313 to Pr.315 to assign
RX12 — (DO2 function) signals.
After "1" is set in the monitor command (RY20), and the monitored value is set in
RX20 Monitoring the remote register RWr26 to RWr2F, "1" is set in this signal. When "0" is set in
the monitor command (RY20), "0" is set in this signal.
After "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RY21) and the set frequency is
RX21 Frequency setting completion (RAM) written to the inverter RAM, "1" is set in this signal. When "0" is set in the
frequency setting command (RY21), "0" is set in this signal.
After "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RY22) and the set frequency is
Frequency setting completion (RAM,
RX22 written to the inverter RAM and EEPROM, "1" is set in this signal. When "0" is set
EEPROM)
in the frequency setting command (RY22), "0" is set in this signal.
After "1" is set in the torque command / torque limit (RY23) and the torque
Torque command / torque limit setting command / torque limit value is written to the inverter RAM, "1" is set in this signal.
RX23
completion (RAM) When "0" is set in the torque command / torque limit (RY23), "0" is set in this
signal.
After "1" is set in the torque command / torque limit (RY24) and the torque
Torque command / torque limit setting command / torque limit value is written to the inverter RAM and EEPROM, "1" is
RX24
completion (RAM, EEPROM) set in this signal. When "0" is set in the torque command / torque limit (RY24), "0"
is set in this signal.
After "1" is set in the instruction code execution request (RY25) and the
processes corresponding to the instruction codes (RWw10, 12, 14, 16, 18 and
RX25 Instruction code execution completed
1A) are executed, "1" is set in this signal. When "0" is set in the instruction code
execution request (RY25), "0" is set in this signal.
When an inverter error occurs (protective function is activated), "1" is set in this
RX3A Error status flag
signal.
When the inverter goes into the ready status upon completion of initial setting
after power-on or hardware reset, "1" is set in this signal.
When an inverter error occurs (protective function is activated), "0" is set in this
RX3B Remote station ready
signal.
The signal is used as an interlock during the write to/read from the master
module.

5.21.4 Details of the remote register

The following device numbers are for the station number 1.
For the station number 2 and later, the device numbers are different. (Refer to the manual for the CC-Link master module for
the correspondence between device numbers and station numbers.)

758 5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
 Remote register (from the master module to the inverter)
Device No. Signal Description 1
• Specify the set frequency or rotations per minute (machine speed). At this time, whether
to write to RAM or EEPROM is decided with the RY21 and RY22 settings. After setting
the set frequency in this register, set "1" in RY21 or RY22 to write the frequency. After
RWw0 Set frequency*1*2 writing of frequency is completed, "1" is set in RX21 or RX22 in response to the input 2
command.
• The setting range is 0 to 590.00 Hz (0.01 Hz increments). Write "59000" when setting
590.00 Hz.
Torque command value Specify the torque command value / torque limit value. Set Pr.804 Torque command 3
source selection = "1, 3, 5, or 6" to activate this signal under Real sensorless vector
control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control. The value is written to the
RWw2*5 inverter either by RY23 or RY24. Pr.805 Torque command value (RAM) and Pr.806
Torque limit value
Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM) are updated as well. The setting range and 4
the setting increment depend on the Pr.804 setting. (Refer to page 762.)
Set the PID action set point.
RWw4 PID set point*3 Setting range: 0 to 100.00% • Input a value 100 times greater than the value to be
RWw5 PID measured value*3
Set the PID measured value. set. For example, enter "10000" when setting 5
Setting range: 0 to 100.00% 100.00%.
Set the PID deviation. • Refer to page 601 for details on PID control.
RWw6 PID deviation*3 Setting range: -100.00 to 100.00%

RWw10,
Set an instruction code (refer to page 760) for an operation such as operation mode 6
switching, parameter read/write, error reference, and error clear in the lower eight bits. The
RWw12,
instructions are executed in the following order by setting "1" in RY25 after completing the
RWw14, Link parameter extended
register setting: RWw10, 12, 14, 16, 18, then 1A. After completing the execution up to
RWw16,
RWw18,
setting / instruction code
RWw1A, "1" is set in RX25. Set HFFFF to disable an instruction by RWw10 to 1A. 7
Set the link parameter extended setting in the upper 8 bits.
RWw1A
Example) When reading Pr.160, instruction code is H0200.
RWw11, Set the data specified by the instruction code of RWw10, 12, 14, 16, 18 and 1A (when
RWw13, required). 8
RWw15, RWw10 and 11, 12 and 13, 14 and 15, 16 and 17, 18 and 19, and 1A and 1B correspond
Write data
RWw17, each other. Set "1" in RY25 after setting the instruction codes (RWw10, 12, 14, 16, 18 and
RWw19, 1A) and the corresponding register.
RWw1B Set "0" when the write data is not required.
Set the individual fault number of the fault history that you want to read. Fault records can
9
be read back to the eighth latest fault.
RWw21 Fault history No.*4 Last two digits: H00 (latest fault) to H07 (eighth latest fault)
Set H08 to HFF to make the fault history No. to "0".
10
RWw26 Monitor code 1*4
RWw27 Monitor code 2*4
Set the monitor code to be monitored. By setting "1" in RY20 after setting, the specified
RWw28 Monitor code 3*4
monitor data is stored in RWr26 to RWr2F.
RWw29 Monitor code 4*4 If a monitor code out of the setting range is set, no item is monitored (the monitor value is
fixed to 0).
RWw2A Monitor code 5*4
The monitor codes are the same as those of the RS-485 communication dedicated
RWw2B Monitor code 6*4 monitor. (Refer to page 446.)
RWw2C Monitor code 7*4 When the remote registers RWw26 to 2F are used for monitoring, H01 (output frequency)
and H05 (set frequency) always indicate the frequency regardless of the settings of Pr.37,
RWw2D Monitor code 8*4 Pr.144, and Pr.811.
RWw2E Monitor code 9*4
RWw2F Monitor code 10*4
*1 The rotation speed command or the machine speed command is selected according to the combination of Pr.37, Pr.144, and Pr.811. (Refer to
page 444.)
*2 When Pr.541 Frequency command sign selection = "1", the set frequency is a signed value. When the setting value is negative, the command
is the inverse from the start command. Setting range: -327.68 Hz to 327.67 Hz (-327.68 to 327.67), 0.01 Hz increments. (Refer to page 699.)
*3 When Pr.128 = "50, 51, 60, or 61", the register is valid. If the data outside the range is set, the previous setting is retained. (Refer to page 601.)
*4 Write data is in hexadecimal, and only two digits are valid. (The upper two digits are ignored.)
*5 The value in RWw2 is used as the torque limit value during speed control or position control, and as the torque command value during torque
control. (Torque control cannot be performed with a PM motor.) To use the value as the torque limit value, set Pr.810 = "2".

5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
759
  Remote register (from the inverter to the master module)
Device No. Signal Description
When "1" is set in RY21 or RY22, the following reply codes are set for the frequency setting
command. The setting value "0" is set normally, and a value other than "0" is set at an error.
RWr0 Reply code H0000: Normal
H0001: Write mode fault
H0003: Setting range fault
When "1" is set in RY23 or RY24, the following reply codes are set for the torque command /
torque limit. The setting value "0" is set normally, and a value other than "0" is set at an error.
RWr2 Reply code
H0000: Normal
H0003: Setting range fault
When the PID command (RWw4 to RWw6) is set, the following reply code is set for the PID
RWr4, RWr5, command. The setting value "0" is set normally, and a value other than "0" is set at an error.
Reply code
RWr6 H0000: Normal
H0003: Setting range fault
When "1" is set in RY25, the following reply codes corresponding to the instruction code RWw10,
RWr10,
12, 14, 16, 18, and 1A are set. The setting value "0" is set normally, and a value other than "0" is
RWr12,
set at an error.
RWr14,
Reply code H0000: Normal
RWr16,
H0001: Write mode fault
RWr18,
H0002: Parameter selection fault
RWr1A
H0003: Setting range fault
RWr11,
RWr13,
RWr15,
Read data In a normal reply, a replay code for the instruction code is set.
RWr17,
RWr19,
RWr1B
The setting value "0" is set during normal inverter operation, and the data code of the
RWr20 Error status corresponding error is set at an error. (For the data codes or details of fault records, refer to page
776.)
The data code of fault history No. specified by RWw21 is stored in the lower 8 bits.
RWr21 Fault record (fault data)
Lower 8 bits of RWw21 will be reverted back to the upper 8 bits.
Fault record (output
RWr22 The output frequency of the fault history No. specified in RWw21 is stored.
frequency)
Fault record (output
RWr23 The output current of the fault history No. specified in RWw21 is always stored.
current)
Fault record (output
RWr24 The output voltage of the fault history No. specified in RWw21 is always stored.
voltage)
Fault record
RWr25 The energization time of the fault history No. specified in RWw21 is always stored.
(energization time)
RWr26 First monitor value
RWr27 Second monitor value
RWr28 Third monitor value
RWr29 Fourth monitor value
When "1" is set in RY20, the monitor value specified to the corresponding monitor code (RWw26
RWr2A Fifth monitor value
to RWw2F) is stored.
RWr2B Sixth monitor value
The output frequency, output current, and output voltage monitors are held at an inverter failure.
RWr2C Seventh monitor value
RWr2D Eighth monitor value
RWr2E Ninth monitor value
RWr2F Tenth monitor value
RWr30 to Fixed monitored data are saved regardless of the RY20 setting.
Monitor value
RWr7F The output frequency, output current, and output voltage monitors are held at an inverter failure.

 Instruction code
Set instruction codes using the remote register (RWw). (Refer to page 759.)

760 5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
The definition read by the instruction code is stored in the remote register (RWr). (Refer to page 760.)

Item
Read/
write
Instruction
code
Data description 1
H0000: Network operation mode
H0001: External operation mode, External JOG operation mode
Read H7B

Operation mode
H0002: PU operation mode, External/PU combined operation 1 and 2, PUJOG
operation
2
H0000: Network operation mode
Write HFB H0001: External operation mode
H0002: PU operation mode (Pr.79 = "6", Pr.340 = "10, 12") 3
H0000 to HFFFF: Output frequency in 0.01 Hz increments (The display can be
Output frequency*1*2 Read H6F changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144 and Pr.811. (Refer to page
444.))

Output current Read H70

H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal)
Increment 0.01 A (FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower, FR-A840-01800(55K) or lower)
4
Increment 0.1 A (FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher)
H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal)
Output voltage Read H71
Increments 0.1 V 5
Special monitor Read H72 H0000 to HFFFF: Monitor data selected in the instruction code HF3
Read H73 H01 to HFF: Selection of the monitor item (monitor code)
Special monitor If a monitor code out of the setting range is set, a range error occurs.
selection No. Write HF3*3 The monitor codes (monitor items) are the same as those of the RS-485 6
communication dedicated monitor. (Refer to page 446.)
H0000 to HFFFF: Two fault records per code.
b15 b8 b7 b0

Monitor
H74 Second latest fault Latest fault 7
H75 Fourth latest fault Third latest fault

H76 Sixth latest fault Fifth latest fault 8

H77 Eighth latest fault Seventh latest fault

Fault record Read H74 to H77 Fault record display example (instruction code H74)
9
With the read data H30A0
(Second fault : THT)
(Latest fault : OPT)
b15 b8 b7 b0 10
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Second fault Latest fault

(H30) (HA0)
(Refer to page 776 for details on fault record read data.)
Set frequency (RAM) H6D Read the set frequency/speed from the RAM or EEPROM.
H0000 to HFFFF: Set frequency in 0.01 Hz increments
Read
Set frequency (EEPROM) H6E (The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144, and
Pr.811. (Refer to page 444.))
Set frequency (RAM)*4 Write HED Write the set frequency/speed into the RAM or EEPROM.
H0000 to HE678 (0 to 590.00 Hz): frequency in 0.01 Hz increments
(The display can be changed to the rotations per minute using Pr.37, Pr.144, and
Set frequency (RAM and
Write HEE Pr.811. (Refer to page 444.))
EEPROM)*4 • To change the set frequency consecutively, write data to the inverter RAM.
(Instruction code: HED)

• Refer to the instruction code (page 864) and write and/or read parameter values as
Read H00 to H6B required.
• Write to Pr.77 and Pr.79 is disabled.
Parameter • When setting Pr.100 and later, set the link parameter extended setting.
• Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
Write H80 to HEB • When changing the parameter values frequently, set "1" in Pr.342 to write them to
the RAM. (Refer to page 663.)

Fault history clear Write HF4 H9696: Fault history is cleared.

5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
761
 Read/ Instruction
Item Data description
write code
All parameters return to initial values.
Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be selected according to the
data.
• Parameter clear
H9696: Communication parameters are cleared.
H5A5A*5: Communication parameters are not cleared.
Parameter clear • All parameter clear
Write HFC
All parameter clear H9966: Communication parameters are cleared.
H55AA*5: Communication parameters are not cleared.
For details on whether or not to clear parameters, refer to page 864.
When clear is performed with H9696 or H9966, communication related parameter
settings also return to the initial values. When resuming the operation, set the
parameters again. Performing a clear will clear the instruction code HEC, HF3, and
HFF settings.
Inverter reset Write HFD H9696: Resets the inverter.
Read or write of bias and gain parameters (instruction codes H5E to H61 and HDE
Read H6C to HE1 with the link parameter extended setting = "1", H11 to H23 and H91 to HA3
*6
with the link parameter extended setting = "9").
Second parameter changing
H00: Frequency*7
Write HEC H01: Parameter-set analog value
H02: Analog value input from terminal
*1 When "100" is set in Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, set frequency is monitored during a stop and output frequency is monitored
during running.
*2 When position control is selected, the number of pulses is monitored when Pr.430 ≠ "9999".
*3 Write data is in hexadecimal, and only two digits are valid. (The upper two digits are ignored.)
*4 Setting from the remote register (RWw0) is also available.
*5 Turning OFF the power supply while clearing parameters with H5A5A or H55AA returns the communication parameter settings to the initial
settings.
*6 Reading or writing is available when the link parameter extended setting = "1 or 9".
*7 The gain frequency can be also written using Pr.125 (instruction code: H99) or Pr.126 (instruction code: H9A).

NOTE
• When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitored value is read and the read value exceeds HFFFF, the reply data will be HFFFF.

 Torque command / torque limit through CC-Link IE Field Network

communication
• Torque commands can be given or the torque can be limited via CC-Link IE Field Network under Real sensorless vector
control, Vector control, or PM sensorless vector control. The value is used to limit the torque during speed control or
position control, and to give a torque command during torque control. To limit the torque, set Pr.810 = "2". The torque
command / torque limit setting method can be selected using Pr.804 Torque command source selection. (Torque control
cannot be performed with a PM motor.)
• For setting the torque limit parameters, refer to page 245, and for setting the torque command parameters, refer to page
283.
• Set the torque command value or the torque limit value in RWw2. The RWw2 function is switched according to the Pr.804
and Pr.810 settings and the control mode.
RWw2 function
Pr.804 setting Pr.810 setting
Speed control / position control Torque control
2 Torque limit Torque command
1, 3, 5, 6
0, 1 RWw2 disabled Torque command
0, 4 — RWw2 disabled RWw2 disabled

• Relationship between the Pr.804 setting, the setting range, and the actual torque command / torque limit (when setting is
made from CC-Link IE Field Network communication)
Pr.804 setting Setting range Actual torque command Actual torque limit
1, 3 600 to 1400 (1% increments)*1 -400 to 400% 0 to 400%
-32768 to 32767 (two's
5, 6 -327.68 to 327.67% 0 to 327.67%
complement)*1

*1 The torque limit setting is defined as an absolute value.

762 5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
 • Torque command / torque limit setting method
Setting method Setting procedure 1
1. Set the torque command / torque limit value in RWw2.
Writing in RWw2
2. Set "1" in RY23 (or RY24).
1. Set link parameter extended setting = H08 for RWw10 (12, 14, 16, 18, 1A).
Writing in Pr.805 or Pr.806
2. Set H85 or H86 as the instruction code. 2
3. Set the torque command / torque limit value in RWw11 (13, 15, 17, 19, 1B).
4. Set "1" in RY25.

5.21.5 Programming examples 3

The following explains the programming examples for controlling the inverter with sequence programs.

Item Program example

Refer to
page
4
Reading the inverter status Reading the inverter status from the buffer memory of the master station 765
Setting the operation mode Selecting the Network operation mode 765
Setting the operation commands Commanding the forward rotation and middle speed signals 766 5
Setting the monitoring function Monitoring the output frequency 766
Reading a parameter value Reading the value of Pr.7 Acceleration time 767
Writing a parameter value Setting "3.0 s" in Pr.7 Acceleration time 767
Setting the set frequency (set
6
Setting to 50.00 Hz 768
speed)
Reading the fault records Reading the inverter faults 769
Inverter reset Resetting the inverter when an inverter error occurs 769 7
• System configuration for programming example

PLC
8
Power Master station Input unit Output unit
CPU
supply QJ71GF11-T2 QX40 QY40P
Q02UCPU
Q61P-A1 (X/Y00 to 1F) (X20 to X2F) (Y30 to Y3F)

X20 Y30
9
Station 1 Station 2
Inverter Inverter 10
Pr.434 = 1 Pr.434 = 1
Pr.435 = 1 Pr.435 = 2

• In the programming example, network parameters of the master station are set as follows. (Network parameters (module
1))
Item Setting condition
Network type CC-Link IE Field (master station)
Start I/O 0000
Network No. 1
Total number of (slave) stations 2
Mode Online (standard mode)
Network configuration Refer to the following.
Refresh parameter Refer to the following.

5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
763
 • Network configuration (assignment method: start/end)
Setting condition
Item
Module 1 Module 2
Station number 1 2
Station type Intelligent device station Intelligent device station
Start 0000 0040
RX/RY setting
End 003F 007F
Start 0000 0080
RWw/RWr setting
End 007F 00FF
Reserved station / error invalid
No setting No setting
station

• Refresh parameters (assignment method: start/end)

Link side Master side
Device name Start End Device name Start End
SB 0000 01FF SB 0000 01FF
SW 0000 01FF SW 0000 01FF
RX 0000 007F X 1000 107F
RY 0000 007F Y 1000 107F
RWr 0000 00FF W 000000 0000FF
RWw 0000 00FF W 000100 0001FF
• Remote I/O (RX and RY) transmitted between the programmable controller CPU and intelligent device stations

Programmable controller CPU Intelligent device station 1

X103F to X1000 RX3F to RX00

X107F to X1040

RY3F to RY00

Y103F to Y1000 Intelligent device station 2

Y107F to Y1040
RX3F to RX00

RY3F to RY00

764 5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
 • Remote registers (RWw and RWr) transmitted between the programmable controller CPU and the intelligent device
stations
1
Programmable controller CPU
Intelligent device station 1
For writing
W100
W101
RWw0
RWw1 2
W17E RWw7E
W17F RWw7F
W180
W181
RWr0
RWr1
3
W1FE RWr7E
W1FF RWr7F
4
For reading Intelligent device station 2
W000
W001 RWw0
RWw1 5
W07E
W07F RWw7E
W080 RWw7F
W081 RWr0
RWr1
6
W0FE
W0FF RWr7E
RWr7F
7
 Programming example for reading the inverter status
The following program turns ON the signal Y00 of the output unit when the station 1 inverter starts running.
8
SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1

3
M0 X1002
Y30 Turn ON the signal Y00 of the output unit 9
Inverter running (RX02)
6 END

X101F X1000
10
Remote input
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
One
RX3F to RX00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
station
[Inverter status]
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Inverter status [Inverter status]

b0 : Forward running
b1 : Reverse running
b2 : Running (RUN) 
b3 : Up to frequency (SU) 
b4 : Overload alarm (OL) 
b5 : Instantaneous power failure (IPF) 
b6 : Frequency detection (FU) 
b7 : Fault (ABC1) 
b8 : (ABC2) 
b16 : (DO0) 
b17 : (DO1) 
b18 : (DO2) 

*1 These signals are assigned in the initial status. Use Pr.190 to Pr.196 and Pr.313 to Pr.315 (Output terminal function
selection) to change the output signals.

 Programming example for setting the operation mode

The following explains a program to write various data to the inverter.
The following program changes the operation mode of the station 1 inverter to network operation.
• Operation mode write code: HFB (hexadecimal)
• Network operation set data: H0000 (hexadecimal) (Refer to page 760.)

5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
765
 • The reply code (RWr10) to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 760 for the reply code (RWr10).)

SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1.
M0 X20
3 PLS M300
M300
7 SET M301
M301 X1025
9 MOV H0FB W110
Write the operation mode write code (HFB)
to RWw10 and the set data (H0000) to RWw11.
MOV H0 W111

SET Y1025 Turn ON the instruction code execution

request (RY25).
RST M301

SET M302
M302 X1025 Read the reply code (RWr10) to D2 when the instruction
18 MOV W10 D2 code execution completion (RX25) turns ON.

RST Y1025 Turn OFF the instruction code execution

request (RY25).
RST M302

24 END

 Programming example for setting the operation commands

The following program gives a forward rotation command and middle-speed operation command to the station 1 inverter.

SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1.
M0 X20
3 Y1000 Forward rotation command (RY00)

Y1003 Middle-speed operation command (RY03)

7 END

Y100F Y1000
b15 b7 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 RY3F to RY00 One station

[Run command] 1: ON
Middle speed Forward rotation 0: OFF
Run command
b0 : Forward rotation command b6 : Second function selection (RT)∗1
b1 : Reverse rotation command b7 : Terminal 4 input selection (AU)∗1
b2 : High-speed operation command (RH)∗1 b8 : Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (CS)∗1
b3 : Middle-speed operation command (RM)∗1 b9 : Output stop (MRS)∗1
b4 : Low-speed operation command (RL)∗1 b10 : Start self-holding selection (STOP)∗1
b5 : Jog operation selection (JOG)∗1 b11 : Inverter reset (RES)∗1

*1 These signals are assigned in the initial status. Use Pr.180 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to change
the input signals. Some signals are not controllable by a command from the programmable controller depending on the
setting.

 Programming example for monitoring the output frequency

The following explains a program to read monitor functions of the inverter.

The following program reads the output frequency of the station 1 inverter to output to D1.
Output frequency read code: H0001 (hexadecimal)
For the monitor codes, refer to page 446.

766 5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
Example) The output frequency of 60 Hz is indicated as "H1770 (6000)".

SB49 SW0B0.0
1
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1.
M0 X20
3 Set the monitor code (H01) of output frequency
MOV H1 W126
in RWw26.
2
Y1020 Turn ON the monitor command (RY20).
X1020 Read the output frequency (RWr26) to output to D1
MOV W26 D1 when the monitoring (RX20) turns ON.

11 END
3

 Programming example for the parameter reading 4

The following program reads Pr.7 Acceleration time of the station 1 inverter to output to D1.
• Pr.7 Acceleration time reading instruction code: H07 (hexadecimal)
• Refer to page 864 for details on the parameter instruction code. 5
• The reply code (RWr10) to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 760 for the reply code (RWr10).)

6
SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1.
M0 X20
3 PLS M300
M300
7 SET M301

9
M301 X1025
MOV H7 W110 Write the Pr. 7 read code (H07) to RWw10.
7
SET Y1025 Turn ON the instruction code execution request (RY25).

RST M301
8
SET M302
M302 X1025
16 MOV W11 D1 Read the acceleration time (RWr11) and the reply code

MOV W10 D2
(RWr10) to output to D1 and D2 when the instruction code
execution completion (RX25) turns ON. 9
RST Y1025 Turn OFF the instruction code execution request (RY25).

RST M302
10
24 END

NOTE
• For the parameter assigned the number of 100 or higher, change the link parameter extended setting (set it to the one other
than H00). Refer to page 864 for the settings.

 Programming example for the parameter writing

The following program changes the setting value in Pr.7 Acceleration time of the station 1 inverter to 3.0 seconds.
• Acceleration time writing instruction code: H87 (hexadecimal)
• Acceleration time setting data: K30 (decimal)
For details on instruction codes of each parameter, refer to the list of parameters (function codes) and instruction codes under
different control modes (on page 864).

5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
767
 The reply code (RWr10) to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 760 for the reply code (RWr10).)

SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1.
M0 X20
3 PLS M300
M300
7 SET M301
M301 X1025
9 MOV H87 W110
Write the Pr. 7 write code (H87) to RWw10 and
the acceleration time setting data (K30) to RWw11.
MOV K30 W111

SET Y1025 Turn ON the instruction code execution request (RY25).

RST M301

SET M302
M302 X1025 Read the reply code (RWr10) to output to D2 when the
18 MOV W10 D2 instruction code execution completion (RX25) turns ON.
RST Y1025 Turn OFF the instruction code execution request (RY25).

RST M302

24 END

NOTE
• For the parameter assigned the number of 100 or higher, change the link parameter extended setting (set it to the one other
than H00). Refer to page 864 for the settings.
• For other functions, refer to the instruction codes (refer to page 760).

 Programming example for setting the running frequency

The following program changes the running frequency of the station 1 inverter to 50.00 Hz.
• Set frequency: K5000 (decimal)
• The reply code (RWr10) to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 760 for the reply code (RWr0).)

SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1.
M0 X20
3 PLS M300
M300
7 SET M301
M301 X1021
9 MOV K5000 W100 Write the set frequency to RWw0.

SET Y1021 Turn OFF the frequency setting

command RAM (RY21).
RST M301

SET M302
M302 X1021 Read the reply code (RWr0) to output to D2 when the
16 MOV W0 D2 frequency setting completion (RX21) turns ON.

RST Y1021 Turn OFF the frequency setting command RAM

(RY21).
RST M302

22 END

NOTE
• To change the set frequency continuously from a programmable controller, check that the frequency setting complete (for
example, X1021) turns ON, and the reply code from the intelligent register is H0000. Then change the setting data (for
example, W100) continuously.
• To write the set frequency to the EEPROM, change the following points in the program shown above.
- Frequency setting command (from Y1021 to Y1022)
- Frequency setting completion (from X1021 to X1022)

768 5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
 <Timing chart for writing to the RAM> <Timing chart for writing to the EEPROM>

Y1021 Y1022
1
(
)
W100 W100

Inverter Inverter
()
2
set frequency set frequency
Apply to the inverter when the command Y1022 turns ON.
*1 To the EEPROM, a writing is performed only once after the command Y1022 turns ON.
*2 If the set data is changed at the command Y1022 ON, the change is not applied to the inverter. 3

 Programming example for the fault record reading

The following program reads the fault records of the station 1 inverter to output to D1.
4
• Fault history No. 1 and 2 reading instruction code: H74 (hexadecimal)
For the error code, refer to page 776.
The reply code (RWr10) to the instruction code execution is set in D2. (Refer to page 760 for the reply code (RWr10).)
5
SB49 SW0B0.0
0
M0 X20
M0 Check the data link status of the station 1. 6
3 PLS M300
M300
7
M301 X1025
SET M301
7
9 MOV H74 W110 Write the fault history No.1 and No.2 read
code (H74) to RWw10.
SET Y1025 Turn ON the instruction code execution request

RST M301
(RY25).
8
SET M302
M302 X1025
16 MOV W11 D1 Read the fault record (RWr11) and the reply code 9
(RWr10) to output to D1 and D2 when the instruction
MOV W10 D2 code execution completion (RX25) turns ON.

RST Y1025 Turn OFF the instruction code execution request

(RY25). 10
RST M302

24 END

 Programming example for resetting the inverter at an inverter fault

The following program resets the station 1 inverter at an inverter fault.

SB49 SW0B0.0
0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1.
M0 X103A X20
3 Y103A Turn ON the error reset request flag (RY3A).
Turn OFF the error reset request flag (RY3A)
Error status flag
when the error status flag (RX3A) is OFF.
7 END

NOTE
• The inverter reset with the flag RY3A shown above is enabled at an inverter fault only.
• When Pr.349 Communication reset selection/Ready bit status selection = "0 or 100", inverter reset is available
independently of the operation mode.
• When using the instruction code execution request (RY25) with the instruction code (HFD) and data (H9696) to reset the
inverter, set a value other than "0" in Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection or change the operation mode to the
Network operation mode. (For the program example, refer to page 765.)

5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
769
 5.21.6 Instructions
 Programming instructions
• Since the buffer memory data of the master station is kept transferred (refreshed) to/from the inverters, the TO instruction
need not be executed every scan in response to data write or read requests. (The execution of the TO instruction every
scan does not pose any problem.)
• If the FROM/TO instruction is executed frequently, data may not be written reliably. When transferring data between the
inverter and sequence program via the buffer memory, perform the handshake to confirm that data has been written
without error.

TO instruction TO instruction
Correct Incorrect
Write completion Write completion

 Operating and handling instructions

• The commands only from the programmable controller can be accepted during CC-Link IE Field Network communication.
The run command from external and parameter unit is ignored.
• If multiple inverters have the same station number, the communication cannot be performed properly.
• The inverter protective function (E.OP1) is activated if data communication stops for more than the time set in Pr.500
Communication error execution waiting time due to a programmable controller fault, an open Ethernet cable etc. during
CC-Link IE Field Network operation.
• If the programmable controller (master station) is reset during CC-Link IE Field Network operation or if the programmable
controller is powered off, data communication stops and the inverter protective function (E.OP1) is activated. To reset the
programmable controller (master station), switch the operation mode to the External operation once, then reset the
programmable controller.
• When Pr.340 = "0 (initial value)", any inverter whose main power is restored is reset to return to the External operation
mode. To resume the Network operation, therefore, set the operation mode to the Network operation using the sequence
program. Set a value other than "0" in Pr.340 to start in the Network operation mode after inverter reset.

5.21.7 Troubleshooting
Description Point to be checked
Check for looseness of the connector between the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit
board and the inverter's control circuit board. Check that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly. (Check
for contact fault, break in the cable, etc.)
Check that Pr.434 Network number (CC-Link IE) and Pr.435 Station number (CC-Link IE) are
Operation mode does not switch to correctly set. (Check that their settings match with the program, that the network number is set within
the Network operation mode. the range, that no overlapping stations exist, and that the station number is set within the range.)
Check that the inverter is in the External operation mode.
Check that the operation mode switching program is running.
Check that the operation mode switching program has been written correctly.
Check that the inverter starting program is running.
Inverter does not start in the
Check that the inverter starting program has been written correctly.
Network operation mode.
Check that Pr.338 Communication operation command source is not set to External.

770 5. PARAMETERS
5.21 CC-Link IE Field Network (FR-A800-GF)
 CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
4

6.1 Inverter fault and alarm indications.......................................................................................................................772

6.2 Reset method for the protective functions ............................................................................................................773
6
6.3 Check and clear of the fault history ......................................................................................................................774
6.4 List of fault displays ..............................................................................................................................................776
6.5 Causes and corrective actions..............................................................................................................................779
7
6.6 Check first when you have a trouble.....................................................................................................................800

10

771
 6 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
This chapter explains the "PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS" that operate in this product.
Always read the instructions before use.

6.1 Inverter fault and alarm indications

• When the inverter detects a fault, depending on the nature of the fault, the operation panel displays an error message or
warning, or a protective function is activated to shut off the inverter output.
• When any fault occurs, take an appropriate corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume the operation. Restarting
the operation without a reset may break or damage the inverter.
• When a protective function is activated, note the following points.
Item Description
Opening the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the inverter at a fault occurrence shuts off
Fault output signal
the control power to the inverter, therefore, the fault output will not be retained.
Fault or alarm indication When a protective function is activated, the operation panel displays a fault indication.
While a protective function is activated, the inverter output is kept shutoff. Reset the inverter to restart the
Operation restart method
operation.
• Inverter fault or alarm indications are categorized as follows.
Displayed item Description
A message regarding operational fault and setting fault by the operation panel and the parameter unit. The
Error message
inverter output is not shut off.
The inverter output is not shut off even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate
Warning
measures will lead to a fault.
Alarm The inverter output is not shut off. An Alarm (LF) signal can also be output with a parameter setting.
Fault When a protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and a Fault (ALM) signal is output.

NOTE
• The last eight faults can be displayed on the operation panel. (Fault history) (For the operation, refer to page 774.)

772 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.1 Inverter fault and alarm indications
6.2 Reset method for the protective functions 1

Reset the inverter by performing any of the following operations. Note that the accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal
relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter. 2
The inverter recovers about 1 second after the reset is released.

3
• On the operation panel, press to reset the inverter. (This operation is valid only when a protective function for a fault
is activated. (Refer to page 785 of the Instruction Manual for faults.))
4

5
• Switch the power OFF once, then switch it ON again.
ON
6
OFF

• Turn ON the Reset (RES) signal for 0.1 second or more. (If the RES signal is kept ON, "Err" appears (blinks) to indicate 7
that the inverter is in a reset status.)
Inverter
8
RES
SD 9
NOTE
• OFF status of the start signal must be confirmed before resetting the inverter fault. Resetting an inverter fault with the start 10
signal ON restarts the motor suddenly.

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.2 Reset method for the protective functions
773
 6.3 Check and clear of the fault history
The operation panel stores the fault indications which appear when a protective function is activated to display the fault record
for the past 8 faults (fault history).

 Check for the fault history

Monitor mode Parameter setting mode Function mode

Fault history mode

[Operation for displaying fault history]

The last eight fault records can be displayed.
(On the display of the last fault record (fault record 1), a decimal point LED is ON.)

Output frequency Output current 

Blinking Blinking
Fault record 1

Time Output voltage

Blinking Blinking

Press the
setting dial.

Fault record number

Cumulative
Day energization time 

Latest fault

Fault record 2 Fault record number Blinking Blinking

Second latest fault

Press the
setting dial.
Month Year

Fault record 8 Fault record number

Blinking Blinking

Eighth latest fault

When the fault history is
empty, "E0" is displayed. Press the
setting dial.

*1 When an overcurrent trip occurs by an instantaneous overcurrent, the monitored current value saved in the fault history may be lower than the
actual current that has flowed.
*2 The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0.

774 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.3 Check and clear of the fault history
 Fault history clearing procedure
1
• Set Err.CL Fault history clear = "1" to clear the fault history.

2
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode. 3
2. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.) 4
3. Selecting the parameter number

Turn until " " (Fault history clear) appears. Press to read the present set value. " " 5
(initial value) appears.

4. Fault history clear 6

Turn to change the set value to " ". Press to start clearing.

" " and " " are displayed alternately after parameters are cleared. 7
• Turn to read another parameter.

• Press to show the setting again. 8

• Press twice to show the next parameter.
9

10

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.3 Check and clear of the fault history
775
 6.4 List of fault displays
If the displayed message does not correspond to any of the Operation panel Refer
Name
following or if you have any other problem, contact your sales indication to page
representative. Continuous operation during 784
communication fault
 Error message Load fault warning 784

• A message regarding operational fault and setting fault

by the operation panel and the parameter unit is  Alarm
displayed. The inverter output is not shut off. • The inverter output is not shut off. An Alarm (LF) signal
can also be output with a parameter setting.
Operation panel Refer
Name
indication to page
Operation panel Refer
Name
Operation panel lock 779 indication to page

Password locked 779 Fan alarm 785

to Internal fan alarm 785

779,
Parameter write error
780  Fault
• When a protective function is activated, the inverter
to output is shut off and a Fault (ALM) signal is output.
780,
Copy operation fault
781
• The data code is used for checking the fault detail via
communication or with Pr.997 Fault initiation.
Error 781
 Data code 16 to 199

 Warning Operation panel

Name
Data Refer
indication code to page
• The inverter output is not shut off even when a warning is
Overcurrent trip during 16
785
displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures acceleration (H10)
will lead to a fault. Overcurrent trip during 17
786
constant speed (H11)
Operation panel Refer Overcurrent trip during 18
Name 786
indication to page deceleration or stop (H12)
Regenerative overvoltage 32
Stall prevention (overcurrent) 782 787
trip during acceleration (H20)
Regenerative overvoltage 33
Stall prevention (overvoltage) 782 787
trip during constant speed (H21)
Regenerative brake pre-alarm 782 Regenerative overvoltage 34
787
trip during deceleration or (H22)
Electronic thermal relay function 783 Inverter overload trip 48
pre-alarm 787
(electronic thermal relay (H30)
PU stop 783 Motor overload trip 49
788
(electronic thermal relay (H31)
Speed limit indication 783
64
Heat sink overheat 788
Parameter copy 783 (H40)
80
Instantaneous power failure 788
Safety stop 783 (H50)
81
to Undervoltage 789
(H51)
Maintenance signal output 784
82
Input phase loss 789
(H52)
USB host error 784 96
Stall prevention stop 789
(H60)
Home position return setting error 784 Loss of synchronism 97
790
detection (H61)
Home position return uncompleted 784 98
Upper limit fault detection 790
(H62)
Home position return parameter 784
setting error 99
Lower limit fault detection 790
(H63)

776 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.4 List of fault displays
 Operation panel Data Refer Operation panel Data Refer
Name Name
indication code to page indication code to page
Brake transistor alarm 112 208
1
790 Overspeed occurrence 795
detection (H70) (HD0)
Output side earth (ground) 128 Speed deviation excess 209
790 795
fault overcurrent (H80)
129
detection (HD1)
210
2
Output phase loss 791 Signal loss detection 796
(H81) (HD2)
External thermal relay 144 211
791 Excessive position fault 796
operation (H90)
145 Orientation encoder no-
(HD3)
212
3
PTC thermistor operation 791 796
(H91) signal (HD4)
160 213
Option fault
(HA0)
791 (HD5) 4
161 214
(HA1) (HD6)
162 215
Communication option fault
(HA2)
792 (HD7) 5
163 216
Brake sequence fault 797
(HA3) (HD8)
164 217
(HA4) (HD9) 6
165 218
(HA5) (HDA)
219
User definition error by the
PLC function
166
(HA6)
792 (HDB) 7
220
167 Encoder phase fault 797
(HDC)
(HA7)
Magnetic pole position 222
168
(HA8)
unknown (HDE)
797 8
External fault during output 224
Parameter storage device 176 797
792 operation (HE0)
fault (control circuit board) (HB0)

PU disconnection
177
792
Abnormal internal
temperature
225
(HE1)
797 9
(HB1)
228
178 4 mA input fault 797
Retry count excess 793 (HE4)
(HB2)
Parameter storage device 179
793
Pre-charge fault
229
(HE5)
798 10
fault (main circuit board) (HB3)
230
192 PID signal fault 798
CPU fault 793 (HE6)
(HC0)
241
Operation panel power 193
793 (HF1)
supply short circuit/RS-485 (HC1)
242
194 Option fault 798
24 VDC power fault 793 (HF2)
(HC2)
243
Abnormal output current 196 (HF3)
794
detection (HC4)
245
Inrush current limit circuit 197 (HF5)
794
fault (HC5)
246
Communication fault 198 CPU fault 793
794 (HF6)
(inverter) (HC6)
247
199 (HF7)
Analog input fault 794
(HC7)
Opposite rotation 251
799
deceleration fault (HFB)
 Data code 200 or more
 Others
Operation panel Data Refer • The fault history and the operation status of the inverter
Name
indication code to page
are displayed. It is not a fault indication.
200
USB communication fault 794
(HC8)
201 Operation panel Refer
Safety circuit fault 795 Name
(HC9) indication to page
202 Fault history 774
(HCA)
Internal circuit fault 795
253 No fault history 799
(HFD)

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.4 List of fault displays
777
 Operation panel Refer
Name
indication to page
24 V external power supply 799
operation
Backup in progress 799

Restoration in progress 799

If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales

representative.

778 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.4 List of fault displays
6.5 Causes and corrective actions
1
 Error message
A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. Output is not shut off. 2
Operation panel
HOLD
indication
Name Operation panel lock 3
Description Operation lock is set. Operation other than is invalid. (Refer to page 341.)
Check point --------------
4
Corrective action Press for 2 seconds to release the lock.

Operation panel
LOCD
5
indication
Name Password locked
Description Password function is active. Display and setting of parameters are restricted.
Check point -------------- 6
Enter the password in Pr.297 Password lock/unlock to unlock the password function before operating. (Refer to
Corrective action
page 348.)

7
Operation panel
Er1
indication
Name Write disable error
• Parameter setting was attempted while Pr.77 Parameter write selection is set to disable parameter write. 8
• Overlapping range has been set for the frequency jump.
Description • Overlapping range has been set for the adjustable 5 points V/F.
• The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication.
• IPM parameter initialization was attempted while Pr.72 PWM frequency selection = "25". 9
• Check the Pr.77 setting. (Refer to page 345.)
• Check the settings of Pr.31 to Pr.36 (frequency jump). (Refer to page 429.)
Check point • Check the settings of Pr.100 to Pr.109 (adjustable 5 points V/F). (Refer to page 713.)
•
•
Check the connection of PU and the inverter.
Check the Pr.72 setting. A sine wave filter cannot be used under PM sensorless vector control.
10

Operation panel
Er2
indication
Name Write error during operation
Description Parameter write was attempted while Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "0".
Check point • Check that the inverter is stopped.
• After stopping the operation, make parameter setting.
Corrective action
• When setting Pr.77 = "2", parameter write is enabled during operation. (Refer to page 345.)

Operation panel
Er3
indication
Name Calibration error
Description Analog input bias and gain calibration values have been set too close.
Check point Check the settings of the calibration parameters C3, C4, C6, and C7 (calibration functions). (Refer to page 505.)

Operation panel
Er4
indication
Name Mode designation error
• Parameter setting was attempted in the External or NET operation mode while Pr.77 Parameter write selection
Description = "1".
• Parameter write was attempted when the command source is not at the operation panel (FR-DU08).
• Check that the operation mode is the PU operation mode.
Check point
• Check that the Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection setting is correct.
• After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer to page 389.)
Corrective action • When Pr.77 = "2", parameter write is enabled regardless of the operation mode. (Refer to page 345.)
• Set Pr.551 = "2". (Refer to page 400.)

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.5 Causes and corrective actions
779
 Operation panel
Er8
indication
Name USB memory device operation error
• An operation command was given during the USB memory device operation.
Description • A copy operation (writing) was performed while the PLC function was in the RUN state.
• A copy operation was attempted for a password locked project.
• Check if the USB memory device is operating.
Check point • Check if the PLC function is in the RUN state.
• Check if the project data is locked with a password.
• Perform the operation after the USB memory device operation is completed.
• Stop the PLC function. (Refer to page 646 and the PLC function programming manual.)
Corrective action
• Unlock the password of the project data using FR Configurator2. (Refer to the Instruction Manuals of FR
Configurator2 and GX Works2.)

Operation panel
rE1
indication
Name Parameter read error
• A failure has occurred at the operation panel side EEPROM while reading the copied parameters.
Description • A failure has occurred in the USB memory device while copying the parameters or reading the PLC function
project data.
Check point • --------------
• Perform parameter copy again. (Refer to page 744 and page 747.)
• Perform PLC function project data copy again. (Refer to page 646.)
Corrective action
• The USB memory device may be faulty. Replace the USB memory device.
• The operation panel (FR-DU08) may be faulty. Contact your sales representative.

Operation panel
rE2
indication
Name Parameter write error
• Parameter copy from the operation panel to the inverter was attempted during operation.
• A failure has occurred at the operation panel side EEPROM while writing the copied parameters.
Description
• A failure has occurred in the USB memory device while writing the copied parameters or PLC function project
data.
Check point • Check that the inverter is stopped.
• After stopping the operation, perform parameter copy again. (Refer to page 744.)
• The operation panel (FR-DU08) may be faulty. Contact your sales representative.
Corrective action
• Perform parameter copy or PLC project data copy again. (Refer to page 646 and page 747.)
• The USB memory device may be faulty. Replace the USB memory device.

Operation panel
rE3
indication
Name Parameter verification error
• The data in the inverter are different from the data in the operation panel.
• A failure has occurred at the operation panel side EEPROM during parameter verification.
Description • A failure has occurred in the USB memory device during parameter verification.
• The data in the inverter are different from the data in the USB memory device or the personal computer (FR
Configurator2).
Check point • Check the parameter setting of the source inverter against the setting of the destination inverter.

• Continue the verification by pressing .

• Perform parameter verification again. (Refer to page 746.)
Corrective action
• The operation panel (FR-DU08) may be faulty. Contact your sales representative.
• The USB memory device may be faulty. Replace the USB memory device.
• Verify the PLC function project data again. (Refer to page 646.)

780 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.5 Causes and corrective actions
Operation panel
indication
rE4
1
Name Model error
• The series of the source inverter used to copy or verify parameters is not the same as the target inverter.
Description • The operation panel data was incorrect when attempting to verify parameters or copy parameters from the
operation panel to the inverter. 2
• Check that the source inverter being used to verify or copy parameters is the same series as the target inverter.
Check point • Check that the copying of parameters was not interrupted due to a loss of power to the inverter or the operation
panel being disconnected.
• Use a source inverter that is the same series (FR-A800 series) as the target inverter. 3
Corrective action
• Try to copy the parameters to the operation panel from the inverter again.

Operation panel
indication
rE5 4
Name File error
Description • The data in the USB memory device may be damaged.
Check point • -------------- 5
Corrective action • Delete the copy file in the USB memory device and perform parameter copy again.

Operation panel
indication
rE6 6
Name File error
• The parameter copy file in the USB memory device cannot be recognized.
Description
• An error has occurred in the file system during transfer of the PLC function data or writing to RAM. 7
Check point • --------------
• Perform parameter copy again. (Refer to page 747.)
Corrective action
• Copy the PLC function project data again. (Refer to page 646.)
8
Operation panel
rE7
indication
Name File quantity error
• A parameter copy was attempted to the USB memory device in which the copy files from 001 to 099 had already
9
Description
been saved.
Check point • Check if the number of copy files in the USB memory device has reached 99.
Corrective action • Delete the copy file in the USB memory device and perform parameter copy again. (Refer to page 747.) 10
Operation panel
rE8
indication
Name No PLC function project file
Description The specified PLC function project file does not exist in the USB memory device.
• Check that the file exists in the USB memory device.
Check point
• Check that the folder name and the file name in the USB memory device is correct.
Corrective action The data in the USB memory device may be damaged.

Operation panel
Err.
indication
• The RES signal is turned ON.
• The operation panel and inverter cannot make normal communication (contact faults of the connector).
Description • This error may occur when the voltage at the input side of the inverter drops.
• When using a separate power source for the control circuit power (R1/L11, S1/L21) from the main circuit power
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3), this error may appear at turning ON of the main circuit. It is not a fault.
• Turn OFF the RES signal.
Corrective action • Check the connection between the operation panel and the inverter.
• Check the voltage on the input side of the inverter.

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.5 Causes and corrective actions
781
  Warning
Output is not shut off when a protective function is activated.
Operation panel
OL FR-LU08 indication OL
indication
Name Stall prevention (overcurrent)
• When the output current of the inverter increases, the stall prevention (overcurrent) function is activated.
• The following section explains about the stall prevention (overcurrent) function.
When the output current (output torque under Real sensorless vector control or Vector
control) of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention level (Pr.22 Stall prevention
operation level, etc.), this function stops the increase in frequency until the overload
During acceleration
current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the
overload current is reduced below stall prevention operation level, this function increases
the frequency again.
When the output current (output torque under Real sensorless vector control or Vector
control) of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention level (Pr.22 Stall prevention
Description
During constant- operation level, etc.), this function reduces frequency until the overload current
speed operation decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload
current is reduced below stall prevention operation level, this function increases the
frequency up to the set value.
When the output current (output torque under Real sensorless vector control or Vector
control) of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention level (Pr.22 Stall prevention
operation level, etc.), this function stops the decrease in frequency until the overload
During deceleration
current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the
overload current is reduced below stall prevention operation level, this function decreases
the frequency again.
• Check that the Pr.0 Torque boost setting is not too large.
• The Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time settings may be too short.
• Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check point
• Check for any failures in peripheral devices.
• Check that the Pr.13 Starting frequency is not too large.
• Check that Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level is appropriate.
• Gradually increase or decrease the Pr.0 setting by 1% at a time and check the motor status. (Refer to page
706.)
• Set a larger value in Pr.7 and Pr.8. (Refer to page 367.)
• Reduce the load.
• Try Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or Vector control.
Corrective action
• Change the Pr.14 Load pattern selection setting.
• The stall prevention operation current can be set in Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level. (Initial value is
150%.) The acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level with Pr.22
Stall prevention operation level, or disable stall prevention with Pr.156 Stall prevention operation
selection. (Use Pr.156 to set either operation continued or not at OL operation.)

Operation panel
oL FR-LU08 indication oL
indication
Name Stall prevention (overvoltage)
• When the output voltage of the inverter increases, the stall prevention (overvoltage) function is activated.
• The regeneration avoidance function is activated due to excessive regenerative power of the motor. (Refer to
page 732.)
Description • The following section explains the stall prevention (overvoltage) function.
If the regenerative power of the motor becomes excessive to exceed the regenerative
During deceleration power consumption capability, this function stops decreasing the frequency to prevent
overvoltage trip. As soon as the regenerative power has reduced, deceleration resumes.
• Check for sudden speed reduction.
Check point
• Check if the regeneration avoidance function (Pr.882 to Pr.886) is being used. (Refer to page 732.)
Corrective action The deceleration time may change. Increase the deceleration time using Pr.8 Deceleration time.

Operation panel
RB FR-LU08 indication RB
indication
Name Regenerative brake pre-alarm (Standard models only)
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty
Description
value. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV[ ]) occurs.
• Check if the brake resistor duty is not too high.
Check point
• Check that the Pr.30 Regenerative function selection and Pr.70 settings are correct.
• Set the deceleration time longer.
Corrective action
• Check the Pr.30 and Pr.70 settings. (Refer to page 724.)

782 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.5 Causes and corrective actions
Operation panel
indication
TH FR-LU08 indication TH
1
Name Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm
Appears if the cumulative value of the electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the preset level
Description of Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. If the specified value is reached, the protection circuit is activated to shut
off the inverter output. 2
• Check for large load or sudden acceleration.
Check point
• Check that the Pr.9 setting is appropriate. (Refer to page 415.)

Corrective action
• Reduce the load and frequency of operation.
• Set an appropriate value in Pr.9. (Refer to page 415.) 3
Operation panel
PS FR-LU08 indication PS
indication 4
Name PU stop

• The motor is stopped using under the mode other than the PU operation mode. (To enable
Description under the mode other than the PU operation mode, set Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/
PU stop selection. Refer to page 336 for details.)
5
• The motor is stopped by the emergency stop function.

• Check for a stop made by pressing of the operation panel.

Check point
• Check for whether the X92 signal is OFF.
6
Corrective action • Turn the start signal OFF and release with .
• Turn ON the X92 signal and OFF the start signal for release.
7
Operation panel
SL FR-LU08 indication SL
indication
Name Speed limit indication (output during speed limit) 8
Description Output if the speed limit level is exceeded during torque control.
• Check that the torque command is not larger than required.
Check point
• Check if the speed limit level is set too low.

Corrective action
• Decrease the torque command value. 9
• Increase the speed limit level.

Operation panel
indication
CP FR-LU08 indication CP 10
Name Parameter copy
Appears when parameter copy is performed between the FR-A820-03160(55K) or lower / FR-A840-01800(55K)
Description
or lower inverters and the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher / FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher inverters.
Resetting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.61, Pr.70, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.82, Pr.90 to Pr.94, Pr.453, Pr.455,
Check point
Pr.458 to Pr.462, Pr.557, Pr.859, Pr.860, and Pr.893 is necessary.
Corrective action Set the initial value in Pr.989 Parameter copy alarm release.

Operation panel
SA FR-LU08 indication —
indication
Name Safety stop
Description Appears when safety stop function is activated (during output shutoff). (Refer to page 82.)
• Check if an emergency stop device is activated.
Check point • Check if the shorting wire between S1 and PC or between S2 and PC is disconnected when not using the safety
stop function.
• An emergency stop device is active when using the safety stop function. Identify the cause of emergency stop,
ensure the safety and restart the system.
• When not using the safety stop function, short across terminals S1 and PC and across S2 and PC with shorting
Corrective action wire for the inverter to run.
• If " " is indicated when wires across S1 and SIC and across S2 and SIC are both conducted while using
the safety stop function (drive enabled), internal failure might be the cause. Check the wiring of terminals S1,
S2, and SIC and contact your sales representative if the wiring has no fault.

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.5 Causes and corrective actions
783
 to
Operation panel
MT1 to MT3 FR-LU08 indication MT1 to MT3
indication

Name Maintenance signal output

Appears when the inverter's cumulative energization time reaches or exceeds the parameter set value. Set the
time until the MT is displayed using Pr.504 Maintenance timer 1 warning output set time (MT1), Pr.687
Description
Maintenance timer 2 warning output set time (MT2), and Pr.689 Maintenance timer 3 warning output set
time (MT3). MT does not appear when the settings of Pr.504, Pr.687, and Pr.689 are initial values (9999).
Check point The set time of maintenance timer has been exceeded. (Refer to page 363.)
Take appropriate countermeasures according to the purpose of the maintenance timer setting.
Corrective action Setting "0" in Pr.503 Maintenance timer 1, Pr.686 Maintenance timer 2, and Pr.688 Maintenance timer 3
clears the indication.

Operation panel
UF FR-LU08 indication UF
indication
Name USB host error
Description Appears when an excessive current flows into the USB A connector.
Check point Check if a USB device other than a USB memory device is connected to the USB A connector.
• If a device other than a USB memory device is connected to the USB A connector, remove the device.
Corrective action
• Setting Pr.1049 USB host reset = "1" or inverter reset clears the UF indication.

to
Operation panel
HP1 to HP3 FR-LU08 indication HP1 to HP3
indication

Name Home position return error

Appears when an error occurs during the home position return operation under position control. For the details,
Description
refer to page 313.
Check point Identify the cause of the error occurrence.
Corrective action Check the parameter setting, and check that the input signal is correct.

Operation panel
CF FR-LU08 indication CF
indication
Name Continuous operation during communication fault
Appears when the operation continues while an error is occurring in the communication line or communication
Description
option (when Pr.502 = "4").
• Check for a break in the communication cable.
Check point
• Check for communication option faults.
• Check the connection of communication cable.
Corrective action
• Replace the communication option.

Operation panel
LDF FR-LU08 indication LDF
indication
Name Load fault warning
Appears when the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1488 Upper limit warning detection width
Description
or Pr.1489 Lower limit warning detection width.
• Check if too much load is applied to the equipment, or if the load is too light.
Check point
• Check that the load characteristics settings are correct.
• Inspect the equipment.
Corrective action
• Set the load characteristics (Pr.1481 to Pr.1487) correctly.

784 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.5 Causes and corrective actions
 Alarm
Output is not shut off when a protective function is activated. The Alarm (LF) signal can be output depending on the parameter 1
setting. (Set "98" in Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). Refer to page 473.)
Operation panel
FN FR-LU08 indication FN
indication 2
Name Fan alarm
For the inverter that contains a cooling fan, FN appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due
Description
to a fault, low rotation speed, or different operation from the setting of Pr.244 Cooling fan operation selection.

Check point
When the cooling fan is replaced, check that the fan is not installed upside down. 3
Check the cooling fan for a failure.
Install the fan correctly. (Refer to page 815.)
Corrective action If the fan alarm still occurs after the fan is installed correctly, the fan may be faulty. Contact your sales
representative. 4
Operation panel
indication
FN2 FR-LU08 indication FN2
5
Name Internal fan alarm (IP55 compatible models only)
Description FN2 appears on the operation panel when the internal air circulation fan stops due to a fault or low rotation speed.
Check point Check the internal air circulation fan for a failure.
Corrective action The fan may be faulty. Contact your sales representative.
6
 Fault
When a protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and a Fault signal is output. 7
Operation panel
E.OC1 FR-LU08 indication OC During Acc
indication
Name Overcurrent trip during acceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 235%*1 of the rated current during
8
Description
acceleration, the protection circuit is activated and the inverter output is shut off.
• Check for sudden speed acceleration.
•
•
Check if the downward acceleration time is too long in a lift application.
Check for output short-circuit.
9
• Check that the Pr.3 Base frequency setting is not 60 Hz when the motor rated frequency is 50 Hz.
• Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high. Check if the fast-response current limit operation is

•
disabled.
Check that the regenerative driving is not performed frequently. (Check if the output voltage becomes larger
10
than the V/F reference voltage at regenerative driving and overcurrent occurs due to increase in the motor
Check point
current.)
• Check that the power supply for RS-485 terminal is not shorted (under Vector control).
• Check that the encoder wiring and the specifications (encoder power supply, resolution, differential/
complementary) are correct. Check also that the motor wiring (U, V, W) is correct (under Vector control).
• Check that the rotation direction is not switched from forward to reverse rotation (or from reverse to forward)
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control.
• Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity. (PM sensorless vector control)
• Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (PM sensorless vector control)
• Set the acceleration time longer. (Shorten the downward acceleration time of the lift.)
• If "E.OC1" always appears at start, disconnect the motor once and restart the inverter. If "E.OC1" still appears,
contact your sales representative.
• Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur.
• Set 50 Hz in Pr.3 Base frequency. (Refer to page 707.)
• Lower the stall prevention operation level. Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (Refer to page
431.)
• Set the base voltage (rated voltage of the motor, etc.) in Pr.19 Base frequency voltage. (Refer to page 707.)
Corrective action
• Check RS-485 terminal connection (under Vector control).
• Check the wiring and specifications of the encoder and the motor. Perform the setting according to the
specifications of the encoder and the motor (under vector control). (Refer to page 87.)
• Prevent the motor from switching the rotation direction from forward to reverse (or from reverse to forward)
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control.
• Choose inverter and motor capacities that match. (PM sensorless vector control)
• Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure/flying start function. (Refer to page 635.) (PM sensorless vector control)

*1 Differs according to ratings. The rating can be changed using Pr.570 Multiple rating setting. (Refer to page 343.)
148% for SLD rating, 170% for LD rating, 235% for ND rating (initial setting), and 280% for HD rating

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.5 Causes and corrective actions
785
 Operation panel
E.OC2 FR-LU08 indication OC During Cnst Spd
indication
Name Overcurrent trip during constant speed

Description When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 235%*2 of the rated current during constant-
speed operation, the protection circuit is activated and the inverter output is shut off.
• Check for sudden load change.
• Check for a short-circuit in the output circuit.
• Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high. Check if the fast-response current limit operation is
disabled.
Check point • Check that the power supply for RS-485 terminal is not shorted (under Vector control).
• Check that the rotation direction is not switched from forward to reverse rotation (or from reverse to forward)
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control.
• Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity. (PM sensorless vector control)
• Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (PM sensorless vector control)
• Keep the load stable.
• Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur.
• Lower the stall prevention operation level. Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (Refer to page
431.)
• Check RS-485 terminal connection (under Vector control).
Corrective action
• Prevent the motor from switching the rotation direction from forward to reverse (or from reverse to forward)
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control.
• Choose inverter and motor capacities that match. (PM sensorless vector control)
• Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure/flying start function. (Refer to page 635.) (PM sensorless vector control)
*2 Differs according to ratings. The rating can be changed using Pr.570 Multiple rating setting. (Refer to page 343.)
148% for SLD rating, 170% for LD rating, 235% for ND rating (initial setting), and 280% for HD rating

Operation panel
E.OC3 FR-LU08 indication OC During Dec
indication
Name Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 235%*3 of the rated current during
Description deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protection circuit is activated and the inverter output
is shut off.
• Check for sudden speed reduction.
• Check for a short-circuit in the output circuit.
• Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake.
• Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high. Check if the fast-response current limit operation is
disabled.
Check point
• Check that the power supply for RS-485 terminal is not shorted (under Vector control).
• Check that the rotation direction is not switched from forward to reverse rotation (or from reverse to forward)
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control.
• Check that the inverter capacity matches with the motor capacity. (PM sensorless vector control)
• Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (PM sensorless vector control)
• Set the deceleration time longer.
• Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur.
• Check the mechanical brake operation.
• Lower the stall prevention operation level. Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (Refer to page
431.)
Corrective action • Check RS-485 terminal connection (under Vector control).
• Prevent the motor from switching the rotation direction from forward to reverse (or from reverse to forward)
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control.
• Choose inverter and motor capacities that match. (PM sensorless vector control)
• Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure/flying start function. (Refer to page 635.) (PM sensorless vector control)
*3 Differs according to ratings. The rating can be changed using Pr.570 Multiple rating setting. (Refer to page 343.)
148% for SLD rating, 170% for LD rating, 235% for ND rating (initial setting), and 280% for HD rating

786 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.5 Causes and corrective actions
Operation panel
indication
E.OV1 FR-LU08 indication OV During Acc
1
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration
If regenerative power causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified
Description value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge
voltage produced in the power supply system. 2
• Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during downward acceleration in vertical lift load)
Check point • Check that the Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level is not set to the no load current or lower.
• Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load inertia.
• Set the acceleration time shorter. 3
Use the regeneration avoidance function (Pr.882 to Pr.886). (Refer to page 732.)
Corrective action
• Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr.22.
• Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10 or 11". (Refer to page 431.)
4
Operation panel
E.OV2 FR-LU08 indication OV During Cnst Spd
indication
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed 5
If regenerative power causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified
Description value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge
voltage produced in the power supply system.
•
•
Check for sudden load change.
Check that the Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level is not set to the no load current or lower.
6
Check point
• Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load inertia.
• Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short.
• Keep the load stable.
• Use the regeneration avoidance function (Pr.882 to Pr.886). (Refer to page 732.)
7
• Use the brake unit, multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC), or power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV) as required.
Corrective action • Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr.22.
• Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10 or 11". (Refer to page 431.)
8
• Set the acceleration/deceleration time longer. (Under Vector control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control,
the output torque can be increased. However, sudden acceleration may cause an overshoot in speed, resulting
in an occurrence of overvoltage.)
9
Operation panel
E.OV3 FR-LU08 indication OV During Dec
indication
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop 10
If regenerative power causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified
Description value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge
voltage produced in the power supply system.
• Check for sudden speed reduction.
Check point
• Check if the stall prevention operation is frequently activated in an application with a large load inertia.
• Set the deceleration time longer. (Set the deceleration time which matches the moment of inertia of the load.)
• Make the brake cycle longer.
• Use the regeneration avoidance function (Pr.882 to Pr.886). (Refer to page 732.)
Corrective action
• Use the brake unit, multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC), or power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV) as required.
• Set Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation = "10 or 11". (Refer to page 431.)

Operation panel
E.THT FR-LU08 indication Inv. overload trip
indication
Name Inverter overload trip (Electronic thermal O/L relay)*4
If the temperature of the output transistor elements exceeds the protection level with a rated output current or
Description
higher flowing without the overcurrent trip (E.OC[]), the inverter output is stopped. (Overload capacity 150% 60 s)
• Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short.
• Check that torque boost setting is not too large (small).
• Check that load pattern selection setting is appropriate for the load pattern of the using machine.
Check point
• Check the motor for the use under overload.
• Check that the encoder wiring and the specifications (encoder power supply, resolution, differential/
complementary) are correct. Check also that the motor wiring (U, V, W) is correct (under Vector control).
• Set the acceleration/deceleration time longer.
• Adjust the torque boost setting.
• Set the load pattern selection setting according to the load pattern of the using machine.
Corrective action
• Reduce the load.
• Check the wiring and specifications of the encoder and the motor. Perform the setting according to the
specifications of the encoder and the motor (under vector control). (Refer to page 87.)

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.5 Causes and corrective actions
787
 *4 Resetting the inverter initializes the internal cumulative heat value of the electronic thermal O/L relay function.

Operation panel
E.THM FR-LU08 indication Motor Ovrload
indication
Name Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay function)*5
The electronic thermal O/L relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat, which is caused by overload or
reduced cooling capability during low-speed operation. When the cumulative heat value reaches 85% of the Pr.9
Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, pre-alarm (TH) is output. When the accumulated value reaches the
Description
specified value, the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. When the inverter is used to drive a
dedicated motor, such as a multiple-pole motor, or several motors, the motor cannot be protected by the
electronic thermal O/L relay. Install an external thermal relay on the inverter output side.
• Check the motor for the use under overload.
Check point • Check that the setting of Pr.71 Applied motor for motor selection is correct. (Refer to page 528.)
• Check that the stall prevention operation setting is correct.
• Reduce the load.
Corrective action • For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr.71.
• Set the stall prevention operation level accordingly. (Refer to page 431.)
*5 Resetting the inverter initializes the internal cumulative heat value of the electronic thermal relay function.

Operation panel
E.FIN FR-LU08 indication Heatsink overheat
indication
Name Heat sink overheat
When the heat sink overheats, the temperature sensor is activated, and the inverter output is stopped.
The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heat sink overheat
Description protection operation temperature.
For the terminal used for the FIN signal output, assign the function by setting "26 (positive logic) or 126 (negative
logic)" from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 473.)
• Check for too high surrounding air temperature.
Check point • Check for heat sink clogging.
• Check that the cooling fan is not stopped. (Check that FN is not displayed on the operation panel.)
• Set the surrounding air temperature to within the specifications.
Corrective action • Clean the heat sink.
• Replace the cooling fan.

Operation panel
E.IPF FR-LU08 indication Instant Pwr failure
indication
Name Instantaneous power failure (Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)
If a power failure occurs (or when power input to the inverter is shut off) for longer than 15 ms*6, the
instantaneous power failure protective function is activated to shut off the inverter output in order to prevent the
control circuit from malfunctioning. If a power failure persists for 100 ms or longer, the fault warning output is not
provided, and the inverter restarts if the start signal is ON upon power restoration. (The inverter continues
Description operating if an instantaneous power failure is within 15 ms*6.) In some operating status (load magnitude,
acceleration/deceleration time setting, etc.), overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power
restoration.
When instantaneous power failure protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to page 628 and page
635.)
Check point Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.
• Remedy the instantaneous power failure.
• Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure.
Corrective action
• Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr.57). (Refer to page 628 and page
635.)
*6 10 ms for IP55 compatible models

788 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.5 Causes and corrective actions
Operation panel
indication
E.UVT FR-LU08 indication Under Voltage
1
Name Undervoltage (Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal functions. In
addition, the motor torque will be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if the power
Description
supply voltage decreases to about 150 VAC (300 VAC for the 400 V class) or below, this function shuts off the 2
inverter output.
When a jumper is not connected across P/+ and P1, the undervoltage protective function is activated.
When undervoltage protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to page 628 and page 635.)

Check point
• Check if a high-capacity motor is driven. 3
• Check if the jumper is connected across terminals P/+ and P1.
• Check the devices on the power supply line such as the power supply itself. If this function is activated due to
unstable voltage in the power supply, change the undervoltage level (DC bus voltage value). (Refer to page
Corrective action 425.) 4
• Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
• If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, contact your sales representative.

Operation panel
5
E.ILF FR-LU08 indication Input phase loss
indication
Name Input phase loss (Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)

Description
When Pr.872 Input phase loss protection selection is enabled ("1") and one of the three-phase power input
is lost, the inverter output is shut off. This protective function is not available when Pr.872 is set to the initial value
6
(Pr.872 = "0"). (Refer to page 426.)
Check point Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.

Corrective action
• Wire the cables properly.
• Repair a break portion in the cable.
7

Operation panel
indication
E.OLT FR-LU08 indication Stall prevention STP
8
Name Stall prevention stop
V/F Magnetic flux
If the output frequency has fallen to 0.5 Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3 seconds, a fault
(E.OLT) appears and the inverter is shut off. OL appears while stall prevention is being activated.
9
Description Sensorless Vector PM
When speed control is performed, a fault (E.OLT) appears and the inverter output is shut off if frequency drops
to the Pr.865 Low speed detection (initial value is 1.5 Hz) setting by torque limit operation and the output torque 10
exceeds the Pr.874 OLT level setting (initial value is 150%) setting and remains 3 seconds.
• Check the motor for the use under overload.
• Check that the Pr.865 and Pr.874 values are correct.
Check point (Check the Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level setting under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux
vector control.)
• Check if a motor is connected under PM sensorless vector control.
• Reduce the load.
• Change the Pr.22, Pr.865, and Pr.874 values. (Check the Pr.22 setting under V/F control and Advanced
magnetic flux vector control.)
Corrective action • For the test operation without connecting a motor, select the PM sensorless vector control test operation.
(Refer to page 224.)
• Also check that the stall prevention (overcurrent) warning (OL) or the stall prevention (overvoltage) warning
(oL) countermeasure is taken.

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.5 Causes and corrective actions
789
 Operation panel E.SOT
FR-LU08 indication Motor Step Out
indication PM
Name Loss of synchronism detection
The inverter output is shut off when the motor operation is not synchronized. (This function is only available under
Description
PM sensorless vector control.)
• Check that the PM motor is not driven overloaded.
• Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the PM motor is coasting.
Check point
• Check if a motor is connected under PM sensorless vector control.
• Check if a PM motor other than the MM-CF series is driven.
• Set the acceleration time longer.
• Reduce the load.
• If the inverter restarts during coasting, set Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠ "9999", and select the automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure.
• Check the connection of the IPM motor.
Corrective action
• For the test operation without connecting a motor, select the PM sensorless vector control test operation.
(Refer to page 224.)
• Drive an IPM motor (MM-CF series).
• When driving an IPM motor other than MM-CF series, offline auto tuning must be performed. (Refer to page
551.)

Operation panel
E.LUP FR-LU08 indication Upper limit fault
indication
Name Upper limit fault detection
The inverter output is shut off when the load exceeds the upper limit fault detection range. This protective
Description
function is not available in the initial setting of Pr.1490 (Pr.1490 = "9999").
• Check if too much load is applied to the equipment.
Check point
• Check that the load characteristics settings are correct.
• Inspect the equipment.
Corrective action
• Set the load characteristics (Pr.1481 to Pr.1487) correctly.

Operation panel
E.LDN FR-LU08 indication Lower limit fault
indication
Name Lower limit fault detection
The inverter output is shut off when the load falls below the lower limit fault detection range. This protective
Description
function is not available in the initial setting of Pr.1491 (Pr.1491 = "9999").
• Check if the equipment load is too light.
Check point
• Check that the load characteristics settings are correct.
• Inspect the equipment.
Corrective action
• Set the load characteristics (Pr.1481 to Pr.1487) correctly.

Operation panel
E.BE FR-LU08 indication Brake transistor err
indication
Name Brake transistor alarm detection
• The inverter output is shut off if a fault due to damage of the brake transistor and such occurs in the brake
circuit.
Description
In such a case, the power supply to the inverter must be shut off immediately.
• Appears when an internal circuit fault occurred for separated converter types and IP55 compatible models.
• Reduce the load inertia.
Check point
• Check that the brake duty is proper.
Corrective action Replace the inverter.

Operation panel
E.GF FR-LU08 indication Ground Fault
indication
Name Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
The inverter output is shut off if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows due to an earth (ground) fault that
Description
occurred on the inverter's output side (load side).
Check point Check for a ground fault in the motor and connection cable.
Corrective action Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.

790 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.5 Causes and corrective actions
Operation panel
indication
E.LF FR-LU08 indication Output phase loss
1
Name Output phase loss
Description The inverter output is shut off if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) is lost.

Check point
• Check the wiring. (Check that the motor is normally operating.)
• Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter. 2
• Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting. (PM sensorless vector control)
• Wire the cables properly.
Corrective action • Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure/flying start function (page 635). (PM sensorless vector control) 3
Operation panel
E.OHT FR-LU08 indication Ext TH relay oper
indication 4
Name External thermal relay operation
The inverter output is shut off if the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection or the internally
mounted thermal relay in the motor, etc. switches ON (contacts open). This function is available when "7" (OH
Description
signal) is set in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection). This protective function is not 5
available in the initial status. (OH signal is not assigned.)
• Check for motor overheating.
Check point • Check that the value "7" (OH signal) is set correctly to any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection). 6
• Reduce the load and operation duty.
Corrective action
• Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.

Operation panel
7
E.PTC FR-LU08 indication PTC thermistor oper
indication
Name PTC thermistor operation
The inverter output is shut off if resistance of the PTC thermistor connected between terminal 2 and terminal 10 8
is equal to or higher than the Pr.561 PTC thermistor protection level setting for a continuous time equal to or
Description
longer than the setting value in Pr.1016 PTC thermistor protection detection time. When the initial value
(Pr.561 = "9999") is set, this protective function is not available.
• Check the connection with the PTC thermistor. 9
Check point • Check the Pr.561 and Pr.1016 settings.
• Check the motor for operation under overload.
Corrective action Reduce the load.
10
Operation panel
E.OPT FR-LU08 indication Option Fault
indication
Name Option fault
• Appears if the AC power supply is accidentally connected to terminal R/L1, S/L2, or T/L3 when a high power
factor converter (FR-HC2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC in common bus regeneration mode),
or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) is connected to the inverter while Pr.30 Regenerative
function selection = "2".
• Appears when torque command by the plug-in option is selected using Pr.804 Torque command source
Description
selection and no plug-in option is mounted. This function is available under torque control.
• Appears when either one of a Vector control compatible plug-in option or a control terminal option (FR-A8TP)
is not installed during machine end orientation control.
• Appears when the switch for manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
• Appears when a communication option is connected while Pr.296 Password lock level = "0 or 100".
• Check that the AC power supply is not connected to terminal R/L1, S/L2, or T/L3 when the FR-HC2, FR-XC (in
common bus regeneration mode), or FR-CV is connected to the inverter while Pr.30 = "2".
• Check that the plug-in option for torque command setting is connected.
Check point
• Check that the Vector control plug-in option and the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) are installed correctly.
Check that the Pr.393 Orientation selection and Pr.862 Encoder option selection settings are correct.
• Check for the password lock with a setting of Pr.296 = "0, 100".
• Check the Pr.30 setting and wiring with the FR-HC2, FR-XC, or FR-CV.
• The inverter may be damaged if the AC power supply is connected to terminal R/L1, S/L2, or T/L3 when a high
power factor converter is connected. Contact your sales representative.
• Check for connection of the plug-in option. Check the Pr.804 setting.
Corrective action • Install the Vector control plug-in option and the control terminal option (FR-A8TP) correctly. Set Pr.393 and
Pr.862 correctly. (Refer to page 585.)
• Set the switch on the plug-in option, which is for manufacturer setting, back to the initial setting. (Refer to the
Instruction Manual of each option.)
• To apply the password lock when installing a communication option, set Pr.296 ≠ "0, 100". (Refer to page 348.)

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.5 Causes and corrective actions
791
 Operation panel
E.OP1 to E.OP3 to FR-LU08 indication Option1 Fault to Option3 Fault
indication
Name Communication option fault
• The inverter output is shut off if a communication line error occurs in the communication option.
• This function stops the inverter output when a communication line error occurs on the CC-Link IE Field network
Description communication circuit board of the FR-A800-GF.
• When the FR-A8APR is installed to the inverter and a motor with a resolver is used, the inverter output is shut
off if the FR-A8APR fails or the wiring of the resolver is not properly connected.
• Check for an incorrect option function setting and operation.
• Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.
• For the FR-A800-GF, check that the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board is securely installed
Check point to the connector of the inverter control circuit board.
• Check for a break in the communication cable.
• Check that the terminating resistor is fitted properly.
• Check that the wiring of the resolver is correct. (When the FR-A8APR is used.)
• Check the option function setting, etc.
• Connect the plug-in option securely.
• Connect the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board of the FR-A800-GF securely.
Corrective action
• Check the connection of communication cable.
• Check the wiring of the resolver (when the FR-A8APR is used).
• If the fault occurs again when the inverter is reset, contact your sales representative.

Operation panel to
E.16 to E.20 FR-LU08 indication Fault 16 to Fault 20
indication

Name User definition error by the PLC function

The protective function is activated by setting "16 to 20" in the special register SD1214 for the PLC function. The
inverter output is shut off when the protective function is activated.
Description The protective function is activated when the PLC function is enabled. This protective function is not available in
the initial setting (Pr.414 = "0").
Any character string can be displayed on FR-LU08 or FR-PU07 by sequence programs.
Check point • Check if "16 to 20" is set in the special register SD1214.
Corrective action • Set a value other than "16 to 20" in the special register SD1214.

Operation panel
E.PE FR-LU08 indication Corrupt Memory
indication
Name Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board)
Description The inverter output is shut off if a fault occurs in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure)
Check point Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Contact your sales representative.
Set "1" in Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection (write to RAM) for the operation which requires
Corrective action
frequent parameter writing via communication, etc. Note that writing to RAM goes back to the initial status at
power OFF.

Operation panel
E.PUE FR-LU08 indication PU disconnection
indication
Name PU disconnection
• The inverter output is shut off if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended, e.g. the operation
panel or parameter unit is disconnected, when the disconnected PU disconnection function is valid in Pr.75
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.
• The inverter output is shut off if communication errors occurred consecutively for more than permissible
Description
number of retries when Pr.121 PU communication retry count ≠ "9999" during the RS-485 communication
via the PU connector.
• The inverter output is shut off if communication is broken within the period of time set in Pr.122 PU
communication check time interval during the RS-485 communication via the PU connector.
• Check that the operation panel or the parameter unit is connected properly.
Check point
• Check the Pr.75 setting.
Corrective action Fit the operation panel or the parameter unit securely.

792 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.5 Causes and corrective actions
Operation panel
indication
E.RET FR-LU08 indication Retry count excess
1
Name Retry count excess
The inverter output is shut off if the operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set in Pr.67
Description Number of retries at fault occurrence. This function is available when Pr.67 is set. This protective function is
not available in the initial setting (Pr.67 = "0"). 2
Check point Find the cause of the fault occurrence.
Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the fault preceding this fault indication.

3
Operation panel
E.PE2 FR-LU08 indication PR storage alarm
indication
Name Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board)
Description The inverter output is shut off if a fault occurs in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure) 4
Check point ――――
Corrective action Contact your sales representative.

5
E.CPU CPU Fault

E. 5 Fault 5
Operation panel
indication
FR-LU08 indication 6
E. 6 Fault 6

E. 7 Fault 7
Name CPU fault 7
Description The inverter output is shut off if the communication fault of the built-in CPU occurs.
Check point Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.

Corrective action
• Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
• Contact your sales representative.
8
Operation panel
indication
E.CTE FR-LU08 indication Circuit fault
9
Name Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485 terminals power supply short circuit
• When the power supply for the operation panel (PU connector) is shorted, the power output is shutoff and the
inverter output is shut off. The use of the operation panel (parameter unit) and the RS-485 communication via
the PU connector are disabled. 10
To reset, enter the RES signal from the terminal, reset through communication via the RS-485 terminals, or
Description switch power OFF then ON again.
• When the power supply for the RS-485 terminals are short circuited, this function shuts off the power output.
At this time, communication from the RS-485 terminals cannot be made.
To reset, use on the operation panel, enter the RES signal, or switch power OFF then ON again.
• Check that the PU connector cable is not shorted.
Check point
• Check that the RS-485 terminals are connected correctly.
• Check PU and the cable.
Corrective action
• Check the connection of the RS-485 terminals.

Operation panel
E.P24 FR-LU08 indication 24 VDC power fault
indication
Name 24 VDC power fault
• When the 24 VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts off the power output.
Description At this time, all external contact inputs switch OFF. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES signal.
To reset it, use the operation panel, or switch power OFF, then ON again.
• Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output.
Check point
• Check that the 24 V external power supply voltage is correct.
• Repair the short-circuited portion.
• Supply the power at 24 V. (If the power with insufficient voltage is supplied to the 24 V input circuit for a long
Corrective action
time, the inverter internal circuit may heats up. Although it will not damage the inverter, supply power at the
correct voltage.)

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.5 Causes and corrective actions
793
 Operation panel
E.CDO FR-LU08 indication OC detect level
indication
Name Abnormal output current detection
The inverter output is shut off if the output current exceeds the Pr.150 Output current detection level setting.
Description This functions is available when "1" is set in Pr.167 Output current detection operation selection. When the
initial value (Pr.167 = "0") is set, this protective function is not available.
Check the settings of Pr.150, Pr.151 Output current detection signal delay time, Pr.166 Output current
Check point
detection signal retention time, and Pr.167. (Refer to page 487.)

Operation panel
E.IOH FR-LU08 indication Inrush overheat
indication
Name Inrush current limit circuit fault (Standard models and IP55 compatible models only)
The inverter output is shut off when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit is overheated. The inrush current
Description
limit circuit is faulty.
• Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
• Check if the input side fuse (5A) in the power supply circuit of the inrush current limit circuit contactor (FR-A840-
Check point
03250(110K) or higher) is blown.
• Check that the power supply circuit of inrush current limit circuit contactor is not damaged.
Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
Corrective action
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, contact your sales representative.

Operation panel
E.SER FR-LU08 indication VFD Comm error
indication
Name Communication fault (inverter)
The inverter output is shut off when communication error occurs consecutively for the permissible number of
retries or more when Pr.335 RS-485 communication retry count ≠ "9999" during RS-485 communication
Description
through the RS-485 terminals. The inverter output is also shut off if communication is broken for the period of
time set in Pr.336 RS-485 communication check time interval.
Check point Check the RS-485 terminal wiring.
Corrective action Perform wiring of the RS-485 terminals properly.

Operation panel
E.AIE FR-LU08 indication Analog input fault
indication
Name Analog input fault
The inverter output is shut off when a 30 mA or higher current or a 7.5 V or higher voltage is input to terminal 2
Description while the current input is selected by Pr.73 Analog input selection, or to terminal 4 while the current input is
selected by Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection.
Check point Check the Pr.73, Pr.267, and the voltage/current input switch settings. (Refer to page 496.)
Either give a current less than 30 mA, or set Pr.73, Pr.267, and the voltage/current input switch to the voltage
Corrective action
input and input a voltage.

Operation panel
E.USB FR-LU08 indication USB comm error
indication
Name USB communication fault
The inverter output is shut off when the communication is cut off for the time set in Pr.548 USB communication
Description
check time interval.
Check point • Check that the USB communication cable is connected securely.
• Check the Pr.548 setting.
Corrective action • Connect the USB communication cable securely.
• Increase the Pr.548 setting or set "9999." (Refer to page 701.)

794 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.5 Causes and corrective actions
Operation panel
indication
E.SAF FR-LU08 indication Safety circuit fault
1
Name Safety circuit fault
• The inverter output is shut off when a safety circuit fault occurs.
• The inverter output is shut off if the either of the wire between S1 and SIC or S2 and SIC becomes non-
conductive while using the safety stop function. 2
Description • When the safety stop function is not used, the inverter output is shut off when the shorting wire between
terminals S1 and PC or across S2 and PC is disconnected.
• Settings of the switches (SW3 and SW4) for manufacturer setting may have been changed from the initial
settings. 3
• Check that the safety relay module or the connection has no fault when using the safety stop function.
• Check if the shorting wire between S1 and PC or between S2 and PC is disconnected when not using the safety
Check point
stop function.
• Check that the initial position of each switch was not changed. 4
• When using the safety stop function, check that wiring of terminal S1, S2 and SIC is correct and the safety stop
input signal source such as a safety relay module is operating properly. Refer to the Safety Stop Function
Instruction Manual for causes and countermeasures. (Contact your sales representative for the manual.)
Corrective action • When the safety stop function is not used, short across terminals S1 and PC and across S2 and PC with 5
shorting wires. (Refer to page 82.)
• Set each manufacturer setting switch to the initial position (OFF). (Refer to page 19 for the positions of the
switches.)
6
E.PBT PBT fault
Operation panel
FR-LU08 indication
indication
E.13 Internal circuit fault
7
Name Internal circuit fault
Description The inverter output is shut off when an internal circuit fault occurs.
Corrective action Contact your sales representative.
8
Operation panel
E.OS FR-LU08 indication Overspeed occurrence
indication
Name Overspeed occurrence
The inverter output is shut off when the motor speed exceeds the Pr.374 Overspeed detection level under
9
Description encoder feedback control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control. This
protective function is not available in the initial status.
• Check that the Pr.374 setting is correct.
• Check that the setting of Pr.369 (Pr.851) Number of encoder pulses does not differ from the actual number
10
Check point of encoder pulses. (Under encoder feedback control or vector control)
• Check that the motor temperature is not increased under Real sensorless vector control. (The motor constant
may vary due to increase in the motor temperature.)
• Set Pr.374 correctly.
• Set Pr.369 (Pr.851) correctly. (Under encoder feedback control or vector control)
Corrective action • When the motor temperature increases, enable the online auto tuning at startup (set Pr.95 (Pr.574) = "1")
(under Real sensorless vector control). To perform the online auto tuning at startup for a lift, use of the Start-
time tuning start external input (X28) signal is recommended. (Refer to page 558.)

Operation panel E.OSD

FR-LU08 indication Spd deviation fault
indication Vector

Name Speed deviation excess detection

• The inverter output is shut off if the motor speed is increased or decreased under the influence of the load etc.
during Vector control with Pr.285 Overspeed detection frequency set and cannot be controlled in accordance
Description with the speed command value.
• If the motor is accelerated against the stop command accidentally, the deceleration check function (Pr.690) is
activated to stop the inverter output.
• Check that the settings of Pr.285 and Pr.853 Speed deviation time are correct.
• Check for sudden load change.
Check point
• Check that the setting of Pr.369 (Pr.851) Number of encoder pulses does not differ from the actual number
of encoder pulses.
• Set Pr.285 and Pr.853 correctly.
Corrective action • Keep the load stable.
• Set Pr.369 (Pr.851) correctly.

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.5 Causes and corrective actions
795
 Operation panel
E.ECT FR-LU08 indication Encoder signal loss
indication
Name Signal loss detection
The inverter output is shut off when the encoder signal is shut off under orientation control, encoder feedback
Description
control or vector control. This protective function is not available in the initial status.
• Check for the encoder signal loss.
• Check that the encoder specifications are correct.
• Check for a loose connector.
Check point • Check that the switch setting of a Vector control compatible option is correct.
• Check that the power is supplied to the encoder. Alternatively, check that the power is not supplied to the
encoder later than the inverter.
• Check that the voltage of the power supplied to the encoder is the same as the encoder output voltage.
• Remedy the signal loss.
• Use an encoder that meets the specifications.
• Make connection securely.
• Make a switch setting of a Vector control compatible option correctly. (Refer to page 88.)
• Supply the power to the encoder. Or supply the power to the encoder at the same time when the power is
Corrective action
supplied to the inverter.
If the power is supplied to the encoder after sent to the inverter, check that the encoder signal is properly sent
and set "0 (initial value)" in Pr.376 Encoder signal loss detection enable/disable selection to disable signal
loss detection.
• Make the voltage of the power supplied to the encoder the same as the encoder output voltage.

Operation panel E.OD

FR-LU08 indication Position fault
indication Vector
Name Excessive position fault
The inverter output is shut off when the difference between the position command and position feedback
Description exceeds the setting of Pr.427 Excessive level error during position control. This protective function is not
available in the initial status.
• Check that the position detecting encoder mounting orientation matches the parameter.
Check point • Check that the load is not large.
• Check that the settings of Pr.427 and Pr.369 (Pr.851) Number of encoder pulses are correct.
• Check the parameters.
Corrective action • Reduce the load.
• Set Pr.427 and Pr.369 (Pr.851) correctly.

Operation panel E.ECA

FR-LU08 indication ENC direction fault
indication Vector
Name Encoder signal loss for orientation
The inverter output is shut off when the machine end encoder signal is shut off during machine end orientation
Description
control under Vector control. This protective function is not available in the initial status.
• Check for the encoder signal loss.
• Check that the encoder specifications are correct.
• Check for a loose connector.
Check point • Check that the switch setting of a Vector control compatible option is correct.
• Check that the power is supplied to the encoder. Alternatively, check that the power is not supplied to the
encoder later than the inverter.
• Check that the voltage of the power supplied to the encoder is the same as the encoder output voltage.
• Remedy the signal loss.
• Use an encoder that meets the specifications.
• Make connection securely.
• Make a switch setting of a Vector control compatible option correctly. (Refer to page 88.)
• Supply the power to the encoder. Or supply the power to the encoder at the same time when the power is
Corrective action
supplied to the inverter.
If the power is supplied to the encoder after sent to the inverter, check that the encoder signal is properly sent
and set "0 (initial value)" in Pr.376 Encoder signal loss detection enable/disable selection to disable signal
loss detection.
• Make the voltage of the power supplied to the encoder the same as the encoder output voltage.

796 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.5 Causes and corrective actions
Operation panel
E.MB1 to 7
to
FR-LU08 indication E.MB1 Fault to E.MB7 Fault 1
indication

Name Brake sequence fault

The inverter output is shut off when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence function (Pr.278 2
Description to Pr.285). This protective function is not available in the initial status. (The brake sequence function is invalid.)
(For details on fault records, refer to page 572.)
Check point Find the cause of the fault occurrence.
Corrective action Check the set parameters and perform wiring properly. 3
Operation panel E.EP
FR-LU08 indication Encoder phase fault
indication
Name
Vector
Encoder phase fault
4
The inverter output is shut off when the rotation command of the inverter differs from the actual motor rotation
Description direction detected from the encoder during offline auto tuning. This protective function is not available in the initial
status.
• Check for mis-wiring of the encoder cable.
5
Check point
• Check if the Pr.359 (Pr.852) Encoder rotation direction setting is incorrect.
• Perform connection and wiring securely.
Corrective action
• Change the Pr.359 (Pr.852) setting. 6
Operation panel E.MP
FR-LU08 indication MagnetPole Pos Fault
indication Vector
Name Magnetic pole position unknown 7
When the offset value between the PM motor home magnetic pole position and the home position of the encoder
Description
(position detector) is unknown, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.

Check point
• Check that the encoder position tuning was performed.
• Check that the encoder position tuning ended properly. When Pr.1105 (Pr.887) Encoder magnetic pole 8
position offset = "9999", the encoder position tuning does not end properly.
• Perform encoder position tuning with Pr.373 (Pr.871) Encoder position tuning setting/status. (Refer to page
Corrective action 542.)
• Remove the cause of the tuning error, and perform tuning again. (Refer to page 542.) 9
Operation panel
E.EF FR-LU08 indication E.EF
indication 10
Name External fault during output operation
When the X32 signal turns OFF (the contact opens) due to an external fault or other factor, the inverter output is
Description shut off. This function is available when "32" is set in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function
selection). This protective function is not available in the initial status (X32 signal is not assigned).
Check point • Check that the X32 signal is OFF.
Corrective action • Make sure that there is no problem in starting operation, and turn ON the X32 signal.

Operation panel
E.IAH FR-LU08 indication Abnormal Intnl Temp
indication
Name Abnormal internal temperature (IP55 compatible models only)
Description The inverter output is shut off when the inverter internal temperature reaches the specified value or higher.
• Check for too high surrounding air temperature.
Check point
• Check if the internal air circulation fan or the cooling fan stops due to a fault.
• Install an inverter suitable for the installation environment. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Hardware).)
Corrective action
• Replace the internal air circulation fan or the cooling fan.

Operation panel
E.LCI FR-LU08 indication 4 mA input fault
indication
Name 4 mA input fault
The inverter output is shut off when the analog input current is 2 mA or less for the time set in Pr.778 4 mA input
Description check filter. This function is available when Pr.573 4 mA input check selection = "2 or 3". (Refer to page 517.)
This protective function is not available in the initial status.
• Check for a break in the wiring for the analog current input.
Check point
• Check that the Pr.778 setting is not too short.
• Check the wiring for the analog current input.
Corrective action
• Set the Pr.778 setting larger.

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.5 Causes and corrective actions
797
 Operation panel
E.PCH FR-LU08 indication Pre-charge fault
indication
Name Pre-charge fault
The inverter output is shut off when the pre-charge time exceeds Pr.764 Pre-charge time limit. The inverter
output is shut off when the measured value exceeds Pr.763 Pre-charge upper detection level during pre-
Description
charging. This function is available when Pr.764 and Pr.763 are set (refer to page 618). This protective function
is not available in the initial status.
• Check that the Pr.764 setting is not too short.
• Check that the Pr.763 setting is not too small.
Check point
• Check that the Pr.127 PID control automatic switchover frequency setting is not too low.
• Check for a break in the connection to the pump.
• Set the Pr.764 setting longer.
• Set the Pr.763 setting larger.
Corrective action
• Set the Pr.127 setting higher.
• Check the connection to the pump.

Operation panel
E.PID FR-LU08 indication PID signal fault
indication
Name PID signal fault
The inverter output is shut off if the measured value exceeds the PID upper limit or PID lower limit parameter
setting, or the absolute deviation value exceeds the PID deviation parameter setting during PID control. Set this
Description
function in Pr.131 PID upper limit, Pr.132 PID lower limit, Pr.553 PID deviation limit, and Pr.554 PID signal
operation selection. (Refer to page 601.) This protective function is not available in the initial status.
• Check the meter for a failure or break.
Check point
• Check that the parameter settings are correct.
• Check that the meter has no failure or break.
Corrective action
• Set the parameters correctly.

to
Operation panel
E. 1 to E. 3 FR-LU08 indication Fault 1 to Fault 3
indication

Name Option fault

• The inverter output is shut off when a contact fault is found between the inverter and the plug-in option, or when
the communication option is not connected to the connector 1.
• For the FR-A800-GF, the inverter output is shut off when a connector contact fault or the like occurs between
Description the CC-Link IE Field network communication circuit board and the inverter control circuit board.
• The inverter output is shut off when encoder feedback control is performed while 10 poles or more is set in
Pr.144 Speed setting switchover.
• Appears when the switch for manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
• Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely. (1 to 3 indicate connector numbers for
connection of options.)
• For the FR-A800-GF, check that the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board is securely installed
Check point to the connector of the inverter control circuit board.
• Check for excessive noise around the inverter.
• Check if the communication option is connected to the connector 2 or 3.
• For encoder feedback control operation, check that the number of motor poles is correct.
• Connect the plug-in option securely.
• Connect the CC-Link IE Field Network communication circuit board of the FR-A800-GF securely.
• Take precautions against noise if there are devices producing excessive electrical noise around the inverter.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, contact your sales representative.
Corrective action
• Connect the communication option to the connector 1.
• For encoder feedback control operation, use a motor with 8 poles or less.
• Set the switch on the plug-in option, which is for manufacturer setting, back to the initial setting. (Refer to the
Instruction Manual of each option.)

798 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.5 Causes and corrective actions
 Operation panel E.11
indication Sensorless
FR-LU08 indication Opst rot dtct fault
1
Name Opposite rotation deceleration fault
The speed may not decelerate during low speed operation if the rotation direction of the speed command and
the estimated speed differ when the rotation is changing from forward to reverse or from reverse to forward
Description during torque control under Real sensorless vector control. The inverter output is shut off when overload occurs 2
due to the un-switched rotation direction. This protective function is not available in the initial status (V/F control).
(This function is only available under Real sensorless vector control.)
• Check that the rotation direction is not switched from forward to reverse rotation (or from reverse to forward)
Check point
during torque control under Real sensorless vector control. 3
• Prevent the motor from switching the rotation direction from forward to reverse (or from reverse to forward)
Corrective action during torque control under Real sensorless vector control.
• Contact your sales representative.
4
 Others
Indicate the status of the inverter. It is not a fault.
Operation panel
E.0 FR-LU08 indication No faults
5
indication
Name No fault history
Appears when no fault records are stored. (Appears when the fault history is cleared after the protective function
Description
has been activated.) 6

Operation panel
indication
EV FR-LU08 indication —
7
Name 24 V external power supply operation
Description Blinks when the main circuit power supply is off and the 24 V external power supply is being input.
Check point • Power is supplied from a 24 V external power supply.
• Turning ON the power supply (main circuit) of the inverter clears the indication.
8
Corrective action • If the indication is still displayed after turning ON of the power supply (main circuit) of the inverter, the power
supply voltage may be low, or the jumper between terminals P/+ and P1 may be disconnected.

9
Operation panel
RD FR-LU08 indication Rd
indication
Name Backup in progress

Description
The GOT is used for backing up inverter parameters and the data used in the PLC function of inverter. (Refer to 10
page 702.)

Operation panel
WR FR-LU08 indication WR
indication
Name Restoration in progress
Description The backup data stored in the GOT is used to restore the data in the inverter. (Refer to page 702.)

NOTE
• If protective functions with indication of "Fault" on the FR-LU08 or FR-PU07 are activated, "ERR" appears in the fault history
of the FR-LU08 or FR-PU07.
• If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.5 Causes and corrective actions
799
 6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
For Real sensorless vector control and Vector control, also refer to the troubleshooting on page 261 (speed control), page
295 (torque control), and page 329 (position control).

• If the cause is still unknown after every check, it is recommended to initialize the parameters, set the required parameter values
and check again.

6.6.1 Motor does not start

Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
Power on a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), an earth leakage
An appropriate power supply voltage is not —
circuit breaker (ELB), or a magnetic contactor (MC).
applied.
Check for the decreased input voltage, input phase loss, and wiring. —
(The operation panel display is not
operating.) If only the control power is ON when using a separate power source
77
for the control circuit, turn ON the main circuit power.
Main Check the wiring between the inverter and the motor.
circuit The motor is not connected properly. If the electronic bypass function is active, check the wiring of the 55
magnetic contactor (MC) between the inverter and the motor.
Securely fit a jumper across P/+ and P1.
The jumper across P/+ to P1 is When using a DC reactor (FR-HEL), remove the jumper across P/
disconnected. + to P1, and then connect the DC reactor. 55, 109
A DC reactor (FR-HEL) is not connected. Connect the DC reactor securely when required according to the
capacity.

800 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
Check the start command source, and input a start signal.
1
A start signal is not input. PU operation mode: / 393
External operation mode: STF/STR signal

Both the forward and reverse rotation start

Turn ON only one of the forward and reverse rotation start signals 2
(STF or STR).
signals (STF, STR) are input 68
When the STF and STR signals are turned ON simultaneously in
simultaneously.
the initial setting, a stop command is given.
Frequency command is zero. (The [FWD] or
Check the frequency command source and input a frequency
3
[REV] LED indicator on the operation panel 393
command.
is blinking.)
The AU signal is not ON when terminal 4 is
used for frequency setting. (The [FWD] or Turn ON the AU signal.
496
4
[REV] LED indicator on the operation panel Turning ON the AU signal activates terminal 4 input.
is blinking.)
The Output stop (MRS) signal or Inverter Turn the MRS or RES signal OFF.
reset (RES) signal is ON. The inverter starts the operation with a given start command and a
68
5
(The [FWD] or [REV] LED indicator on the frequency command after turning OFF the MRS or RES signal.
operation panel is blinking.) Before turning OFF, ensure the safety.
The CS signal is OFF while the automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure Turn ON the Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous 6
function is selected (Pr.57 Restart power failure / flying start (CS) signal.
628
coasting time≠ 9999). (The [FWD] or When the CS signal is assigned to an input terminal, automatic
Input [REV] LED indicator on the operation panel restart operation is enabled when the CS signal is turned ON.
signal is blinking.) 7
The jumper connector for selecting sink
Check that the control logic switchover jumper connector is
logic or source logic is incorrectly installed.
correctly installed. 72
(The [FWD] or [REV] LED indicator on the
If it is not installed correctly, the input signal is not recognized.
operation panel is blinking.) 8
The wiring of the encoder is incorrect.
(Under encoder feedback control or vector Check the wiring of the encoder. 91
control)
The voltage/current input switch is not 9
correctly set for the analog input signal (0 to Set Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input
5 V, 0 to 10 V, or 4 to 20 mA). (The [FWD] selection, and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input 496
or [REV] LED indicator on the operation an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
panel is blinking.) 10
The key was pressed. During the External operation mode, check the method of restarting
(The operation panel indication is 338, 783
from a input stop from PU.
" " (PS).)
Refer to the
For the separated converter type, terminals
Instruction
RDA and SE of the converter unit are not
Manual
connected to terminals MRS (X10 signal) Check for secure wiring connections.
(Hardware)
and SD (PC for source logic) of the inverter
of the FR-
respectively.
A802.

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
801
 Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
Check the connection.
Two-wire or three-wire type connection is
Use the Start self-holding selection (STP (STOP)) signal when the 722
incorrect.
three-wire type is used.
Increase the Pr.0 setting by 0.5% increments while observing the
Under V/F control, Pr.0 Torque boost
rotation of a motor. 706
setting is not appropriate.
If that makes no difference, decrease the setting.
Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention Check the Pr.78 setting. Set Pr.78 when you want to limit the motor
406
selection is set. rotation to only one direction.
The Pr.79 Operation mode selection Select the operation mode suitable for the input methods of the start
389
setting is incorrect. command and frequency command.
The bias and gain (the calibration
Check the bias and gain (the calibration parameter C2 to C7)
parameter C2 to C7) settings are not 505
settings.
appropriate.
Set the frequency higher than the one set in Pr.13.
The Pr.13 Starting frequency setting is
The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal has a 381, 367
greater than the set frequency.
value lower than that of Pr.13.
Zero is set in frequency settings (such as for
multi-speed operation). Set the frequency command according to the application. Set Pr.1
411, 428
Especially, Pr.1 Maximum frequency is higher than the actual frequency used.
zero.
Pr.15 Jog frequency is lower than Pr.13 The Pr.15 setting should be equal to or higher than the Pr.13 381, 382,
Starting frequency for JOG operation. setting. 410
The Pr.359 (Pr.852) Encoder rotation
If the REV indicator on the operation panel is ON even though the
direction setting is incorrect under encoder 94, 736
forward-rotation command is given, set Pr.359 (Pr.852) = "1".
feedback control or under vector control.
When a Vector control option is used, the
Correctly set Pr.862 Encoder option selection according to the
option to be used and parameter settings do 226
option to be used.
not match.
Check Pr.79 Operation mode selection, Pr.338 Communication
Parameter operation command source, Pr.339 Communication speed
setting Operation mode and a writing device do not command source, Pr.550 NET mode operation command
389, 400
correspond. source selection and Pr.551 PU mode operation command
source selection, and select an operation mode suitable for the
purpose.
The start signal operation selection is set by Check the Pr.250 setting and the connection of the STF and STR
722
Pr.250 Stop selection signals.
When power is restored, ensure the safety, and turn OFF the start
The motor has decelerated to a stop when
signal once, then turn ON again to restart. When Pr.261 Power
the power failure time deceleration-to-stop 642
failure stop selection = "2 or 12", the motor automatically restarts
function is selected.
after the power is restored.

When offline auto tuning ends, press the key of the

operation panel for the PU operation. For the External operation,
532, 542,
Auto tuning is being performed. turn OFF the start signal (STF or STR).
551, 638
This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the PU’s monitor
display returns to the normal indication.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
The automatic restart after instantaneous Set Pr.872 Input phase loss protection selection = "1" (input
power failure function or power failure stop phase failure protection active).
function has been activated. Disable the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
426, 628,
(Performing overload operation during input function and power failure stop function.
635, 642
phase loss may cause voltage insufficiency, Reduce the load.
and that may result in detection of power Increase the acceleration time if the function was activated during
failure.) acceleration.
The motor test operation is selected under
Vector control or PM sensorless vector Check the Pr.800 Control method selection setting. 221
control.
Set Pr.599 = "0" (initial value for standard models and IP55
When the FR-HC2, FR-XC, FR-CV, or FR-
compatible models) to use the X10 signal with the NO contact input
CC2 is used, the input logic setting of the 724
specification, and Pr.599 = "1" (initial value for separated converter
X10 signal is incorrect.
types) to use the X10 signal with the NC contact input specification.
Load is too heavy. Reduce the load. —
Load
The shaft is locked. Inspect the machine (motor). —

802 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
6.6.2 Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic
noise 1

Check
point
Possible cause Countermeasure
Refer to
page 2
Input
Disturbance due to EMI when the frequency Take countermeasures against EMI. 116
signal
or torque command is given through analog
Parameter
setting
input terminal 1, 2, or 4.
Increase the Pr.74 Input filter time constant setting if steady
operation cannot be performed due to EMI.
503 3
In the initial setting, Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection is
No carrier frequency noises (metallic enabled to change motor noise to an unoffending complex tone.
356
noises) are generated. Therefore, no carrier frequency noises (metallic noises) are
generated. Set Pr.240 = "0" to disable this function.
4
The motor noise increases due to activation Reduce the load. Disable the automatic reduction function by
of the carrier frequency automatic reduction setting Pr.260 PWM frequency automatic switchover = "0". (As
356
function when the motor is driven
overloaded.
the load remains excessive, overload may cause a protective
function E.THT.)
5
Set Pr.31 to Pr.36, and Pr.552 (frequency jump).
When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural
Resonance occurs. (Output frequency) 429
frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters allow
resonant frequencies to be jumped. 6
Change the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect on
356
Parameter Resonance occurs. (Carrier frequency)
setting
avoiding the resonance frequency of a mechanical system or a
motor. 7
Set a notch filter. 271
Auto tuning is not performed under
Advanced magnetic flux vector control,
Real sensorless vector control, or Vector
Perform offline auto tuning. 532 8
control.
To stabilize the measured value, change the proportional band
Gain adjustment during PID control is
(Pr.129) to a larger value, the integral time (Pr.130) to a slightly
longer time, and the differential time (Pr.134) to a slightly shorter 601 9
insufficient.
time.
Check the calibration of set point and measured value.

The gain is too high under Real sensorless

During speed control, check the setting of Pr.820 Speed control P
gain 2.
254 10
vector control, Vector control, or PM
During torque control, check the setting of Pr.824 Torque control
sensorless vector control. 294
P gain 2 (current loop proportional gain).
Adjust machine/equipment so that there is no mechanical
Mechanical looseness —
Others looseness.
Contact the motor manufacturer.
Motor Operating with output phase loss Check the motor wiring. —

6.6.3 Inverter generates abnormal noise

Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
The fan cover was not correctly installed
Fan Install the fan cover correctly. 816
when a cooling fan was replaced.

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
803
 6.6.4 Motor generates heat abnormally
Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
The motor fan is not working. Clean the motor fan.
—
(Dust is accumulated.) Improve the environment.
Motor
Phase to phase insulation of the motor is
Check the insulation of the motor. —
insufficient.
Main The inverter output voltage (U, V, W) are Check the output voltage of the inverter.
821
circuit unbalanced. Check the insulation of the motor.
Parameter The Pr.71 Applied motor setting is
Check the Pr.71 Applied motor setting. 528
setting incorrect.
— Motor current is too large Refer to "6.6.11 Motor current is too large". 807

6.6.5 Motor rotates in the opposite direction

Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
Main The phase sequence of output terminals U,
Connect the output side terminals (terminals U, V, and W) correctly. 55
circuit V and W is incorrect.
The start signals (STF and STR signals) are Check the connection. (STF: forward rotation, STR: reverse
68, 722
connected improperly. rotation)
Input The polarity of the frequency command is
signal negative during the polarity reversible
Check the polarity of the frequency command. 496
operation set by Pr.73 Analog input
selection.
Input
signal, The torque command is negative during
Check the torque command value. 283
parameter torque control under Vector control.
setting

6.6.6 Speed greatly differs from the setting

Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
The frequency setting signal is incorrect. Measure the input signal level. —
Input
signal The input signal lines are affected by Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using shielded wires
118
external EMI. for input signal lines.
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.2 Minimum Check the settings of Pr.1, Pr.2, and Pr.18. 428
frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum
Parameter frequency, and the calibration parameter Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings. 505
setting C2 to C7 settings are not appropriate.
Pr.31 to Pr.36, and Pr.552 (frequency
Narrow down the range of frequency jump. 429
jump) settings are not appropriate.
Load Reduce the load weight. —
Set Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level)
Parameter The stall prevention (torque limit) function is
higher according to the load. (If Pr.22 is set too high, an overcurrent 245, 431
setting activated due to a heavy load.
trip (E.OC[]) is likely to occur.)
Motor Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor. —

804 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
6.6.7 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth
1
Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
The acceleration/deceleration time is too
short.
Increase the acceleration/deceleration time. 367 2
The torque boost (Pr.0, Pr.46, Pr.112)
Increase/decrease the Pr.0 Torque boost setting value by 0.5%
setting is not appropriate under V/F control, 706
increments so that stall prevention does not occur.
Parameter
so the stall prevention function is activated.
Under V/F control, set Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.47 Second V/F
3
setting The base frequency does not match the 707
(base frequency), and Pr.113 Third V/F (base frequency).
motor characteristics.
Under Vector control, set Pr.84 Rated motor frequency. 221

Regeneration avoidance operation is

If the frequency becomes unstable during regeneration avoidance
operation, decrease the setting of Pr.886 Regeneration 732
4
performed.
avoidance voltage gain.
Load Reduce the load. —

Parameter The stall prevention (torque limit) function is

Set Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level) 5
higher according to the load. (If Pr.22 is set too high, an overcurrent 245, 431
setting activated due to a heavy load.
trip (E.OC[]) is likely to occur.)
Motor Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor. —
6

10

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
805
 6.6.8 Speed varies during operation
Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, and encoder feedback control,
the output frequency varies between 0 and 2 Hz as the load fluctuates. This is a normal operation and not a fault.
Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
Select Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless
Load The load varies during an operation. 221, 736
vector control, Vector control, or encoder feedback control.
The frequency setting signal is varying. Check the frequency setting signal. —
Set filter to the analog input terminal using Pr.74 Input filter time
503
The frequency setting signal is affected by constant, Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1.
EMI. Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using shielded wires
118
for input signal lines.
A malfunction is occurring due to the
Use terminal PC (terminal SD when source logic) as a common
Input undesirable current generated when the 74
terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable current.
signal transistor output unit is connected.
A multi-speed command signal is
Take countermeasures to suppress chattering. —
chattering.
Run the encoder cable away from any EMI source such as the main
The feedback signal from the encoder is circuit and power supply voltage.
91
affected by EMI. Earth (ground) the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure
using a metal P-clip or U-clip.
Fluctuation of power supply voltage is too Under V/F control, change the Pr.19 Base frequency voltage
707
large. setting (approximately by 3%).
The Pr.80 Motor capacity and Pr.81
Number of motor poles settings are not
appropriate for the motor capacity under
Check the settings of Pr.80 and Pr.81. 221
Advanced magnetic flux vector control,
Real sensorless vector control, Vector
control, or PM sensorless vector control.
The wiring length exceeds 30 m when
Advanced magnetic flux vector control,
Real sensorless vector control, Vector Perform offline auto tuning. 532
control, or PM sensorless vector control is
selected.
Parameter
In the low-speed range, adjust the Pr.0 Torque boost setting by
setting 706
Under V/F control, wiring is too long and a 0.5% increments.
voltage drop occurs. Change the control method to Advanced magnetic flux vector
221
control or Real sensorless vector control.
Disable automatic control functions, such as the energy saving
operation, fast-response current limit operation, torque limit,
regeneration avoidance function, Advanced magnetic flux vector
control, Real sensorless vector control, Vector control, encoder
Hunting occurs by the generated vibration,
feedback control, droop control, stall prevention, online auto tuning, —
for example, when structural rigidity of the notch filter, and orientation control.
load is insufficient.
For PID control, set smaller values to Pr.129 PID proportional
band and Pr.130 PID integral time.
Lower the control gain to increase the stability.
Change the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting. 356

806 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
6.6.9 Operation mode is not changed properly
1
Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
Input
signal
The start signal (STF or STR) is ON.
Check that the STF and STR signals are OFF.
When either is ON, the operation mode cannot be changed.
68, 722 2
When the Pr.79 is set to "0 (initial value)", the operation mode is the
External operation mode at power ON. To switch to the PU
The Pr.79 Operation mode selection
setting is not appropriate.
operation mode, press the key on the operation panel 389 3
(press the key on the parameter unit (FR-PU07)). At other
Parameter settings (1 to 4, 6, 7), the operation mode is limited accordingly.
setting
Check Pr.79 Operation mode selection, Pr.338 Communication 4
operation command source, Pr.339 Communication speed
Operation mode and a writing device do not command source, Pr.550 NET mode operation command
389, 400
correspond. source selection and Pr.551 PU mode operation command
source selection, and select an operation mode suitable for the
purpose.
5

6.6.10 Operation panel (FR-DU08) display is not operating 6

Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
Main 7
circuit,
The power is not input. Input the power. 46
control
circuit
Front The operation panel is not properly
Check if the inverter front cover is installed securely. 33 8
cover connected to the inverter.

6.6.11 The motor current is too large 9

Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
The torque boost (Pr.0, Pr.46, Pr.112) 10
setting is not appropriate under V/F Increase/decrease the Pr.0 Torque boost setting value by 0.5%
706
control, so the stall prevention function is increments so that stall prevention does not occur.
activated.
Set the rated frequency of the motor to Pr.3 Base frequency. Use
The V/F pattern is not appropriate when V/ Pr.19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage (for example, 707
F control is performed. (Pr.3, Pr.14, rated motor voltage).
Pr.19) Change the Pr.14 Load pattern selection setting according to the
708
load characteristic.
Reduce the load weight. —
Parameter
Set Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit
setting The stall prevention (torque limit) function
level)higher according to the load. (If Pr.22 is set too high, an 245, 431
is activated due to a heavy load.
overcurrent trip (E.OC[]) is likely to occur.)
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor. —
Offline auto tuning is not performed under
Advanced magnetic flux vector control,
Perform offline auto tuning. 532
Real sensorless vector control, or Vector
control.
When PM sensorless vector control is
selected for an IPM motor other than MM- Perform offline auto tuning for the IPM motor. 551
CF, offline auto tuning is not performed.

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
807
 6.6.12 Speed does not accelerate
Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
The start command or frequency
Check if the start command and the frequency command are correct. —
command is chattering.
The wiring length is too long for the analog
Input
frequency command, causing a voltage Perform the bias and gain calibration for the analog input. 505
signal
(current) drop.
The input signal lines are affected by Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using shielded wires for
118
external EMI. input signal lines.
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.2 Check the settings of Pr.1 and Pr.2. To operate at 120 Hz or higher,
428
Minimum frequency, Pr.18 High speed set Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency.
maximum frequency, and the calibration
parameter C2 to C7 settings are not Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings. 505
appropriate.
Check the settings of Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
The maximum voltage (current) input
frequency and Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
value is not set during the External 428, 505
frequency.
operation. (Pr.125, Pr.126, Pr.18)
To operate at 120 Hz or higher, set Pr.18.
The torque boost (Pr.0, Pr.46, Pr.112)
setting is not appropriate under V/F Increase/decrease the Pr.0 Torque boost setting value by 0.5%
706
control, so the stall prevention function is increments so that stall prevention does not occur.
activated.
Set the rated frequency of the motor to Pr.3 Base frequency. Use
Pr.19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage (for example, 707
The V/F pattern is not appropriate when V/
rated motor voltage).
Parameter F control is performed. (Pr.3, Pr.14, Pr.19) Change the Pr.14 Load pattern selection setting according to the
setting 708
load characteristic.
Reduce the load weight. —
Set Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level)
The stall prevention (torque limit) function
higher according to the load. (If Pr.22 is set too high, an overcurrent 245, 431
is activated due to a heavy load.
trip (E.OC[]) is likely to occur.)
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor. —
Auto tuning is not performed under
Advanced magnetic flux vector control,
Perform offline auto tuning. 532
Real sensorless vector control, or Vector
control.
Check the specification of the pulse generator (open collector output
The setting of pulse train input is not or complementary output) and check the adjustment of the pulse train
406
appropriate. and frequency (Pr.385 Frequency for zero input pulse and Pr.386
Frequency for maximum input pulse).
During PID control, the output frequency is automatically controlled so that the measured value equals the set
601
point.
A brake resistor is connected across
Main Connect an optional brake resistor (FR-ABR) across terminals P/+
terminals P/+ and P1 or across P1 and PR 97
circuit and PR.
by mistake.

808 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
6.6.13 Unable to write parameter setting
1
Check Refer to
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
Input
signal
Operation is being performed (the STF or
STR signal is ON).
Stop the operation. When Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "0
(initial value)", writing is enabled only during a stop.
345 2
Choose the PU operation mode. Or, set Pr.77 Parameter write
Parameter setting was attempted in the
selection = "2" to enable parameter writing regardless of the 345, 389
External operation mode.

Parameter write is disabled by the Pr.77

operation mode.
3
Check the Pr.77 setting. 345
Parameter write selection setting.
The key lock mode is enabled by the Pr.161
Parameter
Frequency setting/key lock operation
selection setting.
Check the Pr.161 setting. 341
4
setting
Operation mode and a writing device do not Check Pr.79, Pr.338, Pr.339, Pr.550 and Pr.551, and select an
389, 400
correspond. operation mode suitable for the purpose.
Under PM sensorless vector control, setting
"25" in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection Under PM sensorless vector control, "25" cannot be set in Pr.72. (A
5
was attempted. Or, setting PM sensorless sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) cannot be used under PM 356
vector control was attempted while Pr.72 = sensorless vector control.)
"25".
6
6.6.14 Power lamp is not lit
Check Refer to
7
Possible cause Countermeasure
point page
Main
Check for secure wiring and installation.
circuit,
control
The wiring or installation is inadequate. The power lamp is lit when power is supplied to the control circuit (R1/ 54 8
L11, S1/L21).
circuit

10

6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
809
 MEMO

810 6. PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

6.6 Check first when you have a trouble
 CHAPTER 7
CHAPTER 7 PRECAUTIONS FOR
MAINTENANCE AND 4

INSPECTION 5

7.1 Inspection item......................................................................................................................................................812

7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, and powers...............................................................................821
6

10

811
 7 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION
This chapter explains the precautions for maintenance and inspection of this product.
Always read the instructions before use.
For the precautions for maintenance and inspection of the separated converter type inverter, refer to the FR-A802 (Separated
Converter Type) Instruction Manual (Hardware).
For the precautions for maintenance and inspection of the IP55 compatible model inverter, refer to the FR-A806 (IP55/UL Type
12 specification) Instruction Manual (Hardware).

7.1 Inspection item

The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any fault
from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and vibration,
changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.

 Precautions for maintenance and inspection

When accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF. Then,
make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- on the inverter is not more than 30 VDC using a digital
multimeter, etc.

7.1.1 Daily inspection

Basically, check for the following faults during operation.
• Motor operation fault
• Improper installation environment
• Cooling system fault
• Abnormal vibration, abnormal noise
• Abnormal overheat, discoloration

7.1.2 Periodic inspection

Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection. Consult us for periodic inspection.
Check and clean the cooling system: Clean the air filter, etc.
Check the tightening and retighten: The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature
changes, etc. Check and tighten them. Tighten them according to the specified
tightening torque. (Refer to page 57.)
Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage.
Measure the insulation resistance.
Check and change the cooling fan and relay.

NOTE
• When using the safety stop function, periodic inspection is required to confirm that safety function of the safety system
operates correctly. For more details, refer to the Safety Stop Function Instruction Manual.

812 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.1 Inspection item
7.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection
1
Inspection Corrective action
Area of Inspection Check by
Description interval at fault
inspection item user
Periodic*3 occurrence
Surrounding Check the surrounding air temperature, humidity, dirt,
Daily
Improve the
2
○
environment corrosive gas, oil mist, etc. environment.
Check fault

General Overall unit

Check for unusual vibration and noise. ○ location and
retighten.
3
Check for dirt, oil, and other foreign material.*1 ○ Clean.
Power supply Check that the main circuit voltage and control circuit Inspect the power
voltage voltage are normal.*2
○
supply. 4
• Check with megger (between main circuit terminals Contact the
○
and earth (ground) terminal). manufacturer.
• Check for loose screws and bolts. ○ Retighten.
General
○ Contact the
5
• Check for overheat traces on the parts.
manufacturer.
• Check for stains. ○ Clean.

Conductors and
• Check conductors for distortion. ○
Contact the
manufacturer.
6
cables • Check cable sheaths for breakage and deterioration Contact the
○
(crack, discoloration, etc.). manufacturer.

Transformer/ Check for unusual odor and abnormal increase of

Stop the
equipment and
7
○
reactor whining sound. contact the
manufacturer.

Main circuit
Stop the
equipment and
8
Terminal block Check for a damage. ○
contact the
manufacturer.

• Check for liquid leakage. ○

Contact the
manufacturer.
9
Smoothing
aluminum ○ Contact the
• Check for safety valve projection and bulge.
electrolytic manufacturer.
capacitor • Visual check and judge by the life check of the main
circuit capacitor. (Refer to page 815.)
○ 10
Check that the operation is normal and no chattering Contact the
Relay/contactor ○
sound is heard. manufacturer.
Contact the
• Check for cracks in the resistor insulator. ○
manufacturer.
Resistor
Contact the
• Check for a break in the cable. ○
manufacturer.
• Check for an output voltage imbalance between Contact the
○
Operation phases while operating the inverter alone. manufacturer.
check • Check that no fault is found in protective and display Contact the
○
circuits in a sequence protective operation test. manufacturer.
Stop the
Control equipment and
• Check for unusual odor and discoloration. ○
Components check

circuit, contact the

Overall
protection manufacturer.
circuit ○ Contact the
• Check for serious rust development.
manufacturer.
• Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and Contact the
Aluminum ○
deformation trace. manufacturer.
electrolytic
• Visual check and judge by the life check of the control
capacitor ○
circuit capacitor. (Refer to page 815.)
• Check for unusual vibration and noise. ○ Replace the fan.
Fix with the fan
Cooling fan • Check for loose screws and bolts. ○ cover fixing
Cooling screws.
system
• Check for stains. ○ Clean.
• Check for clogging. ○ Clean.
Heat sink
• Check for stains. ○ Clean.

7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.1 Inspection item
813
 Inspection Corrective action
Area of Inspection interval Check by
Description at fault
inspection item user
Daily Periodic*3 occurrence
Contact the
• Check that indications are correct. ○
Indication manufacturer.
• Check for stains. ○ Clean.
Display Stop the
equipment and
Meter/counter Check that readouts are correct. ○
contact the
manufacturer.
Stop the
Operation Check for vibration and abnormal increase in operation equipment and
Load motor ○
check noise. contact the
manufacturer.
*1 Oil component of the heat dissipation grease used inside the inverter may leak out. The oil component, however, is not flammable, corrosive, nor
conductive and is not harmful to humans. Wipe off such oil component.
*2 It is recommended to install a voltage monitoring device for checking the voltage of the power supplied to the inverter.
*3 One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment.
Consult us for periodic inspection.

NOTE
• Continuous use of a leaked, deformed, or degraded smoothing aluminum electrolytic capacitor (as shown in the table above)
may lead to a burst, breakage, or fire. Replace such capacitor without delay.

7.1.4 Checking the inverter and converter modules

 Preparation
• Disconnect the external power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and motor cables (U, V, W).
• Prepare a continuity tester. (For the resistance measurement, use the 100 Ω range.)

 Checking method
Change the polarity of the tester alternately at the inverter terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, P/+, and N/- and check the
electric continuity.

NOTE
• Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged.
• At the time of electric discontinuity, the measured value is almost ∞. When there is an instantaneous electric continuity, due
to the smoothing capacitor, the tester may not indicate ∞. At the time of electric continuity, the measured value is several Ω to
several tens of Ω. When all measured values are almost the same (although values may not be constant depending on the
tester type), it shows that there are no electrical paths with problems.

 Module device numbers and terminals to be checked

Tester polarity Tester polarity

Continuity Continuity

R/L1 P/+ No R/L1 N/- Yes

D1 D4
P/+ R/L1 Yes N/- R/L1 No
S/L2 P/+ No S/L2 N/- Yes
Converter module D2 D5
P/+ S/L2 Yes N/- S/L2 No
T/L3 P/+ No T/L3 N/- Yes
D3 D6
P/+ T/L3 Yes N/- T/L3 No
U P/+ No U N/- Yes
TR1 TR4
P/+ U Yes N/- U No
V P/+ No V N/- Yes
Inverter module TR3 TR6
P/+ V Yes N/- V No
W P/+ No W N/- Yes
TR5 TR2
P/+ W Yes N/- W No
(Assuming that an analog meter is used.)

814 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.1 Inspection item
 Converter module P/+ Inverter module
1
TR1 TR3 TR5
D1 D2 D3

R/L1 U
2
C
S/L2 V

T/L3 W 3

D4 D5 D6
TR4 TR6 TR2 4
N/−

5
7.1.5 Cleaning
Always run the inverter in a clean status.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol. 6
NOTE
• Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as these will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.
• The display, etc. of the operation panel (FR-DU08) and parameter unit (FR-PU07) are vulnerable to detergent and alcohol. 7
Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.

8
7.1.6 Replacement of parts
The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced 9
performance or fault of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically.
Use the life check function as a guidance of parts replacement.
Part name Estimated lifespan*1 Description 10
Cooling fan 10 years Replace (as required)
Main circuit smoothing capacitor 10 years*2 Replace (as required)
On-board smoothing capacitor 10 years*2 Replace the board (as required).
Relays — As required
Main circuit fuse inside the inverter (FR-A840-
10 years Replace (as required)
04320(160K) or higher)
*1 Estimated lifespan for when the yearly average surrounding air temperature is 40°C.
(without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
*2 Output current: 80% of the inverter rating

NOTE
• For parts replacement, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.

 Inverter parts life display

The inverter diagnoses the main circuit capacitor, control circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and inrush current limit circuit by itself
and estimates their lives.
The self-diagnostic warning is output when the life span of each part is near its end. It gives an indication of replacement time.
Guideline for life judgment using the life warning output
Part Judgment level
Main circuit capacitor 85% of the initial capacity
Control circuit capacitor Estimated remaining life 10%
Inrush current limit circuit Estimated remaining life 10% (Power ON: 100,000 times left)
Cooling fan Less than the specified speed

7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.1 Inspection item
815
 NOTE
• Refer to page 359 to perform the life check of the inverter parts.

 Replacement procedure of the cooling fan

The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit semiconductor
is greatly affected by the surrounding air temperature. When unusual noise and/or vibration are noticed during inspection, the
cooling fan must be replaced immediately.

 Removal (FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 04750(90K), FR-A840-00083(2.2K) to 03610(132K))

1. Push the hooks from above and remove the fan cover.

FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 00250(3.7K) FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to 01540(30K) FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher

FR-A840-00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to 00770(30K) FR-A840-00930(37K) to 03610(132K)

2. Disconnect the fan connectors.

3. Remove the fan.

Fan cover Fan cover

Fan cover
Fan connection
Fan Fan connection connector
connector *1

FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 00250(3.7K) FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to 01540(30K) FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher

FR-A840-00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to 00770(30K) FR-A840-00930(37K) to 03610(132K)
*1 The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity.

 Installation (FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 04750(90K), FR-A840-00083(2.2K) to 03610(132K))

1. After confirming the orientation of the fan, install the fan so that the "AIR FLOW" arrow faces up.

AIR FLOW

<Fan side face>

816 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.1 Inspection item
 2. Connect the fan connectors.

3
FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 00250(3.7K) FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to 00770(15K)
FR-A840-00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to 00380(15K)

FR-A820-00930(18.5K), 01250(22K)
FR-A840-00470(18.5K), 00620(22K)
FR-A820-01540(30K)
FR-A840-00770(30K) 6

8
FR-A820-01870(37K), 02330(45K) FR-A820-03160(55K) or higher
FR-A840-00930(37K) to 01800(55K) FR-A840-02160(75K) to 03610(132K)
9
3. Install the fan cover.
2. Insert hooks 1. Insert hooks 2. Insert hooks
until you hear
1. Insert hooks
into holes. until you
hear a click
1. Insert hooks 2. Insert hooks
into holes. until you
10
a click sound.
into holes. sound. hear a click
sound.

FR-A820-00105(1.5K) to 00250(3.7K) FR-A820-00340(5.5K) to 01540(30K) FR-A820-01870(37K) or higher

FR-A840-00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K) FR-A840-00170(5.5K) to 00770(30K) FR-A840-00930(37K) to 03610(132K)

NOTE
• Installing the fan in the opposite direction of air flow may shorten the inverter life.
• Ensure that the cables are not caught when the fan is installed.
• Switch OFF the power before starting the fan replacement work. To prevent an electric shock accident, keep the inverter with
its covers on during fans replacement since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power OFF.

 Removal (FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher)

1. Remove the fan cover fixing screws, and remove the fan cover.

2. Disconnect the fan connector and remove the fan block.

7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.1 Inspection item
817
 3. Remove the fan fixing screws, and remove the fan.

Fan *1

Fan block
3)

Fan cover
2)

Fan connection
connector
1)

*1 The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity.

 Installation (FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher)

1. After confirming the orientation of the fan, install the fan so that the "AIR FLOW" arrow faces up.

AIR FLOW

<Fan side face>

2. Install fans referring to the above figure.

The tightening torque of the fan fixing screws is 0.73 N·m.

NOTE
• Installing the fan in the opposite direction of air flow may shorten the inverter life.
• Ensure that the cables are not caught when the fan is installed.
• Switch OFF the power before starting the fan replacement work. To prevent an electric shock accident, keep the inverter with
its covers on during fans replacement since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power OFF.

 Smoothing capacitors
A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the DC section of the main circuit, and an aluminum
electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Adverse effects from ripple currents
deteriorate capacitors. Replacement intervals of capacitors vary greatly with surrounding temperatures and operating
conditions. Replace them roughly every 10 years when used in normal air-conditioned environments.
Inspecting the product visually:
• Case: Check that the sides and bottom of the capacitor have not ruptured.
• Rubber seal: Check for any noticeable bulging or severe cracks.
• Check for external cracks, discoloration, leakage, etc. It is assumed that the capacitor has reached the end of its life when
its capacity has dropped below 80% of its rated capacity.

NOTE
• The inverter diagnoses the main circuit capacitor and control circuit capacitor by itself and estimates its remaining life. (Refer
to page 359.)

818 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.1 Inspection item
 Relay output terminals
• The contacts of relays deteriorate over time. To prevent faults from occurring, relays must be replaced when they have 1
reached the maximum of switching operations (switching life).
• The control terminal block must be replaced (refer to page 819) in case of failure of either relay between the relay output
terminals C1 and B1 or A1, or terminals C2 and B2 or A2. After replacing the control terminal block, connect the jumper 2
connector to the correct position in accordance with the control logic of input signals. (Refer to page 72.)

 Main circuit fuse inside the inverter (FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher)

Fuses are used in some inverters. Replacement intervals of fuses vary greatly with surrounding temperatures and operating
3
conditions. Replace them roughly every 10 years when used in normal air-conditioned environments.

4
7.1.7 Removal and reinstallation of the control circuit
terminal block
This product has a removable control circuit terminal block, which can be replaced with a new one or a control terminal option.
5
 Removal and reinstallation
1. Loosen the two installation screws at the both side of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be
6
removed.)
Slide down the control circuit terminal block to remove it.
7
Loosen the
screws
8

10
2. Be careful not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.

NOTE
• Before starting the replacement, power OFF the inverter, wait for at least 10 minutes, and then check that the charge lamp is
OFF to ensure safety.

 Removal and reinstallation precautions

The following are the precautions to remove or reinstall the control circuit terminal block. Observe the following precautions
and handle the inverter properly to avoid malfunctions or failures.
• To remove or reinstall the control circuit terminal block, keep it upright so that it is parallel with the inverter.
• To install the control circuit terminal block, slide it upward so that the tongues on the inverter slot into the grooves on the
terminal block.

7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.1 Inspection item
819
 • Check that the terminal block is parallel to the inverter and the pins on the inverter control circuit connector are not bent.
After checking proper connection, fix the terminal block in place with two screws.
Control circuit terminal block
Inverter's control
circuit connector
Tighten the screws.
Slot the tongue into
the groove.

A
Control circuit terminal block

Insert the terminal Inverter's control

block parallel to the circuit connector
inverter.

View from side A

NOTE
• Do not tilt the terminal block while tightening the screws or removing it from the inverter. (Otherwise, a stress applied to the
control circuit terminal block or the control circuit connector may cause damage to them.)
• After replacing the control terminal block, connect the jumper connector to the correct position in accordance with the control
logic of input signals. (Refer to page 72.)

820 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.1 Inspection item
7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, 1
and powers
2
Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides include harmonics, measurement data depends
on the instruments used and circuits measured. When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement,
measure the following circuits with the instruments given on the next page. 3
NOTE
• When installing meters etc. on the inverter output side
When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is long, especially in the 400 V class, small-capacity models, the meters and CTs may 4
generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the
current rating.
To measure and display the output voltage and output current of the inverter, it is recommended to use the terminal AM and
FM/CA output functions of the inverter.
5

6
Input voltage Output voltage

7
Input current
Output current

9
Inverter

Ar W11 R/L1 U Au W21 10

Vr Vu
Three-phase
power supply As W12 S/L2 V Av To the motor
Vs Vv
At W13 T/L3 W Aw W22
Vt Vw
P/+ N/-

V
+ -

7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, and powers
821
  Measuring points and instruments
Item Measuring point Measuring instrument Remarks (reference measured value)
Between R/L1 and S/L2, Commercial power
Input voltage
S/L2 and T/L3, and T/L3 Within permissible AC voltage fluctuation. (Refer to
V1
and R/L1 page 826.)
Input current Line current at R/L1, S/L2,
Digital power meter (designed for
I1 and T/L3
inverter)
At R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3,
Input power and between R/L1 and S/
P1 = W11 + W12 + W13 (3-wattmeter method)
P1 L2, S/L2 and T/L3, and T/
L3 and R/L1
Calculate after measuring input voltage, input current and input power.
Input power factor 3
Pf1 3I [
Ҁ9[ ,
Output voltage Between U and V, V and Digital power meter (designed for Difference between the phases must be within 1%
V2 W, and W and U inverter)*1 of the maximum output voltage.
Output current Difference between the phases must be within
Line current at U, V, and W
I2 10%.
Digital power meter (designed for
At U, V, and W, and
Output power inverter) P2 = W21 + W22
between U and V, and V
P2 2-wattmeter method (or 3-wattmeter method)
and W
Calculate in similar manner to the input power factor.
Output power factor 3
Pf2 3I [
Ҁ9[ ,

Converter output Between P/+ and N/- Digital multimeter or other tester Inverter LED indication 1.35 × V1
Frequency setting 2, and between 4(+) and 5 0 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA
signal Between 1(+) and 5 0 to ±5 VDC and 0 to ±10 VDC
Power supply for a Between 10(+) and 5 5.2 VDC
frequency setting
Between 10E(+) and 5 10 VDC Terminal 5 is
potentiometer
a common
Approximately 10 VDC at maximum terminal.
Between AM(+) and 5 frequency
(without frequency meter)
Approximately 20 mADC at
Between CA(+) and 5
maximum frequency
Approximately 5 VDC at maximum
frequency
Digital multimeter or other tester, (without frequency meter)
or moving-coil type instrument
Frequency meter signal (internal resistance 50 kΩ or
T1
more)
8VDC
Between FM(+) and SD

T2 Terminal SD
is a common
Pulse width T1: Adjust with C0
terminal.
(Pr.900).
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr.55
(for frequency monitor only).
Between STF, STR, RH,
Start signal, Voltage when terminal is open: 20 to
RM, RL, JOG, RT, AU,
selection signal, 30 VDC.
STP (STOP), CS, RES, or
reset signal, Voltage when signal is ON: 1 V or
MRS(+) and SD (for sink
output stop signal less.
logic)
Continuity check*2
Between A1 and C1 Normal: discontinuity across A1 and C1 (continuity
Fault signal Digital multimeter or other tester across B1 and C1)
Between B1 and C1
Fault: continuity across A1 and C1 (discontinuity
across B1 and C1)
*1 Use an FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. A digital multimeter or general measuring instrument cannot measure accurately.
*2 When the setting of Pr.195 ABC1 terminal function selection is the positive logic.

822 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, and powers
7.2.1 Measurement of powers
Use digital power meters (for inverter) both on the inverter's input and output sides. 1

7.2.2 Measurement of voltages 2

 Inverter input side
Use a digital power meter (for inverter) on the inverter's input side.
3
 Inverter output side
When using a measuring instrument, use a digital power meter for inverters as the inverter outputs PWM-controlled square
wave voltage. The value monitored on the operation panel is the inverter-controlled voltage itself. Monitoring values via the 4
operation panel or by outputting the analog signal is recommended as these values are accurate.

7.2.3 Measurement of currents 5

Use a digital power meter (for inverter) both on the inverter's input and output sides.
Since the inverter input current tends to be unbalanced, measurement of three phases is recommended. The correct value
cannot be obtained by measuring only one or two phases. On the other hand, the unbalanced ratio of each phase of the output 6
current should be within 10%.
The inverter output current can be monitored on the operation panel. The value displayed on the operation panel is accurate
even if the output frequency varies. Hence, it is recommended to monitor values on the operation panel. 7

7.2.4 Measurement of inverter input power factor 8

Calculate the factor from the effective power and the apparent power. A power-factor meter cannot indicate an exact value.

Effective power
Total power factor of the inverter =
Apparent power 9
Three-phase input power found by the 3-wattmeter method
=
√3×V (power supply voltage) × I (input current effective value)
10
7.2.5 Measurement of converter output voltage (between
terminals P and N)
The output voltage of the converter can be measured with a voltmeter (such as a digital multimeter) between terminals P and
N. The voltage varies according to the power supply voltage. Approximately 270 to 300 VDC (540 to 600 VDC for the 400 V
class) is output when no load is connected. The voltage decreases when a load is applied.
When energy is regenerated from the motor during deceleration, for example, the converter output voltage rises to nearly 400
to 450 VDC (800 to 900 VDC for the 400 V class) maximum.

7.2.6 Measurement of inverter output frequency

In the initial setting of the FM type inverter, a pulse train proportional to the output frequency is output across the pulse train
output terminals FM and SD on the inverter. This pulse train output can be counted by a frequency counter, or a digital
multimeter can be used to read the mean value of the pulse train output voltage. When a digital multimeter is used to measure
the output frequency, approximately 5 VDC is indicated at the maximum frequency.
For detailed specifications of the pulse train output terminal FM, refer to page 463.
In the initial setting of the CA type inverter, a pulse train proportional to the output frequency is output across the analog current
output terminals CA and 5 on the inverter. Measure the current using a digital multimeter.
For detailed specifications of the analog current output terminal CA, refer to page 465.

7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, and powers
823
 7.2.7 Insulation resistance test using megger
• For the inverter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as follows and do not perform the test on
the control circuit.
(Use a 500 VDC megger.)

NOTE
• Before performing the insulation resistance test on the external circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter
so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter.
• For the continuity test of the control circuit, use a tester for high resistance range and do not use the megger or buzzer.

Motor
Power R/L1 Inverter U
supply S/L2 V M
T/L3 W

500 VDC
megger

7.2.8 Withstand voltage test

Do not conduct a withstand voltage test. Deterioration may occur.

824 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

7.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents, and powers
 CHAPTER 8
CHAPTER 8 SPECIFICATIONS
4

8.1 Inverter rating........................................................................................................................................................826

8.2 Motor rating...........................................................................................................................................................829
6
8.3 Common specifications.........................................................................................................................................835
8.4 Outline dimension drawings..................................................................................................................................837
7

10

825
 8 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter explains the specifications of this product.
Always read the instructions before use.
For the separated converter type inverter, refer to "SPECIFICATIONS" in the FR-A802 (Separated Converter Type) Instruction
Manual (Hardware).
For the IP55 compatible model inverter, refer to "SPECIFICATIONS" in the FR-A806 (IP55/UL Type12 specification) Instruction
Manual (Hardware).

8.1 Inverter rating

 200 V class
00046 00077 00105 00167 00250 00340 00490 00630 00770 00930 01250 01540 01870 02330 03160 03800 04750
Model FR-A820-[]
0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K 90K
90/
SLD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 132
110
Applicable motor LD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
capacity (kW)*1 ND (initial setting) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
HD 0.2*2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
SLD 1.8 2.9 4 6.4 10 13 19 24 29 35 48 59 71 89 120 145 181
Rated
LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 17 22 27 32 43 53 65 81 110 132 165
capacity
ND (initial setting) 1.1 1.9 3 4.2 6.7 9.1 13 18 23 29 34 44 55 67 82 110 132
(kVA)*3
HD 0.6 1.1 1.9 3 4.2 6.7 9.1 13 18 23 29 34 44 55 67 82 110
SLD 4.6 7.7 10.5 16.7 25 34 49 63 77 93 125 154 187 233 316 380 475
Rated LD 4.2 7 9.6 15.2 23 31 45 58 70.5 85 114 140 170 212 288 346 432
current (A) ND (initial setting) 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215 288 346
HD 1.5 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215 288
Output

SLD 110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40°C

Overload
LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
current
ND (initial setting) 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
rating*4
HD 200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
Rated voltage*5 Three-phase 200 to 240 V
Brake transistor Built-in FR-BU2 (option)
150% torque, 3% 100% torque, 100% torque, 10% torque,
Regenerative Maximum brake torque*7 20% torque, continuous
braking ED*6 3% ED*6 2% ED*6 continuous
when the option FR- 150% torque,
100% torque, 10% ED 100% torque, 6% ED — — — — — —
ABR is used 10% ED
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 170 to 264 V, 50/60 Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
SLD 5.3 8.9 13.2 19.7 31.3 45.1 62.8 80.6 96.7 115 151 185 221 269 — — —
LD 5 8.3 12.2 18.3 28.5 41.6 58.2 74.8 90.9 106 139 178 207 255 — — —
Without DC
reactor ND (initial
3.9 6.3 10.6 14.1 22.6 33.4 44.2 60.9 80 96.3 113 150 181 216 266 — —
setting)
Rated input HD 2.3 3.9 6.3 10.6 14.1 22.6 33.4 44.2 60.9 80 96.3 113 150 181 216 — —
current (A)*8 SLD 4.6 7.7 10.5 16.7 25 34 49 63 77 93 125 154 187 233 316 380 475
LD 4.2 7 9.6 15.2 23 31 45 58 70.5 85 114 140 170 212 288 346 432
Power supply

With DC
reactor ND (initial
3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215 288 346
setting)
HD 1.5 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215 288
SLD 2 3.4 5 7.5 12 17 24 31 37 44 58 70 84 103 — — —
LD 1.9 3.2 4.7 7 11 16 22 29 35 41 53 68 79 97 — — —
Without DC
reactor ND (initial
1.5 2.4 4 5.4 8.6 13 17 23 30 37 43 57 69 82 101 — —
setting)
Power supply
HD 0.9 1.5 2.4 4 5.4 8.6 13 17 23 30 37 43 57 69 82 — —
capacity
SLD 1.8 2.9 4 6.4 10 13 19 24 29 35 48 59 71 89 120 145 181
(kVA)*9
LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 17 22 27 32 43 53 65 81 110 132 165
With DC
reactor ND (initial
1.1 1.9 3 4.2 6.7 9.1 13 18 23 29 34 44 55 67 82 110 132
setting)
HD 0.6 1.1 1.9 3 4.2 6.7 9.1 13 18 23 29 34 44 55 67 82 110
Protection rating of structure (IEC 60529)*10 Enclosed type Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Natural Forced air
Approx. mass (kg) 2.0 2.2 3.4 3.4 3.4 6.7 6.7 8.3 15.5 15.5 15.5 22 42 42 54 74 74

*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric standard 4-pole motor.

826 8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 Inverter rating
 *2 A 0.2 kW motor can be operated under V/F control only.
*3 The rated output capacity is the value with respect to 220 V output voltage.
*4 The percentage of the overload current rating is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow 1
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
*5 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.

√2 .
2
However, the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about
*6 The built-in brake resistor is used.
*7 Value for the ND rating
*8 The rated input current is the value at a rated output voltage. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables) affect
the value.
*9 The power supply capacity is the value at the rated output current. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables) 3
affect the value.
*10 FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector)

 400 V class 4
 00023 to 01800
00023 00038 00052 00083 00126 00170 00250 00310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160 01800
Model FR-A840-[]
0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 5
SLD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75/90
Applicable motor LD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
capacity (kW)*1 ND (initial setting) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
HD 0.2*2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 6
SLD 1.8 2.9 4 6.3 10 13 19 24 29 36 47 59 71 88 137
Rated
LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 18 22 27 33 43 53 65 81 110
capacity
ND (initial setting) 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 18 24 29 34 43 54 66 84
(kVA)*3
HD
SLD
0.6
2.3
1.1
3.8
1.9
5.2
3
8.3
4.6
12.6 17
6.9 9.1
25
13
31
18
38
24
47
29
62
34
77
43
93
54
116
66
180
7
Rated LD 2.1 3.5 4.8 7.6 11.5 16 23 29 35 43 57 70 85 106 144
current (A) ND (initial setting) 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 110
HD 0.8 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86
8
Output

SLD 110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40°C

Overload
LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
current
ND (initial setting) 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
rating*4
HD 200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
Rated voltage*5 Three-phase 380 to 500 V 9
Brake transistor Built-in
Regenerative Maximum brake torque*7 100% torque, 2% ED*6 20% torque, continuous
braking when the option FR-ABR
is used
100% torque, 10% ED 100% torque, 6% ED —*12 10
Rated input AC voltage/frequency *11
Three-phase 380 to 500 V, 50/60 Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 323 to 550 V, 50/60 Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
SLD 3.2 5.4 7.8 10.9 16.4 22.5 31.7 40.3 48.2 58.4 76.8 97.6 115 141 —
LD 3 4.9 7.3 10.1 15.1 22.3 31 38.2 44.9 53.9 75.1 89.7 106 130 —
Without DC
reactor ND (initial
2.3 3.7 6.2 8.3 12.3 17.4 22.5 31 40.3 48.2 56.5 75.1 91 108 134
setting)
Rated input HD 1.4 2.3 3.7 6.2 8.3 12.3 17.4 22.5 31 40.3 48.2 56.5 75.1 91 108
current (A)*8 SLD 2.3 3.8 5.2 8.3 12.6 17 25 31 38 47 62 77 93 116 180
LD 2.1 3.5 4.8 7.6 11.5 16 23 29 35 43 57 70 85 106 144
Power supply

With DC
reactor ND (initial
1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 110
setting)
HD 0.8 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86
SLD 2.5 4.1 5.9 8.3 12 17 24 31 37 44 59 74 88 107 —
LD 2.3 3.7 5.5 7.7 12 17 24 29 34 41 57 68 81 99 —
Without DC
reactor ND (initial
1.7 2.8 4.7 6.3 9.4 13 17 24 31 37 43 57 69 83 102
setting)
Power supply
HD 1.1 1.7 2.8 4.7 6.3 9.4 13 17 24 31 37 43 57 69 83
capacity
SLD 1.8 2.9 4 6.3 10 13 19 24 29 36 47 59 71 88 137
(kVA)*9
LD 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.8 8.8 12 18 22 27 33 43 53 65 81 110
With DC
reactor ND (initial
1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 18 24 29 34 43 54 66 84
setting)
HD 0.6 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 18 24 29 34 43 54 66
Protection rating of structure (IEC 60529)*10 Enclosed type Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Natural Forced air
Approx. mass (kg) 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.4 3.4 6.7 6.7 8.3 8.3 15 15 23 41 41 43

*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric standard 4-pole motor.
*2 A 0.2 kW motor can be operated under V/F control only.
*3 The rated output capacity is the value with respect to 440 V output voltage.
*4 The percentage of the overload current rating is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.

8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 Inverter rating
827
 *5 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about √2 .
*6 The built-in brake resistor is used.
*7 Value for the ND rating
*8 The rated input current is the value at a rated output voltage. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables) affect
the value.
*9 The power supply capacity is the value at the rated output current. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables)
affect the value.
*10 FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector)
*11 For the power voltage exceeding 480 V, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection. (For details, refer to page 345.)
*12 The braking capability of the inverter can be improved with a commercial brake resistor. (For details, refer to page 97.)

 02160 to 06830
02160 02600 03250 03610 04320 04810 05470 06100 06830
Model FR-A840-[]
75K 90K 110K 132K 160K 185K 220K 250K 280K
SLD 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355
Applicable motor LD 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315
capacity (kW)*1 ND (initial setting) 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280
HD 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250
SLD 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521
Rated
LD 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465
capacity
*2 ND (initial setting) 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417
(kVA)
HD 84 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367
SLD 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 683
Rated LD 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610
current (A) ND (initial setting) 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547
HD 110 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481
Output

SLD 110% 60 s, 120% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 40°C

Overload
LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
current
*3 ND (initial setting) 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
rating
HD 200% 60 s, 250% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
Rated voltage*4 Three-phase 380 to 500 V
Brake transistor FR-BU2 (option)
Regenerative Maximum brake torque*5 10% torque, continuous
braking when the option FR-ABR
— — — — — — — — —
is used
Rated input AC voltage/frequency *9
Three-phase 380 to 500 V, 50/60 Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 323 to 550 V, 50/60 Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
SLD 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 683
LD 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610
Power supply

Rated input With DC

*6 reactor ND (initial
current (A) 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547
setting)
HD 110 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481
SLD 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521
Power supply LD 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465
capacity With DC
reactor ND (initial
110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417
(kVA)*7 setting)
HD 84 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367
Protection rating of structure (IEC 60529)*8 Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Forced air
Approx. mass (kg) 52 55 71 78 117 117 166 166 166

*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric standard 4-pole motor.
*2 The rated output capacity is the value with respect to 440 V output voltage.
*3 The percentage of the overload current rating is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
*4 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the maximum point of the voltage waveform at the inverter output side is the power supply voltage multiplied by about √2 .
*5 Value for the ND rating
*6 The rated input current is the value at a rated output voltage. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables) affect
the value.
*7 The power supply capacity is the value at the rated output current. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables)
affect the value.
*8 FR-DU08: IP40 (except for the PU connector)
*9 For the power voltage exceeding 480 V, set Pr.977 Input voltage mode selection. (For details, refer to page 345.)

828 8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 Inverter rating
8.2 Motor rating 1

8.2.1 Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU (1500 r/ 2

min series)
3
 Motor specifications
 200 V class
Motor model: SF-V5RU[]K 1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18 22 30 37 45 55 4
Applicable inverter model:
2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
FR-A820-[]K (ND rating)
Rated output power (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30*1 37*1 45*1 55
Rated current (A) 8.5 11.5 17.6 28.5 37.5 54 72.8 88 102 126 168 198 264
5
Rated torque (N·m) 9.55 14.1 23.6 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.5 118 140 191 235 286 350
Maximum torque at 150% 60 s
14.3 21.1 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176 211 287 353 429 525
(N·m)
Rated speed (r/min) 1500 6
Maximum speed (r/min) *2 2400
3000
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S
Inertia moment J (×10
*5
-4 2
kg·m ) 67.5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850
7
Noise 75 dB or less 80 dB or less 85 dB or less
Single-phase 200 V 50 Hz / Three-phase 200 V 50 Hz /
Cooling fan Voltage
Single-phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Three-phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz
(with
thermal Input*3 36/55 W (0.26/0.32 A)
22/28 W (0.11/
0.13 A)
55/71 W (0.37/0.39 A) 100/156 W (0.47/0.53 A)
85/130 W
(0.46/0.52 A)
8
protector)*7*
8 Recommended
0.36 A 0.18 A 0.51 A 0.69 A 0.68 A
thermal setting
Surrounding air temperature and
humidity
-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
9
Structure (Protection rating) Totally enclosed forced ventilated (Motor: IP44, Cooling fan: IP23S)*4
Detector Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase, +12 V/24 VDC power supply*6
Equipment
Insulation class
Encoder, thermal protector, fan
F
10
Vibration rank V10
Approx. mass (kg) 24 33 41 52 62 99 113 138 160 238 255 255 320

8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.2 Motor rating
829
  400 V class
Motor model: SF-V5RUH[]K 1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18 22 30 37 45 55
Applicable inverter model:
2.2 2.2 3.7 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
FR-A840-[]K (ND rating)
Rated output power (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30*1 37*1 45*1 55
Rated current (A) 4.2 5.8 8.8 14.5 18.5 27.5 35.5 44 51 67 84 99 132
Rated torque (N·m) 9.55 14.1 23.6 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.5 118 140 191 235 286 350
Maximum torque at 150% 60 s
14.3 21.1 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176 211 287 353 429 525
(N·m)
Rated speed (r/min) 1500
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000*2 2400
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S
Inertia moment J (×10-4 kg·m2) 67.5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850
*5 75 dB or less 80 dB or less 85 dB or less
Noise
Single-phase 200 V 50 Hz / Three-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz /
Cooling fan Voltage
Single-phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Three-phase 400 to 460 V 60 Hz
(with
thermal 22/28 W (0.11/ 85/130 W
Input*3 36/55 W (0.26/0.32 A)
0.13 A)
55/71 W (0.19/0.19 A) 100/156 W (0.27/0.30 A)
(0.23/0.26 A)
protector)*7*
8 Recommended
0.36 A 0.18 A 0.25 A 0.39 A 0.34 A
thermal setting
Surrounding air temperature and
-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Structure (Protection rating) Totally enclosed forced ventilated (Motor: IP44, Cooling fan: IP23S)*4
Detector Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase, +12 V/24 VDC power supply*6
Equipment Encoder, thermal protector, fan
Insulation class F
Vibration rank V10
Approx. mass (kg) 24 33 41 52 62 99 113 138 160 238 255 255 320

*1 80% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 2400 r/min or faster.) (Contact us separately for details.)
*2 The maximum speed of a 3.7 kW motor or less is 3600 r/min. Consult our sales office for use of these motor.
*3 Power (current) at 50/60 Hz.
*4 Since a brake motor has a window for gap check, the protection rating of both the cooling fan section and brake section of the motor is IP20. The
letter S in IP23S is an additional code indicating that a cooling fan was checked for water protection while it is stationary.
*5 The value shown is applicable to the motor at high carrier frequency (Pr.72 = 6 and Pr.240 = 0).
*6 A separate power supply of 12/24 V is required for the encoder. (When the FR-A8TP is installed on the inverter, the 24 V power supply from the
FR-A8TP is available.)
*7 The cooling fan is equipped with a thermal protector. The cooling fan stops when the coil temperature exceeds the specified value in order to
protect the fan motor. A restrained cooling fan or degraded fan motor insulation could be causes for the rise in coil temperature. The cooling fan
re-starts when the coil temperature drops to normal.
*8 The cooling fan voltage and input values are the basic specifications of the cooling fan alone and free air values. The input value becomes slightly
larger when it is rotated by this motor due to an increased workload, but the cooling fan can be used as it is. When preparing a thermal relay at
the user side, use the recommended thermal setting.

 Motor torque
The torque characteristics of the SF-V5RU series driven by the inverter are shown in graph form as follows.

830 8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.2 Motor rating
These are the case of the motor driven by the inverter at ND or HD rating. As the overload capacity decreases in the case of
LD or SLD rating, observe the specified range of the inverter.
1
SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series)
1.5 to 22 (kW) 30 to 55 (kW)

150
Maximum torque for short time
150
Maximum torque for short time 2
Output torque

Output torque
Continuous Continuous
operation torque operation torque Constant power
100 100

3
Constant power 94 Reduced output
75
63
(%) 50 (%) 60
40

0 1500
Speed (r/min)
3000 0 1500 2400
Speed (r/min)
3000
4
SF-V5RU1 (1000 r/min) speed ratio = 1:2 SF-V5RU3 (1000 r/min) speed ratio = 1:3 SF-V5RU4 (500 r/min) speed ratio = 1:4
1.5 to 37 (kW) 1.5 to 30 (kW) 1.5 to 15 (kW)
5
Maximum torque for short time Maximum torque for short time Maximum torque for short time
(SF-V5RU[]K1Y) (SF-V5RU[]K3Y) (SF-V5RU[]K4Y)
150 150 150
6
Maximum torque for short time
(SF-V5RU[]K1) Maximum torque for short time Maximum torque for short time
Constant power (SF-V5RU[]K3) (SF-V5RU[]K4)
120 120 120
Continuous operation Continuous operation

Output torque
Output torque

Output torque

torque torque
100 100 100
Reduced output Continuous

7
30 kW operation
Constant power torque
(SF-V5RU30K1)
75 Constant power
(%) 60 (%) 63 (%)
54
50 50
45 42
40 37.5

8
33 30
25

0 0 0
0 1000 2000 0 1000 2400 3000 0 500 2000
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)

• The maximum speed of the SF-V5RU55K and SF-V5RU30K3 is 2400 r/min.

9
• The maximum speed of a 3.7 kW motor or less is 3600 r/min. Consult our sales office for use of these motor.
• The maximum speed of a brake motor is 1800 r/min.
• The maximum short-time torque of the SF-V5RU[]K1, SF-V5RU[]K3, and SF-V5RU[]K4 is 120% of the rated torque. The
10
maximum short-time torque of the SF-V5RU[]K1Y, SF-V5RU[]K3Y, and SF-V5RU[]K4Y is 150% of the rated torque.

8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.2 Motor rating
831
 8.2.2 Vector control dedicated motor SF-THY
 Motor specifications
Motor model SF-THY
FR-A820-[]K FR-A840-[]K
Applicable inverter model (ND rating)
90 90 110 132 160 185 220 280
Rated output power (kW) 75 75 90 110 132 160 200 250
Rated torque (N·m) 477 477 572 700 840 1018 1273 1591
Maximum torque at 150% 60 s (N·m) 715 715 858 1050 1260 1527 1909 2386
Rated speed (r/min) 1500 1500
Maximum speed (r/min) 2400 2400 1800
Frame No. 250MD 250MD 250MD 280MD 280MD 280MD 280L 315H
Inertia moment J (kg·m2) 1.1 1.1 1.7 2.3 2.3 4.0 3.8 5.0
Noise 90 dB 90 dB 95 dB
Three-phase 200 V 50 Hz / 200 V 60 Hz / 220 V 60 Hz
Voltage
(400 V class cooling fan is available upon order.)
Cooling fan
50 Hz 400 400 400 400 400 750 750
Input (W) 750
60 Hz 750 750 750 750 750 1500 1500
Approx. mass (kg) 610 610 660 870 890 920 1170 1630
Surrounding air temperature and
-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Structure Totally enclosed forced ventilated
Equipment Encoder, thermal protector*2, fan
Insulation class F
Vibration rank V10
Common
Resolution 2048 pulse/rev
specifications
Power supply voltage 12/24 VDC±10%*1
Current consumption 90 mA
Dedicated
encoder Output signal form Phase A and Phase B: 90 degrees out of phase, Phase Z: 1 pulse/rev
Output circuit Complementary (constant voltage output matched by emitter follow)
"H" level: 9 V power supply voltage or more (IOH: -20 mA).
Output voltage
"L" level: 3 V power supply voltage or less (IOL: 20 mA).
*1 The 12/24 V power supply is required for the encoder.
*2 A motor with a thermal protector is available. Contact your sales representative.

 Motor torque
The torque characteristics of the SF-THY driven by the inverter are shown in graph form as follows.
75 (kW) 90 to 250 (kW)

Maximum torque Maximum torque

150 150
Output torque
Output torque

125
Rated torque Rated torque
100 100
94
83
63
(%) (%)

0 1.5 1500 2400 0 1.5 1500 1800

Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)

832 8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.2 Motor rating
8.2.3 IPM motor MM-CF (2000 r/min series)
1
 Motor specifications
Motor model: MM-CF[] 52(C)(B) 102(C)(B) 152(C)(B) 202(C)(B) 352(C)(B) 502(C) 702(C)
SLD 0.4 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 2
Applicable inverter model: LD 0.4 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5
FR-A820[]K ND (initial setting) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5
HD 0.75*6 1.5*6 2.2*6 3.7*6 5.5*6 7.5*6 11*6
Continuous Rated output power (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 5.0 7.0
3
characteristics*1 Rated torque (N·m) 2.39 4.78 7.16 9.55 16.70 23.86 33.41
Rated speed*1(r/min) 2000
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000 4
Instantaneous permissible speed (r/min) 3450*7
Maximum torque (N·m) 4.78 9.56 14.32 19.09 33.41 47.73 66.82
Inertia moment J *5 6.6 13.7 20.0 45.5 85.6
120.0 160.0 5
(×10-4 kg m2) (7.0) (14.9) (21.2) (48.9) (89.0)
Recommended ratio of load inertia moment to
100 times max. 50 times max.
motor shaft inertia moment*2
Rated current (A) 1.81 3.70 5.22 7.70 12.5 20.5 27.0
6
Insulation class F
Structure (Protection rating) Totally enclosed, naturally air-cooled (IP44*3/IP65*3*4)
Surrounding air temperature and humidity -10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90% RH or less (non-condensing) 7
Storage temperature and humidity -20 to +70°C (non-freezing), 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Indoors (no direct sun light) and free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust
Ambience
and dirt, etc.
Altitude Maximum 1000 m 8
Vibration X: 9.8 m/s2, Y: 24.5 m/s2
Approx. mass*5 (kg) 5.1/7.8 7.2/11 9.3/13 13/20 19/28 27 36
*1 The rated output power or speed is not guaranteed at low supply voltages.
9
*2 It is the case that the load torque is 20% of the motor rating. The permissible load inertia moment ratio is smaller when the load torque is larger.
Consult us if the load inertia moment ratio exceeds the above value.
*3 This does not apply to the shaft through portion.
*4 The value after the slash is for MM-CF[ ]2C. 10
*5 The value for MM-CF[ ]2B is indicated in parentheses.
*6 The one-rank higher inverter is designated for high torque in low-speed range.
*7 Set 3150 r/min (210 Hz) or less in Pr.374 Overspeed detection level. The inverter may be damaged by the motor induction voltage if the motor
speed exceeds 3150 r/min (210 Hz).

8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.2 Motor rating
833
  Motor torque
Motor capacity Low speed high torque setting enabled (high frequency superposition control)
1.5 kW or lower ND rating HD rating

Torque % Torque %
Instantaneous (3 s) Instantaneous (3 s)
200 200
Short duration (60 s) Short duration (60 s)
150 150
120 Continuous Continuous
100 100

100 2000 3000 2000 3000

Speed r/min Speed r/min

2.0 kW or higher ND rating HD rating

Torque % Torque %
Instantaneous (3 s) Instantaneous (3 s)
200 200
Short duration (60 s) Short duration (60 s)
150 150
120 Continuous
100 Continuous
100

100 2000 3000 100 2000 3000

Speed r/min
Speed r/min
∗ Zero speed up to a 150% instantaneous output torque

Low speed high torque setting disabled (current

Motor capacity
synchronization operation)
All capacities ND rating

Torque %
Instantaneous (3 s)
200
Short duration (60 s)
150
Continuous
100

50

200 2000 3000

Speed r/min

834 8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.2 Motor rating
8.3 Common specifications
1
Soft-PWM control, high carrier frequency PWM control (selectable among V/F control, Advanced
Control method magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control), Optimum excitation control, Vector 2
control*1, and PM sensorless vector control
0.2 to 590 Hz (The upper-limit frequency is 400 Hz under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real
Output frequency range
sensorless vector control, Vector control*1, and PM sensorless vector control.)
0.015 Hz/60 Hz at 0 to 10 V/12 bits (terminals 2 and 4). 3
Frequency 0.03 Hz/60 Hz at 0 to 5 V/11 bits or 0 to 20 mA/approx. 11 bits (terminals 2 and 4), at 0 to ±10 V/12
Analog input
setting and bits (terminal 1).
resolution 0.06 Hz/60 Hz at 0 to ±5 V/11 bits (terminal 1).
Digital input 0.01 Hz 4
Frequency Analog input Within ±0.2% of the maximum output frequency (25 ± 10°C)
accuracy Digital input 0.01% or less of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency Base frequency can be set from 0 to 590 Hz. Constant-torque/variable-torque pattern or adjustable 5
5
Control

characteristics points V/F can be selected.

SLD rating: 120% 0.3 Hz, LD rating: 150% 0.3 Hz, ND rating: 200%*3 0.3 Hz, HD rating: 250%*3 0.3
Hz (under Real sensorless vector control)
Starting torque*2
SLD rating: 120% 0 Hz, LD rating: 150% 0 Hz, ND rating: 200%*3 0 Hz, HD rating: 250%*3 0 Hz (under 6
Vector control*1)
Torque boost Manual torque boost
Acceleration/deceleration
time setting
0 to 3600 s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration mode, backlash countermeasures acceleration/deceleration can be selected. 7
DC injection brake (induction
Operation frequency (0 to 120 Hz), operation time (0 to 10 s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable
motor)

Stall prevention operation

Activation range of stall prevention operation (SLD rating: 0 to 120%, LD rating: 0 to 150%, ND rating:
0 to 220%, HD rating: 0 to 280%). Whether to use the stall prevention or not can be selected (V/F
8
level
control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control)
Torque limit value can be set (0 to 400% variable).
Torque limit level
(Real sensorless vector control, Vector control*1, PM sensorless vector control) 9
Terminals 2 and 4: 0 to 10 V / 0 to 5 V / 4 to 20 mA (0 to 20 mA).
Frequency Analog input
Terminal 1: -10 to +10 V / -5 to +5 V.
setting
Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit.
signal Digital input
Input of four-digit BCD (Binary-coded decimal) or 16-bit binary when the option FR-A8AX is installed. 10
Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be
Start signal
selected.
Low-speed operation command, Middle-speed operation command, High-speed operation command,
Second function selection, Terminal 4 input selection, Jog operation selection, Selection of automatic
Input signal (12) restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start, Output stop, Start self-holding selection,
Forward rotation command, Reverse rotation command, Inverter reset
The signal to be input can be changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Pulse train input 100k pulses/s
Maximum frequency, Minimum frequency, multi-speed operation, acceleration/deceleration pattern,
thermal protection, DC injection brake, Starting frequency, JOG operation, Output stop (MRS), stall
prevention, regeneration avoidance, increased magnetic excitation deceleration, DC feeding*4,
Operation

frequency jump, rotation indication, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, electronic
bypass sequence, remote setting, Automatic acceleration/deceleration, retry function, carrier
frequency selection, fast-response current limit, forward/reverse rotation prevention, Operation mode
selection, slip compensation, droop control, load torque high-speed frequency control, Speed
Operational function smoothing control, traverse, auto tuning, applied motor selection, gain tuning, RS-485
communication, PID control, PID pre-charge function, dancer control, Cooling fan operation selection,
Stop selection (deceleration stop/coasting), power-failure deceleration stop function, stop-on-contact
control, PLC function, life diagnosis, maintenance timer, current average monitoring, multiple rating,
orientation control*1, speed control, torque control, position control, pre-excitation, torque limit, test
operation, 24 V power supply input for control circuit, safety stop function, anti-sway control, CC-Link
IE Field Network communication*11
Inverter running, Up to frequency, Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage*4, Overload warning,
Output signal

Open collector output (5) Output frequency detection, Fault

Relay output (2) The signal to be output can be changed using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection).
Fault codes (4 bits) of the inverter can be output from the open collector.
Pulse train output
50k pulses/s
(FM type inverter)

8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.3 Common specifications
835
 Pulse train
Max. 2.4 kHz via one terminal (for the indication of inverter output frequency).
output (FM
The item for monitoring can be changed using Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection.
For type inverter)
indication Current output
Max. 20 mADC via one terminal (for the indication of inverter output frequency).
on external (CA type
The item for monitoring can be changed using Pr.54 FM/CA terminal function selection.
Indication

meters inverter)
Max. 10 VDC via one terminal (for the indication of inverter output frequency).
Voltage output
The item for monitoring can be changed using Pr.158 AM terminal function selection.
Status Output frequency, output current, output voltage, and frequency setting value are monitored.
Operation monitoring The item for monitoring can be changed using Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection.
panel (FR- When a protective function is activated, a fault indication is displayed and the output voltage, output
Fault
DU08) current, output frequency, cumulative energization time, date (year, month, day) and time at the
monitoring
occurrence of the fault are stored. Each fault is recorded and the last 8 records can be displayed.
Overcurrent trip during acceleration, Overcurrent trip during constant speed, Overcurrent trip during
deceleration or stop, Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration, Regenerative overvoltage trip
during constant speed, Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop, Inverter overload
trip (electronic thermal relay function), Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay function), Heat
sink overheat, Instantaneous power failure*4, Undervoltage*4, Input phase loss*4*5, Stall prevention
stop, Loss of synchronism detection*5, Brake transistor alarm detection*6, Upper limit fault detection,
Lower limit fault detection, Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, Output short circuit, Output
phase loss, External thermal relay operation*5, PTC thermistor operation*5, Option fault,
Communication option fault, Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board), PU disconnection,
Fault
Retry count excess*5, CPU fault, Operation panel power supply short circuit/RS-485 terminals power
supply short circuit, 24 VDC power fault, Abnormal output current detection*5, Inrush current limit
circuit fault*4, Communication fault (inverter), Analog input fault, USB communication fault, Safety
Protective
function circuit fault, Overspeed occurrence*5, Speed deviation excess detection*1*5, Signal loss detection*1*5,
Excessive position fault*1*5, Brake sequence fault*5, Encoder phase fault*1*5, 4 mA input fault*5, Pre-
charge fault*5, PID signal fault*5, Option fault, Opposite rotation deceleration fault*5, Internal circuit
fault, Abnormal internal temperature*7, Magnetic pole position unknown*1, External fault during output
operation*5
Fan alarm, Stall prevention (overcurrent), Stall prevention (overvoltage), Regenerative brake pre-
alarm*5*6, Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU stop, Speed limit indication*5, Parameter
Alarm, copy, Safety stop, Maintenance signal output*5, USB host error, Home position return setting error*5,
warning, error Home position return uncompleted*5, Home position return parameter setting error*5, Operation panel
message lock*5, Password locked*5, Parameter write error, Copy operation error, 24 V external power supply
operation, Internal fan alarm*7, Continuous operation during communication fault*5, Load fault
warning
-10 to +50°C (0 to +50°C for the FR-A800-GF) (non-freezing) (LD, ND, HD ratings).
Surrounding air temperature
-10 to +40°C (0 to +40°C for the FR-A800-GF) (non-freezing) (SLD rating, IP55 compatible models).
Environment

95% RH or less (non-condensing) (With circuit board coating (conforming to IEC 60721-3-3 3C2/3S2),
Surrounding air humidity IP55 compatible models).
90% RH or less (non-condensing) (Without circuit board coating).
Storage temperature*8 -20 to +65°C
Ambience Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Altitude/vibration Maximum 2500 m *9, 5.9 m/s2 or less*10 at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
*1 Available when a Vector control compatible option is installed.
*2 For PM sensorless vector control, refer to page 863.
*3 For the FR-A820-00340(5.5K) or higher and the FR-A840-00170(5.5K) or higher, the starting torque is initially limited to a level of 150% due to
the torque limitation.
*4 The function is available for standard structure models and IP55 compatible models.
*5 Not activated in the inverter in the initial state.
*6 Available only for the standard model.
*7 Available only for the IP55 compatible model.
*8 Applicable to conditions for a short time, for example, in transit.
*9 For the installation at an altitude above 1000 m, consider a 3% reduction in the rated current per 500 m increase in altitude.
*10 2.9 m/s2 or less for the FR-A840-04320(160K) or higher.
*11 Available only for the FR-A800-GF series.

836 8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.3 Common specifications
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
1

8.4.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings 2

FR-A820-00046(0.4K), FR-A820-00077(0.75K)(-GF)

(7.5)
2×6 hole
3

245
260
*1
5

6
7.5
(1.5)
6
7.5 95
5
D1
7
110 D

9
Inverter model D D1
FR-A820-00046(0.4K) 110 20
FR-A820-00077(0.75K) 125 35
10
*1 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.

(Unit: mm)

8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
837
 FR-A820-00105(1.5K), 00167(2.2K), 00250(3.7K)(-GF)
FR-A840-00023(0.4K), 00038(0.75K), 00052(1.5K), 00083(2.2K), 00126(3.7K)(-GF)

7.5
2×6 hole

FAN *1

245
260
*2

(7.5)
(1.5)
6 5
12.5 125 140
150 45.5

*1 FR-A840-00023(0.4K) to 00052(1.5K) are not provided with a cooling fan.

*2 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)

838 8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
FR-A820-00340(5.5K), 00490(7.5K), 00630(11K)(-GF)
FR-A840-00170(5.5K), 00250(7.5K), 00310(11K), 00380(15K)(-GF) 1

(7.5)
2×6 hole
2
FAN

H1
H
*1
4

5
2.3

7.5
H2
6
12.5 195
220 D
6

7
D1

Inverter model H H1 H2 D D1
FR-A820-00340(5.5K), 00490(7.5K) 9
260 245 1.5 170 84
FR-A840-00170(5.5K), 00250(7.5K)
FR-A820-00630(11K)
300 285 3 190 101.5
FR-A840-00310(11K), 00380(15K)
*1 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
10
(Unit: mm)

8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
839
 FR-A820-00770(15K), 00930(18.5K), 01250(22K)(-GF)
FR-A840-00470(18.5K), 00620(22K)(-GF)

2×10 hole

(10)
FAN

*1

380
400
2.3

10
10

(1.5)
10 230
250 93.3 190

*1 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.

(Unit: mm)

840 8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
FR-A820-01540(30K)(-GF)
FR-A840-00770(30K)(-GF) 1

(10)
2×10 hole 4×20 hole for hanging 17

(15)
2

520
530
550
3.2 *1 5

15
10 3.2
10

270 195
325
8
*1 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.

(Unit: mm)
9

10

8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
841
 FR-A820-01870(37K), 02330(45K), 03160(55K), 03800(75K), 04750(90K)(-GF)
FR-A840-00930(37K), 01160(45K), 01800(55K), 02160(75K), 02600(90K), 03250(110K), 03610(132K)(-GF)

2×12 hole 4×d hole D1

(18)
(15)
FAN

H2
H1
*2

12 3.2
W1
10

18
W D

Inverter model W W1 H H1 H2 d D D1
FR-A820-01870(37K), 02330(45K)
435 380 550 525 514 25 250 24
FR-A840-00930(37K), 01160(45K), 01800(55K)*1
FR-A820-03160(55K)*1 465 410 700 675 664 25 250 22
*1 *1 465 400 740 715 704 24 360 22
FR-A820-03800(75K) , 04750(90K)
*1,
FR-A840-02160(75K) 02600(90K)*1 465 400 620 595 584 24 300 22
*1 *1 465 400 740 715 704 25 360 22
FR-A840-03250(110K) , 03610(132K)
*1 For the FR-A820-03800(75K) or higher, the FR-A840-02160(75K) or higher, or whenever a 75 kW or higher motor is used, always connect a DC
reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.
*2 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)

842 8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
FR-A840-04320(160K), 04810(185K)(-GF)
1
22

(15)

(13)
3×12 hole 4×16 hole
2
FAN

4
*1

1010
5

984
985 6

12
200 200
3.2 8
10

380

13
498

Always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option. 9

*1 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)

10

8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
843
 FR-A840-05470(220K), 06100(250K), 06830(280K)(-GF)

22

(13)
3×12 hole

(13)
4×16 hole

FAN

*1

1010
984

984
12 3.2
13

13
300 300

680 380

Always connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL), which is available as an option.

*1 The LED display cover attached to the FR-A800-GF in this position has an additional 2.1 mm depth.
(Unit: mm)

Operation panel (FR-DU08, FR-LU08)

Outline drawing Panel cutting dimension drawing

Panel 120 or more∗
3.2max 21 27.8
3

Operation panel

Parameter unit
connection cable
Air- (FR-CB2[ ])
72.5
78.5

20
72.5

bleeding (option)
hole
5

22

2-M3 screw 66 Operation panel connection connector

3

(FR-ADP option)
3 66 3 16

72 17 ∗ Denotes the space required to connect an optional

parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB2[ ]). When
using another cable, leave the space required for the
cable specification.

(Unit: mm)

844 8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
8.4.2 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings
1
 Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (standard
horizontal type)
Frame number: 90L Frame number: 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M 2
Connector (for encoder) Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P
L
R
L
R
3
A B 50 KL
A B Q
KA 40 D KL
KA QK
Exhaust
Exhaust D
Suction

A
Suction
4
A
KP

I
H
C
A
KG

KG
A

6.5
5

C
4
φ27
Direction of φ27
Direction of
cooling fan wind F F XB E E cooling fan wind 40
F F XB
Mark for earthing N M Mark for earthing E E
(grounding) N
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) (grounding) M
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) W ML Sliding distance

6
W Sliding distance
15 4
U

U
T

T
9

12
S
Frame leg viewed from above S
Frame leg viewed
Section AA
Section AA from above

For cooling fan (A, B)

For motor (U, V, W)
7
Thermal protector (G1, G2)

A B U V W G1 G2

Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as
8
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)
the earth terminal in the terminal box.

Dimensions table (Unit: mm) 10

SF- SF- SF- SF- Motor Terminal screw size
Frame Mass
V5RU V5RU V5RU V5RU KL U, V, A, B, G1,
No. (kg) A B C D E F H I KA KG L M ML N XB Q QK R S T U W
[]K []K1 []K3 []K4 (KP) W (C) G2
220
1 — — — 90L 24 256.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 198 — 53 65 425 175 — 150 56 — — 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
(210)
2 1 — — 100L 33 284 128 100 207 80 70 203.5 230 65 78 231 477 200 212 180 63 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
3 2 1 — 112M 41 278 135 112 228 95 70 226 253 69 93 242 478 230 242 180 70 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
5 3 2 - 132S 52 303 152 132 266 108 70 265 288 75 117 256 542 256 268 180 89 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
7 5 3 1 132M 62 322 171 132 266 108 89 265 288 94 117 256 580 256 268 218 89 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4

8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
845
 Frame Number: 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L Frame number: 200L, 225S

Connector (for encoder) Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P
L L
R R
KL
A B 110 A B 140 D
D
KA 90 KA 110
Exhaust
Suction

φ90
Exhaust
A Suction
With guard
wires
With guard

I
A

KP
wires

KG

H
C
A
KG
φ56

8
Direction of A

C
cooling fan wind 50

11
Mark for earthing XB E E
(grounding) F F Direction of 70
M
N cooling fan wind Mark for earthing F F XB E E
Earth (ground) (grounding)
terminal (M8) N M
Sliding distance
W 4 Earth (ground) Sliding distance
W
U

terminal (M12)
T

4
14.5

U
T

18.5
S
Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above S
Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above

For motor (U, V, W)

Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M8)
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as
the earth terminal in the terminal box.

For cooling fan (A, B, C) For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

SF- SF- SF- SF- Motor Terminal screw size
Frame Mass
V5RU V5RU V5RU V5RU KL U, V, A, B, G1,
No. (kg) A B C D E F H I KA KG L M ML N XB Q QK R S T U W
[]K []K1 []K3 []K4 (KP) W (C) G2
11 7 5 2 160M 99 412 198 160 318 127 105 316 367 105 115 330 735 310 — 254 108 — — 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
15 11 7 3 160L 113 434 220 160 318 127 127 316 367 127 115 330 779 310 — 298 108 — — 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
18 — — — 138
180M 438.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 359 410 127 139 352 790 335 — 285 121 — — 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4
22 15 11 — 160
— 18 15 5 180L 200 457.5 242.5 180 363 139.5 139.5 359 410 146 139 352 828 335 — 323 121 — — 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4
30 — — 7 238
200L 483.5 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 401 — 145 487 (546) 909 390 — 361 133 — — 425.5 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4
37, 45 22, 30 18, 22 — 255
55 37 30 11, 15 225S 320 500 277 225 446 178 143 446 — 145 533 (592) 932 428 — 342 149 — — 432 65m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4

NOTE
• Install the motor with a frame number 180 or larger on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal.
• Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from
the opposite load side to the load side.
0
• The vertical tolerance for the shaft center height is -0.5 .
• The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its model name.

846 8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
 Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (standard
horizontal type with brake) 1
Frame number: 90L Frame number: 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
2
L L
A R A R KL
KL D
KA B KA B Q

φ22
50 D *1

φ22
3
Exhaust Main QK
Exhaust Main 40 Suction terminal box
Suction terminal box
*1
*1 1 A *2

KP
A

KP

H
KG

C
A φ27

G
*2

C
KG
A

G
*2 φ27 Direction of J
cooling fan wind
Direction of F F XB E E
Mark for earthing Mark for earthing
cooling fan wind (grounding) F F XB 2 E E N M
(grounding)
N M ML
Earth (ground)
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) W
Sliding distance
5
terminal (M5)
W Sliding distance

U
X
X
U

T
T

Z
Z

S
S Frame leg viewed
from above Section AA Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above

6
Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan
For brake (B1, B2)
For motor (U, V, W) * indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
For cooling fan (A, B)
opening.
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as
7
B1 B2 U V W G1 G2 A B C
the earth terminal in the terminal box.

8
Earthing (grounding) Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M4) terminal (M4)

9
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
SF- SF- SF- SF- Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
Frame Mass

10
V5RU V5RU V5RU V5RU U, V, A, B, G1, B1,
No. (kg) A B C D E F G H I J KA KD KG KL KP L M ML N X XB Z Q QK R S T U W
[]KB []K1B []K3B []K4B W (C) G2 B2
1 — — — 90L 29 296.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 4 — — — 53 27 65 220 245 465 175 — 150 15 56 9 50 40 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
2 1 — — 100L 46 333.5 128 100 207 80 70 6.5 — — 40 65 27 78 231 265 526.5 200 212 180 4 63 12 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
3 2 1 — 112M 53 355 135 112 228 95 70 6.5 — — 40 69 27 93 242 290 555 230 242 180 4 70 12 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
5 3 2 — 132S 70 416 152 132 266 108 70 6.5 — — 40 75 27 117 256 329 655 256 268 180 4 89 12 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
7 5 3 1 132M 80 435 171 132 266 108 89 6.5 — — 40 94 27 117 256 329 693 256 268 218 4 89 12 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4

8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
847
 Frame Number: 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L Frame number: 200L, 225S

Terminal box for cooling fan Connector (for encoder)

Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
MS3102A20-29P
L L
A R A R
KL
KA B 110 B 140 D
Main D
90 φ22 KA 110
Suction Exhaust terminal box *1 Main

φ22
terminal box

φ90
Exhaust
Suction
*1, 2 A *2 *1

KP
*2
A

KP
*1, 2

KG

H
φ56

C
KG
A

G
A

C
Direction of

G
Mark for earthing J
cooling fan wind (grounding) F F XB E E
Earth (ground) N Direction of Mark for earthing J
M (grounding) F F XB
terminal (M8) cooling fan wind E E
N M
W Sliding distance
Earth (ground) W
U

X
Sliding distance

U
terminal (M12)
T

T
Z

Z
Frame leg viewed S
Section AA
from above Section AA Frame leg viewed
from above

Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan

For motor (U, V, W)
* indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual
For cooling fan (A, B, C)
opening.
Earthing
(grounding) A B C
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as
U V W
terminal (M8)
Earthing (grounding)
the earth terminal in the terminal box.
terminal (M4)
B1 B2 G1 G2

For brake (B1, B2) For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

SF- SF- SF- SF- Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
Frame Mass
V5RU V5RU V5RU V5RU U, V, A, B, G1, B1,
No. (kg) A B C D E F G H I J KA KD KG KL KP L M ML N X XB Z Q QK R S T U W
[]KB []K1B []K3B []K4B W (C) G2 B2
11 7 5 2 160M 140 522.5 198 160 318 127 105 8 — — 50 105 56 115 330 391 845.5 310 — 254 4 108 14.5 110 90 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
15 11 7 3 160L 155 544.5 220 160 318 127 127 8 — — 50 127 56 115 330 391 889.5 310 — 298 4 108 14.5 110 90 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
18 — — — 185
180M 568.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 8 — — 50 127 56 139 352 428 920 335 — 285 4 121 14.5 110 90 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4 M4
22 15 11 — 215
— 18 15 5 180L 255 587.5 242.5 180 363 139.5 139.5 8 — — 50 146 56 139 352 428 958 335 — 323 4 121 14.5 110 90 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4 M4
30 — — 7 305
200L 644.5 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 11 — — 70 145 90 487 — 546 1070 390 — 361 4 133 18.5 140 110 425.5 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 M4
37, 45 22, 30 18, 22 — 330
55 37 30 11, 15 225S 395 659 277 225 446 178 143 11 — — 70 145 90 533 — 592 1091 428 — 342 4 149 18.5 140 110 432 65m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 M4

NOTE
• Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal.
• Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from
the opposite load side to the load side.
• The vertical tolerance for the shaft center height is -0.5
0
.
• The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its model name.
• Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure. (This device should be arranged by the customer.
Refer to the FR-A800 catalog.)

848 8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
 Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (flange type)
Frame number: 90L Frame number: 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M 1
Connector (for encoder) Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P

2
LL LL
KB LR
Q KL KB LR
LG LE Q
Exhaust QK LN LZ
LG LE KL
QK LN LZ
Section Exhaust
AA Section
Suction AA
LA

3
B A Suction
LA

IE
LC
LB
D

B B A

LC
LB
D
A
KD B
Direction of
cooling fan wind
W KD A
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
4
U

Direction of
Mark for earthing (grounding)
T

cooling fan wind W

U
S Earth (ground) terminal (M5)

T
Section BB Mark for earthing (grounding)
S

Section BB
5
For cooling fan (A, B) Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as
6
For motor (U, V, W)
For thermal protector (G1, G2) the earth terminal in the terminal box.

A B U V W G1 G2

Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M4)
7

8
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
SF- SF- SF- SF-
V5RUF V5RUF V5RUF V5RUF
Flange Frame Mass
No. No. (kg) D IE KB KD KL LA
Motor

LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK
Shaft end

S T U W
Terminal screw size
U, V, A, B, G1,
9
[]K []K1 []K3 []K4 W (C) G2
1 — — — FF165 90L 26.5 183.6 — 198.5 27 220 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 402 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
2 1 — — FF215 100L 37 207 130 213 27 231 215 180j6 250 4 16 432 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4

10
3 2 1 — FF215 112M 46 228 141 239 27 242 215 180j6 250 4 16 448 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
5 3 2 — FF265 132S 65 266 156 256 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 484 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
7 5 3 1 FF265 132M 70 266 156 294 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 522 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4

8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
849
 Frame Number: 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L Frame number: 200L

Connector (for encoder) Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P
LL LL
KB LR KB LR
Q
Q QK KL
LG LE LN LZ LG LE LN LZ
QK KL Exhaust
Exhaust Section Section
AA
AA Suction
Suction

IE
LA

IE
B A

LA
A

LC
LB
B

D
LC
LB
B
D

B
KD A KD
Direction of A
cooling fan wind Earth (ground) terminal (M12)
Direction of W
Earth (ground) terminal (M8) W Mark for earthing (grounding)
cooling fan wind

U
Mark for earthing (grounding) With guard wires

T
With guard wires
T

S
S Section BB
Section BB

For motor (U, V, W) Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as
the earth terminal in the terminal box.

Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M8)

For cooling fan (A, B, C) For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

SF- SF- SF- SF- Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
Flange Frame Mass
V5RUF V5RUF V5RUF V5RUF U, V, A, B, G1,
No. No. (kg) D IE KB KD KL LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W
[]K []K1 []K3 []K4 W (C) G2
11 7 5 2 FF300 160M 110 318 207 318 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 625 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
15 11 7 3 FF300 160L 125 318 207 362 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 669 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
18 — — — 160
FF350 180M 363 230 378.5 56 352 350 300j6 400 5 20 690 4 18.5 110 110 90 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4
22 15 11 — 185
— 18 15 5 FF350 180L 225 363 230 416.5 56 352 350 300j6 400 5 20 728 4 18.5 110 110 90 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4
30 — — 7 270
FF400 200L 406 255 485 90 346 400 350j6 450 5 22 823.5 8 18.5 140 140 110 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4
37, 45 22, 30 18, 22 — 290

NOTE
• The motor with a frame number 180 or larger cannot be installed on the ceiling (with the shaft facing up). For use with the shaft
facing down, the protection rating of the cooling fan is IP20.
• Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from
the opposite load side to the load side.
• The 400 V class motor has "-H" at the end of its model name.

850 8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
 Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (flange type
with brake) 1
Frame number: 90L Frame number: 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
Connector (for encoder) Terminal box for cooling fan
MS3102A20-29P
2
LL
LL
KB LR KB LR
LG LE Q KL
KL

3
Exhaust LG LE
Exhaust Main Q Main *1
terminal box QK
terminal box Suction

φ22
QK

φ22
Suction Section Section A LN LZ
LN LZ AA

KP
AA

KP
*1 *1
*1 *2
B LA

D
B A

LC
LB
LC
LB
D

4
B LA A
*2
*2 A KD
KD
Direction of
Direction of *2 cooling fan wind W
cooling fan wind
W Earth (ground) terminal (M5)

U
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
U

Mark for earthing (grounding)

T
Mark for earthing (grounding)
T

S
S

Section BB
5
Section BB

6
Main terminal box
For brake (B1, B2)
Terminal box for cooling fan * indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual
For motor (U, V, W) opening.
7
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
For cooling fan (A, B)
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as
the earth terminal in the terminal box.
B1 B2 U V W G1 G2 A B C

Earthing Earthing

8
(grounding) (grounding)
terminal (M4) terminal (M4)

9
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
SF- SF- SF- SF- Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
Flange Frame Mass

10
V5RUF V5RUF V5RUF V5RUF U, V, A, B, B1, G1,
No. No. (kg) D KB KD KL KP LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W
[]KB []K1B []K3B []K4B W (C) B2 G2
1 — — — FF165 90L 31.5 183.6 198.5 27 220 155 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 442 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
2 1 — — FF215 100L 50 207 213 27 231 165 215 180j6 250 4 16 481.5 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
3 2 1 — FF215 112M 58 228 239 27 242 178 215 180j6 250 4 16 525 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
5 3 2 — FF265 132S 83 266 256 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 597 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
7 5 3 1 FF265 132M 88 266 294 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 635 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4

8. SPECIFICATIONS
8.4 Outline dimension drawings
851
 Frame number: 160M, 160L

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P
Terminal box for cooling fan
LL
KB LR
KL
Main LG LE
Q

φ22
terminal box LN LZ
Exhaust QK *1
Section
AA

KP
Suction

LA
*1, 2 A *2
B

LC
LB
D

B
KD A
W
Direction of

U
cooling fan wind

T
Earth (ground) terminal (M8)
Mark for earthing (grounding)
S

Section BB

Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan * indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual
For motor (U, V, W)
For cooling fan (A, B, C)
opening.
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as
Earthing A B C the earth terminal in the terminal box.
U V W
(grounding) Earthing
terminal (M8) (grounding)
terminal (M4)
B1 B2 G1 G2

For brake (B1, B2) For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

SF- SF- SF- SF- Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
Flange Frame Mass
V5RUF V5RUF V5RUF V5RUF U, V, A, B, B1, G1,
No. No. (kg) D KB KD KL KP LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W
[]KB []K1B []K3B []K4B W (C) B2 G2
11 7 5 2 FF300 160M 151 318 318 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 735.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
15 11 7 3 FF300 160L 167 318 362 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 779.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4

NOTE
• Install the motor on the wall and use it with the shaft horizontal.
• Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from
the opposite load side to the load side.
•